Learn the right way to manage metrics

  • Parent Category Name: Improve Your Processes
  • Parent Category Link: /improve-your-processes

Learn to use metrics in the right way. Avoid staff (subconciously) gaming the numbers, as it is only natural to try to achieve the objective. This is really a case of be careful what you wish for, you may just get it.

Register to read more …

Assess Your Readiness to Implement UCaaS

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}305|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Voice & Video Management
  • Parent Category Link: /voice-video-management
  • Employees no longer work in the office all the time and have adopted a hybrid or remote policy.
  • Security is on your mind when it comes to the risks associated with data and voice across the internet.
  • You are unaware of the technology used by other departments, such as sales and marketing.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • The importance of doing your due diligence and building out requirements is paramount to deciding on what UCaaS solution works for you. Even if you decide not to pursue this cloud-based service, at least you have done your homework.
  • There are five reasons you should migrate to UCaaS: flexibility & scalability, productivity, enhanced security, business continuity, and cost savings. Challenge your selection with these criteria at your foundation and you cannot go wrong.

Impact and Result

With features such as messaging, collaboration tools, and video conferencing, UCaaS enables users to be more effective regardless of location and device. This can lead to quicker decision making and reduce communication delays.

Assess Your Readiness to Implement UCaaS Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Assess Your Readiness to Implement UCaaS Storyboard – Research that reviews the business drivers to move to a UCaaS solution.

In addition to examining the benefits of UCaaS, this deck covers how to drive toward an RFP and convince the C-suite to champion your UCaaS strategy.

  • Assess Your Readiness to Implement UCaaS Storyboard

2. UCaaS Readiness Questionnaire – Three sets of questions to help determine your organization's readiness to move to a UCaaS platform.

This questionnaire is a starting point. Sections include: 1) Current State Questionnaire, 2) IT Infrastructure Readiness Questionnaire, and 3) UCaaS Vendor Questionnaire. These questions can also be added to an RFP for UCaaS vendors you may want to work with.

  • UCaaS Readiness Questionnaire
[infographic]

Further reading

Assess Your Readiness to Implement UCaaS

Unified communication as a service (UCaaS) is already here. Find the right solution for your organization, whether it is Teams Phone or another solution.

Analyst Perspective

UCaaS is the solution to the hybrid and remote working world

Hybrid/remote work is a reality and there is little evidence to prove otherwise despite efforts to return employees to the office. A 2023 survey from Zippia says 74% of US companies are planning to or have implemented hybrid work policies. Given the reality of the new ways people work, there’s a genuine need for a UCaaS solution.

The days of on-premises private branch exchange (PBX) and legacy voice over internet protocol (VoIP) solutions are numbered, and organizations are examining alternative solutions to redundant desk phones. The stalwarts of voice solutions, Cisco and Avaya, have seen the writing on the wall for some time: the new norm must be a cloud-based solution that integrates via API with content resource management (CRM), email, chat, and collaboration tools.

Besides remaining agile when accommodating different work locations, it’s advantageous to be able to quickly scale and meet the needs of organizations and their employees. New technology is moving at such a pace that utilizing a UCaaS service is truly beneficial, especially given its AI, analytics, and mobile capabilities. Being held back by an on-premises solution that is capitalized over several years is not a wise option.

Photo of John Donovan
John Donovan
Principle Research Director, I&O Practice
Info-Tech Research Group

Insight Summary

Improved integration and communication in a hybrid world
Unified communication as a service (UCaaS) integrates several tools into one platform to provide seamless voice, video, chat, collaboration, sharing and much more. The ability to work from anywhere and the ability to use application programming interfaces (APIs) to integrate content resource management (CRM) and other productivity tools into a unified environment is a key component of employee productivity, whether at the office or remote, or even on mobile devices.

Simplify your maintenance, management, and support
Communication and voice using a cloud provisioner has many benefits and makes life easier for your IT staff. No more ongoing maintenance, upgrades, patching and managing servers or private branch exchanges (PBXs). UCaaS is easy to deploy, and due to its scalability and flexibility, users can easily be added or removed. Now businesses can retire their legacy technical debt of voice hardware and old desk phones that clutter the office.

Oversight on security
The utilization of a software as a service (SaaS) platform in UCaaS form does by design risk data breaches, phishing, and third-party malware. Fortunately, you can safeguard your organization’s security by ensuring the vendor you choose features SOC2 certification, taking care of encryption, firewalls, two-factor authentication and security incident handling, and disaster recovery. The big players in the UCaaS world have these features.

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

So, your legacy PBX is ready to be replaced. It has no support or maintenance contract, and you face a critical decision. You could face these challenges:

  • Employees no longer work in the office all the time and have adopted a hybrid or remote policy
  • Security risks associated with data and voice across the internet
  • Limited awareness of the technology used by some departments, such as sales and marketing

Common Obstacles

Businesses may worry about several obstacles when it’s time to choose a voice and collaboration solution. For example:

  • Concern over internet connectivity or disruptions
  • Uncertainty integrating systems with the platform
  • Unsure whether employees will embrace new tools/workflows that completely change how they work, collaborate, and communicate
  • Failure to perform due diligence when trying to choose the right solution for an organization

Info-Tech’s Approach

It’s critically important to perform due diligence and build out requirements when deciding what UCaaS solution works for you. Even if you decide not to pursue this cloud-based service, at least you will:

  • Determine your business case
  • Evaluate your roadmap for unified communication
  • Ask all the right questions to determine suitability

In this advisory deck, you will see a set of questions you must ask including whether Teams is suitable for your business.

Info-Tech Insight

Determine your communication and collaboration needs. Evaluate your current use of voice, video, chat, collaboration, sharing, and mobility whether for the office or remote work. Evaluate your security and regulatory requirements and needs. Determine the integration requirements when evaluating top vendors.

The evolution of unified communication

How we moved from fax machines and desk phones to an integrated set of tools on one platform in the cloud

A diagram that shows the evolution of unified communication from 1980s to 2020s.

Business drivers for moving to UCaaS

What organizations look to gain or save by moving to UCaaS solutions

Flexibility and scalability
Ability to add/remove users and services as appropriate for changing business needs, allowing for quick adaptation to changing markets.

Productivity
Offering features like messaging, collaboration tools, and video conferencing enables users to be more effective regardless of location and device. May lead to quicker decision making and reduced communication delays.

Cost savings
Eliminating the need for on-premises hardware and software, reducing maintenance and support costs. Predictable monthly billing.

Business continuity
Reducing risks of disruption or disaster. Allowing users to work from anywhere when the physical office is unavailable. Additional features can include disaster recovery and backup services.

Enhanced security
UCaaS providers usually offer advanced security and compliance features including encryption, firewall, intrusion detection, and certifications like HIPAA and SOC 2.

KPIs to demonstrate success

What key metrics should businesses measure to demonstrate a successful UCaaS project?
What improvements are needed?
What can be optimized?

KPI Measurement
User adoption rate
  • % of employees utilizing UCaaS solutions
  • # of users who completed UCaaS training/onboarding
  • # of calls or messages sent per user
Call quality and reliability
  • % of calls with good to excellent quality
  • # of dropped calls or call disruption
  • Mean opinion score (MOS) for video and voice quality
Cost savings
  • TCO for UCaaS compared to previous solution
  • Cost per month for UCaaS
  • Reduced hardware/maintenance and communication costs
Improved productivity
  • Time saved with streamlined comms workflows
  • # of successful collaborative projects or meetings
  • Improved speed and quality for customer service or support
Customer satisfaction
  • Net promoter score or CSAT
  • Positive customer reviews
  • Time-to-resolution of customer issues
Scalability
  • Ability to add/remove/change user features as needed
  • Time to deploy new UCaaS features
  • Scalability of network to support increased UCaaS usage

What are the surveys telling us?

Different organizations adopt UCaaS solutions for different reasons

95%

Collaboration: No Jitter’s study on team collaboration found that 95% of survey respondents think collaborative communication apps are a necessary component of a successful communications strategy.
Source: No Jitter, 2018.

95%

Security: When deploying remote communication solutions, 95% of businesses say they want to use VPN connections to keep data private.
Source: Mitel, 2018.

31%

Flexibility: While there are numerous advantages to cloud-based communications, 31% of companies intend to use UCaaS to eliminate technical debt from legacy systems and processes.
Source: Freshworks, 2019.

UCaaS adoption

While many organizations are widely adopting UCaaS, they still have data security concerns

UCaaS deployments are growing

UCaaS is growing at a rate that shows the market for UC is moving toward cloud-based voice and collaboration solutions at a rate of 29% year over year.

Source: Synergy Research Group, 2017.

Security is still a big concern

While it’s increasingly popular to adopt cloud-based unified communication solutions, 70% of those companies are still concerned about their data security.

Source: Masergy, 2022.


Concerns around security range from encrypting conversations to controlling who has access to what data in the organization’s network to how video is managed on emerging video communications platforms.

Info-Tech Insight

Ensure you maintain a robust security posture with your data regardless of where it is being stored. Security breaches can happen at any location.

UCaaS vs. on-premises UC

A diagram that shows UCaaS benefits

Main benefits of UCaaS

  • Rapid deployment: Cloud hosting provides the ability to deploy quickly.
  • Ease of management: It’s no longer necessary for companies to manage communications across multiple platforms and devices.
  • Better connection: The communication flow across teams and with customers is faster and easier with phone, messaging, audio and video conferencing available in one place.
  • Scalability: Since UCaaS is an on-demand service, companies can scale their communication needs to what’s immediately required at an affordable price.

Info-Tech Insight

There are five reasons you should migrate to UCaaS. They are advanced technology, easily scalable, cost efficiencies, highly available, and security. There are always outliers, but these five criteria are a reliable foundation when assessing a vendor/product.

UCaaS architecture

The 6 primary elements of UCaaS

Unified communications as a service (UCaaS) is a cloud-based subscription service primarily for communication tools such as voice, video, messaging, collaboration, content sharing, and other cloud services over the internet. It uses VoIP to process calls.

The popularity of UCaaS is increasing with the recent trend of users working remotely full or part-time and requiring collaboration tools for their work.

  • The main benefit to businesses is the ability to remove on-premises hardware and reduce technical debt.
  • Additionally, it removes the need for expensive up-front capital costs and reduces communications costs.
  • From a productivity perspective, delivering these services under one platform/service increases effective collaboration and allows instant communication regardless of device or location.

A diagram that shows protocols

Features available to UCaaS/UC

Must-haves vs. nice-to-haves

A diagram that shows Must-haves vs. nice-to-haves UC features

Info-Tech Insight

Decide what matters most to the organization when choosing the UC platform and applications. Divide criteria into must-have vs. nice-to-have categories.

Security and UCaaS

  • Maintain company integrity
  • Enhance data security
  • Regulatory compliance
  • Reduce risk of fraud
  • Protect data for multiple devices

What are the concerns? What is at risk?

  • DDoS attacks: Enterprise transactions are paralyzed by flooding of data across the network preventing access
  • Phishing: Users are tricked into clicking a URL and sharing an organization’s sensitive data
  • Ransomware: Malicious attack preventing the business from accessing data and demanding a ransom for access
  • Third-party malware: Software infected with a virus, trojan horse, worms, spyware, or even ransomware with malicious intent

Security solutions in UCaaS

End-to-end encryption is critical

SRTP

  • Secure real-time protocol is a cryptographic protocol used to secure voice & video calls over IP networks
  • SRTP provides encryption, message authentication, and integrity protection for voice and data packets. Using advanced encryption standard (AES) reduces chance of DDoS attacks

TLS

  • Transport layer security (TLS) is a cryptographic protocol that secures data in transit over the internet, protecting from interception and tampering

VPNs and firewalls

  • Virtual private networks (VPNs) are used to secure and encrypt connections between remote devices and the network. UCaaS providers can use VPN to secure access from remote locations
  • Firewalls are your primary line of defense against unauthorized traffic entering or leaving the network

SIP

  • Session initiated protocol (SIP) over TLS is used to initiate and terminate video and voice calls over the internet. UCaaS providers often use SIP over TLS to encrypt and secure SIP messages

SSH

  • Secure shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol used to secure remote access and communications over the network. SSH is often used by UCaaS providers to secure remote management and configuration of systems

Info-Tech Insight

Encryption is a must for securing data and voice packets across the internet. These packets can be vulnerable to eavesdropping techniques and local area network (LAN) breaches. This risk must be mitigated from end to end.

UCaaS

Seven vendors competing with Microsoft’s integrated suite of collaboration tools

Zoom

A logo of Zoom
Best for large meetings and webinars

Key features:

  • Virtual meetings up to 300 users, up to 1,000 with enterprise version
  • Team chat
  • Digital whiteboard
  • Phone

RingCentral

A logo of RingCentral
Best for project management collaboration tools

Key features:

  • Video conferencing up to 200 users
  • Chat
  • Voice calls
  • Video polls and captioning
  • Digital whiteboard

Nextiva

A logo of Nextiva
Best for CRM support, best-in-class functionality and features

Key features:

  • Single dashboard
  • Chat
  • Cospace collaboration tool
  • Templates
  • Voice and call pop

GoTo Connect

A logo of GoTo Connect
Best for integration with other business apps

Key features:

  • Video conferencing up to 250 participants
  • Meeting transcripts
  • Dial plan

Dialpad

A logo of Dialpad
Best for small companies under 15 users

Key features:

  • Video meetings up to 15 participants
  • AI transcripts with call summary
  • Call controls share screen, switch between devices
  • Channel conversations with calendar app

WebEx

A logo of WebEx
Only vendor offering real-time translation & closed captioning

Key features:

  • Video meetings up to 200 participants
  • Calling features with noise removal, call recording, and transcripts
  • Live polling and Q&A

Google Workspace

A logo of Google Workspace
Best for whole team collaboration for docs and slides

Key features:

  • Google meet video
  • Collaboration on docs, sheets, and slides
  • Google chat and spaces
  • Calendars with sync updates with Gmail and auto-reminders

Avaya and Cisco

The major players in the VoIP on-premises PBX world have moved to a cloud experience to compete with Microsoft and other UCaaS players

Avaya offers the OneCloud UC platform. It is one of the last UC vendors to offer on-premises solutions. In a market which is moving to the cloud at a serious pace, Avaya retains a 14% share. It made a strategic partnership with RingCentral in 2019 and in February 2021 they formed a joint venture which is now called Avaya Cloud Office, a UCaaS solution that integrates Avaya’s communication and collaboration solution with the RingCentral cloud platform.

With around 33% of the UC market, Cisco also has a selection of UC products and services for on-premises deployment and the cloud, including WebEx Calling, Jabber, Unity Connections for voice messaging, and Single Number Reach for extensive telephony features.

Both vendors support on-premises and cloud-based solutions for UC.

Services provided by Avaya and Cisco in the UCaaS space

A logo of Avaya Cloud Office
Avaya Cloud Office

  • Voice calling: Cloud-based phone system over the internet with call forwarding, call transfer, voice mail, and more
  • Video conferencing: Virtual meetings for real-time collaboration, screen sharing, virtual backgrounds, video layout, meeting recording, whiteboarding and annotation, and virtual waiting room
  • Messaging: A feature that allows users to send and receive instant messages and SMS text messaging on the same platform
  • Collaboration: Work together on documents and projects in real time. File sharing and task management
  • Contact center: Manage customer interactions across voice, email, chat, and social media
  • Mobile app: Allows users to access communication and collaboration features on smartphones and tablets

A logo of Cisco WebEx
Cisco WebEx

  • Voice calling: Cisco WebEx calling provides cloud-based phone system over the internet including call forwarding, transfer, and voice mail
  • Video conferencing: Features include virtual meeting and real-time collaboration, screen sharing, and virtual backgrounds and layouts, highly scalable to large audiences
  • Messaging: Features include chat and SMS
  • Collaboration: Allows users to work together on docs and projects in real time, including file sharing and task management
  • Contact center: Multiple contact center solutions offered for small, medium, and large enterprises
  • Mobile app: Software clients for Jabber on cellphones
  • Artificial intelligence: Business insights, automatic transcripts, notes, and highlights to capture the meeting

Service desk and contact center cloud options

INDUSTRY: All industries
SOURCE: Software reviews

What vendors offer and what they don’t

RingCentral integrates with some popular contact centers such as Five 9, Talkdesk and Sharpen. They also have a built-in contact center solution that can be integrated with their messaging and video conferencing tools.

GoToConnect integrates with several leading customer service providers including Zendesk and Salesforce Service Cloud They also offer a built-in contact center solution with advanced call routing and management features.

WebEx integrates with a variety of contact center and customer service platforms including Five9, Genesys, and ServiceNow.

Dialpad integrates with contact center platforms such as Talkdesk and ServiceNow as well as CRM tools such as Salesforce and HubSpot.

Google Workspace integrates with third-party contact center platforms through their Google Cloud Contact Center AI offering.

SoftwareReviews

A diagram that shows some top cloud options in Software reviews

UCaaS comparison table

A diagram of a UCaaS comparison table
* Some reported issues around sound and voice quality may be due to network
**Limited to certain plans

Differences between UCaaS and CPaaS

UCaaS

CPaaS

Defined

Unified communication as a service – a cloud-based platform providing a suite of tools like voice, video messaging, file sharing & contact center.

Communication platform as a service – a cloud-based platform allowing developers to use APIs to integrate real-time communications into their own applications.

Functionality

Designed for end users accessing a suite of tools for communication and collaboration through a unified platform.

Designed for developers to create and integrate comms features into their own applications.

Use cases

Replace aging on-premises PBX systems with consolidated voice and collaboration services.

Embedded communications capabilities into existing applications through SDKs, Java, and .NET libraries.

Cost

Often has a higher cost depending on services provided which can be quite comprehensive.

Can be more cost effective than UCaaS if the business only requires a few communication features Integrated into their apps.

Customization

Offers less customization as it provides a predefined suite of tools that are rarely customized.

Highly flexible and customizable so developers can build and integrate to fit unique use cases.

Vendors

Zoom, MS Teams, Cisco WebEx, RingCentral 8x8, GoTo Meeting, Slack, Avaya & many more.

Twilio, Vonage, Pivo, MessageBird, Nexmo, SignalWire, CloudTalk, Avaya OneCloud, Telnyx, Voximplant, and others.

Microsoft Teams Phone

UCaaS for Microsoft 365

Consider your approach to the telephony question. Microsoft incorporates telephony functionality with their broader collaboration suite. Other providers do the opposite.

Microsoft’s voice solution

These options allow you to plan for an all-cloud solution, connect to your own carrier, or use a combination of all cloud with a third-party carrier. Caveat: Calling plans must be available in your country or region.

How do you connect with the public switched telephone network (PSTN)?

Microsoft has three options for connecting the phone system to the PSTN:

Calling Plan

  • Uses Microsoft's phone system and adds a domestic and international calling plan, which enables worldwide calling but depends on your chosen license
  • Since PSTN Calling Plan operates out of Microsoft 365, you are not required to deploy/maintain on-premises hardware
  • Customers can connect a supported session border controller (SBC) via direct routing if it’s necessary to operate with third-party PBX analog devices or other voice solutions supported by the SBC
  • You can assign your phone numbers directly in the Teams Admin Center

This plan will work for you if:

  • There is a calling plan available in your region
  • You don’t need to maintain your PSTN carrier
  • You want to use Microsoft's managed PSTN
  • No SBC is necessary in your organization
  • Teams provides all the features your business needs

Operator Connect

  • Leverage existing contracts or find a new operator from a selection of participating operators
  • Operator-managed infrastructure, your operator manages PSTN calling services and SBC
  • Faster, easier deployment, quickly connect to your operator and assign phone numbers directly from Teams Admin Center
  • Enhanced support and reliability, operators provide technical support and shared service level agreements
  • Customers can connect a supported SBC via Direct Routing for interoperability with third-party PBXs, analog devices, and other third-party voice solution equipment supported by SBC

This plan will work for you if:

  • There is no calling plan available in your region
  • Your preferred carrier participates in the Microsoft operator connect plan
  • You are looking to get a new operator that enables calling in Teams

Direct Routing

  • Connect your own supported SBC to Microsoft Phone System directly without needing additional on-premises software
  • Use virtually any voice solution carrier with Microsoft Phone System
  • Can be configured and managed by customers or by your carrier or partner (ask if your carrier or partner provides this option)
  • Configure interoperability between your voice solution equipment (e.g., a third-party PBX and analog devices) and Microsoft Phone System
  • Assign phone numbers directly from Teams Admin Center

This plan will work for you if:

  • You want to use Teams with Phone System
  • You need to retain your current PSTN carrier
  • You want to mix routing – some calls are going via Calling Plans, some via your carrier
  • You need to interoperate with third-party PBXs and/or equipment such as overhead pagers, analog devices
  • Teams has all the features that your organization requires


For more information, go to Microsoft Teams call flows.

Teams phone architecture

Microsoft offers three options that can be deployed based on several factors and questions you must answer.

Microsoft Teams phone considerations when connecting to a PSTN

  • Do you want to move on-premises users to the cloud?
  • Is Microsoft's PSTN Calling Plan available in your region?
  • Is your preferred operator a participant in the Microsoft Operator Connect Program?
  • Do you want or need to keep your current voice carrier (e.g., does an existing contract require you to do so)?
  • Do you have an existing on-premises legacy PBX that you want or need to keep?
  • Does your current legacy PBX offer unique business-critical features?
  • Do all/any of your users require features not currently offered in Phone System?

1. Phone System with Calling Plan

All in the cloud for Teams users
A diagram that shows Phone System with Calling Plan.

Infrastructure requirements:

Requires uninterrupted connection with Microsoft 365 Yes
Available worldwide* No
Requires deploying and maintaining a supported session border controller (SBC) No
Requires contract with third-party carrier No

*List of countries where calling plans are available: aka.ms/callingplans

2. Phone System with own carrier via operator connect

Phone system in the cloud; connectivity to on-premises voice network for Teams users
A diagram that shows Phone System with own carrier via operator connect

Infrastructure requirements:

Requires uninterrupted connection with Microsoft 365 Yes
Available worldwide* No
Requires deploying and maintaining a supported session border controller (SBC) No
Requires contract with third-party carrier Yes

*List of countries where Operator Connect is available: aka.ms/operatorconnect

3. Phone System with own carrier via Direct Routing

Phone system in the cloud; connectivity to on-premises voice network for Teams users
A diagram that shows Phone System with own carrier via Direct Routing

Infrastructure requirements:

Requires uninterrupted connection with Microsoft 365 Yes
Available worldwide Yes
Requires deploying and maintaining a supported session border controller (SBC) Yes
Requires contract with third-party carrier* Yes

*Unless deployed as an option to provide connection to third-party PBX, analog devices, or other voice equipment for users who are on Phone System with Calling Plans


A Metrigy study found that 70% of organizations adopting MS Teams are using direct routing to connect to the PSTN
Note: Complex organizations with varying needs can adopt all three options simultaneously.

Avoid overpurchasing Microsoft telephony

Microsoft telephony products on a page

A diagram that shows Microsoft telephony products

Pros:

  • The complete package: sole-sourcing your environment for simpler management
  • Users familiar with Microsoft will only have one place to go for telephony
  • You can bring your own provider and manage your own routing, giving you more choice
  • This can keep costs down as you do not have to pay for calling plan services
  • You can choose your own third-party solution while still taking advantage of the integrations that make Microsoft so attractive as a vendor

Cons:

  • The most expensive option of the three
  • Less control and limited features compared to other pure-play telephony vendors
  • This service requires expertise in managing telephony infrastructure
  • Avoiding the cloud may introduce technical debt in the long term
  • You will have to manage integrations and deal with limited feature functionality (e.g. you may be able to receive inbound calls but not make outbound calls)

Why does it matter?

Phone System is Microsoft’s answer to the premises-based private branch exchange (PBX) functionality that has traditionally required a large capital expenditure. The cloud-based Phone System, offered with Microsoft’s highest tier of Microsoft/Office 365 licensing, allows Skype/Teams customers access to the following features (among others):

  • PSTN telephony (inbound and outbound)
  • Auto attendants (a menu system for callers to navigate your company directory)
  • Call forwarding, voice mail, and transferring
  • Caller ID
  • Shared lines
  • Common area phones

Phone System, especially the Teams version, is a fully-featured telephony solution that integrates natively with a popular productivity solution. Phone System is worth exploring because many organizations already have Teams licenses.

Key insights

  1. Don’t pay twice for the same service (unless you must). If you already have M/O365 E5 customer, Teams telephony can be a great way to save money and streamline your environment.
  2. Consider your approach to the telephony question. Microsoft incorporates telephony functionality into a broader collaboration suite. Other providers do the opposite. This reflects their relative strengths.
  3. Teams is a platform. You can use it as a front end for other telephone services. This might make sense if you have a preferred cloud PBX provider.

Sources

“Plan your Teams voice solution,” Microsoft, 2022.

“Microsoft Calling Plans for Teams,” Microsoft, 2023.

“Plan Direct Routing,” Microsoft, 2023.

“Cisco vs. Microsoft Cloud Calling—Discussing the Options,” UC Today, 2022.

“Microsoft Teams Phone Systems: 5 Deployment Options in 2020,” AeroCom, 2020.

Contact Center and Teams integration

Three Teams integration options

If you want to use a certified and direct routing solution for Teams Phone, use the Connect model.

If you want to use Azure bots and the Microsoft Graph Communication APIs that enable solution providers to create the Teams app, use the Extend model.

If you want to use the SDK that enables solution providers to embed native Teams experiences in their App, use the Power model (under development).

The Connect model features

The Extend model features

The Power model features (TBD)

Office 365 authN for agents to connect to their MS tenant from their integrated CCaaS client

Team graph APIs and Cloud Communication APIs for integration with Teams

Goal: One app, one screen contact center experience

Use Teams to see when agents are available

Teams-based app for agent experience Chat and collaboration experience integrated with the Teams Client

Goal: Adapt using software development kits (SDKs)

Transfers and groups call support for Teams

Teams as the primary calling endpoint for the agent

Goal: One dashboard experience

Teams Graph APIs and Cloud communication APIs for integration with Teams

Teams' client calling for the all the call controls. Preserve performance & quality of Teams client experience

Multi-tenant SIP trunking to support several customers on solution provider’s SBC

Agent experience apps for both Teams web and mobile client

Solution providers to use Microsoft certified session border controller (SBC)

Analytics workflow management role-based experience for agents in the CaaS app in Teams

Teams phone network assessment

Useful tools for Microsoft network testing and Microsoft Teams site assessment

Plan network basics

  • Does your network infrastructure have enough capacity? Consider switch ports, wireless access points, and other coverage.
  • If you use VLANs and DHCP, are your scopes sized accordingly?
  • Evaluate and test network paths from where devices are deployed to Microsoft 365.
  • Open the required firewall ports and URLs for Microsoft 365 as per guidance.
  • Review and test E911 requirements and configuration for location accuracy and compliance.
  • Avoid using a proxy server and optimize media paths for reliability and quality.

What internet speed do I need for Teams calls?

  • Microsoft Teams uses about 1.2 Mbps for HD video calling (720p), 1.5 Mbps for 1080p, 500 kbps for standard quality video (360p). Group video requires about 1 Mbps, HD group video uses about 2 Mbps.

Key physical considerations

  • Power: Do you have enough electrical outlets? If the device needs an external power source, how close can you position it to an outlet?
  • Device placement: Where will your device be located? Review desk stands, wall mounts, and other accessories from the original equipment manufacturer (OEM).
  • Security: Does your device need to be locked in certain spaces?
  • Accessibility: Does the device meet the accessibility requirements of its primary user? Consider where it's placed, wire length, and handset or headset usability.

Prepare your organization's network for Microsoft Teams

Plan your Teams voice solution

Check your internet connection for Teams Phone System

Teams Phone Mobile

UCaaS Activity

Questions that must be addressed by your business and the vendor. Site surveys and questionnaires for your assessment

Activity: Questionnaire

Input: Evaluate your current state, Network readiness
Output: Decisions on readiness, Gaps in infrastructure readiness, Develop a project plan
Materials: UCaaS Readiness Questionnaire
Participants: Infrastructure Manager, Project Manager, Network Engineer, Voice Engineer

As a group, read through the questions on Tabs 1 and 2 of the UCaaS Readiness Questionnaire workbook. The answers to the questions will determine if you have gaps to fill when determining your readiness to move forward on a UCaaS solution.

You may produce additional questions during the session that pertain to your specific business and situation. Please add them to the questionnaire as needed.

Record your answers to determine next steps and readiness.

When assessing potential vendors, use Tab 3 to determine suitability for your organization and requirements. This section may be left to a later date when building a request for proposal (RFP).

Call #1: Review client advisory deck and next steps.

Call #2: Assess readiness from answers to the Tab 1 questions.

Download the UCaaS Readiness Questionnaire here

Critical Path – Teams with Phone System Deployment

A diagram that shows Critical Path – Teams with Phone System Deployment

Example Ltd.’s Communications Guide

A diagram that shows Example Ltd.’s Communications Guide

[Insert Organization Name]’s Communications Guide

A diagram that shows [Insert Organization Name]’s Communications Guide

Related Info-Tech Research

Photo of Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure

Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure

Organizations are losing productivity from managing the limitations of yesterday’s technology. The business is changing and the current communications solution no longer adequately connects end users. A new communications and collaboration infrastructure is due to replace or update the legacy infrastructure in place today.

Photo of Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

Establish a Communication and Collaboration System Strategy

Communication and collaboration portfolios are overburdened with redundant and overlapping services. Between Office 365, Slack, Jabber, and WebEx, IT is supporting a collection of redundant apps. This redundancy takes a toll on IT, and on the user.

Photo of Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers

Implement a Transformative IVR Experience That Empowers Your Customers

Learn the strategies that will allow you to develop an effective interactive voice response (IVR) framework that supports self-service and improves the customer experience.

Bibliography

“8 Security Considerations for UCaaS.” Tech Guidance, Feb. 2022. Accessed March 2023.

“2022 UCaaS & CCaaS market trends snapshot.” Masergy, 2022. Web.

“All-in-one cloud communications.” Avaya, 2023. Accessed April 2023. Web.

Carter, Rebekah. “UC Case Study in Focus: Microsoft Teams and GroupM.” UC Today, 9 May 2022. Accessed Feb. 2023.

“Cisco Unified Communications Manager Cloud (Cisco UCM Cloud) Data Sheet.” Cisco, 15 Sept. 2021. Accessed Jan. 2023.

“Cloud Adoption as Viewed by European Companies: Assessing the Impact on Public, Hybrid and Private Cloud Communications.” Mitel, 2018. Web.

De Guzman, Marianne. “Unified Communications Security: The Importance of UCaaS Encryption.” Fit Small Business, 13 Dec. 2022. Accessed March 2023.

“Evolution of Unified Communications.” TrueConf, n.d. Accessed March 2023. Web.

Froehlich, Andrew. “Choose between Microsoft Teams vs. Zoom for conference needs.” TechTarget, 7 May 2021. Accessed March 2023.

Gerwig, Kate. “UCaaS explained: Guide to unified communications as a service.” TechTarget, 29 March 2022. Accessed Jan. 2023.

Irei, Alissa. “Emerging UCaaS trends include workflow integrations and AI.” TechTarget, 21 Feb 2020. Accessed Feb. 2023.

Kuch, Mike. “What Is Unified Communications as a Service (UCaaS)?” Avaya, 27 Dec. 2022. Accessed Jan. 2023.

Lazar, Irwin. “UC vendors extend mobile telephony capabilities.” TechTarget, 10 Feb. 2023. Accessed Mar 2023.

McCain, Abby. "30 Essential Hybrid Work Statistics [2023]: The Future of Work." Zippia, 20 Feb. 2023. Accessed Mar 2023.

“Meet the modern CIO: What CEOs expect from their IT leaders.” Freshworks, 2019. Web.

“A New Era of Workplace Communications: Will You Lead or Be Left Behind.” No Jitter, 2018. Web.

Plumley, Mike, et al. “Microsoft Teams IT architecture and voice solutions posters.’” Microsoft Teams, Microsoft, 14 Feb. 2023. Accessed March 2023.

Rowe, Carolyn, et al. “Plan your Teams voice solution” Microsoft Learn, Microsoft, 1 Oct. 2022.

Rowe, Carolyn, et al. “Microsoft Calling Plans for Teams.” Microsoft Learn, Microsoft, 23 May 2023.

Rowe, Carolyn, et al. “Plan Direct Routing.” Microsoft Learn, Microsoft, 20 Feb. 2023.

Scott, Rob. “Cisco vs. Microsoft Cloud Calling—Discussing the Options,” UC Today, 21 April 2022.

Smith, Mike. “Microsoft Teams Phone Systems: 5 Deployment Options in 2020.” YouTube, uploaded by AeroCom Inc, 23 Oct. 2020.

“UCaaS - Getting Started With Unified Communications As A Service.” Cloudscape, 10 Nov. 2022. Accessed March 2023.

“UCaaS Market Accelerating 29% per year; RingCentral, 8x8, Mitel, BroadSoft and Vonage Lead.” Synergy Research Group, 16 Oct. 2017. Web.

“UCaaS Statistics – The Future of Remote Work.” UC Today, 21 April 2022. Accessed Feb. 2023.

“Workplace Collaboration: 2021-22.” Metrigy, 27 Jan. 2021. Web.

Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}170|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
  • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
  • Internal stakeholders usually have different – and often conflicting – needs and expectations that require careful facilitation and management.
  • Vendors have well-honed negotiating strategies. Without understanding your own position and leverage points, it’s difficult to withstand their persuasive – and sometimes pushy – tactics.
  • Software – and software licensing – is constantly changing, making it difficult to acquire and retain subject matter expertise.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Conservatively, it’s possible to save 5% of the overall IT budget through comprehensive software contract review.
  • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price.
  • Learning to negotiate is crucial.

Impact and Result

  • Look at your contract holistically to find cost savings.
  • Guide communication between vendors and your organization for the duration of contract negotiations.
  • Redline the terms and conditions of your software contract.
  • Prioritize crucial terms and conditions to negotiate.

Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to redline and negotiate your software agreement, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Gather requirements

Build and manage your stakeholder team, then document your business use case.

  • Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements – Phase 1: Gather Requirements
  • RASCI Chart
  • Vendor Communication Management Plan
  • Software Business Use Case Template
  • SaaS TCO Calculator

2. Redline contract

Redline your proposed software contract.

  • Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements – Phase 2: Redline Contract
  • Software Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool
  • Software Buyer's Checklist

3. Negotiate contract

Create a thorough negotiation plan.

  • Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements – Phase 3: Negotiate Contract
  • Controlled Vendor Communications Letter
  • Key Vendor Fiscal Year End Calendar
  • Contract Negotiation Tactics Playbook
[infographic]

Workshop: Master Contract Review and Negotiation for Software Agreements

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Collect and Review Data

The Purpose

Assemble documentation.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understand current position before going forward.

Activities

1.1 Assemble existing contracts.

1.2 Document their strategic and tactical objectives.

1.3 Identify current status of the vendor relationship and any historical context.

1.4 Clarify goals for ideal future state.

Outputs

Business Use Case

2 Define Business Use Case and Build Stakeholder Team

The Purpose

Define business use case and build stakeholder team.

Key Benefits Achieved

Create business use case to document functional and nonfunctional requirements.

Build internal cross-functional stakeholder team to negotiate contract.

Activities

2.1 Establish negotiation team and define roles.

2.2 Write communication plan.

2.3 Complete business use case.

Outputs

RASCI Chart

Vendor Communication Management Plan

SaaS TCO Calculator

Software Business Use Case

3 Redline Contract

The Purpose

Examine terms and conditions and prioritize for negotiation.

Key Benefits Achieved

Discover cost savings.

Improve agreement terms.

Prioritize terms for negotiation.

Activities

3.1 Review general terms and conditions.

3.2 Review license- and application-specific terms and conditions.

3.3 Match to business and technical requirements.

3.4 Redline agreement.

Outputs

Software Terms & Conditions Evaluation Tool

Software Buyer’s Checklist

4 Build Negotiation Strategy

The Purpose

Create a negotiation strategy.

Key Benefits Achieved

Establish controlled communication.

Choose negotiation tactics.

Plot negotiation timeline.

Activities

4.1 Review vendor- and application-specific negotiation tactics.

4.2 Build negotiation strategy.

Outputs

Contract Negotiation Tactics Playbook

Controlled Vendor Communications Letter

Key Vendor Fiscal Year End Calendar

Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}430|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: N/A
  • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
  • member rating average days saved: N/A
  • Parent Category Name: Requirements & Design
  • Parent Category Link: /requirements-and-design

Many organizations want to get to market quickly and on budget but don’t know the steps to get the right product/service to satisfy the users and business. This may be made apparent through uninformed decisions leading to lack of adoption of your product or service, rework due to post-implementation user feedback, or the competition discovering new approaches that outshine yours.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

Ensure your practice has a clear understanding of the design problem space – not just the solution. An understanding of the user is critical to this.

Impact and Result

  • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
    • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
    • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
    • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.
  • Create a practice that develops solutions specific to the needs of users, customers, and stakeholders.

Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement an experience design practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four dimensions we recommend using to mature your practice.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Build the foundation

Motivate your team with a common vision, mission, and goals.

  • Design Roadmap Workbook
  • User Experience Practice Roadmap

2. Review the design dimensions

Examine your practice – from the perspectives of organizational alignment, business outcomes, design perspective, and design integration – to determine what it takes to improve your maturity.

3. Build your roadmap and communications

Bring it all together – determine your team structure, the roadmap for the practice maturity, and communication plan.

[infographic]

Workshop: Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Answer “So What?”

The Purpose

Make the case for UX. Bring the team together with a common mission, vision, and goals.

Key Benefits Achieved

Mission, vision, and goals for design

Activities

1.1 Define design practice goals.

1.2 Generate the vision statement.

1.3 Develop the mission statement.

Outputs

Design vision statement

Design mission statement

Design goals

2 Examine Design Dimensions

The Purpose

Review the dimensions that help organizations to mature, and assess what next steps make sense for your organization.

Key Benefits Achieved

Develop initiatives that are right-sized for your organization.

Activities

2.1 Examine organizational alignment.

2.2 Establish priorities for initiatives.

2.3 Identify business value sources.

2.4 Identify design perspective.

2.5 Brainstorm design integration.

2.6 Complete UCD-Canvas.

Outputs

Documented initiatives for design maturity

Design canvas framework

3 Create Structure and Initiatives

The Purpose

Make your design practice structure right for you.

Key Benefits Achieved

Examine patterns and roles for your organization.

Activities

3.1 Structure your design practice.

Outputs

Design practice structure with patterns

4 Roadmap and Communications

The Purpose

Define the communications objectives and audience for your roadmap.

Develop your communication plan.

Sponsor check-in.

Key Benefits Achieved

Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

Activities

4.1 Define the communications objectives and audience for your roadmap.

4.2 Develop your communication plan.

Outputs

Communication Plan and Roadmap

Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}486|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 7.5/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $9,246 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
  • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
  • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project, but also a process improvement opportunity.
  • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool, but they will not fix your processes for you.
  • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment.
  • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data.
  • ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices.
  • Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope.

Impact and Result

  • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
  • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project.
  • Improved project management, and therefore, better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront.

Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Research & Tools

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Deck – An implementation guide that walks you through the steps to ensure the tool delivers business value.

There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical for the success of the implementation project.

  • Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan – Phases 1-3

2. ITSM Tool Project Charter Template – A charter to document your project scope, milestones, stakeholders, risks etc. to kick-off and manage your project.

This project charter document summarizes the Project Overview (Description, background, drivers, and objectives), Governance and Management (Project stakeholders/roles, budget, and dependencies), and Risk, Assumptions, and Constraints (Known and potential risks and mitigation strategy).

  • ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

3. ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist – A tool to help identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

The checklists in this tool identify the most common decisions and preparation you will need to make to support the implementation for the ITSM modules that we recommend are set up first: incident management and service requests; change management; and asset management. Use these checklists as a model to follow for any additional ITSM modules you plan to implement, and refer to Info-Tech's blueprints for each service management topic for additional guidance.

  • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

4. ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template – A tool to help prioritize and prepare for tool rollout plan.

This deployment plan documents the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool, and the details to execute the cutover to a live environment, including how, when, where.

  • ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

5. ITSM Tool Training Schedule – Use the tool to create your new tool training roadmap.

This template is a guide for creating a training and communication plan as part of the implementation project for your ITSM tool. Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

  • ITSM Tool Training Schedule

Infographic

Further reading

Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

Plan ahead with a step-by-step approach to ensure the tool delivers business value.

EXECUTIVE BRIEF

Analyst perspective

Take control of the wheel or you might end up in a ditch.

The image contains a picture of Frank Trovato.

An ITSM tool implementation is a complex project with direct impact on IT’s ability to support the business. With that level of risk, you need to take control early on.

Yes, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation, but they depend on you to tell them how to configure ITSM parameters and workflows that affect user interface, the ability to manage incidents, and governance over assets and IT changes.

If you leave the configuration completely to the vendor, at best you might get the same setup as in your old tool (and not realize the benefits that leadership is expecting). At worst you end up with default values that don’t fit your process needs, i.e., confusion and not realizing expected benefits.

A successful implementation requires early planning from a wide range of resources including ITSM tool experts (supported by the vendor), process experts, and a project manager to methodically step through the hundreds of parameters you will need to define before implementation.

Frank Trovato
Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations
Info-Tech Research Group

Executive Summary

Your Challenge

Common Obstacles

Info-Tech’s Approach

Leadership has invested significantly in a new ITSM tool and expects to see the benefits they were promised by the vendor and the procurement team.

The ITSM project team needs to balance leadership expectations with the direct impact this project will have on IT staff and end users.

Implementing an ITSM tool is a large project that is often highly complex in part because it requires input from a wide range of stakeholders: IT staff, end users, senior management, and vendors.

A new ITSM tool will change how IT staff work and how users are serviced, and change is always difficult.

Finally, implementing the new tool requires a migration from an existing tool without a pause in IT service availability. Incidents don’t take a week off while you execute the final product rollout.

There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical to:

  • Identify the necessary stakeholders to provide input into implementation decisions.
  • Properly define scope and timelines.
  • Take advantage of the opportunity to review and improve processes as part of defining what will need to be configured in the new ITSM tool.

Info-Tech Insight

As with any large project, a key step is tackling it one bite at a time – but also understanding the size of the whole meal. This is where organizations often fail with ITSM implementations: not understanding upfront the volume of work required for a successful implementation.

Your Challenge

Organizations implementing a new ITSM tool often face these pitfalls:

  • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project but also a process improvement opportunity. You will need to configure ITSM parameters and workflows in the new tool – which directly affects processes. Take advantage of that opportunity to fix pain points. For example, if your existing ticket categories are not effective, implement a better categorization scheme rather than just configure the same old, ineffective scheme.
  • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool but they will not fix your processes for you. On installation day, if you are not prepared with the categories, ticket templates, and so on that you wish to configure, your vendor will just go with the default or migrate your old parameters from your old ITSM tool.
  • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment. That takes planning and must be defined well before the vendor is ready to implement your tool.
  • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

A survey of implementation challenges for ServiceNow’s customers

26% Resistance to change

43% Lacked a clear roadmap

38% Planning for resources

Source: Acorio, 2019

Info-Tech’s approach

Divide the implementation project into controllable phases for an effective implementation.

Plan

Define the scope of your project, identify and get buy-in from your stakeholders, and establish a timeframe for the implementation.

Design & Build

Identify existing process challenges and design workflows and ticket management to improve processes. Make decisions on data migrations and integrations for your new tool.

Deploy & Train

Create a rollout plan and communicate changes and improvements to users. Plan for the new tool deployment and monitor your solution.

STOP: Use this blueprint after you have selected an ITSM solution

Leverage our SoftwareReviews service and related blueprints to assist with ITSM tool selection, and then use this blueprint to plan the implementation.

1. Evaluate solutions

2. Select and purchase

3. Implement (use this blueprint)

Use our SoftwareReviews resources to evaluate solutions and vendors based on criteria such as features and customer service. Below are links to our ITSM software reviews:

Use the following resources to help you make the case for funding and execute the purchase process:

Your ITSM vendor or systems integrator will lead the technical implementation (e.g. software install and integration).

As a result, your implementation plan needs to focus on preparing the information needed for implementation (e.g. ticket categories, workflow requirements) and organizational change management.

This blueprint provides a methodology, checklist, and supporting templates to prepare for the implementation.

Info-Tech’s methodology to build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

1. Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

2. Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

3. Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

Phase Steps

1.1 Document define scope

1.2 Define roles and responsibilities

1.3 Identify preliminary timeline

2.1 Review your existing solution and challenges

2.2 Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

2.3 Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations

2.4 Plan the module rollout

3.1 Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

3.2 Create a training plan

3.3 Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

Phase Outcomes

  • RACI chart outlining high-level accountability and responsibilities for the project
  • Documenting timeline and team for the implementation project
  • ITSM tool implementation checklist
  • Strategy and identified opportunities to implement incident and service request modules
  • Documented communications and targeted training plan
  • Completed rollout plan and prepared to monitor your success metrics

Insight summary

Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data

ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices

Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope

We all love data. We love being able to run reports showing trends, measuring changes over time, and highlighting pain points – but is your data from five years ago relevant to those assessments? Can you get by with just migrating open tickets and perhaps just the last year of critical tickets?

Be ruthless in deciding what really needs to be in your active system to support incident matching, troubleshooting, or ongoing reporting.

If you can’t make a strong case, don’t waste your time on old data. Remember, you can still save an exported copy or report of your old data if the need arises to search historical records.

For organizations lacking process maturity, the tool’s default settings will often provide a good starting point. For example, a good ITSM tool will typically already be configured to follow best practices such as:

  • Separating incidents from service requests
  • Assigning resolution codes to solved tickets
  • Enabling routing based on categories

Within those defaults, you will still need to decide your specific parameters – e.g. what your categories and resolution codes should be – so don’t blindly follow default settings but use them as a starting point.

Start with the incident management and service requests modules. Those are typically the core of IT service management operations, so that should help realize benefits from the new tool sooner. In addition, incident management and service requests processes will support other ITSM processes such as asset management and problem management.

Once those modules are implemented successfully (from a technology and process perspective), then start to implement your next core module (e.g. asset or change management), and continue to build from there.

Blueprint deliverables

This blueprint includes tools and templates to help you accomplish your goals:

ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

Identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

ITSM Tool Project Charter Template

Review and edit the template to suit your project requirements

The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Project Charter Template.
The image contains screenshots of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist.

ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

Prioritize and prepare tool rollout plan

The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

ITSM Tool Training Schedule

Use the checklist to create your new tool training roadmap

The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

Blueprint benefits

Benefits for IT

Benefits for the business

  • Checklists and templates to support a smoother transition to the new ITSM tool.
  • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project. A new tool with the same old processes will not achieve expected benefits.
  • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
  • Better planning means better results – specifically, ensuring that the implementation takes into account targeted business benefits.
  • Improved project management, and therefore better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront. This also provides the opportunity to re-scope or adjust timelines based on estimated effort.
  • Higher end-user satisfaction by executing a well-organized ITSM tool implementation.

Measured value from using this blueprint

Use this guide as an example to calculate your total cost savings from the ITSM tool implementation project.

Phase 1

Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to define scope and plan your project

E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

Phase 2

Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to build your solution strategy and determine configurations

E.g. 2 FTEs * 8 days * $80,000/year = $5,400/-

Phase 3

Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective communications roadmap and deploy tool

E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

Total Savings

Total Savings

Phase 1 + Phase 2 + Phase 3 = $13,400

Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
"Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

Guided Implementation

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

Call #1: Define scope, roles, responsibilities and timeline.

Call #2: Review your existing solution and challenges.

Call #3: Plan ticket management and workflow implementation.

Call #4: Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations.

Call #5: Plan the module rollout.

Call #6: Create a communication plan.

Call #7: Create a training plan.

Call #8: Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution.

A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

Phase 1

Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

This phase will walk you through the following steps:

  1. Define scope
  2. Define roles and responsibilities
  3. Identify preliminary timeline

Step 1.1

Define scope

Activities

1.1.1

Use the Project Charter Template to capture project parameters

1.1.2

Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

1.1.3

Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

1.1.4

Interview ITSM staff to identify current tool challenges and support organizational change management

1.1.5

Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

1.1.6

Determine if data migration is required

This step will walk you through the following activities:

  • Define the scope of the implementation project
  • Establish the future processes and functionalities the tool will support

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Director/Manager
  • Service Manager
  • Project Manager and the project team

Outcomes of this step

  • Specifying the implementation project
  • Identifying the business units that are needed to support the project
  • Defining the ongoing and future service management processes the tool will support

1.1.1 Use the Project Charter Template to capture scope, stakeholders, and timeline as outlined in Phase 1

Follow the instructions in Phase 1 (step 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3) to gather information needed to create a project charter to define project parameters.

Specific subsections are listed below and described in more detail in the remainder of this phase.

  1. Project Overview: Includes deliverables, scope, milestones, and success metrics.
  2. Governance and Management: Includes roles, responsibilities, and resource requirements.
  3. Project Risks, Assumptions, and Constraints: Includes risks and mitigation strategies as well as any assumptions and constraints.
  4. Project Sign-Off: Includes IT and executive sign-off (if required).

The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

1.1.2 Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

The checklist tabs align to each phase of this blueprint.

  • Phase 1 (Tab 1) – Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline
  • Phase 2 (Tab 2) – Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules
  • Phase 3 (Tabs 3+4) – Prepare to Implement Additional ITSM Modules (e.g. Change Management)
  • Phase 4 (deployment section in each tab) – Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

The image contains screenshots from the Implementation Checklist.

Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

1.1.3 Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

Identify the triggers for the selection and implementation of your new ITSM tool.

Whether this is your first ITSM tool or a replacement for your old tool, the project was likely triggered by pain points that must be addressed by the new tool to improve your service desk. Having a clear understanding of these pain points throughout the implementation of your new tool will help to prevent them from reoccurring.

Common ITSM pain points include:

  1. Poor communication with end users on ticket status.
  2. Lack of SLA automation to escalate issues to the appropriate channels.
  3. Poor self-service options for end users to perform simple requests on their own.
  4. Undeveloped knowledgebase for users to find answers to common issues.
  5. Lack of reporting or mistrust in reporting data.
  6. Lack of automation, including ticket templates.
  7. Overcomplicated ticket categories resulting in categories being misused.
  8. Overconfiguration prevents future upgrades.
  9. Lack of integration with other tools.

If you haven't already selected an ITSM tool, leverage the IT Service Management Selection Guide to select the right tool.

Download the IT Service Management Selection Guide

1.1.4 Plan to interview staff to support organizational change management

Identify challenges with the existing tool and processes as well as potential objections to the new tool.

Incorporate this feedback in the implementation to drive buy-in and a successful rollout.

Implementing a new ITSM tool will force changes in how IT staff do their work:

  • At a minimum, it means learning a new interface.
  • It could also mean leveraging features that improve IT operations but could change the process or tasks for the staff.
  • Their input on the current tool and process challenges can be critical for the project.
  • Solving at least some of their challenges can help bring them onboard to use this tool properly and follow associated process changes.

Info-Tech Insight

Keep management in the loop through every stage of the implementation process. They are the ones who are paying for the software, so they need to be informed throughout implementation and feel that their needs and feedback are being heard to prevent pushback further into the implementation.

1.1.5 Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

Consider these factors when deciding what modules and features you want to implement:

  • Specific ITSM modules based on the recommended order and any unique business requirements
  • Key features that drove the tool purchase and address key issues
  • High-level process changes needed to address challenges and realize expected benefits from the new ITSM tool (e.g. if a key goal was automated ticket routing based on categories, then the project needs to include developing a good categorization scheme)

Recommended order for implementation:

  1. Incident Management and Service Request
  2. This is the core of service management and typically has the highest impact on the organization. Include knowledgebase development as part of this implementation.

  3. Change Management
  4. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to minimize disruptions to IT services when making changes to services and critical systems.

  5. Asset Management
  6. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to track their assets’ locations, how they are used, and when changes are made to them.

1.1.6 Determine if data migration is required

If you are switching from a previous ITSM tool, carefully weigh the pros and cons as well as the necessity of migrating historical transactional data before deciding to import it into the new tool.

Importing your old transactional data will allow you to track metrics over time, which can be valuable for data analysis and reporting purposes.

However, ask yourself what the true value of your data is before you import it.

You will not get value out of migrating the old data if:

  • You have incomplete or inaccurate data (a high percentage of incidents did not have tickets created in the old system).
  • The categorization of your old tickets was not useful or was used inconsistently.
  • You plan on changing the ticket categorization in the new system.

“Don’t debate whether you can import your old data until you’ve made sure that you should.”

– Barry Cousins, Practice Lead at Info-Tech Research Group

Info-Tech Insight

If you decide to migrate your data, keep in mind that it can be a complex process and proper time should be budgeted for planning, structuring the data, and importing and testing it.

Step 1.2

Define roles and responsibilities

Activities

1.2.1

Key internal roles and responsibilities

1.2.2

Key external roles and responsibilities

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Director/Manager
  • Service Manager
  • Project Manager and the project team

Outcomes of this step

  • Decision on whether to hire professional services for the implementation
  • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the project

1.2.1 Identify key internal roles and responsibilities

Review the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist to help you identify appropriate roles and specific staff that will be needed to execute this project.

Project Role

Description

RACI

Assigned To

Executive Sponsor

Liaison with the executive team (the CIO would be a good candidate for this role).

Accountable for project completion.

Approves resource allocation and funding.

A, C

Name(s)

Project Manager

Manages the project schedule, tasks, and budget.

May act as a liaison between executives and the project-level team.

R

Name(s)

Product Owner

Liaison with the vendor.

SME for the new tool.

Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

Manages the tool post-implementation.

R

Name(s)

Process Owners

Define current processes.

Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address and potential changes as part of the new tool implementation.

R

Name(s)

Service Desk Manager

Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

Manages and trains service desk agents to use new tool and processes.

R

Name(s)

ITSM Tool Core Users (e.g. Service Desk Technicians)

Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address.

Provide input to tool configuration decisions.

C

Name(s)

RACI = Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed

Assign individuals to roles through each step of the implementation project in the governance and management chart in the Project Charter Template.

Download the Project Charter Template

1.2.2 Key external roles and responsibilities

Determine whether you will engage professional services for the implementation.

There are three main ways to implement your ITSM tool

Implemented in-house by own staff

Implemented using a combination of your own staff and your ITSM tool vendor

Implemented by professional services and your ITSM tool vendor

DIY Implementation

Adopting a DIY implementation approach can save money but could draw out your implementation timeline and increase the likelihood of errors. Carefully consider your integration environment to determine your resourcing capabilities and maturity.

Vendor Implementation

In most cases, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation based on your requirements. Use this blueprint to help you define those requirements.

Professional Services

Opting for professional services may result in a shorter implementation period and fewer errors but may also deny your IT staff the opportunity to develop the skills necessary to maintain and configure the solution in the future.

Clarify the role of the professional services vendor before acquiring their services to make sure your expectations are aligned. For example, are you hiring the vendor for tool installation, tool configuration, or tool customization or for training your end users?

Step 1.3

Identify preliminary timeline

Activities

1.3.1

Identify preliminary internal target dates

1.3.2

Identify target dates for vendor involvement

This step involves the following participants:

  • CIO
  • IT Director/Manager
  • Service Manager
  • Project Manager and the project team

Outcomes of this step

  • Specifying the target dates for the implementation project

1.3.1 Identify preliminary internal target dates

Identify high-level start and end dates based on the following:

  • Existing process maturity
  • Process changes required (to address process issues or to realize targeted benefits from the new tool)
  • Data migration requirements (if any)
  • Information to prepare for the implementation (review the Checklist Tool)
  • Vendor availability to support implementation
  • Executive mandates that have established specific milestone dates

Create an initial project schedule:

  • Review the remaining phases of this blueprint for more details on the implementation planning steps.
  • Review and update the Checklist Tool to suit your implementation goals and requirements.
  • Assign task owners and target dates in the Checklist Tool.

Note: This is a preliminary schedule. Monitor progress as well as requirement changes, and adjust the scope or schedule as needed.

Update the columns in the Checklist Tool to plan and keep track of your implementation project.

1.3.2 Identify target dates for vendor involvement

Plan when you'll be ready for the vendor and identify the key points for when the vendor will come in.

Are dates already scheduled for tool installation/configuration/customization?

If yes:

  • Clarify vendor expectations for those target dates (i.e. what do you have to have prepared in advance?).
  • Determine options to adjust dates if needed.

If no:

  • Defer scheduling until you have reviewed and updated the Implementation Checklist. The checklist will help you determine your readiness for vendor involvement.

Consider if the vendor will implement the ITSM tool in one go or if they will help setup the tool in stages. Keep in mind that ITSM implementation projects typically take anywhere from 9 weeks to 16 months and plan accordingly depending on the maturity of your processes and the modules and features you plan to implement.

Use your internal target dates to estimate when you'll be ready for the vendor to set up the tool and implement the setting that you've defined.

Phase 2

Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

This phase will walk you through the following steps:

  • Review your existing solution and challenges
  • Plan ticket management and workflow implementation
  • Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations
  • Plan the module rollout

Additional Info-Tech Research

The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in these blueprints.

Standardize the Service Desk

Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

Incident and Problem Management

Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

Step 2.1

Review your existing solution and challenges

Activities

2.1.1

Configure, don’t customize, your solution to minimize risk

2.1.2

Review your existing process and solution challenges for opportunities for improvement

This step involves the following participants:

  1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
  2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
  3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

2.1.1 Configure your tool, don’t customize it

Your tool may require at least some basic configurations to align with your processes, but in most cases customization of the tool is not recommended.

Configuration

Customization

  • Creating settings and recording reference data in the tool within the normal functionality of the tool.
  • Does not require changes to source code.

Documentation of configurations is key.

Failure to document configurations and the reasons for specific configurations will lead to:

  • Difficulty diagnosing incidents and problems.
  • Difficulty reconstructing the tool in the case of disaster recovery.
  • One administrator having all of the knowledge of configurations and taking it with them if they leave the organization.
  • Configurations that become useless in the future are maintained and lead to unnecessary work if documentation is not regularly reviewed.
  • Extending the functionality of the tool beyond what it was originally intended to do.
  • Requires manual changes to source code.

Carefully consider whether a customization is necessary.

  • Over-customization of your ITSM tool code may lock you into your current version of the software by preventing future patches and upgrades, leaving you with outdated software.
  • Over-customization becomes particularly risky when your ITSM solution is integrated with other tools, as a loss in functionality of your ITSM tool resulting from over-customization may cause disruptions across the business.
  • If your selected ITSM solution doesn’t do something you think you need it to do, carefully evaluate whether you really need that customization and if the trade-off of potentially limiting future innovation is worth it.

Case Study

Consider the consequences of over-customizing your solution.

INDUSTRY: Education

SOURCE: IT Director

Situation

Challenge

Resolution

A few years ago, the service management office at the university decided to switch ITSM tools, from Computer Associates to ServiceNow.

They wanted the new tool to behave similarly to what they had previously, so they made a lot of customized code changes to ServiceNow during implementation.

As a result of the customizations, much of the functionality of the tool was restricted, and the upgrades were not compatible with the solution.

The external consultants who performed the customizations and backend work did not document their changes, leaving the service management team without an understanding of why they did what they did.

The service management team is working with ServiceNow to slowly unravel the custom code to try to get the solution back to having out-of-the-box functionality, with the ability to be upgraded.

It has been challenging to do this work without disrupting the functionality of the tool.

Over-customization led to the organization paying for features they couldn’t use and spending more time and resources down the road to try to reverse the changes.

2.1.2 Review your existing process to identify opportunities for improvement

Documenting your existing processes is an effective method for also reviewing those processes and identifying inefficiencies. Take advantage of this project to fix your process issues.

  1. Document your existing workflows for incident management and service requests.
  2. Review your workflows to identify opportunities to optimize through process refinement (e.g. clarifying escalation guidelines) or by leveraging features in your new ITSM tool (e.g. improved workflow automation).
  3. Similarly, review the challenges identified through stakeholder interviews: is there an opportunity address those challenges through process changes or leveraging your new ITSM tool?
  4. Address those challenge and issues as you execute the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist Tool. For example, if inconsistent ticket routing was identified as a challenge due to a vague categorization scheme, that’s a driver to review and update your scheme rather than just carry forward your existing scheme.

Regardless of your existing ITSM maturity, this is an opportunity to review and optimize existing processes. Even the most-mature organizations can typically find an area to improve.

Case Study

Reviewing and defining processes before the implementation can be a project in itself.

INDUSTRY: Defense

SOURCE: Anonymous

Situation

Challenge

Resolution

The organization was switching to a new ITSM tool. To prepare for the implementation, they gathered stakeholders, held steering committee meetings, and broke down key processes, teams, and owners before even meeting with the larger group.

They used a software tool called InDesign to visibly map service requests and incidents and determine who owned each process and where the handoffs were.

The service catalog also needed to be built out as they were performing certain services that didn’t relate to anything in the catalog.

The goal for the implementation was to have it completed within a year, but it ended up going over, taking 15 to 16 months to complete.

Most of the time was spent identifying processes upfront before configuring the tool. There were difficulties defining processes as well as agreeing on who owned a process or service.

There were also difficulties agreeing upon who the valid stakeholders were for processes, as groups were siloed.

The major obstacles to implementation were therefore people and process, not the product.

New processes were introduced, and boundaries were placed around processes that were being done in the past that weren’t necessary.

Once the groups were able to agree upon process owners, the tool configuration and implementation itself did not pose any major difficulties.

After the implementation, the tool was continually improved and sharpened to adapt to processes.

Step 2.2

Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

Activities

2.2.1

Define ticket classification values

2.2.2

Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

2.2.3

Plan your ticket intake channels

2.2.4

Design a self-service portal

2.2.5

Plan your knowledgebase implementation in the new tool

2.2.6

Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

2.2.7

Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/ service groups

2.2.8

Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

2.2.9

Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

This step involves the following participants:

  1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
  2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
  3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

Outcomes of this step

Tool is designed and configured to support service desk processes and organization needs.

Checklist overview

The ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist will help you estimate resources required to support demand, based on your ticket volume.

TAB 2

TAB 3

TAB 4

Incident and Service Modules Checklist

Change Management Modules

Asset Management Modules

The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 2. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 3. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 4.

How to follow this section:

The following slides contain a table that explains why each task in the module matters and what needs to be considered. Complete the checklist modules referring to this section.

2.2.1 Define ticket classification values

Ticket classification improves reporting, workflow automation, and problem identification.

Review your existing ticket classification values to identify what to carry forward, drop, or change. For example, if your categorization scheme has become too complex, this is your opportunity to fix it; don’t perpetuate ineffective classification in the new tool.

Task

Why this matters

Ticket Types (e.g. incident, service request, change)

In particular, separating incidents from service requests supports appropriate ticket prioritization and resourcing; for example, an incident typically should be prioritized, and service requests can be scheduled.

Categories (e.g. network, servers)

An effective categorization scheme can help identify ticket assignment and escalation (e.g. network tickets would be escalated to the network team), and potentially automate ticket routing.

Resolution Codes

Indicates how the ticket was resolved (e.g. configuration change). Supports another layer of trends reporting and data to support problem identification.

Status Values

Shows what status the ticket is currently in (e.g. if the ticket has been opened or assigned to an agent, if it is in progress or has been resolved).

2.2.2 Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

Ticket templates are the backbone of automation. A common complaint is that tickets take too much time. However, a little planning can reduce the time it takes to create a ticket to less than a minute.

Task

Why this matters

Identify common recurring tickets that would be good candidates for using ticket templates (e.g. common service requests and incidents).

Some common recurring tickets such as password reset, new laptop, and login requests would be great candidates to create ticket templates for. Building a deck of standard rules to follow for common tickets saves time and reduces the number of tickets generated.

Design ticket templates and workflows for common tickets (e.g. fields to auto-populate as well as routing and secondary tickets for onboarding requests).

Differentiating between recurring ticket types and building pre-defined templates not just saves time but can also have major impact on how service is delivered as this will also help separate tickets. Creating these templates beforehand will also let you communicate effectively with the users at a time when all hands need to be on deck.

2.2.3 Plan your ticket intake channels

Consider possible ticket intake channels and evaluate their relevance to your organization.

Task

Why this matters

Decide on ticket intake channels (e.g. phone, email, portal, walk-ups).

Each standard intake channel serves its own purposes and can be extremely valuable under different circumstances. For example, walk-ins may be inefficient but necessary for critical incidents.

If using email, identify/create the email account and appropriate permissions.

Email works well if it automatically creates a ticket in your ticketing system, but users often don’t provide enough information in unstructured emails. Use required fields and ticket templates to ensure the ticket is properly categorized.

If using phone, identify/create the phone number and appropriate integrations.

Maintain the phone for users from other locations and for critical incidents but encourage users who call in to submit a ticket through the portal.

If using a portal, determine if you will leverage the tool's portal or an existing portal.

The web portal is the most efficient intake method, but ensure it is user friendly before promoting it.

If using chat, determine whether you will use the tool's chat or an existing chat mechanism and whether integrations are needed.

Another way to improve support experience for your customers is through live chat. This gives your customers an easy way to reach you at the exact moment they have questions or issues they can't fix.

2.2.4 Design a self-service portal

Map your processes to the tool by defining your ticket input, categories, escalations, and workflows.

Don’t forget about the client-facing side of the solution. It is important to build a self-serve portal that has an easy-to-use interface where the user can easily find the category for the help they’re looking for. It is also necessary to educate the users on where to find the portal or how to access it.

Task

Why this matters

Identify components to include (e.g. service request, incident, knowledgebase).

Identify the categories you want the users to be able to access in the portal. Finding the right balance of components to include is very important to make it easy for your users to find all the relevant information they are looking for. This could mean fewer tickets.

Plan the input form for service requests and incidents (e.g. mandatory fields, optional fields, drop-down lists).

Having relevant and specific fields helps to narrow down your user’s issues and provides more information on how to allocate these tasks among the service desk resources and reduce time to further investigate the issues.

If service catalog will be attached to the ITSM tool, define routing and workflows; if there is no existing service catalog, start a separate project to define it (e.g. services, SLAs).

A centrally defined guide enables a uniform quality in service and clarifies the responsible tier for the ticket. Identify services that will be included in the catalog, and if the information is attached to the ITSM tool, plan for how will the routing and workflows be structured.

Plan design requirements (e.g. company branding).

Ensure that the portal is aligned with the company’s theme and access format. Work with the vendor to customize the branding on the tool, design requirements, images.

2.2.5 Plan your knowledgebase (KB) implementation in the new tool

Evaluate how onerous KB migration will be for you. Is this an opportunity to improve how the KB is organized?

Task

Why this matters

Define knowledgebase categories and structure.

Establishing knowledgebase structures or having them separated into categories makes it easy for your clients to find them (e.g. do they align with ticket categories?).

Identify existing knowledgebase articles to add to the new tool.

Review existing knowledgebase articles at a high level (e.g. Do you carry forward all existing articles? Take an opportunity to retire old articles?).

Define knowledgebase article templates.

Having standardized templates makes it an easy read and will increase its usage (e.g. all knowledgebase articles for recurring incidents will follow the same template).

Build knowledgebase article creation, usage, and revision workflows.

Decide how new knowledgebase articles will be built and added to the tool, how it will be accessed and used, and also any steps necessary to update the articles.

Plan a knowledgebase feedback system.

For example, include a comments section, like buttons, and who will get notified about feedback.

2.2.6 Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

Task

Why this matters

Identify triggers for status notifications. Balance the need for keeping users informed versus notifications being treated as spam.

Identify when and where the users are informed to make sure you are not under or over communicating with them. Status notifications and alerts are a great way to set or reset expectations to your users on the delivery or resolution on their tickets. For example, auto-response for a new ticket, or status updates to users when the ticket is assigned, solved, and closed.

If using email notifications, design email templates for each type of notification.

Creating notification templates is a great way to provide standardized service to your clients and it saves time when a ticket is raised. For example, email templates for new ticket, ticket updated, or ticket closed.

Plan how you will enable users to validate the ticket or resolve request without causing the ticket to reopen.

For example, in the ticket solved template, provide a link to close the ticket, and ask the user to reply only if they wish to re-open the ticket (i.e. if it's not resolved). May require consulting with the ITSM tool vendor.

Decide if customer satisfaction surveys will be sent to end users after their ticket has been closed.

Discuss if this data would be useful to you if captured to improve/modify your service.

If customer satisfaction surveys will be used, design the survey.

Discuss what data would be useful to you if captured and create survey questionnaires to capture that data from your clients. For example, how many questions, types of questions, whether sent for every ticket or randomly.

2.2.7 Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/service groups

Task

Why this matters

Define Tier 1, 2, and 3 roles and their associated access levels.

Having pre-established roles for different tiers and teams is a great way to boost accountability and also helps identify training requirements for each tier. For example, knowledgebase training for tier 1 & 2, reporting/analytics for IT manager.

Identify skill groups or support teams.

Establishing accountability for all the support practices in the service desk is important for the tickets to be effectively distributed among the functional individuals and teams. Identifying the responsibilities of groups help execute shift-left strategy.

Identify required email permissions for each role.

For example, define which roles get permissions to include status updates or other ticket information in their emails or to support automated notifications and other integrations with email.

Determine how you will import users into the new tool.

Identify the best way to migrate your users to the new tool whether it be by importing from Active Directory or the old ITSM tool, etc.

2.2.8 Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

Task

Why this matters

Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

Document your workflows and review it to make sure it’s accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

Review the future-state workflows.

This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

Identify opportunities to further automate workflows by leveraging the new tool.

The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

2.2.9 Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

Documentation of key metrics of service desk performance and end-user satisfaction that you wish to improve through the new solution is key to evaluate the success of your implementation.

Task

Why this matters

Define the metrics you will track in the new ITSM tool.

It is critical to ensure that your tool will be able to track necessary metrics on KPIs from the start and that this data is accurate and reliable so that reporting will be relevant and meaningful to the business. Whether you use your own tool for tracking metrics or an external tool, ensure that you can get the internal data you need from the ITSM tool. This may include measures of Productivity (e.g. time to respond, time to resolve), Service (e.g. incident backlog, customer satisfaction), and Proactiveness (e.g. number of knowledgebase articles per week).

Determine what reports you want to generate from data collected through the tool.

It’s not enough to simply set up metrics, you have to actually use the information. Reports should be analyzed regularly and used to manage costs and productivity, improve services, and identify issues. Ensure that your service desk team contributes to the usefulness of reporting by following processes such as creating tickets for every incident and request, categorizing it properly, and closing it after it’s resolved with the proper resolution code.

Identify the information and metrics to include in the ITSM tool's dashboards.

A dashboard helps drive accountability across the team through greater visibility. Decide what will be reported on the dashboard. For example, average time to resolution, number of open tickets with subtotals for each priority, problem ticket aging.

Step 2.3

Plan data migration and integrations

Activities

2.3.1

Create a data migration and archiving plan

2.3.2

Identify and plan required integrations

This step involves the following participants:

  1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
  2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
  3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

Outcomes of this step

  • Decisions made around data migration, integrations, automation, and reporting.
  • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

2.3.1 Create a data migration and archiving plan

Task

Why this matters

Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

Document your workflows and review them to make sure they’re accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

Review the future-state workflows.

This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

Identify opportunities to further automate workflows leveraging the new tool.

The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor-intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

2.3.2 Identify and plan required integrations

Consider and plan for any necessary integrations with other systems.

A major component of the implementation that should be carefully considered throughout is if and how to integrate your ITSM tool with other applications in the environment.

Task

Why this matters

Identify the systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool (e.g. asset discovery tools, reporting systems).

Regardless of whether your solution will be configured and installed on-premises or as a SaaS, you need to consider the underlying technology to determine how you will integrate it with other tools where necessary.

Businesses may need to integrate their ITSM tool with other systems including asset management, network monitoring, and reporting systems to make the organization more efficient.

Determine how data will flow between systems.

Carefully evaluate the purpose of each integration. Clients often want their ITSM tool to be integrated with all of the available data in another application when they only need a subset of that data to be integrated.

Consider not only which systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool but also who the owners of those systems are and which way the data needs to flow.

Plan the development, configuration, and testing of integrations.

As with other aspects of the implementation, configure and test the integrations before going live with the tool.

Step 2.4

Plan the module rollout

Activities

2.4.1

Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

2.4.2

Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

This step involves the following participants:

  1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
  2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
  3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

Outcomes of this step

Identify and plan for additional modules and features to be implemented

2.4.1 Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

The preparation completed in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provide a foundation for additional ITSM modules.

This blueprint starts with the incident management and service request modules as those are typically implemented first since they are the most impactful to day-to-day IT service management.

In addition, the methodology outlined in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provides a model to follow for additional ITSM modules:

  • If you did not already account for additional modules in Phase 1, then repeat the steps in Phase 1 to define scope, stakeholders, and timeline.
  • The Implementation Checklist Tool provides tabs for Change Management and Asset Management to outline the specific details for those topic areas, but they follow the same high-level steps as Phase 2 (e.g. review existing processes, design relevant workflows).
  • If you are planning to implement other modules (e.g. Problem Management), create additional tabs in the Implementation Checklist Tool as needed, using the existing tabs as a base.
The image contains screenshots of the ITSM checklists.

2.4.2 Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in the blueprints below.

Optimize IT Change Management

Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

Implement Hardware Asset Management

Create an SOP and associated process workflows to streamline and standardize hardware asset management.

Implement Software Asset Management

Build on a strong hardware asset management program to also properly track and manage software assets. This includes managing software licensing, finding opportunities to reduce costs, and improving your software audit readiness.

Phase 3

Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

This phase will walk you through the following steps:

  1. Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)
  2. Create a training plan
  3. Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

ITSM Tool Training Schedule

ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

Use the deployment plan template to document the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool.

The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

Download the ITSM Tool Training Schedule

Download the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

Step 3.1

Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

Activities

3.1.1

Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

3.1.2

Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve to accommodate natural resistance

3.1.3

Communicate new processes with business leaders and end users to improve positive customer feedback

This step involves the following participants:

  1. CIO/IT Director
  2. IT Manager
  3. Service Manager

Outcomes of this step

Plan for communicating the change with business executives, service desk agents, and end users.

3.1.1 Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

A common contributing factor for unsuccessful implementation is a lack of communication around training, transitioning, and deploying the new tool.

Common Pitfall:

Organizational communication and change management should have been ongoing and tightly monitored throughout the project. However, cut-over is a time in which critical communication regarding deployment and proper user training can be derailed when last-minute preparations take priority. Not only will general user frustration increase, but unintended process workarounds will emerge, eroding system effectiveness.

Mitigating Actions:

Deliver training for end users that will be engaged in testing. For all other users, deliver training prior to go-live to avoid the risk of training too early (where materials may not be ready or users are likely to forget what was learned). If possible, host quick refresher training a week or two prior to go-live.

Aim to communicate the upcoming go-live. The purpose of communication here is to reiterate expectations, complexities, and ramifications on business going forward. Alleviate performance anxiety by clearly stating that temporary drops in productivity are to be expected and that there will be appropriate assistance throughout the transition period.

Transition: Have the project/program manager remain on the project team for some time after deployment to oversee and assure smooth transition for the organization.

Complete training: Have a clear plan for training those users that were missed in the first round of training as well as a plan for ongoing training for those that require refresher training, for new joiners to your organization, and for any training requirements that result from subsequent upgrades.

3.1.2 Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve

It’s important to communicate the change ahead of the implementation, but also to reinforce that communication after implementation to recover from any resistance that occurs through the implementation itself.

Stages in a typical change curve:

  1. Change is announced. Some people are skeptical and resistant, but others are enthusiastic. Most people are fence sitters; if they trust senior leadership, they will give the benefit of the doubt and expect change to be good.
  2. Positive sentiment declines as implementation approaches. Training and other disruptions take people’s time and energy away from their work. Project setbacks and delays take credibility away from project leaders and seem to validate the efforts of saboteurs and skeptics.
  3. Overall sentiment begins to improve as people adjust and see real progress made. Ideally, early successes or quick wins neutralize saboteurs and convert skeptics. At the very least, people will begin to accept and adapt to new realities.
  4. If the project is successful and communication is reinforced after implementation, sentiment will peak and level out over time as people move on to other projects.

The image contains a diagram of a change curve.

  1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: Tentative support and enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
  2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): People realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or how soon they’ll be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
  3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
  4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: More optimism and support when people begin to see bright spots and early successes.
  5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

3.1.3 Communicate new processes

  1. Communicate with business unit leaders and users:
  • Focus on the benefits for end users to encourage buy-in for the change.
  • Include preliminary instructions with a date for training sessions.
  • Train users:
    • Teach users how to contact the service desk and submit a ticket.
    • Set expectations for IT’s response.
    • Record all your training sessions so it can used for recursive training.
  • Enforce:
    • IT must point users toward the new process, but ad hoc requests should still be expected at first. Deal with these politely but encourage all employees to use the new service desk ticketing process, if applicable.
  • Measure success:
    • Continue to adjust communications if processes aren’t being followed to ensure SLAs can be met and improved.

    “Communicate with your end users in phase 1 to let them know what will be changing, get feedback and buy-in, and inform them that training will be happening, then ensure you train them once the tool is installed. A lot of times we’ll get our tool set up but people don’t know how to use it."

    – Director of ITSM Tools

    Info-Tech Insight

    If there is a new process for ticket input, consider using a reward system for users who submit a ticket through the proper channel ;(e.g. email or self-serve portal) instead of their old method (e.g. phone). However, if a significant cultural change is required, don’t expect it to happen right away.

    Step 3.2

    Create a training plan

    Activities

    3.2.1

    Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk, service groups, IT managers

    3.3.1

    Provide training (tool/portal and process changes)

    3.4.1

    Choose an appropriate training delivery method that will focus on both process and tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Training modules for different users of the tool.
    • Assignment of training modules to users and schedule for completion.

    3.2.1 Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk and IT staff

    Create targeted role-based training programs for your service desk analysts; they care about the portion of the solution they are responsible for, not the functionality that is irrelevant to their job.

    Create and execute a role-based training program by conducting training sessions for targeted groups of users, training them on the functions they require to perform their jobs.

    Use a table like this one to help identify which roles should be trained on which tasks within the ITSM tool.

    The image contains a table as an example of identifying which roles should be trained within the ITSM tool.

    The need for targeted training:

    • IT personnel may challenge the need for training. They may feel they don’t require training on the use of tools or that they don’t have time to dedicate to training when there is so much work to be done.
    • Providing targeted training focused on only the functions of the solution that each tier is responsible for can help to overcome that resistance.
    • Targeted training may include basic training for level 1 technicians and more advanced in-depth training for administrators, power users, or level 2/3 technicians.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Properly trained users promote adoption and improve results. Always keep training materials updated and available. New employees, new software integration, and internal promotions create opportunities for training employees to align the ITSM tool with their roles and responsibilities.

    3.2.2 Provide training

    Training must take place before deployment to ensure that both your service desk agents and end users will use the tool in the way it was intended and improve end-user satisfaction.

    • Implementing a new ITSM tool will likely bring with it at least some degree of organizational and cultural change. It’s important to manage that change through proper training. Your training needs will vary depending on the maturity of the organization and the amount of cultural and process change being implemented.
    • If this is your first ITSM solution with many new changes for staff to take on board, it will be important to dedicate training time not only before deployment but also several months after the initial installation, to allow staff to gain more experience with the new tool and processes and formulate questions they may not think to ask during implementation.
    • A training plan should take into account not only training needs for the implementation project but also any ongoing training requirements that may be required. This may include:
      • Training for new personnel.
      • Training on any changes to the tool.
      • Training on any new processes the tool will support.
    • Better agent training will lead to better performance and improved end-user satisfaction.

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate training hours and first contact resolution.

    The blue graph line charts new-agent training hours against first contact resolution and the orange graph line charts the trendline for the dataset.

    Source: MetricNet, 2012

    3.2.3 Choose an appropriate training delivery method

    Training should include use cases that focus on not only how the tool’s interface works but also how the tool should be used to support process activities.

    1. Training through use cases highlights how the tool will support the user in role-based tasks.
    2. If new processes are being introduced along with the tool, training should cover both in an integrated way.
    3. Team leadership and management commitment ensures that all agents take their training seriously and are prepared for all use cases by the deployment date.

    Trainer-led sessions:

    Self-taught sessions:

    • May take the form of onsite or video training.
    • Vendor may train administrators or managers, who will later train remaining staff.
    • Allows for interaction with the trainer and greater opportunity to ask questions.
    • Difficult for large organizations with many users to be trained.
    • Delivered via computer-based training applications, typically through a web browser.
    • May include voice training sessions combined with exercises and quizzes.
    • More feasible for large, distributed organizations with less flexible schedules.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Ensure that the training demonstrates not only how the tool should be used, but also the benefits it will provide your staff in terms of improved efficiency and productivity. Users who can clearly see the benefits the tool will provide for their daily work will accept the tool more readily and promote it across the organization.

    Step 3.3

    Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Activities

    3.3.1

    Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    3.3.2

    Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    3.3.3

    Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    3.3.4

    Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    3.3.5

    Monitor success metrics defined in Phase 1

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Deployment plan, including a plan for cut-over from the old tool (if applicable), release of the new tool, and post-deployment support and maintenance of the tool.

    3.3.1 Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    If you will have a transitional period during which the current tool will be used alongside the new tool, develop a clear plan for the transition to ensure continued service for your end users.

    • If there will be an interim period during which only some aspects of the new ITSM tool are functional, you will need to determine how the new system and old systems will work together for that period of time. This may require creating interfaces as well as providing user documentation and/or SOPs on how the business processes will operate during the interim period.
    • Cut-over is the period during which the changeover to the new system occurs. Cut-over activities need to be tightly choreographed for a successful deployment. If improperly planned, chaos may erupt when unforeseen issues are encountered during deployment, the deployment may be jeopardized, and the organization may encounter costly interruptions to its daily operations.
    • Many organizations may leave any open tickets in the old tool until they are closed, which requires that tool run alongside the new tool for a transitional period. In this case, it is necessary to create guidelines around how long the open tickets will remain in the old system and ensure there is clear communication around these processes.

    Be prepared for the transition:

    1. Create a robust cut-over plan that includes when the old tool will be decommissioned, what activities are necessary during the cut-over, and what the contingency plan is in case of unforeseen issues.
    2. Plan for and perform mock cut-overs to establish the timeline and dependencies for all steps that need to be performed to successfully complete the changeover. Do this to avoid any surprises or delays during the true cut-over period.
    3. Establish cut-over logistics: Create a schedule for resources to work in shifts to avoid burn-out during cut-over, which can lead to lapses in judgment and easily avoidable mistakes. Allocate dedicated workspaces for cut-over activities, e.g. “war rooms” for the triage of issues.

    3.3.2 Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    Approaches and insights from three case studies

    Case Study #1

    Case Study #2

    Case Study #3

    On day one we started recording all new incidents in the new tool, and everything that was open in the old tool remained open for about one month. At that point we transferred over some open incidents but closed old incidents with the view that if anyone really wanted something done that hadn’t been yet, they could re-submit a ticket.

    – Brett Andrews,

    Managing Director at BAPTISM Consultancy

    It made sense for us to start fresh with the new system. We left all of the old tickets in the old system and started the new system with ticket #1. We only had about a dozen open tickets in the old system so we left them there and ran the two tools side by side until those were closed.

    – CIO, Publishing

    It depends on the client and the size of their service desk as well as the complexity of their data and whether they need their old data for reporting. If there are only a dozen open tickets, they can manually move those over easily, and decide whether they want to migrate their historical data for reporting purposes.

    – Scott Walling,

    Co-Founder at Monitor 24-7 Inc.

    3.3.3 Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    Follow a deployment plan for introducing new processes alongside the new tool to ensure changes to both process and technology are adopted simultaneously.

    If you’re introducing new processes alongside the new tool, it’s important to maintain the link between process and tool. Typically, the processes and tool should be deployed simultaneously unless there is a strong reason not to do so.

    Deployment can be done as a big-bang or phased approach. The decision to employ a phased deployment depends on the number and size of business units the tool will support, as well as the organization’s geography and infrastructure (deployment locations).

    Before deployment, conduct readiness assessments to understand whether:

    The people are ready to accept the new system (have received the proper training and communications and understand how their jobs will change when the switch is flipped).

    The technology is ready (test results are favorable, workarounds and a plan for closure have been identified for any open defects, and the system is performing as expected).

    The data is ready (data for final conversion has been cleansed, and all conversions have been rehearsed).

    The post-deployment support model is ready (infrastructure and technical support is in place, sites are ready, knowledge transfer has been conducted with the support organization, and end users understand procedures for escalation of issues).

    3.3.4 Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    Ensure that strong internal support for the project and tool will continue after deployment.

    The stabilization period after a new software deployment can last between three and nine months, during which there may be continued training needs and fine-tuning of processes. Internal support from project leaders within your organization will be critical to recover from any dip in operational efficiency and deliver the benefits of the tool.

    Consider the following to prepare better for your support plan:

    What are the roles and responsibilities for ongoing tool administration support?

    What level of support will exist to assist service desk staff after deployment?

    How much time will project team resources devote to tackling upcoming issues and assisting with ongoing support?

    Who will be responsible for ongoing training needs and documentation?

    If your organization is spread across multiple locations, what level of support/assistance will be available at each site?

    How will new code releases or system upgrades be managed and communicated?

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Deployment is only the first step in the system lifecycle. Full benefit realization from the tool requires ongoing investment and learning to be sustained. Unless processes and training are updated on an ongoing basis, benefits gained will start to decrease over time. If your service desk efficiency stagnates at the level it was at prior to implementation, the tool has failed to serve its objective.

    Establish ongoing tool maintenance, improvement structures, and processes

    People, processes, and organizations change over time, and your ITSM tool will need to change to meet expectations.

    Develop and execute a plan for the maintenance of the solution and its infrastructure components.

    Include periodic reviews against business needs and operational requirements (e.g. patches, upgrades, and risk and security requirements).

    For maintenance updates, use the change management process and assess how an activity will impact solution design, functionality, and business processes.

    For major changes that result in significant change in current designs, functionality, and/or business processes, follow the development process used for new systems.

    Ensure that maintenance activities are periodically analyzed for abnormal trends indicating underlying quality or performance problems, cost/benefit of major upgrade, or replacement in lieu of maintenance.

    Assign responsibility for ongoing maintenance. Hold regular meetings for the following activities:

    1. Inspect data and reports.
    2. Assess whether you’re meeting SLAs.
    3. Predict any upcoming changes that may impact ticket volume (e.g. a new operating system or security patch).
    4. Create new ticket templates for recurring or upcoming issues.
    5. Create new knowledgebase articles.
    6. Determine whether ticket categories are being used correctly.
    7. Ask team if there are any problems with the tool.

    3.3.5 Monitor success metrics defined in Project Charter

    Revisit your goals for the solution and assess if they are being met by evaluating current metrics. If your goals have not yet been met, re-evaluate how to ensure the tool will deliver value.

    Sample High-Level Goals:

    1. Improved service desk efficiency
    2. Improved end-user satisfaction
    3. Improved self-service options for end users
    4. Improved data and reporting capabilities

    Sample Metric Descriptions

    Baseline Metric

    Goal

    Current Metric

    Increased ticket input through email versus phone

    50% of tickets submitted through phone

    10% of tickets submit through phone

    Reduced ticket volume (through improved self-serve capabilities)

    1,500 tickets per month

    1,200 tickets per month

    Improved first call resolution (through increased efficiency and automation)

    50% FCR

    60% FCR

    Improved ability to meet SLAs (through automated escalations and prioritization)

    5 minutes to log a ticket

    1 minute to log a ticket

    Improved time to produce reports

    3 business days

    1 business day

    Improved end-user satisfaction

    60% satisfied with services

    75% satisfied

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    IT Service Management Selection Guide

    Identify the best-of-breed solution to make the most of your investment and engage the right stakeholders to define success.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Develop a framework to track metrics, clean data, and put your data to use for pre-defined timelines.

    Bibliography

    Adiga, Siddanth. “10 Reasons Why ITSM Implementations Fail.” Could Strategy, 6 May 2015. Web.

    Hastie, Shane, and Stéphane Wojewoda. “Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” InfoQ, 4 October 2015. Web.

    “How to Manage Change in the Implementation of an ITSM Software.” C2, 20 April 2015. Web.

    Lockwood, Meghan. “First Look: Annual ServiceNow Insight and Vision Executive Summary [eBook].” Acorio, 31 October 2019. Web.

    Mainville, David. “7 Steps to a Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” Navvia, 2012. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Preparing for ITSM Tool Implementation.” Joe the IT Guy, 24 June 2015. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” BrightTALK, 9 May 2013. Webcast.

    Rumburg, Jeffrey. “Metric of the Month: Agent Training Hours.” MetricNet, 2012. Web.

    Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}467|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $26,627 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 12 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Center & Facilities Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /data-center-and-facilities-optimization
    • Most organizations are good at procuring IT products, but few are truly good at acquiring infrastructure services.
    • The lack of expertise in acquiring services is problematic – not only is the acquisition process for services more complex, but it also often has high stakes with large deal sizes, long-term contracts, and high switching costs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t treat infrastructure service acquisitions lightly. Not only are failure rates high, but the stakes are high as well.
    • Make sure your RFP strategy aligns with your deal value. Large deals, characterized by high monthly spend, high criticality to the organization, and high switching costs, warrant a more thorough and lengthy planning period and RFP process.
    • Word your RFP carefully and do your due diligence when reviewing SLAs. Make sure your RFP will help you understand what the vendor’s standard offerings are and don’t treat your service level agreements like an open negotiation. The vendor’s standard offerings will be your most reliable options.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow this blueprint to avoid common pitfalls and navigate the tricky business of acquiring infrastructure services.
    • This blueprint will provide step-by-step guidance from assessing your acquisition goals to transitioning your service. Make sure you do the due diligence required to acquire the best service for your needs.

    Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should follow the blueprint to effectively acquire infrastructure services, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop the procurement strategy and process

    Kick off an acquisition by establishing acquisition goals, validating the decision to acquire a service, and structuring an acquisition approach. There are several RFP approaches and strategies – evaluate the options and develop one that aligns with the nature of the acquisition.

    • Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services – Phase 1: Develop the Procurement Strategy and Process

    2. Assess requirements and build the RFP

    A solid RFP is critical to the success of this project. Assess the current and future requirements, examine the characteristics of an effective RFP, and develop an RFP.

    • Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services – Phase 2: Assess Requirements and Build the RFP
    • Infrastructure Service RFP Template

    3. Manage vendor questions and select the vendor

    Manage the activities surrounding vendor questions and score the RFP responses to select the best-fit solution.

    • Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services – Phase 3: Manage Vendor Questions and Select the Vendor
    • Vendor Question Organizer Template
    • Infrastructure Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool

    4. Manage the contract, transition, and vendor

    Perform due diligence in reviewing the SLAs and contract before signing. Plan to transition the service into the environment and manage the vendor on an ongoing basis for a successful partnership.

    • Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services – Phase 4: Manage the Contract, Transition, and Vendor
    • Service Acquisition Planning and Tracking Tool
    • Vendor Management Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Develop the Procurement Strategy and Process

    The Purpose

    Establish procurement goals and success metrics.

    Develop a projected acquisition timeline.

    Establish the RFP approach and strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined acquisition approach and timeline.

    Activities

    1.1 Establish your acquisition goals.

    1.2 Establish your success metrics.

    1.3 Develop a projected acquisition timeline.

    1.4 Establish your RFP process and refine your RFP timeline.

    Outputs

    Acquisition goals

    Success metrics

    Acquisition timeline

    RFP strategy and approach

    2 Gather Service Requirements

    The Purpose

    Gather requirements for services to build into the RFP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gathered requirements.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess the current state.

    2.2 Evaluate service requirements and targets.

    2.3 Assess the gap and validate the service acquisition.

    2.4 Define requirements to input into the RFP.

    Outputs

    Current State Assessment

    Service requirements

    Validation of services being acquired and key processes that may need to change

    Requirements to input into the RFP

    3 Develop the RFP

    The Purpose

    Build the RFP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    RFP development.

    Activities

    3.1 Build the RFP requirement section.

    3.2 Develop the rest of the RFP.

    Outputs

    Service requirements input into the RFP

    Completed RFP

    4 Review RFP Responses and Select a Vendor (Off-Site)

    The Purpose

    Review RFP responses to select the best solution for the acquisition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Vendor selected.

    Activities

    4.1 Manage vendor questions regarding the RFP.

    4.2 Review RFP responses and shortlist the vendors.

    4.3 Conduct additional due diligence on the vendors.

    4.4 Select a vendor.

    Outputs

    Managed RFP activities

    Imperceptive scoring of RFP responses and ranking of vendors

    Additional due diligence and further questions for the vendor

    Selected vendor

    The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}598|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage & Coach
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-coach
    • Helping employees navigate personal and business responsibilities to find solutions that ensure both are taken care of.
    • Reducing potential disruption to business operations through employee absenteeism due to increased care-provider responsibilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Remote work is complicated by children at home with school closures. Implement alternative temporary work arrangements that allow and support employees to balance work and personal obligations.
    • Adjustments to work arrangements and pay may be necessary. Temporary work arrangements while caring for dependents over a longer-term pandemic may require adjustments to the duties carried out, number of hours worked, and adjustments to employee pay.
    • Managing remotely is more than staying in touch by phone. As a leader you will need to provide clear options that provide solutions to your employees to avoid them getting overwhelmed while taking care of the business to ensure there is a business long term.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop a policy that provides parameters around mutually agreed adjustments to performance levels while balancing dependent care with work during a pandemic.
    • Take care of the business through clear guidelines on compensation while taking care of the health and wellness of your people.
    • Develop detailed work-from-home plans that lessen disruption to your work while taking care of children or aged parents.

    The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday Research & Tools

    Start here. Read The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday

    Read our recommendations and follow the steps to develop a policy that will help your employees work productively while managing care-provider responsibilities at home.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • The Essential COVID-19 Childcare Policy for Every Organization, Yesterday Storyboard
    • Pandemic Dependent Care Policy
    • COVID-19 Dependent Care Policy Manager Action Toolkit
    • COVID-19 Dependent Care Policy Employee Guide
    • Dependent-Flextime Agreement Template
    • Workforce Planning Tool
    • Nine Ways to Support Working Caregivers Today
    • Employee Resource Group (ERG) Charter Template
    [infographic]

    Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}301|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management

    The rapid technological evolution in platforms, processes, and applications is leading to gaps in the skills needed to manage and use data. Some common obstacles that could prevent you from identifying and building the data & analytics skills your organization needs include:

    • Lack of resources and knowledge to secure professionals with the right mix of D&A skills and right level of experience/skills
    • Lack of well-formulated and robust data strategy
    • Underestimation of the value of soft skills

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Skill deficiency is frequently stated as a roadblock to realizing corporate goals for data & analytics. Soft skills and technical skills are complementary, and data & analytics teams need a combination of both to perform effectively. Identify the essential skills and the gap with current skills that fit your organization’s data strategy to ensure the right skills are available at the right time and minimize pertinent risks.

    Impact and Result

    Follow Info-Tech's advice on the roles and skills needed to support your data & analytics strategic growth objectives and how to execute an actionable plan:

    • Define the skills required for each essential data & analytics role.
    • Identify the roles and skills gaps in alignment with your current data strategy.
    • Establish an action plan to close the gaps and reduce risks.

    Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs Deck – Use this research to assist you in identifying and building roles and skills that are aligned with the organization’s data strategy.

    To generate business value from data, data leaders must first understand what skills are required to achieve these goals, identify the current skill gaps, and then develop skills development programs to enhance the relevant skills. Use Info-Tech's approach to identify and fill skill gaps to ensure you have the right skills at the right time.

    • Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs Storyboard

    2. Data & Analytics Skills Assessment and Planning Tool – Use this tool to help you identify the current and required level of competency for data & analytics skills, analyze gaps, and create an actionable plan.

    Start with skills and roles identified as the highest priority through a high-level maturity assessment. From there, use this tool to determine whether the organization’s data & analytics team has the key role, the right combination of skill sets, and the right level competency for each skill. Create an actionable plan to develop skills and fill gaps.

    • Data & Analytics Skills Assessment and Planning Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs

    Blending soft skills with deep technical expertise is essential for building successful data & analytics teams.

    Analyst Perspective

    Blending soft skills with deep technical expertise is essential for building successful data & analytics teams.

    In today's changing environment, data & analytics (D&A) teams have become an essential component, and it is critical for organizations to understand the skill and talent makeup of their D&A workforce. Chief data & analytics officers (CDAOs) or other equivalent data leaders can train current data employees or hire proven talent and quickly address skills gaps.

    While developing technical skills is critical, soft skills are often left underdeveloped, yet lack of such skills is most likely why the data team would face difficulty moving beyond managing technology and into delivering business value.

    Follow Info-Tech's methodology to identify and address skills gaps in today's data workplace. Align D&A skills with your organization's data strategy to ensure that you always have the right skills at the right time.

    Ruyi Sun
    Research Specialist,
    Data & Analytics, and Enterprise Architecture
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The rapid technological evolution in platforms, processes, and applications is leading to gaps in the skills needed to manage and use data. Some critical challenges organizations with skills deficiencies might face include:

    • Time loss due to delayed progress and reworking of initiatives
    • Poor implementation quality and low productivity
    • Reduced credibility of data leader and data initiatives

    Common Obstacles

    Some common obstacles that could prevent you from identifying and building the data and analytics (D&A) skills your organization needs are:

    • Lack of resources and knowledge to secure professionals with the right mixed D&A skills and the right experience/skill level
    • Lack of well-formulated and robust data strategy
    • Neglecting the value of soft skills and placing all your attention on technical skills

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Follow Info-Tech's guidance on the roles and skills required to support your D&A strategic growth objectives and how to execute an actionable plan:

    • Define skills required for each essential data and analytics role
    • Identify roles and skills gap in alignment with your current data strategy
    • Establish action plan to close the gaps and reduce risks

    Info-Tech Insight

    Skills gaps are a frequently named obstacle to realizing corporate goals for D&A. Soft skills and technical skills are complementary, and a D&A team needs both to perform effectively. Identify the essential skills and the gap with current skills required by your organization's data strategy to ensure the right skill is available at the right time and to minimize applicable risks.

    The rapidly changing environment is impacting the nature of work

    Scarcity of data & analytics (D&A) skills

    • Data is one of the most valuable organizational assets, and regardless of your industry, data remains the key to informed decision making. More than 75% of businesses are looking to adopt technologies like big data, cloud computing, and artificial intelligence (AI) in the next five years (World Economic Forum, 2023). As organizations pivot in response to industry disruptions and technological advancements, the nature of work is changing, and the demand for data expertise has grown.
    • Despite an increasing need for data expertise, organizations still have trouble securing D&A roles due to inadequate upskilling programs, limited understanding of the skills required, and more (EY, 2022). Notably, scarce D&A skills have been critical. More workers will need at least a base level of D&A skills to adequately perform their jobs.

    Stock image of a data storage center.

    Organizations struggle to remain competitive when skills gaps aren't addressed

    Organizations identify skills gaps as the key barriers preventing industry transformation:

    60% of organizations identify skills gaps as the key barriers preventing business transformation (World Economic Forum, 2023)

    43% of respondents agree the business area with the greatest need to address potential skills gaps is data analytics (McKinsey & Company, 2020)

    Most organizations are not ready to address potential role disruptions and close skills gaps:

    87% of surveyed companies say they currently experience skills gaps or expect them within a few years (McKinsey & Company, 2020)

    28% say their organizations make effective decisions on how to close skills gaps (McKinsey & Company, 2020)

    Neglecting soft skills development impedes CDOs/CDAOs from delivering value

    According to BearingPoint's CDO survey, cultural challenges and limited data literacy are the main roadblocks to a CDO's success. To drill further into the problem and understand the root causes of the two main challenges, conduct a root cause analysis (RCA) using the Five Whys technique.

    Bar Chart of 'Major Roadblocks to the Success of a CDO' with 'Limited data literacy' at the top.
    (Source: BearingPoint, 2020)

    Five Whys RCA

    Problem: Poor data literacy is the top challenge CDOs face when increasing the value of D&A. Why?

    • People that lack data literacy find it difficult to embrace and trust the organization's data insights. Why?
    • Data workers and the business team don't speak the same language. Why?
    • No shared data definition or knowledge is established. Over-extensive data facts do not drive business outcomes. Why?
    • Leaders fail to understand that data literacy is more than technical training, it is about encompassing all aspects of business, IT, and data. Why?
    • A lack of leadership skills prevents leaders from recognizing these connections and the data team needing to develop soft skills.

    Problem: Cultural challenge is one of the biggest obstacles to a CDO's success. Why?

    • Decisions are made from gut instinct instead of data-driven insights, thus affecting business performance. Why?
    • People within the organization do not believe that data drives operational excellence, so they resist change. Why?
    • Companies overestimate the organization's level of data literacy and data maturity. Why?
    • A lack of strategies in change management, continuous improvement & data literacy for data initiatives. Why?
    • A lack of expertise/leaders possessing these relevant soft skills (e.g. change management, etc.).

    As organizations strive to become more data-driven, most conversations around D&A emphasize hard skills. Soft skills like leadership and change management are equally crucial, and deficits there could be the root cause of the data team's inability to demonstrate improved business performance.

    Data cannot be fully leveraged without a cohesive data strategy

    Business strategy and data strategy are no longer separate entities.

    • For any chief data & analytics officer (CDAO) or equivalent data leader, a robust and comprehensive data strategy is the number one tool for generating measurable business value from data. Data leaders should understand what skills are required to achieve these goals, consider the current skills gap, and build development programs to help employees improve those skills.
    • Begin your skills development programs by ensuring you have a data strategy plan prepared. A data strategy should never be formulated independently from the business. Organizations with high data maturity will align such efforts to the needs of the business, making data a major part of the business strategy to achieve data centricity.
    • Refer to Info-Tech's Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy blueprint to ensure data can be leveraged as a strategic asset of the organization.

    Diagram of 'Data Strategy Maturity' with two arrangements of 'Data Strategy' and 'Business Strategy'. One is 'Aligned', the other is 'Data Centric.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    The process of achieving data centricity requires alignment between the data and business teams, and that requires soft skills.

    Follow Info-Tech's methodology to identify the roles and skills needed to execute a data strategy

    1. Define Key Roles and Skills

      Digital Leadership Skills, Soft Skills, Technical Skills
      Key Output
      • Defined essential competencies, responsibilities for some common data roles
    2. Uncover the Skills Gap

      Data Strategy Alignment, High-Level Data Maturity Assessment, Skills Gap Analysis
      Key Output
      • Data roles and skills aligned with your current data strategy
      • Identified current and target state of data skill sets
    3. Build an Actionable Plan

      Initiative Priority, Skills Growth Feasibility, Hiring Feasibility
      Key Output
      • Identified action plan to address the risk of data skills deficiency

    Info-Tech Insight

    Skills gaps are a frequently named obstacle to realizing corporate goals for D&A. Soft skills and technical skills are complementary, and a D&A team needs both to perform effectively. Identify the essential skills and the gap with current skills that fit your organization's data strategy to ensure the right skill is available at the right time and to minimize applicable risks.

    Research benefits

    Member benefits

    • Reduce time spent defining the target state of skill sets.
    • Gain ability to reassess the feasibility of execution on your data strategy, including resources and timeline.
    • Increase confidence in the data leader's ability to implement a successful skills development program that is aligned with the organization's data strategy, which correlates directly to successful business outcomes.

    Business benefits

    • Reduce time and cost spent hiring key data roles.
    • Increase chance of retaining high-quality data professionals.
    • Reduce time loss for delayed progress and rework of initiatives.
    • Optimize quality of data initiative implementation.
    • Improve data team productivity.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Skills gaps are a frequently named obstacle to realizing corporate goals for D&A. Soft skills and technical skills are complementary, and a D&A team needs both to perform effectively. Identify the essential skills and the gap with current skills that fit your organization's data strategy to ensure the right skill is available at the right time and to minimize applicable risks.

    Phase 1 insight

    Technological advancements will inevitably require new technical skills, but the most in-demand skills go beyond mastering the newest technologies. Soft skills are essential to data roles as the global workforce navigates the changes of the last few years.

    Phase 2 insight

    Understanding and knowing your organization's data maturity level is a prerequisite to assessing your current skill and determining where you must align in the future.

    Phase 3 insight

    One of the misconceptions that organizations have includes viewing skills development as a one-time effort. This leads to underinvestment in data team skills, risk of falling behind on technological changes, and failure to connect with business partners. Employees must learn to continuously adapt to the changing circumstances of D&A.

    While the program must be agile and dynamic to reflect technological improvements in the development of technical skills, the program should always be anchored in soft skills because data management is fundamentally about interaction, collaboration, and people.

    Tactical insight

    Seeking input and support across your business units can align stakeholders to focus on the right data analytics skills and build a data learning culture.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is four to six calls over the course of two to three months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Call #1: Understand common data & analytics roles and skills, and your specific objectives and challenges. Call #2: Assess the current data maturity level and competency of skills set. Identify the skills gap. Call #3: Identify the relationship between current initiatives and capabilities. Initialize the corresponding roadmap for the data skills development program.

    Call #4: (follow-up call) Touching base to follow through and ensure that benefits have received.

    Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs

    Phase 1

    Define Key Roles and Skills

    Define Key Roles and Skills Uncover the Skills Gap Build an Actionable Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 1.1 Review D&A Skill & Role List in Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data leads

    Key resources for your data strategy: People

    Having the right role is a key component for executing effective data strategy.

    D&A Common Roles

    • Data Steward
    • Data Custodian
    • Data Owner
    • Data Architect
    • Data Modeler
    • Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Machine Learning (ML) Specialist
    • Database Administrator
    • Data Quality Analyst
    • Security Architect
    • Information Architect
    • System Architect
    • MDM Administrator
    • Data Scientist
    • Data Engineer
    • Data Pipeline Developer
    • Data Integration Architect
    • Business Intelligence Architect
    • Business Intelligence Analyst
    • ML Validator

    AI and ML Specialist is projected to be the fastest-growing occupation in the next five years (World Economic Forum, 2023).

    While tech roles take an average of 62 days to fill, hiring a senior data scientist takes 70.5 days (Workable, 2019). Start your recruitment cycle early for this demand.

    D&A Leader Roles

    • Chief Data Officer (CDO)/Chief Data & Analytics Officer (CDAO)
    • Data Governance Lead
    • Data Management Lead
    • Information Security Lead
    • Data Quality Lead
    • Data Product Manager
    • Master Data Manager
    • Content and Record Manager
    • Data Literacy Manager

    CDOs act as impactful change agents ensuring that the organization's data management disciplines are running effectively and meeting the business' data needs. Only 12.0% of the surveyed organizations reported having a CDO as of 2012. By 2022, this percentage had increased to 73.7% (NewVantage Partners, 2022).

    Sixty-five percent of respondents said lack of data literacy is the top challenge CDOs face today (BearingPoint, 2020). It has become imperative for companies to consider building a data literacy program which will require a dedicated data literacy team.

    Key resources for your data strategy: Skill sets

    Distinguish between the three skills categories.

    • Soft Skills

      Soft skills are described as power skills regarding how you work, such as teamwork, communication, and critical thinking.
    • Digital Leadership Skills

      Not everyone working in the D&A field is expected to perform advanced analytical tasks. To thrive in increasingly data-rich environments, however, every data worker, including leaders, requires a basic technological understanding and skill sets such as AI, data literacy, and data ethics. These are digital leadership skills.
    • Technical Skills

      Technical skills are the practical skills required to complete a specific task. For example, data scientists and data engineers require programming skills to handle and manage vast amounts of data.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Technological advancements will inevitably require new technical skills, but the most in-demand skills go beyond mastering the newest technologies. Soft skills are essential to data roles as the global workforce navigates the changes of the last few years.

    Soft skills aren't just nice to have

    They're a top asset in today's data workplace.

    Leadership

    • Data leaders with strong leadership abilities can influence the organization's strategic execution and direction, support data initiatives, and foster data cultures. Organizations that build and develop leadership potential are 4.2 times more likely to financially outperform those that do not (Udemy, 2022).

    Business Acumen

    • The process of deriving conclusions and insights from data is ultimately utilized to improve business decisions and solve business problems. Possessing business acumen helps provide the business context and perspectives for work within data analytics fields.

    Critical Thinking

    • Critical thinking allows data leaders at every level to objectively assess a problem before making judgment, consider all perspectives and opinions, and be able to make decisions knowing the ultimate impact on results.

    Analytical Thinking

    • Analytical thinking remains the most important skill for workers in 2023 (World Economic Forum, 2023). Data analytics expertise relies heavily on analytical thinking, which is the process of breaking information into basic principles to analyze and understand the logic and concepts.

    Design Thinking & Empathy

    • Design thinking skills help D&A professionals understand and prioritize the end-user experience to better inform results and assist the decision-making process. Organizations with high proficiency in design thinking are twice as likely to be high performing (McLean & Company, 2022).

    Learning Focused

    • The business and data analytics fields continue to evolve rapidly, and the skills, especially technical skills, must keep pace. Learning-focused D&A professionals continuously learn, expanding their knowledge and enhancing their techniques.

    Change Management

    • Change management is essential, especially for data leaders who act as change agents developing and enabling processes and who assist others with adjusting to changes with cultural and procedural factors. Organizations with high change management proficiency are 2.2 times more likely to be high performing (McLean & Company, 2022).

    Resilience

    • Being motivated and adaptable is essential when facing challenges and high-pressure situations. Organizations highly proficient in resilience are 1.8 times more likely to be high performing (McLean & Company, 2022).

    Managing Risk & Governance Mindset

    • Risk management ability is not limited to highly regulated institutions. All data workers must understand risks from the larger organizational perspective and have a holistic governance mindset while achieving their individual goals and making decisions.

    Continuous Improvement

    • Continuously collecting feedback and reflecting on it is the foundation of continuous improvement. To uncover and track the lessons learned and treat them as opportunities, data workers must be able to discover patterns and connections.

    Teamwork & Collaboration

    • Value delivery in a data-centric environment is a team effort, requiring collaboration across the business, IT, and data teams. D&A experts with strong collaborative abilities can successfully work with other teams to achieve shared objectives.

    Communication & Active Listening

    • This includes communicating with relevant stakeholders about timelines and expectations of data projects and associated technology and challenges, paying attention to data consumers, understanding their requirements and needs, and other areas of interest to the organization.

    Technical skills for everyday excellence

    Digital Leadership Skills

    • Technological Literacy
    • Data and AI Literacy
    • Cloud Computing Literacy
    • Data Ethics
    • Data Translation

    Data & Analytics Technical Competencies

    • Data Mining
    • Programming Languages (Python, SQL, R, etc.)
    • Data Analysis and Statistics
    • Computational and Algorithmic Thinking
    • AI/ML Skills (Deep Learning, Computer Vision, Natural Language Processing, etc.)
    • Data Visualization and Storytelling
    • Data Profiling
    • Data Modeling & Design
    • Data Pipeline (ETL/ELT) Design & Management
    • Database Design & Management
    • Data Warehouse/Data Lake Design & Management

    1.1 Review D&A Skill & Role List in the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    Sample of Tab 2 in the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool.

    Tab 2. Skill & Role List

    Objective: Review the library of skills and roles and customize them as needed to align with your organization's language and specific needs.

    Download the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs

    Phase 2

    Uncover the Skills Gap

    Define Key Roles and Skills Uncover the Skills Gap Build an Actionable Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 2.1 High-level assessment of your present data management maturity
    • 2.2 Interview business and data leaders to clarify current skills availability
    • 2.3 Use the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool to Identify your skills gaps

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data leads
    • Business leads and subject matter experts (SMEs)
    • Key business stakeholders

    Identify skills gaps across the organization

    Gaps are not just about assigning people to a role, but whether people have the right skill sets to carry out tasks.

    • Now that you have identified the essential skills and roles in the data workplace, move to Phase 2. This phase will help you understand the required level of competency, assess where the organization stands today, and identify gaps to close.
    • Using the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool, start with areas that are given the highest priority through a high-level maturity assessment. From there, three levels of gaps will be found: whether people are assigned to a particular position, the right combination of D&A skill sets, and the right competency level for each skill.
    • Lack of talent assigned to a position

    • Lack of the right combination of D&A skill sets

    • Lack of appropriate competency level

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding your organization's data maturity level is a prerequisite to assessing the skill sets you have today and determining where you need to align in the future.

    2.1 High-level assessment of your present data management maturity

    Identifying and fixing skills gaps takes time, money, and effort. Focus on bridging the gap in high-priority areas.

    Input: Current state capabilities, Use cases (if applicable), Data culture diagnostic survey results (if applicable)
    Output: High-level maturity assessment, Prioritized list of data management focused area
    Materials: Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool (optional), Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool
    Participants: Data leads, Business leads and subject matter experts (SMEs), Key business stakeholders

    Objectives:

    Prioritize these skills and roles based on your current maturity levels and what you intend to accomplish with your data strategy.

    Steps:

    1. (Optional Step) Refer to the Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy blueprint. You can assess your data maturity level using the following frameworks and methods:
      • Review current data strategy and craft use cases that represent high-value areas that must be addressed for their teams or functions.
      • Use the data culture assessment survey to determine your organization's data maturity level.
    2. (Optional Step) Refer to the Create a Data Management Roadmap blueprint and Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool to dive deep into understanding and assessing capabilities and maturity levels of your organization's data management enablers and understanding your priority areas and specific gaps.
    3. If you have completed Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool, fill out your maturity level scores for each of the data management practices within it - Tab 3 (Current-State Assessment). Skip Tab 4 (High-Level Maturity Assessment).
    4. If you have not yet completed Data Management Assessment and Planning Tool, skip Tab 3 and continue with Tab 4. Assign values 1 to 3 for each capability and enabler.
    5. You can examine your current-state data maturity from a high level in terms of low/mid/high maturity using either Tabs 3 or 4.
    6. Suggested focus areas along the data journey:
      • Low Maturity = Data Strategy, Data Governance, Data Architecture
      • Mid Maturity = Data Literacy, Information Management, BI and Reporting, Data Operations Management, Data Quality Management, Data Security/Risk Management
      • High Maturity = MDM, Data Integration, Data Product and Services, Advanced Analytics (ML & AI Management).

    Download the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    2.2 Interview business and data leaders to clarify current skills availability

    1-2 hours per interview

    Input: Sample questions targeting the activities, challenges, and opportunities of each unit
    Output: Identified skills availability
    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool
    Participants: Data leads, Business leads and subject matter experts (SMEs), Key business stakeholders

    Instruction:

    1. Conduct a deep-dive interview with each key data initiative stakeholder (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT/Business department leads) who can provide insights on the skill sets of their team members, soliciting feedback from business and data leaders about skills and observations of employees as they perform their daily tasks.
    2. Populate a current level of competency for each skill in the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool in Tabs 5 and 6. Having determined your data maturity level, start with the prioritized data management components (e.g. if your organization sits at low data maturity level, start with identifying relevant positions and skills under data governance, data architecture, and data architecture elements).
    3. More detailed instructions on how to utilize the workbook are at the next activity.

    Key interview questions that will help you :

    1. Do you have personnel assigned to the role? What are their primary activities? Do the personnel possess the soft and technical skills noted in the workbook? Are you satisfied with their performance? How would you evaluate their degree of competency on a scale of "vital, important, nice to have, or none"? The following aspects should be considered when making the evaluation:
      • Key Performance Indicators (KPIs): Business unit data will show where the organization is challenged and will help identify potential areas for development.
      • Project Management Office: Look at successful and failed projects for trends in team traits and competencies.
      • Performance Reviews: Look for common themes where employees excel or need to improve.
      • Focus Groups: Speak with a cross section of employees to understand their challenges.
    2. What technology is currently used? Are there requirements for new technology to be bought and/or optimized in the future? Will the workforce need to increase their skill level to carry out these activities with the new technology in place?

    Download the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    2.3 Use the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool to identify skills gaps

    1-3 hours — Not everyone needs the same skill levels.

    Input: Current skills competency, Stakeholder interview results and findings
    Output: Gap identification and analysis
    Materials: Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool
    Participants: Data leads

    Instruction:

    1. Select your organization's data maturity level in terms of Low/Mid/High in cell A6 for both Tab 5 (Soft Skills Assessment) and Tab 6 (Technical Skills Assessment) to reduce irrelevant rows.
    2. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owners, SMEs, and relevant IT custodians) to determine whether the data role exists in the organization. If yes, assign a current-state value from “vital, important, nice to have, or none” for each skill in the assessment tool. Info-Tech has specified the desired/required target state of each skill set.
    3. Once you've assigned the current-state values, the tool will automatically determine whether there is a gap in skill set.

    Download the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    Identify and Build the Data & Analytics Skills Your Organization Needs

    Phase 3

    Build an Actionable Plan

    Define Key Roles and Skills Uncover the Skills Gap Build an Actionable Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.1 Use the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool to build your actionable roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data leads
    • Business leads and subject matter experts (SMEs)
    • Key business stakeholders

    Determine next steps and decision points

    There are three types of internal skills development strategies

    • There are three types of internal skills development strategies organizations can use to ensure the right people with the right abilities are placed in the right roles: reskill, upskill, and new hire.
    1. Reskill

      Reskilling involves learning new skills for a different or newly defined position.
    2. Upskill

      Upskilling involves building a higher level of competency in skills to improve the worker's performance in their current role.
    3. New hire

      New hire involves hiring workers who have the essential skills to fill the open position.

    Info-Tech Insight

    One of the misconceptions that organizations have includes viewing skills development as a one-time effort. This leads to underinvestment in data team skills, risk of falling behind on technological changes, and failure to connect with business partners. Employees must learn to continuously adapt to the changing circumstances of D&A. While the program must be agile and dynamic to reflect technological improvements in the development of technical skills, the program should always be anchored in soft skills because data management is fundamentally about interaction, collaboration, and people.

    How to determine when to upskill, reskill, or hire to meet your skills needs

    Reskill

    Reskilling often indicates a change in someone's career path, so this decision requires a goal aligned with both individuals and the organization to establish a mutually beneficial situation.

    When making reskilling decisions, organizations should also consider the relevance of the skill for different positions. For example, data administrators and data architects have similar skill sets, so reskilling is appropriate for these employees.

    Upskill

    Upskilling tends to focus more on the soft skills necessary for more advanced positions. A data strategy lead, for example, might require design thinking training, which enables leaders to think from different perspectives.

    Skill growth feasibility must also be considered. Some technical skills, particularly those involving cutting-edge technologies, require continual learning to maintain operational excellence. For example, a data scientist may require AI/ML skills training to incorporate use of modern automation technology.

    New Hire

    For open positions and skills that are too resource-intensive to reskill or upskill, it makes sense to recruit new employees. Consider, however, time and cost feasibility of hiring. Some positions (e.g. senior data scientist) take longer to fill. To minimize risks, coordinate with your HR department and begin recruiting early.

    Data & Analytics skills training

    There are various learning methods that help employees develop priority competencies to achieve reskilling or upskilling.

    Specific training

    The data team can collaborate with the human resources department to plan and develop internal training sessions aimed at specific skill sets.

    This can also be accomplished through external training providers such as DCAM, which provides training courses on data management and analytics topics.

    Formal education program

    Colleges and universities can equip students with data analytics skills through formal education programs such as MBAs and undergraduate or graduate degrees in Data Science, Machine Learning, and other fields.

    Certification

    Investing time and effort to obtain certifications in the data & analytics field allows data workers to develop skills and gain recognition for continuous learning and self-improvement.

    AWS Data Analytics and Tableau Data Scientist Certification are two popular data analytics certifications.

    Online learning from general providers

    Some companies offer online courses in various subjects. Coursera and DataCamp are two examples of popular providers.

    Partner with a vendor

    The organization can partner with a vendor who brings skills and talents that are not yet available within the organization. Employees can benefit from the collaboration process by familiarizing themselves with the project and enhancing their own skills.

    Support from within your business

    The data team can engage with other departments that have previously done skills development programs, such as Finance and Change & Communications, who may have relevant resources to help you improve your business acumen and change management skills.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Seeking input and support across your business units can align stakeholders to focus on the right data analytics skills and build a data learning culture.

    Data & Analytics skills reinforcement

    Don't assume learners will immediately comprehend new knowledge. Use different methods and approaches to reinforce their development.

    Innovation Space

    • Skills development is not a one-time event, but a continuous process during which innovation should be encouraged. A key aspect of being innovative is having a “fail fast” mentality, which means collecting feedback, recognizing when something isn't working, encouraging experimentation, and taking a different approach with the goal of achieving operational excellence.
    • Human-centered design (HCD) also yields innovative outcomes with a people-first focus. When creating skills development programs for various target groups, organizations should integrate a human-centered approach.

    Commercial Lens

    • Exposing people to a commercial way of thinking can add long-term value by educating people to act in the business' best interest and raising awareness of what other business functions contribute. This includes concepts such as project management, return on investment (ROI), budget alignment, etc.

    Checklists/Rubrics

    • Employees should record what they learn so they can take the time to reflect. A checklist is an effective technique for establishing objectives, allowing measurement of skills development and progress.

    Buddy Program

    • A buddy program helps employees gain and reinforce knowledge and skills they have learned through mutual support and information exchange.

    Align HR programs to support skills integration and talent recruitment

    With a clear idea of skills needs and an executable strategy for training and reinforcing of concepts, HR programs and processes can help the data team foster a learning environment and establish a recruitment plan. The links below will direct you to blueprints produced by McLean & Company, a division of Info-Tech Research Group.

    Workforce Planning

    When integrating the skills of the future into workforce planning, determine the best approach for addressing the identified talent gaps – whether to build, buy, or borrow.

    Integrate the future skills identified into the organization's workforce plan.

    Talent Acquisition

    In cases where employee development is not feasible, the organization's talent acquisition strategy must focus more on buying or borrowing talent. This will impact the TA process. For example, sourcing and screening must be updated to reflect new approaches and skills.

    If you have a talent acquisition strategy, assess how to integrate the new roles/skills into recruiting.

    Competencies/Succession Planning

    Review current organizational core competencies to determine if they need to be modified. New skills will help inform critical roles and competencies required in succession talent pools.

    If no competency framework exists, use McLean & Company's Develop a Comprehensive Competency Framework blueprint.

    Compensation

    Evaluate modified and new roles against the organization's compensation structure. Adjust them as necessary. Look at market data to understand compensation for new roles and skills.

    Reassess your base pay structure according to market data for new roles and skills.

    Learning and Development

    L&D plays a huge role in closing the skills gap. Build L&D opportunities to support development of new skills in employees.

    Design an Impactful Employee Development Program to build the skills employees need in the future.

    3.1 Use the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool to build an actionable plan

    1-3 hours

    Input: Roles and skills required, Key decision points
    Output: Actionable plan
    Materials: Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool
    Participants: Data leads, Business leads and subject matter experts (SMEs), Key business stakeholders

    Instruction:

    1. On Tab 7 (Next Steps & Decision Points), you will find a list of tasks that correspond to roles that where there is a skills gap.
    2. Customize this list of tasks initiatives according to your needs.
    3. The Gantt chart, which will be generated automatically after assigning start and finish dates for each activity, can be used to structure your plan and guarantee that all the main components of skills development are addressed.

    Sample of Tab 7 in the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool.

    Download the Data & Analytics Assessment and Planning Tool

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of the Create a Data Management Roadmap blueprint.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    • This blueprint will help you design a data management practice that will allow your organization to use data as a strategic enabler.

    Stock image of a person looking at data dashboards on a tablet.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    • Put a strategy in place to ensure data is available, accessible, well-integrated, secured, of acceptable quality, and suitably visualized to fuel organization-wide decision making. Start treating data as strategic and corporate asset.

    Sample of the Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy blueprint.

    Foster Data-Driven Culture With Data Literacy

    • By thoughtfully designing a data literacy training program appropriate to the audience's experience, maturity level, and learning style, organizations build a data-driven and engaged culture that helps them unlock their data's full potential and outperform other organizations.

    Research Authors and Contributors

    Authors:

    Name Position Company
    Ruyi Sun Research Specialist Info-Tech Research Group

    Contributors:

    Name Position Company
    Steve Wills Practice Lead Info-Tech Research Group
    Andrea Malick Advisory Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Annabel Lui Principal Advisory Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Sherwick Min Technical Counselor Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    2022 Workplace Learning Trends Report.” Udemy, 2022. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Agrawal, Sapana, et al. “Beyond hiring: How companies are reskilling to address talent gaps.” McKinsey & Company, 12 Feb. 2020. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Bika, Nikoletta. “Key hiring metrics: Useful benchmarks for tech roles.” Workable, 2019. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Chroust, Tomas. “Chief Data Officer – Leaders of data-driven enterprises.” BearingPoint, 2020. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    “Data and AI Leadership Executive Survey 2022.” NewVantage Partners, Jan 2022. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Dondi, Marco, et al. “Defining the skills citizens will need in the future world of work.” McKinsey & Company, June 2021. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Futschek, Gerald. “Algorithmic Thinking: The Key for Understanding Computer Science.” Lecture Notes in Computer Science, vol. 4226, 2006.

    Howard, William, et al. “2022 HR Trends Report.” McLean & Company, 2022. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    “Future of Jobs Report 2023.” World Economic Forum, May 2023. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Knight, Michelle. “What is Data Ethics?” Dataversity, 19 May 2021. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Little, Jim, et al. “The CIO Imperative: Is your technology moving fast enough to realize your ambitions?” EY, 22 Apr. 2022. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    “MDM Roles and Responsibilities.” Profisee, April 2019. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    “Reskilling and Upskilling: A Strategic Response to Changing Skill Demands.” TalentGuard, Oct. 2019. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Southekal, Prashanth. “The Five C's: Soft Skills That Every Data Analytics Professional Should Have.” Forbes, 17 Oct. 2022. Accessed 20 June 2023.

    Domino – Maintain, Commit to, or Vacate?

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}113|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    If you have a Domino/Notes footprint that is embedded within your business units and business processes and is taxing your support organization, you may have met resistance from the business and been asked to help the organization migrate away from the Lotus Notes platform. The Lotus Notes platform was long used by technology and businesses and a multipurpose solution that, over the years, became embedded within core business applications and processes.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    For organizations that are struggling to understand their options for the Domino platform, the depth of business process usage is typically the biggest operational obstacle. Migrating off the Domino platform is a difficult option for most organizations due to business process and application complexity. In addition, migrating clients have to resolve the challenges with more than one replaceable solution.

    Impact and Result

    The most common tactic is for the organization to better understand their Domino migration options and adopt an application rationalization strategy for the Domino applications entrenched within the business. Options include retiring, replatforming, migrating, or staying with your Domino platform.

    Domino – Maintain, Commit to, or Vacate? Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Domino – Maintain, Commit to, or Vacate? – A brief deck that outlines key migration options for HCL Domino platforms.

    This blueprint will help you assess the fit, purpose, and price of Domino options; develop strategies for overcoming potential challenges; and determine the future of Domino for your organization.

    • Domino – Maintain, Commit to, or Vacate? Storyboard

    2. Application Rationalization Tool – A tool to understand your business-developed applications, their importance to business process, and the potential underlying financial impact.

    Use this tool to input the outcomes of your various application assessments.

    • Application Rationalization Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Domino – Maintain, Commit to, or Vacate?

    Lotus Domino still lives, and you have options for migrating away from or remaining with the platform.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    “HCL announced that they have somewhere in the region of 15,000 Domino customers worldwide, and also claimed that that number is growing. They also said that 42% of their customers are already on v11 of Domino, and that in the year or so since that version was released, it’s been downloaded 78,000 times. All of which suggests that the Domino platform is, in fact, alive and well.”
    – Nigel Cheshire in Team Studio

    Your Challenge

    You have a Domino/Notes footprint embedded within your business units and business processes. This is taxing your support organization; you are meeting resistance from the business, and you are now asked to help the organization migrate away from the Lotus Notes platform. The Lotus Notes platform was long used by technology and businesses as a multipurpose solution that, over the years, became embedded within core business applications and processes.

    Common Obstacles

    For organizations that are struggling to understand their options for the Domino platform, the depth of business process usage is typically the biggest operational obstacle. Migrating off the Domino platform is a difficult option for most organizations due to business process and application complexity. In addition, migrating clients have to resolve the challenges with more than one replaceable solution.

    Info-Tech Approach

    The most common tactic is for the organization to better understand their Domino migration options and adopt an application rationalization strategy for the Domino applications entrenched within the business. Options include retiring, replatforming, migrating, or staying with your Domino platform.

    Review

    Is “Lotus” Domino still alive?

    Problem statement

    The number of member engagements with customers regarding the Domino platform has, as you might imagine, dwindled in the past couple of years. While many members have exited the platform, there are still many members and organizations that have entered a long exit program, but with how embedded Domino is in business processes, the migration has slowed and been met with resistance. Some organizations had replatformed the applications but found that the replacement target state was inadequate and introduced friction because the new solution was not a low-code/business-user-driven environment. This resulted in returning the Domino platform to production and working through a strategy to maintain the environment.

    This research is designed for:

    • IT strategic direction decision-makers
    • IT managers responsible for an existing Domino platform
    • Organizations evaluating migration options for mission-critical applications running on Domino

    This research will help you:

    1. Evaluate migration options.
    2. Assess the fit and purpose.
    3. Consider strategies for overcoming potential challenges.
    4. Determine the future of this platform for your organization.

    The “everything may work” scenario

    Adopt and expand

    Believe it or not, Domino and Notes are still options to consider when determining a migration strategy. With HCL still committed to the platform, there are options organizations should seek to better understand rather than assuming SharePoint will solve all. In our research, we consider:

    Importance to current business processes

    • Importance of use
    • Complexity in migrations
    • Choosing a new platform

    Available tools to facilitate

    • Talent/access to skills
    • Economies of scale/lower cost at scale
    • Access to technology

    Info-Tech Insight

    With multiple options to consider, take the time to clearly understand the application rationalization process within your decision making.

    • Archive/retire
    • Application migration
    • Application replatform
    • Stay right where you are

    Eliminate your bias – consider the advantages

    “There is a lot of bias toward Domino; decisions are being made by individuals who know very little about Domino and more importantly, they do not know how it impacts business environment.”

    – Rob Salerno, Founder & CTO, Rivet Technology Partners

    Domino advantages include:

    Modern Cloud & Application

    • No-code/low-code technology

    Business-Managed Application

    • Business written and supported
    • Embrace the business support model
    • Enterprise class application

    Leverage the Application Taxonomy & Build

    • A rapid application development platform
    • Develop skill with HCL training

    HCL Domino is a supported and developed platform

    Why consider HCL?

    • Consider scheduling a Roadmap Session with HCL. This is an opportunity to leverage any value in the mission and brand of your organization to gain insights or support from HCL.
    • Existing Domino customers are not the only entities seeking certainty with the platform. Software solution providers that support enterprise IT infrastructure ecosystems (backup, for example) will also be seeking clarity for the future of the platform. HCL will be managing these relationships through the channel/partner management programs, but our observations indicate that Domino integrations are scarce.
    • HCL Domino should be well positioned feature-wise to support low-code/NoSQL demands for enterprises and citizen developers.

    Visualize Your Application Roadmap

    1. Focus on the application portfolio and crafting a roadmap for rationalization.
      • The process is intended to help you determine each application’s functional and technical adequacy for the business process that it supports.
    2. Document your findings on respective application capability heatmaps.
      • This drives your organization to a determination of application dispositions and provides a tool to output various dispositions for you as a roadmap.
    3. Sort the application portfolio into a disposition status (keep, replatform, retire, consolidate, etc.)
      • This information will be an input into any cloud migration or modernization as well as consolidation of the infrastructure, licenses, and support for them.

    Our external support perspective

    by Darin Stahl

    Member Feedback

    • Some members who have remaining Domino applications in production – while the retire, replatform, consolidate, or stay strategy is playing out – have concerns about the challenges with ongoing support and resources required for the platform. In those cases, some have engaged external services providers to augment staff or take over as managed services.
    • While there could be existing support resources (in house or on retainer), the member might consider approaching an external provider who could help backstop the single resource or even provide some help with the exit strategies. At this point, the conversation would be helpful in any case. One of our members engaged an external provider in a Statement of Work for IBM Domino Administration focused on one-time events, Tier 1/Tier 2 support, and custom ad hoc requests.
    • The augmentation with the managed services enabled the member to shift key internal resources to a focus on executing the exit strategies (replatform, retire, consolidate), since the business knowledge was key to that success.
    • The member also very aggressively governed the Domino environment support needs to truly technical issues/maintenance of known and supported functionality rather than coding new features (and increasing risk and cost in a migration down the road) – in short, freezing new features and functionality unless required for legal compliance or health and safety.
    • There obviously are other providers, but at this point Info-Tech no longer maintains a market view or scan of those related to Domino due to low member demand.

    Domino database assessments

    Consider the database.

    • Domino database assessments should be informed through the lens of a multi-value database, like jBase, or an object system.
    • The assessment of the databases, often led by relational database subject matter experts grounded in normalized databases, can be a struggle since Notes databases must be denormalized.
    Key/Value Column

    Use case: Heavily accessed, rarely updated, large amounts of data
    Data Model: Values are stored in a hash table of keys.
    Fast access to small data values, but querying is slow
    Processor friendly
    Based on amazon's Dynamo paper
    Example: Project Voldemort used by LinkedIn

    this is a Key/Value example

    Use case: High availability, multiple data centers
    Data Model: Storage blocks of data are contained in columns
    Handles size well
    Based on Google's BigTable
    Example: Hadoop/Hbase used by Facebook and Yahoo

    This is a Column Example
    Document Graph

    Use case: Rapid development, Web and programmer friendly
    Data Model: Stores documents made up of tagged elements. Uses Key/Value collections
    Better query abilities than Key/Value databases.
    Inspired by Lotus Notes.
    Example: CouchDB used by BBC

    This is a Document Example

    Use case: Best at dealing with complexity and relationships/networks
    Data model: Nodes and relationships.
    Data is processed quickly
    Inspired by Euler and graph theory
    Can easily evolve schemas
    Example: Neo4j

    This is a Graph Example

    Understand your options

    Archive/Retire

    Store the application data in a long-term repository with the means to locate and read it for regulatory and compliance purposes.

    Migrate

    Migrate to a new version of the application, facilitating the process of moving software applications from one computing environment to another.

    Replatform

    Replatforming is an option for transitioning an existing Domino application to a new modern platform (i.e. cloud) to leverage the benefits of a modern deployment model.

    Stay

    Review the current Domino platform roadmap and understand HCL’s support model. Keep the application within the Domino platform.

    Archive/retire

    Retire the application, storing the application data in a long-term repository.

    Abstract

    The most common approach is to build the required functionality in whatever new application/solution is selected, then archive the old data in PDFs and documents.

    Typically this involves archiving the data and leveraging Microsoft SharePoint and the new collaborative solutions, likely in conjunction with other software-as-a-service (SaaS) solutions.

    Advantages

    • Reduce support cost.
    • Consolidate applications.
    • Reduce risk.
    • Reduce compliance and security concerns.
    • Improve business processes.

    Considerations

    • Application transformation
    • eDiscovery costs
    • Legal implications
    • Compliance implications
    • Business process dependencies

    Info-Tech Insights

    Be aware of the costs associated with archiving. The more you archive, the more it will cost you.

    Application migration

    Migrate to a new version of the application

    Abstract

    An application migration is the managed process of migrating or moving applications (software) from one infrastructure environment to another.

    This can include migrating applications from one data center to another data center, from a data center to a cloud provider, or from a company’s on-premises system to a cloud provider’s infrastructure.

    Advantages

    • Reduce hardware costs.
    • Leverage cloud technologies.
    • Improve scalability.
    • Improve disaster recovery.
    • Improve application security.

    Considerations

    • Data extraction, starting from the document databases in NSF format and including security settings about users and groups granted to read and write single documents, which is a powerful feature of Lotus Domino documents.
    • File extraction, starting from the document databases in NSF format, which can contain attachments and RTF documents and embedded files.
    • Design of the final relational database structure; this activity should be carried out without taking into account the original structure of the data in Domino files or the data conversion and loading, from the extracted format to the final model.
    • Design and development of the target-state custom applications based on the new data model and the new selected development platform.

    Application replatform

    Transition an existing Domino application to a new modern platform

    Abstract

    This type of arrangement is typically part of an application migration or transformation. In this model, client can “replatform” the application into an off-premises hosted provider platform. This would yield many benefits of cloud but in a different scaling capacity as experienced with commodity workloads (e.g. Windows, Linux) and the associated application.

    Two challenges are particularly significant when migrating or replatforming Domino applications:

    • The application functionality/value must be reproduced/replaced with not one but many applications, either through custom coding or a commercial-off-the-shelf/SaaS solution.
    • Notes “databases” are not relational databases and will not migrate simply to an SQL database while retaining the same business value. Notes databases are essentially NoSQL repositories and are difficult to normalize.

    Advantages

    • Leverage cloud technologies.
    • Improve scalability.
    • Align to a SharePoint platform.
    • Improve disaster recovery.
    • Improve application security.

    Considerations

    • Application replatform resource effort
    • Network bandwidth
    • New platform terms and conditions
    • Secure connectivity and communication
    • New platform security and compliance
    • Degree of complexity

    Info-Tech Insights

    There is a difference between a migration and a replatform application strategy. Determine which solution aligns to the application requirements.

    Stay with HCL

    Stay with HCL, understanding its future commitment to the platform.

    Abstract

    Following the announced acquisition of IBM Domino and up until around December 2019, HCL had published no future roadmap for the platform. The public-facing information/website at the time stated that HCL acquired “the product family and key lab services to deliver professional services.” Again, there was no mention or emphasis on upcoming new features for the platform. The product offering on their website at the time stated that HCL would leverage its services expertise to advise clients and push applications into four buckets:

    1. Replatform
    2. Retire
    3. Move to cloud
    4. Modernize

    That public-facing messaging changed with release 11.0, which had references to IBM rebranded to HCL for the Notes and Domino product – along with fixes already inflight. More information can be found on HCL’s FAQ page.

    Advantages

    • Known environment
    • Domino is a supported platform
    • Domino is a developed platform
    • No-code/low-code optimization
    • Business developed applications
    • Rapid application framework

    This is the HCL Domino Logo

    Understand your tools

    Many tools are available to help evaluate or migrate your Domino Platform. Here are a few common tools for you to consider.

    Notes Archiving & Notes to SharePoint

    Summary of Vendor

    “SWING Software delivers content transformation and archiving software to over 1,000 organizations worldwide. Our solutions uniquely combine key collaborative platforms and standard document formats, making document production, publishing, and archiving processes more efficient.”*

    Tools

    Lotus Notes Data Migration and Archiving: Preserve historical data outside of Notes and Domino

    Lotus Note Migration: Replacing Lotus Notes. Boost your migration by detaching historical data from Lotus Notes and Domino.

    Headquarters

    Croatia

    Best fit

    • Application archive and retire
    • Migration to SharePoint

    This is an image of the SwingSoftware Logo

    * swingsoftware.com

    Domino Migration to SharePoint

    Summary of Vendor

    “Providing leading solutions, resources, and expertise to help your organization transform its collaborative environment.”*

    Tools

    Notes Domino Migration Solutions: Rivit’s industry-leading solutions and hardened migration practice will help you eliminate Notes Domino once and for all.

    Rivive Me: Migrate Notes Domino applications to an enterprise web application

    Headquarters

    Canada

    Best fit

    • Application Archive & Retire
    • Migration to SharePoint

    This is an image of the RiVit Logo

    * rivit.ca

    Lotus Notes to M365

    Summary of Vendor

    “More than 300 organizations across 40+ countries trust skybow to build no-code/no-compromise business applications & processes, and skybow’s community of customers, partners, and experts grows every day.”*

    Tools

    SkyBow Studio: The low-code platform fully integrated into Microsoft 365

    Headquarters:

    Switzerland

    Best fit

    • Application Archive & Retire
    • Migration to SharePoint

    This is an image of the SkyBow Logo

    * skybow.com | About skybow

    Notes to SharePoint Migration

    Summary of Vendor

    “CIMtrek is a global software company headquartered in the UK. Our mission is to develop user-friendly, cost-effective technology solutions and services to help companies modernize their HCL Domino/Notes® application landscape and support their legacy COBOL applications.”*

    Tools

    CIMtrek SharePoint Migrator: Reduce the time and cost of migrating your IBM® Lotus Notes® applications to Office 365, SharePoint online, and SharePoint on premises.

    Headquarters

    United Kingdom

    Best fit

    • Application replatform
    • Migration to SharePoint

    This is an image of the CIMtrek Logo

    * cimtrek.com | About CIMtrek

    Domino replatform/Rapid application selection framework

    Summary of Vendor

    “4WS.Platform is a rapid application development tool used to quickly create multi-channel applications including web and mobile applications.”*

    Tools

    4WS.Platform is available in two editions: Community and Enterprise.
    The Platform Enterprise Edition, allows access with an optional support pack.

    4WS.Platform’s technical support provides support services to the users through support contracts and agreements.

    The platform is a subscription support services for companies using the product which will allow customers to benefit from the knowledge of 4WS.Platform’s technical experts.

    Headquarters

    Italy

    Best fit

    • Application replatform

    This is an image of the 4WS PLATFORM Logo

    * 4wsplatform.org

    Activity

    Understand your Domino options

    Application Rationalization Exercise

    Info-Tech Insight

    Application rationalization is the perfect exercise to fully understand your business-developed applications, their importance to business process, and the potential underlying financial impact.

    This activity involves the following participants:

    • IT strategic direction decision-makers.
    • IT managers responsible for an existing Domino platform
    • Organizations evaluating platforms for mission-critical applications.

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Completed Application Rationalization Tool

    Application rationalization exercise

    Use this Application Rationalization Tool to input the outcomes of your various application assessments

    In the Application Entry tab:

    • Input your application inventory or subset of apps you intend to rationalize, along with some basic information for your apps.

    In the Business Value & TCO Comparison tab, determine rationalization priorities.

    • Input your business value scores and total cost of ownership (TCO) of applications.
    • Review the results of this analysis to determine which apps should require additional analysis and which dispositions should be prioritized.

    In the Disposition Selection tab:

    • Add to or adapt our list of dispositions as appropriate.

    In the Rationalization Inputs tab:

    • Add or adapt the disposition criteria of your application rationalization framework as appropriate.
    • Input the results of your various assessments for each application.

    In the Disposition Settings tab:

    • Add or adapt settings that generate recommended dispositions based on your rationalization inputs.

    In the Disposition Recommendations tab:

    • Review and compare the rationalization results and confirm if dispositions are appropriate for your strategy.

    In the Timeline Considerations tab:

    • Enter the estimated timeline for when you execute your dispositions.

    In the Portfolio Roadmap tab:

    • Review and present your roadmap and rationalization results.

    Follow the instructions to generate recommended dispositions and populate an application portfolio roadmap.

    This image depicts a scatter plot graph where the X axis is labeled Business Value, and the Y Axis is labeled Cost. On the graph, the following datapoints are displayed: SF; HRIS; ERP; ALM; B; A; C; ODP; SAS

    Info-Tech Insight

    Watch out for misleading scores that result from poorly designed criteria weightings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code

    Extend IT, automation, and digital capabilities to the business with the right tools, good governance, and trusted organizational relationships.

    Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence

    Optimize your organization’s enterprise application capabilities with a refined and scalable methodology.

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results.

    Research Authors

    Darin Stahl, Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin Stahl, Principal Research Advisor,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin is a Principal Research Advisor within the Infrastructure practice, leveraging 38+ years of experience. His areas of focus include IT operations management, service desk, infrastructure outsourcing, managed services, cloud infrastructure, DRP/BCP, printer management, managed print services, application performance monitoring, managed FTP, and non-commodity servers (zSeries, mainframe, IBM i, AIX, Power PC).

    Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Troy has over 24 years of experience and has championed large enterprise-wide technology transformation programs, remote/home office collaboration and remote work strategies, BCP, IT DRP, IT operations and expense management programs, international right placement initiatives, and large technology transformation initiatives (M&A). Additionally, he has deep experience working with IT solution providers and technology (cloud) startups.

    Research Contributors

    Rob Salerno, Founder & CTO, Rivit Technology Partners

    Rob Salerno, Founder & CTO, Rivit Technology Partners

    Rob is the Founder and Chief Technology Strategist for Rivit Technology Partners. Rivit is a system integrator that delivers unique IT solutions. Rivit is known for its REVIVE migration strategy which helps companies leave legacy platforms (such as Domino) or move between versions of software. Rivit is the developer of the DCOM Application Archiving solution.

    Bibliography

    Cheshire, Nigel. “Domino v12 Launch Keeps HCL Product Strategy On Track.” Team Studio, 19 July 2021. Web.

    “Is LowCode/NoCode the best platform for you?” Rivit Technology Partners, 15 July 2021. Web.

    McCracken, Harry. “Lotus: Farewell to a Once-Great Tech Brand.” TIME, 20 Nov. 2012. Web.

    Sharwood, Simon. “Lotus Notes refuses to die, again, as HCL debuts Domino 12.” The Register, 8 June 2021. Web.

    Woodie, Alex. “Domino 12 Comes to IBM i.” IT Jungle, 16 Aug. 2021. Web.

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}460|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $7,199 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Measuring the business value provided by IT is very challenging.
    • You have a number of metrics, but they may not be truly meaningful, contextual, or actionable.
    • You know you need more than a single metric to tell the whole story. You also suspect that metrics from different systems combined will tell an even fuller story.
    • You are being asked to provide information from different levels of management, for different audiences, conveying different information.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Many organizations collect metrics to validate they are keeping the lights on. But the Infrastructure and Operations managers who are benefitting the most are taking steps to ensure they are getting the right metrics to help them make decisions, manage costs, and plan for change.
    • Complaints about metrics are often rooted in managers wading through too many individual metrics, wrong metrics, or data that they simply can’t trust.
    • Info-Tech surveyed and interviewed a number of Infrastructure managers, CIOs, and IT leaders to understand how they are leveraging metrics. Successful organizations are using metrics for everything from capacity planning to solving customer service issues to troubleshooting system failures.

    Impact and Result

    • Manage metrics so they don’t become time wasters and instead provide real value.
    • Identify the types of metrics you need to focus on.
    • Build a metrics process to ensure you are collecting the right metrics and getting data you can use to save time and make better decisions.

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a metrics program in your Infrastructure and Operations practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gap analysis

    This phase will help you identify challenges that you want to avoid by implementing a metrics program, discover the main IT goals, and determine your core metrics.

    • Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics – Phase 1: Gap Analysis
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Executive Presentation

    2. Build strategy

    This phase will help you make an actionable plan to implement your metrics program, define roles and responsibilities, and communicate your metrics project across your organization and with the business division.

    • Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics – Phase 2: Build Strategy
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Definition Template
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Tracking and Reporting Tool
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Program Roles & Responsibilities Guide
    • Weekly Metrics Review With Your Staff
    • Quarterly Metrics Review With the CIO
    [infographic]

    Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}110|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    In many cases, the answer is to develop a cloud brokerage to manage the complexity. But what should your cloud broker be delivering, and how?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To avoid failure, you need to provide security and compliance, but basic user satisfaction means becoming a frictionless intermediary.
    • Enabling brokers provide knowledge and guidance for the best usage of cloud.
    • While GCBs fill a critical role as a control point for IT consumption, they can easily turn into a friction point for IT projects. It’s important to find the right balance between enabling compliance and providing frictionless usability.

    Impact and Result

    • Avoid disintermediation.
    • Maintain compliance.
    • Leverage economies of scale.
    • Ensure architecture discipline.

    Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Cloud Brokerage Deck – A guide to help you start designing a cloud brokerage that delivers value beyond gatekeeping.

    Define the value, ecosystem, and metrics required to add value as a brokerage. Develop a brokerage value proposition that aligns with your audience and capabilities. Define and rationalize the ecosystem of partners and value-add activities for your brokerage. Define KPIs that allow you to maximize and balance both usability and compliance.

    • Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Adding the Right Value: Building Cloud Brokerages That Enable

    Considerations for implementing an institutional-focused cloud brokerage.

    Your Challenge

    Increasingly, large institutions and governments are adopting cloud-first postures for delivering IT resources. Combined with the growth of cloud offerings that are able to meet the certifications and requirements of this segment that has been driven by federal initiatives like Cloud-First in Canada and Cloud Smart in the United States, these two factors have left institutions (and the businesses that serve them) with the challenge of delivering cloud services to their users while maintaining compliance, control, and IT sanity.

    In many cases, the answer is to develop a cloud brokerage to manage the complexity. But what should your cloud broker be delivering and how?

    Navigating the Problem

    Not all cloud brokerages are the same. And while they can be an answer to cloud complexity, an ineffective brokerage can drain value and complicate operations even further. Cloud brokerages need to be designed:

    1. To deliver the right type of value to its users.
    2. To strike the balance between effective governance & security and flexibility & ease of use.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By defining your end goals, framing solutions based on the type of value and rigor your brokerage needs to deliver, and focusing on the right balance of security and flexibility, you can deliver a brokerage that delivers the best of all worlds.

    1. Define the brokerage value you want to deliver.
    2. Build the catalog and partner ecosystem.
    3. Understand how to maximize adoption and minimize disintermediation while maintaining architectural discipline and compliance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sometimes a brokerage delivery model makes sense, sometimes it doesn’t! Understanding the value addition you want your brokerage to provide before creating it allows you to not only avoid pitfalls and maximize benefits but also understand when a brokerage model does and doesn’t make sense in the first place.

    Project Overview

    Understand what value you want your brokerage to deliver

    Different institutions want brokerage delivery for different reasons. It’s important to define up front why your users need to work through a brokerage and what value that brokerage needs to deliver.

    What’s in the catalog? Is it there to consolidate and simplify billing and consumption? Or does it add value further up the technology stack or value chain? If so, how does that change the capabilities you need internally and from partners?

    Security and compliance are usually the highest priority

    Among institutions adopting cloud, a broker that can help deliver their defined security and compliance standards is an almost universal requirement. Especially in government institutions, this can mean the need to meet a high standard in both implementation and validation.

    The good news is that even if you lack the complete set of skills in-house, the high certification levels available from hyperscale providers combined with a growing ecosystem of service providers working on these platforms means you can usually find the right partner(s) to make it possible.

    The real goal: frictionless intermediation and enablement

    Ultimately, if end users can’t get what they need from you, they will go around you to get it. This challenge, which has always existed in IT, is further amplified in a cloud service world that offers users a cornucopia of options outside the brokerage. Furthermore, cloud users expect to be able to consume IT seamlessly. Without frictionless satisfaction of user demand your brokerage will become disintermediated, which risks your highest priorities of security and compliance.

    Understand the evolution: Info-Tech thought model

    While initial adoption of cloud brokerages in institutions was focused on ensuring the ability of IT to extend its traditional role as gatekeeper to the realm of cloud services, the focus has now shifted upstream to enabling ease of use and smart adoption of cloud services. This is evidenced clearly in examples like the US government’s renaming of its digital strategy from “Cloud First” to “Cloud Smart” and has been mirrored in other regions and institutions.

    Info-Tech Insights

    To avoid failure, you need to provide security and compliance.

    Basic user satisfaction means becoming a frictionless intermediary.

    Exceed expectations! Enabling brokers provide knowledge and guidance for the best usage of cloud.

    • Security & Compliance
    • Frictionless Intermediation
    • Cloud-Enabling Brokerage

    Define the role of a cloud broker

    Where do brokers fit in the cloud model?

    • NIST Definition: An entity that manages the use, performance, and delivery of cloud services and negotiates relationships between cloud providers and cloud consumers.
    • Similar to a telecom master agent, a cloud broker acts as the middle-person and end-user point of contact, consolidating the management of underlying providers.
    • A government or institutional cloud broker (GCB) is responsible for the delivery of all cloud services consumed by the departments or agencies it supports or that are mandated to use it.

    Balancing governance and agility

    Info-Tech Insight

    While GCBs fill a critical role as a control point for IT consumption, they can easily turn into a friction point for IT projects. It’s important to find the right balance between enabling compliance and providing frictionless usability.

    Model brokerage drivers and benefits

    Reduced costs: Security through standardization: Frictionless consumption: Avoid disinter-mediation; Maintain compliance; Leverage economies of scale; Ensure architecture discipline

    Maintain compliance and ensure architecture discipline: Brokerages can be an effective gating point for ensuring properly governed and managed IT consumption that meets the specific regulations and compliances required for an institution. It can also be a strong catalyst and enabler for moving to even more effective cloud consumption through automation.

    Avoid disintermediation: Especially in institutions, cloud brokers are a key tool in the fight against disintermediation – that is, end users circumventing your IT department’s procurement and governance by consuming an ad hoc cloud service.

    Leverage economies of scale: Simply put, consolidation of your cloud consumption drives effectiveness by making the most of your buying power.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Understanding the importance of each benefit type to your brokerage audience will help you define the type of brokerage you need to build and what skills and partners will be required to deliver the right value.

    The brokerage landscape

    The past ten years have seen governments and institutions evolve from basic acceptance of cloud services to the usage of cloud as the core of most IT initiatives.

    • As part of this evolution, many organizations now have well-defined standards and guidance for the implementation, procurement, and regulation of cloud services for their use.
    • Both Canada (Strategic Plan for Information Management and Information Technology) and the United States (Cloud Smart – formerly known as Cloud First) have recently updated their guidance on adoption of cloud services. The Australian Government has also recently updated its Cloud Computing Policy.
    • AWS and Azure both now claim Full FedRAMP (Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program) certification.
    • This has not only enabled easy adoption of these core hyperscale cloud service by government but also driven the proliferation of a large ecosystem of FedRAMP-authorized cloud service providers.
    • This trend started with government at the federal level but has cascaded downstream to provincial and municipal governments globally, and the same model seems likely to be adopted by other governments and other institution types over time.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The ecosystem of platforms and tools has grown significantly and examples of best practices, especially in government, are readily available. Once you’ve defined your brokerage’s value stance, the building blocks you need to deliver often don’t need to be built from scratch.

    Address the unique challenges of business-led IT in institutions

    With the business taking more accountability and management of their own technology, brokers must learn how to evolve from being gatekeepers to enablers.

    This image This lists the Cons of IT acting as a gatekeeper providing oversight, and the Pros of IT acting as an Enabler in an IT Partnership.  the Cons are: Restrict System Access; Deliver & Monitor Applications; Own Organizational Risk; Train the Business.  The Pros are: Manage Role-Based Access; Deliver & Monitor Platforms; Share Organizational Risk; Coach & Mentor the Business

    Turn brokerage pitfalls into opportunities

    The greatest risks in using a cloud broker come from its nature as a single point of distribution for service and support. Without resources (or automation) to enable scale, as well as responsive processes for supporting users in finding the right services and making those services available through the brokerage, you will lose alignment with your users’ needs, which inevitably leads to disintermediation, loss of IT control, and broken compliance

    Info-Tech Insights

    Standardization and automation are your friend when building a cloud brokerage! Sometimes this means having a flexible catalog of options and configurations, but great brokerages can deliver value by helping their users redefine and evolve their workloads to work more effectively in the cloud. This means providing guidance and facilitating the landing/transformation of users’ workloads in the cloud, the right way.

    Challenges Impact
    • Single point of failure
    • Managing capacity
    • Alignment of brokerage with underlying agencies
    • Additional layer of complexity
    • Inability to deliver service
    • Disintermediation
    • Broken security/compliance
    • Loss of cost control/purchasing power

    Validate your cloud brokerage strategy using Info-Tech’s approach

    Value Definition

    • Define your brokerage type and value addition

    Capabilities Mapping

    • Understand the partners and capabilities you need to be able to deliver

    Measuring Value

    • Define KPIs for both compliant delivery and frictionless intermediation

    Provide Cloud Excellence

    • Move from intermediation to enablement and help users land on the cloud the right way

    Define the categories for your brokerage’s benefit and value

    Depending on the type of brokerage, the value delivered may be as simple as billing consolidation, but many brokerages go much deeper in their value proposition.

    This image depicts a funnel, where the following inputs make up the Broker Value: Integration, Interface and Management Enhancement; User Identity and Risk Management/ Security & Compliance; Cost & Workload Efficiency, Service Aggregation

    Define the categories of brokerage value to add

    • Purchasing Agents save the purchaser time by researching services from different vendors and providing the customer with information about how to use cloud computing to support business goals.
    • Contract Managers may also be assigned power to negotiate contracts with cloud providers on behalf of the customer. In this scenario, the broker may distribute services across multiple vendors to achieve cost-effectiveness, while managing the technical and procurement complexity of dealing with multiple vendors.
      • The broker may provide users with an application program interface (API) and user interface (UI) that hides any complexity and allows the customer to work with their cloud services as if they were being purchased from a single vendor. This type of broker is sometimes referred to as a cloud aggregator.
    • Cloud Enablers can also provide the customer with additional services, such as managing the deduplication, encryption, and cloud data transfer and assisting with data lifecycle management and other activities.
    • Cloud Customizers integrate various underlying cloud services for customers to provide a custom offering under a white label or its own brand.
    • Cloud Agents are essentially the software version of a Contract Manager and act by automating and facilitating the distribution of work between different cloud service providers.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Remember that these categories are general guidelines! Depending on the requirements and value a brokerage needs to deliver, it may fit more than one category of broker type.

    Brokerage types and value addition

    Info-Tech Insights

    Each value addition your brokerage invests in delivering should tie to reinforcing efficiency, compliance, frictionlessness, or enablement.

    Value Addition Purchasing Agent Contract Manager Cloud Enabler Cloud Customizer Cloud Agent
    Underlying service selection

    Standard Activity

    Standard Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity Common Activity
    Support and info Standard Activity

    Common Activity

    Standard Activity Standard Activity Common Activity
    Contract lifecycle (pricing/negotiation) Standard Activity Common Activity Standard Activity
    Workload distribution (to underlying services) (aggregation) Common Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity Standard Activity
    Value-add or layered on services Standard Activity Common Activity
    Customization/integration of underlying services Standard Activity
    Automated workload distribution (i.e. software) Standard Activity

    Start by delivering value in these common brokerage service categories

    Security & Compliance

    • Reporting & Auditing
    • SIEM & SOC Services
    • Patching & Monitoring

    Cost Management

    • Right-Sizing
    • Billing Analysis
    • Anomaly Detection & Change Recommendations

    Data Management

    • Data Tiering
    • Localization Management
    • Data Warehouse/Lake Services

    Resilience & Reliability

    • Backup & Archive
    • Replication & Sync
    • DR & HA Management
    • Ransomware Prevention/Mitigation

    Cloud-Native & DevOps Enablement

    • Infrastructure as Code (IaC)
    • DevOps Tools & Processes
    • SDLC Automation Tools

    Design, Transformation, and Integration

    • CDN Integration
    • AI Tools Integration
    • SaaS Customizations

    Activity: Brokerage value design

    Who are you and who are you building this for?

    • Internal brokerage (i.e. you are a department in an organization that is tasked with providing IT resources to other internal groups)
      • No profit motivation
      • Primary goal is to maintain compliance and avoid disintermediation
    • Third-party brokerage (i.e. you are an MSP that needs to build a brokerage to provide a variety of downstream services and act as the single point of consumption for an organization)
      • Focus on value-addition to the downstream services you facilitate for your client
      • Increased requirement to quickly add new partners/services from downstream as required by your client

    What requirements and pains do you need to address?

    • Remember that in the world of cloud, users ultimately can go around IT to find the resources and tools they want to use. In short, if you don’t provide ease and value, they will get it somewhere else.
    • Assess the different types of cloud brokerages out there as a guide to what sort of value you want to deliver.

    Why are you creating a brokerage? There are several categories of driver and more than one may apply.

    • Compliance and security gating/validation
    • Cost consolidation and governance
    • Value-add or feature enhancement of raw/downstream services being consumed

    It’s important to clearly understand how best you can deliver unique value to ensure that they want to consume from you.

    This is an image of a Venn diagram between the following: Who are you trying to serve?; Why and how are you uniquely positioned to deliver?; What requirements do they have and what pain points can you help solve?.  Where all three circles overlap is the Brokerage Value Proposition.

    Understand the ecosystem you’ll require to deliver value

    GCB

    • Enabling Effectiveness
    • Cost Governance
    • Adoption and User Satisfaction
    • Security & Compliance

    Whatever value proposition and associated services your brokerage has defined, either internal resources or additional partners will be required to run the platform and processes you want to offer on top of the defined base cloud platforms.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Remember to always align your value adds and activities to the four key themes:

    • Efficiency
    • Compliance
    • Frictionlessness
    • Cloud Enablement

    Delivering value may require an ecosystem

    The additional value your broker delivers will depend on the tools and services you can layer on top of the base cloud platform(s) you support.

    In many cases, you may require different partners to fulfil similar functions across different base platforms. Although this increases complexity for the brokerage, it’s also a place where additional value can be delivered to end users by your role as a frictionless intermediary.

    Base Partner/Platform

    • Third-party software & platforms
    • Third-party automations & integrations
    • Third-party service partners
    • Internal value-add functions

    Build the ecosystem you need for your value proposition

    Leverage partners and automation to bake compliance in.

    Different value-add types (based on the category/categories of broker you’re targeting) require different additional platforms and partners to augment the base cloud service you’re brokering.

    Security & Config

    • IaC Tools
    • Cloud Resource Configuration Validation
    • Templating Tools
    • Security Platforms
    • SDN and Networking Platforms
    • Resilience (Backup/Replication/DR/HA) Platforms
    • Data & Storage Management
    • Compliance and Validation Platforms & Partners

    Cost Management

    • Subscription Hierarchy Management
    • Showback and Chargeback Logic
    • Cost Dashboarding and Thresholding
    • Governance and Intervention

    Adoption & User Satisfaction

    • Service Delivery SLAs
    • Support Process & Tools
    • Capacity/Availability Management
    • Portal Usability/UX

    Speed of Evolution

    • Partner and Catalog/Service Additions
    • Broker Catalog Roadmapping
    • User Request Capture (new services)
    • User Request Capture (exceptions)

    Build your features and services lists

    Incorporate your end user, business, and IT perspectives in defining the list of mandatory and desired features of your target solution.

    See our Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process blueprint for information on procurement practices, including RFP templates.

    End User

    • Visual, drag-and-drop models to define data models, business logic, and user interfaces
    • One-click deployment
    • Self-healing application
    • Vendor-managed infrastructure
    • Active community and marketplace
    • Prebuilt templates and libraries
    • Optical character recognition and natural language processing

    Business

    • Audit and change logs
    • Theme and template builder
    • Template management
    • Knowledgebase and document management
    • Role-based access
    • Business value, operational costs, and other KPI monitoring
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Consistent design and user experience across applications
    • Business workflow automation

    IT

    • Application and system performance monitoring
    • Versioning and code management
    • Automatic application and system refactoring and recovery
    • Exception and error handling
    • Scalability (e.g. load balancing) and infrastructure management
    • Real-time debugging
    • Testing capabilities
    • Security management
    • Application integration management

    Understand the stakeholders

    Hyperscale Platform/Base Platform: Security; Compliance and Validation;Portal/Front-End; Cost Governance; Broker Value Add(s)

    Depending on the value-add(s) you are trying to deliver, as well as the requirements from your institution(s), you will have a different delineation of responsibilities for each of the value-add dimensions. Typically, there will be at least three stakeholders whose role needs to be considered for each dimension:

    • Base Cloud Provider
    • Third-Party Platforms/Service Providers
    • Internal Resources

    Info-Tech Insights

    It’s important to remember that the ecosystem of third-party options available to you in each case will likely be dependent on if a given partner operates or supports your chosen base provider.

    Define the value added by each stakeholder in your value chain

    Value Addition Cost Governance Security & Compliance Adoption and User Satisfaction New Service Addition Speed End-User Cloud Effectiveness
    Base platform(s)
    Third party
    Internal

    A basic table of the stakeholders and platforms involved in your value stream is a critical tool for aligning activities and partners with brokerage value.

    Remember to tie each value-add category you’re embarking on to at least one of the key themes!

    Cost Governance → Efficiency

    Security & Compliance → Compliance

    Adoption & User Satisfaction → Frictionlessness

    New Service Addition Responsiveness → Frictionlessness, Enablement

    End-User Cloud Effectiveness → Enablement

    Info-Tech Insights

    The expectations for how applications are consumed and what a user experience should look like is increasingly being guided by the business and by the disintermediating power of the cloud-app ecosystem.

    “Enabling brokers” help embrace business-led IT

    In environments where compliance and security are a must, the challenges of handing off application management to the business are even more complex. Great brokers learn to act not just as a gatekeeper but an enabler of business-led IT.

    Business Empowerment

    Organizations are looking to enhance their Agile and BizDevOps practices by shifting traditional IT practices left and toward the business.

    Changing Business Needs

    Organizational priorities are constantly changing. Cost reduction opportunities and competitive advantages are lost because of delayed delivery of features.

    Low Barrier to Entry

    Low- and no-code development tools, full-stack solutions, and plug-and-play architectures allow non-technical users to easily build and implement applications without significant internal technical support or expertise.

    Democratization of IT

    A wide range of digital applications, services, and information are readily available and continuously updated through vendor and public marketplaces and open-source communities.

    Technology-Savvy Business

    The business is motivated to learn more about the technology they use so that they can better integrate it into their processes.

    Balance usability and compliance: accelerate cloud effectiveness

    Move to being an accelerator and an enabler! Rather than creating an additional layer of complexity, we can use the abstraction of a cloud brokerage to bring a wide variety of value-adds and partners into the ecosystem without increasing complexity for end users.

    Manage the user experience

    • Your portal is a great source of data for optimizing user adoption and satisfaction.
    • Understand the KPIs that matter to your clients or client groups from both a technical and a service perspective.

    Be proactive and responsive in meeting changing needs

    • Determine dashboard consumption by partner view.
    • Regularly review and address the gaps in your catalog.
    • Provide an easy mechanism for adding user-demanded services.

    Think like a service provider

    • You do need to be able to communicate and even market internally new services and capabilities as you add them or people won't know to come to you to use them.
    • It's also critical in helping people move along the path to enablement and knowing what might be possible that they hadn't considered.

    Provide cloud excellence functions

    Enablement Broker

    • Mentorship & Training
      • Build the skills, knowledge, and experiences of application owners and managers with internal and external expertise.
    • Organizational Change Leadership
      • Facilitate cultural, governance, and other organizational changes through strong relationships with business and IT leadership.
    • Good Delivery Practices & Thinking
      • Develop, share, and maintain a toolkit of good software development lifecycle (SDLC) practices and techniques.
    • Knowledge Sharing
      • Centralize a knowledgebase of up-to-date and accurate documentation and develop community forums to facilitate knowledge transfer.
    • Technology Governance & Leadership
      • Implement the organizational standards, policies, and rules for all applications and platforms and coordinate growth and sprawl.
    • Shared Services & Integrations
      • Provide critical services and integrations to support end users with internal resources or approved third-party providers and partners.

    Gauge value with the right metrics

    Focus your effort on measuring key metrics.

    Category

    Purpose

    Examples

    Business Value – The amount of value and benefits delivered. Justify the investment and impact of the brokerage and its optimization to business operations. ROI, user productivity, end-user satisfaction, business operational costs, error rate
    Application Quality – Satisfaction of application quality standards. Evaluate organizational effort to address and maximize user satisfaction and adoption rates. Adoption rate, usage friction metrics, user satisfaction metrics
    Delivery Effectiveness – The delivery efficiency of changes. Enable members to increase their speed to effective deployment, operation, and innovation on cloud platforms. Speed of deployment, landing/migration success metrics

    Determine measures that demonstrate the value of your brokerage by aligning it with your quality definition, value drivers, and users’ goals and objectives. Recognize that your journey will require constant monitoring and refinement to adjust to situations that may arise as you adopt new products, standards, strategies, tactics, processes, and tools.

    Activity Output

    Ultimately, the goal is designing a brokerage that can evolve from gatekeeping to frictionless intermediation to cloud enablement.

    Maintain focus on the value proposition, your brokerage ecosystem, and the metrics that represent enablement for your users and avoid pitfalls and challenges from the beginning.

    Activity: Define your brokerage type and value addition; Understand the partners and capabilities you need to be able to deliver; Define KPIs for both delivery (compliance) and adoption (frictionlessness); Output: GCB Strategy Plan; Addresses: Why and when you should build a GCB; How to avoid pitfalls; How to maximize benefits; How to maximize responsiveness and user satisfaction; How to roadmap and add services with agility.

    Appendix

    Related blueprints and tools

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    This blueprint covers aligning your value proposition with general cloud requirements.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    Phase 1 of this research covers identifying value chains to be transformed.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Phase 1 of this research covers understanding the business-managed applications as a factor in developing a frictionless intermediary model.

    Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process

    This blueprint provides information on partner selection and procurement practices, including RFP templates.

    Bibliography

    “3 Types of Cloud Brokers That Can Save the Cloud.” Cloud Computing Topics, n.d. Web.

    Australian Government Cloud Computing Policy. Government of Australia, October 2014. Web.

    “Cloud Smart Policy Overview.” CIO.gov, n.d. Web.

    “From Cloud First to Cloud Smart.” CIO.gov, n.d. Web.

    Gardner, Dana. “Cloud brokering: Building a cloud of clouds.” ZDNet, 22 April 2011. Web.

    Narcisi, Gina. “Cloud, Next-Gen Services Help Master Agents Grow Quickly And Beat 'The Squeeze' “As Connectivity Commissions Decline.” CRN, 14 June 2017. Web.

    Smith, Spencer. “Asigra calls out the perils of cloud brokerage model.” TechTarget, 28 June 2019. Web.

    Tan, Aaron. “Australia issues new cloud computing guidelines.” TechTarget, 27 July 2020. Web.

    The European Commission Cloud Strategy. ec.europa.eu, 16 May 2019. Web.

    “TrustRadius Review: Cloud Brokers 2022.” TrustRadius, 2022. Web.

    Yedlin, Debbie. “Pros and Cons of Using a Cloud Broker.” Technology & Business Integrators, 17 April 2015. Web.

    Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}168|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Endpoint Security
    • Parent Category Link: /endpoint-security
    • Threat actors are more innovative than ever before and developing sophisticated methods of endpoints attacks capable of avoiding detection with traditional legacy anti-virus software.
    • Legacy anti-virus solutions rely on signatures and hence fail at detecting memory objects, and new and mutating malware.
    • Combined with the cybersecurity talent gap and the sheer volume of endpoint attacks, organizations need endpoint security solutions capable of efficiently and accurately blocking never-before-seen malware types and variants.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t make machine learning a goal in itself. Think of how machine learning can help you achieve your goals.
    • Determine your endpoint security requirements and goals prior to shopping around for a vendor. Vendors can easily suck you into a vortex of marketing jargon and sell you tools that your organization does not need.
    • Machine learning alone is not a solution to catching malware. It is a computational method that can generalize and analyze large datasets, and output insights quicker than a human security analyst.

    Impact and Result

    • Consider deploying an endpoint protection technology that leverages machine learning into your existing endpoint security strategy to counteract against the unknown and to quickly sift through the large volumes of data.
    • Understand how machine learning methods can help drive your organization’s security goals.
    • Identify vendors that utilize machine learning in their endpoint security products.
    • Understand use cases of where machine learning in endpoint security has been successful.

    Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should consider machine learning in endpoint security solutions, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Demystify machine learning concepts

    Understand basic machine learning concepts used in endpoint security.

    • Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions – Phase 1: Demystify Machine Learning Concepts

    2. Evaluate vendors that leverage machine learning

    Determine feature requirements to evaluate vendors.

    • Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions – Phase 2: Evaluate Vendors That Leverage Machine Learning
    • Endpoint Protection Request for Proposal
    [infographic]

    Dive Into Five Years of Security Strategies

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}247|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • As organizations build their security programs, there is often the question of what are other companies doing.
    • Part of this is a desire to know whether challenges are unique to certain companies, but also to understand how people are tackling some of their security gaps.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Don’t just wonder what others are doing – use this report to see how companies are faring in their current state, where they want to target in their future state, and the ways they’re planning to raise their security posture.

    Impact and Result

    • Whether you’re building out your security program for the first time or are just interested in how others are faring, review insights from 66 security strategies in this report.
    • This research complements the blueprint, Build an Information Security Program, and can be used as a guide while completing that project.

    Dive Into Five Years of Security Strategies Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out what this report contains.

    [infographic]

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}332|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $36,636 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Getting a seat at the table is your first objective in building a strategic roadmap. Knowing what the business wants to do and understanding what it will need in the future is a challenge for most IT departments.

    This could be a challenge such as:

    • Understanding the business vision
    • Clear communications on business planning
    • Insight into what the future state should look like
    • Understanding what the IT team is spending its time on day to day

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a clear vision of what the future state is and knowing that creating an IT Infrastructure roadmap is never finished will give your IT team an understanding of priorities, goals, business vision, and risks associated with not planning.
    • Understand what you are currently paying for and why.

    Impact and Result

    • Understanding of the business priorities, and vision of the future
    • Know what your budget is spent on: running the business, growth, or innovation
    • Increased communication with the right stakeholders
    • Better planning based on analysis of time study, priorities, and business goals

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Storyboard – Improve and align goals and strategy.

    In this section you will develop a vision and mission statement and set goals that align with the business vision and goals. The outcome will deliver your guiding principles and a list of goals that will determine your initiatives and their priorities.

    • Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap Storyboard
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    2. Financial Spend Analysis Template – Envision future and analyze constraints.

    Consider your future state by looking at technology that will help the business in the future. Complete an analysis of your past spending to determine your future spend. Complete a SWOT analysis to determine suitability.

    • Financial Spend Analysis Template

    3. Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template – Align and build the roadmap.

    Develop a risk framework that may slow or hinder your strategic initiatives from progressing and evaluate your technical debt. What is the current state of your infrastructure? Generate and prioritize your initiatives, and set dates for completion.

    • Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template

    4. Infrastructure and Strategy Executive Brief Template – Communicate and improve the process.

    After creating your roadmap, communicate it to your audience. Identify who needs to be informed and create an executive brief with the template download. Finally, create KPIs to measure what success looks like.

    • Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template
    • Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    Align infrastructure investment to business-driven goals.

    Analysts' Perspectives

    Infrastructure roadmaps are an absolute necessity for all organizations. An organization's size often dictates the degree of complexity of the roadmap, but they all strive to paint the future picture of the organization's IT infrastructure.

    Infrastructure roadmaps typically start with the current state of infrastructure and work on how to improve. That thinking must change! Start with the future vision, an unimpeded vision, as if there were no constraints. Now you can see where you want to be.

    Look at your past to determine how you have been spending your infrastructure budget. If your past shows a trend of increased operational expenditures, that trend will likely continue. The same is true for capital spending and staffing numbers.

    Now that you know where you want to go, and how you ended up where you are, look at the constraints you must deal with and make a plan. It's not as difficult as it may seem, and even the longest journey begins with one step.

    Speaking of that first step, it should be to understand the business goals and align your roadmap with those same goals. Now you have a solid plan to develop a strategic infrastructure roadmap; enjoy the journey!

    There are many reasons why you need to build a strategic IT infrastructure roadmap, but your primary objectives are to set the long-term direction, build a framework for decision making, create a foundation for operational planning, and be able to explain to the business what you are planning. It is a basis for accountability and sets out goals and priorities for the future.

    Other than knowing where you are going there are four key benefits to building the roadmap.

    1. It allows you to be strategic and transformative rather than tactical and reactive.
    2. It gives you the ability to prioritize your tasks and projects in order to get them going.
    3. It gives you the ability to align your projects to business outcomes.
    4. Additionally, you can leverage your roadmap to justify your budget for resources and infrastructure.

    When complete, you will be able to communicate to your fellow IT teams what you are doing and get an understanding of possible business- or IT-related roadblocks, but overall executing on your roadmap will demonstrate to the business your competencies and ability to succeed.

    PJ Ryan

    PJ Ryan
    Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    John Donovan

    John Donovan
    Principal Research Director
    Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Build a Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap

    Align infrastructure investment to business-driven goals.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    When it comes to building a strategic roadmap, getting a seat at the table is your first objective. Knowing what the business wants to do and understanding its future needs is a challenge for most IT organizations.

    Challenges such as:

    • Understanding the business vision
    • Clear communications on business planning
    • Insight into what the future state should look like

    Common Obstacles

    Fighting fires, keeping the lights on, patching, and overseeing legacy debt maintenance – these activities prevent your IT team from thinking strategically and looking beyond day-to-day operations. Issues include:

    • Managing time well
    • Building the right teams
    • Setting priorities

    Procrastinating when it comes to thinking about your future state will get you nowhere in a hurry.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Look into your past IT spend and resources that are being utilized.

    • Analyze all aspects of the operation, and resources required.
    • Be realistic with your timelines.
    • Work from the future state backward.

    Build your roadmap by setting priorities, understanding risk and gaps both in finance and resources. Overall, your roadmap is never done, so don't worry if you get it wrong on the first pass.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Have a clear vision of what the future state is, and know that when creating an IT infrastructure roadmap, it is never done. This will give your IT team an understanding of priorities, goals, business vision, and risks associated with not planning. Understand what you are currently paying for and why.

    Insight Summary

    "Planning is bringing the future into the present so that you can do something about it now."
    Source: Alan Lakein, Libquotes

    Your strategic objectives are key to building a roadmap

    Many organizations' day-to-day IT operations are tactical and reactive. This needs to change; the IT team needs to become strategic and proactive in its planning and execution. Forward thinking bridges the gap from your current state, to what the organization is, to what it wants to achieve. Your strategic objectives need to align to the business vision and goals and keep it running.

    Your future state will determine your roadmap priorities

    Identify what the business needs to meet its goals; this should be reflected in your roadmap priorities. Then identify the tasks and projects that can get you there. Business alignment is key, as these projects require prioritization. Strategic initiatives that align to business outcomes will be your foundation for planning on those priorities. If you do not align your initiatives, you will end up spinning your wheels. A good strategic roadmap will have all the elements of forward thinking and planning to execute with the right resources, right priorities, and right funding to make it happen.

    Understand what you have been paying for the last few years

    Measure the cost of "keeping the lights on" as a baseline for your budget that is earmarked and already spent. Determine if your current spend is holding back innovation due to:

    1. The high cost of maintenance
    2. Resources in operations doing low-value work due to the effort required to do tasks related to break/fix on aging hardware and software

    A successful strategic roadmap will be determined when you have a good handle on your current spending patterns and planning for future needs that include resources, budget, and know-how. Without a plan and roadmap, that plan will not get business buy-in or funding.

    Top challenges reported by Info-Tech members

    Lack of strategic direction

    • Infrastructure leadership must discover the business goals.

    Time seepage

    • Project time is constantly being tracked incorrectly.

    Technical debt

    • Aging equipment is not proactively cycled out with newer enabling technologies.

    Case Study

    The strategic IT roadmap allows Dura to stay at the forefront of automotive manufacturing.

    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing
    SOURCE: Performance Improvement Partners

    Challenge

    Following the acquisition of Dura, MiddleGround aimed to position Dura as a leader in the automotive industry, leveraging the company's established success spanning over a century.

    However, prior limited investments in technology necessitated significant improvements for Dura to optimize its processes and take advantage of digital advancements.

    Solution

    MiddleGround joined forces with PIP to assess technology risks, expenses, and prospects, and develop a practical IT plan with solutions that fit MiddleGround's value-creation timeline.

    By selecting the top 15 most important IT projects, the companies put together a feasible technology roadmap aimed at advancing Dura in the manufacturing sector.

    Results

    Armed with due diligence reports and a well-defined IT plan, MiddleGround and Dura have a strategic approach to maximizing value creation.

    By focusing on key areas such as analysis, applications, infrastructure and the IT organization, Dura is effectively transforming its operations and shaping the future of the automotive manufacturing industry.

    How well do you know your business strategy?

    A mere 25% of managers
    can list three of the company's
    top five priorities.

    Based on a study from MIT Sloan, shared understanding of strategic directives barely exists beyond the top tiers of leadership.

    An image of a bar graph showing the percentage of leaders able to correctly list a majority of their strategic priorities.

    Take your time back

    Unplanned incident response is a leading cause of the infrastructure time crunch, but so too are nonstandard service requests and service requests that should be projects.

    29%

    Less than one-third of all IT projects finish on time.

    200%

    85% of IT projects average cost overruns of 200% and time overruns of 70%.

    70%

    70% of IT workers feel as though they have too much work and not enough time to do it.

    Source: MIT Sloan

    Inventory Assessment

    Lifecycle

    Refresh strategies are still based on truisms (every three years for servers, every seven years for LAN, etc.) more than risk-based approaches.

    Opportunity Cost

    Assets that were suitable to enable business goals need to be re-evaluated as those goals change.

    See Info-Tech's Manage Your Technical Debt blueprint

    an image of info-tech's Manage your technical debt.

    Key IT strategy initiatives can be categorized in three ways

    IT key initiative plan

    Initiatives collectively support the business goals and corporate initiatives, and improve the delivery of IT services.

    1. Business support
      • Support major business initiatives
      • Each corporate initiative is supported by a major IT project and each project has unique IT challenges that require IT support.
    2. IT excellence
      • Reduce risk and improve IT operational excellence
      • These projects will increase IT process maturity and will systematically improve IT.
    3. Innovation
      • Drive technology innovation
      • These projects will improve future innovation capabilities and decrease risk by increasing technology maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A CIO has three roles: enable business productivity, run an effective IT shop, and drive technology innovation. Your key initiative plan must reflect these three mandates and how IT strives to fulfill them.

    IT must accomplish many things

    Manage
    the lifecycle of aging equipment against current capacity and capability demands.

    Curate
    a portfolio of enabling technologies to meet future capacity and capability demands.

    Initiate
    a realistic schedule of initiatives that supports a diverse range of business goals.

    Adapt
    to executive feedback and changing business goals.

    an image of Info-Tech's Build your strategic roadmap

    Primary and secondary infrastructure drivers

    • Primary driver – The infrastructure component that is directly responsible for enabling change in the business metric.
    • Secondary driver – The infrastructure component(s) that primary drivers rely on.

    (Source: BMC)

    Sample primary and secondary drivers

    Business metric Source(s) Primary infrastructure drivers Secondary infrastructure drivers

    Sales revenue

    Online store

    Website/Server (for digital businesses)

    • Network
    • Data center facilities

    # of new customers

    Call center

    Physical plant cabling in the call center

    • PBX/VOIP server
    • Network
    • Data center facilities

    Info-Tech Insight

    You may not be able to directly influence the primary drivers of the business, but your infrastructure can have a major impact as a secondary driver.

    Info-Tech's approach

    1. Align strategy and goals
    • Establish the scope of your IT strategy by defining IT's mission and vision statements and guiding principles.
  • Envision future and analyze constraints
    • Envision and define your future infrastructure and analyze what is holding you back.
  • Align and build the roadmap
    • Establish a risk framework, identify initiatives, and build your strategic infrastructure roadmap.
  • Communicate and improve the process
    • Communicate the results of your hard work to the right people and establish the groundwork for continual improvement of the process.
  • Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Mission and Vision Statement
    Goal Alignment (Slide 28)

    Construct your vision and mission aligned to the business.

    Mission and Vision Statement

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap tool

    Build initiatives and prioritize them. Build the roadmap.

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap tool

    Infrastructure Domain Study

    What is stealing your time from getting projects done?

    Infrastructure Domain Study

    Initiative Templates Process Maps & Strategy

    Build templates for initiates, build process map, and develop strategies.

    Initiative Templates Process Maps & Strategy

    Key Deliverable

    it infrastructure roadmap template

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Info-Tech's methodology for an infrastructure strategy and roadmap

    1. Align Strategy and Goals

    2. Envision Future and Analyze Constraints

    3. Align and Build the Roadmap

    4. Communicate and Improve the Process

    Phase steps

    1.1 Develop the infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Define the goals

    2.1 Define the future state

    2.2 Analyze constraints

    3.1 Align the roadmap

    3.2 Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Improve the process

    Phase Outcomes

    • Vision statement
    • Mission statement
    • Guiding principles
    • List of goals
    • Financial spend analysis
    • Domain time study
    • Prioritized list of roadblocks
    • Future-state vision document
    • IT and business risk frameworks
    • Technical debt assessment
    • New technology analysis
    • Initiative templates
    • Initiative candidates
    • Roadmap visualization
    • Process schedule
    • Communications strategy
    • process map
    • Infrastructure roadmap report

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Define mission and vision statements and guiding principles to discuss strategy scope.
    Call #3: Brainstorm goals and definition.

    Call #4: Conduct a spend analysis and a time resource study.
    Call #5: Identify roadblocks.

    Call #6: Develop a risk framework and address technical debt.
    Call #7: Identify new initiatives and SWOT analysis.
    Call #8: Visualize and identify initiatives.
    Call #9: Complete shadow IT and initiative finalization.

    Call #10: Identify your audience and communicate.
    Call #11: Improve the process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 0 (Pre-workshop)

    Session 1

    Session 2

    Session 3

    Session 4

    Session 5 (Post-workshop)

    Elicit business context Align Strategy and Goals Envision Future and Analyze Constraints Align and Build the Roadmap Communicate and Improve the Process Wrap-up (offsite)

    0.1 Complete recommended diagnostic programs.
    0.2 Interview key business stakeholders, as needed, to identify business context: business goals, initiatives, and the organization's mission and vision.
    0.3 (Optional) CIO to compile and prioritize IT success stories.

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy.
    1.1.1 Review/validate the business context.
    1.1.2 Construct your mission and vision statements.
    1.1.3 Elicit your guiding principles and finalize IT strategy scope.

    1.2 Business goal alignment
    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis.
    1.2.2 Survey results analysis.
    1.2.3 Brainstorm goals.
    1.2.4 Perform goal association and analysis.

    2.1 Define the future state.
    2.1.1 Conduct an emerging technology discussion.
    2.1.2 Document desired future state.
    2.1.3 Develop a new technology identification process.
    2.1.4 Compete SWOT analysis.

    2.2 Analyze your constraints
    2.2.1 Perform a historical spend analysis.
    2.2.2 Conduct a time study.
    2.2.3 Identify roadblocks.
    .

    3.1 Align the roadmap
    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework.
    3.1.2 Evaluate technical debt.

    3.2 Build the roadmap.
    3.2.1 Build effective initiative templates.
    3.2.2 Visualize.
    3.2.3 Generate new initiatives.
    3.2.4 Repatriate shadow IT initiatives.
    3.2.5 Finalize initiative candidates.

    4.2 Identify the audience
    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences.
    4.1.2 Plan the process.
    4.1.2 Identify supporters and blockers.

    4.2 Improve the process
    4.2.1 Evaluate the value of each process output.
    4.2.2 Brainstorm improvements.
    4.2.3 Set realistic measures.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.
    5.2 Set up time to review workshop deliverables and discuss next steps.

    1. SWOT analysis of current state
    2. Goals cascade
    3. Persona analysis
    1. Vision statement, mission statement, and guiding principles
    2. List of goals
    1. Spend analysis document
    2. Domain time study
    3. Prioritized list of roadblocks
    4. Future state vision document
    1. IT and business risk frameworks
    2. Technical debt assessment
    3. New technology analysis
    4. Initiative templates
    5. Initiative candidates
    1. Roadmap visualization
    2. Process schedule
    3. Communications strategy
    4. Process map
    1. Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Report

    Phase 1

    Align Strategy and Goals

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • How to build IT mission and vision statements
    • How to elicit IT guiding principles
    • How to finalize and communicate your IT strategy scope

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    Step 1.1

    Develop the Infrastructure Strategy

    Activities

    1.1.1 Review/validate the business context

    1.1.2 Construct your mission and vision statements

    1.1.3 Elicit your guiding principles and finalize IT strategy scope

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Business Mission Statement
    • Business Vision Statement
    • Business Goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement
    • Guiding principles

    To complete this phase, you will need:

    Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Use the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template to document the results from the following activities:

    • Mission and Vision Statements
    • Business impact
    • Roadmap

    IT must aim to support the organization's mission and vision

    A mission statement

    • Focuses on today and what an organization does to achieve the mission.
    • Drives the company.
    • Answers: What do we do? Who do we serve? How do we service them?

    "A mission statement focuses on the purpose of the brand; the vision statement looks to the fulfillment of that purpose."

    A vision statement

    • Focuses on tomorrow and what an organization ultimately wants to become.
    • Gives the company direction.
    • Answers: What problems are we solving? Who and what are we changing?

    "A vision statement provides a concrete way for stakeholders, especially employees, to understand the meaning and purpose of your business. However, unlike a mission statement – which describes the who, what, and why of your business – a vision statement describes the desired long-term results of your company's efforts."
    Source: Business News Daily, 2020

    Characteristics of mission and vision statements

    A strong mission statement has the following characteristics:

    • Articulates the IT function's purpose and reason for existence.
    • Describes what the IT function does to achieve its vision.
    • Defines the customers of the IT function.
    • Is:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Concise

    A strong vision statement has the following characteristics:

    • Describes a desired future achievement.
    • Focuses on ends, not means.
    • Communicates promise.
    • Is:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Measurable

    Derive the IT mission and vision statements from the business

    Begin the process by identifying and locating the business mission and vision statements.

    • Corporate websites
    • Business strategy documents
    • Business executives

    Ensure there is alignment between the business and IT statements.

    Note: Mission statements may remain the same unless the IT department's mandate is changing.

    an image showing Business mission, IT mission, Business Vision, and IT Vison.

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 1:

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your business context inputs, specifically the corporate mission statement.
    2. Begin by asking the participants:
        1. What is our job as a team?
        2. What's our goal? How do we align IT to our corporate mission?
        3. What benefit are we bringing to the company and the world?
      1. Ask them to share general thoughts in a check-in.

    Step 2:

    1. Share some examples of IT mission statements.
    2. Example: IT provides innovative product solutions and leadership that drives growth and
      success.
    3. Provide each participant with some time to write their own version of an IT mission statement.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 3:

    This step involves reviewing individual mission statements, combining them, and building one collective mission statement for the team.

    1. Consider the following approach to build a unified mission statement:

    Use the 20x20 rule for group decision-making. Give the group no more than 20 minutes to craft a collective team purpose with no more than 20 words.

    1. As a facilitator, provide guidelines on how to write for the intended audience. Business stakeholders need business language.
    2. Refer to the corporate mission statement periodically and ensure there is alignment.
    3. Document your final mission statement in your ITRG Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 4:

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your business context inputs, specifically the corporate vision statement.
    2. Share one or more examples of vision statements.
    3. Provide participants with sticky notes and writing materials and ask them to work individually for this step.
    4. Ask participants to brainstorm:
      1. What is the desired future state of the IT organization?
      2. How should we work to attain the desired state?
      3. How do we want IT to be perceived in the desired state?
    5. Provide participants with guidelines to build descriptive, compelling, and achievable statements regarding their desired future state.
    6. Regroup as a team and review participant answers.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their purpose (why they exist) to build a mission statement (if one doesn't already exist).

    Step 5:

    1. Ask the team to post their notes on the wall.
    2. Have the team group the words that have a similar meaning or feeling behind them; this will create themes.
    3. When the group is done categorizing the statements into themes, ask if there's anything missing. Did they ensure alignment to the corporate vision statement? Are there any elements missing when considering alignment back to the corporate vision statement?

    Step 6:

    1. Consider each category as a component of your vision statement.
    2. Review each category with participants; define what the behavior looks like when it is being met and what it looks like when it isn't.
    3. As a facilitator, provide guidelines on word-smithing and finessing the language.
    4. Refer to the corporate vision statement periodically and ensure there is alignment.
    5. Document your final mission statement in your IT Strategy Presentation Template.

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    1.1.2 Construct mission and vision statements (cont'd)

    Tips for online facilitation:

    • Pick an online whiteboard tool that allows participants to use a large, zoomable canvas.
    • Set up each topic at a different area of the board; spread them out just like you would do on the walls of a room.
    • Invite participants to zoom in and visit each section and add their ideas as sticky notes once you reach that section of the exercise.
    • If you're not using an online whiteboard, we'd recommend using a collaboration tool such as Google Docs or Teams Whiteboard to collect the information for each step under a separate heading. Invite everyone into the document but be very clear regarding editing rights.
    • Pre-create your screen deck and screen share this with your participants through your videoconferencing software. We'd also recommend sharing this so participants can go through the deck again during the reflection steps.
    • When facilitating group discussion, we'd recommend that participants use non-verbal means to indicate they'd like to speak. You can use tools like Teams' hand-raising tool, a reaction emoji, or have people put their hands up. The facilitator can then invite that person to talk.

    Source: Hyper Island

    Input

    • Business vision statement
    • Business mission statement

    Output

    • IT mission statement
    • IT vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brainstorming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    IT mission statements demonstrate IT's purpose

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statements use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements have the following characteristics:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Are:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample IT Mission Statements:

    • To provide infrastructure, support, and innovation in the delivery of secure, enterprise-grade information technology products and services that enable and empower the workforce at [Company Name].
    • To help fulfill organizational goals, the IT department is committed to empowering business stakeholders with technology and services that facilitate effective processes, collaboration, and communication.
    • The mission of the information technology (IT) department is to build a solid, comprehensive technology infrastructure; to maintain an efficient, effective operations environment; and to deliver high-quality, timely services that support the business goals and objectives of ABC Inc.
    • The IT department has operational, strategic, and fiscal responsibility for the innovation, implementation, and advancement of technology at ABC Inc. in three main areas: network administration and end-user support, instructional services, and information systems. The IT department provides leadership in long-range planning, implementation, and maintenance of information technology across the organization.
    • The IT group is customer-centered and driven by its commitment to management and staff. It oversees services in computing, telecommunications, networking, administrative computing, and technology training.

    Sample mission statements (cont'd)

    • To collaborate and empower our stakeholders through an engaged team and operational agility and deliver innovative technology and services.
    • To empower our stakeholders with innovative technology and services, through collaboration and agility.
    • To collaborate and empower our stakeholder, by delivering innovative technology and services, with an engaged team and operational agility.
    • To partner with departments and be technology leaders that will deliver innovative, secure, efficient, and cost-effective services for our citizens.
    • As a client-centric strategic partner, provide excellence in IM and IT services through flexible business solutions for achieving positive user experience and satisfaction.
    • Develop a high-performing global team that will plan and build a scalable, stable operating environment.
    • Through communication and collaboration, empower stakeholders with innovative technology and services.
    • Build a robust portfolio of technology services and solutions, enabling science-lead and business-driven success.
    • Guided by value-driven decision making, high-performing teams and trusted partners deliver and continually improve secure, reliable, scalable, and reusable services that exceed customer expectations.
    • Engage the business to grow capabilities and securely deliver efficient services to our users and clients.
    • Engage the business to securely deliver efficient services and grow capabilities for our users and clients.

    IT vision statements demonstrate what the IT organization aspires to be

    The IT vision statement communicates a desired future state of the IT organization. The statement is expressed in the present tense. It seeks to articulate the desired role of IT and how IT will be perceived.

    Strong IT vision statements have the following characteristics:

    • Describe a desired future
    • Focus on ends, not means
    • Communicate promise
    • Are:
      • Concise; no unnecessary words
      • Compelling
      • Achievable
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable

    Sample IT vision statements:

    • To be a trusted advisor and partner in enabling business innovation and growth through an engaged IT workforce.
    • The IT organization will strive to become a world-class value center that is a catalyst for innovation.
    • IT is a cohesive, proactive, and disciplined team that delivers innovative technology solutions while demonstrating a strong customer-oriented mindset.
    • Develop and maintain IT and an IT support environment that is secure, stable, and reliable within a dynamic environment.

    Sample vision statements (cont'd)

    • Alignment: To ensure that the IT organizational model and all related operational services and duties are properly aligned with all underlying business goals and objectives. Alignment reflects an IT operation "that makes sense," considering the business served, its interests and its operational imperatives.
    • Engagement: To ensure that all IT vision stakeholders are fully engaged in technology-related planning and the operational parameters of the IT service portfolio. IT stakeholders include the IT performing organization (IT Department), company executives and end-users.
    • Best Practices: To ensure that IT operates in a standardized fashion, relying on practical management standards and strategies properly sized to technology needs and organizational capabilities.
    • Commitment to Customer Service: To ensure that IT services are provided in a timely, high-quality manner, designed to fill the operational needs of the front-line end-users, working within the boundaries established by business interests and technology best practices.

    Quoted From ITtoolkit, 2020

    Case Study

    Acme Corp. was able to construct its IT mission and vison statements by aligning to its corporate mission and vision.

    INDUSTRY: Professional Services
    COMPANY: This case study is based on a real company but was anonymized for use in this research.

    Business

    IT

    Mission

    Vision

    Mission

    Vision

    We help IT leaders achieve measurable results by systematically improving core IT processes, governance, and critical technology projects.

    Acme Corp. will grow to become the largest research firm across the industry by providing unprecedented value to our clients.

    IT provides innovative product solutions and leadership that drives growth and success.

    We will relentlessly drive value to our customers through unprecedented innovation.

    IT guiding principles set the boundaries for your strategy

    Strategic guiding principles advise the IT organization on the boundaries of the strategy.

    Guiding principles are a priori decisions that limit the scope of strategic thinking to what is acceptable organizationally, from budgetary, people, and partnership standpoints. Guiding principles can cover other dimensions, as well.

    Organizational stakeholders are more likely to follow IT principles when a rationale is provided.

    After defining the set of IT principles, ensure that they are all expanded upon with a rationale. The rationale ensures principles are more likely to be followed because they communicate why the principles are important and how they are to be used. Develop the rationale for each IT principle your organization has chosen.

    IT guiding principles = IT strategy boundaries

    Consider these four components when brainstorming guiding principles

    Breadth

    of the IT strategy can span across the eight perspectives: people, process, technology, data, process, sourcing, location, and timing.

    Defining which of the eight perspectives is in scope for the IT strategy is crucial to ensuring the IT strategy will be comprehensive, relevant, and actionable.

    Depth

    of coverage refers to the level of detail the IT strategy will go into for each perspective. Info-Tech recommends that depth should go to the initiative level (i.e. individual projects).

    Organizational coverage

    will determine which part of the organization the IT strategy will cover.

    Planning horizon

    of the IT strategy will dictate when the target state should be reached and the length of the roadmap.

    Consider these criteria when brainstorming guiding principle statements

    Approach focused IT principles are focused on the approach, i.e. how the organization is built, transformed, and operated, as opposed to what needs to be built, which is defined by both functional and non-functional requirements.
    Business relevant Create IT principles that are specific to the organization. Tie IT principles to the organization's priorities and strategic aspirations.
    Long lasting Build IT principles that will withstand the test of time.
    Prescriptive Inform and direct decision-making with IT principles that are actionable. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.
    Verifiable If compliance can't be verified, the principle is less likely to be followed.
    Easily digestible IT principles must be clearly understood by everyone in IT and by business stakeholders. IT principles aren't a secret manuscript of the IT team. IT principles should be succinct; wordy principles are hard to understand and remember.
    Followed

    Successful IT principles represent a collection of beliefs shared among enterprise stakeholders. IT principles must be continuously reinforced to all stakeholders to achieve and maintain buy-in.

    In organizations where formal policy enforcement works well, IT principles should be enforced through appropriate governance processes.

    Review ten universal IT principles to determine if your organization wishes to adopt them

    IT principle name

    IT principle statement

    1. Enterprise value focus We aim to provide maximum long-term benefits to the enterprise as a whole while optimizing total costs of ownership and risks.
    2. Fit for purpose We maintain capability levels and create solutions that are fit for purpose without over engineering them.
    3. Simplicity We choose the simplest solutions and aim to reduce operational complexity of the enterprise.
    4. Reuse > buy > build We maximize reuse of existing assets. If we can't reuse, we procure externally. As a last resort, we build custom solutions.
    5. Managed data We handle data creation, modification, and use enterprise-wide in compliance with our data governance policy.
    6. Controlled technical diversity We control the variety of technology platforms we use.
    7. Managed security We manage security enterprise-wide in compliance with our security governance policy.
    8. Compliance to laws and regulations We operate in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
    9. Innovation We seek innovative ways to use technology for business advantage.
    10. Customer centricity We deliver best experiences to our customers with our services and products.

    1.1.3 Elicit guiding principles

    1 hour

    Objective: Generate ideas for guiding principle statements with silent sticky note writing.

    1. Gather the IT strategy creation team and revisit your mission and vision statements.
    2. Ask the group to brainstorm answers individually, silently writing their ideas on separate sticky notes. Provide the brainstorming criteria from the previous slide to all team members. Allow the team to put items on separate notes that can later be shuffled and sorted as distinct thoughts.
    3. After a set amount of time, ask the members of the group to stick their notes to the whiteboard and quickly present them. Categorize all ideas into four major buckets: breadth, depth, organizational coverage, and planning horizon. Ideally, you want one guiding principle to describe each of the four components.
    4. If there are missing guiding principles in any category or anyone's items inspire others to write more, they can stick those up on the wall too, after everyone has presented.
    5. Discuss and finalize your IT guiding principles.
    6. Document your guiding principles in the IT Strategy Presentation Template in Section 1.

    Source: Hyper Island

    Download the ITRG IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Four components for eliciting guiding principles
    • Mission and vision statements

    Output

    • IT guiding principles
    • IT strategy scope

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Paper
    • Collaboration/brain-storming tool (whiteboard, flip chart, digital equivalent)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Senior IT Team

    Guiding principle examples

    • Alignment: Our IT decisions will align with [our organization's] strategic plan.
    • Resources: We will allocate cyber-infrastructure resources based on providing the greatest value and benefit for [the community].
    • User Focus: User needs will be a key component in all IT decisions.
    • Collaboration: We will work within and across organizational structures to meet strategic goals and identify opportunities for innovation and improvement.
    • Transparency: We will be transparent in our decision making and resource use.
    • Innovation: We will value innovative and creative thinking.
    • Data Stewardship: We will provide a secure but accessible data environment.
    • IT Knowledge and Skills: We will value technology skills development for the IT community.
    • Drive reduced costs and improved services
    • Deploy packaged apps – do not develop – retain business process knowledge expertise – reduce apps portfolio
    • Standardize/Consolidate infrastructure with key partners
    • Use what we sell, and help sell
    • Drive high-availability goals: No blunders
    • Ensure hardened security and disaster recovery
    • Broaden skills (hard and soft) across the workforce
    • Improve business alignment and IT governance

    Quoted From: Office of Information Technology, 2014; Future of CIO, 2013

    Case Study

    Acme Corp. elicited guiding principles that set the scope of its IT strategy for FY21.

    INDUSTRY: Professional Services
    COMPANY: Acme Corp.

    The following guiding principles define the values that drive IT's strategy in FY23 and provide the criteria for our 12-month planning horizon.

    • We will focus on big-ticket items during the next 12 months.
    • We will keep the budget within 5%+/- YOY.
    • We will insource over outsource.
    • We will develop a cloud-first technology stack.

    Finalize your IT strategy scope

    Your mission and vision statements and your guiding principles should be the first things you communicate on your IT strategy document.

    Why is this important?

    • Communicating these elements shows how IT supports the corporate direction.
    • The vision and mission statements will clearly articulate IT's aspirations and purpose.
    • The guiding principles will clearly articulate how IT plans to support the business strategically.
    • These elements set expectations with stakeholders for the rest of your strategy.

    Input information into the IT Strategy Presentation Template.

    an image showing the IT Strategy Scope.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Established the scope of your IT strategy

    • Constructed the IT mission statement to communicate the IT organization's reason for being.
    • Constructed the IT vision statement to communicate the desired future state of the IT organization.
    • Elicited IT's guiding principles to communicate the overall scope and time horizon for the strategy.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Step 1.2

    Business Goal Alignment

    Activities

    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis

    1.2.2 Survey results analysis

    1.2.3 Goal brainstorming

    1.2.4 Goal association and analysis

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Last year's accomplished project list
    • Business unit input source list
    • Goal list
    • In-flight initiatives list

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Solution or Enterprise Architecture
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Intake analysis
    • Goal list
    • Initiative-to-goal map

    Identify who is expecting what from the infrastructure

    "Typically, IT thinks in an IT first, business second, way: 'I have a list of problems and if I solve them, the business will benefit.' This is the wrong way of thinking. The business needs to be thought of first, then IT."

    – Fred Chagnon, Infrastructure Director,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you're not soliciting input from or delivering on the needs of the various departments in your company, then who is? Be explicit and track how you communicate with each individual unit within your company.

    Mature project portfolio management and enterprise architecture practices are no substitute for understanding your business clientele.

    It may not be a democracy, but listening to everyone's voice is an essential step toward generating a useful roadmap.

    Building good infrastructure requires an understanding of how it will be used. Explicit consultation with stakeholders maximizes a roadmap's usefulness and holds the enterprise accountable in future roadmap iterations as goals change.

    Who are the customers for infrastructure?

    Internal customer examples:

    • Network Operations manager
    • IT Systems manager
    • Webmaster
    • Security manager

    External customer examples:

    • Director of Sales
    • Operations manager
    • Applications manager
    • Clients
    • Partners and consultants
    • Regulators/government

    1.2.1 Intake identification and analysis

    1 hour

    The humble checklist is the single most effective tool to ensure we don't forget someone or something:

    1. Have everyone write down their top five completed projects from last year – one project per sticky note.
    2. Organize everyone's sticky notes on a whiteboard according to input source – did these projects come from the PMO? Directly from a BRM? Service request? VP or LoB management?
    3. Make a MECE list of these sources on the left-hand side of a whiteboard.
    4. On the right-hand side list all the departments or functional business units within the company.
    5. Draw lines from right to left indicating which business units use which input source to request work.
    6. Optional: Rate the efficacy of each input channel – what is the success rate of projects per channel in terms of time, budget, and functionality?

    Discussion:

    1. How clearly do projects and initiatives arrive at infrastructure to be acted on? Do they follow the predictable formal process with all the needed information or is it more ad hoc?
    2. Can we validate that business units are using the correct input channel to request the appropriate work? Does infrastructure have to spend more time validating the requests of any one channel?
    3. Can we identify business units that are underserved? How about overserved? Infrastructure initiatives tend to be near universal in effect – are we forgetting anyone?
    4. Are all these methods passive (order taking), or is there a process for infrastructure to suggest an initiative or project?

    Input

    • Last year's accomplished project list

    Output

    • Work requested workflow and map

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Case Study

    Building IT governance and digital infrastructure for tech-enabled student experiences

    INDUSTRY: Education
    COMPANY: Collegis Education

    Challenge

    In 2019, Saint Francis University decided to expand its online program offering to reach students outside of its market.

    It had to first transform its operations to deliver a high-quality, technology-enabled student experience on and off campus. The remote location of the campus posed power outages, Wi-Fi issues, and challenges in attracting and retaining the right staff to help the university achieve its goals.

    It began working with an IT consulting firm to build a long-term strategic roadmap.

    Solution

    The consultant designed a strategic multi-year roadmap for digital transformation that would prioritize developing infrastructure to immediately improve the student experience and ultimately enable the university to scale its online programs. The consultant worked with school leadership to establish a virtual CIO to oversee the IT department's strategy and operations. The virtual CIO quickly became a key advisor to the president and board, identifying gaps between technology initiatives and enrollment and revenue targets. St. Francis staff also transitioned to the consultant's technology team, allowing the university to alleviate its talent acquisition and retention challenges.

    Results

    • $200,000 in funds reallocated to help with upgrades due to streamlined technology infrastructure
    • Updated card access system for campus staff and students
    • Active directory implementation for a secure and strong authentication technology
    • An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) backup is installed to ensure power continues in the event of a power outage
    • Upgrade to a reliable, campus-wide Wi-Fi network
    • Behind-the-scenes upgrades like state-of-the-art data centers to stabilize aging technology for greater reliability

    Track your annual activity by business unit – not by input source

    A simple graph showing the breakdown of projects by business unit is an excellent visualization of who is getting the most from infrastructure services.

    Show everyone in the organization that the best way to get anything done is by availing themselves of the roadmap process.

    An image of two bar graphs, # of initiatives requested
by customer; # of initiatives proposed to customer.

    Enable technology staff to engage in business storytelling by documenting known goals in a framework

    Without a goal framework

    Technology-focused IT staff are notoriously disconnected from the business process and are therefore often unable to explain the outcomes of their projects in terms that are meaningful to the business.

    With a goal framework

    When business, IT, and infrastructure goals are aligned, the business story writes itself as you follow the path of cascading goals upward.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    So many organizations we speak with don't have goals written down. This rarely means that the goals aren't known, rather that they're not clearly communicated.

    When goals aren't clear, personal agendas can take precedence. This is what often leads to the disconnect between what the business wants and what IT is delivering.

    1.2.2 Survey and results analysis

    1 hour

    Infrastructure succeeds by effectively scaling shared resources for the common good. Sometimes that is a matter of aggregating similarities, sometimes by recognizing where specialization is required.

    1. Have every business unit provide their top three to five current goals or objectives for their department. Emphasize that you are requesting their operational objectives, not just the ones they think IT may be able to help them with.
    2. Put each goal on a sticky note (optional: use a unique sticky note or marker color for each department) and place them on a whiteboard.
    3. Group the sticky notes according to common themes.
    4. Rank each grouping according to number of occurrences.

    Discussion:

    1. This is very democratic. Do certain departments' goals carry more weight more than others?
    2. What is the current business prioritization process? Do the results of our activity match with the current published output of this process?
    3. Consider each business goal in the context of infrastructure activity or technology feature or capability. As infrastructure is a lift function existing only to serve the business, it is important to understand our world in context.

    Examples: The VP of Operations is looking to reduce office rental costs over the next three years. The VP of Sales is focused on increasing the number of face-to-face customer interactions. Both can potentially be served by IT activities and technologies that increase mobility.

    Input

    • Business unit input source list

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business goals

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    1.2.3 Goal brainstorming – Affinity diagramming exercise

    1 hour

    Clarify how well you understand what the business wants.

    1. Ask each participant to consider: "What are the top three priorities of the company [this period]?" They should consider not what they think the priorities should be, but their understanding of what business leadership's priorities actually are.
    2. Have each participant write down their three priorities on sticky notes – one per note.
    3. Select a moderator from the group – not the infrastructure leader or the CIO. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    4. Have each participant place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    5. The moderator will assist each participant in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    6. Groups that become overly large may be broken into smaller, more precise themes.
    7. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes, and the groups have been arranged and rearranged, you should have a visual representation of infrastructure's understanding of the business' priorities.
    8. Let the infrastructure leader and/or CIO place their sticky notes last.

    Discussion:

    Is there a lot of agreement within the group? What does it mean if there are 10 or 15 groups with equal numbers of sticky notes? What does it mean if there are a few top groups and dozens of small outliers?

    How does the group's understanding compare with that of the Director and/or CIO?

    What mechanisms are in place for the business to communicate their goals to infrastructure? Are they effective? Does the team take the time to reimagine those goals and internalize them?

    What does it mean if infrastructure's understanding differs from the business?

    Input

    • Business unit input source list

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business goals

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Additional Activity

    Now that infrastructure has a consensus on what it thinks the business' goals are, suggest a meeting with leadership to validate this understanding. Once the first picture is drawn, a 30-minute meeting can help clear up any misconceptions.

    Build your own framework or start with these three root value drivers

    With a framework of cascading goals in place, a roadmap is a Rosetta Stone. Being able to map activities back to governance objectives allows you to demonstrate value regardless of the audience you are addressing.

    An image of the framework for developing a roadmap using three root value drivers.

    (Info-Tech, Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy 2022)

    1.2.4 Goal association exercise and analysis

    1 hour

    Wherever possible use the language of your customers to avoid confusion, but at least ensure that everyone in infrastructure is using a common language.

    1. Take your business strategy or IT strategy or survey response (Activity 1.2.3) or Info-Tech's fundamental goals list (strategic agility, improved cash flow, innovate product, safety, standardize end-user experience) and write them across the top of a whiteboard.
    2. Have everyone write, on a sticky note, their current in-flight initiatives – one per sticky note.
    3. Have each participant then place each of their sticky notes on the whiteboard and draw a line from the initiative to the goal it supports.
    4. The rest of the group should challenge any relationships that seem unsupported or questionable.

    Discussion:

    1. How many goals are you supporting? Are there too many? Are you doing enough to support the right goals?
    2. Is there a shared understanding of the business goals among the infrastructure staff? Or, do questions about meaning keep coming up?
    3. Do you have initiatives that are difficult to express in terms of business goals? Do you have a lot of them or just a few?

    Input

    • Goal list
    • In-flight initiatives list

    Output

    • Initiatives-to-goals map

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year.

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 2

    Envision Future and Analyze Constraints

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine from a greenfield perspective what the future state looks like.
    • Do SWOT analysis on technology you may plan to use in the future.
    • Complete a time study.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Step 2.1

    Define the future state

    Activities

    2.1.1 Define your future infrastructure vision

    2.1.2 Document desired future state

    2.1.3 Develop a new technology identification process

    2.1.4 Conduct a SWOT analysis

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Emerging technology interest

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team
    • External SMEs

    Outcomes of this step

    • Technology discovery process
    • Technology assessment process
    • Future state vision document

    Future state discussion

    "Very few of us are lucky enough to be one of the first few employees in a new organization. Those of you who get to plan the infrastructure with a blank slate and can focus all of your efforts on doing things right the first time."

    BMC, 2018

    "A company's future state is ultimately defined as the greater vision for the business. It's where you want to be, your long-term goal in terms of the ever-changing state of technology and how that applies to your present-day business."
    "Without a definitive future state, a company will often find themselves lacking direction, making it harder to make pivotal decisions, causing misalignment amongst executives, and ultimately hindering the progression and growth of a company's mission."
    Source: Third Stage Consulting

    "When working with digital technologies, it is imperative to consider how such technologies can enhance the solution. The future state should communicate the vision of how digital technologies will enhance the solutions, deliver value, and enable further development toward even greater value creation."
    Source: F. Milani

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define your infrastructure roadmap as if you had a blank slate – no constraints, no technical debt, and no financial limitations. Imagine your future infrastructure and let that vision drive your roadmap.

    Expertise is not innate; it requires effort and research

    Evaluating new enterprise technology is a process of defining it, analyzing it, and sourcing it.

    • Understand what a technology is in order to have a common frame of reference for discussion. Just as important, understand what it is not.
    • Conduct an internal and external analysis of the technology including an adoption case study.
    • Provide an overview of the vendor landscape, identifying the leading players in the market and how they differentiate their offerings.

    This is not intended to be a thesis grade research project, nor an onerous duty. Most infrastructure practitioners came to the field because of an innate excitement about technology! Harness that excitement and give them four to eight hours to indulge themselves.

    An output of approximately four slides per technology candidate should be sufficient to decided if moving to PoC or pilot is warranted.

    Including this material in the roadmap helps you control the technology conversation with your audience.

    Info-Tech Best Practices

    Don't start from scratch. Recall the original sources from your technology watchlist. Leverage vendors and analyst firms (such as Info-Tech) to give the broad context, letting you focus instead on the specifics relevant to your business.

    Channel emerging technologies to ensure the rising tide floats all boats rather than capsizing your business

    Adopting the wrong new technology can be even more dangerous than failing to adopt any new technology.

    Implementing every new promising technology would cost prodigious amounts of money and time. Know the costs before choosing what to invest in.

    The risk of a new technology failing is acceptable. The risk of that failure disrupting adjacent core functions is unacceptable. Vet potential technologies to ensure they can be safely integrated.

    Best practices for new technologies are nonexistent, standards are in flux, and use cases are fuzzy. Be aware of the unforeseen that will negatively affect your chances of a successful implementation.

    "Like early pioneers crossing the American plains, first movers have to create their own wagon trails, but later movers can follow in the ruts."
    Harper Business, 2014

    Info-Tech Insight

    The right technology for someone else can easily be the wrong technology for your business.

    Even with a mature Enterprise Architecture practice, wrong technology bets can happen. Minimize the chance of this occurrence by making selection an infrastructure-wide activity. Leverage the practical knowledge of the day-to-day operators.

    First Mover

    47% failure rate

    Fast Follower

    8% failure rate

    2.1.1 Create your future infrastructure vision

    1 hour

    Objective: Help teams define their future infrastructure state (assuming zero constraints or limitations).

    1. Ask each participant to ponder the question: "How would the infrastructure look if there were no limitations?" They should consider all aspects of their infrastructure but keep in mind the infrastructure vision and mission statements from phase one, as well as the business goals.
    2. Have each participant write down their ideas on sticky notes – one per note.
    3. Select a moderator and a scribe from the group – not the infrastructure leader or the CIO. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their sticky notes on the whiteboard. The scribe will summarize the results in short statements at the end.
    4. Have each participant place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    5. The moderator will assist each participant in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    6. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes and groups have been arranged and rearranged, you should have a visual representation of infrastructure's understanding of the business' priorities.
    7. Let the infrastructure leader and/or CIO place their sticky notes last.

    Discussion:

    1. Assume a blank slate as a starting point. No technical debt or financial constraints; nothing holding you back.
    2. Can SaaS, PaaS, or other cloud-based offerings play a role in this future utopia?
    3. Do vendors play a larger or smaller role in your future infrastructure vision?

    Download the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template and document your mission and vision statements in Section 1.

    Input

    • Thoughts and ideas about how the future infrastructure should look.

    Output

    • Future state vision

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.1.1 Document your future state vision (cont'd)

    Objective: Help teams define their future infrastructure state (assuming zero constraints or limitations).

    1 hour

    Steps:

    1. The scribe will take the groups of suggestions and summarize them in a statement or two, briefly describing the infrastructure in that group.
    2. The statements should be recorded on Tab 2 of the Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Tool.

    Discussion:

    • Should the points be listed in any specific order?
    • Include all suggestions in the summary. Remember this is a blank slate with no constraints, and no idea is higher or lower in weight at this stage.
    Infrastructure Future State Vision
    Item Focus Area Future Vision
    1 Email Residing on Microsoft 365
    2 Servers Hosted in cloud - nothing on prem.
    3 Endpoints virtual desktops on Microsoft Azure
    4 Endpoint hardware Chromebooks
    5 Network internet only
    6 Backups cloud based but stored in multiple cloud services
    7

    Download Info-Tech's Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Tool and document your future state vision in the Infrastructure Future State tab.

    Input

    • Thoughts and ideas about how the future infrastructure should look.

    Output

    • Future state vision

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.1.2 Identification and association exercise

    1 hour

    Formalize what is likely an ad hoc process.

    1. Brainstorm with the group a list of external sources they are currently using to stay abreast of the market.
    2. Organize this list on the left-hand side of a whiteboard, in vendor and vendor-neutral groups.
      1. For each item in the list ask a series of questions:
      2. Is this a push or pull source?
      3. Is this source suited to individual or group consumption?
      4. What is the frequency of this source?
    3. What is the cost of this source to the company?
    4. On the right-hand side of the whiteboard brainstorm a list of internal mechanisms for sharing new technology information. Ask about the audience, distribution mode, and frequency for each of those mechanisms.
    5. Map which of the external sources make it over to internal distribution.

    Discussion:

    1. Are we getting the most value out of our high-cost conferences? Does that information make it from the attendees to the rest of the team?
    2. Do we share information only within our domains? Or across the whole infrastructure practice?
    3. Do we have sufficient diversity of sources? Are we in danger of believing one vendor's particular market interpretation?
    4. How do we select new technologies to explore further? Make it fun – upvotes, for example.

    Input

    • Team knowledge
    • Conference notes
    • Expense reports

    Output

    • Internal socialization process
    • Tech briefings & repository

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Info-Tech Best Practices

    It is impractical for everyone to present their tech briefing at the monthly meeting. But you want to avoid a one-to-many exercise. Keep the presenter a secret until called on. Those who do not present live can still contribute their material to the technology watchlist database.

    Analyze new technologies for your future state

    Four to eight hours of research per technology can uncover a wealth of relevant information and prepare the infrastructure team for a robust discussion. Key research elements include:

    • Précis: A single page or slide that describes the technology, outlines some of the vendors, and explores the value proposition.
    • SWOT Analysis:
      • Strengths and weaknesses: What does the technology inherently do well (e.g. lots of features) and what does it do poorly (e.g. steep learning curve)?
      • Opportunities and threats: What capabilities can the technology enable (e.g. build PCs faster, remote sensing)? Why would we not want to exploit this technology (e.g. market volatility, M&As)

    a series of four screenshots from the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template

    Download the IT Infrastructure Strategy and Roadmap Report Template slides 21, 22, 23 for sample output.

    Position infrastructure as the go-to source for information about new technology

    One way or another, tech always seems to finds its way into infrastructure's lap. Better to stay in front and act as stewards rather than cleanup crew.

    Beware airline magazine syndrome!

    Symptoms

    Pathology
    • Leadership speaking in tech buzzwords
    • Urgent meetings to discuss vaguely defined topics
    • Fervent exclamations of "I don't care how – just get it done!"
    • Management showing up on at your doorstep needing help with their new toy

    Outbreaks tend to occur in close proximity to

    • Industry trade shows
    • Excessive executive travel
    • Vendor BRM luncheons or retreats with leadership
    • Executive golf outings with old college roommates

    Effective treatment options

    1. Targeted regular communication with a technology portfolio analysis customized to the specific goals of the business.
    2. Ongoing PoC and piloting efforts with detailed results reporting.

    While no permanent cure exists, regular treatment makes this chronic syndrome manageable.

    Keep your roadmap horizon in mind

    Technology doesn't have to be bleeding edge. New-to-you can have plenty of value.

    You want to present a curated landscape of technologies, demonstrating that you are actively maintaining expertise in your chosen field.

    Most enterprise IT shops buy rather than develop their technology, which means they want to focus effort on what is market available. The outcome is that infrastructure sponsors and delivers new technologies whose capabilities and features will help the business achieve its goals on this roadmap.

    If you want to think more like a business disruptor or innovator, we suggest working through the blueprint Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.
    Explore technology five to ten years into the future!

    a quadrant analysis comparing innovation and transformation, as well as two images from Exploit Disruptive Infrastructure Technology.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The ROI of any individual effort is difficult to justify – in aggregate, however, the enterprise always wins!
    Money spent on Google Glass in 2013 seemed like vanity. Certainly, this wasn't enterprise-ready technology. But those early experiences positioned some visionary firms to quickly take advantage of augmented reality in 2018. Creative research tends to pay off in unexpected and unpredictable ways.
    .

    2.1.3 Working session, presentation, and feedback

    1 hour

    Complete a SWOT analysis with future state technology.

    The best research hasn't been done in isolation since the days of da Vinci.

    1. Divide the participants into small groups of at least four people.
    2. Further split those groups into two teams – the red team and the white team.
    3. Assign a technology candidate from the last exercise to each group. Ideally the group should have some initial familiarity with the technology and/or space.
    4. The red team from each group will focus on the weaknesses and threats of the technology. The white team will focus on the strengths and opportunities of the technology.
    5. Set a timer and spend the next 30-40 minutes completing the SWOT analysis.
    6. Have each group present their analysis to the larger team. Encourage conversation and debate. Capture and refine the understanding of the analysis.
    7. Reset with the next technology candidate. Have the participants switch teams within their groups.
    8. Continue until you've exhausted your technology candidates.

    Discussion:

    1. Does working in a group make for better research? Why?
    2. Do you need specific expertise in order to evaluate a technology? Is an outsider (non-expert) view sometimes valuable?
    3. Is it easier to think of the positive or the negative qualities of a technology? What about the internal or external implications?

    Input

    • Technology candidates

    Output

    • Technology analysis including SWOT

    Materials

    • Projector
    • Templates
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Step 2.2

    Constraints analysis

    Activities

    2.2.1 Historical spend analysis

    2.2.2 Conduct a time study

    2.2.3 Identify roadblocks

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Historical spend and staff numbers
    • Organizational design identification and thought experiment
    • Time study
    • Roadblock brainstorming session
    • Prioritization exercise

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Financial leader
    • HR Leader
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends
    • Domain time study
    • Prioritized roadblock list

    2.2.1 Historical spend analysis

    "A Budget is telling your money where to go, instead of wondering where it went."
    -David Ramsay

    "Don't tell me where your priorities are. Show me where you spend your money and I'll tell you what they are"
    -James Frick, Due.com

    Annual IT budgeting aligns with business goals
    a circle showing 68%, broken down into 50% and 18%

    50% of businesses surveyed see that improvements are necessary for IT budgets to align to business goals, while 18% feel they require significant improvements to align to business goals
    Source: ITRG Diagnostics 2022

    Challenges in IT spend visibility

    68%

    Visibility of all spend data for on-prem, SaaS and cloud environments
    Source: Flexera

    The challenges that keep IT leaders up at night

    47%

    Lack of visibility in resource usage and cost
    Source: BMC, 2021

    2.2.1 Build a picture of your financial spending and staffing trends

    Follow the steps below to generate a visualization so you can start the conversation:

    1 hour

    1. Open the Info-Tech Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool.
    2. The Instructions tab will provide guidance, or you can follow the instructions below.
    3. Insert values into the appropriate uncolored blocks in the first 4 rows of the Spend Record Entry tab to reflect the amount spent on IT OpEx, IT CapEx, or staff numbers for the present year (budgeted) as well as the previous five years.
    4. Data input populates cells in subsequent rows to quickly reveal spending ratios.

    an image of the timeline table from the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool

    Download the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool
    ( additional Deep Dive available if required)

    Input

    • Historical spend and staff numbers

    Output

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends for your organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Infrastructure leader
    • Financial leader
    • HR leader

    2.2.1 Build a picture of your financial spending and staffing trends (cont'd)

    Continue with the steps below to generate a visualization so you can start the conversation.

    1 hour

    1. Select tab 3 (Results) to reveal a graphical analysis of your data.
    2. Trends are shown in graphs for OpEx, CapEx, and staffing levels as well as comparative graphs to show broader trends between multiple spend and staffing areas.
    3. Some observations worth noting may include the following:
      • Is OpEx spending increasing over time or decreasing?
      • Is CapEx increasing or decreasing?
      • Are OpEx and CapEx moving in the same directions?
      • Are IT staff to total staff ratios increasing or decreasing?
      • Trends will continue in the same direction unless changes are made.

    Download the Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Analysis Tool
    ( additional Deep Dive available if required)

    Input

    • Historical spend and staff numbers

    Output

    • OpEx, CapEx, and staffing trends for your organization

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Financial Spend Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Infrastructure leader
    • Financial leader
    • HR leader

    Consider perceptions held by the enterprise when dividing infrastructure into domains

    2.2.2 Conduct a time study

    Internal divisions that seem important to infrastructure may have little or even negative value when it comes to users accessing their services.

    Domains are the logical divisions of work within an infrastructure practice. Historically, the organization was based around physical assets: servers, storage, networking, and end-user devices. Staff had skills they applied according to specific best practices using physical objects that provided functionality (computing power, persistence, connectivity, and interface).

    Modern enterprises may find it more effective to divide according to activity (analytics, programming, operations, and security) or function (customer relations, learning platform, content management, and core IT). As a rule, look to your organizational chart; managers responsible for buying, building, deploying, or supporting technologies should each be responsible for their own domain.

    Regardless of structure, poor organization leads to silos of marginally interoperable efforts working against each other, without focus on a common goal. Clearly defined domains ensure responsibility and allow for rapid, accurate, and confident decision making.

    • Server
    • Network
    • Storage
    • End User
    • DevOps
    • Analytics
    • Core IT
    • Security

    Info-Tech Insight

    The medium is the message. Do stakeholders talk about switches or storage or services? Organizing infrastructure to match its external perception can increase communication effectiveness and improve alignment.

    Case Study

    IT infrastructure that makes employees happier

    INDUSTRY: Services
    SOURCE: Network Doctor

    Challenge

    Atlas Electric's IT infrastructure was very old and urgently needed to be refreshed. Its existing server hardware was about nine years old and was becoming unstable. The server was running Windows 2008 R2 server operating systems that was no longer supported by Microsoft; security updates and patches were no longer available. They also experienced slowdowns on many older PCs.

    Recommendations for an upgrade were not approved due to budgetary constraints. Recommendations for upgrading to virtual servers were approved following a harmful phishing attack.

    Solution

    The following improvements to their infrastructure were implemented.

    • Installing a new physical host server running VMWare ESXi virtualization software and hosting four virtual servers.
    • Migration of data and applications to new virtual servers.
    • Upgrading networking equipment and deploying new relays, switches, battery backups, and network management.
    • New server racks to host new hardware.

    Results

    Virtualization, consolidating servers, and desktops have made assets more flexible and simpler to manage.

    Improved levels of efficiency, reliability, and productivity.

    Enhanced security level.

    An upgraded backup and disaster recovery system has improved risk management.

    Optimize where you spend your time by doing a time study

    Infrastructure activity is limited generally by only two variables: money and time. Money is in the hands of the CFO, which leaves us a single variable to optimize.

    Not all time is spent equally, nor is it equally valuable. Analysis lets us communicate with others and gives us a shared framework to decide where our priorities lie.

    There are lots of frameworks to help categorize our activities. Stephen Covey (Seven Habits of Highly Effective People) describes a four-quadrant system along the axes of importance and urgency. Gene Kim, through his character Erik in The Phoenix Project,speaks instead of business projects, internal IT projects, changes, and unplanned work.

    We propose a similar four-category system.

    Project Maintenance

    Administrative

    Reactive

    Planned activity spent pursuing a business objective

    Planned activity spent on the upkeep of existing IT systems

    Planned activity required as a condition of employment

    Unplanned activity requiring immediate response

    This is why we are valuable to our company

    We have it in our power to work to reduce these three in order to maximize our time available for projects

    Survey and analysis

    Perform a quick time study.

    Verifiable data sources are always preferred but large groups can hold each other's inherent biases in check to get a reasonable estimate.

    1 hour

    1. Organize the participants into the domain groups established earlier.
    2. On an index card have each participant independently write down the percentage of time they think their entire domain (not themselves personally) spends during the average month, quarter, or year on:
      1. Admin
      2. Reactive work
      3. Maintenance
    3. Draw a matrix on the whiteboard; collect the index cards and transcribe the results from participants into the matrix.
    4. Add up the three reported time estimates and subtract from 100 – the result is the percentage of time available for/spent on project work.

    Discussion

    1. Certain domains should have higher percentages of reactive work (think Service Desk and Network Operations Center) – can we shift work around to optimize resources?
    2. Why is reactive work the least desirable type? Could we reduce our reactive work by increasing our maintenance work?
    3. From a planning perspective, what are the implications of only having x% of time available for project work?
    4. Does it feel like backing into the project work from adding the other three together provides a reasonable assessment?

    Input

    • Domain groups

    Output

    • Time study

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Quickly and easily evaluate all your infrastructure

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 2, Capacity Analysis

    In order to quickly and easily build some visualizations for the eventual final report, Info-Tech has developed the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool.

    • Up to five infrastructure domains are supported.
      • For practices that cannot be reasonably collapsed into five domains, multiple copies of the tool can be used and manually stitched together.
    • The tool can be used in either an absolute (total number) or relative mode (percentage of available).
    • By design we specifically don't ask for a project work figure but rather calculate it based on other values.
    • For everything but miscellaneous duties, hard data sources can (and where appropriate should) be leveraged.
      • Reactive work – service desk tool
      • Project work – project management tool
      • Maintenance work – logs or ITSM tool
    • Individual domains' values are calculated, as well as the overall breakdown for the infrastructure practice.
    • Even these rough estimates will be useful during the planning steps throughout the rest of the roadmap process.

    an image of the source capacity analysis page from tab 2 of the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Please note that this tool requires Microsoft's Power Pivot add-in to be installed if you are using Excel 2010 or 2013. The scatter plot labels on tabs 5 and 8 may not function correctly in Excel 2010.

    Build your roadmap from both the top and the bottom for best results

    Strong IT strategy favors top-down: activities enabling clearly dictated goals. The bottom-up approach aggregates ongoing activities into goals.

    Systematic approach

    External stakeholders prioritize a list of goals requiring IT initiatives to achieve.

    Roadblocks:

    • Multitudes of goals easily overwhelm scant IT resources.
    • Unglamorous yet vital maintenance activities get overlooked.
    • Goals are set without awareness of IT capacity or capabilities.

    Organic approach

    Practitioners aggregate initiatives into logical groups and seek to align them to one or more business goals.

    Roadblocks:

    • Pet initiatives can be perpetuated based on cult of personality rather than alignment to business goals.
    • Funding requests can fall flat when competing against other business units for executive support.

    A successful roadmap respects both approaches.

    an image of two arrows, intersecting with the words Infrastructure Roadmap with the top arrow labeled Systematic, and the bottom arrow being labeled Organic.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Perfection is anathema to practicality. Draw the first picture and not only expect but welcome conflicting feedback! Socialize it and drive the conversation forward to a consensus.

    2.2.3 Brainstorming – Affinity diagramming

    Identify the systemic roadblocks to executing infrastructure projects

    1 hour

    Affinity diagramming is a form of structured brainstorming that works well with larger groups and provokes discussion.

    1. Have each participant write down their top five impediments to executing their projects from last year – one roadblock per sticky note.
    2. Once everyone has written their top five, select a moderator from the group. The moderator will begin by placing (and explaining) their five sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    3. Have each participant then place and explain their sticky notes on the whiteboard.
    4. The moderator will assist participants in grouping sticky notes together based on theme.
    5. Groups that have become overly large may be broken into smaller, more precise themes.
    6. Once everyone has placed their sticky notes, you should be able to visually identify the greatest or most common roadblocks the group perceives.

    Discussion

    Categorize each roadblock identified as either internal or external to infrastructure's control.

    Attempt to understand the root cause of each roadblock. What would you need to ask for in order to remove the roadblock?

    Additional Research

    Also called the KJ Method (after its inventor, Jiro Kawakita, a 1960s Japanese anthropologist), this activity helps organize large amounts of data into groupings based on natural relationships while reducing many social biases.

    Input

    • Last years initiatives and their roadblocks

    Output

    • List of refined Roadblocks

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard & markers

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    2.2.4 Prioritization exercise – Card sorting

    Choose your priorities wisely.

    Which roadblocks do you need to work on? How do you establish a group sense of these priorities? This exercise helps establish priorities while reducing individual bias.

    1 hour

    1. Distribute index cards that have been prepopulated with the roadblocks identified in the previous activity – one full set of cards to each participant.
    2. Have each participant sort their set-in order of perceived priority, highest on top.
    3. Where n=number of cards in the stack, take the n-3 lowest priority cards and put a tick mark in the upper-right-hand corner. Pass these cards to the person on the left, who should incorporate them into their pile (if you start with eight cards you're ticking and passing five cards). Variation: On the first pass, allow everyone to take the most important and least important cards, write "0th" and "NIL" on them, respectively, and set them aside.
    4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for a total of n times. Treat duplicates as a single card in your hand.
    5. After the final pass, ask each participant to write the priority in the upper-left-hand corner of their top three cards.
    6. Collect all the cards, group by roadblock, count the number of ticks, and take note of the final priority.

    Discussion

    Total the number of passes (ticks) for each roadblock. A large number indicates a notionally low priority. No passes indicates a high priority.

    Are the internal or external roadblocks of highest priority? Were there similarities among participants' 0th and NILs compared to each other or to the final results?

    Input

    • Roadblock list

    Output

    • Prioritized roadblocks

    Materials

    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 3

    Align and Build the Roadmap

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Elicit business context from the CIO & IT team
    • Identify key initiatives that support the business
    • Identify key initiatives that enable IT excellence
    • Identify initiatives that drive technology innovation
    • Build initiative profiles
    • Construct your strategy roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap Team

    Step 3.1

    Drive business alignment

    Activities

    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework

    3.1.2 Evaluate technical debt

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Intake identification and analysis
    • Survey results analysis
    • Goal brainstorming
    • Goal association and analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business leadership
    • Project Management Office
    • Service Desk
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Solution or Enterprise Architecture
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Intake analysis
    • Goal list
    • Initiative-to-goal map

    Speak for those with no voice – regularly review your existing portfolio of IT assets and services

    A chain is only as strong as its weakest link; while you'll receive no accolades for keeping the lights on, you'll certainly hear about it if you don't!

    Time has been a traditional method for assessing the fitness of infrastructure assets – servers are replaced every five years, core switches every seven, laptops and desktops every three. While quick, this framework of assessment is overly simplistic for most modern organizations.

    Building one that is instead based on the likelihood of asset failure plotted against the business impact of that failure is not overly burdensome and yields more practical results. Infrastructure focuses on its strength (assessing IT risk) and validates an understanding with the business regarding the criticality of the service(s) enabled by any given asset.

    Rather than fight on every asset individually, agree on a framework with the business that enables data-driven decision making.

    IT Risk Factors
    Age, Reliability, Serviceability, Conformity, Skill Set

    Business Risk Factors
    Suitability, Capacity, Safety, Criticality

    Info-Tech Insight

    Infrastructure in a cloud-enabled world: As infrastructure operations evolve it is important to keep current with the definition of an asset. Software platforms such as hypervisors and server OS are just as much an asset under the care and control of infrastructure as are cloud services, managed services from third-party providers, and traditional racks and switches.

    3.1.1 Develop a risk framework – Classification exercise

    While it's not necessary for each infrastructure domain to view IT risk identically, any differences should be intensely scrutinized.

    1 hour

    1. Divide the whiteboard along the axes of IT Risk and
      Business Risk (criticality) into quadrants:
      1. High IT Risk & High Biz Risk (upper right)
      2. Low IT Risk & Low Biz Risk (bottom left)
      3. Low IT Risk & High Biz Risk (bottom right)
      4. High IT Risk & Low Biz Risk (upper left)
    2. Have each participant write the names of two or three infrastructure assets or services they are responsible or accountable for – one name per sticky note.
    3. Have each participant come one-at-a-time and place their sticky notes in one quadrant.
    4. As each additional sticky note is placed, verify with the group that the relative positioning of the others is still accurate.

    Discussion:

    1. Most assets should end up in the lower-right quadrant, indicating that IT has lowered the risk of failure commensurate to the business consequences of a failure. What does this imply about assets in the other three quadrants?
    2. Infrastructure is foundational; do we properly document and communicate all dependencies for business-critical services?
    3. What actions can infrastructure take to adjust the risk profile of any given asset?

    Input

    • List of infrastructure assets

    Output

    • Notional risk analysis

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.2 Brainstorming and prioritization exercise

    Identify the key elements that make up risk in order to refine your framework.

    A shared notional understanding is good, but in order to bring the business onside a documented defensible framework is better.

    1 hour

    1. Brainstorm (possibly using the affinity diagramming technique) the component elements of IT risk.
    2. Ensure you have a non-overlapping set of risk elements. Ensure that all the participants are comfortable with the definitions of each element. Write them on a whiteboard.
    3. Give each participant an equal number (three to five) of voting dots.
    4. As a group have the participants go the whiteboard and use their dots to cast their votes for what they consider to be the most important risk element(s). Participants are free to place any number of their dots on a single element.
    5. Based on the votes cast select a reasonable number of elements with which to proceed.
    6. For each element selected, brainstorm up to six tiers of the risk scale. You can use numbers or words, whichever is most compelling.
      • E.g. Reliability: no failures, >1 incident per year, >1 incident per quarter, >1 incident per month, frequent issues, unreliable.
    7. Repeat the above except with the components of business risk. Alternately, rely on existing business risk documentation, possibly from a disaster recovery or business continuity plan.

    Discussion
    How difficult was it to agree on the definitions of the IT risk elements? What about selecting the scale? What was the voting distribution like? Were there tiers of popular elements or did most of the dots end up on a limited number of elements? What are the implications of having more elements in the analysis?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Risk elements
    • Scale dimensions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Voting dots

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.3 Forced ranking exercise

    Alternate: Identify the key elements that make up risk in order to refine your framework

    A shared notional understanding is good, but in order to bring the business onside a documented defensible framework is better.

    1 hour

    1. Brainstorm (possibly using the affinity diagramming technique) the component elements of IT risk.
    2. Ensure you have a non-overlapping set of risk elements. Ensure that all the participants are comfortable with the definitions of each element. Write them on a whiteboard.
    3. Distribute index cards (one per participant) with the risk elements written down one side.
    4. Ask the participants to rank the elements in order of importance, with 1 being the most important.
    5. Collect the cards and write the ranking results on the whiteboard.
    6. Look for elements with high variability. Also look for the distribution of 1, 2, and 3 ranks.
    7. Based on the results select a reasonable number of elements with which to proceed.
    8. Follow the rest of the procedure from the previous activity.

    Discussion:

    What was the total number of elements required in order to contain the full set of every participant's first-, second-, and third-ranked risks? Does this seem a reasonable number?

    Why did some elements contain both the lowest and highest rankings? Was one (or more) participant thinking consistently different from the rest of the group? Are they seeing something the rest of the group is overlooking?

    This technique automatically puts the focus on a smaller number of elements – is this effective? Or is it overly simplistic and reductionist?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Risk elements

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.4 Consensus weighting

    Use your previous notional assessment to inform your risk weightings:

    1 hour

    1. Distribute index cards that have been prepopulated with the risk elements from the previous activity.
    2. Have the participants independently assign a weighting to each element. The assigned weights must add up to 100.
    3. Collect the cards and transcribe the results into a matrix on the whiteboard.
    4. Look for elements with high variability in the responses.
    5. Discuss and come to a consensus figure for each element's weighting.
    6. Select a variety of assets and services from the notional assessment exercise. Ensure that you have representation from all four quadrants.
    7. Using your newly defined risk elements and associated scales, evaluate as a group the values you'd suggest for each asset. Aim for a plurality of opinion rather than full consensus.
    8. Use Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool to document the elements, weightings, scales, and asset analysis.
    9. Compare the output generated by the tool (Tab 4) with the initial notional assessment.

    Discussion:

    How much framework is too much? Complexity and granularity do not guarantee accuracy. What is the right balance between effort and result?

    Does your granular assessment match your notional assessment? Why or why not? Do you need to go back and change weightings? Or reduce complexity?

    Is this a more reasonable and valuable way of periodically evaluating your infrastructure?

    Input

    • Notional risk analysis

    Output

    • Weighted risk framework

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Index cards
    • Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.1.5 Platform assessment set-up

    Hard work up front allows for year-over-year comparisons

    The value of a risk framework is that once the heavy lifting work of building it is done, the analysis and assessment can proceed very quickly. Once built, the framework can be tweaked as necessary, rather than recreated every year.

    • Open Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 3.
    • Up to eight elements each of IT and business risk can be captured.
      • IT risk elements of end-of-life and dependencies are mandatory and do not count against the eight customizable elements.
    • Every element can have up to six scale descriptors. Populate them from left to right in increasing magnitude of risk.
      • Scale descriptors must be input as string values and not numeric.
    • Each element's scale can be customized from linear to a risk-adverse or risk-seeking curve. We recommend linear.

    an image of the Platform Assessment Setup Page from Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool,

    IT platform assessment

    Quickly and easily evaluate all your infrastructure.

    Once configured, individual domain teams can spend surprisingly little time answering reasonably simple questions to assess their assets. The common framework lets results be compared between teams and produces a valuable visualization to communication with the business.

    • Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 4.
    • The tool has been tested successfully with up to 2,000 asset items. Don't necessarily list every asset; rather, think of the logical groups of assets you'd cycle in or out of your environment.
    • Each asset must be associated with one and only one infrastructure domain and have a defined End of Service Life date.
    • With extreme numbers of assets an additional filter can be useful – the Grouping field allows you to set any number of additional tags to make sorting and filtering easier.
    • Drop-down menus for each risk element are prepopulated with the scale descriptors from Tab 3. Unused elements are greyed out.
    • Each asset can be deemed dependent on up to four additional assets or services. Use this to highlight obscure or undervalued relationships between assets. It is generally not useful to be reminded that everything relies on Cat 6 cabling.

    A series of screenshots from the IT Platform Assessment.

    Prioritized upgrades

    Validate and tweak your framework with the business

    Once the grunt work of inputting all the assets and the associated risk data has been completed, you can tweak the risk profile and sort the data to whatever the business may require.

    • Open Info-Tech's Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 5.
    • IT platforms in the upper-right quadrant have an abundance of IT risk and are critical to the business.
    • The visualization can be sorted by selecting the slicers on the left. Sort by:
      • Infrastructure domain
      • Customized grouping tag
      • Top overall risk platforms
    • With extreme numbers of assets an additional filter can be useful. The Grouping field allows you to set any number of additional tags to make sorting and filtering easier.
    • Risk weightings can be individually adjusted to reflect changing business priorities or shared infrastructure understanding of predictive power.
      • In order to make year-over-year comparisons valuable it is recommended that changing IT risk elements should be avoided unless absolutely necessary.

    An image of a scatter plot graph titled Prioritized Upgrades.

    Step 3.2

    Build the roadmap

    Activities

    3.2.1 Build templates and visualize

    3.2.2 Generate new initiatives

    3.2.3 Repatriate shadow IT initiatives

    3.2.4 Finalize initiative candidates

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Develop an initiative template
    • Restate the existing initiatives with the template
    • Visualize the existing initiatives
    • Brainstorm new initiatives
    • Initiative ranking
    • Solicit, evaluate, and refine shadow IT initiatives
    • Resource estimation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Initiative communication template
    • Roadmap visualization diagram

    Tell them what they really need to know

    Templates transform many disparate sources of data into easy-to-produce, easy-to-consume, business-ready documents.

    Develop a high-level document that travels with the initiative from inception through executive inquiry and project management, and finally to execution. Understand an initiative's key elements that both IT and the business need defined and that are relatively static over its lifecycle.

    Initiatives are the waypoints along a roadmap leading to the eventual destination, each bringing you one step closer. Like steps, initiatives need to be discrete: able to be conceptualized and discussed as a single largely independent item. Each initiative must have two characteristics:

    • Specific outcome: Describe an explicit change in the people, processes, or technology of the enterprise.
    • Target end date: When the described outcome will be in effect.

    "Learn a new skill"– not an effective initiative statement.

    "Be proficient in the new skill by the end of the year" – better.

    "Use the new skill to complete a project and present it at a conference by Dec 15" – best!

    Info-Tech Insight

    Bundle your initiatives for clarity and manageability.
    Ruthlessly evaluate if an initiative should stand alone or can be rolled up with another. Fewer initiatives increases focus and alignment, allowing for better communication.

    3.2.1 Develop impactful templates to sell your initiative upstream

    Step 1: Open Info-Tech's Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template. Determine and describe the goals that the initiative is enabling or supporting.
    Step 2: State the current pain points from the end-user or business perspective. Do not list IT-specific pain points here, such as management complexity.
    Step 3: List both the tangible (quantitative) and ancillary (qualitative) benefits of executing the project. These can be pain relievers derived from the pain points, or any IT-specific benefit not captured in Step 1.
    Step 4: List any enabled capability that will come as an output of the project. Avoid technical capabilities like "Application-aware network monitoring." Instead, shoot for business outcomes like "Ability to filter network traffic based on application type."

    An image of the Move to Office 365, with the numbers 1-4 superimposed over the image.  These correspond to steps 1-4 above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Sell the project to the mailroom clerk! You need to be able to explain the outcome of the project in terms that non-IT workers can appreciate. This is done by walking as far up the goals cascade as you have defined, which gets to the underlying business outcome that the initiative supports.

    Develop impactful templates to sell your initiative upstream (cont'd)

    Strategic Roadmap Initiative Template, p. 2

    Step 5: State the risks to the business for not executing the project (and avoid restating the pain points).
    Step 6: List any known or anticipated roadblocks that may come before, during, or after executing the project. Consider all aspects of people, process, and technology.
    Step 7: List any measurable objectives that can be used to gauge the success of the projects. Avoid technical metrics like "number of IOPS." Instead think of business metrics such as "increased orders per hour."
    Step 8: The abstract is a short 50-word project description. Best to leave it as the final step after all the other aspects of the project (risks and rewards) have been fully fleshed out. The abstract acts as an executive summary – written last, read first.

    An image of the Move to Office 365, with the numbers 5-8 superimposed over the image.  These correspond to steps 5-8 above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every piece of information that is not directly relevant to the interests of the audience is a distraction from the value proposition.

    Working session, presentation, and feedback

    Rewrite your in-flight initiatives to ensure you're capturing all the required information:

    1 hour

    1. Have each participant select an initiative they are responsible or accountable for.
    2. Introduce the template and discuss any immediate questions they might have.
    3. Take 15-20 minutes and have each participant attempt to fill out the template for their initiative.
    4. Have each participant present their initiative to the group.
    5. The group should imagine themselves business leaders and push back with questions or clarification when IT jargon is used.
    6. Look to IT leadership in the room for cues as to what hot button items they've encountered from the business executives.
    7. Debate the merits of each section in the template. Adjust and customize as appropriate.

    Discussion:
    Did everyone use the goal framework adopted earlier? Why not?
    Are there recurring topics or issues that business leaders always seem concerned about?
    Of all the information available, what consistently seems to be the talking points when discussing an initiative?

    Input

    • In-flight initiatives

    Output

    • Completed initiatives templates

    Materials

    • Templates
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    3.2.2 Visual representations are more compelling than text alone

    Being able to quickly sort and filter data allows you to customize the visualization and focus on what matters to your audience. Any data that is not immediately relevant to them risks becoming a distraction.

    1. Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tabs 6 and 7.
    2. Up to ten goals can be supported. Input the goals into column F of the tool. Be explicit but brief.
    3. Initiatives and Obstacles can be independently defined, and the tool supports up to five subdivisions of each. Initiative by origin source makes for an interesting analysis but initially we recommend simplicity.
    4. Every Initiative and Obstacle must be given a unique name in column H. Context-sensitive drop-downs let you define the subtype and responsible infrastructure domain.
    5. Three pieces of data are captured for each initiative: Business Impact is the qualitative value to the business; Risk is the qualitative likelihood of failure – entirely or partially (e.g. significantly over budget or delayed); and Effort is a relative measure of magnitude ($ or time). Only the value for Effort must be specified.
    6. Every initiative can claim to support one or many goals by placing an "x" in the appropriate column(s).
    7. On Tab 7 you must select the initiative end date (go-live date). You can also document start date, owner, and manager if required. Remember, though, that the tool does not replace proper project management tools.

    A series of screenshots of tables, labeled A-F

    Decoding your visualization

    Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 8, "Roadmap"

    Visuals aren't always as clear as we assume them to be.

    An example of a roadmap visualization found in the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    If you could suggest one thing, what would it be?

    The roadmap is likely the best and most direct way to showcase our ideas to business leadership – take advantage of it.

    We've spent an awful lot of time setting the stage, deciding on frameworks so we agree on what is important. We know how to have an effective conversation – now what do we want to say?

    an image of a roadmap, including inputs passing through infrastructure & Operations; to the Move to Office 365 images found earlier in this blueprint.

    Creative thinking, presentation, and feedback

    Since we're so smart – how could we do it better?

    1 hour

    1. Introduce the Roadmap Initiative Template and discuss any immediate questions the participants might have.
    2. Take 15-20 minutes and have each participant attempt to fill out the template for their initiative candidate.
    3. Have each author present their initiative to the group.
    4. The group should imagine themselves business leaders and push back with questions or clarification when IT jargon is used.
    5. Look to IT leadership in the room for cues as to what hot button items they've encountered from the business executives
    6. Debate the merits of each section in the template. Adjust and customize as appropriate.

    Discussion:
    Did everyone use the goal framework adopted earlier? Why not?
    Do we think we can find business buy-in or sponsorship? Why or why not?
    Are our initiatives at odds with or complementary to the ones proposed through the normal channels?

    Input

    • Everything we know

    Output

    • Initiative candidates

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Infrastructure Roadmap Initiatives Template
    • Laptops & internet

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Forced Ranking Exercise

    Showcase only your best and brightest ideas:

    1 hour

    1. Write the initiative titles from the previous exercise across the top of a whiteboard.
    2. Distribute index cards (one per participant) with the initiative titles written down one side.
    3. Ask each participant to rank the initiatives in order of importance, with 1 being the most important.
    4. Collect the cards and write the ranking results on the whiteboard.
    5. Look at the results with an eye toward high variability. Also look for the distribution of 1, 2, and 3 ranks.
    6. Based on the results, select (through democratic vote or authoritarian fiat – Director or CIO) a reasonable number of initiatives.
    7. Refine the selected initiative templates for inclusion in the roadmap.

    Discussion:
    Do participants tend to think their idea is the best and rank it accordingly?
    If so, then is it better to look at the second, third, and fourth rankings for consensus instead?
    What is a reasonable number of initiatives to suggest? How do we limit ourselves?

    Input

    • Infrastructure initiative candidates

    Output

    • Infrastructure initiatives

    Materials

    • Index cards

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Who else might be using technology to solve business problems?

    Shadow IT operates outside of the governance and control structure of Enterprise IT and so is, by definition, a problem. an opportunity!

    Except for that one thing they do wrong, that one small technicality, they may well do everything else right.

    Consider:

    1. Shadow IT evolves to solve a problem or enable an activity for a specific group of users.
    2. This infers that because stakeholders spend their own resources resolving a problem or enabling an action, it is a priority.
    3. The technology choices they've made have been based solely on functionality for value, unrestrained by any legacy of previous decisions.
    4. Staffing demands and procedural issues must be modest or nonexistent.
    5. The users must be engaged, receptive to change, and tolerant of stutter steps toward a goal.

    In short, shadow IT can provide fully vetted infrastructure initiatives that with a little effort can be turned into easy wins on the roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Shadow IT can include business-ready initiatives, needing only minor tweaking to align with infrastructure's best practices.

    3.2.3 Survey and hack-a-thon

    Negotiate amnesty with shadow IT by evaluating their "hacks" for inclusion on the roadmap.

    1 hour

    1. Put out an open call for submissions across the enterprise. Ask "How do you think technology could help you solve one of your pain points?" Be specific.
    2. Gather the responses into a presentable format and assemble the roadmap team.
    3. Use voting dots (three per person) to filter out a shortlist.
    4. Invite the original author to come in and work with a roadmap team member to complete the template.
    5. Reassemble the roadmap team and use the forced ranking exercise to select initiatives to move forward.

    Discussion:
    Did you learn anything from working directly with in-the-trenches staff? Can those learnings be used elsewhere in infrastructure? Or in larger IT?

    Input

    • End-user ideas

    Output

    • Roadmap initiatives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Voting dots
    • Index cards
    • Templates

    Participants

    • Enthusiastic end users
    • Roadmap team
    • Infrastructure leader

    3.2.4 Consensus estimation

    Exploit the wisdom of groups to develop reasonable estimates.

    1 hour

    Also called scrum poker (in Agile software circles), this method reduces anchoring bias by requiring all participants to formulate and submit their estimates independently and simultaneously.

    Equipment: A typical scrum deck shows the Fibonacci sequence of numbers, or similar progression, with the added values of ∞ (project too big and needs to be subdivided), and a coffee cup (need a break). Use of the (mostly) Fibonacci sequence helps capture the notional uncertainty in estimating larger values.

    1. The infrastructure leader, who will not play, moderates the activity. A "currency" of estimation is selected. This could be person, days, or weeks, or a dollar value in the thousands or tens of thousands – whatever the group feels they can speak to authoritatively.
    2. The author of each initiative gives a short overview, and the participants are given the chance to ask questions and clarify assumptions and risks.
    3. Participants lay a card representing their estimate face down on the table. Estimates are revealed simultaneously.
    4. Participants with the highest and lowest estimates are given a soapbox to offer justification. The author is expected to provide clarifications. The moderator drives the conversation.
    5. The process is repeated until consensus is reached (decided by the moderator).
    6. To structure discussion, the moderator can impose time limits between rounds.

    Discussion:

    How often was the story unclear? How often did participants have to ask for additional information to make their estimate? How many rounds were required to reach consensus?
    Does number of person, days, or weeks, make more sense than dollars? Should we estimate both independently?
    Source: Scrum Poker

    Input

    • Initiative candidates from previous activity

    Output

    • Resourcing estimates

    Materials

    • Scrum poker deck

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Hard work up front allows for year-over-year comparisons

    Open the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool, Tab 6, "Initiatives & Goals" and Tab 7, "Timeline"

    Add your ideas to the visualization.

    • An initiative subtype can be useful here to differentiate infrastructure-sponsored initiatives from traditional ones.
    • Goal alignment is as important as always – ideally you want your sponsored initiatives to fill gaps or support the highest-priority business goals.
    • The longer-term roadmap is an excellent parking lot for ideas, especially ones the business didn't even know they wanted. Make sure to pull those ideas forward, though, as you repeat the process periodically.

    An image containing three screenshots of timeline tables from the Strategic Infrastructure Roadmap Tool

    Pulling it all together – the published report

    We started with eight simple questions. Logically, the answers suggest sections for a published report. Developing those answers in didactic method is effective and popular among technologists as answers build upon each other. Business leaders and journalists, however, know never to bury the lead.

    Report Section Title Roadmap Activity or Step
    Sunshine diagram Visualization
    Priorities Understand business goals
    Who we help Evaluate intake process
    How we can help Create initiatives
    What we're working on Review initiatives
    How you can help us Assess roadblocks
    What is new Assess new technology
    How we spend our day Conduct a time study
    What we have Assess IT platform
    We can do better! Identify process optimizations

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 4

    Communicate and Improve the Process

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Infrastructure strategy

    1.2 Goal alignment

    2.1 Define your future

    2.2 Conduct constraints analysis

    3.1 Drive business alignment

    3.2. Build the roadmap

    4.1 Identify the audience

    4.2 Process improvement

    and measurements

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify authors and target audiences
    • Understand the planning process
    • Identify if the process outputs have value
    • Set up realistic KPIs

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Roadmap team

    Step 4.1

    Identify the audience

    Activities

    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences

    4.1.2 Planning the process

    4.1.3 Identifying supporters and blockers

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Identify required authors and target audiences
    • Plan the process
    • Identify supporters and blockers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Process schedule
    • Communication strategy

    Again! Again!

    And you thought we were done. The roadmap is a process. Set a schedule and pattern to the individual steps.

    Publishing an infrastructure roadmap once a year as a lead into budget discussion is common practice. But this is just the last in a long series of steps and activities. Balance the effort of each activity against its results to decide on a frequency. Ensure that the frequency is sufficient to allow you to act on the results if required. Work backwards from publication to develop the schedule.

    an image of a circle of questions around the Infrastructure roadmap.

    A lot of work has gone into creating this final document. Does a single audience make sense? Who else may be interested in your promises to the business? Look back at the people you've asked for input. They probably want to know what this has all been about. Publish your roadmap broadly to ensure greater participation in subsequent years.

    4.1.1 Identify required authors and target audiences

    1 hour

    Identification and association

    Who needs to hear (and more importantly believe) your message? Who do you need to hear from? Build a communications plan to get the most from your roadmap effort.

    1. Write your eight roadmap section titles in the middle of a whiteboard.
    2. Make a list of everyone who answered your questions during the creation of this roadmap. Write these names on a single color of sticky notes and place them on the left side.
    3. Make a list of everyone who would be (or should be) interested in what you have to say. Write these names on a different single color of sticky notes and place them on the right side.
    4. Draw lines between the stickies and the relevant section of the roadmap. Solid lines indicate a must have communication while dashed lines indicate a nice-to-have communication.
    5. Come to a consensus.

    Discussion:

    How many people appear in both lists? What are the implications of that?

    Input

    • Roadmap sections

    Output

    • Roadmap audience and contributors list

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    4.1.2 Planning the process and scheduling

    The right conversation at the right time

    Due Date (t) Freq Mode Participants Infrastructure Owner
    Update & Publish

    Start of Budget Planning

    Once

    Report

    IT Steering Committee

    Infrastructure Leader or CIO

    Evaluate Intakes

    (t) - 2 months

    (t) - 8 months

    Biannually

    Review

    PMO

    Service Desk

    Domain Heads

    Assess Roadblocks

    (t) - 2 months

    (t) - 5 months

    (t) - 8 months

    (t) - 11 months

    Quarterly

    Brainstorming & Consensus

    Domain Heads

    Infrastructure Leader

    Time Study

    (t) - 1 month

    (t) - 4 months

    (t) - 7 months

    (t) - 10 months

    Quarterly

    Assessment

    Domain Staff

    Domain Heads

    Inventory Assessment

    (t) - 2 months

    Annually

    Assessment

    Domain Staff

    Domain Heads

    Business Goals

    (t) - 1 month

    Annually

    Survey

    Line of Business Managers

    Infrastructure Leader or CIO

    New Technology Assessment

    monthly

    (t) - 2 months

    Monthly/Annually

    Process

    Domain Staff

    Infrastructure Leader

    Initiative Review

    (t) - 1 month

    (t) - 4 months

    (t) - 7 months

    (t) - 10 months

    Quarterly

    Review

    PMO

    Domain Heads

    Infrastructure Leader

    Initiative Creation

    (t) - 1 month

    Annually

    Brainstorming & Consensus

    Roadmap Team

    Infrastructure Leader

    The roadmap report is just a point-in-time snapshot, but to be most valuable it needs to come at the end of a full process cycle. Know your due date, work backwards, and assign responsibility.

    Discussion:

    1. Do each of the steps make sense? Is the outcome clear and does it flow naturally to where it will be useful?
    2. Is the effort required for each step commensurate with its value? Are we doing to much for not enough return?
    3. Are we acting on the information we're gathering? Is it informing or changing decisions throughout the year or period?

    Input

    • Roadmap sections

    Output

    • Roadmap process milestones

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Template

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Tailor your messaging to secure stakeholders' involvement and support

    If your stakeholders aren't on board, you're in serious trouble.

    Certain stakeholders will not only be highly involved and accountable in the process but may also be responsible for approving the roadmap and budget, so it's essential that you get their buy-in upfront.

    an image of a quadrant analysis, comparing levels of influence and support.

    an image of a quadrant analysis, comparing levels of influence and support.

    4.1.3 Identifying supporters and blockers

    Classification and Strategy

    1 hour

    You may want to restrict participation to senior members of the roadmap team only.

    This activity requires a considerable degree of candor in order to be effective. It is effectively a political conversation and as such can be sensitive.

    Steps:

    1. Review your sticky notes from the earlier activity (list of input and output names).
    2. Place each name in the corresponding quadrant of a 2x2 matrix like the one on the right.
    3. Come to a consensus on the placement of each sticky note.

    Input

    • Roadmap audience and contributors list

    Output

    • Communications strategy & plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Senior roadmap team

    Step 4.2

    Process improvement

    Activities

    4.2.1 Evaluating the value of each process output

    4.2.2 Brainstorming improvements

    4.2.3 Setting realistic measures

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Evaluating the efficacy of each process output
    • Brainstorming improvements
    • Setting realistic measures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Roadmap team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Process map
    • Process improvement plan

    Continual improvement

    Not just for the DevOps hipsters!

    You started with a desire – greater satisfaction with infrastructure from the business. All of the inputs, processes, and outputs exist only, and are designed solely, to serve the attainment of that outcome.

    The process outlined is not dogma; no element is sacrosanct. Ruthlessly evaluate the effectiveness of your efforts so you can do better next time.

    You would do no less after a server migration, network upgrade, or EUC rollout.

    Consider these four factors to help make your infrastructure roadmap effort more successful.

    Leadership
    If infrastructure leaders aren't committed, then this will quickly become an exercise of box-checking rather than candid communication.

    Data
    Quantitative or qualitative – always try to go where the data leads. Reduce unconscious bias and be surprised by the insight uncovered.

    Metrics
    Measurement allows management but if you measure the wrong thing you can game the system, cheating yourself out of the ultimate prize.

    Focus
    Less is sometimes more.

    4.2.1 Evaluating the value of each process output

    Understanding why and how individual steps are effective (or not) is how we improve the outcome of any process.

    1 hour

    1. List each of the nine roadmap steps on the left-hand side of a whiteboard.
    2. Ask the participants "Why was this step included? Did it accomplish its objective?" Consider using a reduced scale affinity diagramming exercise for this step.
    3. Consider the priority characteristics of each step; try to be as universal as possible (every characteristic will ideally apply to each step).
    4. Include two columns at the far right: "Improvement" and "Expected Change."
    5. Populate the table. If this is your first time, brainstorm reasonable objectives for your left-hand columns. Otherwise, document the reality of last year and focus on brainstorming the right-hand columns.
    6. Optional: Conduct a thought experiment and brainstorm tension metrics to establish whether the process is driving the outcomes we desire.
    7. Optional: Consider Info-Tech's assertion about the four things a roadmap can do. Brainstorm KPIs that you can measure yearly. What else would you want the roadmap to be able to do?

    Discussion:

    Did the group agree on the intended outcome of each step? Did the group think the step was effective? Was the outcome clear and did it flow naturally to where it was useful?
    Is the effort required for each step commensurate with its value? Are we doing too much for not enough return?
    Are we acting on the information we're gathering? Is it informing or changing decisions throughout the year or period?

    Input

    • Roadmap process steps

    Output

    • Process map
    • Improvement targets & metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Process Map Template (see next slide)

    Participants

    • Roadmap team

    Process map template

    Replace the included example text with your inputs.

    Freq.MethodMeasuresSuccess criteria

    Areas for improvement

    Expected change

    Evaluate intakesBiannuallyPMO Intake & Service RequestsProjects or Initiatives% of departments engaged

    Actively reach out to underrepresented depts.

    +10% engagement

    Assess roadblocksQuarterlyIT All-Staff MeetingRoadblocks% of identified that have been resolved

    Define expected outcomes of removing roadblock

    Measurable improvements

    Time studyQuarterly IT All-Staff MeetingTimeConfidence value of data

    Real data sources (time sheets, tools, etc.)

    85% of sources defensible

    Legacy asset assessmentAnnuallyDomain effortAsset Inventory Completeness of Inventory
    • Compare against Asset Management database
    • Track business activity by enabling asset(s)
    • > 95% accuracy/
      completeness
    • Easier business risk framework conversations
    Understand business goalsAnnuallyRoadmap MeetingGoal listGoal specificity

    Survey or interview leadership directly

    66% directly attributable participation

    New technology assessmentMonthly/AnnuallyTeam/Roadmap MeetingTechnologies Reviewed IT staff participation/# SWOTs

    Increase participation from junior members

    50% presentations from junior members

    Initiative review

    Quarterly

    IT All-Staff Meeting

    • Status Review
    • Template usage
    • Action taken upon review
    • Template uptake
    • Identify predictive factors
    • Improve template
    • 25% of yellow lights to green
    • -50% requests for additional info

    Initiative creation

    Annually Roadmap MeetingInitiatives# of initiatives proposedBusiness uptake+25% sponsorship in 6 months (biz)

    Update and publish

    AnnuallyPDF reportRoadmap Final ReportLeadership engagement Improve audience reach+15% of LoB managers have read the report

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will improve through:

    1. Increased communication. More information being shared to more people who need it.
    2. Better planning. More accurate information being shared.
    3. Reduced lead times. Less due diligence or discovery work required as part of project implementations.
    4. Faster delivery times. Less less-valuable work, freeing up more time to project work.
    Metric description Current metric Future goal
    # of critical incidents resulting from equipment failure per month
    # of service provisioning delays due to resource (non-labor) shortages
    # of projects that involve standing up untested (no prior infrastructure PoC) technologies
    # of PoCs conducted each year
    # of initiatives proposed by infrastructure
    # of initiatives proposed that find business sponsorship in >1yr
    % of long-term projects reviewed as per goal framework
    # of initiatives proposed that are the only ones supporting a business goal
    # of technologies deployed being used by more than the original business sponsor
    # of PMO delays due to resource contention

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Draw the first picture.

    Highly engaged and effective team members are proactive rather than reactive. Instead of waiting for clear inputs from the higher ups, take what you do know, make some educated guesses about the rest, and present that to leadership. Where thinking diverges will be crystal clear and the necessary adjustments will be obvious.

    Insight 2

    Infrastructure must position itself as the broker for new technologies.

    No man is an island; no technology is a silo. Infrastructure's must ensure that everyone in the company benefits from what can be shared, ensure those benefits are delivered securely and reliably, and prevent the uninitiated from making costly technological mistakes. It is easier to lead from the front, so infrastructure must stay on top of available technology.

    Insight 3

    The roadmap is a process that is business driven and not a document.

    In an ever-changing world the process of change itself changes. We know the value of any specific roadmap output diminishes quickly over time, but don't forget to challenge the process itself from time to time. Striving for perfection is a fool's game; embrace constant updates and incremental improvement.

    Insight 4

    Focus on the framework, not the output.

    There usually is no one right answer. Instead make sure both the business and infrastructure are considering common relevant elements and are working from a shared set of priorities. Data then, rather than hierarchical positioning or a d20 Charisma roll, becomes the most compelling factor in making a decision. But since your audience is in hierarchical ascendency over you, make the effort to become familiar with their language.

    4.2.3 Track metrics throughout the project to keep stakeholders informed

    An effective strategic infrastructure roadmap should help to:

    1. Initiate a schedule of infrastructure projects to achieve business goals.
    2. Adapt to feedback from executives on changing business priorities.
    3. Curate a portfolio of enabling technologies that align to the business whether growing or stabilizing.
    4. Manage the lifecycle of aging equipment in order to meet capacity demands.
    Metric description

    Metric goal

    Checkpoint 1

    Checkpoint 2

    Checkpoint 3

    # of critical incidents resulting from equipment failure per month >1
    # of service provisioning delays due to resource (non-labor) shortages >5
    # of projects that involve standing up untested (no prior infrastructure PoC) technologies >10%
    # of PoCs conducted each year 4
    # of initiatives proposed by infrastructure 4
    # of initiatives proposed that find business sponsorship in >1 year 1
    # of initiatives proposed that are the only ones supporting a business goal 1
    % of long-term projects reviewed as per goal framework 100%

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Review performance from last fiscal year

    • Analyzed and communicated the benefits and value realized from IT's strategic initiatives in the past fiscal year.
    • Analyzed and prioritized diagnostic data insights to communicate IT success stories.
    • Elicited important retrospective information such as KPIs, financials, etc. to build IT's credibility as a strategic business partner.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Document your Cloud Strategy
    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it's just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas.

    Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy
    ITAM is a foundational IT service that provides accurate, accessible, actionable data on IT assets. But there's no value in data for data's sake. Enable collaboration between IT asset managers, business leaders, and IT leaders to develop an ITAM strategy that maximizes the value they can deliver as service provider.

    Infrastructure & Operations Research Center
    Practical insights, tools, and methodologies to systematically improve IT Infrastructure & Operations.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge gained

    • Deeper understanding of business goals and priorities
    • Key data the business requires for any given initiative
    • Quantification of risk
    • Leading criteria for successful technology adoption

    Processes optimized

    • Infrastructure roadmap
    • Initiative creation, estimation, evaluation, and prioritization
    • Inventory assessment for legacy infrastructure debt
    • Technology adoption

    Deliverables completed

    • Domain time study
    • Initiative intake analysis
    • Prioritized roadblock list
    • Goal listing
    • IT and business risk frameworks
    • Infrastructure inventory assessment
    • New technology analyzes
    • Initiative templates
    • Initiative candidates
    • Roadmap visualization
    • Process schedule
    • Communications strategy
    • Process map
    • Roadmap report

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Bibliography

    "10 Essential KPIs for the IT Strategic Planning Process." Apptio Inc, Dec. 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Amos, Justin. "8 areas your 2022 IT Infrastructure roadmap should cover." Soma, 24 Jan 2022 Accessed Nov. 2022
    Ahmed, Anam. "Importance of Mission Vision in Organizational Strategy." Chron, 14 March 2019. Accessed 10 May 2021. ."
    Barker, Joel A. "Joel A Barker Quote about Vision." Joel A Barker.com. Accessed 10 Nov 2022
    Bhagwat, Swapnil ."Top IT Infrastructure Management Strategies For 2023 , Atlas Systems, 23 Oct 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Blank, Steve. "You're Better Off Being A Fast Follower Than An Originator." Business Insider. 5 Oct. 2010. Web.
    Bridges, Jennifer . "IT Risk Management Strategies and Best Practices." Project Manager, 6 Dec 2019. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "Building a Technology Roadmap That Stabilizes and Transforms." Collegis Education. Accessed Dec 2022.
    Collins, Gavin. "WHY AN IT INFRASTRUCTURE ROAD MAP?." Fifth Step, Date unknown. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "Define the Business Context Needed to Complete Strategic IT Initiatives: 2018 Blueprint - ResearchAndMarkets.com." Business Wire, 1 Feb. 2018. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    De Vos, Colton. “Well-Developed IT Strategic Plan Example." Resolute Tech Solutions, 6 Jan 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Gray, Dave. "Post-Up." Gamestorming, 15 Oct. 2010. Accessed 10 Nov 2022
    Helm, Clay. "Majority of Surveyed Companies are Not Prepared for IT Needs of the Future." IBM Study, 4 Jan 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Hertvik, Joe. "8 Components of A Great IT Strategy, BMC Blogs, 29 May. 2020. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    ISACA, "Effective governance at your Fingertips". COBIT Framework, Accessed Dec 2022
    "IT Guiding Principles." Office of Information Technology, NC State University, 2014-2020. Accessed 9 Nov 2022.
    ""IT Infrastructure That Makes Employees Happier." Network Doctor, 2021. Accessed Dec 2022
    "IT Road mapping Helps Dura Remain at the Forefront of Auto Manufacturing." Performance Improvement Partners, ND. Accessed Dec 2022.
    ITtoolkit.com. "The IT Vision: A Strategic Path to Lasting IT Business Alignment." ITtoolkit Magazine, 2020. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    Kark, Khalid. "Survey: CIOs Are CEOs' Top Strategic Partner." CIO Journal, The Wall Street Journal, 22 May 2020. Accessed 11 May 2021.
    Kimberling, Eric. "What is "Future State" and Why is it Important?" Third Stage Consulting, 11 June 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Kishore. "The True Cost of Keeping the Lights On." Optanix, 1 Feb. 2017. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Lakein, Alan. Libquotes.
    Mindsight. "THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO CREATING A TECHNOLOGY ROADMAP" Mind sight, 12 Dec 2021. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Milani, F. (2019). Future State Analysis. In: Digital Business Analysis. Springer, Cham. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-05719-0_13
    Newberry, Dennis. "Meeting the Challenges of Optimizing IT Cost and Capacity Management." BMC, 2021, Accessed 12 Nov 2022.
    Peek, Sean. "What Is a Vision Statement?" Business News Daily, 7 May 2020. Accessed 10 Nov 2022.
    Ramos, Diana. "Infrastructure Management 101: A Beginner's Guide to IT Infrastructure Management." Smartsheet.com. 30 Nov 2021. Accessed 09 Dec 2022.
    Ramsey, Dave. "Dave Rant: How to Finally Take Control of Your Money." Ramseysolutions. 26 Aug 2021. Accessed 10 Nov 2022.
    Richards-Gustafson, Flora. "5 Core Operational Strategies." Chron, 8 Mar 2019. Accessed 9 June 2021.
    Richardson, Nigel. "What are the differences between current and future state maps?." Nexus, 18 Oct 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    Roush, Joe. "IT Infrastructure Planning: How To Get Started." BMC. 05 January, 2018. Accessed 24 Jan 2023.
    Shields, Corey. "A Complete Guide to IT Infrastructure Management." Ntiva, 15 Sept. 2020. Accessed 28 Nov. 2022.
    Snow, Shane. "Smartcuts: How Hackers, Innovators, and Icons Accelerate Success." Harper Business, 2014.
    Strohlein, Marc. "The CIO's Guide to Aligning IT Strategy with the Business." IDC, 2019. Accessed Nov 2022.
    Sull, Sull, and Yoder. "No One Knows Your Strategy — Not Even Your Top Leaders." MIT Sloan. 12 Feb 2018. Accessed 26 Jan 2023.
    "Team Purpose & Culture." Hyper Island. Accessed 10 Nov. 2022
    "Tech Spend Pulse, 2022." Flexera, Jan 2022, Accessed 15 Nov 2022
    "Tech Spend Pulse." Flexera, Dec. 2022. Accessed Nov. 2022.
    "The Definitive Guide to Developing an IT Strategy and Roadmap" CIO Pages.com , 5 Aug 13 2022. Accessed 30 Nov. 2022.
    Wei, Jessica. "Don't Tell Me Where Your Priorities Are – James W. Frick." Due.com, 21 Mar 2022. Accessed 23 Nov 2022.
    Zhu, Pearl. "How to Set Guiding Principles for an IT Organization." Future of CIO, 1 July 2013. Accessed 9 June 2021.

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}416|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $38,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Writing SOPs is the last thing most people want to do, so the work gets pushed down the priority list and the documents become dated.
    • Most organizations know it is good practice to have SOPs as it improves consistency, facilitates process improvement, and contributes to efficient operations.
    • Though the benefits are understood, many organizations don't have SOPs and those that do don't maintain them.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Create visual documents, not dense SOP manuals.
    • Start with high-impact SOPs, and identify the most critical undocumented SOPs and address them first.
    • Integrate SOP creation into project requirements and create SOP approval steps to ensure documentation is reviewed and completed in a timely fashion.

    Impact and Result

    • Create visual documents that can be scanned. Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are quicker to create, take less time to update, and are ultimately more usable than a dense manual.
    • Use simple but effective document management practices.
    • Make SOPs part of your project deliverables rather than an afterthought. That includes checking documentation status as part of your change management process.

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind – Make SOPs work for you with visual documents that are easier to create and more effective for process management and optimization.

    Learn best practices for creating, maintaining, publishing, and managing effective SOP documentation.

    • Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind – Phases 1-3

    2. Standard Operating Procedures Workbook and Document Management Checklist – Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs.

    Identify required documentation and prioritize them according to urgency and impact.

    • Standard Operating Procedures Workbook
    • Document Management Checklist

    3. Process Templates and Examples – Review and assess templates to find samples that are fit for purpose.

    Review the wide variety of samples to see what works best for your needs.

    • Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool
    • System Recovery Procedures Template
    • Application Development Process – AppDev Example (Visio)
    • Application Development Process – AppDev Example (PDF)
    • Network Backup for Atlanta Data Center – Backups Example
    • DRP Recovery Workflow Template (PDF)
    • DRP Recovery Workflow Template (Visio)
    • Employee Termination Process Checklist – IT Security Example
    • Sales Process for New Clients – Sales Example (Visio)
    • Sales Process for New Clients – Sales Example (PDF)
    • Incident and Service Management Procedures – Service Desk Example (Visio)
    • Incident and Service Management Procedures – Service Desk Example (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Change your focus from satisfying auditors to driving process optimization, consistent IT operations, and effective knowledge transfer.

    Project Outline

    Two flowcharts are depicted. The first is labelled 'Executive Brief' and the second is labelled 'Tools and Templates Roadmap'. Both outline the following project.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Do your SOPs drive process optimization?

    "Most organizations struggle to document and maintain SOPs as required, leading to process inconsistencies and inefficiencies. These breakdowns directly impact the performance of IT operations. Effective SOPs streamline training and knowledge transfer, improve transparency and compliance, enable automation, and ultimately decrease costs as processes improve and expensive breakdowns are avoided. Documenting SOPs is not just good practice; it directly impacts IT efficiency and your bottom line."

    Frank Trovato, Senior Manager, Infrastructure Research Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • IT Process Owners
    • IT Infrastructure Managers
    • IT Service Managers
    • System Administrators
    • And more…

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Identify, prioritize, and document SOPs for critical business processes.
    • Discover opportunities for overall process optimization by documenting SOPs.
    • Develop documentation best practices that support ongoing maintenance and review.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CTOs
    • Business unit leaders

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand the need for and value of documenting SOPs in a usable format.
    • Help set expectations around documentation best practices.
    • Extend IT best practices to other parts of the business.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Most organizations know it is good practice to have SOPs as it improves consistency, facilitates process improvement, and contributes to efficient operations.
    • Though the benefits are understood, many organizations don't have SOPs and those that do don't maintain them.

    Complication

    • Writing SOPs is the last thing most people want to do, so the work gets pushed down the priority list and the documents become dated.
    • Promoting the use of SOPs can also face staff resistance as the documentation is seen as time consuming to develop and maintain, too convoluted to be useful, and generally out of date.

    Resolution

    • Overcome staff resistance while implementing a sustainable SOP documentation approach by doing the following:
      • Create visual documents that can be scanned. Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams are quicker to create, take less time to update, and are ultimately more usable than a dense manual.
      • Use simple, but effective document management practices.
      • Make SOPs part of your project deliverables rather than an afterthought. That includes checking documentation status as part of your change management process.
    • Extend these principles to other areas of IT and business processes. The survey data and examples in this report include application development and business processes as well as IT operations.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Create visual documents, not dense SOP manuals.
    2. Start with high-impact SOPs. Identify the most critical undocumented SOPs and document them first.
    3. Integrate SOP creation into project requirements and create SOP approval steps to ensure documentation is reviewed and completed in a timely fashion.

    Most organizations struggle to create and maintain SOP documents, especially in North America, despite the benefits

    North American companies are traditionally more technology focused than process focused, and that is reflected in the approach to documenting SOPs.

    • An ad hoc approach to SOPs almost certainly means documents will be out of date and ineffective. The same is also true when updating SOPs as part of periodic concerted efforts to prepare for an audit, annual review, or certification process, and this makes the task more imposing.
    • Incorporating SOP updates as part of regular change management processes ensures documents are up to date and usable. This can also make reviews and audits much more manageable.

    'It isn’t unusual for us to see infrastructure or operations documentation that is wildly out of date. We’re talking months, even years. Often it was produced as one big effort and then not reliably maintained.'

    – Gary Patterson, Consultant, Quorum Resources

    Organizations are most likely to update documents on an ad hoc basis or via periodic formal reviews. Less than 25% keep SOPs updated as needed.

    Graph depicting North America versus Asia and Europe practices of document updates

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group; N=104

    Document SOPs to improve knowledge transfer, optimize processes, and ultimately save money

    Benefits of documented SOPs Impact of undocumented/undefined SOPs
    Improved training and knowledge transfer: Routine tasks can be delegated to junior staff (freeing senior staff to work on higher priority tasks). Without documented SOPs: Tasks will be difficult to delegate, key staff become a bottleneck, knowledge transfer is inconsistent, and there is a longer onboarding process for new staff.
    IT automation, process optimization, and consistent operations: Defining, documenting, and then optimizing processes enables IT automation to be built on sound processes, so consistent positive results can be achieved. Without documented SOPs: IT automation built on poorly defined, unoptimized processes leads to inconsistent results.
    Compliance: Compliance audits are more manageable because the documentation is already in place. Without documented SOPs: Documenting SOPs to prepare for an audit becomes a major time-intensive project.
    Transparency: Visually documented processes answer the common business question of “why does that take so long?” Without documented SOPs: Other areas of the organization may not understand how IT operates, which can lead to confusion and unrealistic expectations.
    Cost savings: Work can be assigned to the lowest level of support cost, IT operations achieve greater efficiency, and expensive breakdowns are avoided. Without documented SOPs: Work may be distributed uneconomically, money may be wasted through inefficient processes, and the organization is vulnerable to costly disruptions.

    COBIT, ISO, and ITIL aren’t a complete solution

    "Being ITIL and ISO compliant hasn’t solved our documentation problem. We’re still struggling."

    – Vendor Relationship Manager, Financial Services Industry

    • Adopting a framework such as ITIL, COBIT, or ISO doesn’t always mean that SOP documents are accurate, effective, or up to date.
    • Although these frameworks emphasize the importance of documenting processes, they tend to focus more on process development and requirements than on actual documentation. In other words, they deal more with what needs to be done than with how to do it.
    • This research will focus more on the documentation process itself – so how to go about creating, updating, optimizing, managing, and distributing SOP documents.

    Inadequate SOPs lead to major data loss and over $99,000 in recovery costs

    CASE STUDY 1

    Company A mid-sized US organization with over 1,000 employees

    Source Info-Tech Interview

    Situation

    • IT supports storage nodes replicated across two data centers. SOPs for backup procedures did not include an escalation procedure for failed backups or a step to communicate successful backups. Management was not aware of the issue and therefore could not address it before a failure occurred.

    Incident

    • Primary storage had a catastrophic failure, and that put pressure on the secondary storage, which then also failed. All active storage failed and the data corrupted. Daily backups were failing due to lack of disk space on the backup device. The organization had to resort to monthly tape backups.

    Impact

    • Lost 1 month of data (had to go back to the last tape backup).
    • Recovery also took much longer because recovery procedures were also not documented.
    • Key steps such as notifying impacted customers were overlooked. Customers were left unhappy not only with the outage and data loss but also the lack of communication.
    Hard dollar recovery costs
    Backup specialist (vendor) to assist with restoring data from tape $12,000
    Temps to re-enter 1 month of data $5,000
    Weekend OT for 4 people (approximately 24 hours per person) $5,538
    Productivity cost for affected employees for 1 day of downtime $76,923
    Total $99,462

    Intangible costs

    High “goodwill” impact for internal staff and customers.

    "The data loss pointed out a glaring hole in our processes – the lack of an escalation procedure. If I knew backups weren’t being completed, I would have done something about that immediately."

    – Senior Division Manager, Information Technology Division

    IT services company optimizes its SOPs using “Lean” approach

    CASE STUDY 2

    Company Atrion

    SourceInfo-Tech Interview

    Lean and SOPs

    • Standardized work is important to Lean’s philosophy of continuous improvement. SOPs allow for replication of the current best practices and become the baseline standard for member collaboration toward further improvements.
    • For more on Lean’s approach to SOPs, see “Lean Six Sigma Quality Transformation Toolkit (LSSQTT) Tool #17.”

    Atrion’s approach

    • Atrion is focused on documenting high-level processes that improve the client and employee experience or which can be used for training.
    • Cross-functional teams collaborate to document a process and find ways to optimize that SOP.
    • Atrion leverages visual documentation as much as possible: flowcharts, illustrations, video screen captures, etc.

    Outcomes

    • Large increase in usable, up-to-date documentation.
    • Process and efficiency improvements realized and made repeatable.
    • Success has been so significant that Atrion is planning to offer SOP optimization training and support as a service for its clients in the future.

    Atrion

    • Atrion provides IT services, solutions, and leadership to clients in the 250+ user range.
    • After adopting the Lean framework for its organization, it has deliberately focussed on optimizing its documentation.

    When we initiated a formal process efficiency program a little over a year ago and began striving towards a culture of continuous improvement, documenting our SOPs became key. We capture how we do things today and how to make that process more efficient. We call it current state and future state mapping of any process.

    – Michelle Pope, COO, Atrion Networking Corp.

    Strategies to overcome common documentation challenges

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to streamline the SOP documentation process.

    Common documentation challenges Info-Tech’s methodology
    Where to start. For organizations with very few (if any) documented SOPs, the challenge is where to start. Apply a client focus to prioritize SOPs. Start with mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery.
    Lack of time. Writing SOPs is viewed as an onerous task, and IT staff typically do not like to write documentation or lack the time. Use flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams over traditional dense manuals. Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams take less time to create and maintain, and the output is far more usable than traditional manuals.
    Inconsistent document management. Documents are unorganized, e.g. hard to find documents, or you don’t know if you have the correct, latest version. Keep it simple. You don’t need a full-time SOP librarian if you stick to a simple, but consistent approach to documentation management. Simple is easier to follow (therefore, be consistent).
    Documentation is not maintained. More urgent tasks displace documentation efforts. There is little real motivation for staff to keep documents current. Ensure accountability at the individual and project level. Incorporate documentation requirements into performance evaluations, project planning, and change control procedures.

    Use this blueprint as a building block to complete these other Info-Tech projects

    Improve IT-Business Alignment Through an Internal SLA

    Understand business requirements, clarify capabilities, and close gaps.

    Standardize the Service Desk – Module 2 & 3

    Improve reporting and management of incidents and build service request workflows.

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan

    Define appropriate objectives for DR, build a roadmap to close gaps, and document your incident response plan.

    Extend the Service Desk to the Enterprise

    Position IT as an innovator.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Create Visual SOP Documents – project overview

    1. Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs 2. Establish a sustainable documentation process 3. Identify a content management solution
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify and prioritize undocumented/outdated critical processes

    1.2 Reduce effort and improve usability with visual documentation

    1.3 Optimize and document critical processes

    2.1 Establish guidelines for identifying and organizing SOPs

    2.2 Write an SOP for creating and maintaining SOPs

    2.3 Plan SOP working sessions to put a dent into your documentation backlog

    3.1 Understand the options when it comes to content management solutions

    3.2 Use Info-Tech’s evaluation tool to determine the right approach for you

    Guided Implementations
    • Identify undocumented critical SOPs.
    • Understand the benefits of a visual approach.
    • Work through a tabletop exercise to document two visual SOP documents.
    • Establish documentation information guidelines.
    • Identify opportunities to create a culture that fosters SOP creation.
    • Address outstanding undocumented SOPs by working through process issues together.
    • Review your current approach to content management and discuss possible alternatives.
    • Evaluate options for a content management strategy, in the context of your own environment.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:

    Identify undocumented critical processes and review the SOP mapping process.

    Module 2:

    Review and improve your documentation process and address your documentation backlog.

    Module 3:

    Evaluate strategies for publishing and managing SOP documentation.

    Phase 1 Outcome:
      Review and implement the process for creating usable SOPs.
    Phase 2 Outcome:
      Optimize your SOP maintenance processes.
    Phase 3 Outcome:
      Choose a content management solution that meets your needs.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Prep Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities Scope the SOP pilot and secure resources
    • Identify the scope of the pilot project.
    • Develop a list of processes to document.
    • Ensure required resources are available.
    Prioritize SOPs and review methodology

    1.1 Prioritize undocumented SOPs.

    1.2 Review the visual approach to SOP planning.

    1.3 Conduct a tabletop planning exercise.

    Review SOPs and identify process gaps

    2.1 Continue the tabletop planning exercise with other critical processes.

    2.2 Conduct a gap analysis to identify solutions to issues discovered during SOP mapping.

    Identify projects to meet process gaps

    3.1 Develop a prioritized project roadmap to address gaps.

    3.2 Define a process for documenting and maintaining SOPs.

    3.3 Identify and assign actions to improve SOP management and maintenance.

    Set next steps and put a dent in your backlog

    4.1 Run an SOP working session with experts and process owners to put a dent in the documentation backlog.

    4.2 Identify an appropriate content management solution.

    Deliverables
    1. Defined scope for the workshop.
    2. A longlist of key processes.
    1. Undocumented SOPs prioritized according to business criticality and current state.
    2. One or more documented SOPs.
    1. One or more documented SOPs.
    2. Gap analysis.
    1. SOP Project Roadmap.
    2. Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool.
    1. Multiple documented SOPs.
    2. Action steps to improve SOP management and maintenance.

    Measured value for Guided Implementations (GIs)

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Measured Value
    Phase 1: Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs
    • Time, value, and resources saved using Info-Tech’s methodology to prioritize and document SOPs in the ideal visual format.
    • For example, 4 FTEs*4 days*$80,000/year = $5,120
    Phase 2: Establish a sustainable documentation process
    • Time, value, and resources saved using our tools and methodology to implement a process to ensure SOPs are maintained, accessible, and up to date.
    • For example: 4 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $6,400
    Phase 3: Identify a content management solution
    • Time, value, and resources saved using our best-practice guidance and tools to select an approach and solution to manage your organization’s SOPs.
    • For example: 2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200
    Total Savings $14,720

    Note: Documenting SOPs provides additional benefits that are more difficult to quantify: reducing the time spent by staff to find or execute processes, improving transparency and accountability, presenting opportunities for automation, etc.

    Phase 1

    Prioritize, Optimize, and Document Critical SOPs

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prioritize, optimize, and document critical SOPs

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2 weeks

    Step 1.1: Prioritize SOPs

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Apply a client focus to critical IT services.
    • Identify undocumented, critical SOPs.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Rank and prioritize your SOP documentation needs.

    With this template:

    Standard Operating Procedures Workbook

    Step 1.2: Develop visual documentation

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Understand the benefits of a visual approach.
    • Review possibilities for visual documentation.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify formats that can improve your SOP documentation.

    With these templates:

    • Example DRP Process Flows
    • Example App Dev Process And more…

    Step 1.3: Optimize and document critical processes

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Two visual SOP documents, mapped using a tabletop exercise.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Create the visual SOP.
    • Review and optimize the process.

    With this tool:

    SOP Project Roadmap Tool

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    Identify opportunities to deploy visual documentation, and follow Info-Tech’s process to capture steps, gaps, and opportunities to improve IT processes.

    Focus first on client-facing and high-impact SOPs

    IT’s number one obligation to internal and external customers is to keep critical services running – that points to mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery.

    Topic Description
    Mission-critical operations
    • Maintenance processes for mission-critical systems (e.g. upgrade procedures, batch processing, etc.).
    • Client-facing services with either formal or informal SLAs.
    • Change management – especially for mission-critical systems, change management is more about minimizing risk of downtime than expediting change.
    Service management
    • Service desk procedures (e.g. ticket assignment and issue response).
    • Escalation procedures for critical outages.
    • System monitoring.
    Disaster recovery procedures
    • Management-level incident response plans, notification procedures, and high-level failover procedures (e.g. which systems must come up first, second, third).
    • Recovery or failover procedures for individual systems.
    • Backup and restore procedures – to ensure backups are available if needed.

    Understand what makes an application or service mission critical

    When email or a shared drive goes down, it may impact productivity, but may not be a significant impact to the business. Ask these questions when assessing whether an application or service is mission critical.

    Criteria Description
    Is there a hard-dollar impact from downtime?
    • For example, when an online catalog system goes down, it impacts sales and therefore revenue. Without determining the actual financial impact, you can make an immediate assessment that this is a Gold system.
    • By contrast, loss of email may impact productivity but may not affect revenue streams, depending on your business. A classification of Silver is most likely appropriate.
    Impact on goodwill/customer trust?
    • If downtime means delays in service delivery or otherwise impacts goodwill, there is an intangible impact on revenue that may make the associated systems Gold status.
    Is regulatory compliance a factor?
    • If a system requires redundancy and/or high availability due to legal or regulatory compliance requirements, it may need to be classified as a Gold system.
    Is there a health or safety risk?
    • For example, police and medical organizations have systems that are mission critical due to their impact on health and safety rather than revenue or cost, and therefore are classified as Gold systems. Are there similar considerations in your organization?

    "Email and other Windows-based applications are important for our day-to-day operations, but they aren’t critical. We can still manufacture and ship clothing without them. However, our manufacturing systems, those are absolutely critical"

    – Bob James, Technical Architect, Carhartt, Inc.

    Create a high-level risk and benefit scale

    1.1a

    15 minutes

    Define criteria for high, medium, and low risks and benefits, as shown in the example below. These criteria will be used in the upcoming exercises to rank SOPs.

    Note: The goal in this section is to provide high-level indicators of which SOPs should be documented first, so a high-level set of criteria is used. To conduct a detailed business impact analysis, see Info-Tech’s Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs
    Risk to the business Score
    Low: Affects ad hoc activities or non-critical data. 1
    Moderate: Impacts productivity and internal goodwill. 2
    High: Impacts revenue, safety, and external goodwill. 3
    Benefit (e.g. productivity improvement) Score
    Low: Minimal impact. 1
    Moderate: Items with short-term or occasional applicability, so limited benefit. 2
    High: Save time for common or ongoing processes, and extensive improvement to training/knowledge transfer. 3

    Identify and prioritize undocumented mission-critical operations

    1.1b

    15 minutes

    1. To navigate to this exercise, open Info-Tech’s Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
    2. List your top three–five mission critical applications or services.
    3. Identify relevant SOPs that support those applications or services.
    4. Indicate SOP status: Green = up to date and complete, Yellow = out-of-date or incomplete, Red = undocumented.
    5. Assign risk and benefit scores (3=high, 1=low) to Yellow and Red SOPs based on potential impact if those processes failed (risk) and opportunity for process improvement (benefit).

    OUTPUT

    • Analysis of SOPs supporting mission-critical operations

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs
    Application SOPs Status Risk Benefit
    Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
    • System administration (user administration, adding projects, etc.).
    Red 1 2
    • System upgrades (including OS upgrades and patches).
    Red 2 2
    • Report generation.
    Green n/a n/a
    Network services
    • Network monitoring (including fault detection).
    Yellow 3 2
    • Network upgrades.
    Red 2 1
    • Backup procedures.
    Yellow 3 1

    Identify and prioritize undocumented service management procedures

    1.1c

    15 minutes

    1. To navigate to this exercise, open Info-Tech’s Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
    2. Identify service management SOPs.
    3. Indicate SOP status: Green = up to date and complete, Yellow = out-of-date or incomplete, Red = undocumented.
    4. Assign risk and benefit scores (3=high, 1=low) to Yellow and Red SOPs based on potential impact if those processes failed (risk) and opportunity for process improvement (benefit).

    OUTPUT

    • Analysis of SOPs supporting service management

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs
    Service Type SOPs Status Risk Benefit
    Service Request
    • Software install
    Red 3 1
    • Software update
    Yellow 3 1
    • New hardware
    Green n/a n/a
    Incident Management
    • Ticket entry and triage
    Yellow 3 2
    • Ticket escalation
    Red 2 1
    • Notification for critical issues
    Yellow 3 1

    Identify and prioritize undocumented DR procedures

    1.1d

    20 minutes

    1. To navigate to this exercise, open Info-Tech’s Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
    2. Identify DR SOPs.
    3. Indicate SOP status: Green = up to date and complete, Yellow = out-of-date or incomplete, Red = undocumented.
    4. Assign risk and benefit scores (3=high, 1=low) to Yellow and Red SOPs based on potential impact if those processes failed (risk) and opportunity for process improvement (benefit).

    OUTPUT

    • Analysis of SOPs supporting DR

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs
    DR Phase SOPs Status Risk Benefit
    Discovery and Declaration
    • Initial detection and escalation
    Red 3 1
    • Notification procedures to Emergency Response Team (ERT)
    Yellow 3 1
    • Notification procedures to staff
    Green n/a n/a
    Recover Gold Systems
    • ERP recovery procedures
    Red 2 2
    • Corporate website recovery procedures
    Yellow 3 2
    Recover Silver Systems
    • MS Exchange recovery procedures
    Red 2 1

    Select the SOPs to focus on for the first round of documentation

    1.1e

    20 minutes

    1. Identify two significantly different priority 1 SOPs to document during this workshop. It’s important to get a sense of how the Info-Tech templates and methodology can be applied to different types of SOPs.
    2. Rank the remaining SOPs that you still need to address post-workshop by priority level within each topic area.

    INPUT

    • SOP analysis from activities 1.1 and 1.2

    OUTPUT

    • A shortlist of critical, undocumented SOPs to review later in this phase

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs
    Category Area SOPs Status Risk Benefit
    Disaster Recovery Procedures Discovery and Declaration
    • Initial detection and escalation
    Red 3 1
    • Notification procedures to ERT
    Yellow 3 1
    Mission-Critical Operations Network Services
    • Network monitoring (including fault detection)
    Yellow 3 2
    Service Management Procedures Incident Management
    • Ticket entry and triage
    Yellow 3 2

    Change the format of your documentation

    Which document is more effective? Which is more likely to be used?

    "The end result for most SOPs is a 100-page document that makes anyone but the author want to stab themselves rather than read it. Even worse is when you finally decide to waste an hour of your life reading it only to be told afterwards that it might not be quite right because Bob or Stan needed to make some changes last year but never got around to it."

    – Peter Church, Solutions Architect

    Create visual-based documentation to improve usability and effectiveness

    "Without question, 300-page DRPs are not effective. I mean, auditors love them because of the detail, but give me a 10-page DRP with contact lists, process flows, diagrams, and recovery checklists that are easy to follow."

    – Bernard Jones, MBCI, CBCP, CORP, Manager Disaster Recovery/BCP, ActiveHealth Management

    SOPs, including those that support your disaster recovery plan (DRP), are often created to meet certification requirements. However, this often leads to lengthy overly detailed documentation that is geared to auditors and business leaders, not IT staff trying to execute a procedure in a high-pressure, time-sensitive scenario.

    Staff don’t have time to flip through a 300-page manual, let alone read lengthy instructions, so organizations are transforming monster manuals into shorter, visual-based documentation. Benefits include:

    • Quicker to create than lengthy manuals.
    • Easier to be absorb, so they are more usable.
    • More likely to stay up to date because they are easier to maintain.

    Example: DRPs that include visual SOPs are easier to use — that leads to shorter recovery times and fewer mistakes.

    Chart is depicted showing the success rates of traditional manuals versus visual documentation.

    Use flowcharts for process flows or a high-level view of more detailed procedures

    • Flowcharts depict who does what and when; they provide an at-a-glance view that is easy to follow and makes task ownership clear.
    • Use swim lanes, as in this example, to indicate process stages and task ownership.
    • For experienced staff, a high-level reminder of process flows or key steps is sufficient.
    • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation (which could include checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts, etc.).

    See Info-Tech’s Incident and Service Management Procedures – Service Desk Example.

    "Flowcharts are more effective when you have to explain status and next steps to upper management."

    – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

    Example: SOP in flowchart format

    A flowchart is depicted as an example flowchart. This one is an SOP flowchart labelled 'Triage Process - Incidents'

    Review your options for diagramming software

    Many organizations look for an option that easily integrates with the MS Office suite. The default option is often Microsoft Visio.

    Pros:

    • Easy to learn and use.
    • Has a wide range of features and capabilities.
    • Comes equipped with a large collection of stencils and templates.
    • Offers the convenience of fluid integration with the MS Office Suite.

    Cons:

    • Isn’t included in any version of the MS Office Suite and can be quite expensive to license.
    • Not available for Mac or Linux environments.

    Consider the options below if you’re looking for an alternative to Microsoft Visio:

    Desktop Solutions

    • Dia Diagram Editor
    • Diagram Designer
    • LibreOffice Draw
    • Pencil Project
    • yEd Graph Editor

    • Draw.io
    • Creately
    • Gliffy
    • LucidChart

    Note: No preference or recommendation is implied from the ordering of the options above.

    This list is not intended to be comprehensive.

    Evaluate different solutions to identify one that works for you

    Use the criteria below to identify a flowchart software that fits your needs.

    Criteria Description
    Platform What platform(s) can run the software?
    Description What use cases are identified by the vendor – and do these cover your needs for documenting your SOPs? Is the software open source?
    Features What are the noteworthy features and characteristics?
    Usability How easy is the program to use? What’s the learning curve like? How intuitive is the design?
    Templates and Stencils Availability of templates and stencils.
    Portability Can the solution integrate with other pieces of software? Consider whether other tools can view, open, and/or edit documents; what file formats can be published, etc.
    Cost Cost of the software to purchase or license.

    Use checklists to streamline step-by-step procedures

    • Checklists are ideal when staff just need a reminder of what to do, not how to do it.
    • Remember your audience. You aren’t pulling in a novice to run a complex procedure, so all you really need here are a series of reminders.
    • Where more detail is required, include links to supporting documentation.
    • Note that a flowchart can often be used instead of a checklist, depending on preference.

    For two different examples of a checklist template, see:

    Image depicting an example checklist. This checklist depicts an employee termination checklist

    Use topology diagrams to capture network layout, integrations, and system information

    • Organizations commonly have network topology diagrams for reference purposes, so this is just a re-use of existing resources.
    • Physically label real world equipment to correspond to topology diagrams. While these labels will be redundant for most IT employees, they help give clarity and confidence when changes are being made.
    • If your topology diagrams are housed in a tool such as a systems management product, then export the diagrams so they can be included in your SOP documentation suite.

    "Our network engineers came to me and said our standard SOP template didn't work for them. They're now using a lot of diagrams and flowcharts, and that has worked out better for them."

    The image shows a topology organization diagram as an example network layout

    Use screen captures and tutorials to facilitate training for applications and SOPs

    • Screen capture tutorials or videos are effective for training staff on applications. For example, create a screen capture tutorial to train staff on the use of a help desk application and your company’s specific process for using that tool.
    • Similarly, create tutorials to train end users on straightforward “technical” tasks (e.g. setting up their VPN connection) to reduce the demand on IT staff.
    • Tutorials can be created quickly and easily with affordable software such as Snag-It, ScreenHunter Pro, HyperSnap, PicPick, FastStone, Ashampoo Snap 6, and many others.

    "When contractors come onboard, they usually don't have a lot of time to learn about the organization, and we have a lot of unique requirements. Creating SOP documents with screenshots has made the process quicker and more accurate."

    – Susan Bellamore, Business Analyst, Public Guardian and Trustee of British Columbia

    The image is an example of a screen caption tutorial, depicting desktop icons and a password login

    Example: Disaster recovery notification and declaration procedure

    1. Swim lanes indicate task ownership and process stages.
    2. Links to supporting documentation (which could include checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts, etc.) are included where necessary.
    3. Additional DR SOPs are captured within the same spreadsheet for convenient, centralized access.

    Review Info-Tech’s Incident Response and Recovery Process Flows – DRP Example.

    Example: DRP flowchart with links to supporting documents

    The image is an example of an DRP flowchart labelled 'Initial Discovery/Notification and Declaration Procedures'

    Establish flowcharting standards

    If you don’t have existing flowchart standards, then keep it simple and stick to basic flowcharting conventions as described below.

    Start, End, and Connector. Traditional flowcharting standards reserve this shape for connectors to other flowcharts or other points in the existing flowchart. Unified Modeling Language (UML) also uses the circle for start and end points.

    Start, End. Traditional flowcharting standards use this for start and end. However, Info-Tech recommends using the circle shape to reduce the number of shapes and avoid confusion with other similar shapes.

    Process Step. Individual process steps or activities (e.g. create ticket or escalate ticket). If it’s a series of steps, then use the sub-process symbol and flowchart the sub-process separately.

    Sub-Process. A series of steps. For example, a critical incident SOP might reference a recovery process as one of the possible actions. Marking it as a sub-process, rather than listing each step within the critical incident SOP, streamlines the flowchart and avoids overlap with other flowcharts (e.g. the recovery process).

    Decision. Represents decision points, typically with Yes/No branches, but you could have other branches depending on the question (e.g. a “Priority?” question could branch into separate streams for Priority 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 issues).

    Document/Report Output. For example, the output from a backup process might include an error log.

    Conduct a tabletop planning exercise to build an SOP

    1.3a

    20 minutes

    Tabletop planning is a paper-based exercise where your team walks through a particular process and maps out what happens at each stage.

    1. For this exercise, choose one particular process to document.
    2. Document each step of the process using cue cards, which can be arranged on the table in sequence.
    3. Be sure to include task ownership in your steps.
    4. Map out the process as it currently happens – we’ll think about how to improve it later.
    5. Keep focused. Stay on task and on time.

    OUTPUT

    • Steps in the current process for one SOP

    Materials

    • Tabletop, pen, and cue cards

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t get weighed down by tools. Relying on software or other technological tools can detract from the exercise. Use simple tools such as cue cards to record steps so that you can easily rearrange steps or insert steps based on input from the group.

    The image depicts three cue cards labelled steps 3 to 5. The cue cards are examples of the tabletop planning exercise.

    Collaborate to optimize the SOP

    1.3b

    20 minutes

    Review the tabletop exercise. What gaps exist in current processes?

    How can the process be made better? What are the outputs and checkpoints?

    The image depicts five cue cards, two of which are examples on how to improve the process. This is an example of the tabletop exercise.

    OUTPUT

    • Identify steps to optimize the SOP

    Materials

    • Tabletop, pen, and cue cards

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs

    A note on colors: Use white cards to record steps. Record gaps on yellow cards (e.g. a process step not documented) and risks on red cards (e.g. only one person knows how to execute a step) to highlight your gaps/to-dos and risks to be mitigated or accepted.

    If it’s necessary to clarify complex process flows during the exercise, also use green cards for decision diamonds, purple for document/report outputs, and blue for sub-processes.

    Capture opportunities to improve processes in the Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool

    1.3

    Rank and track projects to close gaps you discover in your processes.

    1. As a group, identify potential solutions to close the gaps in your processes that you’ve uncovered through the tabletop mapping exercise.
    2. Add these project names to the Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool on the “Project Scoring” tab.
    3. Review and adjust the criteria for evaluating the benefits and costs of different projects on the “Scoring Criteria” tab.
    4. Return to the “Project Scoring” tab, and assign weights at the top of each scoring column. Use the drop-down menus to adjust the scores for each project category. The tool will automatically rank the projects based on your input, but you can adjust the ranks as needed.
    5. Assign dates and descriptions to the projects on the “Implementation Schedule” tab, below.
    The image depicts a graph showing an example of ranked and tracked projects.

    Identify gaps to improve process performance and make SOP documentation a priority

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Government (700+ FTEs)
    Source Info-Tech Workshop

    Challenge

    • Tabletop planning revealed a 77-hour gap between current and desired RTO for critical systems.
    • Similarly, the current achievable RPO gap was up to one week, but the desired RPO was one hour.
    • A DR site was available but not yet set up with the necessary equipment.
    • Lack of documented standard operating procedures (SOPs) was identified as a risk since that increased the dependence on two or three key SMEs.

    Solution

    • Potential projects to close RTO/RPO gaps were identified, including:
      • Deploy servers that were decommissioned (as a result of a server refresh) to the DR site as warm standby servers.
      • Implement site-to-site data replication.
      • Document SOPs to enable tasks to be delegated and minimize resourcing risks.

    Results

    • A DR project implementation schedule was defined.
    • Many of the projects required no further investment, but rather deployment of existing equipment that could function as standby equipment at the DR site.
    • The DR risk from a lack of SOPs enabled SOPs to be made a priority. An expected side benefit is the ability to review and optimize processes and improve consistency in IT operations.

    Document the SOPs from the tabletop exercise

    1.3c

    20 minutes

    Document the results from the tabletop exercise in the appropriate format.

    1. Identify an appropriate visual format for the high-level SOP as well as for any sub-processes or supporting documentation.
    2. Break into groups of two or three.
    3. Each group will be responsible for creating part of the SOP. Include both the high-level SOP itself and any supporting documentation such as checklists, sign-off forms, sub-processes, etc.
    4. Once your document is complete, exchange it with that of another group. Review each other’s documents to check for clarity and completeness.

    OUTPUT

    • Output from activities 1.4 and 1.5

    Materials

    • Flowcharting software, laptops

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs

    This image has four cue cards, and an arrow pointing to a flowchart, depicting the transfer of the information on the cue cards into a flowchart software

    Repeat the tabletop exercise for the second process

    Come back together as a large group. Choose a process that is significantly different from the one you’ve just documented, and repeat the tabletop exercise.

    As a reminder, the steps are:

    1. Use the tabletop exercise to map out a current SOP.
    2. Collaborate to optimize the SOP.
    3. Decide on appropriate formats for the SOP and its supporting documents.
    4. Divide into small groups to create the SOP and its supporting documents.
    5. Repeat the steps above as needed for your initial review of critical processes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you plan to document more than two or three SOPs at once, consider making it an SOP “party” to add momentum and levity to an otherwise dry process. Review section 2.3 to find out how.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1a-e

    Get started by prioritizing SOPs

    Ensure the SOP project remains business focused, and kick off the project by analyzing critical business services. Identify key IT services that support the relevant business services. Conduct a benefit/risk analysis to prioritize which SOPs should become the focus of the workshop.

    1.3a-c

    Document the SOPs from the tabletop exercise

    Leverage a tabletop planning exercise to walk the team through the SOP. During the exercise, focus on identifying timelines, current gaps, and potential risks. Document the steps via que cards first and transpose the hard copies to an electronic version.

    Phase 2

    Establish a Sustainable Documentation Process

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Establish a sustainable SOP documentation process

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks

    Step 2.1: Establish guidelines for identifying and organizing SOPs

    Start with an analyst call:

    • Establish documentation information guidelines.
    • Review version control best practices.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Implement best practices to identify and organize your SOPs.

    With these tools & templates:

    • SOP Workbook

    Step 2.2: Define a process to document and maintain SOPs

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Identify opportunities to create a culture that fosters SOP creation.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Create a plan to address SOP documentation gaps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Document Management Checklist

    Step 2.3: Plan time with experts to put a dent in your documentation backlog

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Address outstanding undocumented SOPs by working through process issues together.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Organize and run a working session to document and optimize processes.

    With these tools & templates:

    • SOP Workbook
    • SOP Project Roadmap Tool

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    Improve the process for documenting and maintaining your SOPs, while putting a dent in your documentation backlog and gaining buy-in with staff.

    Identify current content management practices and opportunities for improvement

    DISCUSS

    What is the current state of your content management practices?

    Are you using a content management system? If not, where are documents kept?

    Are your organizational or departmental SOPs easy to find?

    Is version control a problem? What about file naming standards?

    Get everyone on the same page on the current state of your SOP document management system, using the questions above as the starting point.

    Keep document management simple for better adoption and consistency

    If there is too much complexity and staff can’t easily find what they need, you won’t get buy-in and you won’t get consistency.

    Whether you store SOPs in a sophisticated content management system (CMS) or on a shared network drive, keep it simple and focus on these primary goals:

    • Enable staff to find the right document.
    • Know if a document is the latest, approved version.
    • Minimize document management effort to encourage buy-in and consistency.

    If users can’t easily find what they need, it leads to bad practices. For example:

    • Users maintain their own local copies of commonly used documents to avoid searching for them. The risk is that local copies will not be automatically updated when the SOP changes.
    • Separate teams will implement their own document management system and repository. Now you have duplication of effort and company resources, multiple copies of documents (where each group needs their own version), and no centralized control over potentially sensitive documents.
    • Users will ignore documented SOPs or ask a colleague who might also be following the above bad practices.

    Insert a document information block on the first page of every document to identify key attributes

    Include a document information block on the first page of every document to identify key attributes. This strategy is as much about minimizing resistance as it is ensuring key attributes are captured.

    • A consistent document information block saves time (e.g. vs. customized approaches per document). If some fields don’t apply, enter “n/a.”
    • It provides key information about the document without having to check soft copy metadata, especially if you work with hard copies.
    • It’s a built-in reminder of what to capture and easier than updating document properties or header/footer information or entering metadata into a CMS.

    Note: The Info-Tech templates in this blueprint include a copy of the document information block shown in this example. Add more fields if necessary for your organization’s needs.

    For an example of a completed document information block, see Network Backup for Atlanta Data Center – Backups Example

    Info-Tech Insight

    For organizations with more advanced document management requirements, consider more sophisticated strategies (e.g. using metadata) as described in Info-Tech’s Use SharePoint for Enterprise Content Management and Reintroduce the Information Lifecycle to the Content Management Strategy. However, the basic concepts above still apply: establish standard attributes you need to capture and do so in a consistent manner.

    Modify the Info-Tech document information block to meet your requirements

    2.1a

    15 minutes

    1. Review “Guidelines and Template for the Document Information Block” in the Standard Operating Procedures Workbook. Determine if any changes are required, such as additional fields.
    2. Identify which fields you want to standardize and then establish standard terms. Balance the needs for simplicity and consistency – don’t force consistency where it isn’t a good fit.
    3. Pre-fill the document information block with standard terms and examples and add it to an SOP template that’s stored in your content management system.

    Educate staff by pre-filling the document

    • Providing examples built into the templates provides in-context, just-in-time training which is far more effective and easier than formal education efforts.
    • Focus your training on communicating when the template or standard terms change so that staff know to obtain the new version. Otherwise, the tendency for many staff will be to use one of their existing documents as their template.

    OUTPUT

    • Completed document information block

    Materials

    • Laptop
    • Projector

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs

    Leverage the document information block to create consistent filenames that facilitate searching

    Use the following filename format to create consistent, searchable, and descriptive filenames:

    Topic – Document Title – Document Type – Version Date

    Filename Component Purpose
    Topic
    • Functions as a filename prefix to group related documents but is also a probable search term. For project work, use a project name/number.
    Document Title
    • The title should be fairly descriptive of the content (if it isn’t, it’s not a good title) so it will help make the file easily identifiable and will include more probable search terms.
    Document Type Further distinguishes similar files (e.g. Maintenance SOP vs. a Maintenance Checklist).
    Version Date (for local files or if not using a CMS)
    • If it’s necessary to work on a file locally, include the version date at the end of the filename. The date is a more recognizable indicator of whether it’s the latest version or an old copy.
    • Establish a standard date format. Although MM-DD-YY is common in the US, the format YYYY-MM-DD reduces confusion between the month and day.

    For example:

    • ERP – System Administration Monthly Maintenance Tasks – Checklist – 2016-01-15.docx
    • ERP – System Administration Monthly Maintenance Tasks – SOP – 2017-01-10.docx
    • Backups – Network Backup Procedure for Atlanta Data Center – SOP – 2017-03-06.docx
    • PROJ437 – CRM Business Requirements – BRD – 2017-02-01.xlsx
    • DRP – Notification Procedures – SOP – 2016-09-14.docx
    • DRP – Emergency Response Team Roles and Responsibilities – Reference – 2018-03-10.xlsx

    Apply filename and document information block guidelines to existing SOPs

    2.1b

    15 minutes

    1. Review the SOPs created during the earlier exercises.
    2. Update the filenames and document information block based on guidelines in this section.
    3. Apply these guidelines to other select existing SOPs to see if additional modifications are required (e.g. additional standard terms).

    INPUT

    • Document Information Block

    OUTPUT

    • Updated filenames and document information blocks

    Materials

    • Laptop and projector

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs

    Implement version control policies for local files as well as those in your content management system (CMS)

    1. Version Control in Your CMS

    2. Always keep one master version of a document:

    • When uploading a new copy of an existing SOP (or any other document), ensure the filenames are identical so that you are just adding a new version rather than a separate new file.
    • Do not include version information in the filename (which would create a new separate file in your CMS). Allow your CMS to handle version numbering.
  • Version Control for Local Files

  • Ideally, staff would never keep local copies of files. However, there are times when it is practical or preferable to work from a local copy: for example, when creating or updating an SOP, or when working remotely if the CMS is not easily accessible.

    Implement the following policies to govern these circumstances:

    • Add the version date to the end of the filename while the document is local, as shown in the slide on filenames.
    • Remove the date when uploading it to a CMS that tracks date and version. If you leave the date in the filename, you will end up with multiple copies in your CMS.
    • When distributing copies for review, upload a copy to the CMS and send the link. Do not attach a physical file.
  • Minimize the Need for Version Updates

  • Reduce the need for version updates by isolating volatile information in a separate, linked document. For example:

    • Use Policy documents to establish high-level expectations and goals, and use SOPs to capture workflow, but put volatile details in a separate reference document. For example, for Backup procedures, put offsite storage vendor details such as contact information, pick up times, and approved couriers in a separate document.
    • Similarly, for DRP Notification procedures, reference a separate contacts list.

    Modify the Info-Tech Document Management Checklist to meet your requirements

    2.1c

    15 minutes

    1. Review the Info-Tech Document Management Checklist.
    2. Add or remove checklist items.
    3. Update the document information block.

    OUTPUT

    • Completed document management checklist

    Materials

    • Laptop, projector

    Participants

    • Process Owners
    • SMEs

    See Info-Tech’s Document Management Checklist.

    If you aren’t going to keep your SOPs current, then you’re potentially doing more harm than good

    An outdated SOP can be just as dangerous as having no SOP at all. When a process is documented, it’s trusted to be accurate.

    • Disaster recovery depends as much on supporting SOPs – such as backup and restore procedures – as it does on a master incident response plan.
    • For disaster scenarios, the ability to meet recovery point objectives (i.e. minimize data loss) and recovery time objectives (i.e. minimize downtime) depends on smoothly executed recovery procedures and on having well-defined and up-to-date DR documentation and supporting SOPs. For example:
      • Recovery point (data loss) objectives are directly impacted by your backup procedures.
      • Recovery time is minimized by a well-defined restore procedure that reduces the risk of human error during recovery which could lead to data loss or a delay in the recovery.
      • Similarly, a clearly documented configuration procedure will reduce the time to bring a standby system online.
    A graph depicting the much faster recovery time of up-to-date SOPs versus out-of-date SOPs.

    Follow Info-Tech best practices to keep SOPs current and drive consistent, efficient IT operations

    The following best practices were measured in this chart, and will be discussed further in this section:

    1. Identify documentation requirements as part of project planning.
    2. Require a manager or supervisor to review and approve SOPs.
    3. Check documentation status as part of change management.
    4. Hold staff accountable.
    Higher adoption of Info-Tech best practices leads to more effective SOPs and greater benefits in areas such as training and process improvement.

    Graph depicting the efficiency of adopting Info-Tech practices regarding SOPs. Four categories of 'Training', 'process improvement', 'IT automation', and 'consistent IT operations' are shown increasing in efficiency with a high adoption of Info-Tech strategies.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Audits for compliance requirements have little impact on getting SOPs done in a timely manner or the actual usefulness of those SOPs, because the focus is on passing the audit instead of creating SOPs that improve operations. The frantic annual push to complete SOPs in time for an audit is also typically a much greater effort than maintaining documents as part of ongoing change management.

    Identify documentation requirements as part of project planning

    DISCUSS

    When are documentation requirements captured, including required changes to SOPs?

    Make documentation requirements a clearly defined deliverable. As with any other task, this should include:

    • Owner: The person ultimately responsible for the documentation.
    • Assigned resource: The person who will actually put pen to paper. This could be the same person as the owner, or the owner could be a reviewer.
    • Deadlines: Include documentation deliverables in project milestones.
    • Verification process: Validate completion and accuracy. This could be a peer review or management review.
    Example: Implement a new service desk application.
    • Service desk SOP documentation requirements: SOP for monitoring and managing tickets will require changes to leverage new automation features.
    • Owner: Service Desk Lead.
    • Assigned resource: John Smith (service desk technician).
    • Deadline: Align with “ready for QA testing.”
    • Verification process: Service Desk Lead document review and signoff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Realistically, documentation will typically be a far less urgent task than the actual application or system changes. However, if you want the necessary documentation to be ultimately completed, even if it’s done after more urgent tasks, it must be tracked.

    Implement document approval steps at the individual and project level

    DISCUSS

    How do you currently review and validate SOP documents?

    Require a manager or supervisor to review and approve SOPs.

    • Avoid a bureaucratic review process involving multiple parties. The goal is to ensure accuracy and not just provide administrative protection.
    • A review by the immediate supervisor or manager is often sufficient. Their feedback and the implied accountability improve the quality and usefulness of the SOPs.

    Check documentation status as part of change management.

    • Including a documentation status check holds the project leaders and management accountable.
    • If SOPs are not critical to the project deliverable, then realistically the deliverable is not held back. However, keep the project open until relevant documents are updated so those tasks can’t be swept under the rug until the next audit.

    SOP reviews, change management, and identifying requirements led to benefits such as training and process improvement.

    A chart depicting the impact and benefits of SOP reviews, change management and identifying requirements. The chart is accompanied by a key for the grey to blue colours depicted

    "Our directors and our CIO have tied SOP work to performance evaluations and SOP status is reviewed during management meetings. People have now found time to get this work done."

    – Assistant Director-IT Operations, Healthcare Industry

    Review SOPs regularly and assign a process owner to avoid reinforcing silos

    CASE STUDY

    Industry

    Public service organization

    Source

    Info-Tech client engagement

    Situation

    • The organization’s IT department consists of five heavily siloed units.
    • Without communication or workflow accountability across units, each had developed incompatible workflows, making estimates of “time to resolution” for service requests difficult.
    • The IT service manager purchases a new service desk tool, attempting to standardize requests across IT to improve efficiency, accountability, and transparency.

    Complication

    • The IT service manager implements the tool and creates standardized workflows without consulting stakeholders in the different service units.
    • The separate units immediately rebel against the service manager and try to undermine the implementation of the new tool.

    Results

    • Info-Tech analysts helped to facilitate a solution between experts in the different units.
    • In order to develop a common workflow and ticket categorization scheme, Info-Tech recommended that each service process should have a single approver.

    The bottom line: ensure that there’s one approver per process to drive process efficiency and accountability and avoid problems down the road.

    Hold staff accountable to encourage SOP work to be completed in a timely manner

    DISCUSS

    Are SOP updates treated as optional or “when I have time” work?

    Hold staff directly accountable for SOP work.

    Holding staff accountable is really about emphasizing the importance of ensuring SOPs stay current. If management doesn’t treat SOPs as a priority, then neither will your staff. Strategies include:

    • Include SOP work in performance appraisals.
    • Keep relevant tickets open until documentation is completed.
    • Ensure documents are reviewed, as discussed earlier.
    • Identify and assign documentation tasks as part of project planning efforts, as discussed earlier.

    Holding staff accountable minimizes procrastination and therefore maintenance effort.

    Chart depicting the impact on reducing SOP maintenance effort followed by a key defining the colours on the chart

    Info-Tech Insight

    Holding staff accountable does not by itself make a significant impact on SOP quality (and therefore the typical benefits of SOPs), but it minimizes procrastination, so the work is ultimately done in a more timely manner. This ensures SOPs are current and usable, so they can drive benefits such as consistent operations, improved training, and so on.

    Assign action items to address SOP documentation process challenges

    2.2

    1. Discuss the challenges mentioned at the start of this section, and other challenges highlighted by the strategies discussed in this section. For example:
    • Are documentation requirements included in project planning?
    • Are SOPs and other documentation deliverables reviewed?
    • Are staff held accountable for documentation?
  • Document the challenges in your copy of the Standard Operating Procedures Workbook and assign action items to address those challenges.
  • Challenge Action Items Action Item Owner
    Documentation requirements are identified at the end of a project.
    • Modify project planning templates and checklists to include “identify documentation requirements.”
    Bob Ryan
    SOPs are not reviewed.
    • When assigning documentation tasks, also assign an owner who will be responsible for reviewing and approving the deliverable.
    • Create a mechanism for officially signing off on the document (e.g. email approval or create a signoff form).
    Susan Jones

    An “SOP party” fosters a collaborative approach and can add some levity to an otherwise dry exercise

    What is an SOP party?

    • An SOP party is a working session, bringing together process owners and key staff to define current SOPs and collaborate to identify optimization opportunities.
    • The party aspect is really just about how you market the event. Order in food or build in a cooking contest (e.g. a chilli cook-off or dessert bake-off) to add some fun to what can be a dry activity.

    Why does this work?

    • Process owners become so familiar with their tasks that many of the steps essentially live in their heads. Questions from colleagues draw out those unwritten steps and get them down on paper so another sufficiently qualified employee could carry out the same steps.
    • Once the processes are defined (e.g. via a tabletop exercise), input from colleagues can help identify risks and optimization opportunities, and process questions can be quickly answered because the key people are all present.
    • The group approach also promotes consistency and enables you to set expectations (e.g. visual-based approach, standards, level of detail, etc.).

    When is collaboration necessary (e.g. via tabletop planning)?

    • Tabletop planning is ideal for complex processes as well as processes that span multiple tasks, people, and/or systems.
    • For processes with a narrow focus (e.g. recovery steps for a specific server), assign these to the SME to document. Then ensure the SOP is reviewed to draw out the unwritten steps as described above.
    • For example, if you use tabletop planning to document a high-level DR plan, sub-processes might include recovery procedures for individual systems; those SOPs can then be assigned to individual SMEs.

    Schedule SOP working sessions until critical processes are documented

    Ultimately, it’s more efficient to create and update SOPs as needed but dedicated working sessions will help address immediate critical needs.

    Organize the working session:
    1. Book a full-day meeting in an out of the way meeting room, invite key staff (system and process owners who ultimately need to be SOP owners), and order in lunch so no one has to leave.
    2. Prioritize SOPs (see Phase 1) and set goals (e.g. complete the top 6 SOPs during this session).
    3. Alternate between collaborative efforts and documenting the SOPs. For example:
      1. Tabletop or flowchart the current SOP. Take a picture of the current state for reference purposes.
      2. Look for process improvements. If you have the authority in the room to enable process changes, then modify the tabletop/flowchart accordingly and capture this desired future state (e.g. take a picture). Otherwise, identify action items to follow up on proposed changes.
      3. Identify all related documentation deliverables (e.g. sub-processes, checklists, approval forms, etc.).
      4. Create the identified documentation deliverables (divide the work among the team). Then repeat the above.
    4. Repeat these working sessions on a monthly or quarterly basis, depending on your requirements, until critical SOPs are completed.
    5. When the SOP backlog is cleared, conduct quarterly or semi-annual refreshers for ongoing review and optimization of key processes.

    Assign action items to capture next steps after SOP working sessions

    2.3

    1. Review the SOPs documented during this workshop. Identify action items to complete and validate those SOPs and related documents. For example, do the SOPs require further approval or testing?
    2. Similarly, review the document management checklist and identify action items to complete, expand, and/or validate proposed standards.
    3. For SOP working sessions, decide on a date, time, and who should be there based on the guidelines in this section. If the SOP party approach does not meet your requirements, then at the very least assign owners for the identified critical SOPs and set deadlines for completing those SOPs. Document these extra action items in your copy of the Standard Operating Procedures Workbook.
    SOP or Task Action Items Action Item Owner
    Ticket escalation SOP
    • Debrief the rest of the Service Desk team on the new process.
    • Modify the SOP further based on feedback, if warranted.
    • Implement the new SOP. This includes communicating visible changes to business users and other IT staff.
    Jeff Sutter
    SOP party
    • Contact prospective attendees to communicate the purpose of the SOP party.
    • Schedule the SOP party.
    Bob Smith

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with out Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    Identify current content management practices

    As a group, identify current pain points and opportunities for improvement in your current content management practices.

    2.2

    Assign action items to address documentation process challenges

    Develop a list of action items to address gaps in the SOP documentation and maintenance process.

    Phase 3

    Identify a Content Management Solution

    Create Visual SOP Documents that Drive Process Optimization, Not Just Peace of Mind

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Decide on a content management solution for your SOPs

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1 week

    Step 3.1: Understand the options for CM solutions

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Review your current approach to content management and discuss possible alternatives.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Evaluate the pros and cons of different approaches to content management.
    • Discuss approaches for fit with your team.

    Step 3.2: Identify the right solution for you

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Identify 2–3 possible options for a content management strategy.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify the best solution based on portability, maintainability, cost, and implementation effort.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool
    • SOP Project Roadmap
    • SOP Workbook

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    Choose an approach to content management that will best support your organization’s SOP documentation and maintenance process.

    Decide on an appropriate publishing and document management strategy for your organization

    Publishing and document management considerations:

    • Portability/External Access: At the best of times, portability is nice because it enables flexibility, but at the worst of times (such as in a disaster recovery situation) it is absolutely essential. If your primary site is down, can you still access your documentation? As shown in this chart, traditional storage strategies still dominate DRP documentation, but these aren’t necessarily the best options.
    • Maintainability/Usability: How easy is it to create, update, and use the documentation? Is it easy to link to other documents? Is there version control? The easier the system is to use, the easier it is to get employees to use it.
    • Cost/Effort: Is the cost and effort appropriate? For example, a large enterprise may need a formal solution like SharePoint or a Content Management System. For smaller organizations, the cost of these tools might be harder to justify.

    Consider these approaches:

    This section reviews the following approaches, their pros and cons, and how they meet publishing and document management requirements:

    • SOP tools.
    • Cloud-based content management software.
    • In-house solutions combining SharePoint and MS Office (or equivalent).
    • Wiki site.
    • “Manual” approaches such as storing documents on a USB drive.
    Chart depicting the portable strategy popularity, followed by a key defining the colours on the graph

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group; N=118

    Note: Percentages total more than 100% due to respondents using more than one portability strategy.

    Develop a content management strategy and process to reduce organizational risk

    CASE STUDY

    Segment

    Mid-market company

    Source

    Info-Tech Interview

    Situation

    • A mid-sized company hired a technical consultancy to manage its network.
    • As part of this move, the company’s network administrator was fired.
    • Over time, this administrator had become a “go-to” person for several other IT functions.

    Complication

    • The consulting team realizes that the network administrator kept critical documentation on his local hard drive.
    • This includes configs, IP addresses, passwords, logins to vendor accounts, and more.
    • It becomes clear the administrator was able to delete some of this information before leaving, which the consultants are required to retrieve and re-document.

    Result

    • Failing to implement effective SOPs for document management and terminating key IT staff exposed the organization to unnecessary risk and additional costs.
    • Allowing a local content management system to develop created a serious security risk.
    • The bottom line: create a secure, centralized, and backed-up location and establish SOPs around using it to help keep the company’s data safe.

    Info-Tech offers a web-based policy management solution with process management capabilities

    Role How myPolicies helps you
    Policy Sponsors
    • CEO
    • Board of Directors

    Reduced Corporate Risk

    Avoid being issued a regulatory fine or sanction that could jeopardize operations or hurt brand image.

    Policy Reviewers
    • Internal Audit
    • Compliance
    • Risk
    • Legal

    A Culture of Compliance

    Adherence with regulatory requirements as well as documented audit trail of all critical policy activities.

    Policy Owners
    • HR
    • IT
    • Finance
    • Operations

    Less Administrative Burden

    Automation and simplification of policy creation, distribution, and tracking.

    Policy Users
    • Employees
    • Vendors
    • Contractors

    Policy Clarity

    Well-written policies are stored in one reliable, easy to navigate location.

    About this Approach:

    myPolicies is a web-based solution to create, distribute, and manage corporate policies, procedures, and forms, built around best practices identified by our research.

    Contact your Account Manager today to find out if myPolicies is right for you.

    SOP software and DR planning tools can help, but they aren’t a silver bullet

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Typically have a SaaS option, providing built-in external access with appropriate security and user administration to vary access rights.
    • Cons: Dependent on the vendor to ensure external access, but this is typically not an issue.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in templates encourage consistency as well as guide initial content development by indicating what details need to be captured.
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support, etc.), centralized access/navigation to required documents, and some automation (e.g. update contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Not a silver bullet. You still have to do the work to define and capture your processes.
    • Cons: Requires end-user and administrator training.
    • Cons: Often modules of larger software suites. If you use the entire suite, it may make sense to use the SOP tool, but otherwise probably not.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: For large enterprises, the convenience of built-in document management and templates can outweigh the cost.
    • Cons: SOP tools can be costly. Expect to pay at least $3,000-7,000 for software licensing, plus additional per user and hosting fees.
    About this Approach:

    SOP tools such as Princeton Center’s SOP ExpressTM and SOP Tracks or MasterControl’s SOP Management and eSOP allow organizations to create, manage, and access SOPs. These programs typically offer a range of SOP templates and formats, electronic signatures, version control, and review options and training features such as quizzes and monitoring.

    Similarly, DR planning solutions (e.g. eBRP, Recovery Planner, LDRPS, etc.) provide templates, tools, and document management to create DR documentation including SOPs.

    Consider leveraging SharePoint to provide document management capabilities

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: SharePoint is commonly web-enabled and supports external access with appropriate security and user administration.
    • Cons: Must be installed at redundant sites or be cloud-based to be effective in the event of a worst-case scenario disaster recovery situation in which the primary data center is down.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access to required documents.
    • Pros: No tool learning curve – SharePoint and MS Office would be existing solutions already used on a daily basis.
    • Cons: No built-in automated updates (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Using existing tools, so this is a sunk cost in terms of capex.
    • Cons: Additional effort required to create templates and manage the documentation library.

    For more information on SharePoint as a content management solution, see Info-Tech’s Use SharePoint for Enterprise Content Management.

    About this Approach:

    Most SOP documents start as MS Office documents, even if there is an SOP tool available (some SOP tools actually run within MS Office on the desktop). For organizations that decide to bypass a formal SOP tool, the biggest gap they have to overcome is document management.

    Many organizations are turning to SharePoint to meet this need. For those that already have SharePoint in place, it makes sense to further leverage SharePoint for SOP documentation.

    For SharePoint to be a practical solution, the documentation must still be accessible if the primary data center is down, e.g. by having redundant SharePoint instance at multiple in-house locations or using a cloud-based SharePoint solution.

    As an alternative to SharePoint, SaaS tools such as Power DMS, NetDocuments, Xythos on Demand, Knowledge Tree, Spring CM, and Zoho Docs offer cloud-based document management, authoring, and distribution services that can work well for SOPs. Some of these, such as Power DMS and Spring CM, are geared specifically toward workflows.

    A wiki may be all you need

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Wiki sites can support external access as with any web solution.
    • Cons: May lack more sophisticated content management features.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Built-in document management (e.g. version control, metadata support, etc.) as well as centralized access to required information.
    • Pros: Authorized users can make updates dynamically, depending on how much restriction you have on the site.
    • Cons: No built-in automation (e.g. automated updates to contacts throughout the system).
    • Cons: Consistency depends on creating templates and implementing processes for document updates, review, and approval.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: An inexpensive option compared to traditional content management solutions such as SharePoint.
    • Cons: Learning curve if wikis are new to your organization.
    About this Approach:

    Wiki sites are websites where users collaborate to create and edit the content. Wikipedia is an example.

    While wiki sites are typically used for collaboration and dynamic content development, the traditional collaborative authoring model can be restricted to provide structure and an approval process.

    Several tools are available to create and manage wiki sites (and other collaboration solutions), as outlined in the following research:

    An approach that I’ve seen work well is to consult the wiki for any task, activity, job, etc. Is it documented? If not, then document it there and then. Sure, this led to 6-8 weeks of huge effort, but the documentation grew in terms of volume and quality at an alarming but pleasantly surprising rate. Providing an environment to create the documentation is important and a wiki is ideal. Fast, lightweight, in-browser editing leads to little resistance in creating documents.

    - Lee Blackwell, Global IT Operation Services Manager, Avid Technology

    Managing SOPs on a shared network drive involves major challenges and limitations

    Portability/External Access:
    • Cons: Must be hosted at redundant sites in order to be effective in a worst-case scenario that takes down your data center.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: Easy to implement and no learning curve.
    • Pros: Access can be easily managed.
    • Cons: Version control, standardization, and document management can be significant challenges.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: Little to no cost and no tool management required.
    • Cons: Managing documents on a shared network drive requires strict attention to process for version control, updates, approvals, and distribution.
    About this Approach:

    With this strategy, SOP documents are stored and managed locally on a shared network drive. Only process owners and administrators have read-write permissions on documents on the shared drive.

    The administrator grants access and manages security permissions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    For small organizations, the shared network drive approach can work, but this is ultimately a short-term solution. Move to an online library by creating a wiki site. Start slow by beginning with a particular department or project, then evaluate how well your staff adapt to this technology as well as its potential effectiveness in your organization. Refer to the Info-Tech collaboration strategy research cited on the previous slide for additional guidance.

    Avoid extensive use of paper copies of SOP documentation

    SOP documents need to be easy to update, accessible from anywhere, and searchable. Paper doesn’t meet these needs.

    Portability/External Access:
    • Pros: Does not rely on technology or power.
    • Cons: Not adequate for disaster recovery situations; would require all staff to have a copy and to have it with them at all times.
    Maintainability/Usability:
    • Pros: In terms of usability, again there is no dependence on technology.
    • Cons: Updates need to be printed and distributed to all relevant staff every time there is a change to ensure staff have access to the latest most accurate documentation.
    • Cons: Navigation to other information is manual – flipping through pages etc. No searching or hyperlinks.
    Cost/Effort:
    • Pros: No technology system to maintain, aside from what you use for printing.
    • Cons: Printing expenses are actually among the highest incurred by organizations and this adds to it.
    • Cons: Labor-intensive due to need to print and physically distribute documentation updates.
    About this Approach

    Traditionally, SOPs were printed and kept somewhere in a large binder (or several large binders). This isn’t adequate to the needs of most organizations and typically results in documents that aren’t up to date or effective.

    Use Info-Tech’s solution evaluation tool to decide on a publishing and document management strategy

    All organizations have existing document management methodologies, even if it’s simply storing documents on a network drive.

    Use Info-Tech’s solution evaluation tool to decide whether your existing solution meets the portability/external access, maintainability/usability, and cost/effort criteria, or whether you need to explore a different option.

    Note: This tool was originally built to evaluate DRP publishing options, so the tool name and terminology refers to DR. However, the same tool can be used to evaluate general SOP publishing and document management solutions.

    The image is a screenshot of Info-Tech's evaluation tool
    Consider using Info-Tech’s DRP Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no absolute ranking for possible solutions. The right choice will depend on factors such as current in-house tools, maturity around document management, the size of your IT department, and so on. For example, a small shop may do very well with the USB drive strategy, whereas a multi-national company will need a more formal strategy to ensure consistent application of corporate guidelines.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    Decide on a publishing and document management strategy

    Review the pros and cons of different strategies for publishing and document management. Identify needs, priorities, and limitations of your environment. Create a shortlist of options that can meet your organization’s needs and priorities.

    3.2

    Complete the solution evaluation tool

    Evaluate solutions on the shortlist to identify the strongest option for your organization, based on the criteria of maintainability, affordability, effort to implement, and accessibility/portability.

    Insight breakdown

    Create visual documents, not dense SOP manuals.

    • Visual documents that can be scanned are more usable and easier to update.
    • Flowcharts, checklists, and diagrams all have their place in visual documentation.

    Start with high-impact SOPs.

    • It can be difficult to decide where to start when faced with a major documentation backlog.
    • Focus first on client facing and high-impact SOPs, i.e. mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery procedures.

    Integrate SOP creation into project requirements and hold staff accountable.

    • Holding staff accountable does not provide all the benefits of a well documented and maintained SOP, but it minimizes procrastination, so the work is ultimately done in a more timely manner.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    SOPs may not be exciting, but they’re very important to organizational consistency, efficiency, and improvement.

    This blueprint outlined how to:

    • Prioritize and execute SOP documentation work.
    • Establish a sustainable process for creating and maintaining SOP documentation.
    • Choose a content management solution for best fit.

    Processes Optimized

    • Multiple processes supporting mission-critical operations, service management, and disaster recovery were documented. Gaps in those processes were uncovered and addressed.
    • In addition, your process for maintaining process documents was improved, including adding documentation requirements and steps requiring documentation approval.

    Deliverables Completed

    As part of completing this project, the following deliverables were completed:

    • Standard Operating Procedures Workbook
    • Standard Operating Procedures Project Roadmap Tool
    • Document Management Checklist
    • Publishing and Document Management Solution Evaluation Tool

    Project step summary

    Client Project: Create and maintain visual SOP documentation.

    1. Prioritize undocumented SOPs.
    2. Develop visual SOP documentation.
    3. Optimize and document critical processes.
    4. Establish guidelines for identifying and organizing SOPs.
    5. Define a process for documenting and maintaining SOPs.
    6. Plan time with experts to put a dent in your documentation backlog.
    7. Understand the options for content management solutions.
    8. Identify the right content management solution for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This project has the ability to fit the following formats:

    • Onsite workshop by Info-Tech Research Group consulting analysts.
    • Do-it-yourself with your team.
    • Remote delivery (Info-Tech Guided Implementation).

    Bibliography

    Anderson, Chris. “What is a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)?” Bizmanualz, Inc. No date. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. https://www.bizmanualz.com/save-time-writing-procedures/what-are-policies-and-procedures-sop.html

    Grusenmeyer, David. “Developing Effective Standard Operating Procedures.” Dairy Business Management. 1 Feb. 2003. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. https://ecommons.cornell.edu/handle/1813/36910

    Mosaic. “The Value of Standard Operating Procedures.” 22 Oct. 2012. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. ttp://www.mosaicprojects.com.au/WhitePapers/WP1086_Standard_Operating_Procedures.pdf

    Sinn, John W. “Lean, Six Sigma, Quality Transformation Toolkit (LSSQTT) Tool #17 Courseware Content – Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) For Lean and Six Sigma: Infrastructure for Understanding Process.” Summer 2006. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. https://www.bgsu.edu/content/dam/BGSU/college-of-technology/documents/LSSQTT/LSSQTT%20Toolkit/toolkit3/LSSQTT-Tool-17.pdf

    United States Environmental Protection Agency. “Guidance for Preparing Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs).” April 2007. Web. 25 Jan. 2016. http://www.epa.gov/sites/production/files/2015-06/documents/g6-final.pdf

    Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}397|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • There are no standardized processes for the intake of new ideas and no consistent view of the drivers needed to assess the value of these ideas.
    • IT is spending money on low-value services and doesn’t have the ability to understand and track value in order to prioritize IT investment.
    • CIOs are not trusted to drive innovation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The service portfolio empowers IT to be a catalyst in business strategy, change, and growth.
    • IT must drive value-based investment by understanding value of all services in the portfolio.
    • Organizations must assess the value of their services throughout their lifecycle to optimize business outcomes and IT spend.

    Impact and Result

    • Optimize IT investments by prioritizing services that provide more value to the business, ensuring that you do not waste money on low-value or out-of-date IT services.
    • Ensure that services are directly linked to business objectives, goals, and needs, keeping IT embedded in the strategic vision of the organization.
    • Enable the business to understand the impact of IT capabilities on business strategy.
    • Ensure that IT maintains a strategic and tactical view of the services and their value.
    • Drive agility and innovation by having a streamlined view of your business value context and a consistent intake of ideas.
    • Provide strategic leadership and create new revenue by understanding the relative value of new ideas vs. existing services.

    Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Service portfolio management enables organizations to become strategic value creators by establishing a dynamic view of service value. Understand the driving forces behind the need to manage services through their lifecycles.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish the service portfolio

    Establish and understand the service portfolio process by setting up the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 1: Establish the Service Portfolio
    • Service Portfolio Worksheet

    2. Develop a value assessment framework

    Use the value assessment tool to assess services based on the organization’s context of value.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 2: Develop a Value Assessment Framework
    • Value Assessment Tool
    • Value Assessment Example Tool

    3. Manage intake and assessment of initiatives

    Create a centralized intake process to manage all new service ideas.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 3: Manage Intake and Assessment of Initiatives
    • Service Intake Form

    4. Assess active services

    Continuously validate the value of the existing service and determine the future of service based on the value and usage of the service.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 4: Assess Active Services

    5. Manage and communicate the service portfolio

    Communicate and implement the service portfolio within the organization, and create a mechanism to seek out continuous improvement opportunities.

    • Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management – Phase 5: Manage and Communicate the Service Portfolio
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Lead Strategic Decision Making With Service Portfolio Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the Service Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Establish and understand the service portfolio process by setting up the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Understand at a high level the steps involved in managing the service portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Adapt the Service Portfolio Worksheet to organizational needs and create a plan to begin documenting services in the worksheet.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    1.2 Adapt the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Outputs

    Knowledge about the use of the Service Portfolio Worksheet.

    Adapt the worksheet to reflect organizational needs and structure.

    2 Develop a Value Assessment Framework

    The Purpose

    Understand the need for a value assessment framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the organizational context of value through a holistic look at business objectives.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Value Assessment Tool to validate and determine service value.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand value from business context.

    2.2 Determine the governing body.

    2.3 Assess culture and organizational structure.

    2.4 Complete the value assessment.

    2.5 Discuss value assessment score.

    Outputs

    Alignment on value context.

    Clear roles and responsibilities established.

    Ensure there is a supportive organizational structure and culture in place.

    Understand how to complete the value assessment and obtain a value score for selected services.

    Understand how to interpret the service value score.

    3 Manage Intake and Assessment of Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Create a centralized intake process to manage all new service ideas.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Encourage collaboration and innovation through a transparent, formal, and centralized service intake process.

    Activities

    3.1 Review or design the service intake process.

    3.2 Review the Service Intake Form.

    3.3 Design a process to assess and transfer service ideas.

    3.4 Design a process to transfer completed services to the service catalog.

    Outputs

    Create a centralized process for service intake.

    Complete the Service Intake Form for a specific initiative.

    Have a process designed to transfer approved projects to the PMO.

    Have a process designed for transferring of completed services to the service catalog.

    4 Assess Active Services

    The Purpose

    Continuously validate the value of existing services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure services are still providing the expected outcome.

    Clear next steps for services based on value.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss/review management of active services.

    4.2 Complete value assessment for an active service.

    4.3 Determine service value and usage.

    4.4 Determine the next step for the service.

    4.5 Document the decision regarding the service outcome.

    Outputs

    Understand how active services must be assessed throughout their lifecycles.

    Understand how to assess an existing service.

    Place the service on the 2x2 matrix based on value and usage.

    Understand the appropriate next steps for services based on value.

    Formally document the steps for each of the IRMR options.

    5 Manage and Communicate Your Service Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Communicate and implement the service portfolio within the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Obtain buy-ins for the process.

    Create a mechanism to identify changes within the organization and to seek out continuous improvement opportunities for the service portfolio management process and procedures.

    Activities

    5.1 Create a communication plan for service portfolio and value assessment.

    5.2 Create a communication plan for service intake.

    5.3 Create a procedure to continuously validate the process.

    Outputs

    Document the target audience, the message, and how the message should be communicated.

    Document techniques to encourage participation and promote participation from the organization.

    Document the formal review process, including cycle, roles, and responsibilities.

    Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}440|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 29 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • The number of IT project resources and the quantity of IT projects and tasks can no longer be recorded, prioritized, and tracked using non-commercial project portfolio management (PPM) solutions.
    • Your organization has attained a moderate level of PPM maturity.
    • You have sufficient financial and technical resources to purchase a commercial PPM solution.
    • There is a wide variety of commercial PPM solutions; different kinds of PPM solutions are more appropriate for organizations of a certain size and a certain PPM maturity level than others.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Implementations of PPM solutions are often unsuccessful resulting in wasted time and resources; failing to achieve sustainable adoption of the tool is a widespread pain point.
    • The costs of PPM solutions do not end after the implementation and subscription invoices are paid. Have realistic expectations about the time required to use and maintain PPM solutions to ensure success.
    • PPM solutions help PMOs serve the organization’s core decision makers. Success depends on improved service to these stakeholders.

    Impact and Result

    • Using Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape and PPM solution use cases, you will be able to make sense of the diversity of PPM solutions available in today’s market and choose the most appropriate solution for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.
    • Info-Tech’s blueprint for a PPM solution selection and implementation project will provide you with a variety of tools and templates.
    • A carefully planned out and executed selection and implementation process will help ensure your organization can maximize the value of your project portfolio and will allow the PMO to improve portfolio stakeholder satisfaction.

    Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a commercial PPM solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the PPM solution project and collect requirements

    Create a PPM solution selection and implementation project charter and gather your organizations business and technical requirements.

    • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 1: Launch the PPM Solution Project and Collect Requirements
    • PPM Solution Project Charter Template
    • PPM Implementation Work Breakdown Structure
    • PPM Solution Requirements Gathering Tool
    • PPM Solution Cost-of-Use Estimation Tool
    • PPM Solution RFP Template
    • PPM Solution Success Metrics Workbook
    • PPM Solution Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    2. Select a PPM solution

    Select the most appropriate PPM solution for your organization by using Info-Tech’s PPM solution Vendor Landscape and use cases to help you create a vendor shortlist, produce an RFP, and establish evaluation criteria for ranking your shortlisted solutions.

    • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 2: Select a PPM Solution
    • PPM Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • PPM Solution Vendor Response Template
    • PPM Solution Evaluation & RFP Scoring Tool
    • PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script

    3. Plan the PPM solution implementation

    Plan a PPM solution implementation that will result in long-term sustainable adoption of the tool and that will allow the PMO to meet the needs of core project portfolio stakeholders.

    • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 3: Plan the PPM Solution Implementation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the PPM Solution Project and Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Create a PPM solution selection and implementation project charter.

    Gather the business and technical requirements for the PPM solution.

    Establish clear and measurable success criteria for your PPM solution project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Comprehensive project plan

    Comprehensive and organized record of the various PPM solution requirements

    A record of PPM solution project goals and criteria that can be used in the future to establish the success of the project

    Activities

    1.1 Brainstorm, refine, and prioritize your PPM solution needs

    1.2 Stakeholder identification exercise

    1.3 Project charter work session

    1.4 Requirements gathering work session

    1.5 PPM solution success metrics workbook session

    Outputs

    High-level outline of PPM solution requirements

    Stakeholder consultation plan

    A draft project charter and action plan to fill in project charter gaps

    A draft requirements workbook and action plan to fill in requirement gathering gaps

    A PPM project success metrics workbook that can be used during and after the project

    2 Select a PPM Solution

    The Purpose

    Identify the PPM solutions that are most appropriate for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.

    Create a PPM solution and vendor shortlist.

    Create a request for proposal (RFP).

    Create a PPM solution scoring and evaluation tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of the PPM solution market and the various features available

    An informed shortlist of PPM vendors

    An organized and focused method for evaluating the often long and complex responses to the RFP that vendors provide

    The groundwork for an informed and defensible selection of a PPM solution for your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Assess the size of your organization and the level of PPM maturity to select the most appropriate use case

    2.2 PPM solution requirements and criteria ranking activity

    2.3 An RFP working session

    2.4 Build an RFP evaluation tool

    Outputs

    Identification of the most appropriate use case in Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape

    A refined and organized list of the core features that will be included in the RFP

    A draft RFP with an action plan to fill in any RFP gaps

    An Excel tool that can be used to compare and evaluate vendors’ responses to the RFP

    3 Prepare for the PPM Solution Implementation

    The Purpose

    To think ahead to the eventual implementation of the solution that will occur once the selection phase is completed

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of key insights and steps that will help avoid mistakes resulting in poor adoption or PPM solutions that end up producing little tangible value

    Activities

    3.1 Outline high-level implementation stages

    3.2 Organizational change management strategy session

    3.3 A PPM project success metrics planning session

    Outputs

    High-level implementation tasks and milestones

    A RACI chart for core implementation tasks

    A high-level PPM solution implementation organizational change management strategy

    A RACI chart for core organizational change management tasks related to the PPM solution implementation

    A PPM project success metrics schedule and plan

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}334|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,535 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • IT needs a method to pinpoint which contact center solution best aligns with business objectives, adapting to a post-COVID world of remote work, flexibility, and scalability.
    • Scoring RFP and RFQ proposals is a complex process, and it is difficult to map and gap without a clear view of the organization’s needs. SOWs can contain pitfalls that cause expensive headaches for the organization in the long run. Guidance through a SOW is required to best represent the organization’s interests.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • “On-premises versus cloud” is a false dichotomy. Contact center architectures come in all shapes and sizes, and organizations should discern whether a hybrid option best meets their needs.
    • Contact centers should service customers – not capabilities. Capabilities must work for you, your agents, and your customers – not the other way around.
    • Deliverables and responsibilities should be a contract’s focal point. While organizations are right to focus on avoiding unanticipated license charges, it is more important to clearly define how deliverables and responsibilities will be divided among the organization, the vendor, and potential third parties.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess the array of contact center architectures with Info-Tech’s Contact Center Decision Points Tool to select a right-sized solution.
    • Build business requirements in a formalized process to achieve stakeholder buy-in.
    • Use Info-Tech’s Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool to evaluate and choose from a range of vendors.
    • Successfully navigate and avoid major pitfalls in a SOW construction.
    • Justify each stage of the process with this blueprint’s key deliverable: the Contact Center Playbook.

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to examine the current contact center marketspace, review Info-Tech’s methodology for choosing a right-sized contact center solution, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Contact Center Architectures

    Establish your project vision and metrics of success before shortlisting potential contact center architectures and deciding which is right-sized for the organization.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 1: Assess Contact Center Architectures
    • Contact Center Playbook
    • Contact Center Decision Points Tool

    2. Gather Requirements and Shortlist Vendors

    Build business requirements to achieve stakeholder buy-in, define key deliverables, and issue an RFP/RFQ to shortlisted vendors.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 2: Gather Requirements and Shortlist Vendors
    • Requirements Gathering Documentation Tool
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Contact Center Business Requirements Document
    • Request for Quotation Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template

    3. Score Vendors and Construct SOW

    Score RFP/RFQ responses and decide upon a vendor before constructing a SOW.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 3: Score Vendors and Construct SOW
    • Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool
    • Contact Center SOW Template and Guide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Architecture

    The Purpose

    Shortlist and decide upon a right-sized contact center architecture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level decision for a right-sized architecture

    Activities

    1.1 Define vision and mission statements.

    1.2 Identify infrastructure metrics of success.

    1.3 Confirm key performance indicators for contact center operations.

    1.4 Complete architecture assessment.

    1.5 Confirm right-sized architecture.

    Outputs

    Project outline

    Metrics of success

    KPIs confirmed

    Quickly narrow down right-sized architecture

    Decision on right-sized contact center architecture

    2 Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Build business requirements and define key deliverables to achieve stakeholder buy-in and shortlist potential vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key deliverables defined and a shortlist of no more than five vendors

    Sections 7-8 of the Contact Center Playbook completed

    Activities

    2.1 Hold focus groups with key stakeholders.

    2.2 Gather business, nonfunctional, and functional requirements.

    2.3 Define key deliverables.

    2.4 Shortlist five vendors that appear meet those requirements.

    Outputs

    User requirements identified

    Business Requirements Document completed

    Key deliverables defined

    Shortlist of five vendors

    3 Initial Vendor Scoring

    The Purpose

    Compare and evaluate shortlisted vendors against gathered requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a strong overview of which vendors are preferred for issuing RFP/RFQ

    Section 9 of the Contact Center Playbook

    Activities

    3.1 Input requirements to the Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool. Define which are mandatory and which are desirable.

    3.2 Determine which vendors best meet requirements.

    3.3 Compare requirements met with anticipated TCO.

    3.4 Compare and rank vendors.

    Outputs

    An assessment of requirements

    Vendor scoring

    A holistic overview of requirements scoring and vendor TCO

    An initial ranking of vendors to shape RFP process after workshop end

    4 SOW Walkthrough

    The Purpose

    Walk through the Contact Center SOW Template and Guide to identify how much time to allocate per section and who will be responsible for completing it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of a SOW that is designed to avoid major pitfalls with vendor management

    Section 10 of the Contact Center Playbook

    Activities

    4.1 Get familiar with the SOW structure.

    4.2 Identify which sections will demand greater time allocation.

    4.3 Strategize how to avoid potential pitfalls.

    4.4 Confirm reviewer responsibilities.

    Outputs

    A broad understanding of a SOW’s key sections

    A determination of how much time should be allocated for reviewing major sections

    A list of ways to avoid major pitfalls with vendor management

    A list of reviewers, the sections they are responsible for reviewing, and their time allocation for their review

    5 Communicate and Implement

    The Purpose

    Finalize deliverables and plan post-workshop communications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed Contact Center Playbook that justifies each decision of this workshop

    Activities

    5.1 Finalize deliverables.

    5.2 Support communication efforts.

    5.3 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Contact Center Playbook delivered

    Post-workshop engagement to confirm satisfaction

    Follow-up research that complements the workshop or leads workshop group in relevant new directions

    Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}137|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $72,298 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Internal stakeholders usually have different – and often conflicting – needs and expectations that require careful facilitation and management.
    • SaaS solutions bring forth a unique form of “switching costs” that can make a decision to migrate solutions financially, technically, and politically painful.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Conservatively, it’s possible to save 5% of the overall IT budget through comprehensive software and SaaS contract review.
    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price.
    • Learning to negotiate is crucial.

    Impact and Result

    • Take control of your SaaS contract negotiations from the beginning.
    • Look at your contract holistically to find cost savings.
    • Guide communication between vendors and your organization for the duration of contract negotiations.
    • Redline the terms and conditions of your SaaS contract.
    • Prioritize crucial terms and conditions to negotiate.

    Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to redline and negotiate a SaaS agreement, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the different ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gather requirements

    Build and manage the stakeholder team, and then document the business use case.

    • Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last – Phase 1: Gather Requirements
    • RASCI Chart
    • Vendor Communication Management Plan
    • Software Business Use Case Template
    • SaaS TCO Calculator

    2. Redline contract

    Redline the proposed SaaS contract.

    • Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last – Phase 2: Redline Contract
    • SaaS Terms and Conditions Evaluation Tool

    3. Negotiate contract

    Create a thorough negotiation plan.

    • Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last – Phase 3: Negotiate Contract
    • SaaS Contract Negotiation Terms Prioritization Checklist
    • Controlled Vendor Communications Letter
    • Key Vendor Fiscal Year End Calendar
    • Contract Negotiation Tactics Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Collect and Review Data

    The Purpose

    Assemble documentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand current position before going forward.

    Activities

    1.1 Assemble existing contracts.

    1.2 Document their strategic and tactical objectives.

    1.3 Identify current status of the vendor relationship and any historical context.

    1.4 Clarify goals for ideal future state.

    Outputs

    Business Use Case.

    2 Define the Business Use Case and Build a Stakeholder Team

    The Purpose

    Define the business use case and build a stakeholder team.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a business use case to document functional and non-functional requirements.

    Build an internal cross-functional stakeholder team to negotiate the contract.

    Activities

    2.1 Establish a negotiation team and define roles.

    2.2 Write a communication plan.

    2.3 Complete a business use case.

    Outputs

    RASCI Matrix

    Communications Plan

    SaaS TCO Calculator

    Business Use Case

    3 Redline the Contract

    The Purpose

    Examine terms and conditions and prioritize for negotiation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Discover cost savings.

    Improve agreement terms.

    Prioritize terms for negotiation.

    Activities

    3.1 Review general terms and conditions.

    3.2 Review license and application specific terms and conditions.

    3.3 Match to business and technical requirements.

    3.4 Redline the agreement.

    Outputs

    SaaS Terms and Conditions Evaluation Tool

    SaaS Contract Negotiation Terms Prioritization Checklist

    4 Build a Negotiation Strategy

    The Purpose

    Create a negotiation strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Controlled communication established.

    Negotiation tactics chosen.

    Negotiation timeline plotted.

    Activities

    4.1 Review vendor and application specific negotiation tactics.

    4.2 Build negotiation strategy.

    Outputs

    Contract Negotiation Tactics Playbook

    Controlled Vendor Communications Letter

    Key Vendor Fiscal Year End Calendar

    Modernize the Network

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}501|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $16,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Network Management
    • Parent Category Link: /network-management
    • Business units, functions, and processes are inextricably intertwined with less and less tolerance for downtime.
    • Business demands change rapidly but the refresh horizon for infrastructure remains 5-7 years.
    • The number of endpoint devices the network is expected to support is growing geometrically but historic capacity planning grew linearly.
    • The business is unable to clearly define requirements, paralyzing planning.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Build for your needs. Don’t fall into the trap of assuming what works for your neighbor, your peer, or your competitor will work for you.
    • Deliver on what your business knows it needs as well as what it doesn’t yet know it needs. Business leaders have business vision, but this vision won’t directly demand the required network capabilities to enable the business. This is where you come in.
    • Modern technologies are hampered by vintage processes. New technologies demand new ways of accomplishing old tasks.

    Impact and Result

    • Use a systematic approach to document all stakeholder needs and rely on the network technical staff to translate those needs into design constraints, use cases, features, and management practices.
    • Spend only on those emerging technologies that deliver features offering direct benefits to specific business goals and IT needs.
    • Solidify the business case for your network modernization project by demonstrating and quantifying the hard dollar value it provides to the business.

    Modernize the Network Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize the enterprise network, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the network

    Identify and prioritize stakeholder and IT/networking concerns.

    • Modernize the Network – Phase 1: Assess the Network
    • Network Modernization Workbook

    2. Envision the network of the future

    Learn about emerging technologies and identify essential features of a modernized network solution.

    • Modernize the Network – Phase 2: Envision Your Future Network
    • Network Modernization Technology Assessment Tool

    3. Communicate and execute the plan

    Compose a presentation for stakeholders and prepare the RFP for vendors.

    • Modernize the Network – Phase 3: Communicate and Execute the Plan
    • Network Modernization Roadmap
    • Network Modernization Executive Presentation Template
    • Network Modernization RFP Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize the Network

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Network

    The Purpose

    Understand current stakeholder and IT needs pertaining to the network.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized lists of stakeholder and IT needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess and prioritize stakeholder concerns.

    1.2 Assess and prioritize design considerations.

    1.3 Assess and prioritize use cases.

    1.4 Assess and prioritize network infrastructure concerns.

    1.5 Assess and prioritize care and control concerns.

    Outputs

    Current State Register

    2 Analyze Emerging Technologies and Identify Features

    The Purpose

    Analyze emerging technologies to determine whether or not to include them in the network modernization.

    Identify and shortlist networking features that will be part of the network modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of what emerging technologies are suitable for including in your network modernization.

    A prioritized list of features, aligned with business needs, that your modernized network must or should have.

    Activities

    2.1 Analyze emerging technologies.

    2.2 Identify features to support drivers, practices, and pain points.

    Outputs

    Emerging technology assessment

    Prioritize lists of modernized network features

    3 Plan for Future Capacity

    The Purpose

    Estimate future port, bandwidth, and latency requirements for all sites on the network.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Planning for capacity ensures the network is capable of delivering until the next refresh cycle and beyond.

    Activities

    3.1 Estimate port, bandwidth, and latency requirements.

    3.2 Group sites according to capacity requirements.

    3.3 Create standardized capacity plans for each group.

    Outputs

    A summary of capacity requirements for each site in the network

    4 Communicate and Execute the Plan

    The Purpose

    Create a presentation to pitch the project to executives.

    Compose key elements of RFP.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Communication to executives, summarizing the elements of the modernization project that business decision makers will want to know, in order to gain approval.

    Communication to vendors detailing the network solution requirements so that proposed solutions are aligned to business and IT needs.

    Activities

    4.1 Build the executive presentation.

    4.2 Compose the scope of work.

    4.3 Compose technical requirements.

    Outputs

    Executive Presentation

    Request for Proposal/Quotation

    Effective IT Communications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}429|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    IT communications are often considered ineffective. This is demonstrated by:

    • A lack of inclusion or time to present in board meetings.
    • Confusion around IT priorities and how they align to organizational objectives.
    • Segregating IT from the rest of the organization.
    • The inability to secure the necessary funding for IT-led initiatives.
    • IT employees not feeling supported or engaged.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • No one is born a good communicator. Every IT employee needs to spend the time and effort to grow their communication skills; with constant change and worsening IT crises, IT cannot afford to communicate poorly anymore.
    • The skills needed to communicate effectively as a front=line employee or CIO are the same. It is important to begin the development of these skills from the beginning of one's career.
    • Time is a non-renewable resource. Any communication needs to be considered valuable and engaging by the audience or they will be unforgiving.

    Impact and Result

    Communications is a responsibility of all members of IT. This is demonstrated through:

    • Engaging in two-way communications that are continuous and evolving.
    • Establishing a communications strategy – and following the plan.
    • Increasing the skills of all IT employees when it comes to communications.
    • Identifying audiences and their preferred means of communication.

    Effective IT Communications Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Effective IT Communications Capstone Deck – A resource center to ensure you never start communications from a blank page again.

    This capstone blueprint highlights the components, best practices, and importance of good communication for all IT employees.

    • Effective IT Communications Storyboard

    2. IT Townhall Template – A ready-to-use template to help you engage with IT employees and ensure consistent access to information.

    IT town halls must deliver value to employees, or they will withdraw and miss key messages. To engage employees, use well-crafted communications in an event that includes crowd-sourced contents, peer involvement, recognition, significant Q&A time allotment, organizational discussions, and goal alignment.

    • IT Townhall Template

    3. IT Year in Review Template – A ready-to-use template to help communicate IT successes and future objectives.

    This template provides a framework to build your own IT Year In Review presentation. An IT Year In Review presentation typically covers the major accomplishments, challenges, and initiatives of an organization's information technology (IT) department over the past year.

    • IT Year in Review Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Effective IT Communications

    Empower IT employees to communicate well with any stakeholder across the organization.

    Analyst perspective

    There has never been an expectation for IT to communicate well.

    Brittany Lutes

    Brittany Lutes
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Diana MacPherson

    Diana MacPherson
    Senior Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT rarely engages in proper communications. We speak at, inform, or tell our audience what we believe to be important. But true communications seldom take place.

    Communications only occur when channels are created to ensure the continuous opportunity to obtain two-way feedback. It is a skill that is developed over time, with no individual having an innate ability to be better at communications. Each person in IT needs to work toward developing their personal communications style. The problem is we rarely invest in development or training related to communications. Information and technology fields spend time and money developing hard skills within IT, not soft ones.

    The benefits associated with communications are immense: higher business satisfaction, funding for IT initiatives, increased employee engagement, better IT to business alignment, and the general ability to form ongoing partnerships with stakeholders. So, for IT departments looking to obtain these benefits through true communications, develop the necessary skills.

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
    IT communications are often considered ineffective. This is demonstrated by:
    • A lack of inclusion or time to present in board meetings.
    • Confusion around IT priorities and how they align to organizational objectives.
    • Segregating IT from the rest of the organization.
    • An inability to secure the necessary funding for IT-led initiatives.
    • IT employees not feeling supported or engaged.
    Frequently, these barriers have prevented IT communications from being effective:
    • Using technical jargon when a universal language is needed.
    • Speaking at organization stakeholders rather than engaging through dialogue.
    • Understanding the needs of the audience.
    Overall, IT has not been expected to engage in good communications or taken a proactive approach to communicate effectively.
    Communications is a responsibility of all members of IT. This is demonstrated through:
    • Engaging in two-way communications that are continuous and evolving.
    • Establishing a communications strategy – and following the plan.
    • Increasing the skills of all IT employees when it comes to communications.
    • Identifying audiences and their preferred means of communication.

    Info-Tech Insight
    No one is born a good communicator. Every IT employee needs to spend the time and effort to grow their communication skills as constant change and worsening IT crises mean that IT cannot afford to communicate poorly anymore.

    Your challenge

    Overall satisfaction with IT is correlated to satisfaction with IT communications

    Chart showing satisfaction with it and communications

    The bottom line? For every 10% increase in communications there 8.6% increase in overall IT satisfaction. Therefore, when IT communicates with the organization, stakeholders are more likely to be satisfied with IT overall.

    Info-Tech Diagnostic Programs, N=330 organizations

    IT struggles to communicate effectively with the organization:

    • CIOs are given minimal time to present to the board or executive leaders about IT’s value and alignment to business goals.
    • IT initiatives are considered complicated and confusing.
    • The frequency and impact of IT crises are under planned for, making communications more difficult during a major incident.
    • IT managers do not have the skills to communicate effectively with their team.
    • IT employees do not have the skills to communicate effectively with one another and end users.

    Common obstacles

    IT is prevented from communicating effectively due to these barriers:

    • Difficulty assessing the needs of the audience to inform the language and means of communication that should be used.
    • Using technical jargon rather than translating the communication into commonly understood terms.
    • Not receiving the training required to develop communication skills across IT employees.
    • Frequently speak at organization stakeholders rather than engaging through dialogue.
    • Beginning many communications from a blank page, especially crisis communications.
    • Difficulty presenting complex concepts in a short time to an audience in a digestible and concise manner without diluting the point.

    Effective IT communications are rare:

    53% of CXOs believe poor communication between business and IT is a barrier to innovation.
    Source: Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Survey, 2022

    69% of those in management positions don’t feel comfortable even communicating with their staff.”
    Source: TeamStage, 2022

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Effective communications is not a broadcast but a dialogue between communicator and audience in a continuous feedback loop.

    Continuous loop of dialogue

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Always treat every communication as a dialogue, enabling the receiver of the message to raise questions, concerns, or ideas.
    2. Different audiences will require different communications. Be sure to cater the communication to the needs of the receiver(s).
    3. Never assume the communication was effective. Create measures and adjust the communications to get the desired outcome.

    Common IT communications

    And the less common but still important communications

    Communicating Up to Board or Executives

    • Board Presentations
    • Executive Leadership Committee Meetings
    • Technology Updates
    • Budget Updates
    • Risk Updates
    • Year in Review

    Communicating Across the Organization

    • Townhalls – external to IT
    • Year in Review
    • Crisis Email
    • Intranet Communication
    • Customer/Constituent Requests for Information
    • Product Launches
    • Email
    • Watercooler Chat

    Communicating Within IT

    • Townhalls – internal to IT
    • Employee 1:1s
    • Team Meetings
    • Project Updates
    • Project Collaboration Sessions
    • Year in Review
    • All-Hands Meeting
    • Employee Interview
    • Onboarding Documentation
    • Vendor Negotiation Meetings
    • Vendor Product Meetings
    • Email
    • Watercooler Chat

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight
    IT cannot afford to communicate poorly given the overwhelming impact and frequency of change related to technology. Learn to communicate well or get out of the way of someone who can.

    Insight 1: The skills needed to communicate effectively as a frontline employee or a CIO are the same. It’s important to begin the development of these skills from the beginning of one’s career.
    Insight 2: Time is a non-renewable resource. Any communication needs to be considered valuable and engaging by the audience or they will be unforgiving.
    Insight 3: Don’t make data your star. It is a supporting character. People can argue about the collection methods or interpretation of the data, but they cannot argue the story you share.
    Insight 4: Measure if the communication is being received and resulting in the desired outcome. If not, modify what and how the message is being expressed.
    Insight 5: Messages are also non-verbal. Practice using your voice and body to set the right tone and impact your audience.

    Communication principles

    Follow these principles to support all IT communications.

    Two-Way

    Incorporate feedback loops into your communication efforts. Providing stakeholders with the opportunity to voice their opinions and ideas will help gain their commitment and buy-in.

    Timely

    Frequent communications mitigate rumors and the spread of misinformation. Provide warning before the implementation of any changes whenever possible. Communicate as soon as possible after decisions have been made.

    Consistent

    Make sure the messaging is consistent across departments, mediums, and presenters. Provide managers with key phrases to support the consistency of messages.

    Open & Honest

    Transparency is a critical component of communication. Always tell employees that you will share information as soon as you can. This may not be as soon as you receive the information but as soon as sharing it is acceptable.

    Authentic

    Write messages in a way that embodies the personality of the organization. Don’t spin information; position it within the wider organizational context.

    Targeted

    Use your target audience profiles to determine which audiences need to consume which messages and what mediums should be employed.

    Importance of IT being a good communicator

    Don’t pay the price for poor communication.

    IT needs to communicate well because:

    • IT risk mitigation and technology initiative funding are dependent on critical stakeholders comprehending the risk impact and initiative benefit in easy-to-understand terms.
    • IT employees need clear and direct information to feel empowered and accountable to do their jobs well.
    • End users who have a good experience engaging in communications with IT employees have an overall increase in satisfaction with IT.
    • Continuously demonstrating IT’s value to the organization comes when those initiatives are clearly aligned to overall objectives.
    • Communication prevents assumptions and further miscommunication from happening among IT employees who are usually impacted and fear change the most.

    “Poor communication results in employee misunderstanding and errors that cost approximately $37 billion.”
    – Intranet Connections, 2019

    Effective communication enables organizational strategy and facilitates a two-way exchange

    Effective communication facilitates a two-way exchange

    What makes internal communications effective?

    To be effective, internal communications must be strategic. They should directly support organizational objectives, reinforce key messages to make sure they drive action, and facilitate two-way dialogue, not just one-way messaging.

    Measure the value of the communication

    Communication effectiveness can be measured through a variety of metrics:

    • Increase in Productivity
    • “When employees are offered better communication technology and skills, productivity can increase by up to 30%” (Expert Market, 2022).
    • Increase in Understanding Decision Rationale
    • Employees who report understanding the rationale behind the business decisions made by the executive leadership team (ELT) are 3.6x more likely to be engaged, compared to those who were not (McLean & Company Engagement Survey Database, 2022; N=133,167 responses, 187 organizations).
    • Increase in Revenue
    • Collaboration amongst C-suite executives led to a 27% increase in revenue compared to low collaborating C-suites (IBM, 2021).
    • Increase in End-User Satisfaction
    • 80.9% of end users are satisfied with IT’s ability to communicate with them regarding the information they need to perform their job (Info-Tech’s End-User Satisfaction Survey Database, N=20,617 end users from 126 organizations).

    Methods to determine effectiveness:

    • CIO Business Vision Survey
    • Engagement surveys
    • Focus groups
    • Suggestion boxes
    • Team meetings
    • Random sampling
    • Informal feedback
    • Direct feedback
    • Audience body language
    • Repeating the message back

    How to navigate the research center

    This research center is intended to ensure that IT never starts their communications from a blank page again:

    Tools to help IT be better communicators

    “‘Effectiveness’ can mean different things, and effectiveness for your project is going to look different than it would for any other project.”
    – Gale McCreary in WikiHow, 2022

    Audience: Organizational leadership

    Speaking with Board and executive leaders about strategy, risk, and value

    Keep in mind:

    1 2 3
    Priorities Differ Words Matter The Power of Three
    What’s important to you as CIO is very different from what is important to a board or executive leadership team or even the individual members of these groups. Share only what is important or relevant to the stakeholder(s). Simplify the message into common language whenever possible. A good test is to ensure that someone without any technical background could understand the message. Keep every slide to three points with no more than three words. You are the one to translate this information into a worth-while story to share.

    “Today’s CIOs have a story to tell. They must change the old narrative and describe the art of the (newly) possible. A great leader rises to the occasion and shares a vision that inspires the entire organization.”
    – Dan Roberts, CIO, 2019

    Communications for board presentations

    Secure funding and demonstrate IT as a value add to business objectives.

    DEFINING INSIGHT

    Stop presenting what is important to you as the CIO and present to the board what is important to them.

    Why does IT need to communicate with the board?

    • To get their buy-in and funding for critical IT initiatives.
    • To ensure that IT risks are understood and receive the funding necessary to mitigate.
    • To change the narrative of IT as a service provider to a business enabler.

    FRAMEWORK

    Framework for board presentations

    CHECKLIST

    Do’s & Don’ts of Communicating Board Presentations:

    Do: Ensure you know all the members of the board and their strengths/areas of focus.

    Do: Ensure the IT objectives and initiatives align to the business objectives.

    Do: Avoid using any technical jargon.

    Do: Limit the amount of data you are using to present information. If it can’t stand alone, it isn’t a strong enough data point.

    Do: Avoid providing IT service metrics or other operational statistics.

    Do: Demonstrate how the organization’s revenue is impacted by IT activities.

    Do: Tell a story that is compelling and excited.

    OUTCOME

    Organization Alignment

    • Approved organization objectives and IT objectives are aligned and supporting one another.

    Stakeholder Buy-In

    • Board members all understand what the future state of IT will look like – and are excited for it!

    Awareness on Technology Trends

    • It is the responsibility of the CIO to ensure the board is aware of critical technology trends that can impact the future of the organization/industry.

    Risks

    • Risks are understood, the impact they could have on the organization is clear, and the necessary controls required to mitigate the risk are funded.

    Communications for business updates

    Continuously build strong relationships with all members of business leadership.

    DEFINING INSIGHT

    Business leaders care about themselves and their goals – present ideas and initiatives that lean into this self-interest.

    Why does IT need to communicate business updates?

    • The key element here is to highlight how IT is impacting the organization’s overall ability to meet goals and targets.
    • Ensure all executive leaders know about and understand IT’s upcoming initiatives – and how they will be involved.

    FRAMEWORK

    Framework for business updates

    CHECKLIST

    Do’s & Don’ts of Communicating Business Updates:

    Do: Ensure IT is given sufficient time to present with the rest of the business leaders.

    Do: Ensure the goals of IT are clear and can be depicted visually.

    Do: Tie every IT goal to the objectives of different business leaders.

    Do: Avoid using any technical jargon.

    Do: Reinforce the positive benefits business leaders can expect.

    Do: Avoid providing IT service metrics or other operational statistics.

    Do: Demonstrate how IT is driving the digital transformation of the organization.

    OUTCOME

    Better Reputation

    • Get other business leaders to see IT as a value add to any initiative, making IT an enabler not an order taker.

    Executive Buy-In

    • Executives are concerned about their own budgets; they want to embrace all the innovation but within reason and minimal impact to their own finances.

    Digital Transformation

    • Indicate and commit to how IT can help the different leaders deliver on their digital transformation activities.

    Relationship Building

    • Establish trust with the different leaders so they want to engage with you on a regular basis.

    Audience: Organization wide

    Speaking with all members of the organization about the future of technology – and unexpected crises.

    1 2 3
    Competing to Be Heard Measure Impact Enhance the IT Brand
    IT messages are often competing with a variety of other communications simultaneously taking place in the organization. Avoid the information-overload paradox by communicating necessary, timely, and relevant information. Don’t underestimate the benefit of qualitative feedback that comes from talking to people within the organization. Ensure they read/heard and absorbed the communication. IT might be a business enabler, but if it is never communicated as such to the organization, it will only be seen as a support function. Use purposeful communications to change the IT narrative.

    Less than 50% of internal communications lean on a proper framework to support their communication activities.
    – Philip Nunn, iabc, 2020

    Communications for strategic IT initiatives

    Communicate IT’s strategic objectives with all business stakeholders and users.

    DEFINING INSIGHT

    IT leaders struggle to communicate how the IT strategy is aligned to the overall business objectives using a common language understood by all.

    Why does IT need to communicate its strategic objectives?

    • To ensure a clear and consistent view of IT strategic objectives can be understood by all stakeholders within the organization.
    • To demonstrate that IT strategic objectives are aligned with the overall mission and vision of the organization.

    FRAMEWORK

    Framework for IT strategic initiatives

    CHECKLIST

    Do’s & Don’ts of Communicating IT Strategic Objectives:

    Do: Ensure all IT leaders are aware of and understand the objectives in the IT strategy.

    Do: Ensure there is a visual representation of IT’s goals.

    Do: Ensure the IT objectives and initiatives align to the business objectives.

    Do: Avoid using any technical jargon.

    Do: Provide metrics if they are relevant, timely, and immediately understandable.

    Do: Avoid providing IT service metrics or other operational statistics.

    Do: Demonstrate how the future of the organization will benefit from IT initiatives.

    OUTCOME

    Organization Alignment

    • All employees recognize the IT strategy as being aligned, even embedded, into the overall organization strategy.

    Stakeholder Buy-In

    • Business and IT stakeholders alike understand what the future state of IT will look like – and are excited for it!

    Role Clarity

    • Employees within IT are clear on how their day-to-day activities impact the overall objectives of the organization.

    Demonstrate Growth

    • Focus on where IT is going to be maturing in the coming one to two years and how this will benefit all employees.

    Communications for crisis management

    Minimize the fear and chaos with transparent communications.

    DEFINING INSIGHT

    A crisis communication should fit onto a sticky note. If it’s not clear, concise, and reassuring, it won’t be effectively understood by the audience.

    Why does IT need to communicate when a crisis occurs?

    • To ensure all members of the organization have an understanding of what the crisis is, how impactful that crisis is, and when they can expect more information.
    • “Half of US companies don’t have a crisis communication plan” (CIO, 2017).

    FRAMEWORK

    Framework for crisis management

    CHECKLIST

    Do’s & Don’ts of Communicating During a Crisis:

    Do: Provide timely and regular updates about the crisis to all stakeholders.

    Do: Involve the Board or ELT immediately for transparency.

    Do: Avoid providing too much information in a crisis communication.

    Do: Have crisis communication statements ready to be shared at any time for possible or common IT crises.

    Do: Highlight that employee safety and wellbeing is top priority.

    Do: Work with members of the public relations team to prepare any external communications that might be required.

    OUTCOME

    Ready to Act

    • Holding statements for possible crises will eliminate the time and effort required when the crisis does occur.

    Reduce Fears

    • Prevent employees from spreading concerns and not feeling included in the crisis.

    Maintain Trust

    • Ensure Board and ELT members trust IT to respond in an appropriate manner to any crisis or major incident.

    Eliminate Negative Reactions

    • Any crisis communication should be clear and concise enough when done via email.

    Audience: IT employees

    IT employees need to receive and obtain regular transparent communications to better deliver on their expectations.

    Keep in mind:

    1 2 3
    Training for All Listening Is Critical Reinforce Collaboration
    From the service desk technician to CIO, every person within IT needs to have a basic ability to communicate. Invest in the training necessary to develop this skill set. It seems simple, but as humans we do an innately poor job at listening to others. It’s important you hear employee concerns, feedback, and recommendations, enabling the two-way aspect of communication. IT employees will reflect the types of communications they see. If IT leaders and managers cannot collaborate together, then teams will also struggle, leading to productivity and quality losses.

    “IT professionals who […] enroll in communications training have a chance to both upgrade their professional capabilities and set themselves apart in a crowded field of technology specialists.”
    – Mark Schlesinger, Forbes, 2021

    Communications for IT activities and tactics

    Get IT employees aligned and clear on their daily objectives.

    DEFINING INSIGHT

    Depending on IT goals, the structure might need to change to support better communication among IT employees.

    Why does IT need to communicate IT activities?

    • To ensure all members of the project team are aligned with their tasks and responsibilities related to the project.
    • To be able to identify, track, and mitigate any problems that are preventing the successful delivery of the project.

    FRAMEWORK

    Framework for IT activities & tactics

    CHECKLIST

    Do’s & Don’ts of Communicating IT Activities:

    Do: Provide metrics that define how success of the project will be measured.

    Do: Demonstrate how each project aligns to the overarching objectives of the organization.

    Do: Avoid having large meetings that include stakeholders from two or more projects.

    Do: Consistently create a safe space for employees to communicate risks related to the project(s).

    Do: Ensure the right tools are being leveraged for in-office, hybrid, and virtual environments to support project collaboration.

    Do: Leverage a project management software to reduce unnecessary communications.

    OUTCOME

    Stakeholder Adoption

    • Create a standard communication template so stakeholders can easily find and apply communications.

    Resource Allocation

    • Understand what the various asks of IT are so employees can be adequately assigned to tasks.

    Meet Responsibly

    • Project status meetings are rarely valuable or insightful. Use meetings for collaboration, troubleshooting, and knowledge sharing.

    Encourage Engagement

    • Recognize employees and their work against critical milestones, especially for projects that have a long timeline.

    Communications for everyday IT

    Engage employees and drive results with clear and consistent communications.

    DEFINING INSIGHT

    Employees are looking for empathy to be demonstrated by those they are interacting with, from their peers to managers. Yet, we rarely provide it.

    Why does IT need to communicate on regularly with itself?

    • Regular communication ensures employees are valued, empowered, and clear about their expectations.
    • 97% of employees believe that their ability to perform their tasks efficiently is impacted by communication (Expert Market, 2022).

    FRAMEWORK

    Framework for everyday IT

    CHECKLIST

    Do’s & Don’ts of Communicating within IT:

    Do: Have responses for likely questions prepared and ready to go.

    Do: Ensure that all leaders are sharing the same messages with their teams.

    Do: Avoid providing irrelevant or confusing information.

    Do: Speak with your team on a regular basis.

    Do: Reinforce the messages of the organization every chance possible.

    Do: Ensure employees feel empowered to do their jobs effectively.

    Do: Engage employees in dialogue. The worst employee experience is when they are only spoken at, not engaged with.

    OUTCOME

    Increased Collaboration

    • Operating in a vacuum or silo is no longer an option. Enable employees to successfully collaborate and deliver holistic results.

    Role Clarity

    • Clear expectations and responsibilities eliminate confusion and blame game. Engage employees and create a positive work culture with role clarity.

    Prevent Rumors

    • Inconsistent communication often leads to information sharing and employees spreading an (in)accurate narrative.

    Organizational Insight

    • Employees trust the organization’s direction because they are aware of the different activities taking place and provided with a rationale about decisions.

    Case Study

    Amazon

    INDUSTRY
    E-Commerce

    SOURCE
    Harvard Business Review

    Jeff Bezos has definitely taken on unorthodox approaches to business and leadership, but one that many might not know about is his approach to communication. Some of the key elements that he focused on in the early 2000s when Amazon was becoming a multi-billion-dollar empire included:

    • Banning PowerPoint for all members of the leadership team. They had to learn to communicate without the crutch of the most commonly used presentation tool.
    • Leveraging memos that included specific action steps and clear nouns
    • Reducing all communication to an eighth-grade reading level, including pitches for new products (e.g. Kindle).

    Results

    While he was creating the Amazon empire, 85% of Jeff Bezos’ communication was written in a way that an eighth grader could read. Communicating in a way that was easy to understand and encouraging his leadership team to do so as well is one of the many reasons this business has grown to an estimated value of over $800B.

    “If you cannot simplify a message and communicate it compellingly, believe me, you cannot get the masses to follow you.”
    – Indra Nooyi, in Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Communication competency expectations

    Communication is a business skill; not a technical skill.

    Demonstrated Communication Behavior
    Level 1: Follow Has sufficient communication skills for effective dialogue with others.
    Level 2: Assist Has sufficient communication skills for effective dialogue with customers, suppliers, and partners.
    Level 3: Apply Demonstrates effective communication skills.
    Level 4: Enable Communicates fluently, orally, and in writing and can present complex information to both technical and non-technical audiences.
    Level 5: Ensure, Advise Communicates effectively both formally and informally.
    Level 6: Initiate, Influence Communicates effectively at all levels to both technical and non-technical audiences.
    Level 7: Set Strategy, Inspire, Mobilize Understands, explains, and presents complex ideas to audiences at all levels in a persuasive and convincing manner.

    Source: Skills Framework for the Information Age, 2021

    Key KPIs for communication with any stakeholder

    Measuring communication is hard; use these to determine effectiveness.

    Goal Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Related Resource
    Obtain board buy-in for IT strategic initiatives X% of IT initiatives that were approved to be funded. Number of times technical initiatives were asked to be explained further. Using our Board Presentation Review service
    Establish stronger relationships with executive leaders X% of business leadership satisfied with the statement “IT communicates with your group effectively.” Using the CIO Business Vision Diagnostic
    Organizationally, people know what products and services IT provides X% of end users who are satisfied with communications around changing services or applications. Using the End-User Satisfaction Survey
    Organizational reach and understanding of the crisis. Number of follow-up tickets or requests related to the crisis after the initial crisis communication was sent. Using templates and tools for crisis communications
    Project stakeholders receive sufficient communication throughout the initiative. X% overall satisfaction with the quality of the project communications. Using the PPM Customer Satisfaction Diagnostic
    Employee feedback is provided, heard, and acted on X% of satisfaction employees have with managers or IT leadership to act on employee feedback. Using the Employee Engagement Diagnostic Program

    Standard workshop communication activities

    Introduction
    Communications overview.

    Plan
    Plan your communications using a strategic tool.

    Compose
    Create your own message.

    Deliver
    Practice delivering your own message.

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Research contributors and experts

    Anuja Agrawal, National Communications Director, PwC

    Anuja Agrawal
    National Communications Director
    PwC

    Anuja is an accomplished global communications professional, with extensive experience in the insurance, banking, financial, and professional services industries in Asia, the US, and Canada. She is currently the National Communications Director at PwC Canada. Her prior work experience includes communication leadership roles at Deutsche Bank, GE, Aviva, and Veritas. Anuja works closely with senior business leaders and key stakeholders to deliver measurable results and effective change and culture building programs. Anuja has experience in both internal and external communications, including strategic leadership communication, employee engagement, PR and media management, digital and social media, and M&A/change and crisis management. Anuja believes in leveraging digital tools and technology-enabled solutions, combined with in-person engagement, to help improve the quality of dialogue and increase interactive communication within the organization to help build an inclusive culture of belonging.

    Nastaran Bisheban, Chief Technology Officer, KFC Canada

    Nastaran Bisheban
    Chief Technology Officer
    KFC Canada

    A passionate technologist, and seasoned transformational leader. A software engineer and computer scientist by education, a certified Project Manager that holds an MBA in Leadership with Honors and Distinction from University of Liverpool. A public speaker on various disciplines of technology and data strategy with a Harvard Business School executive leadership program training to round it all. Challenges status quo and conventional practices; is an advocate for taking calculated risk and following the principle of continuous improvement. With multiple computer software and project management publications she is a strategic mentor and board member on various non-profit organizations. Nastaran sees the world as a better place only when everyone has a seat at the table and is an active advocate for diversity and inclusion.

    Heidi Davidson, Co-Founder & CEO, Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

    Heidi Davidson
    Co-Founder & CEO
    Galvanize Worldwide and Galvanize On Demand

    Dr. Heidi Davidson is the co-founder and CEO of Galvanize Worldwide, the largest distributed network of marketing and communications experts in the world. She also is the co-founder and CEO of Galvanize On Demand, a tech platform that matches marketing and communications freelancers with client projects. Now with 167 active experts, the Galvanize team delivers startup advisory work, outsourced marketing, training, and crisis communications to organizations of all sizes. Before Galvanize, Heidi spent four years as part of the turnaround team at BlackBerry as the Chief Communications Officer and SVP of Corporate Marketing, where she helped the company move from a device manufacturer to a security software provider.

    Eli Gladstone, Co-Founder, Speaker Labs

    Eli Gladstone
    Co-Founder
    Speaker Labs

    Eli is a co-founder of Speaker Labs. He has spent over six years helping countless individuals overcome their public speaking fears and communicate with clarity and confidence. When he’s not coaching others on how to build and deliver the perfect presentation, you’ll probably find him reading some weird books, teaching his kids how to ski or play tennis, or trying to develop a good-enough jumpshot to avoid being a liability on the basketball court.

    Francisco Mahfuz, Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

    Francisco Mahfuz
    Keynote Speaker & Storytelling Coach

    Francisco Mahfuz has been telling stories in front of audiences for a decade and even became a National Champion of public speaking. Today, Francisco is a keynote speaker and storytelling coach and offers communication training to individuals and international organizations and has worked with organizations like Pepsi, HP, the United Nations, Santander, and Cornell University. He’s the author of Bare: A Guide to Brutally Honest Public Speaking and the host of The Storypowers Podcast, and he’s been part of the IESE MBA communications course since 2020. He’s received a BA in English Literature from Birkbeck University in London.

    Sarah Shortreed, EVP & CTO, ATCO Ltd.

    Sarah Shortreed
    EVP & CTO
    ATCO Ltd.

    Sarah Shortreed is ATCO’s Executive Vice President and Chief Technology Officer. Her responsibilities include leading ATCO’s Information Technology (IT) function as it continues to drive agility and collaboration throughout ATCO’s global businesses and expanding and enhancing its enterprise IT strategy, including establishing ATCO’s technology roadmap for the future. Ms. Shortreed’s skill and expertise are drawn from her more than 30-year career that spans many industries and includes executive roles in business consulting, complex multi-stakeholder programs, operations, sales, customer relationship management, and product management. She was recently the Chief Information Officer at Bruce Power and has previously worked at BlackBerry, IBM, and Union Gas. She sits on the Board of Governors for the University of Western Ontario and is the current Chair of the Chief Information Officer (CIO) Committee at the Conference Board of Canada.

    Eric Silverberg, Co-Founder, Speaker Labs

    Eric Silverberg
    Co-Founder
    Speaker Labs

    Eric is a co-founder of Speaker Labs and has helped thousands of people build their public speaking confidence and become more dynamic and engaging communicators. When he’s not running workshops to help people grow in their careers, there’s a good chance you’ll find him with his wife and dog, drinking Diet Coke, and rewatching iconic episodes of the reality TV show Survivor! He’s such a die-hard fan, that you’ll probably see him playing the game one day.

    Stephanie Stewart, Communications Officer & DR Coordinator, Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

    Stephanie Stewart
    Communications Officer & DR Coordinator
    Info Security Services Simon Fraser University

    Steve Strout, President, Miovision Technologies

    Steve Strout
    President
    Miovision Technologies

    Mr. Strout is a recognized and experienced technology leader with extensive experience in delivering value. He has successfully led business and technology transformations by leveraging many dozens of complex global SFDC, Oracle, and SAP projects. He is especially adept at leading what some call “Project Rescues” – saving people’s careers where projects have gone awry; always driving “on-time and on-budget.” Mr. Strout is the current President of Miovision Technologies and the former CEO and board member of the Americas’ SAP Users” Group (ASUG). His wealth of practical knowledge comes from 30 years of extensive experience in many CxO and executive roles at some prestigious organizations such as Vonage, Sabre, BlackBerry, Shred-it, The Thomson Corporation (now Thomson Reuters), and Morris Communications. He has served on boards including Customer Advisory Boards of Apple, AgriSource Data, Dell, Edgewise, EMC, LogiSense, Socrates.ai, Spiro Carbon Group, and Unifi.

    Info-Tech Research Group Contributors:

    Sanchia Benedict, Research Lead
    Antony Chan Executive Counsellor
    Janice Clatterbuck, Executive Counsellor
    Ahmed Jowar, Research Specialist
    Dave Kish, Practice Lead
    Nick Kozlo, Senior Research Analyst
    Heather Leier Murray, Senior Research Analyst
    Amanda Mathieson, Research Director
    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
    Joe Meier, Executive Counsellor
    Andy Neill, AVP Research
    Thomas Randall, Research Director

    Plus an additional two contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Boardroom Presentation Review

    • You will come away with a clear, concise, and compelling board presentation that IT leaders can feel confident presenting in front of their board of directors.
    • Add improvements to your current board presentation in terms of visual appeal and logical flow to ensure it resonates with your board of directors.
    • Leverage a best-of-breed presentation template.

    Build a Better Manager

    • Management skills training is needed, but organizations are struggling to provide training that makes a long-term difference in the skills managers actually use in their day to day.
    • Many training programs are ineffective because they offer the wrong content, deliver it in a way that is not memorable, and are not aligned with the IT department’s business objectives.

    Crisis Communication Guides

    During a crisis it is important to communicate to employees through messages that convey calm and are transparent and tailored to your audience. Use the Crisis Communication Guides to:

    • Draft a communication strategy.
    • Tailor messages to your audience.
    • Draft employee crisis communications.
    Use this guide to equip leadership to communicate in times of crisis.

    Bibliography

    “Communication in the Workplace Statistics: Importance and Effectiveness in 2022.” TeamStage, 2022.

    Gallo, Carmine. “How Great Leaders Communicate.” Harvard Business Review, 23 November 2022

    Guthrie, Georgina. “Why Good Internal Communications Matter Now More than Ever.” Nulab, 15 December 2021.

    Lambden, Duncan. “The Importance of Effective Workplace Communication – Statistics for 2022.” Expert Market, 13 June 2022.

    “Mapping SFIA Levels of Responsibilities to Behavioural Factors.” Skills Framework for the Information Age, 2021.

    McCreary, Gale. “How to Measure the Effectiveness of Communication: 14 Steps.” WikiHow, 31 March 2023.

    Nowak, Marcin. “Top 7 Communication Problems in the Workplace.” MIT Enterprise Forum CEE, 2021.

    Nunn, Philip. “Messaging That Works: A Unique Framework to Maximize Communication Success.” iabc, 26 October 2020.

    Picincu, Andra. “How to Measure Effective Communications.” Small Business Chron. 12 January 2021.

    Price. David A. “Pixar Story Rules.” Stories From the Frontiers of Knowledge, 2011.

    Roberts, Dan. “How CIOs Become Visionary Communicators.” CIO, 2019.

    Schlesinger, Mark. “Why building effective communication skill in IT is incredibly important.” Forbes, 2021.

    Stanten, Andrew. “Planning for the Worst: Crisis Communications 101.” CIO, 25 May 2017.

    State of the American Workplace Report. Gallup, 6 February 2020.

    “The CIO Revolution.” IBM, 2021.

    “The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022.” Hypercontex, 2022.

    Walters, Katlin. “Top 5 Ways to Measure Internal Communication.” Intranet Connections, 30 May 2019.

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}342|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Data warehouse implementation is a costly and complex undertaking, and can end up not serving the business' needs appropriately.
    • Too heavy a focus on technology creates a data warehouse that isn’t sustainable and ends up with poor adoption.
    • Emerging data sources and technologies add complexity to how the appropriate data is made available to business users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A data warehouse is a project; but successful data warehousing is a program. An effective data warehouse requires planning beyond the technology implementation.
    • Governance, not technology needs to be the core support system for enabling a data warehouse program.
    • Understand business processes at the operational, tactical, and ad hoc levels to ensure a fit-for-purpose DW is built.

    Impact and Result

    • Leverage an approach that focuses on constructing a data warehouse foundation that is able to address a combination of operational, tactical, and ad hoc business needs.
    • Invest time and effort to put together pre-project governance to inform and provide guidance to your data warehouse implementation.
    • Develop “Rosetta Stone” views of your data assets to facilitate data modeling.
    • Select the most suitable architecture pattern to ensure the data warehouse is “built right” at the very beginning.

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why the data warehouse is becoming an important tool for driving business value, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for the data warehouse foundation project

    Begin the data warehouse foundation by defining the project and governance teams, as well as reviewing supporting data management practices.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 1: Prepare for the Data Warehouse Foundation Project
    • Data Warehouse Foundation Project Plan Template
    • Data Warehouse Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data (Warehouse) Architect
    • Data Integration Specialist
    • Business Intelligence Specialist
    • Director of Data Warehousing/Business Intelligence
    • Data Warehouse Program Charter Template
    • Data Warehouse Steering Committee Charter Template

    2. Establish the business drivers and data warehouse strategy

    Using the business activities as a guide, develop a data model, data architecture, and technology plan for a data warehouse foundation.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 2: Establish the Business Drivers and Data Warehouse Strategy
    • Business Data Catalog
    • Data Classification Inventory Tool
    • Data Warehouse Architecture Planning Tool
    • Master Data Mapping Tool

    3. Plan for data warehouse governance

    Start developing a data warehouse program by defining how users will interact with the new data warehouse environment.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 3: Plan for Data Warehouse Governance
    • Data Warehouse Standard Operating Procedures Template
    • Data Warehouse Service Level Agreement
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare for the Data Warehouse Foundation Project

    The Purpose

    Identify the members of the foundation project team.

    Define overarching statements and define success factors/risks.

    Outline basic project governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined membership, roles, and responsibilities involved in the foundation project.

    Establishment of a steering committee as a starting point for the data warehouse program.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify foundation project team and create a RACI chart.

    1.2 Understand what a data warehouse can and cannot enable.

    1.3 Define critical success factors, key performance metrics, and project risks.

    1.4 Develop rough timelines for foundation project completion.

    1.5 Define the current and future states for key data management practices.

    Outputs

    Job Descriptions and RACI

    Data Warehouse Steering Committee Charter

    Data Warehouse Foundation Project Plan

    Work Breakdown Structure

    2 Establish the Business Drivers and Data Warehouse Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define the information needs of the business and its key processes.

    Create the components that will inform an appropriate data model.

    Design a data warehouse architecture model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear definition of business needs that will directly inform the data and architecture models.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the most fundamental needs of the business.

    2.2 Define the data warehouse vision, mission, purpose, and goals.

    2.3 Detail the most important operational, tactical, and ad hoc activities the data warehouse should support.

    2.4 Link the processes that will be central to the data warehouse foundation.

    2.5 Walk through the four-column model and business entity modeling as a starting point for data modeling.

    2.6 Create data models using the business data glossary and data classification.

    2.7 Identify master data elements to define dimensions.

    2.8 Design lookup tables based on reference data.

    2.9 Create a fit-for-purpose data warehousing model.

    Outputs

    Data Warehouse Program Charter

    Data Warehouse Vision and Mission

    Documentation of Business Processes

    Business Entity Map

    Business Data Glossary

    Data Classification Scheme

    Data Warehouse Architecture Model

    3 Plan for Data Warehouse Governance

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for governing your data warehouse efficiently and effectively.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documentation of current standard operating procedures.

    Identified members of a data warehouse center of excellence.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop a technology capability map to visualize your desired state.

    3.2 Establish a data warehouse center of excellence.

    3.3 Create a data warehouse foundation roadmap.

    3.4 Define data warehouse service level agreements.

    3.5 Create standard operating procedures.

    Outputs

    Technology Capability Map

    Project Roadmap

    Service Level Agreement

    Data Warehouse Standard Operating Procedure Workbook

    Corporate security consultancy

    Corporate security consultancy

    Based on experience
    Implementable advice
    human-based and people-oriented

    Engage our corporate security consultancy firm to discover any weaknesses within your company’s security management. Tymans Group has extensive expertise in helping small and medium businesses set up clear security protocols to safeguard their data and IT infrastructure. Read on to discover how our consulting firm can help improve corporate security within your company.

    Why should you hire a corporate security consultancy company?

    These days, corporate security includes much more than just regulating access to your physical location, be it an office or a store. Corporate security increasingly deals in information and data security, as well as general corporate governance and responsibility. Proper security protocols not only protect your business from harm, but also play an important factor in your overall success. As such, corporate security is all about setting up practical and effective strategies to protect your company from harm, regardless of whether the threat comes from within or outside. As such, hiring a security consulting firm to improve corporate security and security management within your company is not an unnecessary luxury, but a must.

    Security and risk management

    Our security and risk services

    Security strategy

    Security Strategy

    Embed security thinking through aligning your security strategy to business goals and values

    Read more

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Create a disaster recovey plan that is right for your company

    Read more

    Risk Management

    Risk Management

    Build your right-sized IT Risk Management Program

    Read more

    Check out all our services

    Improve your corporate security with help from our consulting company

    As a consultancy firm, Tymans Group can help your business to identify possible threats and help set up strategies to avoid them. However, as not all threats can be avoided, our corporate security consultancy firm also helps you set up protocols to mitigate and manage them, as well as help you develop effective incident management protocols. All solutions are practical, people-oriented and based on our extensive experience and thus have proven effectiveness.

    Hire our experienced consultancy firm

    Engage the services of our consulting company to improve corporate security within your small or medium business. Contact us to set up an appointment on-site or book a one-hour talk with expert Gert Taeymans to discuss any security issues you may be facing. We are happy to offer you a custom solution.

    Register to read more …

    We may not be able to show you this

    We may not be able to show you this just yet.
    Our deeper, more detailed content is reserved for Tymans Group clients. 

    If you are interested in retaining our services or would really like access, please contact us. 

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}203|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The immaturity of the big data market means that organizations lack examples and best practices to follow, and they are often left trailblazing their own paths.
    • Experienced and knowledgeable big data professionals are limited and without creative resourcing; IT might struggle to fill big data positions.
    • The term NoSQL has become a catch-all phrase for big data technologies; however, the technologies falling under the umbrella of NoSQL are disparate and often misunderstood. Organizations are at risk of adopting incorrect technologies if they don’t take the time to learn the jargon.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • NoSQL plays a key role in the emergence of the big data market, but it has not made relational databases outdated. Successful big data strategies can be conducted using SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of the two.
    • Assign a Data Architect to oversee your initiative. Hire or dedicate someone who has the ability to develop both a short-term and long-term vision and that has hands-on experience with data management, mining and modeling. You will still need someone (like a database administrator) who understands the database, the schemas, and the structure.
    • Understand your data before you attempt to use it. Take a master data management approach to ensure there are rules and standards for managing your enterprise’s data, and take extra caution when integrating external sources.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess whether SQL, NoSQL, or a combination of both technologies will provide you with the appropriate capabilities to achieve your business objectives and gain value from your data.
    • Form a Big Data Team to bring together IT and the business in order to leave a successful initiative.
    • Conduct ongoing training with your personnel to ensure up-to-date skills and end-user understanding.
    • Frequently scan the big data market space to identify new technologies and opportunities to help optimize your big data strategy.

    Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a big data strategy

    Know where to start and where to focus attention in the implementation of a big data strategy.

    • Storyboard: Build a Strategy for Big Data Platforms

    2. Assess the appropriateness of big data technologies

    Decide the most correct tools to use in order to solve enterprise data management problems.

    • Big Data Diagnostic Tool

    3. Determine the TCO of a scale out implementation

    Compare the TCO of a SQL (scale up) with a NoSQL (scale out) deployment to determine whether NoSQL will save costs.

    • Scale Up vs. Scale Out TCO Tool
    [infographic]

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

    • IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace.
    • In most organizations, technology has evolved faster than the business’ understanding of what it is, how it works, and what it can do for them.
    • How traditional financial accounting methods are applied to IT expenditure don’t align well to modern IT realities.
    • IT is often directed to make cuts when cost optimization and targeted investment are what’s really needed to sustain and grow the organization in the long term.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Meaningful conversations about IT spend don’t happen nearly as frequently as they should. When they do happen, they are often inhibited by a lack of IT financial management (ITFM) maturity combined with the absence of a shared vocabulary between IT, the CFO, and other business function leaders.
    • Supporting data about actual technology spend taking place that would inform decision making is often scattered and incomplete.
    • Creating transparency in your IT financial data is essential to powering collaborative and informed technology spend decisions.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the uses and benefits of making your IT spend more transparent.
    • Discover and organize your IT financial data.
    • Map your organization’s total technology spend against four IT stakeholder views: CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO.
    • Gain vocabulary and facts that will help you tell the true story of IT spend.

    Members may also be interested in Info-Tech's IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service.

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Deck – A detailed, do-it-yourself framework and process for clearly mapping your organization’s total technology spend.

    This deck mirrors Info-Tech’s own internal methods for delivering its IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service in a do-it-yourself format. Based on Info-Tech’s proven ITFM Cost Model, it includes an IT spend mapping readiness assessment, expert advice for sourcing and organizing your financial data, a methodology for mapping IT staff and vendor spend according to four key stakeholder views (CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO), and guidance on how to analyze and share your results.

    • Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Storyboard

    2. IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook – A structured Excel tool that allows you to allocate your IT spend across four key stakeholder views and generate high-impact visualizations.

    This workbook offers a step-by-step approach for mapping and visualizing your organization’s true IT spend.

    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    3. IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation Template – A PowerPoint template that helps you summarize and showcase key results from your IT spend transparency exercise.

    This presentation template offers a recommended structure for introducing key executive stakeholders to your organization’s true IT spending behavior and IT financial management as a whole.

    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

    Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations with the business.

    Analyst Perspective

    Take the first step in your IT spend journey.

    Talking about money is hard. Talking to the CEO, CFO, and other business leaders about money is even harder, especially if IT is seen as just a cost center, is not understood by stakeholders, or is simply taken for granted. In times of economic hardship, already lean IT operations are tasked with becoming even leaner.

    When there's little fat to trim, making IT spend decisions without understanding the spend's origin, location, extent, and purpose can lead to mistakes that weaken, not strengthen, the organization.

    The first step in optimizing IT spend decisions is setting a baseline. This means having a comprehensive and transparent view of all technology spend, organization-wide. This baseline is the only way to have meaningful, data-driven conversations with stakeholders and approvers around what IT delivers to the business and the implications of making changes to IT funding.

    Before stepping forward in your IT financial management journey, know exactly where you're standing today.

    Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice

    Jennifer Perrier
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech's Approach
    IT spend has increased in volume and complexity, but how IT spend decisions are made has not kept pace:
    • Technology has evolved faster than the business' understanding of what it is, how it works, and what it can do for them.
    • How traditional financial accounting methods are applied doesn't align well to modern IT realities.
    • IT is directed to make cuts when cost optimization and targeted investment are what's really needed to sustain and grow the organization in the long-term.
    Meaningful conversations about IT spend don't happen nearly as much as they should. This is often due to:
    • A lack of maturity in how ITFM (IT financial management) is executed within IT and across the organization as a whole.
    • The absence of a shared vocabulary between IT, the CFO, and other business function leaders.
    • Scattered and incomplete data about the actual technology spend taking place in the organization.
    Lay a foundation for meaningful conversations and informed decision-making around IT spend.
    • Understand the uses and benefits of making your IT spend more transparent.
    • Discover and organize your IT financial data.
    • Map your organization's total technology spend against four IT stakeholder views: CFO, CIO, CXO, and CEO.
    • Gain both vocabulary and facts that will help you tell the true story of IT spend.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Create transparency in your IT financial data to power both collaborative and informed technology spend decisions.

    IT spend has grown alongside IT complexity

    IT spend has grown alongside IT complexity

    Growth creates change ... and challenges

    IT has become more integral to business operations and achievement of strategic goals, driving complexity in how IT funds are allocated and managed.

    How IT funds are spent has changed
    Value demonstration is two-pronged. The first is return on performance investment, focused on formal and objective goals, metrics, and KPIs. The second is stakeholder satisfaction, a more subjective measure driven by IT-business alignment and relationship. IT leaders must do both well to prove and promote IT's value.
    Funding decision cadence has sped up
    Many organizations have moved from three- to five-year strategic planning cycles to one-year planning horizons or less, most noticeably since the 2008/2009 recession. Not only has the pace of technological change accelerated, but so too has volatility in the broader business and economic environments, forcing rapid response.
    Justification rigor around IT spend has increased
    The need for formal business cases, proposals, and participation in formal governance processes has increased, as has demand for financial transparency. With many IT departments still reporting into the CFO, there's no getting around it - today's IT leaders need to possess financial management savvy.
    Clearly showing business value has become priority
    IT spend has moved from the purchase of discrete hardware and software tools traditionally associated with IT to the need to address larger-scale issues around interoperability, integration, and virtualized cloud solutions. Today's focus is more on big-picture architecture than on day-to-day operations.

    ITFM capabilities haven't grown with IT spend

    IT still needs to prove itself.

    Increased integration with the core business has made it a priority for the head of IT to be well-versed in business language and practice, specifically in the areas of measurement and financial management.

    However, IT staff across all industries aren't very confident in how well IT is doing in managing its finances via three core processes:

    • Accounting of costs and budgets.
    • Optimizing costs to gain the best return on investment.
    • Demonstrating IT's value to the business.

    Recent data from 4,137 respondents to Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Diagnostic shows that while most IT staff feel that these three financial management processes are important, notably fewer feel that IT management is effective at executing them.

    IT leadership's capabilities around fundamental cost data capture appear to be lagging, not to mention the essential value-added capabilities around optimizing costs and showing how IT contributes to business value.

    Graph of Cost and Budget Management

    Graph of Cost Optimization

    Questions for support transition

    Source: IT Management & Governance Diagnostic, Info-Tech Research Group, 2022.

    Take the perspective of key IT stakeholders as a first step in ITFM capability improvement

    Other business unit leaders need to deliver on their own specific and unique accountabilities. Create true IT spend transparency by accounting for these multiple perspectives.

    Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?
    Many IT costs, like back-end infrastructure and apps maintenance, can be invisible to the business.

    Why doesn't my department get more support from IT?
    Some business needs won't align with spend priorities, while others seem to take more than their fair share.

    Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?
    IT will get little done or fall short of meeting service level requirements without appropriate funding.

    I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?
    Questions about value arise as IT investment and spend increase. How to answer these questions is critical.

    At the end of the day, telling IT's spend story to the business is a significant challenge if you don't understand your audience, have a shared vocabulary, or use a repeatable framework.

    Mapping your IT spend against a reusable framework helps generate transparency

    A framework makes transparency possible by simplifying methods, creating common language, and reducing noise.

    However, the best methodological framework won't work if the materials and information plugged into it are weak. With IT spend, the materials and information are your staff and your vendor financial data. To achieve true transparency, inputs must have the following three characteristics:

    Availability Reliability Usability
    The data and information are up-to-date and accessible when needed. The data and information are accurate, complete, and verifiable. The data and information are clearly defined, consistently and predictably organized, consumable, and meaningful for decision-making.

    A framework is an organizing principle. When it comes to better understanding your IT spend, the things being organized by a framework are your method and your data.

    If your IT spend information is transparent, you have an excellent foundation for having the right conversations with the right people in order to make strategically impactful decisions.

    Info-Tech's approach enables meaningful dialogue with stakeholders about IT spend

    View of meaningful dialogue with stakeholders about IT spend

    Investing time in preparing and mapping your IT spend data enables better IT governance

    While other IT spend transparency methods exist, Info-Tech's is designed to be straightforward and tactical.

    Info-Tech method for IT spend transparency

    Put your data to work instead of being put to work by your data.

    Introducing Info-Tech's methodology for creating transparency on technology spend

    1. Know your objectives 2. Gather required data 3. Map your IT staff spend 4. Map your IT vendor spend 5. Identify implications for IT
    Phase Steps
    1. Review your business context
    2. Set IT staff and vendor spend transparency objectives
    3. Assess effort and readiness
    1. Collect IT staff spend data
    2. Collect IT vendor spend data
    3. Define industry-specific CXO Business View categories
    1. Categorize IT staff spend in each of the four views
    2. Validate
    1. Categorize IT vendor spend in each of the four views
    2. Validate
    1. Analyze your findings
    2. Craft your key messages
    3. Create an executive presentation
    Phase Outcomes Goals and scope for your IT spend and staffing transparency effort. Information and data required to perform the IT staff and vendor spend transparency initiative. A mapping of the allocation of IT staff spend across the four views of the Info-Tech ITFM Cost Model. A mapping of the allocation of IT vendor spend across the four views of the Info-Tech ITFM Cost Model. An analysis of your results and a presentation to aid your communication of findings with stakeholders.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight
    Take the perspective of key stakeholders and lay out your organization's complete IT spend footprint in terms they understand to enable meaningful conversations and start evolving your IT financial management capability.

    Phase 1 insight
    Your IT spend transparency efforts are only useful if you actually do something with the outcomes of those efforts. Be clear about where you want your IT transparency journey to take you.

    Phase 2 insight
    Your IT spend transparency efforts are only as good as the quality of your inputs. Take the time to properly source, clean, and organize your data.

    Phase 3 insight
    Map your IT staff spend data first. It involves work but is relatively straightforward. Practice your mapping approach here and carry forward your lessons learned.

    Phase 4 insight
    The importance of good, usable data will become apparent when mapping your IT vendor spend. Apply consistent and meaningful vendor labels to enable true aggregation and insight.

    Phase 5 insight
    Communicating your final IT spend transparency mapping with executive stakeholders is your opportunity to debut IT financial management as not just an IT issue but an organization-wide concern.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Use this tool in Phases 1-4

    IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    Input your IT staff and vendor spend data to generate visual outputs for analysis and presentation in your communications.

    Key deliverable:

    IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation

    Create a showcase for your newly-transparent IT staff and vendor spend data and present it to key business stakeholders.

    Use this tool in Phase 5

    IT and business blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits Business Benefits
    • Gain insight into exactly where you're spending IT funds on hardware, software, service providers, and the workforce.
    • Understand how much it's costing IT to deliver specific IT services.
    • Illustrate differences in business consumption of IT spend.
    • Learn the ratio of spend allocated to innovation vs. growth vs. keeping the lights on (KTLO).
    • Develop a series of core IT spend metrics including IT spend as a percent of revenue, IT spend per organization employee, and IT spend per IT staff member.
    • Create a complete IT spend baseline to serve as a foundation for future benchmarking, cost optimization, and other forms of IT financial analysis.
    • Understand the relative allocation of IT spend across capital vs. operational expenditure.
    • See the degree to which IT differentially supports and enables organizational goals, strategies, and functions.
    • Have better data for informing the organization's IT spend allocation and prioritization decisions.
    • Gain better visibility into real-life IT spending behaviors, cadences, and patterns.
    • Identify potential areas of spend waste as well as underinvestment.
    • Understand the true value that IT brings to the business.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    You will know that your IT spend and staffing transparency effort is succeeding when:

    • Your understanding of where technology funds are really being allocated is comprehensive.
    • You're having active and meaningful dialogue with key stakeholders about IT spend issues.
    • IT spend transparency is a permanent part of your IT financial management toolkit.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you identify initiatives where you can leverage the outcomes of your IT spend and staffing transparency effort.

    In phases 2, 3, and 4, we will guide you through the process of mapping your IT staff and vendor spend data so you can generate your own IT spend metrics based on reliable sources and verifiable facts.

    Win #1: Knowing how to reliably source the financial data you need to make decisions.

    Win #2: Getting your IT spend data in an organized format that you can actually analyze.

    Win #3: Having a framework that puts IT spend in a language stakeholders understand.

    Win #4: Gaining a practical starting point to mature ITFM practices like cost optimization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    Info-Tech recommends the following calls in your Guided Implementation.

    Phase 1: Know your objectives Phase 2: Gather required data Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend Phase 5: Identify implications for IT
    Call #1: Discuss your IT spend and staffing transparency objectives and readiness. Call #2: Review spend and staffing data sources and identify data organization and cleanup needs. Call #3: Review your mapped IT staff spend and resolve lingering challenges. Call #4: Review your mapped IT vendor spend and resolve lingering challenges. Call #5: Analyze your mapping outputs for opportunities and devise next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between four to six calls over the course of two to three months.

    Want even more help with your IT spend transparency effort?

    Let us fast-track your IT spend journey.

    The path to IT financial management maturity starts with knowing exactly where your money is going. To streamline this effort, Info-Tech offers an IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service that provides full transparency into where your money is going without any heavy lifting on your part.

    This unique service features:

    • A client-proven approach to meet your IT spend transparency goals.
    • Vendor and staff spend mapping that reveals business consumption of IT.
    • Industry benchmarking to compare your spending and staffing to that of your peers.
    • Results in a fraction of the time with much less effort than going it alone.
    • Expert review of results and ongoing discussions with Info-Tech analysts.

    If you'd like Info-Tech to pave the way to IT spend transparency, contact your account manager for more information - we're happy to talk anytime.

    Phase 1

    Know Your Objectives

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish IT spend and staffing transparency uses and objectives
    • Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend and staffing transparency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 1: Know your objectives

    Envision what transparency can do.

    You're at the very beginning of your IT spend transparency journey. In this phase you will:

    • Set your objectives for making your IT spend and staffing transparent.
    • Assess your readiness to tackle the exercise and gauge how much work you'll need to do in order to do it well.

    "I've heard this a lot lately from clients: 'I've got my hands on this data, but it's not structured in a way that will allow me to make any decisions about it. I have these journal entries and they have some accounting codes, GL descriptors, cost objects, and some vendors, but it's not enough detail to make any decisions about my services, my applications, my asset spend.'"
    - Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Transparency positively enables both business outcomes and the practice of business ethics

    However, transparency's real superpower is in how it provides fact-based context.

    • More accurate and relevant data for decision-making.
    • Better managed and more impactful financial outcomes.
    • Increased inclusion of people in the decisions that affect them.
    • Clearer accountabilities for organizational efficiency and effectiveness goals.
    • Concrete proof that business priorities and decisions are being acted on and implemented.
    • Greater trust and respect between IT and the business.
    • Demonstration of integrity in how funds are being used.

    IT spend transparency efforts are only useful if you actually do something with the outputs

    Identify in advance how you plan to leverage IT spend transparency outcomes.

    CFO expense view

    • Demonstrate actual IT costs at the right level of granularity.
    • Update/change the categories finance uses to track IT spend.
    • Adjust the expected CapEx/OpEx ratio.

    CXO business view

    • Calculate consumption of IT resources by department.
    • Implement a showback/chargeback mechanism.
    • Change the funding conversation about proposed IT projects.

    CIO service view

    • Calculate the total cost to deliver a specific IT service.
    • Adjust the IT service spend-to-value ratio as per business priorities.
    • Rightsize IT service levels to reflect true value to the business.

    CEO innovation view

    • Formalize the organization's position on use of cloud/outsourcing.
    • Reduce the portion of spend dedicated to "keeping the lights on."
    • Develop a plan for boosting commitment to innovation investment.

    When determining your end objectives, think about the real questions IT is being asked by the business and how IT spend transparency will help you answer them.

    CFO: Financial accounting perspective

    IT spend used to be looked at from a strictly financial accounting perspective - this is the view of the CFO and the finance department. Their question, "exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them," is really about how money is distributed across different asset classes. This question breaks down into other questions that IT leaders needs to ask themselves in order to provide answers:

    • How should I classify my IT costs? What are the standard categories you need to have that are meaningful to folks crunching the corporate numbers? If you're too detailed, it won't make sense to them. If you pick outmoded categories, you'll have to adjust in the future as IT evolves, which makes tracking year-over-year spend patterns harder.
    • What information should I include in my plans and reports? This is about two things. One is about communicating with the finance department in language that reduces back-and-forth and eliminates misinterpretation. The other is about aligning with the categories the finance department uses to track financial data in the general ledger.
    • How do I justify current spend? This is about clarity and transparency. Specifically itemizing spend into categories that are meaningful for your audience does a lot of justification work for you since you don't have to re-explain what everything means.
    • How do I justify a budget increase? In a declining economy, this question may not be appropriate. However, establishing a baseline puts you in a better position to discuss spend requirements based on past performance and to focus the conversation.

    Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?

    Example
    Asset Class % IT Spend
    Workforce 42.72%
    Software - Cloud 9.26%
    Software - On Prem 13.61%
    Hardware - Cloud 0.59%
    Hardware - On Prem 15.68%
    Contract Services 18.14%
    Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

    CIO: IT operations management perspective

    As the CIO role was adopted, IT spend was viewed from the IT operations management perspective. Optimizing the IT delivery model is a critical step to reducing time to provision services. For the IT leader, the questions they need to ask themselves are:

    • What's the impact of cloud adoption on speed of delivery? Leveraging a SaaS solution can reduce time to deployment as well as increase your ability to scale; however, integration with other functionality will still be a challenge that will incur costs.
    • Where can I improve spend efficiency? This is about optimizing spend in your IT delivery model. What service levels does the business require and what's the most cost-effective way to meet those levels without incurring significant technical debt?
    • Is my support model optimized? By reviewing where support staff are focused and which services are using most of your resources, you can investigate underlying drivers of your staffing requirements. If staff costs in support of a business function are high, perhaps the portfolio of applications needs to be reviewed.
    • How does our spend compare to others? Benchmarking against peers is a useful input, but reflects common practice, not best practice. For example, if you need to invest in IT security, your entire industry is lagging on this front, and you happen to be doing slightly better than most, then bringing forth this benchmark won't help you make the case. Starting with year-over-year internal benchmarking is essential - establish your categories, establish your baseline, and track it consistently.

    Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?

    Example
    Service Area % IT Spend
    App Development 9.06%
    App Maintenance 30.36%
    Hosting/Network 25.39%
    End User 18.59%
    Data & BI 3.58%
    Security & Risk 5.21%
    IT Management 7.82%
    Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

    CXO: Business unit perspective

    As business requests have increased, so too has the importance of the business unit perspective. Each business function has a unique mandate to fulfill in the organization and also competes with other business functions for IT resources. By understanding business consumption of IT, organizations can bring transparency and drive a different dialog with their business partners. Every IT leader should find out the answers to these questions:

    • Which business units consume the most IT resources? By understanding consumption of IT by business function, IT organizations can clearly articulate which business units are getting the highest share of IT resources. This will bring much needed clarity when it comes to IT spend prioritization and investment.
    • Which business units are underserved by IT? By providing full transparency into where all IT spend is consumed, organizations can determine if certain business functions may need increased attention in an upcoming budget cycle. Knowing which levers to pull is critical in aligning IT activities with delivering business value.
    • How do I best communicate spend data internally? Different audiences need information presented to them differently. This is not just about the language - it's also about the frequency, format, and channel you use. Ask your audiences directly what methods of communication stand the best chance of you being seen and heard.
    • Where do I need better business sponsorship for IT projects? If a lot of IT spend is going toward one or two business units, the leaders of those units need to be active sponsors of IT projects and associated spend that will benefit all users.

    Why doesn't my business unit get more support from IT?

    Example
    Business Function % IT Spend
    HR Department 6.16%
    Finance Department 15.15%
    IT Department 10.69%
    Business Function 1 23.80%
    Business Function 2 10.20%
    Business Function 3 6.80%
    Business Function 4 27.20%
    Source: Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Studies, 2022.

    CEO: Strategic vs. operations perspective

    With a business view now available, evaluating IT spend from a strategic standpoint is critical. Simply put, how much is being spent keeping the lights on (KTLO) in the organization versus supporting business or organizational growth versus net-new business innovations? This view is not about what IT costs but rather how it is being prioritized to drive revenue, operating margin, or market share. Here are the questions IT leaders should be asking themselves along with the organization's executive leadership and the CEO:

    • Why is KTLO spend so high? This question is a good gauge of where the line is drawn between operations and strategy. Many IT departments want to reduce time spent on maintenance and redeploy resource investment toward strategic projects. This reallocation must include retiring or eliminating technologies to free up funds.
    • What should our operational spend priorities be? Maintenance and basic operations aren't going anywhere. The issue is what is necessary and what could be done more wisely. Are you throwing good money after bad on a high-maintenance legacy system?
    • Which projects and investments should we prioritize? The answer to this question should tightly align with business strategic goals and account for the lion's share of growth and innovation spend.
    • Are we spending enough on innovative initiatives? This is the ultimate dialogue between business partners, the CEO, and IT that needs to take place, yet often doesn't.

    I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?

    Example
    Focus Area % IT Spend
    KTLO 89.16%
    Grow 7.18%
    Innovate 3.66%
    Info-Tech IT Spend Studies, 2022.

    Be clear about where you want your IT spend transparency journey to take you in real life

    Transparent IT spend data will allow you to have conversations you couldn't have before. Consider this example of how telling an IT spend story could evolve.

    I want to ...
    Analyze the impact of the cloud on IT operating expenditure to update finance's expectations of a realistic IT CapEx/OpEx ratio now and into the future.

    To address the problem of ...

    • Many of our key software vendors have eliminated on-premises products and only offer software as an OpEx service.
    • Assumptions that modern IT solutions are largely on-premises and can be treated as capitalizable assets are out-of-date and don't reflect IT financial realities.

    And will use transparency to ...

    • Provide the CFO with specific, accurate, and annotated OpEx by product/service and vendor for all cloud-based and on-premises solutions.
    • Facilitate a realistic calculation of CapEx/OpEx distribution based on actuals, as well as let us develop defendable projections of OpEx into the future based on typical annual service fee increases and anticipated growth in the number of users/licenses.

    1.1 Establish ITFM objectives that leverage IT spend transparency

    Duration: One hour

    1. Consider the problems or issues commonly voiced by the business about IT, as well as your own ongoing challenges in communicating with stakeholders. Document these problems/issues as questions or statements as spoken by a person. To help structure your brainstorming, consider these general process domains and examples:
      1. Spend tracking and reporting. E.g. Why is IT's OpEx so high? We need you to increase IT's percentage of CapEx.
      2. Service levels and business continuity. E.g. Why do we need to hire more service desk staff? There are more of them in IT than any other role.
      3. Project and operations resourcing. E.g. Why can't IT just buy this new app we want? It's not very expensive.
      4. Strategy and innovation. E.g. Did output increase or decrease last quarter per input unit? IT should be able to run those reports for us.
    2. For each problem/issue noted, identify:
      1. The source(s) of the question/concern (e.g. CEO, CFO, CXO, CIO).
      2. The financial process involved (e.g. accurate costing, verification of costs, building a business case to invest).
    3. For each problem/issue, identify a broader project-style initiative where having transparent IT spend data is a valuable input. One initiative may apply to multiple problems/issues. For each initiative:
      1. Give it a working title.
      2. State the goal for the initiative with reference to ITFM aspirations.
      3. Identify key stakeholders (these will likely overlap with the problem/issue source).
      4. Set general time frames for resolution.

    Document your outputs on the slide immediately following the instruction slides for this exercise. Examples are included.

    1.1 Establish ITFM objectives that leverage IT spend transparency

    Input Output
    • Organizational knowledge
    • List of the potential uses and objectives of transparent IT spend and staffing data
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    ITFM initiatives that leverage transparency

    Problem/Issue Statement Source/ Stakeholder Associated ITFM Process Potential Initiative Initiative Goal Time Frame
    "Why is IT's OpEx so high? We need you to increase IT's percentage of CapEx." CFO IT spend categorization and reporting. Analyze the impact of the cloud on IT operating expenditure. To update finance's expectations of a realistic IT CapEx/OpEx ratio. <12 months
    "Why do we need to hire more service desk staff? There are more of them in IT than any other role." CFO, VP of HR Business case for hiring IT staff. Document ongoing IT support requirements for proposed ERP platform migration project. To ensure sufficient resources for an anticipated increase in service desk tickets due to implementation of a new ERP system. 1-3 months
    "Why can't IT just buy this new app we want? It's not very expensive." CEO, all CXOs/VPs Total cost of technology ownership. Develop a mechanism to review the lifecycle impact on IT of proposed technology purchases. To determine if functionality of new tool already exists in the org. and the total cost of ownership of a new app. <6 months
    "Did output increase or decrease last quarter per input unit? IT should be able to run those reports for us." CEO, CFO, VP of Production IT service costing. Develop an organizational business intelligence strategy. To create a comprehensive plan for evolving BI capability in the organization and transferring report development to users. Select a department for pilot. <12 months

    Your organization's governance culture will affect how you approach transparency

    Know your governance culture Lower Governance
    • Few regulations.
    • Financial reporting is largely internal.
    • Change is frequent and rapid.
    • Informal or nonexistent mechanisms and structures.
    • Data sharing behavior driven by competitive concerns.
    Higher Governance
    • Many regulations.
    • Stringent and regular external reporting requirements.
    • Change is limited and/or slow.
    • Defined and established mechanisms and structures.
    • Data sharing behavior driven by regulatory concerns.
    Determine impact on opportunities How does your governance culture impact IT spend transparency opportunities?
    Resistance to formality and bureaucracy Resistance to change and uncertainty
    Set expectations and approach You have plenty of room to implement transparency rigor within the confines of IT, but getting others to give you the time and attention you want will be a challenge. One-on-one, informal relationship building to create goodwill and dialogue is needed before putting forth recommendations or numbers. Many existing procedures must be accommodated and respected. While you can benefit by working with preexisting mechanisms and touchpoints, expect any changes you want to make to things like IT cost categories or CapEx/OpEx ratios to require a lot of time, meetings, and case-making.

    IT's current maturity around ITFM practice will also affect your approach to transparency

    Know your ITFM maturity level Lower ITFM Maturity
    • No/few formal policies, standards, or procedures exist.
    • There is little/no formal education or experience within IT around budget, costing, charging, or accounting practices.
    • Financial reporting is sporadic and inconsistent in its contents.
    • Business cases are rarely used in decision-making.
    • Financial data is neither reliable nor readily available.
    Higher ITFM Maturity
    • Formal policies, standards, and procedures are enforced organization-wide for all financial management activities.
    • Formally-trained accountants are embedded within IT.
    • Financial reporting is regular, scheduled, and defined.
    • Business cases are leveraged in most decision-making activities.
    • Financial data is governed, centralized, and current.
    Determine stakeholders' financial literacy How does your degree of ITFM maturity impact IT spend transparency opportunities?
    Improve your own financial literacy first Determine stakeholders' financial literacy
    Set expectations and approach Brush up on core financial management and accounting concepts before taking the discussion beyond IT's walls. Do start mapping your costs, but just know how to communicate what the data is saying before sharing it. Not everyone will be at your level, familiar with ITFM language and concepts, or focused on the same things you are. Gauge where your audience is at so you can prepare for meaningful dialogue.

    1.2 Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend transparency

    Duration: One hour

    Note: This assessment is general in nature. It's intended to help you identify and prepare for potential challenges in your IT spend and staffing transparency effort.

    1. Rate your agreement with the "Data & Information" and "Experience, Expertise, & Support" statements listed on the slide immediately following the two instruction slides for this exercise. For each statement, indicate the extent to which you agree or disagree, where:
      1. 1 = Strongly disagree
      2. 2 = Disagree
      3. 3 = Neither agree nor disagree
      4. 4 = Agree
      5. 5 = Strongly agree
    2. Add up your numerical scores for all statements, where the highest possible score is 65.
    3. Assess your general readiness against the following guidelines:
      1. 50-65: Ready. The transparency exercise will involve work, but should be straightforward since you have the data, skills, tools, processes, and support to do it.
      2. 40-49: Ready, with caveats. The transparency exercise is doable but will require some preparatory legwork and investigation on your part around data sourcing, organization, and interpretation.
      3. 30-39: Challenged. The transparency exercise will present some obstacles. Expect to encounter data gaps, inconsistencies, errors, roadblocks, and frustrations that will need to be resolved.
      4. Less than 30: Not ready. You don't have the data, skills, tools, processes, and/or support to do the data transparency exercise. Take time to develop a stronger foundation of financial literacy and governance before tackling it.

    Document your outputs on the slide immediately following the two instruction slides for this exercise.

    1.2 Assess your readiness to tackle IT spend transparency

    InputOutput
    • Organizational knowledge
    • Estimation of IT spend and staffing transparency effort
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    IT spend transparency readiness assessment

    Data & Information
    Statement Rating
    We know how to access all IT department spend records.
    We know how to access all non-IT-department technology spend records.
    We know how to access all IT vendor/contractor agreements.
    We know how to access data about our IT staff costs and allocation, such as organizational charts and salaries/benefits.
    Our financial and staffing data is up-to-date.
    Our financial and staffing data are labeled, described, and organized so that we know what they're referring to.
    Our financial and staffing data are in a format that we can easily manipulate (e.g. export, copy and paste, perform calculations).
    Experience, Expertise, & Support
    Statement Rating
    We have sufficient expertise within the IT department to navigate and accurately interpret financial records.
    We have reasonable access to expertise/resources in our finance department to support us in an IT spend transparency exercise.
    We can allocate sufficient time (about 40 hours) and resources in the near term to do an IT spend transparency exercise.
    We have current accountabilities to track and internally report financial information to others on at least a monthly basis.
    There are existing financial policies, procedures, and standards in the organization with which we must closely adhere and comply.
    We have had the experience of participating in, or responding to the results of, an internal or external audit.

    Rating scale:
    1 = Strongly Disagree; 2 = Disagree; 3 = Neither agree nor disagree; 4 = Agree; 5 = Strongly agree
    Assessment scale:
    Less than 30 = Not ready; 30-39 = Challenged; 40-49 = Ready with caveats; 50-65 = Ready

    Take a closer look at the statements you rated 1, 2, or 3. These will be areas of challenge no matter what your total score on the assessment scale.

    Phase 1: Know your objectives

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed the first two steps on your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

    • Set your objectives for making your IT spend and staffing transparent.
    • Assessed your readiness to tackle the exercise and know how much work you'll need to do in order to do it well.

    "Mapping to a transparency model is labor intensive. You can do it once and never revisit it again, but we would never advise that. What it does is play well into an IT financial management maturity roadmap."
    - Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 2

    Gather Required Data

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Gather, clean, and organize your data
    • Build your industry-specific business views

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 2: Gather required data

    Finish your preparation.

    You're now ready to do the final preparation for your IT spend and staffing transparency journey. In this phase you will:

    • Gather your IT spend and staffing data and information.
    • Clean and organize your data to streamline mapping.
    • Identify your baseline data points.

    "Some feel like they don't have all the data, so they give up. Don't. Every data point counts."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Your IT spend transparency efforts are only as good as the quality of your inputs

    Aim for a comprehensive, complete, and accurate set of data and information.

    Diagram of comprehensive, complete, and accurate set of data and information

    Start by understanding what's included in technology spend

    Info-Tech's ITFM Technology Inventory

    In scope:

    • All network, telecom, and data center equipment.
    • All end-user productivity software and devices (e.g. laptops, peripheral devices, cell phones).
    • Information security.
    • All acquisition, development, maintenance, and management of business and operations software.
    • All systems used for the storage and management of business assets, data, records, and information.
    • All managed IT services.
    • Third-party consulting services.
    • All identifiable spend from the business for the above.

    Expand your thinking: Total tech spend goes beyond what's under IT's operational umbrella

    "Technology" means all technology in the organization regardless of where it lives, who bought it, who owns it, who runs it, or who uses it.

    IT may have low or no visibility into technologies that exist in the broader business environment beyond IT. Accept that you won't gain 100% visibility right now. However, do get started and be persistent.

    Where to look for non-IT technology ...

    • Highly specialized business functions - niche tools that are probably used by only a few people.
    • Power users and the "underserved" - cloud-based workflow, communication, and productivity tools they got on their own.
    • Operational technology - network-connected industrial, building, or physical security sensors and control systems.
    • Recently acquired/merged entities - inherited software.

    Who might get you what you need ...

    • Business unit and team leaders - identification of what they use and copies of their spend records and/or contracts.
    • Finance - a report of the "software" expenditure category to spot unrecognized technologies and their owners.
    • Vendors - copies of contracts if not forthcoming internally.
    • Your service desk - informal knowledge gained about unknown technologies at play in the course of doing their job.

    The IT spend and staffing transparency exercise is an opportunity to kick-start a technology discovery process that will give you and the business a true picture of your technology profile, use, and spend.

    Seek out data at the right level of granularity with the right supporting information

    Key data and information to seek out:

    • Credits applied to appropriate debits that show net expense, or detailed descriptions of credits with no matching debit.
    • Cash-based accounting (not accrual accounting). If accrual, will need to determine how to simplify the data for your uses.
    • Vendor names, asset classes, descriptors, and departments.
    • A total spend amount (CapEx + OpEx) that:
      • Aligns with the spend period.
      • Passes your gut check for total IT spend.
      • Includes annual amounts for multi-year contracts (e.g. one year of a three-year Microsoft enterprise agreement).
      • Includes technology spend from the business (e.g. OT that IT supports).
    • Insights on large projects.
    • Consolidated recurring payments, salaries and benefits, and other small expenses.

    Look for these data descriptors in your files:

    • Cost center/accounting unit
    • Cost center/department description
    • GL ACCT
    • CL account description
    • Activity description
    • Status
    • Program/business function/project description
    • Accounting period
    • Transaction amount
    • Vendor/vendor name
    • Product/product name

    Avoid data that's hard to use or problematic as it will slow you down and bring limited benefits

    Spend data that's out of scope:

    • Depreciation/amortization.
    • Gain or loss of asset write-off.
    • Physical security (e.g. key cards, cameras, motion sensors, floodlights).
    • Printer consumables costs.
    • Heating and cooling costs (for data centers).

    Challenging data formats:

    • Large raw data files with limited or no descriptors.
    • Major accounts (hardware and software) combined in the same line item.
    • Line items (especially software) with no vendor reference information.
    • PDF files or screenshots that you can't extract data from readily. Use Excel or CSV files whenever possible.

    Getting at the data you need can be easy or hard – it all depends

    This is where your governance culture and ITFM maturity start to come into play.

    Data source Potential data and information What to expect
    IT Current/past budget, vendor agreements, IT project records, discretionary spend, number of IT employees. The rigor of your ITFM practice and centralization of data and documents will affect how straightforward this is.
    Finance General ledger, cash and income statements, contractor payments and other accounts payable, general revenue. Secure their expertise early. Let them know what you're trying to do and what you need. They may be willing to prepare data for you in the format you need and help you decipher records.
    Purchasing List of vendors/suppliers, vendor agreements, purchase invoices. Purchasing often has more descriptive information about vendors than finance. They can also point you to tech spend in other departments that you didn't know about.
    Human Resources Organizational chart, staff salaries and benefits, number of employees overall and by department. Data about benefits costs is something you're not likely to have, and there's only one place you can reliably get it.
    Other Business Units Non-IT technology spend vendor agreements and purchase invoices, number of department employees. Other departments may be tracking spend in an entirely different way than you. Be prepared to dig and reconcile.

    There may be some data or information you can't get without a Herculean effort. Don't worry about it too much - these items are usually relatively minor and won't significantly affect the overall picture.

    Commit to finding out what you don't know

    Many IT leaders don't have visibility into other departments' technology spend. In some cases, the fact that spend is even happening may be a complete surprise.

    Near-term visibility fix ...

    • Ask your finance department for a report on all technology-related spend categories. "Software" is a broad category that finance departments tend to track. Scan the report for items that don't look familiar and confirm the originating department or approver.
    • Check in with the procurement office. See what technology-related contracts they have on record and which departments "own" them. Get copies of those contracts if possible.
    • Contact individual department heads or technology spend approvers. Devise your contact shortlist based on what you already know or learned from finance and procurement. Position your outreach as a discovery process that supports your transparency effort. Avoid coming across as though you're judging their spend or planning to take over their technologies.

    Long-term visibility fix ...

    • Develop your relationships with other business unit leaders. This will help open the lines of communication permanently.
    • Establish a cross-functional central technology office or group. The main task of this unit is to set and manage technology standards organization-wide, including standards for tracking and documenting technology costs and asset lifecycle factors.
    • Ensure IT is formally involved in all technology spend proposals and plans. This gives IT the opportunity to assess them for security compliance, IT network/system interoperability, manageability, and IT support requirements prior to purchase.
    • Ensure IT is notified of all technology financial transactions. This includes contracts, invoices, and payments for all one-time purchases, subscription fees, and maintenance costs.

    Finally, note any potential anomalies in the IT spend period you're looking at

    No two years have the exact same spend patterns. One-time spend for a big capital project, for example, can dramatically alter your overall spend landscape.

    Look for the following anomalies:

    • New or ongoing capital implementations or projects that span more than one fiscal year.
    • Completed projects that have recently transitioned, or are transitioning, from CapEx (decreasing) to OpEx (increasing).
    • A major internal reorganization or merger, acquisition, or divestiture event.
    • Crises, disasters, or other rare emergencies.
    • Changes in IT funding sources (e.g. new or expiring grants).

    These anomalies often explain why IT spend is unusually high in certain areas. There's often a good business reason.

    In many cases, doing a separate spend transparency exercise for these anomalous projects or events can isolate their costs from other spend so their true nature and impact can be better understood.

    2.1 Gather your input data and information

    Duration: Variable

    1. Develop a complete list of the spending and staffing data and information you need to complete the transparency mapping exercise. For each required item, note the following:
      1. Description of data needed (i.e. type, timeframe, and format).
      2. Ideal timeframe or deadline for receipt.
      3. Probable source(s) and contact(s).
      4. Additional facilitation/support required.
      5. Person on your transparency team responsible for obtaining it.
    2. Set up a data and information repository to store all files as soon as they're received. Ideally, you'll want all data/information files to be in an electronic format so that everything can be stored in one place. Avoid paper documents if possible.
    3. Conduct your outreach to obtain the input data and information on your list. This could include delegating it to a subordinate, sending emails, making phone calls, booking meetings, and so on.
    4. Review the data and information received to confirm that it's the right type of data, at the correct level of granularity, for the right timeframe, in a usable format, and is generally accurate.
    5. Enter documentation about your data and information sources in tab "1. Data & Information Sources" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook to reflect what you needed and where you got it in order to make the discovery process easier in the future.
    6. In the same tab in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook, document any significant events that occurred that directly or indirectly impacted the selected year's spend values. These could include mergers/acquisitions/divestitures, major reorganizations or changes in leadership, significant shifts in product offerings or strategic direction, large capital projects, legal/regulatory changes, natural disasters, or changes in the economy.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    2.1 Gather your input data and information

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge of potential data and information sources
    • List of data and information required to complete the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Tidy up your data before beginning any spend mapping

    Most organizations aren't immaculate in their tech spend documentation and tracking practices. This creates data rife with gaps that lives in hard-to-use formats.

    The more preparation you do to approach the "good data" intersection point in the diagram below, the easier your mapping effort will be and the more useful and insightful your final findings.

    Venn diagram of good data

    Make your data "un-unique" to reduce the number of line items and make it manageable

    There's a good chance that the IT spend data you've received is in the form of tens of thousands of unique line items. Use the checklist below to help you roll it up.

    Warning: Never overwrite your original data. Insert new columns/rows and put your alternate information in these instead.

    Step 1: Standardize vendor names

    • Start with known large vendors.
    • Select a standard name for the vendor.
    • Brainstorm possible variations on the vendor name, including abbreviations and shortforms.
    • Search for the vendor in your data and document the new standardized vendor name in the appropriate row.
    • Repeat the above for all vendors.
    • Sort the new vendor name column from A-Z. Look for instances where names remain unique or are missing entirely. Reconcile if needed and fill in missing data.

    Step 2: Consolidate vendor spend

    • Sort the new vendor name column from A-Z. Start with vendors that have the most line items.
    • Add together related spend items from a given vendor. Create a new row for the consolidated spend item and flag it as consolidated. Keep the following item types in separate rows:
      • Hardware vs. software spend for the same vendor.
      • Cloud vs. on-premises spend for the same vendor.
    • Repeat the above for all vendors.
    • Consider breaking out separate rows for overly consolidated line items that contain too many different types of IT spend.

    2.2 Clean and organize your data

    Duration: Variable

    1. Check to ensure that you have all data and information required to conduct the IT spend transparency exercise.
    2. Conduct an initial scan to assess the data's current state of hygiene and overall usability. Flag anything of concern and follow up with the data/information provider to fix or reconcile any issues.
    3. Normalize your data to make it easier to work with. This includes selecting data format standards and changing anything that doesn't conform to those standards. This includes items such as date conventions, currencies, and so on.
    4. Standardize product and vendor naming/references throughout to enable searching, sorting, and grouping. For example, Microsoft Office may be variably referred to as "Microsoft", "Office", "Office 365", and "Office365" throughout your data. Pick one descriptor for the product/vendor and replace all related references with that descriptor.
    5. Consolidate and aggregate your data. Ideally, the data you received from your sources has already been simplified; however, you may need to further organize it to reduce the number of individual line items to a more manageable number. The transparency exercise uses relatively high-level categories, so combine data sets and aggregate where feasible without losing appropriate granularity.
    6. Archive any original copies of files that have been modified or replaced with consolidated/aggregated versions for future reference if needed.

    2.2 Clean and organize your data

    InputOutput
    • Data and information files
    • A normalized set of data and information for completing the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Select IT spend "buckets" for the CXO Business View as your final preparatory step

    Every organization has both industry-agnostic and industry-specific lines of business that are the direct beneficiaries of IT spend.

    Common shared business functions:

    • Human resources.
    • Finance and accounting.
    • Sales/customer service.
    • Marketing and advertising.
    • Legal services and regulatory compliance.
    • Information technology.

    It may seem odd to see IT on the business functions list since the purpose of this exercise is to map IT spend. For business view purposes, IT spend refers to what IT spends on itself to support its own internal operations.

    Examples of industry-specific functions:

    • Manufacturing: Product research and development; production operations; supply chain management.
    • Retail banking: Core banking services; loan, mortgage and credit services; investment and wealth management services.
    • Hospitals: Patient intake and admissions; patient diagnosis; patient treatment; patient recovery and ongoing care.
    • Insurance: Actuarial analysis; policy creation; underwriting; claims processing.

    See the Appendix of this blueprint for definitions of shared business functions plus sample industry-specific business view categories.

    Define your CXO Business View categories to set yourself up well for future ITFM analyses

    The CXO Business View buckets you set up today are tools you can and should reuse in your overall approach to ITFM governance. Spend some time to get them right.

    Stay high-level

    Getting too granular invites administrative headaches and overhead. Keep things high-level and general:

    • Limit the number of direct stakeholders represented: This will reduce communication overhead and ensure you're dealing only with people who have real decision-making authority.
    • Look to your org. chart: Note the departments or business units listed across the top of the chart that have one executive or top-ranking senior manager accountable for them. These business units often translate as-is into a tidy CXO Business View category.

    Limit your number of buckets

    Tracking IT spend across more than 8-10 shared and industry-specific business categories is impractical.

    • Simplify your options: Too many buckets gets confusing and invites time-wasting doubt.
    • Reduce future rework: Business structures will change, which means recategorizing spend data. Using a forklift is a lot easier than using tweezers.
    • Stick to major business units: Create separate "Business Other" and "Industry Other" catch-all categories to track IT spend for smaller functions that fall outside of major business unit structures.

    Stay high-level with the CXO Business View

    Be clear on what's in and what's out of your categories to keep everyone on the same page

    Clear lines of demarcation between CXO Business View categories reduce confusion, doubt, and wheel-reinvention when deciding where to allocate IT spend.

    Ensure clear boundaries

    Mutual exclusivity is key when defining categories in any taxonomical structure.

    • Avoid overlaps: Each high-level business function category should have few or no core function or process overlaps with another business function category. Aim for clear vertical separation.
    • Be encompassing: When defining a category, list all the business capabilities and sub-functions included in that category. For example, if defining the finance and accounting function, remember to specify its less obvious accountabilities, like enterprise asset management if appropriate.

    Identify exclusions

    Listing what's out can be just as informative and clarifying as listing what's in.

    • Beware odd bedfellows: Minor business groups are often tucked under a bigger organizational entity even though the two use different processes and technologies. Separate them if appropriate and state this exclusion in the bigger entity's definition.
    • Draw a line: If a process crosses business function categories, state which sub-steps are out of scope.
    • Document your decisions: This helps ensure you allocate IT spend the same way every time.

    Clear lines of demarcation between CXO Business View categories

    2.3 Build your industry-specific business views

    Duration: Two hours

    1. Confirm your list of high-level shared business services (human resources, finance and accounting, etc.) as provided in Info-Tech's IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. Rename them if needed to match the nomenclature used in your organization.
    2. Set and define your additional list of high-level, industry-specific business categories that are unique to or define your industry. See the slides immediately following this exercise for tips on developing these categories, as well as the appendix of this blueprint for some examples of industry-specific categories and definitions.
    3. Create "Business Other" and "Industry Other" categories to capture minor groups and activities supported by IT that fall beyond the major shared and industry-specific business functions you've shortlisted. Briefly note the business groups/activities that fall under these categories.
    4. Edit/enter your shared and industry-specific business function categories and their definitions on tab "2. Business View Definitions" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    2.3 Build your industry-specific business views

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge about your organization's structure and business functions/units
    • A list of major shared business functions and industry-specific business functions/capabilities that are defining of your industry
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Lock in key pieces of baseline data

    Calculating core IT spend metrics relies on a few key numbers. Settle these first based on known data before diving into detailed mapping.

    These baseline data will allow you to calculate high-level metrics like IT spend as a percent of revenue and year-over-year percent change in IT spend, as well as more granular metrics like IT staff spend per employee for a specific IT service.

    Baseline data checklist

    • IT spend analysis period (date range).
    • Currency used.
    • Organizational revenue.
    • Organizational OpEx.
    • Total current year IT spend.
    • Total current year IT CapEx and IT OpEx.
    • Total previous-year IT spend.
    • Total projected next-year IT spend.
    • Number of organizational employees.
    • Number of IT employees.

    You may have discovered some things you didn't know about during the mapping process. Revisit your baseline data when your mapping is complete and make adjustments where needed.

    2.4 Enter your baseline data

    Duration: One hour

    1. Navigate to tab "3. Baseline Data" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. Using the data you've gathered, enter the following information to set your baseline data for future calculations:
      1. Your IT spend analysis date range. This can be concrete dates, a fiscal year abbreviation, etc.
      2. The currency you will be using throughout the workbook. It's important that all monetary values entered are in the same currency.
      3. Your organization's total revenue and total operating expenditure (OpEx) for the spend analysis data range you've specified. Revenue includes all sources of funding/income.
      4. Your total IT OpEx and total IT capital expenditure (CapEx). The workbook will add your OpEx and CapEx values for you to arrive at a total IT spend value.
      5. Total IT spend for the year prior to the current IT spend analysis date range, as well as anticipated total IT spend for the year following.
      6. Total IT staff spend (salaries, benefits, training, travel, and fees for employees and contractors in a staff augmentation role) for the spend analysis date range.
      7. The total number of organizational employees and total number of IT employees. These are typically full-time equivalent (FTE) values and include contractors in a staff augmentation role.
    2. Make note of any issues that have influenced the values you entered.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    2.4 Enter your baseline data

    InputOutput
    • Cleaned and organized spend and staffing data and information
    • Finalized baseline data for deriving spend metrics
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead

    Phase 2: Gather required data

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed all preparation steps for your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

    • Gathered your IT spend and staffing data and information.
    • Cleaned and organized your data to streamline mapping.
    • Identified your baseline data points.

    "As an IT person, you're not speaking the same language at all as the accounting department. There's almost always a session of education that's required first."
    - Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 3

    Map Your IT Staff Spend

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Mapping your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    • Validating your mapping

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend

    Allocate your workforce costs across the four views.

    Now it's time to tackle the first part of your hands-on spend mapping effort, namely IT staff spend. In this phase you will:

    • Allocate your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validate your mapping to ensure that it's accurate and complete.

    "We're working towards the truth. We know the answer, but it's how to get it. Take Data & BI. For some organizations, four FTEs is too many. Are these people really doing Data & BI? Look at the big picture and see if something's missing."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Staffing costs comprise a significant percent of OpEx

    Staffing is the first thing that comes to mind when it comes to spend. Intentionally bring it out of the shadows to promote constructive conversations.

    • Total staffing costs stand out from other IT spend line items. This is because they're comparatively large, often comprising 30-50% of total IT costs.
    • Standing out comes at a price. Staff costs are where business leadership looks first if they want cuts. If IT leadership doesn't bring forward ways to cut staffing costs as part of a broader cost-cutting mandate, it will be seen as ignorant of business priorities at best and outright insubordinate at worst.
    • Staffing costs as a percentage of total costs vary between IT functions. On the business side, there's a lack of understanding about what functions IT staff serve and support and the real-world costs of obtaining (and keeping) needed IT skills. For example, IT security staffing costs as a percentage of that service's total OpEx will likely be higher than service desk staff given the scarcity and higher market value of the former. Trimming 20% of IT staffing costs from the IT security function has much different implications than cutting 20% of service desk staffing costs.

    Staffing spend transparency can do a lot to change the conversation from one where the business thinks that IT management is just being self-protecting to one where they know that IT management is actually protecting the business.

    Demonstrating the legitimate reasons behind IT staff spend is critical in both rationalizing past and current spend decisions as well as informing future decisions.

    Info-Tech recommends that you map your IT staffing costs before all other IT costs

    Mapping your IT staffing spend first is a good idea because:

    • Staffing costs are usually documented more clearly, simply, and accurately than other IT costs.
    • Gathering all your IT staffing data is usually a one-stop shop (i.e. the HR department).
    • The comparative straightforwardness of mapping staff costs compared to other IT costs gives you the opportunity to:
      • Get familiar with the ITFM Cost Model views and categories.
      • Get the hang of the hands-on mapping process.
      • Determine the kinds of speed bumps and questions you'll encounter down the road when you tackle the more complicated mappings.

    "Some companies will say software developer. Others say application development specialist or engineer. What are these things? You have to have conversations ..."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Understand the CFO Expense View: "Workforce" categories defined

    For the staffing spend mapping exercise, we're defining the Workforce category here and will offer Vendor category definitions in the vendor spend mapping exercise later.

    Workforce: The total costs of employing labor in the IT organization. This includes all salary/wages, benefits, travel/training, dues and memberships, and contractor pay. Managed services expenses associated with an external service provider should be excluded from Workforce and included in Contract Services.

    Employee: A person employed by the IT organization on a permanent full-time or part-time basis. Costs include salary, benefits, training, travel and expenses, and professional dues and memberships. These relationships are managed under human resources and the bulk of spend transactions via payroll processes.

    Contractor: A person serving in a non-permanent staff augmentation role. These relationships are typically managed under procurement or finance and spend transactions handled via invoicing and accounts payable processes. Labor costs associated with an external service provider are excluded.

    CFO Expense View

    Mapping your IT staff across the CFO Expense View is relatively cut-and-dried

    The CFO Expense View is the most straightforward in terms of mapping IT staffing costs as it's made up of only two main categories: Workforce and Vendor.

    In the CFO Expense View, all IT spend on staffing is allocated to the Workforce bucket under either Employee or Contractor.

    What constitutes a Contractor can be confusing given increased use of long-term labor augmentation strategies, so being absolutely clear about this is imperative. For spend mapping purposes:

    • Any staff members under independent contract where individuals are paid directly by your organization as opposed to indirectly via a service provider (e.g. staffing firm) are considered Workforce > Contractor.
    • Any circumstances where you pay a third-party organization for labor is slotted under Vendor > Contract Services.

    CFO Expense View

    Understand the CIO Service View: Categories defined

    We've provided definitions for the major categories that require clarification.

    Applications Development: Purchase/development, testing, and deployment of application projects. Includes internally developed or packaged solutions.

    Applications Maintenance: Software maintenance fees or maintaining current application functionality along with minor enhancements.

    Hosting & Networks: Compute, storage, and network functionality for running/hosting applications and providing communications/connectivity for the organization.

    End User: Procurement, provision, management, and maintenance (break/fix) of end-user devices (desktop, laptops, tablets, peripherals, and phones) as well as purchase/support and use of productivity software on these devices. The IT service desk is included here as well.

    PPM & Projects: People, processes, and technologies dedicated to the management of IT projects and the IT project portfolio as a whole.

    Data & BI: Strategy and oversight of the technology used to support data warehousing, business intelligence, and analytics.

    IT Management: Senior IT leadership, IT finance, IT strategy and governance, enterprise architecture, process management, vendor management, talent management, and program and portfolio management oversight.

    Security: Information security strategy and oversight, practices, procedures, compliance, and risk mitigation to protect and prevent unauthorized access to organizational data and technology assets.

    CIO Service View

    Mapping your IT staff across the CIO Service View is a slightly harder exercise

    The complexity of mapping staff across this view depends on how your IT department is organized and the degree of role specialization vs. generalization.

    The CIO Service View mirrors how many IT departments are organized into teams or work groups. However, some partial percentage-based allocations are probably required, especially for smaller IT units with more generalized, cross-functional roles. For example:

    • A systems administrator's costs may need to be allocated 80% to Hosting & Networks and 20% to Security.
    • An app development team lead may spend about 40% of their time doing hands-on Development work and the other 60% on project management (i.e. PPM & Projects).

    Info-Tech has found that allocating staffing costs for Data & BI raises the most doubts as it can be very entangled with Applications and other spend. Do the best you can.

    Understand the CXO Expense View: Categories defined

    Expand shared services and industry function categories as suits your organization.

    Industry Functions: As listed and defined by you for your specific industry.

    Human Resources: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of organizational human resource management.

    Finance & Accounting: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of corporate finance and accounting.

    Shared Services Other: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of all other shared enterprise functions.

    Information Technology: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of IT performing its own internal IT operations functions.

    Industry Other: IT staff and specific application functionality in support of all other industry-specific functions.

    CXO Expense View

    Mapping your IT staff across the CXO Business View warrants the most time

    This view is probably the most difficult as many IT department roles are set up according to lines of IT service, not lines of business. Prepare to do a little math.

    The CXO Expense View also requires percentage-based splitting of role spend, but to a greater extent.

    • Start by mapping staff cost allocations for those roles that are at, or close to, 100% dedicated to a specific business function (if any).
    • For IT roles that support organization-wide or multi-department functions, knowing the percent of employees that work in each relevant business unit and parceling IT staff spend by those same percentages may be easiest. For example, a general systems administrator's costs could be allocated as 4% to HR, 2% to finance, 25% to sales, 20% to production operations, and so on based on the percentage of employees in each of the supported business units.

    Take a minute to figure out how you plan to map IT's indirect CXO Business View costs

    Direct IT costs are those that are dedicated to a specific business unit or user group, such a marketing campaign management app, specialized devices used by a specific subset of workers in the field, or a business analyst embedded full-time in a sales organization.

    VS

    Indirect IT costs are pretty much everything else that's shared broadly across the organization and can't be tied to just one stakeholder or user group, such as network infrastructure, the service desk, and office productivity apps. These costs must be fairly and evenly distributed.

    No indirect mapping method is perfect, but here's a suggestion:

    • Take the respective headcount of all business functions sharing the IT resource/service in question.
    • Calculate each business function's staff as a percentage of all organizational staff.
    • Use this same percent of staff to calculate and allocate a business function's indirect staff and indirect vendor costs.

    "There is always a conversation about indirect allocations. There's never been an organization I've heard of or worked for which has been able to allocate every technology cost directly to a business consumption or business unit."
    Monica Braun, ITFM Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Example:

    • A company of 560 employees has six HR staff (about 1.1% of total staff).
    • Network admin staffing costs $143,000, so $1,573 (1.1%) would be allocated to HR.
    • Internet services cost $40,000, so $440 (1.1%) would be allocated to HR.

    Some indirect costs are shared by multiple business functions, but not all. In these cases, exclude non-participating business functions from the total number of organizational employees and re-calculate a new percent of staff for each participating business function.

    Know where you're most likely to encounter direct vs. indirect IT staffing costs

    Info-Tech has found that direct vs. indirect staffing spend is more commonly found in some areas than others. Use this insight to focus your work.

    Direct IT staffing spend

    Definition: Individuals or teams whose total time is formally dedicated to the support of one business unit/function.

    • Data & BI (direct to one non-IT unit)
    • IT Management (direct to IT)
      • Service planning & Architecture
      • Strategy & Governance
      • Financial Management
      • People & Resources

    Hybrid IT staffing spend

    Definition: Teams with a percent of time or entire FTEs formally dedicated to one business unit/function while the remainder of the time or team is generalized.

    • Applications
      • Applications Development
      • Applications Maintenance
    • IT Management
      • PPM & Projects

    Indirect IT staffing spend

    Definition: Individuals or teams whose total time is generalized to the support of multiple or all business units or functions.

    • Infrastructure
      • Hosting & Networks
      • End Users
    • Security

    Indirect staff spend only comes into play in the CXO Business View. Thoroughly map the CIO Service View first and leverage its outcomes to inform your allocations to individual business and industry functions.

    Understand the CEO Innovation View: Categories defined

    Be particularly clear on your understanding of the difference between business growth and business innovation.

    Business Innovation: IT spend/ activities focused on the development of new business capability, new products and services, and/or introduction of existing products/ services into new markets. It does not include expansion or update of existing capabilities.

    Business Growth: IT spend/activities focused on the expansion, scaling, or modernization of an existing business capability, product/service, or market. This is specifically related to growth within a current market.

    Keep the Lights On: IT spend/activities focused on keeping the organization running on a day-to-day basis. This includes all activities used to ensure the smooth operation of business functions and overall business continuity.

    CEO Innovation View

    Important Note

    Info-Tech analysts often skip mapping staff for the CEO Innovation View when delivering the IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking Service.

    This is because, for many organizations, either most IT staff spend is allocated to Keep the Lights On or any IT staff allocation to Business Growth and Business Innovation activities is untracked, undocumented, and difficult to parse out.

    Mapping your IT staff across the CEO Innovation View is largely straightforward

    Clear divisions between CapEx and OpEx can be your friend when it comes to mapping this view. Focus your efforts on parsing growth vs. innovation.

    • The majority of IT staff costs are OpEx: And the majority of OpEx will land in the Keep the Lights On category. This is a comparatively simple mapping exercise. Know in advance that this will be the largest of the three buckets in the CEO Innovation View by a very wide margin, so don't be surprised if over 90% of IT staffing costs end up here.
    • Most of the remaining IT staff costs will be tied to capital projects and investments: This means that they will land in either Business Growth or Business Innovation, with the majority typically sitting under Business Growth. Again, don't be surprised if the Business Innovation category holds less than 3% of total IT staffing spend.

    Take your IT staff spend mapping to the next level with detailed time and headcount data

    Overlay a broader assessment of your IT staff

    Info-Tech's IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic can expand your view of what's really happening on the staffing front.

    • Learn your true distribution of IT staff across the same IT services listed in the ITFM Cost Model's CIO Service View.
    • Get other metrics such as degrees of seniority, manager span of control, and IT staff perception of their effectiveness.

    Take action

    1. Set it up: Contact your Info-Tech Account Manager and sign your team up to take the diagnostic.
    2. Assess the findings: Review the output report, specifically how your staff says they spend their time versus what your organization chart's been telling you.
    3. Apply the percentages: Use the FTE allocation percentages in the output report to guide how you distribute your staff spend across the CIO Service View.
    4. Expand your analysis: Use your staff's feedback around perceived aids and obstacles to effectiveness in order to inform and defend your recommendations and decisions on how IT funds should be spent.

    Consider these final tips for mapping your IT staffing costs before diving in

    Mapping your IT staffing costs definitely requires some work. However, knowing the common stumbling blocks and being systematic will yield the best results.

    Approach: Be efficient to be effective

    Start with what you know best: Map the CFO Expense View first to plug in information you already have. Next, map the CIO Service View since it's most aligned to your organization chart.

    Keep a list of questions: You'll need to seek clarifications. Note your questions, but don't reach out until you've done a first pass at the mapping - don't annoy people with a barrage of questions.

    Delegate: Your managers and leads have a more accurate view of exactly what their staff do. Consider delegating the CIO Service View and CXO Business View to them or turn the mapping exercise into a series of collaborative leadership team activities.

    Biggest challenge: Role/title ambiguity

    • The Business Analyst role is often vague. These staffers are often jacks-of-all-trades in IT. You probably can't rely on a generic job description to figure out exactly which services and business functions BAs are spending their time on. Plan to ask a lot of questions.
    • Other role titles may be completely inaccurate. Is the word "system" referring to apps, infrastructure, or both? Is the user experience specialist actually a programmer? Is a manager really managing anything? Know your organization's tendencies around meaningful job titling and set your workload expectations accordingly.

    Key step - validate! If you see services or functions with low or no allocation, or something just doesn't look right, investigate. Someone's doing that work - take the time to figure out who.

    3.1 Map your IT staffing costs

    Duration: Variable

    1. Navigate to tab "4. Staff Spend Mapping" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. On one row, enter the name of an individual or group to be mapped, their role/title (if an individual), and their total known cost as per your collected data.
    2. Under the CFO Expense View (columns F-G), enter the number of FTEs represented by the individual or group named and their status (i.e. Employee or Contractor).
    3. Under the CIO Service View (columns L-AF), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across all service categories. If the allocation for a service is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    4. Under the CXO Business View (columns AI-BA), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across all business function and industry-specific function categories. If the allocation for a function is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    5. Under the CEO Innovation View (columns BD-BH), allocate the individual or group's spend as a percentage across Business Innovation, Business Growth, and Keep the Lights On. If the allocation for an investment type is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all other IT staff (as individuals or groups).
    7. Follow up on and resolve any additional inquiries you need to make based on questions that arose during the mapping process.
    8. Validate your mapping by:
      1. Identifying spend categories that have zero staff spend allocation. Additional percentage allocation splits for certain roles are probably required.
      2. Investigating spend categories that seem to have very high or very low spend allocations based on a gut check. Again, double-check your percentage allocation splits.
      3. Ensuring your amounts add up to your previously calculated total IT staff spend. A balance tracker is provided on tab "6. Tracker & General Outputs" of the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    3.1 Map your staffing costs

    Input Output
    • Cleaned and organized IT staffing data and information
    • Finalized mapping of IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    Materials Participants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management as required

    Phase 3: Map your IT staff spend

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed your IT staff spend mapping. You have:

    • Allocated your IT staff spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validated your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

    "Some want to allocate everybody to IT, but that's not how we do it. [In one CXO Business View mapping], a client allocated all their sand network people to the IT department. At the end of the process, the IT department itself accounted for 20% of total IT spend. We went back and reallocated those indirect staff costs across the business."
    - Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 4

    Map Your IT Vendor Spend

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Mapping your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    • Validating your mapping

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend

    Allocate your vendor costs across the four views.

    Now you're ready to take on the second part of your spend mapping, namely IT vendor spend. In this phase you will:

    • Allocate your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validate your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

    "[One CIO] said that all technology spend runs through their IT group. But they didn't have hardware in their financial data file - no cellphones or laptops, no network or server expenses. They thought they had everything, but they didn't know what they didn't have. Assume it's out there somewhere."
    - Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Tackle the non-staff side of IT spend

    Info-Tech analysts find that mapping the IT vendor spend data is harder because the source data is often scattered and not meaningfully labeled.

    • Be patient and systematic. As with mapping your IT staff spend data, the more organized you are from the outset and the more thoroughly you've prepared your data, the more straightforward the exercise will be.
      • Did you "un-unique" your data? If not, do that now before attempting mapping.
    • Get comfortable with making some assumptions. You need to get through the exercise, so sometimes making a best guess and entering a value is better than diving down a rabbit hole. Your gut is probably right anyway. But only make assumptions around smaller line items that don't have a massive impact on your final numbers. Never assume anything when it comes to big-ticket items.
    • Curb your urge to fix. Some of your buckets will start to get big, while others will barely budge. This is normal ... and interesting! Resist the urge to "balance" staffing spend in a bucket by loading it with apps and hardware for fear that the staffing spend looks too high and will be questioned. This exercise is about how things are, not how they look.

    "A common financial data problem is no vendor names. I've noticed that, even if the vendor name is there, there are no descriptors. You cannot actually tell what type of service it is. Data security? Infrastructure? Networking? Ask yourself 'What did we purchase and what does it do?'"
    - Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Understand the CFO Expense View: Vendor categories defined

    These are the final definitions for this view. See the previous section for CFO Expense View > Workforce definitions used in the IT staffing cost mapping exercise.

    Vendor: Provider of a good or service in exchange for payment.

    Hardware: Costs of procuring, maintaining, and managing all IT hardware, including end-user devices, data center and networking equipment, cabling, and hybrid appliances for both on-premises and cloud-based providers.

    Software: Costs for all software (applications, database, middleware, utilities, tools) used across the organization. This includes purchase, maintenance, and licensing costs.

    Contract Services: Costs for all third-party services including managed service providers, consultants, and advisory services.

    Cloud: Offsite hosting and delivery of an on-demand software or hardware computing function by a third-party provider, often on a subscription-type basis.

    On-Prem: On-site hosting and delivery of a software or hardware computing function, often requiring upfront purchase cost and subsequent maintenance costs.

    Managed Services: Costs for outsourcing the provision and maintenance of a technical process or function.

    Consulting & Advisory: Costs for the third-party provision of professional or technical advice and expertise.

    CFO Expense View

    Know if a technology is cloud-based or on-premises before mapping

    A technology may be one, the other, or both if multiple versions are in play. Financial records rarely indicate which, but on-premises vs. cloud matters in your planning.

    On-Premises

    • Check your CapEx. Any net-new purchases of software or hardware for the IT spend analysis year in question should appear on the CapEx side of the equation. After the first year of implementation/rollout, all ongoing maintenance and management costs should be found under OpEx.
    • Focus on real in-year costs.
      • Don't try to map depreciation or amortization associated with CapEX. Instead, map any upfront purchase costs that occurred in the relevant IT spend analysis year.
      • Map any OpEX costs incurred from maintenance and management. For multi-year maintenance contracts, apply the percentage of fees paid for the relevant year.

    Cloud

    • Check your OpEx. Cloud services are typically fee-based, which means the costs often come in the form of regularly timed bills akin to a subscription.
    • Differentiate new services from older ones. If the cloud service was initiated during the IT spend analysis year in question, there may be some one-time service setup and initiation fees that were legitimately slotted under CapEx. If the cloud service isn't new, then all costs should be OpEx.

    Vendors are increasingly "retiring" on-premises software products. This means an older version may be on-prem, a newer one cloud, and you may have both in play.

    Mapping built-in data, analytics, and security functions can raise doubts

    With so many apps focused on capturing, manipulating, and protecting data, built-in analytics, reporting, and security functions blur CIO Service View bucket boundaries.

    Applications vs. Data & BI

    • In recent years, much more powerful analysis and report-generation features have been added to core enterprise applications. If analytics and reporting functionality is an extended feature of a database-driven application, such as ERP or CRM, then map it to one of the Applications buckets.
    • If the sole purpose of the application is to store, manipulate, query, analyze, and/or visualize data, then log its costs under Data & BI. These would include technologies such as data warehouses, marts, cubes, and lakes; desktop data visualization tools; enterprise business intelligence platforms; and specialized reporting tools.

    Applications vs. Security

    • A similar conundrum exists for Security. So many tools today have built-in security functionality that cannot be unintegrated from the app they support. Don't even try to isolate native security functionality for spend mapping purposes - map it to Applications.
    • If the tool is a special-purpose, standalone security tool or security platform, then map it to Security. These tools usually sit within, and are used/managed by, IT. They include firewalls; antivirus/anti-malware; intrusion prevention, detection and response; access control and authentication; encryption; and penetration testing and vulnerability assessment.

    Putting spend in the right bucket does matter. However, if uncertainty persists, err on the side of consistency. For most organizations Applications Maintenance does end up being the biggest bucket.

    When mapping the CXO Business View, do the biggest vendors first

    Below is a suggested order of operations to clear through the majority of vendor spend as early as possible in the process.

    1 Sort high to low Sort your list of vendor spend from highest to lowest. Your top 20 vendors should constitute most of the spend.
    2 Map multi-department enterprise apps Flag your top apps vendors that have presence in most or all of your business units. Map these first. These tend to be enterprise-level business apps "owned" by core business functions but used broadly across the organization such as enterprise resource planning (ERP), customer relationship management (CRM), and people management systems.
    3 Map end-user spend Identify top vendors of general end-user technologies like office productivity apps, desktop hardware, and IT service desk tools. Allocate percentages according to your selected indirect spend mapping method.
    4 Map core infrastructure spend Map the behind-the-scenes network, telecom, and data center technologies that underpin IT, plus any infrastructure managed services. Again, apply your selected indirect spend mapping method.
    5 Map business-unit specific technologies This is the spend that's often incurred by just one department. This may also be technology spend that's out in the business, not in IT proper. Map it to the right business function or put it in Business Other or Industry Other if the business function doesn't have its own bucket.
    6 Map the miscellaneous Only smaller spend items likely remain at this point. When in doubt, map them to either Business Other or Industry Other.

    After mapping the CXO Business View, your Other buckets might be getting a bit big

    It's common for the Business Other and Industry Other categories to be quite large, and even the largest. This is okay, but plan to dig deeper and understand why.

    Remember "when in doubt, map to either the Business Other or Industry Other category"? Know what large Other buckets might really be telling you. After your first pass at mapping the CXO Business View, review Business Other and Industry Other if either is more than about 10% of your total spend.
    Diversification: Your organization has a wide array of business functions and/or associated staff that exist outside the core business and industry-specific categories selected. Are there minor business functions that can reasonably be included with the core categories identified? If not, don't force it. Better to keep your core buckets clean and uncomplicated.
    Non-core monolith: There's a significant technology installation outside the core that's associated with a comparatively minor business function. Is there a business function incurring substantial technology spend that should probably be broken out on its own and added to the core? If so, do it. Spend is unlikely to get smaller as the organization grows, so best to shine a light on it now.
    Shadow IT: There's significant technology spend in several areas of the organization that is unowned, unmanaged, or serving an unknown purpose as far as IT is concerned. Is a lot of the spend non-IT technology in the business? If yes, flag it and plan to learn more. It's likely that technologies living elsewhere in the organization will become IT concerns eventually. Better to be ready than to be surprised.

    As with staffing, CapEx vs. OpEx helps map the CEO Innovation View

    Mapping to this view was optional for IT staffing. For hard technology vendor spend, mapping this view is key. Use the guidance below to determine what goes where.

    Keep the Lights On
    Spend usually triggered by a service deck ticket or work order, not a formal project. Includes:

    • Daily maintenance and management.
    • Repair or upgrade of existing technology to preserve business function/continuity.
    • Purchase of "commodity" technology, such as standard-issue laptops and licenses for office productivity software.

    Business Growth
    Spend usually in the context of a formal project under a CapEx umbrella. Includes:

    • Technology spend that directly supports business expansion of an existing product or service and/or market.
    • Modernizing existing technology.
    • Extension of, or investment in, existing infrastructure to ensure reliability and availability in response to growth-driven scaling of headcount and utilization.

    Business Innovation
    Spend is always in the context of a formal project and should be 100% CapEx in the first year after purchase. Includes:

    • Technology spend that directly supports development and rollout of new products or service and/or entry into new markets.
    • Use of existing technology or investment in net-new technology in direct support of a new business initiative, direction, or requirement.

    In many organizations, most technology spend will be allocated to Keep the Lights On. This is normal but should generate conversations with the business about redirecting funds to growth and innovation.

    Remember these top tips when mapping your technology vendor spend

    The benefits of having tidy and organized data can't be overstated, as your source data will be in a more varied state for this phase of the mapping than with IT staffing data.

    Approach: Move from macro to micro

    • Start with the big enterprise apps: These will probably be in the top five of your vendor spend list and will likely have good info about how and by whom they're used. Get them out of the way.
    • Clear out shared technologies. This will feature infrastructure and operations plus office productivity and communications spend. Portioning spend by department headcount for the CXO Business View is the hardest part. Get this forklift task out of the way too.
    • Don't sweat the small stuff. Wasting hours chasing the details of a $500 line item isn't worth it when you have five-, six-, or even seven-figure line items to map.

    Biggest challenge: Poor vendor labeling

    • Vendor labels are often an inconsistent mess or missing entirely. Standardize and apply consistent vendor labels throughout your data so that you can aggregate your data into a workable form.
    • Spend transactions with the same vendor can be scattered all over the place in your general ledger. Take the time to "un-unique" your data to save yourself tremendous grief later on.
    • Start new go-forward labeling habits. Talk to finance about your new list of vendor naming standards and tagging spend as on-prem or cloud. Getting their cooperation with these are major wins.

    Key step - validate! If you see services or functions with low or no allocation, or something just doesn't look right, investigate. There's probably a technology out there in the business doing that work.

    4.1 Map your IT vendor spend

    Duration: Variable

    1. Navigate to tab "5. Vendor Spend Mapping" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. On one row, enter a spend line item (vendor, product, etc.), a brief description, and the known amount of spend.
    2. Under the CFO Expense View (columns F-P), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all asset-class categories. If the allocation for a line item is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    3. Under the CIO Service View (columns S-AM), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all service categories. If the allocation for a service is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    4. Under the CXO Business View (columns AP-BH), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across all business function and industry-specific function categories. If the allocation for a function is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    5. Under the CEO Innovation View (columns BK-BO), allocate the line item's spend as a percentage across Business Innovation, Business Growth, and Keep the Lights On. If the allocation for an investment type is 0%, leave the cell blank.
    6. Repeat steps 2-5 for all spend line items.
    7. Follow up on and resolve any additional inquiries you need to make based on questions that arose during the mapping process.
    8. Validate your mapping by:
      1. Ensuring your amounts add up to your previously calculated total IT vendor spend. A balance tracker is provided on tab "6. Tracker & General Outputs" of the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.
      2. Identifying spend categories that have zero spend allocation. Additional percentage allocation splits for certain line items are probably required.
      3. Investigating spend categories that seem to have very high or very low spend allocations based on a gut check. Again, double-check your percentage allocation splits.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    4.1 Map your IT vendor spend

    InputOutput
    • Cleaned and organized IT vendor spend data and information
    • Finalized mapping of IT vendor spend across the four views of the IT Cost Model
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management as required

    Phase 4: Map your IT vendor spend

    Achievement summary

    You've now completed your IT vendor spend mapping. You have:

    • Allocated your IT vendor spend across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model.
    • Validated your mapping to ensure it's accurate and complete.

    "A lot of organizations log their spending by vendor name with no description of the goods or services they actually purchased from the vendor. It could be hardware, software, consulting services ... anything. Having a clear understanding of what's really in there is an essential aspect of the spend conversation."
    - Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase 5

    Identify Implications for IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing the results of your IT staff and vendor spend mapping across the four views of the ITFM Cost Model
    • Preparing an executive presentation of your transparent IT spend

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other members of IT management

    Phase 5: Identify implications for IT

    Analyze and communicate.

    You're now nearing the end of the first leg in your IT spend transparency journey. In this phase you will:

    • Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping process.
    • Revisit your transparency objectives.
    • Prepare an executive presentation so you can share findings with other leaders in your organization.

    "Don't plug in numbers just to make yourself look good or please someone else. The only way to improve is to look at real life."
    - Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    You've mapped your IT spend data. Now what?

    With mapped data in hand, now you can start to tell IT's spend story with stakeholders in the business.

    Mapping your IT spend is a lot of work, but what you've achieved is impressive (applause!) as well as essential for growing your ITFM maturity. Now put your hard work to work.

    • Consider benchmarking. While not covered in-depth here, benchmarking against yourself in a year-over-year approach as well as against external industry peers are very useful exercises in your technology spend analysis.
    • Review your numbers and graphs. Your IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook contains a series of data visualizations that will help you see the big picture as well as relationships between spend categories.
    • Note the very big numbers, the very small numbers, and the things that just look odd. You'll want to investigate and understand these further.
    • Prepare to communicate. Facilitating conversations with stakeholders in the business is the immediate objective of the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise. Decide where and with whom you want to start dialogue.

    The slides that follow show sample data summaries and visualizations generated in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. We'll take a look at the metrics, tables, and graphs you now have available to you post-mapping and how you can potentially use them in conversations with different IT stakeholders.

    Evaluate how you might use benchmarks before diving into your analysis

    Benchmarking can be a useful input for contextualizing and interpreting your IT spend data. It's not essential at this point but should be part of your ITFM toolkit.

    There are two basic types of benchmarking ...

    Internal: Capturing a current-state set of data about an in-house operation to serve as a baseline. Over time, snapshots of the same data are taken and compared to the baseline to track and assess changes. Common uses for internal benchmarking include:

    • Assessing the impact of a project or initiative.
    • Measuring year-over-year performance.

    External: Seeking out aggregated, current-state data about a peer-group operation to assess your own relative status or performance on the same operation. Common uses for external benchmarking include:

    • Understanding common practices in the industry.
    • Strategic and operational visioning, planning, and goal-setting.
    • Putting together a business case for change or investment.

    Both types of benchmarking benefit from some formality and rigor. Info-Tech can help you stand up an ITFM benchmarking approach as well as connect you with actual IT spend peer benchmarks via our IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service.

    5.1 Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping

    Duration: Variable

    1. Review the guidance slides that follow the two instruction slides for this exercise to provide yourself with a grounding on how to interpret and analyze your mapped IT staff and vendor spend data.
    2. Systematically review the data tables and graphs on the "Outputs" tabs 6 through 10 in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook. There are several approaches you can take - use the one that works best for you. For example:
      1. Review each view in its entirety, one at a time.
      2. Review all workforce spend collectively across all four views, followed by all vendor spend across all four views (or vice versa).
    3. Make note of any spend values that are comparatively high or low or strike you as odd or worth further investigation.
    4. Craft a series of spend-related questions you want to answer for yourself and your stakeholders using the data.
      1. For example, you need to cut costs and apps maintenance is high. Your question could be, "Can we cut costs on applications maintenance staffing?"
      2. Alternatively, you can develop a series of statements (research hypotheses) that you seek to prove true or false with the data. This approach is useful for testing assumptions you've been making. For example, "We can cut spending on applications maintenance staff. True or false?"
    5. Use the template provided on tab "11. Data Analysis" in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook to document your findings and conclusions, along with the data that supports them.

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook

    5.1 Analyze the results of your IT spend mapping

    InputOutput
    • Tabular and graphical data outputs
    • Conclusions and potential actions about IT staff and vendor spend
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Head of IT
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management as required

    High-level findings: Use these IT spend metrics to review and set big picture goals

    Think of these metrics as key anchors in your long-term strategic planning efforts.

    Use IT spend metrics to review and set big goals

    It's common for the business to want a sacrifice in IT OpEx in favor of CapEx

    CapEx and OpEx approval mechanisms are often entirely separate. Different tax treatment for CapEx means that it's usually preferred by the business over OpEx.

    OpEx is often seen as a sunk cost (i.e. an IT problem).

    • Barring a major decision or event, OpEx on an individual item will generally trend upward over time, often by a few percent every year, in lockstep with inflation and growth in organizational headcount.
    • A good portion of OpEx, however, is necessary for basic business continuity.

    CapEx is usually seen as investment (i.e. a business growth opportunity).

    • CapEx behaves quite differently than OpEx. On-the-books capitalized spend on an individual asset tends to trend downward over time due to depreciation or amortization.
    • CapEx only tends to go up when a net-new capital project is initiated, and organizations often have more control over if, when, and how this spend happens.

    Break down the OpEx/CapEx wall. Reference OpEx whenever you talk about CapEx. The best way to do this is via Total Cost of Ownership (TCO).

    • Present data on long-term OpEx projections whenever a new capital project is proposed and ensure ongoing maintenance funds are secured.
    • Educate your CFO about the impact of the cloud on OpEx. See if internal OpEx/CapEx ratio expectations can be adjusted to reflect this reality.

    Spend by asset class offers the CFO a visual illustration of where the money's really gone

    The major spend categories should look very familiar to your CFO. It's the minor sub-categories that sit underneath where you ultimately want to drive the conversation.

    Traditional categories don't reflect IT reality anymore.

    • Most finance departments have "software" accounts that contain apples and oranges, plus other dissimilar fruit.
    • Software isn't just software anymore. Now it's on-premises (CapEx) or cloud (OpEx). The same distinction applies to traditional hardware due to the advent of managed services.
    • The basic categories traditionally used to tag IT spend are out of date. This makes it hard for IT to have meaningful conversations with the CFO since they're not working from the same glossary.

    "Software (on-premises)" and "hardware (cloud)" are more meaningful descriptors than "software" and "hardware." Shift the dialogue.

    Start the migration from major categories to minor categories.

    • Still give the CFO the traditional major categories they're looking for but start including minor category breakdowns into your communications. Most importantly, have a meeting to explain what these minor categories are and why they're important to managing IT effectively.
    • Next, see if the CFO can formally split on-premises vs. cloud software on the books as a first step in making IT spend tracking more meaningful.

    Employees vs. contractors warrants a specific conversation, plus a change in mindset

    IT leaders often find it easier to get approval for contracted labor than to hire a permanent employee. However, the true value proposition for contractors does vary.

    The decision to go with permanent employees or contractors depends on your ultimate goals.

    • Contractors tend to be less expensive and provide more flexibility when adjusting to changing business needs. However, contractors may be less dedicated and take their skills and knowledge with them when they leave.
    • Permanent employees bring additional costs like benefits and training. Plus, letting them go is a lot more complicated. However, they can also bring real value in a way a contractor can't when it comes to sustaining long-term strategic growth. They're assets in themselves.

    Far too often, labor-sourcing decisions are driven by controlling near-term costs instead of generating and sustaining long-term value.

    Introduce the cost-to-value ratio to your workforce spend conversations.

    • Your mapped data will allow you to talk about comparative headcount and spend. This is a financial conversation devoid of context.
    • Go beyond. Show how workforce spend has allowed stated goals to be achieved while controlling for costs. This is the true definition of value.

    CFO Expense View: Shift the ITFM conversation

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CFO Expense View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • How should I classify my IT costs?
    • What information should I include in my plans and reports?
    • How do I justify current spend?
    • How do I justify a budget increase?

    You now have:

    • A starting point for educating the CFO about IT spend realities.
    • A foundation for creating a shared glossary of terms that works for both IT and the finance department and facilitates more meaningful conversations.
    • Proof that there are major areas of IT spend, such as cloud software, that are distinctive and probably warrant their own financial category in the general ledger.
    • A transparent record of IT spend that shows that you understand and care about financial issues, fostering the goodwill and trust that facilitates investment in IT.
    • A starting point to change the ITFM conversation with the CFO from one focused on cost to one focused on value.

    Exactly how is IT spending all that money we give them?

    Exactly like this ...

    Chart of the CFO Expense View

    The CIO Service View aligns with how IT organizes and manages itself – this is your view

    The data mapped here is a critical input for IT's service planning and management program and should be integrated into your IT performance measurement activities.

    Major service categories: These values give a high-level snapshot of your general IT service spend priorities. In most organizations, Applications dominates, making it a focus for cost optimization.

    Minor service categories: The level of granularity for these values prove more practical when measuring performance and making service management decisions - not too big, not too small. While not reflected in this example, application maintenance is usually the largest relative consumer of IT spend in most organizations.

    Data & BI and security: Isolating the exact spend for these services is challenging given that they're often entangled in applications and infrastructure spend respectively, and separate spend tracking for both is a comparatively recent practice.

    Table of CIO Service View

    Check the alignment of individual service spend against known business objectives

    Some IT services are taken for granted by the business, while others are virtually invisible. This lack of visibility often translates into funding misalignments.

    Is the amount of spend on a given service in parallel with the service's overall importance?

    • Though often unstated, ensuring continuity of basic business operations is always the top priority. This means business apps, core infrastructure, end users, and security need to be appropriately funded - these should collectively comprise the majority of IT service spend.
    • Strategy-supporting IT services, like data & BI, see high investment variability between organizations. If its strategic role/importance doesn't align with spend, flag it as an issue you'll need to reconcile with the business by increasing funding (important) or reducing service levels (unimportant).
    • The strategic importance of IT as a whole is often reflected in the spend on IT management services. If spend is low, IT's probably seen as a support function, not a strategic one.

    Identify the hot spots and pick your battles.

    • Spend levels are just approximate gauges of where and how the business is willing to spend its money. Start with this simple gut check.
    • Noting the areas of importance vs. spend misalignment will help you identify where negotiations with the business should probably happen.

    A mature IT cost optimization practice is often approached from the service perspective

    When optimizing IT costs, you have two OpEx levers to pull - vendor spend and staff spend. Isolating these two sources of IT service spend will help shortlist your options.

    It's all about how much room you have to move.

    • Any decision made about how a service is provisioned will push vendor and staff spend in clear, predictable, and often opposite directions (e.g. in-house and people-intensive services tend to see higher staff spend, while outsourced and tech-intensive services higher vendor spend).
    • Service levels required by the business should be the driving factor behind service design and spend decisions. High service spend may reflect priority but may also indicate it's over-built and is ripe for a cost-optimization treatment.
    • Service spend is a useful barometer for tracking the financial impact of any changes made to IT. Add simple unit-cost metrics like "service spend per organizational employee" and "service spend per FTE assigned to the service" to see if and how the dial has moved over time.

    Grow your IT service management practice.

    • The real power of the CIO Service View is laying the groundwork for next-level IT service management initiatives like developing a service catalog, negotiating service-level agreements, rolling out chargeback and showback mechanisms, and calculating IT's value to the business.
    • Use service spend as a common denominator for both your IT service management and IT performance management programs. Better yet, integrate the two programs to ensure a single version of the truth.

    CIO Service View: Optimize your cost-to-value ratio

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CIO Service View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • What's the impact of cloud adoption on speed of delivery?
    • Where can I improve spend efficiency?
    • Is my support model optimized?
    • How does our spend compare to others?

    You now have:

    • Data that shows the financial impact of change decisions on service costs.
    • Insight into the relationship between vendor spend and staff spend within a given IT service.
    • The information you need to start developing service unit costing mechanisms.
    • A tool for setting and right-sizing service-level agreements with the business.
    • A more focused starting point for investigating IT cost-optimization opportunities.
    • A baseline for benchmarking common IT services against your peers.

    Does the amount we spend on each IT service make sense?

    We have some good opportunities for optimization ...

    Chart of CIO Service View

    The CXO Business View will spur conversations that may have never happened before

    This view is a potential game changer as previously unknown technology spend is often revealed, triggering change in IT's relationship with business unit leaders.

    Table of CXO Business View

    The big beneficiaries of IT spend will leap out

    The CXO Business View mapping does have a "shock and awe" quality to it given large spend disparities. They may be totally legitimate, but they're still eye-catching.

    Share information, don't push recommendations.

    • Have a series of one-on-one meetings with business unit leaders to present these numbers.
      • Approach initial meetings as information-sharing sessions only. The data is probably new to them, and they'll need time to reflect and ask questions.
      • Bring a list of the big-ticket spend items for that business unit to focus the conversation.
    • Present these numbers at a broader leadership meeting.
      • It's critical for everyone to hear the same truth and learn about each other's technology needs and uses.
      • This is where recommendations for better aligning IT spend with business goals and cost-optimization strategies should surface. A group approach will bring technology haves and have-nots into the open, as well as provide a forum for collaborative solutioning.

    If possible, slice the numbers by business unit headcount.

    • IT spend per business unit employee is an attention-getting metric that can help gain entry to important conversations.
    • Comparing per-employee spend across different business functions is not necessarily an apples-to-apples comparison, as units like HR may have few employees but serve the entire organization. Bring up these kinds of differences to provide context and avoid misinterpretations.

    Questions will arise in how you calculated and allocated indirect IT spend

    IT spend for things like core infrastructure and end-user services must be distributed fairly across multiple or all business units. Be prepared to explain your methods.

    Be transparent in your transparency.

    • Distributing indirect spend is imprecise by nature. You can't account for every unique circumstance. However, you can devise a logic-driven, general approach that's defensible, fair, and works for most people most of the time.
    • Lay out your assumptions from the start. This is an important part of communicating transparently and can prevent unwanted descent into weedy rabbit holes.
      • List what you classified as indirect spend. Use the CFO Expense View and/or CIO Service View categories to aid your presentation of this information.
      • Point out known circumstances that didn't fit your general allocation method and how you handled them. Opting to ignore minor anomalies is reasonable but be sure to tell business unit leaders you did this and why.

    Use questions about indirect IT staff spend distribution to engage stakeholders.

    • As a percentage, the indirect IT staff spend allocation to a specific business unit may be higher than that for IT vendor spend since IT staff tend to operate more generally than the technologies they support.
    • Leverage any pushback about indirect spend as an opportunity to engage the broader business leadership group. Let them arrive at a consensus of how they want it done and confirm buy-in.

    CXO Business View: Bring the truth to light

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CXO Business View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • Which business units consume the most IT resources?
    • Which business units are underserved by IT?
    • How do I best communicate spend data internally?
    • Where do I need better business sponsorship for IT projects?

    You now have:

    • A reason-based accounting of direct and indirect amounts spent on IT vendors and staff in support of each major business unit.
    • Insight into the technology haves and have-nots in your organization and where opportunities to optimize costs may exist.
    • Attention-getting numbers that will help you engage business-unit leaders in meaningful conversations about their use of IT resources and the value they receive.
    • A mechanism to assess if a business unit's consumption of IT is appropriate and aligned with its purpose and mandate in the organization.
    • A list of previously unknown business-side technologies that IT will investigate further.

    Why doesn't my business unit get more support from IT?

    Let's look at how you compare to the other departments ...

    Chart of the CXO Business View

    From the CEO's high-level perspective, IT spend is a collection of distinct financial islands

    From IT's perspective, these islands are intimately connected, with events on one affecting what happens (or doesn't) on another. Focus on the bridges.

    Table of CEO High-level Perspective

    Focus more on unifying the view of technology spend than on the numbers

    When talking to the CEO, seek to build mutual understanding and encourage a holistic approach to the organization's technology spend.

    Use the numbers to get to the real issues.

    • Clarify with the CEO what business innovation, business growth, and KTLO means to them and the role each plays in the organization's strategic and operational plans.
    • Find out the role they think IT, and technology as a whole, has in realizing business plans. Only then can you look at the relative allocation of IT spend with them to see if the aspiration aligns with reality.
    • Eventually, you'll need to discuss expectations around who pays the bills for operationally supporting capital technology investments over the long-term (i.e. IT or the business units that actually want and use it). You'll have concrete examples of business projects that consumed IT operations resources without a corresponding increase in IT's OpEx budget.

    Focus your KTLO spend conversation on risk and trade-off.

    • Every strategic conversation needs to look at the impact on ongoing operations. Every discussion about CapEx needs to investigate the long-term repercussions for OpEx. Look at the whole tech spend picture.
    • Use risk to get KTLO/OpEx into the conversation. Be straightforward (i.e. "If we do/don't do this, then we can/can't do that"). Simply put, mitigating the risks that get in the way of having it all usually requires spending.

    CEO Innovation View: Learn what's really expected of IT

    Now that you've mapped your IT spend data to the CEO Innovation View, there are some questions you're better equipped to answer, namely:

    • Why is KTLO spend so high?
    • What should our operational spend priorities be?
    • Which projects and investments should we prioritize?
    • Are we spending enough on innovative initiatives?

    You now have:

    • A holistic, organization-wide view of total technology spend in support of different investment types, namely business innovation, business growth, and keeping things up and running.
    • Data-driven examples that prove the impact of near-term capital spend on long-term operational expenses and the intimate relationship between the two types of spend.
    • A way to measure the degree of alignment between the innovation and growth goals the organization has and how money is actually being spent to realize those goals.
    • A platform to discuss how technology investment decision-making and governance can work better to realize organizational mandates and goals.

    I know what IT costs us, but what is it really worth?

    Here's how tech spend directly supports business objectives ...

    Chart of CEO Innovation View

    Revisit your IT spend transparency objectives before crafting your executive presentation

    Go back to exercise 1.1 to remind yourself why you undertook this effort in the first place, clear your head of all that data, and refocus on the big picture.

    Review the real problems and issues you need to address and the key stakeholders.
    This will guide what data you focus on or showcase with other business leaders. For example, if IT OpEx is perceived as high, be prepared to examine the CapEx/OpEx ratio as well as cloud-related spend's impact on OpEx.

    Flag ITFM processes you'll develop as part of your ITFM maturity improvement plan.
    You won't become a TCO math expert overnight, but being able to communicate your awareness of and commitment to developing and applying ITFM capabilities helps build confidence in you and the information you're presenting.

    Use your first big presentation to debut ITFM.
    ITFM as a formal practice and the changes you hope to make may be a novel concept for your business peers. Use your newfound IT spend and staffing transparency to gently wade into the topic instead of going for the deep dive.

    Now it's time to present your transparent IT spend and staffing data to your executive

    Pull out of analysis mode. You're starting to tell the IT spend story, and this is just the first chapter. Introduce your cast of characters and pique your audience's interest.

    The goal of this first presentation is to showcase IT spend in general and make sure that everyone's getting the same information as everyone else.

    Go broad, not deep
    Defer any in-depth examinations until after you're sure you have everyone's attention. Only dive deep when you're ready to talk about specific plans via follow-up sessions.

    Focus on the CXO
    Given your audience, the CXO Business View may be the most interesting for them and will trigger the most questions and discussion. Plan to spend the largest chunk of your time here.

    Avoid judgment
    Let the numbers speak for themselves. Do point out what's high and what's low, but don't offer your opinion about whether it's good or bad. Let your audience draw their own conclusions.

    Ask for impressions
    Education and awareness are primary objectives. What comes up will give a good indication of what's known, what's news, who's interested, and where there's work to do.

    Pick a starting point
    Ask what they see as high-priority areas for both optimizing IT costs as well as improving the organization's approach to making IT spend decisions in general.

    What to include in your presentation ...

    • Purpose: Why you did the IT spend and staffing transparency exercise.
    • Method: The models and processes you used to map the data.
    • Data: Charts from the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook.
    • Feedback: Space for your audience to voice their thoughts.
    • Next steps: Discussion and summary of actions to come.

    5.2 Develop an executive presentation

    Duration: Two hours

    1. Download the IT Staff & Spend Executive Presentation Template.
    2. Copy and paste the IT spend output tables and graphs into the template. (Note: Pasting as an image will preserve formatting.)
    3. Incorporate observations and insights about your analysis of your IT spend metrics.
    4. Conduct an internal review of the final presentation to ensure it includes all the elements you need and is error free.
    5. Book time to make your presentation to the executive team. Plan time after the presentation to field questions, engage in follow-up information sessions, and act on feedback.

    Note: Refer to your organization's standards and norms for executive-level presentations and either adapt the Info-Tech template accordingly or use your own.

    Input Output
    • Tabular and graphical data outputs in the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • Executive presentation summarizing your organization's actual IT spend
    Materials Participants
    • IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Workbook
    • IT Staff & Spend Executive Presentation Template
    • CIO/IT directors
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management

    Download the IT Spend & Staffing Transparency Executive Presentation TemplateTemplate

    Phase 5: Identify implications for IT

    Achievement summary

    You've done the hard part in starting your IT spend transparency journey. You have:

    • Analyzed the results of your IT spend mapping process.
    • Revisited your transparency objectives.
    • Prepared an executive presentation so you can share findings with other leaders in your organization.

    "Having internal conversations, especially if there is doubt, allows for accuracy and confidence in your model. I was showing someone the cost of a service he managed. He didn't believe the service was so expensive. We went through it: here are the people we allocated, the assets we allocated, and the software we allocated. It was right - that was the total cost. He was like, 'No way. Wow.' The costs were high, and the transparency is what allowed for a conversation on cost optimization."
    - Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group

    Next Steps

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency

    This final section will provide you with:

    • An overall summary of accomplishment
    • Recommended next steps
    • A list of contributors to this research
    • Some related Info-Tech resources to help you grow your ITFM practice

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Congratulations! You now have a fully transparent view of your IT spend.

    You've now mapped the entirety of technology spend in your organization. You've:

    1. Learned the key sources of spend data and information in your organization.
    2. Set some standards for data organization and labeling.
    3. Have a methodology for continuing to track and document spend in a transparent way.
    4. Crafted an executive presentation that's a first step in having more meaningful and constructive conversations about IT spend with your key stakeholders.

    What's next?

    With a reliable baseline, you can look forward to more informed and defensible IT budgeting and cost optimization. Use your newly-transparent IT spend as a foundation for improving your financial data hygiene in the near term and evolving your overall ITFM governance maturity in the long-term.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech full-service engagement or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice

    Monica Braun
    Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Dave Kish, Practice Lead, ITFM Practice

    Dave Kish
    Practice Lead, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kennedy Confurius, Research Analyst, ITFM Practice

    Kennedy Confurius
    Research Analyst, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice

    Aman Kumari
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice

    Rex Ding
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice

    Angie Reynolds
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    • Cost optimization often doesn't go beyond the cutting part, but cutting costs isn't strategic - it's reactive and can easily result in mistakes.
    • True cost optimization is much more than this. Re-focus your efforts on optimizing your cost-to-value ratio and implementing a sustainable cost-optimization practice.

    Build an IT Budget

    • Budgetary approval is difficult because finance executives have a limited understanding of IT and use a different vocabulary.
    • Detailed budgets must be constructed in a way that is transparent but at a level of appropriate detail in order to limit complexity and confusion.

    Manage an IT Budget

    • No one likes to be over budget, but being under budget isn't necessarily good either.
    • Implement a budget management process that documents your planned budget and actual expenditures, tracks variances, and responds to those variances to stay on track.
    • Control for under- or overspending using Info Tech's budget management tool and tactics.

    APPENDIX

    Sample shared business services

    Sample industry-specific business services

    Sample shared business functions

    Business function Definition
    Human Resources The management of the recruitment, training, development, appraisal, compensation/reward, retention, and departure of employees in an organization. Does not include management of subcontractor or outsourced relationships.
    Finance and Accounting The management and analysis of an organization's revenue, funds, spend, investments, financial transactions, accounts, and financial statements. Often includes enterprise asset management.
    Procurement and Supplier Management Acquiring materials, goods, and services from an external party, including identifying potential suppliers/providers, managing tendering or bidding processes, negotiating terms and agreements, and managing the relationship with the vendor/provider.
    Information Technology The development, management, and optimization of information technology resources and systems over their lifecycle in support of an organization's work priorities and goals. Includes computer-based information and communication systems, but typically excludes industrial operational technologies.
    Legal Expertise in interpretation, implication, and application of legislation and regulation that affects the enterprise, including guidance and support in the areas of risk, contracting, compliance, ownership, and litigation.
    Regulatory Affairs and Compliance Management Identification, operationalization, monitoring, reporting, and enforcement of the standards, rules, codes, and laws that apply to an organization's operating environment and the products and services it offers.
    Sales Transactional provision of a product or service to a buyer at an agreed-upon price. Includes identifying and developing prospective buyers, presenting and explaining the product/service, overcoming prospect objections and concerns to purchase, negotiating terms, developing contracts, and billing or invoicing.
    Customer Service and Support A range of activities designed to optimize the customer experience with an organization and its products and services throughout the customer lifecycle with the goals of retaining the customer; encouraging additional spend or consumption; the customer positively influencing other potential customers; and minimizing financial and reputational business risks.
    Marketing and Advertising Understanding customer/prospect needs, developing strategies to meet those needs, and promotion of the organization's products/services to a target market via a range of channels to maximize revenue, membership, donations, and/or develop the organization's brand or reputation. Includes market research and analysis and promotion, campaign, and brand management.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Supply chain and capital-intensive industries.

    Industry function Definition
    Product Innovation Research, design, development, and launch of new products, including the engineering of their underlying production processes.
    Product and Service Portfolio Management The management of an organization's collection of products and services, including management of the product/service roadmap; product/service portfolio and catalog; product/service quality and performance; and product/service pricing, bundling and markdown.
    Logistics and Supply Chain Management Sourcing raw materials or component parts needed and shipping of a finished product. Includes demand planning; procurement/supplier management; inventory management; yard management; allocation management; fulfillment and replenishment; and product distribution and delivery.
    Production Operations Manufacture, storage, and tracking of a product and ensuring product and production process quality. Includes operations management, materials management, quality/safety control, packaging management, and management of the tools, equipment, and technologies that support it.
    Architecture & Engineering The design and planning of structures or critical infrastructure systems according to scientific, functional, and aesthetic principles.
    Construction New construction, assembly, or alteration of buildings and critical infrastructure (e.g. transportation systems; telecommunications systems; utilities generation/transmission/distribution facilities and systems). Includes management of all construction project plans and the people, materials, and equipment required to execute.
    Real Estate Management Management of any residential, commercial, or industrial real estate holdings (land and buildings), including any financial dealings such as its purchase, sale, transfer, and rental as well as ongoing maintenance and repair of associated infrastructure and capital assets.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Financial services and insurance industries.

    Industry function Definition
    Core Banking Services Includes ATM management; account management (opening, deposit/withdrawal, interest calculation, overdraft management, closing); payments processing; funds transfers; foreign currency exchange; cash management.
    Loan, Mortgage, and Credit Services Includes application, adjudication, and approval; facility; disbursement/card issuance; authorization management; merchant services; interest calculation; billing/payment; debt/collections management.
    Investment and Wealth Management Processes for the investment of premiums/monies received from policy holders/customers to generate wealth. Often two-pronged: internal investment to fund claim payout in the case of insurance, and customer-facing investment as a financial service (e.g. retirement planning/annuities). Includes product development and management, investment management, safety deposit box services, trust management services.
    Actuarial Analysis & Policy Creation Development of new policy products based on analysis of past losses and patterns, forecasts of financial risks, and assessment of potential profitability (i.e. actuarial science). These processes also include development of rate schedules (pricing) and the reserves that the insurer needs to have available for potential claim payouts.
    Underwriting & Policy Administration Processes for assessing risk of a potential policy holder; determining whether to insure them or not; setting the premiums the policy holder must pay; and administering the policy over the course of its lifecycle (including updates and billing).
    Claims Processing & Claims Management Processes for receiving, investigating, evaluating, approving/denying, and disbursing a claim payout. This process is unique to the insurance industry. In health insurance, ongoing case management processes need to be considered here whereby the insurer monitors and approves patient treatments over a long-term basis to ensure that the treatments are both necessary and beneficial.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Healthcare industry

    Industry function Definition
    Patient Intake & Admissions Processes whereby key pieces of information about a patient are registered, updated, or confirmed with the healthcare provider in order to access healthcare services. Includes patient triage, intake management, and admissions management. These processes are generally administrative in nature.
    Patient Diagnosis A range of methods for determining the medical condition a patient has in order to provide appropriate care or treatment. Includes examination, consultation, testing, and diagnostic imaging.
    Patient Treatment The range of medical procedures, methods, and interventions to mitigate, relieve, or cure a patient's symptom, injury, disease, or other medical condition. Includes consultation and referral; treatment and care planning; medical procedure management; nursing and personal support; medicine management; trauma management; diet and nutrition management; and patient transportation.
    Patient Recovery & Ongoing Care Processes and methods for tracking the progress of a patient post-treatment; improving their health outcomes; restoring, maintaining, or improving their quality of life; and discharging or transferring them to other providers. Includes remote monitoring of vital parameters, physical therapy, post-trauma care, and a range of restorative and lifestyle modification programs.

    Sample industry-specific functions

    Gaming and hospitality industries

    Industry function Definition
    Accommodation Short-term lodging in hotel facilities. Includes management and maintenance of guest rooms and common spaces, amenities (e.g. swimming pool), and other related services (e.g. valet parking).
    Gaming Includes table wagering games and gambling activities such as slot machines or any other activity that includes on premises mobile casino gaming.
    Food & Beverage Services Food and beverages prepared, served, or available for sale by the hotel on the hotel premises via restaurants and bars and room service. Excludes catering (see Events Management) and management or operation of independent leased food and beverage establishments located on the hotel premises.
    Entertainment & Events Planning, coordination, and on-premises hosting of events including conferences, conventions, trade shows, parties, ceremonies and live entertainment, and other forms of recreation on the hotel premises. Includes all aspects of entertainment operations, facility management and catering for the event.

    Service Management Integration With Agile Practices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}400|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management

    • Work efficiently and in harmony with Agile and service management to deliver business value.
    • Optimize the value stream of services and products.
    • Leverage the benefits of each practice.
    • Create a culture of collaboration to support a rapidly changing business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Agile and Service Management are not necessarily at odds; find the integration points to solve specific problems.

    Impact and Result

    • Optimize the value stream of services and products.
    • Work efficiently and in harmony with Agile and service management to deliver business value.
    • Create a culture of collaboration to support a rapidly changing business.

    Service Management Integration With Agile Practices Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Service Management Integration With Agile Practices Storyboard – Use this deck to understand the integration points and how to overcome common challenges.

    Understand how service management integrates with Agile software development practices, and how to solve the most common challenges to work efficiently and deliver business value.

    • Service Management Integration With Agile Practices Storyboard

    2. Service Management Stakeholder Register Template – Use this tool to identify and document Service Management stakeholders.

    Use this tool to identify your stakeholders to engage when working on the service management integration.

    • ITSM Stakeholder Register Template

    3. Service Management Integration With Agile Practices Assessment Tool – Use this tool to identify key challenging integration points in your organization.

    Use this tool to identify which of your current practices might already be aligned with Agile mindset and which might need adjustment. Identify integration challenges with the current service management practices.

    • Service Management Integration With Agile Practices Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Service Management Integration With Agile Practices

    Understand how Agile transformation affects service management

    Analyst Perspective

    Don't forget about operations

    Many organizations believe that once they have implemented Agile that they no longer need any service management framework, like ITIL. They see service management as "old" and a roadblock to deliver products and services quickly. The culture clash is obvious, and it is the most common challenge people face when trying to integrate Agile and service management. However, it is not the only challenge. Agile methodologies are focused on optimized delivery. However, what happens after delivery is often overlooked. Operations may not receive proper communication or documentation, and processes are cumbersome or non-existent. This is a huge paradox if an organization is trying to become nimbler. You need to find ways to integrate your Agile practices with your existing Service Management processes.

    This is a picture of Renata Lopes

    Renata Lopes
    Senior Research Analyst
    Organizational Transformation Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Work efficiently and in harmony with Agile and service management to deliver business value.
    • Optimize the value stream of services and products.
    • Leverage the benefits of each practice.
    • Create a culture of collaboration to support a rapidly changing business.

    Common Obstacles

    • Culture clashes.
    • Inefficient or inexistent processes.
    • Lack of understanding of what Agile and service management mean.
    • Leadership doesn't understand the integration points of practices.
    • Development overlooks the operations requirement.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • When integrating Agile and service management practices start by understanding the key integration points:
    • Processes
    • People and resources
    • Governance and org structure

    Info-Tech Insight

    Agile and Service Management are not necessarily at odds Find the integration points to solve specific problems.

    Your challenge

    Deliver seamless business value by integrating service management and Agile development.

    • Understand how Agile development impacts service management.
    • Identify bottlenecks and inefficiencies when integrating with service management.
    • Connect teams across the organization to collaborate toward the organizational goals.
    • Ensure operational requirements are considered while developing products in an Agile way.
    • Stay in alignment when designing and delivering services.

    The most significant Agile adoption barriers

    46% of respondents identified inconsistent processes and practices across teams as a challenge.
    Source: Digital.ai, 2021

    43% of respondents identified Culture clashes as a challenge.
    Source: Digital.ai, 2021

    What is Agile?

    Agile development is an umbrella term for several iterative and incremental development methodologies to develop products.

    In order to achieve Agile development, organizations will adopt frameworks and methodologies like Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe), Scrum, Large Scaled Scrum (LeSS), DevOps, Spotify Way of Working (WoW), etc.

    • DevOps
    • WoW
    • SAFe
    • Scrum
    • LeSS

    Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}569|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions

    Brands that fail to invest in brand awareness are likely to face some, if not all these problems:

    • Lack of brand visibility and recognition
    • Inability to reach and engage with the buyers
    • Difficulties generating and converting leads
    • Low customer retention rate
    • Inability to justify higher pricing
    • Limited brand equity, business valuation, and sustainability

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Awareness brings visibility and traction to brands, which is essential in taking the market leadership position and becoming the trusted brand that buyers think of first.

    Brand awareness also significantly contributes to increasing brand equity, market valuation, and business sustainability.

    Impact and Result

    Building brand awareness allows for the increase of:

    • Brand visibility, perception, recognition, and reputation
    • Interactions and engagement with the target audience
    • Digital advertising performance and ROI
    • Conversion rates and sales wins
    • Revenue and profitability
    • Market share & share of voice (SOV)
    • Talents, partners, and investors attraction and retention
    • Brand equity, business growth, and market valuation

    Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness Storyboard - Learn how to establish the brand foundation, create assets and workflows, and deploy effective brand awareness strategies and tactics.

    A two-step approach to building brand awareness, starting with defining the brand foundations and then implementing effective brand awareness strategies and tactics.

    • Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation by Building Brand Awareness Storyboard

    2. Define Brand's Personality and Message - Analyze your target market and develop key elements of your brand guidelines.

    With this set of tools, you will be able to capture and analyze your target market, your buyers and their journeys, define your brand's values, personality, and voice, and develop all the key elements of your brand guidelines to enable people within your organization and external resources to build a consistent and recognizable image across all assets and platforms.

    • Market Analysis Template
    • Brand Recognition Survey and Interview Questionnaire and List Template
    • External and Internal Factors Analysis Template
    • Buyer Personas and Journey Presentation Template
    • Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values Template
    • Brand Value Proposition and Positioning Statement
    • Brand Voice Guidelines Template
    • Writing Style Guide Template
    • Brand Messaging Template
    • Writer Checklist

    3. Start Building Brand Awareness - Achieve strategic alignment.

    These tools will allow you to achieve strategic alignment and readiness, create assets and workflows, deploy tactics, establish Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and monitor and optimize your strategy on an ongoing basis.

    • Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template
    • Asset Creation and Management List
    • Campaign Workflows Template
    • Brand Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan Template
    • Survey Emails Best Practices Guidelines

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Accelerate Business Growth and Valuation By Building Brand Awareness

    Develop and deploy comprehensive, multi-touchpoint brand awareness strategies to become the trusted brand that buyers think of first.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst perspective

    Building brand awareness

    Achieving high brand awareness in a given market and becoming the benchmark for buyers

    is what every brand wants to achieve, as it is a guarantee of success. Building brand awareness,

    even though its immediate benefits are often difficult to see and measure, is essential for companies that want to stand out from their competitors and continue to grow in a sustainable way. The return on investment (ROI) may take longer, but the benefits are also greater than those achieved through short-term initiatives with the expectation of immediate, albeit often limited, results.

    Brands that are familiar to their target market have greater credibility, generate more sales,

    and have a more loyal customer base. CMOs that successfully execute brand awareness programs

    build brand equity and grow company valuation.

    This is a picture of Nathalie Vezina

    Nathalie Vezina
    Marketing Research Director
    SoftwareReviews Advisory

    Executive summary

    Brand leaders know that brand awareness is essential to the success of all marketing and sales activities. Brands that fail to invest in brand awareness are likely to face some, if not all these problems:

    • Lack of brand visibility and compelling storytelling.
    • Inability to reach the target audience.
    • Low engagement on digital platforms and with ads.
    • Difficulties generating and converting leads, or closing/winning sales/deals, and facing a high cost per acquisition.
    • Low/no interest or brand recognition, trust level, and customer retention rate.
    • Inability to justify higher pricing.

    Convincing stakeholders of the benefits of strong brand awareness can be difficult when the positive outcomes are hard to quantify, and the return on investment (ROI) is often long-term. Among the many obstacles brand leaders must overcome are:

    • Lack of longer-term corporate vision, focusing all efforts and resources on short-term growth strategies for a quick ROI.
    • Insufficient market and target buyers' information and understanding of the brand's key differentiator.
    • Misalignment of brand message, and difficulties creating compelling content that resonates with the target audience, generates interest, and keeps them engaged.
    • Limited or no resources dedicated to the development of the brand.

    Inspired by top-performing businesses and best practices, this blueprint provides the guidance and tools needed to successfully build awareness and help businesses grow. By following these guidelines, brand leaders can expect to:

    • Gain market intelligence and a clear understanding of the buyer's needs, your competitive advantage, and key differentiator.
    • Develop a clear and compelling value proposition and a human-centric brand messaging driven by the brand's values.
    • Increase online presence and brand awareness to attract and engage with buyers.
    • Develop a long-term brand strategy and execution plan.

    "A brand is the set of expectations, memories, stories, and relationships that, taken together, account for a consumer's decision to choose one product or service over another."

    – Seth Godin

    What is brand awareness?

    The act of making a brand visible and memorable.

    Brand awareness is the degree to which buyers are familiar with and recognize the attributes and image of a particular brand, product, or service. The higher the level of awareness, the more likely the brand is to come into play when a target audience enters the " buying consideration" phase of the buyer's journey.

    Brand awareness also plays an important role in building equity and increasing business valuation. Brands that are familiar to their target market have greater credibility, drive more sales and have a more loyal customer base.
    Building brand awareness allows increasing:

    • Brand visibility, perception, recognition, and reputation
    • Interactions and engagement with the target audience
    • Digital advertising performance and ROI
    • Conversion rates and sales wins
    • Revenue and profitability
    • Market share and share of voice (SOV)
    • Talents, partners, and investors attraction and retention
    • Brand equity, business growth, and market valuation

    "Products are made in a factory, but brands are created in the mind."
    Source: Walter Landor

    Capitalizing on a powerful brand

    A longer-term approach for an increased and more sustainable ROI.

    Market leader position

    Developing brand awareness is essential to increase the visibility and traction of a brand.

    Several factors may cause a brand to be not well-known. One reason might be that the brand recently launched, such as a startup. Another reason could be that the brand has rebranded or entered a new market.

    To become the trusted brand that buyers think of first in their target markets, it is critical for these brands to develop and deploy comprehensive, multi-touchpoint brand awareness strategies.

    A relationship leading to loyalty

    A longer-term brand awareness strategy helps build a strong relationship between the brand and the buyer, fostering a lasting and rewarding alliance.

    It also enables brands to reach and engage with their target audience effectively by using compelling storytelling and meaningful content.

    Adopting a more human-centric approach and emphasizing shared values makes the brand more attractive to buyers and can drive sales and gain loyalty.

    Sustainable business growth

    For brands that are not well established in their target market, short-term tactics that focus on immediate benefits can be ineffective. In contrast, long-term brand awareness strategies provide a more sustainable ROI (return on investment).

    Investing in building brand awareness can impact a business's ability to interact with its target audience, generate leads, and increase sales. Moreover, it can significantly contribute to boosting the business's brand equity and market valuation.

    "Quick wins may work in the short term, but they're not an ideal substitute for long-term tactics and continued success."
    Source: Forbes

    Impacts of low brand awareness on businesses

    Unfamiliar brands, despite their strong potential, won't thrive unless they invest in their notoriety.

    Brands that choose not to invest in longer-term awareness strategies and rely solely on short-term growth tactics in hopes of an immediate gain will see their ability to grow diminished and their longevity reduced due to a lack of market presence and recognition.

    Symptoms of a weakening brand include:

    • High marketing spending and limited result
    • Low market share or penetration
    • Low sales, revenue, and gross margin
    • Weak renewal rate, customer retention, and loyalty
    • Difficulties delivering on the brand promise, low/no trust in the brand
    • Limited brand equity, business valuation, and sustainability
    • Unattractive brand to partners and investors

    "Your brand is the single most important investment you can make in your business."
    Source: Steve Forbes

    Most common obstacles to increasing brand awareness

    Successfully building brand awareness requires careful preparation and planning.

    • Limited market intelligence
    • Unclear competitive advantage/key differentiator
    • Misaligned and inconsistent messaging and storytelling
    • Lack of long-term vision
    • and low prioritization
    • Limited resources to develop and execute brand awareness building tactics
    • Unattractive content that does not resonate, generates little or no interest and engagement

    Investing in the notoriety of the brand

    Become the top-of-mind brand in your target market.

    To stand out, be recognized by their target audience, and become major players in their industry, brands must adopt a winning strategy that includes the following elements:

    • In-depth knowledge and understanding of the market and audience
    • Strengthening digital presence and activities
    • Creating and publishing content relevant to the target audience
    • Reaching out through multiple touchpoints
    • Using a more human-centric approach
    • Ensure consistency in all aspects of the brand, across all media and channels

    How far are you from being the brand buyers think of first in your target market?

    This is an image of the Brand Awareness Pyramid.

    Brand awareness pyramid

    Based on David Aaker's brand loyalty pyramid

    Tactics for building brand awareness

    Focus on effective ways to gain brand recognition in the minds of buyers.

    This is an image of the Brand Awareness Journey Roadmap.

    Brand recognition requires in-depth knowledge of the target market, the creation of strong brand attributes, and increased presence and visibility.

    Understand the market and audience you're targeting

    Be prepared. Act smart.

    To implement a winning brand awareness-building strategy, you must:

    • Be aware of your competitor's strengths and weaknesses, as well as yours.
    • Find out who is behind the keyboard, and the user experience they expect to have.
    • Plan and continuously adapt your tactics accordingly.
    • Make your buyer the hero.

    Identify the brands' uniqueness

    Find your "winning zone" and how your brand uniquely addresses buyers' pain points.

    Focus on your key differentiator

    A brand has found its "winning zone" or key differentiator when its value proposition clearly shows that it uniquely solves its buyers' specific pain points.

    Align with your target audience's real expectations and successfully interact with them by understanding their persona and buyer's journey. Know:

    • How you uniquely address their pain points.
    • Their values and what motivates them.
    • Who they see as authorities in your field.
    • Their buying habits and trends.
    • How they like brands to engage with them.

    An image of a Venn diagram between the following three terms: Buyer pain point; Competitors' value proposition; your unique value proposition.  The overlapping zone is labeled the Winning zone.  This is your key differentiator.

    Give your brand a voice

    Define and present a consistent voice across all channels and assets.

    The voice reflects the personality of the brand and the emotion to be transmitted. That's why it's crucial to establish strict rules that define the language to use when communicating through the brand's voice, the type of words, and do's and don'ts.

    To be recognizable it is imperative to avoid inconsistencies. No matter how many people are behind the brand voice, the brand must show a unique, distinctive personality. As for the tone, it may vary according to circumstances, from lighter to more serious.

    Up to 80% Increased customer recognition when the brand uses a signature color scheme across multiple platforms
    Source: startup Bonsai
    23% of revenue increase is what consistent branding across channels leads to.
    Source: Harvard Business Review

    When we close our eyes and listen, we all recognize Ella Fitzgerald's rich and unique singing voice.

    We expect to recognize the writing of Stephen King when we read his books. For the brand's voice, it's the same. People want to be able to recognize it.

    Adopt a more human-centric approach

    If your brand was a person, who would it be?

    Human attributes

    Physically attractive

    • Brand identity
    • Logo and tagline
    • Product design

    Intellectually stimulating

    • Knowledge and ideas
    • Continuous innovation
    • Thought leadership

    Sociable

    • Friendly, likeable and fun
    • Confidently engage with audience through multiple touchpoints
    • Posts and shares meaningful content
    • Responsive

    Emotionally connected

    • Inspiring
    • Powerful influencer
    • Triggers emotional reactions

    Morally sound

    • Ethical and responsible
    • Value driven
    • Deliver on its promise

    Personable

    • Honest
    • Self-confident and motivated
    • Accountable

    0.05 Seconds is what it takes for someone to form an opinion about a website, and a brand.
    Source: 8ways

    90% of the time, our initial gut reaction to products is based on color alone.
    Source: startup Bonsai

    56% of the final b2b purchasing decision is based on emotional factors.
    Source: B@B International

    Put values at the heart of the brand-buyers relationship

    Highlight values that will resonate with your audience.

    Brands that focus on the values they share with their buyers, rather than simply on a product or service, succeed in making meaningful emotional connections with them and keep them actively engaged.

    Shared values such as transparency, sustainability, diversity, environmental protection, and social responsibility become the foundation of a solid relationship between a brand and its audience.

    The key is to know what motivates the target audience.

    86% of consumers claim that authenticity is one of the key factors they consider when deciding which brands they like and support.
    Source: Business Wire

    56% of the final decision is based on having a strong emotional connection with the supplier.
    Source: B2B International

    64% of today's customers are belief-driven buyers; they want to support brands that "can be a powerful force for change."
    Source: Edelman

    "If people believe they share values with a company, they will stay loyal to the brand."
    – Howard Schultz
    Source: Lokus Design

    Double-down on digital

    Develop your digital presence and reach out to your target audiences through multiple touchpoints.

    Beyond engaging content, reaching the target audience requires brands to connect and interact with their audience in multiple ways so that potential buyers can form an opinion.

    With the right message consistently delivered across multiple channels, brands increase their reach, create a buzz around their brand and raise awareness.

    73% of today's consumers confirm they use more than one channel during a shopping journey
    Source: Harvard Business Review

    Platforms

    • Website and apps
    • Social media
    • Group discussions

    Multimedia

    • Webinars
    • Podcasts
    • Publication

    Campaign

    • Ads and advertising
    • Landing pages
    • Emails, surveys drip campaigns

    Network

    • Tradeshows, events, sponsorships
    • Conferences, speaking opportunities
    • Partners and influencers

    Use social media to connect

    Reach out to the masses with a social media presence.

    Social media platforms represent a cost-effective opportunity for businesses to connect and influence their audience and tell their story by posting relevant and search-engine-optimized content regularly on their account and groups. It's also a nice gateway to their website.

    Building a relationship with their target buyer through social media is also an easy way for businesses to:

    • Understand the buyers.
    • Receive feedback on how the buyers perceive the brand and how to improve it.
    • Show great user experience and responsiveness.
    • Build trust.
    • Create awareness.

    75% of B2B buyers and 84% of C-Suite executives use social media when considering a purchase
    Source: LinkedIn Business

    92% of B2B buyers use social media to connect with leaders in the sales industry.
    Source: Techjury

    With over 4.5 billion social media users worldwide, and 13 new users signing up to their first social media account every second, social media is fast becoming a primary channel of communication and social interaction for many.
    Source: McKinsey

    Become the expert subject matter

    Raise awareness with thought leadership content.

    Thought leadership is about building credibility
    by creating and publishing meaningful, relevant content that resonates with a target audience.
    Thought leaders write and publish all kinds of relevant content such as white papers, ebooks, case studies, infographics, video and audio content, webinars, and research reports.
    They also participate in speaking opportunities, live presentations, and other high-visibility forums.
    Well-executed thought leadership strategies contribute to:

    • Raise awareness.
    • Build credibility.
    • Be recognized as a subject expert matter.
    • Become an industry leader.

    60% of buyers say thought leadership builds credibility when entering a new category where the brand is not already known.
    Source: Edelman | LinkedIn

    70% of people would rather learn about a company through articles rather than advertising.
    Source: Brew Interactive

    57% of buyers say that thought leadership builds awareness for a new or little-known brand.
    Source: Edelman | LinkedIn

    To achieve best results

    • Know the buyers' persona and journey.
    • Create original content that matches the persona of the target audience and that is close to their values.
    • Be Truthful and insightful.
    • Find the right tone and balance between being human-centric, authoritative, and bold.
    • Be mindful of people's attention span and value their time.
    • Create content for each phase of the buyer's journey.
    • Ensure content is SEO, keyword-loaded, and add calls-to-action (CTAs).
    • Add reason to believe, data to support, and proof points.
    • Address the buyers' pain points in a unique way.

    Avoid

    • Focusing on product features and on selling.
    • Publishing generic content.
    • Using an overly corporate tone.

    Promote personal branding

    Rely on your most powerful brand ambassadors and influencers: your employees.

    The strength of personal branding is amplified when individuals and companies collaborate to pursue personal branding initiatives that offer mutual benefits. By training and positioning key employees as brand ambassadors and industry influencers, brands can boost their brand awareness through influencer marketing strategies.

    Personal branding, when well aligned with business goals, helps brands leverage their key employee's brands to:

    • Increase the organization's brand awareness.
    • Broaden their reach and circle of influence.
    • Show value, gain credibility, and build trust.
    • Stand out from the competition.
    • Build employee loyalty and pride.
    • Become a reference to other businesses.
    • Increase speaking opportunities.
    • Boost qualified leads and sales.

    About 90% of organizations' employee network tends to be completely new to the brand.
    Source: Everyone Social

    8X more engagement comes from social media content shared by employees rather than brand accounts.
    Source: Entrepreneur

    561% more reach when brand messages are shared by employees on social media, than the same message shared by the Brand's social media.
    Source: Entrepreneur

    "Personal branding is the art of becoming knowable, likable and trustable."
    Source: Founder Jar, John Jantsch

    Invest in B2B influencer marketing

    Broaden your reach and audiences by leveraging the voice of influencers.

    Influencers are trusted industry experts and analysts who buyers can count on to provide reliable information when looking to make a purchase.

    Influencer marketing can be very effective to reach new audiences, increase awareness, and build trust. But finding the right influencers with the level of credibility and visibility brands are expecting can sometimes be challenging.

    Search for influencers that have:

    • Relevance of audience and size.
    • Industry expertise and credibility.
    • Ability to create meaningful content (written, video, audio).
    • Charismatic personality with values consistent with the brand.
    • Frequent publications on at least one leading media platform.

    76% of people say that they trust content shared by people over a brand.
    Source: Adweek


    44% increased media mention of the brand using B2B influencer marketers.
    Source: TopRank Marketing

    Turn your customers into brand advocates

    Establish customer advocacy programs and deliver a great customer experience.

    Retain your customers and turn them into brand advocates by building trust, providing an exceptional experience, and most importantly, continuously delivering on the brand promise.

    Implement a strong customer advocacy program, based on personalized experiences, the value provided, and mutual exchange, and reap the benefits of developing and growing long-term relationships.

    92% of individuals trust word-of-mouth recommendations, making it one of the most trust-rich forms of advertising.
    Source: SocialToaster

    Word-of-mouth (advocacy) marketing increases marketing effectiveness by 54%
    Source: SocialToaster

    Make your brand known and make it stick in people's minds

    Building and maintaining high brand awareness requires that each individual within the organization carry and deliver the brand message clearly and consistently across all media whether in person, in written communications, or otherwise.

    To achieve this, brand leaders must first develop a powerful, researched narrative that people will embrace and convey, which requires careful preparation.

    Target market and audience intel

    • Target market Intel
    • Buyer persona and journey/pain points
    • Uniqueness and positioning

    Brand attributes

    • Values at the heart of the relationship
    • Brand's human attributes

    Brand visibly and recall

    • Digital and social media presence
    • Thought leadership
    • Personal branding
    • Influencer marketing

    Brand awareness building plan

    • Long-term awareness and multi-touchpoint approach
    • Monitoring and optimization

    Short and long-term benefits of increasing brand awareness

    Brands are built over the long term but the rewards are high.

    • Stronger brand perception
    • Improved engagement and brand associations
    • Enhanced credibility, reputation, and trust
    • Better connection with customers
    • Increased repeat business
    • High-quality leads
    • Higher and faster conversion rate
    • More sales closed/ deals won
    • Greater brand equity
    • Accelerated growth

    "Strong brands outperform their less recognizable competitors by as much as 73%."
    Source: McKinsey

    Brand awareness building

    Building brand awareness, even though immediate benefits are often difficult to see and measure, is essential for companies to stand out from their competitors and continue to grow in a sustainable way.

    To successfully raise awareness, brands need to have:

    • A longer-term vision and strategy.
    • Market Intelligence, a clear value proposition, and key differentiator.
    • Consistent, well-aligned messaging and storytelling.
    • Digital presence and content.
    • The ability to reach out through multiple touchpoints.
    • Necessary resources.

    Without brand awareness, brands become less attractive to buyers, talent, and investors, and their ability to grow, increase their market value, and be sustainable is reduced.

    Brand awareness building methodology

    Define brands' personality and message

    • Gather market intel and analyze the market.
    • Determine the value proposition and positioning.
    • Define the brand archetype and voice.
    • Craft a compelling brand message and story.
    • Get all the key elements of your brand guidelines.

    Start building brand awareness

    • Achieve strategy alignment and readiness.
    • Create and manage assets.
    • Deploy your tactics, assets, and workflows.
    • Establish key performance indicators (KPIs).
    • Monitor and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Toolkit

    • Market and Influencing Factors Analysis
    • Recognition Survey and Best Practices
    • Buyer Personas and Journeys
    • Purpose, Mission, Vision, Values
    • Value Proposition and Positioning
    • Brand Message, Voice, and Writing Style
    • Brand Strategy and Tactics
    • Asset Creation and Management
    • Strategy Rollout Plan

    Short and long-term benefits of increasing brand awareness

    Increase:

    • Brand perception
    • Brand associations and engagement
    • Credibility, reputation, and trust
    • Connection with customers
    • Repeat business
    • Quality leads
    • Conversion rate
    • Sales closed / deals won
    • Brand equity and growth

    It typically takes 5-7 brand interactions before a buyer remembers the brand.
    Source: Startup Bonsai

    Who benefits from this brand awareness research?

    This research is being designed for:
    Brand and marketing leaders who:

    • Know that brand awareness is essential to the success of all marketing and sales activities.
    • Want to make their brand unique, recognizable, meaningful, and highly visible.
    • Seek to increase their digital presence, connect and engage with their target audience.
    • Are looking at reaching a new segment of the market.

    This research will also assist:

    • Sales with qualified lead generation and customer retention and loyalty.
    • Human Resources in their efforts to attract and retain talent.
    • The overall business with growth and increased market value.

    This research will help you:

    • Gain market intelligence and a clear understanding of the target audience's needs and trends, competitive advantage, and key differentiator.
    • The ability to develop clear and compelling, human-centric messaging and compelling story driven by brand values.
    • Increase online presence and brand awareness activities to attract and engage with buyers.
    • Develop a long-term brand awareness strategy and deployment plan.

    This research will help them:

    • Increase campaign ROI.
    • Develop a longer-term vision and benefits of investing in longer-term initiatives.
    • Build brand equity and increase business valuation.
    • Grow your business in a more sustainable way.

    SoftwareReviews' brand awareness building methodology

    Phase 1 Define brands' personality and message

    Phase 2 Start building brand awareness

    Phase steps

    1.1 Gather market intelligence and analyze the market.

    1.2 Develop and document the buyer's persona and journey.

    1.3 Uncover the brand mission, vision statement, core values, value proposition and positioning.

    1.4 Define the brand's archetype and tone of voice, then craft a compelling brand messaging.

    2.1 Achieve strategy alignment and readiness.

    2.2 Create assets and workflows and deploy tactics.

    2.3 Establish key performance indicators (KPIs), monitor, and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Phase outcomes

    • Target market and audience are identified and documented.
    • A clear value proposition and positioning are determined.
    • The brand personality, voice, and messaging are developed.
    • All the key elements of the brand guidelines are in place and ready to use, along with the existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery.
    • A comprehensive and actionable brand awareness strategy, with tactics, KPIs, and metrics, is set and ready to execute.
    • A progressive and effective deployment plan with deliverables, timelines, workflows, and checklists is in place.
    • Resources are assigned.

    Insight summary

    Brands to adapt their strategies to achieve longer-term growth
    Brands must adapt and adjust their strategies to attract informed buyers who have access to a wealth of products, services, and brands from all over. Building brand awareness, even though immediate benefits are often difficult to see and measure, has become essential for companies that want to stand out from their competitors and continue to grow in a sustainable way.

    A more human-centric approach
    Brand personalities matter. Brands placing human values at the heart of the customer-brand relationship will drive interest in their brand and build trust with their target audience.

    Stand out from the crowd
    Brands that develop and promote a clear and consistent message across all platforms and channels, along with a unique value proposition, stand out from their competitors and get noticed.

    A multi-touchpoints strategy
    Engage buyers with relevant content across multiple media to address their pain points. Analyze touchpoints to determine where to invest your efforts.

    Going social
    Buyers expect brands to be active and responsive in their interactions with their audience. To build awareness, brands are expected to develop a strong presence on social media by regularly posting relevant content, engaging with their followers and influencers, and using paid advertising. They also need to establish thought leadership through content such as white papers, case studies, and webinars.

    Thought leaders wanted
    To enhance their overall brand awareness strategy, organizations should consider developing the personal brand of key executives. Thought leadership can be a valuable method to gain credibility, build trust, and drive conversion. By establishing thought leadership, businesses can increase brand mentions, social engagement, website traffic, lead generation, return on investment (ROI), and Net Promoter Score (NPS).

    Save time and money with SoftwareReviews' branding advice

    Collaborating with SoftwareReviews analysts for inquiries not only provides valuable advice but also leads to substantial cost savings during branding activities, particularly when partnering with an agency.

    Guided Implementation Purpose Measured Value
    Build brands' personality and message Get the key elements of the brand guidelines in place and ready to use, along with your existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery, to ensure consistency and clarity across all brand touchpoints from internal communication to customer-facing materials. Working with SoftwareReviews analysts to develop brand guidelines saves costs compared to hiring an agency.

    Example: Building the guidelines with an agency will take more or less the same amount of time and cost approximately $80K.

    Start building brand awareness Achieve strategy alignment and readiness, then deploy tactics, assets, and other deliverables. Start building brand awareness and reap the immediate and long-term benefits.

    Working with SoftwareReviews analysts and your team to develop a long-term brand strategy and deployment will cost you less than a fraction of the cost of using an agency.

    Example: Developing and executing long-term brand awareness strategies with an agency will cost between $50-$75K/month over a 24-month period minimum.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Build brands' personality and message

    Phase 2

    Start building brand awareness

    • Call #1: Discuss concept and benefits of building brand awareness. Identify key stakeholders. Anticipate concerns and objections.
    • Call #2: Discuss target market intelligence, information gathering, and analysis.
    • Call #3: Review market intelligence information. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #4: Discuss value proposition and guide to find positioning and key differentiator.
    • Call #5: Review value proposition. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #6: Discuss how to build a comprehensive brand awareness strategy using SR guidelines and template.
    • Call #7: Review strategy. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #8: Second review of the strategy. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #9 (optional): Third review of the strategy. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #10: Discuss how to build the Execution Plan using SR template.
    • Call #11: Review Execution Plan. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #12: Second review of the Execution Plan. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #13 (optional): Third review of the Execution Plan. Address questions or concerns.
    • Call #14: Discuss how to build a compelling storytelling and content creation.
    • Call #15: Discuss website and social media platforms and other initiatives.
    • Call #16: Discuss marketing automation and continuous monitoring.
    • Call #17 (optional): Discuss optimization and reporting
    • Call #18: Debrief and determine how we can help with next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Marketing Analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    Brand awareness building tools

    Each step of this blueprint comes with tools to help you build brand awareness.

    Brand Awareness Tool Kit

    This kit includes a comprehensive set of tools to help you better understand your target market and buyers, define your brand's personality and message, and develop an actionable brand awareness strategy, workflows, and rollout plan.

    The set includes these templates:
    • Market and Influencing Factors Analysis
    • Recognition Survey and Best Practices
    • Buyer Personas and Journeys
    • Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values
    • Value Proposition and Positioning
    • Brand Message, Voice, and Writing Style
    • Brand Strategy and Tactics
    • Asset Creation and Management
    • Strategy Rollout Plan
    An image of a series of screenshots from the templates listed in the column to the left of this image.

    Get started!

    Know your target market and audience, deploy well-designed strategies based on shared values, and make meaningful connections with people.

    Phase 1

    Define brands' personality and message

    Phase 2

    Start building brand awareness

    Phase 1

    Define brands' personality and message

    Steps

    1.1 Gather market intelligence and analyze the market.
    1.2 Develop and document the buyer's persona and journey.
    1.3 Uncover the brand mission, vision statement, core values, positioning, and value proposition.
    1.4 Define the brand's archetype and tone of voice, then craft a compelling brand messaging.

    Phase outcome

    • Target market and audience are identified and documented.
    • A clear value proposition and positioning are determined.
    • The brand personality, voice, and messaging are developed.
    • All the key elements of the brand guidelines are in place. and ready to use, along with the existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery..

    Build brands' personality and message

    Step 1.1 Gather market intelligence and analyze the market.

    Total duration: 2.5-8 hours

    Objective

    Analyze and document your competitive landscape, assess your strengths, weaknesses, opportunities,
    and threats, gauge the buyers' familiarity with your brand, and identify the forces of influence.

    Output

    This exercise will allow you to understand your market and is essential to developing your value proposition.

    Participants

    • Head of branding and key stakeholders

    MarTech
    May require you to:

    • Register to a Survey Platform.
    • Use, setup, or install platforms like CRM and/or Marketing Automation Platform.

    Tools

    1.1.1 SWOT and competitive landscape

    (60-120 min.)

    Analyze & Document

    Follow the instructions in the Market Analysis Template to complete the SWOT and Competitive Analysis, slides 4 to 7.

    1.1.3 Internal and External Factors

    (30-60 min.)

    Analyze

    Follow the instructions in the External and Internal Factors Analysis Template to perform the PESTLE, Porter's 5 Forces, and Internal Factors and VRIO Analysis.

    Transfer

    Transfer key information into slides 10 and 11 of the Market Analysis Template.

    Consult SoftwareReviews website to find the best survey and MarTech platforms or contact one of our analysts for more personalized assistance and guidance

    1.1.2 Brand recognition

    (60-300 min.)

    Prep

    Adapt the survey and interview questions in the Brand Recognition Survey Questionnaire and List Template.

    Determine how you will proceed to conduct the survey and interviews (internal or external resources, and tools).

    Refer to the Survey Emails Best Practices Guidelines for more information on how to conduct email surveys.

    Collect & Analyze

    Use the Brand Recognition Survey Questionnaire and List Template to build your list, conduct the survey /interviews, and collect and analyze the feedback received.

    Transfer

    Transfer key information into slides 8 and 9 of the Market Analysis Template.

    Brand performance diagnostic

    Have you considered diagnosing your brand's current performance before you begin building brand awareness?

    Audit your brand using the Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth blueprint.Collect and interpret qualitative and quantitative brand performance measures.

    The toolkit includes the following templates:

    • Surveys and interviews questions and lists
    • External and internal factor analysis
    • Digital and financial metrics analysis

    Also included is an executive presentation template to communicate the results to key stakeholders and recommendations to fix the uncovered issues.

    Build brands' personality and message

    Step 1.2 Develop and document the buyer's persona and journey.

    Total duration: 4-8 hours

    Objective

    Gather existing and desired customer insights and conduct market research to define and personify your buyers' personas and their buying behaviors.

    Output

    Provide people in your organization with clear direction on who your target buyers are and guidance on how to effectively reach and engage with them throughout their journey.
    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Key stakeholders from sales and product marketing

    MarTech
    May require you to:

    • Register to an Online Survey Platform (free version or subscription).
    • Use, setup, or installation of platforms like CRM and/or Marketing Automation Platform.

    Tools

    1.2.1 Buyer Personas and Journeys

    (240-280 min.)

    Research

    Identify your tier 1 to 3 customers using the Ideal Client Profile (ICP) Workbook. (Recommended)

    Survey and interview existing and desired customers based using the Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool. (Recommended)

    Create

    Define and document your tier 1 to 3 Buyer Personas and Journeys using the Buyer Personas and Journeys Presentation Template.

    Consult SoftwareReviews website to find the best survey platform for your needs or contact one of our analysts for more personalized assistance and guidance

    Buyer Personas and Journeys

    A well-defined buyer persona and journey is a great way for brands to ensure they are effectively reaching and engaging their ideal buyers through a personalized buying experience.

    When properly documented, it provides valuable insights about the ideal customers, their needs, challenges, and buying decision processes allowing the development of initiatives that correspond to the target buyers.

    Build brands' personality and message

    Step 1.3 Uncover the brand mission, vision statement, core values, value proposition, and positioning.

    Total duration: 4-5.5 hours

    Objective
    Define the "raison d'être" and fundamental principles of your brand, your positioning in the marketplace, and your unique competitive advantage.

    Output
    Allows everyone in an organization to understand and align with the brand's raison d'être beyond the financial dimension, its current positioning and objectives, and how it intends to achieve them.
    It also serves to communicate a clear and appealing value proposition to buyers.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Chief Executive Officer (CEO)
    • Key stakeholders

    Tools

    • Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values Template
    • Value Proposition and Positioning Statement Template

    1.3.1 Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values

    (90-120 min.)

    Capture or Develop

    Capture or develop, if not already existing, your brand's purpose, mission, vision statement, and core values using slides 4 to 7 of the Brand Purpose, Mission, Vision, and Values Template.

    1.3.2 Brand Value Proposition and Positioning

    (150-210 min.)

    Define

    Map the brand value proposition using the canvas on slide 5 of the Value Proposition and Positioning Statement Template, and clearly articulate your value proposition statement on slide 4.

    Optional: Use canvas on slide 7 to develop product-specific product value propositions.

    On slide 8 of the same template, develop your brand positioning statement.

    Build brands' personality and message

    Steps 1.4 Define the brand's archetype and tone of voice, and craft a compelling brand messaging.

    Total duration: 5-8 hours

    Objective

    Define your unique brand voice and develop a set of guidelines, brand story, and messaging to ensure consistency across your digital and non-digital marketing and communication assets.
    Output

    A documented brand personality and voice, as well as brand story and message, will allow anyone producing content or communicating on behalf of your brand to do it using a unique and recognizable voice, and convey the right message.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Content specialist
    • Chief Executive Officer and other key stakeholders

    Tools

    • Brand Voice Guidelines Template
    • Writing Style Guide Template
    • Brand Messaging Template
    • Writer Checklist Template

    1.4.1 Brand Archetype and Tone of Voice

    (120-240 min.)

    Define and document

    Refer to slides 5 and 6 of the Brand Voice Guidelines Template to define your brand personality (archetype), slide 7.

    Use the Brand Voice Guidelines Template to define your brand tone of voice and characteristics on slides 8 and 9, based on the 4 primary tone of voice dimensions, and develop your brand voice chart, slide 9.

    Set Rules

    In the Writing Style Guide template, outline your brand's writing principles, style, grammar, punctuation, and number rules.

    1.4.2 Brand Messaging

    (180-240 min.)

    Craft

    Use the Brand Messaging template, slides 4 to 7, to craft your brand story and message.

    Audit

    Create a content audit to review and approve content to be created prior to publication, using the Writer's Checklist template.

    Important Tip!

    A consistent brand voice leads to remembering and trusting the brand. It should stand out from the competitors' voices and be meaningful to the target audience. Once the brand voice is set, avoid changing it.

    Phase 2

    Start building brand awareness

    Steps

    2.1 Achieve strategy alignment and readiness.
    2.2 Create assets and workflows, and deploy tactics.
    2.3 Establish key performance indicators (KPIs), monitor, and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Phase outcome

    • A comprehensive and actionable brand awareness strategy, with tactics, KPIs, and metrics, is set and ready to execute.
    • A progressive and effective deployment plan with deliverables, timelines, workflows, and checklists is in place.
    • Resources are assigned.

    Start building brand awareness

    Step 2.1 Achieve strategy readiness and alignment.

    Total duration: 4-5 hours

    Objective

    Now that you have all the key elements of your brand guidelines in place, in addition to your existing logo, typography, color palette, and imagery, you can begin to build brand awareness.

    Start planning to build brand awareness by developing a comprehensive and actionable brand awareness strategy with tactics that align with the company's purpose and objectives. The strategy should include achievable goals and measurables, budget and staffing considerations, and a good workload assessment.

    Output

    A comprehensive long-term, actionable brand awareness strategy with KPIs and measurables.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Key stakeholders

    Tools

    • Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template

    2.1.1 Brand Awareness Analysis

    (60-120 min.)

    Identify

    In slide 5 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template, identify your top three brand awareness drivers, opportunities, inhibitors, and risks to help you establish your strategic objectives in building brand awareness.

    2.1.2 Brand Awareness Strategy

    (60-120 min.)

    Elaborate

    Use slides 6 to 10 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template to elaborate on your strategy goals, key issues, and tactics to begin or continue building brand awareness.

    2.1.3 Brand Awareness KPIs and Metrics

    (180-240 min.)

    Set

    Set the strategy performance metrics and KPIs on slide 11 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template.

    Monitor

    Once you start executing the strategy, monitor and report each quarter using slides 13 to 15 of the same document.

    Understanding the difference between strategies and tactics

    Strategies and tactics can easily be confused, but although they may seem similar at times, they are in fact quite different.

    Strategies and tactics are complementary.

    A strategy is a plan to achieve specific goals, while a tactic is a concrete action or set of actions used to implement that strategy.

    To be effective, brand awareness strategies should be well thought-out, carefully planned, and supported by a series of tactics to achieve the expected outcomes.

    Start building brand awareness

    Step 2.2 Create assets and workflows and deploy tactics.

    Total duration: 3.5-4.5 hours

    Objective

    Build a long-term rollout with deliverables, milestones, timelines, workflows, and checklists. Assign resources and proceed to the ongoing development of assets. Implement, manage, and continuously communicate the strategy and results to key stakeholders.

    Output

    Progressive and effective development and deployment of the brand awareness-building strategy and tactics.

    Participants

    • Head of branding

    Tools

    • Asset Creation and Management List
    • Campaign Workflows Template
    • Brand Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan Template

    2.2.1 Assets Creation List

    (60-120 min.)

    Inventory

    Inventory existing assets to create the Asset Creation and Management List.

    Assign

    Assign the persons responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed of the development of each asset, using the RACI model in the template. Ensure you identify and collaborate with the right stakeholders.

    Prioritize

    Prioritize and add release dates.

    Communicate

    Update status and communicate regularly. Make the list with links to the assets available to the extended team to consult as needed.

    2.2.2 Rollout Plan

    (60-120 min.)

    Inventory

    Map out your strategy deployment in the Brand Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan Template and workflow in the Campaign Workflow Template.

    Assign

    Assign the persons responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each tactic, using the RACI model in the template. Ensure you identify and collaborate with the right stakeholders.

    Prioritize

    Prioritize and adjust the timeline accordingly.

    Communicate

    Update status and communicate regularly. Make the list with links to the assets available to the extended team to consult as needed.

    Band Awareness Strategy Rollout Plan
    A strategy rollout plan typically includes the following:

    • Identifying a cross-functional team and resources to develop the assets and deploy the tactics.
    • Listing the various assets to create and manage.
    • A timeline with key milestones, deadlines, and release dates.
    • A communication plan to keep stakeholders informed and aligned with the strategy and tactics.
    • Ongoing performance monitoring.
    • Constant adjustments and improvements to the strategy based on data collected and feedback received.

    Start building brand awareness

    Step 2.3 Establish key performance indicators (KPIs), monitor, and optimize on an ongoing basis.

    Total duration: 3.5-4.5 hours

    Objective

    Brand awareness is built over a long period of time and must be continuously monitored in several ways. Measuring and monitoring the effectiveness of your brand awareness activities will allow you to constantly adjust your tactics and continue to build awareness.

    Output

    This step will provide you with a snapshot of your current level of brand awareness and interactions with the brand, and allow you to set up the tools for ongoing monitoring and optimization.

    Participants

    • Head of branding
    • Digital marketing manager

    MarTech
    May require you to:

    • Register to an Online Survey Platform(free version or subscription), or
    • Use, setup, or installation of platforms like CRM and/or Marketing Automation Platform.
    • Use Google Analytics or other tracking tools.
    • Use social media and campaign management tools.

    Tools

    • Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics Template

    2.2.2 Rollout Plan

    (60-120 min.)

    Measure

    Monitor and record the strategy performance metrics in slides 12 to 15 of the Brand Awareness Strategy and Tactics template, and gauge its performance against preset KPIs in slide 11. Make ongoing improvements to the strategy and assets.

    Communicate

    The same slides in which you monitor strategy performance can be used to report on the results of the current strategy to key stakeholders on a monthly or quarterly basis, as appropriate.

    Take this opportunity to inform stakeholders of any adjustments you plan to make to the existing plan to improve its performance. Since brand awareness is built over time, be sure to evaluate the results based on how long the strategy has been in place before making major changes.

    Consult SoftwareReviews website to find the best survey, brand monitoring and feedback, and MarTech platforms, or contact one of our analysts for more personalized assistance and guidance

    Measuring brand strategy performance
    There are two ways to measure and monitor your brand's performance on an ongoing basis.

    • By registering to brand monitoring and feedback platforms and tools like Meltwater, Hootsuite, Insights, Brand24, Qualtrics, and Wooltric.
    • Manually, using native analytics built in the platforms you're already using, such as Google and Social Media Analytics, or by gathering customer feedback through surveys, or calculating CAC, ROI, and more in spreadsheets.

    SoftwareReviews can help you choose the right platform for your need. We also equip you with manual tools, available with the Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growthblueprint to measure:

    • Surveys and interviews questions and lists.
    • External and internal factor analysis.
    • Digital and financial metrics analysis.
    • Executive presentation to report on performance.

    Related SoftwareReviews research

    An image of the title page for SoftwareReviews Create a Buyer Persona and Journey. An image of the title page for SoftwareReviews Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth.

    Create a Buyer Persona and Journey

    Get deeper buyer understanding and achieve product-market fit, with easier access to market and sales

    • Reduce time and resources wasted chasing the wrong prospects.
    • Increase open and click-through rates.
    • Perform more effective sales discovery.
    • Increase win rate.

    Diagnose Brand Health to Improve Business Growth

    Have a significant and well-targeted impact on business success and growth by knowing how your brand performs, identifying areas of improvement, and making data-driven decisions to fix them.

    • Increase brand awareness and equity.
    • Build trust and improve customer retention and loyalty.
    • Achieve higher and faster growth.

    Bibliography

    Aaker, David. "Managing Brand Equity." Simon & Schuster, 1991.
    "6 Factors for Brands to Consider While Designing Their Communication." Lokus Design, 23 Sept. 2022.
    "20 Advocacy Marketing Statistics You Need to Know." Social Toaster, n.d.
    Bazilian, Emma. "How Millennials and Baby Boomers Consume User-Generated Content And what brands can learn from their preferences." Adweek, January 2, 2017.
    B2B International, a Gyro: company, B2B Blog - Why Human-To-Human Marketing Is the Next Big Trend in a Tech-Obsessed World.
    B2B International, a Gyro: company, The State of B2B Survey 2019 - Winning with Emotions: How to Become Your Customer's First Choice.
    Belyh, Anastasia. "Brand Ambassador 101:Turn Your Personal Brand into Cash." Founder Jar, December 6, 2022.
    Brand Master Academy.com.
    Businesswire, a Berkshire Hathaway Company, "Stackla Survey Reveals Disconnect Between the Content Consumers Want & What Marketers Deliver." February 20, 2019.
    Chamat, Ramzi. "Visual Design: Why First Impressions Matter." 8 Ways, June 5, 2019.
    Cognism. "21 Tips for Building a LinkedIn Personal Brand (in B2B SaaS)."
    Curleigh, James. "How to Enhance and Expand a Global Brand." TED.
    "2019 Edelman Trust Barometer." Edelman.
    Erskine, Ryan. "22 Statistics That Prove the Value of Personal Branding." Entrepreneur, September 13, 2016.
    Forbes, Steve. "Branding for Franchise Success: How To Achieve And Maintain Brand Consistency Across A Franchise Network?" Forbes, 9 Feb. 2020.
    Godin, Seth. "Define: Brand." Seth's Blog, 30 Dec. 2009,
    Houragan, Stephen. "Learn Brand Strategy in 7 Minutes (2023 Crash Course)." YouTube.
    Jallad, Revecka. "To Convert More Customers, Focus on Brand Awareness." Forbes, October 22, 2019.
    Kingsbury, Joe, et al. "2021 B2B Thought Leadership Impact Study." Edelman, 2021.
    Kunsman, Todd. "The Anatomy of an Employee Influencer." EveryoneSocial, September 8, 2022.
    Landor, Walter. A Brand New World: The Fortune Guide to the 21st Century. Time Warner Books, 1999.
    Liedke, Lindsay. "37+ Branding Statistics For 2023: Stats, Facts & Trends." Startup Bonsai, January 2, 2023.
    Millman, Debbie. "How Symbols and Brands Shape our Humanity." TED, 2019.
    Nenova, Velina. "21 Eye-Opening B2B Marketing Statistics to Know in 2023." Techjury, February 9, 2023.
    Perrey, Jesko et al., "The brand is back: Staying relevant in an accelerating age." McKinsey & Company, May 1, 2015.
    Schaub, Kathleen. "Social Buying Meets Social Selling: How Trusted Networks Improve the Purchase Experience." LinkedIn Business, April 2014.
    Sopadjieva, Emma et al. "A Study of 46,000 Shoppers Shows That Omnichannel Retailing Works." Harvard Business Review, January 3, 2017.
    Shaun. "B2B Brand Awareness: The Complete Guide 2023." B2B House. 2023.
    TopRank Marketing, "2020 State of B2B Influencer Marketing Research Report." Influencer Marketing Report.

    Security Priorities 2022

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}244|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Ransomware activities and the cost of breaches are on the rise.
    • Cybersecurity talent is hard to find, and an increasing number of cybersecurity professionals are considering leaving their jobs.
    • Moving to the digital world increases the risk of a breach.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The pandemic has fundamentally changed the technology landscape. Security programs must understand how their threat surface is now different and adapt their controls to meet the challenge.
    • The upside to the upheaval in 2021 is new opportunities to modernize your security program.

    Impact and Result

    • Use the report to ensure your plan in 2022 addresses what’s important in cybersecurity.
    • Understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space.

    Security Priorities 2022 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Security Priorities 2022 – A report that describes priorities and recommendations for CISOs in 2022.

    Use this report to understand the current situation in the cybersecurity space and inform your plan for 2022. This report includes sections on protecting against and responding to ransomware, acquiring and retaining talent, securing a remote workforce, securing digital transformation, and adopting zero trust.

    • Security Priorities for 2022 Report

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Security Priorities 2022

    The pandemic has changed how we work

    disruptions to the way we work caused by the pandemic are here to stay.

    The pandemic has introduced a lot of changes to our lives over the past two years, and this is also true for various aspects of how we work. In particular, a large workforce moved online overnight, which shifted the work environment rapidly.

    People changed how they communicate, how they access company information, and how they connect to the company network. These changes make cybersecurity a more important focus than ever.

    Although changes like the shift to remote work occurred in response to the pandemic, they are largely expected to remain, regardless of the progression of the pandemic itself. This report will look into important security trends and the priorities that stemmed from these trends.

    30% more professionals expect transformative permanent change compared to one year ago.

    47% of professionals expect a lot of permanent change; this remains the same as last year. (Source: Info-Tech Tech Trends 2022 Survey; N=475)

    The cost of a security breach is rising steeply

    The shift to remote work exposes organizations to more costly cyber incidents than ever before.

    $4.24 million

    Average cost of a data breach in 2021
    The cost of a data breach rose by nearly 10% in the past year, the highest rate in over seven years.

    $1.07 million

    More costly when remote work involved in the breach

    The average cost of breaches where remote work is involved is $1.07 million higher than breaches where remote work is not involved.

    The ubiquitous remote work that we saw in 2021 and continue to see in 2022 can lead to more costly security events. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Remote work is here to stay, and the cost of a breach is higher when remote work is involved.

    The cost comes not only directly from payments but also indirectly from reputational loss. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Security teams can participate in the solution

    The numbers are clear: in 2022, when we face a threat environment like WE’VE never EXPERIENCED before, good security is worth the investment

    $1.76 million

    Saved when zero trust is deployed facing a breach

    Zero trust controls are realistic and effective controls.

    Organizations that implement zero trust dramatically reduce the cost of an adverse security event.

    35%

    More costly if it takes more than 200 days to identify and contain a breach

    With increased BYOD and remote work, detection and response is more challenging than ever before – but it is also highly effective.

    Organizations that detect and respond to incidents quickly will significantly reduce the impact. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Breaches are 34% less costly when mature zero trust is implemented.

    A fully staffed and well-prepared security team could save the cost through quick responses. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Top security priorities and constraints in 2022

    Survey results

    As part of its research process for the 2022 Security Priorities Report, Info-Tech Research Group surveyed security and IT leaders (N=97) to ask their top security priorities as well as their main obstacles to security success in 2022:

    Top Priorities
    A list of the top three priorities identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Acquiring and retaining talent, 30%', 'Protecting against and responding to ransomware, 23%', and 'Securing a remote workforce, 23%'.

    Survey respondents were asked to force-rank their security priorities.

    Among the priorities chosen most frequently as #1 were talent management, addressing ransomware threats, and securing hybrid/remote work.

    Top Obstacles
    A list of the top three obstacles identified in the survey with their respective percentages, 'Staffing constraints, 31%', 'Demand of ever-changing business environment, 23%', and 'Budget constraints, 15%'.

    Talent management is both the #1 priority and the top obstacle facing security leaders in 2022.

    Unsurprisingly, the ever-changing environment in a world emerging from a pandemic and budget constraints are also top obstacles.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    This report details what we see the world demanding of security leaders in the coming year.

    Setting aside the demands – what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of 'Top security topics among Info-Tech members' with accompanying bars, 'Security Strategy', 'Security Policies', 'Security Operations', 'Security Governance', and 'Security Incident Response'.

    Many organizations are still mastering the foundations of a mature cybersecurity program.

    This is a good idea!

    Most breaches are still due to gaps in foundational security, not lack of advanced controls.

    We know the priorities…

    But what are security leaders actually working on?

    A list of industries with accompanying bars representing their demand for security. The only industry with a significant positive percentage is 'Government'. Security projects included in annual plan relative to industry.

    One industry plainly stands out from the rest. Government organizations are proportionally much more active in security than other industries, and for good reason: they are common targets.

    Manufacturing and professional services are proportionally less interested in security. This is concerning, given the recent targeting of supply chain and personal data holders by ransomware gangs.

    5 Security Priorities for 2022 Logo for Info-Tech. Logo for ITRG.

    People

    1. Acquiring and Retaining Talent
      Create a good working environment for existing and potential employees. Invest time and effort into talent issues to avoid being understaffed.
    2. Securing a Remote Workforce
      Create a secure environment for users and help your people build safe habits while working remotely.

    Process

    1. Securing Digital Transformation
      Build in security from the start and check in frequently to create agile and secure user experiences.

    Technology

    1. Adopting Zero Trust
      Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege.
    2. Protecting Against and Responding to Ransomware
      Put in your best effort to build defenses but also prepare for a breach and know how to recover.

    Main Influencing Factors

    COVID-19 Pandemic
    The pandemic has changed the way we interact with technology. Organizations are universally adapting their business and technology processes to fit the post-pandemic paradigm.
    Rampant Cybercrime Activity
    By nearly every conceivable metric, cybercrime is way up in the past two years. Cybercriminals smell blood and pose a more salient threat than before. Higher standards of cybersecurity capability are required to respond to this higher level of threat.
    Remote Work and Workforce Reallocation
    Talented IT staff across the globe enabled an extraordinarily fast shift to remote and distance work. We must now reckon with the security and human resourcing implications of this huge shift.

    Acquire and Retain Talent

    Priority 01

    Security talent was in short supply before the pandemic, and it's even worse now.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Cybersecurity talent has been in short supply for years, but this shortage has inflected upward since the pandemic.

    The Great Resignation contributed to the existing talent gap. The pandemic has changed how people work as well as how and where they choose work. More and more senior workers are retiring early or opting for remote working opportunities.

    The cost to acquire cybersecurity talent is huge, and the challenge doesn’t end there. Retaining top talent can be equally difficult.

    Current situation

    • A 2021 survey by ESG shows that 76% of security professional agree it’s difficult to recruit talent, and 57% said their organization is affected by this talent shortage.
    • (ISC)2 reports there are 2.72 million unfilled job openings and an increasing workforce gap (2021).

    2.72 million unfilled cybersecurity openings (Source: (ISC)2, 2021)

    IT leaders must do more to attract and retain talent in 2022

    • Over 70% of IT professionals are considering quitting their jobs (TalentLMS, 2021). Meanwhile, 51% of surveyed cybersecurity professionals report extreme burnout during the last 12 months and many of them have considered quitting because of it (VMWare, 2021).
    • Working remotely makes it easier for people to look elsewhere, lowering the barrier to leaving.
    • This is a big problem for security leaders, as cybersecurity talent is in very short supply. The cost of acquiring and retaining quality cybersecurity staff in 2022 is significant, and many organizations are unwilling or unable to pay the premium.
    • Top talent will demand flexible working conditions – even though remote work comes with security risk.
    • Most smart, talented new hires in 2022 are demanding to work remotely most of the time.
    Top reasons for resignations in 2021
    Burnout 30%
    Other remote opportunities 20%
    Lack of growth opportunities 20%
    Poor culture 20%
    Acquisition concerns 10%
    (Source: Survey of West Coast US cybersecurity professionals; TechBeacon, 2021)

    Talent will be 2022’s #1 strength and #1 weakness

    Staffing obstacles in 2022:

    “Attracting and retaining talent is always challenging. We don’t pay as well and my org wants staff in the office at least half of the time. Most young, smart, talented new hires want to work remotely 100 percent of the time.“

    “Trying to grow internal resources into security roles.”

    “Remote work expectations by employees and refusal by business to accommodate.”

    “Biggest obstacle: payscales that are out of touch with cybersecurity market.”

    “Request additional staff. Obtaining funding for additional position is most significant obstacle.”

    (Info-Tech Tech Security Priorities Survey 2022)
    Top obstacles in 2022:

    As you can see, respondents to our security priorities survey have strong feelings on the challenges of staffing a cybersecurity team.

    The growth of remote work means local talent can now be hired by anybody, vastly increasing your competition as an employer.

    Hiring local will get tougher – but so will hiring abroad. People who don’t want to relocate for a new job now have plenty of alternatives. Without a compelling remote work option, you will find non-local prospects unwilling to move for a new job.

    Lastly, many organizations are still reeling at the cost of experienced cybersecurity talent. Focused internal training and development will be the answer for many organizations.

    Recommended Actions

    Provide career development opportunities

    Many security professionals are dissatisfied with their unclear career development paths. To improve retention, organizations should provide their staff with opportunities and clear paths for career and skills advancement.

    Be open-minded when hiring

    To broaden the candidate pool, organizations should be open-minded when considering who to hire.

    • Enable remote work.
    • Do not fixate on certificates and years of experience; rather, be open to developing those who have the right interest and ability.
    • Consider using freelance workers.
    Facilitate work-life balance

    Many security professionals say they experience burnout. Promoting work-life balance in your organization can help retain critical skills.

    Create inclusive environment

    Hire a diverse team and create an inclusive environment where they can thrive.

    Talent acquisition and retention plan

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Address a top priority and a top obstacle with a plan to attract and retain top organizational and cybersecurity talent.

    Initiative Description:

    • Provide secure remote work capabilities for staff.
    • Work with HR to refine a hiring plan that addresses geographical and compensation gaps with cybersecurity and general staff.
    • Survey staff engagement to identify points of friction and remediate where needed.
    • Define a career path and growth plan for staff.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduction in costs due to turnover and talent loss

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Productivity due to good morale/ engagement
    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved corporate culture
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Big organizational and cultural changes
    • Increased attack surface of remote/hybrid workforce

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure a Remote Workforce

    Priority 02

    Trends suggest remote work is here to stay. Addressing the risk of insecure endpoints can no longer be deferred.

    Executive summary

    Remote work poses unique challenges to cybersecurity teams. The personal home environment may introduce unauthorized people and unknown network vulnerabilities, and the organization loses nearly all power and influence over the daily cyber hygiene of its users.

    In addition, the software used for enabling remote work itself can be a target of cybersecurity criminals.

    Current situation

    • 70% of workers in technical services work from home.
    • Employees of larger firms and highly paid individuals are more likely to be working outside the office.
    • 80% of security and business leaders find that remote work has increased the risk of a breach.
    • (Source: StatCan, 2021)

    70% of tech workers work from home (Source: Statcan, 2021)

    Remote work demands new security solutions

    The security perimeter is finally gone

    The data is outside the datacenter.
    The users are outside the office.
    The endpoints are … anywhere and everywhere.

    Organizations that did not implement digital transformation changes following COVID-19 experience higher costs following a breach, likely because it is taking nearly two months longer, on average, to detect and contain a breach when more than 50% of staff are working remotely (IBM, 2021).

    In 2022 the cumulative risk of so many remote connections means we need to rethink how we secure the remote/hybrid workforce.

    Security
    • Distributed denial of service
    • DNS hijacking
    • Weak VPN protocols
    Identity
    • One-time verification allowing lateral movement
    Colorful tiles representing the surrounding security solutions. Network
    • Risk perimeter stops at corporate network edge
    • Split tunneling
    Authentication
    • Weak authentication
    • Weak password
    Access
    • Man-in-the-middle attack
    • Cross-site scripting
    • Session hijacking

    Recommended Actions

    Mature your identity management

    Compromised identity is the main vector to breaches in recent years. Stale accounts, contractor accounts, misalignment between HR and IT – the lack of foundational practices leads to headline-making breaches every week.
    Tighten up identity control to keep your organization out of the newspaper.

    Get a handle on your endpoints

    Work-from-home (WFH) often means unknown endpoints on unknown networks full of other unknown devices…and others in the home potentially using the workstation for non-work purposes. Gaining visibility into your endpoints can help to keep detection and resolution times short.

    Educate users

    Educate everyone on security best practices when working remotely:

    • Apply secure settings (not just defaults) to the home network.
    • Use strong passwords.
    • Identify suspicious email.
    Ease of use

    Many workers complain that the corporate technology solution makes it difficult to get their work done.

    Employees will take productivity over security if we force them to choose, so IT needs to listen to end users’ needs and provide a solution that is nimble and secure.

    Roadmap to securing remote/hybrid workforce

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    The corporate network now extends to the internet – ensure your security plan has you covered.

    Initiative Description:

    • Reassess enterprise security strategy to include the WFH attack surface (especially endpoint visibility).
    • Ensure authentication requirements for remote workers are sufficient (e.g. MFA, strong passwords, hardware tokens for high-risk users/connections).
    • Assess the value of zero trust networking to minimize the blast radius in the case of a breach.
    • Perform penetration testing annually.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.


    Reduced cost of security incidents/reputational damage

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Improved ability to attract and retain talent
    Arrow pointing up.
    Increased business adaptability
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential disruption to traditional working patterns
    • Cost of investing in WFH versus risk of BYOD

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Secure Digital Transformation

    Priority 03

    Digital transformation could be a competitive advantage…or the cause of your next data breach.

    Executive summary

    Background

    Digital transformation is occurring at an ever-increasing rate these days. As Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella said early in the pandemic, “We’ve seen two years’ worth of digital transformation in two months.”

    We have heard similar stories from Info-Tech members who deployed rollouts that were scheduled to take months over a weekend instead.

    Microsoft’s own shift to rapidly expand its Teams product is a prime example of how quickly the digital landscape has changed. The global adaption to a digital world has largely been a success story, but rapid change comes with risk, and there is a parallel story of rampant cyberattacks like we have never seen before.

    Insight

    There is an adage that “slow is smooth, and smooth is fast” – the implication being that fast is sloppy. In 2022 we’ll see a pattern of organizations working to catch up their cybersecurity with the transformations we all made in 2020.

    $1.78 trillion expected in digital transformation investments (Source: World Economic Forum, 2021)

    An ounce of security prevention versus a pound of cure

    The journey of digital transformation is a risky one.

    Digital transformations often rely heavily on third-party cloud service providers, which increases exposure of corporate data.

    Further, adoption of new technology creates a new threat surface that must be assessed, mitigations implemented, and visibility established to measure performance.

    However, digital transformations are often run on slim budgets and without expert guidance.

    Survey respondents report as much: rushed deployments, increased cloud migration, and shadow IT are the top vulnerabilities reported by security leaders and executives.

    In a 2020 Ponemon survey, 82% of IT security and C-level executives reported experiencing at least one data breach directly resulting from a digital transformation they had undergone.

    Scope creep is inevitable on any large project like a digital transformation. A small security shortcut early in the project can have dire consequences when it grows to affect personal data and critical systems down the road.

    Recommended Actions

    Engage the business early and often

    Despite the risks, organizations engage in digital transformations because they also have huge business value.

    Security leaders should not be seeking to slow or stop digital transformations; rather, we should be engaging with the business early to get ahead of risks and enable successful transformation.

    Establish a vendor security program

    Data is moving out of datacenters and onto third-party environments. Without security requirements built into agreements, and clear visibility into vendor security capabilities, that data is a major source of risk.

    A robust vendor security program will create assurance early in the process and help to reinforce the responsibility of securing data with other parts of the organization.

    Build/revisit your security strategy

    The threat surface has changed since before your transformation. This is the right time to revisit or rebuild your security strategy to ensure that your control set is present throughout the new environment – and also a great opportunity to show how your current security investments are helping secure your new digital lines of business!

    Educate your key players

    Only 16% of security leaders and executives report alignment between security and business processes during digital transformation.

    If security is too low a priority, then key players in your transformation efforts are likely unaware of how security risks impact their own success. It will be incumbent upon the CISO to start that conversation.

    Securing digital transformation

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Ensure your investment in digital transformation is appropriately secured.

    Initiative Description:

    • Engage security with digital transformation and relevant governance structures (steering committees) to ensure security considerations are built into digital transformation planning.
    • Incorporate security stage gates in project management procedures.
    • Establish a vendor security assessment program.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased likelihood of digital transformation success

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.
    Ability to make informed decisions for the field rep strategy
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced long-term cost of digital transformation
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Potential increased up front cost (reduced long-term cost)
    • Potential slowed implementation with security stage gates in project management

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Adopt Zero Trust

    Priority 04

    Governments are recognizing the importance of zero trust strategies. So should your organization.

    Why now for zero trust?

    John Kindervag modernized the concept of zero trust back in 2010, and in the intervening years there has been enormous interest in cybersecurity circles, yet in 2022 only 30% of organizations report even beginning to roll out zero trust capabilities (Statista, 2022).

    Why such little action on a revolutionary and compelling model?

    Zero trust is not a technology; it is a principle. Zero trust adoption takes concerted planning, effort, and expense, for which the business value has been unclear throughout most of the last 10 years. However, several recent developments are changing that:

    • Securing technology has become very hard! The size, complexity, and attack surface of IT environments has grown significantly – especially since the pandemic.
    • Cyberattacks have become rampant as the cost to deploy harmful ransomware has become lower and the impact has become higher.
    • The shift away from on-premises datacenters and offices created an opening for zero trust investment, and zero trust technology is more mature than ever before.

    The time has come for zero trust adoption to begin in earnest.

    97% will maintain or increase zero trust budget (Source: Statista, 2022)

    Traditional perimeter security is not working

    Zero trust directly addresses the most prevalent attack vectors today

    A hybrid workforce using traditional VPN creates an environment where we are exposed to all the risks in the wild (unknown devices at any location on any network), but at a stripped-down security level that still provides the trust afforded to on-premises workers using known devices.

    What’s more, threats such as ransomware are known to exploit identity and remote access vulnerabilities before moving laterally within a network – vectors that are addressed directly by zero trust identity and networking. Ninety-three percent of surveyed zero trust adopters state that the benefits have matched or exceeded their expectations (iSMG, 2022).

    Top reasons for building a zero trust program in 2022

    (Source: iSMG, 2022)

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    44%

    Reduce attacker ability to move laterally

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    The business case for zero trust is clearer than ever

    Prior obstacles to Zero Trust are disappearing

    A major obstacle to zero trust adoption has been the sheer cost, along with the lack of business case for that investment. Two factors are changing that paradigm in 2022:

    The May 2021 US White House Executive Order for federal agencies to adopt zero trust architecture finally placed zero trust on the radar of many CEOs and board members, creating the business interest and willingness to consider investing in zero trust.

    In addition, the cost of adopting zero trust is quickly being surpassed by the cost of not adopting zero trust, as cyberattacks become rampant and successful zero trust deployments create a case study to support investment.

    Bar chart titled 'Cost to remediate a Ransomware attack' with bars representing the years '2021' and '2020'. 2021's cost sits around $1.8M while 2020's was only $750K The cost to remediate a ransomware attack more than doubled from 2020 to 2021. Widespread adoption of zero trust capabilities could keep that number from doubling again in 2022. (Source: Sophos, 2021)

    The cost of a data breach is on average $1.76 million less for organizations with mature zero trust deployments.

    That is, the cost of a data breach is 35% reduced compared to organizations without zero trust controls. (Source: IBM, 2021)

    Recommended Actions

    Start small

    Don’t put all your eggs in one basket by deploying zero trust in a wide swath. Rather, start as small as possible to allow for growing pains without creating business friction (or sinking your project altogether).

    Build a sensible roadmap

    Zero trust principles can be applied in a myriad of ways, so where should you start? Between identities, devices, networking, and data, decide on a use case to do pilot testing and then refine your approach.

    Beware too-good-to-be-true products

    Zero trust is a powerful buzzword, and vendors know it.

    Be skeptical and do your due diligence to ensure your new security partners in zero trust are delivering what you need.

    Zero trust roadmap

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Develop a practical roadmap that shows the business value of security investment.

    Initiative Description:

    • Define desired business and security outcomes from zero trust adoption.
    • Assess zero trust readiness.
    • Build roadmaps for zero trust:
      1. Identity
      2. Networking
      3. Devices
      4. Data
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Increased security posture and business agility

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced impact of security events
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost of managing complex control set
    Arrow pointing up.
    More secure business transformation (i.e. cloud/digital)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Learning curve of implementation (start small and slow)
    • Transition from current control set to zero trust model

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Protect Against and Respond to Ransomware

    Priority 05

    Ransomware is still the #1 threat to the safety of your data.

    Executive summary

    Background

    • Ransomware attacks have transformed in 2021 and show no sign of slowing in 2022. There is a new major security breach every week, despite organizations spending over $150 billion in a year on cybersecurity (Nasdaq, 2021).
    • Ransomware as a service (RaaS) is commonplace, and attackers are doubling down by holding encrypted data ransom and also demanding payment under threat to disclose exfiltrated data – and they are making good on their threats.
    • The global cost of ransomware is expected to rise to $265 billion by 2031 (Cybersecurity Ventures, 2021).
    • We expect to see an increase in ransomware incidents in 2022, both in severity and volume – multiple attacks and double extortion are now the norm.
    • High staff turnover increases risk because new employees are unfamiliar with security protocols.

    150% increase ransomware attacks in 2020 (Source: ENISA)

    This is a new golden age of ransomware

    What is the same in 2022

    Unbridled ransomware attacks make it seem like attackers must be using complex new techniques, but prevalent ransomware attack vectors are actually well understood.

    Nearly all modern variants are breaching victim systems in one of three ways:

    • Email phishing
    • Software vulnerabilities
    • RDP/Remote access compromise
    What is new in 2022
    The sophistication of victim targeting

    Victims often find themselves asking, “How did the attackers know to phish the most security-oblivious person in my staff?” Bad actors have refined their social engineering and phishing to exploit high-risk individuals, meaning your chain is only as strong as the weakest link.

    Ability of malware to evade detection

    Modern ransomware is getting better at bypassing anti-malware technology, for example, through creative techniques such as those seen in the MedusaLocker variant and in Ghost Control attacks.

    Effective anti-malware is still a must-have control, but a single layer of defense is no longer enough. Any organization that hopes to avoid paying a ransom must prepare to detect, respond, and recover from an attack.

    Many leaders still don’t know what a ransomware recovery would look like

    Do you know what it would take to recover from a ransomware incident?

    …and does your executive leadership know what it would take to recover?

    The organizations that are most likely to pay a ransom are unprepared for the reality of recovering their systems.

    If you have not done a tabletop or live exercise to simulate a true recovery effort, you may be exposed to more risk than you realize.

    Are your defenses sufficiently hardened against ransomware?

    Organizations with effective security prevention are often breached by ransomware – but they are prepared to contain, detect, and eradicate the infection.

    Ask yourself whether you have identified potential points of entry for ransomware. Assume that your security controls will fail.

    How well are your security controls layered, and how difficult would it be for an attacker to move east/west within your systems?

    Recommended Actions

    Be prepared for a breach

    There is no guarantee that an organization will not fall victim to ransomware, so instead of putting all their effort into prevention, organizations should also put effort into planning to respond to a breach.

    Security awareness training/phishing detection

    Phishing continues to be the main point of entry for ransomware. Investing in phishing awareness and detection among your end users may be the most impactful countermeasure you can implement.

    Zero trust adoption

    Always verify at every step of interaction, even when access is requested by internal users. Manage access of sensitive information based on the principle of least privilege access.

    Encrypt and back up your data

    Encrypt your data so that even if there is a breach, the attackers don’t have a copy of your data. Also, keep regular backups of data at a separate location so that you still have data to work with after a breach occurs.

    You never want to pay a ransom. Being prepared to deal with an incident is your best chance to avoid paying!

    Prevent and respond to ransomware

    Use this template to explain the priorities you need your stakeholders to know about.

    Provide a brief value statement for the initiative.

    Determine your current readiness, response plan, and projects to close gaps.

    Initiative Description:

    • Execute a systematic assessment of your current security and ransomware recovery capabilities.
    • Perform tabletop activities and live recoveries to test data recovery capabilities.
    • Train staff to detect suspicious communications and protect their identities.
    Description must include what IT will undertake to complete the initiative.

    Primary Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing up.


    Improved productivity and brand protection

    Other Expected Business Benefits:

    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced downtime and disruption
    Arrow pointing down.
    Reduced cost due to incidents (ransom payments, remediation)
    Align initiative benefits back to business benefits or benefits for the stakeholder groups that it impacts.

    Risks:

    • Friction with existing staff

    Related Info-Tech Research:

    Deepfakes: Dark-horse threat for 2022

    Deepfake video

    How long has it been since you’ve gone a full workday without having a videoconference with someone?

    We have become inherently trustful that the face we see on the screen is real, but the technology required to falsify that video is widely available and runs on commercially available hardware, ushering in a genuinely post-truth online era.

    Criminals can use deepfakes to enhance social engineering, to spread misinformation, and to commit fraud and blackmail.

    Deepfake audio

    Many financial institutions have recently deployed voiceprint authentication. TD describes its VoicePrint as “voice recognition technology that allows us to use your voiceprint – as unique to you as your fingerprint – to validate your identity” over the phone.

    However, hackers have been defeating voice recognition for years already. There is ripe potential for voice fakes to fool both modern voice recognition technology and the accounts payable staff.

    Bibliography

    “2021 Ransomware Statistics, Data, & Trends.” PurpleSec, 2021. Web.

    Bayern, Macy. “Why 60% of IT security pros want to quit their jobs right now.” TechRepublic, 10 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Bresnahan, Ethan. “How Digital Transformation Impacts IT And Cyber Risk Programs.” CyberSaint Security, 25 Feb. 2021. Web.

    Clancy, Molly. “The True Cost of Ransomware.” Backblaze, 9 Sept. 2021.Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, 2021. Web.

    Cybersecurity Ventures. “Global Ransomware Damage Costs To Exceed $265 Billion By 2031.” Newswires, 4 June 2021. Web.

    “Digital Transformation & Cyber Risk: What You Need to Know to Stay Safe.” Ponemon Institute, June 2020. Web.

    “Global Incident Response Threat Report: Manipulating Reality.” VMware, 2021.

    Granger, Diana. “Karmen Ransomware Variant Introduced by Russian Hacker.” Recorded Future, 18 April 2017. Web.

    “Is adopting a zero trust model a priority for your organization?” Statista, 2022. Web.

    “(ISC)2 Cybersecurity Workforce Study, 2021: A Resilient Cybersecurity Profession Charts the Path Forward.” (ISC)2, 2021. Web.

    Kobialka, Dan. “What Are the Top Zero Trust Strategies for 2022?” MSSP Alert, 10 Feb. 2022. Web.

    Kost, Edward. “What is Ransomware as a Service (RaaS)? The Dangerous Threat to World Security.” UpGuard, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Lella, Ifigeneia, et al., editors. “ENISA Threat Landscape 2021.” ENISA, Oct. 2021. Web.

    Mello, John P., Jr. “700K more cybersecurity workers, but still a talent shortage.” TechBeacon, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Naraine, Ryan. “Is the ‘Great Resignation’ Impacting Cybersecurity?” SecurityWeek, 11 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Oltsik, Jon. “ESG Research Report: The Life and Times of Cybersecurity Professionals 2021 Volume V.” Enterprise Security Group, 28 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware as a service: Negotiators are now in high demand.” ZDNet, 8 July 2021. Web.

    Osborne, Charlie. “Ransomware in 2022: We’re all screwed.” ZDNet, 22 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Retaining Tech Employees in the Era of The Great Resignation.” TalentLMS, 19 Oct. 2021. Web.

    Rubin, Andrew. “Ransomware Is the Greatest Business Threat in 2022.” Nasdaq, 7 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Samartsev, Dmitry, and Daniel Dobrygowski. “5 ways Digital Transformation Officers can make cybersecurity a top priority.“ World Economic Forum, 15 Sept. 2021. Web.

    Seymour, John, and Azeem Aqil. “Your Voice is My Passport.” Presented at black hat USA 2018.

    Solomon, Howard. “Ransomware attacks will be more targeted in 2022: Trend Micro.” IT World Canada, 6 Jan. 2022. Web.

    “The State of Ransomware 2021.” Sophos, April 2021. Web.

    Tarun, Renee. “How The Great Resignation Could Benefit Cybersecurity.” Forbes Technology Council, Forbes, 21 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “TD VoicePrint.” TD Bank, n.d. Web.

    “Working from home during the COVID-19 pandemic, April 202 to June 2021.” Statistics Canada, 4 Aug. 2021. Web.

    “Zero Trust Strategies for 2022.” iSMG, Palo Alto Networks, and Optiv, 28 Jan. 2022. Web.

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}582|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
    • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
    • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Enterprise architecture is not a technical function – it should be business-value driven and forward looking, positioning organizational assets in favor of long-term strategy rather than short-term tactics.

    Impact and Result

    • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
    • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
    • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
    • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our Executive Brief to find out how implementing a successful enterprise architecture governance framework can benefit your organization.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Current State of EA Governance

    Identify the organization’s standing in terms of the enterprise architecture practice, and know the gaps and what the EA practice needs to fulfill to create a good governance framework.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 1: Current State of EA Governance
    • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    2. EA Fundamentals

    Understand the EA fundamentals and then refresh them to better align the EA practice with the organization and create business benefit.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 2: EA Fundamentals
    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template
    • EA Principles Template

    3. Engagement Model

    Analyze the IT operating model and identify EA’s role at each stage; refine it to promote effective EA engagement upfront in the early stages of the IT operating model.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 3: Engagement Model
    • EA Engagement Model Template

    4. EA Governing Bodies

    Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies, and creating an architecture review process.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 4: EA Governing Bodies
    • Architecture Board Charter Template
    • Architecture Review Process Template

    5. EA Policy

    Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 5: EA Policy
    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Assessment Checklist Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    6. Architectural Standards

    Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability. Develop a process to update the architectural standards to ensure relevancy and promote process transparency.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 6: Architectural Standards
    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    7. Communication Plan

    Craft a plan to engage the relevant stakeholders, ascertain the benefits of the initiative, and identify the various communication methods in order to maximize the chances of success.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 7: Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Current State of EA governance (Pre-workshop)

    The Purpose

    Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand current state of EA practice and prioritize gaps for EA governance based on organizational complexity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized list of actions to arrive at the target state based on the complexity of the organization

    Activities

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity.

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps.

    1.4 Conduct senior management interviews.

    Outputs

    Organizational complexity score

    EA governance current state and prioritized list of EA governance component gaps

    Stakeholder perception of the EA practice

    2 EA Fundamentals and Engagement Model

    The Purpose

    Refine EA fundamentals to align the EA practice with the organization and identify EA touchpoints to provide guidance for projects.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment of EA goals and objectives with the goals and objectives of the organization

    Early involvement of EA in the IT operating model

    Activities

    2.1 Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools.

    2.2 Craft the EA vision and mission.

    2.3 Develop the EA principles.

    2.4 Identify the EA goals.

    2.5 Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

    Outputs

    EA vision and mission statement

    EA principles

    EA goals and measures

    Identified EA engagement touchpoints and EA level of involvement

    3 EA Governing Bodies

    The Purpose

    Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies and creating an architecture review process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models while no additional layers of bureaucracy are introduced

    Activities

    3.1 Identify the number of governing bodies.

    3.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.

    3.3 Define the architecture review process.

    Outputs

    Architecture board structure and coverage

    Identified architecture review template

    4 EA Policy

    The Purpose

    Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved architecture compliance, which ties investments to business value and provides guidance to architecture practitioners

    Activities

    4.1 Define the scope.

    4.2 Identify the target audience.

    4.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.

    4.4 Craft an assessment checklist.

    Outputs

    Defined scope

    Inclusion and exclusion criteria for project review

    Architecture assessment checklist

    5 Architectural Standards and Communication Plan

    The Purpose

    Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability.

    Craft a communication plan to implement the new EA governance framework in order to maximize the chances of success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Consistent development of architecture, increased information exchange between stakeholders

    Improved process transparency

    Improved stakeholder engagement

    Activities

    5.1 Identify and standardize EA work products.

    5.2 Classifying the architectural standards.

    5.3 Identifying the custodian of standards.

    5.4 Update the standards.

    5.5 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

    5.6 Create a communication plan.

    Outputs

    Identified set of EA work products to standardize

    Architecture information taxonomy

    Identified set of custodian of standards

    Standard update process

    List of EA governance initiatives

    Communication plan for EA governance initiatives

    Further reading

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Focus on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Enterprise architecture is not a technology concept, rather it is the foundation on which businesses orient themselves to create and capture value in the marketplace. Designing architecture is not a simple task and creating organizations for the future requires forward thinking and rigorous planning.

    Architecture processes that are supposed to help facilitate discussions and drive option analysis are often seen as an unnecessary overhead. The negative perception is due to enterprise architecture groups being overly prescriptive rather than providing a set of options that guide and constrain solutions at the same time.

    EA groups should do away with the direct and control mindset and change to a collaborate and mentor mindset. As part of the architecture governance, EA teams should provide an option set that constrains design choices, and also be open to changes to standards or best practices. "

    Gopi Bheemavarapu, Sr. Manager, CIO Advisory Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand the importance of enterprise architecture (EA) governance and how to apply it to guide architectural decisions.
    • Enhance your understanding of the organization’s current EA governance and identify areas for improvement.
    • Optimize your EA engagement model to maximize value creation.
    • Learn how to set up the optimal number of governance bodies in order to avoid bureaucratizing the organization.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Business Relationship Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Analysts
    • Quality Assurance Leads
    • Software Developers

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Give an overview of enterprise architecture governance
    • Clarity on the role of enterprise architecture team

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Deployed solutions do not meet business objectives resulting in expensive and extensive rework.
    • Each department acts independently without any regular EA touchpoints.
    • Organizations practice project-level architecture as opposed to enterprise architecture.

    Complication

    • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
    • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
    • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

    Resolution

    • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
    • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints, rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
    • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
    • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology imperatives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enterprise architecture is critical to ensuring that an organization has the solid IT foundation it needs to efficiently enable the achievement of its current and future strategic goals rather than focusing on short-term tactical gains.

    What is enterprise architecture governance?

    An architecture governance process is the set of activities an organization executes to ensure that decisions are made and accountability is enforced during the execution of its architecture strategy. (Hopkins, “The Essential EA Toolkit.”)

    EA governance includes the following:

    • Implement a system of controls over the creation and monitoring of all architectural components.
    • Ensure effective introduction, implementation, and evolution of architectures within the organization.
    • Implement a system to ensure compliance with internal and external standards and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop practices that ensure accountability to a clearly identified stakeholder community, both inside and outside the organization.

    (TOGAF)

    IT governance sets direction through prioritization and decision making, and monitors overall IT performance.

    The image shows a circle set within a larger circle. The inner circle is connected to the bottom of the larger circle. The inner circle is labelled EA Governance and the larger circle is labelled IT Governance.

    EA governance ensures that optimal architectural design choices are being made that focus on long-term value creation.

    Harness the benefits of an optimized EA governance

    Core benefits of EA governance are seen through:

    Value creation

    Effective EA governance ensures alignment between organizational investments and corporate strategic goals and objectives.

    Cost reduction

    Architecture standards provide guidance to identify opportunities for reuse and eliminate redundancies in an organization.

    Risk optimization

    Architecture review processes and assessment checklists ensure that solutions are within the acceptable risk levels of the organization.

    EA governance is difficult to structure appropriately, but having an effective structure will allow you to:

    • Achieve business strategy through faster time-to-market innovations and capabilities.
    • Reduced transaction costs with more consistent business processes and information across business units.
    • Lower IT costs due to better traceability, faster design, and lower risk.
    • Link IT investments to organizational strategies and objectives
    • Integrate and institutionalizes IT best practices.
    • Enable the organization to take full advantage of its information, infrastructure, and hardware and software assets.
    • Support regulatory as well as best practice requirements such as auditability, security, responsibility, and accountability.

    Organizations that have implemented EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA programs

    Modern day CIOs of high-performing organizations use EA as a strategic planning discipline to improve business-IT alignment, enable innovation, and link business and IT strategies to execution.

    Recent Info-Tech research found that organizations that establish EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA initiatives.

    The image shows a bar graph, with Impact from EA on the Y-axis, and different initiatives listed on the X-axis. Each initiative has two bars connected to it, with a blue bar representing answers of No and the grey bar representing answers of Yes.

    (Info-Tech Research Group, N=89)

    Measure EA governance implementation effectiveness

    Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an “enabler” of business outcomes to senior executives.

    EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
    Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

    Enterprise Architecture Management

    • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

    IT Investment Portfolio Management

    • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

    Solution Development

    • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
    • Number of building blocks reused.

    Operations Management

    • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

    Business Value

    • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
    • Decreased time to production.
    • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

    An insurance provider adopts a value-focused, right-sized EA governance program

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The insurance sector has been undergoing major changes, and as a reaction, businesses within the sector have been embracing technology to provide innovative solutions.

    The head of EA in a major insurance provider (henceforth to be referred to as “INSPRO01”) was given the mandate to ensure that solutions are architected right the first time to maximize reuse and reduce technology debt. The EA group was at a critical point – to demonstrate business value or become irrelevant.

    Complication

    The project management office had been accountable for solution architecture and had placed emphasis on short-term project cost savings at the expense of long term durability.

    There was a lack of awareness of the Enterprise Architecture group within INSPRO01, and people misunderstood the roles and responsibilities of the EA team.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped define the responsibilities of the EA team and clarify the differences between the role of a Solution Architect vs. Enterprise Architect.

    The EA team was able to make the case for change in the project management practices to ensure architectures are reviewed and approved prior to implementation.

    As a result, INSPRO01 saw substantial increases in reuse opportunities and thereby derived more value from its technology investments.

    Success factors for EA governance

    The success of any EA governance initiative revolves around adopting best practices, setting up repeatable processes, and establishing appropriate controls.

    1. Develop best practices for managing architecture policies, procedures, roles, skills, and organizational structures.
    2. Establish organizational responsibilities and structures to support the architecture governance processes.
    3. Management of criteria for the control of the architecture governance processes, dispensations, compliance assessments, and SLAs.

    Info-Tech’s approach to EA governance

    Our best-practice approach is grounded in TOGAF and enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.

    Right-sized. Insert EA governance into existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.

    Measured. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance, and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.

    Balanced. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

    Info-Tech’s EA governance framework

    Info-Tech’s architectural governance framework provides a value-focused, right-sized approach with a strong emphasis on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    Use Info-Tech’s templates to complete this project

    1. Current state of EA governance
      • EA Capability - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
      • EA Governance Assessment Tool
    2. EA fundamentals
      • EA Vision and Mission Template
      • EA Goals and Measures Template
      • EA Principles Template
    3. Engagement model
      • EA Engagement Model Template
    4. EA governing bodies
      • Architecture Board Charter Template
      • Architecture Review Process Template
    5. EA policy
      • EA Policy Template
      • Architecture Assessment Checklist Template
      • Compliance Waiver Process Template
      • Compliance Waiver Form Template
    6. Architectural standards
      • Architecture Standards Update Process Template
    7. Communication Plan
      • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
      • EA Governance Framework Template

    As you move through the project, capture your progress with a summary in the EA Governance Framework Template.

    Download the EA Governance Framework Template document for use throughout this project.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (1/2)

    Current state of EA governance EA Fundamentals Engagement Model EA Governing Bodies
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

    2.1 Craft the EA vision and mission

    2.2 Develop the EA principles

    2.3 Identify the EA goals

    3.1 Build the case for EA engagement

    3.2 Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

    4.1 Identify the number of governing bodies

    4.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies

    4.3 Define the architecture review process

    Guided Implementations
    • Determine organizational complexity
    • Assess current state of EA governance
    • Develop the EA fundamentals
    • Review the EA fundamentals
    • Review the current IT operating model
    • Determine the target engagement model
    • Identify architecture boards and develop charters
    • Develop an architecture review process

    Phase 1 Results:

    • EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment
    • EA governance assessment

    Phase 2 Results:

    • EA vision and mission
    • EA goals and measures
    • EA principles

    Phase 3 Results:

    • EA engagement model

    Phase 4 Results:

    • Architecture board charter
    • Architecture review process

    EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (2/2)

    EA Policy Architectural Standards Communication Plan
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    5.1 Define the scope of EA policy

    5.2 Identify the target audience

    5.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria

    5.4 Craft an assessment checklist

    6.1 Identify and standardize EA work products

    6.2 Classify the architectural standards

    6.3 Identify the custodian of standards

    6.4 Update the standards

    7.1 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

    7.2 Identify stakeholders

    7.3 Create a communication plan

    Guided Implementations
    • EA policy, assessment checklists, and decision types
    • Compliance waivers
    • Understand architectural standards
    • EA repository and updating the standards
    • Create a communication plan
    • Review the communication plan

    Phase 5 Results:

    • EA policy
    • Architecture assessment checklist
    • Compliance waiver process
    • Compliance waiver form

    Phase 6 Results:

    • Architecture standards update process

    Phase 7 Results:

    • Communication plan
    • EA governance framework

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Pre-workshopWorkshop Day 1Workshop Day 2Workshop Day 3Workshop Day 4
    ActivitiesCurrent state of EA governance EA fundamentals and engagement model EA governing bodies EA policy Architectural standards and

    communication plan

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

    1.4 Senior management interviews

    1. Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools
    2. Craft the EA vision and mission
    3. Develop the EA principles.
    4. Identify the EA goals
    5. Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model
    1. Identify the number of governing bodies
    2. Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
    3. Define the architecture review process
    1. Define the scope
    2. Identify the target audience
    3. Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
    4. Craft an assessment checklist
    1. Identify and standardize EA work products
    2. Classifying the architectural standards
    3. Identifying the custodian of standards
    4. Updating the standards
    5. List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
    6. Identify stakeholders
    7. Create a communication plan
    Deliverables
    1. EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment tool
    2. EA governance assessment tool
    1. EA vision and mission template
    2. EA goals and measures template
    3. EA principles template
    4. EA engagement model template
    1. Architecture board charter template
    2. Architecture review process template
    1. EA policy template
    2. Architecture assessment checklist template
    3. Compliance waiver process template
    4. Compliance waiver form template
    1. Architecture standards update process template
    2. Communication plan template

    Phase 1

    Current State of EA Governance

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Current State of EA Governance

    1. Current State of EA Governance
    2. EA Fundamentals
    3. Engagement Model
    4. EA Governing Bodies
    5. EA Policy
    6. Architectural Standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine organizational complexity
    • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components
    • Identify and prioritize gaps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritized list of gaps

    Info-Tech Insight

    Correlation is not causation – an apparent problem might be a symptom rather than a cause. Assess the organization’s current EA governance to discover the root cause and go beyond the symptoms.

    Phase 1 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Current State of EA Governance

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 1.1: Determine organizational complexity

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how to use Info-Tech’s EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool.
    • Discuss how to complete the inputs on the EA Governance Assessment Tool.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Conduct an assessment of your organization to determine its complexity.
    • Assess the state of EA governance within your organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Step 1.2: Assess current state of EA governance

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the output of the EA governance assessment and gather feedback on your goals for the EA practice.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Discuss whether you are ready to proceed with the project.
    • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Right-size EA governance based on organizational complexity

    Determining organizational complexity is not rocket science. Use Info-Tech’s tool to quantify the complexity and use it, along with common sense, to determine the appropriate level of architecture governance.

    Info-Tech’s methodology uses six factors to determine the complexity of the organization:

    1. The size of the organization, which can often be denoted by the revenue, headcount, number of applications in use, and geographical diversity.
    2. The solution alignment factor helps indicate the degree to which various projects map to the organization’s strategy.
    3. The size and complexity of the IT infrastructure and networks.
    4. The portfolio of applications maintained by the IT organization.
    5. Key changes within the organization such as M&A, regulatory changes, or a change in business or technology leadership.
    6. Other negative influences that can adversely affect the organization.

    Determine your organization’s level of complexity

    1.1 2 hours

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Capability section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool to facilitate a session on determining your organization’s complexity.

    Download EA Organizational - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the results in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Understand the components of effective EA governance

    EA governance is multi-faceted and it facilitates effective use of resources to meet organizational strategic objectives through well-defined structural elements.

    EA Governance

    • Fundamentals
    • Engagement Model
    • Policy
    • Governing Bodies
    • Architectural Standards

    Components of architecture governance

    1. EA vision, mission, goals, metrics, and principles that provide a direction for the EA practice.
    2. An engagement model showing where and in what fashion EA is engaged in the IT operating model.
    3. An architecture policy formulated and enforced by the architectural governing bodies to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.
    4. Governing bodies to assess projects for compliance and provide feedback.
    5. Architectural standards that codify the EA work products to ensure consistent development of architecture.

    Next Step: Based on the organization’s complexity, conduct a current state assessment of EA governance using Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool.

    Assess the components of EA governance in your organization

    1.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Governance section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the “EA Governance Assessment Tool” to facilitate a session on identifying the best practices to be applied in your organization.

    Download Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the identified best practices in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Conduct a current state assessment to identify limitations of the existing EA governance framework

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 was planning a major transformation initiative. The organization determined that EA is a strategic function.

    The CIO had pledged support to the EA group and had given them a mandate to deliver long-term strategic architecture.

    The business leaders did not trust the EA team and believed that lack of business skills in the group put the business transformation at risk.

    Complication

    The EA group had been traditionally seen as a technology organization that helps with software design.

    The EA team lacked understanding of the business and hence there had been no common language between business and technology.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped the EA team create a set of 10 architectural principles that are business-value driven rather than technical statements.

    The team socialized the principles with the business and technology stakeholders and got their approvals.

    By applying the business focused architectural principles, the EA team was able to connect with the business leaders and gain their support.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Determine organizational complexity.
    • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.
    • Identify and prioritize gaps.

    Outcomes

    • Organizational complexity assessment
    • EA governance capability assessment
    • A prioritized list of capability gaps

    Phase 2

    EA Fundamentals

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Fundamentals

    1. Current State of EA Governance
    2. EA Fundamentals
    3. Engagement Model
    4. EA Governing Bodies
    5. EA Policy
    6. Architectural Standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Craft the EA vision and mission
    • Develop the EA principles.
    • Identify the EA goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance

    Info-Tech Insight

    A house divided against itself cannot stand – ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned with the organization’s goals and objectives.

    Phase 2 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: EA Fundamentals

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

    Step 2.1: Develop the EA fundamentals

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the importance of the EA fundamentals – vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
    • Understand how to align the EA vision, mission, goals, and measures to your organization’s vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop the EA vision statements.
    • Craft the EA mission statements.
    • Define EA goals and measures.
    • Adopt EA principles.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Principles Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template

    Step 2.2: Review the EA fundamentals

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the EA fundamentals in conjunction with the results of the EA governance assessment tool and gather feedback.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the EA vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
    • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Principles Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template

    Fundamentals of an EA organization

    Vision, mission, goals and measures, and principles form the foundation of the EA function.

    Factors to consider when developing the vision and mission statements

    The vision and mission statements provide strategic direction to the EA team. These statements should be created based on the business and technology drivers in the organization.

    Business Drivers

    • Business drivers are factors that determine, or cause, an increase in value or major improvement of a business.
    • Examples of business drivers include:
      • Increased revenue
      • Customer retention
      • Salesforce effectiveness
      • Innovation

    Technology Drivers

    • Technology drivers are factors that are vital for the continued success and growth of a business using effective technologies.
    • Examples of technology drivers include:
      • Enterprise integration
      • Information security
      • Portability
      • Interoperability

    "The very essence of leadership is [that] you have a vision. It's got to be a vision you articulate clearly and forcefully on every occasion. You can't blow an uncertain trumpet." – Theodore Hesburgh

    Develop vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles to define the EA capability direction and purpose

    EA capability vision statement

    Articulates the desired future state of EA capability expressed in the present tense.

    • What will be the role of EA capability?
    • How will EA capability be perceived?

    Example: To be recognized by both the business and IT as a trusted partner that drives [Company Name]’s effectiveness, efficiency, and agility.

    EA capability mission statement

    Articulates the fundamental purpose of the EA capability.

    • Why does EA capability exist?
    • What does EA capability do to realize its vision?
    • Who are the key customers of the EA capability?

    Example: Define target enterprise architecture for [Company Name], identify solution opportunities, inform IT investment management, and direct solution development, acquisition, and operation compliance.

    EA capability goals and measures

    EA capability goals define specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. EA capability measures define how to validate the achievement of the EA capability goals.

    Example:

    Goal: Improve reuse of IT assets at [Company Name].

    Measures:

    • The number of building blocks available for reuse.
    • Percent of projects that utilized existing building blocks.
    • Estimated efficiency gain (= effort to create a building block * reuse count).

    EA principles

    EA principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting target-state enterprise architecture design, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    Example:

    • EA principle name: Reuse.
    • Statement: Maximize reuse of existing assets.
    • Rationale: Reuse prevents duplication of development and support efforts, increasing efficiency, and agility.
    • Implications: Define architecture and solution building blocks and ensure their consistent application.

    EA principles guide decision making

    Policies can be seen as “the letter of the law,” whereas EA principles summarize “the spirit of the law.”

    The image shows a graphic with EA Principles listed at the top, with an arrow pointing down to Decisions on the use of IT. At the bottom are domain-specific policies, with two arrows pointing upwards: the arrow on the left is labelled direct, and the arrow on the right is labelled control. The arrow points up to the label Decisions on the use of IT. On the left, there is an arrow pointing both up and down. At the top it is labelled The spirit of the law, and at the bottom, The letter of the law. On the right, there is another arrow pointing both up and down, labelled How should decisions be made at the top and labelled Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions? at the bottom.

    Define EA capability goals and related measures that resonate with EA capability stakeholders

    EA capability goals, i.e. specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. Use COBIT 5, APO03 process goals, and metrics as a starting point.

    The image shows a chart titled Manage Enterprise Architecture.

    Define relevant business value measures to collect indirect evidence of EA’s contribution to business benefits

    Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an enabler of business outcomes to senior executives.

    EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
    Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

    Enterprise Architecture Management

    • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

    IT Investment Portfolio Management

    • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

    Solution Development

    • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
    • Number of building blocks reused.

    Operations Management

    • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

    Business Value

    • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
    • Decreased time to production.
    • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

    Refine the organization’s EA fundamentals

    2.1 2 hrs

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents with four sections highlighted, beginning with EA Vision Statement and ending with EA Goals and Measures.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the three templates and hold a working session to facilitate a session on creating EA fundamentals.

    Download the EA Vision and Mission Template, the EA Principles Template, and the EA Goals and Measures Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Document the final vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures within the EA Governance Framework.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned to the organizational needs

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The EA group at INSPRO01 was being pulled in multiple directions with requests ranging from architecture review to solution design to code reviews.

    Project level architecture was being practiced with no clarity on the end goal. This led to EA being viewed as just another IT function without any added benefits.

    Info-Tech recommended that the EA team ensure that the fundamentals (vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures) reflect what the team aspired to achieve before fixing any of the process concerns.

    Complication

    The EA team was mostly comprised of technical people and hence the best practices outlined were not driven by business value.

    The team had no documented vision and mission statements in place. In addition, the existing goals and measures were not tied to the business strategic objectives.

    The team had architectural principles documented, but there were too many and they were very technical in nature.

    Result

    With Info-Tech’s guidance, the team developed a vision and mission statement to succinctly communicate the purpose of the EA function.

    The team also reduced and simplified the EA principles to make sure they were value driven and communicated in business terms.

    Finally, the team proposed goals and measures to track the performance of the EA team.

    With the fundamentals in place, the team was able to show the value of EA and gain organization-wide acceptance.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Craft the EA vision and mission.
    • Develop the EA principles.
    • Identify the EA goals.

    Outcomes

    • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance.

    Phase 3

    Engagement Model

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Engagement Model

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build the case for EA engagement
    • Engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
    • Target EA engagement model

    Info-Tech Insight

    Perform due diligence prior to decision making. Use the EA Engagement Model to promote conversations between stage gate meetings as opposed to having the conversation during the stage gate meetings.

    Phase 3 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: EA engagement model

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 3.1 Review the current IT operating model

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review Info-Tech’s IT operating model.
    • Understand how to document your organization’s IT operating model.
    • Document EA’s current role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document your organization’s IT operating model.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Engagement Model Template

    Step 3.2: Determine the target engagement model

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your organization’s current state IT operating model.
    • Review your EA’s role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.
    • Document the role and responsibility of EA in the future state.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document EA’s future role within each stage of your organization’s IT operating model.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Engagement Model Template.

    The three pillars of EA Engagement

    Effective EA engagement revolves around three basic principles – generating business benefits, creating adaptable models, and being able to replicate the process across the organization.

    Business Value Driven

    Focus on generating business value from organizational investments.

    Repeatable

    Process should be standardized, transparent, and repeatable so that it can be consistently applied across the organization.

    Flexible

    Accommodate the varying needs of projects of different sizes.

    Where these pillars meet: Advocates long-term strategic vs. short-term tactical solutions.

    EA interaction points within the IT operating model

    EA’s engagement in each stage within the plan, build, and run phases should be clearly defined and communicated.

    Plan Strategy Development Business Planning Conceptualization Portfolio Management
    Build Requirements Solution Design Application Development/ Procurement Quality Assurance
    Run Deploy Operate

    Document the organization’s current IT operating model

    3.1 2-3 hr

    Input

    • IT project lifecycle

    Output

    • Organization’s current IT operating model.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, IT department leads, business leaders.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to document the current IT operating model. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Map out the IT operating model.

    1. Find a project that was just deployed within the organization and backtrack every step of the way to the strategy development that resulted in the conception of the project.
    2. Interview the personnel involved with each step of the process to get a sense of whether or not projects usually move to deployment going through these steps.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s best-practice IT operating model presented in the EA Engagement Model Template, and add or remove any steps to the existing organization’s IT operating model as necessary. Document the finalized steps of the IT operating model.

    2. Determine EA’s current role in the operating model.

    1. Interview EA personnel through each step of the process and ask them their role. This is to get a sense of the type of input that EA is having into each step of the process.
    2. Using the EA Engagement Model Template, document the current role of EA in each step of the organization’s IT operation as you complete the interviews.

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template to document the organization’s current IT operating model.

    Define RACI in every stage of the IT operating model (e.g. EA role in strategy development phase of the IT operating model is presented below)

    Strategy Development

    Also known as strategic planning, strategy development is fundamental to creating and running a business. It involves the creation of a longer-term game plan or vision that sets specific goals and objectives for a business.

    R Those in charge of performing the task. These are the people actively involved in the completion of the required work. Business VPs, EA, IT directors R
    A The one ultimately answerable for the correct and thorough completion of the deliverable or task, and the one who delegates the work to those responsible. CEO A
    C Those whose opinions are sought before a decision is made, and with whom there is two-way communication. PMO, Line managers, etc. C
    I Those who are kept up to date on progress, and with whom there is one-way communication. Development managers, etc. I

    Next Step: Similarly define the RACI for each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

    Best practices on the role of EA within the IT operating model

    Plan

    Strategy Development

    C

    Business Planning

    C

    Conceptualization

    A

    Portfolio Management

    C

    Build

    Requirements

    C

    Solution Design

    R

    Application Development/ Procurement

    R

    Quality Assurance

    I

    Run

    Deploy

    I

    Operate

    I

    Next Step: Define the role of EA in each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

    Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

    3.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Organization’s IT operating model.

    Output

    • Organization’s EA engagement model.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business leaders, IT department leaders.

    The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Engagement Model Template with the EA Engagement Summary section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template and hold a working session to define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model.

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Document the target state role of EA within the EA Governance Framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Design an EA engagement model to formalize EA’s role within the IT operating model

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 had a high IT cost structure with looming technology debt due to a preference for short-term tactical gains over long-term solutions.

    The business satisfaction with IT was at an all-time low due to expensive solutions that did not meet business needs.

    INSPRO01’s technology landscape was in disarray with many overlapping systems and interoperability issues.

    Complication

    No single team within the organization had an end-to-end perspective all the way from strategy to project execution. A lot of information was being lost in handoffs between different teams.

    This led to inconsistent design/solution patterns being applied. Investment decisions had not been grounded in reality and this often led to cost overruns.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped INSPRO01 identify opportunities for EA team engagement at different stages of the IT operating model. EA’s role within each stage was clearly defined and documented.

    With Info-Tech’s help, the EA team successfully made the case for engagement upfront during strategy development rather than during project execution.

    The increased transparency enabled the EA team to ensure that investments were aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Build the case for EA engagement.
    • Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

    Outcomes

    • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
    • Target EA engagement model

    Phase 4

    EA Governing Bodies

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Governing Bodies

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify the number of governing bodies
    • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
    • Define the architecture review process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Charter definition for each EA governance board

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use architecture governance like a scalpel rather than a hatchet. Implement governing bodies to provide guidance rather than act as a police force.

    Phase 4 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Create or identify EA governing bodies

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 4.1: Identify architecture boards and develop charters

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Understand the factors influencing the number of governing bodies required for an organization.
    • Understand the components of a governing body charter.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify how many governing bodies are needed.
    • Define EA governing body composition, meeting frequency, and domain of coverage.
    • Define the inputs and outputs of each EA governing body.
    • Identify mandatory inclusion criteria.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Board Charter Template

    Step 4.2: Develop an architecture review process

    Follow-up with an analyst call:

    • Review the number of boards identified for your organization and gather feedback.
    • Review the charters developed for each governing body and gather feedback.
    • Understand the various factors that impact the architecture review process.
    • Review Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the charters for governing bodies.
    • Develop the architecture review process for your organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Review Process Template

    Factors that determine the number of architectural boards required

    The primary purpose of architecture boards is to ensure that business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models without introducing additional layers of bureaucracy.

    The optimal number of architecture boards required in an organization is a function of the following factors:

    • EA organization model
      • Distributed
      • Federated
      • Centralized
    • Architecture domains Maturity of architecture domains
    • Project throughput

    Commonly observed architecture boards:

    • Architecture Review Board
    • Technical Architecture Committee
    • Data Architecture Review Board
    • Infrastructure Architecture Review Board
    • Security Architecture Review Board

    Info-Tech Insight

    Before building out a new governance board, start small by repurposing existing forums by adding architecture as an agenda item. As the items for review increase consider introducing dedicated governing bodies.

    EA organization model drives the architecture governance structure

    EA teams can be organized in three ways – distributed, federated, and centralized. Each model has its own strengths and weaknesses. EA governance must be structured in a way such that the strengths are harvested and the weaknesses are mitigated.

    Distributed Federated Centralized
    EA org. structure
    • No overarching EA team exists and segment architects report to line of business (LOB) executives.
    • A centralized EA team exists with segment architects reporting to LOB executives and dotted-line to head of (centralized) EA.
    • A centralized EA capability exists with enterprise architects reporting to the head of EA.
    Implications
    • Produces a fragmented and disjointed collection of architectures.
    • Economies of scale are not realized.
    • High cross-silo integration effort.
    • LOB-specific approach to EA.
    • Requires dual reporting relationships.
    • Additional effort is required to coordinate centralized EA policies and blueprints with segment EA policies and blueprints.
    • Accountabilities may be unclear.
    • Can be less responsive to individual LOB needs, because the centralized EA capability must analyze needs of multiple LOBs and various trade-off options to avoid specialized, one-off solutions.
    • May impede innovation.
    Architectural boards
    • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and common services.
    • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB-specific needs.
    • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns and common services.
    • Cross-enterprise boards to ensure adherence to enterprise standards and reduce integration costs.
    • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB specific needs.
    • Enterprise working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and all services.
    • Central board to ensure adherence to enterprise standards.

    Architecture domains influences the number of architecture boards required

    • An architecture review board (ARB) provides direction for domain-specific boards and acts as an escalation point. The ARB must have the right mix of both business and technology stakeholders.
    • Domain-specific boards provide a platform to have focused discussions on items specific to that domain.
    • Based on project throughput and the maturity of each domain, organizations would have to pick the optimal number of boards.
    • Architecture working groups provide a platform for cross-domain conversations to establish organization wide standards.
    Level 1 Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
    Level 2 Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
    Level 3 Architecture Working Groups Architects

    Create a game plan for the architecture boards

    • Start with a single board for each level – an architecture review board (ARB), a technical architecture committee (TAC), and architecture working groups.
    • As the organization matures and the number of requests to the TAC increase, consider creating domain-specific boards – such as business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, etc. – to handle architecture decisions pertaining to that domain.

    Start with this:

    Level 1 Architecture Review Board
    Level 2 Technical Architecture Committee
    Level 3 Architecture Working Groups

    Change to this:

    Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
    Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
    Architecture Working Groups Architects

    Architecture boards have different objectives and activities

    The boards at each level should be set up with the correct agenda – ensure that the boards’ composition and activities reflect their objective. Use the entry criteria to communicate the agenda for their meetings.

    Architecture Review Board Technical Architecture Committee
    Objective
    • Evaluates business strategy, needs, and priorities, sets direction and acts as a decision making authority of the EA capability.
    • Directs the development of target state architecture.
    • Monitors performance and compliance of the architectural standards.
    • Monitor project solution architecture compliance to standards, regulations, EA principles, and target state EA blueprints.
    • Review EA compliance waiver requests, make recommendations, and escalate to the architecture review board (ARB).
    Composition
    • Business Leadership
    • IT Leadership
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Business Managers
    • IT Managers
    • Architects
    Activities
    • Review compliance of conceptual solution to standards.
    • Discuss the enterprise implications of the proposed solution.
    • Select and approve vendors.
    • Review detailed solution design.
    • Discuss the risks of the proposed solution.
    • Discuss the cost of the proposed solution.
    • Review and recommend vendors.
    Entry Criteria
    • Changes to IT Enterprise Technology Policy.
    • Changes to the technology management plan.
    • Approve changes to enterprise technology inventory/portfolio.
    • Ongoing operational cost impacts.
    • Detailed estimates for the solution are ready for review.
    • There are significant changes to protocols or technologies responsible for solution.
    • When the project is deviating from baselined architectures.

    Identify the number of governing bodies

    4.1 2 hrs

    Input

    • EA Vision and Mission
    • EA Engagement Model

    Output

    • A list of EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to identify the number of governing bodies. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Examine the EA organization models mentioned previously. Assess how your organization is structured, and identify whether your organization has a federated, distributed or centralized EA organization model.
    2. Reference the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide. Assess the architecture domains, and define how many there are in the organization.
    3. Architecture domains:
      1. If no defined architecture domains exist, model the number of governing bodies in the organization based on the “Start with this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
      2. If defined architecture domains do exist, model the number of governing bodies based on the “Change to this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
    4. Name each governing body you have defined in the previous step. Download Info-Tech’s Architecture Board Charter Template for each domain you have named. Input the names into the title of each downloaded template.

    Download the Architecture Board Charter Template to document this activity.

    Defining the governing body charter

    The charter represents the agreement between the governing body and its stakeholders about the value proposition and obligations to the organization.

    1. Purpose: The reason for the existence of the governing body and its goals and objectives.
    2. Composition: The members who make up the committee and their roles and responsibilities in it.
    3. Frequency of meetings: The frequency at which the committee gathers to discuss items and make decisions.
    4. Entry/Exit Criteria: The criteria by which the committee selects items for review and items for which decisions can be taken.
    5. Inputs: Materials that are provided as inputs for review and decision making by the committee.
    6. Outputs: Materials that are provided by the committee after an item has been reviewed and the decision made.
    7. Activities: Actions undertaken by the committee to arrive at its decision.

    Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

    4.2 3 hrs

    Input

    • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

    Output

    • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Governance Framework document, with the Architecture Board Charters highlighted.

    Step 1 Facilitate

    Hold a working session with the stakeholders to define the charter for each of the identified architecture boards.

    Download Architecture Board Charter Template

    Step 2 Summarize

    • Summarize the objectives of each board and reference the charter document within the EA Governance Framework.
    • Upload the final charter document to the team’s common repository.

    Update the EA Governance Framework document


    Considerations when creating an architecture review process

    • Ensure that architecture review happens at major milestones within the organization’s IT Operating Model such as the plan, build, and run phases.
    • In order to provide continuous engagement, make the EA group accountable for solution architecture in the plan phase. In the build phase, the EA group will be consulted while the solution architect will be responsible for the project solution architecture.

    Plan

    • Strategy Development
    • Business Planning
    • A - Conceptualization
    • Portfolio Management

    Build

    • Requirements
    • R - Solution Design
    • Application Development/ Procurement
    • Quality Assurance

    Run

    • Deploy
    • Operate

    Best-practice project architecture review process

    The best-practice model presented facilitates the creation of sound solution architecture through continuous engagement with the EA team and well-defined governance checkpoints.

    The image shows a graphic of the best-practice model. At the left, four categories are listed: Committees; EA; Project Team; LOB. At the top, three categories are listed: Plan; Build; Run. Within the area between these categories is a flow chart demonstrating the best-practice model and specific checkpoints throughout.

    Develop the architecture review process

    4.3 2 hours

    Input

    • A list of all EA governing bodies.
    • Info-Tech’s best practice architecture review process.

    Output

    • The new architecture review process.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Hold a working session with the participants to develop the architecture review process. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Reference Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process embedded within the “Architecture Review Process Template” to gain an understanding of an ideal architecture review process.
    2. Identify the stages within the plan, build, and run phases where solution architecture reviews should occur, and identify the governing bodies involved in these reviews.
    3. As you go through these stages, record your findings in the Architecture Review Process Template.
    4. Connect the various activities leading to and from the architecture creation points to outline the review process.

    Download the Architecture Review Process Template for additional guidance regarding developing an architecture review process.

    Develop the architecture review process

    4.3 2 hrs

    Input

    • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

    Output

    • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents, with the Architecture Review Process highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download Architecture Review Process Template and facilitate a session to customize the best-practice model presented in the template.

    Download the Architecture Review Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the process changes and document the process flow in the EA Governance Framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Right-size EA governing bodies to reduce the perception of red tape

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    At INSPRO01, architecture governance boards were a bottleneck. The boards fielded all project requests, ranging from simple screen label changes to complex initiatives spanning multiple applications.

    These boards were designed as forums for technology discussions without any business stakeholder involvement.

    Complication

    INSPRO01’s management never gave buy-in to the architecture governance boards since their value was uncertain.

    Additionally, architectural reviews were perceived as an item to be checked off rather than a forum for getting feedback.

    Architectural exceptions were not being followed through due to the lack of a dispensation process.

    Result

    Info-Tech has helped the team define adaptable inclusion/exclusion criteria (based on project complexity) for each of the architectural governing boards.

    The EA team was able to make the case for business participation in the architecture forums to better align business and technology investment.

    An architecture dispensation process was created and operationalized. As a result architecture reviews became more transparent with well-defined next steps.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Identify the number of governing bodies.
    • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.
    • Define the architecture review process.

    Outcomes

    • Charter definition for each EA governance board

    Phase 5

    EA Policy

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Policy

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the EA policy scope
    • Identify the target audience
    • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
    • Create an assessment checklist

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • The completed EA policy
    • Project assessment checklist
    • Defined assessment outcomes
    • Completed compliance waiver process

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use the EA policy to promote EA’s commitment to deliver value to business stakeholders through process transparency, stakeholder engagement, and compliance.

    Phase 5 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 5: EA Policy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

    Step 5.1–5.3: EA Policy, Assessment Checklists, and Decision Types

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss the three pillars of EA policy and its purpose.
    • Review the components of an effective EA policy.
    • Understand how to develop architecture assessment checklists.
    • Understand the assessment decision types.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Define purpose, scope, and audience of the EA policy.
    • Create a project assessment checklist.
    • Define the organization’s assessment decision type.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Assessment Checklist Template

    Step 5.4: Compliance Waivers

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your draft EA policy and gather feedback.
    • Review your project assessment checklists and the assessment decision types.
    • Discuss the best-practice architecture compliance waiver process and how to tailor it to your organizational needs.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the EA policy based on feedback gathered.
    • Create the compliance waiver process.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    Three pillars of architecture policy

    Architecture policy is a set of guidelines, formulated and enforced by the governing bodies of an organization, to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.

    Architecture compliance – promotes compliance to organizational standards through well-defined assessment checklists across architectural domains.

    Business value – ensures that investments are tied to business value by enforcing traceability to business capabilities.

    Architectural guidance – provides guidance to architecture practitioners on the application of the business and technology standards.

    Components of EA policy

    An enterprise architecture policy is an actionable document that can be applied to projects of varying complexity across the organization.

    1. Purpose and Scope: This EA policy document clearly defines the scope and the objectives of architecture reviews within an organization.
    2. Target Audience: The intended audience of the policy such as employees and partners.
    3. Architecture Assessment Checklist: A wide range of typical questions that may be used in conducting Architecture Compliance reviews, relating to various aspects of the architecture.
    4. Assessment Outcomes: The outcome of the architecture review process that determines the conformance of a project solution to the enterprise architecture standards.
    5. Compliance Waiver: Used when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

    Draft the purpose and scope of the EA policy

    5.1 2.5 hrs

    Input

    • A consensus on the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

    Output

    • Documented version of the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Policy section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Policy Template and hold a working session to draft the EA policy.

    Download the EA Policy Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize purpose, scope, and intended audience of the policy in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the purpose, scope and intended audience.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Architecture assessment checklist

    Architecture assessment checklist is a list of future-looking criteria that a project will be assessed against. It provides a set of standards against which projects can be assessed in order to render a decision on whether or not the project can be greenlighted.

    Architecture checklists should be created for each EA domain since each domain provides guidance on specific aspects of the project.

    Sample Checklist Questions

    Business Architecture:

    • Is the project aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives?
    • What are the business capabilities that the project supports? Is it creating new capabilities or supporting an existing one?

    Data Architecture:

    • What processes are in place to support data referential integrity and/or normalization?
    • What is the physical data model definition (derived from logical data models) used to design the database?

    Application Architecture:

    • Can this application be placed on an application server independent of all other applications? If not, explain the dependencies.
    • Can additional parallel application servers be easily added? If so, what is the load balancing mechanism?

    Infrastructure Architecture:

    • Does the solution provide high-availability and fault-tolerance that can recover from events within a datacenter?

    Security Architecture:

    • Have you ensured that the corporate security policies and guidelines to which you are designing are the latest versions?

    Create architectural assessment checklists

    5.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Reference architecture models.

    Output

    • Architecture assessment checklist.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Assessment Checklist section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template and hold a working session to create the architectural assessment checklists.

    Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize the major points of the checklists in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the detailed architecture assessment checklists.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Architecture assessment decision types

    • As a part of the proposed solution review, the governing bodies produce a decision indicating the compliance of the solution architecture with the enterprise standards.
    • Go, No Go, or Conditional are a sample set of decision outcomes available to the governing bodies.
    • On a conditional approval, the project team must file for a compliance waiver.

    Approved

    • The solution demonstrates substantial compliance with standards.
    • Negligible risk to the organization or minimal risks with sound plans of how to mitigate them.
    • Architectural approval to proceed with delivery type of work.

    Conditional Approval

    • The significant aspects of the solution have been addressed in a satisfactory manner.
    • Yet, there are some aspects of the solution that are not compliant with standards.
    • The architectural approval is conditional upon presenting the missing evidence within a minimal period of time determined.
    • The risk level may be acceptable to the organization from an overall IT governance perspective.

    Not Approved

    • The solution is not compliant with the standards.
    • Scheduled for a follow-up review.
    • Not recommended to proceed until the solution is more compliant with the standards.

    Best-practice architecture compliance waiver process

    Waivers are not permanent. Waiver terms must be documented for each waiver specifying:

    • Time period after which the architecture in question will be compliant with the enterprise architecture.
    • The modifications necessary to the enterprise architecture to accommodate the solution.

    The image shows a flow chart, split into 4 sections: Enterprise Architect; Solution Architect; TAC; ARB. To the right of these section labels, there is a flow chart that documents the waiver process.

    Create compliance waiver process

    5.4 3-4 hrs

    Input

    • A consensus on the compliance waiver process.

    Output

    • Documented compliance waiver process and form.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents with the Compliance Waiver Form section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA compliance waiver template and hold a working session to customize the best-practice process to your organization’s needs.

    Download the EA Compliance Waiver Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize the objectives and high-level process in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the compliance waiver process.
    • Upload the final policy document to the team’s common repository.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Creates an enterprise architecture policy to drive adoption

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    EA program adoption across INSPRO01 was at its lowest point due to a lack of transparency into the activities performed by the EA group.

    Often, projects ignored EA entirely as it was viewed as a nebulous and non-value-added activity that produced no measurable results.

    Complication

    There was very little documented information about the architecture assessment process and the standards against which project solution architectures were evaluated.

    Additionally, there were no well-defined outcomes for the assessment.

    Project groups were left speculating about the next steps and with little guidance on what to do after completing an assessment.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped the EA team create an EA policy containing architecture significance criteria, assessment checklists, and reference to the architecture review process.

    Additionally, the team also identified guidelines and detailed next steps for projects based on the outcome of the architecture assessment.

    These actions brought clarity to EA processes and fostered better engagement with the EA group.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Define the scope.
    • Identify the target audience.
    • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.
    • Create an assessment checklist.

    Outcomes

    • The completed EA policy
    • Project assessment checklist
    • Defined assessment outcomes
    • Completed compliance waiver process

    Phase 6

    Architectural Standards

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Architectural Standards

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and standardize EA work products
    • Classify the architectural standards
    • Identify the custodian of standards
    • Update the standards

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • A standardized set of EA work products
    • A way to categorize and store EA work products
    • A defined method of updating standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    The architecture standard is the currency that facilitates information exchange between stakeholders. The primary purpose is to minimize transaction costs by providing a balance between stability and relevancy.

    Phase 6 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 6: Architectural standards

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 6.1: Understand Architectural Standards

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss architectural standards.
    • Know how to identify and define EA work products.
    • Understand the standard content of work products.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify and standardize EA work products.

    Step 6.2–6.3: EA Repository and Updating the Standards

    Review with analyst:

    • Review the standardized EA work products.
    • Discuss the principles of EA repository.
    • Discuss the Info-Tech best-practice model for updating architecture standards and how to tailor them to your organizational context.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a folder structure for storing EA work products.
    • Use the Info-Tech best-practice architecture standards update process to develop your organization’s process for updating architecture standards.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    Recommended list of EA work products to standardize

    • EA work products listed below are typically produced as a part of the architecture lifecycle.
    • To ensure consistent development of architecture, the work products need to be standardized.
    • Consider standardizing both the naming conventions and the content of the work products.
    1. EA vision: A document containing the vision that provides the high-level aspiration of the capabilities and business value that EA will deliver.
    2. Statement of EA Work: The Statement of Architecture Work defines the scope and approach that will be used to complete an architecture project.
    3. Reference architectures: A reference architecture is a set of best-practice taxonomy that describes components and the conceptual structure of the model, as well as graphics, which provide a visual representation of the taxonomy to aid understanding. Reference architectures are created for each of the architecture domains.
    4. Solution proposal: The proposed project solution based on the EA guidelines and standards.
    5. Compliance assessment request: The document that contains the project solution architecture assessment details.
    6. Architecture change request: The request that initiates a change to architecture standards when existing standards can no longer meet the needs of the enterprise.
    7. Transition architecture: A transition architecture shows the enterprise at incremental states that reflect periods of transition that sit between the baseline and target architectures.
    8. Architectural roadmap: A roadmap that lists individual increments of change and lays them out on a timeline to show progression from the baseline architecture to the target architecture.
    9. EA compliance waiver request: A compliance waiver request that must be made when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

    Standardize the content of each work product

    1. Purpose - The reason for the existence of the work product.
    2. Owner - The owner of this EA work product.
    3. Target Audience - The intended audience of the work product such as employees and partners.
    4. Naming Pattern - The pattern for the name of the work product as well as its file name.
    5. Table of Contents - The various sections of the work product.
    6. Review & Sign-Off Authority - The stakeholders who will review the work product and approve it.
    7. Repository Folder Location - The location where the work product will be stored.

    Identify and standardize work products

    6.1 3 hrs

    Input

    • List of various documents being produced by projects currently.

    Output

    • Standardized list of work products.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to identify and standardize work products. Facilitate the activity using the steps below.

    1. Identifying EA work products:
      1. Start by reviewing the list of all architecture-related documents presently produced in the organization. Any such deliverable with the following characteristics can be standardized:
        1. If it can be broken out and made into a standalone document.
        2. If it can be made into a fill-in form completed by others.
        3. If it is repetitive and requires iterative changes.
      2. Create a list of work products that your organization would like to standardize based on the characteristics above.
    2. The content and format of standardized EA work products:
      1. For each work product your organization wishes to standardize, look at its purpose and brainstorm the content needed to fulfill that purpose.
      2. After identifying the elements that need to be included in the work product to fulfill its purpose, order them logically for presentation purposes.
      3. In each section of the work product that need to be completed, include instructions on how to complete the section.
      4. Review the seven elements presented in the previous slide and include them in the work products.

    EA repository - information taxonomy

    As the EA function begins to grow and accumulates EA work products, having a well-designed folder structure helps you find the necessary information efficiently.

    Architecture meta-model

    Describes the organizationally tailored architecture framework.

    Architecture capability

    Defines the parameters, structures, and processes that support the enterprise architecture group.

    Architecture landscape

    An architectural presentation of assets in use by the enterprise at particular points in time.

    Standards information base

    Captures the standards with which new architectures and deployed services must comply.

    Reference library

    Provides guidelines, templates, patterns, and other forms of reference material to accelerate the creation of new architectures for the enterprise.

    Governance log

    Provides a record of governance activity across the enterprise.

    Create repository folder structure

    6.2 5-6 hrs

    Input

    • List of standardized work products.

    Output

    • EA work products mapped to a repository folder.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to create a repository structure. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

    1. Start with the taxonomy on the previous slide, and sort the existing work products into these six categories.
    2. Assess that the work products are sorted in a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive fashion. This means that a certain work product that appears in one category should not appear in another category. As well, make sure these six categories capture all the existing work products.
    3. Based on the categorization of the work products, build a folder structure that follows these categories, which will allow for the work products to be accessed quickly and easily.

    Create a process to update EA work products

    • Architectural standards are not set in stone and should be reviewed and updated periodically.
    • The Architecture Review Board is the custodian for standards.
    • Any change to the standards need to be assessed thoroughly and must be communicated to all the impacted stakeholders.

    Architectural standards update process

    Identify

    • Identify changes to the standards

    Assess

    • Review and assess the impacts of the change

    Document

    • Document the change and update the standard

    Approve

    • Distribute the updated standards to key stakeholders for approval

    Communicate

    • Communicate the approved changes to impacted stakeholders

    Create a process to continually update standards

    6.3 1.5 hrs

    Input

    • The list of work products and its owners.

    Output

    • A documented work product update process.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the screenshot of the Table of Contents with the Standards Update Process highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the standards update process template and hold a working session to customize the best practice process to your organization’s needs.

    Download the Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the objectives and the process flow in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Create architectural standards to minimize transaction costs

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 didn’t maintain any centralized standards and each project had its own solution/design work products based on the preference of the architect on the project. This led to multiple standards across the organization.

    Lack of consistency in architectural deliverables made the information hand-offs expensive.

    Complication

    INSPRO01 didn’t maintain the architectural documents in a central repository and the information was scattered across multiple project folders.

    This caused key stakeholders to make decisions based on incomplete information and resulted in constant revisions as new information became available.

    Result

    Info-Tech recommended that the EA team identify and standardize the various EA work products so that information was collected in a consistent manner across the organization.

    The team also recommended an information taxonomy to store the architectural deliverables and other collateral.

    This resulted in increased consistency and standardization leading to efficiency gains.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Identify and standardize EA work products.
    • Classify the architectural standards.
    • Identify the custodian of standards.
    • Update the standards.

    Outcomes

    • A standardized set of EA work products
    • A way to categorize and store EA work products
    • A defined method of updating standards

    Phase 7

    Communication Plan

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Communication Plan

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
    • Identify stakeholders
    • Create a communication plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail – maximize the likelihood of success for EA governance by engaging the relevant stakeholders and communicating the changes.

    Phase 7 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 6: Operationalize the EA governance framework

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

    Step 7.1: Create a Communication Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how to communicate changes to stakeholders.
    • Discuss the purposes and benefits of the EA governance framework.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify the stakeholders affected by the EA governance transformations.
    • List the benefits of the proposed EA governance initiative.
    • Create a plan to communicate the changes to impacted stakeholders.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

    Step 7.2: Review the Communication Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the communication plan and gather feedback on the proposed stakeholders.
    • Confer about the various methods of communicating change in an organization.
    • Discuss the uses of the EA Governance Framework.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine your communication plan and use it to engage with stakeholders to better serve customers.
    • Create the EA Governance Framework to accompany the communication plan in engaging stakeholders to better understand the value of EA.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

    Communicate changes to stakeholders

    The changes made to the EA governance components need to be reviewed, approved, and communicated to all of the impacted stakeholders.

    Deliverables to be reviewed:

    • Fundamentals
      • Vision and Mission
      • Goals and Measures
      • Principles
    • Architecture review process
    • Assessment checklists
    • Policy Governing body charters
    • Architectural standards

    Deliverable Review Process:

    Step 1: Hold a meeting with stakeholders to review, refine, and agree on the changes.

    Step 2: Obtain an official approval from the stakeholders.

    Step 3: Communicate the changes to the impacted stakeholders.

    Communicate the changes by creating an EA governance framework and communication plan

    7.1 3 hrs

    Input

    • EA governance deliverables.

    Output

    • EA Governance Framework
    • Communication Plan.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to create the EA governance framework as well as the communication plan. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

    1. EA Governance Framework:
      1. The EA Governance Framework is a document that will help reference and cite all the materials created from this blueprint. Follow the instructions on the framework to complete.
    2. Communication Plan:
      1. Identify the stakeholders based on the EA governance deliverables.
      2. For each stakeholder identified, complete the “Communication Matrix” section in the EA Governance Communication Plan Template. Fill out the section based on the instructions in the template.
      3. As the stakeholders are identified based on the “Communication Matrix,” use the EA Governance Framework document to communicate the changes.

    Download the EA Governance Communication Plan Template and EA Governance Framework Template for additional instructions and to document your activities in this phase.

    Maximize the likelihood of success by communicating changes

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The EA group followed Info-Tech’s methodology to assess the current state and has identified areas for improvement.

    Best practices were adopted to fill the gaps identified.

    The team planned to communicate the changes to the technology leadership team and get approvals.

    As the EA team tried to roll out changes, they encountered resistance from various IT teams.

    Complication

    The team was not sure of how to communicate the changes to the business stakeholders.

    Result

    Info-Tech has helped the team conduct a thorough stakeholder analysis to identify all the stakeholders who would be impacted by the changes to the architecture governance framework.

    A comprehensive communication plan was developed that leveraged traditional email blasts, town hall meetings, and non-traditional methods such as team blogs.

    The team executed the communication plan and was able to manage the change effectively.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative.
    • Identify stakeholders.
    • Create a communication plan.
    • Compile the materials created in the blueprint to better communicate the value of EA governance.

    Outcomes

    • Communication plan
    • EA governance framework

    Bibliography

    Government of British Columbia. “Architecture and Standards Review Board.” Government of British Columbia. 2015. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.gov.bc.ca/cio/standards/asrb.page >

    Hopkins, Brian. “The Essential EA Toolkit Part 3 – An Architecture Governance Process.” Cio.com. Oct 2010. Web. April 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2372450/enterprise-architecture/the-essential-ea-toolkit-part-3---an-architecture-governance-process.html >

    Kantor, Bill. “How to Design a Successful RACI Project Plan.” CIO.com. May 2012. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2395825/project-management/how-to-design-a-successful-raci-project-plan.html >

    Sapient. “MIT Enterprise Architecture Guide.” Sapient. Sep 2004. Web. Jan 2016. < http://web.mit.edu/itag/eag/FullEnterpriseArchitectureGuide0.1.pdf >

    TOGAF. “Chapter 41: Architecture Repository.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap41.html >

    TOGAF. “Chapter 48: Architecture Compliance.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap48.html >

    TOGAF. “Version 9.1.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/

    United States Secret Service. “Enterprise Architecture Review Board.” United States Secret Service. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/toolkit/pdf/ID191.pdf >

    Virginia Information Technologies Agency. “Enterprise Architecture Policy.” Commonwealth of Virginia. Jul 2006. Web. Jan 2016. < https://www.vita.virginia.gov/uploadedfiles/vita_main_public/library/eapolicy200-00.pdf >

    Research contributors and experts

    Alan Mitchell, Senior Manager, Global Cities Centre of Excellence, KPMG

    Alan Mitchell has held numerous consulting positions before his role in Global Cities Centre of Excellence for KPMG. As a Consultant, he has had over 10 years of experience working with enterprise architecture related engagements. Further, he worked extensively with the public sector and prides himself on his knowledge of governance and how governance can generate value for an organization.

    Ian Gilmour, Associate Partner, EA advisory services, KPMG

    Ian Gilmour is the global lead for KPMG’s enterprise architecture method and Chief Architect for the KPMG Enterprise Reference Architecture for Health and Human Services. He has over 20 years of business design experience using enterprise architecture techniques. The key service areas that Ian focuses on are business architecture, IT-enabled business transformation, application portfolio rationalization, and the development of an enterprise architecture capability within client organizations.

    Djamel Djemaoun Hamidson, Senior Enterprise Architect, CBC/Radio-Canada

    Djamel Djemaoun is the Senior Enterprise Architect for CBC/Radio-Canada. He has over 15 years of Enterprise Architecture experience. Djamel’s areas of special include service-oriented architecture, enterprise architecture integration, business process management, business analytics, data modeling and analysis, and security and risk management.

    Sterling Bjorndahl, Director of Operations, eHealth Saskatchewan

    Sterling Bjorndahl is now the Action CIO for the Sun Country Regional Health Authority, and also assisting eHealth Saskatchewan grow its customer relationship management program. Sterling’s areas of expertise include IT strategy, enterprise architecture, ITIL, and business process management. He serves as the Chair on the Board of Directors for Gardiner Park Child Care.

    Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive, Enterprise Architect

    Huw Morgan has 10+ years experience as a Vice President or Chief Technology Officer in Canadian internet companies. As well, he possesses 20+ years experience in general IT management. Huw’s areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, integration, e-commerce, and business intelligence.

    Serge Parisien, Manager, Enterprise Architecture at Canada Mortgage Housing Corporation

    Serge Parisien is a seasoned IT leader with over 25 years of experience in the field of information technology governance and systems development in both the private and public sectors. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, strategy, and project management.

    Alex Coleman, Chief Information Officer at Saskatchewan Workers’ Compensation Board

    Alex Coleman is a strategic, innovative, and results-driven business leader with a proven track record of 20+ years’ experience planning, developing, and implementing global business and technology solutions across multiple industries in the private, public, and not-for-profit sectors. Alex’s expertise includes program management, integration, and project management.

    L.C. (Skip) Lumley , Student of Enterprise and Business Architecture

    Skip Lumley was formerly a Senior Principle at KPMG Canada. He is now post-career and spends his time helping move enterprise business architecture practices forward. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture program implementation and public sector enterprise architecture business development.

    Additional contributors

    • Tim Gangwish, Enterprise Architect at Elavon
    • Darryl Garmon, Senior Vice President at Elavon
    • Steve Ranaghan, EMEIA business engagement at Fujitsu

    Applications Priorities 2023

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}186|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Economic, social, and regulatory conditions have changed livelihoods, businesses, and marketplaces. Modern tools and technologies have acted as lifelines by minimizing operating and delivery costs, and in the process, establishing a strong foundation for growth and maturity.
    • These tools and technologies must meet the top business goals of CXOs: ensure service continuity, improve customer experience, and make data-driven decisions.
    • While today’s business applications are good and well received, there is still room for improvement. The average business application satisfaction score among IT leadership was 72% (n=1582, CIO Business Vision).

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Applications are critical components in any business strategic plan. They can directly influence an organization’s internal and external brand and reputation, such as their uniqueness, competitiveness and innovativeness in the industry
    • Business leaders are continuously looking for innovative ways to better position their application portfolio to satisfy their goals and objectives, i.e., application priorities. Given the scope and costs often involved, these priorities must be carefully crafted to clearly state achievable business outcomes that satisfies the different needs very different customers, stakeholders, and users.
    • Unfortunately, expectations on your applications team have increased while the gap between how stakeholders and applications teams perceive effectiveness remains wide. This points to a need to clarify the requirements to deliver valuable and quality applications and address the pressures challenging your teams.

    Impact and Result

    Learn and explore the technology and practice initiatives in this report to determine which initiatives should be prioritized in your application strategy and align to your business organizational objectives:

    • Optimize the effectiveness of the IT organization.
    • Boost the productivity of the enterprise.
    • Enable business growth through technology.

    Applications Priorities 2023 Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Applications Priorities Report 2023 – A report that introduces and describes five opportunities to prioritize in your 2023 application strategy.

    In this report, we explore five priorities for emerging and leading-edge technologies and practices that can improve on capabilities needed to meet the ambitions of your organization.

    • Applications Priorities 2023 Report

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Applications Priorities 2023

    Applications are the engine of the business: keep them relevant and modern

    What we are facing today is transforming the ways in which we work, live, and relate to one another. Applications teams and portfolios MUST change to meet this reality.

    Economic, social, and regulatory conditions have changed livelihoods, businesses, and marketplaces. Modern tools and technologies have acted as lifelines by minimizing operating and delivery costs, and in the process, establishing a strong foundation for growth and maturity.

    As organizations continue to strengthen business continuity, disaster recovery, and system resilience, activities to simply "keep the lights on" are not enough. Be pragmatic in the prioritization and planning of your applications initiatives, and use your technologies as a foundation for your growth.

    Your applications must meet the top business goals of your CXOs

    • Ensure service continuity
    • Improve customer experience
    • Make data-driven decisions
    • Maximize stakeholder value
    • Manage risk

    Source: CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, August 2021 to July 2022, n=568.

    Select and align your applications priorities to your business goals and objectives

    Applications are critical components in any business strategic plan. They can directly influence an organization's internal and external brand and reputation, such as their:

    • Uniqueness, competitiveness, and innovativeness in the industry.
    • Ability to be dynamic, flexible, and responsive to changing expectations, business conditions, and technologies.

    Therefore, business leaders are continuously looking for innovative ways to better position their application portfolios to satisfy their goals and objectives, i.e. applications priorities. Given the scope and costs often involved, these priorities must be carefully crafted to clearly state achievable business outcomes that satisfy
    the different needs of very different customers, stakeholders, and users.

    Today's business applications are good but leave room for improvement

    72%
    Average business application satisfaction score among IT leadership in 1582 organizations.

    Source: CIO Business Vision, August 2021 to July 2022, N=190.

    Five Applications Priorities for 2023

    In this report, we explore five priorities for emerging and leading-edge technologies and practices that can improve on capabilities needed to meet the Ambitions of your organization.

    this is an image of the Five Applications Priorities for which will be addressed in this blueprint.

    Strengthen your foundations to better support your applications priorities

    These key capabilities are imperative to the success of your applications strategy.

    KPI and Metrics

    Easily attainable and insightful measurements to gauge the progress of meeting strategic objectives and goals (KPIs), and the performance of individual teams, practices and processes (metrics).

    BUSINESS ALIGNMENT

    Gain an accurate understanding and interpretation of stakeholder, end-user, and customer expectations and priorities. These define the success of business products and services considering the priorities of individual business units and teams.

    EFFICIENT DELIVERY & SUPPORT PRACTICE

    Software delivery and support roles, processes, and tools are collaborative, well equipped and resourced, and optimized to meet changing stakeholder expectations.

    Data Management & Governance

    Ensuring data is continuously reliable and trustworthy. Data structure and integrations are defined, governed, and monitored.

    Product & Service Ownership

    Complete inventory and rationalization of the product and service portfolio, prioritized backlogs, roadmaps, and clear product and service ownership with good governance. This helps ensure this portfolio is optimized to meet its goals and objectives.

    Strengthen your foundations to better support your applications priorities (cont'd)

    These key capabilities are imperative to the success of your applications strategy.

    Organizational Change Management

    Manage the adoption of new and modified processes and technologies considering reputational, human, and operational concerns.

    IT Operational Management

    Continuous monitoring and upkeep of products and services to assure business continuity, and system reliability, robustness and disaster recovery.

    Architectural Framework

    A set of principles and standards that guides the consistent, sustainable and scalable growth of enterprise technologies. Changes to the architecture are made in collaboration with affected parties, such as security and infrastructure.

    Application Security

    The measures, controls, and tactics at the application layer that prevent vulnerabilities against external and internal threats and ensure compliance to industry and regulatory security frameworks and standards.

    There are many factors that can stand in your team's way

    Expectations on your applications team have increased, while the gap between how stakeholders and applications teams perceive effectiveness remains wide. This points to a need to clarify the requirements to deliver valuable and quality applications and address the pressures challenging your teams.

    1. Attracting and retaining talent
    2. Maximizing the return on technology
    3. Confidently shifting to digital
    4. Addressing competing priorities
    5. Fostering a collaborative culture
    6. Creating high-throughput teams

    CIOs agree that at least some improvement is needed across key IT activities

    A bar graph is depicted which shows the proportion of CIOs who believe that some, or significant improvement is necessary for the following categories: Measure IT Project Success; Align IT Budget; Align IT Project Approval Process; Measure Stakeholder Satisfaction With IT; Define and Align IT Strategy; Understand Business Goals

    Source: CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, August 2021 to July 2022, n=568.

    Pressure Point 1:
    Attracting and Retaining Talent

    Recent environmental pressures impacted traditional working arrangements and showed more workplace flexibility is often possible. At the same time, many employees' expectations about how, when, and where they choose to work have also evolved. Recruitment and retention are reflections of different sides of the same employee value proposition coin. Organizations that fail to reinvent their approach to attracting and retaining talent by focusing on candidate and employee experience risk turnover, vacancies, and lost opportunities that can negatively impact the bottom line.

    Address the underlying challenges

    • Lack of employee empowerment and few opportunities for learning and development.
    • Poor coworker and manager relationships.
    • Compensation and benefits are inadequate to maintain desired quality of life.
    • Unproductive work environment and conflicting balance of work and life.
    • Unsatisfactory employee experience, including lack of employee recognition
      and transparency of organizational change.

    While workplace flexibility comes with many benefits, longer work hours jeopardize wellbeing.
    62% of organizations reported increased working hours, while 80% reported an increase in flexibility.
    Source: McLean & Company, 2022; n=394.

    Be strategic in how you fill and train key IT skills and capabilities

    • Cybersecurity
    • Big Data/Analytics
    • Technical Architecture
    • DevOps
    • Development
    • Cloud

    Source: Harvey Nash Group, 2021; n=2120.

    Pressure Point 2:
    Maximizing the Return of Technology

    Recent environmental pressures impacted traditional working arrangements and showed more workplace flexibility is often possible. At the same time, many employees' expectations about how, when, and where they choose to work have also evolved. Recruitment and retention are reflections of different sides of the same employee value proposition coin. Organizations that fail to reinvent their approach to attracting and retaining talent by focusing on candidate and employee experience risk turnover, vacancies, and lost opportunities that can negatively impact the bottom line.

    Address the underlying challenges

    • Inability to analyze, propose, justify, and communicate modernization solutions in language the stakeholders understand and in a way that shows they clearly support business priorities and KPIs and mitigate risks.
    • Little interest in documenting and rationalizing products and services through business-IT collaboration.
    • Lack of internal knowledge of the system and loss of vendor support.
    • Undefined, siloed product and service ownership and governance, preventing solutions from working together to collectively deliver more value.
    • Little stakeholder appetite to invest in activities beyond "keeping the lights on."

    Only 64% of applications were identified as effective by end users.
    Effective applications are identified as at least highly important and have high feature and usability satisfaction.
    Source: Application Portfolio Assessment, August 2021 to July 2022; N=315.

    "Regardless of the many definitions of modernization floating around, the one characteristic that we should be striving for is to ensure our applications do an outstanding job of supporting the users and the business in the most effective and efficient manner possible."
    Source: looksoftware.

    Pressure Point 3:
    Confidently Shifting to Digital

    "Going digital" reshapes how the business operates and drives value by optimizing how digital and traditional technologies and tactics work together. This shift often presents significant business and technical risks to business processes, enterprise data, applications, and systems which stakeholders and teams are not aware of or prepared to accommodate.

    Address the underlying challenges

    • Differing perspectives on digital can lead to disjointed transformation initiatives, oversold benefits, and a lack of synergy among digital technologies and processes.
    • Organizations have difficulty adapting to new technologies or rethinking current business models, processes, and ways of working because of the potential human, ethical, and reputational impacts and restrictions from legacy systems.
    • Management lacks a framework to evaluate how their organization manages and governs business value delivery.
    • IT is not equipped or resourced to address these rapidly changing business, customer, and technology needs.
    • The wrong tools and technologies were chosen to support the shift to digital.

    The shift to digital processes is starting, but slowly.
    62% of respondents indicated that 1-20% of their processes were digitized during the past year.
    Source: Tech Trends and Priorities 2023; N=500

    Resistance to change and time/budget constraints are top barriers preventing companies from modernizing their applications.
    Source: Konveyor, 2022; n=600.

    Pressure Point 4:
    Addressing Competing Priorities

    Enterprise products and services are not used, operated, or branded in isolation. The various parties involved may have competing priorities, which often leads to disagreements on when certain business and technology changes should be made and how resources, budget, and other assets should be allocated. Without a broader product vision, portfolio vision, and roadmap, the various dependent or related products and services will not deliver the same level of value as if they were managed collectively.

    Address the underlying challenges

    • Undefined product and service ownership and governance, including escalation procedures when consensus cannot be reached.
    • Lack of a unified and grounded set of value and quality definitions, guiding principles, prioritization standards, and broad visibility across portfolios, business capabilities, and business functions.
    • Distrust between business units and IT teams, which leads to the scaling of unmanaged applications and fragmented changes and projects.
    • Decisions are based on opinions and experiences without supporting data.

    55% of CXOs stated some improvement is necessary in activities to understand business goals.
    Source: CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, August 2021 to July 2022; n=568.

    CXOs are moderately satisfied with IT's performance as a business partner (average score of 69% among all CXOs). This sentiment is similarly felt among CIOs (64%).
    Source: CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, August 2021 to July 2022; n=568.

    Pressure Point 5:
    Fostering a Collaborative Culture

    Culture impacts business results, including bottom-line revenue and productivity metrics. Leaders appreciate the impact culture can have on applications initiatives and wish to leverage this. How culture translates from an abstract concept to something that is measurable and actionable is not straightforward. Executives need to clarify how the desired culture will help achieve their applications strategy and need to focus on the items that will have the most impact.

    Address the underlying challenges

    • Broad changes do not consider the unique subcultures, personalities, and behaviors of the various teams and individuals in the organization.
    • Leaders mandate cultural changes without alleviating critical barriers and do not embody the principles of the target state.
    • Bureaucracy and politics restrict changes and encourage the status quo.
    • Industry standards, technologies, and frameworks do not support or cannot be tailored to fit the desired culture.
    • Some teams are deliberately excluded from the scoping, planning, and execution of key product and service delivery and management activities.

    Agile does not solve team culture challenges.
    43% of organizations cited organizational culture as a significant barrier to adopting and scaling Agile practices.
    Source: Digital.ai, 2021.

    "Providing a great employee experience" as the second priority (after recruiting) highlights the emphasis organizations are placing on helping employees adjust after having been forced to change the way work gets done.
    Source: McLean & Company, 2022; N=826.

    Use your applications priorities to help address your pressure points

    Success can be dependent on your ability to navigate around or alleviate your pressure points. Design and market your applications priorities to bring attention to your pressure points and position them as key risk factors to their success.

    Applications Priorities
    Digital Experience (DX) Intelligent Automation Proactive Application Management Multisource Systems Digital Organization as a Platform
    Attracting and Retaining Talent Enhance the employee experience Be transparent and support role changes Shift focus from maintenance to innovation Enable business-managed applications Promote and showcase achievements and successes
    Maximizing the Return on Technology Modernize or extend the use of existing investments Automate applications across multiple business functions Improve the reliability of mission-critical applications Enhance the functionality of existing applications Increase visibility of underused applications
    Confidently Shifting to Digital Prioritize DX in your shift to digital Select the capabilities that will benefit most from automation Prepare applications to support digital tools and technologies Use best-of-breed tools to meet specific digital needs Bring all applications up to a common digital standard
    Addressing Competing Priorities Ground your digital vision, goals, and objectives Recognize and evaluate the architectural impact Rationalize the health of the applications Agree on a common philosophy on system composition Map to a holistic platform vision, goals, and objectives
    Fostering a Collaborative Culture Involve all perspectives in defining and delivering DX Involve the end user in the delivery and testing of the automated process Include the technical perspective in the viability of future applications plans Discuss how applications can work together better in an ecosystem Ensure the platform is configured to meet the individual needs of the users
    Creating High-Throughput Teams Establish delivery principles centered on DX Remove manual, error-prone, and mundane tasks Simplify applications to ease delivery and maintenance Alleviate delivery bottlenecks and issues Abstract the enterprise system to expedite delivery

    Digital Experience (DX)

    PRIORITY 1

    • Deliver Valuable User, Customer, Employee, and Brand Experiences

    Delivering valuable digital experiences requires the adoption of good management, governance, and operational practices to accommodate stakeholder, employee, customer, and end-user expectations of digital experiences (e.g. product management, automation, and iterative delivery). Technologies are chosen based on what best enables, delivers, and supports these expectations.

    Introduction

    Digital transformation is not just about new tools and technologies. It is also about delivering a valuable digital experience

    What is digital experience (DX)?

    Digital experience (DX) refers to the interaction between a user and an organization through digital products and services. Digital products and services are tools, systems, devices, and resources that gather, store, and process data; are continuously modernized; and embody eight key attributes that are described on the following slide. DX is broken down into four distinct perspectives*:

    • Customer Experience – The immediate perceptions of transactions and interactions experienced through a customer's journey in the use of the organization's digital
      products and services.
    • End-User Experience – Users' emotions, beliefs, and physical and psychological responses
      that occur before, during, or after interacting with a digital product or service.
    • Brand Experience – The broader perceptions, emotions, thoughts, feelings and actions the public associate with the organization's brand and reputation or its products and services. Brand experience evolves over time as customers continuously engage with the brand.
    • Employee Experience – The satisfaction and experience of an employee through their journey with the organization, from recruitment and hiring to their departure. How an employee embodies and promotes the organization brand and culture can affect their performance, trust, respect, and drive to innovate and optimize.
    Digital Products and Services
    Customer Experience Brand Experience Employee Experience End-User Experience

    Digital products and services have a common set of attributes

    Digital transformation is not just about new tools and technologies. It is also about delivering a valuable digital experience

    • Digital products and services must keep pace with changing business and end-user needs as well as tightly supporting your maturing business model with continuous modernization. Focus your continuous modernization on the key characteristics that drive business value.
    • Fit for purpose: Functionalities are designed and implemented for the purpose of satisfying the end user's needs and solving their problems.
    • User-centric: End users see the product as rewarding, engaging, intuitive, and emotionally satisfying. They want to come back to it.
    • Adaptable: The product can be quickly tailored to meet changing end-user and technology needs with reusable and customizable components.
    • Accessible: The product is available on demand and on the end user's preferred interface.
      End users have a seamless experience across all devices.
    • Private and secured: The end user's activity and data are protected from unauthorized access.
    • Informative and insightful: The product delivers consumable, accurate, and trustworthy real-time data that is important to the end user.
    • Seamless application connection: The product facilitates direct interactions with one or more other products through an uninterrupted user experience.
    • Relationship and network building: The product enables and promotes the connection and interaction of people.

    The Business Value cycle of continuous modernization.

    Signals

    DX is critical for business growth and maturity, but the organization may not be ready

    A good DX has become a key differentiator that gives organizations an advantage over their competition and peers. Shifts in working environments; employee, customer, and stakeholder expectations; and the advancements in modern technologies have raised the importance of adopting and transitioning to digital processes and tools to stay relevant and responsive to changing business and technology conditions.

    Applications teams are critical to ensuring the successful delivery and operation of these digital processes and tools. However, they are often under-resourced and challenged to meet their DX goals.

    • 7% of both business and IT respondents think IT has the resources needed to keep up with digital transformation initiatives and meet deadlines (Cyara, 2021).
    • 43% of respondents said that the core barrier to digital transformation is a lack of skilled resources (Creatio, 2021).
    A circle graph is shown with 91% of the circle coloured in dark blue, with the number 91% in the centre.

    of organizations stated that at least 1% of processes were shifted from being manually completed to digitally completed in the last year. 29% of organizations stated at least 21% were shifted.

    Source: Tech Trends and Priorities 2023; N=500.

    A circle graph is shown with 98% of the circle coloured in dark blue, with the number 98% in the centre.

    of organizations recognized digital transformation is important for competitive advantage. 94% stated it is important to enhance customer experience, and 91% stated it will have a positive impact on revenue.

    Source: Cyara, 2021.

    Drivers

    Brand and reputation

    Customers are swayed by the innovations and advancements in digital technologies and expect your applications team to deliver and support them. Your leaders recognize the importance of these expectations and are integrating them into their business strategy and brand (how the organization presents itself to its customers, employees and the public). They hope that their actions will improve and shape the company's reputation (public perception of the company) as effective, customer-focused, and forward-thinking.

    Worker productivity

    As you evolve and adopt more complex tools and technology, your stakeholders will expect more from business units and IT teams. Unfortunately, teams employing manual processes and legacy systems will struggle to meet these expectations. Digital products and services promote the simplification of complex operations and applications and help the business and your teams better align operational practices with strategic goals and deliver valuable DX.

    Organization modernization

    Legacy processes, systems, and ways of working are no longer suitable for meeting the strategic digital objectives and DX needs stakeholders expect. They drive up operational costs without increased benefits, impede business growth and innovation, and consume scarce budgets that could be used for other priorities. Shifting to digital tools and technologies will bring these challenges to light and demonstrate how modernization is an integral part of DX success.

    Benefits & Risks

    Benefits

    • Flexibility & Satisfaction
    • Adoption
    • Reliability

    Employees and customers can choose how they want to access, modify, and consume digital products and services. They can be tailored to meet the specific functional needs, behaviors, and habits of the end user.

    The customer, end user, brand, and employee drive selection, design, and delivery of digital products and services. Even the most advanced technologies will fail if key roles do not see the value in their use.

    Digital products and services are delivered with technical quality built into them, ensuring they meet the industry, regulatory, and company standards throughout their lifespan and in various conditions.

    Risks

    • Legacy & Lore
    • Bureaucracy & Politics
    • Process Inefficiencies
    • No Quality Standards

    Some stakeholders may not be willing to change due to their familiarity and comfort of business practices.

    Competing and conflicting priorities of strategic products and services undermine digital transformation and broader modernization efforts.

    Business processes are often burdened by wasteful activities. Digital products and services are only as valuable as the processes they support.

    The performance and support of your digital products and services are hampered due to unmanageable technical debt because of a deliberate decision to bypass or omit quality good practices.

    Address your pressure points to fully realize the benefits of this priority

    Success can be dependent on your ability to address your pressure points.

    Attracting and Retaining Talent

    Enhance the employee experience.

    Design the digital processes, tools, and technologies to meet the individual needs of the employee.

    Maximizing the Return on Technology

    Modernize or extend the use of existing investments.

    Drive higher adoption of applications and higher user value and productivity by implementing digital capabilities to the applications that will gain the most.

    Confidently Shifting to Digital

    Prioritize DX in your shift to digital. Include DX as part of your definition of success.

    Your products and services are not valuable if users, customers, and employees do not use them.

    Addressing Competing Priorities

    Ground your digital vision, goals, and objectives

    Establish clear ownership of DX and digital products and services with a cross-functional prioritization framework.

    Fostering a Collaborative Culture

    Involve all perspectives in defining and delivering DX.

    Maintain a committee of owners, stakeholders, and delivery teams to ensure consensus and discuss how to address cross-functional opportunities and risks.

    Creating High-Throughput Teams

    Establish delivery principles centered on DX.

    Enforce guiding principles to streamline and simplify DX delivery, such as plug-and-play architecture and quality standards.

    Recommendations

    Build a digital business strategy

    A digital business strategy clearly articulates the goals and ambitions of the business to adopt digital practices, tools, and technologies. This document:

    • Looks for ways to transform the business by identifying what technologies to embrace, what processes to automate, and what new business models to create.
    • Unifies digital possibilities with your customer experiences.
    • Establishes accountability with the executive leadership.
    • States the importance of cross-functional participation from senior management across the organization.

    Related Research:

    Learn, understand, and empathize with your users, employees, and customers

    • To create a better product, solution, or service, understanding those who use it, their needs, and their context is critical.
    • A great experience design practice can help you balance those goals so that they are in harmony with those of your users.
    • IT leaders must find ways to understand the needs of the business and develop empathy on a much deeper level. This empathy is the foundation for a thriving business partnership.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Center product and service delivery decisions and activities on DX and quality

    User, customer, employee, and brand are integral perspectives on the software development lifecycle (SDLC) and the management and governance practices supporting digital products and services. It ensures quality standards and controls are consistently upheld while maintaining alignment with various needs and priorities. The goal is to come to a consensus on a universal definition and approach to embed quality and DX-thinking throughout the delivery process.

    Related Research:

    Instill collaborative delivery practices

    Today's rapidly scaling and increasingly complex digital products and services create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality. This pressure is further compounded by the competing priorities of individual stakeholders and the nuances among different personas of digital products and services.

    A collaborative delivery practice sets the activities, channels, and relationships needed to deliver a valuable and quality product or service with cross-functional awareness, accountability, and agreement.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Continuously monitor and modernize your digital products and services

    Today's modern digital products and services are tomorrow's shelfware. They gradually lose their value, and the supporting technologies will become obsolete. Modernization is a continuous need.

    Data-driven insights help decision makers decide which products and services to retire, upgrade, retrain on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Enhancements focusing on critical business capabilities strengthen the case for investment and build trust with all stakeholders.

    Related Research:

    CASE STUDY
    Mastercard in Asia

    Focus on the customer journey

    Chief Marketing Officer M.V. Rajamannar (Raja) wanted to change Mastercard's iconic "Priceless" ad campaign (with the slogan "There are some things money can't buy. For everything else there's Mastercard."). The main reasons were that the campaign relied on one-way communication and targeted end customers, even though Mastercard doesn't issue cards directly to customers; partner banks do. To drive the change in campaign, Raja and his team created a digital engine that leveraged digital and social media. Digital engine is a seven-step process based on insights gleaned from data and real-time optimization.

    1. Emotional spark: Using data to understand customers' passion points, Mastercard builds videos and creatives to ignite an emotional spark and give customers a reason to engage. For example, weeks before New Year's Eve, Mastercard produced a video with Hugh Jackman to encourage customers to submit a story about someone who deeply mattered to them. The authors of the winning story would be flown to reunite with those both distant and dear.
    2. Engagement: Mastercard targets the right audience with a spark video through social media to encourage customers to share their stories.
    3. Offers: To help its partner banks and merchants in driving their business, the company identifies the best offers to match consumers' interests. In the above campaign, Mastercard's Asia-Pacific team found that Singapore was a favorite destination for Indian customers, so they partnered with Singapore's Resorts World Sentosa with an attractive offer.
    4. Real-time optimization: Mastercard optimizes, in real time, a portfolio of several offers through A/B testing and other analysis.
    5. Amplification: Real-time testing provides confidence to Mastercard about the potential success of these offers and encourages its bank and merchant partners to co-market and co-fund these campaigns.
    6. Network effects: A few weeks after consumers submitted their stories about distant loved ones, Mastercard selected winners, produced videos of them surprising their friends and families, and used these videos in social media to encourage sharing.
    7. Incremental transactions: These programs translate into incremental business for banks who issue cards, for merchants where customers spend money, and for Mastercard, which gets a portion of every transaction.

    Source: Harvard Business Review Press

    CASE STUDY
    Mastercard in Asia (cont'd)

    Focus on the customer journey

    1. Emotional Spark
      Drives genuine personal stories
    2. Engagement
      Through Facebook
      and social media
    3. Offers
      From merchants
      and Mastercard assets
    4. Optimization
      Real-time testing of offers and themes
    5. Amplification
      Paid and organic programmatic buying
    6. Network Effects
      Sharing and
      mass engagement
    7. Incremental Transactions
      Win-win for all parties

    CASE STUDY
    Mastercard in Asia (cont'd)

    The Mastercard case highlights important lessons on how to engage customers:

    • Have a broad message. Brands need to connect with consumers over how they live and spend their time. Organizations need to go beyond the brand or product message to become more relevant to consumers' lives. Dove soap was very successful in creating a conversation among consumers with its "Real Beauty" campaign, which focused not on the brand or even the product category, but on how women and society view beauty.
    • Shift from storytelling to story making. To break through the clutter of advertising, companies need to move from storytelling to story making. A broader message that is emotionally engaging allows for a two-way conversation.
    • Be consistent with the brand value. The brand needs to stand for something, and the content should be relevant to and consistent with the image of the brand. Pepsi announced an award of $20 million in grants to individuals, businesses, and nonprofits that promote a new idea to make a positive impact on community. A large number of submissions were about social causes that had nothing to do with Pepsi, and some, like reducing obesity, were in conflict with Pepsi's product.
    • Create engagement that drives business. Too much entertainment in ads may engage customers but detract from both communicating the brand message and increasing sales. Simply measuring the number of video views provides only a partial picture of a program's success.

    Intelligent Automation

    PRIORITY 2

    • Extend Automation Practices with AI and ML

    AI and ML are rapidly growing. Organizations see the value of machines intelligently executing high-performance and dynamic tasks such as driving cars and detecting fraud. Senior leaders see AI and ML as opportunities to extend their business process automation investments.

    Introduction

    Intelligent automation is the next step in your business process automation journey

    What is intelligent automation (IA)?

    Intelligent automation (IA) is the combination of traditional automation technologies, such as business process management (BPM) and robotic process automation (RPA), with AI and ML. The goal is to further streamline and scale decision making across various business processes by:

    • Removing human interactions.
    • Addressing decisions that involve complex variables.
    • Automatically adapting processes to changing conditions.
    • Bridging disparate automation technologies into an integrated end-to-end value delivery pipeline.

    "For IA to succeed, employees must be involved in the transformation journey so they can experience firsthand the benefits of a new way of working and creating business value," (Cognizant).

    What is the difference between IA and hyperautomation?

    "Hyperautomation is the act of automating everything in an organization that can be automated. The intent is to streamline processes across an organization using intelligent automation, which includes AI, RPA and other technologies, to run without human intervention. … Hyperautomation is a business-driven, disciplined approach that organizations use to rapidly identify, vet, and automate as many business and IT processes as possible" (IBM, 2021).

    Note that hyperautomation often enables IA, but teams solely adopting IA do not need to abide to its automation-first principles.

    IA is a combination of various tools and technologies

    What tools and technologies are involved in IA?

    • Artificial intelligence (AI) & Machine Learning (ML) – AI systems perform tasks mimicking human intelligence such as learning from experience and problem solving. AI is making its own decisions without human intervention. Machine learning systems learn from experience and without explicit instructions. They learn patterns from data then analyze and make predictions based on past behavior and the patterns learned. AI is a combination of technologies and can include machine learning.
    • Intelligent Business Process Management System (iBPMS) – Combination of BPM tools with AI and other intelligence capabilities.
    • Robotic Process Automation (RPA) – Robots leveraging an application's UI rather than programmatic access. Automate rules-based, repetitive tasks performed by human workers with AI/ML.
    • Process Mining & Discovery – Process mining involves reading system event logs and application transactions and applying algorithmic analysis to automatically identify and map inferred business processes. Process discovery involves unintrusive virtual agents that sit on a user's desktop and record and monitor how they interact with applications to perform tasks and processes. Algorithms are then used to map and analyze the processes.
    • Intelligent Document Processing – The conversion of physical or unstructured documents into a structured, digital format that can be used in automation solutions. Optical character recognition (OCR) and natural language processing (NPL) are common tools used to enable this capability.
    • Advanced Analytics – The gathering, synthesis, transformation, and delivery of insightful and consumable information that supports data-driven decision making. Data is queried from various disparate sources and can take on a variety of structured and unstructured formats.

    The cycle of IA technologies

    Signals

    Process automation is an executive priority and requires organizational buy-in

    Stakeholders recognize the importance of business process automation and AI and are looking for ways to deliver more value using these technologies.

    • 90% of executives stated automating business workflows post-COVID-19 will ensure business continuity (Kofax, 2022).
    • 88% of executives stated they need to fast-track their end-to-end digital transformation (Kofax, 2022).

    However, the advertised benefits to vendors of enabling these desired automations may not be easily achievable because of:

    • Manual and undocumented business processes.
    • Fragmented and inaccessible systems.
    • Poor data quality, insights, and security.
    • The lack of process governance and management practice.
    A circle graph is shown with 49% of the circle coloured in dark blue, with the number 49% in the centre.

    of CXOs stated staff sufficiency, skill and engagement issues as a minor IT pain point compared to 51% of CIOs stated this issue as a major pain point.

    Source: CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, August 2021 to July 2022; n=568.

    A circle graph is shown with 36% of the circle coloured in dark blue, with the number 36% in the centre.

    of organizations have already invested in AI or machine learning.

    Source: Tech Trends and Priorities 2023; N=662

    Drivers

    Quality & throughput

    Products and services delivered through an undefined and manual process risk the creation of preventable and catchable defects, security flaws and holes, missing information, and other quality issues. IA solutions consistently reinforce quality standards the same way across all products and services while tailoring outputs to meet an individual's specific needs. Success is dependent on the accurate interpretation and application of quality standards and the user's expectations.

    Worker productivity

    IA removes the tedious, routine, and mundane tasks that distract and restrict employees from doing more valuable, impactful, and cognitively focused activities. Practical insights can also be generated through IA tools that help employees make data-driven decisions, evaluate problems from different angles, and improve the usability and value of the products and services they produce.

    Good process management practices

    Automation magnifies existing inefficiencies of a business process management practice, such as unclear and outdated process documentation and incorrect assumptions. IA reinforces the importance of good business process optimization practices, such as removing waste and inefficiencies in a thoughtful way, choosing the most appropriate automation solution, and configuring the process in the right way to maximize the solution's value.

    Benefits & Risks

    Benefits

    • Documentation
    • Hands-Off
    • Reusability

    All business processes must be mapped and documented to be automated, including business rules, data entities, applications, and control points.

    IA can be configured and orchestrated to automatically execute when certain business, process, or technology conditions are met in an unattended or attended manner.

    IA is applicable in use cases beyond traditional business processes, such as automated testing, quality control, audit, website scraping, integration platform, customer service, and data transfer.

    Risks

    • Data Quality & Bias
    • Ethics
    • Recovery & Security
    • Management

    The accuracy and relevance of the decisions IA makes are dependent on the overall quality of the data
    used to train it.

    Some decisions can have significant reputational, moral, and ethical impacts if made incorrectly.
    The question is whether it is appropriate for a non-human to make that decision.

    IA is composed of technologies that can be compromised or fail. Without the proper monitoring, controls,
    and recovery protocols, impacted IA will generate significant business and IT costs and can potentially harm customers, employees, and the organization.

    Low- and no-code capabilities ease and streamline IA development, which makes it susceptible to becoming unmanageable. Discipline is needed to ensure IA owners are aware of the size and health of the IA portfolio.

    Address your pressure points to fully realize the benefits of this priority

    Success can be dependent on your ability to address your pressure points.

    Attracting and Retaining Talent

    Be transparent and support role changes.

    Plan to address the human sentiment with automation (e.g. job security) and the transition of the role to other activities.

    Maximizing the Return on Technology

    Automate applications across multiple business functions.

    Recognize the value opportunities of improving and automating the integration of cross-functional processes.

    Confidently Shifting to Digital

    Maximize the learning of automation fit.

    Select the right capabilities to demonstrate the value of IA while using lessons learned to establish the appropriate support.

    Addressing Competing Priorities

    Recognize automation opportunities with capability maps.

    Use a capability diagram to align strategic IA objectives with tactical and technical IA initiatives.

    Fostering a Collaborative Culture

    Involve the user in the delivery process.

    Maximize automation adoption by ensuring the user finds value in its use before deployment.

    Creating High-Throughput Teams

    Remove manual, error-prone, and mundane tasks.

    Look for ways to improve team throughput by removing wasteful activities, enforcing quality, and automating away tasks driving down productivity.

    Recommendations

    Build your business process automation playbook and practice

    Formalize your business process automation practice with a good toolkit and a repeatable set of tactics and techniques.

    • Clarify the problem being solved with IA.
    • Optimate your processes. Apply good practices to first optimize (opti-) and then automate (-mate) key business processes.
    • Deliver minimum viable automations (MVAs). Maximize the learning of automation solutions and business operational changes through small, strategic automation use cases.

    Related Research:

    Explore the various IA tooling options

    Each IA tool will address a different problem. Which tool to choose is dependent on a variety of factors, such as functional suitability, technology suitability, delivery and support capabilities, alignment to strategic business goals, and the value it is designed to deliver.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Introduce AI and ML thoughtfully and with a plan

    Despite the many promises of AI, organizations are struggling to fully realize its potential. The reasons boil down to a lack of understanding of when these technologies should and shouldn't be used, as well as a fear of the unknown. The plan to adopt AI should include:

    • Understanding of what AI really means in practice.
    • Identifying specific applications of AI in the business.
    • Understanding the type of AI applicable for the situation.

    Related Research:

    Mitigate AI and ML bias

    Biases can be introduced into an IA system at any stage of the development process, from the data you collect, to the way you collect it, to which algorithms are used and what assumptions were made. In most cases, AI and ML bias is a is a social, political, and business problem.

    While bias may not be intentional nor completely prevented or eliminated, early detection, good design, and other proactive preventative steps can be taken to minimize its scope and impact.

    Related Research:

    CASE STUDY
    University Hospitals

    Challenge

    University Hospitals Cleveland (UH) faces the same challenge that every major hospital confronts regarding how to deliver increasingly complex, high-quality healthcare to a diverse population efficiently and economically. In 2017, UH embarked on a value improvement program aiming to improve quality while saving $400 million over a five-year period.

    In emergency department (ED) and inpatient units, leaders found anticipating demand difficult, and consequently units were often over-staffed when demand was low and under-staffed when demand was high. Hospital leaders were uncertain about how to reallocate resources based on capacity needs.

    Solution

    UH turned to Hospital IQ's Census Solution to proactively manage capacity, staff, and flow in the ED and inpatient areas.

    By applying AI, ML, and external data (e.g. weather forecasts) to the hospital's own data (including EMR data and hospital policies), the solution helped UH make two-day census forecasts that managers used to determine whether to open or close in-patient beds and, when necessary, divert low-acuity patients to other hospitals in the system to handle predicted patient volume.

    Source: University Hospitals

    Results

    ED boarding hours have declined by 10% and the hospital has seen a 50% reduction in the number of patients who leave the hospital without
    being seen.

    UH also predicts in advance patients ready for discharge and identifies roadblocks, reducing the average length of stay by 15%. UH is able to better manage staff, reducing overtime and cutting overall labor costs.

    The hospital has also increased staff satisfaction and improved patient safety by closing specific units on weekends and increasing the number of rooms that can be sterilized.

    Proactive Application Management

    PRIORITY 3

    • Strengthen Applications to Prevent and Minimize the Impact of Future Issues

    Application management is often viewed as a support function rather than an enabler of business growth. Focus and investments are only placed on application management when it becomes a problem. The lack of governance and practice accountability leaves this practice in a chaotic state: politics take over, resources are not strategically allocated, and customers are frustrated. As a result, application management is often reactive and brushed aside for new development.

    Introduction

    What is application management?

    Application management ensures valuable software is successfully delivered and is maintained for continuous and sustainable business operations. It contains a repeatable set of activities needed to rationalize and roadmap products and services while balancing priorities of new features and maintenance tasks.

    Unfortunately, application management is commonly perceived as a practice that solely addresses issues, updates, and incidents. However, application management teams are also tasked with new value delivery that was not part of the original release.

    Why is an effective application maintenance (reactive) practice not good enough?

    Application maintenance is the "process of modifying a software system or its components after delivery to correct faults, improve performance or other attributes, or adapt to a changed environment or business process," (IEEE, 1998). While it is critical to quickly fix defects and issues when they occur, reactively addressing them is more expensive than discovering them early and employing the practices to prevent them.

    Even if an application is working well, its framework, architecture, and technology may not be compatible with the possible upcoming changes stakeholders and vendors may want to undertake. Applications may not be problems now, but they soon can be.

    What motivates proactive application changes?

    This image shows the motivations for proactive application changes, sorted by external and internal sources.

    Proactive application management must be disciplined and applied strategically

    Proactive application management practices are critical to maintaining business continuity. They require continuous review and modification so that applications are resilient and can address current and future scenarios. Depending on the value of the application, its criticality to business operations, and its susceptibility to technology change, a more proactive management approach may be warranted. Stakeholders can then better manage resources and budget according to the needs of specific products.

    Reactive Management

    Run-to-Failure

    Fix and enhance the product when it breaks. In most cases, a plan is in place ahead of a failure, so that the problem can be addressed without significant disruption and costs.

    Preventive

    Regularly inspect and optimize the product to reduce the likelihood that it will fail in the future. Schedule inspections based on a specific timeframe or usage threshold.

    Predictive

    Predict failures before they happen using performance and usage data to alert teams when products are at risk of failure according to specified conditions.

    Reliability and Risk Based

    Analyze all possible failure scenarios for each component of the product and create tailored delivery plans to improve the stability, reliability, and value of each product.

    Proactive Management

    Signals

    Applications begin to degrade as soon as they are used

    Today's applications are tomorrow's shelfware. They gradually lose their value, stability, robustness, and compatibility with other enterprise technologies. The longer these applications are left unattended or simply "keeping the lights on," the more risks they will bring to the application portfolio, such as:

    • Discovery and exploitation of security flaws and gaps.
    • Increasing the lock-in to specific vendor technologies.
    • Inconsistent application performance across various workloads.

    These impacts are further compounded by the continuous work done on a system burdened with technical debt. Technical debt describes the result of avoided costs that, over time, cause ongoing business impacts. Left unaddressed, technical debt can become an existential threat that risks your organization's ability to effectively compete and serve its customers. Unfortunately, most organizations have a significant, growing, unmanageable technical debt portfolio.

    A circle graph is shown with 60% of the circle coloured in dark green, with the number 60% in the centre.

    of respondents stated they saw an increase in perceived change in technical debt during the past three years. A quarter of respondents indicated that it stayed the same.

    Source: McKinsey Digital, 2020.

    US
    $4.35
    Million

    is the average cost of a data breach in 2022. This figure represents a 2.6% increase from last year. The average cost has climbed 12.7% since 2020.

    Source: IBM, 2022; N=537.

    Drivers

    Technical debt

    Historical decisions to meet business demands by deferring key quality, architectural, or other software delivery activities often lead to inefficient and incomplete code, fragile legacy systems, broken processes, data quality problems, and the other contributors to technical debt. The impacts for this challenge is further heightened if organizations are not actively refactoring and updating their applications behind the scenes. Proactive application management is intended to raise awareness of application fragility and prioritize comprehensive refactoring activities alongside new feature development.

    Long-term application value

    Applications are designed, developed, and tested against a specific set of parameters which may become less relevant over time as the business matures, technology changes, and user behaviors and interactions shift. Continuous monitoring of the application system, regular stakeholder and user feedback, and active technology trend research and vendor engagement will reveal tasks to prepare an application for future value opportunities or stability and resilience concerns.

    Security and resiliency

    Innovative approaches to infiltrating and compromising applications are becoming prevailing stakeholder concerns. The loopholes and gaps in existing application security protocols, control points, and end-user training are exploited to gain the trust of unsuspecting users and systems. Proactive application management enforces continuous security reviews to determine whether applications are at risk. The goal is to prevent an incident from happening by hardening or complementing measures already in place.

    Benefits & Risks

    Benefits

    • Consistent Performance
    • Robustness
    • Operating Costs

    Users expect the same level of performance and experience from their applications in all scenarios. A proactive approach ensures the configurations meet the current needs of users and dependent technologies.

    Proactively managed applications are resilient to the latest security concerns and upcoming trends.

    Continuous improvements to the underlying architecture, codebase, and interfaces can minimize the cost to maintain and operate the application, such as the transition to a loosely coupled architecture and the standardization of REST APIs.

    Risks

    • Stakeholder Buy-In
    • Delayed Feature Releases
    • Team Capacity
    • Discipline

    Stakeholders may not see the association between the application's value and its technical quality.

    Updates and enhancements are system changes much like any application function. Depending
    on the priority of these changes, new functions may be pushed off to a future release cycle.

    Applications teams require dedicated capacity to proactively manage applications, but they are often occupied meeting other stakeholder demands.

    Overinvesting in certain application management activities (such as refactoring, re-architecture, and redesign) can create more challenges. Knowing how much to do is important.

    Address your pressure points to fully realize the benefits of this priority

    Success can be dependent on your ability to address your pressure points.

    Attracting and Retaining Talent

    Shift focus from maintenance to innovation.

    Work on the most pressing and critical requests first, with a prioritization framework reflecting cross-functional priorities.

    Maximizing the Return on Technology

    Improve the reliability of mission-critical applications.

    Regularly verify and validate applications are up to date with the latest patches and fixes and comply with industry good practices and regulations.

    Confidently Shifting to Digital

    Prepare applications to support digital tools and technologies.

    Focus enhancements on the key components required to support the integration, performance, and security needs of digital.

    Addressing Competing Priorities

    Rationalize the health of the applications.

    Use data-driven, compelling insights to justify the direction and prioritization of applications initiatives.

    Fostering a Collaborative Culture

    Include the technical perspective in the viability of future applications plans.

    Demonstrate how poorly maintained applications impede the team's ability to deliver confidently and quickly.

    Creating High-Throughput Teams

    Simplify applications to ease delivery and maintenance.

    Refactor away application complexities and align the application portfolio to a common quality standard to reduce the effort to deliver and test changes.

    Recommendations

    Reinforce your application maintenance practice

    Maintenance is often viewed as a support function rather than an enabler of business growth. Focus and investments are only placed on maintenance when it becomes a problem.

    • Justify the necessity of streamlined maintenance.
    • Strengthen triaging and prioritization practices.
    • Establish and govern a repeatable process.

    Ensure product issues, incidents, defects, and change requests are promptly handled to minimize business and IT risks.

    Related Research:

    Build an application management practice

    Apply the appropriate management approaches to maintain business continuity and balance priorities and commitments among maintenance and new development requests.

    This practice serves as the foundation for creating exceptional customer experience by emphasizing cross-functional accountability for business value and product and service quality.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Manage your technical debt

    Technical debt is a type of technical risk, which in turn is business risk. It's up to the business to decide whether to accept technical debt or mitigate it. Create a compelling argument to stakeholders as to why technical debt should be a business priority rather than just an IT one.

    • Define and identify your technical debt.
    • Conduct a business impact analysis.
    • Identify opportunities to better manage technical debt.

    Related Research:

    Gauge your application's health

    Application portfolio management is nearly impossible to perform without an honest and thorough understanding of your portfolio's alignment to business capabilities, business value, total cost of ownership, end-user reception and satisfaction, and technical health.

    Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, retrain on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Adopt site reliability engineering (SRE) and DevOps practices

    Site reliability engineering (SRE) is an operational model for running online services more reliably by a team of dedicated reliability-focused engineers.

    DevOps, an operational philosophy promoting development and operations collaboration, can bring the critical insights to make application management practices through SRE more valuable.

    Related Research:

    CASE STUDY
    Government Agency

    Goal

    A government agency needed to implement a disciplined, sustainable application delivery, planning, and management process so their product delivery team could deliver features and changes faster with higher quality. The goal was to ensure change requests, fixes, and new features would relieve requester frustrations, reduce regression issues, and allow work to be done on agreeable and achievable priorities organization-wide. The new model needed to increase practice efficiency and visibility in order to better manage technical debt and focus on value-added solutions.

    Solution

    This organization recognized a number of key challenges that were inhibiting its team's ability to meet its goals:

    • The product backlog had become too long and unmanageable.
    • Delivery resources were not properly allocated to meet the skills and capabilities needed to successfully meet commitments.
    • Quality wasn't defined or enforced, which generated mounting technical debt.
    • There was a lack of clear metrics and defined roles and responsibilities.
    • The business had unrealistic and unachievable expectations.

    Source: Info-Tech Workshop

    Key practices implemented

    • Schedule quarterly business satisfaction surveys.
    • Structure and facilitate regular change advisory board meetings.
    • Define and enforce product quality standards.
    • Standardize a streamlined process with defined roles.
    • Configure management tools to better handle requests.

    Multisource Systems

    PRIORITY 4

    • Manage an Ecosystem Composed of In-House and Outsourced Systems

    Various market and company factors are motivating a review on resource and system sourcing strategies. The right sourcing model provides key skills, resources, and capabilities to meet innovation, time to market, financial, and quality goals of the business. However, organizations struggle with how best to support sourcing partners and to allocate the right number of resources to maximize success.

    Introduction

    A multisource system is an ecosystem of integrated internally and externally developed applications, data, and infrastructure. These technologies can be custom developed, heavily configured vendor solutions, or they may be commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) solutions. These systems can also be developed, supported, and managed by internal staff, in partnership with outsourced contractors, or be completely outsourced. Multisource systems should be configured and orchestrated in a way that maximizes the delivery of specific value drivers for the targeted audience.

    Successfully selecting a sourcing approach is not a simple RFP exercise to choose the lowest cost

    Defining and executing a sourcing approach can be a significant investment and risk because of the close interactions third-party services and partners will have with internal staff, enterprise applications and business capabilities. A careful selection and design is necessary.

    The selection of a sourcing partner is not simple. It involves the detailed inspection and examination of different candidates and matching their fit to the broader vision of the multisource system. In cases where control is critical, technology stack and resource sourcing consolidation to a few vendors and partners is preferred. In other cases, where worker productivity and system flexibility are highly prioritized, a plug-and-play best-of-breed approach is preferred.

    Typical factors involved in sourcing decisions.

    Sourcing needs to be driven by your department and system strategies

    How does the department want to be perceived?

    The image that your applications department and teams want to reflect is frequently dependent on the applications they deliver and support, the resources they are composed of, and the capabilities they provide.

    Therefore, choosing the right sourcing approach should be driven by understanding who the teams are and want to be (e.g. internal builder, an integrator, a plug-in player), what they can or want to do (e.g. custom-develop or implement), and what they can deliver or support (e.g. cloud or on-premises) must be established.

    What value is the system delivering?

    Well-integrated systems are the lifeblood of your organization. They provide the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, employees, and stakeholders. However, underlying system components may not be sourced under a unified strategy, which can lead to duplicate vendor services and high operational costs.

    The right sourcing approach ensures your partners address key capabilities in your system's delivery and support, and that they are positioned to maximize the value of critical and high-impact components.

    Signals

    Business demand may outpace what vendors can support or offer

    Outsourcing and shifting to a buy-over-build applications strategy are common quick fixes to dealing with capacity and skills gaps. However, these quick fixes often become long-term implementations that are not accounted for in the sourcing selection process. Current application and resource sourcing strategies must be reviewed to ensure that vendor arrangements meet the current and upcoming demands and challenges of the business, customers, and enterprise technologies, such as:

    • Pressure from stakeholders to lower operating costs while maintaining or increasing quality and throughput.
    • Technology lock-in that addresses short-term needs but inhibits long-term growth and maturity.
    • Team capacity and talent acquisition not meeting the needs of the business.
    A circle graph is shown with 42% of the circle coloured in dark brown, with the number 42% in the centre.

    of respondents stated they outsourced software development fully or partly in the last 12 months (2021).

    Source: Coding Sans, 2021.

    A circle graph is shown with 65% of the circle coloured in dark brown, with the number 65% in the centre.

    of respondents stated they were at least somewhat satisfied with the result of outsourcing software development.

    Source: Coding Sans, 2021.

    Drivers

    Business-managed applications

    Employees are implementing and building applications without consulting, notifying, or heeding the advice of IT. IT is often ill-equipped and under-resourced to fight against shadow IT. Instead, organizations are shifting the mindset of "fight shadow IT" to "embrace business-managed applications," using good practices in managing multisource systems. A multisource approach strikes the right balance between user empowerment and centralized control with the solutions and architecture that can best enable it.

    Unique problems to solve

    Point solutions offer features to address unique use cases in uncommon technology environments. However, point solutions are often deployed in siloes with limited integration or overlap with other solutions. The right sourcing strategy accommodates the fragmented nature of point solutions into a broader enterprise system strategy, whether that be:

    • Multisource best of breed – integrate various technologies that provide subsets of the features needed for supporting business functions.
    • Multisource custom – integrate systems built in-house with technologies developed by external organizations.
    • Vendor add-ons and integrations – enhance an existing vendor's offering by using their system add-ons as upgrades, new add-ons, or integrations.

    Vendor services

    Some vendor services in a multisource environment may be redundant, conflicting, or incompatible. Given that multisource systems are regularly changing, it is difficult to identify what services are affected, what would be needed to fill the gap of the removed solution, or which redundant services should be removed.

    A multisource approach motivates the continuous rationalization of your vendor services and partners to determine the right mixture of in-house and outsourced resources, capabilities, and technologies.

    Benefits & Risks

    Benefits

    • Business-Focused Solution
    • Flexibility
    • Cost Optimization

    Multisource systems can be designed to support an employee's ability to select the tools they want and need.

    The environment is architected in a loosely coupled approach to allow applications to be easily added, removed, and modified with minimized impact to other integrated applications.

    Rather than investing in large solutions upfront, applications are adopted when they are needed and are removed when little value is gained. Disciplined application portfolio management is necessary to see the full value of this benefit.

    Risks

    • Manageable Sprawl
    • Policy Adherence
    • Integration & Compatibility

    The increased number and diversity of applications in multisource system environments can overwhelm system managers who do not have an effective application portfolio management practice.

    Fragmented application implementations risk inconsistent adherence to security and other quality policies, especially in situations where IT is not involved.

    Application integration can quickly become tangled, untraceable, and unmanageable because of varying team and vendor preferences for specific integration technologies and techniques.

    Address your pressure points to fully realize the benefits of this priority

    Success can be dependent on your ability to address your pressure points.

    Attracting and Retaining Talent

    Enable business-managed applications.

    Create the integrations to enable the easy connection of desired tools to enterprise systems with the appropriate guardrails.

    Maximizing the Return on Technology

    Enhance the functionality of existing applications.

    Complement current application capability gaps with data, features, and services from third-party applications.

    Confidently Shifting to Digital

    Use best-of-breed tools to meet specific digital needs.

    Select the best tools to meet the unique and special functional needs of the digital vision.

    Addressing Competing Priorities

    Agree on a common philosophy on system composition.

    Establish an owner of the multisource system to guide how the system should mature as the organization grows.

    Fostering a Collaborative Culture

    Discuss how applications can work together better in an ecosystem.

    Build committees to discuss how applications can better support each other and drive more value.

    Creating High-Throughput Teams

    Alleviate delivery bottlenecks and issues.

    Leverage third-party sources to fill skills and capacity gaps until a long-term solution can be implemented.

    Recommendations

    Define the goals of your applications department and product vision

    Understanding the applications team's purpose and image is critical in determining how the system they are managing and the skills and capacities they need should be sourced.

    Changing and conflicting definitions of value and goals make it challenging to convey an agreeable strategy of the multisource system. An achievable vision and practical tactics ensure all parties in the multisource system are moving in the same direction.

    Related Research:

    Develop a sourcing partner strategy

    Almost half of all sourcing initiatives do not realize projected savings, and the biggest reason is the choice of partner (Zhang et al., 2018). Making the wrong choice means inferior products, higher costs and the loss of both clients and reputation.

    Choosing the right sourcing partner involves understanding current skills and capacities, finding the right matching partner based on a desired profile, and managing a good working relationship that sees short-term gains and supports long-term goals.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Strengthen enterprise integration practices

    Integration strategies that are focused solely on technology are likely to complicate rather than simplify because little consideration is given on how other systems and processes will be impacted. Enterprise integration needs to bring together business process, applications, and data – in that order.

    Kick-start the process of identifying opportunities for improvement by mapping how applications and data are coordinated to support business activities.

    Related Research:

    Manage your solution architecture and application portfolio

    Haphazardly implementing and integrating applications can generate significant security, performance, and data risks. A well-thought-through solution architecture is essential in laying the architecture quality principles and roadmap on how the multisource system can grow and evolve in a sustainable and maintainable way.

    Good application portfolio management complements the solution architecture as it indicates when low-value and unused applications should be removed to reduce system complexity.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Embrace business-managed applications

    Multisource systems bring a unique opportunity to support the business and end users' desire to implement and develop their own applications. However, traditional models of managing applications may not accommodate the specific IT governance and management practices required to operate business-managed applications:

    • A collaborative and trusting business-IT relationship is key.
    • The role of IT must be reimagined.
    • Business must be accountable for its decisions.

    Related Research:

    CASE STUDY
    Cognizant

    Situation

    • Strives to be primarily an industry-aligned organization that delivers multiple service lines in multiple geographies.
    • Cognizant seeks to carefully consider client culture to create a one-team environment.
    • Value proposition is a consultative approach bringing thought leadership and mutually adding value to the relationship vs. the more traditional order-taker development partner.
    • Wants to share in solution development to facilitate shared successes. Geographic alignment drives knowledge of the client and their challenges, not just about time zone and supportability.
    • Offers one of the largest offshore capabilities in the world, supported by local and nearshore resources to drive local knowledge.
    • Today's clients don't typically want a black box, they are sophisticated and want transparency around the process and solution, to have a partner.
    • Clients do want to know where the work is being delivered from, how it's being done.

    Source: interview with Jay MacIsaac, Cognizant.

    Approach

    • Best relationship comes where teams operate as one.
    • Clients are seeking value, not a development black box.
    • Clients want to have a partner they can engage with, not just an order taker.
    • Want to build a one-team culture with shared goals and deliver business value.
    • Seek a partner that will add to their thinking not echo it.

    Results

    • Cognizant is continuing to deliver double-digit growth and continues to strive for top quartile performance.
    • Growth in the client base has seen the company grow to over 340,000 associates worldwide.

    Digital Organization as a Platform

    PRIORITY 5

    • Create a Common Digital Interface to Access All Products and Services

    A digital platform enables organizations to leverage a flexible, reliable, and scalable foundation to create a valuable DX, ease delivery and management efforts, maximize existing investments, and motivate the broader shift to digital. This approach provides a standard to architect, integrate, configure, and modernize the applications that compose the platform.

    Introduction

    What is digital organization as a platform (DOaaP)?

    Digital organization as a platform (DOaaP) is a collection of integrated digital services, products, applications, and infrastructure that is used as a vehicle to meet and exceed an organization's digital strategies. It often serves as an accessible "place for exchanges of information, goods, or services to occur between producers and consumers as well as the community that interacts
    with said platform" (Watts, 2020).

    DOaaP involves a strategy that paves the way for organizations to be digital. It helps organizations use their assets (e.g. data, processes, products, services) in the most effective ways and become more open to cooperative delivery, usage, and management. This opens opportunities for innovation and cross-department collaborations.

    How is DOaaP described?

    1. Open and Collaborative
      • Open organization: open data, open APIs, transparency, and user participation.
      • Collaboration, co-creation, crowdsourcing, and innovation
    2. Accessible and Connected
      • Digital inclusion
      • Channel ubiquity
      • Integrity and interoperability
      • Digital marketplace
    3. Digital and Programmable
      • Digital identity
      • Policies and processes as code
      • Digital products and services
      • Enabling digital platforms

    Digital organizations follow a common set of principles and practices

    Customer-centricity

    Digital organizations are driven by customer focus, meeting and exceeding customer expectations. It must design its services with a "digital first" principle, providing access through every expected channel and including seamless integration and interoperability with various departments, partners, and third-party services. It also means creating trust in its ability to provide secure services and to keep privacy and ethics as core pillars.

    Leadership, management, and strategies

    Digital leadership brings customer focus to the enterprise and its structures and organizes efficient networks and ecosystems. Accomplishing this means getting rid of silos and a siloed mentality and aligning on a digital vision to design policies and services that are efficient, cost-effective, and provide maximum benefit to the user. Asset sharing, co-creation, and being open and transparent become cornerstones of a digital organization.

    Infrastructure

    Providing digital services across demographics and geographies requires infrastructure, and that in turn requires long-term vision, smart investments, and partnerships with various source partners to create the necessary foundational infrastructure upon which to build digital services.

    Digitization and automation

    Automation and digitization of processes and services, as well as creating digital-first products, lead to increased efficiency and reach of the organization across demographics and geographies. Moreover, by taking a digital-first approach, digital organizations future-proof their services and demonstrate their commitment to stakeholders.

    Enabling platforms

    DOaaP embraces open standards, designing and developing organizational platforms and ecosystems with a cloud-first mindset and sound API strategies. Developer experience must also take center stage, providing the necessary tools and embracing Agile and DevOps practices and culture become prerequisites. Cybersecurity and privacy are central to the digital platform; hence they must be part of the design and development principles and practices.

    Signals

    The business expects support for digital products and services

    Digital transformation continues to be a high-priority initiative for many organizations, and they see DOaaP as an effective way to enable and exploit digital capabilities. However, DOaaP unleashes new strategies, opportunities, and challenges that are elusive or unfamiliar to business leaders. Barriers in current business operating models may limit DOaaP success, such as:

    • Department and functional silos
    • Dispersed, fragmented and poor-quality data
    • Ill-equipped and under-skilled resources to support DOaaP adoption
    • System fragmentation and redundancies
    • Inconsistent integration tactics employed across systems
    • Disjointed user experience leading to low engagement and adoption

    DOaaP is not just about technology, and it is not the sole responsibility of either IT or business. It is the collective responsibility of the organization.

    A circle graph is shown with 47% of the circle coloured in dark blue, with the number 47% in the centre.

    of organizations plan to unlock new value through digital. 50% of organizations are planning major transformation over the next three years.

    Source: Nash Squared, 2022.

    A circle graph is shown with 70% of the circle coloured in dark blue, with the number 70% in the centre.

    of organizations are undertaking digital expansion projects focused on scaling their business with technology. This result is up from 57% in 2021.

    Source: F5 Inc, 2022.

    Drivers

    Unified brand and experience

    Users should have the same experience and perception of a brand no matter what product or service they use. However, fragmented implementation of digital technologies and inconsistent application of design standards makes it difficult to meet this expectation. DOaaP embraces a single design and DX standard for all digital products and services, which creates a consistent perception of your organization's brand and reputation irrespective of what products and services are being used and how they are accessed.

    Accessibility

    Rapid advancement of end-user devices and changes to end-user behaviors and expectations often outpace an organization's ability to meet these requirements. This can make certain organization products and services difficult to find, access and leverage. DOaaP creates an intuitive and searchable interface to all products and services and enables the strategic combination of technologies to collectively deliver more value.

    Justification for modernization

    Many opportunities are left off the table when legacy systems are abstracted away rather than modernized. However, legacy systems may not justify the investment in modernization because their individual value is outweighed by the cost. A DOaaP initiative motivates decision makers to look at the entire system (i.e. modern and legacy) to determine which components need to be brought up to a minimum digital state. The conversation has now changed. Legacy systems should be modernized to increase the collective benefit of the entire DOaaP.

    Benefits & Risks

    Benefits

    • Look & Feel
    • User Adoption
    • Shift to Digital

    A single, modern, customizable interface enables a common look and feel no matter what and how the platform is being accessed.

    Organizations can motivate and encourage the adoption and use of all products and services through the platform and increase the adoption of underused technologies.

    DOaaP motivates and supports the modernization of data, processes, and systems to meet the goals and objectives outlined in the broader digital transformation strategy.

    Risks

    • Data Quality
    • System Stability
    • Ability to Modernize
    • Business Model Change

    Each system may have a different definition of commonly used entities (e.g. customer), which can cause data quality issues when information is shared among these systems.

    DOaaP can stress the performance of underlying systems due to the limitations of some systems to handle increased traffic.

    Some systems cannot be modernized due to cost constraints, business continuity risks, vendor lock-in, legacy and lore, or other blocking factors.

    Limited appetite to make the necessary changes to business operations in order to maximize the value of DOaaP technologies.

    Address your pressure points to fully realize the benefits of this priority

    Success can be dependent on your ability to address your pressure points.

    Attracting and Retaining Talent Promote and showcase achievements and successes. Share the valuable and innovative work of your teams across the organization and with the public.
    Maximizing the Return on Technology Increase visibility of underused applications. Promote the adoption and use of all products and services through the platform and use the lessons learned to justify removal, updates or modernizations.
    Confidently Shifting to Digital Bring all applications up to a common digital standard. Define the baseline digital state all applications, data, and processes must be in to maximize the value of the platform.
    Addressing Competing Priorities Map to a holistic platform vision, goals and objectives. Work with relevant stakeholders, teams and end users to agree on a common directive considering all impacted perspectives.
    Fostering a Collaborative Culture Ensure the platform is configured to meet the individual needs of the users. Tailor the interface and capabilities of the platform to address users' functional and personal concerns.
    Creating High-Throughput Teams Abstract the enterprise system to expedite delivery. Use the platform to standardize application system access to simplify platform changes and quicken development and testing.

    Recommendations

    Define your platform vision

    Organizations realize that a digital model is the way to provide more effective services to their customers and end users in a cost-effective, innovative, and engaging fashion. DOaaP is a way to help support this transition.

    However, various platform stakeholders will have different interpretations of and preferences for what this platform is intended to solve, what benefits it is supposed to deliver, and what capabilities it will deliver. A grounded vision is imperative to steer the roadmap and initiatives.

    Related Research:

    Assess and modernize your applications

    Certain applications may not sufficiently support the compatibility, flexibility, and efficiency requirements of DOaaP. While workaround technologies and tactics can be employed to overcome these application challenges, the full value of the DOaaP may not be realized.

    Reviewing the current state of the application portfolio will indicate the functional and value limitations of what DOaaP can provide and an indication of the scope of investment needed to bring applications up to a minimum state.

    Related Research:

    Recommendations

    Understand and evaluate end-user needs

    Technology has reached a point where it's no longer difficult for teams to build functional and valuable digital platforms. Rather, the difficulty lies in creating an interface and platform that people want to use and use frequently.

    While it is important to increase the access and promotion of all products and services, orchestrating and configuring them in a way to deliver a satisfying experience is even more important. Applications teams must first learn about and empathize with the needs of end users.

    Related Research:

    Architect your platform

    Formalizing and constructing DOaaP just for the sake of doing so often results in an initiative that is lengthy and costly and ends up being considered a failure.

    The build and optimization of the platform must be predicated on a thorough understanding of the DOaaP's goals, objectives, and priorities and the business capabilities and process they are meant to support and enable. The appropriate architecture and delivery practices can then be defined and employed.

    Related Research:

    CASE STUDY
    e-Estonia

    Situation

    The digital strategy of Estonia resulted in e-Estonia, with the vision of "creating a society with more transparency, trust, and efficiency." Estonia has addressed the challenge by creating structures, organizations, and a culture of innovation, and then using the speed and efficiency of digital infrastructure, apps, and services. This strategy can reduce or eliminate bureaucracy through transparency and automation.

    Estonia embarked on its journey to making digital a priority in 1994-1996, focusing on a committed investment in infrastructure and digital literacy. With that infrastructure in place, they started providing digital services like an e-banking service (1996), e-tax and mobile parking (2002), and then went full steam ahead with a digital information interoperability platform in 2001, digital identity in 2002, e-health in 2008, and e-prescription in 2010. The government is now strategizing for AI.

    Results

    This image contains the results of the e-Estonia case study results

    Source: e-Estonia

    Practices employed

    The e-Estonia digital government model serves as a reference for governments across the world; this is acknowledged by the various awards it has received, like #2 in "internet freedom," awarded by Freedom House in 2019; #1 on the "digital health index," awarded by the Bertelsmann Foundation in 2019; and #1 on "start-up friendliness," awarded by Index Venture in 2018.

    References

    "15th State of Agile Report." Digital.ai, 2021. Web.
    "2022 HR Trends Report." McLean & Company, 2022.
    "2022: State of Application Strategy Report." F5 Inc, 2022.
    "Are Executives Wearing Rose-Colored Glasses Around Digital Transformation?" Cyara, 2021. Web.
    "Cost of a Data Breach Report 2022." IBM, 2022. Web.
    Dalal, Vishal, et al. "Tech Debt: Reclaiming Tech Equity." McKinsey Digital, Oct. 2020. Web.
    "Differentiating Between Intelligent Automation and Hyperautomation." IBM, 15 October 2021. Web.
    "Digital Leadership Report 2021." Harvey Nash Group, 2021.
    "Digital Leadership Report 2022: The State of Digital." Nash Squared, 2022. Web.
    Gupta, Sunil. "Driving Digital Strategy: A Guide to Reimagining Your Business." Harvard Business Review Press, 2018. Web.
    Haff, Gordon. "State of Application Modernization Report 2022." Konveyor, 2022. Web.
    "IEEE Standard for Software Maintenance: IEEE Std 1219-1998." IEEE Standard for Software Maintenance, 1998. Accessed Dec. 2015.
    "Intelligent Automation." Cognizant, n.d. Web.
    "Kofax 2022: Intelligent Automation Benchmark Study". Kofax, 2021. Web.
    McCann, Leah. "Barco's Virtual Classroom at UCL: A Case Study for the Future of All University Classrooms?" rAVe, 2 July 2020, Web.
    "Proactive Staffing and Patient Prioritization to Decompress ED and Reduce Length of Stay." University Hospitals, 2018. Web.
    "Secrets of Successful Modernization." looksoftware, 2013. Web.
    "State of Software Development." Coding Sans, 2021. Web.
    "The State of Low-Code/No-Code." Creatio, 2021. Web.
    "We Have Built a Digital Society and We Can Show You How." e-Estonia. n.d. Web.
    Zanna. "The 5 Types of Experience Series (1): Brand Experience Is Your Compass." Accelerate in Experience, 9 February 2020. Web.
    Zhang, Y. et al. "Effects of Risks on the Performance of Business Process Outsourcing Projects: The Moderating Roles of Knowledge Management Capabilities." International Journal of Project Management, 2018, vol. 36 no. 4, 627-639.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    This is a picture of Chris Harrington

    Chris Harrington
    Chief Technology Officer
    Carolinas Telco Federal Credit Union

    Chris Harrington is Chief Technology Officer (CTO) of Carolinas Telco Federal Credit Union. Harrington is a proven leader with over 20 years of experience developing and leading information technology and cybersecurity strategies and teams in the financial industry space.

    This is a picture of Benjamin Palacio

    Benjamin Palacio
    Senior Information Technology Analyst County of Placer

    Benjamin Palacio has been working in the application development space since 2007 with a strong focus on system integrations. He has seamlessly integrated applications data across multiple states into a single reporting solution for management teams to evaluate, and he has codeveloped applications to manage billions in federal funding. He is also a CSAC-credentialed IT Executive (CA, USA).

    This is a picture of Scott Rutherford

    Scott Rutherford
    Executive Vice President, Technology
    LGM Financial Services Inc.

    Scott heads the Technology division of LGM Financial Services Inc., a leading provider of warranty and financing products to automotive OEMs and dealerships in Canada. His responsibilities include strategy and execution of data and analytics, applications, and technology operations.

    This is a picture of Robert Willatts

    Robert Willatts
    IT Manager, Enterprise Business Solutions and Project Services
    Town of Newmarket

    Robert is passionate about technology, innovation, and Smart City Initiatives. He makes customer satisfaction as the top priority in every one of his responsibilities and accountabilities as an IT manager, such as developing business applications, implementing and maintaining enterprise applications, and implementing technical solutions. Robert encourages communication, collaboration, and engagement as he leads and guides IT in the Town of Newmarket.

    This is a picture of Randeep Grewal

    Randeep Grewal
    Vice President, Enterprise Applications
    Red Hat

    Randeep has over 25 years of experience in enterprise applications, advanced analytics, enterprise data management, and consulting services, having worked at numerous blue-chip companies. In his most recent role, he is the Vice President of Enterprise Applications at Red Hat. Reporting to the CIO, he is responsible for Red Hat's core business applications with a focus on enterprise transformation, application architecture, engineering, and operational excellence. He previously led the evolution of Red Hat into a data-led company by maturing the enterprise data and analytics function to include data lake, streaming data, data governance, and operationalization of analytics for decision support.

    Prior to Red Hat, Randeep was the director of global services strategy at Lenovo, where he led the strategy using market data to grow Lenovo's services business by over $400 million in three years. Prior to Lenovo, Randeep was the director of advanced analytics at Alliance One and helped build an enterprise data and analytics function. His earlier work includes seven years at SAS, helping SAS become a leader in business analytics, and at KPMG consulting, where he managed services engagements at Fortune 100 companies.

    Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize Your Investment

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}138|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • A lack of understanding around VMware’s licensing models, bundles, and negotiation tactics makes it difficult to negotiate from a position of strength.
    • Unfriendly commercial practices combined with hyperlink-ridden agreements have left organizations vulnerable to audits and large shortfall payments.
    • Enterprise license agreements (ELAs) come in several purchasing models and do not contain the EULA or various VMware product guide documentation that governs license usage rules and can change monthly.
    • Without a detailed understanding of VMware’s various purchasing models, shelfware often occurs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Contracts are typically overweighted with a discount at the expense of contractual T&Cs that can restrict license usage and expose you to unpleasant financial surprises and compliance risk.
    • VMware customers almost always have incomplete price information from which to effectively negotiate a “best in class” ELA.
    • VMware has a large lead in being first to market and it realizes that running dual virtualization stacks is complex, unwieldy, and expensive. To further complicate the issues, most skill sets in the industry are skewed towards VMware.

    Impact and Result

    • Negotiate desired terms and conditions at the start of the agreement, and prioritize which use rights may be more important than an additional discount percentage.
    • Gather data points and speak with licensing partners to determine if the deal being offered is in fact as great as VMware says it is.
    • Beware of out-year pricing and ELA optimization reviews that may provide undesirable surprises and more spend than was planned.

    Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize Your Investment Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage Your VMware Agreements – Use the Info-Tech tools capture your existing licenses and prepare for your renewal bids.

    Use Info-Tech’s licensing best practices to avoid shelfware with VMware licensing and remain compliant in case of an audit.

    • Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize Your Investment Storyboard

    2. Manage your VMware agreements

    Use Info-Tech’s licensing best practices to avoid shelfware with VMware licensing and remain compliant in case of an audit.

    • VMware Business as Usual – Install Base SnS Renewal Only Tool
    • VMware ELA RFQ Template

    3. Transition to the VMWare Cloud – Use these tools to evaluate your ELA and vShpere requirements and make an informed choice.

    Manage your renewals and transition to the cloud subscription model.

    • VPP Transactional Purchase Tool
    • VMware ELA Analysis Tool
    • vSphere Edition 7 Features List

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize Your Investment

    Learn the essential steps to avoid overspending and to maximize negotiation leverage with VMware.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize Your Investment.

    The image contains a picture of Scott Bickley.

    The mechanics of negotiating a deal with VMware may seem simple at first as the vendor is willing to provide a heavy discount on an enterprise license agreement (ELA). However, come renewal time, when a reduction in spend or shelfware is needed, or to exit the ELA altogether, the process can be exceedingly frustrating as VMware holds the balance of power in the negotiation.

    Negotiating a complete agreement with VMware from the start can save you from an immense headache and unforeseen expenditures. Many VMware customers do not realize that the terms and conditions in the Volume Purchasing Program (VPP) and Enterprise Purchasing Program (EPP) agreements limit how and where they are able to use their licenses.

    Furthermore, after the renewal is complete, organizations must still worry about the management of various license types, accurate discovery of what has been deployed, visibility into license key assignments, and over and under use of licenses.

    Preventive and proactive measures enclosed within this blueprint will help VMware clients mitigate this minefield of challenges.

    Scott Bickley
    Practice Lead, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    VMware's dominant position in the virtualization space can create uncertainty to your options in the long term as well as the need to understand:

    • The hybrid cloud model.
    • Hybrid VM security and management.
    • New subscription license model and how it affects renewals.

    Make an informed decision with your VMware investments to allow for continued ROI.

    There are several hurdles that are presented when considering a VMware ELA:

    • Evolving licensing and purchasing models
    • Understanding potential ROI in the cloud landscape
    • Evolving door of corporate ownership

    Overcoming these and other obstacles are key to long-term satisfaction with your VMware infrastructure.

    Info-Tech has a two-phase approach:

    • Manage your VMware agreements.
    • Plan a transition to the cloud.

    A tactical roadmap approach to VMware ELA and the cloud will ensure long-term success and savings.

    Info-Tech Insight

    VMware customers almost always have incomplete price information from which to effectively negotiate a “best in class” ELA.

    Your challenge

    VMware's dominant position in the virtualization space can create uncertainty to your options in the long term driven by:

    • VMware’s dominant market position and ownership of the virtualization market, which is forcing customers to focus on managing capacity demand to ensure a positive ROI on every license.
    • The trend toward a hybrid cloud for many organizations, especially those considering using VMware in public clouds, resulting in confusion regarding licensing and compliance scenarios.

    ELAs and EPPs are generally the only way to get a deep discount from VMware.

    The image contains a pie chart to demonstrate that 85% have answered yes to being audited by VMware for software license compliance.

    Common obstacles

    There are several hurdles that are presented when considering a VMware ELA.

    • A lack of understanding around VMware’s licensing models, bundles, and negotiation tactics makes it difficult to negotiate from a position of strength.
    • Unfriendly commercial practices combined with hyperlink-ridden agreements have left organizations vulnerable to audits and large shortfall payments.
    • ELAs come in several purchasing models and do not contain the EULA or various VMware product guide documentation that govern license usage rules and can change monthly.

    Competition is a key driver of price

    The image contains a screenshot of a bar graph to demonstrate virtualization market share % 2022.

    Source: Datanyze

    Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize your Investment

    The image contains a screenshot of the Thought model on Master the secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize your Investment.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Master the Secrets of VMware Licensing to Maximize Your Investment

    1. Manage Your VMware Agreements

    2. Transition to the VMware Cloud

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Establish licensing requirements

    1.2 Evaluate licensing options

    1.3 Evaluate agreement options

    1.4 Purchase and manage licenses

    1.5 Understand SnS renewal management

    2.1 Understand the VMware subscription model

    2.2 Migrate workloads and licenses

    2.3 Manage SnS and cloud subscriptions

    Phase Outcomes

    Understanding of your licensing requirements and what agreement option best fits your needs for now and the future.

    Knowledge of VMware’s sales model and how to negotiate the best deal.

    Knowledge of the evolving cloud subscription model and how to plan your cloud migration and transition to the new licensing.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    With the introduction of the subscription licensing model, VMware licensing and renewals are becoming more complex and require a deeper understanding of the license program options to best manage renewals and cloud deployments as well as to maximize legacy ROI.

    Phase 1 insight

    Contracts are typically overweighted with a discount at the expense of contractual T&Cs that can restrict license usage and expose you to unpleasant financial surprises and compliance risk.

    Phase 1 insight

    VMware has a large lead in being first to market and it realizes running dual virtualization stacks is complex, unwieldy, and expensive. To further complicate the issues, most skill sets in the industry are skewed toward VMware.

    Phase 2 insight

    VMware has purposefully reduced a focus on the actual license terms and conditions; most customers focus on the transactional purchase or the ELA document, but the rules governing usage are on a website and can be changed by VMware regularly.

    Tactical insight

    Beware of out-year pricing and ELA optimization reviews that may provide undesirable surprises and more spend than was planned.

    Tactical insight

    Negotiate desired terms and conditions at the start of the agreement, and prioritize which use rights may be more important than an additional discount percentage.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    VMware ELA Analysis Tool

    VMware ELA RFQ Template Tool

    VPP Transaction Purchase Tool

    VMware ELA Analysis Tool

    Use this tool as a template for an RFQ with VMware ELA contracts.

    Use this tool to analyze cost breakdown and discount based on your volume purchasing program (VPP) level.

    The image contains screenshots of the VMware ELA Analysis Tool. The image contains a screenshot of the VMware ELA RFQ template tool. The image contains a screenshot of the VPP Transaction Purchase Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    VMware Business as Usual SnS Renewal Only Tool

    Use this tool to analyze discounts from a multi-year agreement vs. prepay. See how you can get the best discount.

    The image contains screenshots of the VMware Business as Usual SnS Renewal Only Tool.

    Blueprint Objectives

    The aim of this blueprint is to provide a foundational understanding of VMware’s licensing agreement and best practices to manage them.

    Why VMware

    What to Know

    The Future

    VMware is the leader in OS virtualization, however, this is a saturated market, which is being pressured by public and hybrid cloud as a competitive force taking market share.

    There are few viable alternatives to VMware for virtualization due to vendor lock-in of existing IT infrastructure footprint. It is too difficult and cost prohibitive to make a shift away from VMware even when alternative solutions are available.

    ELAs are the preferred method of contracting as it sets the stage for a land-and-expand product strategy; once locked into the ELA model, customers must examine VMware alternatives with preference or risk having Support and Subscription Services (SnS) re-priced at retail.

    VMware does not provide a great deal of publicly available information regarding its enterprise license agreement (ELA) options, leaving a knowledge gap that allows the sales team to steer the customer.

    VMware is taking countermeasures against increasing competition.

    Recent contract terms changed to eliminate perpetual caps on SnS renewals; they are now tied to a single year of discounted SnS, then they go to list price.

    Migration of list pricing to a website versus contract, where pricing can now be changed, reducing discount percentage effectiveness.

    Increased audits of customers, especially those electing to not renew an ELA.


    Examining VMware’s vendor profile

    Turbonomics conducted a vendor profile on major vendors, focusing on licensing and compliance. It illustrated the following results:

    The image contains a pie graph to demonstrate that the majority of companies say yes to using license enterprise software from VMware.

    The image contains a bar graph to demonstrate what license products organizations use of VMware products.

    Source: Turbonomics
    N-sample size

    Case Study

    The image contains a logo for ADP.

    INDUSTRY: Finance

    SOURCE: VMware.com

    “We’ll have network engineers, storage engineers, computer engineers, database engineers, and systems engineers all working together as one intact team developing and delivering goals on specific outcomes.” – Vipul Nagrath, CIO, ADP

    Improving developer capital management

    Constant innovation helped ADP keep ahead of customer needs in the human resources space, but it also brought constant changes to the IT environment. Internally, the company found it was spending too long working on delivering the required infrastructure and system updates. IT staff wanted to improve velocity for refreshes to better match the needs of ADP developers and encourage continued development innovation.

    Business needs

    • Improve turnaround time on infrastructure refreshes to better meet developer roadmaps.
    • Establish an IT culture that works at the global scale of ADP and empowers individual team members.
    • Streamline approach toward infrastructure resource delivery to reduce need for manual management.

    Impact

    • Infrastructure resource delivery reduced from 100+ days to minutes, improving ADP developer efficiency.
    • VMware Cloud™ on AWS establishes seamless private and public cloud workflows, fostering agility and innovation.
    • Automating IT management redirects resources to R&D, boosting time to market for new services.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Discuss scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Assess the current state.

    Determine licensing position.

    Call #3: Complete a deployment count, needs analysis, and internal audit.

    Call #4: Review findings with analyst:

    • Review licensing options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Review contract option types.

    Call #5: Select licensing option. Document forecasted costs and benefits.

    Call #6: Review final contract:

    • Discuss negotiation points.
    • Plan a roadmap for SAM.

    Call #7: Negotiate final contract. Evaluate and develop a roadmap for SAM.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 2 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 2 months.

    Phase # 1

    Manage Your VMware Agreements

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish licensing requirements

    1.2 Evaluate licensing options

    1.3 Evaluate agreement options

    1.4 Purchase and manage licenses

    2.1 Understand the VMware subscription model

    2.2 Migrate workloads and licenses

    2.3 Discuss the VMware sales approach

    2.4 Manage SnS and cloud subscriptions

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understanding the VMware licensing model
    • Understanding the license agreement options
    • Understanding the VMware sales approach

    This phase will take you thorough:

    • The new VMware subscription movement to the cloud
    • How to prepare and migrate
    • Manage your subscriptions efficiently

    1.1 Establish licensing requirements

    VMware has greatly improved the features of vSphere over time.

    vSphere Main Editions Overview

    • vSphere Standard – Provides the basic features for server consolidation. A support and subscription contract (SnS) is mandatory when purchasing the vSphere Standard.
    • vSphere Enterprise Plus – Provides the full range of vSphere features. A support and subscription contract (SnS) is mandatory when purchasing the Enterprise Plus editions.
    • vSphere Essentials kit – The Essentials kit is an all-in-one solution for small environments with up to three hosts (2 CPUs on each host). Support is optional when purchasing the Essentials kit and is available on a per-incident basis.
    • vSphere Essentials Plus kit – This is similar to the Essentials kit and provides additional features such as vSphere vMotion, vSphere HA, and vSphere replication. A support and subscription contract (SnS) is sold separately, and a minimum of one year of SnS is required.

    Review vSphere Edition Features

    The image contains a screenshot to review the vSphere Edition Features.

    Download the vSphere Edition 7 Features List

    1.2 Evaluate licensing options

    VMware agreement types

    Review purchase options to align with your requirements.

    Transactional VPP EPP ELA

    Transactional

    Entry-level volume license purchasing program

    Mid-level purchasing program

    Highest-level purchasing program

    • Purchasing in this model is not recommended for business purposes unless very infrequent and low quantities.
    • 250 points minimum
    • Four tiers of discounts
    • Rolling eight-quarter points accumulation period
    • Discounts on license only

    Deal size of initial purchase typically is:

    • US$250K MSRP License + SnS (2,500 tokens)
    • Exceptions do exist with purchase volume

    Minimum deal size of top-up purchase:

    • US$50K MSRP License + SnS (500 tokens)
    • Initial purchase determines token level
    • Three-year term

    Minimum deal size of initial purchase:

    • US$150K-$250K
    • Discounted licenses and SnS through term of contract
    • Single volume license key
    • No final true-up
    • Global deployment rights and consolidation of multiple agreements

    1.2.1 The Volume Purchasing Program (VPP)

    This is the entry-level purchasing program aimed at small/mid-sized organizations.

    How the program works

    • The threshold to be able to purchase from the VPP program is 250 points minimum, equivalent to $25,000.
    • Discounts attained can only be applied to license purchases. They do not apply to service and support/renewals. Discounts range from 4% to 12%.
    • For the large majority of products 1 VPP point = ~$100.
      • Point values will be the same globally.
      • Point ratios may vary over time as SKUs are changed.
      • Points are valid for two years.

    Benefits

    • Budget predictability for two years.
    • Simple license purchase process.
    • Receive points on qualifying purchases that accumulate over a rolling eight-quarter period.
    • Online portal for tracking purchases and eligible discounts.
    • Global program where affiliates can purchase from existing contract.

    VPP Point & Discount Table

    Level

    Point Range

    Discount

    1

    250-599

    4%

    2

    600-999

    6%

    3

    1,000-1,749

    9%

    4

    1,750+

    12%

    Source: VMware Volume Purchasing Program

    1.2.2 Activity VPP Transactional Purchase Tool

    1-3 hours

    Instructions:

    1. Use the tool to analyze the cost breakdown and discount based on your Volume Purchasing Program level.
    2. On tab 1, Enter SnS install base renewal units and or new license details.
    3. Review tab 2 for Purchase summary.

    The image contains a screenshot of the VPP Transactional Purchase Tool.

    Input Output
    • SnS renewal details
    • New license requirements and pricing
    • Transaction purchase summary
    • Estimated VPP purchase level
    Materials Participants
    • Current VMware purchase orders
    • Any SnS renewal requirements
    • Transaction Purchase Tool
    • Procurement
    • Vendor Management
    • Licensing Admin

    Download the VPP Transactional Purchase Tool

    1.3 Evaluate agreement options

    Introduction to EPP and ELA

    What to know when using a token/credit-based agreement.

    Token/credit-based agreements carry high risk as customers are purchasing a set number of tokens/credits to be redeemed during the ELA term for licenses.

    • Tokens/credits that are not used during the ELA term expire and become worthless.
    • By default in most agreements (negotiation dependent), tokens/credits are tied to pricing maintained by VMware on its website that is subject to change (increase usually), resulting in a reduced value for the tokens/credits.
      • Therefore, it is necessary to negotiate to have current list prices for all products/versions included in the ELA to prevent price increases while in the current ELA term.
    • Token-based agreements may come with a lower overall discount level as VMware is granting more flexibility in terms of the wider product selection offered, vendor cost of overhead to manage the redemption program, currency exchange risks, and more complex revenue recognition headaches.

    1.3.1 The Enterprise Purchasing Program (EPP)

    This is aimed at mid-tier customers looking for flexibility with deeper discounting.

    How the program works

    • Token-based program in which tokens are redeemed for licenses and/or SnS.
      • Tokens can be added at any time to active fund.
      • Token usage is automatically tracked and reported.
    • Minimum order of 2,500 tokens, equivalent to $250,000 (1 token=$100).
      • Exceptions have been made, allowing for lower minimum spends.
    • Restricted to specific regions, not a global agreement.
    • Self-service portal for access to license keys and support entitlements.
    • Deeper discounting than the VMware Volume Purchase Program.
    • EPP initial purchase gets VPP L4 for four years.

    Benefits

    • Able to mix and match VMware products, manage licenses, and adjust deployment strategy.
    • Prices are protected for term of the EPP agreement.
    • Number of tokens needed to obtain a product or SnS are negotiated at the start of the contract and fixed for the term.
    • SnS is co-termed to the EPP term.
    • Ability to purchase new products that become available at a future date and are listed on the EPP Eligibility Matrix.

    EPP Level & Point Table

    Level

    Point Range

    7

    2,500-3,499

    8

    3,500-4,499

    9

    4,500-5,999

    10

    6,000+

    Source: VMware Volume Purchasing Program

    1.3.2 The ELA is aimed at large global organizations, offering the deepest discounts with operational benefits and flexibility

    What is an ELA?

    • The ELA agreement provides the best vehicle for global enterprises to obtain maximum discounts and price-hold protection for a set period of time. Discounts and price holds are removed once an ELA has expired.
    • The ELA minimum spend previously was $500,000. Purchase volume now generally starts at $250K total spend with exceptions and, depending on VMware, it may be possible to attain for $150K in net-new license spend.

    Key things to know

    • Customers pay up front for license and SnS rights, but depending on the deployment plans, the value of the licenses is not realized and/or recognized for up to two years after point of purchase.
    • License and SnS is paid up front for a three-year period in most ELAs, although a one- or two-year term can be negotiated.
    • Licenses not deployed in year one should be discounted in value and drive a re-evaluation of the ELA ROI, as even heavily discounted licenses that are not used until year three may not be such a great deal in retrospect.
      • Use a time value of money calculation to arrive at a realistic ROI.
      • Partner with Finance and Accounting to ensure the ROI also clears any Internal Hurdle Rate (IHR).
      • Share and strategically position your IHR with VMware and resellers to ensure they understand the minimum value an ELA deal must bring to the table.
    • Organizational changes, such as merger, acquisition, and divestiture (MAD) activities, may result in the customer paying for license rights that can no longer be used and/or require a renegotiated ELA.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If a legacy ELA exists that has “deploy or lose” language, engage VMware to recapture any lost license rights as VMware has changed this language effective with 2016 agreements and there is an “appeals” process for affected customers.

    1.3.3 Select the best ELA variant to match your specific demand profile and financial needs

    The advantages of an ELA are:

    • Maximum discount level + price protection
    • SnS discounted at % of net license fee
    • Sole option for global use territory rights

    General disadvantages are:

    • Term lock-in with SnS for three years
    • Pay up front and if defer usage, ROI drops
    • Territory rights priced at a premium versus domestic use rights

    Type of ELAs

    ELA Type

    Description

    Pros and Cons

    Capped (max quantities)

    Used to purchase a specific quantity and type of license.

    Pro – Clarity on what will be purchased

    Pro – Lower risk of over licensing

    Con – Requires accurate forecasting

    All you can eat or unlimited

    Used to purchase access to specified products that can be deployed in unlimited quantities during the ELA term.

    Pro – Acquire large quantity of licenses

    Pro – Accurate forecasting not critical

    Con – Deployment can easily exceed forecast, leading to high renewal costs

    Burn-down

    A form of capped ELA purchase that uses prepaid tokens that can be used more flexibly to acquire a variety of licenses or services. This can include the hybrid purchasing program (HPP) credits. However, the percentage redeemable for VMware subscription services may be limited to 10% of the MSRP value of the HPP credit.

    Pro – Accurate demand forecast not critical

    Pro – Can be used for products and services

    Con – Unused tokens or credits are forfeited

    True-up

    Allows for additional purchases during the ELA term on a determined schedule based on the established ELA pricing.

    Pro – Consumption payments matched after initial purchase

    Pro – Accurate demand forecast not critical

    Con – Potentially requires transaction throughout term

    1.4 Purchase and manage licenses

    Negotiating ELA terms and conditions

    Editable copies of VMware’s license and governance documentation are a requirement to initiate the dialogue and negotiation process over T&Cs.

    VMware’s licensing is complex and although documentation is publicly available, it is often hidden on VMware’s website.

    Many VMware customers often overlook reviewing the license T&Cs, leaving them open to compliance risks.

    It is imperative for customers to understand:

    • Product definition for licensing of each acquired product
    • Products included by bundle
    • Use restrictions:
      • The VMware Product Guide, which includes information about:
        • ELA Order Forms, Amendments, Exhibits, EULA, Support T&Cs, and other policies that add dozens of pages to a contractual agreement.
        • All of these documents are web based and can change monthly; URL links in the contract do not take the user to the actual document but a landing page from which customers must find the applicable documents.
      • Obtain copies of ALL current documents at the time of your order and keep as a reference in the CLM and SAM systems.

    Build in time to obtain, review, and negotiate these documents (easily weeks to months).

    1.4.1 Negotiating ELA terms and conditions specifics

    License and Deployment

    • Review perpetual use rights for all licenses purchased under the ELA (exception being subscription services).
    • Carefully scrutinize contract language for clearly defined deployment rights.
      • Some agreements contain language that terminates the use rights for licenses not deployed by the end of the ELA term.
    • While older contracts would frequently contain clearly defined token values and product prices for the ELA term, VMware has moved away from this process and now refers to URL links for current MSRP pricing.

    Use Rights

    • The customer’s legal entities and territories listed in the contract are hard limits on the license usage via the VMware Product Guide definitions. Global use rights are not a standard license grant with VMware license agreement by default. Global rights are usually tied to an ELA.
    • VMware audits most aggressively against violations of territory use rights and will use the non-compliance events to resolve the issue via a commercial transaction.
      • Negotiate for assignment rights with no strings attached in terms of fees or multi-party consent by future affiliates or successors to a surviving entity.
    • Extraordinary Corporate Transaction clause: VMware’s standard language prevents customers from using licenses within the ELA for any third party that becomes part of customer’s business by way of acquisition, merger, consolidation, change of control, reorganization, or other similar transaction.
      • Request VMware to drop this language.
    • Include any required language pertaining to MAD events as default language will not allow for transfer or assignment of license rights.

    Checklist of necessary information to negotiate the best deal

    Product details that go beyond the sales pitch

    • Product family
    • Unique product SKU for license renewal
    • Part description
    • Current regional or global price list
    • One and three-year proposal for SnS renewals including new license and SnS detail
    • SnS term dates
    • Discount or offered prices for all line items (global pricing is generally ~20% higher than US pricing)

    Different support levels (e.g. basic, enterprise, per incident)

    • Standard pricing:
      • Basic Support = 21% of current list price (12x5)
      • Production Support = 25% of current list price (24x7 for severity 1 issues) – defined in VMware Support and Subscription Services T&Cs; non-severity 1 issues are 12x5

    Details to ensure the product being purchased matches the business needs

    • Realizing after the fact the product is insufficient with respect to functional requirements or that extra spend is required can be frustrating and extend expected timelines

    SnS renewals pricing is based on the (1) year SnS list price

    • This can be bundled for a multi-year discounted SnS rate (can result in 12%+ under VPP)

    Governing agreements, VPP program details

    • Have a printed copy of documents that are URL links, which VMware can change, allowing for surprises or unexpected changes in rules

    1.4.2 Activity VMware ELA Analysis Tool

    2-4 hours

    Instructions:

    1. As a group, review the various RFQ responses. Identify top three proposals and start to enter proposal details into the VPP Prepay or ELA tabs of the analysis tool.
    2. Review savings in the ELA Offer Analysis tab.

    The image contains screenshots of the VMware ELA Analysis Tool.

    Input Output
    • RFQ requirements data
    • RFQ response data
    • Analysis of ELA proposals
    • ELA savings analysis
    Materials Participants
    • RFQ response documents
    • ELA Analysis Tool
    • IT Leadership
    • Procurement
    • Vendor Management

    Download the VMware ELA Analysis Tool

    1.4.3 Negotiating ELA terms and conditions specifics: pricing, renewal, and exit

    VMware does not offer price protection on future license consumption by default.

    Securing “out years” pricing for SnS or the cost of SnS is critical or it will default to a set percentage (25%) of MSRP, removing the ELA discount.

    Typically, the out year is one year; maximum is two years.

    Negotiate the “go forward” SnS pricing post-ELA term as part of the ELA negotiations when you have some leverage.

    Default after (1) out year is to rise to 25% of current MSRP versus as low as 20% of net license price within the ELA.

    Carefully incorporate the desired installed-base licenses that were acquired pre-ELA into the agreement, but ensure unwanted licenses are removed.

    Ancillary but binding support policies, online terms and conditions, and other hyperlinked documentation should be negotiated and incorporated as part of the agreement whenever possible.

    1.4.4 Find the best reseller partner

    Seek out a qualified VMware partner that will work with you and with your interest as a priority:

    1. Resellers, at minimum, should have achieved an enterprise-level rating, as these partners can offer the deepest discounts and have more clout with VMware.
    2. Select your reseller prior to engaging in any RFX acquisition steps. Verify they are enterprise level or higher AND secure their written commitment to maximum pass-through of the discounting provided to them by VMware.
    3. Document and prioritize key T&Cs for your ELA and submit to your sales team along with a requirement and timeline for their formal response. Essentially, this escalates outside of the VMware process and disrupts the status quo. Ideally this will occur in advance of being presented a contract by VMware and be pre-emptive in nature.
    4. If applicable and of benefit or a high priority, seek out a reseller that is willing to finance the VMware upfront payment cost at a low or no interest rate.
    5. It will be important to have ELA-level deals escalated to higher levels of authority to obtain “best in class” discount levels, above and beyond those prescribed in the VMware sales playbook.
    6. VMware’s standard process is to “route” customers through a pre-defined channel and “deal desk” process. Preferred pricing of up to an additional 10% discount is reserved for the first reseller that registers the deal with VMware, with larger discounts reserved for the Enterprise and Premium partners. Additional discounts can be earned if the deal closes within specified time periods (First Deal Registration).

    1.4.5 Activity VMware ELA RFQ Template

    1-3 hours

    Use this tool for as a template for an RFQ with VMware ELA contracts.

    1. For SnS renewals that contain no new licenses, state that the requirement for award consideration is the provisioning of all details for each itemized SnS renewal product code corresponding to all the licenses of your installed base. The details for the renewals are to be placed in Section 1 of the template.
    2. SnS Renewal Options: Info-Tech recommends that you ask for one- and three-year SnS renewal proposals, assuming these terms are realistic for your business requirements. Then compare your SnS BAU costs for these two options against ELA offers to determine the best choice for your renewal.

    The image contains a screenshot of the VMware ELA RFQ Template.

    Input Output
    • Renewing SnS data
    • Agreement type options
    • Detailed list of required licenses
    • Summary list of SnS requirements
    Materials Participants
    • RFQ Template
    • SnS renewal summary
    • New license/subscription details
    • IT Leadership
    • Vendor Management
    • Procurement

    Download the VMware ELA RFQ Template

    1.4.6 Consider your path forward

    Consider your route forward as contract commitments, license compliance, and terms and conditions differ in structure to perpetual models previously used.

    • Are you able to accurately discover VMware licensing within your environment?
    • Is licensing managed for compliance? Are internal audits conducted so you have accurate results?
    • Have the product use rights been examined for terms and conditions such as geographic rights? Some T&Cs may change over time due to hyperlinked references within commercial documents.
    • How are Oracle and SQL being used within your VMware environment? This may affect license compliance with Oracle and Microsoft in virtualized environments.
    • Prepare for the Subscription model; it’s here now and will be the lead discussion with all VMware reps going forward.

    Shift to Subscription

    1. With the $64bn takeover by Broadcom, there will be a significant shift and pressure to the subscription model.
    2. Broadcom has significant growth targets for its VMware acquisition that can only be achieved through a strong press to a SaaS model.

    Info-Tech Insight

    VMware has a license cost calculator and additional licensing documents that can be used to help determine what spend should be.

    Phase # 2

    Transition to the VMware Cloud

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish licensing requirements

    1.2 Evaluate licensing options

    1.3 Evaluate agreement options

    1.4 Purchase and manage licenses

    2.1 Understand the VMware subscription model

    2.2 Migrate workloads and licenses

    2.3 Discuss the VMware sales approach

    2.4 Manage SnS and cloud subscriptions

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the VMware licensing model
    • Understand the license agreement options
    • Understand the VMware sales approach

    This phase will take you thorough:

    • The new VMware subscription movement to the cloud
    • How to prepare and migrate
    • Manage your subscriptions efficiently

    2.1 Understand the VMware subscription model

    VMware Cloud Universal

    • VMware Cloud Universal unifies compute, network, and storage capabilities across infrastructures, management, and applications.
    • Take advantage of financial and cloud management flexibility by combining on-premises and SaaS capabilities for automation, operations, log analytics, and network visibility across your infrastructure.
    • Capitalize on VMware knowledge by integrating proven migration methods and plans across your transformation journey such as consumption strategies, business outcome workshops, and more.
    • Determine your eligibility to earn a one-time discount with this exclusive benefit designed to offset the value of your current unamortized VMware on-premises license investments and then reallocate toward your multi-cloud initiatives.

    2.2 Migrate workloads and licenses to the cloud

    There are several cloud migration options and solutions to consider.

    • VMware Cloud offers solutions that can provide a low-cost path to the cloud that will help accelerate modernization.
    • There are also many third-party solution providers who can be engaged to migrate workloads and other infrastructure to VMware Cloud and into other public cloud providers.
    • VMware Cloud can be deployed on many IaaS providers such as AWS, Azure, Google, Dell, and IBM.

    VMware Cloud Assist

    1. Leverage all available transition funding opportunities and any IaaS migration incentives from VMware.
    2. Learn and understand the value and capabilities of VMware vRealize Cloud Universal to help you transition and manage hybrid infrastructure.

    2.2.1 Manage your VMware cloud subscriptions

    Use VMware vRealize to manage private, public, and local environments.

    Combine SaaS and on-premises capabilities for automation, operations, log analytics, network visibility, security, and compliance into one license.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate VMware cloud subscriptions.

    2.3 The VMware sales approach

    Understand the pitch before entering the discussion

    1. VMware will present a PowerPoint presentation proposal comparing a Business-as-Usual (BAU) scenario versus the ELA model.
    2. Critical factors to consider if considering the proposed ELA are growth rate projections, deployment schedule, cost of non-ELA products/options, shelf-ware, and non-ELA discounts (e.g. VPP, multi-year, or pre-paid).
    3. Involving VMware’s direct account team along with your reseller in the negotiations can be beneficial. Keep in mind that VMware ultimately decides on the final price in terms of the discount that is passed through. Ensure you have a clear line of sight into how pricing is determined.
    4. Explore reseller incentives and promotional programs that may provide for deeper than normal discount opportunities.

    INFO-TECH TIP: Create your own assumptions as inputs into the BAU model and then evaluate the ELA value proposition instead of depending on VMware’s model.

    2.4 Manage SnS and cloud subscriptions

    The new subscription model is making SnS renewal more complex.

    • Start renewal planning four to six months prior to anniversary.
    • Work closely with your reseller on your SnS renewal options.
    • Request “as is” versus subscription renewal proposal from reseller or VMware with a “savings” component.
    • Consider and review multi-year versus annual renewal; savings will differ.
    • For the Subscription transition renewal model, ensure that credits for legacy licensing is provided.
    • Negotiate cloud transition investments and incentives from VMware.

    What information to collect and how to analyze it

    • Negotiating toward preferred terms on SnS is critical, more so than when new license purchases are made, as approximately 75-80% of server virtualization are at x86 workloads, where maintenance revenue is a larger source of revenue for VMware than new license sales.
    • All relevant license and SnS details must be obtained from VMware to include Product Family, Part Description, Product Code (SKU), Regional/Global List Price, SnS Term Dates, and Discount Price for all new licenses.
    • VMware has all costs tied to the US dollar; you must calculate currency conversion into ROI models as VMware does not adjust token values of products across geographies or currency of purchase. The token to dollar value by product SKU is locked for the three-year term. This translates into a variable cost model depending on how local currency fluctuates against the US dollar; time the initial purchase to take this into consideration, if applicable.
    • Products purchased based on MSRP price with each token contains a value of US$100. Under the Hybrid Purchasing Program (HPP) credit values and associated buying power will fluctuate over the term as VMware reserves the right to adjust current list prices. Consider locking in a set product list and pricing versus HPP.
    • Take a structured approach to discover true discounts via the use of a tailored RFQ template and options model to compare and contrast VMware ELA proposals.

    Use Info-Tech Research Group’s customized RFQ template to discover true discount levels and model various purchase options for VMware ELA proposals.

    The image contains a screenshot of the VMware RFQ Template Tool.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • The key pieces of licensing information that should be gathered about the current state of your own organization.
    • An in-depth understanding of the required licenses across all of your products.
    • Clear methodology for selecting the most effective contract type.
    • Development of measurable, relevant metrics to help track future project success and identify areas of strength and weakness within your licensing program.

    Processes Optimized

    • Senior leaders in IT now have a clear understanding of the importance of licensing in relation to business objectives.
    • Understanding of the various licensing considerations that need to be made.
    • Contract negotiation.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

    • IT budgets are increasing, but many CIOs feel their budgets are inadequate to accomplish what is being asked of them.
    • Eighty percent of organizations don’t have a mature, repeatable, scalable negotiation process.
    • Training dollars on negotiations are often wasted or ineffective.

    Price Benchmarking & Negotiation

    You need to achieve an objective assessment of vendor pricing in your IT contracts, but you have limited knowledge about:

    • Current price benchmarking on the vendor.
    • Pricing and negotiation intelligence.
    • How to secure a market-competitive price.
    • Vendor pricing tiers, models, and negotiation tactics.

    VMware vRealize Cloud Management

    VMware vCloud Suite is an integrated offering that brings together VMware’s industry-leading vSphere hypervisor and VMware vRealize Suite multi-vendor hybrid cloud management platform. VMware’s new portable licensing units allow vCloud Suite to build and manage both vSphere-based private clouds and multi-vendor hybrid clouds.

    Bibliography

    Barrett, Alex. “vSphere and vCenter licensing and pricing explained -- a VMware license guide.” TechTarget, July 2010. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Bateman, Kayleigh. “VMware licensing, pricing and features mini guide.” Computer Weekly, May 2011. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Blaisdell, Rick. “What Are The Common Business Challenges The VMware Sector Faces At This Point In Time?” CIO Review, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    COMPAREX. “VMware Licensing Program.” COMPAREX, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Couesbot, Erwann. “Using VMware? Oracle customers hate this licensing pitfall.” UpperEdge, 17 October 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Crayon. “VMware Licensing Programs.” Crayon, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Datanyze." Virtualization Software Market Share.” Datanyze, n.d. Web.
    Demers, Tom. “Top 18 Tips & Quotes on the Challenges & Future of VMware Licensing.” ProfitBricks, 1 September 2015. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Fenech, J. “A quick look at VMware vSphere Editions and Licensing.” VMware Hub by Altaro, 17 May 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Flexera. “Challenges of VMware Licensing.” Flexera, n.d. Accessed 5 February 2018.
    Fraser, Paris. “A Guide for VMware Licensing.” Sovereign, 11 October 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Haag, Michael. “IDC Data Shows vSAN is the Largest Share of Total HCI Spending.” VMware Blogs, 1 December 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Kealy, Victoria. “VMware Licensing Quick Guide 2015.” The ITAM Review, 17 December 2015. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Kirsch, Brian. “A VMware licensing guide to expanding your environment.” TechTarget, August 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Kirupananthan, Arun. “5 reasons to get VMware licensing right.” Softchoice, 16 April 2018. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Knorr, Eric. “VMware on AWS: A one-way ticket to the cloud.” InfoWorld, 17 October 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018
    Leipzig. “Help, an audit! License audits by VMware. Are you ready?” COMPAREX Group, 2 May 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Mackie, Kurt. “VMware Rips Microsoft for Azure “Bare Metal” Migration Solution.” Redmond Magazine, 27 November 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Micromail. “VMware vSphere Software Licensing.” Micromail, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Microsoft Corportation. “Migrating VMware to Microsoft Azure” Microsoft Azure, November 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Peter. “Server Virtualization and OS Trends.” Spiceworks, 30 August 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Rich. “VMware running on Azure.” The ITAM Review, 28 November 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Robb, Drew. “Everything you need to know about VMware’s licensing shake up.” Softchoice, 4 March 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Rose, Brendan. “How to determine which VMware licensing option is best.” Softchoice, 28 July 2015. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Scholten, Eric. “New VMware licensing explained.” VMGuru, 12 July 2011. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Sharwood, Simon. “Microsoft to run VMware on Azure, on bare metal. Repeat. Microsoft to run VMware on Azure.” The Register, 22 November 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Siebert, Eric. “Top 7 VMware Management Challenges.” Veeam, n.d. Web.
    Smith, Greg. “Will The Real HCI Market Leader Please Stand Up?” Nutanix, 29 September 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    Spithoven, Richard. “Licensing Oracle software in VMware vCenter 6.0.” LinkedIn, 2 May 2016. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    VMTurbo, Inc. “Licensing, Compliance & Audits in the Cloud Era.” Turbonomics, November 2015. Web.
    VMware. “Aug 1st – Dec 31st 2016 Solution Provider Program Requirements & Incentives & Rewards.” VMware, n.d. Web.
    VMware. “Global Support and Subscription Services “SnS” Renewals Policy.” VMware, n.d. Web.
    VMware. “Support Policies.” VMware, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    VMware. “VMware Cloud Community.” VMware Cloud, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    VMware. “VMware Cloud on AWS” VMware Cloud, n.d. Accessed 7 May 2018.
    VMware. “VMware Enterprise Purchasing Program.” VMware, 2013. Web.
    VMware. “VMware Product Guide.” VMware, May 2018. Web.
    VMware. “VMware Volume Purchasing Program.” VMware, April 2019. Web.
    VMware. "VMware Case Studies." VMware, n.d. Web.
    Wiens, Rob. “VMware Enterprise Licensing – What You Need To Know. House of Brick, 14 April 2017. Accessed 7 May 2018

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}191|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $44,821 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Unfortunately, when CIOs implement IT steering committees, they often lack the appropriate structure and processes to be effective.
    • Due to the high profile of the IT steering committee membership, CIOs need to get this right – or their reputation is at risk.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • 88% of IT steering committees fail. The organizations that succeed have clearly defined responsibilities that are based on business needs.
    • Without a documented process your committee can’t execute on its responsibilities. Clearly define the flow of information to make your committee actionable.
    • Limit your headaches by holding your IT steering committee accountable for defining project prioritization criteria.

    Impact and Result

    Leverage Info-Tech’s process and deliverables to see dramatic improvements in your business satisfaction through an effective IT steering committee. This blueprint will provide three core customizable deliverables that you can use to launch or optimize your IT steering committee:

    • IT Steering Committee Charter: Use this template in combination with this blueprint to form a highly tailored committee.
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation: Build understanding around the goals and purpose of the IT steering committee, and generate support from your leadership team.
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool: Engage your IT steering committee participants in defining project prioritization criteria. Track project prioritization and assess your portfolio.

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish an IT steering committee, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build the steering committee charter

    Build your IT steering committee charter using results from the stakeholder survey.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 1: Build the Steering Committee Charter
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey
    • IT Steering Committee Charter

    2. Define IT steering commitee processes

    Define your high level steering committee processes using SIPOC, and select your steering committee metrics.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 2: Define ITSC Processes

    3. Build the stakeholder presentation

    Customize Info-Tech’s stakeholder presentation template to gain buy-in from your key IT steering committee stakeholders.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 3: Build the Stakeholder Presentation
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation

    4. Define the prioritization criteria

    Build the new project intake and prioritization process for your new IT steering committee.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 4: Define the Prioritization Criteria
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool
    • IT Project Intake Form
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build the IT Steering Committee

    The Purpose

    Lay the foundation for your IT steering committee (ITSC) by surveying your stakeholders and identifying the opportunities and threats to implementing your ITSC.

    Key Benefits Achieved

     An understanding of the business environment affecting your future ITSC and identification of strategies for engaging with stakeholders

    Activities

    1.1 Launch stakeholder survey for business leaders.

    1.2 Analyze results with an Info-Tech advisor.

    1.3 Identify opportunities and threats to successful IT steering committee implementation.

    1.4 Develop the fit-for-purpose approach.

    Outputs

    Report on business leader governance priorities and awareness

    Refined workshop agenda

    2 Define the ITSC Goals

    The Purpose

    Define the goals and roles of your IT steering committee.

    Plan the responsibilities of your future committee members.

    Key Benefits Achieved

     Groundwork for completing the steering committee charter

    Activities

    2.1 Review the role of the IT steering committee.

    2.2 Identify IT steering committee goals and objectives.

    2.3 Conduct a SWOT analysis on the five governance areas

    2.4 Define the key responsibilities of the ITSC.

    2.5 Define ITSC participation.

    Outputs

    IT steering committee key responsibilities and participants identified

    IT steering committee priorities identified

    3 Define the ITSC Charter

    The Purpose

    Document the information required to create an effective ITSC Charter.

    Create the procedures required for your IT steering committee.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for your steering committee

    Completed IT Steering Committee Charter document

    Activities

    3.1 Build IT steering committee participant RACI.

    3.2 Define your responsibility cadence and agendas.

    3.3 Develop IT steering committee procedures.

    3.4 Define your IT steering committee purpose statement and goals.

    Outputs

    IT steering committee charter: procedures, agenda, and RACI

    Defined purpose statement and goals

    4 Define the ITSC Process

    The Purpose

    Define and test your IT steering committee processes.

    Get buy-in from your key stakeholders through your stakeholder presentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholder understanding of the purpose and procedures of IT steering committee membership

    Activities

    4.1 Define your high-level IT steering committee processes.

    4.2 Conduct scenario testing on key processes, establish ITSC metrics.

    4.3 Build your ITSC stakeholder presentation.

    4.4 Manage potential objections.

    Outputs

    IT steering committee SIPOC maps

    Refined stakeholder presentation

    5 Define Project Prioritization Criteria

    The Purpose

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Activities

    5.1 Create prioritization criteria

    5.2 Customize the project prioritization tool

    5.3 Pilot test the tool

    5.4 Define action plan and next steps

    Outputs

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Action plan

    Further reading

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    Have the right people making the right decisions to drive IT success.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIOs
    • IT Leaders

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Business Partners

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Structure an IT steering committee with the appropriate membership and responsibilities
    • Define appropriate cadence around business involvement in IT decision making
    • Define your IT steering committee processes, metrics, and timelines
    • Obtain buy-in for IT steering committee participations
    • Define the project prioritization criteria

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand the importance of IT governance and their role
    • Identify and build the investment prioritization criteria

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • An effective IT steering committee (ITSC) is one of the top predictors of value generated by IT, yet only 11% of CIOs believe their committees are effective.
    • An effective steering committee ensures that the right people are involved in critical decision making to drive organizational value.

    Complication

    • Unfortunately, when CIOs do implement IT steering committees, they often lack the appropriate structure and processes to be effective.
    • Due to the high profile of the IT steering committee membership, CIOs need to get this right – or their reputation is at risk.

    Resolution

    Leverage Info-Tech’s process and deliverables to see dramatic improvements in your business satisfaction through an effective IT steering committee. This blueprint will provide three core customizable deliverables that you can use to launch or optimize your IT steering committee. These include:

    1. IT Steering Committee Charter: Customizable charter complete with example purpose, goals, responsibilities, procedures, RACI, and processes. Use this template in combination with this blueprint to get a highly tailored committee.
    2. IT Stakeholder Presentation: Use our customizable presentation guide to build understanding around the goals and purpose of the IT steering committee and generate support from your leadership team.
    3. IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool: Engage your IT steering committee participants in defining the project prioritization criteria. Use our template to track project prioritization and assess your portfolio.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. 88% of IT steering committees fail. The organizations that succeed have clearly defined responsibilities that are based on business needs.
    2. Without a documented process your committee can’t execute on its responsibilities. Clearly define the flow of information to make your committee actionable.
    3. Limit your headaches by holding your IT steering committee accountable for defining project prioritization criteria.

    IT Steering Committee

    Effective IT governance critical in driving business satisfaction with IT. Yet 88% of CIOs believe that their governance structure and processes are not effective. The IT steering committee (ITSC) is the heart of the governance body and brings together critical organizational stakeholders to enable effective decision making (Info-Tech Research Group Webinar Survey).

    IT STEERING COMMITTEES HAVE 3 PRIMARY OBJECTIVES – TO IMPROVE:

    1. Alignment: IT steering committees drive IT and business strategy alignment by having business partners jointly accountable for the prioritization and selection of projects and investments within the context of IT capacity.
    2. Accountability: The ITSC facilitates the involvement and commitment of executive management through clearly defined roles and accountabilities for IT decisions in five critical areas: investments, projects, risk, services, and data.
    3. Value Generation: The ITSC is responsible for the ongoing evaluation of IT value and performance of IT services. The committee should define these standards and approve remediation plans when there is non-achievement.

    "Everyone needs good IT, but no one wants to talk about it. Most CFOs would rather spend time with their in-laws than in an IT steering-committee meeting. But companies with good governance consistently outperform companies with bad. Which group do you want to be in?"

    – Martha Heller, President, Heller Search Associates

    An effective IT steering committee improves IT and business alignment and increases support for IT across the organization

    CEOs’ PERCEPTION OF IT AND BUSINESS ALIGNMENT

    67% of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    47% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

    64% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.

    28% of business leaders are supporters of their IT departments.

    A well devised IT steering committee ensures that core business partners are involved in critical decision making and that decisions are based on business goals – not who shouts the loudest. Leading to faster decision-making time, and better-quality decisions and outcomes.

    Source: Info-Tech CIO/CEO Alignment data

    Despite the benefits, 9 out of 10 steering committees are unsuccessful

    WHY DO IT STEERING COMMITTEES FAIL?

    1. A lack of appetite for an IT steering committee from business partners
    2. An effective ITSC requires participation from core members of the organization’s leadership team. The challenge is that most business partners don’t understand the benefits of an ITSC and the responsibilities aren’t tailored to participants’ needs or interests. It’s the CIOs responsibility to make this case to stakeholders and right-size the committee responsibilities and membership.
    3. IT steering committees are given inappropriate responsibilities
    4. The IT steering committee is fundamentally about decision making; it’s not a working committee. CIOs struggle with clarifying these responsibilities on two fronts: either the responsibilities are too vague and there is no clear way to execute on them within a meeting, or responsibilities are too tactical and require knowledge that participants do not have. Responsibilities should determine who is on the ITSC, not the other way around.
    5. Lack of process around execution
    6. An ITSC is only valuable if members are able to successfully execute on the responsibilities. Without well defined processes it becomes nearly impossible for the ITSC to be actionable. As a result, participants lack the information they need to make critical decisions, agendas are unmet, and meetings are seen as a waste of time.

    GOVERNANCE and ITSC and IT Management

    Organizations often blur the line between governance and management, resulting in the business having say over the wrong things. Understand the differences and make sure both groups understand their role.

    The ITSC is the most senior body within the IT governance structure, involving key business executives and focusing on critical strategic decisions impacting the whole organization.

    Within a holistic governance structure, organizations may have additional committees that evaluate, direct, and monitor key decisions at a more tactical level and report into the ITSC.

    These committees require specialized knowledge and are implemented to meet specific organizational needs. Those operational committees may spark a tactical task force to act on specific needs.

    IT management is responsible for executing on, running, and monitoring strategic activities as determined by IT governance.

    RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN STRATEGIC, TACTICAL, AND OPERATIONAL GROUPS

    Strategic IT Steering Committee
    Tactical

    Project Governance Service Governance

    Risk Governance Information Governance

    IT Management
    Operational Risk Task Force

    This blueprint focuses exclusively on building the IT steering committee. For more information on IT governance see Info-Tech’s blueprint Tailor an IT Governance Plan to Fit Organizational Needs.

    1. Governance of the IT Portfolio & Investments: ensures that funding and resources are systematically allocated to the priority projects that deliver value
    2. Governance of Projects: ensures that IT projects deliver the expected value, and that the PM methodology is measured and effective.
    3. Governance of Risks: ensures the organization’s ability to assess and deliver IT projects and services with acceptable risk.
    4. Governance of Services: ensures that IT delivers the required services at the acceptable performance levels.
    5. Governance of Information and Data: ensures the appropriate classification and retention of data based on business need.

    If these symptoms resonate with you, it might be time to invest in building an IT steering committee

    SIGNS YOU MAY NEED TO BUILD AN IT STEERING COMMITTEE

    As CIO I find that there is a lack of alignment between business and IT strategies.
    I’ve noticed that projects are thrown over the fence by stakeholders and IT is expected to comply.
    I’ve noticed that IT projects are not meeting target project metrics.
    I’ve struggled with a lack of accountability for decision making, especially by the business.
    I’ve noticed that the business does not understand the full cost of initiatives and projects.
    I don’t have the authority to say “no” when business requests come our way.
    We lack a standardized approach for prioritizing projects.
    IT has a bad reputation within the organization, and I need a way to improve relationships.
    Business partners are unaware of how decisions are made around IT risks.
    Business partners don’t understand the full scope of IT responsibilities.
    There are no SLAs in place and no way to measure stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Info-Tech’s approach to implementing an IT steering committee

    Info-Tech’s IT steering committee development blueprint will provide you with the required tools, templates, and deliverables to implement a right-sized committee that’s effective the first time.

    • Measure your business partner level of awareness and interest in the five IT governance areas, and target specific responsibilities for your steering committee based on need.
    • Customize Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Charter Template to define and document the steering committee purpose, responsibilities, participation, and cadence.
    • Build critical steering committee processes to enable information to flow into and out of the committee to ensure that the committee is able to execute on responsibilities.
    • Customize Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template to make your first meeting a breeze, providing stakeholders with the information they need, with less than two hours of preparation time.
    • Leverage our workshop guide and prioritization tools to facilitate a meeting with IT steering committee members to define the prioritization criteria for projects and investments and roll out a streamlined process.

    Info-Tech’s Four-Phase Process

    Key Deliverables:
    1 2 3 4
    Build the Steering Committee Charter Define ITSC Processes Build the Stakeholder Presentation Define the Prioritization Criteria
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey
    • IT Steering Committee Charter
      • Purpose
      • Responsibilities
      • RACI
      • Procedures
    • IT Steering Committee SIPOC (Suppliers, Inputs, Process, Outputs, Customers)
    • Defined process frequency
    • Defined governance metrics
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template
      • Introduction
      • Survey outcomes
      • Responsibilities
      • Next steps
      • ITSC goals
    • IT project prioritization facilitation guide
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool
    • Project Intake Form

    Leverage both COBIT and Info-Tech-defined metrics to evaluate the success of your program or project

    COBIT METRICS Alignment
    • Percent of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by strategic goals.
    • Level of stakeholder satisfaction with scope of the planned portfolio of programs and services.
    Accountability
    • Percent of executive management roles with clearly defined accountabilities for IT decisions.
    • Rate of execution of executive IT-related decisions.
    Value Generation
    • Level of stakeholder satisfaction and perceived value.
    • Number of business disruptions due to IT service incidents.
    INFO-TECH METRICS Survey Metrics:
    • Percent of business leaders who believe they understand how decisions are made in the five governance areas.
    • Percentage of business leaders who believe decision making involved the right people.
    Value of Customizable Deliverables:
    • Estimated time to build IT steering committee charter independently X cost of employee
    • Estimated time to build and generate customer stakeholder survey and generate reports X cost of employee
    • # of project interruptions due to new or unplanned projects

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    Situation

    A newly hired CIO at a large consumer goods company inherited an IT department with low maturity from her predecessor. Satisfaction with IT was very low across all business units, and IT faced a lot of capacity constraints. The business saw IT as a bottleneck or red tape in terms of getting their projects approved and completed.

    The previous CIO had established a steering committee for a short time, but it had a poorly established charter that did not involve all of the business units. Also the role and responsibilities of the steering committee were not clearly defined. This led the committee to be bogged down in politics.

    Due to the previous issues, the business was wary of being involved in a new steering committee. In order to establish a new steering committee, the new CIO needed to navigate the bad reputation of the previous CIO.

    Solution

    The CIO established a new steering committee engaging senior members of each business unit. The roles of the committee members were clearly established in the new steering committee charter and business stakeholders were informed of the changes through presentations.

    The importance of the committee was demonstrated through the new intake and prioritization process for projects. Business stakeholders were impressed with the new process and its transparency and IT was no longer seen as a bottleneck.

    Results

    • Satisfaction with IT increased by 12% after establishing the committee and IT was no longer seen as red tape for completing projects
    • IT received approval to hire two more staff members to increase capacity
    • IT was able to augment service levels, allowing them to reinvest in innovative projects
    • Project prioritization process was streamlined

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    Build the Steering Committee Charter Define ITSC Processes Build the Stakeholder Presentation Define the Prioritization Criteria
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Survey Your Steering Committee Stakeholders

    1.2 Build Your ITSC Charter

    2.1 Build a SIPOC

    2.2 Define Your ITSC Process

    3.1 Customize the Stakeholder Presentation

    4.1 Establish your Prioritization Criteria

    4.2 Customize the Project Prioritization Tool

    4.3 Pilot Test Your New Prioritization Criteria

    Guided Implementations
    • Launch your stakeholder survey
    • Analyze the results of the survey
    • Build your new ITSC charter
    • Review your completed charter
    • Build and review your SIPOC
    • Review your high-level steering committee processes
    • Customize the presentation
    • Build a script for the presentation
    • Practice the presentation
    • Review and select prioritization criteria
    • Review the Project Prioritization Tool
    • Review the results of the tool pilot test
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:

    Build a New ITSC Charter

    Module 2:

    Design Steering Committee Processes

    Module 3:

    Present the New Steering Committee to Stakeholders

    Module 4:

    Establish Project Prioritization Criteria

    Phase 1 Results:
    • Customized ITSC charter

    Phase 2 Results:

    • Completed SIPOC and steering committee processes
    Phase 3 Results:
    • Customized presentation deck and script
    Phase 4 Results:
    • Customized project prioritization tool

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities

    Build the IT Steering Committee

    1.1 Launch stakeholder survey for business leaders

    1.2 Analyze results with an Info-Tech Advisor

    1.3 Identify opportunities and threats to successful IT steering committee implementation.

    1.4 Develop the fit-for-purpose approach

    Define the ITSC Goals

    2.1 Review the role of the IT steering committee

    2.2 Identify IT steering committee goals and objectives

    2.3 Conduct a SWOT analysis on the five governance areas

    2.4 Define the key responsibilities of the ITSC 2.5 Define ITSC participation

    Define the ITSC Charter

    3.1 Build IT steering committee participant RACI

    3.2 Define your responsibility cadence and agendas

    3.3 Develop IT steering committee procedures

    3.4 Define your IT steering committee purpose statement and goals

    Define the ITSC Process

    4.1 Define your high-level IT steering committee processes

    4.2 Conduct scenario testing on key processes, establish ITSC metrics

    4.3 Build your ITSC stakeholder presentation

    4.4 Manage potential objections

    Define Project Prioritization Criteria

    5.1 Create prioritization criteria

    5.2 Customize the Project Prioritization Tool

    5.3 Pilot test the tool

    5.4 Define action plan and next steps

    Deliverables
    1. Report on business leader governance priorities and awareness
    2. Refined workshop agenda
    1. IT steering committee priorities identified
    2. IT steering committee key responsibilities and participants identified
    1. IT steering committee charter: procedures, agenda, and RACI
    2. Defined purpose statement and goals
    1. IT steering committee SIPOC maps
    2. Refined stakeholder presentation
    1. Project Prioritization Tool
    2. Action plan

    Phase 1

    Build the IT Steering Committee Charter

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Formalize the Security Policy Program

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-2 weeks

    Select Your ITSC Members

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Launch your stakeholder survey

    Then complete these activities…

    • Tailor the survey questions
    • Identify participants and tailor email templates

    With these tools & templates:

    • ITSC Stakeholder Survey
    • ITSC Charter Template

    Review Stakeholder Survey Results

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the results of the Stakeholder Survey

    Then complete these activities…

    • Customize the ITSC Charter Template

    With these tools & templates:

    • ITSC Charter Template

    Finalize the ITSC Charter

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Review the finalized ITSC charter with an Info-Tech analyst

    Then complete these activities…

    • Finalize any changes to the ITSC Charter
    • Present it to ITSC Members

    With these tools & templates:

    • ITSC Charter Template

    Build the IT Steering Committee Charter

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Launch and analyze the stakeholder survey
    • Define your ITSC goals and purpose statement
    • Determine ITSC responsibilities and participants
    • Determine ITSC procedures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    Be exclusive with your IT steering committee membership. Determine committee participation based on committee responsibilities. Select only those who are key decision makers for the activities the committee is responsible for and, wherever possible, keep membership to 5-8 people.

    Tailor Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Charter Template to define terms of reference for the ITSC

    1.1

    A charter is the organizational mandate that outlines the purpose, scope, and authority of the ITSC. Without a charter, the steering committee’s value, scope, and success criteria are unclear to participants, resulting in unrealistic stakeholder expectations and poor organizational acceptance.

    Start by reviewing Info-Tech’s template. Throughout this section we will help you to tailor its contents.

    Committee Purpose: The rationale, benefits of, and overall function of the committee.

    Responsibilities: What tasks/decisions the accountable committee is making.

    Participation: Who is on the committee

    RACI: Who is accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed regarding each responsibility.

    Committee Procedures and Agendas: Includes how the committee will be organized and how the committee will interact and communicate with business units.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Charter Template.">

    IT Steering Committee Charter

    Take a data-driven approach to build your IT steering committee based on business priorities

    1.2

    Leverage Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Surveyand reports to quickly identify business priorities and level of understanding of how decisions are made around the five governance areas.

    Use these insights to drive the IT steering committee responsibilities, participation, and communication strategy.

    The Stakeholder Survey consists of 17 questions on:

    • Priority governance areas
    • Desired level of involvement in decision making in the five governance areas
    • Knowledge of how decisions are made
    • Five open-ended questions on improvement opportunities

    To simplify your data collection and reporting, Info-Tech can launch a web-based survey, compile the report data and assist in the data interpretation through one of our guided implementations.

    Also included is a Word document with recommended questions, if you prefer to manage the survey logistics internally.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's first page of the <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey "> A screenshot of Info-Tech's survey.

    Leverage governance reports to define responsibilities and participants, and in your presentation to stakeholders

    1.3

    A screenshot is displayed. It advises that 72% of stakeholders do <strong data-verified= understand how decisions around IT services are made (quality, availability, etc.). Two graphs are included in the screenshot. One of the bar graphs shows the satisfaction with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services. The other bar graph displays IT decisions around service delivery and quality that involve the right people.">

    OVERALL PRIORITIES

    You get:

    • A clear breakdown of stakeholders’ level of understanding on how IT decisions are made in the five governance areas
    • Stakeholder perceptions on the level of IT and business involvement in decision making
    • Identification of priority areas

    So you can:

    • Get an overall pulse check for understanding
    • Make the case for changes in decision-making accountability
    • Identify which areas the IT steering committee should focus on
    A screenshot is displayed. It advises that 80% of stakeholders do <strong data-verified=not understand how decisions around IT investments or project and service resourcing are made. Two bar graphs are displayed. One of the bar graphs shows the satisfaction with the quality of decisions made around IT investments. The other graph display IT decisions around spending priorities involving the right people.">

    GOVERNANCE AREA REPORTS

    You get:

    • Satisfaction score for decision quality in each governance area
    • Breakdown of decision-making accountability effectiveness
    • Identified level of understanding around decision making
    • Open-ended comments

    So you can:

    • Identify the highest priority areas to change.
    • To validate changes in decision-making accountability
    • To understand business perspectives on decision making.

    Conduct a SWOT analysis of the five governance areas

    1.4

    1. Hold a meeting with your IT leadership team to conduct a SWOT analysis on each of the five governance areas. Start by printing off the following five slides to provide participants with examples of the role of governance and the symptoms of poor governance in each area.
    2. In groups of 1-2 people, have each group complete a SWOT analysis for one of the governance areas. For each consider:
    • Strengths: What is currently working well in this area?
    • Weaknesses: What could you improve? What are some of the challenges you’re experiencing?
    • Opportunities: What are some organizational trends that you can leverage? Consider whether your strengths or weaknesses that could create opportunities?
    • Threats: What are some key obstacles across people, process, and technology?
  • Have each team or individual rotate until each person has contributed to each SWOT. Add comments from the stakeholder survey to the SWOT.
  • As a group rank each of the five areas in terms of importance for a phase one IT steering committee implementation, and highlight the top 10 challenges, and the top 10 opportunities you see for improvement.
  • Document the top 10 lists for use in the stakeholder presentation.
  • INPUT

    • Survey outcomes
    • Governance overview handouts

    OUTPUT

    • SWOT analysis
    • Ranked 5 areas
    • Top 10 challenges and opportunities identified.

    Materials

    • Governance handouts
    • Flip chart paper, pens

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Governance of RISK

    Governance of risk establishes the risk framework, establishes policies and standards, and monitors risks.

    Governance of risk ensures that IT is mitigating all relevant risks associated with IT investments, projects, and services.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Defines responsibility and accountability for IT risk identification and mitigation.
    2. Ensures the consideration of all elements of IT risk, including value, change, availability, security, project, and recovery
    3. Enables senior management to make better IT decisions based on the evaluation of the risks involved
    4. Facilitates the identification and analysis of IT risk and ensures the organization’s informed response to that risk.

    Symptoms of poor governance of risk

    • Opportunities for value creation are missed by not considering or assessing IT risk, or by completely avoiding all risk.
    • No formal risk management process or accountabilities exist.
    • There is no business continuity strategy.
    • Frequent security breaches occur.
    • System downtime occurs due to failed IT changes.

    Governance of PPM

    Governance of the IT portfolio achieves optimum ROI through prioritization, funding, and resourcing.

    PPM practices create value if they maximize the throughput of high-value IT projects at the lowest possible cost. They destroy value when they foster needlessly sophisticated and costly processes.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Ensures that the projects that deliver greater business value get a higher priority.
    2. Provides adequate funding for the priority projects and ensures adequate resourcing and funding balanced across the entire portfolio of projects.
    3. Makes the business and IT jointly accountable for setting project priorities.
    4. Evaluate, direct, and monitor IT value metrics and endorse the IT strategy and monitor progress.

    Symptoms of poor governance of PPM/investments

    • The IT investment mix is determined solely by Finance and IT.
    • It is difficult to get important projects approved.
    • Projects are started then halted, and resources are moved to other projects.
    • Senior management has no idea what projects are in the backlog.
    • Projects are approved without a valid business case.

    Governance of PROJECTS

    Governance of projects improves the quality and speed of decision making for project issues.

    Don’t confuse project governance and management. Governance makes the decisions regarding allocation of funding and resources and reviews the overall project portfolio metrics and process methodology.

    Management ensures the project deliverables are completed within the constraints of time, budget, scope, and quality.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Monitors and evaluates the project management process and critical project methodology metrics.
    2. Ensures review and mitigation of project issue and that management is aware of projects in crisis.
    3. Ensures that projects beginning to show characteristics of failure cannot proceed until issues are resolved.
    4. Endorses the project risk criteria, and monitors major risks to project completion.
    5. Approves the launch and execution of projects.

    Symptoms of poor governance of projects

    • Projects frequently fail or get cancelled.
    • Project risks and issues are not identified or addressed.
    • There is no formal project management process.
    • There is no senior stakeholder responsible for making project decisions.
    • There is no formal project reporting.

    Governance of SERVICES

    Governance of services ensures delivery of a highly reliable set of IT services.

    Effective governance of services enables the business to achieve the organization’s goals and strategies through the provision of reliable and cost-effective services.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Ensures the satisfactory performance of those services critical to achieving business objectives.
    2. Monitors and directs changes in service levels.
    3. Ensures operational and performance objectives for IT services are met.
    4. Approves policy and standards on the service portfolio.

    Symptoms of poor governance of service

    • There is a misalignment of business needs and expectations with IT capability.
    • No metrics are reported for IT services.
    • The business is unaware of the IT services available to them.
    • There is no accountability for service level performance.
    • There is no continuous improvement plan for IT services.
    • IT services or systems are frequently unavailable.
    • Business satisfaction with IT scores are low.

    Governance of INFORMATION

    Governance of information ensures the proper handling of data and information.

    Effective governance of information ensures the appropriate classification, retention, confidentiality, integrity, and availability of data in line with the needs of the business.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Ensures the information lifecycle owner and process are defined and endorse by business leadership.
    2. Ensures the controlled access to a comprehensive information management system.
    3. Ensures knowledge, information, and data are gathered, analyzed, stored, shared, used, and maintained.
    4. Ensures that external regulations are identified and met.

    Symptoms of poor governance of information

    • There is a lack of clarity around data ownership, and data quality standards.
    • There is insufficient understanding of what knowledge, information, and data are needed by the organization.
    • There is too much effort spent on knowledge capture as opposed to knowledge transfer and re-use.
    • There is too much focus on storing and sharing knowledge and information that is not up to date or relevant.
    • Personnel see information management as interfering with their work.

    Identify the responsibilities of the IT steering committee

    1.5

    1. With your IT leadership team, review the typical responsibilities of the IT steering committee on the following slide.
    2. Print off the following slide, and in your teams of 1-2 have each group identify which responsibilities they believe the IT steering committee should have, brainstorm any additional responsibilities, and document their reasoning.
    3. Note: The bolded responsibilities are the ones that are most common to IT steering committees, and greyed out responsibilities are typical of a larger governance structure. Depending on their level of importance to your organization, you may choose to include the responsibility.

    4. Have each team present to the larger group, track the similarities and differences between each of the groups, and come to consensus on the list of responsibilities.
    5. Complete a sanity check – review your swot analysis and survey results. Do the responsibilities you’ve identified resolve the critical challenges or weaknesses?
    6. As a group, consider the responsibilities and consider whether you can reasonably implement those in one year, or if there are any that will need to wait until year two of the IT steering committee.
    7. Modify the list of responsibilities in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Charter by deleting the responsibilities you do not need and adding any that you identified in the process.

    INPUT

    • SWOT analysis
    • Survey reports

    OUTPUT

    • Defined ITSC responsibilities documented in the ITSC Charter

    Materials

    • Responsibilities handout
    • Voting dots

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Typical IT steering committee and governance responsibilities

    The bolded responsibilities are those that are most common to IT steering committees, and responsibilities listed in grey are typical of a larger governance structure.

    INVESTMENTS / PPM

    • Establish the target investment mix
    • Evaluate and select programs/projects to fund
    • Monitor IT value metrics
    • Endorse the IT budget
    • Monitor and report on program/project outcomes
    • Direct the governance optimization
    • Endorse the IT strategy

    PROJECTS

    • Monitor project management metrics
    • Approve launch of projects
    • Review major obstacles to project completion
    • Monitor a standard approach to project management
    • Monitor and direct project risk
    • Monitor requirements gathering process effectiveness
    • Review feasibility studies and formulate alternative solutions for high risk/high investment projects

    SERVICE

    • Monitor stakeholder satisfaction with services
    • Monitor service metrics
    • Approve plans for new or changed service requirements
    • Monitor and direct changes in service levels
    • Endorse the enterprise architecture
    • Approve policy and standards on the service portfolio
    • Monitor performance and capacity

    RISK

    • Monitor risk management metrics
    • Review the prioritized list of risks
    • Monitor changes in external regulations
    • Maintain risk profiles
    • Approve the risk management emergency action process
    • Maintain a mitigation plan to minimize risk impact and likelihood
    • Evaluate risk management
    • Direct risk management

    INFORMATION / DATA

    • Define information lifecycle process ownership
    • Monitor information lifecycle metrics
    • Define and monitor information risk
    • Approve classification categories of information
    • Approve information lifecycle process
    • Set policies on retirement of information

    Determine committee membership based on the committee’s responsibilities

    • One of the biggest benefits to an IT steering committee is it involves key leadership from the various lines of business across the organization.
    • However, in most cases, more people get involved than is required, and all the committee ends up accomplishing is a lot of theorizing. Participants should be selected based on the identified responsibilities of the IT steering committee.
    • If the responsibilities don’t match the participants, this will negatively impact committee effectiveness as leaders become disengaged in the process and don’t feel like it applies to them or accomplishes the desired goals. Once participants begin dissenting, it’s significantly more difficult to get results.
    • Be careful! When you have more than one individual in a specific role, select only the people whose attendance is absolutely critical. Don’t let your governance collapse under committee overload!

    LIKELY PARTICIPANT EXAMPLES:

    MUNICIPALITY

    • City Manager
    • CIO/IT Leader
    • CCO
    • CFO
    • Division Heads

    EDUCATION

    • Provost
    • Vice Provost
    • VP Academic
    • VP Research
    • VP Public Affairs
    • VP Operations
    • VP Development
    • Etc.

    HEALTHCARE

    • President/CEO
    • CAO
    • EVP/ EDOs
    • VPs
    • CIO
    • CMO

    PRIVATE ORGANIZATIONS

    • CEO
    • CFO
    • COO
    • VP Marketing
    • VP Sales
    • VP HR
    • VP Product Development
    • VP Engineering
    • Etc.

    Identify committee participants and responsibility cadence

    1.6

    1. In a meeting with your IT leadership team, review the list of committee responsibilities and document them on a whiteboard.
    2. For each responsibility, identify the individuals whom you would want to be either responsible or accountable for that decision.
    3. Repeat this until you’ve completed the exercise for each responsibility.
    4. Group the responsibilities with the same participants and highlight groupings with less than four participants. Consider the responsibility and determine whether you need to change the wording to make it more applicable or if you should remove the responsibility.
    5. Review the grouping, the responsibilities within them, and their participants, and assess how frequently you would like to meet about them – annually, quarterly, or monthly. (Note: suggested frequency can be found in the IT Steering Committee Charter.)
    6. Subdivide the responsibilities for the groupings to determine your annual, quarterly, and monthly meeting schedule.
    7. Validate that one steering committee is all that is needed, or divide the responsibilities into multiple committees.
    8. Document the committee participants in the IT Steering Committee Charter and remove any unneeded responsibilities identified in the previous exercise.

    INPUT

    • List of responsibilities

    OUTPUT

    • ITSC participants list
    • Meeting schedule

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Committees can only be effective if they have clear and documented authority

    It is not enough to participate in committee meetings; there needs to be a clear understanding of who is accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed about matters brought to the attention of the committee.

    Each committee responsibility should have one person who is accountable, and at least one person who is responsible. This is the best way to ensure that committee work gets done.

    An authority matrix is often used within organizations to indicate roles and responsibilities in relation to processes and activities. Using the RACI model as an example, there is only one person accountable for an activity, although several people may be responsible for executing parts of the activity. In this model, accountable means end-to-end accountability for the process.

    RESPONSIBLE: The one responsible for getting the job done.

    ACCOUNTABLE: Only one person can be accountable for each task.

    CONSULTED: Involvement through input of knowledge and information.

    INFORMED: Receiving information about process execution and quality.

    A chart is depicted to show an example of the authority matrix using the RACI model.

    Define IT steering committee participant RACI for each of the responsibilities

    1.7

    1. Use the table provided in the IT Steering Committee Charter and edit he list of responsibilities to reflect the chosen responsibilities of your ITSC.
    2. Along the top of the chart list the participant names, and in the right hand column of the table document the agreed upon timing from the previous exercise.
    3. For each of the responsibilities identify whether participants are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, or Informed by denoting an R, A, C, I, or N/A in the table. Use N/A if this is a responsibility that the participant has no involvement in.
    4. Review your finalized RACI chart. If there are participants who are only consulted or informed about the majority of responsibilities, consider removing them from the IT steering committee. You only want the decision makers on the committee.

    INPUT

    • Responsibilities
    • Participants

    OUTPUT

    • RACI documented in the ITSC Charter

    Materials

    • ITSC RACI template
    • Projector

    Participants

    • IT leadership

    Building the agenda may seem trivial, but it is key for running effective meetings

    49% of people consider unfocused meetings as the biggest workplace time waster.*

    63% of the time meetings do not have prepared agendas.*

    80% Reduction of time spent in meetings by following a detailed agenda and starting on time.*

    *(Source: http://visual.ly/fail-plan-plan-fail).

    EFFECTIVE MEETING AGENDAS:

    1. Have clearly defined meeting objectives.
    2. Effectively time-boxed based on priority items.
    3. Defined at least two weeks prior to the meetings.
    4. Evaluated regularly – are not static.
    5. Leave time at the end for new business, thus minimizing interruptions.

    BUILDING A CONSENT AGENDA

    A consent agenda is a tool to free up time at meetings by combining previously discussed or simple items into a single item. Items that can be added to the consent agenda are those that are routine, noncontroversial, or provided for information’s sake only. It is expected that participants read this information and, if it is not pulled out, that they are in agreement with the details.

    Members have the option to pull items out of the consent agenda for discussion if they have questions. Otherwise these are given no time on the agenda.

    Define the IT steering committee meeting agendas and procedures

    1.8

    Agendas

    1. Review the listed responsibilities, participants, and timing as identified in a previous exercise.
    2. Annual meeting: Identify if all of the responsibilities will be included in the annual meeting agenda (likely all governance responsibilities).
    3. Quarterly Meeting Agenda: Remove the meeting responsibilities from the annual meeting agenda that are not required and create a list of responsibilities for the quarterly meetings.
    4. Monthly Meeting Agenda: Remove all responsibilities from the list that are only annual or quarterly and compile a list of monthly meeting responsibilities.
    5. Review each responsibility, and estimate the amount of time each task will take within the meeting. We recommend giving yourself at least an extra 10-20% more time for each agenda item for your first meeting. It’s better to have more time than to run out.
    6. Complete the Agenda Template in the IT Steering Committee Charter.

    Procedures:

    1. Review the list of IT steering committee procedures, and replace the grey text with the information appropriate for your organization.

    INPUT

    • Responsibility cadence

    OUTPUT

    • ITSC annual, quarterly, monthly meeting agendas & procedures

    Materials

    • ITSC Charter

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Draft your IT steering committee purpose statement and goals

    1.9

    1. In a meeting with your IT leadership team – and considering the defined responsibilities, participants, and opportunities and threats identified – review the example goal statement in the IT Steering Committee Charter, and first identify whether any of these statements apply to your organization. Select the statements that apply and collaboratively make any changes needed.
    2. Define unique goal statements by considering the following questions:
      1. What three things would you realistically list for the ITSC to achieve.
      2. If you were to accomplish three things in the next year, what would those be?
    3. Document those goals in the IT Steering Committee Charter.
    4. With those goal statements in mind, consider the overall purpose of the committee. The purpose statement should be a reflection of what the committee does, why it does it, and the goals.
    5. Have each individual review the example purpose statement, and draft what they think a good purpose statement would be.
    6. Present each statement, and work together to determine a best of breed statement.
    7. Document this in the IT Steering Committee Charter.

    INPUT

    • Responsibilities, participants, top 10 lists of challenges and opportunities.

    OUTPUT

    • ITSC goals and purpose statement

    Materials

    • ITSC Charter

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    CASE STUDY

    "Clearly defined Committee Charter allows CIO to escape the bad reputation of previous committee."

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    CHALLENGE

    The new CIO at a large consumer goods company had difficulty generating interest in creating a new IT steering committee. The previous CIO had created a steering committee that was poorly organized and did not involve all of the pertinent members. This led to a committee focused on politics that would often devolve into gossip. Also, many members were dissatisfied with the irregular meetings that would often go over their allotted time.

    In order to create a new committee, the new CIO needed to dispel the misgivings of the business leadership.

    SOLUTION

    The new CIO decided to build the new steering committee from the ground up in a systematic way.

    She collected information from relevant stakeholders about what they know/how they feel about IT and used this information to build a detailed charter.

    Using this info she outlined the new steering committee charter and included in it the:

    1. Purpose
    2. Responsibilities
    3. RACI Chart
    4. Procedures

    OUTCOME

    The new steering committee included all the key members of business units, and each member was clear on their roles in the meetings. Meetings were streamlined and effective. The adjustments in the charter and the improvement in meeting quality played a role in improving the satisfaction scores of business leaders with IT by 21%.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    A screenshot of activity 1.1 is displayed. 1.1 is about surveying your ITSC stakeholders.

    Survey your ITSC stakeholders

    Prior to the workshop, Info-Tech’s advisors will work with you to launch the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey to understand business priorities and level of understanding of how decisions are made. Using this data, we will create the IT steering committee responsibilities, participation, and communication strategy.

    1.7

    A screenshot of activity 1.7 is displayed. 1.7 is about defining a participant RACI for each of the responsibilities.

    Define a participant RACI for each of the responsibilities

    The analyst will facilitate several exercises to help you and your stakeholders create an authority matrix. The output will be defined responsibilities and authorities for members.

    Phase 2

    Build the IT Steering Committee Process

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Define your ITSC Processes
    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Review SIPOCs and Process Creation

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the purpose of the SIPOC and how to build one

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a draft SIPOC for your organization

    With these tools & templates:

    Phase 2 of the Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Finalize the SIPOC

    Review Draft SIPOC:

    • Review and make changes to the SIPOC
    • Discuss potential metrics

    Then complete these activities…

    • Test survey link
    • Info-Tech launches survey

    With these tools & templates:

    Phase 2 of the Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Finalize Metrics

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Finalize metrics

    Then complete these activities…

    • Establish ITSC metric triggers

    With these tools & templates:

    Phase 2 of the Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Build the IT Steering Committee Process

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define high-level steering committee processes using SIPOC
    • Select steering committee metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    Building high-level IT steering committee processes brings your committee to life. Having a clear process will ensure that you have the right information from the right sources so that committees can operate and deliver the appropriate output to the customers who need it.

    Build your high-level IT steering committee processes to enable committee functionality

    The IT steering committee is only valuable if members are able to successfully execute on responsibilities.

    One of the most common mistakes organizations make is that they build their committee charters and launch into their first meeting. Without defined inputs and outputs, a committee does not have the needed information to be able to effectively execute on responsibilities and is unable to meet its stated goals.

    The arrows in this picture represent the flow of information between the IT steering committee, other committees, and IT management.

    Building high-level processes will define how that information flows within and between committees and will enable more rapid decision making. Participants will have the information they need to be confident in their decisions.

    Strategic IT Steering Committee
    Tactical

    Project Governance Service Governance

    Risk Governance Information Governance

    IT Management
    Operational Risk Task Force

    Define the high-level process for each of the IT steering committee responsibilities

    Info-Tech recommends using SIPOC as a way of defining how the IT steering committee will operate.

    Derived from the core methodologies of Six Sigma process management, SIPOC – a model of Suppliers, Inputs, Processes, Outputs, Customers – is one of several tools that organizations can use to build high level processes. SIPOC is especially effective when determining process scope and boundaries and to gain consensus on a process.

    By doing so you’ll ensure that:

    1. Information and documentation required to complete each responsibility is identified.
    2. That the results of committee meetings are distributed to those customers who need the information.
    3. Inputs and outputs are identified and that there is defined accountability for providing these.

    Remember: Your IT steering committee is not a working committee. Enable effective decision making by ensuring participants have the necessary information and appropriate recommendations from key stakeholders to make decisions.

    Supplier Input
    Who provides the inputs to the governance responsibility. The documented information, data, or policy required to effectively respond to the responsibility.
    Process
    In this case this represents the IT steering committee responsibility defined in terms of the activity the ITSC is performing.
    Output Customer
    The outcome of the meeting: can be approval, rejection, recommendation, request for additional information, endorsement, etc. Receiver of the outputs from the committee responsibility.

    Define your SIPOC model for each of the IT steering committee responsibilities

    2.1

    1. In a meeting with your IT leadership, draw the SIPOC model on a whiteboard or flip-chart paper. Either review the examples on the following slides or start from scratch.
    2. If you are adjusting the following slides, consider the templates you already have which would be appropriate inputs and make adjustments as needed.

    For atypical responsibilities:

    1. Start with the governance responsibility and identify what specifically it is that the IT steering committee is doing with regards to that responsibility. Write that in the center of the model.
    2. As a group, consider what information or documentation would be required by the participants to effectively execute on the responsibility.
    3. Identify which individual will supply each piece of documentation. This person will be accountable for this moving forward.
    4. Outputs: Once the committee has met about the responsibility, what information or documentation will be produced. List all of those documents.
    5. Identify the individuals who need to receive the outputs of the information.
    6. Repeat this for all of the responsibilities.
    7. Once complete, document the SIPOC models in the IT Steering Committee Charter.

    INPUT

    • List of responsibilities
    • Example SIPOCs

    OUTPUT

    • SIPOC model for all responsibilities.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • ITSC Charter

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Establish the target investment mix
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Target investment mix and rationale
    Process
    Responsibility: The IT steering committee shall review and approve the target investment mix.
    Output Customer
    • Approval of target investment mix
    • Rejection of target investment mix
    • Request for additional information
    • CFO
    • CIO
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Endorse the IT budget
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Recommendations

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint IT Budget Presentation

    Process

    Responsibility: Review the proposed IT budget as defined by the CIO and CFO.

    Output Customer
    • Signed endorsement of the IT budget
    • Request for additional information
    • Recommendation for changes to the IT budget.
    • CFO
    • CIO
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Monitor IT value metrics
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • IT value dashboard
    • Key metric takeaways
    • Recommendations
    CIO Business Vision
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations and either accept or reject recommendations. Refine go-forward metrics.

    Output Customer
    • Launch corrective task force
    • Accept recommendations
    • Define target metrics
    • CEO
    • CFO
    • Business executives
    • CIO
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Evaluate and select programs/projects to fund
    Supplier Input
    PMO
    • Recommended project list
    • Project intake documents
    • Prioritization criteria
    • Capacity metrics
    • IT budget

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    Process

    Responsibility: The ITSC will approve the list of projects to fund based on defined prioritization criteria – in line with capacity and IT budget.

    It is also responsible for identifying the prioritization criteria in line with organizational priorities.

    Output Customer
    • Approved project list
    • Request for additional information
    • Recommendation for increased resources
    • PMO
    • CIO
    • Project sponsors

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Endorse the IT strategy
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • IT strategy presentation

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint

    IT Strategy and Roadmap
    Process

    Responsibility: Review, understand, and endorse the IT strategy.

    Output Customer
    • Signed endorsement of the IT strategy
    • Recommendations for adjustments
    • CEO
    • CFO
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Monitor project management metrics
    Supplier Input
    PMO
    • Project metrics report with recommendations
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around PM metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept project metrics performance
    • Accept recommendations
    • Launch corrective task force
    • Define target metrics
    • PMO
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Approve launch of planned and unplanned project
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Project list and recommendations
    • Resourcing report
    • Project intake document

    See Info-Tech’s Blueprint:

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    Process

    Responsibility: Review the list of projects and approve the launch or reprioritization of projects.

    Output Customer
    • Approved launch of projects
    • Recommendations for changes to project list
    • CFO
    • CIO
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Monitor stakeholder satisfaction with services and other service metrics
    Supplier Input
    Service Manager
    • Service metrics report with recommendations
    Info-Tech End User Satisfaction Report
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around service metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept service level performance
    • Accept recommendations
    • Launch corrective task force
    • Define target metrics
    • Service manager
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Approve plans for new or changed service requirements
    Supplier Input
    Service Manager
    • Service change request
    • Project request and change plan
    Process

    Responsibility: Review IT recommendations, approve changes, and communicate those to staff.

    Output Customer
    • Approved service changes
    • Rejected service changes
    • Service manager
    • Organizational staff
    SIPOC: Monitor risk management metrics
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Risk metrics report with recommendations
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around risk metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept risk register and mitigation strategy
    • Launch corrective task force to address risks
    • Risk manager
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Review the prioritized list of risks
    Supplier Input
    Risk Manager
    • Risk register
    • Mitigation strategies
    See Info-Tech’s risk management research to build a holistic risk strategy.
    Process

    Responsibility: Accept the risk registrar and define any additional action required.

    Output Customer
    • Accept risk register and mitigation strategy
    • Launch corrective task force to address risks
    • Risk manager
    • IT leadership
    • CRO
    SIPOC: Define information lifecycle process ownership
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • List of risk owner options with recommendations
    See Info-Tech’s related blueprint: Information Lifecycle Management
    Process

    Responsibility: Define responsibility and accountability for information lifecycle ownership.

    Output Customer
    • Defined information lifecycle owner
    • Organization wide.

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Monitor information lifecycle metrics
    Supplier Input
    Information lifecycle owner
    • Information metrics report with recommendations
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around information management metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept information management performance
    • Accept recommendations
    • Launch corrective task force to address challenges
    • Define target metrics
    • IT leadership

    Define which metrics you will report to the IT steering committee

    2.2

    1. Consider your IT steering committee goals and the five IT governance areas.
    2. For each governance area, identify which metrics you are currently tracking and determine whether these metrics are valuable to IT, to the business, or both. For metrics that are valuable to business stakeholders determine whether you have an identified target metric.

    New Metrics:

    1. For each of the five IT governance areas review your SWOT analysis and document your key opportunities and weaknesses.
    2. For each, brainstorm hypotheses around why the opportunity was weak or was a success. For each hypothesis identify if there are any clear ways to measure and test the hypothesis.
    3. Review the list of metrics and select 5-7 metrics to track for each prioritized governance area.

    INPUT

    • List of responsibilities
    • Example SIPOCs

    OUTPUT

    • SIPOC model for all responsibilities

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    IT steering committee metric triggers to consider

    RISK

    • Risk profile % increase
    • # of actionable risks outstanding
    • # of issues arising not identified prior
    • # of security breaches

    SERVICE

    • Number of business disruptions due to IT service incidents
    • Number of service requests by department
    • Number of service requests that are actually projects
    • Causes of tickets overall and by department
    • Percentage of duration attributed to waiting for client response

    PROJECTS

    • Projects completed within budget
    • Percentage of projects delivered on time
    • Project completion rate
    • IT completed assigned portion to scope
    • Project status and trend dashboard

    INFORMATION / DATA

    • % of data properly classified
    • # of incidents locating data
    • # of report requests by complexity
    • # of open data sets

    PPM /INVESTMENTS

    • CIO Business Vision (an Info-Tech diagnostic survey that helps align IT strategy with business goals)
    • Level of stakeholder satisfaction and perceived value
    • Percentage of ON vs. OFF cycle projects by area/silo
    • Realized benefit to business units based on investment mix
    • Percent of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by strategic goals
    • Target vs. actual budget
    • Reasons for off-cycle projects causing delays to planned projects

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    "IT steering committee’s reputation greatly improved by clearly defining its process."

    CHALLENGE

    One of the major failings of the previous steering committee was its poorly drafted procedures. Members of the committee were unclear on the overall process and the meeting schedule was not well established.

    This led to low attendance at the meetings and ineffective meetings overall. Since the meeting procedures weren’t well understood, some members of the leadership team took advantage of this to get their projects pushed through.

    SOLUTION

    The first step the new CIO took was to clearly outline the meeting procedures in her new steering committee charter. The meeting agenda, meeting goals, length of time, and outcomes were outlined, and the stakeholders signed off on their participation.

    She also gave the participants a SIPOC, which helped members who were unfamiliar with the process a high-level overview. It also reacquainted previous members with the process and outlined changes to the previous, out-of-date processes.

    OUTCOME

    The participation rate in the committee meetings improved from the previous rate of approximately 40% to 90%. The committee members were much more satisfied with the new process and felt like their contributions were appreciated more than before.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    An image of an Info-Tech analyst is depicted.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    A screenshot of activity 2.1 is depicted. Activity 2.1 is about defining a SIPOC for each of the ITSC responsibilities.

    Define a SIPOC for each of the ITSC responsibilities

    Create SIPOCs for each of the governance responsibilities with the help of an Info-Tech advisor.

    2.2

    A screenshot of activity 2.2 is depicted. Activity 2.2 is about establishing the reporting metrics for the ITSC.

    Establish the reporting metrics for the ITSC

    The analyst will facilitate several exercises to help you and your stakeholders define the reporting metrics for the ITSC.

    Phase 3

    Build the Stakeholder Presentation

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Build the Stakeholder Presentation
    Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

    Customize the Presentation

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation with an analyst

    Then complete these activities…

    • Schedule the first meeting and invite the ITSC members
    • Customize the presentation template

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation


    Review and Practice the Presentation

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the changes made to the template
    • Practice the presentation and create a script

    Then complete these activities…

    • Hold the ITSC meeting

    With these tools & templates:

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation
    Review the First ITSC Meeting

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Review the outcomes of the first ITSC meeting and plan out the next steps

    Then complete these activities…

    • Review the discussion and plan next steps

    With these tools & templates:

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Build the Stakeholder Presentation

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Organizing the first ITSC meeting
    • Customizing an ITSC stakeholder presentation
    • Determine ITSC responsibilities and participants
    • Determine ITSC procedures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    Stakeholder engagement will be critical to your ITSC success, don't just focus on what is changing. Ensure stakeholders know why you are engaging them and how it will help them in their role.

    Hold a kick-off meeting with your IT steering committee members to explain the process, responsibilities, and goals

    3.1

    Don’t take on too much in your first IT steering committee meeting. Many participants may not have participated in an IT steering committee before, or some may have had poor experiences in the past.

    Use this meeting to explain the role of the IT steering committee and why you are implementing one, and help participants to understand their role in the process.

    Quickly customize Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template to explain the goals and benefits of the IT steering committee, and use your own data to make the case for governance.

    At the end of the meeting, ask committee members to sign the committee charter to signify their agreement to participate in the IT steering committee.

    A screenshot of IT Steering Committee: Meeting 1 is depicted. A screenshot of the IT Steering Committee Challenges and Opportunities for the organization.

    Tailor the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template: slides 1-5

    3.2 Estimated Time: 10 minutes

    Review the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template. This document should be presented at the first IT steering committee meeting by the assigned Committee Chair.

    Customization Options

    Overall: Decide if you would like to change the presentation template. You can change the color scheme easily by copying the slides in the presentation deck and pasting them into your company’s standard template. Once you’ve pasted them in, scan through the slides and make any additional changes needed to formatting.

    Slide 2-3: Review the text on each of the slides and see if any wording should be changed to better suite your organization.

    Slide 4: Review your list of the top 10 challenges and opportunities as defined in section 2 of this blueprint. Document those in the appropriate sections. (Note: be careful that the language is business-facing; challenges and opportunities should be professionally worded.)

    Slide 5: Review the language on slide 5 to make any necessary changes to suite your organization. Changes here should be minimal.

    INPUT

    • Top 10 list
    • Survey report
    • ITSC Charter

    OUTPUT

    • Ready-to-present presentation for defined stakeholders

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation

    Participants

    • IT Steering Committee Chair/CIO

    Tailor the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template: slides 6-10

    3.2 Estimated Time: 10 minutes

    Customization Options

    Slide 6: The goal of this slide is to document and share the names of the participants on the IT steering committee. Document the names in the right-hand side based on your IT Steering Committee Charter.

    Slides 7-9:

    • Review the agenda items as listed in your IT Steering Committee Charter. Document the annual, quarterly, and monthly meeting responsibilities on the left-hand side of slides 7-9.
    • Meeting Participants: For each slide, list the members who are required for that meeting.
    • Document the key required reading materials as identified in the SIPOC charts under “inputs.”
    • Document the key meeting outcomes as identified in the SIPOC chart under “outputs.”

    Slide 10: Review and understand the rollout timeline. Make any changes needed to the timeline.

    INPUT

    • Top 10 list
    • Survey report
    • ITSC Charter

    OUTPUT

    • Ready-to-present presentation for defined stakeholders

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation

    Participants

    • IT Steering Committee Chair/CIO

    Present the information to the IT leadership team to increase your comfort with the material

    3.3 Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. Once you have finished customizing the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation, practice presenting the material by meeting with your IT leadership team. This will help you become more comfortable with the dialog and anticipate any questions that might arise.
    2. The ITSC chair will present the meeting deck, and all parties should discuss what they think went well and opportunities for improvement.
    3. Each business relationship manager should document the needed changes in preparation for their first meeting.

    INPUT

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation - Meeting 1

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Schedule your first meeting of the IT steering committee

    3.4

    By this point, you should have customized the meeting presentation deck and be ready to meet with your IT steering committee participants.

    The meeting should be one hour in duration and completed in person.

    Before holding the meeting, identify who you think is going to be most supportive and who will be least. Consider meeting with those individuals independently prior to the group meeting to elicit support or minimize negative impacts on the meeting.

    Customize this calendar invite script to invite business partners to participate in the meeting.

    Hello [Name],

    As you may have heard, we recently went through an exercise to develop an IT steering committee. I’d like to take some time to discuss the results of this work with you, and discuss ways in which we can work together in the future to better enable corporate goals.

    The goals of the meeting are:

    1. Discuss the benefits of an IT steering committee
    2. Review the results of the organizational survey
    3. Introduce you to our new IT steering committee

    I look forward to starting this discussion with you and working with you more closely in the future.

    Warm regards,

    CASE STUDY

    Industry:Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    "CIO gains buy-in from the company by presenting the new committee to its stakeholders."

    CHALLENGE

    Communication was one of the biggest steering committee challenges that the new CIO inherited.

    Members were resistant to joining/rejoining the committee because of its previous failures. When the new CIO was building the steering committee, she surveyed the members on their knowledge of IT as well as what they felt their role in the committee entailed.

    She found that member understanding was lacking and that their knowledge surrounding their roles was very inconsistent.

    SOLUTION

    The CIO dedicated their first steering committee meeting to presenting the results of that survey to align member knowledge.

    She outlined the new charter and discussed the roles of each member, the goals of the committee, and the overarching process.

    OUTCOME

    Members of the new committee were now aligned in terms of the steering committee’s goals. Taking time to thoroughly outline the procedures during the first meeting led to much higher member engagement. It also built accountability within the committee since all members were present and all members had the same level of knowledge surrounding the roles of the ITSC.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    A screenshot of Activity 3.1 is depicted. Activity 3.1 is about creating a presentation for ITSC stakeholders to be presented at the first ITSC meeting.

    Create a presentation for ITSC stakeholders to be presented at the first ITSC meeting

    Work with an Info-Tech advisor to customize our IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template. Use this presentation to gain stakeholder buy-in by making the case for an ITSC.

    Phase 4

    Define the Prioritization Criteria

    Phase 4 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation : Define the Prioritization Criteria
    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Discuss Prioritization Criteria

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review sample project prioritization criteria and discuss criteria unique to your organization

    Then complete these activities...

    • Select the criteria that would be most effective for your organization
    • Input these into the tool

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Customize the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review changes made to the tool
    • Finalize criteria weighting

    Then complete these activities…

    • Pilot test the tool using projects from the previous year

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Review Results of the Pilot Test

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Review the results of the pilot test
    • Make changes to the tool

    Then complete these activities…

    • Input your current project portfolio into the prioritization tool

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Define the Project Prioritization Criteria

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Selecting the appropriate project prioritization criteria for your organization
    • Developing weightings for the prioritization criteria
    • Filling in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    The steering committee sets and agrees to principles that guide prioritization decisions. The agreed upon principles will affect business unit expectations and justify the deferral of requests that are low priority. In some cases, we have seen the number of requests drop substantially because business units are reluctant to propose initiatives that do not fit high prioritization criteria.

    Understand the role of the IT steering committee in project prioritization

    One of the key roles of the IT steering committee is to review and prioritize the portfolio of IT projects.

    What is the prioritization based on? Info-Tech recommends selecting four broad criteria with two dimensions under each to evaluate the value of the projects. The criteria are aligned with how the project generates value for the organization and the execution of the project.

    What is the role of the steering committee in prioritizing projects? The steering committee is responsible for reviewing project criteria scores and making decisions about where projects rank on the priority list. Planning, resourcing, and project management are the responsibility of the PMO or the project owner.

    Info-Tech’s Sample Criteria

    Value

    Strategic Alignment: How much a project supports the strategic goals of the organization.

    Customer Satisfaction: The impact of the project on customers and how visible a project will be with customers.

    Operational Alignment: Whether the project will address operational issues or compliance.

    Execution

    Financial: Predicted ROI and cost containment strategies.

    Risk: Involved with not completing projects and strategies to mitigate it.

    Feasibility: How easy the project is to complete and whether staffing resources exist.

    Use Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool to catalog and prioritize your project portfolio

    4.1

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool in conjunction with the following activities to catalog and prioritize all of the current IT projects in your portfolio.
    • Assign weightings to your selected criteria to prioritize projects based on objective scores assigned during the intake process and adjust these weightings on an annual basis to align with changing organizational priorities and goals.
    • Use this tool at steering committee meetings to streamline the prioritization process and create alignment with the PMO and project managers.
    • Monitor ongoing project status and build a communication channel between the PMO and project managers and the IT steering committee.
    • Adjusting the titles in the Settings tab will automatically adjust the titles in the Project Data tab.
    • Note: To customize titles in the document you must unprotect the content under the View tab. Be sure to change the content back to protected after making the changes.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool is depicted. The first page of the tool is shown. A screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool is depicted. The page depicted is on the Intake and Prioritization Tool Settings.

    Establish project prioritization criteria and build the matrix

    4.2 Estimated Time: 1 hour

    1. During the second steering committee meeting, discuss the criteria you will be basing your project prioritization scoring on.
    2. Review Info-Tech’s prioritization criteria matrix, located in the Prioritization Criteria List tab of the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool, to gain ideas for what criteria would best suit your organization.
    3. Write these main criteria on the whiteboard and brainstorm criteria that are more specific for your organization; include these on the list as well.
    4. Discuss the criteria. Eliminate criteria that won’t contribute strongly to the prioritization process and vote on the remaining. Select four main criteria from the list.
    5. After selecting the four main criteria, write these on the whiteboard and brainstorm the dimensions that fall under the criteria. These should be more specific/measurable aspects of the criteria. These will be the statements that values are assigned to for prioritizing projects so they should be clear. Use the Prioritization Criteria List in the tool to help generate ideas.
    6. After creating the dimensions, determine what the scoring statements will be. These are the statements that will be used to determine the score out of 10 that the different dimensions will receive.
    7. Adjust the Settings and Project Data tabs in the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool to reflect your selections.
    8. Edit Info-Tech’s IT Project Intake Form or the intake form that you currently use to contain these criteria and scoring parameters.

    INPUT

    • Group input
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    OUTPUT

    • Project prioritization criteria to be used for current and future projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard and markers

    Participants

    • IT steering committee
    • CIO
    • IT leadership

    Adjust prioritization criteria weightings to reflect organizational needs

    4.3 Estimated Time: 1 hour

    1. In the second steering committee meeting, after deciding what the project prioritization criteria will be, you need to determine how much weight (the importance) each criteria will receive.
    2. Use the four agreed upon criteria with two dimensions each, determined in the previous activity.
    3. Perform a $100 test to assign proportions to each of the criteria dimensions.
      1. Divide the committee into pairs.
      2. Tell each pair that they have $100 divide among the 4 major criteria based on how important they feel the criteria is.
      3. After dividing the initial $100, ask them to divide the amount they allocated to each criteria into the two sub-dimensions.
      4. Next, ask them to present their reasoning for the allocations to the rest of the committee.
      5. Discuss the weighting allotments and vote on the best one (or combination).
      6. Input the weightings in the Settings tab of the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool and document the discussion.
    4. After customizing the chart establish the owner of the document. This person should be a member of the PMO or the most suitable IT leader if a PMO doesn’t exist.
    5. Only perform this adjustment annually or if a major strategic change happens within the organization.

    INPUT

    • Group discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Agreed upon criteria weighting
    • Complete prioritization tool

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool
    • Whiteboard and sticky notes

    Participants

    • IT steering committee
    • IT leadership

    Document the prioritization criteria weightings in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool.

    Configure the prioritization tool to align your portfolio with business strategy

    4.4 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    Rank: Project ranking will dynamically update relative to your portfolio capacity (established in Settings tab) and the Size, Scoring Progress, Remove from Ranking, and Overall Score columns. The projects in green represent top priorities based on these inputs, while yellow projects warrant additional consideration should capacity permit.

    Scoring Progress: You will be able to determine some items on the scorecard earlier in the scoring progress (such as strategic and operational alignment). As you fill in scoring columns on the Project Data tab, the Scoring Progress column will dynamically update to track progress.

    The Overall Score will update automatically as you complete the scoring columns (refer to Activity 4.2).

    Days in Backlog: This column will help with backlog management, automatically tracking the number of days since an item was added to the list based on day added and current date.

    Validate your new prioritization criteria using previous projects

    4.5 Estimated Time: 2 hours

    1. After deciding on the prioritization criteria, you need to test their validity.
    2. Look at the portfolio of projects that were completed in the previous year.
    3. Go through each project and score it according to the criteria that were determined in the previous exercise.
    4. Enter the scores and appropriate weighting (according to goals/strategy of the previous year) into the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool.
    5. Look at the prioritization given to the projects in reference to how they were previously prioritized.
    6. Adjust the criteria and weighting to either align the new prioritization criteria with previous criteria or to align with desired outcomes.
    7. After scoring the old projects, pilot test the tool with upcoming projects.

    INPUT

    • Information on previous year’s projects
    • Group discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Pilot tested project prioritization criteria

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • IT steering committee
    • IT leadership
    • PMO

    Pilot the scorecard to validate criteria and weightings

    4.6 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    1. Pilot your criteria and weightings in the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool using project data from one or two projects currently going through approval process.
    2. For most projects, you will be able to determine strategic and operational alignment early in the scoring process, while the feasibility and financial requirements will come later during business case development. Score each column as you can. The tool will automatically track your progress in the Scoring Progress column on the Project Data tab.

    Projects that are scored but not prioritized will populate the portfolio backlog. Items in the backlog will need to be rescored periodically, as circumstances can change, impacting scores. Factors necessitating rescoring can include:

    • Assumptions in business case have changed.
    • Organizational change – e.g. a new CEO or a change in strategic objectives.
    • Major emergencies or disruptions – e.g. a security breach.

    Score projects using the Project Data tab in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool is depicted. The Data Tab is shown.">

    Use Info-Tech’s IT Project Intake Form to streamline the project prioritization and approval process

    4.7

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT Project Intake Form template to streamline the project intake and prioritization process.
    • Customize the chart on page 2 to include the prioritization criteria that were selected during this phase of the blueprint.
    • Including the prioritization criteria at the project intake phase will free up a lot of time for the steering committee. It will be their job to verify that the criteria scores are accurate.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Project Intake Form is depicted.

    After prioritizing and selecting your projects, determine how they will be resourced

    Consult these Info-Tech blueprints on project portfolio management to create effective portfolio project management resourcing processes.

    A Screenshot of Info-Tech's Create Project Management Success Blueprint is depicted. Create Project Management Success A Screenshot of Info-Tech's Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy Blueprint is depicted. Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    "Clear project intake and prioritization criteria allow for the new committee to make objective priority decisions."

    CHALLENGE

    One of the biggest problems that the previous steering committee at the company had was that their project intake and prioritization process was not consistent. Projects were being prioritized based on politics and managers taking advantage of the system.

    The procedure was not formalized so there were no objective criteria on which to weigh the value of proposed projects. In addition to poor meeting attendance, this led to the overall process being very inconsistent.

    SOLUTION

    The new CIO, with consultation from the newly formed committee, drafted a set of criteria that focused on the value and execution of their project portfolio. These criteria were included on their intake forms to streamline the rating process.

    All of the project scores are now reviewed by the steering committee, and they are able to facilitate the prioritization process more easily.

    The objective criteria process also helped to prevent managers from taking advantage of the prioritization process to push self-serving projects through.

    OUTCOME

    This was seen as a contributor to the increase in satisfaction scores for IT, which improved by 12% overall.

    The new streamlined process helped to reduce capacity constraints on IT, and it alerted the company to the need for more IT employees to help reduce these constraints further. The IT department was given permission to hire two new additional staff members.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1

    A screenshot of activity 4.1 is depicted. Activity 4.1 was about defining your prioritization criteria and customize our <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool.">

    Define your prioritization criteria and customize our IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    With the help of Info-Tech advisors, create criteria for determining a project’s priority. Customize the tool to reflect the criteria and their weighting. Run pilot tests of the tool to verify the criteria and enter your current project portfolio.

    Research contributors and experts

    • Andy Lomasky, Manager, Technology & Management Consulting, McGladrey LLP
    • Angie Embree, CIO, Best Friends Animal Society
    • Corinne Bell, CTO and Director of IT Services, Landmark College
    • John Hanskenecht, Director of Technology, University of Detroit Jesuit High School and Academy
    • Lori Baker, CIO, Village of Northbrook
    • Lynne Allard, IT Supervisor, Nipissing Parry Sound Catholic School Board
    • Norman Allen, Senior IT Manager, Baker Tilly
    • Paul Martinello, VP, IT Services, Cambridge and North Dumfries Hydro Inc.
    • Renee Martinez, IT Director/CIO, City of Santa Fe
    • Sam Wong, Director, IT, Seneca College
    • Suzanne Barnes, Director, Information Systems, Pathfinder International
    • Walt Joyce, CTO, Peoples Bank

    Appendices

    GOVERNANCE & ITSC & IT Management

    Organizations often blur the line between governance and management, resulting in the business having say over the wrong things. Understand the differences and make sure both groups understand their role.

    The ITSC is the most senior body within the IT governance structure, involving key business executives and focusing on critical strategic decisions impacting the whole organization.

    Within a holistic governance structure, organizations may have additional committees that evaluate, direct, and monitor key decisions at a more tactical level and report into the ITSC.

    These committees require specialized knowledge and are implemented to meet specific organizational needs. Those operational committees may spark a tactical task force to act on specific needs.

    IT management is responsible for executing on, running, and monitoring strategic activities as determined by IT governance.

    Strategic IT Steering Committee
    Tactical

    Project Governance Service Governance

    Risk Governance Information Governance

    IT Management
    Operational Risk Task Force

    This blueprint focuses exclusively on building the IT Steering committee. For more information on IT governance see Info-Tech’s related blueprint: Tailor an IT Governance Plan to Fit Organizational Needs.

    IT steering committees play an important role in IT governance

    By bucketing responsibilities into these areas, you’ll be able to account for most key IT decisions and help the business to understand their role in governance, fostering ownership and joint accountability.

    The five governance areas are:

    Governance of the IT Portfolio and Investments: Ensures that funding and resources are systematically allocated to the priority projects that deliver value.

    Governance of Projects: Ensures that IT projects deliver the expected value, and that the PM methodology is measured and effective.

    Governance of Risks: Ensures the organization’s ability to assess and deliver IT projects and services with acceptable risk.

    Governance of Services: Ensures that IT delivers the required services at the acceptable performance levels.

    Governance of Information and Data: Ensures the appropriate classification and retention of data based on business need.

    A survey of stakeholders identified a need for increased stakeholder involvement and transparency in decision making

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: I understand how decisions are made in the following areas. The areas include risk, services, projects, portfolio, and information. A circle graph is depicted. The title is: Do IT decisions involve the right people?

    Overall, survey respondents indicated a lack of understanding about how decisions are made around risk, services, projects, and investments, and that business involvement in decision making was too minimal.

    Satisfaction with decision quality around investments and PPM are uneven and largely not well understood

    72% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around IT services are made (quality, availability, etc.).

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services? A bar graph is depicted. Title of the graph: IT decisions around service delivery and quality involve the right people?

    Overall, services were ranked #1 in importance of the 5 areas

    62% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around IT services are made (quality, availability, etc.).

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services? A bar graph is depicted. Title of the graph: IT decisions around service delivery and quality involve the right people?

    Projects ranked as one of the areas with which participants are most satisfied with the quality of decisions

    70% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around projects selection, success, and changes are made.

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services? A bar graph is depicted. The title is: IT decisions around project changes, delays, and metrics involve the right people?

    Stakeholders are largely unaware of how decisions around risk are made and believe business participation needs to increase

    78% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around risk are made

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions made around risk? A bar graph is depicted. The title is: IT decisions around acceptable risk involve the right people?

    The majority of stakeholders believe that they are aware of how decisions around information are made

    67% of stakeholders believe they do understand how decisions around information (data) retention and classification are made.

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions around information governance? A bar graph is depicted. The title is: IT decisions around information retention and classification involve the right people?

    Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}99|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation

    COVID-19 has created new risks to physical encounters among workers and customers. New biosecurity processes and ways to effectively enforce them – in the least intrusive way possible – are required to resume these activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    New biosecurity standards will be imposed on many industries, and the autonomous edge will be part of the solution to manage that new reality.

    Impact and Result

    There are some key considerations for businesses considering new biosecurity measures:

    1. If prevention, then ID-based access control
    2. If intervention, then alerts based on data
    3. If investigation, then contact tracing

    Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge Research & Tools

    Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge

    Understand how new biosecurity requirements could affect your business and why AI at the edge could be part of the solution.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Tech Trend Update: If Biosecurity Then Autonomous Edge Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}479|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Incompatible technologies. Organizations with more than one service desk are likely to have many legacy IT service management (ITSM) solutions. These come with a higher support cost, costly skill-set maintenance, and the inability to negotiate volume licensing discounts.
    • Inconsistent processes. Organizations with more than one service desk often have incompatible processes, which can lead to inconsistent service support across departments, less staffing flexibility, and higher support costs.
    • Lack of data integration. Without a single system and consistent processes, IT leaders often have only a partial view of service support activities. This can lead to rigid IT silos, limit the ability to troubleshoot problems, and streamline process workflows.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Every step should put people first. It’s tempting to focus the strategy on designing processes and technologies for the target architecture. However, the most common barrier to success is workforce resistance to change.
    • A consolidated service desk is an investment, not a cost-reduction program. Focus on efficiency, customer service, and end-user satisfaction. There will be many cost savings, but viewing them as an indirect consequence of the pursuit of efficiency and customer service is the best approach.

    Impact and Result

    • Conduct a comprehensive assessment of existing service desk people, processes, and technology.
    • Identify and retire resources and processes that are no longer meeting business needs, and consolidate and modernize resources and processes that are worth keeping.
    • Identify logistic and cost considerations and create a roadmap of consolidation initiatives.
    • Communicate the change and garner support for the consolidation initiative.

    Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a service desk consolidation strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a shared vision

    Engage stakeholders to develop a vision for the project and perform a comprehensive assessment of existing service desks.

    • Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – Phase 1: Develop a Shared Vision
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation
    • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool
    • IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool

    2. Design the consolidated service desk

    Outline the target state of the consolidated service desk and assess logistics and cost of consolidation.

    • Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – Phase 2: Design the Consolidated Service Desk
    • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
    • Consolidated Service Desk SOP Template
    • Service Desk Efficiency Calculator
    • Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

    3. Plan the transition

    Build a project roadmap and communication plan.

    • Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – Phase 3: Plan the Transition
    • Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap
    • Service Desk Consolidation Communications and Training Plan Template
    • Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Engage Stakeholders to Develop a Vision for the Service Desk

    The Purpose

    Identify and engage key stakeholders.

    Conduct an executive visioning session to define the scope and goals of the consolidation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of key stakeholders and an engagement plan to identify needs and garner support for the change.

    A common vision for the consolidation initiative with clearly defined goals and objectives.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify key stakeholders and develop an engagement plan.

    1.2 Brainstorm desired service desk attributes.

    1.3 Conduct an executive visioning session to craft a vision for the consolidated service desk.

    1.4 Define project goals, principles, and KPIs.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder Engagement Workbook

    Executive Presentation

    2 Conduct a Full Assessment of Each Service Desk

    The Purpose

    Assess the overall maturity, structure, organizational design, and performance of each service desk.

    Assess current ITSM tools and how well they are meeting needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A robust current state assessment of each service desk.

    An understanding of agent skills, satisfaction, roles, and responsibilities.

    An evaluation of existing ITSM tools and technology.

    Activities

    2.1 Review the results of diagnostics programs.

    2.2 Map organizational structure and roles for each service desk.

    2.3 Assess overall maturity and environment of each service desk.

    2.4 Assess current information system environment.

    Outputs

    Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

    3 Design Target Consolidated Service Desk

    The Purpose

    Define the target state for consolidated service desk.

    Identify requirements for the service desk and a supporting solution.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Detailed requirements and vision for the consolidated service desk.

    Gap analysis of current vs. target state.

    Documented standardized processes and procedures.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify requirements for target consolidated service desk.

    3.2 Build requirements document and shortlist for ITSM tool.

    3.3 Use the scorecard comparison tool to assess the gap between existing service desks and target state.

    3.4 Document standardized processes for new service desk.

    Outputs

    Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool

    Consolidated Service Desk SOP

    4 Plan for the Transition

    The Purpose

    Break down the consolidation project into specific initiatives with a detailed timeline and assigned responsibilities.

    Plan the logistics and cost of the consolidation for process, technology, and facilities.

    Develop a communications plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Initial analysis of the logistics and cost considerations to achieve the target.

    A detailed project roadmap to migrate to a consolidated service desk.

    A communications plan with responses to anticipated questions and objections.

    Activities

    4.1 Plan the logistics of the transition.

    4.2 Assess the cost and savings of consolidation to refine business case.

    4.3 Identify initiatives and develop a project roadmap.

    4.4 Plan communications for each stakeholder group.

    Outputs

    Consolidation TCO Tool

    Consolidation Roadmap

    Executive Presentation

    Communications Plan

    News Bulletin & FAQ Template

    Further reading

    Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy

    Manage the dark side of growth.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    A successful service desk consolidation begins and ends with people.

    "It’s tempting to focus strategic planning on the processes and technology that will underpin the consolidated service desk. Consistent processes and a reliable tool will cement the consolidation, but they are not what will hold you back.

    The most common barrier to a successful consolidation is workforce resistance to change. Cultural difference, perceived risks, and organizational inertia can hinder data gathering, deter collaboration, and impede progress from the start.

    Building a consolidated service desk is first and foremost an exercise in organizational change. Garner executive support for the project, enlist a team of volunteers to lead the change, and communicate with key stakeholders early and often. The key is to create a shared vision for the project and engage those who will be most affected."

    Sandi Conrad

    Senior Director, Infrastructure Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • CIOs who need to reduce support costs and improve customer service.
    • IT leaders tasked with the merger of two or more IT organizations.
    • Service managers implementing a shared service desk tool.
    • Organizations rationalizing IT service management (ITSM) processes.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Develop a shared vision for the consolidated service desk.
    • Assess key metrics and report on existing service desk architecture.
    • Design a target service desk architecture and assess how to meet the new requirements.
    • Deploy a strategic roadmap to build the consolidated service desk architecture.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    Every organization must grow to survive. Good growth makes an organization more agile, responsive, and competitive, which leads to further growth.

    The proliferation of service desks is a hallmark of good growth when it empowers the service of diverse end users, geographies, or technologies.

    Complication

    Growth has its dark side. Bad growth within a business can hinder agility, responsiveness, and competitiveness, leading to stagnation.

    Supporting a large number of service desks can be costly and inefficient, and produce poor or inconsistent customer service, especially when each service desk uses different ITSM processes and technologies.

    Resolution

    Manage the dark side of growth. Consolidating service desks can help standardize ITSM processes, improve customer service, improve service desk efficiency, and reduce total support costs. A consolidation is a highly visible and mission critical project, and one that will change the public face of IT. Organizations need to get it right.

    Building a consolidated service desk is an exercise in organizational change. The success of the project will hinge on how well the organization engages those who will be most affected by the change. Build a guiding coalition for the project, create a shared vision, enlist a team of volunteers to lead the change, and communicate with key stakeholders early and often.

    Use a structured approach to facilitate the development of a shared strategic vision, design a detailed consolidated architecture, and anticipate resistance to change to ensure the organization reaps project benefits.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Every step should put people first. It’s tempting to focus the strategy on designing processes and technologies for the target architecture. However, the most common barrier to success is workforce resistance to change.
    2. A consolidated service desk is an investment, not a cost-reduction program. Focus on efficiency, customer service, and end-user satisfaction. Cost savings, and there will be many, should be seen as an indirect consequence of the pursuit of efficiency and customer service.

    Focus the service desk consolidation project on improving customer service to overcome resistance to change

    Emphasizing cost reduction as the most important motivation for the consolidation project is risky.

    End-user satisfaction is a more reliable measure of a successful consolidation.

    • Too many variables affect the impact of the consolidation on the operating costs of the service desk to predict the outcome reliably.
    • Potential reductions in costs are unlikely to overcome organizational resistance to change.
    • Successful service desk consolidations can increase ticket volume as agents capture tickets more consistently and increase customer service.

    The project will generate many cost savings, but they will take time to manifest, and are best seen as an indirect consequence of the pursuit of customer service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Business units facing a service desk consolidation are often concerned that the project will lead to a loss of access to IT resources. Focus on building a customer-focused consolidated service desk to assuage those fears and earn their support.

    End users, IT leaders, and process owners recognize the importance of the service desk.

    2nd out of 45

    On average, IT leaders and process owners rank the service desk 2nd in terms of importance out of 45 core IT processes. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, Management and Governance Diagnostic (2015, n = 486)

    42.1%

    On average, end users who were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT services 42.1% higher than dissatisfied end users. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, End-User Satisfaction Survey 2015, n = 133)

    38.0%

    On average, end users who were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT services 38.0% higher than dissatisfied end users. Source: Info-Tech Research Group, End-User Satisfaction Survey (2015, n = 133)

    Overcome the perceived barriers from differing service unit cultures to pursue a consolidated service desk (CSD)

    In most organizations, the greatest hurdles that consolidation projects face are related to people rather than process or technology.

    In a survey of 168 service delivery organizations without a consolidated service desk, the Service Desk Institute found that the largest internal barrier to putting in place a consolidated service desk was organizational resistance to change.

    Specifically, more than 56% of respondents reported that the different cultures of each service unit would hinder the level of collaboration such an initiative would require.

    The image is a graph titled Island cultures are the largest barrier to consolidation. The graph lists Perceived Internal Barriers to CSD by percentage. The greatest % barrier is Island cultures, with executive resistance the next highest.

    Service Desk Institute (n = 168, 2007)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use a phased approach to overcome resistance to change. Focus on quick-win implementations that bring two or three service desks together in a short time frame and add additional service desks over time.

    Avoid the costly proliferation of service desks that can come with organizational growth

    Good and bad growth

    Every organization must grow to survive, and relies heavily on its IT infrastructure to do that. Good growth makes an organization more agile, responsive, and competitive, and leads to further growth.

    However, growth has its dark side. Bad growth hobbles agility, responsiveness, and competitiveness, and leads to stagnation.

    As organizations grow organically and through mergers, their IT functions create multiple service desks across the enterprise to support:

    • Large, diverse user constituencies.
    • Rapidly increasing call volumes.
    • Broader geographic coverage.
    • A growing range of products and services.

    A hallmark of bad growth is the proliferation of redundant and often incompatible ITSM services and processes.

    Project triggers:

    • Organizational mergers
    • ITSM tool purchase
    • Service quality or cost-reduction initiatives
    Challenges arising from service desk proliferation:
    Challenge Impact
    Incompatible Technologies
    • Inability to negotiate volume discounts.
    • Costly skill set maintenance.
    • Increased support costs.
    • Increased shadow IT.
    Inconsistent Processes
    • Low efficiency.
    • High support costs.
    • Inconsistent support quality.
    • Less staffing flexibility.
    Lack of Data Integration
    • Only partial view of IT.
    • Inefficient workflows.
    • Limited troubleshooting ability.
    Low Customer Satisfaction
    • Fewer IT supporters.
    • Lack of organizational support.

    Consolidate service desks to integrate the resources, processes, and technology of your support ecosystem

    What project benefits can you anticipate?

    • Consolidated Service Desk
      • End-user group #1
      • End-user group #2
      • End-user group #3
      • End-user group #4

    A successful consolidation can significantly reduce cost per transaction, speed up service delivery, and improve the customer experience through:

    • Single point of contact for end users.
    • Integrated ITSM solution where it makes sense.
    • Standardized processes.
    • Staffing integration.
    Project Outcome

    Expected Benefit

    Integrated information The capacity to produce quick, accurate, and segmented reports of service levels across the organization.
    Integrated staffing Flexible management of resources that better responds to organizational needs.
    Integrated technology Reduced tool procurement costs, improved data integration, and increased information security.
    Standardized processes Efficient and timely customer service and a more consistent customer experience.

    Standardized and consolidated service desks will optimize infrastructure, services, and resources benefits

    • To set up a functioning service desk, the organization will need to invest resources to build and integrate tier 1, tier 2, and tier 3 capabilities to manage incidents and requests.
    • The typical service desk (Figure 1) can address a certain number of tickets from all three tiers. If your tickets in a given tier are less than that number, you are paying for 100% of service costs but consuming only a portion of it.
    • The consolidated model (Figure 2) reduces the service cost by reducing unused capacity.
    • Benefits of consolidation include a single service desk solution, a single point of contact for the business, data integration, process standardization, and consolidated administration, reporting, and management.

    The image is a graphic showing 2 figures. The first shows ring graphs labelled Service Desk 1 and Service Desk 2, with the caption Service provisioning with distinct service desks. Figure 2 shows one graphic, captioned Service provisioning with Consolidated service providers. At the bottom of the image, there is a legend.

    Info-Tech’s approach to service desk consolidation draws on key metrics to establish a baseline and a target state

    The foundation of a successful service desk consolidation initiative is a robust current state assessment. Given the project’s complexity, however, determining the right level of detail to include in the evaluation of existing service desks can be challenging.

    The Info-Tech approach to service desk consolidation includes:

    • Envisioning exercises to set project scope and garner executive support.
    • Surveys and interviews to identify the current state of people, processes, technologies, and service level agreements (SLAs) in each service desk, and to establish a baseline for the consolidated service desk.
    • Service desk comparison tools to gather the results of the current state assessment for analysis and identify current best practices for migration to the consolidated service desk.
    • Case studies to illustrate the full scope of the project and identify how different organizations deal with key challenges.

    The project blueprint walks through a method that helps identify which processes and technologies from each service desk work best, and it draws on them to build a target state for the consolidated service desk.

    Inspiring your target state from internal tools and best practices is much more efficient than developing new tools and processes from scratch.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The two key hurdles that a successful service desk consolidation must overcome are organizational complexity and resistance to change.

    Effective planning during the current state assessment can overcome these challenges.

    Identify existing best practices for migration to the consolidated service desk to foster agent engagement and get the consolidated service desk up quickly.

    A consolidation project should include the following steps and may involve multiple transition phases to complete

    Phase 1: Develop a Shared Vision

    • Identify stakeholders
    • Develop vision
    • Measure baseline

    Phase 2: Design the Consolidation

    • Design target state
    • Assess gaps to reach target
    • Assess logistics and cost

    Phase 3: Plan the Transition

    • Develop project plan and roadmap
    • Communicate changes
    • Make the transition
      • Evaluate and prepare for next transition phase (if applicable)
      • Evaluate and stabilize
        • CSI

    Whether or not your project requires multiple transition waves to complete the consolidation depends on the complexity of the environment.

    For a more detailed breakdown of this project’s steps and deliverables, see the next section.

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to develop a service desk consolidation strategy

    Phases Phase 1: Develop a Shared Vision Phase 2: Design the Consolidated Service Desk Phase 3: Plan the Transition
    Steps 1.1 - Identify and engage key stakeholders 2.1 - Design target consolidated service desk 3.1 - Build the project roadmap
    1.2 - Develop a vision to give the project direction
    1.3 - Conduct a full assessment of each service desk 2.2 - Assess logistics and cost of consolidation 3.2 - Communicate the change
    Tools & Templates Executive Presentation Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap
    Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool Consolidated Service Desk SOP Communications and Training Plan Template
    Service Desk Efficiency Calculator News Bulletin & FAQ Template
    Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

    Service desk consolidation is the first of several optimization projects focused on building essential best practices

    Info-Tech’s Service Desk Methodology aligns with the ITIL framework

    Extend

    Facilitate the extension of service management best practices to other business functions to improve productivity and position IT as a strategic partner.

    Standardize

    Build essential incident, service request, and knowledge management processes to create a sustainable service desk that meets business needs.

    Improve

    Build a continual improvement plan for the service desk to review and evaluate key processes and services, and manage the progress of improvement initiatives.

    Adopt Lean

    Build essential incident, service request, and knowledge management processes to create a sustainable service desk that boosts business value.

    Select and Implement

    Review mid-market and enterprise service desk tools, select an ITSM solution, and build an implementation plan to ensure your investment meets your needs.

    Consolidate

    Build a strategic roadmap to consolidate service desks to reduce end-user support costs and sustain end-user satisfaction.

    Our Approach to the Service Desk

    Service desk optimization goes beyond the blind adoption of best practices.

    Info-Tech’s approach focuses on controlling support costs and making the most of IT’s service management expertise to improve productivity.

    Complete the projects sequentially or in any order.

    Info-Tech draws on the COBIT framework, which focuses on consistent delivery of IT services across the organization

    The image shows Info-Tech's IT Management & Governance Framework. It is a grid of boxes, which are colour-coded by category. The framework includes multiple connected categories of research, including Infrastructure & Operations, where Service Desk is highlighted.

    Oxford University IT Service Desk successfully undertook a consolidation project to merge five help desks into one

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Higher Education

    Source: Oxford University, IT Services

    Background

    Until 2011, three disparate information technology organizations offered IT services, while each college had local IT officers responsible for purchasing and IT management.

    ITS Service Desk Consolidation Project

    Oxford merged the administration of these three IT organizations into IT Services (ITS) in 2012, and began planning for the consolidation of five independent help desks into a single robust service desk.

    Complication

    The relative autonomy of the five service desks had led to the proliferation of different tools and processes, licensing headaches, and confusion from end users about where to acquire IT service.

    Oxford University IT at a Glance

    • One of the world’s oldest and most prestigious universities.
    • 36 colleges with 100+ departments.
    • Over 40,000 IT end users.
    • Roughly 350 ITS staff in 40 teams.
    • 300 more distributed IT staff.
    • Offers more than 80 services.

    Help Desks:

    • Processes → Business Services & Projects
    • Processes → Computing Services
    • Processes → ICT Support Team

    "IT Services are aiming to provide a consolidated service which provides a unified and coherent experience for users. The aim is to deliver a ‘joined-up’ customer experience when users are asking for any form of help from IT Services. It will be easier for users to obtain support for their IT – whatever the need, service or system." – Oxford University, IT Services

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Build a Service Desk Consolidation Strategy – project overview

    1. Develop shared vision 2. Design consolidation 3. Plan transition
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

    1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    2.1 Design target consolidated service desk

    2.2 Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

    3.1 Build project roadmap

    3.2 Communicate the change

    Guided Implementations
    • Build the project team and define their roles and responsibilities, then identify key stakeholders and formulate an engagement plan
    • Develop an executive visioning session plan to formulate and get buy-in for the goals and vision of the consolidation
    • Use diagnostics results and the service desk assessment tool to evaluate the maturity and environment of each service desk
    • Define the target state of the consolidated service desk in detail
    • Identify requirements for the consolidation, broken down by people, process, technology and by short- vs. long-term needs
    • Plan the logistics of the consolidation for process, technology, and facilities, and evaluate the cost and cost savings of consolidation with a TCO tool
    • Identify specific initiatives for the consolidation project and evaluate the risks and dependencies for each, then plot initiatives on a detailed project roadmap
    • Brainstorm potential objections and questions and develop a communications plan with targeted messaging for each stakeholder group
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1: Engage stakeholders to develop a vision for the service desk

    Module 2: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    Module 3: Design target consolidated service desk Module 4: Plan for the transition

    Phase 1 Outcomes:

    • Stakeholder engagement and executive buy-in
    • Vision for the consolidation
    • Comprehensive assessment of each service desk’s performance

    Phase 2 Outcomes:

    • Defined requirements, logistics plan, and target state for the consolidated service desk
    • TCO comparison

    Phase 3 Outcomes:

    • Detailed consolidation project roadmap
    • Communications plan and FAQs

    Info-Tech delivers: Use our tools and templates to accelerate your project to completion

    • Service Desk Assessment Tool (Excel)
    • Executive Presentation (PowerPoint)
    • Service Desk Scorecard Comparison Tool (Excel)
    • Service Desk Efficiency Calculator (Excel)
    • Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap (Excel)
    • Service Desk Consolidation TCO Tool (Excel)
    • Communications and Training Plan (Word)
    • Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template (PowerPoint)

    Measured value for Guided Implementations (GIs)

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Measured Value
    Phase 1:
    • Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to engage stakeholders, develop a project vision, and assess your current state.
    • For example, 2 FTEs * 10 days * $80,000/year = $6,200
    Phase 2:
    • Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s tools and templates to design the consolidated service desk and evaluate cost and logistics.
    • For example, 2 FTEs * 5 days * $80,000/year = $3,100
    Phase 3:
    • Time, value, and resources saved by following Info-Tech’s tools and methodology to build a project roadmap and communications plan.
    • For example, 1 FTE * 5 days * $80,000/year = $1,500
    Total savings $10,800

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Pre-Workshop Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Activities

    Module 0: Gather relevant data

    0.1 Conduct CIO Business Vision Survey

    0.2 Conduct End-User Satisfaction Survey

    0.3 Measure Agent Satisfaction

    Module 1: Engage stakeholders to develop a vision for the service desk

    1.1 Identify key stakeholders and develop an engagement plan

    1.2 Brainstorm desired service desk attributes

    1.3 Conduct an executive visioning session to craft a vision for the consolidated service desk

    1.4 Define project goals, principles, and KPIs

    Module 2: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    2.1 Review the results of diagnostic programs

    2.2 Map organizational structure and roles for each service desk

    2.3 Assess overall maturity and environment of each service desk

    2.4 Assess current information system environment

    Module 3: Design target consolidated service desk

    3.1 Identify requirements for target consolidated service desk

    3.2 Build requirements document and shortlist for ITSM tool

    3.3 Use the scorecard comparison tool to assess the gap between existing service desks and target state

    3.4 Document standardized processes for new service desk

    Module 4: Plan for the transition

    4.1 Plan the logistics of the transition

    4.2 Assess the cost and savings of consolidation to refine business case

    4.3 Identify initiatives and develop a project roadmap

    4.4 Plan communications for each stakeholder group

    Deliverables
    1. CIO Business Vision Survey Diagnostic Results
    2. End-User Satisfaction Survey Diagnostic Results
    1. Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    2. Executive Presentation
    1. Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool
    1. Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
    2. Consolidated Service Desk SOP
    1. Consolidation TCO Tool
    2. Executive Presentation
    3. Consolidation Roadmap
    4. Communications Plan
    5. News Bulletin & FAQ Template

    Insight breakdown

    Phase 1 Insight

    Don’t get bogged down in the details. A detailed current state assessment is a necessary first step for a consolidation project, but determining the right level of detail to include in the evaluation can be challenging. Gather enough data to establish a baseline and make an informed decision about how to consolidate, but don’t waste time collecting and evaluating unnecessary information that will only distract and slow down the project, losing management interest and buy-in.

    How we can help

    Leverage the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool to gather the data you need to evaluate your existing service desks.

    Phase 2 Insight

    Select the target state that is right for your organization. Don’t feel pressured to move to a complete consolidation with a single point of contact if it wouldn’t be compatible with your organization’s needs and abilities, or if it wouldn’t be adopted by your end users. Design an appropriate level of standardization and centralization for the service desk and reinforce and improve processes moving forward.

    How we can help

    Leverage the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool to analyze the gap between your existing processes and your target state.

    Phase 3 Insight

    Getting people on board is key to the success of the consolidation, and a communication plan is essential to do so. Develop targeted messaging for each stakeholder group, keeping in mind that your end users are just as critical to success as your staff. Know your audience, communicate to them often and openly, and ensure that every communication has a purpose.

    How we can help

    Leverage the Communications Plan and Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template to plan your communications.

    Phase 1

    Develop a Shared Vision

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Develop shared vision

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4-8

    Step 1.1: Identify and engage key stakeholders

    Discuss with an analyst:

    • Build the project team and define their roles and responsibilities
    • Identify key stakeholders and formulate an engagement plan

    Then complete these activities…

    • Assign project roles and responsibilities
    • Identify key stakeholders
    • Formalize an engagement plan and conduct interviews

    With these tools & templates:

    Stakeholder Engagement Workbook

    Step 1.2: Develop a vision to give the project direction

    Discuss with an analyst:

    • Develop an executive visioning session plan to formulate and get buy-in for the goals and vision of the consolidation

    Then complete these activities…

    • Host an executive visioning exercise to define the scope and goals of the consolidation

    With these tools & templates:

    Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation

    Step 1.3: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    Discuss with an analyst:

    • Use diagnostics results and the service desk assessment tool to evaluate the maturity and environment of each service desk
    • Assess agent skills, satisfaction, roles and responsibilities

    Then complete these activities…

    • Analyze organizational structure
    • Assess maturity and environment of each service desk
    • Assess agent skills and satisfaction

    With these tools & templates:

    Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

    IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool

    Phase 1 Outcome:

    • A common vision for the consolidation initiative, an analysis of existing service desk architectures, and an inventory of existing best practices.

    Step 1.1: Get buy-in from key stakeholders

    Phase 1

    Develop a shared vision

    1.1 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

    1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 1.1.1 Assign roles and responsibilities
    • 1.1.2 Identify key stakeholders for the consolidation
    • 1.1.3 Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand needs in more depth, if necessary
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Project Sponsor
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    Step Outcomes:
    • A project team with clearly defined roles and responsibilities
    • A list of key stakeholders and an engagement plan to identify needs and garner support for the change

    Oxford consulted with people at all levels to ensure continuous improvement and new insights

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Higher Education

    Source: Oxford University, IT Services

    Motivation

    The merging of Oxford’s disparate IT organizations was motivated primarily to improve end-user service and efficiency.

    Similarly, ITS positioned the SDCP as an “operational change,” not to save costs, but to provide better service to their customers.

    "The University is quite unique in the current climate in that reduction in costs was not one of the key drivers behind the project. The goal was to deliver improved efficiencies and offer a single point of contact for their user base." – Peter Hubbard, ITSM Consultant Pink Elephant

    Development

    Oxford recognized early that they needed an open and collaborative environment to succeed.

    Key IT and business personnel participated in a “vision workshop” to determine long- and short-term objectives, and to decide priorities for the consolidated service desk.

    "Without key support at this stage many projects fail to deliver the expected outcomes. The workshop involved the key stakeholders of the project and was deemed a successful and positive exercise, delivering value to this stage of the project by clarifying the future desired state of the Service Desk." – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service & Project Sponsor

    Deployment

    IT Services introduced a Service Desk Consolidation Project Blog very early into the project, to keep everyone up-to-date and maintain key stakeholder buy-in.

    Constant consultation with people at all levels led to continuous improvement and new insights.

    "We also became aware that staff are facing different changes depending on the nature of their work and which toolset they use (i.e. RT, Altiris, ITSM). Everyone will have to change the way they do things at least a little – but the changes depend on where you are starting from!" – Jonathan Marks, Project Manager

    Understand and validate the consolidation before embarking on the project

    Define what consolidation would mean in the context of your organization to help validate and frame the scope of the project before proceeding.

    What is service desk consolidation?

    Service desk consolidation means combining multiple service desks into one centralized, single point of contact.

    • Physical consolidation = personnel and assets are combined into a single location
    • Virtual consolidation = service desks are combined electronically

    Consolidation must include people, process, and technology:

    1. Consolidation of some or all staff into one location
    2. Consolidation of processes into a single set of standardized processes
    3. One consolidated technology platform or ITSM tool

    Consolidation can take the form of:

    1. Merging multiple desks into one
    2. Collapsing multiple desks into one
    3. Connecting multiple desks into a virtual desk
    4. Moving all desks to one connected platform

    Service Desk 1 - Service Desk 2 - Service Desk 3

    Consolidated Service Desk

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consolidation isn’t for everyone.

    Before you embark on the project, think about unique requirements for your organization that may necessitate more than one service desk, such as location-specific language. Ask yourself if consolidation makes sense for your organization and would achieve a benefit for the organization, before proceeding.

    1.1 Organize and build the project team to launch the project

    Solidify strong support for the consolidation and get the right individuals involved from the beginning to give the project the commitment and direction it requires.

    Project Sponsor
    • Has direct accountability to the executive team and provides leadership to the project team.
    • Legitimatizes the consolidation and provides necessary resources to implement the project.
    • Is credible, enthusiastic, and understands the organization’s culture and values.
    Steering Committee
    • Oversees the effort.
    • Ensures there is proper support from the organization and provides resources where required.
    • Resolves any conflicts.
    Core Project Team
    • Full-time employees drawn from roles that are critical to the service desk, and who would have a strong understanding of the consolidation goals and requirements.
    • Ideal size: 6-10 full-time employees.
    • May include roles defined in the next section.

    Involve the right people to drive and facilitate the consolidation

    Service desk consolidations require broad support and capabilities beyond only those affected in order to deal with unforeseen risks and barriers.

    • Project manager: Has primary accountability for the success of the consolidation project.
    • Senior executive project sponsor: Needed to “open doors” and signal organization’s commitment to the consolidation.
    • Technology SMEs and architects: Responsible for determining and communicating requirements and risks of the technology being implemented or changed, especially the ITSM tool.
    • Business unit leads: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
    • Product/process owners: Responsible for identifying and communicating impact on business functions, approving changes, and helping champion change.
    • HR specialists: Most valuable when roles and organizational design are affected, i.e. the consolidation requires staff redeployment or substantial training (not just using a new system or tool but acquiring new skills and responsibilities) or termination.
    • Training specialists: If you have full-time training staff in the organization, you will eventually need them to develop training courses and material. Consulting them early will help with scoping, scheduling, and identifying the best resources and channels to deliver the training.
    • Communications specialists (internal): Valuable in crafting communications plan, required if communications function owns internal communications.

    Use a RACI table (e.g. in the following section) to clarify who is to be accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The more transformational the change, the more it will affect the organizational chart – not just after the implementation but through the transition.

    Take time early in the project to define the reporting structure for the project/transition team, as well as any teams and roles supporting the transition.

    Assign roles and responsibilities

    1.1.1 Use a RACI chart to assign overarching project responsibilities

    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • Project Manager
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • RACI chart

    RACI = Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed

    The RACI chart will provide clarity for overarching roles and responsibilities during the consolidation.

    1. Confirm and modify the columns to match the stakeholders in your organization.
    2. Confirm and modify the roles listed as rows if there are obvious gaps or opportunities to consolidate rows.
    3. Carefully analyze and document the roles as a group.
    Task Project Sponsor Project Manager Sr. Executives SMEs Business Lead Service Desk Managers HR Trainers Communications
    Meeting project objectives A R A R R
    Identifying risks and opportunities R A A C C C C I I
    Assessing current state I A I R C R
    Defining target state I A I C C R
    Planning logistics I A I R R C R
    Building the action plan I A C R R R R R R
    Planning and delivering communications I A C C C C R R A
    Planning and delivering training I A C C C C R R C
    Gathering and analyzing feedback and KPIs I A C C C C C R R

    Identify key stakeholders to gather input from the business, get buy-in for the project, and plan communications

    Identify the key stakeholders for the consolidation to identify the impact consolidation will have on them and ensure their concerns don’t get lost.

    1. Use a stakeholder analysis to identify the people that can help ensure the success of your project.
    2. Identify an Executive Sponsor
      • A senior-level project sponsor is someone who will champion the consolidation project and help sell the concept to other stakeholders. They can also ensure that necessary financial and human resources will be made available to help secure the success of the project. This leader should be someone who is credible, tactful, and accessible, and one who will not only confirm the project direction but also advocate for the project.

    Why is a stakeholder analysis essential?

    • Ignoring key stakeholders is an important cause of failed consolidations.
    • You can use the opinions of the most influential stakeholders to shape the project at an early stage.
    • Their support will secure resources for the project and improve the quality of the consolidation.
    • Communicating with key stakeholders early and often will ensure they fully understand the benefits of your project.
    • You can anticipate the reaction of key stakeholders to your project and plan steps to win their support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Be diverse and aware. When identifying key stakeholders for the project, make sure to include a rich diversity of stakeholder expertise, geography, and tactics. Also, step back and add silent members to your list. The loudest voices and heaviest campaigners are not necessarily your key stakeholders.

    Identify key stakeholders for the consolidation

    1.1.2 Identify project stakeholders, particularly project champions

    Participants
    • CIO/IT Director
    • Project Sponsor
    • Project Manager
    • IT Managers
    What You’ll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers

    Goal: Create a prioritized list of people who are affected or can affect your project so you can plan stakeholder engagement and communication.

    • Use an influence/commitment matrix to determine where your stakeholders lie.
    • High influence, high commitment individuals should be used in conjunction with your efforts to help bring others on board. Identify these individuals and engage with them immediately.
    • Beware of the high influence, low commitment individuals. They should be the first priority for engagement.
    • High commitment, low influence individuals can be used to help influence the low influence, low commitment individuals. Designate a few of these individuals as “champions” to help drive engagement on the front lines.

    Outcome: A list of key stakeholders to include on your steering committee and your project team, and to communicate with throughout the project.

    The image is a matrix, with Influence on the Y-axis and Commitment to change on the X-axis. It is a blank template.

    Overcome the value gap by gathering stakeholder concerns

    Simply identifying and engaging your stakeholders is not enough. There needs to be feedback: talk to your end users to ensure their concerns are heard and determine the impact that consolidation will have on them. Otherwise, you risk leaving value on the table.

    • Talk to the business end users who will be supported by the consolidated service desk.
    • What are their concerns about consolidation?
    • Which functions and services are most important to them? You need to make sure these won't get lost.
    • Try to determine what impact consolidation will have on them.

    According to the Project Management Institute, only 25% of individuals fully commit to change. The remaining 75% either resist or simply accept the change. Gathering stakeholder concerns is a powerful way to gain buy-in.

    The image is a graph with Business Value on the Y-Axis and Time on the X-Axis. Inside the graph, there is a line moving horizontally, separated into segments: Installation, Implementation, and Target Value. The line inclines during the first two segments, and is flat during the last. Emerging from the space between Installation and Implementation is a second line marked Actual realized value. The space between the target value line and the actual realized value line is labelled: Value gap.

    Collect relevant quantitative and qualitative data to assess key stakeholders’ perceptions of IT across the organization

    Don’t base your consolidation on a hunch. Gather reliable data to assess the current state of IT.

    Solicit direct feedback from the organization to gain critical insights into their perceptions of IT.

    • CIO Business Vision: Understanding the needs of your stakeholders is the first and most important step in building a consolidation strategy. Use the results of this survey to assess the satisfaction and importance of different IT services.
    • End-User Satisfaction: Solicit targeted department feedback on core IT service capabilities, IT communications, and business enablement. Use the results to assess the satisfaction of end users with each service broken down by department and seniority level.

    We recommend completing at least the End-User Satisfaction survey as part of your service desk consolidation assessment and planning. An analyst will help you set up the diagnostic and walk through the report with you.

    To book a diagnostic, or get a copy of our questions to inform your own survey, visit Info-Tech’s Benchmarking Tools, contact your account manager, or call toll-free 1-888-670-8889 (US) or 1-844-618-3192 (CAN).

    Data-Driven Diagnostics:

    End-User Satisfaction Survey

    CIO Business Vision

    Review the results of your diagnostics in step 1.3

    Formalize an engagement plan to cultivate support for the change from key stakeholders

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to formalize an engagement strategy

    If a more formal engagement plan is required for this project, use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Engagement Workbook to document an engagement strategy to ensure buy-in for the consolidation.

    The engagement plan is a structured and documented approach for gathering requirements by eliciting input and validating plans for change and cultivating sponsorship and support from key stakeholders early in the project lifecycle.

    The Stakeholder Engagement Workbook situates stakeholders on a grid that identifies which ones have the most interest in and influence on your project, to assist you in developing a tailored engagement strategy.

    You can also use this analysis to help develop a communications plan for each type of stakeholder in step 3.2.

    Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand needs in more depth, if necessary

    1.1.3 Interview key stakeholders to identify needs

    • If the consolidation will be a large and complex project and there is a need to understand requirements in more depth, conduct stakeholder interviews with “high-value targets” who can help generate requirements and promote communication around requirements at a later point.
    • Choose the interview method that is most appropriate based on available resources.
    Method Description Assessment and Best Practices Stakeholder Effort Business Analyst Effort
    Structured One-on-One Interview In a structured one-on-one interview, the business analyst has a fixed list of questions to ask the stakeholder and follows up where necessary. Structured interviews provide the opportunity to quickly hone in on areas of concern that were identified during process mapping or group elicitation techniques. They should be employed with purpose – to receive specific stakeholder feedback on proposed requirements or help identify systemic constraints. Generally speaking, they should be 30 minutes or less. Low

    Medium

    Unstructured One-on-One Interview In an unstructured one-on-one interview, the business analyst allows the conversation to flow freely. The BA may have broad themes to touch on, but does not run down a specific question list. Unstructured interviews are most useful for initial elicitation, when brainstorming a draft list of potential requirements is paramount. Unstructured interviews work best with senior stakeholders (sponsors or power users), since they can be time consuming if they’re applied to a large sample size. It’s important for BAs not to stifle open dialog and allow the participants to speak openly. They should be 60 minutes or less. Medium Low

    Step 1.2: Develop a vision to give the project direction

    Phase 1

    Develop a shared vision

    1.1 Get buy-in from key stakeholders

    1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

    1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 1.2.1 Brainstorm desired attributes for the consolidated service desk to start formulating a vision
    • 1.2.2 Develop a compelling vision and story of change
    • 1.2.3 Create a vision for the consolidated service desk
    • 1.2.4 Identify the purpose, goals, and guiding principles of the consolidation project
    • 1.2.5 Identify anticipated benefits and associated KPIs
    • 1.2.6 Conduct a SWOT analysis on the business
    This step involves the following participants:
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Business Executives
    Step outcomes

    A shared vision for the consolidated service desk that:

    • Defines the scope of the consolidation
    • Encompasses the goals and guiding principles of the project
    • Identifies key attributes of the consolidated service desk and anticipated benefits it will bring
    • Is documented in an executive presentation

    Hold an executive visioning session to kick off the project

    A major change such as service desk consolidation requires a compelling vision to engage staff and motivate them to comprehend and support the change.

    After identifying key stakeholders, gather them in a visioning session or workshop to establish a clear direction for the project.

    An executive visioning session can take up to two days of focused effort and activities with the purpose of defining the short and long-term view, objectives, and priorities for the new consolidated service desk.

    The session should include the following participants:

    • Key stakeholders identified in step 1.1, including:
      • IT management and CIO
      • Project sponsor
      • Business executives interested in the project

    The session should include the following tasks:

    • Identify and prioritize the desired outcome for the project
    • Detail the scope and definition of the consolidation
    • Identify and assess key problems and opportunities
    • Surface and challenge project assumptions
    • Clarify the future desired state of the service desk
    • Determine how processes, functions, and systems are to be included in a consolidation analysis
    • Establish a degree of ownership by senior management

    The activities throughout this step are designed to be included as part of the visioning session

    Choose the attributes of your desired consolidated service desk

    Understand what a model consolidated service desk should look like before envisioning your target consolidated service desk.

    A consolidated service desk should include the following aspects:

    • Handles all customer contacts – including internal and external users – across all locations and business units
    • Provides a single point of contact for end users to submit requests for help
    • Handles both incidents and service requests, as well as any additional relevant ITIL modules such as problem, change, or asset management
    • Consistent, standardized processes and workflows
    • Single ITSM tool with workflows for ticket handling, prioritization, and escalations
    • Central data repository so that staff have access to all information needed to resolve issues quickly and deliver high-quality service, including:
      • IT infrastructure information (such as assets and support contracts)
      • End-user information (including central AD, assets and products owned, and prior interactions)
      • Knowledgebase containing known resolutions and workarounds

    Consolidated Service Desk

    • Service Desk 1
    • Service Desk 2
    • Service Desk 3
    • Consolidated staff
    • Consolidated ITSM tool
    • Consolidated data repository

    Brainstorm desired attributes for the consolidated service desk to start formulating a vision

    1.2.1 Identify the type of consolidation and desired service desk attributes

    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Other interested business executives
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    Document

    Document in the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation, slide 6.

    Brainstorm the model and attributes of the target consolidated service desk. You will use this to formulate a vision and define more specific requirements later on.
    1. Identify the type of consolidation: virtual, physical, or hybrid (both)
    2. Identify the level of consolidation: partial (some service desks consolidated) or complete (all service desks consolidated)
    Consolidated Service Desk Model Level of Consolidation
    Partial Complete
    Type of Consolidation Virtual
    Physical
    Hybrid

    3. As a group, brainstorm and document a list of attributes that the consolidated service desk should have.

    Examples:

    • Single point of contact for all users
    • One ITSM tool with consistent built-in automated workflows
    • Well-developed knowledgebase
    • Self-serve portal for end users with ability to submit and track tickets
    • Service catalog

    Develop a compelling vision and story of change

    1.2.2 Use a vision table to begin crafting the consolidation vision

    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Other interested business executives
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    Document

    Document in the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation, slide 7.

    Build desire for change.

    In addition to standard high-level scope elements, consolidation projects that require organizational change also need a compelling story or vision to influence groups of stakeholders.

    Use the vision table below to begin developing a compelling vision and story of change.

    Why is there a need to consolidate service desks?
    How will consolidation benefit the organization? The stakeholders?
    How did we determine this is the right change?
    What would happen if we didn’t consolidate?
    How will we measure success?

    Develop a vision to inspire and sustain leadership and commitment

    Vision can be powerful but is difficult to craft. As a result, vision statements often end up being ineffective (but harmless) platitudes.

    A service desk consolidation project requires a compelling vision to energize staff and stakeholders toward a unified goal over a sustained period of time.

    Great visions:

    • Tell a story. They describe a journey with a beginning (who we are and how we got here) and a destination (our goals and expected success in the future).
    • Convey an intuitive sense of direction (or “spirit of change”) that helps people act appropriately without being explicitly told what to do.
    • Appeal to both emotion and reason to make people want to be part of the change.
    • Balance abstract ideas with concrete facts. Without concrete images and facts, the vision will be meaninglessly vague. Without abstract ideas and principles, the vision will lack power to unite people and inspire broad support.
    • Are concise enough to be easy to communicate and remember in any situation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tell a story. Stories pack a lot of information into few words. They are easy to write, remember, and most importantly – share. It’s worth spending a little extra time to get the details right.

    Create a vision for the consolidated service desk

    1.2.3 Tell a story to describe the consolidated service desk vision

    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    • Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 8.

    Craft a vision of the future state of the service desk.

    Tell a story.

    Stories serve to give the consolidation real-world context by describing what the future state will mean for both staff and users of the service desk. The story should sum up the core of the experience of using the consolidated service desk and reflect how the service desk will fit into the life of the user.

    Stories should include:

    • Action describing the way things happen.
    • Contextual detail that helps readers relate to the person in the story.
    • Challenging ideas that contradict common belief and may be disruptive, but help suggest new directions.
    Example:

    Imagine if…

    … users could access one single online service that allows them to submit a ticket through a self-service portal and service catalog, view the status of their ticket, and receive updates about organization-wide outages and announcements. They never have to guess who to contact for help with a particular type of issue or how to contact them as there is only one point of contact for all types of incidents and service requests.

    … all users receive consistent service delivery regardless of their location, and never try to circumvent the help desk or go straight to a particular technician for help as there is only one way to get help by submitting a ticket through a single service desk.

    … tickets from any location could be easily tracked, prioritized, and escalated using standardized definitions and workflows to ensure consistent service delivery and allow for one set of SLAs to be defined and met across the organization.

    Discuss the drivers of the consolidation to identify the goals the project must achieve

    Identifying the reasons behind the consolidation will help formulate the vision for the consolidated service desk and the goals it should achieve.

    The image is a graph, titled Deployment Drivers for Those Planning a Consolidated Service Desk. From highest to lowest, they are: Improved Service Delivery/Increased Productivity; Drive on Operational Costs; and Perceived Best Practice.

    Service Desk Institute (n = 20, 2007)

    A survey of 233 service desks considering consolidation found that of the 20 organizations that were in the planning stages of consolidation, the biggest driver was to improve service delivery and/or increase productivity.

    This is in line with the recommendation that improved service quality should be the main consolidation driver over reducing costs.

    This image is a graph titled Drivers Among Those Who Have Implemented a Consolidated Service Desk. From highest to lowest, they are: Improved Service Delivery/Increased Productivity; Best Practice; Drive on Operational Costs; Internal vs Outsourcing; and Legacy.

    Service Desk Institute (n = 43, 2007)

    The drivers were similar among the 43 organizations that had already implemented a consolidated service desk, with improved service delivery and increased productivity again the primary driver.

    Aligning with best practice was the second most cited driver.

    Identify the purpose, goals, and guiding principles of the consolidation project

    1.2.4 Document goals of the project

    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    • Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 9.

    Use the results of your stakeholder analysis and interviews to facilitate a discussion among recommended participants and document the purpose of the consolidation project, the goals the project aims to achieve, and the guiding principles that must be followed.

    Use the following example to guide your discussion:

    Purpose The purpose of consolidating service desks is to improve service delivery to end users and free up more time and resources to achieve the organization’s core mission.
    Goals
    • Align IT resources with business strategies and priorities
    • Provide uniform quality and consistent levels of service across all locations
    • Improve the end-user experience by reducing confusion about where to get help
    • Standardize service desk processes to create efficiencies
    • Identify and eliminate redundant functions or processes
    • Combine existing resources to create economies of scale
    • Improve organizational structure, realign staff with appropriate job duties, and improve career paths
    Guiding Principles

    The consolidated service desk must:

    1. Provide benefit to the organization without interfering with the core mission of the business
    2. Balance cost savings with service quality
    3. Increase service efficiency without sacrificing service quality
    4. Not interfere with service delivery or the experience of end users
    5. Be designed with input from key stakeholders

    Identify the anticipated benefits of the consolidation to weigh them against risks and plan future communications

    The primary driver for consolidation of service desks is improved service delivery and increased productivity. This should relate to the primary benefits delivered by the consolidation, most importantly, improved end-user satisfaction.

    A survey of 43 organizations that have implemented a consolidated service desk identified the key benefits delivered by the consolidation (see chart at right).

    The image is a bar graph titled Benefits Delivered by Consolidated Service Desk. The benefits, from highest to lowest are: Increased Customer Satisfaction; Optimised Resourcing; Cost Reduction; Increased Productivity/Revenue; Team Visibility/Ownership; Reporting/Accountability.

    Source: Service Desk Institute (n = 43, 2007)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cost reduction may be an important benefit delivered by the consolidation effort, but it should not be the most valuable benefit delivered. Focus communications on anticipated benefits for improved service delivery and end-user satisfaction to gain buy-in for the project.

    Identify anticipated outcomes and benefits of consolidation

    1.2.5 Use a “stop, start, continue” exercise to identify KPIs

    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    Document

    Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 10

    1. Divide the whiteboard into 3 columns: stop, start, and continue
    2. Identify components of your service desk that:
    • Are problematic and should be phased out (stop)
    • Provide value but are not in place yet (start)
    • Are effective and should be sustained, if not improved (continue)
  • For each category, identify initiatives or outcomes that will support the desired goals and anticipated benefits of consolidation.
  • Stop Start Continue
    • Escalating incidents without following proper protocol
    • Allowing shoulder taps
    • Focusing solely on FCR as a measure of success
    • Producing monthly ticket trend reports
    • Creating a self-serve portal
    • Communicating performance to the business
    • Writing knowledgebase articles
    • Improving average TTR
    • Holding weekly meetings with team members

    Use a SWOT analysis to assess the service desk

    • A SWOT analysis is a structured planning method that organizations can use to evaluate the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats involved in a project or business venture.
    • Use a SWOT analysis to identify the organization’s current IT capabilities and classify potential disruptive technologies as the first step toward preparing for them.
    Review these questions...
    Strengths (Internal) Weaknesses (Internal)
    • What Service Desk processes provide value?
    • How does the Service Desk align with corporate/IT strategy?
    • How does your Service Desk benefit end users?
    • Does the Service Desk produce reports or data that benefit the business?
    • Does your Service Desk culture offer an advantage?
    • What areas of your service desk require improvement?
    • Are there gaps in capabilities?
    • Do you have budgetary limitations?
    • Are there leadership gaps (succession, poor management, etc.)?
    • Are there reputational issues with the business?
    Opportunities (External) Threats (External)
    • Are end users adopting hardware or software that requires training and education for either themselves or the Service Desk staff?
    • Can efficiencies be gained by consolidating our Service Desks?
    • What is the most cost-effective way to solve the user's technology problems and get them back to work?
    • How can we automate Service Desk processes?
    • Are there obstacles that the Service Desk must face?
    • Are there issues with respect to sourcing of staff or technologies?
    • Could the existing Service Desk metrics be affected?
    • Will the management team need changes to their reporting?
    • Will SLAs need to be adjusted?

    …to help you conduct your SWOT analysis on the service desk.

    Strengths (Internal) Weaknesses (Internal)
    • End user satisfaction >80%
    • Comprehensive knowledgebase
    • Clearly defined tiers
    • TTR on tickets is <1 day
    • No defined critical incident workflow
    • High cost to solve issues
    • Separate toolsets create disjointed data
    • No root cause analysis
    • Ineffective demand planning
    • No clear ticket categories
    Opportunities (External) Threats (External)
    • Service catalog
    • Ticket Templates
    • Ticket trend analysis
    • Single POC through the use of one tool
    • Low stakeholder buy-in
    • Fear over potential job loss
    • Logistics of the move
    • End user alienation over process change

    Conduct a SWOT analysis on the business

    1.2.6 Conduct SWOT analysis

    Participants
    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • IT Managers and Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    Document
    • Document in the Executive Presentation, slide 11
    1. Break the group into two teams:
    • Assign team A strengths and weaknesses.
    • Assign team B opportunities and threats.
  • Have the teams brainstorm items that fit in their assigned areas.
    • Refer to the questions on the previous slide to help guide discussion
  • Choose someone from each group to fill in the grid on the whiteboard.
  • Conduct a group discussion about the items on the list.
  • Helpful to achieving the objective Harmful to achieving the objective
    Internal origin attributes of the organization Strengths Weaknesses

    External Origin attributes of the environment

    Opportunities Threats

    Frame your project in terms of people, process, technology

    A framework should be used to guide the consolidation effort and provide a standardized basis of comparison between the current and target state.

    Frame the project in terms of the change and impact it will have on:

    • People
    • Process
    • Technology

    Service desk consolidation will likely have a significant impact in all three categories by standardizing processes, implementing a single service management tool, and reallocating resources. Framing the project in this way will ensure that no aspect goes forgotten.

    For each of the three categories, you will identify:

    • Current state
    • Target state
    • Gap and actions required
    • Impact, risks, and benefits
    • Communication and training requirements
    • How to measure progress/success

    People

    • Tier 1 support
    • Tier 2 support
    • Tier 3 support
    • Vendors

    Process

    • Incident management
    • Service request management
    • SLAs

    Technology

    • ITSM tools
    • Knowledgebase
    • CMDB and other databases
    • Technology supported

    Complete the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation

    Complete an executive presentation using the decisions made throughout this step

    Use the Consolidate Service Desk Executive Presentation to deliver the outputs of your project planning to the business and gain buy-in for the project.

    1. Use the results of the activities throughout step 1.2 to produce the key takeaways for your executive presentation.
    2. At the end of the presentation, include 1-2 slides summarizing any additional information specific to your organization.
    3. Once complete, pitch the consolidation project to the project sponsor and executive stakeholders.
      • This presentation needs to cement buy-in for the project before any other progress is made.

    Step 1.3: Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    Phase 1

    Develop a shared vision

    1.1 Get buy-in from key stakeholders

    1.2 Develop a vision to give the project direction

    1.3 Conduct a full assessment of each service desk

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 1.3.1 Review the results of your diagnostic programs
    • 1.3.2 Analyze the organizational structure of each service desk
    • 1.3.3 Assess the overall maturity of each service desk
    • 1.3.4 Map out roles and responsibilities of each service desk using organizational charts
    • 1.3.5 Assess and document current information system environment
    This step involves the following participants:
    • CIO
    • IT Directors
    • Service Desk Managers
    • Service Desk Technicians
    Step outcomes
    • A robust current state assessment of each service desk, including overall maturity, processes, organizational structure, agent skills, roles and responsibilities, agent satisfaction, technology and ITSM tools.

    Oxford saved time and effort by sticking with a tested process that works

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Higher Education

    Source: Oxford University, IT Services

    Oxford ITS instigated the service desk consolidation project in the fall of 2012.

    A new ITSM solution was formally acquired in the spring 2014, and amalgamated workflows designed.

    Throughout this period, at least 3 detailed process analyses occurred in close consultation with the affected IT units.

    Responsibility for understanding each existing process (incident, services, change management, etc.) were assigned to members of the project team.

    They determined which of the existing processes were most effective, and these served as the baseline – saving time and effort in the long run by sticking with tested processes that work.

    Reach out early and often.

    Almost from day one, the Oxford consolidation team made sure to consult closely with each relevant ITS team about their processes and the tools they used to manage their workflows.

    This was done both in structured interviews during the visioning stage and informally at periodic points throughout the project.

    The result was the discovery of many underlying similarities. This information was then instrumental to determining a realistic baseline from which to design the new consolidated service desk.

    "We may give our activities different names or use different tools to manage our work but in all cases common sense has prevailed and it’s perhaps not so surprising that we have common challenges that we choose to tackle in similar ways." – Andrew Goff, Change Management at Oxford ITS

    Review the results of your diagnostic programs to inform your current state assessment

    1.3.1 Understand satisfaction with the service desk

    Participants
    • CIO/IT Director
    • IT Manager
    • Service Manager(s)
    Document
    1. Set up an analyst call through your account manager to review the results of your diagnostic.
    • Whatever survey you choose, ask the analyst to review the data and comments concerning:
      • Assessments of service desk timeliness/effectiveness
      • IT business enablement
      • IT innovation leadership
  • Book a meeting with recommended participants. Go over the results of your diagnostic survey.
  • Facilitate a discussion of the results. Focus on the first few summary slides and the overall department results slide.
    • What is the level of IT support?
    • What are stakeholders’ perceptions of IT performance?
    • How satisfied are stakeholders with IT?
    • Does the department understand and act on business needs?
    • What are the business priorities and how well are you doing in meeting these priorities?
    • How can the consolidation project assist the business in achieving goals?
    • How could the consolidation improve end-user satisfaction and business satisfaction?
  • A robust current state assessment is the foundation of a successful consolidation

    You can’t determine where you’re going without a clear idea of where you are now.

    Before you begin planning for the consolidation, make sure you have a clear picture of the magnitude of what you plan on consolidating.

    Evaluate the current state of each help desk being considered for consolidation. This should include an inventory of:

    • Process:
      • Processes and workflows
      • Metrics and SLAs
    • People:
      • Organizational structure
      • Agent workload and skills
      • Facility layout and design
    • Technology:
      • Technologies and end users supported
      • Technologies and tools used by the service desk

    Info-Tech Insight

    A detailed current state assessment is a necessary first step for a consolidation project, but determining the right level of detail to include in the evaluation can be challenging. Gather enough data to establish a baseline and make an informed decision about how to consolidate, but don’t waste time collecting unnecessary information that will only distract and slow down the project.

    Review ticket handling processes for each service desk to identify best practices

    Use documentation, reports, and metrics to evaluate existing processes followed by each service desk before working toward standardized processes.

    Poor Processes vs. Optimized Processes

    Inconsistent or poor processes affect the business through:

    • Low business satisfaction
    • Low end-user satisfaction
    • High cost to resolve
    • Delayed progress on project work
    • Lack of data for reporting due to ineffective ticket categorization, tools, and logged tickets
    • No root cause analysis leads to a reactive vs. proactive service desk
    • Lack of cross-training and knowledge sharing result in time wasted troubleshooting recurring issues
    • Lack of trend analysis limits the effectiveness of demand planning

    Standardized service desk processes increase user and technician satisfaction and lower costs to support through:

    • Improved business satisfaction Improved end-user satisfaction Incidents prioritized and escalated accurately and efficiently
    • Decreased recurring issues due to root cause analysis and trends
    • Increased self-sufficiency of end users
    • Strengthened team and consistent delivery through cross-training and knowledge sharing
    • Enhanced demand planning through trend analysis and reporting

    The image is a graphic of a pyramid, with categories as follows (from bottom): FAQ/Knowledgebase; Users; Tier 1-75-80%; Tier 2-15%; Tier 3 - 5%. On the right side of the pyramid is written Resolution, with arrows extending from each of the higher sections down to Users. On the left is written Escalation, with arrows from each lower category up to the next highest. Inside the pyramid are arrows extending from the bottom to each level and vice versa.

    Analyze the organizational structure of each service desk

    1.3.2 Discuss the structure of each service desk

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You'll Need
    • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

    1. Facilitate a discussion among recommended participants to discuss the structure of each service desk. Decide which model best describes each service desk:

    • The Gatekeeper Model: All calls are routed through a central call group whose sole responsibility is to link the customer to the right individual or group.
    • The Call Sorting Model: All calls are sorted into categories using technology and forwarded to the right 2nd level specialist group.
    • Tiered Structure (Specialist Model): All calls are sorted through a single specialist group, such as desktop support. Their job is to log the interaction, attempt resolution, and escalate when the problem is beyond their ability to resolve.
    • Tiered Structure (Generalist Model): All calls are sorted through a single generalist group, whose responsibility is to log the interaction, attempt a first resolution, and escalate when the problem is beyond their ability to resolve.

    2. Use a flip chart or whiteboard to draw the architecture of each service desk, using the example on the right as a guide.

    The image is a graphic depicting the organizational structure of a service desk, from Users to Vendor. The graphic shows how a user request can move through tiers of service, and the ways that Tiers 2 and 3 of the service desk are broken down into areas of specialization.

    Assess the current state of each service desk using the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

    Assess the current state of each service desk

    The Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool will provide insight into the overall health of each existing service desk along two vectors:

    1. Process Maturity (calculated on the basis of a comprehensive survey)
    2. Metrics (calculated on the basis of entered ticket and demographic data)

    Together these answers offer a snapshot of the health, efficiency, performance, and perceived value of each service desk under evaluation.

    This tool will assist you through the current state assessment process, which should follow these steps:

    1. Send a copy of this tool to the Service Desk Manager (or other designated party) of each service desk that may be considered as part of the consolidation effort.
      • This will collect key metrics and landscape data and assess process maturity
    2. Analyze the data and discuss as a group
    3. Ask follow-up questions
    4. Use the information to compare the health of each service desk using the scorecard tool

    These activities will be described in more detail throughout this step of the project.

    Gather relevant data to assess the environment of each service desk

    Assess each service desk’s environment using the assessment tool

    Send a copy of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool to the Service Desk Manager (or other designated party) of each service desk that will be considered as part of the consolidation.

    Instruct them to complete tab 2 of the tool, the Environment Survey:

    • Enter Profile, Demographic, Satisfaction, Technology, and Ticket data into the appropriate fields as accurately as possible. Satisfaction data should be entered as percentages.
    • Notes can be entered next to each field to indicate the source of the data, to note missing or inaccurate data, or to explain odd or otherwise confusing data.

    This assessment will provide an overview of key metrics to assess the performance of each service desk, including:

    • Service desk staffing for each tier
    • Average ticket volume and distribution per month
    • # staff in IT
    • # service desk staff
    • # supported devices (PC, laptops, mobiles, etc.)
    • # desktop images

    Assess the overall maturity of each service desk

    1.3.3 Use the assessment tool to measure the maturity of each service desk

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You'll Need
    • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool
    1. Assemble the relevant team for each service desk: process owners, functional managers, service desk manager, and relevant staff and technicians who work with the processes to be assessed. Each service desk team should meet to complete the maturity assessment together as a group.
    2. Go to tab 3 (Service Desk Maturity Survey) of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool and respond to the questions in the following categories:
    • Prerequisites (general questions)
    • People
    • Process
    • Technology
    • SLAs
  • Rate each element. Be honest. The goal is to end up with as close a representation as possible to what really exists. Only then can you identify realistic improvement opportunities. Use the maturity definitions as guides.
  • Evaluate resource utilization and satisfaction to allocate resources effectively

    Include people as part of your current state assessment to evaluate whether your resources are appropriately allocated to maximize effectiveness and agent satisfaction.

    Skills Inventory

    Use the IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool to assess agent skills and identify gaps or overlaps.

    Agent Satisfaction

    Measure employee satisfaction and engagement to identify strong teams.

    Roles and Responsibilities

    Gather a clear picture of each service desk’s organizational hierarchy, roles, and responsibilities.

    Agent Utilization

    Obtain a snapshot of service desk productivity by calculating the average amount of time an agent is handling calls, divided by the average amount of time an agent is at work.

    Conduct a skills inventory for each service desk

    Evaluate agent skills across service desks

    After evaluating processes, evaluate the skill sets of the agents tasked with following these processes to identify gaps or overlap.

    Send the Skills Coverage Tool tab to each Service Desk Manager, who will either send it to the individuals who make up their service desk with instructions to rate themselves, or complete the assessment together with individuals as part of one-on-one meetings for discussing development plans.

    IT Skills Inventory and Gap Assessment Tool will enable you to:

    • List skills required to support the organization.
    • Document and rate the skills of the existing IT staffing contingent.
    • Assess the gaps to help determine hiring or training needs, or even where to pare back.
    • Build a strategy for knowledge sharing, transfer, and training through the consolidation project.

    Map out roles and responsibilities of each service desk using organizational charts

    1.3.4 Obtain or draw organizational charts for each location

    Clearly document service desk roles and responsibilities to rationalize service desk architecture.
    Participants
    • CIO, IT Director
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Tier/Specialist Manager(s)
    What You’ll Need
    • Org. charts
    • Flip chart or whiteboard and markers
    1. Obtain or draw (on a whiteboard or flip chart) the organizational chart for each service desk to get a clear picture of the roles that fulfill each service desk. If there is any uncertainty or disagreement, discuss as a group to come to a resolution.
    2. Discuss the roles and reporting relationships within the service desk and across the organization to establish if/where inefficiencies exist and how these might be addressed through consolidation.
    3. If an up-to-date organizational chart is not in place, use this time to define the organizational structure as-is and consider future state.
    IT Director
    Service Desk Manager
    Tier 1 Help Desk Lead Tier 2 Help Desk Lead Tier 2 Apps Support Lead Tier 3 Specialist Support Lead
    Tier 1 Specialist Name Title Name Title Name Title
    Tier 1 Specialist Name Title Name Title Name Title
    Name Title Name Title Name Title
    Name Title Name Title

    Conduct an agent satisfaction survey to compare employee engagement across locations

    Evaluate agent satisfaction

    End-user satisfaction isn’t the only important satisfaction metric.

    Agent satisfaction forms a key metric within the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool, and it can be evaluated in a variety of ways. Choose the approach that best suits your organization and time restraints for the project.

    Determine agent satisfaction on the basis of a robust (and anonymous) survey of service desk agents. Like the end-user satisfaction score, this measure is ideally computed as a percentage.

    There are several ways to measure agent satisfaction:

    1. If your organization runs an employee engagement survey, use the most recent survey results, separating them by location and converting them to a percentage.
    2. If your organization does not currently measure employee engagement or satisfaction, consider one of Info-Tech and McLean & Company’s two engagement diagnostics:
      • Full Engagement Diagnostic – 81 questions that provide a comprehensive view into your organization's engagement levels
      • McLean & Company’s Pulse Survey – 15 questions designed to give a high-level view of employee engagement
    3. For smaller organizations, a survey may not be feasible or make sense. In this case, consider gathering informal engagement data through one-on-one meetings.
    4. Be sure to discuss and document any reasons for dissatisfaction, including pain points with the current tools or processes.
    Document
    • Document on tab 2 of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool

    Assess the service management tools supporting your service desks

    Identify the different tools being used to support each service desk in order to assess whether and how they can be consolidated into one service management tool.

    Ideally, your service desks are already on the same ITSM platform, but if not, a comprehensive assessment of current tools is the first step toward a single, consolidated solution.

    Include the following in your tools assessment:

    • All automated ITSM solutions being used to log and track incidents and service requests
    • Any manual or other methods of tracking tickets (e.g. Excel spreadsheets)
    • Configurations and any customizations that have been made to the tools
    • How configuration items are maintained and how mature the configuration management databases (CMDB) are
    • Pricing and licensing agreements for tools
    • Any unique functions or limitations of the tools

    Info-Tech Insight

    Document not only the service management tools that are used but also any of their unique and necessary functions and configurations that users may have come to rely upon, such as remote support, self-serve, or chat support, in order to inform requirements in the next phase.

    Assess the IT environment your service desks support

    Even if you don’t do any formal asset management, take this opportunity for discovery and inventory to gain a complete understanding of your IT environment and the range of devices your service desks support.

    Inventory your IT environment, including:

    User Devices

    • Device counts by category Equipment/resources by user

    Servers

    • Server hardware, CPU, memory
    • Applications residing on servers

    Data centers

    • Including location and setup

    In addition to identifying the range of devices you currently support, assess:

    • Any future devices, hardware, or software that the service desk will need to support (e.g. BYOD, mobile)
    • How well each service desk is currently able to support these devices
    • Any unique or location-specific technology or devices that could limit a consolidation

    Info-Tech Insight

    The capabilities and configuration of your existing infrastructure and applications could limit your consolidation plans. A comprehensive technology assessment of not only the service desk tools but also the range of devices and applications your service desks supports will help you to prepare for any potential limitations or obstacles a consolidated service desk may present.

    Assess and document current information system environment

    1.3.5 Identify specific technology and tool requirements

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You'll Need
    • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool, tab 2.
    Document

    Document information on number of devices supported and number of desktop images associated with each service desk in the section on “Technology Data” of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool.

    1. Identify and document the service management tools that are used by each service desk.
    2. For each tool, identify and document any of the following that apply:
    • Integrations
    • Configurations that were made during implementation
    • Customizations that were made during implementation
    • Version, licenses, cost
  • For each service desk, document any location-specific or unique technology requirements or differences that could impact consolidation, including:
    • Devices and technology supported
    • Databases and configuration items
    • Differing applications or hardware needs
  • If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.1 Assign roles and responsibilities

    Use a RACI chart to assign overarching responsibilities for the consolidation project.

    1.3.2 Analyze the organizational structure of each service desk

    Map out the organizational structure and flow of each service desk and discuss the model that best describes each.

    Phase 2

    Design the Consolidated Service Desk

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Design consolidated service desk

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2-4

    Step 2.1: Model target consolidated service desk

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Define the target state of the consolidated service desk in detail
    • Identify requirements for the consolidation, broken down by people, process, technology and by short- vs. long-term needs

    Then complete these activities…

    • Set project metrics to measure success of the consolidation
    • Brainstorm people, process, technology requirements for the service desk
    • Build requirements documents and RFP for a new tool
    • Review results of the scorecard comparison tool

    With these tools & templates:

    Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool

    Step 2.2: Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Plan the logistics of the consolidation for process, technology, and facilities
    • Evaluate the cost and cost savings of consolidation using a TCO tool

    Then complete these activities…

    • Plan logistics for process, technology, facilities, and resource allocation
    • Review the results of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator to refine the business case for the consolidation project

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Desk Efficiency Calculator

    Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

    Phase 2 Results:

    • Detailed requirements and vision for the consolidated service desk, gap analysis of current vs. target state, and an initial analysis of the logistical considerations to achieve target.

    Step 2.1: Model target consolidated state

    Phase 2

    Design consolidation

    2.1 Design target consolidated service desk

    2.2 Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 2.1.1 Determine metrics to measure the value of the project
    • 2.1.2 Set targets for each metric to measure progress and success of the consolidation
    • 2.1.3 Brainstorm process requirements for consolidated service desk
    • 2.1.4 Brainstorm people requirements for consolidated service desk
    • 2.1.5 Brainstorm technology requirements for consolidated service desk
    • 2.1.6 Build a requirements document for the service desk tool
    • 2.1.7 Evaluate alternative tools, build a shortlist for RFPs, and arrange web demonstrations or evaluation copies
    • 2.1.8 Set targets for key metrics to identify high performing service desks
    • 2.1.9 Review the results of the scorecard to identify best practices
    This step involves the following participants:
    • CIO
    • IT Director
    • Service Desk Managers
    • Service Desk Technicians
    Step Outcomes
    • A list of people, process, and technology requirements for the new consolidated service desk
    • A clear vision of the target state
    • An analysis of the gaps between existing and target service desks

    Ensure the right people and methods are in place to anticipate implementation hurdles

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Higher Education

    Source: Oxford University, IT Services

    "Since our last update, a review and re-planning exercise has reassessed the project approach, milestones, and time scales. This has highlighted some significant hurdles to transition which needed to be addressed, resulting primarily from the size of the project and the importance to the department of a smooth and well-planned transition to the new processes and toolset." – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service & Project Sponsor

    Initial hurdles led to a partial reorganization of the project in Fall 2014

    Despite careful planning and its ultimate success, Oxford’s consolidation effort still encountered some significant hurdles along the way – deadlines were sometimes missed and important processes overlooked.

    These bumps can be mitigated by building flexibility into your plan:

    • Adopt an Agile methodology – review and revise groups of tasks as the project progresses, rather than waiting until near the end of the project to get approval for the complete implementation.
    • Your Tiger Team or Project Steering Group must include the right people – the project team should not just include senior or high-level management; members of each affected IT group should be consulted, and junior-level employees can provide valuable insight into existing and potential processes and workflows.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure that the project lead is someone conversant in ITSM, so that they are equipped to understand and react to the unique challenges and expectations of a consolidation and can easily communicate with process owners.

    Use the consolidation vision to define the target service desk in more detail

    Use your baseline assessment and your consolidation vision as a guide to figure out exactly where you’re going before planning how to get there.

    With approval for the project established and a clear idea of the current state of each service desk, narrow down the vision for the consolidated service desk into a specific picture of the target state.

    The target state should provide answers to the following types of questions:

    Process:

    • Will there be one set of SLAs across the organization?
    • What are the target SLAs?
    • How will ticket categories be defined?
    • How will users submit and track their tickets?
    • How will tickets be prioritized and escalated?
    • Will a knowledgebase be maintained and accessible by both service desk and end users?

    People:

    • How will staff be reorganized?
    • What will the roles and responsibilities look like?
    • How will tiers be structured?
    • What will the career path look like within the service desk?

    Technology:

    • Will there be one single ITSM tool to support the service desk?
    • Will an existing tool be used or will a new tool be selected?
    • If a new tool is needed, what are the requirements?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Select the target state that is right for your organization. Don’t feel pressured to select the highest target state or a complete consolidation. Instead select the target state that is most compatible with your organization’s current needs and capabilities.

    Determine metrics to measure the value of the project

    2.1.1 Identify KPIs to measure the success of the consolidation

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You’ll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers

    Identify three primary categories where the consolidation project is expected to yield benefits to the business. Use the example on the right to guide your discussion.

    Efficiency and effectiveness are standard benefits for this project, but the third category may depend on your organization.

    • Examples include: improved resourcing, security, asset management, strategic alignment, end-user experience, employee experience

    Identify 1-3 key performance indicators (KPIs) associated with each benefit category, which will be used to measure the success of the consolidation project. Ensure that each has a baseline measure that can be reassessed after the consolidation.

    Efficiency

    Streamlined processes to reduce duplication of efforts

    • Reduced IT spend and cost of delivery
    • One ITSM tool Improved reliability of service
    • Improved response time

    Resourcing

    Improved allocation of human and financial resources

    • Improved resource sharing
    • Improved organizational structure of service desk

    Effectiveness

    Service delivery will be more accessible and standardized

    • Improved responsive-ness to incidents and service requests
    • Improved resolution time
    • Single point of contact for end users
    • Improved reporting

    Set targets for each metric to measure progress and success of the consolidation

    2.1.2 Identify specific metrics for each KPI and targets for each

    Participants
    • IT Director
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You’ll Need
    • KPIs from previous step
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    1. Select one core KPI for each critical success factor, which will be used to measure progress and success of the consolidation effort down the road.
    2. For each KPI, document the average baseline metric the organization is achieving (averaged across all service desks).
    3. Discuss and document a target metric that the project will aim to reach through the single consolidated service desk.
    4. Set a short and long-term target for each metric to encourage continuous improvement. Examples:
    Efficiency
    Business Value KPI Current Metric Short-Term (6 month) Target Long-Term (1 year) Target
    Streamlined processes to reduce duplication of efforts Improved response time 2 hours 1 hour 30 minutes
    Effectiveness
    Business Value KPI Current Metric Short-Term (6 month) Target Long-Term (1 year) Target
    Service delivery will be more accessible and standardized Improved first call resolution (% resolved at Tier 1) 50% 60% 70%

    If poor processes were in place, take the opportunity to start fresh with the consolidation

    If each service desk’s existing processes were subpar, it may be easier to build a new service desk from the basics rather than trying to adapt existing processes.

    You should have these service management essentials in place:

    Service Requests:

    • Standardize process to verify, approve, and fulfill service requests.
    • Assign priority according to business criticality and service agreements.
    • Think about ways to manage service requests to better serve the business long term.

    Incident Management:

    • Set standards to define and record incidents.
    • Define incident response actions and communications.

    Knowledgebase:

    • Define standards for knowledgebase.
    • Introduce creation of knowledgebase articles.
    • Create a knowledge-sharing and cross-training culture.

    Reporting:

    • Select appropriate metrics.
    • Generate relevant insights that shed light on the value that IT creates for the organization.

    The image is a circle comprised of 3 concentric circles. At the centre is a circle labelled Standardized Service Desk. The ring outside of it is split into 4 sections: Incident Management; Service Requests; Structure and Reporting; and Knowledgebase. The outer circle is split into 3 sections: People, Process, Technologies.

    Evaluate how your processes compare with the best practices defined here. If you need further guidance on how to standardize these processes after planning the consolidation, follow Info-Tech’s blueprint, Standardize the Service Desk.

    Even optimized processes will need to be redefined for the target consolidated state

    Your target state doesn’t have to be perfect. Model a short-term, achievable target state that can demonstrate immediate value.

    Consider the following elements when designing service desk processes:
    • Ticket input (i.e. how can tickets be submitted?)
    • Ticket classification (i.e. how will tickets be categorized?)
    • Ticket prioritization (i.e. how will critical incidents be defined?)
    • Ticket escalation (i.e. how and at what point will tickets be assigned to a more specialized resource?)
    • Ticket resolution (i.e. how will resolution be defined and how will users be notified?)
    • Communication with end users (i.e. how and how often will users be notified about the status of their ticket or of other incidents and outages?)

    Consider the following unique process considerations for consolidation:

    • How will knowledge sharing be enabled in order for all technicians to quickly access known errors and resolve problems?
    • How can first contact resolution levels be maintained through the transition?
    • How will procedures be clearly documented so that tickets are escalated properly?
    • Will ticket classification and prioritization schemes need to change?
    • Will new services such as self-serve be introduced to end users and how will this be communicated?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t do it all at once. Consolidation will lead to some level of standardization. It will be reinforced and improved later through ongoing reengineering and process improvement efforts (continual improvement management).

    Brainstorm process requirements for consolidated service desk

    2.1.3 Identify process-related requirements for short and long term

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard, sticky notes, markers
    • Vision and goals for the consolidation from step 1.2
    Document
    • Document internally, or leave on a whiteboard for workshop participants to return to when documenting tasks in the roadmap tool.
    1. Review the questions in the previous section to frame a discussion on process considerations and best practices for the target consolidated service desk.
    2. Use your responses to the questions to brainstorm a list of process requirements or desired characteristics for the target state, particularly around incident management and service request management.
    3. Write each requirement onto a sticky note and categorize it as one of the following:
      1. Immediate requirement for consolidated service desk
      2. Implement within 6 months
      3. Implement within 1 year

    Example:

    Whiteboard:

    • Immediate
      • Clearly defined ticket prioritization scheme
      • Critical incident process workflow
    • 6 months
      • Clearly defined SOP, policies, and procedures
      • Transactional end-user satisfaction surveys
    • 1 year
      • Change mgmt.
      • Problem mgmt.

    Define the target resource distribution and utilization for the consolidated service desk

    Consolidation can sound scary to staff wondering if there will be layoffs. Reduce that by repurposing local staff and maximizing resource utilization in your organizational design.

    Consider the following people-related elements when designing your target state:

    • How will roles and responsibilities be defined for service desk staff?
    • How many agents will be required to deal with ticket demand?
    • What is the target agent utilization rate?
    • How will staff be distributed among tiers?
    • What will responsibilities be at each tier?
    • Will performance goals and rewards be established or standardized?

    Consider the following unique people considerations for consolidation:

    • Will staffing levels change?
    • Will job titles or roles change for certain individuals?
    • How will staff be reorganized?
    • Will staff need to be relocated to one location?
    • Will reporting relationships change?
    • How will this be managed?
    • How will performance measurements be consolidated across teams and departments to focus on the business goals?
    • Will there be a change to career paths?
    • What will consolidation do to morale, job interest, job opportunities?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify SMEs and individuals who are knowledgeable about a particular location, end-user base, technology, or service offering. They may be able to take on a different, greater role due to the reorganization that would make better use of their skills and capabilities and improve morale.

    Brainstorm people requirements for consolidated service desk

    2.1.4 Identify people-related requirements for short and long term

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard, sticky notes, markers
    • Vision and goals for the consolidation from step 1.2
    Document

    Document internally, or leave on a whiteboard for workshop participants to return to when documenting tasks in the roadmap tool.

    1. Review the questions in the previous section to frame a discussion on people considerations and best practices for the target consolidated service desk.
    2. Use your responses to the questions to brainstorm a list of requirements for the allocation and distribution of resources, including roles, responsibilities, and organizational structure.
    3. When thinking about people, consider requirements for both your staff and your end users.
    4. Write each requirement onto a sticky note and categorize it as one of the following:
      1. Immediate requirement for consolidated service desk
      2. Implement within 6 months
      3. Implement within 1 year

    Example:

    Whiteboard:

    • Immediate
      • Three tier structure with SMEs at Tier 2 and 3
      • All staff working together in one visible location
    • 6 months
      • Roles and responsibilities well defined and documented
      • Appropriate training and certifications available to staff
    • 1 year
      • Agent satisfaction above 80%
      • End-user satisfaction above 75%

    Identify the tools that will support the service desk and those the service desk will support

    One of the biggest technology-related decisions you need to make is whether you need a new ITSM tool. Consider how it will be used by a single service desk to support the entire organization.

    Consider the following technology elements when designing your target state:
    • What tool will be used to support the service desk?
    • What processes or ITIL modules can the tool support?
    • How will reports be produced? What types of reports will be needed for particular audiences?
    • Will a self-service tool be in place for end users to allow for password resets or searches for solutions?
    • Will the tool integrate with tools for change, configuration, problem, and asset management?
    • Will the majority of manual processes be automated?
    Consider the following unique technology considerations for consolidation:
    • Is an existing service management tool extensible?
    • If so, can it integrate with essential non-IT systems?
    • Can the tool support a wider user base?
    • Can the tool support all areas, departments, and technologies it will need to after consolidation?
    • How will data from existing tools be migrated to the new tool?
    • What implementation or configuration needs and costs must be considered?
    • What training will be required for the tool?
    • What other new tools and technologies will be required to support the consolidated service desk?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Talk to staff at each service desk to ask about their tool needs and requirements to support their work. Invite them to demonstrate how they use their tools to learn about customization, configuration, and functionality in place and to help inform requirements. Engaging staff in the process will ensure that the new consolidated tool will be supported and adopted by staff.

    Brainstorm technology requirements for consolidated service desk

    2.1.5 Identify technology-related requirements for short and long term

    Participants
    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You’ll Need
    • Whiteboard, sticky notes, markers
    • Vision and goals for the consolidation from step 1.2
    Document

    Document internally, or leave on a whiteboard for workshop participants to return to when documenting tasks in the roadmap tool.

    1. Review the questions in the previous section to frame a discussion on technology considerations and best practices for the target consolidated service desk.
    2. Use your responses to the questions to brainstorm a list of requirements for the tools to support the consolidated service desk, along with any other technology requirements for the target state.
    3. Write each requirement onto a sticky note and categorize it as one of the following:
      1. Immediate requirement for consolidated service desk
      2. Implement within 6 months
      3. Implement within 1 year

    Example:

    Whiteboard:

    • Immediate
      • Single ITSM tool
      • Remote desktop support
    • 6 months
      • Self-service portal
      • Regular reports are produced accurately
    • 1 year
      • Mobile portal
      • Chat integration

    Identify specific requirements for a tool if you will be selecting a new ITSM solution

    Service desk software needs to address both business and technological needs. Assess these needs to identify core capabilities required from the solution.

    Features Description
    Modules
    • Do workflows integrate seamlessly between functions such as incident management, change management, asset management, desktop and network management?

    Self-Serve

    • Does the existing tool support self-serve in the form of web forms for incident reporting, forms for service requests, as well as FAQs for self-solve?
    • Is a service catalog available or can one be integrated painlessly?
    Enterprise Service Management Needs
    • Integration of solution to all of IT, Human Resources, Finance, and Facilities for workflows and financial data can yield great benefits but comes at a higher cost and greater complexity. Weigh the costs and benefits.
    Workflow Automation
    • If IT has advanced beyond simple workflows, or if extending these workflows beyond the department, more power may be necessary.
    • Full business process management (BPM) is part of a number of more advanced service desk/service management solutions.
    License Maintenance Costs
    • Are license and maintenance costs still reasonable and appropriate for the value of the tool?
    • Will the vendor renegotiate?
    • Are there better tools out there for the same or better price?
    Configuration Costs
    • Templates, forms, workflows, and reports all take time and skills but bring big benefits. Can these changes be done in-house? How much does it cost to maintain and improve?
    Speed / Performance
    • Data growth and volume may have reached levels beyond the current solution’s ability to cope, despite database tuning.
    Vendor Support
    • Is the vendor still supporting the solution and developing the roadmap? Has it been acquired? Is the level of support still meeting your needs?

    Build a requirements document for the service desk tool

    2.1.6 Create a requirements list and demo script for an ITSM tool (optional)

    Participants
    • CIO/IT Director
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Technicians
    What You'll Need
    • Flip charts and markers
    • Templates:
      • IT Service Management Demo Script Template
      • Service Desk Software and RFP Evaluation Tool

    Create a requirements list for the service desk tool.

    1. Break the group into smaller functional groups.
    2. Brainstorm features that would be important to improving efficiencies, services to users, and visibility to data.
    3. Document on flip chart paper, labelling each page with the functional group name.
    4. Prioritize into must-have and nice-to-have items.
    5. Reconvene and discuss each list with the group.
    6. Info-Tech’s Service Desk Software and RFP Evaluation Tool can also be used to document requirements for an RFI.

    Create a demo script:

    Using information from the requirements list, determine which features will be important for the team to see during a demo. Focus on areas where usability is a concern, for example:

    • End-user experience
    • Workflow creation and modification
    • Creating templates
    • Creating service catalog items
    • Knowledgebase

    Evaluate alternative tools, build a shortlist for RFPs, and arrange web demonstrations or evaluation copies

    2.1.7 Identify an alternative tool and build an RFP (optional)

    Participants
    • CIO (optional)
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Technician(s)
    • Service Desk Tool Administrator
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    • Service Desk RFP Template

    Evaluate current tool:

    • Investigate to determine if these features are present and just not in use.
    • Contact the vendor if necessary.
    • If enough features are present, determine if additional training is required.
    • If tool is proven to be inadequate, investigate options.

    Consider alternatives:

    Use Info-Tech’s blueprints for further guidance on selecting and implementing an ITSM tool

    1. Select a tool

    Info-Tech regularly evaluates ITSM solution providers and ranks each in terms of functionality and affordability. The results are published in the Enterprise and Mid-Market Service Desk Software Vendor Landscapes.

    2. Implement the tool

    After selecting a solution, follow the Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan project to develop an implementation plan to ensure the tool is appropriately designed, installed, and tested and that technicians are sufficiently trained to ensure successful deployment and adoption of the tool.

    Compare your existing service desks with the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool

    Complete the scorecard tool along with the activities of the next step

    The Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool will allow you to compare metrics and maturity results across your service desks to identify weak and poor performers and processes.

    The purpose of this tool is to organize the data from up to six service desks that are part of a service desk consolidation initiative. Displaying this data in an organized fashion, while offering a robust comparative analysis, should facilitate the process of establishing a new baseline for the consolidated service desk.

    Use the results on tab 4 of the Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool. Enter the data from each service desk into tab “2. InfoCards” of the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool.

    Data from up to six service desks (up to six copies of the assessment tool) can be entered into this tool for comparison.

    Set targets for key metrics to identify high performing service desks

    2.1.8 Use the scorecard tool to set target metrics against which to compare service desks

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You’ll Need
    • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
    1. Review the explanations of the six core metrics identified from the service desk assessment tool. These are detailed on tab 3 of the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool.
      1. End-user satisfaction
      2. Agent satisfaction
      3. Cost per ticket
      4. Agent utilization rate
      5. First contact resolution rate
      6. First tier resolution rate
    2. For each metric (except agent utilization), define a “worst” and “best” target number. These numbers should be realistic and determined only after some consideration.
    • Service desks scoring at or above the “best” threshold for a particular metric will receive 100% on that metric; while service desks scoring at or below the “worst” threshold for a particular metric will receive 0% on that metric.
    • For agent utilization, only a “best” target number is entered. Service desks hitting this target number exactly will receive 100%, with scores decreasing as a service desk’s agent utilization gets further away from this target.
  • Identify the importance of each metric and vary the values in the “weighting” column accordingly.
  • The values entered on this tab will be used in calculating the overall metric score for each service desk, allowing you to compare the performance of existing service desks against each other and against your target state.

    Review the results of the scorecard to identify best practices

    2.1.9 Discuss the results of the scorecard tool

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director (optional)
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
    1. Facilitate a discussion on the results of the scorecard tool on tabs 4 (Overall Results), 5 (Maturity Results), and 6 (Metrics Results).
    2. Identify the top performing service desks(s) (SD Champions) as identified by the average of their metric and maturity scores.
    3. Identify the top performing service desk by maturity level (tab 5; Level 3 – Integrated or Optimized), paying particular attention to high scorers on process maturity and maturity in incident & service request management.
    4. Identify the top performing service desk by metric score (tab 6), paying particular attention to the metrics that tie into your KPIs.
    5. For those service desks, review their processes and identify what they are doing well to glean best practices.
      1. Incorporate best practices from existing high performing service desks into your target state.
      2. If one service desk is already performing well in all areas, you may choose to model your consolidated service desk after it.

    Document processes and procedures in an SOP

    Define the standard operating procedures for the consolidated service desk

    Develop one set of standard operating procedures to ensure consistent service delivery across locations.

    One set of standard operating procedures for the new service desk is essential for a successful consolidation.

    Info-Tech’s Consolidated Service Desk SOP Template provides a detailed example of documenting procedures for service delivery, roles and responsibilities, escalation and prioritization rules, workflows for incidents and service requests, and resolution targets to help ensure consistent service expectations across locations.

    Use this template as a guide to develop or refine your SOP and define the processes for the consolidated service desk.

    Step 2.2: Assess logistics and cost of consolidation

    Phase 2

    Design consolidation

    2.1 Design target consolidated state

    2.2 Assess logistics and cost

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 2.2.1 Plan logistics for process, technology, and facilities
    • 2.2.2 Plan logistics around resource allocation
    • 2.2.3 Review the results of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator to refine the business case for the consolidation project
    This step involves the following participants:
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    Step outcomes
    • An understanding and list of tasks to accomplish to ensure all logistical considerations for the consolidation are accounted for
    • An analysis of the impact on staffing and service levels using the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator
    • An assessment of the cost of consolidation and the cost savings of a consolidated service desk using a TCO tool

    The United States Coast Guard’s consolidation saved $20 million in infrastructure and support costs

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: US Coast Guard

    Source: CIO Rear Adm. Robert E. Day, Jr. (retired)

    Challenges

    The US Coast Guard was providing internal IT support for 42,000 members on active duty from 11 distinct regional IT service centers around the US.

    Pain Points

    1. Maintaining 11 disparate IT architectures was costly and time consuming.
    2. Staffing inefficiencies limited the USCG’s global IT service operations to providing IT support from 8am to 4pm.
    3. Individual sites were unable to offload peak volume during heavier call loads to other facilities.
    4. Enforcing adherence to standard delivery processes, procedures, and methods was nearly impossible.
    5. Personnel didn’t have a single point of contact for IT support.
    6. Leadership has limited access to consolidated analytics.

    Outcomes

    • Significant reduction in infrastructure, maintenance, and support costs.
    • Reduced risk through comprehensive disaster recovery.
    • Streamlined processes and procedures improved speed of incident resolution.
    • Increased staffing efficiencies.
    • Deeper analytical insight into service desk performance.

    Admiral Day was the CIO from 2009 to 2014. In 2011, he lead an initiative to consolidate USCG service desks.

    Selecting a new location communicated the national mandate of the consolidated service desk

    Site Selection - Decision Procedures

    • Determine location criteria, including:
      • Access to airports, trains, and highways
      • Workforce availability and education
      • Cost of land, real estate, taxes
      • Building availability Financial incentives
    • Review space requirements (i.e. amount and type of space).
    • Identify potential locations and analyze with defined criteria.
    • Develop cost models for various alternatives.
    • Narrow selection to 2-3 sites. Analyze for fit and costs.
    • Conduct site visits to evaluate each option.
    • Make a choice and arrange for securing the site.
    • Remember to compare the cost to retrofit existing space with the cost of creating a space for the consolidated service desk.

    Key Decision

    Relocating to a new location involved potentially higher implementation costs, which was a significant disadvantage.

    Ultimately, the relocation reinforced the national mandate of the consolidated service desk. The new organization would act as a single point of contact for the support of all 42,000 members of the US Coast Guard.

    "Before our regional desks tended to take on different flavors and processes. Today, users get the same experience whether they’re in Alaska or Maryland by calling one number: (855) CG-FIX IT." – Rear Adm. Robert E. Day, Jr. (retired)

    Plan the logistics of the consolidation to inform the project roadmap and cost assessment

    Before proceeding, validate that the target state is achievable by evaluating the logistics of the consolidation itself.

    A detailed project roadmap will help break down the project into manageable tasks to reach the target state, but there is no value to this if the target state is not achievable or realistic.

    Don’t forget to assess the logistics of the consolidation that can be overlooked during the planning phase:

    • Service desk size
    • Location of the service desk
    • Proximity to company management and facilities
    • Unique applications, platforms, or configurations in each location/region
    • Distribution of end-user population and varying end-user needs
    • Load balancing
    • Call routing across locations
    • Special ergonomic or accessibility requirements by location
    • Language requirements

    Info-Tech Insight

    Language barriers can form significant hurdles or even roadblocks for the consolidation project. Don’t overlook the importance of unique language requirements and ensure the consolidated service desk will be able to support end-user needs.

    Plan logistics for process, technology, and facilities

    2.2.1 Assess logistical and cost considerations around processes, technology, and facilities

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    • Consolidate roadmap
    Document

    Identify tasks that should form part of the roadmap and document in the roadmap tool.

    Identify costs that should be included in the TCO assessment and document in the TCO tool.

    Discuss and identify any logistic and cost considerations that will need to form part of the consolidation plan and roadmap. Examples are highlighted below.

    Logistic considerations

    • Impact of ticket intake process changes on end users
    • Process change impact on SLAs and productivity standards
    • Call routing changes and improvements
    • Workstations and workspace – is there enough and what will it look like for each agent?
    • Physical access to the service desk – will walk-ups be permitted? Is it accessible?
    • Security or authorization requirements for specific agents that may be impacted by relocation
    • Layout and design of new location, if applicable
    • Hardware, platform, network, and server implications
    • Licensing and contract limitations of the service desk tool

    Cost considerations

    • Cost savings from ITSM tool consolidation
    • Cost of new ITSM tool purchase, if applicable
    • Efficiencies gained from process simplification
    • New hardware or software purchases
    • Cost per square foot of new physical location, if applicable

    Develop a staffing plan that leverages the strengths you currently have and supplement where your needs require

    Your staff are your greatest assets; be sensitive to their concerns as you plan the consolidation.

    Keep in mind that if your target state involves reorganization of resources and the creation of resources, there will be additional staffing tasks that should form part of the consolidation plan. These include:

    • Develop job descriptions and reporting relationships
    • Evaluate current competencies Identify training and hiring needs
    • Develop migration strategy (including severance and migration packages)

    If new positions will be created, follow these steps to mitigate risks:

    1. Conduct skills assessments (a skills inventory should have been completed in phase 1)
    2. Re-interview existing staff for open positions before considering hiring outside staff
    3. Hire staff from outside if necessary

    For more guidance on hiring help desk staff, see Info-Tech’s blueprint, Manage Help Desk Staffing.

    Be sensitive to employee concerns.

    Develop guiding principles for the consolidation to ensure that employee satisfaction remains a priority throughout the consolidation.

    Examples include:

    1. Reconcile existing silos and avoid creating new silos
    2. Keep current systems where it makes sense to avoid staff having to learn multiple new systems to do their jobs and to reduce costs
    3. Repurpose staff and allocate according to their knowledge and expertise as much as possible
    4. Remain open and transparent about all changes and communicate change regularly

    Info-Tech Insight

    The most talented employees can be lost in the migration to a consolidated service desk, resulting in organizational loss of core knowledge. Mitigate this risk using measurement strategies, competency modeling, and knowledge sharing to reduce ambiguity and discomfort of affected employees.

    Plan logistics around resource allocation

    2.2.2 Assess logistical and cost considerations around people

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You’ll Need
    • Whiteboard or flip chart and markers
    • Consolidate roadmap
    Document

    Identify tasks that should form part of the roadmap and document in the roadmap tool.

    Identify costs that should be included in the TCO assessment and document in the TCO tool.

    Discuss and identify any logistic and cost considerations surrounding resources and staffing that will need to form part of the consolidation plan and roadmap. Examples are highlighted below.

    Logistic considerations

    • Specialized training requirements for staff moving to new roles
    • Enablement of knowledge sharing across agents
    • Potential attrition of staff who do not wish to relocate or be reallocated
    • Relocation of staff – will staff have to move and will there be incentives for moving?
    • Skills requirements, recruitment needs, job descriptions, and postings for hiring

    Cost considerations

    • Existing and future salaries for employees
    • Potential attrition of employees
    • Retention costs and salary increases to keep employees
    • Hiring costs
    • Training needs and costs

    Assess impact on staffing with the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator

    How do organizations calculate the staffing implications of a service desk consolidation?

    The Service Desk Efficiency Calculator uses the ITIL Gross Staffing Model to think through the impact of consolidating service desk processes.

    To estimate the impact of the consolidation on staffing levels, estimate what will happen to three variables:

    • Ticket volume
    • Average call resolution
    • Spare capacity

    All things being equal, a reduction in ticket volume (through outsourcing or the implementation of self-serve options, for example), will reduce your staffing requirements (all things being equal). The same goes for a reduction in the average call resolution rate.

    Constraints:

    Spare capacity: Many organizations are motivated to consolidate service desks by potential reductions in staffing costs. However, this is only true if your service desk agents have spare capacity to take on the consolidated ticket volume. If they don’t, you will still need the same number of agents to do the work at the consolidated service desk.

    Agent capabilities: If your agents have specialised skills that you need to maintain the same level of service, you won’t be able to reduce staffing until agents are cross-trained.

    Review the results of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator to refine the business case for the consolidation project

    2.2.3 Discuss the results of the efficiency calculator in the context of consolidation

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You’ll Need
    • Completed Service Desk Efficiency Calculator

    The third tab of the Service Desk Efficiency Calculator will quantify:

    • Service Desk Staffing: The impact of different ticket distribution on service desk staffing levels.
    • Service Desk Ticket Resolution Cost: The impact of different ticket distributions on ticket resolution costs.
    • Service Management Efficiency: The business impact of service management initiatives, specifically, the time lost or captured in service management processes relative to an average full-time employee equivalent.

    Facilitate a discussion around the results.

    Evaluate where you are now and where you hope to be. Focus on the efficiency gains expected from the outsourcing project. Review the expected gains in average resolution time, the expected impact on service desk ticket volume, and the associated productivity gains.

    Use this information to refine the business case and project plan for the consolidation, if needed.

    Assess consolidation costs and cost savings to refine the business case

    While cost savings should not be the primary driver of consolidation, they should be a key outcome of the project in order to deliver value.

    Typical cost savings for a service desk consolidation are highlighted below:

    People 10-20% savings (through resource pooling and reallocation)

    Process 5-10% savings (through process simplification and efficiencies gained)

    Technology 10-15% savings (through improved call routing and ITSM tool consolidation)

    Facilities 5-10% savings (through site selection and redesign)

    Cost savings should be balanced against the costs of the consolidation itself (including hiring for consolidation project managers or consultants, moving expenses, legal fees, etc.)

    Evaluate consolidation costs using the TCO Comparison Tool described in the next section.

    Analyze resourcing and budgeting to create a realistic TCO and evaluate the benefits of consolidation

    Use the TCO tool to assess the cost and cost savings of consolidation

    • The tool compares the cost of operating two service desks vs. one consolidated service desk, along with the cost of consolidation.
    • If your consolidation effort involves more than two facilities, then use multiple copies of the tool.
      • E.g. If you are consolidating four service desks (A, B, C, and D) into one service desk (X), then use two copies of the tool. We encourage you to book an analyst call to help you get the most out of this tool and process.

    Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

    Refine the business case and update the executive presentation

    Check in with executives and project sponsor before moving forward with the transition

    Since completing the executive visioning session in step 1.2, you should have completed the following activities:

    • Current state assessment
    • Detailed target state and metrics
    • Gap analysis between current and target state
    • Assessment of logistics and cost of consolidation

    The next step will be to develop a project roadmap to achieve the consolidation vision.

    Before doing this, check back in with the project sponsor and business executives to refine the business case, obtain necessary approvals, and secure buy-in.

    If necessary, add to the executive presentation you completed in step 1.2, copying results of the deliverables you have completed since:

    • Consolidate Service Desk Assessment Tool (current state assessment)
    • Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool
    • Service Desk Consolidation TCO Comparison Tool

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.3 Brainstorm process requirements for consolidated service desk

    Identify process requirements and desired characteristics for the target consolidated service desk.

    2.1.9 Review the results of the scorecard to identify best practices

    Review the results of the Consolidate Service Desk Scorecard Tool to identify top performing service desks and glean best practices.

    Phase 3

    Plan the Transition

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Plan the transition

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2-4

    Step 3.1: Build project roadmap

    Discuss with an analyst:

    • Identify specific initiatives for the consolidation project and evaluate the risks and dependencies for each
    • Plot initiatives on a detailed project roadmap with assigned responsibilities

    Then complete these activities…

    • Break the consolidation project down into specific initiatives
    • Identify and document risks and dependencies
    • Plot your initiatives onto a detailed project roadmap
    • Select transition date for consolidation

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap

    Step 3.2: Communicate the change

    Discuss with an analyst:

    • Identify the goals of communication, then develop a communications plan with targeted messaging for each stakeholder group to achieve those goals
    • Brainstorm potential objections and questions as well as responses to each

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build the communications delivery plan
    • Brainstorm potential objections and questions and prepare responses
    • Complete the news bulletin to distribute to your end users

    With these tools & templates:

    Service Desk Consolidation Communications and Training Plan Template

    Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template

    Phase 3 Results:
    • A detailed project roadmap toward consolidation and a communications plan to ensure stakeholders are on board

    Step 3.1: Build the project roadmap

    Phase 3

    Plan the consolidation

    3.1 Build the project roadmap

    3.2 Communicate the change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 3.1.1 Break the consolidation project down into a series of specific initiatives
    • 3.1.2 Identify and document risks and dependencies
    • 3.1.3 Plot your initiatives onto a detailed project roadmap
    • 3.1.4 Select transition date based on business cycles
    This step involves the following participants:
    • CIO
    • IT Directors
    • Service Desk Managers
    • Consolidation Project Manager
    • Service Desk Technicians
    Step outcomes

    A detailed roadmap to migrate to a single, consolidated service desk, including:

    • A breakdown of specific tasks groups by people, process, and technology
    • Identified risks and dependencies for each task
    • A timeline for completion of each task and the overall consolidation
    • Assigned responsibility for task completion

    Failure to engage stakeholders led to the failure of a large healthcare organization’s consolidation

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Healthcare

    Source: Organizational insider

    A large US healthcare facilities organization implemented a service desk consolidation initiative in early 2013. Only 18 months later, they reluctantly decided to return to their previous service desk model.

    Why did this consolidation effort fail?

    1. Management failed to communicate the changes to service-level staff, leading to agent confusion and pushback. Initially, each desk became part of the other’s overflow queue with no mention of the consolidation effort. Next, the independent desks began to share a basic request queue. Finally, there was a complete virtual consolidation – which came as a shock to service agents.
    2. The processes and workflows of the original service desks were not integrated, requiring service agents to consult different processes and use different workflows when engaging with end users from different facilities, even though all calls were part of the same queue.
    3. Staff at the different service centers did not have a consistent level of expertise or technical ability, even though they all became part of the same queue. This led to a perceived drop in end-user satisfaction – end users were used to getting a certain level of service and were suddenly confronted with less experienced agents.

    Before Consolidation

    Two disparate service desks:

    • With distinct geographic locations.
    • Servicing several healthcare facilities in their respective regions.
    • With distinct staff, end users, processes, and workflows.

    After Consolidation

    One virtually-consolidated service desk servicing many facilities spread geographically over two distinct locations.

    The main feature of the new virtual service desk was a single, pooled ticket queue drawn from all the end users and facilities in the new geographic regions.

    Break the consolidation project down into a series of specific initiatives

    3.1.1 Create a list of specific tasks that will form the consolidation project

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You’ll Need
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • List of prioritized target state requirements
    • Consolidation roadmap
    Document

    Document the list of initiatives in the Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap.

    In order to translate your newly made decisions regarding the target state and logistical considerations into a successful consolidation strategy, create an exhaustive list of all the steps and sub-steps that will lead you from your current state to your target state.

    Use the next few steps to finish brainstorming the initiative list, identify risks and dependencies, and construct a detailed timeline populated with specific project steps.

    Instructions

    Start with the list you have been curating throughout the current and future state assessments. If you are completing this project as a workshop, add to the initiative list you have been developing on the whiteboard.

    Try to organize your initiatives into groups of related tasks. Begin arranging your initiatives into people, process, technology, or other categories.

    Whiteboard People Process Technology Other

    Evaluate the impact of potential risks and develop a backup plan for high risk initiatives

    A service desk consolidation has a high potential for risks. Have a backup plan prepared for when events don’t go as planned.

    • A consolidation project requires careful planning as it is high risk and not performed often.
    • Apply the same due diligence to the consolidation plan as you do in preparing your disaster recovery plan. Establish predetermined resolutions to realistic risks so that the team can think of solutions quickly during the consolidation.

    Potential Sources of Risk

    • Service desk tool or phone line downtime prevents ability to submit tickets
    • Unable to meet SLAs through the transition
    • Equipment failure or damage through the physical move
    • Lost data through tool migration
    • Lost knowledge from employee attrition
    Risk - degree of impact if activities do not go as planned High

    A – High Risk, Low Frequency

    Tasks that are rarely done and are high risk. Focus attention here with careful planning (e.g. consolidation)

    B – High Risk, High Frequency

    Tasks that are performed regularly and must be watched closely each time (e.g. security authorizations)

    C – Low Risk, Low Frequency

    Tasks that are performed regularly with limited impact or risk (e.g. server upgrades)

    D – Low Risk, High Frequency

    Tasks that are done all the time and are not risky (e.g. password resets)

    Low High
    Frequency - how often the activity has been performed

    Service desk consolidations fit in category A

    Identify risks for people, processes, tools, or data to ensure the project plan will include appropriate mitigations

    Each element of the consolidation has an inherent risk associated with it as the daily service flow is interrupted. Prepare in advance by anticipating these risks.

    The project manager, service desk managers, and subject matter experts (SMEs) of different areas, departments, or locations should identify risks for each of the processes, tools, resource groups (people), and any data exchanges and moves that will be part of the project or impacted by the project.

    Process - For each process, validate that workflows can remain intact throughout the consolidation project. If any gaps may occur in the process flows, develop a plan to be implemented in parallel with the consolidation to ensure service isn’t interrupted.

    Technology - For a tool consolidation, upgrade, or replacement, verify that there is a plan in place to ensure continuation of service delivery processes throughout the change.

    Make a plan for if and how data from the old tool(s) will be migrated to the new tool, and how the new tool will be installed and configured.

    People - For movement of staff, particularly with termination, identify any risks that may occur and involve your HR and legal departments to ensure all movement is compliant with larger processes within the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t overlook the little things. Sometimes the most minor-seeming components of the consolidation can cause the greatest difficulty. For example, don’t assume that the service desk phone number can simply roll over to a new location and support the call load of a combined service desk. Verify it.

    Identify and document risks and dependencies

    3.1.2 Risks, challenges, and dependencies exercise - Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • SMEs
    What You'll Need
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • List of initiatives identified in previous activities
    • Consolidation roadmap
    Document

    Use the outcome of this activity to complete your consolidation roadmap.

    Instructions
    • Document risks and challenges, as well as dependencies associated with the initiatives identified earlier, using a different color sticky note from your initiatives.
    • See example below.
    Combine Related Initiatives
    • Look for initiatives that are highly similar, dependent on each other, or occurring at the same time. Consolidate these initiatives into a single initiative with several sub-steps in order to better organize your roadmap and reduce redundancy.
    • Create hierarchies for dependent initiatives that could affect the scheduling of initiatives on a roadmap, and reorganize the whiteboard where necessary.
    Optional:
    • Use a scoring method to categorize risks. E.g.:
      • High: will stop or delay operations, radically increase cost, or significantly reduce consolidation benefits
      • Medium: would cause some delay, cost increase, or performance shortfall, but would not threaten project viability
      • Low: could impact the project to a limited extent, causing minor delays or cost increases
    • Develop contingency plans for high risks or adjust to avoid the problem entirely
    Implement new ISTM tool:
    • Need to transition from existing tools
    • Users must be trained
    • Data and open tickets must be migrated

    Plot your initiatives onto a detailed project roadmap

    3.1.3 Estimated Time: 45 minutes

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    Document

    Document your initiatives on tab 2 of the Service Desk Consolidation Roadmap or map it out on a whiteboard.

    Determine the sequence of initiatives, identify milestones, and assign dates.
    • The purpose of this exercise is to define a timeline and commit to initiatives to reach your goals.
    • Determine the order in which previously identified consolidation initiatives will be implemented, document previously identified risks and dependencies, assign ownership for each task, and assign dates for pilots and launch.

    Select transition date based on business cycles

    3.1.4

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Consolidation roadmap
    Document

    Adjust initiatives in the consolidation roadmap if necessary.

    The transition date will be used in communications in the next step.

    1. Review the initiatives in the roadmap and the resulting sunshine diagram on tab 3.
    2. Verify that the initiatives will be possible within the determined time frame and adjust if necessary.
    3. Based on the results of the roadmap, select a target transition date for the consolidation by determining:
      1. Whether there are dates when a major effort of this kind should not be scheduled.
      2. Whether there are merger and acquisition requirements that dictate a specific date for the service desk merger.
    4. Select multiple measurable checkpoints to alert the team that something is awry and mitigate risks.
    5. Verify that stakeholders are aware of the risks and the proposed steps necessary to mitigate them, and assign the necessary resources to them.
    6. Document or adjust the target transition date in the roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consolidating service desks doesn’t have to be done in one shot, replacing all your help desks, tools, and moving staff all at the same time. You can take a phased approach to consolidating, moving one location, department, or tool at a time to ease the transition.

    Step 3.2: Communicate the change

    Phase 3

    Design consolidation

    3.1 Build the project roadmap

    3.2 Communicate the change

    This step will walk you through the following activities:
    • 3.2.1 Build the communications delivery plan
    • 3.2.2 Brainstorm potential objections and questions and prepare responses
    This step involves the following participants:
    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Agents
    Step outcomes
    • A detailed communications plan with key messages, delivery timeline, and spokesperson responsibility for each key stakeholder audience
    • A set of agreed-upon responses to anticipated objections and questions to ensure consistent message delivery
    • A news bulletin and list of FAQs to distribute to end users to prepare them for the change

    Create your communication plan with everyone in mind, from the CIO to end users

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Higher Education

    Source: Oxford University, IT Services

    Oxford implemented extremely innovative initiatives as part of its robust communications plan.

    ITS ran a one-day ITSM “business simulation” for the CIO and direct reports, increasing executive buy-in.

    The business simulation was incredibly effective as a way of getting management buy-in – it really showed what we are driving at. It’s a way of making it real, bringing people on board. ” – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service

    Detailed use cases were envisioned referencing particular ITIL processes as the backbone of the process framework.

    The use cases were very helpful, they were used […] in getting a broad engagement from teams across our department and getting buy-in from the distributed IT staff who we work with across the wider University. ” – John Ireland, Director of Customer Service

    The Oxford ITS SDCP blog was accessible to everyone.

    • Oxford’s SDCP blog acted as a project touchstone not only to communicate updates quickly, but also to collect feedback, enable collaboration, and set a project tone.
    • An informal tone and accessible format facilitated the difficult cultural shifts required of the consolidation effort.

    We in the project team would love to hear your view on this project and service management in general, so please feel free to comment on this blog post, contact us using the project email address […] or, for further information visit the project SharePoint site […] ” – Oxford ITS SDCP blog post

    Plan for targeted and timely communications to all stakeholders

    Develop a plan to keep all affected stakeholders informed about the changes consolidation will bring, and more importantly, how they will affect them.

    All stakeholders must be kept informed of the project plan and status as the consolidation progresses.
    • Management requires frequent communication with the core project group to evaluate the success of the project in meeting its goals.
    • End users should be informed about changes that are happening and how these changes will affect them.

    A communications plan should address three elements:

    1. The audience and their communication needs
    2. The most effective means of communicating with this audience
    3. Who should deliver the message

    Goals of communication:

    1. Create awareness and understanding of the consolidation and what it means for each role, department, or user group
    2. Gain commitment to the change from all stakeholders
    3. Reduce and address any concerns about the consolidation and be transparent in responding to any questions
    4. Communicate potential risks and mitigation plan
    5. Set expectations for service levels throughout and after the consolidation

    Plan the method of delivery for your communications carefully

    Plan the message, test it with a small audience, then deliver to your employees and stakeholders in person to avoid message avoidance or confusion.

    Message Format

    Email and Newsletters

    Email and newsletters are convenient and can be transmitted to large audiences easily, but most users are inundated with email already and may not notice or read the message.

    • Use email to make large announcements or invite people to meetings but not as the sole medium of communication.

    Face-to-Face Communication

    Face-to-face communication helps to ensure that users are receiving and understanding a clear message, and allows them to voice their concerns and clarify any confusion or questions.

    • Use one-on-ones for key stakeholders and team meetings for groups.

    Internal Website/Drive

    Internal sites help sustain change by making knowledge available after the consolidation, but won’t be retained beforehand.

    • Use for storing policies, how-to-guides, and SOPs.
    Message Delivery
    1. Plan your message
      1. Emphasize what the audience really needs to know, that is, how the change will impact them.
    2. Test your message
      1. Run focus groups or test your communications with a small audience (2-3 people) first to get feedback and adjust messages before delivering them more broadly.
    3. Deliver and repeat your message
      1. “Tell them what you’re going to tell them, then tell them, then tell them what you told them.”
    4. Gather feedback and evaluate communications
      1. Evaluate the effectiveness of the communications (through surveys, focus groups, stakeholder interviews, or metrics) to ensure the message was delivered and received successfully and communication goals were met.

    Address the specific concerns of the business vs. employees

    Focus on alleviating concerns from both sides of the communication equation: the business units and employees.

    Business units:

    Be attentive to the concerns of business unit management about loss of power. Appease worries about the potential risk of reduced service quality and support responsiveness that may have been experienced in prior corporate consolidation efforts.

    Make the value of the consolidation clear, and involve business unit management in the organizational change process.

    Focus on producing a customer-focused consolidated service desk. It will assuage fears over the loss of control and influence. Business units may be relinquishing control of their service desk, but they should retain the same level of influence.

    Employees:

    Employees are often fearful of the impact of a consolidation on their jobs. These fears should be addressed and alleviated as soon as possible.

    Design a communication plan outlining the changes and the reasons motivating it.

    Put support programs in place for displaced and surviving employees.

    Motivate employees during the transition and increase employee involvement in the change.

    Educate and train employees who make the transition to the new structure and new job demands.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Know your audience. Be wary of using technical jargon or acronyms that may seem like common knowledge within your department but would not be part of the vocabulary of non-technical audiences. Ensure your communications are suitable for the audience. If you need to use jargon or acronyms, explain what you mean.

    Build the communications delivery plan

    3.2.1 Develop a plan to deliver targeted messages to key stakeholder groups

    Participants
    • CIO or IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    What You'll Need
    • Communications plan template
    • Whiteboard and markers
    Document

    Document your decisions in the communications plan template

    1. Define the goals of the communications in section 1 of the Service Desk Consolidation Communications and Training Plan Template.
    2. Determine when communication milestones/activities need to be delivered by completing the Communications Schedule in section 2.
    3. Determine the key stakeholder groups or audiences to whom you will need to deliver communications.
    4. Identify the content of the key messages that need to be delivered and select the most appropriate delivery method for each (i.e. email, team meeting, individual meetings). Designate who will be responsible for delivering the messages.
    5. Document a plan for gathering feedback and evaluating the effectiveness of the communications in section 5 (i.e. stakeholder interviews and surveys).

    Section 4 of the communications plan on objections and question handling will be completed in activity 3.2.2.

    Optional Activity

    If you completed the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook in step 1.1, you may also complete the Communications tab in that workbook to further develop your plan to engage stakeholders.

    Effectively manage the consolidation by implementing change management processes

    Implement change management processes to ensure that the consolidation runs smoothly with limited impact on IT infrastructure.

    Communicate and track changes: Identify and communicate changes to all stakeholders affected by the change to ensure they are aware of any downtime and can plan their own activities accordingly.

    Isolate testing: Test changes within a safe non-production environment to eliminate the risk of system outages that result from defects discovered during testing.

    Document back-out plans: Documented back-out/backup plans enable quick recovery in the event that the change fails.

    The image is a horizontal bar graph, titled Unplanned downtime due to change versus change management maturity. The graph shows that for a Change Management Maturity that is Informal, the % Experiencing Unplanned Downtime due to Failed Change is 41%; for Defined, it is 25%; and for Optimized, it is 19%.

    Organizations that have more mature and defined change management processes experience less unplanned downtime when implementing change across the organization.

    Sustain changes by adapting people, processes, and technologies to accept the transition

    Verify that people, process, and technologies are prepared for the consolidation before going live with the transition.

    What?

    1. Adapt people to the change

    • Add/change roles and responsibilities.
    • Move people to different roles/teams.
    • Change compensation and incentive structures to reinforce new goals, if applicable.

    2. Adapt processes to the change

    • Add/change supporting processes.
    • Eliminate or consolidate legacy processes.
    • Add/change standard operating procedures.

    3. Adapt technologies to the change

    • Add/change/update supporting technologies.
    • Eliminate or consolidate legacy technologies
    How? Work with HR on any changes involving job design, personnel changes, or compensation. Work with enterprise architects or business analysts to manage significant changes to processes that may impact the business and service levels.

    See Info-Tech’s Optimize the Change Management Processblueprint to use a disciplined change control process for technology changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizational change management (OCM) is widely recognized as a key component of project success, yet many organizations struggle to get adoption for new tools, policies, and procedures. Use Info-Tech’s blueprint on driving organizational change to develop a strategy and toolkit to achieve project success.

    Manage people by addressing their specific concerns based on their attitude toward change

    Avoid high turnover and resistance to change by engaging both the enthusiasts and the skeptics with targeted messaging.

    • Clearly articulate and strongly champion the changes that will result from the consolidation for those willing to adapt to the change.
    • Make change management practices integral to the entire project.
    • Provide training workshops on new processes, new goals or metrics, new technologies and tools, and teamwork as early as possible after consolidation.
    1. Enthusiasts - Empower them to stay motivated and promote the change
    2. Fence-Sitters/Indifferent - Continually motivate them by example but give them time to adapt to the change
    3. Skeptics - Engage them early and address their concerns and doubts to convert them to enthusiasts
    4. Saboteurs - Prevent them from spreading dissent and rumors, thus undermining the project, by counteracting negative claims early

    Leverage the Stakeholder Engagement Workbook from step 1.1 as well as Info-Tech’s blueprint on driving organizational change for more tactics on change management, particularly managing and engaging various personas.

    Prepare ahead of time for questions that various stakeholder groups may have

    Anticipate questions that will arise about the consolidation so you can prepare and distribute responses to frequently asked questions. Sample questions from various stakeholders are provided below.

    General
    1. Why is the organization moving to a consolidated service desk?
    2. Where is the consolidated service desk going to be located?
    3. Are all or only some service desks consolidating?
    4. When is the consolidation happening?
    5. What are the anticipated benefits of consolidation?

    Business

    1. What is the budget for the project?
    2. What are the anticipated cost savings and return on investment?
    3. When will the proposed savings be realized?
    4. Will there be job losses from the consolidation and when will these occur?
    5. Will the organization subsidize moving costs?

    Employees

    1. Will my job function be changing?
    2. Will my job location be changing?
    3. What will happen if I can’t relocate?
    4. Will my pay and benefits be the same?
    5. Will reporting relationships change?
    6. Will performance expectations and metrics change?

    End Users

    1. How do I get help with IT issues?
    2. How do I submit a ticket?
    3. How will I be notified of ticket status, outages?
    4. Where will the physical service desk be located?
    5. Will I be able to get help in my language?
    6. Will there be changes for levels of service?

    Brainstorm likely objections/questions to prepare responses

    3.2.2 Prepare responses to likely questions to ensure consistent messaging

    Participants
    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager(s)
    • Service Desk Agents
    Document

    Document your questions and responses in section 4 of the communications plan template. This should be continually updated.

    1. Brainstorm anticipated objections and questions you may hear from various stakeholder groups: service desk employees, end users, and management or executives.
    2. For each objection or question, prepare a response that will be delivered to ensure consistent messaging. Use a table like the example below.
    Group Objection/Question Response
    Service desk staff I’m comfortable with the service desk tool we’ve been using here and won’t know how to use the new one. We carefully evaluated the new solution against our requirements and selected it as the one that will provide the best service to our users and be user friendly. We tested the solution through user-acceptance testing to ensure staff will be comfortable using it, and we will provide comprehensive training to all users of the tool before launching it.
    End user I’m used to going to my favorite technician for help. How will I get service now? We are initiating a single point of contact so that you will know exactly where to go to get help quickly and easily, so that we can more quickly escalate your issue to the appropriate technician, and so that we can resolve it and notify you as soon as possible. This will make our service more effective and efficient than you having to find one individual who may be tied up with other work or unavailable.

    Keep the following in mind when formulating your responses:

    • Lead with the benefits
    • Be transparent and honest
    • Avoid acronyms, jargon, and technical terms
    • Appeal to both emotion and reason
    • Be concise and straightforward
    • Don’t be afraid to be repetitive; people need repetition to remember the message
    • Use concrete facts and images wherever possible

    Complete the Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template to distribute to your end users

    Customize the template or use as a guide to develop your own

    The Service Desk Consolidation News Bulletin & FAQ Template is intended to be an example that you can follow or modify for your own organization. It provides a summary of how the consolidation project will change how end users interact with the service desk.

    1. What the change means to end users
    2. When they should contact the service desk (examples)
    3. How to contact the service desk (include all means of contact and ticket submission)
    4. Answers to questions they may have
    5. Links to more information

    The bulletin is targeted for mass distribution to end users. A similar letter may be developed for service desk staff, though face-to-face communication is recommended.

    Instructions:

    1. Use the template as a guide to develop your own FAQ news bulletin and adjust any sections or wording as you see fit.
    2. You may wish to develop separate letters for each location, referring more specifically to their location and where the new service desk will be located.
    3. Save the file as a PDF for print or email distribution at the time determined in your communications plan.

    Keeping people a priority throughout the project ensured success

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Higher Education

    Source: Oxford University, IT Services

    Oxford’s new consolidated service desk went live April 20, 2015.

    They moved from 3 distinct tools and 5 disparate help desks to a single service desk with one robust ITSM solution, all grounded by a unified set of processes and an integrated workflow.

    The success of this project hinged upon:

    • A bold vision, formulated early and in collaboration with all stakeholders.
    • Willingness to take time to understand the unique perspective of each role and help desk, then carefully studying existing processes and workflows to build upon what works.
    • Constant collaboration, communication, and the desire to listen to feedback from all interested parties.

    "We have had a few teething issues to deal with, but overall this has been a very smooth transition given the scale of it." – ICTF Trinity Term 2015 IT Services Report

    Beyond the initial consolidation.
    • Over the summer of 2015, ITS moved to full 24/7 support coverage.
    • Oxford’s ongoing proposition with regard to support services is to extend the new consolidated service desk beyond its current IT role:
      • Academic Admissions
      • Case Management
      • IT Purchasing
    • To gradually integrate those IT departments/colleges/faculties that remain independent at the present time.
    • Info-Tech can facilitate these goals in your organization with our research blueprint, Extend the Service Desk to Enterprise.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1 Break the consolidation project down into a series of specific initiatives

    Create a list of specific tasks that will form the consolidation project on sticky notes and organize into people, process, technology, and other categories to inform the roadmap.

    3.2.2 Brainstorm likely objections/questions to prepare responses

    Brainstorm anticipated questions and objections that will arise from various stakeholder groups and prepare consistent responses to each.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Standardize the Service Desk - Provide timely and effective responses to user requests and resolutions of all incidents.

    Extend the Service Desk to the Enterprise - Position IT as an innovator.

    Build a Continual Improvement Plan for the Service Desk - Teach your old service desk new tricks.

    Adopt Lean IT to Streamline the Service Desk - Turn your service desk into a Lean, keen, value-creating machine.

    Vendor Landscape: Enterprise Service Desk Software - Move past tickets to proactive, integrated service.

    Vendor Landscape: Mid-Market Service Desk Software - Ensure the productivity of the help desk with the right platform.

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan - Nail your ITSM tool implementation from the outset.

    Drive Organizational Change from the PMO - Don’t let bad change happen to good projects.

    Research contributors and experts

    Stacey Keener - IT Manager for the Human Health and Performance Directorate, Johnson Space Center, NASA

    Umar Reed - Director of IT Support Services US Denton US LLP

    Maurice Pryce - IT Manager City of Roswell, Georgia

    Ian Goodhart - Senior Business Analyst Allegis Group

    Gerry Veugelaers - Service Delivery Manager New Zealand Defence Force

    Alisa Salley Rogers - Senior Service Desk Analyst HCA IT&S Central/West Texas Division

    Eddie Vidal - IS Service Desk Managers University of Miami

    John Conklin - Chief Information Officer Helen of Troy LP

    Russ Coles - Senior Manager, Computer Applications York Region District Schoolboard

    John Seddon - Principal Vanguard Consulting

    Ryan van Biljon - Director, Technical Services Samanage

    Rear Admiral Robert E. Day Jr. (ret.) - Chief Information Officer United States Coast Guard

    George Bartha - Manager of Information Technology Unifrax

    Peter Hubbard - IT Service Management Consultant Pink Elephant

    Andre Gaudreau - Manager of School Technology Operations York Region District School Board

    Craig Nekola - Manager, Information Technology Anoka County

    Bibliography and Further Reading

    Hoen, Jim. “The Single Point of Contact: Driving Support Process Improvements with a Consolidated IT Help-Desk Approach.” TechTeam Global Inc. September 2005.

    Hubbard, Peter. “Leading University embarks on IT transformation programme to deliver improved levels of service excellence.” Pink Elephant. http://pinkelephant.co.uk/about/case-studies/service-management-case-study/

    IBM Global Services. “Service Desk: Consolidation, Relocation, Status Quo.” IBM. June 2005.

    Keener, Stacey. “Help Desks: a Problem of Astronomical Proportions.” Government CIO Magazine. 1 February 2015.

    McKaughan, Jeff. “Efficiency Driver.” U.S. Coast Guard Forum Jul. 2013. Web. http://www.intergraphgovsolutions.com/documents/CoastGuardForumJuly2013.pdf

    Numara Footprints. “The Top 10 Reasons for Implementing a Consolidated Service Desk.” Numara Software.

    Roy, Gerry, and Frederieke Winkler Prins. “How to Improve Service Quality through Service Desk Consolidation.” BMC Software.

    Smith, Andrew. “The Consolidated Service Desk – An Achievable Goal?” The Service Desk Institute.

    Wolfe, Brandon. “Is it Time for IT Service Desk Consolidation?” Samanage. 4 August 2015.

    Build a Platform-Based Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}98|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,420 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • The organization is riddled with bureaucracy. Some even believe that bureaucracy is inevitable and is an outcome of a complex business operating in a complex market and regulatory environment.
    • Time to market for new products and services is excruciatingly long.
    • Digital natives like Facebook, Netflix, and Spotify do not compare well with the organization and cannot be looked to for inspiration.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Large corporations often consist of a few operating units, each with its own idiosyncracies about strategies, culture, and capabilities. These tightly integrated operating units make a company prone to bureaucracy.
    • The antidote to this bureaucracy is a platform structure: small, autonomous teams operating as startups within the organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Platforms consist of related activities and associated technologies that deliver on a specific organizational goal. A platform can therefore be run as a business or as a service. This structure of small autonomous teams that are loosely joined will make your employees directly accountable to the customers. In a way, they become entrepreneurs and do not remain just employees.

    Build a Platform-Based Organization Research & Tools

    Build a platform-based organization

    Download our guide to learn how you can get started with a platform structure.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Build a Platform-Based Organization Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build a Platform-Based Organization

    Use a platform structure to overcome bureaucracy.

    Analyst Perspective

    Build a platform-based organization.

    Bureaucracy saps innovation out of large corporations. Some even believe that bureaucracy is inevitable and is an outcome of a complex business operating in a complex market and regulatory environment.

    So, what is the antidote to bureaucracy? Some look to startups like Uber, Airbnb, Netflix, and Spotify, but they are digital native and don’t compare well to a large monolithic corporation.

    However, all is not lost for large corporations. Inspiration can be drawn from a company in China – Haier, which is not a typical poster child of the digital age like Spotify. In fact, three decades ago, it was a state-owned company with a shoddy product quality.

    Haier uses an intriguing organization structure based on microenterprises and platforms that has proven to be an antidote to bureaucracy.

    Vivek Mehta
    Research Director, Digital & Innovation
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    The Challenge

    Large corporations are prone to bureaucracies, which sap their organizations of creativity and make them blind to new opportunities. Though many executives express the desire to get rid of it, bureaucracy is thriving in their organizations.

    Why It Happens

    As organizations grow and become more complex over time, they yearn for efficiency and control. Some believe bureaucracy is the natural outcome of running a complex organization in a complex business and regulatory environment.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A new organizational form – the platform structure – is challenging the bureaucratic model. The platform structure makes employees directly accountable to customers and organizes them in an ecosystem of autonomous units.

    As a starting point, sketch out a platform structure that works for your organization. Then, establish a governance model and identify and nurture key capabilities for the platform structure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The antidote to bureaucracy is a platform structure: small, autonomous teams operating as startups within the organization.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Small pieces, loosely joined

    Haier

    Industry: Manufacturing
    Source: Harvard Business Review November-December 2018

    Haier, based in China, is currently the world’s largest appliance maker. Zhang Ruimin, Haier’s CEO, has built an intriguing organizing structure where every employee is directly accountable to customers – internal and/or external. A large corporation often consists of a few operating units, each with its own idiosyncrasies, which makes it slow to innovate. To avoid that, Haier has divided itself into 4,000 microenterprises (MEs), most of which have ten to 15 employees. There are three types of microenterprises in Haier:

    1. Approximately 200 “transforming” MEs: market-facing units like Zhisheng, which manufactures refrigerators, a legacy Haier product, for today’s young urbanites.
    2. Approximately 50 “incubating” MEs: entirely new businesses like Xinchu that wrap existing products into entirely new business models.
    3. Approximately 3,800 “node” MEs: units that sell component products and services such as design, manufacturing, and human resources support to Haier’s market-facing MEs.

    Each ME operates as an autonomous unit with its own targets – an organizing structure that enables innovation at Haier.

    (Harvard Business Review, 2018)

    The image is a rectangular graphic with the words Refrigeration Platform in the centre. There are six text boxes around the centre, reading (clockwise from top left): Zhisheng Young urbanites; Langdu Premium; Jinchu Mid-priced; Xinchu Internet-connected; Overseas Export markets; Leader Value-priced. There are a series of white boxes bordering the graphic, with the following labels: at top--Sales nodes; at right--Support nodes (R&D, HR, supply chain, etc.); at bottom left---Design nodes; at bottom right--Production nodes.

    Markets disproportionately reward platform structure

    Tech companies like Facebook, Netflix, and Spotify are organized around a set of modular platforms run by accountable platform teams. This modular org structure enables them to experiment, learn, and scale quickly – a key attribute of innovative organizations.

    Facebook ~2,603 million monthly active users

    India ~1,353 million population

    Netflix ~183 million monthly paid subscribers

    Spotify ~130 million premium subscribers

    Canada ~37 million population

    (“Facebook Users Worldwide 2020,” “Number of Netflix Subscribers 2019,” “Spotify Users - Subscribers in 2020,” Statista.)

    1. Sketch Out the Platform Structure

    What is a platform anyway?

    A modular component of an org structure

    Platforms consist of a logical cluster of activities and associated technology that delivers on a specific business goal and can therefore be run as a business, or ‘as a service’ … Platforms focus on business solutions to serve clients (internal or external) and to supply other platforms.” – McKinsey, 2019

    Platforms operate as independent units with their own business, technology, governance, processes, and people management. As an instance, a bank could have payments platform under a joint business and IT leadership. This payments-as-a-service platform could provide know-how, processes, and technology to the bank’s internal customers such as retail and commercial business units.

    Many leading IT organizations are set up in a platform-based structure that allows them to rapidly innovate. It’s an imperative for organizations in other industries that they must pilot and then scale with a platform play.

    What a platform-based org looks like

    It looks like a multicellular organism, where each cell is akin to a platform

    An organism consists of multiple cells of different types, sizes, and shapes. Each cell is independent in its working. Regardless of the type, a cell would have three features –the nucleus, the cell membrane, and, between the two, the cytoplasm.

    Similarly, an organization could be imagined as one consisting of several platforms of different types and sizes. Each platform must be autonomous, but they all share a few common features – have a platform leader, set up and monitor targets, and enable interoperability amongst platforms. Platforms could be of three types (McKinsey, 2019):

    1. Customer-journey platforms enable customer proposition and experience built on reusable code. They provide “journey as a service”; for example, Account Opening in a bank.
    2. Business-solution platforms are modular and run as a business or as a service. They provide “company as a service”; for example, Payments or Fraud Detection in a bank.
    3. Core IT provisioning platforms provide core IT services for the organization, for example, cloud, data, automation.

    There are two images: in the lower part of the graphic shows a multicellular organism, and has text pointing to a single cell. At the top, there is a zoomed in image of that single cell, with its component parts labelled: Cell Membrane, Nucleus, and Cytoplasm.

    Case study: Payments platform in a bank

    Payments as a service to internal business units

    The payments platform is led by an SVP – the platform leader. Business and IT teams are colocated and have joint leadership. The platform team works with a mindset of a startup, serving internal customers of the bank – retail and commercial lines of business.

    A diagram showing Advisory Council in a large grey box on the left. To the right are smaller dark blue boxes labeled 'Real-time peer-to-peer payments,' Wire transfers,' 'Batch payments,' 'Mobile wallets,' and 'International payments (VISA, WU, etc.),' and one light blue box labeled 'Payments innovation.'


    Advisory Council: An Advisory Council is responsible for strategy, business, and IT architecture and for overseeing the work within the team. The Advisory Council prioritizes the work, earmarks project budgets, sets standards such as for APIs and ISO 20022, and leads vendor evaluation.

    International payments (VISA, WU, etc.): Project execution teams are structured around payment modes. Teams collaborate with each other whenever a common functionality is to be developed, like fraud check on a payment or account posting for debits and credits.

    Payments innovation: A think tank keeping track of trends in payments and conducting proof of concepts (POCs) with prospective fintech partners and with new technologies.

    Use a capability map to sketch out a platform-based structure

    Corral your organization’s activities and associated tech into a set of 20 to 40 platforms that cover customer journeys, business capabilities, and core IT. Business and IT teams must jointly work on this activity and could use a capability map as an aid to facilitate the discussion.

    The image is an example of a capability map, shown in more detail in the following section.

    An example of sketching a platform-based org structure for an insurance provider (partial)

    Design Policy Create Policy Issue Policy Service Customers Process Claims Manage Investments
    Defining Market Research & Analysis Underwriting Criteria Selection Customer Targeting Interaction Management First Notice of Loss (FNOL) Investment Strategy
    Actuarial Analysis Product Reserving Needs Assessment & Quotes Payments Claims Investigation Portfolio Management
    Catastrophe Risk Modeling Reinsurance Strategy Contract Issuance Adjustments Claims Adjudication Deposits & Disbursements
    Product Portfolio Strategy Product Prototyping Application Management Renewals Claims Recovery (Subrogation) Cash & Liquidity Management
    Rate Making Product Testing Sales Execution Offboarding Dispute Resolution Capital Allocation
    Policy Definition Product Marketing Contract Change Management

    Customer Retention

    [Servicing a customer request is a customer-journey platform.]

    Claims Inquiry

    [Filing a claim is a customer-journey platform.]

    Credit Bureau Reporting
    Shared Customer Management

    Account Management

    [Customer and account management is a business-capability platform to enable journeys.]

    Channel Management Risk Management Regulatory & Compliance Knowledge Management
    Partner Management

    Access and Identity Management

    [Access and identity management is a core IT platform.]

    Change Management Enterprise Data Management Fraud Detection [Fraud detection is a business-capability platform to enable journeys.] Product Innovation
    Enabling Corporate Governance Strategic Planning Reporting Accounting Enterprise Architecture Human Resources
    Legal Corporate Finance IT Facilities Management

    2. Establish Governance and Nurture Key Capabilities

    Two ingredients of the platform structure

    Establish a governance

    Advisory Council (AC) operates like a conductor at an orchestra, looking across all the activities to understand and manage the individual components.

    Nurture key capabilities

    Team structure, processes and technologies must be thoughtfully orchestrated and nurtured.

    Establish strong governance

    Empowerment does not mean anarchy

    While platforms are distinct units, they must be in sync with each other, like individual musicians in an orchestra. The Advisory Council (AC) must act like a conductor of the orchestra and lead and manage across platforms in three ways.

    1. Prioritize spend and effort. The AC team makes allocation decisions and prioritizes spend and effort on those platforms that can best support organizational goals and/or are in most urgent technical need. The best AC teams have enterprise architects who can understand business and dive deep enough into IT to manage critical interdependencies.
    2. Set and enforce standards. The AC team establishes both business and technology standards for interoperability. For example, the AC team can set the platform and application interfaces standards and the industry standards like ISO 20022 for payments. The AC team can also provide guidance on common apps and tools to use, for example, a reconciliation system for payments.
    3. Facilitate cross-platform work. The AC team has a unique vantage point where it can view and manage interdependencies among programs. As these complexities emerge, the AC team can step in and facilitate the interaction among the involved platform teams. In cases when a common capability is required by multiple platforms, the AC team can facilitate the dialogue to have it built out.

    Nurture the following capabilities:

    Design thinking

    “Zero distance from the customer” is the focus of platform structure. Each platform must operate with a mindset of a startup serving internal and/or external users.

    Agile delivery model

    Platform teams iteratively develop their offerings. With guidance from Advisory Council, they can avoid bottlenecks of formal alignment and approvals.

    Enterprise architecture

    The raison d'être of enterprise architecture discipline is to enable modularity in the architecture, encourage reusability of assets, and simplify design.

    Microservices

    Microservices allow systems to grow with strong cohesion and weak coupling and enable teams to scale components independently.

    APIs

    With their ability to link systems and data, APIs play a crucial role in making IT systems more responsive and adaptable.

    Machine learning

    With the drop in its cost, predictability is becoming the new electricity for business. Platforms use machine learning capability for better predictions.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies
    Innovate and transform your business models with digital platforms.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work
    Guide your organization through its Agile transformation journey.

    Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model
    Putting the customer at the center of digital transformation.

    Bibliography

    Bossert, Oliver, and Jürgen Laartz. “Perpetual Evolution—the Management Approach Required for Digital Transformation.” McKinsey, 5 June 2017. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    Bossert, Oliver, and Driek Desmet. “The Platform Play: How to Operate like a Tech Company.” McKinsey, 28 Feb. 2019. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    “Facebook Users Worldwide 2020.” Statista. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    Hamel, Gary, and Michele Zanini. “The End of Bureaucracy.” Harvard Business Review. Nov.-Dec. 2018. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    “Number of Netflix Subscribers 2019.” Statista. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    “Spotify Users - Subscribers in 2020.” Statista. Accessed 21 May 2020.

    Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}354|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Leveraging the cloud introduces IT professionals to a new world that they are tasked with securing. Consumers do not know what security services they need and when to implement them.
    • With many cloud vendors proposing to share the security responsibility, it can be a challenge for organizations to develop a clear understanding of how they can best secure their data off premises.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your cloud security architecture needs to be strategic, realistic, and based on risk. The NIST approach to cloud security is to include everything security into your cloud architecture to be deemed secure. However, you can still have a robust and secure cloud architecture by using a risk-based approach to identify the necessary controls and mitigating services for your environment.
    • The cloud is not the right choice for everyone. You’re not as unique as you think. Start with a reference model that is based on your risks and business attributes and optimize it from there.
    • Your responsibility doesn’t end at the vendor. Even if you outsource your security services to your vendors, you will still have security responsibilities to address.
    • Don’t boil the ocean; do what is realistic for your enterprise. Your cloud security architecture should be based on securing your most critical assets. Use our reference model to determine a launch point.
    • A successful strategy is holistic. Controlling for cloud risks comes from knowing what the risks are. Consider the full spectrum of security, including both processes and technologies.

    Impact and Result

    • The business is adopting a cloud environment and it must be secured, which includes:
      • Ensuring business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
      • Maintaining the privacy of data and other information.
      • Securing the network connection points.
      • Knowing the risks associated with the cloud and mitigating those risks with the appropriate services.
    • This blueprint and associated tools are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors. It allows them to know what types of risk they are facing and what security services are strongly recommended to mitigate those risks.

    Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture Research & Tools

    Start Here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should create a cloud security architecture with security at the forefront, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Cloud security alignment analysis

    Explore how the cloud changes and whether your enterprise is ready for the shift to the cloud.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 1: Cloud Security Alignment Analysis
    • Cloud Security Architecture Workbook

    2. Business-critical workload analysis

    Analyze the workloads that will migrated to the cloud. Consider the various domains of security in the cloud, considering the cloud’s unique risks and challenges as they pertain to your workloads.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 2: Business-Critical Workload Analysis

    3. Cloud security architecture mapping

    Map your risks to services in a reference model from which to build a robust launch point for your architecture.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 3: Cloud Security Architecture Mapping
    • Cloud Security Architecture Archive Document
    • Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model (Visio)
    • Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model (PDF)

    4. Cloud security strategy planning

    Map your risks to services in a reference architecture to build a robust roadmap from.

    • Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture – Phase 4: Cloud Security Strategy Planning
    • Cloud Security Architecture Communication Deck

    Infographic

    Workshop: Identify the Components of Your Cloud Security Architecture

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Cloud Security Alignment Analysis

    The Purpose

    Understand your suitability and associated risks with your workloads as they are deployed into the cloud.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the organization’s readiness and optimal service level for cloud security.

    Activities

    1.1 Workload Deployment Plan

    1.2 Cloud Suitability Questionnaire

    1.3 Cloud Risk Assessment

    1.4 Cloud Suitability Analysis

    Outputs

    Workload deployment plan

    Determined the suitability of the cloud for your workloads

    Risk assessment of the associated workloads

    Overview of cloud suitability

    2 Business-Critical Workload Analysis

    The Purpose

    Explore your business-critical workloads and the associated controls and mitigating services to secure them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Address NIST 800-53 security controls and the appropriate security services that can mitigate the risks appropriately.

    Activities

    2.1 “A” Environment Analysis

    2.2 “B” Environment Analysis

    2.3 “C” Environment Analysis

    2.4 Prioritized Security Controls

    2.5 Effort and Risk Dashboard Overview

    Outputs

    NIST 800-53 control mappings and relevancy

    NIST 800-53 control mappings and relevancy

    NIST 800-53 control mappings and relevancy

    Prioritized security controls based on risk and environmental makeup

    Mitigating security services for controls

    Effort and Risk Dashboard

    3 Cloud Security Architecture Mapping

    The Purpose

    Identify security services to mitigate challenges posed by the cloud in various areas of security.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Comprehensive list of security services, and their applicability to your network environment. Documentation of your “current” state of cloud security.

    Activities

    3.1 Cloud Security Control Mapping

    3.2 Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model Mapping

    Outputs

    1. Cloud Security Architecture Archive Document to codify and document each of the associated controls and their risk levels to security services

    2. Mapping of the codified controls onto Info-Tech’s Cloud Security Architecture Reference Model for clear security prioritization

    4 Cloud Security Strategy Planning

    The Purpose

    Prepare a communication deck for executive stakeholders to socialize them to the state of your cloud security initiatives and where you still have to go.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A roadmap for improving security in the cloud.

    Activities

    4.1 Cloud Security Strategy Considerations

    4.2 Cloud Security Architecture Communication Deck

    Outputs

    Consider the additional security considerations of the cloud for preparation in the communication deck.

    Codify all your results into an easily communicable communication deck with a clear pathway for progression and implementation of security services to mitigate cloud risks.

    Review and Improve Your IT Policy Library

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}193|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $34,724 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Your policies are out of date, disorganized, and complicated. They don’t reflect current regulations and don’t actually mitigate your organization’s current IT risks.
    • Your policies are difficult to understand, aren’t easy to find, or aren’t well monitored and enforced for compliance. As a result, your employees don’t care about your policies.
    • Policy issues are taking up too much of your time and distracting you from the real issues you need to address.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A dynamic and streamlined policy approach will:

    1. Right-size policies to address the most critical IT risks.
    2. Clearly lay out a step-by-step process to complete daily tasks in compliance.
    3. Obtain policy adherence without having to be “the police.”

    To accomplish this, the policy writer must engage their audience early to gather input on IT policies, increase policy awareness, and gain buy-in early in the process.

    Impact and Result

    • Develop more effective IT policies. Clearly express your policy goals and objectives, standardize the approach to employee problem solving, and write policies your employees will actually read.
    • Improve risk coverage. Ensure full coverage on the risk landscape, including legal regulations, and establish a method for reporting, documenting, and communicating risks.
    • Improve employee compliance. Empathize with your employees and use policy to educate, train, and enable them instead of restricting them.

    Review and Improve Your IT Policy Library Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to write better policies that mitigate the risks you care about and get the business to follow them, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess

    Assess your risk landscape and design a plan to update your policy network based on your most critical risks.

    • Review and Improve Your IT Policy Library – Phase 1: Assess
    • Policy Management RACI Chart Template
    • Policy Management Tool
    • Policy Action Plan

    2. Draft and implement

    Use input from key stakeholders to write clear, consistent, and concise policies that people will actually read and understand. Then publish them and start generating policy awareness.

    • Review and Improve Your IT Policy Library – Phase 2: Draft and Implement
    • Policy Template
    • Policy Communication Plan Template

    3. Monitor, enforce, revise

    Use your policies to create a compliance culture in your organization, set KPIs, and track policy effectiveness.

    • Review and Improve Your IT Policy Library – Phase 3: Monitor, Enforce, Revise
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Review and Improve Your IT Policy Library

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish & Assess

    The Purpose

    Identify the pain points associated with IT policies.

    Establish the policy development process.

    Begin formulating a plan to re-design the policy network.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the policy process.

    Highlight key issues and pain points regarding policy.

    Assign roles and responsibilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduce workshop.

    1.2 Identify the current pain points with policy management.

    1.3 Establish high-level goals around policy management.

    1.4 Select metrics to measure achievement of goals.

    1.5 Create an IT policy working group (ITPWG).

    1.6 Define the scope and purpose of the ITPWG.

    Outputs

    List of issues and pain points for policy management

    Set of six to ten goals for policy management

    Baseline and target measured value

    Amended steering committee or ITPWG charter

    Completed RACI chart

    Documented policy development process

    2 Assess Your Risk Landscape & Map Policies to Risks; Create a Policy Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Identify key risks.

    Develop an understanding of which risks are most critical.

    Design a policy network that best mitigates those risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Use a risk-driven approach to decide which policies need to be written or updated first.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify risks at a high level.

    2.2 Assess each identified risk scenario on impact and likelihood.

    2.3 Map current and required policies to risks.

    2.4 Assess policy effectiveness.

    2.5 Create a policy action plan.

    2.6 Select policies to be developed during workshop.

    Outputs

    Ranked list of IT’s risk scenarios

    Prioritized list of IT risks (simplified risk register)

    Policy action plan

    3 Develop Policies

    The Purpose

    Outline what key features make a policy effective and write policies that mitigate the most critical IT risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Write policies that work and get them approved.

    Activities

    3.1 Define the policy audience, constraints, and in-scope and out-of-scope requirements for a policy.

    3.2 Draft two to four policies

    Outputs

    Drafted policies

    4 Create a Policy Communication and Implementation Plan and Monitor & Reassess the Portfolio

    The Purpose

    Build an understanding of how well the organization’s value creation activities are being supported.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify an area or capability that requires improvement.

    Activities

    4.1 Review draft policies and update if necessary.

    4.2 Create a policy communication plan.

    4.3 Select KPIs.

    4.4 Review root-cause analysis techniques.

    Outputs

    Final draft policies

    Policy communications plan

    KPI tracking log

    Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}11|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}11|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}11|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $22,900
    • member rating average days saved: 20
    • Parent Category Name: Infra and Operations
    • Parent Category Link: /infra-and-operations
    The service desk is typically the first point of contact for clients and staff who need something. Make sure your team is engaged, involved, knowledgeable, and gives excellent customer service.

    Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}230|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management

    More than any other time, our world is changing. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

    A new threat will impact your organization's operations at some point. Make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences and that you understand where those threats may originate.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential operational impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect operations.
    • Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Impact and Result

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts with our Operational Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts to Your Organization Storyboard – Use this research to better understand the negative impacts of vendor actions to your brand reputation.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential operational impacts caused by vendors. Utilize Info-Tech's approach to look at the operational impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts to Your Organization Storyboard

    2. Operational Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the operational impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate - possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Operational Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Operational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Understand internal and external vendor risks to avoid potential disaster.

    Analyst perspective

    Organizations need to be aware of the operational damage vendors may cause to plan around those impacts effectively.

    Frank Sewell

    Organizations must be mindful that operational risks come from internal and external vendor sources. Missing either component in the overall risk assessment can significantly impact day-to-day business processes that cost revenue, delay projects, and lead to customer dissatisfaction.

    Frank Sewell,

    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    More than any other time, our world is changing rapidly. As a result, organizations – and their vendors – need to be able to adapt their plans to accommodate risk on an unprecedented level.

    A new threat will impact your organization's operations at some point. Make sure your plans are flexible enough to manage the inevitable consequences and that you understand where those threats may originate.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential operational impact on your organization requires multiple people in the organization across several functions. Those people all need coaching on the potential changes in the market and how these changes may affect operations.

    Organizational leadership is often taken unaware during crises, and their plans lack the flexibility to adjust to significant market upheavals.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks from vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts with our Operational Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations must evolve their risk assessments to be more adaptive to respond to threats in the market. Ongoing monitoring of the vendors tied to company operations, and understanding where those vendors impact your operations, is imperative to avoiding disasters.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    There are many components to vendor risk, including: Financial, Reputational, Operational, Strategic, Security, Regulatory & Compliance.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of Scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Operational risk impacts

    Potential losses to the organization due to incidents that affect operations.

    • In this blueprint we’ll explore operational risks, particularly from third-party vendors, and their impacts.
    • Identify potentially disruptive events to assess the overall impact on organizations and implement adaptive measures to identify, manage, and monitor vendor performance.
    Operational

    The world is constantly changing

    The IT market is constantly reacting to global influences. By anticipating changes, leaders can set expectations and work with their vendors to accommodate them.

    When the unexpected happens, being able to adapt quickly to new priorities ensures continued long-term business success.

    Below are some things no one expected to happen in the last few years:

    27%

    Businesses are changing their internal processes around TPRM in response to the Pandemic.

    70%

    Of organizations attribute a third-party breach to too much privileged access.

    85%

    Of breaches involved human factors (phishing, poor passwords, etc.).

    Assess internal and external operational risk impacts

    Due diligence and consistent monitoring are the keys to safeguarding your organization.

    Two sides of the Same Coin

    Internal

    • Poorly vetted supplemental staff
    • Bad system configurations
    • Lack of relevant skills
    • Poor vendor performance
    • Failure to follow established processes
    • Weak contractual accountability
    • Unsupportable or end-of-life system components

    External

    • Cyberattacks
    • Supply Chain Issues
    • Geopolitical Disruptions
    • Vendor Acquisitions
    • N-Party Non-Compliance
    • Vendor Fraud

    Operational risk is the risk of losses caused by flawed or failed processes, policies, systems, or events that disrupt business operations.

    - Wikipedia

    Internal operational risk

    Vendors operating within your secure perimeter can open your organization to substantial risk.

    Frequently monitor your internal process around vendor management to ensure safe operations.

    • Poorly vetted supplemental staff
    • Bad system configurations
    • Lack of relevant skills
    • Poor vendor performance
    • Failure to follow established processes
    • Weak contractual accountability
    • Unsupportable or end-of-life system components

    Info-Tech Insight

    You may have solid policies, but if your employees and vendors are not following them, they will not protect the organization.

    External operational risks

    • Cyberattacks
    • Supplier issues and geopolitical instability
    • Vendor acquisitions
    • N-party vendor non-compliance

    Identify and manage operational risks

    Poorly configured systems

    Failing to ensure that your vendor-supported systems are properly configured and that your vendors are meeting your IT change control and configuration standards is more commonplace than expected. Proper oversight and management of your support vendors are crucial to ensure they are meeting expectations in this regard.

    Failure to follow processes

    Most companies have policies and procedures around IT change and configuration control, security standards, risk management, vendor performance standards, etc. While having these processes is a good start, failure to perform continuous monitoring and management of these leads to increased risks of incidents.

    Supply chain disruptions

    Awareness of the supply chain's complications, and each organization's dependencies, are increasing for everyone. However, most organizations still do not understand the chain of n-party vendors that support their specific vendors or how interruptions in their supply chains could affect them. The 2022 Toyota shutdown due to Kojima is a perfect example of how one essential parts vendor could shut down your operations.

    What to look for

    Identify operational risk impacts

    • Does the vendor have a business continuity plan they will share for your review?
    • Is the vendor operating on old hardware that may be out of warranty or at end of life?
    • Is the vendor operating on older software or shareware that may lack the necessary patches?
    • Does the vendor self-audit, or do they use a vetted third-party audit firm to issue a SOC report annually?
    • Does the vendor have sufficient personnel in acceptable regions to support your operations?
    • Is the vendor willing to make concessions on contractual protections, or are they only offering “one-sided” agreements with “as-is” warranties?

    Operational risks

    Not knowing where your risks come from creates additional risks to operations.

    • Supply chain disruptions and global shortages.
      • Geopolitical disruptions and natural disasters have caused unprecedented interruptions to business. Do you know where your critical vendors are getting their supplies? Are you aware of their business continuity plans to accommodate for those interruptions?
    • Poor vendor performance.
      • Organizations need to understand where vendors are acting in their operations and manage the impact of replacing that vendor and cutting their losses rather than continuing to throw good money away after a bad performance.
    • Vendor acquisitions.
      • A lot of acquisition is going on in the market today. Large companies are buying competitors, imposing new terms on customers, or removing competing products from the market. Understand your options if a vendor is acquired by a company with which you do not wish to be in a relationship.

    It is important to identify where potential risks to your operations may come from to manage and potentially eliminate them from impacting your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most organizations realize that their vendors could operationally affect them if an incident occurs. Still, they fail to follow the chain of events that might arise from those incidents to understand the impact fully.

    Prepare your vendor risk management for success

    Due diligence will enable successful outcomes.

    1. Obtain top-level buy-in; it is critical to success.
    2. Build enterprise risk management (ERM) through incremental improvement.
    3. Focus initial efforts on the “big wins” to prove the process works.
    4. Use existing resources.
    5. Build on any risk management activities that already exist in the organization.
    6. Socialize ERM throughout the organization to gain additional buy‑in.
    7. Normalize the process long term with ongoing updates and continuing education for the organization.

    How to assess third-party operational risk

    1. Review Organizational Operations

      Understand the organization’s operational risks to prepare for the “what if” game exercise.
    2. Identify and Understand Potential Operational Risks

      Play the “what if” game with the right people at the table.
    3. Create a Risk Profile Packet for Leadership

      Pull all the information together in a presentation document.
    4. Validate the Risks

      Work with leadership to ensure that the proposed risks are in line with their thoughts.
    5. Plan to Manage the Risks

      Lower the overall risk potential by putting mitigations in place.
    6. Communicate the Plan

      It is important not only to have a plan but also to socialize it in the organization for awareness.
    7. Enact the Plan

      Once the plan is finalized and socialized, put it in place with continued monitoring for success.

    Insight summary

    Operational risk impacts often come from unexpected places and have unforeseen impacts. Knowing where your vendors place in critical business processes and those vendors' business continuity plans concerning your organization should be a priority for those who manage the vendors.

    Insight 1

    Organizations fail to plan for vendor acquisitions appropriately.

    Vendors routinely get acquired in the IT space. Does your organization have appropriate safeguards from inadvertently entering a negative relationship? Do you have plans around replacing critical vendors purchased in such a manner?

    Insight 2

    Organizations often fail to understand how they factor into a vendor’s business continuity plan.

    If one of your critical vendors goes down, do you know how they intend to re-establish business? Do you know how you factor into their priorities?

    Insight 3

    Organizations need to have a comprehensive understanding of how their vendor-managed systems integrate with Operations.

    Do you understand where in the business processes vendor-supported systems lie? Do you have contingencies around disruptions that account for those pieces missing from the process?

    Identifying operational vendor risk

    Who should be included in the discussion

    • While it is true that executive-level leadership defines the strategy for an organization, it is vital for those making decisions to make informed decisions.
    • Getting input from operational experts at your organization will enhance your organization's long-term potential for success.
    • Involving those who not only directly manage vendors but also understand your business processes will aid in determining the forward path for relationships with your current vendors and identifying new emerging potential partners.

    See the blueprint Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Review your operational plans for new risks on a regular basis.

    Keep in mind Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).

    Impact (I) tends to remain the same, while Likelihood (L) is becoming closer to 100% as threat actors become more prevalent

    Managing vendor operational risk impacts

    What can we realistically do about the risks?

    • Review vendors’ business continuity plans and disaster recovery testing.
      • Understand your priority in their plans.
    • Institute proper contract lifecycle management.
      • Make sure to follow corporate due diligence and risk assessment policies and procedures.
      • Failure to do so consistently can be a recipe for disaster.
    • Develop IT governance and change control.
    • Introduce continual risk assessment to monitor the relevant vendor markets.
      • Regularly review your operational plans for new risks and evolving likelihoods.
      • Risk = Likelihood x Impact (R=L*I).
        • Impact (I) tends to remain the same and be well understood, while Likelihood (L) may often be considered 100%.
    • Be adaptable and allow for innovations that arise from the current needs.
      • Capture lessons learned from prior incidents to improve over time and adjust your plans accordingly.

    Organizations need to review their organizational risk plans, considering the placement of vendors in their operations.

    Pandemics, extreme weather, and wars that affect global supply chains are current realities, not unlikely scenarios.

    Ongoing improvement

    Incorporating lessons learned

    • Over time, despite everyone’s best observations and plans, incidents will catch us off guard.
    • When it happens, follow your incident response plans and act accordingly.
    • An essential step is to document what worked and what did not – collectively known as the “lessons learned.”
    • Use the lessons learned document to devise, incorporate, and enact a better risk management process.

    Sometimes disasters occur despite our best plans to manage them.

    When this happens, it is important to document the lessons learned and improve our plans going forward.

    The "what if" game

    1-3 hours

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to help senior leadership identify and pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the "what if" game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible adverse outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    • Use the Operational Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potentials but manage the overall process to keep the discussion pertinent and on track.
    • Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts (SMEs) for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Operational Risk Impact Tool

    Input

    • List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and operational impact
    • List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output

    • Comprehensive operational risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Operational Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants

    • Vendor Management – Coordinator
    • Organizational Leadership
    • Operations Experts (SMEs)
    • Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager

    High risk example from tool

    Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Impacts. Lists questions impact score, weight, question and comments or notes.

    Being overly reliant on a single talented individual can impose risk to your operations. Make sure you include resiliency in your skill sets for critical business practices.

    Impact score and level. Each score for impacts are unique to the organization.

    Low risk example from tool

    Sample Questions to Ask to Identify Impacts. Lists questions impact score, weight, question and comments or notes. Impact score and level. Each score for impacts are unique to the organization.

    Summary

    Seek to understand all aspects of your operations.

    • Organizations need to understand and map out where vendors are critical to their operations.
    • Those organizations that consistently follow their established risk assessment and due diligence processes will be better positioned to avoid disasters.
    • Bring the right people to the table to outline potential risks in the market and your organization.
    • Understand how your vendors prioritize your organization in their business continuity processes.
    • Incorporate “lessons learned” from prior incidents into your risk management process to build better plans for future issues.

    Organizations must evolve their operational risk assessments considering their vendor portfolio.

    Ongoing monitoring of the market and the vendors tied to company operations is imperative to avoiding disaster.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Reputational Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your reputation and brand with our Reputational Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Strategic Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential risks to vendors in your market and suggest creative and alternative ways to avoid and help manage them.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage potential impacts on your strategic plan with our Strategic Risk Impact Tool.

    Bibliography

    “Weak Cybersecurity is taking a toll on Small Businesses.” Tripwire. August 7, 2022.

    SecureLink 2022 White Paper SL_Page_EA+PAM (rocketcdn.me)

    Member Poll March 2021 "Guide: Evolving Work Environments Impact of Covid-19 on Profile and Management of Third Parties.“ Shared Assessments. March 2021.

    “Operational Risk.” Wikipedia.

    Tonello, Matteo. “Strategic Risk Management: A Primer for Directors.” Harvard Law School Forum on Corporate Governance, August 23, 2012.

    Frigo, Mark L., and Richard J. Anderson. “Embracing Enterprise Risk Management: Practical Approaches for Getting Started.” COSO, 2011.

    IT Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}20|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}20|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}20|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,465
    • member rating average days saved: 35
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • Parent Category Link: strategy-and-governance
    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}399|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,308 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective but rarely from a business goal or outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    • Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    • Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps.
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value.
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value.
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience.
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance.

    Which will translate into the following relationship gains:

    • Embed IT into business value achievement.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing).
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop meaningful service metrics, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Executive Brief
    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics – Phases 1-3

    1. Design the metrics

    Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 1: Design the Metrics
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    2. Design reports and dashboards

    Present the right metrics in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 2: Design Reports and Dashboards
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    3. Implement, track, and maintain

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics, then continuously validate your approach and make refinements to the processes.

    • Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction – Phase 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Design the Metrics

    The Purpose

    Define stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria and identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes.

    Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design meaningful service metrics from stakeholder needs.

    Validate that metrics can be collected and measured.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points.

    1.2 Determine the success criteria and related IT services.

    1.3 Derive the service metrics.

    1.4 Validate the data collection process.

    1.5 Validate metrics with stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Understand stakeholder priorities

    Adopt a business-centric perspective to align IT and business views

    Derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders

    Determine if and how the identified metrics can be collected and measured

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics

    2 Design Reports and Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Determine the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure the metrics are presented in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to guarantee that they are read and used.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the different presentation options.

    2.2 Assess stakeholder needs for information.

    2.3 Select and design the metric report.

    Outputs

    Learn about infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard presentation options

    Determine how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making

    Select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look

    3 Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    The Purpose

    Run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics to validate your approach.

    Make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes prior to activating all service metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    High user acceptance and usability of the metrics.

    Processes of identifying and presenting metrics are continuously validated and improved.

    Activities

    3.1 Select the pilot metrics.

    3.2 Gather data and set initial targets.

    3.3 Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders.

    3.4 Implement the service metrics program.

    3.5 Track and maintain the metrics program.

    Outputs

    Select the metrics that should be first implemented based on urgency and impact

    Complete the service intake form for a specific initiative

    Create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets

    Establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated

    Identify the approach to implement the metrics program across the organization

    Set up mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity

    Further reading

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Select IT service metrics that drive business value.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Are you measuring and reporting what the business needs to know?

    “Service metrics are one of the key tools at IT’s disposal in articulating and ensuring its value to the business, yet metrics are rarely designed and used for that purpose.

    Creating IT service metrics directly from business and stakeholder outcomes and goals, written from the business perspective and using business language, is critical to ensuring that the services that IT provides are meeting business needs.

    The ability to measure, manage, and improve IT service performance in relation to critical business success factors, with properly designed metrics, embeds IT in the value chain of the business and ensures IT’s focus on where and how it enables business outcomes.”

    Valence Howden,
    Senior Manager, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • CIO
    • IT VPs
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Align business/IT objectives (design top-down or outside-in)
    • Significantly improve the relationship between the business and IT aspects of the organization
    • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Service Level Managers
    • Service Owners
    • Program Owners
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Identify unusual deviations from the normal operating state
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate the value of performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating benefits realization

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • IT organizations measure services from a technology perspective yet rarely measure services from a business goal/outcome perspective.
    • Most organizations do a poor job of identifying and measuring service outcomes over the duration of a service’s lifecycle – never ensuring the services remain valuable and meet expected long-term ROI.

    Complication

    • IT organizations have difficulty identifying the right metrics to demonstrate the value of IT services to the business in tangible terms.
    • IT metrics, as currently designed, reinforce division between the IT and business perspectives of service performance. They drive siloed thinking and finger-pointing within the IT structure, and prevent IT resources from understanding how their work impacts business value.

    Resolution

    • Our program enables IT to develop the right service metrics to tie IT service performance to business value and user experience.
    • Ensure the metrics you implement have immediate stakeholder value, reinforcing alignment between IT and the business while influencing behavior in the desired direction.
    • Make sure that your metrics are defined in relation to the business goals and drivers, ensuring they will provide actionable outcomes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.
    2. Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.
    3. Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors, which have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Service metrics 101

    What are service metrics?

    Service metrics measure IT services in a way that relates to a business outcome. IT needs to measure performance from the business perspective using business language.

    Why do we need service metrics?

    To ensure the business cares about the metrics that IT produces, start with business needs to make sure you’re measuring the right things. This will give IT the opportunity talk to the right stakeholders and develop metrics that will meet their business needs.

    Service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Perspectives Matter

    Different stakeholders will require different types of metrics. A CEO may require metrics that provide a snapshot of the critical success of the company while a business manager is more concerned about the performance metrics of their department.

    What are the benefits of implementing service metrics?

    Service metrics help IT communicate with the business in business terms and enables IT to articulate how and where they provide business value. Business stakeholders can also easily understand how IT services contribute to their success.

    The majority of CIOs feel metrics relating to business value and stakeholder satisfaction require significant improvement

    A significantly higher proportion of CIOs than CEOs feel that there is significant improvement necessary for business value metrics and stakeholder satisfaction reporting. Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Business Value Metrics'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    Stacked horizontal bar chart presenting survey results from CIOs and CXOs of 'Stakeholder Satisfaction Reporting'. Answer options are 'Effective', 'Some Improvement Necessary', 'Significant Improvement Necessary', and 'Not Required'.N=364

    (Source: Info-Tech CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Meaningless metrics are a headache for the business

    A major pitfall of many IT organizations is that they often provide pages of technical metrics that are meaningless to their business stakeholders.

    1. Too Many MetricsToo many metrics are provided and business leaders don’t know what to do with these metrics.
    2. Metrics Are Too TechnicalIT provides technical metrics that are hard to relate to business needs, and methods of calculating metrics are not clearly understood, articulated, and agreed on.
    3. Metrics Have No Business ValueService metrics are not mapped to business goals/objectives and they drive incorrect actions or spend.
    When considering only CEOs who said that stakeholder satisfaction reporting needed significant improvement, the average satisfaction score goes down to 61.6%, which is a drop in satisfaction of 12%.

    A bar that says 73% dropping to a bar that says 61%. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)

    Poorly designed metrics hurt IT’s image within the organization

    By providing metrics that do not articulate the value of IT services, IT reinforces its role as a utility provider and an outsider to strategic decisions.

    When the CIOs believe business value metrics weren’t required, 50% of their CEOs said that significant improvements were necessary.

    Pie Chart presenting the survey results from CEOs regarding 'Business Value Metrics'. Description above.

    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group CIO-CXO Alignment Diagnostic Survey)
    1. Reinforce the wrong behaviorThe wrong metrics drive us-against-them, siloed thinking within IT, and meeting metric targets is prioritized over providing meaningful outcomes.
    2. Do not reflect user experienceMetrics don’t align with actual business/user experience, reinforcing a poor view of IT services.
    3. Effort ≠ ValueInvesting dedicated resources and effort to the achievement of the wrong metrics will only leave IT more constrained for other important initiatives.

    Articulate meaningful service performance that supports the achievement of business outcomes

    Service metrics measure the performance of IT services and how they enable or drive the activity outcomes.

    A business process consists of multiple business activities. In many cases, these business activities require one or more supporting IT services.

    A 'Business Process' broken down to its parts, multiple 'Business Activities' and their 'IT Services'. For each business process, business stakeholders and their goals and objectives should be identified.

    For each business activity that supports the completion of a business process, define the success criteria that must be met in order to produce the desirable outcome.

    Identify the IT services that are used by business stakeholders for each business activity. Measure the performance of these services from a business perspective to arrive at the appropriate service metrics.

    Differentiate between different types of metrics

    Stakeholders have different goals and objectives; therefore, it is critical to identify what type of metrics should be presented to each stakeholder.

    Business Metrics

    Determine Business Success

    Business metrics are derived from a pure business perspective. These are the metrics that the business stakeholders will measure themselves on, and business success is determined using these metrics.

    Arrow pointing right.

    Service Metrics

    Manage Service Value to the Business

    Service metrics are used to measure IT service performance against business outcomes. These metrics, while relating to IT services, are presented in business terms and are tied to business goals.

    Arrow pointing right.

    IT Metrics

    Enable Operational Excellence

    IT metrics are internal to the IT organization and used to manage IT service delivery. These metrics are technical, IT-specific, and drive action for IT. They are not presented to the business, and are not written in business language.

    Implementing service metrics is a key step in becoming a service provider and business partner

    As a prerequisite, IT organizations must have already established a solid relationship with the business and have a clear understanding of its critical business-facing services.

    At the very least, IT needs to have a service-oriented view and understand the specific needs and objectives associated with each stakeholder.

    Visualization of 'Business Relationship Management' with an early point on the line representing 'Service Provider: Establish service-oriented culture and business-centric service delivery', and the end of the line being 'Strategic Partner'.

    Once IT can present service metrics that the business cares about, it can continue on the service provider journey by managing the performance of services based on business needs, determine and influence service demand, and assess service value to maximize benefits to the business.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both business relationship management (BRM) and service level management (SLM) provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Business Relationship Management

    BRM works to understand the goals and objectives of the business and inputs them into the design of the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    BRM leverages service metrics to help IT organizations manage the relationship with the business.

    BRM articulates and manages expectations and ensures IT services are meeting business requirements.

    Which processes drive service metrics?

    Both BRM and SLM provide inputs into and receive outputs from service metrics.

    Venn Diagram of 'Business Relationship Management', 'Service Metrics', and 'Service Level Management'.

    Service Level Management

    SLM works with the business to understand service requirements, which are key inputs in designing the service metrics.

    Service Metrics

    SLM leverages service metrics in overseeing the day-to-day delivery of IT services. It ensures they are provided to meet expected service level targets and objectives.

    Effective service metrics will deliver both service gains and relationship gains

    Effective service metrics will provide the following service gains:

    • Confirm service performance and identify gaps
    • Drive service improvement to maximize service value
    • Validate performance improvements while quantifying and demonstrating business value
    • Ensure service reporting aligns with end-user experience
    • Achieve and confirm process and regulatory compliance
        Which will translate into the following relationship gains:
        • Embed IT into business value achievement
        • Improve relationship between the business and IT
        • Achieve higher customer satisfaction (happier end users receiving expected service, the business is able to identify how things are really performing)
        • Reinforce desirable actions and behaviors from both IT and the business

    Don’t let conventional wisdom become your roadblock

    Conventional Wisdom

    Info-Tech Perspective

    Metrics are measured from an application or technology perspective Metrics need to be derived from a service and business outcome perspective.
    The business doesn’t care about metrics Metrics are not usually designed to speak in business terms about business outcomes. Linking metrics to business objectives creates metrics that the business cares about.
    It is difficult to have a metrics discussion with the business It is not a metrics/number discussion, it is a discussion on goals and outcomes.
    Metrics are only presented for the implementation of the service, not the ongoing outcome of the service IT needs to focus on service outcome and not project outcome.
    Quality can’t be measured Quality must be measured in order to properly manage services.

    Our three-phase approach to service metrics development

    Let Info-Tech guide you through your service metrics journey

    1

    2

    3

    Design Your Metrics Develop and Validate Reporting Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Sample of Phase 1 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Design Your Metrics'. Sample of Phase 2 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Develop and Validate Reporting'. Sample of Phase 3 of Info-Tech's service metric development package, 'Implement, Track, and Maintain'.
    Start the development and creation of your service metrics by keeping business perspectives in mind, so they are fully aligned with business objectives. Identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and need for metrics. Track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    CIOs must actively lead the design of the service metrics program

    The CIO must actively demonstrate support for the service metrics program and lead the initial discussions to determine what matters to business leaders.

    1. Lead the initiative by defining the need
      Show visible support and demonstrate importance
    2. Articulate the value to both IT and the business
      Establish the urgency and benefits
    3. Select and assemble an implementation group
      Find the best people to get the job done
    4. Drive initial metrics discussions: goals, objectives, actions
      Lead brainstorming with senior business leaders
    5. Work with the team to determine presentation formats and communication methods
      Identify the best presentation approach for senior stakeholders
    6. Establish a feedback loop for senior management
      Solicit feedback on improvements
    7. Validate the success of the metrics
      Confirm service metrics support business outcomes

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Design

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    The business is enabled to identify and improve service performance to their end customer # of improvement initiatives created based on service metrics
    $ cost savings/revenue generated due to actions derived from service metrics

    Procedure to validate the usefulness of IT metrics

    # / % of service metrics added/removed per year

    Alignment between IT and business objectives and processes Business’ satisfaction with IT

    Measure the success of your service metrics

    It is critical to determine if the designed service metrics are fulfilling their intended purpose. The process of maintaining the service metrics program and the outcomes of implementing service metrics need to be monitored and tracked.

    Validating Service Metrics Process

    Target Outcome

    Related Metrics

    Properly defined service metrics aligned with business goals/outcomes
    Easy understood measurement methodologies
    % of services with (or without) defined service metrics

    % of service metrics tied to business goals

    Consistent approach to review and adjust metrics# of service metrics adjusted based on service reviews

    % of service metrics reviewed on schedule

    Demonstrate monetary value and impact through the service metrics program

    In a study done by the Aberdeen Group, organizations engaged in the use of metrics benchmarking and measurement have:
    • 88% customer satisfaction rate
    • 60% service profitability
    • 15% increase in workforce productivity over the last 12 months

    Stock image of a silhouette of three people's head and shoulders.
    (Source: Aberdeen Group. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement.”)

    A service metric is defined for: “Response time for Business Application A

    The expected response time has not been achieved and this is visible in the service metrics. The reduced performance has been identified as having an impact of $250,000 per month in lost revenue potential.

    The service metric drove an action to perform a root-cause analysis, which identified a network switch issue and drove a resolution action to fix the technology and architect redundancy to ensure continuity.

    The fix eliminated the performance impact, allowing for recovery of the $250K per month in revenue, improved end-user confidence in the organization, and increased use of the application, creating additional revenue.

    Implementing and measuring a video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO interview and case material
    Situation

    The manufacturing business operates within numerous countries and requires a lot of coordination of functions and governance oversight. The company has monthly meetings, both regional and national, and key management and executives travel to attend and participate in the meetings.

    Complication

    While the meetings provide a lot of organizational value, the business has grown significantly and the cost of business travel has started to become prohibitive.

    Action

    It was decided that only a few core meetings would require onsite face-to-face meetings, and for all other meetings, the company would look at alternative means. The face-to-face aspect of the meetings was still considered critical so they focused on options to retain that aspect.

    The IT organization identified that they could provide a video conferencing service to meet the business need. The initiative was approved and rolled out in the organization.

    Result:

    IT service metrics needed to be designed to confirm that the expected value outcome of the implementation of video conferencing was achieved.

    Under the direction of the CIO, the business goals and needs driving use of the service (i.e. reduction in travel costs, efficiency, no loss of positive outcome) were used to identify success criteria and key questions to confirm success.

    With this information, the service manager was able to implement relevant service metrics in business language and confirmed an 80% adoption rate and a 95% success rate in term meetings running as expected and achieving core outcomes.

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop meaningful service metrics to ensure business and user satisfaction

    1. Design the Metrics 2. Design Reports and Dashboards 3. Implement, Track, and Maintain
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1. Defining stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    2. Derive meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validate with business stakeholders
    3. Validate metrics can be collected and measured
    4. Determine calculation methodology
    1. Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    2. Presentation format validated with stakeholders
    1. Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    2. Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    3. Roll out the metrics implementation for a broader audience
    4. Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance

    Guided Implementations

    • Design metrics based on business needs
    • Validate the metrics
    • Select presentation format
    • Review metrics presentation design
    • Select and implement pilot metrics
    • Determine rollout process and establish maintenance/tracking mechanism
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Derive Service Metrics From Business Goals
    Module 2:
    Select and Design Reports and Dashboards
    Module 3:
    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics to Ensure Success
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Meaningful service metrics designed from stakeholder needs
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Appropriate presentation format selected for each stakeholder
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Metrics implemented and process established to maintain and track program success

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.
    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4
    Design the Metrics
    Determine Presentation Format and Implement Metrics
    Gather Service Level Requirements
    Monitor and Improve Service Levels

    Activities

    • 1.1 Determine stakeholder needs
    • 1.2 Determine success criteria and key performance indicators
    • 1.3 Derive metrics
    • 1.4 Validate the metric collection
    • 2.1 Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data and select presentation format
    • 2.2 Select and design the metric report
    • Requirements
    • 3.1 Determine the business requirements
    • 3.2 Negotiate service levels
    • 3.3 Align operational level agreements (OLAs) and supplier contracts
    • 4.1 Conduct service report and perform service review
    • 4.2 Communicate service review
    • 4.3 Remediate issues using action plan
    • 4.4 Proactive prevention

    Deliverables

    1. Metrics Development Workbook
    1. Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    2. Metrics Tracking Tool
    1. Service Level Management SOP
    2. Service Level Agreement
    1. Service Level Report
    2. Service Level Review
    3. Business Satisfaction Report

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 1

    Design the Metrics

    Step (1): Design the Metrics

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Business Relationship Manager (BRM)
    • Service Level Manager (SLM)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Defined stakeholder needs for IT based on their success criteria
    • Identified IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derived meaningful service metrics based on identified IT services and validated with business stakeholders
    • Validated that metrics can be collected and measured
    • Determined calculation methodology

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Design the Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 1.1: Design Metrics Step 1.2: Validate the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Determine the stakeholder and their needs
    • Identify IT services that are tied to the delivery of business outcomes
    • Derive the service metrics
    Review findings with analyst:
    • For the selected metrics, identify the data source for collection
    • Validate whether or not the data can be created
    • Create a calculation method for the metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Using the methodology provided, identify additional stakeholders and map out their success criteria, including KPIs to determine the appropriate service metrics
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine whether the designed metrics are measurable, and if so, how
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Development Workbook

    Design your service metrics – overview

    Figure representing 'CIO'. Step 1
    Derive your service metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate your metrics

    Metrics Worksheet

    Figures representing 'CIO', 'SLM', and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Confirm with stakeholders

    Metrics Tracking Sheet

    A star.

    Defined IT Service Metrics

    Deriving the right metrics is critical to ensuring that you will generate valuable and actionable service metrics.

    Derive your service metrics from business objectives and needs

    Service metrics must be designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    Thus, IT must start by identifying specific stakeholder needs. The more IT understands about the business, the more relevant the metrics will be to the business stakeholders.

    1. Who are your stakeholders?
    2. What are their goals and pain points?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What do I need to measure?
    5. Derive your service metrics

    Derive your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 Metrics Development Workbook

    This workbook guides the development and creation of service metrics that are directly tied to stakeholder needs.

    This process will ensure that your service metrics are designed with the business perspective in mind so they are fully aligned with business objectives.

    1. Who are the relevant stakeholders?
    2. What are the goals and pain points of your stakeholders?
    3. What do the stakeholders need to know?
    4. What does IT need to measure?
    5. What are the appropriate IT metrics?

    Download the Metrics Development Workbook.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Development Workbook.

    Determine your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.1 0.5 Hour

    Who are your stakeholders?

    1. Identify the primary stakeholders of your service metrics. Stakeholders are the people who have a very specific need to know about how IT services affect their business outcomes. Different stakeholders can have different perspective on the same IT service metric.Most often, the primary target of service metrics are the business stakeholders, e.g. VP of a business unit.
    2. Identify any additional stakeholders. The CIO is also a stakeholder since they are effectively the business relationship manager for the senior leaders.

    Video Conferencing Case Study
    Manufacturing company

    For this phase, we will demonstrate how to derive the service metrics by going through the steps in the methodology.

    At a manufacturing company, the CIO’s main stakeholder is the CEO, whose chief concern is to improve the financial position of the company.

    Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2 0.5 Hour

    What are their goals and pain points?

    1. Clearly identify each stakeholder’s business goals and outcomes. These would be particular business goals related to a specific business unit.
    2. Identify particular pain points for each business unit to understand what is preventing them from achieving the desirable business outcome.

    VC Case Study

    One of the top initiatives identified by the company to improve financial performance was to reduce expense.

    Because the company has several key locations in different states, company executives used to travel extensively to carry out meetings at each location.

    Therefore, travel expenses represent a significant proportion of operational expenses and reducing travel costs is a key goal for the company’s executives.

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.3 0.5 Hour

    What do the stakeholders need to know?

    1. Identify the key things that the stakeholders would need to know based on the goals and pain points derived from the previous step.These are your success criteria and must be met to successfully achieve the desired goals.

    VC Case Study

    The CEO needs to have assurance that without executives traveling to each location, remote meetings can be as effective as in-person meetings.

    These meetings must provide the same outcome and allow executives to collaborate and make similar strategic decisions without the onsite, physical presence.

    Therefore, the success criteria are:

    • Reduced travel costs
    • Effective collaboration
    • High-quality meetings

    What do I need to measure?

    Supporting Tool icon 1.4 1 Hour

    What does IT need to measure?

    1. Identify the IT services that are leveraged to achieve the business goals and success criteria.
    2. Identify the users of those services and determine the nature of usage for each group of users.
    3. Identify the key indicators that must be measured for those services from an IT perspective.

    VC Case Study

    The IT department decides to implement the video conferencing service to reduce the number of onsite meetings. This technology would allow executives to meet remotely with both audio and video and is the best option to replicate a physical meeting.

    The service is initially available to senior executives and will be rolled out to all internal users once the initial implementation is deemed successful.

    To determine the success of the service, the following needs to be measured:

    1. Outcomes of VC meetings
    2. Quality of the VC meetings
    3. Reduction in travel expenses

    Derive service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 1.5 0.5 Hour

    Derive your service metrics

    1. Derive the service metrics that are meaningful to business stakeholders based on the IT services and the key indicators identified in the previous steps.
    2. Distinguish between service metrics and business metrics. You may identify some business metrics in addition to the IT metrics, and although these are important, IT doesn’t own the process of tracking and reporting business metrics.

    VC Case Study

    In the previous step, IT identified that it must measure the outcomes of VC meetings, quality of the VC meetings, and the reduction in travel expenses. From these, the appropriate service metrics can be derived to answer the needs of the CEO.

    IT needs to measure:

    1. Percent of VC meetings successfully delivered
    2. Growth of number of executive meetings conducted via VC
    Outcomes

    IT also identified the following business metrics:

    1. Reduction in percent of travel expense/spend
    2. Reduction in lost time due to travel

    Validate your metrics

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine whether or not it is viable to actually measure the metrics.

    Can you measure it? The first question IT must answer is whether the metric is measurable. IT must identify the data source, validate its ability to collect the data, and specify the data requirement. Not all metrics can be measured!
    How will you measure it? If the metric is measurable, the next step is to create a way to measure the actual data. In most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach.
    Define your actions Metrics must be used to drive or reinforce desirable outcomes and behaviors. Thus, IT must predetermine the necessary actions associated with the different metric levels, thresholds, or trends.

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Determine what data sources are available. Make sure that you know where the information you need is captured, or will need to be captured. This would include:
      • A ticket/request system
      • An auto discovery tool
      • A configuration management database ( CMDB)
    2. Confirm that IT has the ability to collect the information.
      • If the necessary data is already contained in an identified data source, then you can proceed.
      • If not, consider whether it’s possible to gather the information using current sources and systems.
      • Understand the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    VC Case Study

    Using the metric derived from the video conferencing service example, IT wants to measure the % of VC meetings successfully delivered.

    What are the data sources?

    • Number of VC meetings that took place
    • Number of service incidents
    • User survey

    Determine if you can measure the identified metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.6 0.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Understand your data requirements
      • To produce relevant metrics from your data, you need to ensure the level of quality and currency that provides you with useful information. You need to define:
        • The level of detail that has to be captured to make the data useful.
        • The consistency of the data, and how it needs to be entered or gathered.
        • The accuracy of the data. This includes how current the data needs to be, how quickly changes have to be made, and how data quality will be verified.

    VC Case Study

    Data requirement for percent of successful VC meetings:

    • Level of detail – user category, location, date/time,
    • Consistency – how efficiently are VC-related incidents opened and closed? Is the data collected and stored consistently?
    • Accuracy – is the information entered accurately?

    Create the calculation to measure it

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 0.5 Hour

    Determine how to calculate the metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS
    1. Develop the calculations that will be used for each accepted metric. The measurement needs to be clear and straightforward.
    2. Define the scope and assumptions for each calculation, including:
      • The defined measurement period (e.g. monthly, weekly)
      • Exclusions (e.g. nonbusiness hours, during maintenance windows)

    VC Case Study

    Metric: Percent of VC meetings delivered successfully

    IT is able to determine the total number of VC meetings that took place and the number of VC service requests to the help desk.

    That makes it possible to use the following formula to determine the success percentage of the VC service:

    ((total # VC) – (# of VC with identified incidents)) / (total # VC) * 100

    Define the actions to be taken for each metric

    Supporting Tool icon 1.7 1.5 Hour

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Centered on the defined metrics and their calculations, IT can decide on the actions that should be driven out of each metric based on one of the following scenarios:
    • Scenario 1: Ad hoc remedial action and root-cause investigation. If the reason for the result is unknown, determining root cause or identifying trends is required to determine required actions.
    • Scenario 2: Predefined remedial action. A set of predetermined actions associated with different results. This is useful when the meaning of the results is clear and points to specific issues within the environment.
    • Scenario 3: Nonremedial action. The metrics may produce a result that reinforces or supports company direction and strategy, or identifies an opportunity that may drive a new initiative or idea.

    VC Case Study

    If the success rate of the VC meetings is below 90%, IT needs to focus on determining if there is a common cause and identify if this is a consistent downward trend.

    A root-cause analysis is performed that identifies that network issues are causing difficulties, impacting the connection quality and usability of the VC service.

    Validate the confirmed metrics with the business

    Supporting Tool icon 1.8 1 Hour

    INPUT: Selected service metrics, Discussion with the business

    OUTPUT: Validated metrics with the business

    Materials: Metrics with calculation methodology

    Participants: IT and business stakeholders, Service owners

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Once you have derived the appropriate metrics and established that the metrics are measurable, you must go back to the targeted stakeholders and validate that the selected metrics will provide the right information to meet their identified goals and success criteria.
    2. Add confirmed metrics to the Metrics Tracking Tool, in the Metrics Tracking Plan tab.
    Service Metric Corresponding
    Business Goal
    Measurement
    Method
    Defined Actions

    Example: Measuring the online banking service at a financial institution

    Who are IT’s stakeholders? The financial institution provides various banking solutions to its customers. Retail banking is a core service offered by the bank and the VP of retail banking is a major stakeholder of IT.
    What are their goals and pain points? The VP of retail banking’s highest priorities are to increase revenue, increase market share, and maintain the bank’s brand and reputation amongst its customers.
    What do they need to know? In order to measure success, the VP of retail banking needs to determine performance in attracting new clients, retaining clients, expanding into new territory, and whether they have increased the number of services provided to existing clients.
    What does IT need to measure? The recent implementation of an online banking service is a key initiative that will keep the bank competitive and help retail banking meet its goals. The key indicators of this service are: the total number of clients, the number of products per client, percent of clients using online banking, number of clients by segment, service, territory.
    Derive the service metrics Based on the key indicators, IT can derive the following service metrics:
    1. Number of product applications originated from online banking
    2. Customer satisfaction/complaints
    As part of the process, IT also identified some business metrics, such as the number of online banking users per month or the number of times a client accesses online banking per month.

    Design service metrics to track service performance and value

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO
    Challenge Solution Results
    The IT organization needed to generate metrics to show the business whether the video conferencing service was being adopted and if it was providing the expected outcome and value.

    Standard IT metrics were technical and did not provide a business context that allowed for easy understanding of performance and decision making.

    The IT organization, working through the CIO and service managers, sat down with the key business stakeholders of the video conferencing service.

    They discussed the goals for the meeting and defined the success criteria for those goals in the context of video conference meeting outcomes.

    The success criteria that were discussed were then translated into a set of questions (key performance indicators) that if answered, would show that the success criteria were achieved.

    The service manager identified what could be measured to answer the defined questions and eliminated any metrics that were either business metrics or non-IT related.

    The remaining metrics were identified as the possible service metrics, and the ability to gather the information and produce the metric was confirmed.

    Service metrics were defined for:

    1. Percent of video conference meetings delivered successfully
    2. Growth in the number of executive meetings conducted via video conference

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    Sample of activity 1.1 'Determine your stakeholders'. Determine stakeholder needs, goals, and pain points

    The onsite analyst will help you select key stakeholders and analyze their business objectives and current pain points.

    1.2

    Sample of activity 1.2 'Identify goals and pain points of your stakeholders'. Determine the success criteria and related IT services

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion to uncover the information that these stakeholders care about. The group will also identify the IT services that are supporting these objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.5

    Sample of activity 1.5 'Derive service metrics'. Derive the service metrics

    Based on the key performance indicators obtained in the previous page, derive meaningful business metrics that are relevant to the stakeholders.

    1.6

    Sample of activity 1.6 'Determine if you can measure the identified metric'. Validate the data collection process

    The analyst will help the workshop group determine whether the identified metrics can be collected and measured. If so, a calculation methodology is created.

    1.7

    Sample of activity 1.7 'Create the caluclation to measure it'. Validate metrics with stakeholders

    Establish a feedback mechanism to have business stakeholders validate the meaningfulness of the metrics.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 2

    Design Reports and Dashboards

    Step (2): Design Reports and Dashboards

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Presentation format selected based on stakeholder needs and preference for information
    • Presentation format validated with stakeholders

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Design Reports and Dashboards

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 3 weeks
    Step 2.1: Select Presentation Format Step 2.2: Review Design
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the different format of metrics presentation and discuss the pros/cons of each format
    • Discuss stakeholder needs/preference for data
    • Select the presentation format
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Discuss stakeholder feedback based on selected presentation format
    • Modify and adjust the presentation format as needed
    Then complete these activities…
    • Design the metrics using the selected format
    Then complete these activities…
    • Finalize the design for metrics presentation
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Design the reports – overview

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Understand the pros and cons of different reporting styles
    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Determine your reporting and presentation style

    Presentation Format Selection

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Design your metrics reports
    A star.

    Validated Service Reports

    The design of service metrics reporting is critically important. The reporting style must present the right information in the most interesting and stakeholder-centric way possible to ensure that it is read and used.

    The reports must also display information in a way that generates actions. If your stakeholders cannot make decisions, kick off activities, or ask questions based on your reports, then they have no value.

    Determine the right presentation format for your metrics

    Most often, metrics are presented in the following ways:

    Dashboard
    (PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    Infographic
    (PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants.”)
    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    Report
    (PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights.”)
    Sample of the 'Report' metric presentation format.
    Scorecard
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Dashboard

    A dashboard is a reporting method that provides a dynamic at-a-glance view of key metrics from the perspective of key stakeholders. It provides a quick graphical way to process important performance information in real time.

    Features

    Typically web-based

    Dynamic data that is updated in real time

    Advantage

    Aggregates a lot of information into a single view

    Presents metrics in a simplistic style that is well understood

    Provides a quick point-in-time view of performance

    Easy to consume visual presentation style

    Disadvantage

    Complicated to set up well.
    Requires additional technology support: programming, API, etc.

    Promotes a short-term outlook – focus on now, no historical performance and no future trends. Doesn’t provide the whole picture and story.

    Existing dashboard tools are often not customized enough to provide real value to each stakeholder.

    Dashboards present real-time metrics that can be accessed and viewed at any time

    Sample of the 'Dashboard' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.”)
    Metrics presented through online dashboards are calculated in real time, which allows for a dynamic, current view into the performance of IT services at any time.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Infographic

    An infographic is a graphical representation of metrics or data, which is used to show information quickly and clearly. It’s based on the understanding that people retain and process visual information more readily than written details.

    Features

    Turns dry into attractive –transforms data into eye-catching visual memory that is easier to retain

    Can be used as the intro to a formal report

    There are endless types of infographics

    Advantage

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Eye catching

    Easily shared

    Spurs conversation

    Customizable

    Disadvantage

    Require design expertise and resources

    Can be time consuming to generate

    Could be easily misinterpreted

    Message can be lost with poor design

    Infographics allow for completely unique designs

    Sample of the 'Infographic' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants…”)
    There is no limit when it comes to designing an infographic. The image used here visually articulates the effects of new entrants pulling away the market.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Formal Report

    A formal report is a more structured and official reporting style that contains detailed research, data, and information required to enable specific business decisions, and to help evaluate performance over a defined period of time.

    Definition

    Metrics can be presented as a component of a periodic, formal report

    A physical document that presents detailed information to a particular audience

    Advantage

    More detailed, more structured and broader reporting period

    Formal, shows IT has put in the effort

    Effectively presents a broader and more complete story

    Targets different stakeholders at the same time

    Disadvantage

    Requires significant effort and resources

    Higher risk if the report does not meet the expectation of the business stakeholder

    Done at a specific time and only valuable for that specific time period

    Harder to change format

    Formal reports provide a detailed view and analysis of performance

    Sample of the 'Formal Report' metric presentation format.
    (Source: PwC Blogs. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?”)
    An effective report incorporates visuals to demonstrate key improvements.

    Formal reports can still contain visuals, but they are accompanied with detailed explanations.

    Understand the advantages and disadvantages of each reporting style – Scorecard

    A scorecard is a graphic view of the progress and performance over time of key performance metrics. These are in relation to specified goals based on identified critical stakeholder objectives.

    Features

    Incorporates multiple metrics effectively.

    Scores services against the most important organizational goals and objectives. Scorecards may tie back into strategy and different perspectives of success.

    Advantage

    Quick view of performance against objectives

    Measure against a set of consistent objectives

    Easily consumable

    Easy to retain

    Disadvantage

    Requires a lot of forethought

    Scorecards provide a time-bound summary of performance against defined goals

    Sample of the 'Scorecard' metric presentation format.
    (PwC. “Annual Report 2015.”)
    Scorecards provide a summary of performance that is directly linked to the organizational KPIs.

    Determine your report style

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    In this section, you will determine the optimal reporting style for the service metrics.

    This guide contains four questions, which will help IT organizations identify the most appropriate presentation format based on stakeholder preference and needs for metrics.

    1. Who is the relevant stakeholder?
    2. What are the defined actions for the metric?
    3. How frequently does the stakeholder need to see the metric?
    4. How does the stakeholder like to receive information?
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.
    Download the Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide.

    Determine your best presentation option

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1 2 Hours

    INPUT: Identified stakeholder and his/her role

    OUTPUT: Proper presentation format based on need for information

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program Manager

    After deciding on the report type to be used to present the metric, the organization needs to consider how stakeholders will consume the metric.

    There are three options based on stakeholder needs and available presentation options within IT.

    1. Paper-based presentation is the most traditional form of reporting and works well with stakeholders who prefer physical copies. The report is produced at a specific time and requires no additional IT capability.
    2. Online documents stored on webpages, SharePoint, or another knowledge management system could be used to present the metrics. This allows the report to be linked to other information and easily shared.
    3. Online dashboards and graphics can be used to have dynamic, real-time reporting and anytime access. These webpages can be incorporated into an intranet and allow the user to view the metrics at any time. This will require IT to continuously update the data in order to maintain the accuracy of the metrics.

    Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind

    Supporting Tool icon 2.2 30 Minutes
    1. Stakeholder-specificThe report must be driven by the identified stakeholder needs and preferences and articulate the metrics that are important to them.
    2. ClarityTo enable decision making and drive desired actions, the metrics must be clear and straightforward. They must be presented in a way that clearly links the performance measurement to the defined outcome without leading to different interpretations of the results.
    3. SimplicityThe report must be simple to read, understand, and analyze. The language of the report must be business-centric and remove as much complexity as possible in wording, imaging, and context.

    Be sure to consider access rights for more senior reports. Site and user access permissions may need to be defined based on the level of reporting.

    Metrics reporting on the video conferencing service

    CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview
    The Situation

    The business had a clear need to understand if the implementation of video conferencing would allow previously onsite meetings to achieve the same level of effectiveness.

    Reporting Context

    Provided reports had always been generated from an IT perspective and the business rarely used the information to make decisions.

    The metrics needed to help the business understand if the meetings were remaining effective and be tied into the financial reporting against travel expenses, but there would be limited visibility during the executive meetings.

    Approach

    The service manager reviewed the information that he had gathered to confirm how often they needed information related to the service. He also met with the CIO to get some insight into the reports that were already being provided to the business, including the ones that were most effective.

    Considerations

    The conversations identified that there was no need for a dynamic real-time view of the performance of the service, since tracking of cost savings and utility would be viewed monthly and quarterly. They also identified that the item would be discussed within a very small window of time during the management meetings.

    The Solution

    It was determined that the best style of reporting for the metric was an existing scorecard that was produced monthly, using some infographics to ensure that the information is clear at a glance to enable quick decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    Sample of presentation format option slide 'Determine the right presentation format for your metrics'. Understand the different presentation options

    The onsite analyst will introduce the group to the communication vehicles of infographic, scorecard, formal report, and dashboard.

    2.1

    Sample of activity 2.1 'Determine your best presentation option'. Assess stakeholder needs for information

    For selected stakeholders, the analyst will facilitate a discussion on how stakeholders would like to view information and how the metrics can be presented to aid decision making.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.2

    Sample of activity 2.2 'Design your metric reports with these guidelines in mind'. Select and design the metric report

    Based on the discussion, the working group will select the most appropriate presentation format and create a rough draft of how the report should look.

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    PHASE 3

    Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Step (3): Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    PHASE 1PHASE 2PHASE 3

    1.1

    Derive the Service Metrics

    1.2

    Validate the Metrics

    2.1

    Determine Reporting Format

    3.1

    Select Pilot Metrics

    3.2

    Activate and Maintain Metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Service Level Manager
    • Business Relationship Manager
    • Service Metrics Program Manager

    Activities in this step

    • Determine the first batch of metrics to be implemented as part of the pilot program
    • Create a process to collect and validate data, determine initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    • Present the metric reports to the relevant stakeholders and incorporate the feedback into the metric design
    • Establish a standard process and roll out the implementation of metrics in batches
    • Establish a process to monitor and track the effectiveness of the service metrics program and make adjustments when necessary

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Implement, Track, and Maintain Your Metrics

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 4 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select and Launch Pilot Metrics Step 3.2: Track and Maintain the Metrics
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Identify metrics that will be presented first to the stakeholders based on urgency or impact of the IT service
    • Determine the process to collect data, select initial targets, and integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the success of metrics and discuss feedback from stakeholders
    • Roll out the metrics implementation to a broader audience
    • Establish roles and timelines for metrics maintenance
    Then complete these activities…
    • Document the first batch of metrics
    • Document the baseline, initial targets
    • Create a plan to integrate with SLM and BRM functions
    Then complete these activities…
    • Create a document that defines how the organization will track and maintain the success of the metrics program
    • Review the metrics program periodically
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Implement, Track, and Maintain the Metrics

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 1
    Run your pilot

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 2
    Validate success

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    Figure representing 'SLM' and/or 'BRM'. Step 3
    Implement your metrics program in batches

    Metrics Tracking Tool

    A star.

    Active Service Metrics Program

    Once you have defined the way that you will present the metrics, you are ready to run a pilot with a smaller sample of defined service metrics.

    This allows you to validate your approach and make refinements to the implementation and maintenance processes where necessary, prior to activating all service metrics.

    Track the performance of your service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1

    The Metrics Tracking Tool will enable you to track goals and success metrics for your service metrics programs. It allows you to set long-term goals and track your results over time.

    There are three sections in this tool:
    1. Metrics Tracking Plan. Identify the metrics to be tracked and their purpose.
    2. Metrics Tracking Actuals. Monitor and track the actual performance of the metrics.
    3. Remediation Tracking. Determine and document the steps that need to be taken to correct a sub-performing metric.
    Sample of Info-Tech's Metrics Tracking Tool.

    Select pilot metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1 30 Minutes

    INPUT: Identified services, Business feedback

    OUTPUT: Services with most urgent need or impact

    Materials: Service catalog or list of identified services

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Business representatives

    To start the implementation of your service metrics program and drive wider adoption, you need to run a pilot using a smaller subset of metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    To determine the sample for the pilot, consider metrics that:

    • Are related to critical business services and functions
    • or
    • Address known/visible pain points for the business
    • or
    • Were designed for supportive or influential stakeholders

    Metrics that meet two or more criteria are ideal for the pilot

    Collect and validate data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics

    OUTPUT: A data collection mythology, Metrics tracking

    Materials: Metrics

    Participants: SLM, BRM, Service owner

    You will need to start collection and validation of your identified data in order to calculate the results for your pilot metrics.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Initiate data collection
      • Use the data sources identified during the design phase and initiate the data collection process.
    2. Determine start date
      • If historical data can be retrieved and gathered, determine how far back you want your measurements to start.
    3. Compile data and validate
      • Ensure that the information is accurate and up to date. This will require some level of data validation and audit.
    4. Run the metric
      • Use the defined calculation and source data to generate the metrics result.
    5. Record metrics results
      • Use the metrics tracking sheet to track the actual results.

    Determine initial targets

    Supporting Tool icon 3.3 1 Hour

    INPUT: Historical data/baseline data

    OUTPUT: Realistic initial target for improvement

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Service owner

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Identify an initial service objective based on one or more of the following options:

    1. Establish an initial target using historical data and trends of performance.
    2. Establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    3. Run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.

    The target may not always be a number - it could be a trend. The initial target will be changed after review with stakeholders

    Integrate with SLM and BRM processes

    Supporting Tool icon 3.4 1 Hour

    INPUT: SLM and BRM SOPs or responsibility documentations

    OUTPUT: Integrate service metrics into the SLM/BRM role

    Materials: SLM / BRM reports

    Participants: SLM, BRM, CIO, Program manager, Service manager

    The service metrics program is usually initiated, used, and maintained by the SLM and BRM functions.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Ensure that the metrics pilot is integrated with those functions by:

    1. Engaging with SLM and BRM functions/resources
      • Identify SLM and BRM resources associated with or working on the services where the metrics are being piloted
      • Obtain their feedback on the metrics/reporting
    2. Integrating with the existing reporting and meeting cycles
      • Ensure the metrics will be calculated and available for discussion at standing meetings and with existing reports
    3. Establishing the metrics review and validation cycle for these metrics
      • Confirm the review and validation period for the metrics in order to ensure they remain valuable and actionable

    Generate reports and present to stakeholders

    Supporting Tool icon 3.5 1 Hour

    INPUT: Identified metrics, Selected presentation format

    OUTPUT: Metrics reports that are ready for distribution

    Materials: Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide

    Participants: BRM, SLM, CIO, Business representatives

    INSTRUCTIONS

    Once you have completed the calculation for the pilot metrics:

    1. Confirm the report style for the selected metrics (as defined in Phase 2)
    2. Generate the reporting for the pilot metrics
    3. Present the pilot metric reports to the identified BRM and SLM resources who will present the reporting to the stakeholders
    4. Gather feedback from Stakeholders on metrics - results and process
    5. Create and execute remediation plans for any actions identified from the metrics
    6. Initiate the review cycle for metrics (to ensure they retain value)

    Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program

    Supporting Tool icon 3.6 1 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from pilot, Services in batch

    OUTPUT: Systematic implementation of metrics

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool

    Participants: BRM, SLM, Program manager

    Upon completion of the pilot, move to start the broader implementation of metrics across the organization:

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Identify the service metrics that you will implement. They can be selected based on multiple criteria, including:
      • Organizational area/business unit
      • Service criticality
      • Pain points
      • Stakeholder engagement (detractors, supporters)
    2. Create a rollout plan for implementation in batches, identifying expected launch timelines, owners, targeted stakeholders, and communications plans
    3. Use the implementation plan from the pilot to roll out each batch of service metrics:
      • Collect and validate data
      • Determine target(s)
      • Integrate with BRM and SLM
      • Generate and communicate reports to stakeholders

    Maintain the service metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7 1.5 Hour

    INPUT: Feedback from business stakeholders

    OUTPUT: Modification to individual metrics or to the process

    Materials: Metrics Tracking Tool, Metrics Development Workbook

    Participants: CIO, BRM, SLM, Program manager, Service owner

    Once service metrics and reporting become active, it is necessary to determine the review time frame for your metrics to ensure they remain useful.

    INSTRUCTIONS

    1. Confirm and establish a review time frame with stakeholders (e.g. annually, bi-annually, after organizational or strategic changes).
    2. Meet with stakeholders by the review date to discuss the value of existing metrics and validate:
      • Whether the goals associated with the metrics are still valid
      • If the metric is still necessary
      • If there is a more effective way to present the metrics
    3. Track actions based on review outcomes and update the remediation tracking sheet.
    4. Update tracking sheet with last complete review date.

    Maintain the metrics

    Supporting Tool icon 3.7

    Based on the outcome of the review meeting, decide what needs to be done for each metric, using the following options:

    Add

    A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    Triggers metrics design as shown in phases 1 and 2.

    Change

    A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.

    Remove

    The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.

    Maintain

    The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    Ensuring metrics remain valuable

    VC CASE STUDY
    Industry: Manufacturing | Source: CIO Interview

    Reviewing the value of active metrics

    When the video conferencing service was initially implemented, it was performed as a pilot with a group of executives, and then expanded for use throughout the company. It was understood that prior to seeing the full benefit in cost reduction and increased efficiency and effectiveness, the rate of use and adoption had to be understood.

    The primary service metrics created for the service were based on tracking the number of requests for video conference meetings that were received by the IT organization. This identified the growth in use and could be used in conjunction with financial metrics related to travel to help identify the impact of the service through its growth phase.

    Once the service was adopted, this metric continued to be tracked but no longer showed growth or expanded adoption.

    The service manager was no longer sure this needed to be tracked.

    Key Activity

    The metrics around requests for video conference meetings were reviewed at the annual metrics review meeting with the business. The service manager asked if the need for the metric, the goal of tracking adoption, was still important for the business.

    The discussion identified that the adoption rate was over 80%, higher than anticipated, and that there was no value in continuing to track this metric.

    Based on the discussion, the adoption metrics were discontinued and removed from data gathering and reporting, while a success rate metric was added (how many meetings ran successfully and without issue) to ensure the ongoing value of the video conferencing service.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Valence Howden, Senior Manager, CIO Advisory, Info-Tech Research Group.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Select pilot metrics'. Select the pilot metrics

    The onsite analyst will help the workshop group select the metrics that should be first implemented based on the urgency and impact of these metrics.

    3.2

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Collect and validate data'. Gather data and set initial targets

    The analyst will help the group create a process to gather data, measure baselines, and set initial targets.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    3.5

    Sample of activity 3.5 'Generate reports and present to stakeholders'. Generate the reports and validate with stakeholders

    The Info-Tech analyst will help the group establish a process to receive feedback from the business stakeholders once the report is generated.

    3.6

    Sample of activity 3.6 'Plan the rollout and implementation of the metrics reporting program'. Implement the service metrics program

    The analyst will facilitate a discussion on how to implement the metrics program across the organization.

    3.7

    Sample of activity 3.7 'Maintain the service metrics'. Track and maintain the metrics program

    Set up a mechanism to ensure the success of the metrics program by assessing process adherence and process validity.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    Service metrics are critical to ensuring alignment of IT service performance and business service value achievement.

    Insight 2

    Service metrics reinforce positive business and end-user relationships by providing user-centric information that drives responsiveness and consistent service improvement.

    Insight 3

    Poorly designed metrics drive unintended and unproductive behaviors that have negative impacts on IT and produce negative service outcomes.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Follow a methodology to identify metrics that are derived from business objectives.
    • Understand the proper presentation format based on stakeholder needs for information.
    • Establish a process to ensure the metrics provided will continue to provide value and aid decision making.

    Processes Optimized

    • Metrics presentation to business stakeholders
    • Metrics maintenance and tracking

    Deliverables Completed

    • Metrics Development Workbook
    • Metrics Presentation Format Selection Guide
    • Metrics Tracking Tool

    Research contributors and experts

    Name Organization
    Joe Evers Joe Evers Consulting
    Glen Notman Associate Partner, Citihub
    David Parker Client Program Manager, eHealth Ontario
    Marianne Doran Collins CIO, The CIO-Suite, LLC
    Chris Kalbfleisch Manager, Service Management, eHealth Ontario
    Joshua Klingenberg BHP Billiton Canada Inc.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Stock image of a menu. Design & Build a User-Facing Service Catalog
    The user-facing service catalog is the go-to place for IT service-related information.
    Stock image of a laptop keyboard. Unleash the True Value of IT by Transforming Into a Service Provider
    Earn your seat at the table and influence business strategy by becoming an IT service provider.

    Bibliography

    Pollock, Bill. “Service Benchmarking and Measurement: Using Metrics to Drive Customer Satisfaction and Profits.” Aberdeen Group. June 2009. http://722consulting.com/ServiceBenchmarkingandMeasurement.pdf

    PwC. “Mega-Trends and Implications.” RMI Discussion. LinkedIn SlideShare. September 2015. http://www.slideshare.net/AnandRaoPwC/mega-trends-and-implications-to-retirement

    PwC. “Healthcare’s new entrants: Who will be the industry’s Amazon.com?” Health Research Institute. April 2014. https://www.pwc.com/us/en/health-industries/healthcare-new-entrants/assets/pwc-hri-new-entrant-chart-pack-v3.pdf

    PwC. “Northern Lights: Where are we now?” PwC Blogs. 2012. http://pwc.blogs.com/files/12.09.06---northern-lights-2--summary.pdf

    PwC. “PwC’s key performance indicators

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}201|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The desire for rapid decision making is increasing and the complexity of data sources is growing; business users want access to several new data sources, but in a way that is controlled and easily consumable.
    • Organizations may understand the transformative potential of a big data initiative, but struggle to make the transition from the awareness of its importance to identifying a concrete use case for a pilot project.
    • The big data ecosystem is crowded and confusing, and a lack of understanding of that ecosystem may cause a paralysis for organizations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Big data is simply data. With technological advances, what was once considered big data is now more approachable for all organizations irrespective of size.
    • The variety element is the key to unlocking big data value. Drill down into your specific use cases more effectively by focusing on what kind of data you should use.
    • Big data is about deep analytics. Deep doesn’t mean difficult. Visualization of data, integrating new data, and understanding associations are ways to deepen your analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish a foundational understanding of what big data entails and what the implications of its different elements are for your organization.
    • Confirm your current maturity for taking on a big data initiative, and make considerations for core data management practices in the context of incorporating big data.
    • Avoid boiling the ocean by pinpointing use cases by industry and functional unit, followed by identifying the most essential data sources and elements that will enable the initiative.
    • Leverage a repeatable pilot project framework to build out a successful first initiative and implement future projects en-route to evolving a big data program.

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should leverage big data, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Undergo big data education

    Build a foundational understanding of the current big data landscape.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 1: Undergo Big Data Education

    2. Assess big data readiness

    Appraise current capabilities for handling a big data initiative and revisit the key data management practices that will enable big data success.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 2: Assess Big Data Readiness
    • Big Data Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Pinpoint a killer big data use case

    Armed with Info-Tech’s variety dimension framework, identify the top use cases and the data sources/elements that will power the initiative.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 3: Pinpoint a Killer Big Data Use Case
    • Big Data Use-Case Suggestion Tool

    4. Structure a big data proof-of-concept project

    Leverage a repeatable framework to detail the core components of the pilot project.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 4: Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project
    • Big Data Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data Scientist
    • Big Data Cost/Benefit Tool
    • Big Data Stakeholder Presentation Template
    • Big Data Communication Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Undergo Big Data Education

    The Purpose

    Understand the basic elements of big data and its relationship to traditional business intelligence.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common, foundational knowledge of what big data entails.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine which of the four Vs is most important to your organization.

    1.2 Explore new data through a social lens.

    1.3 Brainstorm new opportunities for enhancing current reporting assets with big data sources.

    Outputs

    Relative importance of the four Vs from IT and business perspectives

    High-level improvement ideas to report artifacts using new data sources

    2 Assess Your Big Data Readiness

    The Purpose

    Establish an understanding of current maturity for taking on big data, as well as revisiting essential data management practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete idea of current capabilities.

    Recommended actions for developing big data maturity.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your organization’s current big data maturity level.

    2.2 Plan for big data management.

    Outputs

    Established current state maturity

    Foundational understanding of data management practices in the context of a big data initiative

    3 Pinpoint Your Killer Big Data Use Case

    The Purpose

    Explore a plethora of potential use cases at the industry and business unit level, followed by using the variety element of big data to identify the highest value initiative(s) within your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    In-depth characterization of a pilot big data initiative that is thoroughly informed by the business context.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify big data use cases at the industry and/or departmental levels.

    3.2 Conduct big data brainstorming sessions in collaboration with business stakeholders to refine use cases.

    3.3 Revisit the variety dimension framework to scope your big data initiative in further detail.

    3.4 Create an organizational 4-column data flow model with your big data sources/elements.

    3.5 Evaluate data sources by considering business value and risk.

    3.6 Perform a value-effort assessment to prioritize your initiatives.

    Outputs

    Potential big data use cases

    Potential initiatives rooted in the business context and identification of valuable data sources

    Identification of specific data sources and data elements

    Characterization of data sources/elements by value and risk

    Prioritization of big data use cases

    4 Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project

    The Purpose

    Put together the core components of the pilot project and set the stage for enterprise-wide support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A repeatable framework for implementing subsequent big data initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Construct a work breakdown structure for the pilot project.

    4.2 Determine your project’s need for a data scientist.

    4.3 Establish the staffing model for your pilot project.

    4.4 Perform a detailed cost/benefit analysis.

    4.5 Make architectural considerations for supporting the big data initiative.

    Outputs

    Comprehensive list of tasks for implementing the pilot project

    Decision on whether or not a data scientist is needed, and where data science capabilities will be sourced

    RACI chart for the project

    Big data pilot cost/benefit summary

    Customized, high-level architectural model that incorporates technologies that support big data

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}396|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $59,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 66 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Organizations often don’t understand which technical services affect user-facing services.
    • Organizations lack clarity around ownership of responsibilities for service delivery.
    • Organizations are vulnerable to change-related incidents when they don’t have insight into service dependencies and their business impact.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Even IT professionals underestimate the effort and the complexity of technical components required to deliver a service.
    • Info-Tech’s methodology promotes service orientation among technical teams by highlighting how their work affects the value of user-facing services.
    • CIOs can use the technical part of the catalog as a tool to articulate the value, dependencies, and constraints of services to business leaders.

    Impact and Result

    • Extend the user-facing service catalog to document the people, processes, and technology required to deliver user-facing services.
    • Bring transparency to how services are delivered to better articulate IT’s capabilities and strengthen IT-business alignment.
    • Increase IT’s ability to assess the impact of changes, make informed decisions, and mitigate change-related risks.
    • Respond to incidents and problems in the IT environment with more agility due to reduced diagnosis time for issues.

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build the technical components of your service catalog, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the project

    Build a strong foundation for the project to increase the chances of success.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 1: Launch the Project
    • Service Catalog Extension Project Charter
    • Service Catalog Extension Training Deck

    2. Identify service-specific technologies

    Identify which technologies are specific to certain services.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 2: Identify Service-Specific Technology
    • IT Service Catalog

    3. Identify underpinning technologies

    Determine which technologies underpin the existence of user-facing services.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 3: Identify Underpinning Services

    4. Map the people and processes to the technologies they support

    Document the roles and responsibilities required to deliver each user-facing service.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 4: Determine People & Process
    • Service Definitions: Visual Representations
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the Project

    The Purpose

    Build a foundation to kick off the project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A carefully selected team of project participants.

    Identified stakeholders and metrics.

    Activities

    1.1 Create a communication plan

    1.2 Complete the training deck

    Outputs

    Project charter

    Understanding of the process used to complete the definitions

    2 Identify Service-Specific Technologies and Underpinning Technologies

    The Purpose

    Determine the technologies that support the user-facing services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of what is required to run a service.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine service-specific technology categories

    2.2 Identify service-specific technologies

    2.3 Determine underpinning technologies

    Outputs

    Logical buckets of service-specific technologies makes it easier to identify them

    Identified technologies

    Identified underpinning services and technologies

    3 Identify People and Processes

    The Purpose

    Discover the roles and responsibilities required to deliver each user-facing service.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of what is required to deliver each user-facing service.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine roles required to deliver services based on organizational structure

    3.2 Document the services

    Outputs

    Mapped responsibilities to each user-facing service

    Completed service definition visuals

    4 Complete the Service Definition Chart and Visual Diagrams

    The Purpose

    Create a central hub (database) of all the technical components required to deliver a service.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Single source of information where IT can see what is required to deliver each service.

    Ability to leverage the extended catalog to benefit the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Document all the previous steps in the service definition chart and visual diagrams

    4.2 Review service definition with team and subject matter experts

    Outputs

    Completed service definition visual diagrams and completed catalog

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}234|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,716 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Contract reviews are tedious, and reviewers may lack the skills and experience to effectively complete the process.
    • Vendors have a repository of contract terms and conditions that are road-tested and often biased in their favor.
    • Vendors change their contracts frequently through hyperlinked documents without notifying customers, and the onus is on you to stay compliant.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on the terms and conditions, not just the price. Too often, organizations focus on the price contained within their contracts, neglecting to address core terms and conditions that can end up costing multiples of the initial price.
    • Lawyers can’t ensure you get the best business deal. Lawyers tend to look at general terms and conditions for legal risk and may not understand IT-specific components and business needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Align contract language to meet IT and business needs.
    • Communicate more effectively with Legal and the vendors.
    • Identify and reduce contractual and performance risk.
    • Understand the relationship between contract provisions.
    • Negotiate more effectively.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should employ a systematic process for reviewing contracts, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess contract terms and conditions

    Review and assess your IT contracts for vendor-biased terms and conditions, and gain tips for getting vendors to take on their fair share of risk and become more accountable.

    • Contract Review Tool
    • Contract Playbook
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Contract Terms and Conditions

    The Purpose

    Understand IT contract clauses, improve risk identification, and be more effective at negotiating contract terms.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Increased awareness of how contract provisions relate to each other.

    Demystification of legalese and legal concepts.

    Increased ability to seek assistance from internal parties (e.g. Legal, Risk, and Procurement).

    Activities

    1.1 Review the Contract Review Tool.

    1.2 Review the Contract Playbook template.

    1.3 Review 35 contract provisions and reinforce key learnings with exercises (spread across three days)

    Outputs

    Partial completion of the template

    Exercise results and debrief

    Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}367|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $129,465 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 12 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Processes pertaining to managing the application are inconsistent and do not drive excellence.
    • There is a lack of interdepartmental collaboration between different teams pertaining to the application.
    • There are no formalized roles and responsibilities for governance and support around enterprise applications.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Scale the Center of Excellence (CoE) based on business needs. There is flexibility in how extensively the CoE methodology is applied and rigidity in how consistently it should be used.
    • The CoE is a refinery. It takes raw inputs from the business and produces an enhanced product, removing waste and isolating it from re-entering day-to-day operations.
    • Excellence is about people as much as it is about process. Documented best practices should include competencies, key resources, and identified champions to advocate the CoE practice.

    Impact and Result

    • Formalize roles and responsibilities for all application initiatives.
    • Develop a standard process of governance and oversight surrounding the application.
    • Develop a comprehensive support network that consists of IT, the business, and external stakeholders to address issues and problem areas surrounding the application.

    Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish a Center of Excellence for your enterprise application, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a vision for the CoE

    Understand the importance of developing an enterprise application CoE, define its scope, and identify key stakeholders.

    • Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence – Phase 1: Create a Vision for the Center of Excellence
    • Enterprise Application Center of Excellence Project Charter

    2. Design the CoE future state

    Gather high-level requirements to determine the ideal future state.

    • Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence – Phase 2: Design the Center of Excellence Future State
    • Center of Excellence Refinery Model Template

    3. Develop a CoE roadmap

    Assess the required capabilities to reach the ideal state CoE.

    • Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence – Phase 3: Develop a Center of Excellence Roadmap
    • Center of Excellence Exceptions Report
    • Track and Measure Benefits Tool
    • Enterprise Application Center of Excellence Stakeholder Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Create a Vision for the CoE

    The Purpose

    Understand the importance of developing a CoE for enterprise applications.

    Determine how to best align the CoE mandate with business objectives.

    Complete a CoE project charter to gain buy-in, build a project team, and track project success. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key stakeholders identified.

    Project team created with defined roles and responsibilities.

    Project charter finalized to gain buy-in.

    Activities

    1.1 Evaluate business needs and priorities.

    1.2 Identify key stakeholders and the project team.

    1.3 Align CoE with business priorities.

    1.4 Map current state CoE.

    Outputs

    Project vision

    Defined roles and responsibilities

    Strategic alignment of CoE and the business

    CoE current state schematic

    2 Design the CoE Future State

    The Purpose

    Gain a thorough understanding of pains related to the lack of application governance.

    Identify and recycle existing CoE practices.

    Visualize the CoE enhancement process.

    Visualize your ideal state CoE. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Requirements to strengthen the case for the enterprise application CoE.

    CoE value-add refinery.

    Future potential of the CoE.

    Activities

    2.1 Gather requirements.

    2.2 Map the CoE enhancement process.

    2.3 Sketch future state CoE.

    Outputs

    Classified pains, opportunities, and existing practices

    CoE refinery model

    Future state CoE sketch

    3 Develop a CoE Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Assess required capabilities and resourcing.

    List and prioritize CoE initiatives.

    Track and monitor CoE performance. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Next steps for the enterprise application CoE.

    CoE resourcing plan.

    CoE benefits realization tracking.

    Activities

    3.1 Build CoE capabilities.

    3.2 Identify risks and mitigation efforts.

    3.3 Prioritize and track CoE initiatives.

    3.4 Finalize stakeholder presentation.

    Outputs

    CoE potential capabilities

    Risk management plan

    CoE initiatives roadmap

    CoE stakeholder presentation

    IBM i Migration Considerations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}109|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    IBM i remains a vital platform and now many CIOs, CTOs, and IT leaders are faced with the same IBM i challenges regardless of industry focus: how do you evaluate the future viability of this platform, assess the future fit and purpose, develop strategies, and determine the future of this platform for your organization?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    For organizations that are struggling with the iSeries/IBM i platform, resourcing challenges are typically the culprit. An aging population of RPG programmers and system administrators means organizations need to be more pro-active in maintaining in-house expertise. Migrating off the iSeries/IBM i platform is a difficult option for most organizations due to complexity, switching costs in the short term, and a higher long-term TCO.

    Impact and Result

    The most common tactic is for the organization to better understand their IBM i options and adopt some level of outsourcing for the non-commodity platform retaining the application support/development in-house. To make the evident, obvious; the options here for the non-commodity are not as broad as with commodity server platforms. Options include co-location, onsite outsourcing, managed and public cloud services.

    IBM i Migration Considerations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. IBM i Migration Considerations – A brief deck that outlines key migration options for the IBM i platforms.

    This project will help you evaluate the future viability of this platform; assess the fit, purpose, and price; develop strategies for overcoming potential challenges; and determine the future of this platform for your organization.

    • IBM i Migration Considerations Storyboard

    2. Infrastructure Outsourcing IBM i Scoring Tool – A tool to collect vendor responses and score each vendor.

    Use this scoring sheet to help you define and evaluate IBM i vendor responses.

    • Infrastructure Outsourcing IBM i Scoring Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    IBM i Migration Considerations

    Don’t be overwhelmed by IBM i migration options.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IBM i remains a vital platform and now many CIO, CTO, and IT leaders are faced with the same IBM i challenges regardless of industry focus; how do you evaluate the future viability of this platform, assess the future fit and purpose, develop strategies, and determine the future of this platform for your organization?

    Common Obstacles

    For organizations that are struggling with the iSeries/IBM i platform, resourcing challenges are typically the culprit. An aging population of RPG programmers and system administrators means organizations need to be more proactive in maintaining in-house expertise. Migrating off the iSeries/IBM i platform is a difficult option for most organizations due to complexity, switching costs in the short term, and a higher long-term TCO.

    Info-Tech Approach

    The most common tactic is for the organization to better understand its IBM i options and adopt some level of outsourcing for the non-commodity platform, retaining the application support/development in-house. To make the evident, obvious: the options here for the non-commodity are not as broad as with commodity server platforms. Options include co-location, onsite outsourcing, managed hosting, and public cloud services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    “For over twenty years, IBM was ‘king,’ dominating the large computer market. By the 1980s, the world had woken up to the fact that the IBM mainframe was expensive and difficult, taking a long time and a lot of work to get anything done. Eager for a new solution, tech professionals turned to the brave new concept of distributed systems for a more efficient alternative. On June 21, 1988, IBM announced the launch of the AS/400, their answer to distributed computing.” (Dale Perkins)

    Review

    We help IT leaders make the most of their IBM i environment.

    Problem Statement:

    The IBM i remains a vital platform for many businesses and continues to deliver exceptional reliability and performance and play a key role in the enterprise. With the limited resources at hand, CIOs and the like must continually review and understand their migration path with the same regard as any other distributed system roadmap.

    This research is designed for:

    • IT strategic direction decision makers
    • IT managers responsible for an existing iSeries or IBM i platform
    • Organizations evaluating platforms for mission-critical applications

    This research will help you:

    1. Evaluate the future viability of this platform.
    2. Assess the fit, purpose, and price.
    3. Develop strategies for overcoming potential challenges.
    4. Determine the future of this platform for your organization.

    The “fit for purpose” plot

    Thought Model

    We will investigate the aspect of different IBM i scenarios as they impact business, what that means, and how that can guide the questions that you are asking as you move to an aligned IBM i IT strategy. Our model considers:

    • Importance to Business Outcomes
      • Important to strategic objectives
      • Provides competitive advantage
      • Non-commodity IT service or process
      • Specialized in-house knowledge required
    • Vendor’s Performance Advantage
      • Talent or access to skills
      • Economies of scale or lower cost at scale
      • Access to technology

    Info-Tech Insights

    With multiple control points to be addressed, care must be taken in simplifying your options while addressing all concerns to ease operational load.

    Map different 'IBM i' scenarios with axes 'Importance to Business Outcomes - Low to High' and 'Vendor’s Performance Advantage - Low to High'. Quadrant labels are '[LI/LA] Potentially Outsource: Service management, Help desk, desk-side support, Asset management', '[LI/HA] Outsource: Application & Infra Support, Web Hosting, SAP Support, Email Services, Infrastructure', '[HI/LA] Insource (For Now): Application development tech support', and '[HI/HA] Potentially Outsource: Onshore or offshore application maintenance'.

    IBM i environments are challenging

    “The IBM i Reality” – Darin Stahl

    Most members relying on business applications/workloads running on non-commodity platforms (zSeries, IBM i, Solaris, AIX, etc.) are first motivated to get out from under the perceived higher costs for the hardware platform.

    An additional challenge for non-commodity platforms is that from an IT Operations Management perspective they become an island with a diminishing number of integrated operations skills and solutions such as backup/restore and monitoring tools.

    The most common tactic is for the organization to adopt some level of outsourcing for the non-commodity platform, retaining the application support and development in-house.

    Key challenges with current IBM i environments:
    1. DR Requirements
      Understand what the business needs are and where users and resources are located.
    2. Market Lack of Expertise
      Skilled team members are hard to find.
    3. Cost Management
      There is a perceived cost disadvantage to managing on-prem solutions.
    4. Aging Support Teams
      Current support teams are aging with little backfill in skill and experience.

    Understand your options

    Co-Location

    A customer transitions their hardware environment to a provider’s data center. The provider can then manage the hardware and “system.”

    Onsite Outsourcing

    A provider will support the hardware/system environment at the client’s site.

    Managed Hosting

    A customer transitions their legacy application environment to an off-prem hosted, multi-tenanted environment.

    Public Cloud

    A customer can “re-platform” the non-commodity workload into public cloud offerings or in a few offerings “re-host.”

    Co-Location

    Provider manages the data center hardware environment.

    Abstract

    Here a provider manages the system data center environment and hardware; however, the client’s in-house IBM i team manages the IBM i hardware environment and the system applications. The client manages all of the licenses associated with the platform as well as the hardware asset management considerations. This is typically part of a larger services or application transformation. This effectively outsources the data center management while maintaining all IBM i technical operations in-house.

    Advantages

    • On-demand bandwidth
    • Cost effective
    • Secure and compliant environment
    • On-demand remote “hands and feet” services
    • Improved IT DR services
    • Data center compliance

    Considerations

    • Application transformation
    • CapEx cost
    • Fluctuating network bandwidth costs
    • Secure connectivity
    • Disaster recovery and availability of vendor
    • Company IT DR and BC planning
    • Remote system maintenance (HW)

    Info-Tech Insights

    This model is extremely attractive for organizations looking to reduce their data center management footprint. Idea for the SMB.

    Onsite Sourcing

    A provider will support the hardware/system environment at the client’s site.

    Abstract

    Here a provider will support and manage the hardware/system environment at the client’s site. The provider may acquire the customer’s hardware and provide software licenses. This could also include hiring or “rebadging” staff supporting the platform. This type of arrangement is typically part of a larger services or application transformation. While low risk, it is not as cost-effective as other deployment models.

    Advantages

    • Managed environment within company premises
    • Cost effective (OpEx expense)
    • Economies of scale
    • On-demand “as-a-service” model
    • Improved IT DR staffing services
    • 24x7 monitoring and support

    Considerations

    • Outsourced IT talent
    • Terms and contract conditions
    • IT staff attrition
    • Increased liability
    • Modified technical support and engagement
    • Secure connectivity and communication
    • Internal problem and change management

    Info-Tech Insights

    Depending on the application lifecycle and viability, in-house skill and technical depth is a key consideration when developing your IBM i strategy.

    Managed Hosting

    Transition legacy application environment to an off-prem hosted multi-tenanted environment.

    Abstract

    This type of arrangement is typically part of an application migration or transformation. In this model, a client can “re-platform” the application into an off-premises-hosted provider platform. This would yield many of the cloud benefits however in a different scaling capacity as experienced with commodity workloads (e.g. Windows, Linux) and the associated application.

    Advantages

    • Turns CapEx into OpEx
    • Reduces in-house need for diminishing or scarce human resources
    • Allows the enterprise to focus on the value of the IBM i platform through the reduction of system administrative toil
    • Improved IT DR services
    • Data center compliance

    Considerations

    • Application transformation
    • Network bandwidth
    • Contract terms and conditions
    • Modified technical support and engagement
    • Secure connectivity and communication
    • Technical security and compliance
    • Limited providers; reduced options

    Info-Tech Insights

    There is a difference between a “re-host” and “re-platform” migration strategy. Determine which solution aligns to the application requirements.

    Public Cloud

    Leverage “public cloud” alternatives with AWS, Google, or Microsoft AZURE.

    Abstract

    This type of arrangement is typically part of a larger migration or application transformation. While low risk, it is not as cost-effective as other deployment models. In this model, client can “re-platform” the non-commodity workload into public cloud offerings or in a few offerings “re-host.” This would yield many of the cloud benefits however in a different scaling capacity as experienced with commodity workloads (e.g. Windows, Linux).

    Advantages

    • Remote workforce accessibility
    • OpEx expense model
    • Improved IT DR services
    • Reduced infrastructure and system administration
    • Vendor management
    • 24x7 monitoring and support

    Considerations

    • Contract terms and conditions
    • Modified technical support and engagement
    • Secure connectivity and communication
    • Technical security and compliance
    • Limited providers; reduced options
    • Vendor/cloud lock-in
    • Application migration/”re-platform”
    • Application and system performance

    Info-Tech Insights

    This model is extremely attractive for organizations that consume primarily cloud services and have a large remote workforce.

    Understand your vendors

    • To best understand your options, you need to understand what IBM i services are provided by the industry vendors.
    • Within the following slides, you will find a defined activity with a working template that will create “vendor profiles” for each vendor.
    • As a working example, you can review the following partners:
    • Connectria (United States)
    • Rowton IT Solutions Ltd (United Kingdom)
    • Mid-Range (Canada)

    Info-Tech Insights

    Creating vendor profiles will help quickly filter the solution providers that directly meet your IBM i needs.

    Vendor Profile #1

    Rowton IT

    Summary of Vendor

    “Rowton IT thrive on creating robust and simple solutions to today's complex IT problems. We have a highly skilled and motivated workforce that will guarantee the right solution.

    Working with select business partners, we can offer competitive and cost effective packages tailored to suit your budget and/or business requirements.

    Our knowledge and experience cover vast areas of IT including technical design, provision and installation of hardware (Wintel and IBM Midrange), technical engineering services, support services, IT project management, application testing, documentation and training.”

    IBM i Services

    • ✔ IBM Power Hardware Sales
    • ✔ Co-Managed Services
    • ✔ DR/High Available Config
    • ✔ Full Managed Services
    • ✖ Co-Location Services
    • ✔ Public Cloud Services (AWS)

    URL
    rowtonit.com

    Regional Coverage:
    United Kingdom

    Logo for RowtonIT.com.

    Vendor Profile #2

    Connectria

    Summary of Vendor

    “Every journey starts with a single step and for Connectria, that step happened to be with the world’s largest bank, Deutsche Bank. Followed quickly by our second client, IBM. Since then, we have added over 1,000 clients worldwide. For 25 years, each customer, large or small, has relied on Connectria to deliver on promises made to make it easy to do business with us through flexible terms, scalable solutions, and straightforward pricing. Join us on our journey.”

    IBM i Services

    • ✔ IBM Power Hardware Sales
    • ✔ Co-Managed Services
    • ✔ DR/High Available Config
    • ✔ Full Managed Services
    • ✔ Co-Location Services
    • ✔ Public Cloud Services (AWS)

    URL
    connectria.com

    Regional Coverage:
    United States

    Logo for Connectria.

    Vendor Profile #3

    Mid-Range

    Summary of Vendor

    “Founded in 1988 and profitable throughout all of those 31 years, we have a solid track record of success. At Mid-Range, we use our expertise to assess your unique needs, in order to proactively develop the most effective IT solution for your requirements. Our full-service approach to technology and our diverse and in-depth industry expertise keep our clients coming back year after year.

    Serving clients across North America in a variety of industries, from small and emerging organizations to large, established enterprises – we’ve seen it all. Whether you need hardware or software solutions, disaster recovery and high availability, managed services or hosting or full ERP services with our JD Edwards offerings – we have the methods and expertise to help.”

    IBM i Services

    • ✔ IBM Power Hardware Sales
    • ✔ Co-Managed Services
    • ✔ DR/High Available Config
    • ✔ Full Managed Services
    • ✔ Co-Location Services
    • ✔ Public Cloud Services (AWS)

    URL
    midrange.ca

    Regional Coverage:
    Canada

    Logo for Mid-Range.

    Activity

    Understand your vendor options

    Activities:
    1. Create your vendor profiles
    2. Score vendor responses
    3. Develop and manage your vendor agenda

    This activity involves the following participants:

    • IT strategic direction decision makers
    • IT managers responsible for an existing iSeries or IBM i platform

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Vendor Profile Template
    • Completed IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Scoring Tool

    Info-Tech Insights

    This check-point process creates transparency around agreement costs with the business and gives the business an opportunity to re-evaluate its requirements for a potentially leaner agreement.

    1. Create your vendor profiles

    Define what you are looking for:

    • Create a vendor profile for every vendor of interest.
    • Leverage our starting list and template to track and record the advantages of each vendor.

    Mindshift

    First National Technology Solutions

    Key Information Systems

    MainLine

    Direct Systems Support

    T-Systems

    Horizon Computer Solutions Inc.

    Vendor Profile Template

    [Vendor Name]

    Summary of Vendor

    [Vendor Summary]
    *Detail the Vendor Services as a Summary*

    IBM i Services

    • ✔ IBM Power Hardware Sales
    • ✔ Co-Managed Services
    • ✔ DR/High Available Config
    • ✔ Full Managed Services
    • ✔ Co-Location Services
    • ✔ Public Cloud Services (AWS)
    *Itemize the Vendor Services specific to your requirements*

    URL
    https://www.url.com/
    *Insert the Vendor URL*

    Regional Coverage:
    [Country\Region]
    *Insert the Vendor Coverage & Locations*

    *Insert the Vendor Logo*

    2. Score your vendor responses

    Use the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Scoring Tool to manage vendor responses.
    Use Info-Tech’s IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Scoring Tool to systematically score your vendor responses.

    The overall quality of the IBM i questions can help you understand what it might be like to work with the vendor.

    Consider the following questions:

    • Is the vendor clear about what it’s able to offer? Is its response transparent?
    • How much effort did the vendor put into answering the questions?
    • Does the vendor seem like someone you would want to work with?

    Once you have the vendor responses, you will select two or three vendors to continue assessing in more depth leading to an eventual final selection.

    Screenshot of the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Scoring Tool's Scoring Sheet. There are three tables: 'Scoring Scale', 'Results', and one with 'RFP Questions'. Note on Results table says 'Top Scoring Vendors', and note on questions table says 'List your IBM i questions (requirements)'.

    Info-Tech Insights

    Watch out for misleading scores that result from poorly designed criteria weightings.

    3. Develop your vendor agenda

    Vendor Conference Call

    Develop an agenda for the conference call. Here is a sample agenda:
    • Review the vendor questions.
    • Go over answers to written vendor questions previously submitted.
    • Address new vendor questions.

    Commonly Debated Question:
    Should vendors be asked to remain anonymous on the call or should each vendor mention their organization when they join the call?

    Many organizations worry that if vendors can identify each other, they will price fix. However, price fixing is extremely rare due to its consequences and most vendors likely have a good idea which other vendors are participating in the bid. Another thought is that revealing vendors could either result in a higher level of competition or cause some vendors to give up:

    • A vendor that hears its rival is also bidding may increase the competitiveness of its bid and response.
    • A vendor that feels it doesn’t have a chance may put less effort into the process.
    • A vendor that feels it doesn’t have real competition may submit a less competitive or detailed response than it otherwise would have.

    Vendor Workshop

    A vendor workshop day is an interactive way to provide context to your vendors and to better understand the vendors’ offerings. The virtual or in-person interaction also offers a great way to understand what it’s like to work with each vendor and decide whether you could build a partnership with them in the long run.

    The main focus of the workshop is the vendors’ service solution presentation. Here is a sample agenda for a two-day workshop:

    Day 1
    • Meet and greet
    • Welcome presentation with objectives, acquisition strategy, and company overview
    • Overview of the current IT environment, technologies, and company expectations
    • Question and answer session
    • Site walk
    Day 2
    • Review Day 1 activities
    • Vendor presentations and solution framing
    Use the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Scoring Tool to manage vendor responses.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services
    Acquiring a service is like buying an experience. Don’t confuse the simplicity of buying hardware with buying an experience.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery
    There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap
    Move beyond alignment: Put yourself in the driver’s seat for true business value.

    Define Your Cloud Vision
    Make the most of cloud for your organization.

    Document Your Cloud Strategy
    Drive consensus by outlining how your organization will use the cloud.

    Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Close the gap between your DR capabilities and service continuity requirements.

    Create a Better RFP Process
    Improve your RFPs to gain leverage and get better results.

    Research Authors

    Photo of Darin Stahl, Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group.Darin Stahl, Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Principal Research Advisor within the Infrastructure Practice and leveraging 38+ years of experience, his areas of focus include: IT Operations Management, Service Desk, Infrastructure Outsourcing, Managed Services, Cloud Infrastructure, DRP/BCP, Printer Management, Managed Print Services, Application Performance Monitoring (APM), Managed FTP, and non-commodity servers (zSeries, mainframe, IBM i, AIX, Power PC).

    Photo of Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group.Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Troy has over 24 years of experience and has championed large, enterprise-wide technology transformation programs, remote/home office collaboration and remote work strategies, BCP, IT DRP, IT Operations and expense management programs, international right placement initiatives, and large technology transformation initiatives (M&A). Additionally, he has deep experience working with IT solution providers and technology (cloud) start-ups.

    Research Contributors

    Photo of Dan Duffy, President & Owner, Mid-Range.Dan Duffy, President & Owner, Mid-Range

    Dan Duffy is the President and Founder of Mid-Range Computer Group Inc., an IBM Platinum Business Partner. Dan and his team have been providing the Canadian and American IBM Power market with IBM infrastructure solutions including private cloud, hosting and disaster recovery, high availability and data center services since 1988. He has served on numerous boards and associations including the Toronto Users Group for Mid-Range Systems (TUG), the IBM Business Partners of the Americas Advisory Council, the Cornell Club of Toronto, and the Notre Dame Club of Toronto. Dan holds a Bachelor of Science from Cornell University.

    Photo of George Goodall, Executive Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group.George Goodall, Executive Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    George Goodall is an Executive Advisor in the Research Executive Services practice at Info-Tech Research Group. George has over 20 years of experience in IT consulting, enterprise software sales, project management, and workshop delivery. His primary focus is the unique challenges and opportunities in organizations with small and constrained IT operations. In his long tenure at Info-Tech, George has covered diverse topics including voice communications, storage, and strategy and governance.

    Bibliography

    “Companies using IBM i (formerly known as i5/OS).” Enlyft, 21 July 2021. Web.

    Connor, Clare. “IBM i and Meeting the Challenges of Modernization.” Ensono, 22 Mar. 2022. Web.

    Huntington, Tom. “60+ IBM i User Groups and Communities to Join?” HelpSystems, 16 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Perkins, Dale. “The Road to Power Cloud: June 21st 1988 to now. The Journey Continues.” Mid-Range, 1 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Prickett Morgan, Timothy. “How IBM STACKS UP POWER8 AGAINST XEON SERVERS.” The Next Platform, 13 Oct. 2015. Web.

    “Why is AS/400 still used? Four reasons to stick with a classic.” NTT, 21 July 2016. Web.

    Appendix

    Public Cloud Provider Notes

    Appendix –
    Cloud
    Providers


    “IBM Power (IBM i and AIX) workloads are also available in the so-called ‘cloud.’” (Darin Stahl)

    AWS

    Appendix –
    Cloud
    Providers



    “IBM Power (IBM i and AIX) workloads are also available in the so-called ‘cloud.’” (Darin Stahl)

    Google

    • Google Cloud console supports IBM Power Systems.
    • This offering provides cloud instances running on IBM Power Systems servers with PowerVM.
    • The service uses a per-day prorated monthly subscription model for cloud instance plans with different capacities of compute, memory, storage, and network. Standard plans are listed below and custom plans are possible.
    • There is no IBM i offering yet that we are aware of.
    • For AIX on Power, this would appear to be a better option than AWS (Converge Enterprise Cloud with IBM Power for Google Cloud).

    Appendix –
    Cloud
    Providers



    “IBM Power (IBM i and AIX) workloads are also available in the so-called ‘cloud.’” (Darin Stahl)

    Azure

    • Azure has partners using the Azure Dedicated Host offerings to deliver “native support for IBM POWER Systems to Azure data centres” (PowerWire).
    • Microsoft has installed Power servers in an couple Azure data centers and Skytap manages the IBM i, AIX, and Linux environments for clients.
    • As far as I am aware there is no ability to install IBM i or AIX within an Azure Dedicated Host via the retail interfaces – these must be worked through a partner like Skytap.
    • The cloud route for IBM i or AIX might be the easiest working with Skytap and Azure. This would appear to be a better option than AWS in my opinion.

    Appendix –
    Cloud
    Providers



    “IBM Power (IBM i and AIX) workloads are also available in the so-called ‘cloud.’” (Darin Stahl)

    IBM

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}242|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $45,303 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 34 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Many security leaders struggle to decide how to best to prioritize their scarce information security resources
    • The need to move from a reactive approach to security towards a strategic planning approach is clear. The path to getting there is less so.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The most successful information security strategies are:

    • Holistic – They consider the full spectrum of information security, including people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk aware – They understand that security decisions should be made based on the security risks facing their organization, not just on “best practice.”
    • Business aligned – They demonstrate an understanding of the goals and strategies of the organization and how the security program can support the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy, an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for more than seven years with hundreds of different organizations:
    • This approach includes tools for:
      • Ensuring alignment with business objectives.
      • Assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
      • Enabling a comprehensive current state assessment.
      • Prioritizing initiatives and building out a security roadmap.

    Build an Information Security Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Information Security (IS) Strategy Research – A step-by-step document that helps you build a holistic, risk-based, and business-aligned IS strategy.

    Your security strategy should not be based on trying to blindly follow best practices but on a holistic risk-based assessment that is risk aware and aligns with your business context. Use this storyboard to augment your security strategy by ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing your organization's risk and stakeholder expectations, understanding your current security state, and prioritizing initiatives and a security roadmap.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phases 1-4

    2. Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool – A tool to make informed security risk decisions to support business needs.

    Use this tool to formally identify business goals and customer and compliance obligations and make explicit links to how security initiatives propose to support these business interests. Then define the scope and boundaries for the security strategy and the risk tolerance definitions that will guide future security risk decisions.

    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    3. Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool – An evaluation tool to invest in the right security functions using a pressure analysis approach.

    Security pressure posture analysis helps your organization assess your real security context and enables you to invest in the right security functions while balancing the cost and value in alignment with business strategies. Security pressure sets the baseline that will help you avoid over-investing or under-investing in your security functions.

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    4. Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool – A structured tool to systematically understand your current security state.

    Effective security planning should not be one size fits all – it must consider business alignment, security benefit, and resource cost. To enable an effective security program, all areas of security need to be evaluated closely to determine where the organization sits currently and where it needs to go in the future.

    • Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool

    5. Information Security Strategy Communication Deck – A best-of-breed presentation document to build a clear, concise, and compelling strategy document.

    Use this communication deck template to present the results of the security strategy to stakeholders, demonstrate the progression from the current state to the future state, and establish the roadmap of the security initiatives that will be implemented. This information security communication deck will help ensure that you’re communicating effectively for your cause.

    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck

    6. Information Security Charter – An essential document for defining the scope and purpose of a security project or program.

    A charter is an essential document for defining the scope and purpose of security. Without a charter to control and set clear objectives for this committee, the responsibility of security governance initiatives will likely be undefined within the enterprise, preventing the security governance program from operating efficiently. This template can act as the foundation for a security charter to provide guidance to the governance of information security.

    • Information Security Charter
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an Information Security Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Security Requirements

    The Purpose

    Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined security obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Activities

    1.1 Define business and compliance.

    1.2 Establish security program scope.

    1.3 Analyze the organization’s risk and stakeholder pressures.

    1.4 Identify the organizational risk tolerance level.

    Outputs

    Security obligations statement

    Security scope and boundaries statement

    Defined risk tolerance level

    Risk assessment and pressure analysis

    2 Perform a Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Define the information security target state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set goals and Initiatives for the security strategy in line with the business objectives.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities.

    2.2 Identify security gaps.

    2.3 Build initiatives to bridge the gaps.

    Outputs

    Information security target state

    Security current state assessment

    Initiatives to address gaps

    3 Complete the Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Continue assessing current security capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of security gaps and initiatives to bridge them according to the business goals.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify security gaps.

    3.2 Build initiatives to bridge the maturity gaps.

    3.3 Identify initiative list and task list.

    3.4 Define criteria to be used to prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    Completed security current state assessment

    Task list to address gaps

    Initiative list to address gaps

    Prioritize criteria

    4 Develop the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for your security strategy going forward.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set path forward to achieving the target state for the business through goal cascade and gap initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on initiatives.

    4.2 Prioritize gap initiatives based on cost and alignment with business.

    4.3 Build an effort list.

    4.4 Determine state times and accountability.

    4.5 Finalize security roadmap and action plan.

    4.6 Create communication plan.

    Outputs

    Information security roadmap

    Draft communication deck

    5 Communicate and Implement

    The Purpose

    Finalize deliverables.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Consolidate documentation into a finalized deliverable that can be used to present to executives and decision makers to achieve buy-in for the project.

    Activities

    5.1 Support communication efforts.

    5.2 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Security strategy roadmap documentation

    Detailed cost and effort estimates

    Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives

    Further reading

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Create value by aligning your strategy to business goals and business risks.

    Analyst Perspective

    Set your security strategy up for success.

    “Today’s rapid pace of change in business innovation and digital transformation is a call to action to information security leaders.

    Too often, chief information security officers find their programs stuck in reactive mode, a result of years of mounting security technical debt. Shifting from a reactive to proactive stance has never been more important. Unfortunately, doing so remains a daunting task for many.

    While easy to develop, security plans premised on the need to blindly follow ‘best practices’ are unlikely to win over many stakeholders. To be truly successful, an information security strategy needs to be holistic, risk-aware, and business-aligned.”

    Kevin Peuhkurinen

    Research Director – Security, Risk & Compliance

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge

    • Many security leaders struggle to decide how best to prioritize their scarce information security resources.
    • The need to move from a reactive approach to security toward a strategic planning approach is clear. The path to getting there is less clear.

    Common Obstacle

    • Developing a security strategy can be challenging. Complications include:
      • Performing an accurate assessment of your current security program can be extremely difficult when you don’t know what to assess or how.
      • Determining the appropriate target state for security can be even more challenging. A strategy built around following best practices is unlikely to garner significant support from business stakeholders.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy, an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for 7+ years with hundreds of organizations.
    • This unique approach includes tools for:
      • Ensuring alignment with business objectives.
      • Assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
      • Enabling a comprehensive current state assessment.
      • Prioritizing initiatives and building out a security roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The most successful information security strategies are:

    • Holistic. They consider the full spectrum of information security, including people, processes, and technologies.
    • Risk-Aware. They understand that security decisions should be made based on the security risks facing their organization, not just on best practice.
    • Business-Aligned. They demonstrate an understanding of the goals and strategies of the organization, and how the security program can support the business.

    It’s not a matter of if you have a security incident, but when

    Organizations need to prepare and expect the inevitable security breach.

    Fifty-eight percent of companies surveyed that experienced a breach were small businesses.

    Eighty-nine percent of breaches have a financial or espionage motive.

    Three graphs are depicted. The first is labeled ‘Total Cost for Three Data Breach Root Causes,’ the second ‘Distribution of Benchmark by Root Cause of the Data Breach,’ and the third ‘Per Capita for Three Root Causes of a Data Breach.’ The three root causes are malicious or criminal attack (US$166 million per capita), system glitch ($132 million per capita), and human error ($133 million per capita).

    Source: Ponemon Institute, “2019 Global Cost of Data Breach Study”

    An information security strategy can help you prepare for incidents

    Organizations need to expect the inevitable security breach.

    90%

    of businesses have experienced an external threat in the last year.

    50%

    of IT professionals consider security to be their number one priority.

    53%

    of organizations claimed to have experienced an insider attack in the previous 12 months. 1

    46%

    of businesses believe the frequency of attacks is increasing. 2

    Effective IT leaders approach their security strategy from an understanding that attacks on their organization will occur. Building a strategy around this assumption allows your security team to understand the gaps in your current approach and become proactive instead of being reactive.

    Sources: 1 Kaspersky Lab, “Global IT Security Risks Survey”; 2 CA Technologies, “Insider Threat 2018 Report”

    Persistent Issues

    Evolving Ransomware

    • Continual changes in types and platforms make ransomware a persistent threat. The frequency of ransomware attacks was reported to have increased by 67% in the past five years. 1

    Phishing Attacks

      • Despite filtering and awareness, email remains the most common threat vector for phishing attacks (94%) and an average of 3% of participants in phishing campaigns still click on them. 2

    Insider Privilege and Misuse

    • Typically, 34% of breaches are perpetrated by insiders, with 15% involving privilege misuse. Takeaway: Care less about titles and more about access levels. 3

    Denial of Service

    • The median amount of time that an organization is under attack from DDoS attack is three days.

    Emerging Trends

    Advanced Identity and Access Governance

    • Using emerging technologies in automation, orchestration, and machine learning, the management and governance of identities and access has become more advanced.

    Sources: 1 Accenture, “2019 The Cost of Cyber Crime Study”; 2,3 Verizon, “2019 Data Breach Investigations Report”

    New threat trends in information security aren’t new.

    Previously understood attacks are simply an evolution of prior implementations, not a revolution.

    Traditionally, most organizations are not doing a good-enough job with security fundamentals, which is why attackers have been able to use the same old tricks.

    However, information security has finally caught the attention of organizational leaders, presenting the opportunity to implement a comprehensive security program.

    Cyberattacks have a significant financial impact

    Global average cost of a data breach: $3.92 Million

    Source: Ponemon Institute, “2019 Cost of a Data Breach Study: Global Overview”

    A bar graph, titled ‘Average cost of data breach by industry,’ is depicted. Of 17 industries depicted, public is the lowest average cost (US$1.29 million) and health is the highest average cost ($6.45 million).

    Primary incident type (with a confirmed data breach)

    1. Leading incident type is Denial of Service attacks (DoS), taking up to 70% of all incidents.
    2. When it comes to data breaches, we see that the use of stolen credentials leads to the most cases of confirmed breaches, accounting for 29%.

    Personal records tend to be the most compromised data types, while databases tend to be the most frequently involved asset in breaches.

    Source: Verizon, “2019 Data Breach Investigations Report”

    Security threats are not going away

    We continue to see and hear of security breaches occurring regularly.

    A bar graph depicts the percentage of businesses who experienced a data breach in the last year–US total and global total. Numbers have increased from 2016 to 2019. In 2016, 19 percent of US businesses experienced a breach. In 2019, this number was 59 percent.

    An attacker must be successful only once. The defender – you – must be successful every time.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Maturing from reactive to strategic information security

    Two circular graphs depict the move from ‘reactive security’ to ‘strategic security’ organizations can accomplish using Info-Tech’s approach.

    Tools icon that is used in the first three stages of the strategic security graph above. Indicates Info-Tech tools included in this blueprint.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. A proven, structured approach to mature your information security program from reactive to strategic.
    2. A comprehensive set of tools to take the pain out of each phase in the strategy building exercise.
    3. Visually appealing templates to communicate and socialize your security strategy and roadmap to your stakeholders.

    Info-Tech’s Security Strategy Model

    Info-Tech’s Security Strategy Model is depicted in this rectangular image with arrows. The first level depicts business context (enterprise goals, compliance obligations, scope and boundaries) and pressures (security risks, risk tolerance, stakeholder expectations). The second level depicts security target state (maturity model, security framework, security alignment goals, target maturity, time frame) and current state (current state assessment, gap analysis). The third level depicts the information security roadmap (initiative list, task list, prioritization methodology, and Gantt chart).

    The Info-Tech difference:

    An information security strategy model that is:

    1. Business-Aligned. Determines business context and cascades enterprise goals into security alignment goals.
    2. Risk-Aware. Understands the security risks of the business and how they intersect with the overall organizational risk tolerance.
    3. Holistic. Leverages a best-of-breed information security framework to provide comprehensive awareness of organizational security capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s best-of-breed security framework

    This image shows how Info-Tech’s framework is based on ISO 27000 series, CIS Top 20, COBIT 2019, NIST 800-53, and NIST CSF.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Creating an information security strategy

    Value to the business

    Outcome

    Best-of-breed security strategy

    Have documentation that paints a picture of the road to compliance. Integrate your framework with your risk tolerance and external pressures.

    Be ready for future changes by aligning your security strategy to security framework best practices.

    Address the nature of your current information security

    Eliminate gaps in process and know what is in scope for your security strategy. Learn what pressures your business and industry are under.

    Gain insight into your current state, allowing you to focus on high-value projects first, transitioning towards a target state.

    Highlight overlooked functions of your current security strategy

    Build a comprehensive security program that brings to light all aspects of your security program.

    Instead of pursing ad hoc projects, know what needs work and how to prioritize your pressing security issues.

    Create a tangible roadmap to your target state

    Create a plan for your future state of information security. Refer to and update your target state as your business needs change.

    Document your current progress and path forward in the future. Know your goals and requirements, codified in a living document.

    Use our prepopulated deliverables to fast track your progress

    Let Info-Tech do the work for you. With completed deliverables, have tangible documents to convey your business needs.

    A comprehensive set of deliverables with concrete, defensible data to justify any business changes.

    A living security strategy

    Pivot and change prioritization to meet the needs of your security deficits.

    Future-proof your security strategy for any contingency.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    Evolve the security program to be more proactive by leveraging Info-Tech’s approach to building a security strategy.

    • Dive deep into security obligations and security pressures to define the business context.
    • Conduct a thorough current state and future state analysis that is aligned with a best-of-breed framework.
    • Prioritize gap-closing initiatives to create a living security strategy roadmap.

    Use Info-Tech’s blueprint to save one to three months

    This image depicts how using Info-Tech’s four-phase blueprint can save an estimated seven to 14 weeks of an organization’s time and effort.

    Iterative benefit

    Over time, experience incremental value from your initial security strategy. Through continual updates your strategy will evolve but with less associated effort, time, and costs.

    These estimates are based on experiences with Info-Tech clients throughout the creation of this blueprint.

    Key deliverable:

    Information Security Strategy Communication Deck (PPT)

    Present your findings in a prepopulated document that can summarizes all key findings of the blueprint.

    Screenshots from Info-Tech’s Information Security Strategy Communication Deck Template.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Define the business, customer, and compliance alignment for your security program.

    Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Determine your organization’s security pressures and ability to tolerate risk.

    Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Use our best-of-breed security framework to perform a gap analysis between your current and target states.

    Information Security Charter

    Ensure the development and management of your security policies meet the broader program vision.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical Guided Implementation on this topic look like?

    Guided Implementation #1 - Assess security requirements
    • Call #1 - Introduce project and complete pressure analysis.
    Guided Implementation #2 - Build a gap initiative strategy
    • Call #1 - Introduce the maturity assessment.
    • Call #2 - Perform gap analysis and translate into initiatives.
    • Call #3 - Consolidate related gap initiatives and define, cost, effort, alignment, and security benefits.
    Guided Implementation #3 - Prioritize initiatives and build roadmap
    • Call #1 - Review cost/benefit analysis and build an effort map.
    • Call #2 - Build implementation waves and introduce Gantt chart.
    Guided Implementation #4 - Execute and maintain
    • Call #1 - Review Gantt chart and ensure budget/buy-in support.
    • Call #2 - Three-month check-in: Execute and maintain.

    A Guided Implementation is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical Guided Implementation is between 2-12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information, or contact workshops@infotech.com or 1-888-670-8889.

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Activities

    Assess Security Requirements

    Perform a Gap Analysis

    Complete the Gap Analysis

    Develop Roadmap

    Communicate and Implement

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans

    1.2 Define business and compliance requirements

    1.3 Establish the security program scope

    1.4 Analyze the organization’s risks and stakeholder pressures

    1.5 Identify the organizational risk tolerance level

    2.1 Define the information security target state

    2.2 Assess current security capabilities

    2.3 Identify security gaps

    2.4 Build initiatives to bridge the gaps

    3.1 Continue assessing current security capabilities

    3.2 Identify security gaps

    3.3 Build initiatives to bridge the maturity gaps

    3.4 Identify initiative list and task list

    3.5 Define criteria to be used to prioritize initiatives

    4.1 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on initiatives

    4.2 Prioritize gap initiatives based on cost, time, and alignment with the business

    4.3 Build effort map

    4.4 Determine start times and accountability

    4.5 Finalize security roadmap and action plan

    4.6 Create communication plan

    5.1 Finalize deliverables

    5.2 Support communication efforts

    5.3 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives

    Deliverables

    1.Security obligations statement

    2.Security scope and boundaries statement

    3.Defined risk tolerance level

    4.Risk assessment and pressure analysis

    1.Information security target state

    2.Security current state assessment

    3.Initiatives to address gaps

    1.Completed security current state assessment

    2.Task list to address gaps address gaps

    4.Prioritization criteria

    1.Information security roadmap

    2.Draft communication deck

    1.Security strategy roadmap documentation

    2.Detailed cost and effort estimates

    3.Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Credit Service Company

    Industry: Financial Services

    Source: Info-Tech Research group

    Founded over 100 years ago, Credit Service Company (CSC)* operates in the United States with over 40 branches located across four states. The organization services over 50,000 clients.

    Situation

    Increased regulations, changes in technology, and a growing number of public security incidents had caught the attention of the organization’s leadership. Despite awareness, an IT and security strategy had not been previously created. Management was determined to create a direction for the security team that aligned with their core mission of providing exceptional service and expertise.

    Solution

    During the workshop, the IT team and Info-Tech analysts worked together to understand the organization’s ideal state in various areas of information security. Having a concise understanding of requirements was a stepping stone to beginning to develop CSC’s prioritized strategy.

    Results

    Over the course of the week, the team created a document that concisely prioritized upcoming projects and associated costs and benefits. On the final day of the workshop, the team effectively presented the value of the newly developed security strategy to senior management and received buy-in for the upcoming project.

    *Some details have been changed for client privacy.

    Phase 1

    Assess Security Requirements

      Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define goals & scope
    • 1.2 Assess risks
    • 1.3 Determine pressures
    • 1.4 Determine risk tolerance
    • 1.5 Establish target state

      Phase 2

    • 2.1 Review Info-Tech’s security framework
    • 2.2 Assess your current state
    • 2.3 Identify gap closure actions

      Phase 3

    • 3.1 Define tasks & initiatives
    • 3.2 Perform cost/benefit analysis
    • 3.3 Prioritize initiatives
    • 3.4 Build roadmap

      Phase 4

    • 4.1 Build communication deck
    • 4.2 Develop a security charter
    • 4.3 Execute on your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1 Define goals and scope of the security strategy.

    1.2 Assess your organization’s current inherent security risks.

    1.3 Determine your organization’s stakeholder pressures for security.

    1.4 Determine your organization’s risk tolerance.

    1.5 Establish your security target state.

    1.1.1 Record your business goals

    Once you have identified your primary and secondary business goals, as well as the corresponding security alignment goals, record them in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool. The tool provides an activity status that will let you know if any parts of the tool have not been completed.

    1. Record your identified primary and secondary business goals in the Goals Cascade tab of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    Use the drop-down lists to select an appropriate goal or choose “Other.” If you do choose “Other,” you will need to manually enter an appropriate business goal.

    2. For each of your business goals, select one to two security alignment goals. The tool will provide you with recommendations, but you can override these by selecting a different goal from the drop-down lists.

    A screenshot of the ‘Business Goals Cascade,’ which is part of the ‘Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.’

    A common challenge for security leaders is how to express their initiatives in terms that are meaningful to business executives. This exercise helps to make an explicit link between what the business cares about and what security is trying to accomplish.

    1.1.2 Review your goals cascade

    Estimated Time: 15 minutes

    1. When you have completed the goals cascade, you can review a graphic diagram that illustrates your goals. The graphic is found on the Results tab of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
      • Security must support the primary business objectives. A strong security program will enable the business to compete in new and creative ways, rather than simply acting as an obstacle.
      • Failure to meet business obligations can result in operational problems, impacting the organization’s ability to function and the organization’s bottom line.
    2. Once you have reviewed the diagram, copy it into the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.

    A screenshot of the ‘Goal Cascade Diagrams,’ which is part of the ‘Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.’

    Identify your compliance obligations

    Most conventional regulatory obligations are legally mandated legislation or compliance obligations, such as:

    Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX)

    Applies to public companies that have registered equity or debt securities within the SEC to guarantee data integrity against financial fraud.

    Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS)

    Applies to any organization that processes, transmits, or stores credit card information to ensure cardholder data is protected.

    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

    Applies to the healthcare sector and protects the privacy of individually identifiable healthcare information.

    Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH)

    Applies to the healthcare sector and widens the scope of privacy and security protections available under HIPAA.

    Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA)

    Applies to private sector organizations that collect personal information in Canada to ensure the protection of personal information in the course of commercial business.

    Compliance obligations also extend to voluntary security frameworks:

    NIST

    National Institute of Standards and Technology; a non-regulatory agency that develops and publicizes measurement

    CIS – 20 CSC

    Center for Internet Security – 20 Critical Security Controls; foundational set of effective cybersecurity practices.

    ISO 27001

    An information security management system framework outlining policies and procedures.

    COBIT 5

    An information technology and management and governance framework.

    HITRUST

    A common security framework for organizations that use or hold regulated personal health information.

    1.1.3 Record your compliance obligations

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. Identify your compliance obligations. Most organizations have compliance obligations that must be adhered to. These can include both mandatory and voluntary obligations. Mandatory obligations include:
      • Laws
      • Government regulations
      • Industry standards
      • Contractual agreements
      Voluntary obligations include standards that the organization has chosen to follow for best practices and any obligations that are required to maintain certifications. Organizations will have many different compliance obligations. For the purposes of your security strategy, include only those that have information security or privacy requirements.
    2. Record your compliance obligations, along with any notes, in your copy of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    A screenshot of ‘Security Compliance Obligations,’ part of the ‘Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.’

    Establish your scope and boundaries

    It is important to know at the outset of the strategy: what are we trying to secure?

    This includes physical areas we are responsible for, types of data we care about, and departments or IT systems we are responsible for.

    This also includes what is not in scope. For some outsourced services or locations, you may not be responsible for their security. In some business departments, you may not have control of security processes. Ensure that it is made explicit at the outset what will be included and what will be excluded from security considerations.

    Physical Scope and Boundaries

    • How many offices and locations does your organization have?
    • Which locations/offices will be covered by your information security management system (ISMS)?
    • How sensitive is the data residing at each location?
    • You may have many physical locations, and it is not necessary to list every one. Rather, list exceptional cases that are specifically in or out of scope.

    IT Systems Scope and Boundaries

    • There may be hundreds of applications that are run and maintained in your organization. Some of these may be legacy applications. Does your ISMS need to secure all your programs or a select few?
    • Is the system owned or outsourced?
    • Where are we accountable for security?
    • How sensitive is the data that each system handles?

    Organizational Scope and Boundaries

    • Will your ISMS cover all departments within your organization? For example, do certain departments (e.g. Operations) not need any security coverage?
    • Do you have the ability to make security decisions for each department?
    • Who are the key stakeholders/data owners for each department?

    Organizational scope considerations

    Many different groups will fall within the purview of the security strategy. Consider these two main points when deciding which departments will be in scope:

    1. If a group/user has access to data or systems that can impact the organization, then securing that group/user should be included within scope of the security strategy.
    2. If your organization provides some work direction to a group/user, they should be included within scope of the security strategy.
    1. Identify your departments and business groups
      • Start by identifying departments that provide some essential input or service to the organization or departments that interact with sensitive data.
    2. Break out different subsidiaries or divisions
      • Subsidiaries may or may not be responsible for securing themselves and protecting their data, but either way they are often heavily reliant on corporate for guidance and share IT resourcing support.
    3. Identify user groups
      • Many user groups exist, all requiring different levels of security. For example, from on-premises to remote access, from full-time employees to part-time or contractors.

    Physical scope considerations

    List physical locations by type

    Offices

    The primary location(s) where business operations are carried out. Usually leased or owned by the business.

    Regional Offices

    These are secondary offices that can be normal business offices or home offices. These locations will have a VPN connection and some sort of tenant.

    Co-Locations

    These are redundant data center sites set up for additional space, equipment, and bandwidth.

    Remote Access

    This includes all remaining instances of employees or contractors using a VPN to connect.

    Clients and Vendors

    Various vendors and clients have dedicated VPN connections that will have some control over infrastructure (whether owed/laaS/other).

    List physical locations by nature of the location

    Core areas within physical scope

    These are many physical locations that are directly managed. These are high-risk locations with many personal and services, resulting in many possible vulnerabilities and attack vectors.

    Locations on the edge of control

    These are on the edge of the physical scope, and thus, in scope of the security strategy. These include remote locations, remote access connections, etc.

    Third-party connections

    Networks of third-party users are within physical scope and need defined security requirements and definitions of how this varies per user.

    BYOD

    Mostly privately owned mobile devices with either on-network or remote access.

    It would be overkill and unhelpful to list every single location or device that is in scope. Rather, list by broad categories as suggested above or simply list exceptional cases that are in/out of scope.

    IT systems scope considerations

    Consider identifying your IT systems by your level of control or ownership.

    Fully owned systems

    These are systems that are wholly owned or managed by your organization.

    IT is almost always the admin of these systems. Generally they are hosted on premises. All securitization through methods such as patching or antivirus is done and managed by your IT department.

    Cloud/remote hosted (SaaS)

    These are systems with a lot of uncertainties because the vendor or service provided is either not known or what they are doing for security is not fully known.

    These systems need to be secured regardless, but supplier and vendor relationship management becomes a major component of how to manage these systems. Often, each system has varying levels of risk based on vendor practices.

    Hybrid owned (IaaS/PaaS)

    You likely have a good understanding of control for these systems, but they may not be fully managed by you (i.e. ownership of the infrastructure). These systems are often hosted by third parties that do some level of admin work.

    A main concern is the unclear definition of responsibility in maintaining these systems. These are managed to some degree by third parties; it is challenging for your security program to perform the full gamut of security or administrative functions.

    Unknown/unowned systems

    There are often systems that are unowned and even unknown and that very few people are using. These apps can be very small and my not fall under your IT management system framework. These systems create huge levels of risk due to limited visibility.

    For example, unapproved (shadow IT) file sharing or cloud storage applications would be unknown and unowned.

    1.1.4 Record your scope and boundaries

    Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    1. Divide into groups and give each group member a handful of sticky notes. Ask them to write down as many items as possible for the organization that could fall under one of the scope buckets.
    2. Collect each group’s responses and discuss the sticky notes and the rationale for including them. Discuss your security-related locations, data, people, and technologies, and define their scope and boundaries.
      • Careful attention should be paid to any elements of the strategy that are not in scope.
    3. Discuss and aggregate all responses as to what will be in scope of the security strategy and what will not be. Record these in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.

    A screenshot of ‘Scope and Boundaries,’ part of the ‘Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.’

    1.2 Conduct a risk assessment

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on the Risk Assessment tab of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk elements:
      • Threats
      • Assets
      • Vulnerabilities (people, systems, supply chain)
      • Historical security incidents

    Input

    • List of organizational assets
    • Historical data on information security incidents

    Output

    • Completed risk assessment

    Materials

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    1.2.1 Complete the risk assessment questionnaire

    Estimated Time: 60-90 minutes

    1. Review each question in the questionnaire and provide the most appropriate response using the drop-down list.
      • If you are unsure of the answer, consult with subject matter experts to obtain the required data.
      • Otherwise, provide your best estimation
    2. When providing responses for the historical incident questions, only count incidents that had a sizeable impact on the business.

    A screenshot of the ‘Organizational Security Risk Assessment,’ part of the ‘Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.’

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding your organization’s security risks is critical to identifying the most appropriate level of investment into your security program. Organizations with more security risks will need more a mature security program to mitigate those risks.

    1.2.2 Review the results of the risk assessment

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. Once you have completed the risk assessment, you can review the output on the Results tab.
    2. If required, the weightings of each of the risk elements can be customized on the Weightings tab.
    3. Once you have reviewed the results, copy your risk assessment diagram into the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.

    A screenshot showing sample results of the ‘Organizational Risk Assessment,’ part of the ‘Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.’

    It is important to remember that the assessment measures inherent risk, meaning the risk that exists prior to the implementation of security controls. Your security controls will be assessed later as part of the gap analysis.

    1.3 Conduct pressure analysis

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on the Pressure Analysis tab of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following pressure elements:
      • Compliance and oversight
      • Customer expectations
      • Business expectations
      • IT expectations

    Input

    • Information on various pressure elements within the organization

    Output

    • Completed pressure analysis

    Materials

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leaders
    • Compliance

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Risk tolerance considerations

    At this point, we want to frame risk tolerance in terms of business impact. Meaning, what kinds of impacts to the business would we be able to tolerate and how often? This will empower future risk decisions by allowing the impact of a potential event to be assessed, then compared against the formalized tolerance. We will consider impact from three perspectives:

    F

    Functional Impact

    The disruption or degradation of business/organizational processes.

    I

    Informational Impact

    The breach of confidentiality, privacy, or integrity of data/information.

    R

    Recoverability Impact

    The disruption or degradation of the ability to return to conditions prior to a security incident.

    Consider these questions:

    Questions to ask

    Description

    Is there a hard-dollar impact from downtime?

    This refers to when revenue or profits are directly impacted by a business disruption. For example, when an online ordering system is compromised and shut down, it affects sales, and therefore, revenue.

    Is regulatory compliance a factor?

    Depending on the circumstances of the vulnerabilities, it can be a violation of compliance obligations that would cause significant fines.

    Are any critical services dependent on this asset?

    Functional dependencies are sometimes not obvious, and assets that appear marginal can have huge impacts on critical services.

    Is there a health or safety risk?

    Some operations are critical to health and safety. For example, medical organizations have operations that are necessary to ensure uninterrupted critical health services. An exploited vulnerability that impacts these operations can have life and death consequences.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    It is crucial to keep in mind that you care about a risk scenario impact to the main business processes.

    For example, imagine a complete functional loss of the corporate printers. For most businesses, even the most catastrophic loss of printer function will have a small impact on their ability to carry out the main business functions.

    On the flip side, even a small interruption to email or servers could have a large functional impact on business processes.

    Risk tolerance descriptions

    High

    • Organizations with high risk tolerances are often found in industries with limited security risk, such as Construction, Agriculture and Fishing, or Mining.
    • A high risk tolerance may be appropriate for organizations that do not rely on highly sensitive data, have limited compliance obligations, and where their customers do not demand strong security controls. Organizations that are highly focused on innovation and rapid growth may also tend towards a higher risk tolerance.
    • However, many organizations adopt a high risk tolerance by default simply because they have not adequately assessed their risks.

    Moderate

    • Organizations with medium risk tolerances are often found in industries with moderate levels of security risk, such as Local Government, Education, or Retail and Wholesale
    • A medium risk tolerance may be appropriate for organizations that store and process some sensitive data, have a modest number of compliance obligations, and where customer expectations for security tend to be implicit rather than explicit.

    Low

    • Organizations with low risk tolerances are often found in industries with elevated security risk, such as Financial Services, Federal Governments, or Defense Contractors.
    • A low risk tolerance may be appropriate for organizations that store very sensitive data, process high-value financial transactions, are highly regulated, and where customers demand strong security controls.
    • Some organizations claim to have a low risk tolerance, but in practice will often allow business units or IT to accept more security risk than would otherwise be permissible. A strong information security program will be required to manage risks to an acceptable level.

    1.4.1 Complete the risk tolerance questionnaire

    Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    1. In a group discussion, review the low-, medium-, and high-impact scenarios and examples for each impact category. Ensure that everyone has a consistent understanding of the scenarios.
    2. For each impact type, use the frequency drop-down list to identify the maximum frequency that the organization could tolerate for the event scenarios, considering:
      • The current frequency with which the scenarios are occurring in your organization may be a good indication of your tolerance. However, keep in mind that you may be able to tolerate these incidents happening more frequently than they do.
      • Hoping is not the same as tolerating. While everyone hopes that high-impact incidents never occur, carefully consider whether you could tolerate them occurring more frequently.

    A screenshot showing the ‘Organizational Security Risk Tolerance Assessment,’ part of the ‘Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.’

    1.4.2 Review the results of the risk tolerance analysis

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. Once you have completed the risk tolerance exercise, you can review the output on the Results tab.
    2. If required, the weightings of each of the impact types can be customized on the Weightings tab.
    3. Once you have reviewed the results, copy your risk tolerance diagram into the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.

    A screenshot showing the results of the 'Information Security Risk Tolerance Assessment,' part of the ‘Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.’

    A low risk tolerance will require a stronger information security program to ensure that operational security risk in the organization is minimized. If this tool reports that your risk tolerance is low, it is recommended that you review the results with your senior stakeholders to ensure agreement and support for the security program.

    1.5 Establish your target state

    Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, review the overall results of the requirements gathering exercise:
      • Business goals cascade
      • Compliance obligations
      • Scope
    2. Review the overall results of the risk assessment, pressure analysis, and risk tolerance exercises.
    3. Conduct a group discussion to arrive at a consensus of what the ideal target state for the information security program should look like.
      • Developing mission and vision statements for security may be useful for focusing the group.
      • This discussion should also consider the desired time frame for achieving the target state.

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Information security requirements (goals cascade, compliance obligations, scope)
    • Risk assessment
    • Pressure analysis
    • Risk tolerance

    Output

    • Completed information security target state

    Materials

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Risk Management
    • Business Leaders
    • Compliance

    Understanding security target states

    Maturity models are very effective for determining information security target states. This table provides general descriptions for each maturity level. As a group, consider which description most accurately reflects the ideal target state for information security in your organization.

    1. AD HOC

      Initial/Ad hoc security programs are reactive. Lacking strategic vision, these programs are less effective and less responsive to the needs of the business.
    2. DEVELOPING

      Developing security programs can be effective at what they do but are not holistic. Governance is largely absent. These programs tend to rely on the talents of individuals rather than a cohesive plan.
    3. DEFINED

      A defined security program is holistic, documented, and proactive. At least some governance is in place, however, metrics are often rudimentary and operational in nature. These programs still often rely on best practices rather than strong risk management.
    4. MANAGED

      Managed security programs have robust governance and metrics processes. Management and board-level metrics for the overall program are produced. These are reviewed by business leaders and drive security decisions. More mature risk management practices take the place of best practices.
    5. OPTIMIZED

      An optimized security program is based on strong risk management practices, including the production of key risk indicators (KRIs). Individual security services are optimized using key performance indicators (KPIs) that continually measure service effectiveness and efficiency.

    1.5.1 Review the results of the target state recommendation

    Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    1. Based upon your risk assessment, pressure analysis, and risk tolerance, the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool will provide a recommended information security target state.
    2. With your group, review the recommendation against your expectations.
    3. If required, the weightings of each of the factors can be customized on the Weightings tab.
    4. Once you have reviewed the results, copy your target state diagram into the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.

    A screenshot showing the results of the ‘Information Security Target State,’ part of the ‘Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.’

    Info-Tech Insight

    Higher target states require more investment to attain. It is critical to ensure that all key stakeholders agree on the security target state. If you set a target state that aims too high, you may struggle to gain support and funding for the strategy. Taking this opportunity to ensure alignment from the start will pay off dividends in future.

    1.5.2 Review and adjust risk and pressure weightings

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. If the results of your risk assessment, pressure analysis, risk tolerance, or target state do not match your expectations, you may need to review and adjust the weightings for the elements within one or more of these areas.
    2. On the Weightings tab, review each of the strategic categories and adjust the weights as required.
      • Each domain is weighted to contribute to your overall pressure score based on the perceived importance of the domain to the organization.
      • The sum of all weights for each category must add up to 100%.

    A screenshot showing the results of the weightings given to each factor in a category, part of the ‘Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.’

    Case Study

    Credit Service Company

    Industry: Financial Services

    Source: Info-Tech Research group

    Below are some of the primary requirements that influenced CSC’s initial strategy development.

    External Pressure

    Pressure Level: High

    • Highly regulated industries, such as Finance, experience high external pressure.
    • Security pressure was anticipated to increase over the following three years due to an increase in customer requirement.

    Obligations

    Regulatory: Numerous regulations and compliance requirements as a financial institution (PCI, FFIEC guidance).

    Customer: Implicitly assumes personal, financial, and health information will be kept secure.

    Risk Tolerance

    Tolerance Level: Low

    1. Management: Are risk averse and have high visibility into information security.
    2. Multiple locations controlled by a central IT department decreased the organization’s risk tolerance.

    Summary of Security Requirements

    Define and implement dynamic information security program that understands and addresses the business’ inherent pressure, requirements (business, regulatory, and customer), and risk tolerance.

    Phase 2

    Build a Gap Initiative Strategy

      Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define goals & scope
    • 1.2 Assess risks
    • 1.3 Determine pressures
    • 1.4 Determine risk tolerance
    • 1.5 Establish target state

      Phase 2

    • 2.1 Review Info-Tech’s security framework
    • 2.2 Assess your current state
    • 2.3 Identify gap closure actions

      Phase 3

    • 3.1 Define tasks & initiatives
    • 3.2 Perform cost/benefit analysis
    • 3.3 Prioritize initiatives
    • 3.4 Build roadmap

      Phase 4

    • 4.1 Build communication deck
    • 4.2 Develop a security charter
    • 4.3 Execute on your roadmap

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 2.1 Review Info-Tech’s framework.
    • 2.2 Assess your current state of security against your target state.
    • 2.3 Identify actions required to close gaps.

    2.1 Review the Info-Tech framework

    Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, have the security team review the security framework within the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions on the following slides.

    Input

    • Information security requirements
    • Security target state

    Output

    • Customized security framework

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Understand the Info-Tech framework

    Info-Tech’s security framework uses a best-of-breed approach to leverage and align with most major security standards, including:

    • ISO 27001/27002
    • COBIT
    • Center for Internet Security (CIS) Critical Controls
    • NIST Cybersecurity Framework
    • NIST SP 800-53
    • NIST SP 800-171

    A diagram depicting Info-Tech’s best-of-breed security framework.

    A best-of-breed approach ensures holistic coverage of your information security program while refraining from locking you in to a specific compliance standard.

    2.1.1 Configure the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    Review the Setup tab of the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool. This tab contains several configurable settings that should be customized to your organization. For now, the three settings you will need to modify are:

    • The security target state. Enter the target state from your Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool. If you do not enter a target state, the tool will default to a target of 3 (Defined).
    • Your Security Alignment Goals (from your Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool).
    • The starting year for your security roadmap.

    A screenshot showing the ‘Setup’ tab of the ‘Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.’

    2.2 Assess current state of security

    Estimated Time: 8-16 hours

    1. Using the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to complete your current state and target state assessment.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Input

    • Security target state
    • Information on current state of security controls, including sources such as audit findings, vulnerability and penetration test results, and risk registers

    Output

    • Gap analysis

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Example maturity levels

    To help determine appropriate current and target maturity levels, refer to the example below for the control “Email communication is filtered for spam and potential malicious communications.”

    AD HOC 01

    There is no centrally managed spam filter. Spam may be filtered by endpoint email clients.

    DEVELOPING 02

    There is a secure email gateway. However, the processes for managing it are not documented. Administrator roles are not well defined. Minimal fine-tuning is performed, and only basic features are in use.

    DEFINED 03

    There is a policy and documented process for email security. Roles are assigned and administrators have adequate technical training. Most of the features of the solution are being used. Rudimentary reports are generated, and some fine-tuning is performed.

    MANAGED 04

    Metrics are produced to measure the effectiveness of the email security service. Advanced technical features of the solution have been implemented and are regularly fine-tuned based on the metrics.

    OPTIMIZED 05

    There is a dedicated email security administrator with advanced technical training. Custom filters are developed to further enhance security, based on relevant cyber threat intelligence. Email security metrics feed key risk indicators that are reported to senior management.

    2.2.1 Conduct current state assessment

    Estimated Time: 8-16 hours

    1. Carefully review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab. For each control, indicate the current maturity level using the drop-down list.
      • You should only use “N/A” if you are confident that the control is not required in your organization.
      • For example, if your organization does not perform any software development then you can select “N/A” for any controls related to secure coding practices.
    2. Provide comments to describe your current state. This step is optional but recommended as it may be important to record this information for future reference.
    3. Select the target maturity for the control. The tool will default to the target state for your security program, but this can be overridden using the drop-down list.

    2.2.1 Conduct current state assessment

    Estimated Time: 8-16 hours

    1. Carefully review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab. For each control, indicate the current maturity level using the drop-down list.
      • You should only use “N/A” if you are confident that the control is not required in your organization. For example, if your organization does not perform any software development then you can select “N/A” for any controls related to secure coding practices.
    2. Provide comments to describe your current state. This step is optional but recommended as it may be important to record this information for future reference.
    3. Select the target maturity for the control. The tool will default to the target state for your security program, but this can be overridden using the drop-down list.

    A screenshot showing the 'Gap Analysis' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    Review the Gap Analysis Dashboard

    Use the Gap Assessment Dashboard to map your progress. As you fill out the Gap Analysis Tool, check with the Dashboard to see the difference between your current and target state.

    Use the color-coded legend to see how large the gap between your current and target state is. The legend can be customized further if desired.

    Security domains that appear white have not yet been assessed or are rated as “N/A.”

    2.2.3 Identify actions required to close gaps

    Estimated Time: 4-8 hours

    1. Using the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to identify gap closure actions for each control that requires improvement.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Input

    • Security control gap information

    Output

    • Gap closure action list

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    2.3.1 Identify gap closure actions

    Estimated Time: 4-8 hours

    1. For each of the controls where there is a gap between the current and target state, a gap closure action should be identified:
      • Review the example actions and copy one or more of them if appropriate. Otherwise, enter your own gap closure action.
    2. Identify whether the action should be managed as a task or as an initiative. Most actions should be categorized as an initiative. However, it may be more appropriate to categorize them as a task when:
      1. They have no costs associated with them
      2. They require a low amount of initial effort to implement and no ongoing effort to maintain
      3. They can be accomplished independently of other tasks

    A screenshot showing gap closure actions, part of the 'Gap Analysis' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    Considerations for gap closure actions

    • In small groups, have participants ask, “what would we have to do to achieve the target state?” Document these in the Gap Closure Actions column.
    • The example gap closure actions may be appropriate for your organization, but do not simply copy them without considering whether they are right for you.
    • Not all gaps will require their own action. You can enter one action that may address multiple gaps.
    • If you find that many of your actions are along the lines of “investigate and make recommendations,” you should consider using the estimated gap closure percentage column to track the fact that these gaps will not be fully closed by the actions.

    A screenshot showing considerations for gap closure actions, part of the 'Gap Analysis' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    2.3.2 Define gap closure action effectiveness

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    For each of the gap closure actions, optionally enter an estimated gap closure percentage to indicate how effective the action will be in fully closing the gap.

    • For instance, an action to “investigate solutions and make recommendations” will not fully close the gap.
    • This is an optional step but will be helpful to understand how much progress towards your security target state you will make based on your roadmap.
    • If you do not fill in this column, the tool will assume that your actions will fully close all gaps.

    A screenshot showing considerations for estimated gap closure percentage, part of the 'Gap Analysis' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    Completing this step will populate the “Security Roadmap Progression” diagram in the Results tab, which will provide a graphic illustration of how close to your target state you will get based upon the roadmap.

    Phase 3

    Prioritize Initiatives and Build Roadmap

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define goals & scope
    • 1.2 Assess risks
    • 1.3 Determine pressures
    • 1.4 Determine risk tolerance
    • 1.5 Establish target state

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Review Info-Tech’s security framework
    • 2.2 Assess your current state
    • 2.3 Identify gap closure actions

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Define tasks & initiatives
    • 3.2 Perform cost/benefit analysis
    • 3.3 Prioritize initiatives
    • 3.4 Build roadmap

    Phase 4

    • 4.1 Build communication deck
    • 4.2 Develop a security charter
    • 4.3 Execute on your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 3.1 Define tasks and initiatives.
    • 3.2 Define cost, effort, alignment, and security benefit of each initiative.
    • 3.3 Prioritize initiatives.
    • 3.4 Build the prioritized security roadmap

    3.1 Define tasks and initiatives

    Estimated Time: 2-4 hours

    1. As a group, review the gap actions identified in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, finalize your task list.
    3. Using the instructions on the following slides, review and consolidate your initiative list.

    Input

    • Gap analysis

    Output

    • List of tasks and initiatives

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    3.1.1 Finalize your task list

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. Obtain a list of all your task actions by filtering on the Action Type column in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Paste the list into the table on the Task List tab.
      • Use Paste Values to retain the table formatting
    3. Enter a task owner and due date for each task. Without accountability, it is too easy to fall into complacency and neglect these tasks.

    A screenshot showing the 'Task List' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    Tasks are not meant to be managed to the same degree that initiatives will be. However, they are still important. It is recommended that you develop a process for tracking these tasks to completion.

    3.1.2 Consolidate your gap closure actions into initiatives

    Estimated Time: 2-3 hours

    1. Once you have finalized your task list, you will need to consolidate your list of initiative actions. Obtain a list of all your initiative actions by filtering on the Action Type column in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Create initiatives on the Initiative List tab. While creating initiatives, consider the following:
      • As much as possible, it is recommended that you consolidate multiple actions into a single initiative. Reducing the total number of initiatives will allow for more efficient management of the overall roadmap.
      • Start by identifying areas of commonality between gap closure actions, for instance:
        • Group all actions within a security domain into a single initiative.
        • Group together similar actions, such as all actions that require updating policies.
        • Consider combining actions that have inter-dependencies.
      • While it is recommended that you consolidate actions as much as possible, some actions should become initiatives on their own. This will be appropriate when:
        • The action is time sensitive and consolidating it with other actions will cause scheduling issues.
        • Actions that could otherwise be consolidated have different business sponsors or owners and need to be kept separate for funding or accountability reasons.
    3. Link the initiative actions on the Gap Analysis tab using the drop-down list in the Initiative Name column.

    Initiative consolidation example

    In the example below, we see three gap closure actions within the Security Culture and Awareness domain being consolidated into a single initiative “Develop security awareness program.”

    We can also see one gap closure action within the same domain being grouped with two actions from the Security Policies domain into another initiative “Update security policies.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    As you go through this exercise, you may find that some actions that you previously categorized as tasks could be consolidated into an initiative.

    A screenshot showing how six sample gap closure actions can be distilled into two gap closure initiatives. Part of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    3.1.3 Finalize your initiative list

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. Review your final list of initiatives and make any required updates.
    2. Optionally, add a description or paste in a list of the individual gap closure actions that are associated with the initiative. This will make it easier to perform the cost and benefit analysis.
    3. Use the drop-down list to indicate which of the security alignment goals most appropriately reflects the objectives of the initiative. If you are unsure, use the legend next to the table to find the primary security domain associated with the initiative and then select the recommended security alignment goal.
      • This step is important to understand how the initiative supports the business goals identified earlier.

     A screenshot showing the primary security alignment goal, part of the 'Initiative List' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    3.2 Conduct cost/ benefit analysis

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, define the criteria to be used to conduct the cost/benefit analysis, following the instructions on the next slide.
    2. Assign costing and benefits information for each initiative.
    3. Define dependencies or business impacts if they will help with prioritization.

    Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list

    Output

    • Completed cost/benefit analysis for initiative list

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    3.2.1 Define costing criteria

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. On the Setup tab of the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool, enter high, medium, and low ranges for initial and ongoing costs and efforts.
      1. Initial costs are one-time, upfront capital investments (e.g. hardware and software costs, project-based consulting fees, training).
      2. Ongoing cost is any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs (e.g. licensing, maintenance, subscription fees).
      3. Initial staffing in hours is total time in person hours required to complete a project. It is not total elapsed time but dedicated time. Consider time required to gather requirements and to design, test, and implement the solution.
      4. Ongoing staffing in FTEs is the ongoing average effort required to support that initiative after implementation.
    2. In addition to ranges, provide an average for each. These will be used to calculate estimated total costs for the roadmap.

    A screenshot showing the initiative costs for estimation, part of the 'Setup' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.' The range of costs is labeled with an arrow with number 1 on it, and the average cost per initiative is labeled with an arrow with number 2 on it.

    Make sure that your ranges allow for differentiation between initiatives to enable prioritization. For instance, if you set your ranges too low, all your initiatives will be assessed as high cost, providing no help when you must prioritize them.

    3.2.2 Define benefits criteria

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. On the Setup tab of the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool, enter high, medium, and low values for the Alignment with Business Benefit.
      • This variable is meant to capture how well each initiative aligns with organizational goals and objectives.
      • By default, this benefit is linked directly to business goals through the primary and secondary security alignment goals. This allows the tool to automatically calculate the benefit based on the security alignment goals associated with each initiative.
      • If you change these values, you may need to override the calculated values in the prioritization tab.
    2. Enter a high, medium, and low value for the Security Benefit.
      • This variable is meant to capture the relative security benefit or risk reduction being provided by the gap initiative.
      • By default, this benefit is linked to security risk reduction.

    A screenshot showing the initiative benefits for estimation, part of the 'Setup' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    Some organizations prefer to use the “Security Benefit” criteria to demonstrate how well each initiative supports specific compliance goals.

    3.2.3 Complete the cost/benefit analysis

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
      • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
    2. Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
      • The Alignment with Business benefit will be automatically populated, but you can override this value using the drop-down list if desired.

    A screenshot showing the estimated cost, estimated effort, and estimated benefits section, part of the 'Prioritization' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.' Estimated cost and estimated effort are labeled with an arrow with number 1 on it, and estimated benefits is labeled with an arrow with a number 2 on it.

    3.2.4 Optionally enter detailed cost estimates

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. For each initiative, the tool will automatically populate the Detailed Cost Estimates and Detailed Staffing Estimates columns using the averages that you provided in steps 3.2.1 and 3.2.2. However, if you have more detailed data about the costs and effort requirements for an initiative, you can override the calculated data by manually entering it into these columns. For example:
      • You are planning to subscribe to a security awareness vendor, and you have a quote from them specifying that the initial cost will be $75,000.
      • You have defined your “Medium” cost range as being “$10-100K”, so you select medium as your initial cost for this initiative in step 3.2.3. As you defined the average for medium costs as being $50,000, this is what the tool will put into the detailed cost estimate.
      • You can override this average by entering $75,000 as the initial cost in the detailed cost estimate column.

    A screenshot showing the detailed cost estimates and detailed staffing estimates columns, part of the 'Prioritization' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.' These columns are labeled with an arrow with a number 1 on it.

    Case Study

    Credit Service Company

    Industry: Financial Services

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    A chart titled 'Framework Components,' displaying how the Credit Service Company profiled in the case study performed a current state assessment, created gap initiatives, and prioritized gap initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated Time: 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the results of the cost/benefit analysis. Optionally, complete the Other Considerations columns in the Prioritization tab:
      • Dependencies can refer to other initiatives on the list or any other dependency that relates to activities or projects within the organization.
      • Business impacts can be helpful to document as they may require additional planning and communication that could impact initiative timelines.
    2. Follow step 3.3.1 to create an effort map with the results of the cost/benefit analysis.
    3. Follow step 3.3.2 to assign initiatives into execution waves.

    Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list
    • Cost/benefit analysis

    Output

    • Prioritized list of initiatives

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    3.3.1 Create effort map

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. On a whiteboard, draw the quadrant diagram shown.
    2. Create sticky notes for each initiative on your initiative list.
    3. For each initiative, use the “Cost/Effort Rating” and the “Benefit Rating” calculated on the Prioritization tab to place the corresponding sticky note onto the diagram.

    An effort map is a tool used for the visualization of a cost/benefit analysis. It is a quadrant output that visually shows how your gap initiatives were prioritized. In this example, the initiative “Update Security Policies” was assessed as low cost/effort (3) and high benefit (10).

    An image showing how 'update security policies,' as ranked on a cost/effort and benefit quadrant, translates to a cost/effort and benefit rating on the 'Prioritization' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    3.3.2 Assign initiatives to execution waves

    Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    1. Using sticky flip chart sheets, create four sheets and label them according to the four execution waves:
      • MUST DO – These are initiatives that need to get moving right away. They may be quick wins, items with critical importance, or foundational projects upon which many other initiatives depend.
      • SHOULD DO – These are important initiatives that need to get done but cannot launch immediately due to budget constraints, dependencies, or business impacts that require preparation.
      • COULD DO – Initiatives that have merit but are not a priority.
      • WON’T DO – Initiatives where the costs outweigh the benefits.
    2. Using the further instructions on the following slides, move the initiative sticky notes from your effort map into the waves.

    Considerations for prioritization

    • Starting from the top right of the effort map, begin pulling stickies off and putting them in the appropriate roadmap category.
    • Keep dependencies in mind. If an important initiative depends on a low-priority one being completed first, then pull dependent initiatives up the list.
    • It may be helpful to think of each wave as representing a specific time frame (e.g. wave 1 = first year of your roadmap, wave 2 = year two, wave 3 = year three).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use an iterative approach. Most organizations tend to put too many initiatives into wave 1. Be realistic about what you can accomplish and take several passes at the exercise to achieve a balance.

    An image showing how to map the sticky notes from a sample exercise, as placed on a cost/effort and benefit quadrant, into waves.

    3.3.3 Finalize prioritization

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. Once you have completed placing your initiative sticky notes into the waves, update the Prioritization tab with the Roadmap Wave column.
    2. Optionally, use the Roadmap Sub-Wave column to prioritize initiatives within a single wave.
      • This will allow you more granular control over the final prioritization, especially where dependencies require extra granularity.

    Any initiatives that are currently in progress should be assigned to Wave 0.

    An image showing the roadmap wave and roadmap sub-wave sections, part of the 'Prioritization' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.' Roadmap wave is labeled with an arrow with a number 1 on it, and roadmap sub-wave is labeled with an arrow with a number 2 on it.

    3.4 Build roadmap

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, follow step 3.4.1 to create your roadmap by scheduling initiatives into the Gantt chart within the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Review the roadmap for resourcing conflicts and adjust as required.
    3. Review the final cost and effort estimates for the roadmap.

    Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Cost/benefit analysis
    • Prioritized initiative list
    • (Optional) List of other non-security IT and business projects

    Output

    • Security strategic roadmap

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4.1 Schedule initiatives using the Gantt chart

    Estimated Time: 1-2 Hours

    1. On the Gantt Chart tab for each initiative, enter an owner (the individual who will be primarily responsible for execution).
    2. Additionally, enter a start month and year for the initiative and the expected duration in months.
      • You can filter the Wave column to only see specific waves at any one time to assist with the scheduling.
      • You do not need to schedule Wave 4 initiatives as the expectation is that these initiatives will not be done.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use the Owner column to help identify resourcing constraints. If a single individual is responsible for many different initiatives that are planned to start at the same time, consider staggering those initiatives.

    An image showing the owner and planned start sections, part of the 'Security Roadmap Gantt Chart' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.' The owner column is labeled with an arrow with a 1 on it, and the planned start column is labeled with an arrow with a 2 on it.

    3.4.2 Review your roadmap

    Estimated Time: 30-60 minutes

    1. When you have completed the Gantt chart, as a group review the overall roadmap to ensure that it is reasonable for your organization. Consider the following:
      • Do you have other IT or business projects planned during this time frame that may impact your resourcing or scheduling?
      • Does your organization have regular change freezes throughout the year that will impact the schedule?
      • Do you have over-subscribed resources? You can filter the list on the Owner column to identify potential over-subscription of resources.
      • Have you considered any long vacations, sabbaticals, parental leaves, or other planned longer-term absences?
      • Are your initiatives adequately aligned to your budget cycle? For instance, if you have an initiative that is expected to make recommendations for capital expenditure, it must be completed prior to budget planning.

    A screenshot image showing parts of the 'Security Roadmap Gantt Chart' tab with sample data in it. Taken from the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    3.4.3 Review your expected roadmap progression

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. If you complete the optional exercise of filling in the Estimated Gap Closure Percentage column on the Gap Analysis tab, the tool will generate a diagram showing how close to your target state you can expect to get based on the tasks and initiatives in your roadmap. You can review this diagram on the Results tab.
      • Remember that this Expected Maturity at End of Roadmap score assumes that you will complete all tasks and initiatives (including all Wave 4 initiatives).
    2. Copy the diagram into the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Often, internal stakeholders will ask the question “If we do everything on this roadmap, will we be at our target state?” This diagram will help answer that question.

    A screenshot image showing the 'Expected Security Roadmap Progression' with sample data in it. Part of the 'Results' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    3.4.4 Review your cost/effort estimates table

    Estimated Time: 30 minutes

    1. Once you have completed your roadmap, review the total cost/effort estimates. This can be found in a table on the Results tab. This table will provide initial and ongoing costs and staffing requirements for each wave. This also includes the total three-year investment. In your review consider:
      • Is this investment realistic? Will completion of your roadmap require adding more staff or funding than you otherwise expected?
      • If the investment seems unrealistic, you may need to revisit some of your assumptions, potentially reducing target levels or increasing the amount of time to complete the strategy.
      • This table provides you with the information to have important conversations with management and stakeholders
    2. When you have completed your review, copy the table into the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.

    A screenshot image showing the 'Information Security Roadmap Cost/Effort Estimates,' part of the 'Results' tab of the 'Information Security Gap Analysis Tool.'

    Phase 4

    Execute and Maintain

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Define goals & scope
    • 1.2 Assess risks
    • 1.3 Determine pressures
    • 1.4 Determine risk tolerance
    • 1.5 Establish target state

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Review Info-Tech’s security framework
    • 2.2 Assess your current state
    • 2.3 Identify gap closure actions

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Define tasks & initiatives
    • 3.2 Perform cost/benefit analysis
    • 3.3 Prioritize initiatives
    • 3.4 Build roadmap

    Phase 4

    • 4.1 Build communication deck
    • 4.2 Develop a security charter
    • 4.3 Execute on your roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • 4.1 Build your security strategy communication deck.
    • 4.2 Develop a security charter.
    • 4.3 Execute on your roadmap.

    4.1 Build your communication deck

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.
    2. Follow the instructions within the template and on the next few slides to customize the template with the results of your strategic roadmap planning.

    Input

    • Completed Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Completed Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Completed Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Output

    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck

    Materials

    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    4.1.1 Customize the Communication Deck

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. When reviewing the Information Security Strategy Communication Deck, you will find slides that contain instructions within green text boxes. Follow the instructions within the boxes, then delete the boxes.
      • Most slides only require that you copy and paste screenshots or tables from your tools into the slides.
      • However, some slides require that you customize or add text explanations that need to reflect your unique organization.
      • It is recommended that you pay attention to the Next Steps slide at the end of the deck. This will likely have a large impact on your audience.
    2. Once you have customized the existing slides, you may wish to add additional slides. For instance, you may wish to add more context to the risk assessment or pressure analysis diagrams or provide details on high-priority initiatives.

    An image showing the 'Business Goals Cascade,' part of the 'Information Security Strategy Communication Deck.' A green box on top of the screenshot instructs you to 'Paste your goals cascade from the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool here.'

    Consider developing multiple versions of the deck for different audiences. Senior management may only want an executive summary, whereas the CIO may be more interested in the methodology used to develop the strategy.

    Communication considerations

    Developing an information security strategy is only half the job. For the strategy to be successful, you will need to garner support from key internal stakeholders. These may include the CIO, senior executives, and business leaders. Without their support, your strategy may never get the traction it needs. When building your communication deck and planning to present to these stakeholders, consider the following:

    • Gaining support from stakeholders requires understanding their needs. Before presenting to a new audience, carefully consider their priorities and tailor your presentation to address them.
    • Use the communication deck to clarify the business context and how your initiatives that will support business goals.
    • When presenting to senior stakeholders, anticipate what questions they might ask and be sure to prepare answers in advance. Always be prepared to speak to any data point within the deck.
    • If you are going to present your strategy to a group and you anticipate that one or more members of that group may be antagonistic, seek out an opportunity to speak to them before the meeting and address their concerns one on one.

    If you have already fully engaged your key stakeholders through the requirements gathering exercises, presenting the strategy will be significantly easier. The stakeholders will have already bought in to the business goals, allowing you to show how the security strategy supports those goals.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Reinforce the concept that a security strategy is an effort to enable the organization to achieve its core mission and goals and to protect the business only to the degree that the business demands. It is important that stakeholders understand this point.

    4.2 Develop a security charter

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the Information Security Charter.
    2. Customize the template as required to reflect your information security program. It may include elements such as:
      • A mission and vision statement for information security in your organization
      • The objectives and scope of the security program
      • A description of the security principles upon which your program is built
      • High-level roles and responsibilities for information security within the organization

    Input

    • Completed Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Completed Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Completed Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Output

    • Information security charter

    Materials

    • Information Security Charter

    Participants

    • Security Team

    Download the Information Security Gap Analysis Tool

    4.2.1 Customize the Information Security Charter

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. Involve the stakeholders that were present during Phase 1 activities to allow you to build a charter that is truly reflective of your organization.
    2. The purpose of the security charter is too:
      • Establish a mandate for information security within the organization.
      • Communicate executive commitment to risk and information security management.
      • Outline high-level responsibilities for information security within the organization.
      • Establish awareness of information security within the organization.

    A screenshot of the introduction of the 'Information Security Charter' template.

    A security charter is a formalized and defined way to document the scope and purpose of your security program. It will define security governance and allow it to operate efficiently through your mission and vision.

    4.3 Execute on your roadmap

    1. Executing on your information security roadmap will require coordinated effort by multiple teams within your organization. To ensure success, consider the following recommendations:
      1. If you have a project management office, leverage them to help apply formal project management methodologies to your initiatives.
      2. Develop a process to track the tasks on your strategy task list. Because these will not be managed as formal initiatives, it will be easy to lose track of them.
      3. Develop a schedule for regular reporting of progress on the roadmap to senior management. This will help hold yourself and others accountable for moving the project forward.
    2. Plan to review and update the strategy and roadmap on a regular basis. You may need to add, change, or remove initiatives as priorities shift.

    Input

    • Completed Security Gap Analysis Tool

    Output

    • Execution of your strategy and roadmap

    Materials

    • Information Security Gap Analysis Tool
    • Project management tools as required

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Project Management Office
    • IT and Corporate Teams, as required

    Info-Tech Insight

    Info-Tech has many resources that can help you quickly and effectively implement most of your initiatives. Talk to your account manager to learn more about how we can help your strategy succeed.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Knowledge of organizational pressures and the drivers behind them
    • Insight into stakeholder goals and obligations
    • A defined security risk tolerance information and baseline
    • Comprehensive knowledge of security current state and summary initiatives required to achieve security objectives

    Deliverables Completed

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Use our best-of-breed security framework to perform a gap analysis between your current and target states.

    Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Define the business, customer, and compliance alignment for your security program.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Develop a Security Operations Strategy

    A unified security operations process actively transforms security events and threat information into actionable intelligence, driving security prevention, detection, analysis, and response processes, addressing the increasing sophistication of cyberthreats, and guiding continuous improvement.

    This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a flexible and systematic security operations program relevant to your organization.

    Implement a Security Governance and Management Program

    Your security governance and management program needs to be aligned with business goals to be effective.

    This approach also helps to provide a starting point to develop a realistic governance and management program.

    This project will guide you through the process of implementing and monitoring a security governance and management program that prioritizes security while keeping costs to a minimum.

    Align Your Security Controls to Industry Frameworks for Compliance

    Don’t reinvent the wheel by reassessing your security program using a new framework.

    Instead, use the tools in this blueprint to align your current assessment outcomes to required standards.

    Bibliography

    “2015 Cost of Data Breach Study: United States.” Sponsored by IBM. Ponemon Institute, May 2015. Web.

    “2016 Cost of Cyber Crime Study & the Risk of Business Innovation.” Ponemon Institute, Oct. 2016. Web. 25 Oct. 2016.

    “2016 Cost of Data Breach Study: Global Analysis.” Ponemon Institute, June 2016. Web. 26 Oct. 2016.

    “2016 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2016. Web. 25 Oct. 2016.

    “2016 NowSecure Mobile Security Report.” NowSecure, 2016. Web. 5 Nov. 2016.

    “2017 Cost of Cyber Crime Study.” Ponemon Institute, Oct. 2017. Web.

    “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study: Global Overview.” Ponemon Institute, July 2018. Web.

    “2018 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2018. Web. Oct. 2019.

    “2018 Global State of Information Security Survey.” CSO, 2017. Web.

    “2018 Thales Data Threat Report.” Thales eSecurity, 2018. Web.

    “2019 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2020. Web. Feb. 2020.

    “2019 Global Cost of a Data Breach Study.” Ponemon Institute, Feb. 2020. Web.

    “2019 The Cost of Cyber Crime Study.” Accenture, 2019. Web Jan 2020.

    “2020 Thales Data Threat Report Global Edition.” Thales eSecurity, 2020. Web. Mar. 2020.

    Ben Salem, Malek. “The Cyber Security Leap: From Laggard to Leader.” Accenture, 2015. Web. 20 Oct. 2016.

    “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report.” Cisco, Jan. 2017. Web. 3 Jan. 2017.

    “Cyber Attack – How Much Will You Lose?” Hewlett Packard Enterprise, Oct. 2016. Web. 3 Jan. 2017.

    “Cyber Crime – A Risk You Can Manage.” Hewlett Packard Enterprise, 2016. Web. 3 Jan. 2017.

    “Global IT Security Risks Survey.” Kaspersky Lab, 2015. Web. 20 October 2016.

    “How Much Is the Data on Your Mobile Device Worth?” Ponemon Institute, Jan. 2016. Web. 25 Oct. 2016.

    “Insider Threat 2018 Report.” CA Technologies, 2018. Web.

    “Kaspersky Lab Announces the First 2016 Consumer Cybersecurity Index.” Press Release. Kaspersky Lab, 8 Sept. 2016. Web. 3 Jan. 2017.

    “Kaspersky Lab Survey Reveals: Cyberattacks Now Cost Large Businesses an Average of $861,000.” Press Release. Kaspersky Lab, 13 Sept. 2016. Web. 20 Oct. 2016.

    “Kaspersky Security Bulletin 2016.” Kaspersky Lab, 2016. Web. 25 Oct. 2016.

    “Managing Cyber Risks in an Interconnected World: Key Findings From the Global State of Information Security Survey 2015.” PwC, 30 Sept. 2014. Web.

    “Measuring Financial Impact of IT Security on Business.” Kaspersky Lab, 2016. Web. 25 Oct. 2016.

    “Ponemon Institute Releases New Study on How Organizations Can Leapfrog to a Stronger Cyber Security Posture.” Ponemon Institute, 10 Apr. 2015. Web. 20 Oct. 2016.

    “Predictions for 2017: ‘Indicators of Compromise’ Are Dead.” Kaspersky Lab, 2016. Web. 4 Jan. 2017.

    “Take a Security Leap Forward.” Accenture, 2015. Web. 20 Oct. 2016.

    “Trends 2016: (In)security Everywhere.” ESET Research Laboratories, 2016. Web. 25 Oct. 2016.

    Research Contributors

    • Peter Clay, Zeneth Tech Partners, Principal
    • Ken Towne, Zeneth Tech Partners, Security Architect
    • Luciano Siqueria, Road Track, IT Security Manager
    • David Rahbany, The Hain Celestial Group, Director IT Infrastructure
    • Rick Vadgama, Cimpress, Head of Information Privacy and Security
    • Doug Salah, Wabtec Corp, Manager of Information Security and IT Audit
    • Peter Odegard, Children’s Hospitals and Clinics, Information Security Officer
    • Trevor Butler, City of Lethbridge, Information Technology General Manager
    • Shane Callahan, Tractor Supply, Director of Information Security
    • Jeff Zalusky, Chrysalis, President/CEO
    • Candy Alexander, Independent Consultant, Cybersecurity and Information Security Executive
    • Dan Humbert, YMCA of Central Florida, Director of Information Technology
    • Ron Kirkland, Crawford & Co, Manager ICT Security & Customer Service
    • Jason Bevis – FireEye, Senior Director Orchestration Product Management - Office of the CTO
    • Joan Middleton, Village of Mount Prospect, IT Director
    • Jim Burns, Great America Financial Services, Vice President Information Technology
    • Ryan Breed, Hudson’s Bay, Information Security Analyst
    • James Fielder, Farm Credit Services – Central Illinois, Vice President of Information Systems

    Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}64|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-applications

    Your organization is considering holding an event online, or has been, but:

    • The organization (both on the business and IT sides) may not have extensive experience hosting events online.
    • It is not immediately clear how your formerly in-person event’s activities translate to a virtual environment.
    • Like the work-from-home transformation, bringing events online instantly expands IT’s role and responsibilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    If you don't begin with strategy, you will fit your event to technology, instead of the other way around.

    Impact and Result

    To determine your requirements:

    • Determine the scope of the event.
    • Narrow down your list of technical requirements.
    • Use Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework to select the right software solution.

    Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements Storyboard – Use this storyboard to work through key decision points involved in creating digital events.

    This deck walks you through key decision points in creating virtual or hybrid events. Then, begin the process of selecting the right software by putting together the first draft of your requirements for a virtual event software solution.

    • Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements Storyboard

    2. Virtual Events Requirements Tool – Use this tool to begin selecting your requirements for a digital event solution.

    The business should review the list of features and select which ones are mandatory and which are nice to have or optional. Add any features not included.

    • Virtual/Hybrid Event Software Feature Analysis Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Define Your Virtual and Hybrid Event Requirements

    Accelerate your event scoping and software selection process.

    Analyst Perspective

    When events go virtual, IT needs to cover its bases.

    The COVID-19 pandemic imposed a dramatic digital transformation on the events industry. Though event ticket and registration software, mobile event apps, and onsite audio/visual technology were already important pieces of live events, the total transformation of events into online experiences presented major challenges to organizations whose regular business operations involve at least one annual mid-sized to large event (association meetings, conferences, trade shows, and more).

    Many organizations worked to shift to online, or virtual events, in order to maintain business continuity. As time went on, and public gatherings began to restart, a shift to “hybrid” events began to emerge—events that accommodate both in-person and virtual attendance. Regardless of event type, this pivot to using virtual event software, or digital event technology, brings events more closely into IT’s areas of responsibility. If you don't begin with strategy, you risk fitting your event to technology, instead of the other way around.

    If virtual and hybrid events are becoming standard forms of delivering content in your organization, use Info-Tech’s material to help define the scope of the event and your requirements, and to support your software selection process.

    Photo of Emily Sugerman
    Emily Sugerman
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The organization (both on the business and IT sides) may not have extensive experience hosting events online.

    It is not immediately clear how a formerly in-person event’s activities translate to a virtual environment.

    Like the work-from-home transformation, bringing events online expands IT’s role and responsibilities.

    Common Obstacles

    It is not clear what technological capabilities are needed for the event, which capabilities you already own, and what you may need to purchase.

    Though virtual events remove some barriers to attendance (distance, travel), it introduces new complications and considerations for planners.

    Hybrid events introduce another level of complexity.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    In order to determine your requirements:

    Determine the scope of the event.

    Narrow down your list of technical requirements.

    Use Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework to select the right software solution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you don't begin with strategy, you will fit your event to technology, instead of the other way around.

    Your challenge

    The solution you have been using for online events does not meet your needs.

    Though you do have some tools that support large meetings, it is not clear if you require a larger and more comprehensive virtual event solution. There is a need to determine what type of technology you might need to purchase versus leveraging what you already have.

    It is difficult to quickly and practically identify core event requirements and how they translate into technical capabilities.

    Maintaining or improving audience engagement is a perpetual challenge for virtual events.

    38%
    of event professionals consider virtual event technology “a tool for reaching a wider audience as part of a hybrid strategy.”

    21%
    consider it “a necessary platform for virtual events, which remain my go-to event strategy.”

    40%
    prioritize “mid-budget all-in-one event tech solution that will prevent remote attendees from feeling like second-class participants.”

    Source: Virtual Event Tech Guide, 2022

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations.

    Events with networking objectives are not always well served by webinars, which are traditionally more limited in their interactive elements.

    Events that include the conducting of organizational/association business (like voting) may have bylaws that make selecting a virtual solution more challenging.

    Maintaining attendee engagement is more challenging in a virtual environment.

    Prior to the pandemic, your organization may not have been as experienced in putting on fully virtual events, putting more responsibility in your corner as IT. Navigating virtual events can also require technological competencies that your attendee userbase may not universally possess.

    Technological limitations and barriers to access can exclude potential attendees just as much as bringing events online can open up attendance to new audiences.

    Opportunity: Virtual events can significantly increase an event’s reach

    Events held virtually during the pandemic noted significant increases in attendees.

    “We had 19,000 registrations from all over the world, almost 50 times the number of people we had expected to host in Amsterdam. . . . Most of this year’s [2020] attendees would not have been able to participate in a physical GrafanaCon in Amsterdam. That was a huge win.” – Raj Dutt, Grafana Labs CEO[5]

    Event In-person Online 2022
    Microsoft Build 2019: 6,000 attendees 2020: 230,000+ registrants[1] The 2022 conference was also held virtually[3]
    Stanford Institute for Human-Centered Artificial Intelligence A few hundred attendees expected for the original (cancelled) 2020 in-person conference 2020: 30,000 attendees attended the “COVID-19 and AI” virtual conference[2] The 2022 Spring Conference was a hybrid event[4]

    [1] Kelly, 2020; [2] Price, 2020; [3] Stanford Digital Economy Lab, 2022; [4] Warren, 2022; [5] Fast Company, 2020

    Info-Tech’s methodology for defining virtual/hybrid event requirements

    A diagram that shows defining event scope, creating list of requirements, and selecting software.

    Event planning phases

    Apply project management principles to your virtual/hybrid event planning process.

    Online event planning should follow the same established principles as in-person event planning.
    Align the event’s concept and objectives with organizational goals.

    A diagram of event planning phases
    Source: Adapted from Event Management Body of Knowledge, CC BY 4.0

    Gather inputs to the planning processes

    Acquire as much of this information as possible before you being the planning process.

    Budget: Determine your organization’s budget for this event to help decide the scope of the event and the purchasing decisions you make as you plan.

    Internal human resources: Identify who in your organization is usually involved in the organization of this event and if they are available to organize this one.

    List of communication and collaboration tools: Acquire the list of the existing communication and collaboration tools you are currently licensed for. Ensure you know the following information about each tool:

    • Type of license
    • License limitations (maximum number of users)
    • Internal or external-facing tool (or capable of both)
    • Level of internal training and competency on the tool

    Decision point: Relate event goals to organizational goals

    What is driving the event?

    Your organization may hold a variety of in-person events that you now wish, for various reasons, to hold fully or partially online. Each event likely has a slightly different set of goals.

    Before getting into the details of how to transition your event online, return to the business/organizational goals the event is serving.

    Ensure each event (and each component of each event) maps back to an organizational goal.

    If a component of the event does not align to an organizational goal, assess whether it should remain as part of the event.

    Common organizational goals

    • Increase revenue
    • Increase productivity
    • Attract and retain talent
    • Improve change management
    • Carry out organizational mission
    • Identify new markets
    • Increase market share
    • Improve customer service
    • Launch new product/service

    Common event goals

    • Education/training
    • Knowledge transfer
    • Decision making
    • Professional development
    • Sales/lead generation
    • Fundraising
    • Entertainment
    • Morale boosting
    • Recognition of achievement

    Decision point: Identify your organization’s digital event vision

    What do you want the outcome of this event to be?

    Attendee goals: Who are your attendees? Why do they attend this event? What attendee needs does your event serve? What is your event’s value proposition? Are they intrinsically or extrinsically motivated to attend?

    Event goals: From the organizer perspective, why do you usually hold this event? Who are your stakeholders?

    Organizational goals: How do the event goals map to your organizational goals? Is there a clear understanding of what the event’s larger strategic purpose is.

    Common attendee goals

    Education: our attendees need to learn something new that they cannot learn on their own.
    Networking: our attendees need to meet people and make new professional connections.
    Professional development: our attendees have certain obligations to keep credentials updated or to present their work publicly to advance their careers.
    Entertainment: our attendees need to have fun.
    Commerce: our attendees need to buy and sell things.

    Decision point: Level of external event production

    Will you be completely self-managed, reliant on external event production services, or somewhere in the middle?

    You can review this after working through the other decision points and the scope becomes clearer.

    A diagram that shows Level of external event production, comparing Completely self-managed vs Fully externally-managed.

    Decision point: Assign event planning roles

    Who will be involved in planning the event? Fill/combine these roles as needed.

    Planning roles Description
    Project manager Shepherd event planning until completion while ensuring project remains on schedule and on budget.
    Event manager Correspond with presenters during leadup to event, communicate how to use online event tools/platform, perform tests with presenters/exhibitors, coordinate digital event staff/volunteers.
    Program planner Select the topics, speakers, activity types, content, streams.
    Designer and copywriter Design the event graphics; compose copy for event website.
    Digital event technologist Determine event technology requirements; determine how event technology fits together; prepare RFP, if necessary, for new hardware/software.
    Platform administrator Set up registration system/integrate registrations into platform(s) of choice; upload video files and collateral; add livestream links; add/delete staff roles and set controls and permissions; collect statistics and recordings after event.
    Commercial partner liaison Recruit sponsors and exhibitors (offer sponsorship packages); facilitate agreement/contract between commercial partners and organization; train commercial partners on how to use event technology; retrieve lead data.
    Marketing/social media Plan and execute promotional campaigns (email, social media) in the lead up to, and during, the event. Post-event, send follow-up communications, recording files, and surveys.

    Decision point: Assign event production roles

    Who will be involved in running the event?

    Event production roles Description
    Hosts/MCs Address attendees at beginning and end of event, and in-between sessions
    Provide continuity throughout event
    Introduce sessions
    Producers Prepare presenters for performance
    Begin and end sessions
    Use controls to share screens, switch between feeds
    Send backchannel messages to presenters (e.g., "Up next," "Look into webcam")
    Moderators Admit attendees from waiting room
    Moderate incoming questions from attendees
    Manage slides
    Pass questions to host/panelists to answer
    Moderate chat
    IT support Manage event technology stack
    Respond to attendee technical issues
    Troubleshoot network connectivity problems
    Ensure audio and video operational
    Start and stop session recording
    Save session recordings and files (chat, Q&As)

    Decision point: Map attendee goals to event goals to organizational goals

    Input: List of attendee benefits, List of event goals, List of organizational goals
    Output: Ranked list of event goals as they relate to attendee needs and organizational goals
    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts
    Participants: Planning team

    1. Define attendee benefits:
      1. List the attendee benefits derived from your event (as many as possible).
      2. Rank attendee benefits from most to least important.
    2. Define event goals:
      1. List your event goals (as many as possible).
      2. Draw a connecting line to your ranked list of attendee benefits.
      3. Identify if any event goals exist with no clear relationship to attendee benefits. Discuss whether this event goal needs to be re-envisioned. If it connects to no discernible attendee benefits, consider removing it. Otherwise, figure out what attendee benefits the event goal provides.
    3. Define organizational goals:
      1. Acquire a list of your organization’s main strategic goals.
      2. Draw a connecting line from each event goal to the organizational goal it supports.
      3. If most of your event goals do not immediately seem to support an organizational goal, discuss why this is. Try to find the connection. If you cannot, discuss whether the event should proceed or be rethought.

    Decision point: Break down your event into its constituent components

    Identify your event archetype

    Decompose the event into its component parts

    Identify technical requirements that help meet event goals

    Benefits:

    • Clarify how formerly in-person events map to virtual archetypes.
    • Ensure your virtual event planning is anchored to organizational goals from the outset.
    • Streamline your virtual event tech stack planning later.

    Decision point: Determine your event archetype

    Analyze your event’s:

    • Main goals.
    • The components and activities that support those goals.
    • How these components and activities fall into people- vs. content-centric activities, and real-time vs. asynchronous activities.
    1. Conference
    2. Trade show
    3. Annual general meeting
    4. Department meeting
    5. Town hall
    6. Workshop

    A diagram that shows people- vs. content-centric activities, and real-time vs. asynchronous activities

    Info-Tech Insight

    Begin the digital event planning process by understanding how your event’s content is typically consumed. This will help you make decisions later about how best to deliver the content virtually.

    Conference

    Goals: Education/knowledge transfer; professional advancement; networking.

    Major content

    • Call for proposals/circulation of abstracts
    • Keynotes or plenary address: key talk addressed to large audience
    • Panel sessions: multiple panelists deliver address on common theme
    • Poster sessions: staffed/unstaffed booths demonstrate visualization of major research on a poster
    • Association meetings (see also AGM archetype): professional associations hold AGM as one part of a larger conference agenda

    Community

    • Formal networking (happy hours, social outings)
    • Informal networking (hallway track, peer introductions)
    • Business card exchange
    • Pre- and post-event correspondence

    Commercial Partners

    • Booth reps: Publishing or industry representatives exhibit products/discuss collaboration

    A quadrants matrix of conference

    Trade show

    Objectives: Information transfer; sales; lead generation.

    Major content

    • Live booth reps answer questions
    • Product information displayed
    • Promotional/information material distributed
    • Product demonstrations at booths or onstage
    • Product samples distributed to attendees

    Community interactions

    • Statements of intent to buy
    • Lead generation (badge scanning) of booth visitors
    • Business card exchange
    • Pre- and post-event correspondence

    A quadrants matrix of Trade show

    Annual general meeting

    Objectives: Transparently update members; establish governance and alignment.

    Meeting events

    • Updates provided to members on organization’s activities/finances
    • Decisions made regarding organization’s direction
    • Governance over organization established (elections)
    • Speakers addressing large audience from stage
    • In-camera sessions
    • Translation of proceedings
    • Real-time weighted voting
    • Minutes taken during meeting

    Administration

    • Notice given of meeting within mandated time period
    • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
    • Distribution of proxy material
    • Minutes distributed

    A quadrants matrix of Annual general meeting

    Department meeting

    Objectives: Information transfer of company agenda/initiatives; group decision making.

    Major content

    • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
    • Updates provided from senior management/leadership to employees on organization’s initiatives and direction
    • Employee questions and feedback addressed
    • Group decision making
    • Minutes taken during meeting
    • Minutes or follow-up circulated

    A quadrants matrix of department meeting

    Town hall meeting

    Objectives: Update public; answer questions; solicit feedback.

    Major content

    • Public notice of meeting announced
    • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
    • Speakers addressing large audience from stage
    • Presentation of information pertinent to public interest
    • Audience members line up to ask questions/provide feedback
    • Translation of proceedings
    • Recording of meeting archived

    A quadrants matrix of Town hall meeting

    Workshop

    Objectives: Make progress on objective; achieve consensus; knowledge transfer.

    Major content

    • Scheduling of workshop
    • Agenda circulated prior to meeting
    • Facilitator leads group activities
    • Participants develop alignment on project
    • Progress achieved on workshop project
    • Feedback on workshop shared with facilitator

    A quadrants matrix of Workshop

    Decision point: Analyze your event’s purpose and value

    Use the event archetypes to help you identify your event’s core components and value proposition.

    1. Attendee types: Who typically attends your event? Exclusively internal participants? External participants? A mix of the two?
    2. Communication: How do participants usually communicate with each other during this event? How do they communicate with the event organizers? Include both formal types of communication (listening to panel sessions) and informal (serendipitous conversations in the hallway).
    3. Connection: What types of connections do your attendees need to experience? (networking with peers; interactions with booth reps; consensus building with colleagues).
    4. Exchange of material: What kind of material is usually exchanged at this event and between whom? (Pamphlets, brochures, business cards, booth swag).
    5. Engagement: How do you usually retain attendees' attention and make sure they remain engaged throughout the event?
    6. Length: How long does the event typically last?
    7. Location and setup: Where does the event usually take place and who is involved in its setup?
    8. Success metrics: How do you usually measure your event's success?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid trying to exactly reproduce the formerly in-person event online. Instead, identify the value proposition of each event component, then determine what its virtual expression could be.

    Example: Trade show

    Goals: Information transfer; sales; lead generation.

    1. Identify event component(s)
    2. Document its face-to-face expression(s)
    3. Identify the expression’s value proposition
    4. Translate the value proposition to a virtual component that facilitates overall event goal

    Event component

    Face-to-face expression

    Value proposition of component

    Virtual expression

    Attendee types Paying attendees Revenue for event organizer; sales and lead generation for booth rep Access to virtual event space
    Attendee types Booth rep Revenue for event organizer; information source for paying attendees Access to virtual event space
    Communication/connection Conversation between booth rep and attendee Lead generation for booth rep; information to inform decision making for attendee Ability to enter open video breakout session staffed by booth reps OR

    Ability to schedule meeting times with booth rep

    Multiple booth reps on hand to monitor different elements of the booth (one person to facilitate the discussion over video, another to monitor chat and Q&A)
    Communication/connection Serendipitous conversation between attendees Increased attendee contacts; fun Multiple attendees can attend the booth’s breakout session simultaneously and participate in web conferencing, meeting chat, or submit questions to Q&A
    Communication/connection Badges scanned at booth/email sign-up sheets filled out at table Lead generation for exhibitors List of visitors to booth shared with exhibitor (if consent given by attendees)

    Ability for attendees to request to be contacted for more information
    Exchange of material Catering (complimentary coffee, pastries) Obviate the need for attendees to leave the event for refreshments N/A: not included in virtual event
    Exchange of material Pamphlets, product literature, swag Portable information for attendee decision making Downloadable files (pdf)
    Location Responsibility of both the organizers (tables, chairs, venue) and booth reps (posters, handouts) Booth reps need a dedicated space where they can be easily found by attendees and advertise themselves Booth reps need access to virtual platform to upload files, images, provide booth description
    Engagement Attendees able to visit all booths by strolling through space Event organizers have a captive audience who is present in the immediacy of the event site Attendees motivated to stay in the event space and attend booths through gamification strategies (points awarded for number of booths visited or appointments booked)
    Length of event 2 full days Attendees travel to event site and spend the entire 2 days at the event, allowing them to be immersed in the event and absorb as much information in as little time as possible Exhibitors’ visiting hours will be scheduled so they work for both attendees attending in Eastern Standard Time and Pacific Time
    Metrics for success -Positive word of mouth
    -Number of registrations
    These metrics can be used to advertise to future exhibitors and attendees Number of virtual booths visited

    Number of file downloads

    Survey sent to attendees after event (favorite booths, preferred way to interact with exhibitors, suggestions for improvement, most valuable part of experience)

    Plan your metrics

    Use the analytics and reporting features available in your event technology toolset to capture the data you want to measure. Decide how each metric will impact your planning process for the next event.

    Examples of metrics:

    • Number of overall participants/registrants: Did you have more or fewer registrants/attendees than previous iterations of the event? What is the difference between number of registrants and number of real attendees?
    • Locations of participants: Where are people participating from? How many are attending for the first time? Are there new audiences you can pursue next time?
    • Most/least popular sessions: How long did people stay in the sessions and the event overall?
    • Most/least popular breakout rooms and discussion boards: Which topics should be repeated/skipped next time?
    • Social media mentions: Which topics received the most engagement on social media?
    • Surveys: What do participants report enjoying most? Least?
    • Technical failures: Can your software report on failures? Identify what technical problems arose and prepare a plan to mitigate them next time.

    Ensure the data you capture feeds into better planning for the next event

    Determine compliance requirements

    A greater event reach also means new data privacy considerations, depending on the location of your guests.

    General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

    Concerns over the collection of personal electronic data may not have previously been a part of your event planning considerations. However, now that your event is online, it’s wise to explore which data protection regulations apply to you. Remember, even if your organization is not located in the EU, if any of your attendees are European data subjects you may still be required to comply with GDPR, which involves the notification of data collected, allowing for opt-out options and the right to have data purged. The data must be collected for a specific purpose; if that purpose is expired, it can no longer be retained. You also have an obligation to report any breaches.

    Accessibility requirements

    What kind of accessibility laws are you subject to (AODA, WCAG2)? Regardless of compliance requirements, it is a good idea to ensure the online event follows accessibility best practices.

    Decision point: Set event policies

    What event policies need to be documented?
    How will you communicate them to attendees?

    Code of conduct

    One trend in the large event and conference space in recent years has been the development of codes of conduct that attendees are required to abide by to continue participating in the event.
    Now that your event is online, consider whether your code of conduct requires updating. Are there new types of appropriate/inappropriate online behavior that you need to define for your attendees?

    Harassment reporting

    If your organization has an event harassment reporting process, determine how this process will transfer over to the digital event.
    Ensure the reporting process has an owner and a clear methodology to follow to deal with complaints, as well as a digital reporting channel (a dedicated email or form) that is only accessed by approved staff to protect sensitive information.

    Develop a risk management plan

    Plan for how you will mitigate technical risks during your virtual event
    Provide presenters with a process to follow if technical problems arise.

    • Presenter’s internet connection cuts out
    • Attendees cannot log in to event platform
    • Attendees cannot hear/see video feed
    • What process will be followed when technical problems occur: ticketing system; chatbot; generic email accessible by all IT support assigned

    Testing/Rehearsal

    Test audio hardware: Ensure speakers use headphones/earbuds and mics (they do not have to be fancy/expensive). Relying on the computer/laptop mic can lead to more ambient noise and potential feedback problems.

    Check lighting: Avoid backlighting. Reposition speakers so they are not behind windows. Ask them to open/close shades. Add lamps as needed.

    Prevent interruptions: Before the event, ask panelists to turn phone and computer notifications to silent. Put a sign on the door saying Do not Disturb.

    Control audience view of screenshare: If your presenters will be sharing their screens, teach them how this works on the platform they are using. Advise them to exit out of any other application that is not part of their presentation, so they do not share the wrong screen unintentionally. Advise them to remove anything from the desktop that they do not want the audience to see, in case their desktop becomes visible at any point.

    Control audience view of physical environment: Before the event, advise participants to turn their cameras on and examine their backgrounds. Remove anything the audience should not be able to see.

    Test network connectivity: Send the presenters a link to a speed test and check their internet speed.

    Emergency contact: Exchange cell phone numbers for emergency backchannel conversations if problems arise on the day of the event.

    Set expectations: Presenting to an online audience feels very different to a live crowd. Prepare presenters for a lack of applause and lack of ability to see their audience, and that this does not mean the presentation was unsuccessful.

    Identify requirements

    To determine what kind of technical requirements you need to build the virtual expression of your event, consult the Virtual Event Platform Requirements Tool.

    1. If you have determined that the requirements you wish to use for the event exceed the capabilities of your existing communication and collaboration toolset, identify whether these gaps tip the scale toward purchasing a new tool. Use the requirement gaps to make the business case for purchasing a new tool.
    2. Use the Virtual Event Platform Requirements Tool to create a list of requirements.
    3. Consult the Software Reviews category for Virtual Event Platform Data Quadrant and Emotional Footprint reports.
    4. Assemble your documentation for approvals and the Rapid Application Selection Process.

    A photo of Detailed Feature Analysis Worksheet.

    Download the Virtual/Hybrid Event Software Feature Analysis Tool

    Rapid Application Selection Framework and Contract Review

    A photo of Rapid Application Selection Framework
    Launch Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework.

    Using the requirements you’ve just gathered as a base, use Info-Tech’s complete framework to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of software selection.

    Once you’ve selected a vendor(s), review the contract. Does it define an exit strategy? Does it define when your data will be deleted? Does it set service-level agreements that you find acceptable? Leverage Info-Tech’s contract review service once you have selected the virtual event solution and have received a contract from the vendor.

    Further research

    Photo of Run Better Meetings
    Run Better Meetings

    Bibliography

    Dutt, Raj. “7 Lessons from This Company’s First-Ever Virtual Conference.” Fast Company, 29 Jul 2020. Web.

    Kelly, Samantha Murphy. “Microsoft Build Proves Splashy Tech Events Can Thrive Online.” CNN, 21 May 2020. Web.

    “Phases.” Event Management Body of Knowledge (EMBOK), n.d. Web.

    Price, Michael. “As COVID-19 Forces Conferences Online, Scientists Discover Upsides of Virtual Format.” Science, 28 Apr 2020. Web.

    “Stanford HAI Spring Conference - Key Advances in Artificial Intelligence.” Stanford Digital Economy Lab, 2022. Web.

    “Virtual Event Tech Guide 2022.” Skift Meetings, April 2022. Web.

    Warren, Tom. “Microsoft Build 2022 Will Take Place May 24th–26th.” The Verge, 30 March 2022. Web.

    Contributors

    6 anonymous contributors

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}464|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Coordinate IT change and project management to successfully push changes to production.
    • Manage representation of project management within the scope of the change lifecycle to gather requirements, properly approve and implement changes, and resolve incidents that arise from failed implementations.
    • Communicate effectively between change management, project management, and the business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Improvement can be incremental. You do not have to adopt every recommended improvement right away. Ensure every process change you make will create value and slowly add improvements to ease buy-in.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish pre-set touchpoints between IT change management and project management at strategic points in the change and project lifecycles.
    • Include appropriate project representation at the change advisory board (CAB).
    • Leverage standard change resources such as the change calendar and request for change form (RFC).

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle Deck – A guide to walk through integrating project touchpoints in the IT change management lifecycle.

    Use this storyboard as a guide to align projects with your IT change management lifecycle.

    • Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle Storyboard

    2. The Change Management SOP – This template will ensure that organizations have a comprehensive document in place that can act as a point of reference for the program.

    Use this SOP as a template to document and maintain your change management practice.

    • Change Management Standard Operating Procedure
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle

    Increase the success of your changes by integrating project touchpoints in the change lifecycle.

    Analyst Perspective

    Focus on frequent and transparent communications between the project team and change management.

    Benedict Chang

    Misalignment between IT change management and project management leads to headaches for both practices. Project managers should aim to be represented in the change advisory board (CAB) to ensure their projects are prioritized and scheduled appropriately. Advanced notice on project progress allows for fewer last-minute accommodations at implementation. Widespread access of the change calendar can also lead project management to effectively schedule projects to give change management advanced notice.

    Moreover, alignment between the two practices at intake allows for requests to be properly sorted, whether they enter change management directly or are governed as a project.

    Lastly, standardizing implementation and post-implementation across everyone involved ensures more successful changes and socialized/documented lessons learned for when implementations do not go well.

    Benedict Chang
    Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    To align projects with the change lifecycle, IT leaders must:

    • Coordinate IT change and project management to successfully push changes to production.
    • Manage representation of project management within the scope of the change lifecycle to gather requirements, properly approve and implement changes, and resolve incidents that arise from failed implementations.
    • Communicate effectively between change management, project management, and the business.

    Loose definitions may work for clear-cut examples of changes and projects at intake, but grey-area requests end up falling through the cracks.

    Changes to project scope, when not communicated, often leads to scheduling conflicts at go-live.

    Too few checkpoints between change and project management can lead to conflicts. Too many checkpoints can lead to delays.

    Set up touchpoints between IT change management and project management at strategic points in the change and project lifecycles.

    Include appropriate project representation at the change advisory board (CAB).

    Leverage standard change resources such as the change calendar and request for change form (RFC).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Improvement can be incremental. You do not have to adopt every recommended improvement right away. Ensure every process change you make will create value, and slowly add improvements to ease buy-in.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Use the change lifecycle to identify touchpoints.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's approach.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Start with your change lifecycle to define how change control can align with project management.
    2. Make improvements to project-change alignment to benefit the relationship between the two practices and the practices individually.
    3. Scope the alignment to your organization. Take on the improvements to the left one by one instead of overhauling your current process.

    Use this research to improve your current process

    This deck is intended to align established processes. If you are just starting to build IT change processes, see the related research below.

    Align Projects With the IT Change Lifecycle

    02 Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    01 Optimize IT Change Management

    Increase the success of your changes by integrating project touchpoints in your change lifecycle.

    (You are here)

    Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.

    Right-size IT change management to protect the live environment.

    Successful change management will provide benefits to both the business and IT

    Respond to business requests faster while reducing the number of change-related disruptions.

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Fewer incidents and outages at project go-live
    • Upfront identification of project and change requirements
    • Higher rate of change and project success
    • Less rework
    • Fewer service desk calls related to failed go-lives
    • Fewer service disruptions
    • Faster response to requests for new and enhanced functionalities
    • Higher rate of benefits realization when changes are implemented
    • Lower cost per change
    • Fewer “surprise” changes disrupting productivity

    IT satisfaction with change management will drive business satisfaction with IT. Once the process is working efficiently, staff will be more motivated to adhere to the process, reducing the number of unauthorized changes. As fewer changes bypass proper evaluation and testing, service disruptions will decrease and business satisfaction will increase.

    Change management improves core benefits to the business: the four Cs

    Most organizations have at least some form of change control in place, but formalizing change management leads to the four Cs of business benefits:

    Control

    Collaboration

    Consistency

    Confidence

    Change management brings daily control over the IT environment, allowing you to review every relatively new change, eliminate changes that would have likely failed, and review all changes to improve the IT environment.

    Change management planning brings increased communication and collaboration across groups by coordinating changes with business activities. The CAB brings a more formalized and centralized communication method for IT.

    Request-for-change templates and a structured process result in implementation, test, and backout plans being more consistent. Implementing processes for pre-approved changes also ensures these frequent changes are executed consistently and efficiently.

    Change management processes will give your organization more confidence through more accurate planning, improved execution of changes, less failure, and more control over the IT environment. This also leads to greater protection against audits.

    1. Alignment at intake

    Define what is a change and what is a project.

    Both changes and projects will end up in change control in the end. Here, we define the intake.

    Changes and projects will both go to change control when ready to go live. However, defining the governance needed at intake is critical.

    A change should be governed by change control from beginning to end. It would typically be less than a week’s worth of work for a SME to build and come in at a nominal cost (e.g. <$20k over operating costs).

    Projects on the other hand, will be governed by project management in terms of scope, scheduling, resourcing, etc. Projects typically take over a week and/or cost more. However, the project, when ready to go live, should still be scheduled through change control to avoid any conflicts at implementation. At triage and intake, a project can be further scoped based on projected scale.

    This initial touchpoint between change control and project management is crucial to ensure tasks and request are executed with the proper governance. To distinguish between changes and projects at intake, list examples of each and determine what resourcing separates changes from projects.

    Need help scoping projects? Download the Project Intake Classification Matrix

    Change

    Project

    • Smaller scale task that typically takes a short time to build and test
    • Generates a single change request
    • Governed by IT Change Management for the entire lifecycle
    • Larger in scope
    • May generate multiple change requests
    • Governed by PMO
    • Longer to build and test

    Info-Tech Insight

    While effort and cost are good indicators of changes and projects, consider evaluating risk and complexity too.

    1 Define what constitutes a change

    1. As a group, brainstorm examples of changes and projects. If you wish, you may choose to also separate out additional request types such as service requests (user), operational tasks (backend), and releases.
    2. Have each participant write the examples on sticky notes and populate the following chart on the whiteboard/flip chart.
    3. Use the examples to draw lines and determine what defines each category.
    • What makes a change distinct from a project?
    • What makes a change distinct from a service request?
    • What makes a change distinct from an operational task?
    • When do the category workflows cross over with other categories? (For example, when does a project interact with change management?
  • Record the definitions of requests and results in section 2.3 of the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).
  • Change

    Project

    Service Request (Optional)

    Operational Task (Optional)

    Release (Optional)

    Changing Configuration

    New ERP

    Add new user

    Delete temp files

    Software release

    Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

    Input Output
    • List of examples of each category of the chart
    • Definitions for each category to be used at change intake
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens
    • Change Management SOP
    • Change Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    2. Alignment at build and test

    Keep communications open by pre-defining and communicating project milestones.

    CAB touchpoints

    Consistently communicate the plan and timeline for hitting these milestones so CAB can prioritize and plan changes around it. This will give change control advanced notice of altered timelines.

    RFCs

    Projects may have multiple associated RFCs. Keeping CAB appraised of the project RFC or RFCs gives them the ability to further plan changes.

    Change Calendar

    Query and fill the change calendar with project timelines and milestones to compliment the CAB touchpoints.

    Leverage the RFC to record and communicate project details

    The request for change (RFC) form does not have to be a burden to fill out. If designed with value in mind, it can be leveraged to set standards on all changes (from projects and otherwise).

    When looking at the RFC during the Build and Test phase of a project, prioritize the following fields to ensure the implementation will be successful from a technical and user-adoption point of view.

    Filling these fields of the RFC and communicating them to the CAB at go-live approval gives the approvers confidence that the project will be implemented successfully and measures are known for when that implementation is not successful.

    Download the Request for Change Form Template

    Communication Plan

    The project may be successful from a technical point of view, but if users do not know about go-live or how to interact with the project, it will ultimately fail.

    Training Plan

    If necessary, think of how to train different stakeholders on the project go-live. This includes training for end users interacting with the project and technicians supporting the project.

    Implementation Plan

    Write the implementation plan at a high enough level that gives the CAB confidence that the implementation team knows the steps well.

    Rollback Plan

    Having a well-formulated rollback plan gives the CAB the confidence that the impact of the project is well known and the impact to the business is limited even if the implementation does not go well.

    Provide clear definitions of what goes on the change calendar and who’s responsible

    Inputs

    • Freeze periods for individual business departments/applications (e.g. finance month-end periods, HR payroll cycle, etc. – all to be investigated)
    • Maintenance windows and planned outage periods
    • Project schedules, and upcoming major/medium changes
    • Holidays
    • Business hours (some departments work 9-5, others work different hours or in different time zones, and user acceptance testing may require business users to be available)

    Guidelines

    • Business-defined freeze periods are the top priority.
    • No major or medium normal changes should occur during the week between Christmas and New Year’s Day.
    • Vendor SLA support hours are the preferred time for implementing changes.
    • The vacation calendar for IT will be considered for major changes.
    • Change priority: High > Medium > Low.
    • Minor changes and preapproved changes have the same priority and will be decided on a case-by-case basis.

    Roles

    • The Change Manager will be responsible for creating and maintaining a change calendar.
    • Only the Change Manager can physically alter the calendar by adding a new change after the CAB has agreed upon a deployment date.
    • All other CAB members, IT support staff, and other impacted stakeholders should have access to the calendar on a read-only basis to prevent people from making unauthorized changes to deployment dates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make the calendar visible to as many parties as necessary. However, limit the number of personnel who can make active changes to the calendar to limit calendar conflicts.

    3. Alignment at approval

    How can project management effectively contribute to CAB?

    As optional CAB members

    Project SMEs may attend when projects are ready to go live and when invited by the change manager. Optional members provide details on change cross-dependencies, high-level testing, rollback, communication plans, etc. to inform prioritization and scheduling decisions.

    As project management representatives

    Project management should also attend CAB meetings to report in on changes to ongoing projects, implementation timelines, and project milestones. Projects are typically high-priority changes when going live due to their impact. Advanced notice of timeline and milestone changes allow the rest of the CAB to properly manage other changes going into production.

    As core CAB members

    The core responsibilities of CAB must still be fulfilled:

    1. Protect the live environment from poorly assessed, tested, and implemented changes.

    2. Prioritize changes in a way that fairly reflects change impact, urgency, and likelihood.

    3. Schedule deployments in a way the minimizes conflict and disruption.

    If you need to define the authority and responsibilities of the CAB, see Activity 2.1.3 of the Optimize IT Change Management blueprint.

    4. Alignment at implementation

    At this stage, the project or project phase is treated as any other change.

    Verification

    Once the change has been implemented, verify that all requirements are fulfilled.

    Review

    Ensure all affected systems and applications are operating as predicted.

    Update change ticket and change log

    Update RFC status and CMDB as well (if necessary).

    Transition

    Once the change implementation is complete, it’s imperative that the team involved inform and train the operational and support groups.

    If you need to define transitioning changes to production, download Transition Projects to the Service Desk

    5. Alignment at post-implementation

    Tackle the most neglected portion of change management to avoid making the same mistake twice.

    1. Define RFC statuses that need a PIR
    2. Conduct PIRs for failed changes. Successful changes can simply be noted and transitioned to operations.

    3. Conduct a PIR for every failed change
    4. It’s best to perform a PIR once a change-related incident is resolved.

    5. Avoid making the same mistake twice
    6. Include a root-cause analysis, mitigation actions/timeline, and lessons learned in the documentation.

    7. Report to CAB
    8. Socialize the findings of the PIR at the subsequent CAB meeting.

    9. Circle back on previous PIRs
    10. If a similar change is conducted, append the related PIR to avoid the same mistakes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include your PIR documentation right in the RFC for easy reference.

    Download the RFC template for more details on post-implementation reviews

    2 Implement your alignments stepwise

    1. As a group, decide on which implementations you need to make to align change management and project management.
    2. For each improvement, list a timeline for implementation.
    3. Update section 3.5 in the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP). to outline the responsibilities of project management within IT Change Management.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Change Management SOP

    Download the Change Management Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

    Input Output
    • This deck
    • SOP update
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Service catalog (if applicable)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers/pens
    • Change Management SOP
    • Change Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Members of the Change Advisory Board

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Right-size IT change management to protect the live environment.

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Decide which IT projects to approve and when to start them.

    Maintain an Organized Portfolio

    Align portfolio management practices with COBIT (APO05: Manage Portfolio).

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}336|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Mainframes remain a critical part of an organization’s infrastructure and will need to support these platforms for the foreseeable future. Despite the importance, it can be a challenge for organizations to find qualified resources to support them. Meanwhile, companies are unsure of where to find help to train and develop their teams on mainframe technologies and are at risk of a skills gap within their teams.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mainframes continue to have wide usage, particularly in enterprise organizations. The complexity of moving or replatforming many of these applications means these platforms will be around for a long time still.
    • Companies need to be proactive about developing their teams to support their mainframe systems.

    Impact and Result

    • Companies can protect their assets by cultivating a pipeline of qualified resources to support their mainframe infrastructure.
    • There is a robust training ecosystem headed by large, reputable organizations to help develop and support companies' resources. You don’t have to do it alone.

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard – An overview of the solutions available to support your mainframe training and skills development needs.

    Your mainframes are not going to disappear overnight. These systems often support the most critical operations in your organization. You need to ensure you have the right qualified resources to support your platforms.

    • Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Master the Secrets of Adobe’s Creative Cloud Contracts to Right-Size Your Adobe Spend

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}139|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $63,667 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 110 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Adobe operates in its own niche in the creative space, and Adobe users have grown accustomed to their products, making switching very difficult.
    • With Adobe’s transition to a cloud-based subscription model, it’s important for organizations to actively manage licenses, software provisioning, and consumption.
    • Without a detailed understanding of Adobe’s various purchasing models, overspending often occurs.
    • Organizations have experienced issues in identifying commercial licensed packages with their install files, making it difficult to track and assign licenses.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Focus on user needs first. Examine which products are truly needed versus nice to have to prevent overspending on the Creative Cloud suite.
    • Examine what has been deployed. Knowing what has been deployed and what is being used will greatly aid in completing your true-up.
    • Compliance is not automatic with products that are in the cloud. Shared logins or computers that have desktop installs that can be access by multiple users can cause noncompliance.

    Impact and Result

    • Visibility into license deployments and needs
    • Compliance with internal audits

    Master the Secrets of Adobe’s Creative Cloud Contracts to Right-Size Your Adobe Spend Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Procuring Adobe software is not the same game as it was just a few years ago. Adopt a comprehensive approach to understanding Adobe licensing to avoid overspending and to maximize negotiation leverage.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Manage your Adobe agreements

    Use Info-Tech’s licensing best practices to avoid overspending on Adobe licensing and to remain compliant in case of audit.

    • Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table
    • Adobe ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits
    • Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Master the Secrets of Adobe’s Creative Cloud Contracts to Right-Size Your Adobe Spend

    Learn the essential steps to avoid overspending and to maximize negotiation leverage with Adobe.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Only 18% of Adobe licenses are genuine copies: are yours?

    "Adobe has designed and executed the most comprehensive evolution to the subscription model of pre-cloud software publishers with Creative Cloud. Adobe's release of Document Cloud (replacement for the Acrobat series of software) is the final nail in the coffin for legacy licensing for Adobe. Technology procurement functions have run out of time in which to act while they still retain leverage, with the exception of some late adopter organizations that were able to run on legacy versions (e.g. CS6) for the past five years. Procuring Adobe software is not the same game as it was just a few years ago. Adopt a comprehensive approach to understanding Adobe licensing, contract, and delivery models in order to accurately forecast your software needs, transact against the optimal purchase plan, and maximize negotiation leverage. "

    Scott Bickley

    Research Lead, Vendor Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • IT managers scoping their Adobe licensing requirements and compliance position.
    • CIOs, CTOs, CPOs, and IT directors negotiating licensing agreements in search of cost savings.
    • ITAM/Software asset managers responsible for tracking and managing Adobe licensing.
    • IT and business leaders seeking to better understand Adobe licensing options (Creative Cloud).
    • Vendor management offices in the process of a contract renewal.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand and simplify licensing per product to help optimize spend.
    • Ensure agreement type is aligned to needs.
    • Navigate the purchase process to negotiate from a position of strength.
    • Manage licenses more effectively to avoid compliance issues, audits, and unnecessary purchases.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CFOs and the finance department
    • Enterprise architects
    • ITAM/SAM team
    • Network and IT architects
    • Legal
    • Procurement and sourcing

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand licensing methods in order to make educated and informed decisions.
    • Understand the future of the cloud in your Adobe licensing roadmap.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Adobe’s dominant market position and ownership of the creative software market is forcing customers to refocus the software acquisition process to ensure a positive ROI on every license.
    • In early 2017, Adobe announced it would stop selling perpetual Creative Suite 6 products, forcing future purchases to be transitioned to the cloud.

    Complication

    • Adobe operates in its own niche in the creative space, and Adobe users have grown accustomed to their products, making switching very difficult.
    • With transition to a cloud-based subscription model, organizations need to actively manage licenses, software provisioning, and consumption.
    • Without a detailed understanding of Adobe’s various purchasing models, overspending often occurs.
    • Organizations have experienced issues in identifying commercial licensed packages with their install files, making it difficult to track and assign licenses.

    Resolution

    • Gain visibility into license deployments and needs with a strong SAM program/tool; this will go a long way toward optimizing spend.
      • Number of users versus number of installs are not the same, and confusing the two can result in overspending. Device-based licensing historically would have required two licenses, but now only one may be required.
    • Ensure compliance with internal audits. Adobe has a very high rate of piracy stemming from issues such as license overuse, misunderstanding of contract language, using cracks/keygens, virtualized environments, indirect access, and sharing of accounts.
    • A handful of products are still sold as perpetual – Acrobat Standard/Pro, Captivate, ColdFusion, Photoshop, and Premiere Elements – but be aware of what is being purchased and used in the organization.
      • Beware of products deployed on server, where the number of users accessing that product cannot easily be counted.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Your user-need analysis has shifted in the new subscription-based model. Determine which products are needed versus nice to have to prevent overspending on the Creative Cloud suite.
    2. Examine what you need, not what you have. You can no longer mix and match applications.
    3. Compliance is not automatic with products that are in the cloud. Shared logins or computers with desktop installs that can be accessed by multiple users can cause noncompliance.

    The aim of this blueprint is to provide a foundational understanding of Adobe

    Why Adobe

    In 2011 Adobe took the strategic but radical move toward converting its legacy on-premises licensing to a cloud-based subscription model, in spite of material pushback from its customer base. While revenues initially dipped, Adobe’s resolve paid off; the transition is mostly complete and revenues have doubled. This was the first enterprise software offering to effect the transition to the cloud in a holistic manner. It now serves as a case study for those following suit, such as Microsoft, Autodesk, and Oracle.

    What to know

    Adobe elected to make this market pivot in a dramatic fashion, foregoing a gradual transition process. Enterprise clients were temporarily allowed to survive on legacy on-premises editions of Adobe software; however, as the Adobe Creative Cloud functionality was quickly enhanced and new applications were launched, customer capitulation to the new subscription model was assured.

    The Future

    Adobe is now leveraging the power of connected customers, the availability of massive data streams, and the ongoing digitalization trend globally to supplement the core Creative Cloud products with online services and analytics in the areas of Creative Cloud for content, Marketing Cloud for marketers, and Document Cloud for document management and workflows. This blueprint focuses on Adobe's Creative Cloud and Document Cloud solutions and the enterprise term license agreement (ETLA).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Beware of your contract being auto-renewed and getting locked into the quantities and product subset that you have in your current agreement. Determining the number of licenses you need is critical. If you overestimate, you're locked in for three years. If you underestimate, you have to pay a big premium in the true-up process.

    Learn the “Adobe way,” whether you are reviewing existing spend or considering the purchase of new products

    1. Legacy on-premises Adobe Creative Suite products used to be available in multiple package configurations, enabling right-sized spend with functionality. Adobe’s support for legacy Creative Suites CS6 products ended in May 2017.
    2. While early ETLAs allowed customer application packaging at a lower price than the full Creative Cloud suite, this practice has been discontinued. Now, the only purchasing options are the full suite or single-application subscriptions.
    3. Buyers must now assess alternative Adobe products as an option for non-power users. For example, QuarkXPress, Corel PaintShop Pro, CorelDRAW, Bloom, and Affinity Designer are possible replacements for some Creative Cloud applications.
    4. Document Cloud, Adobe’s latest step in creating an Acrobat-focused subscription model, limits the ability to reduce costs with an extended upgrade cycle. These changes go beyond the licensing model.
    5. Organizations need to perform a cost-benefit analysis of single app purchases vs. the full suite to right-size spend with functionality.

    As Adobe’s dominance continues to grow, organizations must find new ways to maintain a value-added relationship

    Adobe estimates the total addressable market for creative and document cloud to be $21 billion. With no sign of growth slowing down, Adobe customers must learn how to work within the current design monopoly.

    The image contains two pie graphs. The first is labelled FY2014 Revenue Mix, and the second graph is titled FY2017E Revenue Mix.

    Source: Adobe, 2017

    "Adobe is not only witnessing a steady increase in Creative Cloud subscriptions, but it also gained more visibility into customers’ product usage, which enables it to consistently push out software updates relevant to user needs. The company also successfully transformed its sales organization to support the recurring revenue model."

    – Omid Razavi, Global Head of Success, ServiceNow

    Consider your route forward

    Consider your route forward, as ETLA contract commitments, scope, and mechanisms differ in structure to the perpetual models previously utilized. The new model shortchanges technology procurement leaders in their expectations of cost-usage alignment and opex flexibility (White, 2016).

    ☑ Implement a user profile to assign licenses by version and limit expenditures. Alternatives can include existing legacy perpetual and Acrobat classic versions that may already be owned by the organization.

    ☑ Examine the suitability and/or dependency on Document Cloud functions, such as existing business workflows and e-signature integration.

    ☑ Involve stakeholders in the evaluation of alternate products for use cases where dependency on Acrobat-specific functionality is limited.

    ☑ Identify not just the installs and active use of the applications but also the depth and breadth of use across the various features so that the appropriate products can be selected.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram listing the adobe toolkit. The toolkit includes: Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast Tool, Adobe ETLA Forecasted Cost and Benefits, Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe toolkit to prepare for your new purchases or contract renewal

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT asset management (ITAM) and software asset management (SAM) are critical! An error made in a true-up can cost the organization for the remaining years of the ETLA. Info-Tech worked with one client that incurred a $600k error in the true-up that they were not able to recoup from Adobe.

    Apply licensing best practices and examine the potential for cost savings through an unbiased third-party perspective

    Establish Licensing Requirements

    • Understand Adobe’s product landscape and transition to cloud.
    • Analyze users and match to correct Adobe SKU.
    • Conduct an internal software assessment.
    • Build an effective licensing position.

    Evaluate Licensing Options

    • Value Incentive Plan (VIP)
    • Cumulative Licensing Program (CLP)
    • Transactional Licensing Program (TLP)
    • Enterprise Term License Agreement (ETLA)

    Evaluate Agreement Options

    • Price
    • Discounts
    • Price protection
    • Terms and conditions

    Purchase and Manage Licenses

    • Learn negotiation tactics to enhance your current strategy.
    • Control the flow of communication.
    • Assign the right people to manage the environment.

    Preventive practices can help find measured value ($)

    Time and resource disruption to business if audited

    Lost estimated synergies in M&A

    Cost of new licensing

    Cost of software audit, penalties, and back support

    Lost resource allocation and time

    Third party, legal/SAM partners

    Cost of poor negotiation tactics

    Lost discount percentage

    Terms and conditions improved

    Explore Adobe licensing and optimize spend – project overview

    Establish Licensing Requirements

    Evaluate Licensing Options

    Evaluate Agreement Options

    Purchase and Manage Licenses

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    • Assess current state and align goals; review business feedback.
    • Interview key stakeholders to define business objectives and drivers.
    • Review licensing options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Determine the ideal contract type.
    • Review final contract.
    • Discuss negotiation points.
    • License management.
    • Future licensing strategy.

    Guided Implementations

    • Engage in a scoping call.
    • Assess the current state.
    • Determine licensing position.
    • Review product options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Review contract option types.
    • Determine negotiation points.
    • Finalize the contract.
    • Discuss license management.
    • Evaluate and develop a roadmap for future licensing.

    PHASE 1

    Manage Your Adobe Agreements

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Managing Adobe Contracts

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3-6 weeks

    Step 1.1: Establish Licensing Requirements

    Start with a kick-off call:

    • Assess the current state.
    • Determine licensing position.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Complete a deployment count, needs analysis, and internal audit.

    With these tools & templates:

    Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast

    Step 1.2: Determine Licensing Options

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review licensing options.
    • Review licensing rules.
    • Review contract option types.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Select licensing option.
    • Document forecasted costs and benefits.

    With these tools & templates:

    Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table

    Adobe ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits

    Step 1.3: Purchase and Manage Licenses

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review final contract.
    • Discuss negotiation points.
    • Plan a roadmap for SAM.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Negotiate final contract.
    • Evaluate and develop a roadmap for SAM.

    With these tools & templates:

    Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast

    Adobe’s Cloud – Snapshot of what has changed

    1. Since Adobe has limited the procurement and licensing options with the introduction of Creative Cloud, there are three main choices:
      1. Direct online purchase at Adobe.com
      2. Value Incentive Plan (VIP): Creative Cloud for teams–based purchase with a volume discount (minimal, usually ~10%); may have some incentives or promotional pricing
      3. Enterprise Term License Agreement (ETLA): Creative Cloud for Enterprise (CCE)
    2. Adobe has discontinued support for legacy perpetual licenses, with the latest version being CS6, which is steering organizations to prioritize their options for products in the creative and document management space.
    3. Document Cloud (DC) is the cloud product replacing the Acrobat perpetual licensing model. DC extends the subscription-based model further and limits options to extend the lifespan of legacy on-premises licenses through a protracted upgrade process.
    4. The subscription model, coupled with limited discount options on transactional purchases, forces enterprises to consider the ETLA option. The ETLA brings with it unique term commitments, new pricing structures, and true-up mechanisms and inserts the "land and expand" model vs. license reassignment.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adobe’s move from a perpetual license to a per-user subscription model can be positive in some scenarios for organizations that experienced challenges with deployment, management of named users vs. devices, and license tracking.

    Core concepts of Adobe agreements: Discounting, pricing, and bundling

    ETLA

    Adobe has been systematically reducing discounts on ETLAs as they enter the second renewal cycle of the original three-year terms.

    Adobe Cloud Bundling

    Adobe cloud services are being bundled with ETLAs with a mandate that companies that do not accept the services at the proposed cost have Adobe management’s approval to unbundle the deal, generally with no price relief.

    Custom Bundling

    The option for custom bundling of legacy Creative Suite component applications has been removed, effectively raising the price across the board for licensees that require more than two Adobe applications who must now purchase the full Creative Cloud suite.

    Higher and Public Education

    Higher education/public education agreements have been revamped over the past couple of years, increasing prices for campus-wide agreements by double-digit percentages (~10-30%+). While they still receive an 80% discount over list price, IT departments in this industry are not prepared to absorb the budget increase.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Adobe has moved to an all-or-one bundle model. If you need more than two application products, you will likely need to purchase the full Creative Cloud suite. Therefore, it is important to focus on creating accurate user profiles to identify usage needs.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Track deployment and needs

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Track deployment and needs.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Audit

    The image contains a screenshot of the Adobe Deployment Tool for SAM, specifically the Audit tab.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe deployment tool for SAM: Cost

    The image contains a screenshot of the Adobe Deployment Tool for SAM, specifically the Cost tab.

    Use Info-Tech’s tools to compare ETLA vs. VIP and to document forecasted costs and benefits

    Is the ETLA or VIP option better for your organization?

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table tool to compare ETLA costs against VIP costs.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table.

    Your ETLA contains multiple products and is a multi-year agreement.

    Use Info-Tech’s ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits tool to forecast your ETLA costs and document benefits.

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's ETLA Forecasted Costs and Benefits.

    Adobe’s Creative Cloud Complete offering provides access to all Adobe creative products and ongoing upgrades

    Why subscription model?

    The subscription model forces customers to an annuity-based pricing model, so Adobe has recurring revenue from a subscription-based product. This increases customer lifetime value (CLTV) for Adobe while providing ongoing functionality updates that are not version/edition dependent.

    Key Characteristics:

    • Available as a month-to-month or annual subscription license
    • Can be purchased for one user, for a team, or for an enterprise
    • Subject to annual payment and true-up of license fees
    • Can only true-up during lifespan of contract; quantities cannot be reduced until renewal
    • May contain auto-renewal clauses – beware!

    Key things to know:

    1. Applications can be purchased individually if users require only one specific product. A few products continue to have on-premises licensing options, but most are offered by per-user subscriptions.
    2. At the end of the subscription period, the organization no longer has any rights to the software and would have to return to a previously owned version.
    3. True-downs are not possible (in contrast to Microsoft’s Office 365).
    4. Downgrade rights are not included or are limited by default.

    Which products are in the Creative Cloud bundle?

    Adobe Acrobat® XI Pro

    Adobe After Effects® CC

    Adobe Audition® CC

    Adobe Digital Publishing Suite, Single Edition

    Adobe InDesign® CC

    Adobe Dreamweaver® CC

    Adobe Edge Animate

    Adobe Edge Code preview

    Adobe Edge Inspect

    Adobe Photoshop CC

    Adobe Edge Reflow preview

    Adobe Edge Web Fonts

    Adobe Extension Manager

    ExtendScript Toolkit

    Adobe Fireworks® CS6

    Adobe Flash® Builder® 4.7 Premium Edition

    Adobe Flash Professional CC

    Adobe Illustrator® CC

    Adobe Prelude® CC

    Adobe Premiere® Pro CC

    Adobe Scout

    Adobe SpeedGrade® CC

    Adobe Muse CC

    Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 6

    Adobe offers different solutions for teams vs. enterprise licensing

    Evaluate the various options for Creative Cloud, as they can be purchased individually, for teams, or for enterprise.

    Bundle Name

    Target Customer

    Included Applications

    Features

    CC (for Individuals)

    Individual users

    The individual chooses

    • Sync, store, and share assets
    • Adobe Portfolio website
    • Adobe Typekit font collection
    • Microsoft Teams integration
    • Can only be purchased through credit card

    CC for Teams (CCT)

    Small to midsize organizations with a small number of Adobe users who are all within the same team

    Depends on your team’s requirements. You can select all applications or specific applications.

    Everything that CC (for individuals) does, plus

    • One license per user; can reassign CC licenses
    • Web-based admin console
    • Centralized deployment
    • Usage tracking and reporting
    • 100GB of storage per user
    • Volume discounts for 10+ seats

    CC for Enterprise (CCE)

    Large organizations with users who regularly use multiple Adobe products on multiple machines

    All applications including Adobe Stock for images and Adobe Enterprise Dashboard for managing user accounts

    Everything that CCT does, plus

    • Employees can activate a second copy of software on another device (e.g. home computer) as long as they share the same Adobe ID and are not used simultaneously
    • Ability to reassign licenses from old users to new users
    • Custom storage options
    • Greater integration with other Adobe products
    • Larger volume discounts with more seats

    For further information on specific functionality differences, reference Adobe’s comparison table.

    A Cloud-ish solution: Considerations and implications for IT organizations

    ☑ True cloud products are typically service-based, scalable and elastic, shared resources, have usage metering, and rely upon internet technologies. Currently, Adobe’s Creative Cloud and Document Cloud products lack these characteristics. In fact, the core products are still downloaded and physically installed on endpoint devices, then anchored to the cloud provisioning system, where the software can be automatically updated and continuously verified for compliance by ensuring the subscription is active.

    ☑ Adobe Cloud allows Adobe to increase end-user productivity by releasing new features and products to market faster, but the customer will increase lock-in to the Adobe product suite. The fast-release approach poses a different challenge for IT departments, as they must prepare to test and support new functionality and ensure compatibility with endpoint devices.

    ☑ There are options at the enterprise level that enable IT to exert more granular control over new feature releases, but these are tied to the ETLA and the provided enterprise portal and are not available on other subscription plans. This is another mechanism by which Adobe has been able to spur ETLA adoption.

    Not all CIOs consider SaaS/subscription applications their first choice, but the Adobe’s dominant position in the content and document management marketplace is forcing the shift regardless. It is significant that Adobe bypassed the typical hybrid transition model by effectively disrupting the ability to continue with perpetual licensing without falling behind the functionality curve.

    VIP plans do allow for annual terms and payment, but you lose the price elasticity that comes with multi-year terms.

    Download Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table tool to compare ETLA costs against VIP costs.

    When moving to Adobe cloud, validate that license requirements meet organizational needs, not a sales quota

    Follow these steps in your transition to Creative Cloud.

    Step 1: Make sure you have a software asset management (SAM) tool to determine Adobe installs and usage within your environment.

    Step 2: Look at the current Adobe install base and usage. We recommend reviewing three months’ worth of reliable usage data to decide which users should have which licenses going forward.

    Step 3: Understand the changes in Adobe packages for Creative Cloud (CC). Also, take into account that the license types are based on users, not devices.

    Step 4: Identify those users who only need a single license for a single application (e.g. Photoshop, InDesign, Muse).

    Step 5: Identify the users who require CC suites. Look at their usage of previous Adobe suites to get an idea of which CC suite they require. Did they have Design Suite Standard installed but only use one or two elements? This is a good way to ensure you do not overspend on Adobe licenses.

    Source: The ITAM Review

    Download Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast tool to track Adobe installs within your environment and to determine usage needs.

    Acquiring Adobe Software

    Adobe offers four common licensing methods, which are reviewed in detail in the following slides.

    Most common purchasing models

    Points for consideration

    • Value Incentive Plan (VIP)
    • Cumulative Licensing Program (CLP)
    • Transactional Licensing Program (TLP)
    • Enterprise Term License Agreement (ETLA)
    • Adobe, as with many other large software providers, includes special benefits and rights when its products are purchased through volume licensing channels.
    • Businesses should typically refrain from purchasing individual OEM (shrink wrap) licenses or those meant for personal use.
    • Purchase record history is available online, making it easier for your organization to manage entitlements in the case of an audit.

    "Customers are not even obliged to manage all the licenses themselves. The reseller partners have access to the cloud console and can manage licenses on behalf of their customers. Even better, they can seize cross and upsell opportunities and provide good insight into the environment. Additionally, Adobe itself provides optimization services."

    B-lay

    CLP and TLP

    The CLP and TLP are transactional agreements generally used for the purchase of perpetual licenses. For example, they could be used for making Acrobat purchases if Creative Suite products are purchased on the ETLA.

    The image contains a screenshot of a table comparing CLP and TLP.

    Source: “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Commercial and Government Organizations”

    VIP and ETLA

    The Value Incentive Plan is aimed at small- to medium-sized organizations with no minimum quantity required. However, there is limited flexibility to reduce licenses and limited price protection for future purchases. The ETLA is aimed at large organizations who wish to have new functionality as it comes out, license management portal, services, and security/IT control aspects.

    The image contains a screenshot of a table comparing VIP and ETLA.

    Source: “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Commercial and Government Organizations”

    ETLA commitments risk creating “shelfware-as-a-service”

    The Adobe ETLA’s rigid contract parameters, true-up process, and unique deployment/provisioning mechanisms give technology/IT procurement leaders fewer options to maximize cost-usage alignment and to streamline opex costs.

    ☑ No ETLA price book is publicly published; pricing is controlled by the Adobe enterprise sales team.

    ☑ Adobe's retail pricing is a good starting point for negotiating discounted pricing.

    ☑ ETLA commitments are usually for three years, and the lack of a true-down option increases the risk involved in overbuying licenses should the organization encounter a business downturn or adverse event.

    ☑ Pricing discounts are the highest at the initial ETLA signing for the upfront volume commitment. The true-up pricing is discounted from retail but still higher than the signing cost per license.

    ☑ Technical support is included in the ETLA.

    ☑ While purchases typically go through value-added resellers (VARs), procurement can negotiate directly with Adobe.

    "For cloud products, it is less complex when it comes to purchasing and pricing. If larger quantities are purchased on a longer term, the discount may reach up to 15%. As soon as you enroll in the VIP program, you can control all your licenses from an ‘admin console’. Any updates or new functionalities are included in the original price. When the licenses expire, you may choose to renew your subscriptions or remove them. Partial renewal is also accepted. Of course, you can also re-negotiate your price if more subscriptions are added to your console."

    B-lay

    ETLA recommendations

    1. Assess the end-user requirements with a high degree of scrutiny. Perform an analysis that matches the licensee with the correct Adobe product SKU to reduce the risk of overspending.
    • Leverage metering data that identifies actual usage and lack thereof, match to user profile functional requirements, and then determine end users’ actual license requirements.
  • Build in time to evaluate alternative products where possible and position the organization to leverage a Plan B vendor to replace or mitigate growth on the Adobe platform. Re-evaluate options well in advance of the ETLA renewal.
  • Secure price protection through negotiating a price cap or an extended ETLA term beyond the standard three-year term. Short of obtaining an escalation cap, which Adobe is strongly resisting, build in price increases for the ETLA renewal years.
    • Demand price transparency and granularity in the proposal process.
    • Validate that volume discounts are appropriate and show through to the true-up line item pricing.
  • Negotiate a true-down mechanism upfront with Adobe if usage decline is inevitable or expected due to a merger or acquisition, divestiture, or material restructuring event.
  • INFO-TECH TIP: For further guidance on ETLAs and pricing, contact your Info-Tech representative to set up a call with an analyst.

    Use Info-Tech’s Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast tool to match licensees with Adobe product SKUs.

    Prepare for Adobe’s true-up process

    How the true-up process works

    When adding a license, the true-up price will be prorated to 50% of the license cost for previous year’s usage plus 100% of the license cost for the next year. This back-charging adds up to 150% of the overall true-up license cost. In some rare cases, Adobe has provided an “unlimited” quantity for certain SKUs; these Unlimited ETLAs generally align with FTE counts and limit FTE increases to about 5%. Procurement must monitor and work with SAM/ITAM and stakeholder groups to restrain unnecessary growth during the term of an Unlimited ETLA to avoid the risk of cost escalation at renewal time.

    Higher-education specific

    Higher-education clients can license under the ETLA based on a prescribed number of user and classroom/lab devices and/or on a FTE basis. In these cases, the combination of Creative Cloud and Acrobat Pro volume must equal the FTE total, creating an enterprise footprint. FTE calculations establish the full-time faculty plus one-third of part-time faculty plus one-half of part-time staff.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Compliance takes a different form in terms of the ETLA true-up process. The completion of Adobe's transition to cloud-based licensing and verification has improved compliance rates via phone home telemetry such that pirated software is less available and more easily detected. Adobe has actually decommissioned its audit arm in the Americas and EMEA.

    Audits and software asset management with Adobe

    Watch out for:

    • Virtual desktops, freeware, and test and trial licenses
    • Adobe products that may be bundled into a suite; a manual check will be needed to ensure the suite isn’t recognized as a standalone license
    • Pirated licenses with a “crack” built into the software

    Simplify your process – from start to finish – with these steps:

    Determine License Entitlements

    Obtain documentation from internal records and Adobe to track licenses and upgrades to determine what licenses you own and have the right to use.

    Gather Deployment Information

    Leverage a software asset management tool or process to determine what software is deployed and what is/is not being used.

    Determine Effective License Position

    Compare license entitlements with deployment data to uncover surpluses and deficits in licensing. Look for opportunities.

    Plan Changes to License Position

    Meet with IT stakeholders to discuss the enterprise license program (ELP), short- and long-term project plans, and budget allocation. Plan and document licensing requirements.

    Adobe Genuine Software Integrity Service

    • This service was started in 2014 to combat non-genuine software sold by non-authorized resellers.
    • The service works hand in hand with the cloud movement to reduce piracy.
    • Every Adobe product now contains an executable file that will scan your machine for non-genuine software.
    • If non-genuine software is detected, the user will be notified and directed to the official Adobe website for next steps.

    Detailed list of Adobe licensing contract types

    The table below describes Adobe contract types beyond the four typical purchasing models explained in the previous slides:

    Option

    What is it?

    What’s included?

    For

    Term

    CLP (Cumulative Licensing Program)

    10,000 plus points, support and maintenance optional

    Select Adobe perpetual desktop products

    Business

    2 years

    EA (Adobe Enterprise Agreement)

    100 licenses plus maintenance and support for eligible Adobe products

    All applications

    100+ users requirement

    3 years

    EEA (Adobe Enterprise Education Agreement)

    Creative Cloud enterprise agreement for education establishments

    Creative Cloud applications without services

    Education

    1 or 2 years

    ETLA (Enterprise Term License Agreement)

    Licensing program designed for Adobe’s top commercial, government, and education customers

    All Creative Cloud applications

    Large enterprise companies

    3 years

    K-12 – Enterprise Agreement

    Enterprise agreement for primary and secondary schools

    Creative Cloud applications without services

    Education

    1 year

    K-12 – School Site License

    Allows a school to install a Creative Cloud on up to 500 school-owned computers regardless of school size

    Creative Cloud applications without services

    Education

    1 year

    TLP (Transactional Licensing Program)

    Agreement for SMBs that want volume licensing bonuses

    Perpetual desktop products only

    Aimed at SMBs, but Enterprise customers can use the TLP for smaller requirements

    N/A

    Upgrade Plan

    Insurance program for software purchased under a perpetual license program such as CLP or TLP for Creative Cloud upgrade

    Dependent on the existing perpetual estate

    Anyone

    N/A

    VIP (Value Incentive Plan)

    VIP allows customers to purchase, deploy, and manage software through a term-based subscription license model

    Creative Cloud of teams

    Business, government, and education

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    Adobe operates in its own niche in the creative space, and Adobe users have grown accustomed to their products, making switching very difficult.

    Insight 2

    Adobe has transitioned the vast majority of its software offerings to the cloud-based subscription model. Active management of licenses, software provisioning, and consumption of cloud services is now an ongoing job.

    Insight 3

    With the vendor lock-in process nearly complete via the transition to a SaaS subscription model, Adobe is raising prices on an annual basis. Advance planning and strategic use of the ETLA is key to avoid budget-breaking surprises.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • The key pieces of licensing information that should be gathered about the current state of your own organization.
    • An in-depth understanding of the required licenses across all of your products.
    • Clear methodology for selecting the most effective contract type.
    • Development of measurable, relevant metrics to help track future project success and identify areas of strength and weakness within your licensing program.

    Processes Optimized

    • Understanding of the importance of licensing in relation to business objectives.
    • Understanding of the various licensing considerations that need to be made.
    • Contract negotiation.

    Deliverables Completed

    • Adobe ETLA Deployment Forecast
    • Adobe ETLA Forecasted Cost and Benefits
    • Adobe ETLA vs. VIP Pricing Table

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Take Control of Microsoft Licensing and Optimize Spend

    Create an Effective Plan to Implement IT Asset Management

    Establish an Effective System of Internal IT Controls to Mitigate Risks

    Optimize Software Asset Management

    Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit

    Cut PCI Compliance and Audit Costs in Half

    Bibliography

    “Adobe Buying Programs: At-a-glance comparison guide for Commercial and government organizations.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2014. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Commercial and Government Organizations.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2018. Web.

    “Adobe Buying Programs Comparison Guide for Education.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2018. Web. 1 Feb 2018.

    “Adobe Education Enterprise Agreement: Give your school access to the latest industry-leading creative tools.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2014. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Adobe Enterprise Term License Agreement for commercial and government organizations.” Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2016. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Adobe Investor Presentation – October 2017. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 2017. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Cabral, Amanda. “Students react to end of UConn-Adobe contract.” The Daily Campus (Uconn), 5 April 2017. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    de Veer, Patrick and Alecsandra Vintilescu. “Quick Guide to Adobe Licensing.” B-lay, Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Find the best program for your organization.” Adobe, Web. 1 Feb 2018.

    Foxen, David. “Adobe Upgrade Simplified.” Snow Software, 7 Oct. 2016. Web.

    Frazer, Bryant. “Adobe Stops Reporting Subscription Figures for Creative Cloud.” Studio Daily. Access Intelligence, LLC. 17 March 2016. Web.

    “Give your students the power to create bright futures.” Adobe, Web. 1 Feb 2018.

    Jones, Noah. “Adobe changes subscription prices, colleges forced to pay more.” BG Falcon Media. Bowling Green State University, 18 Feb. 2015. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Mansfield, Adam. “Is Your Organization Prepared for Adobe’s Enterprise Term License Agreements (ETLA)?” UpperEdge,30 April 2013. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Murray, Corey. “6 Things Every School Should Know About Adobe’s Move to Creative Cloud.” EdTech: Focus on K-12. CDW LLC, 10 June 2013. Web.

    “Navigating an Adobe Software Audit: Tips for Emerging Unscathed.” Nitro, Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Razavi, Omid. “Challenges of Traditional Software Companies Transitioning to SaaS.” Sand Hill, 12 May 2015. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Rivard, Ry. “Confusion in the Cloud.” Inside Higher Ed. 22 May 2013. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    Sharwood, Simon. “Adobe stops software licence audits in Americas, Europe.” The Register. Situation Publishing. 12 Aug. 2016. Web. 1 Feb. 2018.

    “Software Licensing Challenges Faced In The Cloud: How Can The Cloud Benefit You?” The ITAM Review. Enterprise Opinions Limited. 20 Nov. 2015. Web.

    White, Stephen. “Understanding the Impacts of Adobe’s Cloud Strategy and Subscriptions Before Negotiating an ETLA.” Gartner, 22 Feb. 2016. Web.

    Change Management's Role in Incident Prevention: standard changes

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    During peak business hours, I witnessed a straightforward database field addition bring down a whole e-commerce platform. It was meant to be standard procedure, the type of “standard change” that is automatically approved because we have performed it innumerable times.

    Adding a field to the end of a table and having applications retrieve data by field name instead of position made the change itself textbook low-impact. There is no need to alter the application or the functional flow. This could have been problematic in the past if you added a field in the middle of the list and it affected the values of other fields, but adding it at the end? That ought to have been impenetrable.

    However, it wasn't.

    Before I tell you what went wrong, let me explain why this is important to all of the IT professionals who are reading this.

    Over the past three decades, industry data has repeatedly supported what this incident taught me: our presumptions about “safe” changes are frequently our greatest weakness. Upon reviewing the ITIL research, I was not surprised to learn that failed changes, many of which were categorized as “standard” or “low-risk,” are responsible for about 80% of unplanned outages.

    When you look more closely, the numbers become even more concerning. Since I've been following the Ponemon Institute's work for years, I wasn't surprised to learn that companies with well-established change management procedures have 65% fewer unscheduled outages. The paradox surprised me: many of these “mature” procedures still operate under the premise that safety correlates with repetition.

    What I had been observing in the field for decades was confirmed when Gartner released their research showing that standard changes are responsible for almost 40% of change-related incidents. The very changes we consider safe enough to avoid thorough review subtly create some of our greatest risks. IBM's analysis supports the pattern I've seen in innumerable organizations: standard changes cause three times as much business disruption due to their volume and our decreased vigilance around them, whereas emergency changes receive all the attention and scrutiny.

    Aberdeen Group data indicates that the average cost of an unplanned outage has increased to $300,000 per hour, with change-related failures accounting for the largest category of preventable incidents. This data makes the financial reality stark.

    What precisely went wrong with the addition of that database field that caused our e-commerce platform to crash?

    We were unaware that the addition of this one field would cause the database to surpass an internal threshold, necessitating a thorough examination of its execution strategy. In its algorithmic wisdom, the database engine determined that the table structure had changed enough to necessitate rebuilding its access and retrieval mechanisms. Our applications relied on high-speed requests, and the new execution plan was terribly unoptimized for them.

    Instead of completing quotes or purchases, customers were spending minutes viewing error pages. All applications began to time out while they awaited data that just wasn't showing up in the anticipated amounts of time. Thousands of transactions were impacted by a single extra field that should have been invisible to the application layer.

    The field addition itself was not the primary cause. We assumed that since we had made similar adjustments dozens of times previously, this one would also act in the same way. Without taking into account the hidden complexities of database optimization thresholds, we had categorized it as a standard change based on superficial similarities.

    My approach to standard changes was completely altered by this experience, and it is now even more applicable in DevOps-driven environments. Many organizations use pipeline deployments, which produce a standard change at runtime. It's great for speed and reliability, but it can easily fall into the same trap.

    However, I have witnessed pipeline deployments result in significant incidents for non-code-related reasons. Due to timing, resource contention, or environmental differences that weren't noticeable in earlier runs, a deployment that performed flawlessly in development and staging abruptly fails in production. Although the automation boosts our confidence, it may also reveal blind spots.

    Over the course of thirty years, I have come to the unsettling realization that there is no such thing as a truly routine change in complex systems. Every modification takes place in a slightly different setting, with varying environmental factors, data states, and system loads. What we refer to as “standard changes” are actually merely modifications with comparable processes rather than risk profiles.

    For this reason, I support contextual change management. We must consider the system state, timing, dependencies, and cumulative effect of recent changes rather than just categorizing them based on their technical features. After three other changes have changed the system's behavior patterns, a change made at two in the morning on a Sunday with little system load is actually different from the same change made during peak business hours.

    Effective change advisory boards must therefore go beyond assessing individual changes separately. I've worked with organizations where the change board carefully considered and approved each modification on its own merits, only to find that the cumulative effect of seemingly unrelated changes led to unexpected interactions and stress on the system. The most developed change management procedures I've come across mandate that their advisory boards take a step back and look at the whole change portfolio over a specified period of time. They inquire whether we are altering the database too frequently during a single maintenance window. Could there be unanticipated interactions between these three different application updates? What is the total resource impact of this week's approved changes?

    It's the distinction between forest management and tree management. While each change may seem logical individually, when combined, they can create situations beyond the scope of any single change assessment.

    Having worked in this field for thirty years, I've come to the conclusion that our greatest confidences frequently conceal our greatest vulnerabilities. Our primary blind spots frequently arise from the changes we've made a hundred times before, the procedures we've automated and standardized, and the adjustments we've labeled as “routine.”

    Whether we should slow down our deployment pipelines or stop using standard changes is not the question. In the current competitive environment, speed and efficiency are crucial. The issue is whether we are posing the appropriate queries before carrying them out. Are we taking into account not only what the change accomplishes but also when it occurs, what else is changing at the same time, and how our systems actually look right now?

    I've discovered that the phrase “we've done this before” is more dangerous in IT operations than “what could go wrong?” Because, despite what we may believe, we never actually perform the same action twice in complex systems.

    Here is what I would like you to think about: which everyday modifications are subtly putting your surroundings at risk? Which procedures have you standardized or automated to the extent that you no longer challenge their presumptions? Most importantly, when was the last time your change advisory board examined your changes as a cohesive portfolio of system modifications rather than as discrete items on a checklist?

    Remember that simple addition to a database field the next time you're tempted to accept a standard change. The most unexpected outcomes can occasionally result from the most routine adjustments.

    I'm always up for a conversation if you want to talk about your difficulties with change management.

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}253|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $48,932 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 42 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to understand zero trust and how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources.
    • The need to move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach is clear. The path to getting there is complex and expensive.
    • Zero trust as a principle is a moving target due to competing definitions and standards. A strategy that adapts evolving best practices must be supported by business stakeholders.
    • Full zero trust includes many components. Performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Apply zero trust to key protect surfaces. A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Impact and Result

    Every organization should have a zero trust strategy and the roadmap to deploy it must always be tested and refined. Our unique approach:

    • Assess resources and determine zero trust readiness.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build out roadmap.
    • Deploy zero trust and monitor with zero trust progress metrics.

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Zero Trust Roadmap Deck – The purpose of the storyboard is to provide a detailed description of the steps involving in building a roadmap for implementing zero trust.

    The storyboard contains five easy-to-follow steps on building a roadmap for implementing zero trust, from aligning initiatives to business goals to establishing metrics for measuring the progress and effectiveness of a zero trust implementation.

    • Build a Zero Trust Roadmap – Phases 1-5

    2. Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool – A tool to identify key protect surfaces and map them to business goals.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by having it focus on key protect surfaces that are aligned to the goals of the business.

    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    3. Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool – A tool to perform a gap analysis between the organization's current implementation of zero trust controls and its desired target state and to build a roadmap to achieve the target state.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by creating a roadmap that is aligned with the current state of the organization when it comes to zero trust and its desired target state.

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    4. Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool – A tool to identify and evaluate solutions for identified zero trust initiatives.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by identifying the best solutions for zero trust initiatives.

    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    5. Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool – A tool to identify metrics to measure the progress and efficiency of the zero trust implementation.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by identifying metrics that will allow the organization to monitor how the zero trust implementation is progressing, and whether it is proving to be effective.

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    6. Zero Trust Communication Deck – A template to present the zero trust template to key stakeholders.

    Use this template to present the zero trust strategy and roadmap to ensure all key elements are captured.

    • Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    The Purpose

    Align business goals to protect surfaces.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of how business goals can map to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    1.2 Define business goals.

    1.3 Identify five critical protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    1.4 Map business goals and protect surfaces.

    Outputs

    Mapping of business goals to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    2 Begin Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Identify and define zero trust initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of zero trust initiatives to be prioritized and set into a roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities and define the zero trust target state for a set of controls.

    2.2 Identify tasks to close maturity gaps.

    2.3 Assign tasks to zero trust initiatives.

    Outputs

    Security capabilities current state assessment

    Zero trust target state

    Tasks to address maturity gaps

    3 Complete Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Complete the zero trust gap analysis and prioritize zero trust initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized list of zero trust initiatives aligned to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    Activities

    3.1 Align initiatives to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    3.2 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on zero trust initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    Zero trust initiative list mapped to business goals and key protect surfaces

    Prioritization of zero trust initiatives

    4 Finalize Roadmap and Formulate Policies

    The Purpose

    Finalize the zero trust roadmap and begin to formulate zero trust policies for roadmap initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A zero trust roadmap of prioritized initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Define solution criteria.

    4.2 Identify candidate solutions.

    4.3 Evaluate candidate solutions.

    4.4 Finalize roadmap.

    4.5 Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements.

    4.6 Establish metrics for high-priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Zero trust roadmap

    Zero trust policies for critical protect surfaces

    Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions

    Metrics for high-priority initiatives

    Further reading

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Leverage an iterative and repeatable process to apply zero trust to your organization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Internet is the new corporate network.

    For the longest time we have focused on reducing the attack surface to deter malicious actors from attacking organizations, but I dare say that has made these actors scream “challenge accepted.” With sophisticated tools, time, and money in their hands, they have embarrassed even the finest of organizations. A popular hybrid workforce and rapid cloud adoption have introduced more challenges for organizations, as the security and network perimeter have shifted and the internet is now the corporate network. Suffice it to say that a new mindset needs to be adopted to stay on top of the game.

    The success of most attacks is tied to denial of service, data exfiltration, and ransom. A shift from focusing on the attack surface to the protect surface will help organizations implement an inside-out architecture that protects critical infrastructure, prevents the success of any attack, makes it difficult to gain access, and links directly to business goals.

    Zero trust principles aid that shift across several pillars (Identity, Device, Application, Network, and Data) that make up a typical infrastructure; hence, the need for a zero trust roadmap to accomplish that which we desire for our organization.

    Victor Okorie
    Senior Research Analyst, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to understand zero trust and how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources.
    • The need to move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach is clear. The path to getting there is complex and expensive.

    Common Obstacles

    • Zero trust as a principle is a moving target due to competing definitions and standards. A strategy that adapts evolving best practices must be supported by business stakeholders.
    • Full zero trust includes many components. Performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Every organization should have a zero trust strategy and the roadmap to deploy it must always be tested and refined.
    • Our unique approach:
      • Assess resources and determine zero trust readiness.
      • Address barriers and identify enablers.
      • Prioritize initiatives and build out roadmap.
      • Identify most appropriate vendors via vendor selection framework.
      • Deploy zero trust and monitor with zero trust progress metrics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations:

    • Understand what zero trust is and decide how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources. Zero trust is a set of principles that defaults to the highest level of security; a failed implementation can easily disrupt the business. A pragmatic zero trust implementation must be flexible and adaptable yet maintain a consistent level of protection.
    • Move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach. The path to getting there is complex without a clear understanding of desired outcomes. Focusing efforts on key protection gaps and leveraging capable controls in existing architecture allows for a repeatable process that carries IT, security, and the business along on the journey.

    On this zero trust journey, identify your valuable assets and zero trust controls to protect them.

    Top three reasons for building a zero trust strategy

    44%

    Reduce attacker’s ability to move laterally

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Due to zero trust’s many components, performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.
      • To feel ready to implement and to understand the benefits of zero trust, IT must first understand what zero trust means to the organization.
    • Zero trust as a set of principles is a moving target, with many developing standards and competing technology definitions. A strategy built around evolving best practices must be supported by related business stakeholders.
      • To ensure support, IT must be able to “sell” zero trust to business stakeholders by illustrating the value zero trust can bring to business objectives.

    43%

    Organizations with a full implementation of zero trust saved 43% on the costs of data breaches.
    (Source: Teramind, 2021)

    96%

    Zero trust is considered key to the success of 96% of organizations in a survey conducted by Microsoft.
    (Source: Microsoft, 2021)

    What is zero trust?

    It depends on who you ask…

    • Vendors use zero trust as a marketing buzzword.
    • Organizations try to comprehend zero trust in their own limited views.
    • Zero trust regulations/standards are still developing.

    “A cybersecurity paradigm focused on resource protection and the premise that trust is never granted implicitly but must be continually evaluated.”

    Source: NIST, SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture, 2020

    “An evolving set of cybersecurity paradigms that move defenses from static, network-based perimeters to focus on users, assets, and resources.”

    Source: DOD, Zero Trust Reference Architecture, 2021

    “A security model, a set of system design principles, and a coordinated cybersecurity and system management strategy based on an acknowledgement that threats exist both inside and outside traditional network boundaries.”

    Source: NSA, Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model, 2021

    “Zero trust provides a collection of concepts and ideas designed to minimize uncertainty in enforcing accurate, least privilege per-request access decisions in information systems and services in the face of a network viewed as compromised.”

    Source: CISA, Zero Trust Maturity Model, 2021

    “The foundational tenet of the zero trust model is that no actor, system, network, or service operating outside or within the security perimeter is trusted.”

    Source: OMB, Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles, 2022

    What is zero trust?

    From Theoretical to Practical

    Zero trust is an ideal in the literal sense of the word, because it is a standard defined by its perfection. Just as nothing in life is perfect, there is no measure that determines an organization is absolutely zero trust. The best organizations can do is improve their security iteratively and get as close to ideal as possible.

    In the most current application of zero trust in the enterprise, a zero trust strategy applies a set of principles, including least-privilege access and per-request access enforcement, to minimize compromise to critical assets. A zero trust roadmap is a plan that leverages zero trust concepts, considers relationships between technical elements as well as security solutions, and applies consistent access policies to minimize areas of exposure.

    Zero Trust; Identity; Workloads & Applications; Network; Devices; Data

    Info-Tech Insight

    Solutions offering zero trust often align with one of five pillars. A successful zero trust implementation may involve a combination of solutions, each protecting the various data, application, assets, and/or services elements in the protect surface.

    Zero trust business benefits

    Reduce business and organizational risk

    Reduced business risks as continuous verification of identity, devices, network, applications, and data is embedded in the organizations practice.

    36% of data breaches involved internal actors.
    Source: Verizon, 2021

    Reduce CapEx and OpEx

    Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirement, and improved time-to-respond to threats.
    Source: SecurityBrief - Australia, 2020.

    Reduce scope and cost of compliance

    Helps achieve compliance with several privacy standards and regulations, improves maturity for cyber insurance premium, and fewer gaps during audits.

    Scope of compliance reduced due to segmentation.

    Reduce risk of data breach

    Reduced risk of data breach in any instance of a malicious attack as there’s no lateral movement, secure segment, and improved visibility.

    10% Increase in data breach costs; costs went from $3.86 million to $4.24 million.
    Source: IBM, 2021

    This is an image of a thought map detailing Info-Tech's Build A Zero Trust Roadmap.  The main headings are: Define; Design; Develop; Monitor

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Building a Zero Trust Roadmap

    1. Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    2. Assess Key Capabilities and Identify Zero Trust Initiatives

    3. Evaluate Candidate Solutions and Finalize Roadmap

    4. Formulate Policies for Roadmap Initiatives

    5. Monitor the Zero Trust Roadmap Deployment

    Phase Steps

    Define business goals

    Identify critical DAAS elements

    Map business goals to critical DAAS elements

    1. Review the Info-Tech framework
    2. Assess current capabilities and define the zero trust target state
    3. Identify tasks to close gaps
    4. Define tasks and initiatives
    5. Align initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces
    1. Define solution criteria
    2. Identify candidate solutions
    3. Evaluate candidate solutions
    4. Perform cost/benefit analysis
    5. Prioritize initiatives
    6. Finalize roadmap
    1. Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements
    2. Formulate policies to secure a path to access critical DAAS elements
    1. Establish metrics for roadmap tasks
    2. Track and report metrics
    3. Build a communication deck

    Phase Outcomes

    Mapping of business goals to protect surfaces

    Gap analysis of security capabilities

    Evaluation of candidate solutions and a roadmap to close gaps

    Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions

    Metrics for measuring the progress and efficiency of the zero trust implementation

    Protect what is relevant

    Apply zero trust to key protect surfaces

    A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Align protect surfaces to business objectives

    Developing a zero trust roadmap collaboratively with business stakeholders enables alignment with upcoming business priorities and industry trends.

    Identify zero trust capabilities

    Deriving protect surface elements from business goals reframes how security controls are applied. Assess control effectiveness in this context and identify zero trust capabilities to close any gaps.

    Roadmap first, not solution first

    Don’t let your solution dictate your roadmap. Define your zero trust solution criteria before engaging in vendor selection.

    Create enforceable policies

    The success of a zero trust implementation relies on consistent enforcement. Applying the Kipling methodology to each protect surface is the best way to design zero trust policies.

    Success should benefit the organization

    To measure the efficacy of a zero trust implementation, ensure you know what a successful zero trust implementation means for your organization, and define metrics that demonstrate whether that success is being realized.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Present your zero trust strategy in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed as a part of this blueprint.

    Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Identify critical and vulnerable DAAS elements to protect and align them to business goals.

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Perform a gap analysis between current and target states to build a zero trust roadmap.

    Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Determine and evaluate candidate solutions based on defined criteria.

    Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Develop metrics to track the progress and efficiency of the organization’s zero trust implementation.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • A mapped transaction flow of critical and vulnerable assets and visibility of where to implement security controls that aligns with the principle of zero trust.
    • Improved security posture across the digital attack surface while focusing on the protect surface.
    • An inside-out architecture that leverages current existing architecture to tighten security controls, is automated, and gives granular visibility.

    Business Benefits

    • Reduced business risks as continuous verification of identity, devices, network, applications, and data is embedded in the organization’s practice.
    • Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirement, and improved time-to-respond to threats.
    • Helps achieve compliance with several privacy standards and regulations, improves maturity for cyber insurance premium, and fewer gaps during audits.
    • Reduced risk of data breach in any instance of a malicious attack.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Save an average of $1.76 million dollars in the event of a data breach

    • This research set seeks to help organizations develop a mature zero trust implementation which, according to IBM’s “Cost of a Data Breach 2021 Report,” saves organizations an average of $1.76 million in the event of a data breach.
    • Leverage phase 5 of this research to develop metrics to track the implementation progress and efficacy of zero trust tasks.

    43%

    Organizations with a mature implementation of zero trust saved 43%, or $1.76 million, on the costs of data breaches.
    Source: IBM, 2021

    In phase 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish zero trust implementation tasks for your organization.

    In phase 3, we will help you develop a game plan and a roadmap for implementing those tasks.

    This image contains a screenshot info-tech's methodology for building a zero-trust roadmap, discussed earlier in this blueprint

    Executive Brief Case Study

    National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA)

    INDUSTRY: Government

    SOURCE: Zero Trust Architecture Technical Exchange Meeting

    NASA recognized the potential benefits of both adopting a zero trust architecture (including aligning with OMB FISMA and DHS CDM DEFEND) and improving NASA systems, especially those related to user experience with dynamic access, application security with sole access from proxy, and risk-based asset management with trust score. The trust score is continually evaluated from a combination of static factors, such as credential and biometrics, and dynamic factors, such as location and behavior analytics, to determine the level of access. The enhanced access mechanism is projected on use-case flows of users and external partners to analyze the required initiatives.

    The lessons learned in adapting zero trust were:

    • Focus on access to data, assets, applications, and services; and don’t select solutions or vendors too early.
    • Provide support for mobile and external partners.
    • Complete zero trust infrastructure and services design with holistic risk-based management, including network access control with software-defined networking and an identity management program.
    • Develop a zero trust strategy that aligns with mission objectives.

    Results

    NASA implemented zero trust architecture by leveraging the agency existing components on a roadmap with phases related to maturity. The initial development includes privileged access management, security user behavior analytics, and a proof-of-concept lab for evaluating the technologies.
    Case Study Source: NASA, “Planning for a Zero Trust Architecture Target State,” 2019

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5
    Call #1:
    Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #3:
    Define current security capabilities and zero trust target state.

    Call #5:

    Identify and evaluate solution criteria.

    Call #7:
    Create a process for formulating zero trust policies.

    Call #8:
    Establish metrics for assessing the implementation and effectiveness of zero trust.

    Call #2:
    Identify business goals and protect surfaces.

    Call #4:
    Identify gap-closing tasks and assign to zero trust initiatives.

    Call #6:
    Prioritize zero trust initiatives.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    Begin Gap Analysis

    Complete Gap Analysis

    Finalize Roadmap and Formulate Policies

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    1.2 Define business goals.

    1.3 Identify five critical protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    1.4 Map business goals and protect surfaces.

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities and define the zero Trust target state for a set of controls.

    2.2 Identify tasks to close maturity gaps.

    2.3 Assign tasks to zero trust initiatives.

    3.1 Align initiatives to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    3.2 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on zero trust initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.1 Define solution criteria.

    4.2 Identify candidate solutions.

    4.3 Evaluate candidate solutions.

    4.4 Finalize roadmap.

    4.5 Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements.

    4.6 Establish metrics for high-priority initiatives.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. 1.Mapping of business goals to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements
    1. Security capabilities current state assessment
    2. Zero trust target state
    3. Tasks to address maturity gaps
    1. Zero trust initiative list mapped to business goals and key protect surfaces
    2. Prioritization of zero trust initiatives
    1. Zero trust roadmap
    2. Zero trust policies for critical protect surfaces
    3. Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions
    4. Metrics for high-priority initiatives
    1. Zero trust roadmap documentation
    2. Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives

    Phase 1

    Define Business Objectives and Protect Surfaces

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and define the business goals.
    • Identify the critical DAAS elements and protect surface.
    • Align the business goals to the protect surface and critical DAAS elements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Business Executives
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management

    Analyze your business goals

    Identifying business goals is the first step in aligning your zero trust roadmap with your business’ vision.

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction the business is headed in.
    • Wise security investments depend on aligning your security initiatives to business objectives.
    • Zero trust, and information security at large, should contribute to your organization’s business objectives by supporting operational performance, ensuring brand protection and shareholder value.
      • For example, if the organization is working on a new business initiative that requires the handling of credit card payments, the security organization needs to know as soon as possible to ensure the zero trust architecture will be extended to protect the PCI data and enable the organization to be PCI compliant.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Security and the business need to be in alignment when implementing zero trust. Defining the business goal helps rationalize the need for a zero trust implementation.

    1.1 Define your organization’s business goals

    Estimated time 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm the business goals of the organization.
    2. Review relevant business and IT strategies.
    3. Review the business goal definitions in tab “2. Business Objectives” of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool, including the key goal indicator metrics.
    4. Record the most important business goals in the Business Goal column on tab “3. Protect Surfaces” of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than five primary goals. This limitation will be critical to help map the protect surface and the zero trust roadmap later.

    Input

    • Business and IT strategies

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Developing a zero trust roadmap collaboratively with business stakeholders enables alignment with upcoming business priorities and industry trends.

    What does zero trust mean for you?

    For a successful implementation, focus on your zero trust outcome.

    This image describes the Who, What, When, Where, Why, and How for Zero Trust.

    Regardless of whether the user is accessing resources internally or externally, zero trust is posed to authenticate, authorize, and continuously verify the security policies and posture before access is granted or denied. Many network architecture can be local, cloud based, or hybrid and with users working from any location, there is no network perimeter as we knew it and the internet is now the corporate network.

    Zero trust framework seeks to extend the perimeter-less security to the present digital transformation.

    Understand protect surface

    Data, Application, Asset, and Services

    A protect surface can be described as what’s critical, most vulnerable, or most valuable to your organization. This protect surface could include at least one of the following – data, assets, applications, and services (DAAS) – that requires protection. This is also the area that zero trust policy is aimed to protect. Understanding what your protect surface is can help channel the required energy into protecting that which is crucial to the business, and this aligns with the shift from focusing on the attack surface to narrowing it down to a smaller and achievable area of protection.

    Anything and everything that connects to the internet is a potential attack surface and pursuing every loophole will leave us one step behind due to lack of resources. Since a protect surface contains one or more DAAS element, the micro-perimeter is created around it and the appropriate protection is applied around it. As a team, we can ask ourselves this question when thinking of our protect surface: to what degree does my organization want me to secure things? The knowledge of the answer to this question can be tied to the risk tolerance level of the organization and it is only fair for us to engage the business in identifying what the protect surface should be.

    Components of a protect surface

    • Data
    • Application
    • Asset
    • Services

    Info-Tech Insight

    The protect surface is a shift from focusing on the attack surface. DAAS elements show where the initiatives and controls associated with the zero trust pillars (Identity, Devices, Network, Application, and Data) need to be applied.

    Sample Scenario

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare

    SOURCE: Info-Tech Research Group

    Illustration

    A healthcare provider would consider personal health information a critical resource worthy of being protected against data exfiltration due to a host of reasons including but not limited to privacy regulations, loss of revenue, legal, and reputational loss; hence, this would be considered a protect surface.

    • What is the data that can’t be risked exfiltrated?
    • What application(s) is used to access this data?
    • What assets are used to generate and store the data?
    • What are the services we rely on to be able to access the data?

    DAAS Element

    • The data here is the patient information.
    • The application used to access the personal health information would be EPIC, OR list, and any other application used in that organization.
    • The assets used to store the data and generate the PHI would include physical workstations, medical scanners, etc.
    • The services that can be exploited to disrupt the operation or used to access the data would include active directory, single sign-on, etc.

    DAAS and Zero Trust Pillar

    This granular identification provides an opportunity to not only see what the protect surface and DAAS elements are but also understand where to apply security controls that align with the principle of zero trust as well as how the transaction flows. The application pillar initiatives will provide protection to the EPIC application and the device pillar initiatives will provide protection to the workstations and physical scanners. The identity pillar initiatives will apply protection to the active directory, and single sign-on services. The zero trust pillar initiatives align with the protection of the DAAS elements.

    Shift from attack surface to protect surface

    This image contains a screenshot of the thought map: Shift from attack surface to protect surface.  Go from complex to a micro perimeter approach.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The protect surface is a shift from focusing on the attack surface as it creates a micro-perimeter for the application of zero trust policies on the system. This drastically reduces the success of an attack whether internally or externally, reduces the attack surface, and is also repeatable.

    1.2 Identify critical DAAS elements

    Estimated time 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm and identify critical, valuable, sensitive assets or resources requiring high availability in the organization. Each DAAS element is part of a protect surface, or sometimes, the DAAS element itself is a protect surface.
    • Data – The sensitive data that poses the greatest risk if exfiltrated or misused. What data needs to be protected?
    • Applications – The applications that use sensitive data or control critical assets. Which applications are critical for your business functions?
    • Assets – Physical or virtual assets, including an organization’s information technology (IT), operational technology (OT), or Internet of Things devices.
    • Services – The services an organization most depends on. Services that can be exploited to disrupt normal IT or business operations.
  • Record the critical DAAS elements and protect surface in their respective columns of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than five primary protect surfaces to match with the business goals.
  • Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Input

    • Critical resources to protect
    • Understanding of how they interoperate or connect

    Output

    • Protect surfaces

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Stakeholders

    1.3 Map business goals to critical DAAS elements

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. The protect surface will be generated from the critical DAAS elements as a standalone protect surface or a group of interconnected DAAS elements merged into one.
    • Each protect surface can be tied back to a business objective.
  • Select from the drop-down list of business objectives the option that fits the identified protect surface as it relates to the organization.
    • Type in your business objectives if the drop-down list does not apply.

    Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool, with the following columns highlighted: Business Goal Name; Protect Surface Name

    Phase 2

    Assess Key Capabilities and Identify Zero Trust Initiatives

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess the organization’s current capabilities.
    • Define the zero trust target state.
    • Identify tasks to close gaps
    • Define zero trust initiatives and align zero trust initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    The Info-Tech Zero Trust Framework

    Info-Tech’s Zero Trust Framework aligns with zero trust references, including:

    • ACT Zero Trust Cybersecurity Current Trends. 2019
    • NIST SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture. 2020
    • DOD Zero Trust Reference Architecture. 2021
    • NSA Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model. 2021
    • CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model. 2021
    • Executive Order (EO) 14028: Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity, The White House. 2021
    • OMB Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles. 2022
    • NSTAC Zero Trust and Trusted Identity Management. 2022
    • NIST SP 800-53 r5: Security and Privacy Controls for Information Systems and Organizations

    Identity

    • Authentication
    • Authorization
    • Privileged Access Management

    Applications

    • Software Defined Compute
    • DevSecOps
    • Software Supply Chain

    Devices

    • Authentication
    • Authorization
    • Compliance

    Networks

    • Software Defined Networking
    • Macro Segmentations
    • Micro Segmentation

    Data

    • Software Defined Storage
    • Data Loss Prevention
    • Data Rights Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    A best-of-breed approach ensures holistic coverage of your zero trust program while refraining from locking you into a specific reference.

    2.1 Review the Info-Tech framework

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, have the team review the framework within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions in tab “2. Setup”:
    • Define costing criteria
    • Define benefits criteria
    • Configure full-time equivalent hours and start year
    • Input business goals as mapped to protect surfaces (see next slide)

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives

    Output

    • Customized framework

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    2.1.1 Input business goals as mapped to protect surfaces

    Refer to the Protect Surface Mapping Tool, copy the following elements from the Protect Surface tab.

    1. Enter Business Goals.
    2. Enter Protect Surfaces.
    3. Enter Data.
    4. Enter Application.
    5. Enter Assets.
    6. Enter Services.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.  The Column headings are labeled as follows: 1: Business Goal Name; 2: Protect Surface; 3: DATA; 4: APPLICATION; 5: ASSETS; 6: SERVICES

    Info-Tech Insight

    Deriving protect surface elements from business goals reframes how security controls are applied. Assess control effectiveness in this context and identify zero trust capabilities to close any gaps.

    2.2 Assess current capabilities and define zero trust target state

    Estimated time 6-12 hours

    1. Using the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to complete your current-state and target-state assessment.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives
    • Information on current state of controls, including sources such as audit findings, vulnerability and penetration test results, and risk registers

    Output

    • Current-state and target-state assessment for gap analysis

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management

    Understanding security target states

    Maturity models are very effective for determining target states. This table provides general descriptions for each maturity level. As a group, consider which description most accurately reflects the ideal target state in your organization.

    AD HOC 01

    Initial/ad hoc security programs are reactive. Lacking strategic vision, these programs are less effective and less responsive to the needs of the business.

    DEVELOPING 02

    Developing security programs can be effective at what they do but are not holistic. Governance is largely absent. These programs tend to rely on the talents of individuals rather than a cohesive plan.

    DEFINED 03

    A defined security program is holistic, documented, and proactive. At least some governance is in place; however, metrics are often rudimentary and operational in nature. These programs still often rely on best practices rather than strong risk management.

    MANAGED 04

    Managed security programs have robust governance and metrics processes. Management and board-level metrics for the overall program are produced. These are reviewed by business leaders and drive security decisions. More mature risk management practices take the place of best practices.

    OPTIMIZED 05

    An optimized security program is based on strong risk management practices, including the production of key risk indicators (KRIs). Individual security services are optimized using key performance indicators (KPIs) that continually measure service effectiveness and efficiency.

    2.2.1 Conduct current-state assessment

    1. Carefully review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab that are needed for the protect surfaces. For each control, indicate the current maturity level of the organization. The tool uses the maturity levels of the CMMI model to score maturity.
    • Only use “N/A” if you are confident that the control is not required in your protect surfaces. For example, if the protect surfaces do not require or use software-defined computing, select “N/A” for any controls related to software-defined computing.
  • Provide comments to describe your current state. This step is optional but recommended as it may be important to record this information for future reference.
  • Select the target maturity for the control.
  • This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Current Maturity; 2: Current State Comments (optional); Target Maturity

    Make sure that the gap between target state and current state is achievable for the current zero trust roadmap. For instance, if you set your current maturity to 1 – Ad Hoc, then having a target maturity of 4 – Managed or 5 – Optimized is not recommended due to the big jump.

    2.2.2 Review the Gap Analysis Dashboard

    1. Use the Dashboard to map your progress on assessing current- and future-state maturities. As you fill out the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, check with the Dashboard to see the difference between your current and target state.
    2. Use the color-coded legend to see the size of the gap between your current and target state.
    3. Zero trust processes that appear white have not yet been assessed or are rated as “N/A.”
    this image contains a screenshot of Info-tech's Zero-Trust framework discussed earlier in this blueprint, with the addition of a legend demonstrating how to use the gap analysis tool to identify the size of the gap between current and target states

    2.3 Identify tasks to close gaps

    Estimated time 5 hours

    1. Using the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to identify gap closure tasks for each control that requires improvement.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Zero trust controls gap information

    Output

    • Gap closure task list

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management

    2.3 Identify tasks to close gaps (cont.)

    1. For each of the controls where there is a gap between the current and target state, a gap closure task should be identified:
    • Review the example tasks and copy one or more of them if appropriate. Otherwise, enter your own gap closure task.
  • Considerations for identifying gap closure tasks:
    • In small groups, have participants ask, “what would we have to do to achieve the target state?” Document these in the Gap Closure Tasks column.
    • The example gap closure tasks may be appropriate for your organization, but do not simply copy them without considering whether they are right for you.
    • Not all gaps require their own task. You can enter one task that may address multiple gaps.
    • Be aware that tasks that are along the lines of “investigate and make recommendations” may not fully close maturity gaps.
    this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column heading highlighted and numbered: 1: Gap Closure Tasks

    Make sure that the Gap Closure Tasks are SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Realistic, Timebound).

    2.4 Define tasks and initiatives

    Estimated time 2-4 hours

    1. As a group, review the gap tasks identified in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, finalize your tab “5. Task List.”
    3. Using the instructions on the following slides, review and consolidate your tab “6. Initiative List.”

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Gap analysis

    Output

    • Refined list of tasks
    • List of zero trust initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    2.4.1 Finalize your task list

    1. Define the gap closure task list in tab “5. Task List”:
      1. Obtain a list of all your tasks from Gap Closure Tasks column in tab “3. Gap Analysis.”
      2. Paste the list into the table in tab “5. Task List,” Task column.
    • Use Paste Values to retain the table formatting.
  • Consolidate tasks into initiatives when:
      • They have costs associated with them.
      • They require initial effort to implement and ongoing effort to maintain.
      • They must be accomplished dependently of other tasks.
    1. For each new initiative, create the initiative name on Initiative Name column in the tab “6. Initiative List.”
  • For tasks which are not incorporated into initiatives, enter a task owner and due date for each task.
  • this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Gap analysis Tool with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Task; 2: Initiative Name; 3: (Task Owner; Due Date)

    Example: Initiative consolidation

    In the example below, we see three gap closure tasks within the Authentication process for the Identity pillar being consolidated into a single initiative “IAM modernization.”

    We can also see three gap closure tasks within the Micro Segmentation process for the Network pillar being grouped into another initiative “Network segmentation.”

    This image contains an example of Initiative Consolidation

    Info-Tech Insight

    As you go through this exercise, you may find that some tasks that you previously defined could be consolidated into an initiative.

    2.4.2 Finalize your initiative list

    1. As you go through this exercise, you may find that some tasks that you previously defined could be consolidated into an initiative.
    2. Review your final list of initiatives in tab “6. Initiative List” and make any required updates.
      1. Optionally, add a description or paste in a list of the individual gap closure actions that are associated with the initiative. This will make it easier to perform the cost and benefit analysis.
    3. Obtain a list of all gap closure tasks associated with an initiative by filtering the Initiative Name column in the Task List tab.
    4. Indicate the most appropriate pillar alignment for each initiative using the drop-down list.
      1. Refer to tab “5. Task List” for the pillar associated with an initiative under the Initiative Name column.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, the following column headings are numbered and highlighted: 1: Initiative Name; 2: Description; 3: Pillar

    If the list of tasks is too long for the Description column, then you can also shorten the name of the tasks or group several tasks to a more general task.

    2.5 Align initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. Using the instructions on the following slides, align initiatives to business goals in tab “6. Initiative List.”
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, align initiatives to protect surfaces in tab “6. Initiative List.”

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • List of zero trust initiatives
    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives

    Output

    • List of zero trust initiatives aligned to business goals and protect surfaces

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    2.5.1 Align initiatives to business goals

    1. Indicate the most appropriate business goal(s) alignment for each initiative using the drop-down list in “Selection for Business Goal(s)” column.
      1. Use the legend to determine the most appropriate business goal(s).
    2. After that copy the selected business goal(s) to Business Goal(s) Alignment column.
    3. Then reset the selection using the blank cell in Selection for Business Goal(s) column.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Selection for Business Goal(s); Business Goals Alignment; 3: Selection for Business Goals

    2.5.2 Align initiatives to protect surfaces

    1. Indicate the most appropriate protect surface(s) for each initiative using the drop-down list in Selection for Protect Surface(s) column.
      1. Use the legend to determine the most appropriate protect surface(s).
    2. After that copy the selected protect surface(s) to Protect Surface(s) Coverage column.
    3. Reset the selection using the blank cell in Selection for Protect Surface(s) column.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Description; 2: Protect Surfaces Covered; 3: Selection for Protect Surfaces

    Phase 3

    Evaluate Candidate Solutions and Finalize Roadmap

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define solution criteria.
    • Identify candidate solutions.
    • Evaluate candidate solutions.
    • Perform cost/benefit analysis.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build roadmap.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    3.1 Define solution criteria

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, review the scoring system within the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions on the following slides.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t let your solution dictate your roadmap. Define your zero trust solution criteria before engaging in vendor selection.

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Input

    • Zero trust initiative list

    Output

    • Zero trust candidate solutions

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    3.1.1 Define compliance and solution evaluation criteria

    On the Setup tab, provide a weight for each evaluation criterion to evaluate the candidate solutions. You can use “0%” weight if that criterion is not required in your solution selection.

    1. Verify that the Description for each criterion is accurate.
    2. Provide weights for the compliance score and the solution score, which are the overall evaluation:
    • Compliance score consists of tenets score, pillar score, threat protection score, and trust algorithm score.
    • Solution score consists of features score, usability score, affordability score, and architecture score.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool, which demonstrates how to define compliance and solution evaluation criteria.

    3.1.2 Define remaining evaluation criteria

    On the Setup tab, provide a weight for each evaluation criterion to evaluate the candidate solutions. You can use “0%” weight if that criterion is not required in your solution selection.

    1. Verify that the Description for each criterion is accurate.
    2. Provide weights for the remaining evaluation criteria:
    • Tenets: Considers how well each initiative aligns with zero trust principles.
    • Pillars: Considers how well each initiative aligns with zero trust pillars.
    • Threats: Considers what zero trust threats are relevant with the candidate solution.
    • Trust Algorithm: Considers trust evaluation factors, trust evaluation process score, and input coverage.
    • Cost Estimation: Considers initial costs, which are one-time, upfront capital investments (e.g. hardware and software costs), and ongoing cost, which is any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs (e.g. licensing, maintenance, subscription fees).
    • Deployment Architecture: Considers the solutions deployment architecture capabilities.

    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool, and demonstrates where to define additional evaluation data

    Review available candidate solutions

    this image contains a list of available candidate Solutions.  This list includes: Zero Trust Identity; Zero-Trust Application & Workloads; Zero-Trust Networks; Zero-Trust Devices; and Zero-Trust Data

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework is a comprehensive yet fast-moving approach to help you select the right software for your organization

    Five key phases sequentially add rigor to your selection efforts while giving you a clear, swift-flowing methodology to follow.

    Awareness Education & Discovery Evaluation Selection Negotiation & Configuration
    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization 2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends 3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics 4.1 Create a Weighted Vendor Selection Decision Model 5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation With Top
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action 2.2 Discover Alternative Solutions & Conduct Market Education 3.2 Conduct a Data-Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities 4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities With Top 2-4 Vendors 5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration Two Vendors Selected
    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment 2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application Portfolio 3.3 Narrow the Field to Four Top Contenders 4.3 Validate Key Issues With Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks 5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project Implementation Timeline
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation 2.4 Validate the Business Case 5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Download the Rapid Application Selection Framework research

    Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

    SoftwareReviews

    The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    The Data Quadrant Report

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    Vendors ranked by their Composite Score

    The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Emotional Footprint

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Vendors ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score

    Sample whiteboard activity

    • Place sticky notes on the zero trust tenet that matches with the identified candidate solution to produce “solution requirements” that can be used to develop an RFP.
    • A sample sticky note is provided below for privileged access management.

    This image contains a screenshot of a sample whiteboard activity which can be done using sticky notes.

    • The PAM solution should support MFA
    • Live session monitoring, audit, and reporting
    • Should have password vaulting to prevent privileged users from knowing the passwords to critical systems and resources

    3.2 Identify candidate solutions

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. As a group, have the team review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. On tab 3 in the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool:
    • Review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool. For example, the candidate solutions with multifactor authentication (MFA) options are authenticators with SMS, mobile application, smartcard, or token.

    Input

    • Candidate solutions for zero trust tasks and initiatives

    Output

    • Suitability evaluation of candidate solutions

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    Info-Tech Insight

    Add a description associated with the candidate solution, e.g. reference link to vendors or manufacturers. This will make it easier to perform the evaluation.

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    3.2.1 Review candidate solutions

    1. Review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool. For example, the candidate solutions with multifactor authentication (MFA) options are authenticators with SMS, mobile application, smartcard, or token.
    2. Enter candidate solutions to the Compliance Data Entry tab on the Solution column within the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool.
    3. Optionally, add a description associated with the candidate solution, e.g. reference link to vendors or manufacturers. This will make it easier to perform the evaluation.
    this image contains a screenshot of a sample candidate solution, which can be done using Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.3 Evaluate candidate solutions

    Estimated time 3 hours

    On the Scoring tab, evaluate solution features, usability, affordability, and architecture using the instructions on the following slides. This activity will produce a solution score that can be used to identify the suitability of a solution.

    Input

    • Candidate solutions

    Output

    • Candidate solutions scored

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    3.3.3 Evaluate solution scores

    After all candidate solutions are evaluated, the Solution Score column can be sorted to rank the candidate solutions. After sorting, the top solutions can be used on prioritization of initiatives on Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. On Features
      1. Enter Coverage.
      2. Enter Quality.
    2. Enter Usability.
    3. On Affordability
      1. Enter Initial Cost.
      2. Enter Ongoing Cost (annual).
    4. Enter Architecture.
    this image contains a screenshot of how you can sort the solution score column in Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4 Perform cost/benefit analysis

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. Assign costing and benefits information for each initiative, following the instructions on the next slide.
    2. Define dependencies or business impacts if they will help with prioritization.

    Input

    • Ranked candidate solutions
    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list

    Output

    • Completed cost/benefit analysis for initiative list

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4.1 Complete the cost/benefit analysis

    Use Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
    • Use the result from candidate selection to define the estimated costs.
    • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
  • Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
  • This image contains a screenshot of a cost/benefit analysis table which can be found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    The Cost / Effort Rating is calculated based on the weight defined on step 2.1.1. The Benefit Rating is calculated based on the weight defined on step 2.1.2.

    3.4.2 Optionally enter detailed cost estimates

    Use Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. For each initiative, the tool will automatically populate the Detailed Cost Estimates and Detailed Staffing Estimates columns using the averages that you provided in step 2.1.1. However, if you have more detailed data about the costs and effort requirements for an initiative, you can override the calculated data by manually entering it into these columns. For example:
    • You are planning to subscribe to a security awareness vendor, and you have a quote from them specifying that the initial cost will be $75,000.
    • You have defined your “Medium” cost range as being “$10-100K,” so you select medium as your initial cost for this initiative in step 3.4.1. As you defined the average for medium costs as being $50,000, this is what the tool will put into the detailed cost estimate.
    • You can override this average by entering $75,000 as the initial cost in the detailed cost estimate column.

    This image contains a screenshot of a sample cost/benefit table found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    The Benefits-Cost column will give results after comparing the cost and the benefit. Negative value means that the cost outweighs the benefit. Positive value means that the benefit outweighs the cost. Zero value means that the cost equals the benefit.

    3.5 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the results of the cost/benefit analysis. Optionally, complete the Other Considerations columns in the Prioritization tab:
    • Dependencies can refer to other initiatives on the list or any other dependency that relates to activities or projects within the organization.
    • Business impacts can be helpful to document as they may require additional planning and communication that could impact initiative timelines.
  • Follow step 3.5.1 to create a visual effort map for your organization.
  • Follow step 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 to refine the effort map’s visual output.
  • Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list
    • Cost/benefit analysis

    Output

    • Prioritized list of initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.5.1 Create a visual effort map for your organization

    1 hour

    An effort map is a tool used for the visualization of a cost and benefit analysis. It is a quadrant output that visually shows how your gap initiatives were prioritized based on tab 7 in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. Establish the axes and colors for your effort map:
      1. X-axis represents the Benefit value from column J
      2. Y-axis represents the Cost/Effort value from column H
      3. Sticky note color is determined using the Alignment to Business value from column I
    2. Create sticky notes for each initiative and place them on the effort map or whiteboard based on the axes you have created with the help of your team.
    3. As you place initiatives on the visual effort map, discuss and modify rankings based on team member input.

    this image contains a sample visual effort map which can be found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    Input

    • Outputs from activities 3.4.1 and 3.4.2

    Output

    • High-level prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • Visual representation of quantitative values

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    3.5.2 Refine the effort map’s visual output

    1 hour

    Once the effort map is complete, work to further simplify the visual output by categorizing initiatives based on the quadrant in which they have been placed.

    1. Before moving forward with the initiative wave prioritization (activity 3.7), identify any initiatives listed across all quadrants that are required as a part of compliance and mark with a sticky dot.
    2. Document these initiatives as Execution Wave 1.

    this image contains a screenshot of a refined visual effort map, which can be done by following the instructions in this section.

    Input

    • Outputs from activity 3.5.1

    Output

    • Prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • First execution wave of gap-closing initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Sticky dots
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    3.5.3 Refine the effort map’s visual output

    30 minutes

    1. Use a separate area of the whiteboard to draw out four to five Execution Wave columns.
    2. Group initiatives into each Execution Wave column based on their placement within the quadrant from activities 3.5.1 and 3.5.2.
      1. Ensure that all identified mandatory activities as per governing privacy law fall within the first wave.
      2. Leverage the following 0-4 Execution Wave scale:
        1. Underway –Initiatives that are already underway
        2. Must Do – Initiatives that must happen right away
        3. Should Do – Initiatives that should happen but need more time/support
        4. Could Do – Initiatives that are not a priority
        5. Won’t Do – Initiatives that likely won’t be carried out
    3. Indicate the granular level for each execution wave using the a-z scale.
    • Use the lettering to track dependencies between initiatives.
      • If one must take place before another, ensure that its letter comes first alphabetically.
      • If multiple initiatives must take place at the same time, use the same letter to show they will take place in tandem.

    This image depicts the sample output for a refined visual effort map

    Input

    • Outputs from activity 3.5.2

    Output

    • Prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • First execution wave of gap-closing initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Sticky dots
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Wave assignment example

    In the example below, we see “IAM modernization” was assessed as 9 on cost/effort rating and 5 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a positive value of 1. We can label this as SHOULD DO (wave 2).

    We can also see “Network segmentation” was assessed as 6 on cost/effort rating and 4 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a positive value of 2. We can label this as MUST DO (wave 1).

    We can also see “Unified Endpoints Management” was assessed as 8 on cost/effort rating and 2 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a negative value of -4. We can label this as WON’T DO (no wave).

    We can also see “Data Protection” was assessed as 4 on cost/effort rating and 2 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a zero value. We can label this as COULD DO (wave 3).

    This image depicts a sample wave assignment output, discussed in this section.

    It is recommended to define the threshold of each wave based on the value of Benefits-Cost before assigning waves.

    3.6 Build roadmap

    Estimated time 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, follow step 3.6.1 to create your roadmap by scheduling initiatives into the Gantt chart within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Review the roadmap for resourcing conflicts and adjust as required.
    3. Review the final cost and effort estimates for the roadmap.

    Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Cost/benefit analysis
    • Prioritized initiative list

    Output

    • Zero trust roadmap

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.6.1 Schedule initiatives using the Gantt chart

    1. On the Gantt Chart tab for each initiative, enter an owner (the role who will be primarily responsible for execution).
    2. Additionally, enter a start month and year for the initiative and the expected duration in months.
    • You can filter the Wave column to only see specific waves at any one time to assist with the scheduling.
    • You do not need to schedule Wave 4 initiatives as the expectation is that these initiatives will not be done.
    • This Image contains a screenshot of the Gantt Chart, with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Owner; 2: Expected Duration

    3.6.2 Review your roadmap

    1. When you have completed the Gantt chart, as a group review the overall roadmap to ensure that it is reasonable for your organization. Consider the following:
    • Do you have other IT or business projects planned during this time frame that may impact your resourcing or scheduling?
    • Does your organization have regular change freezes throughout the year that will impact the schedule?
    • Do you have over-subscribed resources? You can filter the list on the Owner column to identify potential over-subscription of resources.
    • Have you considered any long vacations, sabbaticals, parental leaves, or other planned longer-term absences?
    • Are your initiatives adequately aligned to your budget cycle? For instance, if you have an initiative that is expected to make recommendations for capital expenditure, it must be completed prior to budget planning.

    This image depicts an example roadmap which can be created following the use of the Gantt Chart

    3.6.3 Review your cost/effort estimates table

    1. Once you have completed your roadmap, review the total cost/effort estimates. This can be found in a table on the Results tab. This table will provide initial and ongoing costs and staffing requirements for each wave. This also includes the total three-year investment. In your review consider:
    • Is this investment realistic? Will completion of your roadmap require adding more staff or funding than you otherwise expected?
    • If the investment seems unrealistic, you may need to revisit some of your assumptions, potentially reducing target levels or increasing the amount of time to complete the strategy.

    This table provides you with the information to have important conversations with management and stakeholders.

    This image contains an example of the Zero Trust Roadmap Cost/Effort Estimates.  The column headings are as follows: Wave; Number of Initiatives; Initial Implementation - Cost; Initial Implementation - Effort; Ongoing Maintenance - Cost; Ongoing Maintenance - Effort.  A separate table is shown with the column heading: Estimated Total Three Year Investment

    Phase 4

    Formulate Policies for Roadmap Initiatives

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Formulate zero trust policies for critical DAAS elements.
    • Formulate zero trust policies to secure a path to access critical DAAS elements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    Understand the zero trust policy

    Use the Kipling methodology as a vendor agnostic approach to identify appropriate allow list elements when deploying multiple zero trust solutions.
    The policies help to prevent lateral movement.

    Who Who should access a resource? Here, the user ID that identifies the users through the principle of least privilege is allowed access to a particular resource. The authentication policy will be used to verify identity of a user when access request to a resource is made. Who requires MFA?
    What What application is used to access the resource? Application ID to identify applications that are only allowed on the network. Port control policies can be used for the application service.
    When When do users access the resource? Policy that identifies and enforces time schedule when an application accessed by users is used.
    Where Where is the resource located? The location of the destination resource should be added to the policy and, where possible, restrict the source of the traffic either by zone and/or IP address.
    Why Why is the data accessed? Data classification should be done to know why the data needs protection and the type of protection (data filtering).
    How How should you allow access to the resource? This covers the protection of the application traffic. Principle of least privilege access, log all traffic, configure security profiles, NGFW, decryption and encryption, consistent application of policy and threat prevention across all locations for all local and remote users on managed and unmanaged endpoints are ways to apply content-ID.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The success of a zero trust implementation relies on enforcing policies consistently. Applying the Kipling methodology to the protect surface is the best way to design zero trust policies.

    4.1.1 Formulate policy

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, review the protect surface(s) identified in phase one, and using the Kipling methodology from the previous slide, formulate a policy. Each policy can be reviewed repeatedly until we are sure it satisfies the goal.
    2. The policy created should be consistent for both cloud and on-prem environments.
    3. As an example, let's use the healthcare scenario found in tab 3 of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. The protect surface used is "Automated Medication Dispensing." Another example will be "Salesforce" accessed via the cloud.
    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID
    On-Prem Pyxis_Users Pyxis Any Pyxis_server Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic
    Cloud Sales Salesforce Working hours Canada Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic

    Input

    • Kipling methodology
    • Protect surface

    Output

    • Zero trust policy

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    4.1.2 Apply policy

    1-2 hours

    1. Place each protect surface in its own microperimeter. Each microperimeter should be segmented by a next-generation firewall or authentication broker that will serve as a segmentation gateway.
    2. Name the microperimeter and place it on a firewall.

    Input

    • Kipling methodology
    • Protect surface

    Output

    • Zero trust policy

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Sticky Notes
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    Microperimeter A
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    Microperimeter B
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    Microperimeter C
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    4.2 Secure a path to access critical DAAS elements

    How should you allow access to the resource?

    This component makes up the final piece of formulating the policies as it applies the protection of the application traffic.

    The principle of least privilege is applied to the security policy to only allow access requests and restrict the access to the purpose it serves. This access request is then logged as well as the traffic (both internal and external). Most firewalls (NGFW) have policy rules that, by default, enable logging.

    Segmentation gateways (NGFW, VM-series firewalls, agent-based and clientless VPN solutions), are used to apply zero trust policy (Kipling methodology) in the network, cloud, and endpoint (managed and unmanaged) for all local and remote users.

    These policies need to be applied to security profiles on all allowed traffic. Some of these profiles include but are not limited to the following: URL filtering profile for web access and protect against phishing attacks, vulnerability protection profile intrusion prevention systems, anti spyware profiles to protect against command-and-control threats, malware and antivirus profile to protect against malware, and a file blocking profile to block and/or alert suspicious file types.

    Good visibility on your network can also be tied to decryption as you can inspect traffic and data to the lowest level possible that is generally accepted by your organization and in compliance with regulation.

    Conceptualized flow

    With users working from anywhere on managed and unmanaged devices, access to the internet, SAAS, public cloud, and the data center will have consistent policies applied regardless of their location.

    The policy is validating that the user is who they say they are based on the role profile, what they are trying to access to make sure their role or attribute profile has the appropriate permission to the application, and within the stipulated time limit. Where the data or application is located is also verified and the why needs to be satisfied before the requested access is granted. Based on the mentioned policies, the how element is then applied throughout the lifecycle of the access.

    Who

    (Internet)

    What

    (SAAS)

    When

    Where

    (Public Cloud)

    Why

    How

    (Data Center)

    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID
    On-Prem Pyxis_Users Pyxis Any Pyxis_server Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic
    Cloud Sales Salesforce Working hours Canada Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic

    Phase 5

    Monitor Zero Trust Roadmap Deployment

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish metrics for roadmap tasks.
    • Track metrics for roadmap tasks.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    5.1 Establish metrics for roadmap tasks

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, identify metrics to measure implementation and efficacy of tasks
    2. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, document metric metadata.
    3. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
    • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
  • Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
  • Input

    • Zero trust roadmap task list

    Output

    • Metrics for measuring zero trust task implementation and efficacy

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    5.1.1 Identify metrics to measure implementation and efficacy of tasks

    Estimated time 3-4 hours

    1. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, for each section defined in columns C and D, enter zero trust implementation tasks into column E. If you completed the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, use the tasks identified there to populate column E.
    2. For each task, identify in column F any metrics that will communicate implementation progress and/or implementation efficacy.
    • If multiple metrics are needed for a single task, we recommend expanding the size of the row and adding additional metrics onto a new line in the same row. A sample is provided in the tool.

    this image contains a screenshot of tab 2 in the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    To measure the efficacy of a zero trust implementation, ensure you know what a successful zero trust implementation means for your organization, and define metrics that demonstrate whether that success is being realized.

    5.1.2 Document metric metadata

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    For each metric defined in step 4.1.1:

    1. Identify in column G whether the metric can be measured now (Phase 1), measured in a few months’ time (Phase 2), or measured in a few years’ time (Phase 3).
    2. Identify in columns H through M who is responsible for collecting the metric (Person Source), who/what is consulted to collect the metric (Technology Source), who compiles the collected metric into dashboards and presentations (Compiler), and who is informed of the measurement of the metric (Audience).
    • Add more columns under the Audience category if needed.
    • Use “X” to identify if an audience group will be informed of the measurement of the metric.
  • Identify in columns N through P the target for the metric (Metric Target), the effort it takes to collect the metric (Effort to Collect), the frequency with which the organizations plans to collect the metric (Frequency of Collection), and any comments that people should know when collecting, compiling, or presenting metrics.
  • This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Priority; 2: Roles and Responsibilities; 3: effort to collect; frequency of collection; Metric Target; Comments

    5.2 Track and report metrics

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. In the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, copy and paste metrics you plan to track in the tool from column F on tab 2 to column B on tab 3.
    2. Use tab 3 to identify collection frequency, metric target, and measurements collected for each metric. Add notes or comments to each metric or measurement to track contextual elements that could affect metric measurements.
    3. Leverage the graphs on tab 4 to communicate metrics to the appropriated audience groups, as defined in tab 2.

    Input

    • Metrics for measuring zero trust task implementation and efficacy

    Output

    • Metric data and graphs for presenting zero trust implementation metrics to audience groups

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    5.2.1 Record baseline measurements for metrics

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    On tab “3. Track Metrics” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    1. Copy and paste the metrics from Column F on tab “2. Task & Metric Register” that you want to track into Column B of this tab.
    2. For each metric, record the frequency of collection (Collection Frequency) and the metric target (Target) by referencing columns O and P on tab “2. Task & Metric Register.”
    3. Begin to record baseline/initial values for each metric in column E. Rename columns to match your highest frequency of collection.
      (e.g. if any metric is being measured monthly, there should be one column per month)
    4. Over time, conduct measurements of your metrics and store them in the table below.
    5. Add notes, as necessary.

    this image contains a screenshot of tab 3 of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Your Metrics; 2: Collection Frequency; Target; 3: Jan; 4: Metric Measurements; 5: Notes

    5.2.2 Report metric health to audience groups

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    On tab “4. Graphs” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    1. The Overall Metric Health gauge at the top of this tab presents the average percentage away from meeting metric targets for all metrics being tracked. To calculate this value, the differences between the most recent measurements and target values for each metric are averaged.
    2. Below the Overall Metric Health gauge, use the drop-down list in cell D9 to select one of the metrics from tab “3. Track Metrics.”
    3. Six different graphic representations of the tracked data for the selected metric will populate.

    Copy and paste desired graphs into presentations for audience members identified in step 5.1.2.

    This image contains a screenshot from tab “4. Graphs” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    5.3 Build a communication deck

    Estimated time 2 hours

    Leverage the Zero Trust Communication Deck to showcase the work that you have done in the tools and activities associated with this research.

    In this communication deck template, you will find the following sections:

    • Introduction
    • Protect Surfaces
    • Zero Trust Gap Analysis
    • Zero Trust Initiatives & Tasks

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business goals
    • Zero trust program gap analysis
    • Zero trust roadmap initiatives and tasks
    • Zero trust metrics

    Output

    • Communication deck for zero trust strategy

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Knowledge of protect surfaces and the business goals protecting them supports
    • Comprehensive knowledge of zero trust current state and summary initiatives required to achieve zero trust objectives
    • Assessment of which solutions for zero trust tasks and initiatives are the most appropriate for the organization
    • A defined set of security metrics assessing zero trust implementation progress and efficacy

    Deliverables Completed

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    This is a picture of an Info-Tech Account Representative
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Assess current security capabilities and build a roadmap of tasks and initiatives that close maturity gaps.

    Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Identify and track metrics for zero trust tasks and initiatives.

    Research Contributors

    • Aaron Benson, CME Group, Director of IAM Governance
    • Brad Mateski, Zones, Solutions Architect for CyberSecurity
    • Bob Smock, Info-Tech Research Group, Vice President of Consulting
    • Dr. Chase Cunningham, Ericom Software, Chief Strategy Officer
    • John Kindervag, ON2IT Cybersecurity, Senior Vice President, Cybersecurity Strategy and ON2IT Group Fellow
    • John Zhao, Fonterra, Enterprise Security Architect
    • Rongxing Lu, University of New Brunswick, Associate Professor
    • Sumanta Sarkar, University of Warwick, Assistant Professor
    • Tim Malone, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Director Information Security
    • Vana Matte, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Vice President of Technology Services

    Related Info-Tech Research

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Build an Information Security Strategy

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations. This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current-state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building out a security roadmap.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness.

    Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    IT security was typified by perimeter security. However, the way the world does business has mandated a change to IT security. In response, zero trust is a set of principles that can add flexibility to planning your IT security strategy.

    Use this blueprint to determine your zero trust readiness and understand how zero trust can benefit both security and the business.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Many organizations are looking to improve their identity and access management (IAM) practices but struggle with where to start and whether all areas of IAM have been considered. This blueprint will help you improve the organization's identity and access management practices by following our three-phase methodology:

    • Assess identity and access requirements
    • Identify initiatives using the identity lifecycle
    • Prioritize initiatives and build a roadmap

    Bibliography

    • “2021 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2021. Web.
    • “A Zero-Trust Strategy Has 3 Needs - Identify, Authenticate, and Monitor Users and Devices On and Off The Network.” Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    • “Applying Zero Trust Principles to Enterprise Mobility.” CISA, March 2022. Web.
    • Biden Jr., Joseph R. “Executive Order on Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity.” The White House, 12 May 2021. Web.
    • “CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model.” CISA - Cybersecurity Division, June 2021. Web.
    • “Continuous Diagnostics and Mitigation Program Overview.” CISA, Jan. 2022. Web.
    • Contributor. “The Five Business Benefits of a Zero Trust Approach to Security.” Security Brief - Australia, 19 Aug. 2020. Web.
    • “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, July 2021. Web.
    • English, Melanie. “5 Stats That Show The Cost Saving Effect of Zero Trust.” Teramind, 29 Sept. 2021. Web.
    • “Improve Application Access and Security With Fortinet Zero Trust Network Access.” Fortinet, 2 March 2021. Web.
    • “Incorporating Zero-trust Strategies for Secure Network and Application Access.” Fortinet, 21 July 2021. Web.
    • Jakkal, Vasu. “Zero Trust Adoption Report: How Does Your Organization Compare?” Microsoft, 28 July 2021. Web.
    • “Jericho Forum™ Commandments.” The Open Group, Jericho Forum, May 2007. Web.
    • Johnson, Derrick. “Zero Trust vs. SASE - Here's What You Need to Know.” Security Magazine, 23 July 2021. Web.
    • Joint Defense Information Systems Agency (DISA) and National Security Agency (NSA) Zero Trust Engineering Team. “Department of Defense (DOD) Zero Trust Reference Architecture.” DoD CIO, Feb. 2021. Web.
    • Kay, Dennis. “Planning for a Zero Trust Architecture Target State.” NASA, NIST, 13 Nov. 2019. Web.
    • National Security Agency. “Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model.” U.S. Department of Defense, Feb. 2021. Web.
    • NSTAC. “Draft Report to the President - Zero Trust and Trusted Identity Management.” CISA, NSTAC, n.d. Web.
    • Rose, Scott W., et al. “Zero Trust Architecture.” NIST, 10 Aug. 2020. Web.
    • “Securing Digital Innovation Demands Zero-Trust Access.” Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    • Shackleford, Dave. “How to Create a Comprehensive Zero Trust Strategy.” SANS, Cisco, 2 Sept. 2020. Web.
    • “The CISO’s Guide to Effective Zero-Trust Access.” Fortinet, 28 April 2021. Web.
    • “The State of Zero Trust Security 2021.” Okta, June 2021. Web.
    • Kerman, Alper, et al. “Implementing a Zero Trust Architecture.” NIST - National Cybersecurity Center of Excellence, March 2020. Web.
    • Kindervag, John. “Keynote - John KINDERVAG - 021622.” Vimeo, VIRTUAL Eastern | CyberSecurity Conference, 16 Feb. 2022. Web.
    • Lodewijkx, Koos. “IBM CISO Perspective: Zero Trust Changes Security From Something You Do to Something You Have.” SecurityIntelligence, IBM, 19 Nov. 2020. Web.
    • VB Staff. “Report: Only 21% of Enterprises Use Zero Trust Architecture.” VentureBeat, 15 Feb. 2022. Web.
    • Young, Shalanda D. “Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles.” The White House, EXECUTIVE OFFICE OF THE PRESIDENT - OFFICE OF MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET, 26 Jan. 2022. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Access.” Fortinet, n.d. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Architecture Technical Exchange Meeting.” NIST - National Cybersecurity Center of Excellence, 12 Nov. 2019. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Cybersecurity Current Trends.” ACT-IAC, 18 April 2019. Web.
    • “Zero-Trust Access for Comprehensive Visibility and Control.” Fortinet, 24 Sep. 2020. Web.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}157|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,359 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • In today’s world, business agility is essential to stay competitive. Quick responses to business needs through efficient development and deployment practices is critical for business value delivery.
    • A mature solution architecture practice is the basic necessity for a business to have technical agility.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Don’t architect for normal situations. That is a shallow approach and leads to decisions that may seem “right” but will not be able to stand up to system elasticity needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the different parts of a continuous security architecture framework and how they may apply to your decisions.
    • Develop a solution architecture for upcoming work (or if there is a desire to reduce tech debt).

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Solution Architecture Practices Deck – A deck to help you develop an approach for or validate existing solution architecture capability.

    Translate stakeholder objectives into architecture requirements, solutions, and changes. Incorporate architecture quality attributes in decisions to increase your architecture’s life. Evaluate your solution architecture from multiple views to obtain a holistic perspective of the range of issues, risks, and opportunities.

    • Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices – Phases 1-3

    2. Solution Architecture Template – A template to record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and make real your digital product vision.

    Identify and detail the value maps that support the business, and discover the architectural quality attribute that is most important for the value maps. Brainstorm solutions for design decisions for data, security, scalability, and performance.

    • Solution Architecture Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Vision and Value Maps

    The Purpose

    Document a vision statement for the solution architecture practice (in general) and/or a specific vision statement, if using a single project as an example.

    Document business architecture and capabilities.

    Decompose capabilities into use cases.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide a great foundation for an actionable vision and goals that people can align to.

    Develop a collaborative understanding of business capabilities.

    Develop a collaborative understanding of use cases and personas that are relevant for the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Develop vision statement.

    1.2 Document list of value stream maps and their associated use cases.

    1.3 Document architectural quality attributes needed for use cases using SRME.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for vision statement canvas and value maps

    2 Continue Vision and Value Maps, Begin Phase 2

    The Purpose

    Map value stream to required architectural attributes.

    Prioritize architecture decisions.

    Discuss and document data architecture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of architectural attributes needed for value streams.

    Conceptual understanding of data architecture.

    Activities

    2.1 Map value stream to required architectural attributes.

    2.2 Prioritize architecture decisions.

    2.3 Discuss and document data architecture.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for value stream and architecture attribute mapping; a prioritized list of architecture design decisions; and data architecture

    3 Continue Phase 2, Begin Phase 3

    The Purpose

    Discuss security and threat assessment.

    Discuss resolutions to threats via security architecture decisions.

    Discuss system’s scalability needs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Decisions for security architecture.

    Decisions for scalability architecture.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss security and threat assessment.

    3.2 Discuss resolutions to threats via security architecture decisions.

    3.3 Discuss system’s scalability needs.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for security architecture and scalability design

    4 Continue Phase 3, Start and Finish Phase 4

    The Purpose

    Discuss performance architecture.

    Compile all the architectural decisions into a solutions architecture list.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A complete solution architecture.

    A set of principles that will form the foundation of solution architecture practices.

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss performance architecture.

    4.2 Compile all the architectural decisions into a solutions architecture list.

    Outputs

    Solution Architecture Template with sections filled out for performance and a complete solution architecture

    Further reading

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders’ short- and long-term needs.

    Analyst Perspective

    Application architecture is a critical foundation for supporting the growth and evolution of application systems. However, the business is willing to exchange the extension of the architecture’s life with quality best practices for the quick delivery of new or enhanced application functionalities. This trade-off may generate immediate benefits to stakeholders, but it will come with high maintenance and upgrade costs in the future, rendering your system legacy early.

    Technical teams know the importance of implementing quality attributes into architecture but are unable to gain approval for the investments. Overcoming this challenge requires a focus of architectural enhancements on specific problem areas with significant business visibility. Then, demonstrate how quality solutions are vital enablers for supporting valuable application functionalities by tracing these solutions to stakeholder objectives and conducting business and technical risk and impact assessments through multiple business and technical perspectives.

    this is a picture of Andrew Kum-Seun

    Andrew Kum-Seun
    Research Manager, Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture

    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders’ short- and long-term needs.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Most organizations have some form of solution architecture; however, it may not accurately and sufficiently support the current and rapidly changing business and technical environments.
    • To enable quick delivery, applications are built and integrated haphazardly, typically omitting architecture quality practices.

    Common Obstacles

    • Failing to involve development and stakeholder perspectives in design can lead to short-lived architecture and critical development, testing, and deployment constraints and risks being omitted.
    • Architects are experiencing little traction implementing solutions to improve architecture quality due to the challenge of tracing these solutions back to the right stakeholder objectives.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Translate stakeholder objectives into architecture requirements, solutions, and changes. Incorporate architecture quality attributes in decisions to increase your architecture’s life.
    • Evaluate your solution architecture from multiple views to obtain a holistic perspective of the range of issues, risks, and opportunities.
    • Regularly review and recalibrate your solution architecture so that it accurately reflects and supports current stakeholder needs and technical environments.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Well-received applications can have poor architectural qualities. Functional needs often take precedence over quality architecture. Quality must be baked into design, execution, and decision-making practices to ensure the right tradeoffs are made.

    A badly designed solution architecture is the root of all technical evils

    A well-thought-through and strategically designed solution architecture is essential for the long-term success of any software system, and by extension, the organization because:

    1. It will help achieve quality attribute requirements (security, scalability, performance, usability, resiliency, etc.) for a software system.
    2. It can define and refine architectural guiding principles. A solution architecture is not only important for today but also a vision for the future of the system’s ability to react positively to changing business needs.
    3. It can help build usable (and reusable) services. In a fast-moving environment, the convenience of having pre-made plug-and-play architectural objects reduces the risk incurred from knee-jerk reactions in response to unexpected demands.
    4. It can be used to create a roadmap to an IT future state. Architectural concerns support transition planning activities that can lead to the successful implementation of a strategic IT plan.

    Demand for quick delivery makes teams omit architectural best practices, increasing downstream risks

    In its need for speed, a business often doesn’t see the value in making sure architecture is maintainable, reusable, and scalable. This demand leads to an organizational desire for development practices and the procurement of vendors that favor time-to-market over long-term maintainability. Unfortunately, technical teams are pushed to omit design quality and validation best practices.

    What are the business impacts of omitting architecture design practices?

    Poor quality application architecture impedes business growth opportunities, exposes enterprise systems to risks, and consumes precious IT budgets in maintenance that could otherwise be used for innovation and new projects.

    Previous estimations indicate that roughly 50% of security problems are the result of software design. […] Flaws in the architecture of a software system can have a greater impact on various security concerns in the system, and as a result, give more space and flexibility for malicious users.(Source: IEEE Software)

    Errors in software requirements and software design documents are more frequent than errors in the source code itself according to Computer Finance Magazine. Defects introduced during the requirements and design phase are not only more probable but also more severe and more difficult to remove. (Source: iSixSigma)

    Design a solution architecture that can be successful within the constraints and complexities set before you

    APPLICATION ARCHITECTURE…

    … describes the dependencies, structures, constraints, standards, and development guidelines to successfully deliver functional and long-living applications. This artifact lays the foundation to discuss the enhancement of the use and operations of your systems considering existing complexities.

    Good architecture design practices can give you a number of benefits:

    Lowers maintenance costs by revealing key issues and risks early. The Systems Sciences Institute at IBM has reported that the cost to fix an error found after product release was 4 to 5 times as much as one uncovered during design.(iSixSigma)

    Supports the design and implementation activities by providing key insights for project scheduling, work allocation, cost analysis, risk management, and skills development.(IBM: developerWorks)

    Eliminates unnecessary creativity and activities on the part of designers and implementers, which is achieved by imposing the necessary constraints on what they can do and making it clear that deviation from constraints can break the architecture.(IBM: developerWorks)

    Use Info-Tech’s Continuous Solution Architecture (CSA) Framework for designing adaptable systems

    Solution architecture is not a one-size-fits-all conversation. There are many design considerations and trade-offs to keep in mind as a product or services solution is conceptualized, evaluated, tested, and confirmed. The following is a list of good practices that should inform most architecture design decisions.

    Principle 1: Design your solution to have at least two of everything.

    Principle 2: Include a “kill switch” in your fault-isolation design. You should be able to turn off everything you release.

    Principle 3: If it can be monitored, it should be. Use server and audit logs where possible.

    Principle 4: Asynchronous is better than synchronous. Asynchronous design is more complex but worth the processing efficiency it introduces.

    Principle 5: Stateless over stateful: State data should only be used if necessary.

    Principle 6: Go horizonal (scale out) over vertical (scale up).

    Principle 7: Good architecture comes in small packages.

    Principle 8: Practice just-in-time architecture. Delay finalizing an approach for as long as you can.

    Principle 9: X-ilities over features. Quality of an architecture is the foundation over which features exist. A weak foundation can never be obfuscated through shiny features.

    Principle 10: Architect for products not projects. A product is an ongoing concern, while a project is short lived and therefore only focused on what is. A product mindset forces architects to think about what can or should be.

    Principle 11: Design for rollback: When all else fails, you should be able to stand up the previous best state of the system.

    Principle 12: Test the solution architecture like you test your solution’s features.

    CSA should be used for every step in designing a solution’s architecture

    Solution architecture is a technical response to a business need, and like all complex evolutionary systems, must adapt its design for changing circumstances.

    The triggers for changes to existing solution architectures can come from, at least, three sources:

    1. Changing business goals
    2. Existing backlog of technical debt
    3. Solution architecture roadmap

    A solution’s architecture is cross-cutting and multi-dimensional and at the minimum includes:

    • Product Portfolio Strategy
    • Application Architecture
    • Data Architecture
    • Information Architecture
    • Operational Architecture

    along with several qualitative attributes (also called non-functional requirements).

    This image contains a chart which demonstrates the relationship between changing hanging business goals, Existing backlog of technical debt, Solution architecture roadmap, and Product Portfolio Strategy, Application Architecture, Data Architecture, Information Architecture and, Operational Architecture

    Related Research: Product Portfolio Strategy

    Integrate Portfolios to Create Exceptional Customer Value

    • Define an organizing principle that will structure your projects and applications in a way that matters to your stakeholders.
    • Bridge application and project portfolio data using the organizing principle that matters to communicate with stakeholders across the organization.
    • Create a dashboard that brings together the benefits of both project and application portfolio management to improve visibility and decision making.

    Deliver on Your Digital Portfolio Vision

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up. Lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented ; define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Related Research: Data, Information & Integration Architecture

    Build a Data Architecture Roadmap

    • Have a framework in place to identify the appropriate solution for the challenge at hand. Our three-phase practical approach will help you build a custom and modernized data architecture.
    • Identify and prioritize the business drivers in which data architecture changes would create the largest overall benefit and determine the corresponding data architecture tiers that need to be addressed.
    • Discover the best-practice trends, measure your current state, and define the targets for your data architecture tactics.
    • Build a cohesive and personalized roadmap for restructuring your data architecture. Manage your decisions and resulting changes.

    Build a Data Pipeline for Reporting and Analytics

    • Understand your high-level business capabilities and interactions across them – your data repositories and flows should be just a digital reflection thereof.
    • Divide your data world in logical verticals overlaid with various speed data progression lanes, i.e. build your data pipeline – and conquer it one segment at a time.
    • Use the most appropriate database design pattern for a given phase/component in your data pipeline progression.

    Related Research:Operational Architecture

    Optimize Application Release Management

    • Acquire release management ownership. Ensure there is appropriate accountability for the speed and quality of the releases passing through the entire pipeline.
    • A release manager has oversight over the entire release process and facilitates the necessary communication between business stakeholders and various IT roles.
    • Instill holistic thinking. Release management includes all steps required to push release and change requests to production along with the hand-off to Operations and Support. Increase the transparency and visibility of the entire pipeline to ensure local optimizations do not generate bottlenecks in other areas.
    • Standardize and lay a strong release management foundation. Optimize the key areas where you are experiencing the most pain and continually improve.

    Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap

    • Increased communication. More information being shared to more people who need it.
    • Better planning. More accurate information being shared.
    • Reduced lead times. Less due diligence or discovery work required as part of project implementations.
    • Faster delivery times. Less low-value work, freeing up more time for project work.

    Related Research:Security Architecture

    Identify Opportunities to Mature the Security Architecture

    • A right-sized security architecture can be created by assessing the complexity of the IT department, the operations currently underway for security, and the perceived value of a security architecture within the organization. This will bring about a deeper understanding of the organizational infrastructure.
    • Developing a security architecture should also result in a list of opportunities (i.e. initiatives) that an organization can integrate into a roadmap. These initiatives will seek to improve security operations and strengthen the IT department’s understanding of security’s role within the organization.
    • A better understanding of the infrastructure will help to save time on determining the correct technologies required from vendors, and therefore, cut down on the amount of vendor noise.
    • Creating a defensible roadmap will assist with justifying future security spend.

    Key deliverable:

    Solution Architecture Template
    Record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and make real your digital product vision.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This image contains screenshots of the deliverables which will be discussed later in this blueprint

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.

    Guided Implementation

    Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track

    Workshop

    We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place

    Consulting

    Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. we need assistance through the entirety of this project.

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Exercises
    1. Articulate an architectural vision
    2. Develop dynamic value stream maps
    1. Create a conceptual map between the value stream, use case, and required architectural attribute
    2. Create a prioritized list of architectural attributes
    3. Develop a data architecture that supports transactional and analytical needs
    1. Document security architecture risks and mitigations
    2. Document scalability architecture
    1. Document performance-enhancing architecture
    2. Bring it all together
    Outcomes
    1. Architecture vision
    2. Dynamic value stream maps (including user stories/personas)
    1. List of required architectural attributes
    2. Architectural attributes prioritized
    3. Data architecture design decisions
    1. Security threat and risk analysis
    2. Security design decisions
    3. Scalability design decisions
    1. Performance design decisions
    2. Finalized decisions

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
    This GI is between 8 to 10 calls over the course of approximately four to six months.

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 2
    Call #1:
    Articulate an architectural vision.
    Call #4:
    Continue discussion on value stream mapping and related use cases.
    Call #6:
    Document security design decisions.
    Call #2:
    Discuss value stream mapping and related use cases.
    Call #5:
    • Map the value streams to required architectural attribute.
    • Create a prioritized list of architectural attributes.
    Call #7:
    • Document scalability design decisions.
    • Document performance design decisions.
    Call #3:
    Continue discussion on value stream mapping and related use cases.
    Call #8:
    Bring it all together.

    Phase 1: Visions and Value Maps

    Phase 1

    1.1 Articulate an Architectural Vision
    1.2 Develop Dynamic Value Stream Maps
    1.3 Map Value Streams, Use Cases, and Required Architectural Attributes
    1.4 Create a Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Phase 2

    2.1 Develop a Data Architecture That Supports Transactional and Analytical Needs
    2.2 Document Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Phase 3

    3.1 Document Scalability Architecture
    3.2 Document Performance Enhancing Architecture
    3.3 Combine the Different Architecture Design Decisions Into a Unified Solution Architecture

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine a vision for architecture outcomes
    • Draw dynamic value stream maps
    • Derive architectural design decisions
    • Prioritize design decisions

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    Let’s get this straight: You need an architectural vision

    If you start off by saying I want to architect a system, you’ve already lost. Remember what a vision is for!

    An architectural vision...

    … is your North Star

    Your product vision serves as the single fixed point for product development and delivery.

    … aligns stakeholders

    It gets everyone on the same page.

    … helps focus on meaningful work

    There is no pride in being a rudderless ship. It can also be very expensive.

    And eventually...

    … kick-starts your strategy

    We know where to go, we know who to bring along, and we know the steps to get there. Let’s plan this out.

    An architectural vision is multi-dimensional

    Who is the target customer (or customers)?

    What is the key benefit a customer can get from using our service or product?

    Why should they be engaged with you?

    What makes our service or product better than our competitors?

    (Adapted from Crossing the Chasm)

    Info-Tech Insight

    It doesn’t matter if you are delivering value to internal or external stakeholders, you need a product vision to ensure everyone understands the “why.”

    Use a canvas as the dashboard for your architecture

    The solution architecture canvas provides a single dashboard to quickly define and communicate the most important information about the vision. A canvas is an effective tool for aligning teams and providing an executive summary view.

    This image contains a sample canvas for you to use as the dashboard for your architecture. The sections are: Solution Name, Tracking Info, Vision, Business Goals, Metrics, Personas, and Stakeholders.

    Leverage the solution architecture canvas to state and inform your architecture vision

    This image contains the sample canvas from the previous section, with annotations explaining what to do for each of the headings.

    1.1 Craft a vision statement for your solution’s architecture

    1. Use the product canvas template provided for articulating your solution’s architecture.

    *If needed, remove or add additional data points to fit your purposes.

    There are different statement templates available to help form your product vision statements. Some include:

    • For [our target customer], who [customer’s need], the [product] is a [product category or description] that [unique benefits and selling points]. Unlike [competitors or current methods], our product [main differentiators].
    • We believe (in) a [noun: world, time, state, etc.] where [persona] can [verb: do, make, offer, etc.], for/by/with [benefit/goal].
    • To [verb: empower, unlock, enable, create, etc.] [persona] to [benefit, goal, future state].
    • Our vision is to [verb: build, design, provide] the [goal, future state] to [verb: help, enable, make it easier to...] [persona].

    (Adapted from Crossing the Chasm)

    Download the Solution Architecture Template and document your vision statement.

    Input

    • Business Goals
    • Product Portfolio Vision

    Output

    • Solution Architecture Vision

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Solution Architecture Canvas: Refine your vision statement

    This image contains a screenshot of the canvas from earlier in the blueprint, with only the annotation for Solution Name: Vision, unique value proposition, elevator pitch, or positioning statement.

    Understand your value streams before determining your solution’s architecture

    Business Strategy

    Sets and communicates the direction of the entire organization.

    Value Stream

    Segments, groups, and creates a coherent narrative as to how an organization creates value.

    Business Capability Map

    Decomposes an organization into its component parts to establish a common language across the organization.

    Execution

    Implements the business strategy through capability building or improvement projects.

    Identify your organization’s goals and define the value streams that support them

    Goal

    Revenue Growth

    Value Streams

    Stream 1- Product Purchase
    Stream 2- Customer Acquisition
    stream 3- Product Financing

    There are many techniques that help with constructing value streams and their capabilities.

    Domain-driven design is a technique that can be used for hypothesizing the value maps, their capabilities, and associated solution architecture.

    Read more about domain-driven design here.

    Value streams can be external (deliver value to customers) or internal (support operations)

      External Perspective

    1. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external/internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
    • E.g. customer acquisition, product purchase, product delivery

    Internal Perspective

  • Support value streams are internally facing: they provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • E.g. employee recruitment to retirement

    Key Questions to Ask While Evaluating Value Streams

    • Who are your customers?
    • What benefits do we deliver to them?
    • How do we deliver those benefits?
    • How does the customer receive the benefits?
    This image contains an example of value streams. The main headings are: Customer Acquisitions, Product Purchase, Product Delivery, Confirm Order, Product Financing, and Product Release.

    Value streams highlight the what, not the how

    Value chains set a high-level context, but architectural decisions still need to be made to deal with the dynamism of user interaction and their subsequent expectations. User stories (and/or use cases) and themes are great tools for developing such decisions.

    Product Delivery

    1. Order Confirmation
    2. Order Dispatching
    3. Warehouse Management
    4. Fill Order
    5. Ship Order
    6. Deliver Order

    Use Case and User Story Theme: Confirm Order

    This image shows the relationship between confirming the customer's order online, and the Online Buyer, the Online Catalog, the Integrated Payment, and the Inventory Lookup.

    The use case Confirming Customer’s Online Order has four actors:

    1. An Online Buyer who should be provided with a catalog of products to purchase from.
    2. An Online Catalog that is invoked to display its contents on demand.
    3. An Integrated Payment system for accepting an online form of payment (credit card, Bitcoins, etc.) in a secure transaction.
    4. An Inventory Lookup module that confirms there is stock available to satisfy the Online Buyer’s order.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each use case theme links back to a feature(s) in the product backlog.

    Related Research

    Deliver on Your Digital Portfolio Vision

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up. Lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented – define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Document Your Business Architecture

    • Recognize the opportunity for architecture work, analyze the current and target states of your business strategy, and identify and engage the right stakeholders.
    • Model the business in the form of architectural blueprints.
    • Apply business architecture techniques such as strategy maps, value streams, and business capability maps to design usable and accurate blueprints of the business.
    • Drive business architecture forward to promote real value to the organization.
    • Assess your current projects to determine if you are investing in the right capabilities. Conduct business capability assessments to identify opportunities and to prioritize projects.

    1.2 Document dynamic value stream maps

    1. Create value stream maps that support your business objectives.
    • The value stream maps could belong to existing or new business objectives.
  • For each value stream map:
    • Determine use case(s), the actors, and their expected activity.

    *Refer to the next slide for an example of a dynamic value stream map.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documentation of dynamic value stream map

    Input

    • Business Goals
    • Some or All Existing Business Processes
    • Some or All Proposed New Business Processes

    Output

    • Dynamic Value Stream Maps for Multiple Use Roles and Use Cases

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect

    Example: Dynamic value stream map

    Loan Provision*

    *Value Stream Name: Usually has the same name as the capability it illustrates.

    Loan Application**; Disbursement of Fund**; Risk Management**; Service Accounts**

    **Value Stream Components: Specific functions that support the successful delivery of a value stream.

    Disbursement of Funds

    This image shows the relationship between depositing the load into the applicant's bank account, and the Applicant's bank, the Loan Applicant, and the Loan Supplier.

    Style #1:

    The use case Disbursement of Funds has three actors:

    1. A Loan Applicant who applied for a loan and got approved for one.
    2. A Loan Supplier who is the source for the funds.
    3. The Applicant’s Bank that has an account into which the funds are deposited.

    Style # 2:

    Loan Provision: Disbursement of Funds
    Use Case Actors Expectation
    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account
    1. Loan Applicant
    2. Loan Supplier
    3. Applicant’s Bank
    1. Should be able to see deposit in bank account
    2. Deposit funds into account
    3. Accept funds into account

    Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    By now, the following items are ideally completed:

    • Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    Start with an investigation of your architecture’s qualitative needs

    Quality attributes can be viewed as the -ilities (e.g. scalability, usability, reliability) that a software system needs to provide. A system not meeting any of its quality attribute requirements will likely not function as required. Examples of quality attributes are:

    1. Slow system response time
    2. Security breaches that result in loss of personal data
    3. A product feature upgrade that is not compatible with previous versions
    Examples of Qualitative Attributes
    Performance Compatibility Usability Reliability Security Maintainability
    • Response Time
    • Resource Utilization
    • System Capacity
    • Interoperability
    • Accessibility
    • User Interface
    • Intuitiveness
    • Availability
    • Fault Tolerance
    • Recoverability
    • Integrity
    • Non-Repudiation
    • Modularity
    • Reusability
    • Modifiability
    • Testability

    Focus on quality attributes that are architecturally significant.

    • Not every system requires every quality attribute.
    • Pay attention to those attributes without which the solution will not be able to satisfy a user’s abstract* expectation.
    • This set can be considered Architecturally Significant Requirements (ASR). ASR concern scenarios have the most impact on the architecture of the software system.
    • ASR are fundamental needs of the system and changing them in the future can be a costly and difficult exercise.

    *Abstract since attributes like performance and reliability are not directly measurable by a user.

    Stimulus Response Measurement Environmental Context

    For applicable use cases: (*Adapted from S Carnegie Mellon University, 2000)

    1. Determine the Stimulus (temporal, external, or internal) that puts stress on the system. For example, a VPN-accessed hospital management system is used for nurses to login at 8am every weekday.
    2. Describe how the system should Respond to the stimulus. For example, the hospital management system should complete a nurse login under 10ms on initiation of the HTTPS request.
    3. Set a Measurement criteria for determining the success of the response to the stimulus. For example, the system should be able to successfully respond to 98% of the HTTPS requests the first time.
    4. Note the environmental context under which the stimulus occurs, including any unusual conditions in effect.
    • The hospital management system needs to respond in under 10ms under typical load or peak load?
    • What is the time variance of peak loads, for example, an e-commerce system during a Black Friday sale?
    • How big is the peak load?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Three out of four is bad. Don’t architect for normal situations because the solution will be fragile and prone to catastrophic failure under unexpected events.
    Read article: Retail sites crash under weight of online Black Friday shoppers.

    Discover and evaluate the qualitative attributes needed for use cases or user stories

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    User Loan Applicant
    Expectations On login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From System System creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    Measurement Under Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute Required Required Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.
    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.
    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability
    • Design Decision: Following Principle # 4 of the CSA (JIT Architecture), delay decision until necessary.

    Use cases developed in Phase 1.2 should be used here. (Adapted from the ATAM Utility Tree Method for Quality Attribute Engineering)

    Reduce technical debt while you are at it

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    UserLoan Applicant
    ExpectationsOn login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From SystemSystem creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    MeasurementUnder Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute RequiredRequired Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.

    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability

    • Expected is 15ms or less under peak loads, but average latency is 21ms.
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.

    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability

    • Data should not be stale and should sync instantaneously, but in some zip codes data synchronization is taking 8 hours.
    • Design Decision: Investigate integrations and flows across application, database, and infrastructure. (Note: A dedicated section for discussing scalability is presented in Phase 2.)

    1.3 Create a conceptual map between the value streams, use cases, and required architectural attributes

    1. For selected use cases completed in Phase 1.2:
    • Map the value stream to its associated use cases.
    • For each use case, list the required architectural quality attributes.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for mapping value stream components to their required architectural attribute.

    Input

    • Use Cases
    • User Roles
    • Stimulus to System
    • Response From System
    • Response Measurement

    Output

    • List of Architectural Quality Attributes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Example for Phase 1.3

    Loan Provision

    Loan Application → Disbursement of Funds → Risk Management → Service Accounts

    Value Stream Component Use Case Required Architectural Attribute
    Loan Application UC1: Submit Loan Application
    UC2: Review Loan Application
    UC3: Approve Loan Application
    UCn: ……..
    UC1: Resilience, Data Reliability
    UC2: Data Reliability
    UC3: Scalability, Security, Performance
    UCn: …..
    Disbursement of Funds UC1: Deposit Funds Into Applicant’s Bank Account
    UCn: ……..
    UC1: Performance, Scalability, Data Reliability
    Risk Management ….. …..
    Service Accounts ….. …..

    1.2 Document dynamic value stream maps

    1. Create value stream maps that support your business objectives.
    • The value stream maps could belong to existing or new business objectives.
  • For each value stream map:
    • Determine use case(s), the actors, and their expected activity.

    *Refer to the next slide for an example of a dynamic value stream map.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documentation of dynamic value stream map

    Input

    • Business Goals
    • Some or All Existing Business Processes
    • Some or All Proposed New Business Processes

    Output

    • Dynamic Value Stream Maps for Multiple Use Roles and Use Cases

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect

    Example: Dynamic value stream map

    Loan Provision*

    *Value Stream Name: Usually has the same name as the capability it illustrates.

    Loan Application**; Disbursement of Fund**; Risk Management**; Service Accounts**

    **Value Stream Components: Specific functions that support the successful delivery of a value stream.

    Disbursement of Funds

    This image shows the relationship between depositing the load into the applicant's bank account, and the Applicant's bank, the Loan Applicant, and the Loan Supplier.

    Style #1:

    The use case Disbursement of Funds has three actors:

    1. A Loan Applicant who applied for a loan and got approved for one.
    2. A Loan Supplier who is the source for the funds.
    3. The Applicant’s Bank that has an account into which the funds are deposited.

    Style # 2:

    Loan Provision: Disbursement of Funds
    Use Case Actors Expectation
    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account
    1. Loan Applicant
    2. Loan Supplier
    3. Applicant’s Bank
    1. Should be able to see deposit in bank account
    2. Deposit funds into account
    3. Accept funds into account

    Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    By now, the following items are ideally completed:

    • Mid-Phase 1 Checkpoint

    Start with an investigation of your architecture’s qualitative needs

    Quality attributes can be viewed as the -ilities (e.g. scalability, usability, reliability) that a software system needs to provide. A system not meeting any of its quality attribute requirements will likely not function as required. Examples of quality attributes are:

    1. Slow system response time
    2. Security breaches that result in loss of personal data
    3. A product feature upgrade that is not compatible with previous versions
    Examples of Qualitative Attributes
    Performance Compatibility Usability Reliability Security Maintainability
    • Response Time
    • Resource Utilization
    • System Capacity
    • Interoperability
    • Accessibility
    • User Interface
    • Intuitiveness
    • Availability
    • Fault Tolerance
    • Recoverability
    • Integrity
    • Non-Repudiation
    • Modularity
    • Reusability
    • Modifiability
    • Testability

    Focus on quality attributes that are architecturally significant.

    • Not every system requires every quality attribute.
    • Pay attention to those attributes without which the solution will not be able to satisfy a user’s abstract* expectation.
    • This set can be considered Architecturally Significant Requirements (ASR). ASR concern scenarios have the most impact on the architecture of the software system.
    • ASR are fundamental needs of the system and changing them in the future can be a costly and difficult exercise.

    *Abstract since attributes like performance and reliability are not directly measurable by a user.

    Stimulus Response Measurement Environmental Context

    For applicable use cases: (*Adapted from S Carnegie Mellon University, 2000)

    1. Determine the Stimulus (temporal, external, or internal) that puts stress on the system. For example, a VPN-accessed hospital management system is used for nurses to login at 8am every weekday.
    2. Describe how the system should Respond to the stimulus. For example, the hospital management system should complete a nurse login under 10ms on initiation of the HTTPS request.
    3. Set a Measurement criteria for determining the success of the response to the stimulus. For example, the system should be able to successfully respond to 98% of the HTTPS requests the first time.
    4. Note the environmental context under which the stimulus occurs, including any unusual conditions in effect.
    • The hospital management system needs to respond in under 10ms under typical load or peak load?
    • What is the time variance of peak loads, for example, an e-commerce system during a Black Friday sale?
    • How big is the peak load?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Three out of four is bad. Don’t architect for normal situations because the solution will be fragile and prone to catastrophic failure under unexpected events.
    Read article: Retail sites crash under weight of online Black Friday shoppers.

    Discover and evaluate the qualitative attributes needed for use cases or user stories

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    User Loan Applicant
    Expectations On login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From System System creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    Measurement Under Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute Required Required Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.
    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.
    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability
    • Design Decision: Following Principle # 4 of the CSA (JIT Architecture), delay decision until necessary.

    Use cases developed in Phase 1.2 should be used here. (Adapted from the ATAM Utility Tree Method for Quality Attribute Engineering)

    Reduce technical debt while you are at it

    Deposit Loan Into Applicant’s Bank Account

    Assume analysis is being done for a to-be developed system.

    UserLoan Applicant
    ExpectationsOn login to the web system, should be able to see accurate bank balance after loan funds are deposited.
    User signs into the online portal and opens their account balance page.
    Expected Response From SystemSystem creates a connection to the data source and renders it on the screen in under 10ms.
    MeasurementUnder Normal Loads:
    • Response in 10ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Under Peak Loads:
    • Response in 15ms or less
    • Data should not be stale
    Quality Attribute RequiredRequired Attribute # 1: Performance
    • Design Decision: Reduce latency by placing authorization components closer to user’s location.

    Required Attribute # 2: Data Reliability

    • Expected is 15ms or less under peak loads, but average latency is 21ms.
    • Design Decision: Use event-driven ETL pipelines.

    Required Attribute # 3: Scalability

    • Data should not be stale and should sync instantaneously, but in some zip codes data synchronization is taking 8 hours.
    • Design Decision: Investigate integrations and flows across application, database, and infrastructure. (Note: A dedicated section for discussing scalability is presented in Phase 2.)

    1.3 Create a conceptual map between the value streams, use cases, and required architectural attributes

    1. For selected use cases completed in Phase 1.2:
    • Map the value stream to its associated use cases.
    • For each use case, list the required architectural quality attributes.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for mapping value stream components to their required architectural attribute.

    Input

    • Use Cases
    • User Roles
    • Stimulus to System
    • Response From System
    • Response Measurement

    Output

    • List of Architectural Quality Attributes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Prioritize architectural quality attributes to ensure a right-engineered solution

    Trade-offs are inherent in solution architecture. Scaling systems may impact performance and weaken security, while fault-tolerance and redundancy may improve availability but at higher than desired costs. In the end, the best solution is not always perfect, but balanced and right-engineered (versus over- or under-engineered).

    Loan Provision

    Loan Application → Disbursement of Funds → Risk Management → Service Accounts

    1. Map architecture attributes against the value stream components.
    • Use individual use cases to determine which attributes are needed for a value stream component.
    This image contains a screenshot of the table showing the importance of scalability, resiliance, performance, security, and data reliability for loan application, disbursement of funds, risk management, and service accounts.

    In our example, the prioritized list of architectural attributes are:

    • Security (4 votes for Very Important)
    • Data Reliability (2 votes for Very Important)
    • Scalability (1 vote for Very Important and 1 vote for Fairly Important) and finally
    • Resilience (1 vote for Very Important, 0 votes for Fairly Important and 1 vote for Mildly Important)
    • Performance (0 votes for Very Important, 2 votes for Fairly Important)

    1.4 Create a prioritized list of architectural attributes (from 1.3)

    1. Using the tabular structure shown on the previous slide:
    • Map each value stream component against architectural quality attributes.
    • For each mapping, indicate its importance using the green, blue, and yellow color scheme.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template and document the list of architectural attributes by priority.

    Input

    • List of Architectural Attributes From 1.3

    Output

    • Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    End of Phase 1

    At the end of this Phase, you should have completed the following activities:

    • Documented a set of dynamic value stream maps along with selected use cases.
    • Using the SRME framework, identified quality attributes for the system under investigation.
    • Prioritized quality attributes for system use cases.

    Phase 2: Multi-Purpose Data and Security Architecture

    Phase 1

    1.1 Articulate an Architectural Vision
    1.2 Develop Dynamic Value Stream Maps
    1.3 Map Value Streams, Use Cases, and Required Architectural Attributes
    1.4 Create a Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Phase 2

    2.1 Develop a Data Architecture That Supports Transactional and Analytical Needs
    2.2 Document Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Phase 3

    3.1 Document Scalability Architecture
    3.2 Document Performance Enhancing Architecture
    3.3 Combine the Different Architecture Design Decisions Into a Unified Solution Architecture

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the scalability, performance, resilience, and security needs of the business.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    Fragmented data environments need something to sew them together

    • A full 93% of enterprises have a multi-cloud strategy, with 87% having a hybrid-cloud environment in place.
    • On average, companies have data stored in 2.2 public and 2.2 private clouds as well as in various on-premises data repositories.
    This image contains a breakdown of the cloud infrastructure, including single cloud versus multi-cloud.

    Source: Flexera

    In addition, companies are faced with:

    • Access and integration challenges (Who is sending the data? Who is getting it? Can we trust them?)
    • Data format challenges as data may differ for each consumer and sender of data
    • Infrastructure challenges as data repositories/processors are spread out over public and private clouds, are on premises, or in multi-cloud and hybrid ecosystems
    • Structured vs. unstructured data

    A robust and reliable integrated data architecture is essential for any organization that aspires to be relevant and impactful in its industry.

    Data’s context and influence on a solution’s architecture cannot be overestimated

    Data used to be the new oil. Now it’s the life force of any organization that has serious aspirations of providing profit-generating products and services to customers. Architectural decisions about managing data have a significant impact on the sustainability of a software system as well as on quality attributes such as security, scalability, performance, and availability.

    Storage and Processing go hand in hand and are the mainstay of any data architecture. Due to their central position of importance, an architecture decision for storage and processing must be well thought through or they become the bottleneck in an otherwise sound system.

    Ingestion refers to a system’s ability to accept data as an input from heterogenous sources, in different formats, and at different intervals.

    Dissemination is the set of architectural design decisions that make a system’s data accessible to external consumers. Major concerns involve security for the data in motion, authorization, data format, concurrent requests for data, etc.

    Orchestration takes care of ensuring data is current and reliable, especially for systems that are decentralized and distributed.

    Data architecture requires alignment with a hybrid data management plan

    Most companies have a combination of data. They have data they own using on-premises data sources and on the cloud. Hybrid data management also includes external data, such as social network feeds, financial data, and legal information amongst many others.

    Data integration architectures have typically been put in one of two major integration patterns:

    Application to Application Integration (or “speed matters”) Analytical Data Integrations (or “send it to me when its all done”)
    • This domain is concerned with ensuring communication between processes.
    • Examples include patterns such as Service-Oriented Architecture, REST, Event Hubs and Enterprise Service Buses.
    • This domain is focused on integrating data from transactional processes towards enterprise business intelligence. It supports activities that require well-managed data to generate evidence-based insights.
    • Examples of this pattern are ELT, enterprise data warehouses, and data marts.

    Sidebar

    Difference between real-time, batch, and streaming data movements

    Real-Time

    • Reacts to data in seconds or even quicker.
    • Real-time systems are hard to implement.

    Batch

    • Batch processing deals with a large volume of data all at once and data-related jobs are typically completed simultaneously in non-stop, sequential order.
    • Batch processing is an efficient and low-cost means of data processing.
    • Execution of batch processing jobs can be controlled manually, providing further control over how the system treats its data assets.
    • Batch processing is only useful if there are no requirements for data to be fresh and current. Real-time systems are suited to processing data that requires these attributes.

    Streaming

    • Stream processing allows almost instantaneous analysis of data as it streams from one device to another.
    • Since data is analyzed quickly, storage may not be a concern (since only computed data is stored while raw data can be dispersed).
    • Streaming requires the flow of data into the system to equal the flow of data computing, otherwise issues of data storage and performance can rise.

    Modern data ingestion and dissemination frameworks keep core data assets current and accessible

    Data ingestion and dissemination frameworks are critical for keeping enterprise data current and relevant.

    Data ingestion/dissemination frameworks capture/share data from/to multiple data sources.

    Factors to consider when designing a data ingestion/dissemination architecture

    What is the mode for data movement?

    • The mode for data movement is directly influenced by the size of data being moved and the downstream requirements for data currency.
    • Data can move in real-time, as a batch, or as a stream.

    What is the ingestion/dissemination architecture deployment strategy?

    • Outside of critical security concerns, hosting on the cloud vs. on premises leads to a lower total cost of ownership (TCO) and a higher return on investment (ROI).

    How many different and disparate data sources are sending/receiving data?

    • Stability comes if there is a good idea about the data sources/recipient and their requirements.

    What are the different formats flowing through?

    • Is the data in the form of data blocks? Is it structured, semi-unstructured, or unstructured?

    What are expected performance SLAs as data flow rate changes?

    • Data change rate is defined as the size of changes occurring every hour. It helps in selecting the appropriate tool for data movement.
    • Performance is a derivative of latency and throughput, and therefore, data on a cloud is going to have higher latency and lower throughput then if it is kept on premises.
    • What is the transfer data size? Are there any file compression and/or file splits applied on the data? What is the average and maximum size of a block object per ingestion/dissemination operation?

    What are the security requirements for the data being stored?

    • The ingestion/dissemination framework should be able to work through a secure tunnel to collect/share data if needed.

    Sensible storage and processing strategy can improve performance and scalability and be cost-effective

    The range of options for data storage is staggering...

    … but that’s a good thing because the range of data formats that organizations must deal with is also richer than in the past.

    Different strokes for different workloads.

    The data processing tool to use may depend upon the workloads the system has to manage.

    Expanding upon the Risk Management use case (as part of the Loan Provision Capability), one of the outputs for risk assessment is a report that conducts a statistical analysis of customer profiles and separates those that are possibly risky. The data for this report is spread out across different data systems and will need to be collected in a master data management storage location. The business and data architecture team have discussed three critical system needs, noted below:

    Data Management Requirements for Risk Management Reporting Data Design Decision
    Needs to query millions of relational records quickly
    • Strong indexing
    • Strong caching
    • Message queue
    Needs a storage space for later retrieval of relational data
    • Data storage that scales as needed
    Needs turnkey geo-replication mechanism with document retrieval in milliseconds
    • Add NoSQL with geo-replication and quick document access

    Keep every core data source on the same page through orchestration

    Data orchestration, at its simplest, is the combination of data integration, data processing, and data concurrency management.

    Data pipeline orchestration is a cross-cutting process that manages the dependencies between your data integration tasks and scheduled data jobs.

    A task or application may periodically fail, and therefore, as a part of our data architecture strategy, there must be provisions for scheduling, rescheduling, replaying, monitoring, retrying, and debugging the entire data pipeline in a holistic way.

    Some of the functionality provided by orchestration frameworks are:

    • Job scheduling
    • Job parametrization
    • SLAs tracking, alerting, and notification
    • Dependency management
    • Error management and retries
    • History and audit
    • Data storage for metadata
    • Log aggregation
    Data Orchestration Has Three Stages
    Organize Transform Publicize
    Organizations may have legacy data that needs to be combined with new data. It’s important for the orchestration tool to understand the data it deals with. Transform the data from different sources into one standard type. Make transformed data easily accessible to stakeholders.

    2.1 Discuss and document data architecture decisions

    1. Using the value maps and associated use cases from Phase 1, determine the data system quality attributes.
    2. Use the sample tabular layout on the next slide or develop one of your own.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Value Maps and Use Cases

    Output

    • Initial Set of Data Design Decisions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Example: Data Architecture

    Data Management Requirements for Risk Management Reporting Data Design Decision
    Needs to query millions of relational records quickly
    • Strong indexing
    • Strong caching
    • Message queue
    Needs a storage space for later retrieval of relational data
    • Data storage that scales as needed
    Needs turnkey geo-replication mechanism with document retrieval in milliseconds
    • Add NoSQL with geo-replication and quick document access

    There is no free lunch when making the most sensible security architecture decision; tradeoffs are a necessity

    Ensuring that any real system is secure is a complex process involving tradeoffs against other important quality attributes (such as performance and usability). When architecting a system, we must understand:

    • Its security needs.
    • Its security threat landscape.
    • Known mitigations for those threats to ensure that we create a system with sound security fundamentals.

    The first thing to do when determining security architecture is to conduct a threat and risk assessment (TRA).

    This image contains a sample threat and risk assessment. The steps are Understand: Until we thoroughly understand what we are building, we cannot secure it. Structure what you are building, including: System boundary, System structure, Databases, Deployment platform; Analyze: Use techniques like STRIDE and attack trees to analyze what can go wrong and what security problems this will cause; Mitigate: The security technologies to use, to mitigate your concerns, are discussed here. Decisions about using single sign-on (SSO) or role-based access control (RBAC), encryption, digital signatures, or JWT tokens are made. An important part of this step is to consider tradeoffs when implementing security mechanisms; validate: Validation can be done by experimenting with proposed mitigations, peer discussion, or expert interviews.

    Related Research

    Optimize Security Mitigation Effectiveness Using STRIDE

    • Have a clear picture of:
      • Critical data and data flows
      • Organizational threat exposure
      • Security countermeasure deployment and coverage
    • Understand which threats are appropriately mitigated and which are not.
    • Generate a list of initiatives to close security gaps.
    • Create a quantified risk and security model to reassess program and track improvement.
    • Develop measurable information to present to stakeholders.

    The 3A’s of strong security: authentication, authorization, and auditing

    Authentication

    Authentication mechanisms help systems verify that a user is who they claim to be.

    Examples of authentication mechanisms are:

    • Two-Factor Authentication
    • Single Sign-On
    • Multi-Factor Authentication
    • JWT Over OAUTH

    Authorization

    Authorization helps systems limit access to allowed features, once a user has been authenticated.

    Examples of authentication mechanisms are:

    • RBAC
    • Certificate Based
    • Token Based

    Auditing

    Securely recording security events through auditing proves that our security mechanisms are working as intended.

    Auditing is a function where security teams must collaborate with software engineers early and often to ensure the right kind of audit logs are being captured and recorded.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Defects in your application software can compromise privacy and integrity even if cryptographic controls are in place. A security architecture made after thorough TRA does not override security risk introduced due to irresponsible software design.

    Examples of threat and risk assessments using STRIDE and attack trees

    STRIDE is a threat modeling framework and is composed of:

    • Spoofing or impersonation of someone other than oneself
    • Tampering with data and destroying its integrity
    • Repudiation by bypassing system identity controls
    • Information disclosure to unauthorized persons
    • Denial of service that prevents system or parts of it from being used
    • Elevation of privilege so that attackers get rights they should not have
    Example of using STRIDE for a TRA on a solution using a payment system This image contains a sample attack tree.
    Spoofing PayPal Bad actor can send fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds.
    Tampering PayPal Bad actor accesses data base and can resend fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds.
    Repudiation PayPal Customer claims, incorrectly, their account made a payment they did not authorize.
    Disclosure PayPal Private service database has details leaked and made public.
    Denial of Service PayPal Service is made to slow down through creating a load on the network, causing massive build up of requests
    Elevation of Privilege PayPal Bad actor attempts to enter someone else’s account by entering incorrect password a number of times.

    2.2 Document security architecture risks and mitigations

    1. Using STRIDE, attack tree, or any other framework of choice:
    • Conduct a TRA for use cases identified in Phase 1.2
  • For each threat identified through the TRA, think through the implications of using authentication, authorization, and auditing as a security mechanism.
  • Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Dynamic Value Stream Maps

    Output

    • Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Security Team
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect

    Examples of threat and risk assessments using STRIDE

    Example of using STRIDE for a TRA on a solution using a payment system
    Threat System Component Description Quality Attribute Impacted Resolution
    Spoofing PayPal Bad actor can send fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds. Confidentiality Authorization
    Tampering PayPal Bad actor accesses data base and can resend fraudulent payment request for obtaining funds. Integrity Authorization
    Repudiation PayPal Customer claims, incorrectly, their account made a payment they did not authorize. Integrity Authentication and Logging
    Disclosure PayPal Private service database has details leaked and made public. Confidentiality Authorization
    Denial of Service PayPal Service is made to slow down through creating a load on the network, causing massive build up of requests Availability N/A
    Elevation of Privilege PayPal Bad actor attempts to enter someone else’s account by entering incorrect password a number of times. Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability Authorization

    Phase 3: Upgrade Your System’s Availability

    Phase 1

    1.1 Articulate an Architectural Vision
    1.2 Develop Dynamic Value Stream Maps
    1.3 Map Value Streams, Use Cases, and Required Architectural Attributes
    1.4 Create a Prioritized List of Architectural Attributes

    Phase 2

    2.1 Develop a Data Architecture That Supports Transactional and Analytical Needs
    2.2 Document Security Architecture Risks and Mitigations

    Phase 3

    3.1 Document Scalability Architecture
    3.2 Document Performance Enhancing Architecture
    3.3 Combine the Different Architecture Design Decisions Into a Unified Solution Architecture

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Examine architecture for scalable and performant system designs
    • Integrate all design decisions made so far into a solution design decision log

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect
    • Product Owner
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practice

    In a cloud-inspired system architecture, scalability takes center stage as an architectural concern

    Scale and scope of workloads are more important now than they were, perhaps, a decade and half back. Architects realize that scalability is not an afterthought. Not dealing with it at the outset can have serious consequences should an application workload suddenly exceed expectations.

    Scalability is …

    … the ability of a system to handle varying workloads by either increasing or decreasing the computing resources of the system.

    An increased workload could include:

    • Higher transaction volumes
    • A greater number of users

    Architecting for scalability is …

    … not easy since organizations may not be able to accurately judge, outside of known circumstances, when and why workloads may unexpectedly increase.

    A scalable architecture should be planned at the:

    • Application Level
    • Infrastructure Level
    • Database Level

    The right amount and kind of scalability is …

    … balancing the demands of the system with the supply of attributes.

    If demand from system > supply from system:

    • Services and products are not useable and deny value to customers.

    If supply from system > demand from system:

    • Excess resources have been paid for that are not being used.

    When discussing the scalability needs of a system, investigate the following, at a minimum:

    • In case workloads increase due to higher transaction volumes, will the system be able to cope with the additional stress?
    • In situations where workloads increase, will the system be able to support the additional stress without any major modifications being made to the system?
    • Is the cost associated with handling the increased workloads reasonable for the benefit it provides to the business?
    • Assuming the system doesn’t scale, is there any mechanism for graceful degradation?

    Use evidence-based decision making to ensure a cost-effective yet appropriate scaling strategy

    The best input for an effective scaling strategy is previously gathered traffic data mapped to specific circumstances.

    In some cases, either due to lack of monitoring or the business not being sure of its needs, scalability requirements are hard to determine. In such cases, use stated tactical business objectives to design for scalability. For example, the business might state its desire to achieve a target revenue goal. To accommodate this, a certain number of transactions would need to be conducted, assuming a particular conversion rate.

    Scaling strategies can be based on Vertical or Horizontal expansion of resources.
    Pros Cons
    Vertical
    Scale up through use of more powerful but limited number of resources
    • May not require frequent upgrades.
    • Since data is managed through a limited number of resources, it is easier to share and keep current.
    • Costly upfront.
    • Application, database, and infrastructure may not be able to make optimal use of extra processing power.
    • As the new, more powerful resource is provisioned, systems may experience downtime.
    • Lacks redundancy due to limited points of failure.
    • Performance is constrained by the upper limits of the infrastructure involved.
    Horizontal
    Scale out through use of similarly powered but larger quantity of resources
    • Cost-effective upfront.
    • System downtime is minimal, when scaling is being performed.
    • More redundance and fault-tolerance is possible since there are many nodes involved, and therefore, can replace failed nodes.
    • Performance can scale out as more nodes are added.
    • Upgrades may occur more often than in vertical scaling.
    • Increases machine footprints and administrative costs over time.
    • Data may be partitioned on multiple nodes, leading to administrative and data currency challenges.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Scalability is the one attribute that sparks a lot of trade-off discussions. Scalable solutions may have to compromise on performance, cost, and data reliability.
    • Horizontal scalability is mostly always preferable over vertical scalability.

    Sidebar

    The many flavors of horizontal scaling

    Traffic Shard-ing

    Through this mechanism, incoming traffic is partitioned around a characteristic of the workload flowing in. Examples of partitioning characteristics are user groups, geo-location, and transaction type.

    Beware of:

    • Lack of data currency across shards.

    Copy and Paste

    As the name suggests, clone the compute resources along with the underlying databases. The systems will use a load balancer as the first point of contact between itself and the workload flowing in.

    Beware of:

    • Though this is a highly scalable model, it does introduce risks related to data currency across all databases.
    • In case master database writes are frequent, it could become a bottleneck for the entire system.

    Productization Through Containers

    This involves breaking up the system into specific functions and services and bundling their business rules/databases into deployable containers.

    Beware of:

    • Too many containers introduce the need to orchestrate the distributed architecture that results from a service-oriented approach.

    Start a scalability overview with a look at the database(s)

    To know where to go, you must know where you are. Before introducing architectural changes to database designs, use the right metrics to get an insight into the root cause of the problem(s).

    In a nutshell, the purpose of scaling solutions is to have the technology stack do less work for the most requested services/features or be able to effectively distribute the additional workload across multiple resources.

    For databases, to ensure this happens, consider these techniques:

    • Reuse data through caching on the server and/or the client. This eliminates the need for looking up already accessed data. Examples of caching are:
      • In-memory caching of data
      • Caching database queries
    • Implement good data retrieval techniques like indexes.
    • Divide labor at the database level.
      • Through setting up primary-secondary distribution of data. In such a setup, the primary node is involved in writing data to itself and passes on requests to secondary nodes for fulfillment.
      • Through setting up database shards (either horizontally or vertically).
        • In a horizontal shard, a data table is broken into smaller pieces with the same data model but unique data in it. The sum total of the shared databases contains all the data in the primary data table.
        • In a vertical shard, a data table is broken into smaller pieces, but each piece may have a subset of the data columns. The data’s corresponding columns are put into the table where the column resides.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A non-scalable architecture has more than just technology-related ramifications. Hoping that load balancers or cloud services will manage scalability-related issues is bound to have economic impacts as well.

    Sidebar

    Caching Options

    CSA PRINCIPLE 5 applies to any decision that supports system scalability.
    “X-ilities Over Features”

    Database Caching
    Fetches and stores result of database queries in memory. Subsequent requests to the database for the same queries will investigate the cache before making a connection with the database.
    Tools like Memcached or Redis are used for database caching.

    Precompute Database Caching
    Unlike database caching, this style of caching precomputes results of queries that are popular and frequently used. For example, a database trigger could execute several predetermined queries and have them ready for consumption. The precomputed results may be stored in a database cache.

    Application Object Caching
    Stores computed results in a cache for later retrieval. For data sources, which are not changing frequently and are part of a computation output, application caching will remove the need to connect with a database.

    Proxy Caching
    Caches retrieved web pages on a proxy server and makes them available for the next time the page is requested.

    The intra- and inter-process communication of the systems middle tier can become a bottleneck

    To synchronize or not to synchronize?

    A synchronous request (doing one thing at a time) means that code execution will wait for the request to be responded to before continuing.

    • A synchronous request is a blocking event and until it is completed, all following requests will have to wait for getting their responses.
    • An increasing workload on a synchronous system may impact performance.
    • Synchronous interactions are less costly in terms of design, implementation, and maintenance.
    • Scaling options include:
    1. Vertical scale up
    2. Horizontal scale out of application servers behind a load balancer and a caching technique (to minimize data retrieval roundtrips)
    3. Horizonal scale out of database servers with data partitioning and/or data caching technique

    Use synchronous requests when…

    • Each request to a system sets the necessary precondition for a following request.
    • Data reliability is important, especially in real-time systems.
    • System flows are simple.
    • Tasks that are typically time consuming, such as I/O, data access, pre-loading of assets, are completed quickly.

    Asynchronous requests (doing many things at the same time) do not block the system they are targeting.

    • It is a “fire and forget” mechanism.
    • Execution on a server/processor is triggered by the request, however, additional technical components (callbacks) for checking the state of the execution must be designed and implemented.
    • Asynchronous interactions require additional time to be spent on implementation and testing.
    • With asynchronous interactions, there is no guarantee the request initiated any processing until the callbacks check the status of the executed thread.

    Use asynchronous requests when…

    • Tasks are independent in nature and don’t require inter-task communication.
    • Systems flows need to be efficient.
    • The system is using event-driven techniques for processing.
    • Many I/O tasks are involved.
    • The tasks are long running.

    Sidebar

    Other architectural tactics for inter-process communication

    STATELESS SERVICES VERSUS STATEFUL SERVICES
    • Does not require any additional data, apart from the bits sent through with the request.
    • Without implementing a caching solution, it is impossible to access the previous data trail for a transaction session.
    • In addition to the data sent through with the request, require previous data sent to complete processing.
    • Requires server memory to store the additional state data. With increasing workloads, this could start impacting the server’s performance.
    It is generally accepted that stateless services are better for system scalability, especially if vertical scaling is costly and there is expectation that workloads will increase.
    MICROSERVICES VERSUS SERVERLESS FUNCTIONS
    • Services are designed as small units of code with a single responsibility and are available on demand.
    • A microservices architecture is easily scaled horizontally by adding a load balancer and a caching mechanism.
    • Like microservices, these are small pieces of code designed to fulfill a single purpose.
    • Are provided only through cloud vendors, and therefore, there is no need to worry about provisioning of infrastructure as needs increase.
    • Stateless by design but the life cycle of a serverless function is vendor controlled.
    Serverless function is an evolving technology and tightly controlled by the vendor. As and when vendors make changes to their serverless products, your own systems may need to be modified to make the best use of these upgrades.

    A team that does not measure their system’s scalability is a team bound to get a 5xx HTTP response code

    A critical aspect of any system is its ability to monitor and report on its operational outcomes.

    • Using the principle of continuous testing, every time an architectural change is introduced, a thorough load and stress testing cycle should be executed.
    • Effective logging and use of insightful metrics helps system design teams make data-driven decisions.
    • Using principle of site reliability engineering and predictive analytics, teams can be prepared for any unplanned exaggerated stimulus on the system and proactively set up remedial steps.

    Any system, however well architected, will break one day. Strategically place kill-switches to counter any failures and thoroughly test their functioning before releasing to production.

    • Using Principles 2 and 9 of the CSA, (include kill-switches and architect for x-ilities over features), introduce tactics at the code and higher levels that can be used to put a system in its previous best state in case of failure.
    • Examples of such tactics are:
      • Feature flags for turning on/off code modules that impact x-ilities.
      • Implement design patterns like throttling, autoscaling, and circuit breaking.
      • Writing extensive log messages that bubble up as exceptions/error handling from the code base. *Logging can be a performance drag. Use with caution as even logging code is still code that needs CPU and data storage.

    Performance is a system’s ability to satisfy time-bound expectations

    Performance can also be defined as the ability for a system to achieve its timing requirements, using available resources, under expected full-peak load:

    (International Organization for Standardization, 2011)

    • Performance and scalability are two peas in a pod. They are related to each other but are distinct attributes. Where scalability refers to the ability of a system to initiate multiple simultaneous processes, performance is the system’s ability to complete the processes within a mandated average time period.
    • Degrading performance is one of the first red flags about a system’s ability to scale up to workload demands.
    • Mitigation tactics for performance are very similar to the tactics for scalability.

    System performance needs to be monitored and measured consistently.

    Measurement Category 1: System performance in terms of end-user experience during different load scenarios.

    • Response time/latency: Length of time it takes for an interaction with the system to complete.
    • Turnaround time: Time taken to complete a batch of tasks.
    • Throughput: Amount of workload a system is capable of handling in a unit time period.

    Measurement Category 2: System performance in terms of load managed by computational resources.

    • Resource utilization: The average usage of a resource (like CPU) over a period. Peaks and troughs indicate excess vs. normal load times.
    • Number of concurrent connections: Simultaneous user requests that a resource like a server can successfully deal with at once.
    • Queue time: The turnaround time for a specific interaction or category of interactions to complete.

    Architectural tactics for performance management are the same as those used for system scalability

    Application Layer

    • Using a balanced approach that combines CSA Principle 7 (Good architecture comes in small packages) and Principle 10 (Architect for products, not projects), a microservices architecture based on domain-driven design helps process performance. Microservices use lightweight HTTP protocols and have loose coupling, adding a degree of resilience to the system as well. *An overly-engineered microservices architecture can become an orchestration challenge.
    • The code design must follow standards that support performance. Example of standards is SOLID*.
    • Serverless architectures can run application code from anywhere – for example, from edge servers close to an end user – thereby reducing latency.

    Database Layer

    • Using the right database technologies for persistence. Relational databases have implicit performance bottlenecks (which get exaggerated as data size grows along with indexes), and document store database technologies (key-value or wide-column) can improve performance in high-read environments.
    • Data sources, especially those that are frequently accessed, should ideally be located close to the application servers. Hybrid infrastructures (cloud and on premises mixed) can lead to latency when a cloud-application is accessing on-premises data.
    • Using a data partitioning strategy, especially in a domain-driven design architecture, can improve the performance of a system.

    Performance modeling and continuous testing makes the SRE a happy engineer

    Performance modeling and testing helps architecture teams predict performance risks as the solution is being developed.
    (CSA Principle 12: Test the solution architecture like you test your solution’s features)

    Create a model for your system’s hypothetical performance testing by breaking an end-to-end process or use case into its components. *Use the SIPOC framework for decomposition.

    This image contains an example of modeled performance, showing the latency in the data flowing from different data sources to the processing of the data.

    In the hypothetical example of modeled performance above:

    • The longest period of latency is 15ms.
    • The processing of data takes 30ms, while the baseline was established at 25ms.
    • Average latency in sending back user responses is 21ms – 13ms slower than expected.

    The model helps architects:

    • Get evidence for their assumptions
    • Quantitatively isolate bottlenecks at a granular level

    Model the performance flow once but test it periodically

    Performance testing measures the performance of a software system under normal and abnormal loads.

    Performance testing process should be fully integrated with software development activities and as automated as possible. In a fast-moving Agile environment, teams should attempt to:

    • Shift-left performance testing activities.
    • Use performance testing to pinpoint performance bottlenecks.
    • Take corrective action, as quickly as possible.

    Performance testing techniques

    • Normal load testing: Verifies the system’s behavior under the expected normal load to ensure that its performance requirements are met. Load testing can be used to measure response time, responsiveness, turnaround time, and throughput.
    • Expected maximum load testing: Like the normal load testing process, ensures system meets its performance requirements under expected maximum load.
    • Stress testing: Evaluates system behavior when processing loads beyond the expected maximum.

    *In a real production scenario, a combination of these tests are executed on a regular basis to monitor the performance of the system over a given period.

    3.1-3.2 Discuss and document initial decisions made for architecture scalability and performance

    1. Use the outcomes from either or both Phases 1.3 and 1.4.
    • For each value stream component, list the architecture decisions taken to ensure scalability and performance at client-facing and/or business-rule layers.

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Output From Phase 1.3 and/or From Phase 1.4

    Output

    • Initial Set of Design Decisions Made for System Scalability and Performance

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Example: Architecture decisions for scalability and performance

    Value Stream Component Design Decision for User Interface Layer Design Decisions for Middle Processing Layer
    Loan Application Scalability: N/A
    Resilience: Include circuit breaker design in both mobile app and responsive websites.
    Performance: Cache data client.
    Scalability: Scale vertically (up) since loan application processing is very compute intensive.
    Resilience: Set up fail-over replica.
    Performance: Keep servers in the same geo-area.
    Disbursement of Funds *Does not have a user interface Scalability: Scale horizontal when traffic reaches X requests/second.
    Resilience: Create microservices using domain-driven design; include circuit breakers.
    Performance: Set up application cache; synchronous communication since order of data input is important.
    …. …. ….

    3.3 Combine the different architecture design decisions into a unified solution architecture

    Download the Solution Architecture Template for documenting data architecture decisions.

    Input

    • Output From Phase 1.3 and/or From Phase 1.4
    • Output From Phase 2.1
    • Output From Phase 2.2
    • Output From 3.1 and 3.2

    Output

    • List of Design Decisions for the Solution

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts

    Participants

    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Integration Architect
    • Database Architect
    • Infrastructure Architect

    Putting it all together is the bow that finally ties this gift

    This blueprint covered the domains tagged with the yellow star.

    This image contains a screenshot of the solution architecture framework found earlier in this blueprint, with stars next to Data Architecture, Security, Performance, and Stability.

    TRADEOFF ALERT

    The right design decision is never the same for all perspectives. Along with varying opinions, comes the “at odds with each other set” of needs (scalability vs. performance, or access vs. security).

    An evidence-based decision-making approach using a domain-driven design strategy is a good mix of techniques for creating the best (right?) solution architecture.

    This image contains a screenshot of a table that summarizes the themes discussed in this blueprint.

    Summary of accomplishment

    • Gained understanding and clarification of the stakeholder objectives placed on your application architecture.
    • Completed detailed use cases and persona-driven scenario analysis and their architectural needs through SRME.
    • Created a set of design decisions for data, security, scalability, and performance.
    • Merged the different architecture domains dealt with in this blueprint to create a holistic view.

    Bibliography

    Ambysoft Inc. “UML 2 Sequence Diagrams: An Agile Introduction.” Agile Modeling, n.d. Web.

    Bass, Len, Paul Clements, and Rick Kazman. Software Architecture in Practices: Third Edition. Pearson Education, Inc. 2003.

    Eeles, Peter. “The benefits of software architecting.” IBM: developerWorks, 15 May 2006. Web.

    Flexera 2020 State of the Cloud Report. Flexera, 2020. Web. 19 October 2021.

    Furdik, Karol, Gabriel Lukac, Tomas Sabol, and Peter Kostelnik. “The Network Architecture Designed for an Adaptable IoT-based Smart Office Solution.” International Journal of Computer Networks and Communications Security, November 2013. Web.

    Ganzinger, Matthias, and Petra Knaup. “Requirements for data integration platforms in biomedical research networks: a reference model.” PeerJ, 5 February 2015. (https://peerj.com/articles/755/).

    Garlan, David, and Mary Shaw. An Introduction to Software Architecture. CMU-CS-94-166, School of Computer Science Carnegie Mellon University, January 1994.

    Gupta, Arun. “Microservice Design Patterns.” Java Code Geeks, 14 April 2015. Web.

    How, Matt. The Modern Data Warehouse in Azure. O’Reilly, 2020.

    ISO/IEC 17788:2014: Information technology – Cloud computing, International Organization for Standardization, October 2014. Web.

    ISO/IEC 18384-1:2016: Information technology – Reference Architecture for Service Oriented Architecture (SOA RA), International Organization for Standardization, June 2016. Web.

    ISO/IEC 25010:2011(en) Systems and software engineering — Systems and software Quality Requirements and Evaluation (SQuaRE) — System and software quality models. International Organization for Standardization, March 2011. Web.

    Kazman, R., M. Klein, and P. Clements. ATAM: Method for Architecture Evaluation. S Carnegie Mellon University, August 2000. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 16: Quality Attributes.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 13 January 2010. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 2: Key Principles of Software Architecture.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 13 January 2010. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 3: Architectural Patterns and Styles.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 14 January 2010. Web.

    Microsoft Developer Network. “Chapter 5: Layered Application Guidelines.” Microsoft Application Architecture Guide. 2nd Ed., 13 January 2010. Web.

    Mirakhorli, Mehdi. “Common Architecture Weakness Enumeration (CAWE).” IEEE Software, 2016. Web.

    Moore, G. A. Crossing the Chasm, 3rd Edition: Marketing and Selling Disruptive Products to Mainstream Customers (Collins Business Essentials) (3rd ed.). Harper Business, 2014.

    OASIS. “Oasis SOA Reference Model (SOA RM) TC.” OASIS Open, n.d. Web.

    Soni, Mukesh. “Defect Prevention: Reducing Costs and Enhancing Quality.” iSixSigma, n.d. Web.

    The Open Group. TOGAF 8.1.1 Online, Part IV: Resource Base, Developing Architecture Views. TOGAF, 2006. Web.

    The Open Group. Welcome to the TOGAF® Standard, Version 9.2, a standard of The Open Group. TOGAF, 2018. Web.

    Watts, S. “The importance of solid design principles.” BMC Blogs, 15 June 2020. 19 October 2021.

    Young, Charles. “Hexagonal Architecture–The Great Reconciler?” Geeks with Blogs, 20 Dec 2014. Web.

    APPENDIX A

    Techniques to enhance application architecture.

    Consider the numerous solutions to address architecture issues or how they will impact your application architecture

    Many solutions exist for improving the layers of the application stack that may address architecture issues or impact your current architecture. Solutions range from capability changes to full stack replacement.

    Method Description Potential Benefits Risks Related Blueprints
    Business Capabilities:
    Enablement and enhancement
    • Introduce new business capabilities by leveraging unused application functionalities or consolidate redundant business capabilities.
    • Increase value delivery to stakeholders.
    • Lower IT costs through elimination of applications.
    • Increased use of an application could overload current infrastructure.
    • IT cannot authorize business capability changes.
    Use Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture blueprint to gain better understanding of business and IT alignment.
    Removal
    • Remove existing business capabilities that don’t contribute value to the business.
    • Lower operational costs through elimination of unused and irrelevant capabilities.
    • Business capabilities may be seen as relevant or critical by different stakeholder groups.
    • IT cannot authorize business capability changes.
    Use Info-Tech’s Build an Application Rationalization Framework to rationalize your application portfolio.
    Business Process:
    Process integration and consolidation
    • Combine multiple business processes into a single process.
    • Improved utilization of applications in each step of the process.
    • Reduce business costs through efficient business processes.
    • Minimize number of applications required to execute a single process.
    • Significant business disruption if an application goes down and is the primary support for business processes.
    • Organizational pushback if process integration involves multiple business groups.
    Business Process (continued):
    Process automation
    • Automate manual business processing tasks.
    • Reduce manual processing errors.
    • Improve speed of delivery.
    • Significant costs to implement automation.
    • Automation payoffs are not immediate.
    Lean business processes
    • Eliminate redundant steps.
    • Streamline existing processes by focusing on value-driven steps.
    • Improve efficiency of business process through removal of wasteful steps.
    • Increase value delivered at the end of the process.
    • Stakeholder pushback from consistently changing processes.
    • Investment from business is required to fit documentation to the process.
    Outsource the process
    • Outsource a portion of or the entire business process to a third party.
    • Leverage unavailable resources and skills to execute the business process.
    • Loss of control over process.
    • Can be costly to bring the process back into the business if desired in the future.
    Business Process (continued):
    Standardization
    • Implement standards for business processes to improve uniformity and reusability.
    • Consistently apply the same process across multiple business units.
    • Transparency of what is expected from the process.
    • Improve predictability of process execution.
    • Process bottlenecks may occur if a single group is required to sign off on deliverables.
    • Lack of enforcement and maintenance of standards can lead to chaos if left unchecked.
    User Interface:
    Improve user experience (UX)
    • Eliminate end-user emotional, mechanical, and functional friction by improving the experience of using the application.
    • UX encompasses both the interface and the user’s behavior.
    • Increase satisfaction and adoption rate from end users.
    • Increase brand awareness and user retention.
    • UX optimizations are only focused on a few user personas.
    • Current development processes do not accommodate UX assessments
    Code:
    Update coding language
    Translate legacy code into modern coding language.
    • Coding errors in modern languages can have lesser impact on the business processes they support.
    • Modern languages tend to have larger pools of coders to hire.
    • Increase availability of tools to support modern languages.
    • Coding language changes can create incompatibilities with existing infrastructure.
    • Existing coding translation tools do not offer 100% guarantee of legacy function retention.
    Code (continued):
    Open source code
    • Download pre-built code freely available in open source communities.
    • Code is rapidly evolving in the community to meet current business needs.
    • Avoid vendor lock-in from proprietary software
    • Community rules may require divulgence of work done with open source code.
    • Support is primarily provided through community, which may not address specific concerns.
    Update the development toolchain
    • Acquire new or optimize development tools with increased testing, build, and deployment capabilities.
    • Increase developer productivity.
    • Increase speed of delivery and test coverage with automation.
    • Drastic IT overhauls required to implement new tools such as code conversion, data migration, and development process revisions.
    Update source code management
    • Optimize source code management to improve coding governance, versioning, and development collaboration.
    • Ability to easily roll back to previous build versions and promote code to other environments.
    • Enable multi-user development capabilities.
    • Improve conflict management.
    • Some source code management tools cannot support legacy code.
    • Source code management tools may be incompatible with existing development toolchain.
    Data:
    Outsource extraction
    • Outsource your data analysis and extraction to a third party.
    • Lower costs to extract and mine data.
    • Leverage unavailable resources and skills to translate mined data to a usable form.
    • Data security risks associated with off-location storage.
    • Data access and control risks associated with a third party.
    Update data structure
    • Update your data elements, types (e.g. transactional, big data), and formats (e.g. table columns).
    • Standardize on a common data definition throughout the entire organization.
    • Ease data cleansing, mining, analysis, extraction, and management activities.
    • New data structures may be incompatible with other applications.
    • Implementing data management improvements may be costly and difficult to acquire stakeholder buy-in.
    Update data mining and data warehousing tools
    • Optimize how data is extracted and stored.
    • Increase the speed and reliability of the data mined.
    • Perform complex analysis with modern data mining and data warehousing tools.
    • Data warehouses are regularly updated with the latest data.
    • Updating data mining and warehousing tools may create incompatibilities with existing infrastructure and data sets.
    Integration:
    Move from point-to-point to enterprise service bus (ESB)
    • Change your application integration approach from point-to-point to an ESB.
    • Increase the scalability of enterprise services by exposing applications to a centralized middleware.
    • Reduce the number of integration tests to complete with an ESB.
    • Single point of failure can cripple the entire system.
    • Security threats arising from centralized communication node.
    Leverage API integration
    • Leverage application programming interfaces (APIs) to integrate applications.
    • Quicker and more frequent transfers of lightweight data compared to extract, load, transfer (ETL) practices.
    • Increase integration opportunities with other modern applications and infrastructure (including mobile devices).
    • APIs are not as efficient as ETL when handling large data sets.
    • Changing APIs can break compatibility between applications if not versioned properly.

    Stabilize Release and Deployment Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}453|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $38,699 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 37 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management

    Lack of control over the release process, poor collaboration between teams, and manual deployments lead to poor quality releases at a cost to the business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Manage risk. Release management should stabilize the IT environment. A poorly designed release can take down the whole business. Rushing releases out the door leads to increased risk for the business.
    • Quality processes are key. Standardized process will enable your release and deployment management teams to have a framework to deploy new releases with minimal chance of costly downtime further down the production chain.
    • Business must own the process. Release managers need oversight of the business to remain good stewards of the release management process.

    Impact and Result

    • Be prepared with a release management policy. With vulnerabilities discovered and published at an alarming pace, organizations have to build a plan to address and fix them quickly. A detailed release and patch policy should map out all the logistics of the deployment in advance, so that when necessary, teams can handle rollouts like a well-oiled machine.
    • Automate your software deployment and patch management strategy. Replace tedious and time-consuming manual processes with the use of automated release and patch management tools. Some organizations have a variety of release tools for various tasks and processes to ensure all or most of the required processes are covered across a diverse development environment.
    • Test deployments and monitor your releases. Larger organizations may have the luxury of a test environment prior to deployment, but that may be cost prohibitive for smaller organizations. If resources are a constraint, roll out the patch gradually and closely monitor performance to be able to quickly revert in the event of an issue.

    Stabilize Release and Deployment Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should control and stabilize your release and deployment management practice while improving the quality of releases and deployments, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Analyze current state

    Begin improving release management by assessing the current state and gaining a solid understanding of how core operational processes are actually functioning within the organization.

    • Stabilize Release and Deployment Management – Phase 1: Analyze Current State
    • Release Management Maturity Assessment
    • Release Management Project Roadmap Tool
    • Release Management Workflow Library (Visio)
    • Release Management Workflow Library (PDF)
    • Release Management Standard Operating Procedure
    • Patch Management Policy
    • Release Management Policy
    • Release Management Deployment Tracker
    • Release Management Build Procedure Template

    2. Plan releases and deployments

    Plan releases to gather all the pieces in one place and define what, why, when, and how a release will happen.

    • Stabilize Release and Deployment Management – Phase 2: Release and Deployment Planning

    3. Build, test, deploy

    Take a holistic and comprehensive approach to effectively designing and building releases. Get everything right the first time.

    • Stabilize Release and Deployment Management – Phase 3: Build, Test, Deploy

    4. Measure, manage, improve

    Determine desired goals for release management to ensure both IT and the business see the benefits of implementation.

    • Stabilize Release and Deployment Management – Phase 4: Measure, Manage, Improve
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Stabilize Release and Deployment Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Analyze Current State

    The Purpose

    Release management improvement begins with assessment of the current state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A solid understanding of how core operational processes are actually functioning within the organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Evaluate process maturity.

    1.2 Assess release management challenges.

    1.3 Define roles and responsibilities.

    1.4 Review and rightsize existing policy suite.

    Outputs

    Maturity Assessment

    Release Management Policy

    Release Management Standard Operating Procedure

    Patch Management Policy

    2 Release Management Planning

    The Purpose

    In simple terms, release planning puts all the pertinent pieces in one place.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    It defines the what, why, when, and how a release will happen.

    Activities

    2.1 Design target state release planning process.

    2.2 Define, bundle, and categorize releases.

    2.3 Standardize deployment plans and models.

    Outputs

    Release Planning Workflow

    Categorization and prioritization schemes

    Deployment models aligned to release types

    3 Build, Test, and Deploy

    The Purpose

    Take a holistic and comprehensive approach to effectively designing and building releases.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standardize build and test procedures to begin to drive consistency.

    Activities

    3.1 Standardize build procedures for deployments.

    3.2 Standardize test plans aligned to release types.

    Outputs

    Build procedure for hardware and software releases

    Test models aligned to deployment models

    4 Measure, Manage, and Improve

    The Purpose

    Determine and define the desired goals for release management as a whole.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Agree to key metrics and success criteria to start tracking progress and establish a post-deployment review process to promote continual improvement.

    Activities

    4.1 Determine key metrics to track progress.

    4.2 Establish a post-deployment review process.

    4.3 Understand and define continual improvement drivers.

    Outputs

    List of metrics and goals

    Post-deployment validation checklist

    Project roadmap

    Requirements Gathering

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}49|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}49|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,901
    • member rating average days saved: 23
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects

    The challenge

    • The number reason projects fail because from the outset, what people wanted was not clear.
    • Without proper due diligence, IT will deliver projects that fail to meet business expectations and fail to provide business value.
    • If you failed to accurately capture the needs and desires, your projects are set up for costly rework. That will hurt your business's financial performance and result in damage to your relationship with your business partners.
    • Even with requirements gathering processes in place, your business analysts may not have the required competencies to execute them.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • You need to gather requirements with your organizations' end-state in mind. That requires IT and business alignment.
    • You would be good to create a set of standard operating procedures around requirements gathering. But many companies fail to do so.
    • Bring standardization and conformity to your requirements gathering processes via a centralized center of excellence. That brings cohesion and uniformity to your practice.
    • It is critical that your business analysts have the necessary competencies to execute your processes and that they ask the right questions.

    Impact and results 

    • Better requirements analysis will result in shorter cycle timed and reduced project rework and overhead.
    • You will enjoy better relationships with your business partners, greater stakeholder satisfaction, and gradually a better standing of IT.
    • Most importantly, the applications and systems you deliver will contain all must-haves and some nice-to-haves. Your minimal viable deliverable will start to create business value immediately.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand why you should invest in optimizing requirements gathering in your company. We show you how we can support you.

    Build the target state

    Fully understand the target needs of the requirements gathering process.

    • Build a Strong Approach to Business Requirements Gathering – Phase 1: Build the Target State for the Requirements Gathering Process (ppt)
    • Requirements Gathering SOP and BA Playbook (doc)
    • Requirements Gathering Maturity Assessment (xls)
    • Project Level Selection Tool (xls)
    • Business Requirements Analyst (doc)
    • Requirements Gathering Communication Tracking Template (xls)

    Develop best practices to gather business requirements

    • Build a Strong Approach to Business Requirements Gathering – Phase 2: Define the Elicitation Process (ppt)
    • Business Requirements Document Template (xls)
    • Scrum Documentation Template (doc)

    Analyze and validate requirements

    Standardize your frameworks for analysis and validation of the business requirements

    • Build a Strong Approach to Business Requirements Gathering – Phase 3: Analyze and Validate Requirements (ppt)
    • Requirements Gathering Documentation Tool (xls)
    • Requirements Gathering Testing Checklist (doc)

    Build your requirements gathering governance action plan

    Formalize governance.

    • Build a Strong Approach to Business Requirements Gathering – Phase 4: Create a Requirements Governance Action Plan (ppt)
    • Requirements Traceability Matrix (xls)

     

     

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}491|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to ones currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify the metrics that serve a real purpose and eliminate the rest. Establish a formal review process to ensure metrics are still valid, continue to provide the answers needed, and are at a manageable and usable level.

    Impact and Result

    • Tracking goal- and action-based metrics allows you to make meaningful, data-driven decisions for your service desk. You can establish internal benchmarks to set your own baselines.
    • Predefining the audience and cadence of each metric allows you to construct targeted dashboards to aid your metrics analysis.

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Storyboard – A deck that shows you how to look beyond benchmarks and rely on internal metrics to drive success.

    Deciding which service desk metrics to track and how to analyze them can be daunting. Use this deck to narrow down your goal-oriented metrics as a starting point and set your own benchmarks.

    • Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter Storyboard

    2. Service Desk Metrics Workbook – A tool to organize your service desk metrics.

    For each metric, consider adding the relevant overall goal, audience, cadence, and action. Use the audience and cadence of the metric to split your tracked metrics into various dashboards. Your final list of metrics and reports can be added to your service desk SOP.

    • Service Desk Metrics Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Define Service Desk Metrics That Matter

    Look beyond benchmarks and rely on internal metrics to drive success.

    Analyst Perspective

    Don’t get paralyzed by benchmarks when establishing metrics

    When establishing a suite of metrics to track, it’s tempting to start with the metrics measured by other organizations. Naturally, benchmarking will enter the conversation. While benchmarking is useful, measuring you organization against others with a lack of context will only highlight your failures. Furthermore, benchmarks will highlight the norm or common practice. It does not necessarily highlight best practice.

    Keeping the limitations of benchmarking in mind, establish your own metrics suite with action-based metrics. Define the audience, cadence, and actions for each metric you track and pair them with business goals. Measure only what you need to.

    Slowly improve your metrics process over time and analyze your environment using your own data as your benchmark.

    Benedict Chang

    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Measure the business value provided by the service desk.
    • Consolidate your metrics and assign context and actions to ones currently tracked.
    • Establish tension metrics to see and tell the whole story.
    • Split your metrics for each stakeholder group. Assign proper cadences for measurements as a first step to building an effective dashboard or effective dashboards.

    Common Obstacles

    • Becoming too focused on benchmarks or unidimensional metrics (e.g. cost, first-contact resolution, time to resolve) can lead to misinterpretation of the data and poorly informed actions.
    • Sifting through the many sources of data post hoc can lead to stalling in data analysis or slow reaction times to poor metrics.
    • Dashboards can quickly become cluttered with uninformative metrics, thus reducing the signal-to-noise ratio of meaningful data.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use metrics that drive productive change and improvement. Track only what you need to report on.
    • Ensure each metric aligns with the desired business goal, is action-based, and includes the answers to what, why, how, and who.
    • Establish internal benchmarks by analyzing the trends from your own data to set baselines.
    • Act on the results of your metrics by adjusting targets and measuring success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify the metrics that serve a real purpose and eliminate the rest. Establish a formal review process to ensure metrics are still valid, continue to provide the answers needed, and are at a manageable and usable level.

    Improve your metrics to align IT with strategic business goals

    The right metrics can tell the business how hard IT works and how well they perform.

    • Only 19% of CXOs feel that their organization is effective at measuring the success of IT projects with their current metrics.
    • Implementing the proper metrics can facilitate communication between the business division and IT practice.
    • The proper metrics can help IT know what issues the business has and how the CEO and CIO should tackle them.
    • If the goals above resonate with your organization, our blueprint Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics will take you through the right steps.

    Current Metrics Suite

    19% Effective

    36% Some Improvement Necessary

    45% Significant Improvement Necessary

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 2019; N=622

    CXOs stress that value is the most critical area for IT to improve in reporting

    • You most likely have to improve your metrics suite by addressing business value.
    • Over 80% of organizations say they need improvement to their business value metrics, with 32% of organizations reporting that significant improvement is needed.
    • Of course, measuring metrics for service desk operations is important, but don’t forget business-oriented metrics such as measuring knowledgebase articles written for shift-left enablement, cost (time and money) of service desk tickets, and overall end-user satisfaction.

    The image shows a bar graph with percentages on the Y-Acis, and the following categories on the X-Axis: Business value metrics; Stakeholder satisfaction reporting; Risk metrics; Technology performance & operating metrics; Cost & Salary metrics; and Ad hoc feedback from executives and staff. Each bar is split into two sections, with the blue section marked a Significant Improvement Necessary, and the purple section labelled Some Improvement necessary. Two sections are highlighted with red circles: Business Value metrics--32% blue; 52% purple; and Technology performance & operating metrics--23% blue and 51% purple.

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group’s CEO/CIO Alignment Diagnostic, 2019; N=622

    Benchmarking used in isolation will not tell the whole story

    Benchmarks can be used as a step in the metrics process

    They can be the first step to reach an end goal, but if benchmarks are observed in isolation, it will only highlight your failures.

    Benchmarking relies on standardized models

    This does not account for all the unique variables that make up an IT organization.

    For example, benchmarks that include cost and revenue may include organizations that prioritize first-call resolution (FCR), but the variables that make up this benchmark model will be quite different within your own organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Benchmarks reflect the norm and common practice, not best practice.

    Benchmarks are open to interpretation

    Taking the time to establish proper metrics is often more valuable time spent than going down the benchmark rabbit hole.

    Being above or below the norm is neither a good nor a bad thing.

    Determining what the results mean for you depends on what’s being measured and the unique factors, characteristics, and priorities in your organization.

    If benchmark data is a priority within your IT organization, you may look up organizations like MetricNet, but keep the following in mind:

    Review the collected benchmark data

    See where IT organizations in your industry typically stand in relation to the overall benchmark.

    Assess the gaps

    Large gaps between yourself and the overall benchmark could indicate areas for improvement or celebration. Use the data to focus your analysis, develop deeper self-awareness, and prioritize areas for potential concern.

    Benchmarks are only guidelines

    The benchmark source data may not come from true peers in every sense. Each organization is different, so always explore your unique context when interpreting any findings.

    Rely on internal metrics to measure and improve performance

    Measure internal metrics over time to define goals and drive real improvement

    • Internally measured metrics are more reliable because they provide information about your actual performance over time. This allows for targeted improvements and objective measurements of your milestones.
    • Whether a given metric is the right one for your service desk will depend on several different factors, including:
      • The maturity and capability of your service desk processes
      • The volume of service requests and incidents
      • The complexity of your environment when resolving tickets
      • The degree to which your end users are comfortable with self-service

    Take Info-Tech’s approach to metrics management

    Use metrics that drive productive change and improvement. Track only what you need to report on.

    Ensure each metric aligns with the desired business goal, is action-based, and includes the answers to what, why, how, and who.

    Establish internal benchmarks by analyzing the trends from your own data to set baselines.

    Act on the results of your metrics by adjusting targets and measuring success.

    Define action-based metrics to cut down on analysis paralysis

    Every metric needs to be backed with the following criteria:

    • Defining audience, cadence, goal, and action for each metric allows you to keep your tracked metrics to a minimum while maximizing the value.
    • The audience and cadence of each metric may allow you to define targeted dashboards.

    Audience - Who is this metric tracked for?

    Goal - Why are you tracking this metric? This can be defined along with the CSFs and KPIs.

    Cadence - How often are you going to view, analyze, and action this metric?

    Action - What will you do if this metric spikes, dips, trends up, or trends down?

    Activity 1. Define your critical success factors and key performance indicators

    Critical success factors (CSFs) are high-level goals that help you define the direction of your service desk. Key performance indicators (KPIs) can be treated as the trend of metrics that will indicate that you are moving in the direction of your CSFs. These will help narrow the data you have to track and action (metrics).

    CSFs, or your overall goals, typically revolve around three aspects of the service desk: time spent on tickets, resources spent on tickets, and the quality of service provided.

    1. As a group, brainstorm the CSFs and the KPIs that will help narrow your metrics. Use the Service Desk Metrics Workbook to record the results.
    2. Look at the example to the right as a starting point.

    Example metrics:

    Critical success factor Key performance indicator
    High End-User Satisfaction Increasing CSAT score on transactional surveys
    High end-user satisfaction score
    Proper resolution of tickets
    Low time to resolve
    Low Cost per Ticket Decreasing cost per ticket (due to efficient resolution, FCR, automation, self-service, etc.)
    Improve Access to Self-Service (tangential to improve customer service) High utilization of knowledgebase
    High utilization of portal

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Activity 2. Define action-based metrics that align with your KPIs and CSFs

    1. Now that you have defined your goals, continue to fill the workbook by choosing metrics that align with those goals.
    2. Use the chart below as a guide. For every metric, define the cadence of measurement, audience of the metric, and action associated with the metric. There may be multiple metrics for each KPI.
    3. If you find you are unable to define the cadence, audience, or action associated with a metric, you may not need to track the metric in the first place. Alternatively, if you find that you may action a metric in the future, you can decide to start gathering data now.

    Example metrics:

    Critical success factor Key performance indicator Metric Cadence Audience Action
    High End-User Satisfaction Increasing CSAT score on transactional surveys Monthly average of ticket satisfaction scores Monthly Management Action low scores immediately, view long-term trends
    High end-user satisfaction score Average end-user satisfaction score from annual survey Annually IT Leadership View IT satisfaction trends to align IT with business direction
    Proper resolution of tickets Number of tickets reopened Weekly Service Desk Technicians Action reopened tickets, look for training opportunities
    SLA breach rate Daily Service Desk Technicians Action reopened tickets, look for training opportunities
    Low time to resolve Average TTR (incidents) Weekly Management Look for trends to monitor resources
    Average TTR by priority Weekly Management Look for TTR solve rates to align with SLA
    Average TTR by tier Weekly Management Look for improperly escalated tickets or shift-left opportunities

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Activity 3. Define the data ownership, metric viability, and dashboards

    1. For each metric, define where the data is housed. Ideally, the data is directly in the ticketing tool or ITSM tool. This will make it easy to pull and analyze.
    2. Determine how difficult the metric will be to pull or track. If the effort is high, decide if the value of tracking the metric is worth the hassle of gathering it.
    3. Lastly, for each metric, use the cadence and audience to place the metric in a reporting dashboard. This will help divide your metrics and make them easier to report and action.
    4. You may use the output of this exercise to add your tracked metrics to your service desk SOP.
    5. A full suite of metrics can be found in our Infrastructure & Operations Metrics Library in the Take Control of Infrastructure Metrics Storyboard. The metrics have been categorized by low, medium, and advanced capabilities for you.

    Example metrics:

    Metric Who Owns the Data? Efforts to Track? Dashboards
    Monthly average of ticket satisfaction scores Service Desk Low Monthly Management Meeting
    Average end-user satisfaction score Service Desk Low Leadership Meeting
    Number of tickets reopened Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    SLA breach rate Service Desk Low Daily Technician Standup
    Average TTR (incidents) Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR by priority Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR by tier Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Average TTR (SRs) Service Desk Low Weekly Technician Standup
    Number of tickets reopened Service Desk Low Daily Technician Standup

    Download the Service Desk Metrics Workbook

    Keep the following considerations in mind when defining which metrics matter

    Keep the customer in mind

    Metrics are typically focused on transactional efficiency and process effectiveness and not what was achieved against the customers’ need and satisfaction.

    Understand the relationships between performance and metrics management to provide the end-to-end service delivery picture you are aiming to achieve.

    Don’t settle for tool defaults

    ITSM solutions offer an abundance of metrics to choose from. The most common ones are typically built into the reporting modules of the tool suite.

    Do not start tracking everything. Choose metrics that are specifically aligned to your organization’s desired business outcomes.

    Establish tension metrics to achieve balance

    Don’t ignore the correlation and context between the suites of metrics chosen and how one interacts and affects the other.

    Measuring metrics in isolation may lead to an incomplete picture or undesired technician behavior. Tension metrics help complete the picture and lead to proper actions.

    Adjust those targets

    An arbitrary target on a metric that is consistently met month over month is useless. Each metric should inform the overall performance by combining capable service level management and customer experience programs to prove the value IT is providing to the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    This project will help you build and improve essential service desk processes, including incident management, request fulfillment, and knowledge management, to create a sustainable service desk.

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics

    Make faster decisions and improve service delivery by using the right metrics for the job.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Take a data-driven approach to service desk optimization.

    IT Diagnostics: Build a Data-Driven IT Strategy

    Our data-driven programs ask business and IT stakeholders the right questions to ensure you have the inputs necessary to build an effective IT strategy.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}369|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting

    Business operations in high-risk areas of the world contend with complex threat environments and risk scenarios that often require a unique response. But traditional approaches to security strategy often miss these jurisdictional risks, leaving organizations vulnerable to threats that range from cybercrime and data breaches to fines and penalties.

    Security leaders need to identify high-risk jurisdictions, inventory critical assets, identify vulnerabilities, assess risks, and identify security controls necessary to mitigate those risks.

    Secure operations and protect critical assets in high-risk regions

    Across risks that include insider threats and commercial surveillance, the two greatest vulnerabilities that organizations face in high-risk parts of the world are travel and compliance. Organizations can make small adjustments to their security program to address these risks:

    1. Support high-risk travel: Put measures and guidelines in place to protect personnel, data, and devices before, during, and after employee travel.
    2. Mitigate compliance risk: Consider data residency requirements, data breach notification, cross-border data transfer, and third-party risks to support business growth.

    Using these two prevalent risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions as examples, this research walks you through the steps to analyze the threat landscape, assess security risks, and execute a response to mitigate them.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions – A step-by-step approach to mitigating jurisdictional security and privacy risks.

    Traditional approaches to security strategy often miss jurisdictional risks. Use this storyboard to make small adjustments to your security program to mitigate security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    • Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions – Phases 1-3

    2. Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map Tool – A tool to inventory, assess, and treat jurisdictional risks.

    Use this tool to track jurisdictional risks, assess the exposure of critical assets, and identify mitigation controls. Use the geographic heatmap to communicate inherent jurisdictional risk with key stakeholders.

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map Tool

    3. Guidelines for Key Jurisdictional Risk Scenarios – Two structured templates to help you develop guidelines for two key jurisdictional risk scenarios: high-risk travel and compliance risk

    Use these two templates to develop help you develop your own guidelines for key jurisdictional risk scenarios. The guidelines address high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    • Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Context for Risk Assessment

    The Purpose

    Assess business requirements and evaluate security pressures to set the context for the security risk assessment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the goals of the organization in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Assess the threats to critical assets in these jurisdictions and capture stakeholder expectations for information security.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine assessment scope.

    1.2 Determine business goals.

    1.3 Determine compliance obligations.

    1.4 Determine risk appetite.

    1.5 Conduct pressure analysis.

    Outputs

    Business requirements

    Security pressure analysis

    2 Analyze Key Risk Scenarios for High-Risk Jurisdictions

    The Purpose

    Build key risk scenarios for high-risk jurisdictions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact should malicious agents exploit them.

    Assess risk exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify critical assets.

    2.2 Identify threats.

    2.3 Assess risk likelihood.

    2.4 Assess risk impact.

    Outputs

    Key risk scenarios

    Jurisdictional risk exposure

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heat Map

    3 Build Risk Treatment Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Prioritize and treat jurisdictional risks to critical assets.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build an initiative roadmap to reduce residual risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify and assess risk response.

    3.2 Assess residual risks.

    3.3 Identify security controls.

    3.4 Build initiative roadmap.

    Outputs

    Action plan to mitigate key risk scenarios

    Further reading

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Assessments often omit jurisdictional risks. Are your assets exposed?

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Operations in high-risk jurisdictions face unique security scenarios.

    The image contains a picture of Michel Hebert.

    Michel Hébert

    Research Director

    Security and Privacy

    Info-Tech Research Group


    The image contains a picture of Alan Tang.

    Alan Tang

    Principal Research Director

    Security and Privacy

    Info-Tech Research Group


    Traditional approaches to security strategies may miss key risk scenarios that critical assets face in high-risk jurisdictions. These include high-risk travel, heightened insider threats, advanced persistent threats, and complex compliance environments. Most organizations have security strategies and risk management practices in place, but securing global operations requires its own effort. Assess the security risk that global operations pose to critical assets. Consider the unique assets, threats, and vulnerabilities that come with operations in high-risk jurisdictions. Focus on the business activities you support and integrate your insights with existing risk management practices to ensure the controls you propose get the visibility they need. Your goal is to build a plan that mitigates the unique security risks that global operations pose and secures critical assets in high-risk areas. Don’t leave security to chance.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Security leaders who support operations in many countries struggle to mitigate security risks to critical assets. Operations in high-risk jurisdictions contend with complex threat environments and security risk scenarios that often require a unique response.
    • Security leaders need to identify critical assets, assess vulnerabilities, catalog threats, and identify the security controls necessary to mitigate related operational risks.

    Common Obstacles

    • Securing operations in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional due diligence. Each jurisdiction involves a different risk context, which complicates efforts to identify, assess, and mitigate security risks to critical assets.
    • Security leaders need to engage the organization with the right questions and identify high-risk vulnerabilities and security risk scenarios to help stakeholders make an informed decision about how to assess and treat the security risks they face in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech has developed an effective approach to protecting critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    This approach includes tools for:

    • Evaluating the security context of your organization’s high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Identifying security risk scenarios unique to high-risk jurisdictions and assessing the exposure of critical assets.
    • Planning and executing a response.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations with global operations must contend with a more diverse set of assets, threats, and vulnerabilities when they operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Security leaders need to take additional steps to secure operations and protect critical assets.

    Business operations in high-risk jurisdictions face a more complex security landscape

    Information security risks to business operations vary widely by region.

    The 2022 Allianz Risk Barometer surveyed 2,650 business risk specialists in 89 countries to identify the most important risks to operations. The report identified cybercrime, IT failures, outages, data breaches, fines, and penalties as the most important global business risks in 2022, but their results varied widely by region. The standout finding of the 2022 Allianz Risk Barometer is the return of security risks as the most important threat to business operations. Security risks will continue to be acute beyond 2022, especially in Africa, the Middle East, Europe, and the Asia-Pacific region, where they will dwarf risks of supply chain interruptions, natural catastrophe, and climate change.

    Global operations in high-risk jurisdictions contend with more diverse threats. These security risk scenarios are not captured in traditional security strategies.

    The image contains a picture of the world map that has certain areas of the map highlighted in various shades of blue based on higher security-related business risks.

    Figures represent the number of cybersecurity risks business risk specialists selected as a percentage of all business risks (Allianz, 2022). Higher scores indicate jurisdictions with higher security-related business risks. Jurisdictions without data are in grey.

    Different jurisdictions’ commitment to cybersecurity also varies widely, which increases security risks further

    The Global Cybersecurity Index (GCI) provides insight into the commitment of different countries to cybersecurity.

    The index assesses a country’s legal framework to identify basic requirements that public and private stakeholders must uphold and the legal instruments prohibiting harmful actions.

    The 2020 GCI results show overall improvement and strengthening of the cybersecurity agenda globally, but significant regional gaps persist. Of the 194 countries surveyed:

    • 33% had no data protection legislation.
    • 47% had no breach notification measures in place.
    • 50% had no legislation on the theft of personal information.
    • 19% still had no legislation on illegal access.

    Not every jurisdiction has the same commitment to cybersecurity. Protecting critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional due diligence.

    The image contains a picture of the world map that has certain areas of the map highlighted in various shades of blue based on scores in relation to the Global Security Index.

    The diagram sets out the score and rank for each country that took part in the Global Cybersecurity Index (ITU, 2021)

    Higher scores show jurisdictions with a lower rank on the CGI, which implies greater risk. Jurisdictions without data are in grey.

    Securing critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions requires additional effort

    Traditional approaches to security strategy may miss these key risk scenarios.

    As a result, security leaders who support operations in many countries need to take additional steps to mitigate security risks to critical assets.

    Guide stakeholders to make informed decisions about how to assess and treat the security risks and secure operations.

    • Engage the organization with the right questions.
    • Identify critical assets and assess vulnerabilities.
    • Catalogue threats and build risk scenarios.
    • Identify the security controls necessary to mitigate risks.

    Work with your organization to analyze the threat landscape, assess security risks unique to high-risk jurisdictions, and execute a response to mitigate them.

    This project blueprint works through this process using the two most prevalent risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions: high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance
    The image contains a screenshot of an Info-Tech thought model regarding secure global operations in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Travel risk is the first scenario we use as an example throughout the blueprint

    • This project blueprint outlines a process to identify, assess, and mitigate key risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions. We use two common key risk scenarios as examples throughout the deck to illustrate how you create and assess your own scenarios.
    • Supporting high-risk travel is the first scenario we will study in-depth as an example. Business growth, service delivery, and mergers and acquisitions can lead end users to travel to high-risk jurisdictions where staff, devices, and data are at risk.
    • Compromised or stolen devices can provide threat actors with access to data that could compromise the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage or expose the organization to regulatory risk.

    The project blueprint includes template guidance in Phase 3 to help you build and deploy your own travel guidelines to protect critical assets and support end users before they leave, during their trip, and when they return.

    Before you leave

    • Identify high-risk countries.
    • Enable controls.
    • Limit what you pack.

    During your trip

    • Assume you are monitored.
    • Limit access to systems.
    • Prevent theft.

    When you return

    • Change your password.
    • Restore your devices.

    Compliance risk is the second scenario we use as an example

    • Mitigating compliance risk is the second scenario we will study as an example in this blueprint. The legal and regulatory landscape is evolving rapidly to keep step with the pace of technological change. Security and privacy leaders are expected to mitigate the risk of noncompliance as the organization expands to new jurisdictions.
    • Later sections will show how to think through at least four compliance risks, including:
      • Cross-border data transfer
      • Third-party risk management
      • Data breach notification
      • Data residency

    The project blueprint includes template guidance in Phase 3 to help you deploy your own compliance governance controls as a risk mitigation measure.

    Secure Operations in High-Risk Jurisdictions: Info-Tech’s methodology

    1. Identify Context

    2. Assess Risks

    3. Execute Response

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess business requirements
    2. Evaluate security pressures
    1. Identify risks
    2. Assess risk exposure
    1. Treat security risks
    2. Build initiative roadmap

    Phase Outcomes

    • Internal security pressures that capture the governance, policies, practices, and risk tolerance of the organization
    • External security pressures that capture the expectations of customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners
    • A heatmap that captures not only the global exposure of your critical assets but also the business processes they support
    • A security risk register to allow for the easy transfer of critical assets’ global security risk data to your organization’s enterprise risk management practice
    • A roadmap of prioritized initiatives to apply relevant controls and secure global assets
    • A set of key risk indicators to monitor and report your progress

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Business Security Requirements

    Identify the context for the global security risk assessment, including risk appetite and risk tolerance.

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap

    Identify critical global assets and the threats they face in high-risk jurisdictions and assess exposure.

    Mitigation Plan

    Roadmap of initiatives and security controls to mitigate global risks to critical assets. Tools and templates to address key security risk scenarios.

    Key deliverable:

    Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture information security risks to critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions. The tool generates a world chart that illustrates the risks global operations face to help you engage the business and execute a response.

    Blueprint benefits

    Protect critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions

    IT Benefits

    Assess and remediate information security risk to critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Easily integrate your risk assessment with enterprise risk assessments to improve communication with the business.

    Illustrate key information security risk scenarios to make the case for action in terms the business understands.

    Business Benefits

    Develop mitigation plans to protect staff, devices, and data in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Support business growth in high-risk jurisdictions without compromising critical assets.

    Mitigate compliance risk to protect your organization’s reputation, avoid fines, and ensure business continuity.

    Quantify the impact of securing global operations

    The tool included with this blueprint can help you measure the impact of implementing the research

    • Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to describe the key risk scenarios you face, assess their likelihood and impact, and estimate the cost of mitigating measures. Working through the project in this way will help you quantify the impact of securing global operations.
    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool. The image contains a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdiction.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    • Review existing information security and risk management metrics and the output of the tools included with the blueprint.
    • Identify metrics to measure the impact of your risk management efforts. Focus specifically on high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Compare your results with those in your overall security and risk management program.

    ID

    Metric

    Why is this metric valuable?

    How do I calculate it?

    1.

    Overall Exposure – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Illustrates the overall exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool. Calculate the impact times the probability rating for each risk. Take the average.

    2.

    # Risks Identified – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs risk tolerance assessments.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    3.

    # Risks Treated – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs residual risk assessments.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    4.

    Mitigation Cost – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs cost-benefit analysis to determine program effectiveness.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    5.

    # Security Incidents – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs incident trend calculations to determine program effectiveness.

    Draw the information from your service desk or IT service management tool.

    6.

    Incident Remediation Cost – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Informs cost-benefit analysis to determine program effectiveness.

    Estimate based on cost and effort, including direct and indirect cost such as business disruptions, administrative finds, reputational damage, etc.

    7.

    TRENDS: Program Effectiveness – High-Risk Jurisdictions

    # of security incidents over time. Remediation : Mitigation costs over time

    Calculate based on metrics 5 to 7.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs.

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Call #1: Scope project requirements, determine assessment scope, and discuss challenges.

    Phase 2

    Call #2: Conduct initial risk assessment and determine risk tolerance.

    Call #3: Evaluate security pressures in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Call #4: Identify risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Call #5: Assess risk exposure.

    Phase 3

    Call #6: Treat security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Days 1

    Days 2-3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Identify Context

    Key Risk Scenarios

    Build Roadmap

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope.

    1.1.2 Determine business goals.

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations.

    1.2.1 Determine risk appetite.

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis.

    2.1.1 Identify assets.

    2.1.2 Identify threats.

    2.2.1 Assess risk likelihood.

    2.2.2 Assess risk impact.

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response.

    3.1.2 Assess residual risks.

    3.2.1 Identify security controls.

    3.2.2 Build initiative roadmap.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Business requirements for security risk assessment
    2. Identification of high-risk jurisdictions
    3. Security threat landscape for high-risk jurisdictions
    1. Inventory of relevant threats, critical assets, and their vulnerabilities
    2. Assessment of adverse effects should threat agents exploit vulnerabilities
    3. Risk register with key risk scenarios and heatmap of high-risk jurisdictions
    1. Action plan to mitigate key risk scenarios
    2. Investment and implementation roadmap
    1. Completed information security risk assessment for two key risk scenarios
    2. Risk mitigation roadmap

    No safe jurisdictions

    Stakeholders sometimes ask information security and privacy leaders to produce a list of safe jurisdictions from which to operate. We need to help them see that there are no safe jurisdictions, only relatively risky ones. As you build your security program, deepen the scope of your risk assessments to include risk scenarios critical assets face in different jurisdictions. These risks do not need to rule out operations, but they may require additional mitigation measures to keep staff, data, and devices safe and reduce potential reputational harms.

    Traditional approaches to security strategy often omit jurisdictional risks.

    Global operations must contend with a more complex security landscape. Secure critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions with a targeted risk assessment.

    The two greatest risks are high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    You can mitigate them with small adjustments to your security program.

    Support High-Risk Travel

    When securing travel to high-risk jurisdictions, you must consider personnel safety as well as data and device security. Put measures and guidelines in place to protect them before, during, and after travel.

    Mitigate Compliance Risk

    Think through data residency requirements, data breach notification, cross-border data transfer, and third-party risks to support business growth and mitigate compliance risks in high-risk jurisdictions to protect your organization’s reputation and avoid hefty fines or business disruptions.

    Phase 1

    Identify Context

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess business requirements to understand the goals of the organization’s global operations, as well as its risk governance, policies, and practices.
    • Evaluate jurisdictional security pressures to understand threats to critical assets and capture the expectations of external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners, and assess risk tolerance.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT leadership
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance

    Step 1.1

    Assess Business Requirements

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope

    1.1.2 Identify enterprise goals in high-risk jurisdictions

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Business stakeholders
    • IT leadership
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assess business requirements to understand the goals of the organization’s global operations, as well as its risk governance, policies, and practices.

    Focus the risk assessment on high-risk jurisdictions

    Traditional approaches to information security strategy often miss threats to global operations

    • Successful security strategies are typically sensitive to risks to different IT systems and lines of business.
    • However, securing global operations requires additional focus on high-risk jurisdictions, considering what makes them unique.
    • This first phase of the project will help you evaluate the business context of operations in high-risk jurisdictions, including:
      • Enterprise and security goals.
      • Lines of business, physical locations, and IT systems that need additional oversight.
      • Unique compliance obligations.
      • Unique risks and security pressures.
      • Organizational risk tolerance in high-risk jurisdictions.

    Focus your risk assessment on the business activities security supports in high-risk jurisdictions and the unique threats they face to bridge gaps in your security strategy.

    Identify jurisdictions with higher inherent risks

    Your security strategy may not describe jurisdictional risk adequately.

    • Security strategies list lines of business, physical locations, and IT systems the organization needs to secure and those whose security will depend on a third-party. You can find additional guidance on fixing the scope and boundaries of a security strategy in Phase 1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.
    • However, security risks vary widely from one jurisdiction to another according to:
      • Active cyber threats.
      • Legal and regulatory frameworks.
      • Regional security and preparedness capabilities.
    • Your first task is to identify high-risk jurisdictions to target for additional oversight.

    Work closely with your enterprise risk management function.

    Enterprise risk management functions are often tasked with developing risk assessments from composite sources. Work closely with them to complete your own assessment.

    Countries at heightened risk of money laundering and terrorism financing are examples of high-risk jurisdictions. The Financial Action Task Force and the U.S. Treasury publish reports three times a year that identify Non-Cooperative Countries or Territories.

    Develop a robust jurisdictional assessment

    Design an intelligence collection strategy to inform your assessment

    Strategic Intelligence

    White papers, briefings, reports. Audience: C-Suite, board members

    Tactical Intelligence

    Internal reports, vendor reports. Audience: Security leaders

    Operational intelligence

    Indicators of compromise. Audience: IT Operations

    Operational intelligence focuses on machine-readable data used to block attacks, triage and validate alerts, and eliminate threats from the network. It becomes outdated in a matter of hours and is less useful for this exercise.

    Determine travel risks to bolster your assessments

    Not all locations and journeys will require the same security measures.

    • Travel risks vary significantly according to destination, the nature of the trip, and traveler profile.
    • Access to an up-to-date country risk rating system enables your organization and individual staff to quickly determine the overall level of risk in a specific country or location.
    • Based on this risk rating, you can specify what security measures are required prior to travel and what level of travel authorization is appropriate, in line with the organization's security policy or travel security procedures.
    • While some larger organizations can maintain their own country risk ratings, this requires significant capacity, particularly to obtain the necessary information to keep these regularly updated.
    • It may be more effective for your organization to make use of the travel risk ratings provided by an external security information provider, such as a company linked to your travel insurance or travel booking service, if available.
    • Alternatively, various open-source travel risk ratings are available via embassy travel sites or other website providers.

    Without a flexible system to account for the risk exposures of different jurisdictions, staff may perceive measures as a hindrance to operations.

    Develop a tiered risk rating

    The example below outlines potential risk indicators for high-risk travel.

    Rating

    Description

    Low

    Generally secure with adequate physical security. Low violent crime rates. Some civil unrest during significant events. Acts of terrorism rare. Risks associated with natural disasters limited and health threats mainly preventable.

    Moderate

    Periodic civil unrest. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups active with sporadic acts of terrorism. Staff at risk from common and violent crime. Transport and communications services are unreliable and safety records are poor. Jurisdiction prone to natural disasters or disease epidemics.

    High

    Regular periods of civil unrest, which may target foreigners. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups very active and threaten political or economic stability. Violent crime rates high, often targeting foreigners. Infrastructure and emergency services poor. May be regular disruption to transportation or communications services. Certain areas off-limits to foreigners. Jurisdictions experiencing natural disasters or epidemics are considered high risk.

    Extreme

    Undergoing active conflict or persistent civil unrest. Risk of being caught up in a violent incident or attack is very high. Authorities may have lost control of significant portions of the country. Lines between criminality and political and insurgent violence are blurred. Foreigners are likely to be denied access to parts of the country. Transportation and communication services are severely degraded or nonexistent. Violence presents a direct threat to staff security.

    Ratings are formulated by assessing several types of risk, including conflict, political/civil unrest, terrorism, crime, and health and infrastructure risks.

    1.1.1 Determine assessment scope

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm a list of high-risk jurisdictions to target for additional assessment. Write down as many items as possible to include in:
    • Lines of business
    • Physical locations
    • IT systems

    Pay close attention to elements of the assessment that are not in scope.

  • Discuss the response and the rationale for targeting each of them for additional risk assessments. Identify security-related concerns for different lines of business, locations, user groups, IT systems, and data.
  • Record your responses and your comments in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Relevant threat intelligence
    • A list of high-risk jurisdictions to focus your risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Position your efforts in a business context

    Securing critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions is a business imperative

    • Many companies relegate their information security strategies to their IT department. Aside from the strain the choice places on a department that already performs many different functions, it wrongly implies that mitigating information security risk is simply an IT problem.
    • Managing information security risks is a business problem. It requires that organizations identify their risk appetite, prioritize relevant threats, and define risk mitigation initiatives. Business leaders can only do these activities effectively in a context that recognizes the business and financial benefits of implementing protections.
    • This is notably true of businesses with operations in many different countries. Each jurisdiction has its own set of security risks the organization must account for, as well as unique local laws and regulations that affect business operations.
    • In high-risk jurisdictions, your efforts must consider the unique operational challenges your organization may not face in its home country. Your efforts to secure critical assets will be most successful if you describe key risk scenarios in terms of their impact on business goals.
    • You can find additional guidance on assessing the business context of a security strategy in Phase 1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Do you understand the unique business context of operations in high-risk jurisdictions?

    1.1.2 Identify business goals

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm the primary and secondary business goals of the organization. Focus your assessment on operations in high-risk jurisdictions you identified in Exercise 1.1.1. Review:
    • Relevant corporate and IT strategies.
    • The business goal definitions and indicator metrics in tab 2, “Goals Definition,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • Limit business goals to no more than two primary goals and three secondary goals. This limitation will help you prioritize security initiatives at the end of the project.
  • For each business goal, identify up to two security alignment goals that will support business goals in high-risk jurisdictions.
  • Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Your goals for the security risk assessment for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Record business goals

    Capture the results in the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    1. Record the primary and secondary business goals you identified in tab 3, “Goals Cascade,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    2. Next, record the two security alignment goals you selected for each business goal based on the tool’s recommendations.
    3. Finally, review the graphic diagram that illustrates your goals on tab 6, “Results,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
    4. Revisit this exercise whenever operations expands to a new jurisdiction to capture how they contribute to the organization’s mission and vision and how the security program can support them.
    The image contains a screenshot of Tab 3, Goals Cascade.

    Tab 3, Goals Cascade

    The image contains a screenshot of Tab 6, Results.

    Tab 6, Results

    Analyze business goals

    Assess how operating in multiple jurisdictions adds nuance to your business goals

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction of the business to propose relevant security initiatives that support business goals in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Operating in different jurisdictions carries its own degree of risk. The organization is subject not only to the information security risks and legal frameworks of its country of origin but also to those associated with international jurisdictions.
    • You need to understand where your organization operates and how these different jurisdictions contribute to your business goals to support their performance and protect the firm’s reputation.
    • This exercise will make an explicit link between security and privacy concerns in high-risk jurisdictions, what the business cares about, and what security is trying to accomplish.

    If the organization is considering a merger and acquisition project that will expand operations in jurisdictions with different travel risk profiles, the security organization needs to revise the security strategy to ensure the organization can support high-risk travel and mitigate risks to critical assets.

    Identify compliance obligations

    Data compliance obligations loom large in high-risk jurisdictions

    The image contains four hexagons, each with their own words. SOX, PCI DSS, HIPAA, HITECH.

    Security leaders are familiar with most conventional regulatory obligations that govern financial, personal, and healthcare data in North America and Europe.

    The image contains four hexagons, each with their own words. Residency, Cross-Border Transfer, Breach Notification, Third-Party Risk Mgmt.

    Data privacy concerns, nationalism, and the economic value of data are all driving jurisdictions to adopt data residency and data localization and to shut down the cross-border transfer of data.

    The next step requires you to consider the compliance obligations the organization needs to meet to support the business as it expands to other jurisdictions through natural growth, mergers, and acquisitions.

    1.1.3 Identify compliance obligations

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm compliance obligations in target jurisdictions. Focus your assessment on operations in high-risk jurisdictions.
    2. Include:

    • Laws
    • Governing regulations
    • Industry standards
    • Contractual agreements
  • Record your compliance obligations and comments on tab 4, “Compliance Obligations,” of the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool.
  • If you need to take full stock of the laws and regulations in place in the jurisdictions where you operate that you are not familiar with, consider seeking local legal counsel to help you navigate this exercise.
  • Input

    Output

    • Legal and compliance frameworks in target jurisdictions
    • Mandatory and voluntary compliance obligations for target jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    Step 1.2

    Evaluate Security Pressures

    Activities

    1.2.1 Conduct initial risk assessment

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis

    1.2.3 Determine risk tolerance

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    Identify threats to global assets and capture the security expectations of external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, legislators, and business partners, and determine risk tolerance.

    Evaluate security pressures to set the risk context

    Perform an initial assessment of high-risk jurisdictions to set the context.

    Assess:

    • The threat landscape.
    • The security pressures from key stakeholders.
    • The risk tolerance of your organization.

    You should be able to find the information in your existing security strategy. If you don’t have the information, work through the next three steps of the project blueprint.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate evaluating security pressures, as described in the text above.

    Some jurisdictions carry inherent risks

    • Jurisdictional risks stem from legal, regulatory, or political factors that exist in different countries or regions. They can also stem from unexpected legal changes in regions where critical assets have exposure. Understanding jurisdictional risks is critical because they can require additional security controls.
    • Jurisdictional risk tends to be higher in jurisdictions:
      • Where the organization:
        • Conducts high-value or high-volume financial transactions.
        • Supports and manages critical infrastructure.
        • Has high-cost data or data whose compromise could undermine competitive advantage.
        • Has a high percentage of part-time employees and contractors.
        • Experiences a high rate of employee turnover.
      • Where state actors:
        • Have a low commitment to cybersecurity, financial, and privacy legislation and regulation.
        • Support cybercrime organizations within their borders.

    Jurisdictional risk is often reduced to countries where money laundering and terrorist activities are high. In this blueprint, the term refers to the broader set of information security risks that arise when operating in a foreign country or jurisdiction.

    Five key risk scenarios are most prevalent

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance

    Security leaders who support operations in many countries need to take additional steps to mitigate security risks to critical assets. The goal of the next two exercises is to analyze the threat landscape and security pressures unique to high-risk jurisdictions, which will inform the construction of key scenarios in Phase 2. These five scenarios are most prevalent in high-risk jurisdictions. Keep them in mind as you go through the exercises in this section.

    1.2.1 Assess jurisdictional risk

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 2, “Risk Assessment,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk elements with a focus on high-risk jurisdictions:
    3. Review each question in tab 2 of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool and select the most appropriate response.

    Input

    Output

    • Existing security strategy
    • List of organizational assets
    • Historical data on information security incidents
    • Completed risk assessment

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    For more information on how to complete the risk assessment questionnaire, see Step 1.2.1 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    1.2.2 Conduct pressure analysis

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 3, “Pressure Analysis,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following pressure elements with a focus on high-risk jurisdictions:
    • Compliance and oversight
    • Customer expectations
    • Business expectations
    • IT expectations
  • Review each question in the questionnaire and provide the most appropriate response using the drop-down list. It may be helpful to consult with the appropriate departments to obtain their perspectives.
  • For more information on how to complete the pressure analysis questionnaire, see Step 1.3 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Input

    Output

    • Information on various pressure elements within the organization
    • Existing security strategy
    • Completed pressure analysis

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business leaders
    • Compliance

    A low security pressure means that your stakeholders do not assign high importance to information security. You may need to engage stakeholders with the right key risk scenarios to illustrate jurisdictional risk and generate support for new security controls.

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Assess risk tolerance

    • Risk tolerance expresses the types and amount of risk the organization is willing to accept in pursuit of its goals.
    • These expectations can help you identify, manage, and report on key risk scenarios in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • For instance, an organization with a low risk tolerance will require a stronger information security program to minimize operational security risks.
    • It’s up to business leaders to determine the risks they are willing to accept. They may need guidance to understand how system-level risks affect the organization’s ability to pursue its goals.

    A formalized risk tolerance statement can help:

    • Support risk-based security decisions that align with business goals.
    • Provide a meaningful rationale for security initiatives.
    • Improve the transparency of investments in the organization’s security program.
    • Provide guidance for monitoring inherent risk and residual risk exposure.

    The role of security professionals is to identify and analyze key risk scenarios that may prevent the organization from reaching its goals.

    1.2.3 Determine risk tolerance

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the questions on tab 4, “Risk Tolerance,” of the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool.
    2. Gather the required information from subject matter experts on the following risk tolerance elements:
    • Recent IT problems, especially downtime and data recovery issues
    • Historical security incidents
  • Review any relevant documentation, including:
    • Existing security strategy
    • Business impact assessments
    • Service-level agreements

    For more information on how to complete the risk tolerance questionnaire, see Step 1.4 of Build an Information Security Strategy.

    Input

    Output

    • Existing security strategy
    • Data on recent IT problems and incidents
    • Business impact assessments
    • Completed risk tolerance statement

    Materials

    Participants

    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool

    Review the output of the results tab

    • The organizational risk assessment provides a high-level assessment of inherent risks in high-risk jurisdictions. Use the results to build and assess key risk scenarios in Phase 2.
    • Use the security pressure analysis to inform stakeholder management efforts. A low security pressure indicates that stakeholders do not yet grasp the impact of information security on organizational goals. You may need to communicate its importance before you discuss additional security controls.
    • Jurisdictions in which organizations have a low risk tolerance will require stronger information security controls to minimize operational risks.
    The image contains a screenshot of the organizational risk assessment. The image contains a screenshot of the security pressure analysis. The image contains a screenshot of the risk tolerance curve.

    Phase 2

    Assess Security Risks to Critical Assets

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify critical assets, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact a successful threat event would have on the organization.
    • Assess risk exposure of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions for each risk scenario through an analysis of its likelihood and impact.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Step 2.1

    Identify Risks

    Activities

    2.1.1 Identify assets

    2.1.2 Identify threats

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Define risk scenarios that identify critical assets, their vulnerabilities to relevant threats, and the adverse impact a successful threat event would have on the organization.

    This blueprint focuses on mitigating jurisdictional risks

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT Risk Management Framework. The framework includes: Risk Identification, Risk Assessment, Risk Response, and Risk Governance.

    For a deeper dive into building a risk management program, see Info-Tech’s core project blueprints on risk management:

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    Draft key risk scenarios to illustrate adverse events

    Risk scenarios help decision-makers understand how adverse events affect business goals.

    • Risk-scenario building is the process of identifying the critical factors that contribute to an adverse event and crafting a narrative that describes the circumstances and consequences if it were to happen.
    • Risk scenarios set up the risk analysis stage of the risk assessment process. They are narratives that describe in detail:
      • The asset at risk.
      • The threat that can act against the asset.
      • Their intent or motivation.
      • The circumstances and threat actor model associated with the threat event.
      • The potential effect on the organization.
      • When or how often the event might occur.

    Risk scenarios are further distilled into a single sentence or risk statement that communicates the essential elements from the scenario.

    Well-crafted risk scenarios have four components

    The second phase of the project will help you craft meaningful risk scenarios

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    An actor capable of harming an asset

    Anything of value that can be affected and results in loss

    Technique an actor uses to affect an asset

    How loss materializes

    Examples: Malicious or untrained employees, cybercriminal groups, malicious state actors

    Examples: Systems, regulated data, intellectual property, people

    Examples: Credential compromise, privilege escalation, data exfiltration

    Examples: Loss of data confidentiality, integrity, or availability; impact on staff health & safety

    Risk scenarios are concise, four to six sentence narratives that describe the core elements of forecasted adverse events. Use them to engage stakeholders with the right questions and guide them to make informed decisions about how to address and treat security risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    The next slides review five key risk scenarios prevalent in high-risk jurisdictions. Use them as examples to develop your own.

    Travel to high-risk jurisdictions requires special measures to protect staff, devices, and data

    Governmental, academic, and commercial advisors compile lists of jurisdictions that pose greater travel risks annually.

    For instance, in the US, these lists might include countries that are:

    • Subjects of travel warnings by the US Department of State.
    • Identified as high risk by other US government sources such as:
      • The Department of the Treasury Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC).
      • The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI).
      • The Office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI).
    • Compiled from academic and commercial sources, such as Control Risks.

    When securing travel to high-risk jurisdictions, you must consider personnel safety as well as data and device security.

    The image contains a diagram to present high-risk jurisdictions.

    The diagram presents high-risk jurisdictions based on US governmental sources (2021) listed on this slide.

    High-risk travel

    Likelihood: Medium

    Impact: Medium

    Key Risk Scenario #1

    Malicious state actors, cybercriminals, and competitors can threaten staff, devices, and data during travel to high-risk jurisdictions. Device theft or compromise may occur while traveling through airports, accessing hotel computer and phone networks, or in internet cafés or other public areas. Threat actors can exploit data from compromised or stolen devices to undermine the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage. They can also infect compromised devices with malware that delivers malicious payloads once they reconnect with home networks.

    Threat Actor:

    • Malicious state actors
    • Cybercriminals
    • Competitors

    Assets:

    • Staff
    • IT systems
    • Sensitive data

    Effect:

    • Compromised staff health and safety
    • Loss of data
    • Lost of system integrity

    Methods:

    • Identify, steal, or target mobile devices.
    • Compromise network, wireless, or Bluetooth connections.
    • Leverage stolen devices as a means of infecting other networks.
    • Access devices to track user location.
    • Activate microphones on devices to collect information.
    • Intercept electronic communications users send from high-risk jurisdictions.

    The data compliance landscape is a jigsaw puzzle of data protection and data residency requirements

    Since the EU passed the GDPR in 2016, jurisdictions have turned to data regulations to protect citizen data

    Data privacy concerns, nationalism, and the economic value of data are all driving jurisdictions to adopt data residency, breach notification, and cross-border data transfer regulations. As 2021 wound down to a close, nearly all the world’s 30 largest economies had some form of data regulation in place. The regulatory landscape is shifting rapidly, which complicates operations as organizations grow into new markets or engage in merger and acquisition activities.

    Global operations require special attention to data-residency requirements, data breach notification requirements, and cross-border data transfer regulations to mitigate compliance risk.

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the data regulations placed in various places around the world.

    Compliance risk

    Likelihood: Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #2

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulatory landscape threaten organizations’ ability to meet their compliance obligations from local legal and regulatory frameworks. Organizations risk reputational damage, administrative fines, criminal charges, and loss of market share. In extreme cases, organizations may lose their license to operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Shifts in the regulatory landscape can involve additional requirements for data residency, cross-border data transfer, data breach notification, and third-party risk management.

    Threat Actor:

    • Local, regional, and national state actors

    Asset:

    • Reputation, market share
    • License to operate

    Effect:

    • Administrative fines
    • Loss of reputation, brand trust, and consumer loyalty
    • Loss of market share
    • Suspension of business operations
    • Lawsuits due to collective actions and claims
    • Criminal charges

    Methods:

    • Shifts in the privacy and security regulatory landscape, including requirements for:
      • Data residency.
      • Cross-border data transfer.
      • Data breach notification.
      • Third-party security and privacy risk management.

    The incidence of insider threats varies widely by jurisdiction in unexpected ways

    On average, companies in North America, the Middle East, and Africa had the most insider incidents in 2021, while those in the Asia-Pacific region had the least.

    The Ponemon Institute set out to understand the financial consequences that result from insider threats and gain insight into how well organizations are mitigating these risks.

    In the context of this research, insider threat is defined as:

    • Employee or contractor negligence.
    • Criminal or malicious insider activities.
    • Credential theft (imposter risk).

    On average, the total cost to remediate insider threats in 2021 was US$15.4 million per incident.

    In all regions, employee or contractor negligence occurred most frequently. Organizations in North America and in the Middle East and Africa were most likely to experience insider threat incidents in 2021.

    the image contains a diagram of the world, with various places coloured in different shades of blue.

    The diagram represents the average number of insider incidents reported per organization in 2021. The results are analyzed in four regions (Ponemon Institute, 2022)

    Insider threat

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #3

    Malicious insiders, negligent employees, and credential thieves can exploit inside access to information systems to commit fraud, steal confidential or commercially valuable information, or sabotage computer systems. Insider threats are difficult to identify, especially when security is geared toward external threats. They are often familiar with the organization’s data and intellectual property as well as the methods in place to protect them. An insider may steal information for personal gain or install malicious software on information systems. They may also be legitimate users who make errors and disregard policies, which places the organization at risk.

    Threat Actor:

    • Malicious insiders
    • Negligent employees
    • Infiltrators

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • Employee credentials
    • IT systems

    Effects:

    • Loss of system integrity
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Financial loss

    Methods:

    • Infiltrators may compromise credentials.
    • Malicious or negligent insiders may use corporate email to steal or share sensitive data, including:
      • Regulated data.
      • Intellectual property.
      • Critical business information.
    • Malicious agents may facilitate data exfiltration, as well as open-port and vulnerability scans.

    The risk of advanced persistent threats is more prevalent in Central and South America and the Asia-Pacific region

    Attacks from advanced persistent threat (APT) actors are more sophisticated than traditional ones.

    • More countries will use legal indictments as part of their cyber strategy. Exposing toolsets of APT groups carried out at the governmental level will drive more states to do the same.
    • Expect APTs to increasingly target network appliances like VPN gateways as organizations continue to sustain hybrid workforces.
    • The line between APTs and state-sanctioned ransomware groups is blurring. Expect cybercriminals to wield better tools, mount more targeted attacks, and use double-extortion tactics.
    • Expect more disruption and collateral damage from direct attacks on critical infrastructure.

    Top 10 Significant Threat Actors:

    • Lazarus
    • DeathStalker
    • CactusPete
    • IAmTheKing
    • TransparentTribe
    • StrongPity
    • Sofacy
    • CoughingDown
    • MuddyWater
    • SixLittleMonkeys

    Top 10 Targets:

    • Government
    • Banks
    • Financial Institutions
    • Diplomatic
    • Telecommunications
    • Educational
    • Defense
    • Energy
    • Military
    • IT Companies
    The image contains a world map coloured in various shades of blue.
    Top 12 countries targeted by APTs (Kaspersky, 2020)

    Track notable APTs to revise your list of high-risk jurisdictions and review the latest tactics and techniques

    Governmental advisors track notable APT actors that pose greater risks.

    The CISA Shields Up site, SANS Storm Center site, and MITRE ATT&CK group site provide helpful and timely information to understand APT risks in different jurisdictions.

    The following threat actors are currently associated with cyberattacks affiliated with the Russian government.

    Activity Group

    Risks

    APT28 (GRU)

    Known as Fancy Bear, this threat group has been tied to espionage since 2004. They compromised the Hillary Clinton campaign, amid other major events.

    APT29 (SVT)

    Tied to espionage since 2008. Reportedly compromised the Democratic National Committee in 2015. Cited in the 2021 SolarWinds compromise.

    Buhtrap/RTM Group

    Group focused on financial targets since 2014. Currently known to target Russian and Ukrainian banks.

    Gamaredon

    Operating in Crimea. Aligned with Russian interests. Has previously targeted Ukrainian government officials and organizations.

    DEV-0586

    Carried out wiper malware attacks on Ukrainian targets in January 2022.

    UNC1151

    Active since 2016. Linked to information operation campaigns and the distribution of anti-NATO material.

    Conti

    Most successful ransomware gang of 2021, with US$188M revenue. Supported Russian invasion of Ukraine, threatening attacks on allied critical infrastructure.

    Sources: MITRE ATT&CK; Security Boulevard, 2022; Reuters, 2022; The Verge, 2022

    Advanced persistent threat

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: High

    Key Risk Scenario #4

    Advanced persistent threats are state actors or state-sponsored affiliates with the means to avoid detection by anti-malware software and intrusion detection systems. These highly-skilled and persistent malicious agents have significant resources with which to bypass traditional security controls, establish a foothold in the information technology infrastructure, and exfiltrate data undetected. APTs have the resources to adapt to a defender’s efforts to resist them over time. The loss of system integrity and data confidentiality over time can lead to financial losses, business continuity disruptions, and the destruction of critical infrastructure.

    Threat Actor:

    • State actors
    • State-sponsored affiliates

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • IT systems
    • Critical infrastructure

    Effects:

    • Loss of system integrity
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Financial loss
    • Business continuity disruptions
    • Infrastructure destruction

    Methods:

    • Persistent, consistent attacks using the most advanced threats and tactics to bypass security defenses.
    • The goal of APTs is to maintain access to networks for prolonged periods without being detected.
    • The median dwell time differs widely between regions. FireEye reported the mean dwell time for 2018:
      • Americas: 71 days
      • Europe, Middle East, and Africa: 177 days
      • Asia-Pacific: 204 days
    Sources: Symantec, 2011; FireEye, 2019

    Threat agents have deployed invasive technology for commercial surveillance in at least 76 countries since 2015

    State actors and their affiliates purchased and used invasive spyware from companies in Europe, Israel, and the US.

    • “Customers are predominantly repressive regimes looking for new ways to control the flow of information and stifle dissent. Less than 10% of suspected customers are considered full democracies by the Economist Intelligence Unit.” (Top10VPN, 2021)
    • Companies based in economically developed and largely democratic states are profiting off the technology.
    • The findings demonstrate the need to consider geopolitical realities when assessing high-risk jurisdictions and to take meaningful action to increase layered defenses against invasive malware.
    • Spyware is having an increasingly well-known impact on civil society. For instance, since 2016, over 50,000 individual phone numbers have been identified as potential targets by NSO Group, the Israeli manufacturers of the notorious Pegasus Spyware. The target list contained the phone numbers of politicians, journalists, activists, doctors, and academics across the world.
    • The true number of those affected by spyware is almost impossible to determine given that many fall victim to the technology and do not notice.
    The image contains a map of the world with various countries highlighted in shades of blue.

    Countries where commercial surveillance tools have been deployed (“Global Spyware Market Index,” Top10VPN, 2021)

    The risks and effects of spyware vary greatly

    Spyware can steal mundane information, track a user’s every move, and everything in between.

    Adware

    Software applications that display advertisements while the program is running.

    Keyboard Loggers

    Applications that monitor and record keystrokes. Malicious agents use them to steal credentials and sensitive enterprise data.

    Trojans

    Applications that appear harmless but inflict damage or data loss to a system.

    Mobile Spyware

    Surveillance applications that infect mobile devices via SMS or MMS channels, though the most advanced can infect devices without user input.

    State actors and their affiliates use system monitors to track browsing habits, application usage, and keystrokes and capture information from devices’ GPS location data, microphone, and camera. The most advanced system monitor spyware, such as NSO Group’s Pegasus, can infect devices without user input and record conversations from end-to-end encrypted messaging systems.

    Commercial surveillance

    Likelihood: Low to Medium

    Impact: Medium

    Key Risk Scenario #5

    Malicious agents can deploy malware on end-user devices with commercial tools available off the shelf to secretly monitor the digital activity of users. Attacks exploit widespread vulnerabilities in telecommunications protocols. They occur through email and text phishing campaigns, malware embedded in untested applications, and sophisticated zero-click attacks that deliver payloads without requiring user interactions. Attacks target sensitive as well as mundane information. They can be used to track employee activities, investigate criminal activity, or steal credentials, credit card numbers, or other personally identifiable information.

    Threat Actor:

    • State actors
    • State-sponsored affiliates

    Asset:

    • Sensitive data
    • Staff health and safety
    • IT systems

    Effects:

    • Data breaches
    • Loss of data confidentiality
    • Increased risk to staff health and safety
    • Misuse of private data
    • Financial loss

    Methods:

    • Email and text phishing attacks that delivery malware payloads
    • Sideloading untested applications from a third-party source rather than an official retailer
    • Sophisticated zero-click attacks that deliver payloads without requiring user interaction

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    The tool included with this blueprint can help you draft risk scenarios and risk statements in this section.

    The risk register will capture a list of critical assets and their vulnerabilities, the threats that endanger them, and the adverse effect your organization may face.

    The image includes two screenshots of the jurisdictional risk register and heatmap tool. The image contains a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdiction.

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    2.1.1 Identify assets

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, consider critical or mission-essential functions in high-risk jurisdictions and the systems on which they depend. Brainstorm a list of the organization’s mission-supporting assets in high-risk jurisdictions. Consider:
    • Staff
    • Critical IT systems
    • Sensitive data
    • Critical operational processes
  • On a whiteboard, brainstorm the potential adverse effect of malicious agents in high-risk jurisdictions compromising critical assets. Consider the impact on:
    • Information systems.
    • Sensitive or regulated data.
    • Staff health and safety.
    • Critical operations and objectives.
    • Organizational finances.
    • Reputation and brand loyalty

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Input

    Output

    • Corporate strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Security strategy
    • Business impact analyses
    • A list of the organization’s mission-supporting assets

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Whiteboard
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • System owner
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    The image contains an example of the activity mentioned in the text above.

    Model threats to narrow the range of scenarios

    Motives and capabilities to perform attacks on critical assets vary across different threat actors.

    Category

    Actions

    Motivation

    Sophistication

    Nation-states

    Cyberespionage, cyberattacks

    Geopolitical

    High. Dedicated resources and personnel, extensive planning and coordination.

    Proxy organizations

    Espionage, destructive attacks

    Geopolitical, Ideological, Profit

    Moderate. Some planning and support functions and technical expertise.

    Cybercrime

    Theft, fraud, extortion

    Profit

    Moderate. Some planning and support functions and technical expertise.

    Hacktivists

    Disrupt operations, attack brands, release sensitive data

    Ideological

    Low. Rely on widely available tools that require little skill to deploy.

    Insiders

    Destruction or release of sensitive data, theft, exposure through negligence

    Incompetence, Discontent

    Internal access. Acting on their own or in concert with any of the above.

    • Criminals, hacktivists, and insiders vary in sophistication. Some criminal groups demonstrate a high degree of sophistication; however, a large cyber event that damages critical infrastructure does not align with their incentives to make money at minimal risk.
    • Proxy actors conduct offensive cyber operations on behalf of a beneficiary. They may be acting on behalf of a competitor, national government, or group of individuals.
    • Nation-states engage in long-term espionage and offensive cyber operations that support geopolitical and strategic policy objectives.

    2.1.2 Identify threats

    1 – 2 hours

    1. Review the outputs from activity 1.1.1 and activity 2.1.1.
    2. Identify threat agents that could undermine the security of critical assets in high-risk jurisdictions. Include internal and external actors.
    3. Assess their motives, means, and opportunities.
    • Which critical assets are most attractive? Why?
    • What paths and vulnerabilities can threat agents exploit to reach critical assets without going through a control?
    • How could they defeat existing controls? Draw on the MITRE framework to inform your analysis.
    • Once agents defeat a control, what further attack can they launch?

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    Inputs for risk scenario identification

    Input

    Output

    • Jurisdictional assessment from activity 1.1.1
    • Critical assets from activity 2.1.1
    • Potential vulnerabilities from:
      • Security control gap analysis
      • Security risk register
    • Threat intelligence
    • MITRE framework
    • A list of critical assets, threat agents, vulnerabilities, and potential attack vectors.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Whiteboard
    • Security team
    • Infrastructure & Operations team
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    2.1.2 Identify threats (continued)

    1 – 2 hours

    1. On a whiteboard, brainstorm how threat agents will exploit vulnerabilities in critical assets to reach their goal. Redefine attack vectors to capture what could result from a successful initial attack.

    For example:

    • State actors and cybercriminals may steal or compromise end-user devices during travel to high-risk jurisdictions using malware they embed in airport charging stations, internet café networks, or hotel business centers.
    • Compromised devices may infect corporate networks and threaten sensitive data once they reconnect to them.

    Threat

    Exploits an

    Asset

    Using a

    Method

    Creating an

    Effect

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 2.1.2 as described in the text above.

    Bring together the critical risk elements into a single risk scenario

    Summarize the scenario further into a single risk statement

    Risk Scenario: High-Risk Travel

    State actors and cybercriminals can threaten staff, devices, and data during travel to high-risk jurisdictions. Device theft or compromise may occur while traveling through airports, accessing hotel computer and phone networks, or in internet cafés or other public areas. Threat actors can exploit data from compromised or stolen devices to undermine the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage. They can also infect compromised devices with malware that delivers malicious payloads once they reconnect with home networks.

    Risk Statement

    Cybercriminals compromise end-user devices during travel to high-risk jurisdictions, jeopardizing staff safety and leading to loss of sensitive data.

    Risk Scenario: Compliance Risk

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulatory landscape threaten an organization’s ability to meet its compliance obligations from local legal and regulatory frameworks. Organizations that fail to do so risk reputational damage, administrative fines, criminal charges, and loss of market share. In extreme cases, organizations may lose their license to operate in high-risk jurisdictions. Shifts in the regulatory landscape can involve additional requirements for data residency, cross-border data transfer, data breach notification, and third-party risk management.

    Risk Statement

    Rapid changes in the privacy and security regulations landscape threaten our ability to remain compliant, leading to reputational and financial loss.

    Fill out the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    The tool is populated with data from two key risk scenarios: high-risk travel and compliance risk.

    The image includes two screenshots of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    1. Label the risk in Tab 3, Column B.
    2. Record your risk scenario in Tab 3, Column C.
    3. Record your risk statement in Tab 3, Column D.
    4. Identify the applicable jurisdictions in Tab 3, Column E.
    5. You can further categorize the scenario as:
      • an enterprise risk (Column G).
      • an IT risk (Column H).

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    Step 2.2

    Assess Risk Exposure

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify existing controls

    2.2.2 Assess likelihood and impact

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assess risk exposure for each risk scenario through an analysis of its likelihood and impact.

    Brush up on risk assessment essentials

    The next step will help you prioritize IT risks based on severity.

    Likelihood of Occurrence X Likelihood of Impact = Risk Severity

    Likelihood of occurrence: How likely the risk is to occur.

    Likelihood of impact: The likely impact of a risk event.

    Risk severity: The significance of the risk.

    Evaluate risk severity against the risk tolerance thresholds and the cost of risk response.

    Identify existing controls before you proceed

    Existing controls will reduce the inherent likelihood and impact of the risk scenario you face.

    Existing controls were put in place to avoid, mitigate, or transfer key risks your organization faced in the past. Without considering existing controls, you run the risk of overestimating the likelihood and impact of the risk scenarios your organization faces in high-risk jurisdictions.

    For instance, the ability to remote-wipe corporate-owned devices will reduce the potential impact of a device lost or compromised during travel to high-risk jurisdictions.

    As you complete the risk assessment for each scenario, document existing controls that reduce their inherent likelihood and impact.

    2.2.1 Document existing controls

    6-10 hours

    1. Document the Risk Category and Existing Controls in the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.
      • Tactical controls apply to individual risks only. For instance, the ability to remote-wipe devices mitigates the impact of a device lost in a high-risk jurisdiction.
      • Strategic controls apply to multiple risks. For instance, deploying MFA for critical applications mitigates the likelihood that malicious actors can compromise a lost device and impedes their access in devices they do compromise.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios
    • Existing controls for risk scenarios

    Materials

    Participants

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Assess the risk scenarios you identified in Phase 1

    The risk register is the central repository for risks in high-risk jurisdictions.

    • Use the second tab of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to create likelihood, impact, and risk tolerance assessment scales to evaluate every risk event effectively.
    • Severity-level assessment is a “first pass” of your risk scenarios that will reveal your organization’s most severe risks in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • You can incorporate expected cost calculations into your evaluation to assess scenarios in greater detail.
    • Expected cost represents how much you would expect to pay in an average year for each risk event. Expected cost calculations can help compare IT risks to non-IT risks that may not use the same scales and communicate system-level risk to the business in a language they will understand.

    Expected cost calculations may not be practical. Determining robust likelihood and impact values to produce cost estimates can be challenging and time consuming. Use severity-level assessments as a first pass to make the case for risk mitigation measures and take your lead from stakeholders.

    The image contains two screenshots of the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture and analyze your data.

    2.2.2 Assess likelihood and impact

    6-10 hours

    1. Assign each risk scenario a likelihood of occurrence and a likely impact level that represents the impact of the scenario on the whole organization considering existing controls. Record your results in Tab 3, column R and S, respectively.
    2. You can further dissect likelihood and impact into component parameters but focus first on total likelihood and impact to keep the task manageable.
    3. As you input the first few likelihood and impact values, compare them to one another to ensure consistency and accuracy. For instance, is a device lost in a high-risk jurisdiction truly more impactful than a device compromised with commercial surveillance software?
    4. The tool will calculate the probability of risk exposure based on the likelihood and consequence associated with the scenario. The results are published in Tab 3, Column T.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios
    • Assessed the likelihood of occurrence and impact for all identified risk events

    Materials

    Participants

    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Laptop
    • Projector
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Business stakeholders
    • Enterprise Risk Management

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool.

    Refine your risk assessment to justify your estimates

    Document the rationale behind each value and the level of consensus in group discussions.

    Stakeholders will likely ask you to explain some of the numbers you assigned to likelihood and impact assessments. Pointing to an assessment methodology will give your estimates greater credibility.

    • Assign one individual to take notes during the assessment exercise.
    • Have them document the main rationale behind each value and the level of consensus.

    The goal is to develop robust intersubjective estimates of the likelihood and impact of a risk scenario.

    We assigned a 50% likelihood rating to a risk scenario. Were we correct?

    Assess the truth of the following statements to test likelihood assessments. In this case, do these two statements seem true?

    • The risk event will likely occur once in the next two years, all things being equal.
    • In two nearly identical organizations, one out of two will experience the risk event this year.
    The image includes a screenshot of the High-Risk Travel Jurisdictions.

    Phase 3

    Execute Response

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.
    • Build an initiative roadmap that identifies and applies relevant controls to protect critical assets. Identify key risk indicators to monitor progress.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Step 3.1

    Treat Security Risks

    Activities

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Analyze and select risk responses

    The next step will help you treat the risk scenarios you built in Phase 2.

    Identify

    Identify risk responses.

    Predict

    Predict the effectiveness of the risk response, if implemented, by estimating the residual likelihood and impact of the risk.

    Calculate

    The tool will calculate the residual severity of the risk after applying the risk response.

    The first part of the phase outlines project activities. The second part elaborates on high-risk travel and compliance risk, the two key risk scenarios we are following throughout the project. Use the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool to capture your work.

    Analyze likelihood and impact to identify response

    The image contains a diagram of he risk response analysis. Risk Transfer and Risk Avoidance has the most likelihood, and Risk Acceptance and Risk Mitigation have the most impact. Risk Avoidance has the most likelihood and most impact in regards to risk response.

    3.1.1 Identify and assess risk response

    Complete the following steps for each risk scenario.

    1. Identify a risk response action that will help reduce the likelihood of occurrence or the impact if the scenario were to occur. Indicate the type of risk response (avoidance, mitigation, transfer, acceptance, or no risk exists).
    2. Assign each risk response action a residual likelihood level and a residual impact level. This is the same step you performed in Activity 2.2.2, but you are now are estimating the likelihood and impact of the risk event after you implemented the risk response action successfully. The Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool will generate a residual risk severity level for each risk event.
    3. Identify the potential Risk Action Owner (Project Manager) if the response is selected and turned into an IT project, and document this in the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool .
    4. For each risk event, document risk response actions, residual likelihood and impact levels, and residual risk severity level.

    Input

    Output

    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • Risk scenario mitigation plan

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Download the Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool

    Step 3.2

    Mitigate Travel Risk

    Activities

    3.2.1 Develop a travel policy

    3.2.2 Develop travel procedures

    3.2.3 Design high-risk travel guidelines

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Identify controls to mitigate jurisdictional risk

    This section provides guidance on the most prevalent risk scenarios identified in Phase 2 and provides a more in-depth examination of the two most prevalent ones, high-risk travel and compliance risk. Determine the appropriate response to each risk scenario to keep global risks to critical assets aligned with the organization’s risk tolerance.

    Key Risk Scenarios

    • High-Risk Travel
    • Compliance Risk
    • Insider Threat
    • Advanced Persistent Threat
    • Commercial Surveillance

    Travel risk is a common concern in organizations with global operations

    • The security of staff, devices, and data is one of the biggest challenges facing organizations with a global footprint. Working and traveling in unpredictable environments will aways carry a degree of risk, but organizations can do much to develop a safer and more secure working environment.
    • Compromised or stolen devices can provide threat actors with access to data that could compromise the organization’s strategic, economic, or competitive advantage or expose the organization to regulatory risk.
    • For many organizations, security risk assessments, security plans, travel security procedures, security training, and incident reporting systems are a key part of their operating language.
    • The following section provides a simple structure to help organizations demystify travel in high-risk jurisdictions.

    The image contains a diagram to present high-risk jurisdictions.

    Before you leave

    • Identify high-risk countries.
    • Enable controls.
    • Limit what you pack.

    During your trip

    • Assume you are monitored.
    • Limit access to systems.
    • Prevent theft.

    When you return

    • Change your password.
    • Restore your devices.

    Case study

    Higher Education: Camosun College

    Interview: Evan Garland

    Frame additional security controls as a value-added service.

    Situation

    The director of the international department at Camosun College reached out to IT security for additional support. Department staff often traveled to hostile environments. They were concerned malicious agents would either steal end-user devices or compromise them and access sensitive data. The director asked IT security for options that would better protect traveling staff, their devices, and the information they contain.

    Challenges

    First, controls would need to admit both work and personal use of corporate devices. Staff relied exclusively on work devices for travel to mitigate the risk of personal device theft. Personal use of corporate devices during travel was common. Second, controls needed to strike the right balance between friction and effortless access. Traveling staff had only intermittent access to IT support. Restrictive controls could prevent them from accessing their devices and data altogether.

    Solution

    IT consulted staff to discuss light-touch solutions that would secure devices without introducing too much complexity or compromising functionality. They then planned security controls that involved user interaction and others that did not and identified training requirements.

    Results

    Controls with user interaction

    Controls without user interaction

    • Multifactor authentication for college systems and collaboration platforms
    • Password manager for both work and personal use for staff for stronger passwords and practices
    • Security awareness training to help traveling staff identify potential threats while traveling through airports or accessing public Wi-Fi.
    • Drive encryption and always-on VPN to protect data at rest and in transit
    • Increased setting for phishing and spam filtering for traveling staff email
    • Enhanced anti-malware/endpoint detection and response (EDR) solution for traveling laptops

    Build a program to mitigate travel risks

    There is no one-size-fits-all solution.

    The most effective solution will take advantage of existing risk management policies, processes, and procedures at your organization.

    • Develop a framework. Outline the organization’s approach to high-risk travel, including the policies, procedures, and mechanisms put in place to ensure safe travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Draft a policy. Outline the organization’s risk attitude and key security principles and define roles and responsibilities. Include security responsibilities and obligations in job descriptions of staff members and senior managers.
    • Provide flexible options. Inherent travel risk will vary from one jurisdiction to another. You will likely not find an approach that works for every case. Establish locally relevant measures and plans in different security contexts and risk environments.
    • Look for quick wins. Identify measures or requirements that you can establish quickly but that can have a positive effect on the security of staff, data, and devices.
    • Monitor and review. Undertake periodic reviews of the organization’s security approach and management framework, as well as their implementation, to ensure the framework remains effective.

    3.2.1 Develop a travel policy

    1. Work with your business leaders to build a travel policy for high-risk jurisdictions. The policy should be a short and accessible document structured around four key sections:
      • A statement on the importance of staff security and safety, the scope of the policy, and who it applies to (staff, consultants, contractors, volunteers, visitors, accompanying dependants, etc.).
      • A principles section explaining the organization’s security culture, risk attitude, and the key principles that shape the organization’s approach to staff security and safety.
      • A responsibilities section setting out the organization’s security risk management structure and the roles and actions allocated to specific positions.
      • A minimal security requirements section establishing the specific security requirements that must be in place in all locations and specific locations.
    2. Common security principles include:
    • Shared responsibility – Managing risks to staff is a shared organizational responsibility.
    • Acknowledgment of risk – Managing security will not remove all risks. Staff need to appreciate, as part of their informed consent, that they are still exposed to risk.
    • Primacy of life – Staff safety is of the highest importance. Staff should never place themselves at excessive risk to meet program objectives or protect property.
    • Proportionate risk – Risks must be assessed to ensure they are proportionate to the benefits organizational activities provide and the ability to manage those risks.
    • Right to withdraw – Staff have the right to withdraw from or refuse to take up work in a particular area due to security concerns.
    • No right to remain – The organization has the right to suspend activities that it considers too dangerous.
  • Cross-reference the organization’s other governing policies that outline requirements related to security risk management, such as the health and safety policy, access control policy, and acceptable use of security assets.
  • Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Travel policy for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Develop security plans for high-risk travel

    Security plans advise staff on how to manage the risk identified in assessments.

    Security plans are key country documents that outline the security measures and procedures in place and the responsibilities and resources required to implement them. Security plans should be established in high-risk jurisdictions where your organization has a regular, significant presence. Security plans must remain relevant and accessible documents that address the specific risks that exist in that location, and, if appropriate, are specific about where the measures apply and who they apply to. Plans should be updated regularly, especially following significant incidents or changes in the operating environment or activities.

    Key Components

    Critical information – One-page summary of pertinent information for easy access and quick reference (e.g. curfew times, no-go areas, important contacts).

    Overview – Purpose and scope of the document, responsibilities for security plan, organization’s risk attitude, date of completion and review date, and a summary of the security strategy and policy.

    Current Context – Summary of current operating context and overall security situation; main risks to staff, assets, and operations; and existing threats and risk rating.

    Procedures – Simple security procedures that staff should adhere to in order to prevent incidents and how to respond should problems arise. Standard operating procedures (SOPs) should address key risks identified in the assessment.

    Security levels – The organization's security levels/phases, with situational indicators that reflect increasing risks to staff in that context and location and specific actions/measures required in response to increasing insecurity.

    Incident reporting – The procedures and responsibilities for reporting security-related incidents; for example, the type of incidents to be reported, the reporting structure, and the format for incident reporting.

    Determine travel risk

    Tailor your risk response to the security risk assessment you conducted in earlier stages of this project.

    Ratings are formulated by assessing several types of risk, including conflict, political/civil unrest, terrorism, crime, and health and infrastructure risks.

    Rating

    Description (Examples)

    Recommended Action

    Low

    Generally secure with adequate physical security. Low violent crime rates. Some civil unrest during significant events. Acts of terrorism rare. Risks associated with natural disasters limited and health threats mainly preventable.

    Basic personal security, travel, and health precautions required.

    Moderate

    Periodic civil unrest. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups active with sporadic acts of terrorism. Staff at risk from common and violent crime. Transport and communications services are unreliable and safety records are poor. Jurisdiction prone to natural disasters or disease epidemics.

    Increased vigilance and routine security procedures required.

    High

    Regular periods of civil unrest, which may target foreigners. Antigovernment, insurgent, or extremist groups very active and threaten political or economic stability. Violent crime rates high and targeting of foreigners is common. Infrastructure and emergency services poor. May be regular disruption to transportation or communications services. Certain areas off-limits to foreigners. Jurisdictions experiencing a natural disaster or a disease epidemic are considered high risk.

    High level of vigilance and effective, context-specific security precautions required.

    Extreme

    Undergoing active conflict or persistent civil unrest. Risk of being caught up in a violent incident or attack is very high. Civil authorities may have lost control of significant portions of the country. Lines between criminality and political and insurgent violence are blurred. Foreigners are likely to be denied access to significant parts of the country. Transportation and communication services are severely degraded or non-existent. Violence presents a direct threat to staff security.

    Stringent security precautions essential and may not be sufficient to prevent serious incidents.

    Program activities may be suspended and staff withdrawn at very short notice.

    3.2.2 Develop travel procedures

    1. Work with your business leaders to build travel procedures for high-risk jurisdictions. The procedures should be tailored to the risk assessment and address the risk scenarios identified in Phase 2.
    2. Use the categories outlined in the next two slides to structure the procedure. Address all types of travel, detail security measures, and outline what the organization expects of travelers before, during, and after their trip.
    3. Consider the implementation of special measures to limit the impact of a potential security event, including:
      • Information end-user device loaner programs.
      • Temporary travel service email accounts.
    4. Specify what happens when staff add personal travel to their work trip to cover issues such as insurance, check-in, actual travel times, etc.
    5. Discuss the rationale for each procedure. Ensure the components align with the policy statements outlined in the high-risk travel policy developed in the previous step.

    Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • High-risk travel policy
    • Travel procedures for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Draft procedures to mitigate travel risks

    Address all types of travel, detail security measures, and outline what the organization expects of travelers before, during, and after their trip

    Introduction

    Clarifies who the procedures apply to. Highlights any differences in travel security requirements or support provided to staff, consultants, partners, and official visitors.

    Travel risk ratings

    Explains the travel or country risk rating system, how staff access the information, the different categories and indicators, and their implications.

    Roles and responsibilities

    Clarifies the responsibilities of travelers, their line managers or contact points, and senior management regarding travel security and how this changes for destinations with higher risk ratings.

    Travel authorization

    Stipulates who in the organization authorizes travel, the various compliance measures required, and how this changes for destinations with higher risk ratings.

    Travel risk assessment

    Explains when travel risk assessments are required, the template that should be used, and who approves the completed assessments.

    Travel security procedures should specify what happens when staff add personal travel to their work trip to cover issues such as insurance, check-in, actual travel times, etc.

    Pre-travel briefings

    Outlines the information that must be provided to travelers prior to departure, the type of briefing required and who provides it, and how these requirements change as risk ratings increase.

    Security training

    Explain security training required prior to travel. This may vary depending on the country’s risk rating. Includes information on training waiver system, including justifications and authorization.

    Traveler profile forms

    Travelers should complete a profile form, which includes personal details, emergency contacts, medical details, social media footprint, and proof-of-life questions (in contexts where there are abduction risks).

    Check-in protocol

    Specifies who travelers must maintain contact with while traveling and how often, as well as the escalation process in case of loss of contact. The frequency of check-ins should reflect the increase in the risk rating for the destination.

    Emergency procedures

    Outlines the organization's emergency procedures for security and medical emergencies.

    3.2.3 Design high-risk travel guidelines

    • Supplement the high-risk travel policies and procedures with guidelines to help international travelers stay safe.
    • The document is intended for an end-user audience and should reflect your organization’s policies and procedures for the use of information and information systems during international travel.
    • Use the Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel template in concert with this blueprint to provide guidance on what end users can do to stay safe before they leave, during their trip, and when they return.
    • Consider integrating the guidelines into specialized security awareness training sessions that target end users who travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • The guidelines should supplement and align with existing technical controls.

    Input

    Output

    • List of high-risk jurisdictions
    • Risk scenarios from Phase 2
    • High-risk travel policy
    • High-risk travel procedure
    • Travel guidelines for high-risk jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Jurisdictional Risk Register and Heatmap Tool
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Digital Safety Guidelines for International Travel template

    Step 3.3

    Mitigate Compliance Risk

    Activities

    3.3.1 Identify data localization obligations

    3.3.2 Integrate obligations into IT system design

    3.3.3 Document data processing activities

    3.3.4 Choose the right mechanism

    3.3.5 Implement the appropriate controls

    3.3.6 Identify data breach notification obligations

    3.3.7 Integrate data breach notification into incident response

    3.3.8 Identify vendor security and data protection requirements

    3.3.9 Build due diligence questionnaire

    3.3.10 Build appropriate data processing agreement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Security team
    • Risk and Compliance
    • IT leadership (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritize and treat global risks to critical assets based on their value and exposure.

    Compliance risk is a prevalent risk in organizations with a global footprint

    • The legal and regulatory landscape is evolving rapidly to keep step with the pace of technological change. Security and privacy leaders are expected to mitigate the risk of noncompliance as the organization expands to new jurisdictions.
    • Organizations with a global footprint must stay abreast of local regulations and provide risk management guidance to business leaders to support global operations.
    • This sections describes four compliance risks in this context:
      • Cross-border data transfer
      • Third-party risk management
      • Data breach notification
      • Data residency

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Data Residency

    Gap Controls

    • Identify and document the data localization obligations for the jurisdictions that the organization is operating in.
    • Design and implement IT systems that satisfy the data localization requirements.
    • Comply with data localization obligations within each jurisdiction.

    Heatmap of Global Data Residency Regulations

    The image contains a screenshot of a picture of a world map with various shades of blue to demonstrate the heatmap of global data residency regulations.
    Source: InCountry, 2021

    Examples of Data Residency Requirements

    Country

    Data Type

    Local Storage Requirements

    Australia

    Personal data – heath record

    My Health Records Act 2012

    China

    Personal information — critical information infrastructure operators

    Cybersecurity law

    Government cloud data

    Opinions of the Office of the Central Leading Group for Cyberspace Affairs on Strengthening Cybersecurity Administration of Cloud Computing Services for Communist Party and Government Agencies

    India

    Government email data

    The Public Records Act of 1993

    Indonesia

    Data held by electronic system operator for the public service

    Regulation 82 concerning “Electronic System and Transaction Operation”

    Germany

    Government cloud service data

    Criteria for the procurement and use of cloud services by the federal German administration

    Russia

    Personal data

    The amendments of Data Protection Act No. 152 FZ

    Vietnam

    Data held by internet service providers

    The Decree on Management, Provision, and Use of Internet Services and Information Content Online (Decree 72)

    US

    Government cloud service data

    Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement: Network Penetration Reporting and Contracting for Cloud Services (DFARS Case 2013-D018)

    3.3.1 Identify data localization obligations

    1-2 hours

    1. Work with your business leaders to identify and document the jurisdictions where your organization is operating in or providing services and products to consumers within.
    2. Work with your legal team to identify and document all relevant data localization obligations for the data your organization generates, collects, and processes in order to operate your business.
    3. Record your data localization obligations in the table below.

    Jurisdiction

    Relevant Regulations

    Local Storage Requirements

    Date Type

    Input

    Output

    • List of jurisdictions your organization is operating in
    • Relevant security and data protection regulations
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Completed list of data localization obligations

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.2 Integrate obligations into your IT system design

    1-2 hours

    1. Work with your IT department to design the IT architecture and systems to satisfy the data localization requirements.
    2. The table below provides a checklist for integrating privacy considerations into your IT systems.

    Item

    Consideration

    Answer

    Supporting Document

    1

    Have you identified business services that process data that will be subject to localization requirements?

    2

    Have you identified IT systems associated with the business services mentioned above?

    3

    Have you established a data inventory (i.e. data types, business purposes) for the IT systems mentioned above?

    4

    Have you established a data flow diagram for the data identified above?

    5

    Have you identified the types of data that should be stored locally?

    6

    Have you confirmed whether a copy of the data locally stored will satisfy the obligations?

    7

    Have you confirmed whether an IT redesign is needed or whether modifications (e.g. adding a server) to the IT systems would satisfy the obligations?

    8

    Have you confirmed whether access from another jurisdiction is allowed?

    9

    Have you identified how long the data should be stored?

    Input

    Output

    • Data localization obligations
    • Business services that process data that will be subject to localization requirements
    • IT systems associated with business services
    • Data inventory and data flows
    • Completed checklist of localization obligations for IT system design

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Cross-Border Transfer

    Gap Controls

    • Know where you transfer your data.
    • Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different requirements for the cross-border transfer of personal data.
    • Adopt and implement a proper cross-border data transfer mechanism in accordance with applicable privacy laws and regulations.
    • Re-evaluate at appropriate intervals.

    Which cross-border transfer mechanism should I choose?

    Transfer Mechanism

    Advantages

    Disadvantages

    Standard Contractual Clauses (SCC)

    • Easy to implement
    • No DPA (data processing agreement) approval
    • Not suitable for complex data transfers
    • Do not meet business agility
    • Needs legal solution

    Binding Corporate Rules (BCRs)

    • Meets business agility needs
    • Raises trust in the organization
    • Doubles as solution for art. 24/25 of the GDPR
    • Sets high compliance maturity level
    • Takes time to draft/implement
    • Requires DPA approval (scrutiny)
    • Requires culture of compliance
    • Approved by one "lead" authority and two other "co-lead“ authorities
    • Takes usually between six and nine months for the approval process only

    Code of Conduct

    • Raises trust in the sector
    • Self-regulation instead of law
    • No code of conduct approved yet
    • Takes time to draft/implement
    • Requires DPA approval and culture of compliance
    • Needs of organization may not be met

    Certification

    • Raises trust in the organization
    • No certification schemes available yet
    • Risk of compliance at minimum necessary
    • Requires audits

    Consent

    • Legal certainty
    • Transparent
    • Administrative burden
    • Some data subjects are incapable of consenting all or nothing

    3.3.3 Document data processing activities

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify and document the following information:
      • Name of business process
      • Purposes of processing
      • Lawful basis
      • Categories of data subjects and personal data
      • Data subject categories
      • Which system the data resides in
      • Recipient categories
      • Third country/international organization
      • Documents for appropriate safeguards for international transfer (adequacy, SCCs, BCRs, etc.)
      • Description of mitigating measures

    Input

    Output

    • Name of business process
    • Categories of personal data
    • Which system the data resides
    • Third country/international organization
    • Documents for appropriate safeguards for international transfer
    • Completed list of data processing activities

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.4 Choose the right mechanism

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different requirements for the cross-border transfer of personal data. For example, the EU’s GDPR and China’s Personal Information Protection Law require proper cross-border transfer mechanisms before the data transfers. Your organization should decide which cross-border transfer mechanism is the best fit for your cross-border data transfer scenarios.
    2. Use the following table to identify and document the pros and cons of each data transfer mechanism and the final decision.

    Data Transfer Mechanism

    Pros

    Cons

    Final Decision

    SCC

    BCR

    Code of Conduct

    Certification

    Consent

    Input

    Output

    • List of relevant data transfer mechanisms
    • Assessment of the pros and cons of each mechanism
    • Final decision regarding which data transfer mechanism is the best fit for your organization

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.5 Implement the appropriate controls

    1-3 hours

    • One of the most common mechanisms is standard contractual clauses (SCCs).
    • Use Info-Tech’s Standard Contractual Clauses Template to facilitate your cross-border transfer activities.
    • Identify and check whether the following core components are covered in your SCC and record the results in the table below.
    # Core Components Status Note
    1 Purpose and scope
    2 Effect and invariability of the Clauses
    3 Description of the transfer(s)
    4 Data protection safeguards
    5 Purpose limitation
    6 Transparency
    7 Accuracy and data minimization
    8 Duration of processing and erasure or return of data
    9 Storage limitation
    10 Security of processing
    11 Sensitive data
    12 Onward transfers
    13 Processing under the authority of the data importer
    14 Documentation and compliance
    15 Use of subprocessors
    16 Data subject rights
    17 Redress
    18 Liability
    19 Local laws and practices affecting compliance with the Clauses
    20 Noncompliance with the Clauses and termination
    21 Description of data processing activities, such as list of parties, description of transfer, etc.
    22 Technical and organizational measures
    InputOutput
    • Description of the transfer(s)
    • Duration of processing and erasure or return of data
    • Onward transfers
    • Use of subprocessors
    • Etc.
    • Draft of the standard contractual clauses (SCC)
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: High

    Impact: Medium to High

    Data Breach

    Gap Controls

    • Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different obligations for data breach reporting.
    • Document the notification obligations for various business scenarios, such as controller to DPA, controller to data subject, and processor to controller.
    • Integrate breach notification obligations into security incident response process.

    Examples of Data Breach Notification Obligations

    Location

    Regulation/ Standard

    Reporting Obligation

    EU

    GDPR

    72 hours

    China

    PIPL

    Immediately

    US

    HIPAA

    No later than 60 days

    Canada

    PIPEDA

    As soon as feasible

    Global

    PCI DSS

    • Visa – immediately after breach discovered
    • Mastercard – within 24 hours of discovering breach
    • American Express – immediately after breach discovered

    Summary of US State Data Breach Notification Statutes

    The image contains a graph to show the summary of the US State Data Breach Notification Statutes.

    Source: Davis Wright Tremaine

    3.3.6 Identify data breach notification obligations

    1-2 hours

    1. Identify jurisdictions that your organization is operating in and that impose different obligations for data breach reporting.
    2. Document the notification obligations for various business scenarios, such as controller to DPA, controller to data subject, and processor to controller.
    3. Record your data breach obligations in the table below.
    Region Regulation/Standard Reporting Obligation

    Input

    Output

    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Documentation of data breach reporting obligations in applicable jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.7 Integrate data breach notification into incident response

    1-2 hours

    • Integrate breach notification obligations into the security incident response process. Understand the security incident management framework.
    • All incident runbooks follow the same process: detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activity.
    • The table below provides a basic checklist for you to consider when implementing your data breach and incident handling process.
    # Phase Considerations Status Notes
    1 Prepare Ensure the appropriate resources are available to best handle an incident.
    2 Detect Leverage monitoring controls to actively detect threats.
    3 Analyze Distill real events from false positives.
    4 Contain Isolate the threat before it can cause additional damage.
    5 Eradicate Eliminate the threat from your operating environment.
    6 Recover Restore impacted systems to a normal state of operations.
    7 Report Report data breaches to relevant regulators and data subjects if required.
    8 Post-Incident Activities Conduct a lessons-learned post-mortem analysis.
    InputOutput
    • Security and data protection incident response steps
    • Key considerations for integrating data breach notifications into incident response
    • Data breach notifications integrated into the incident response process
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Security team
    • Privacy team
    • Legal team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Compliance with local obligations

    Likelihood: High

    Impact: Medium to High

    Third-Party Risk

    Gap Controls

    • Build an end-to-end third-party security and privacy risk management process.
    • Perform internal due diligence prior to selecting a service provider.
    • Stipulate the security and privacy protection obligations of the third party in a legally binding document such as contract or data processing agreement, etc.

    End-to-End Third-Party Security and Privacy Risk Management

    1. Pre-Contract
    • Due diligence check
  • Signing of Contract
    • Data processing agreement
  • Post-Contract
    • Continuous monitoring
    • Regular check or audit
  • Termination of Contract
    • Data deletion
    • Access deprovisioning

    Examples of Vendor Security Management Requirements

    Region

    Law/Standard

    Section

    EU

    General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

    Article 28 (1)

    Article 46 (1)

    US

    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

    §164.308(b)(1)

    US

    New York Department of Financial Services Cybersecurity Requirements

    500.11(a)

    Global

    ISO 27002:2013

    15.1.1

    15.1.2

    15.1.3

    15.2.1

    15.2.2

    US

    NIST 800-53

    SA-12

    SA-12 (2)

    US

    NIST Cybersecurity Framework

    ID-SC-1

    ID-SC-2

    ID-SC-3

    ID-SC-4

    Canada

    OSFI Cybersecurity Guidelines

    4.25

    4.26

    3.3.8 Identify vendor security and data protection requirements

    1-2 hours

    • Effective vendor security risk management is an end-to-end process that includes assessment, risk mitigation, and periodic reassessments.
    • An efficient and effective assessment process can only be achieved when all stakeholders are participating.
    • Identify and document your vendor security and data protection requirements in the table below.
    Region Law/Standard Section Requirements

    Input

    Output

    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Documentation of vendor security and data protection obligations in applicable jurisdictions

    Materials

    Participants

    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.9 Build due diligence questionnaire

    1-2 hours

    Perform internal due diligence prior to selecting a service provider.

    1. Build and right-size your vendor security questionnaire by leveraging Info-Tech’s Vendor Security Questionnaire template.
    2. Document your vendor security questionnaire in the table below.
    # Question Vendor Request Vendor Comments
    1 Document Requests
    2 Asset Management
    3 Governance
    4 Supply Chain Risk Management
    5 Identify Management, Authentication, and Access Control
    InputOutput
    • List of regions and jurisdictions your business is operating in
    • List of relevant regulations and standards
    • Business security and data protection requirements and expectations
    • Draft of due diligence questionnaire
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    3.3.10 Build appropriate data processing agreement

    1-2 hours

    1. Stipulate the security and privacy protection obligations of the third party in a legally binding document such as contract or data processing agreement, etc.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Processing Agreement Template to put the language into your legally binding document.
    3. Use the table below to check whether core components of a typical DPA are covered in your document.
    # Core Components Status Note
    1 Processing of personal data
    2 Scope of application and responsibilities
    3 Processor's obligations
    4

    Controller's obligations

    5 Data subject requests
    6 Right to audit and inspection
    7 Subprocessing
    8 Data breach management
    9 Security controls
    10 Transfer of personal data
    11 Duty of confidentiality
    12 Compliance with applicable laws
    13 Service termination
    14 Liability and damages
    InputOutput
    • Processing of personal data
    • Processor’s obligations
    • Controller’s obligations
    • Subprocessing
    • Etc.
    • Draft of data processing agreement (DPA)
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template
    • Legal team
    • Privacy team
    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • Risk Management

    Download the Guidelines for Compliance With Local Security and Privacy Laws Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    By following Info-Tech’s methodology for securing global operations, you have:

    • Evaluated the security context of your organization’s global operations.
    • Identified security risks scenarios unique to high-risk jurisdictions and assessed the exposure of critical assets.
    • Planned and executed a response.

    You have gone through a deeper analysis of two key risk scenarios that affect global operations:

    • Travel to high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Compliance risk.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshop@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    The image contains a picture of Michel Hebert.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    The image contains a screenshot of High-Risk Travel Jurisdictions.

    Identify High-Risk Jurisdictions

    Develop requirements to identify high-risk jurisdictions.

    The image contains a screenshot of Build Risk Scenarios.

    Build Risk Scenarios

    Build risk scenarios to capture assets, vulnerabilities, threats, and the potential effect of a compromise.

    External Research Contributors

    Ken Muir

    CISO

    LMC Security

    Premchand Kurup

    CEO

    Paramount Computer Systems

    Preeti Dhawan

    Manager, Security Governance

    Payments Canada

    Scott Wiggins

    Information Risk and Governance

    CDPHP

    Fritz Y. Jean Louis

    CISO

    Globe and Mail

    Eric Gervais

    CIO

    Ovivo Water

    David Morrish

    CEO

    MBS Techservices

    Evan Garland

    Manager, IT Security

    Camosun College

    Jacopo Fumagalli

    CISO

    Axpo

    Dennis Leon

    Governance and Security Manager

    CPA Canada

    Tero Lehtinen

    CIO

    Planmeca Oy

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Build a program to identify, evaluate, assess, and treat IT risks.
    • Monitor and communicate risks effectively to support business decision making.

    Combine Security Risk Management Components Into One Program

    • Develop a program focused on assessing and managing information system risks.
    • Build a governance structure that integrates security risks within the organization’s broader approach to risk management.

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    • Build a holistic, risk-aware strategy that aligns to business goals.
    • Develop a roadmap of prioritized initiatives to implement the strategy over 18 to 36 months.

    Bibliography

    2022 Cost of Insider Threats Global Report.” Ponemon Institute, NOVIPRO, 9 Feb. 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “Allianz Risk Barometer 2022.” Allianz Global Corporate & Specialty, Jan. 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    Bickley, Shaun. “Security Risk Management: a basic guide for smaller NGOs”. European Interagency Security Forum (EISF), 2017. Web.

    “Biden Administration Warns against spyware targeting dissidents.” New York Times, 7 Jan 22. Accessed 20 Jan 2022.

    Boehm, Jim, et al. “The risk-based approach to cybersecurity.” McKinsey & Company, October 2019. Web.

    “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM Security, July 2021. Web.

    “Cyber Risk in Asia-Pacific: The Case for Greater Transparency.” Marsh & McLennan Companies, 2017. Web.

    “Cyber Risk Index.” NordVPN, 2020. Accessed 25 May 22

    Dawson, Maurice. “Applying a holistic cybersecurity framework for global IT organizations.” Business Information Review, vol. 35, no. 2, 2018, pp. 60-67.

    “Framework for improving critical infrastructure cybersecurity.” National Institute of Standards and Technology, 16 Apr 2018. Web.

    “Global Cybersecurity Index 2020.” International Telecommunication Union (ITU), 2021. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “Global Risk Survey 2022.” Control Risks, 2022. Accessed 25 May 22.

    “International Travel Guidance for Government Mobile Devices.” Federal Mobility Group (FMG), Aug. 2021. Accessed 18 Nov 2021.

    Kaffenberger, Lincoln, and Emanuel Kopp. “Cyber Risk Scenarios, the Financial System, and Systemic Risk Assessment.” Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, September 2019. Accessed 11 Jan 2022.

    Koehler, Thomas R. Understanding Cyber Risk. Routledge, 2018.

    Owens, Brian. “Cybersecurity for the travelling scientist.” Nature, vol. 548, 3 Aug 2017. Accessed 19 Jan. 2022.

    Parsons, Fintan J., et al. “Cybersecurity risks and recommendations for international travellers.” Journal of Travel Medicine, vol. 1, no. 4, 2021. Accessed 19 Jan 2022.

    Quinn, Stephen, et al. “Identifying and estimating cybersecurity risk for enterprise risk management.” National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Interagency or Internal Report (IR) 8286A, Nov. 2021.

    Quinn, Stephen, et al. “Prioritizing cybersecurity risk for enterprise risk management.” NIST, IR 8286B, Sept. 2021.

    “Remaining cyber safe while travelling security recommendations.” Government of Canada, 27 April 2022. Accessed 31 Jan 2022.

    Stine, Kevin, et al. “Integrating cybersecurity and enterprise risk management.” NIST, IR 8286, Oct. 2020.

    Tammineedi, Rama. “Integrating KRIs and KPIs for effective technology risk management.” ISACA Journal, vol. 4, 1 July 2018.

    Tikk, Eneken, and Mika Kerttunen, editors. Routledge Handbook of International Cybersecurity. Routledge, 2020.

    Voo, Julia, et al. “National Cyber Power Index 2020.” Belfer Center for Science and International Affairs, Harvard Kennedy School, Sept. 2020. Web.

    Zhang, Fang. “Navigating cybersecurity risks in international trade.” Harvard Business Review, Dec 2021. Accessed 31 Jan 22.

    Appendix

    Insider Threat

    Key Risk Scenario

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Gap Controls

    The image contains a picture of the Gap Controls. The controls include: Policy and Awareness, Identification, Monitoring and Visibility, which leads to Cooperation.

    • Identification: Effective and efficient management of insider threats begins with a threat and risk assessment to establish which assets and which employees to consider, especially in jurisdictions associated with sensitive or critical data. You need to pay extra attention to employees who are working in satellite offices in jurisdictions with loose security and privacy laws.
    • Monitoring and Visibility: Organizations should monitor critical assets and groups with privileged access to defend against malicious behavior. Implement an insider threat management platform that provides your organization with the visibility and context into data movement, especially cross-border transfers that might cause security and privacy breaches.
    • Policy and Awareness Training: Insider threats will persist without appropriate action and culture change. Training and consistent communication of best practices will mitigate vulnerabilities to accidental or negligent attacks. Customized training materials using local languages and role-based case studies might be needed for employees in high-risk jurisdictions.
    • Cooperation: An effective insider threat management program should be built with cross-team functions such as Security, IT, Compliance and Legal, etc.

    For more holistic approach, you can leverage our Reduce and Manage Your Organization’s Insider Threat Risk blueprint.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You can’t just throw tools at a human problem. While organizations should monitor critical assets and groups with privileged access to defend against malicious behavior, good management and supervision can help detect attacks and prevent them from happening in the first place.

    Insider threats are not industry specific, but malicious insiders are

    Industry

    Actors

    Risks

    Tactics

    Motives

    State and Local Government

    • Full-time employees
    • Current employees
    • Privileged access to personally identifiable information, financial assets, and physical property
    • Abuse of privileged access
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Financial gain
    • Recognition
    • Benefiting foreign entity

    Information Technology

    • Equal mix of former and current employees
    • Privileged access to networks or systems as well as data
    • Highly technical attacks
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Revenge
    • Financial gain

    Healthcare

    • Majority were full-time and current employees
    • Privileged access to customer data with personally identifiable information, financial assets
    • Abuse of privileged access
    • Received or transferred fraudulent funds
    • Financial gain
    • Entitlement

    Finance and Insurance

    • Majority were full-time and current employees
    • Authorized users
    • Electronic financial assets
    • Privileged access to customer data
    • Created or used fraudulent accounts
    • Fraudulent purchases
    • Identity theft
    • Financial gain
    • Gambling addiction
    • Family pressures
    • Multiple motivations

    Source: Carnegie Mellon University Software Engineering Institute, 2019

    Advanced Persistent Threat

    Key Risk Scenario #4

    Likelihood: Medium to High

    Impact: High

    Gap Controls

    The image contains a screenshot of the Gap Controls listed: Prevent, Detect, Analyze, Respond.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Effective anti-malware, diligent patching and vulnerability management, and strong human-centric security are essential.

    Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.

    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape.

    Respond: Organizations can’t rely on ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Best practices moving forward

    Defense in Depth

    Lock down your organization. Among other tactics, control administrative privileges, leverage threat intelligence, use IP whitelisting, adopt endpoint protection and two-factor authentication, and formalize incident response measures.

    Block Indicators

    Information alone is not actionable. A successful threat intelligence program contextualizes threat data, aligns intelligence with business objectives, and then builds processes to satisfy those objectives. Actively block indicators and act upon gathered intelligence.

    Drive Adoption

    Create organizational situational awareness around security initiatives to drive adoption of foundational security measures: network hardening, threat intelligence, red-teaming exercises, and zero-day mitigation, policies, and procedures.

    Supply Chain Security

    Security extends beyond your organization. Ensure your organization has a comprehensive view of your organizational threat landscape and a clear understanding of the security posture of any managed service providers in your supply chain.

    Awareness and Training

    Conduct security awareness and training. Teach end users how to recognize current cyberattacks before they fall victim – this is a mandatory first line of defense.

    Additional Resources

    Follow only official sources of information to help you assess risk

    The image contains an image highlighting a few additional resources.

    As misinformation is a major attack vector for malicious actors, follow only reliable sources for cyberalerts and actionable intelligence. Aggregate information from these reliable sources.

    Federal Cyber Agency Alerts

    Informational Resources

    Info-Tech Insight

    The CISA Shields Up site provides the latest cyber risk updates on the Russia-Ukraine conflict and should provide the most value in staying informed.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}596|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Employee Development
    • Parent Category Link: /train-and-develop
    • Many organizations have introduced mentoring programs without clearly defining and communicating the purpose and goals around having a program; they simply jumped on the mentoring bandwagon.
    • As a result, these programs have little impact. They don’t add value for mentors, mentees, or the organization.
    • It can be difficult to design a program that is well-suited to your organization, will be adopted by employees, and will drive the results you are looking for.
    • In particular, it is difficult to successfully match mentors and mentees so both derive maximum value from the endeavor.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • As workforce composition shifts, there is a need for mentoring programs to move beyond the traditional senior–junior format option; organizational culture and goals will dictate the best approach.
    • An organization’s mentoring program doesn’t need to be restricted to one format; individual preferences and goals should also factor in. Be open to choosing format on a case-by-case basis.
    • Be sure to gain upper management buy-in and support early to ensure mentoring becomes a valued part of your organization.
    • Ensure that goal setting, communication, ongoing support for participants, and evaluation all play a role in your mentoring program.

    Impact and Result

    • Mentoring can have a significant positive impact on mentor, mentee, and organization.
    • Mentees gain guidance and advice on their career path and skill development. Mentors often experience re-engagement with their job and the satisfaction of helping another person.
    • Mentoring participants benefit from obtaining different perspectives of both the business and work-related problems. Participation in a mentoring program has been linked to greater access to promotions, pay raises, and increased job satisfaction.
    • Mentoring can have a number of positive outcomes for the organization, including breaking down silos, transferring institutional knowledge, accelerating leadership skills, fostering open communication and dialogue, and resolving conflict.

    Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High-Performing Learning Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Align the mentoring program with the organizational culture and goals

    Build a best-fit program that creates a learning culture.

    • Storyboard: Optimize the Mentoring Program to Build a High Performing Learning Organization

    2. Assess the organizational culture and current mentoring program

    Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    • Mentoring Program Diagnostic

    3. Align mentoring practices with culture to improve the appropriateness and effectiveness of the program.

    Track project progress and have all program details defined in a central location.

    • Mentoring Project Plan Template
    • Peer Mentoring Guidelines
    • Mentoring Program Guidelines

    4. Gather feedback from the mentoring program participants

    Evaluate the success of the program.

    • Mentoring Project Feedback Surveys Template

    5. Get mentoring agreements in place

    Improve your mentoring capabilities.

    • Mentee Preparation Checklist
    • Mentoring Agreement Template
    [infographic]

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}192|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,532 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Risk is unavoidable. Without a formal program to manage IT risk, you may be unaware of your severest IT risks.
    • The business could be making decisions that are not informed by risk.
    • Reacting to risks AFTER they occur can be costly and crippling, yet it is one of the most common tactics used by IT departments.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT risk is business risk. Every IT risk has business implications. Create an IT risk management program that shares accountability with the business.

    Impact and Result

    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program, and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders including the business senior management team to gain buy-in and to focus on IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an IT Risk Management Program – A holistic approach to managing IT risks within your organization and involving key business stakeholders.

    Gain business buy-in to understanding the key IT risks that could negatively impact the organization and create an IT risk management program to properly identify, assess, respond, monitor, and report on those risks.

    • Build an IT Risk Management Program – Phases 1-3

    2. Risk Management Program Manual – A single source of truth for the risk management program to exist and be updated to reflect changes.

    Leverage this Risk Management Program Manual to ensure that the decisions around how IT risks will be governed and managed can be documented in a single source accessible by those involved.

    • Risk Management Program Manual

    3. Risk Register & Risk Costing Tool – A set of tools to document identified risk events. Assess each risk event and consider the appropriate response based on your organization’s threshold for risk.

    Engage these tools in your organization if you do not currently have a GRC tool to document risk events as they relate to the IT function. Consider the best risk response to high severity risk events to ensure all possible situations are considered.

    • Risk Register Tool
    • Risk Costing Tool

    4. Risk Event Action Plan and Risk Report – A template to document the chosen risk responses and ensure accountable owners agree on selected response method.

    Establish clear guidelines and responses to risk events that will leave your organization vulnerable to unwanted threats. Ensure risk owners have agreed to the risk responses and are willing to take accountability for that response.

    • Risk Event Action Plan
    • Risk Report

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    The Purpose

    To assess current risk management maturity, develop goals, and establish IT risk governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified obstacles to effective IT risk management.

    Established attainable goals to increase maturity.

    Clearly laid out risk management accountabilities and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current program maturity

    1.2 Complete RACI chart

    1.3 Create the IT risk council

    1.4 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.5 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1.6 Identify risk events

    Outputs

    Maturity Assessment

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Risk Register

    2 Identify IT Risks

    The Purpose

    Identify and assess all IT risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Created a comprehensive list of all IT risk events.

    Risk events prioritized according to risk severity – as defined by the business.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify risk events (continued)

    2.2 Augment risk event list using COBIT 5 processes

    2.3 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    2.4 Create impact and probability scales

    2.5 Select a technique to measure reputational cost

    2.6 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    Outputs

    Finalized List of IT Risk Events

    Risk Register

    Risk Management Program Manual

    3 Identify IT Risks (continued)

    The Purpose

    Prioritize risks, establish monitoring responsibilities, and develop risk responses for top risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Risk monitoring responsibilities are established.

    Risk response strategies have been identified for all key risks.

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    3.2 Document the proximity of the risk event

    3.3 Conduct expected cost assessment

    3.4 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    3.5 Root cause analysis

    3.6 Identify and assess risk responses

    Outputs

    Risk Register

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Risk Event Action Plans

    4 Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    The Purpose

    Assess and select risk responses for top risks and effectively communicate recommendations and priorities to the business.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough analysis has been conducted on the value and effectiveness of risk responses for high severity risk events.

    Authoritative risk response recommendations can be made to senior leadership.

    A finalized Risk Management Program Manual is ready for distribution to key stakeholders.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and assess risk responses

    4.2 Risk response cost-benefit analysis

    4.3 Create multi-year cost projections

    4.4 Review techniques for embedding risk management in IT

    4.5 Finalize the Risk Report and Risk Management Program Manual

    4.6 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Outputs

    Risk Report

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Further reading

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    Table of Contents

    3 Executive Brief

    4 Analyst Perspective

    5 Executive Summary

    19 Phase 1: Review IT Risk Fundamentals & Governance

    43 Phase 2: Identify and Assess IT Risk

    74 Phase 3: Monitor, Communicate, and Respond to IT Risk

    102 Appendix

    108 Bibliography

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Mitigate the IT risks that could negatively impact your organization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Siloed risks are risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Risk is an inherent part of life but not very well understood or executed within organizations. This has led to risk being avoided or, when it’s implemented, being performed in isolated siloes with inconsistencies in understanding of impact and terminology.

    Looking at risk in an integrated way within an organization drives a truer sense of the thresholds and levels of risks an organization is facing – making it easier to manage and leverage risk while reducing risks associated with different mitigation responses to the same risk events.

    This opens the door to using risk information – not only to prevent negative impacts but as a strategic differentiator in decision making. It helps you know which risks are worth taking, driving strong positive outcomes for your organization.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT has several challenges when it comes to addressing risk management:

    • Risk is unavoidable. Without a formal program to manage IT risk, you may be unaware of your severest IT risks.
    • The business could be making decisions that are not informed by risk.
    • Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and crippling, yet it is one of the most common tactics used by IT departments.

    Common Obstacles

    Many IT organizations realize these obstacles:

    • IT risks and business risks are often addressed separately, causing inconsistencies in the approach.
    • Security risk receives such a high profile that it often eclipses other important IT risks, leaving the organization vulnerable.
    • Failing to include the business in IT risk management leaves IT leaders too accountable; the business must have accountability as well.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Transform your ad hoc IT risk management processes into a formalized, ongoing program and increase risk management success.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest risks before they occur.
    • Involve key stakeholders, including the business senior management team, to gain buy-in and to focus on the IT risks most critical to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT risk is business risk. Every IT risk has business implications. Create an IT risk management program that shares accountability with the business.

    Ad hoc approaches to managing risk fail because…

    If you are like the majority of IT departments, you do not have a consistent and comprehensive strategy for managing IT risk.

    1. Ad hoc risk management is reactionary.
    2. Ad hoc risk management is often focused only on IT security.
    3. Ad hoc risk management lacks alignment with business objectives.

    The results:

    • Increased business risk exposure caused by a lack of understanding of the impact of IT risks on the business.
    • Increased IT non-compliance, resulting in costly settlements and fines.
    • IT audit failure.
    • Ineffective management of risk caused by poor risk information and wrong risk response decisions.
    • Increased unnecessary and avoidable IT failures and fixes.

    58% of organizations still lack a systematic and robust method to actually report on risks (Source: AICPA, 2021)

    Data is an invaluable asset – ensure it’s protected

    Case Studies

    Logo for Cognyte.

    Cognyte, a vendor hired to be a cybersecurity analytics company, had over five billion records exposed in Spring 2021. The data was compromised for four days, providing attackers with plenty of opportunities to obtain personally identifying information. (SecureBlink., 2021 & Security Magazine, 2021)

    Logo for Facebook.

    Facebook, the world’s largest social media giant, had over 533 million Facebook users’ personal data breached when data sets were able to be cross-listed with one another. (Business Insider, 2021 & Security Magazine, 2021)

    Logo for MGM Resorts.

    In 2020, over 10.6 million customers experienced some sort of data being accessible, with 1,300 having serious personally identifying information breached. (The New York Times, 2020)

    Risk management is a business enabler

    Formalize risk management to increase your likelihood of success.

    By identifying areas of risk exposure and creating solutions proactively, obstacles can be removed or circumvented before they become a real problem.

    A certain amount of risk is healthy and can stimulate innovation:

    • A formal risk management strategy doesn’t mean trying to mitigate every possible risk; it means exposing the organization to the right amount of risk.
    • Taking a formal risk management approach allows an organization to thoughtfully choose which risks it is willing to accept.
    • Organizations with high risk management maturity will vault themselves ahead of the competition because they will be aware of which risks to prepare for, which risks to ignore, and which risks to take.

    Only 12% of organizations are using risk as a strategic tool most or all of the time (Source: AICPA, 2021)

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Accountability for IT risks and the decisions made to address them should be shared between IT and the business.

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Follow the steps of this blueprint to build or optimize your IT risk management program

    Cycle of 'Goverance' beginning with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report'.

    Start Here

    PHASE 1
    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance
    PHASE 2
    Identify and Assess IT Risk
    PHASE 3
    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    1.1

    Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals

    1.2

    Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    2.1

    Identify IT Risks

    2.2

    Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    3.1

    Monitor IT Risks and Develop Risk Responses

    3.2

    Report IT Risk Priorities

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in 'Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)': 'IT', 'Security', 'Digital', 'Vendor/TPRM', and 'Other'.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Risk Management Program Manual

    Use the tools and activities in each phase of the blueprint to create a comprehensive, customized program manual for the ongoing management of IT risk.

    Sample of the key deliverable, Risk Manangement Program Fund.
    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    Assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment blueprint. Centralized Risk Register

    The repository for all the risks that have been identified within your environment.

    Sample of the Centralized Risk Register blueprint.
    Risk Costing Tool

    A potential cost-benefit analysis of possible risk responses to determine a good method to move forward.

    Sample of the Risk Costing Tool blueprint. Risk Report & Risk Event Action Plan

    A method to report risk severity and hold risk owners accountable for chosen method of responding.

    Samples of the Risk Report & Risk Event Action Plan blueprints.

    Benefit from industry-leading best practices

    As a part of our research process, we used the COSO, ISO 31000, and COBIT 2019 frameworks. Contextualizing IT risk management within these frameworks ensured that our project-focused approach is grounded in industry-leading best practices for managing IT risk.

    Logo for COSO.

    COSO’s Enterprise Risk Management — Integrating with Strategy and Performance addresses the evolution of enterprise risk management and the need for organizations to improve their approach to managing risk to meet the demands of an evolving business environment. (COSO)

    Logo for ISO.

    ISO 31000
    Risk Management can help organizations increase the likelihood of achieving objectives, improve the identification of opportunities and threats, and effectively allocate and use resources for risk treatment. (ISO 31000)

    Logo for COBIT.

    COBIT 2019’s IT functions were used to develop and refine our Ten IT Risk Categories used in our top-down risk identification methodology. (COBIT 2019)

    Abandon ad hoc risk management

    A strong risk management foundation is valuable when building your IT risk management program.

    This research covers the following IT risk fundamentals:

    • Benefits of formalized risk management
    • Key terms and definitions
    • Risk management within ERM
    • Risk management independent of ERM
    • Four key principles of IT risk management
    • Importance of a risk management program manual
    • Importance of buy-in and support from the business

    Drivers of Formalized Risk Management:

    Drivers External to IT
    External Audit Internal Audit
    Mandated by ERM
    Occurrence of Risk Event
    Demonstrating IT’s value to the business Proactive initiative
    Emerging IT risk awareness
    Grassroots Drivers

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Increased on-time, in-scope, and on-budget completion of IT projects.
    • Meet the business’ service requirements.
    • Improved satisfaction with IT by senior leadership and business units.
    • Fewer resources wasted on fire-fighting.
    • Improved availability, integrity, and confidentiality of sensitive data.
    • More efficient use of resources.
    • Greater ability to respond to evolving threats.

    Business Benefits

    • Reduced operational surprises or failures.
    • Improved IT flexibility when responding to risk events and market fluctuations.
    • Reduced budget uncertainty.
    • Improved ability to make decisions when developing long-term strategies.
    • Improved stakeholder and shareholder confidence.
    • Achieved compliance with external regulations.
    • Competitive advantage over organizations with immature risk management practices.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1

    • Call #1: Assess current risk maturity and organizational buy-in.
    • Call #2: Establish an IT risk council and determine IT risk management program goals.
    • Phase 2

    • Call #3: Identify the risk categories used to organize risk events.
    • Call #4: Identify the threshold for risk the organization can withstand.
    • Phase 3

    • Call #5: Create a method to assess risk event severity.
    • Call #6: Establish a method to monitor priority risks and consider possible risk responses.
    • Call #7: Communicate risk priorities to the business and implement risk management plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities
    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    1.1 Assess current program maturity

    1.2 Complete RACI chart

    1.3 Create the IT risk council

    1.4 Identify and engage key stakeholders

    1.5 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1.6 Identify risk events

    Identify IT Risks

    2.1 Identify risk events (continued)

    2.2 Augment risk event list using COBIT5 processes

    2.3 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    2.4 Create impact and probability scales

    2.5 Select a technique to measure reputational cost

    2.6 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    Assess IT Risks

    3.1 Conduct risk severity level assessment

    3.2 Document the proximity of the risk event

    3.3 Conduct expected cost assessment

    3.4 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    3.5 Perform root cause analysis

    3.6 Identify and assess risk responses

    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    4.1 Identify and assess risk responses

    4.2 Risk response cost-benefit analysis

    4.3 Create multi-year cost projections

    4.4 Review techniques for embedding risk management in IT

    4.5 Finalize the Risk Report and Risk Management Program Manual

    4.6 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Outcomes
    1. Maturity Assessment
    2. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Finalized List of IT Risk Events
    2. Risk Register
    3. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Risk Register
    2. Risk Event Action Plans
    3. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Risk Report
    2. Risk Management Program Manual
    1. Workshop Report
    2. Risk Management Program Manual

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 1

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Gain buy-in from senior leadership
    • Assess current program maturity
    • Identify obstacles and pain points
    • Determine the risk culture of the organization
    • Develop risk management goals
    • Develop SMART project metrics
    • Create the IT risk council
    • Complete a RACI chart

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Step 1.1

    Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Gain buy-in from senior leadership
    • 1.1.2 Assess current program maturity

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • Reviewed key IT principles and terminology
    • Gained understanding of the relationship between IT risk management and ERM
    • Introduced to Info-Tech’s IT Risk Management Framework
    • Obtained the support of senior leadership
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Effective IT risk management is possible with or without ERM

    Whether or not your organization has ERM, integrating your IT risk management program with the business is possible.

    Most IT departments find themselves in one of these two organizational frameworks for managing IT risk:

    Core Responsibilities With an ERM Without an ERM
    • Risk Decision-Making Authority
    • Final Accountability
    Senior Leadership Team Senior Leadership Team
    • Risk Governance
    • Risk Prioritization & Communication
    ERM IT Risk Management
    • Risk Identification
    • Risk Assessment
    • Risk Monitoring
    IT Risk Management
    Pro: IT’s risk management responsibilities are defined (assessment schedules, escalation and reporting procedures).
    Con: IT may lack autonomy to implement IT risk management best practices.
    Pro: IT is free to create its own IT risk council and develop customized processes that serve its unique needs.
    Con: Lack of clear reporting procedures and mechanisms to share accountability with the business.

    Info-Tech’s IT risk management framework walks you through each step to achieve risk readiness

    IT Risk Management Framework

    Risk Governance
    • Optimize Risk Management Processes
    • Assess Risk Maturity
    • Measure the Success of the Program
    A cycle surrounds the words 'Business Objectives', referring to the surrounding lists. On the top half is 'Communication', and the bottom is 'Monitoring'. Risk Identification
    • Engage Stakeholder Participation
    • Use Risk Identification Frameworks
    • Compile IT-Related Risks
    Risk Response
    • Establish Monitoring Responsibilities
    • Perform Cost-Benefit Analysis
    • Report Risk Response Actions
    Risk Assessment
    • Establish Thresholds for Unacceptable Risk
    • Calculate Expected Cost
    • Determine Risk Severity & Prioritize IT Risks

    Effective IT risk management benefits

    Obtain the support of the senior leadership team or IT steering committee by communicating how IT risk impacts their priorities.

    Risk management benefits To engage the business...
    IT is compliant with external laws and regulations. Identify the industry or legal legislation and regulations your organization abides by.
    IT provides support for business compliance. Find relevant business compliance issues, and relate compliance failures to cost.
    IT regularly communicates costs, benefits, and risks to the business. Acknowledge the number of times IT and the business miscommunicate critical information.
    Information and processing infrastructure are very secure. Point to past security breaches or potential vulnerabilities in your systems.
    IT services are usually delivered in line with business requirements. Bring up IT services that the business was unsatisfied with. Explain that their inputs in identifying risks are correlated with project quality.
    IT related business risks are managed very well. Make it clear that with no risk tracking process, business processes become exposed and tend to slow down.
    IT projects are completed on time and within budget. Point out late or over-budget projects due to the occurrence of unforeseen risks.

    1.1.1 Gain buy-in from senior leadership

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Buy-in from senior leadership for an IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    The resource demands of IT risk management will vary from organization to organization. Here are typical requirements:

    • Occasional participation of key IT personnel and select business stakeholders in IT risk council meetings (e.g. once every two weeks).
    • Periodic risk assessments (e.g. 4 days, twice a year).
    • IT personnel must take on risk monitoring responsibilities (e.g. 1-4 hours per week).
    • Record the results in the Program Manual sections 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM)

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization.
    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organizations.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    1.1.2 Assess current program maturity

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Maturity scores across four key risk categories

    Materials: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    This assessment is intended for frequent use; process completeness should be re-evaluated on a regular basis.

    How to Use This Assessment:

    1. Download the Integrated Risk Management Maturity Assessment Tool.
    2. Tab 2, "Data Entry:" This is a qualitative assessment of your integrated risk management process and is organized by the categories of integrated risk maturity. You will be asked to rate the extent to which you are executing the activities required to successfully complete each phase of the assessment. Use the drop-down menus provided to select the appropriate level of execution for each activity listed.
    3. Tab 3, "Results:" This tab will display your rate of IRM completeness/maturity. You will receive a score for each category as well as an overall score. The results will be displayed numerically, by percentage, and graphically.

    Record the results in the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understanding of the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Step 1.2

    Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Identify pain points/obstacles and opportunities
    • 1.2.2 Determine the risk culture of the organization
    • 1.2.3 Develop risk management goals
    • 1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics
    • 1.2.5 Create the IT risk council
    • 1.2.6 Complete a RACI chart

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • Business executive leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • Developed goals for the risk management program
    • Established the IT risk council
    • Assigned accountability and responsibility for risk management processes

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2

    Create an IT risk governance framework that integrates with the business

    Follow these best practices to make sure your requirements are solid:

    1. Self-assess your current approach to IT risk management.
    2. Identify organizational obstacles and set attainable risk management goals.
    3. Track the effectiveness and success of the program using SMART risk management metrics.
    4. Establish an IT risk council tasked with managing IT risk.
    5. Set clear risk management accountabilities and responsibilities for IT and business stakeholders.

    Key metrics for your IT risk governance framework

    Challenges:
    • Key stakeholders are left out or consulted once risks have already occurred.
    • Failure to employ consistent risk identification methodologies results in omitted and unknown risks.
    • Risk assessments do not reflect organizational priorities and may not align with thresholds for acceptable risk.
    • Risk assessment occurs sporadically or only after a major risk event has already occurred.
    Key metrics:
    • Number of risk management processes done ad hoc.
    • Frequency that IT risk appears as an agenda item at IT steering committee meetings.
    • Percentage of IT employees whose performance evaluations reflect risk management objectives.
    • Percentage of IT risk council members who are trained in risk management activities.
    • Number of open positions in the IT risk council.
    • Cost of risk management program operations per year.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Metrics provide the foundation for determining the success of your IT risk management program and ensure ongoing funding to support appropriate risk responses.

    IT risk management success factors

    Support and sponsorship from senior leadership

    IT risk management has more success when initiated by a member of the senior leadership team or the board, rather than emerging from IT as a grassroots initiative.

    Sponsorship increases the likelihood that risk management is prioritized and receives the necessary resources and attention. It also ensures that IT risk accountability is assumed by senior leadership.

    Risk culture and awareness

    A risk-aware organizational culture embraces new policies and processes that reflect a proactive approach to risk.

    An organization with a risk-aware culture is better equipped to facilitate communication vertically within the organization.

    Risk awareness can be embedded by revising job descriptions and performance assessments to reflect IT risk management responsibilities.

    Organization size

    Smaller organizations can often institute a mature risk management program much more quickly than larger organizations.

    It is common for key personnel within smaller organizations to be responsible for multiple roles associated with risk management, making it easier to integrate IT and business risk management.

    Larger organizations may find it more difficult to integrate a more complex and dispersed network of individuals responsible for various risk management responsibilities.

    1.2.1 Identify obstacles and pain points

    1-4 hours

    Input: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    Output: Obstacles and pain points identified

    Materials: IT Risk Management Success Factors

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    Anticipate potential challenges and “blind spots” by determining which success factors are missing from your current situation.

    Instructions:

    1. List the potential obstacles and missing success factors that you must overcome to effectively manage IT risk and build a risk management program.
    2. Consider some opportunities that could be leveraged to increase the success of this program.
    3. Use this list in Activity 1.2.3 to develop program goals.

    Risk Management

    Replace the example pain points and opportunities with real scenarios in your organization.

    Pain Points/Obstacles
    • Lack of leadership buy-in
    • Skills and understanding around risk management within IT
    • Skills and understanding around risk management within the organization
    • Lack of a defined risk management posture
    Opportunities
    • Changes in regulations related to risk
    • Organization moving toward an integrated risk management program
    • Ability to leverage lessons learned from similar companies
    • Strong process management and adherence to policies by employees in the organization

    1.2.2 Determine the risk culture of your organization

    1-3 hours

    Determine how your organization fits the criteria listed below. Descriptions and examples do not have to match your organization perfectly.

    Risk Tolerant
    • You have no compliance requirements.
    • You have no sensitive data.
    • Customers do not expect you to have strong security controls.
    • Revenue generation and innovative products take priority and risk is acceptable.
    • The organization does not have remote locations.
    • It is likely that your organization does not operate within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Health care
      • Telecom
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    Moderate
    • You have some compliance requirements, e.g.:
      • HIPAA
      • PIPEDA
    • You have sensitive data, and are required to retain records.
    • Customers expect strong security controls.
    • Information security is visible to senior leadership.
    • The organization has some remote locations.
    • Your organization most likely operates within the following industries:
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    Risk Averse
    • You have multiple, strict compliance and/or regulatory requirements.
    • You house sensitive data, such as medical records.
    • Customers expect your organization to maintain strong and current security controls.
    • Information security is highly visible to senior management and public investors.
    • The organization has multiple remote locations.
    • Your organization operates within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Healthcare
      • Telecom

    Be aware of the organization’s attitude towards risk

    Risk culture is an organization’s attitude towards taking risks. This attitude manifests itself in two ways:

    One element of risk culture is what levels of risk the organization is willing to accept to pursue its objectives and what levels of risk are deemed unacceptable. This is often called risk appetite.
    Risk tolerant

    Risk-tolerant organizations embrace the potential of accelerating growth and the attainment of business objectives by taking calculated risks.

    Risk averse

    Risk-averse organizations prefer consistent, gradual growth and goal attainment by embracing a more cautious stance toward risk.

    The other component of risk culture is the degree to which risk factors into decision making.
    Risk conscious

    Risk-conscious organizations place a high priority on being aware of all risks impacting business objectives, regardless of whether they choose to accept or respond to those risks.

    Unaware

    Organizations that are largely unaware of the impact of risk generally believe there are few major risks impacting business objectives and choose to invest resources elsewhere.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Organizations typically fall in the middle of these spectrums. While risk culture will vary depending on the industry and maturity of the organization, a culture with a balanced risk appetite that is extremely risk conscious is able to make creative, dynamic decisions with reasonable limits placed on risk-related decision making.

    1.2.3 Develop goals for the IT risk management program

    1-4 hours

    Input: Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment, Risk Culture, Pain Points and Opportunities

    Output: Goals for the IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT executive leadership, Business executive leadership

    Translate your maturity assessment and knowledge about organizational risk culture, potential obstacles, and success factors to develop goals for your IT risk management program.

    Instructions:

    1. In the Risk Management Program Manual, revise, replace, or add to the high-level goals provided in section 2.4.
    2. Make sure that you have three to five high-level goals that reflect the current and targeted maturity of IT risk management processes.
    3. Integrate potential obstacles, pain points, and insights from the organization’s risk culture.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics

    1-3 hours

    Create metrics for measuring the success of the IT risk management program.

    Ensure that all success metrics are SMART Instructions
    1. Document a list of appropriate metrics to assess the success of the IT risk management program on a whiteboard.
    2. Use the sample metrics listed in the table on the next slide as a starting point.
    3. Fill in the chart to indicate the:
      1. Name of the success metric
      2. Method for measuring success
      3. Baseline measurement
      4. Target measurement
      5. Actual measurements at various points throughout the process of improving the risk management program
      6. A deadline for each metric to meet the target measurement
    Strong Make sure the objective is clear and detailed.
    Measurable Objectives are measurable if there are specific metrics assigned to measure success. Metrics should be objective.
    Actionable Objectives become actionable when specific initiatives designed to achieve the objective are identified.
    Realistic Objectives must be achievable given your current resources or known available resources.
    Time-Bound An objective without a timeline can be put off indefinitely. Furthermore, measuring success is challenging without a timeline.

    1.2.4 Develop SMART project metrics (continued)

    1-3 hours

    Attach metrics to your goals to gauge the success of the IT risk management program.

    Replace the example metrics with accurate KPIs or metrics for your organization.

    Sample Metrics
    Name Method Baseline Target Deadline Checkpoint 1 Checkpoint 2 Final
    Number of risks identified (per year) Risk register 0 100 Dec. 31
    Number of business units represented (risk identification) Meeting minutes 0 5 Dec. 31
    Frequency of risk assessment Assessments recorded in risk management program manual 0 2 per year Year 2
    Percentage of identified risk events that undergo expected cost assessment Ratio of risks assessed in the risk costing tool to risks assessed in the risk register 0 20% Dec. 31
    Number of top risks without an identified risk response Risk register 5 0 March 1
    Cost of risk management program operations per year Meeting frequency and duration, multiplied by the cost of participation $2,000 $5,000 Dec. 31

    Create the IT risk committee (ITRC)

    Responsibilities of the ITRC:
    1. Formalize risk management processes.
    2. Identify and review major risks throughout the IT department.
    3. Recommend an appropriate risk appetite or level of exposure.
    4. Review the assessment of the impact and likelihood of identified risks.
    5. Review the prioritized list of risks.
    6. Create a mitigation plan to minimize risk likelihood and impact.
    7. Review and communicate overall risk impact and risk management success.
    8. Assign risk ownership responsibilities of key risks to ensure key risks are monitored and risk responses are effectively implemented.
    9. Address any concerns in regards to the risk management program, including, but not limited to, reviewing their risk management duties and resourcing.
    10. Communicate risk reports to senior management annually.
    11. Make any alterations to the committee roster and the individuals’ responsibilities as needed and document changes.
    Must be on the ITRC:
    • CIO
    • CRO (if applicable)
    • Senior Directors
    • Security Officer
    • Head of Operations

    Must be on the ITRC:

    • CFO
    • Senior representation from every business unit impacted by IT risk

    1.2.5 Create the IT risk council

    1-4 hours

    Input: List of IT personnel and business stakeholders

    Output: Goals for the IT risk management program

    Materials: Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: CIO, CRO (if applicable), Senior Directors, Head of Operations

    Identify the essential individuals from both the IT department and the business to create a permanent committee that meets regularly and carries out IT risk management activities.

    Instructions:

    1. Review sections 3.1 (Mandate) and 3.2 (Agenda and Responsibilities) of the IT Risk Committee Charter, located in the Risk Management Program Manual. Make any necessary revisions.
    2. In section 3.3, document how frequently the council is scheduled to meet.
    3. In section 3.4, document members of the IT risk council.
    4. Obtain sign-off for the IT risk council from the CIO or another member of the senior leadership team in section 3.5 of the manual.

    Record the results in the Risk Management Program Manual.

    1.2.6 Complete RACI chart

    1-3 hours

    A RACI diagram is a useful visualization that identifies redundancies and ensures that every role, project, or task has an accountable party.

    RACI is an acronym made up of four participatory roles: Instructions
    1. Use the template provided on the following slide, and add key stakeholders who do not appear and are relevant for your organization.
    2. For each activity, assign each stakeholder a letter.
    3. There must be an accountable party for each activity (every activity must have an “A”).
    4. For activities that do not apply to a particular stakeholder, leave the space blank.
    5. Once the chart is complete, copy/paste it into section 4.1 of the Risk Management Program Manual.
    Responsible Stakeholders who undertake the activity.
    Accountable Stakeholders who are held responsible for failure or take credit for success.
    Consulted Stakeholders whose opinions are sought.
    Informed Stakeholders who receive updates.

    1.2.6 Complete RACI chart (continued)

    1-3 hours

    Assign risk management accountabilities and responsibilities to key stakeholders:

    Stakeholder Coordination Risk Identification Risk Thresholds Risk Assessment Identify Responses Cost-Benefit Analysis Monitoring Risk Decision Making
    ITRC A R I R R R A C
    ERM C I C I I I I C
    CIO I A A A A A I R
    CRO I R C I R
    CFO I R C I R
    CEO I R C I A
    Business Units I C C C
    IT I I I I I I R C
    PMO C C C
    Legend: Responsible Accountable Consulted Informed

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 2

    Identify and Assess IT Risk

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Add organization-specific risk scenarios
    • Identify risk events
    • Augment risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes
    • Conduct a PESTLE analysis
    • Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk
    • Create a financial impact assessment scale
    • Select a technique to measure reputational cost
    • Create a likelihood scale
    • Assess risk severity level
    • Assess expected cost

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business Risk Owners

    Step 2.1

    Identify IT Risks

    Activities
    • 2.1.1 Add organization-specific risk scenarios
    • 2.1.2 Identify risk events
    • 2.1.3 Augment risk event list using COBIT 19 processes
    • 2.1.4 Conduct a PESTLE analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • IT Risk Council
    • Business executive leadership
    • Business risk owners

    Outcomes of this step

    • Participation of key stakeholders
    • Comprehensive list of IT risk events
    Identify and Assess IT Risk
    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Get to know what you don’t know

    1. Engage the right stakeholders in risk identification.
    2. Employ Info-Tech’s top-down approach to risk identification.
    3. Augment your risk event list using alternative frameworks.
    Key metrics:
    • Total risks identified
    • New risks identified
    • Frequency of updates to the Risk Register Tool
    • Number of realized risk events not identified in the Risk Register Tool
    • Level of business participation in enterprise IT risk identification
      • Number of business units represented
      • Number of meetings attended in person
      • Number of risk reports received

    Info-Tech Insight

    What you don’t know CAN hurt you. How do you identify IT-related threats and vulnerabilities that you are not already aware of? Now that you have created a strong risk governance framework that formalizes risk management within IT and connects it to the enterprise, follow the steps outlined in this section to reveal all of IT’s risks.

    Engage key stakeholders

    Ensure that all key risks are identified by engaging key business stakeholders.

    Benefits of obtaining business involvement during the risk identification stage:
    • You will identify risk events you had not considered or you weren’t aware of.
    • You will identify risks more accurately.
    • Risk identification is an opportunity to raise awareness of IT risk management early in the process.

    Executive Participation:

    • CIO participation is integral when building a comprehensive register of risk events impacting IT.
    • CIOs and IT directors possess a holistic view of all of IT’s functions.
    • CIOs and IT directors are uniquely placed to identify how IT affects other business units and the attainment of business objectives. If applicable, CRO and CTO participation is also critical.

    Prioritizing and Selecting Stakeholders

    1. Reliance on IT services and technologies to achieve business objectives.
    2. Relationship with IT, and willingness to engage in risk management activities.
    3. Unique perspectives, skills, and experiences that IT may not possess.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While IT personnel are better equipped to identify IT risk than anyone, IT does not always have an accurate view of the business’ exposure to IT risk. Strive to maintain a 3 to 1 ratio of IT to non-IT personnel involved in the process.

    Enable IT to target risk holistically

    Take a top-down approach to risk identification to guide brainstorming

    Info-Tech’s risk categories are consistent with a risk identification method called Risk Prompting.

    A risk prompt list is a list that categorizes risks into types or areas. The n10 risk categories encapsulate the services, activities, responsibilities, and functions of most IT departments. Use these categories and the example risk scenarios provided as prompts to guide brainstorming and organize risks.

    Risk Category: High-level groupings that describe risk pertaining to major IT functions. See the following slide for all ten of Info-Tech’s IT risk categories. Risk Scenario: An abstract profile representing common risk groups that are more specific than risk categories. Typically, organizations are able to identify two to five scenarios for each category. Risk Event: Specific threats and vulnerabilities that fall under a particular risk scenario. Organizations are able to identify anywhere between 1 and 20 events for each scenario. See the Appendix of the Risk Management Program Manual for a list of risk event examples.

    Risk Category

    Risk Scenario

    Risk Event

    Compliance Regulatory compliance Being fined for not complying/being aware of a new regulation.
    Externally originated attack Phishing attack on the organization.
    Operational Technology evaluation & selection Partnering with a vendor that is not in compliance with a key regulation.
    Capacity planning Not having sufficient resources to support a DRP.
    Third-Party Risk Vendor management Vendor performance requirements are improperly defined.
    Vendor selection Vendors are improperly selected to meet the defined use case.

    2.1.1 Add organization-specific risk scenarios

    1-3 hours

    Review Info-Tech’s ten IT risk categories and add risk scenarios to the examples provided.

    IT Reputational
    • Negative PR
    • Consumers writing negative reviews
    • Employees writing negative reviews
    IT Financial
    • Stock prices drop
    • Value of the organization is reduced
    IT Strategic
    • Organization prioritizes innovation but remains focused on operational
    • Unable to access data to support strategic initiative
    Operational
    • Enterprise architecture
    • Technology evaluation and selection
    • Capacity planning
    • Operational errors
    Availability
    • Power outage
    • Increased data workload
    • Single source of truth
    • Lacking knowledge transfer processes for critical tasks
    Performance
    • Network failure
    • Service levels not being met
    • Capacity overload
    Compliance
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Standards compliance
    • Audit compliance
    Security
    • Malware
    • Internally originated attack
    Third Party
    • Vendor selection
    • Vendor management
    • Contract termination
    Digital
    • No back-up process if automation fails

    2.1.2 Identify risk events

    1-4 hours

    Input: IT risk categories

    Output: Risk events identified and categorized

    Materials: Risk Register Tool

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owners, CRO (if applicable)

    Use Info-Tech’s IT risk categories and scenarios to brainstorm a comprehensive list of IT-related threats and vulnerabilities impacting your organization.

    Instructions:

    1. Document risk events in the Risk Register Tool.
    2. List risk scenarios (organized by risk category) in the Risk Events/Threats column.
    3. Disseminate the list to key stakeholders who were unable to participate and solicit their feedback.
      • Consult the RACI chart located in section 4.1 of the Risk Management Program Manual.
    4. Attack one scenario at a time, exhausting all realistic risk events for that grouping before moving onto the next scenario. Each scenario should take approximately 45-60 minutes.

    Tip: If disagreement arises regarding whether a specific risk event is relevant to the organization or not and it cannot be resolved quickly, include it in the list. The applicability of these risks will become apparent during the assessment process.

    Record the results in the Risk Register Tool.

    2.1.3 Augment the risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes (Optional)

    1-3 hours

    Other industry-leading frameworks provide alternative ways of conceptualizing the functions and responsibilities of IT and may help you uncover additional risk events.

    1. Managed IT Management Framework
    2. Managed Strategy
    3. Managed Enterprise Architecture
    4. Managed Innovation
    5. Managed Portfolio
    6. Managed Budget and Costs
    7. Managed Human Resources
    8. Managed Relationships
    9. Managed Service Agreements
    10. Managed Vendors
    11. Managed Quality
    12. Managed Risk
    13. Managed Security
    14. Managed Data
    15. Managed Programs
    16. Managed Requirements Definition
    17. Managed Solutions Identification and Build
    18. Managed Availability and Capacity
    19. Managed Organizational Change Enablement
    20. Managed IT Changes
    1. Managed IT Change Acceptance and Transitioning
    2. Managed Knowledge
    3. Managed Assets
    4. Managed Configuration
    5. Managed Projects
    6. Managed Operations
    7. Managed Service Requests and Incidents
    8. Managed Problems
    9. Managed Continuity
    10. Managed Security Services
    11. Managed Business Process Controls
    12. Managed Performance and Conformance Monitoring
    13. Managed System of Internal Control
    14. Managed Compliance with External Requirements
    15. Managed Assurance
    16. Ensured Governance Framework Setting and Maintenance
    17. Ensured Benefits Delivery
    18. Ensured Risk Optimization
    19. Ensured Resource Optimization
    20. Ensured Stakeholder Engagement

    Instructions:

    1. Review COBIT 2019’s 40 IT processes and identify additional risk events.
    2. Match risk events to the corresponding risk category and scenario and add them to the Risk Register Tool.

    2.1.4 Finalize your risk register by conducting a PESTLE analysis (Optional)

    1-3 hours

    Explore alternative identification techniques to incorporate external factors and avoid “groupthink.”

    Consider the External Environment – PESTLE Analysis

    Despite efforts to encourage equal participation in the risk identification process, key risks may not have been shared in previous exercises.

    Conduct a PESTLE analysis as a final safety net to ensure that all key risk events have been identified.

    Avoid “Groupthink” – Nominal Group Technique

    The Nominal Group Technique uses the silent generation of ideas and an enforced “safe” period of time where ideas are shared but not discussed to encourage judgement-free idea generation.

    • Ideas are generated silently and independently.
    • Ideas are then shared and documented; however, discussion is delayed until all of the group’s ideas have been recorded.
    • Idea generation can occur before the meeting and be kept anonymous.

    Note: Employing either of these techniques will lengthen an already time-consuming process. Only consider these techniques if you have concerns regarding the homogeneity of the ideas being generated or if select individuals are dominating the exercise.

    List the following factors influencing the risk event:
    • Political factors
    • Economic factors
    • Social factors
    • Technological factors
    • Legal factors
    • Environmental factors
    'PESTLE Analysis' presented as a wheel with the acronym's meanings surrounding the title. 'Political Factors', 'Economic Factors', 'Social Factors', 'Technological Factors', 'Legal Factors', and 'Environmental Factors'.

    Step 2.2

    Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk
    • 2.2.2 Create a financial impact assessment scale
    • 2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost
    • 2.2.4 Create a likelihood scale
    • 2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment
    • 2.2.6 Expected cost assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business risk owners

    Outcomes of this step

    • Business-approved thresholds for unacceptable risk
    • Completed Risk Register Tool with risks prioritized according to severity
    • Expected cost calculations for high-priority risks

    Identify and Assess IT Risk

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2

    Reveal the organization’s greatest IT threats and vulnerabilities

    1. Establish business-approved risk thresholds for acceptable and unacceptable risk.
    2. Conduct a streamlined assessment of all risks to separate acceptable and unacceptable risks.
    3. Perform a deeper, cost-based assessment of prioritized risks.
    Key metrics:
    • Frequency of IT risk assessments
      • (Annually, bi-annually, etc.)
    • Assessment accuracy
      • Percentage of risk assessments that are substantiated by later occurrences or testing
      • Ratio of cumulative actual costs to expected costs
    • Assessment consistency
      • Percentage of risk assessments that are substantiated by third-party audit
    • Assessment rigor
      • Percentage of identified risk events that undergo first-level assessment (severity scores)
      • Percentage of identified risk events that undergo second-level assessment (expected cost)
    • Stakeholder oversight and participation
      • Level of executive participation in IT risk assessment (attend in person, receive report, etc.)
      • Number of business stakeholder reviews per risk assessment

    Info-Tech Insight

    Risk is money. It’s impossible to make intelligent decisions about risks without knowing what their financial impact will be.

    Review risk assessment fundamentals

    Risk assessment provides you with the raw materials to conduct an informed cost-benefit analysis and make robust risk response decisions.

    In this section, you will be prioritizing your IT risks according to their risk severity, which is a reflection of their expected cost.

    Calculating risk severity

    How much you expect a risk event to cost if it were to occur:

    Likelihood of Risk Impact

    e.g. $250,000 or “High”

    X

    Calibrated by how likely the risk is to occur:

    Likelihood of Risk Occurrence

    e.g. 10% or “Low”

    =

    Produces a dollar value or “severity level” for comparing risks:

    Risk Severity

    e.g. $25,000 or “Medium”
    Which must be evaluated against thresholds for acceptable risk and the cost of risk responses.

    Risk Tolerance
    Risk Response

    CBA
    Cost-benefit analysis

    Maintain the engagement of key stakeholders in the risk assessment process

    1

    Engage the Business During Assessment Process

    Asking business stakeholders to make significant contributions to the assessment exercise may be unrealistic (particularly for members of the senior leadership team, other than the CIO).

    Ensure that they work with you to finalize thresholds for acceptable or unacceptable risk.

    2

    Verify the Risk Impact and Assessment

    If IT has ranked risk events appropriately, the business will be more likely to offer their input. Share impact and likelihood values for key risks to see if they agree with the calculated risk severity scores.

    3

    Identify Where the Business Focuses Attention

    While verifying, pay attention to the risk events that the business stresses as key risks. Keep these risks in mind when prioritizing risk responses as they are more likely to receive funding.

    Try to communicate the assessments of these risk events in terms of expected cost to attract the attention of business leaders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If business executives still won’t provide the necessary information to update your initial risk assessments, IT should approach business unit leaders and lower-level management. Lean on strong relationships forged over time between IT and business managers or supervisors to obtain any additional information.

    Info-Tech recommends a two-level approach to risk assessment

    Review the two levels of risk assessment offered in this blueprint.

    Risk severity level assessment (mandatory)

    1

    Information

    Number of risks: Assess all risk events identified in Phase 1.
    Units of measurement: Use customized likelihood and impact “levels.”
    Time required: One to five minutes per risk event.

    Assess Likelihood

    Negligible
    Low
    Moderate
    High
    Very High

    X

    Assess Likelihood

    Negligible
    Low
    Moderate
    High
    Very High

    =

    Output


    Risk Security Level:

    Moderate

    Example of a risk severity level assessment chart.
    Chart risk events according to risk severity as this allows you to organize and prioritize IT risks.

    Assess all of your identified risk events with a risk severity-level assessment.

    • By creating a likelihood and impact assessment scale divided into three to nine “levels” (sometimes referred to as “buckets”), you can evaluate every risk event quickly while being confident that risks are being assessed accurately.
    • In the following activities, you will create likelihood and impact scales that align with your organizational risk appetite and tolerance.
    • Severity-level assessment is a “first pass” of your risk list, revealing your organization’s most severe IT risks, which can be assessed in greater detail by incorporating expected cost into your evaluation.

    Info-Tech recommends a two-level approach to risk assessment (continued)

    Expected cost assessment (optional)

    2

    Information

    Number of risks: Only assess high-priority risks revealed by severity-level assessment.
    Units of measurement: Use actual likelihood values (%) and impact costs ($).
    Time required: 10-20 minutes per risk event.

    Assess Likelihood

    15%

    Moderate

    X

    Assess Likelihood

    $100,000

    High

    =

    Output


    Expected Cost:

    $15,000

    Expected cost is useful for conducting cost-benefit analysis and comparing IT risks to non-IT risks and other budget priorities for the business.

    Conduct expected cost assessments for IT’s greatest risks.

    For risk events warranting further analysis, translate risk severity levels into hard expected-cost numbers.

    Why conduct expected cost assessments?
    • Expected cost represents how much you would expect to pay in an average year for each risk event.
    • Communicate risk priorities to the business in language they can understand.
    • While risk severity levels are useful for comparing one IT risk to another, expected cost data allows the business to compare IT risks to non-IT risks that may not use the same scales.
    Why is expected cost assessment optional?
    • Determining robust likelihood values and precise impact estimates can be challenging and time consuming.
    • Some risk events may require extensive data gathering and industry analysis.

    Implement and leverage a centralized risk register

    The purpose of the risk register is to act as the repository for all the risks that have been identified within your environment.

    Use this tool to:

    1. Collect and maintain a repository for all IT risk events impacting the organization and relevant information for each risk.
      • Capture all relevant IT risk information in one location.
      • Organize risk identification and assessment information for transparent risk management, stakeholder review, and/or internal audit.
    2. Calculate risk severity scores to prioritize risk events and determine which risks require a risk response.
      • Separate acceptable and unacceptable risks (as determined by the business).
      • Rank risks based on severity levels.
    3. Assess risk responses and calculate residual risk.
      • Evaluate the effect that proposed risk response actions will have on top risk events and quantify residual risk magnitude.
      • This step will be completed in section 3.1

    2.2.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk

    1-4 hours

    Input: Risk events, Risk appetite

    Output: Threshold for risk identified

    Materials: Risk Register Tool, Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    There are times when the business needs to know about IT risks with high expected costs.

    1. Create an expected cost threshold that defines what constitutes an acceptable and unacceptable risk for the organization. This figure should be a concrete dollar value. In the next exercises, you will build risk impact and likelihood scales with this value in mind, ensuring that “high” or “extreme” risks are immediately communicated to senior leadership.
    2. Do not consider IT budget restrictions when developing this number. The acceptable risk threshold should reflect the business’ tolerance/appetite for risk.

    This threshold is typically based on the organization’s ability to absorb financial losses, and its tolerance/appetite towards risk.

    If your organization has ERM, adopt the existing acceptability threshold.

    Record this threshold in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    2.2.2 Create a financial impact assessment scale

    1-4 hours

    Input: Risk events, Risk threshold

    Output: Financial impact scale created

    Materials: Risk Register Tool, Risk Management Program Manual

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    1. Create a scale to assess the financial impact of risk events.
      • Typically, risk impacts are assessed on a scale of 1-5; however, some organizations may prefer to assess risks using 3, 4, 7, or 9-point scales.
    2. Ensure that the unacceptable risk threshold is reflected in the scale.
      • In the example provided, the unacceptable risk threshold ($100,000) is represented as “High” on the impact scale.
    3. Attach labels to each point on the scale. Effective labels will easily distinguish between risks on either side of the unacceptable risk threshold.

    Record the risk impact scale in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    Convert project overruns and service outages into costs

    Use the tables below to quickly convert impacts typically measured in units of time to financial cost. Replace the values in the table with those that reflect your own costs.

    • While project overruns and service outages may have intangible impacts beyond the unexpected costs stemming from paying employees and lost revenue (such as adding complexity to project management and undermining the business’ confidence in IT), these measurements will provide adequate impact estimations for risk assessment.
    • Remember, complex risk events can be analyzed further with an expected cost assessment.
    Project Overruns Scale for the use of cost assessment with dollar amounts associated with impact levels. '$250,000 - Extreme', '$100,000 - High', '$60,000 - Moderate', '$35,000 - Low', '$10,000 - Negligible'.

    Project

    Time (days)

    20 days

    Number of employees

    8

    Average cost per employee (per day)

    $300

    Estimated cost

    $48,000
    Service Outages

    Service

    Time (hours)

    4 hours

    Lost revenue (per hour)

    $10,000

    Estimated cost

    $40,000

    Impact scale

    Low

    2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (1 of 3)

    1-3 hours

    Realized risk events may have profound reputational costs that do not immediately impact your bottom line.

    Reputational cost can take several forms, including the internal and external perception of:
    1. Brand likeability
    2. Product quality
    3. Leadership capability
    4. Social responsibility

    Based on your industry and the nature of the risk, select one of the three techniques described in this section to incorporate reputational costs into your risk assessment.

    Technique #1 – Use financial indicators:

    For-profit companies typically experience reputational loss as a gradual decline in the strength of their brand, exclusion from industry groups, or lost revenue.

    If possible, use these measures to put a price on reputational loss:

    • Lost revenue attributable to reputation loss
    • Loss of market share attributable to reputation loss
    • Drops in share price attributable to reputation loss (for public companies)

    Match this dollar value to the corresponding level on the impact scale created in Activity 2.2.2.

    • If you are not able to effectively translate all reputational costs into financial costs, proceed to techniques 2 and 3 on the following slides.

    2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (2 of 3)

    1-3 hours
    It is common for public sector or not-for-profit organizations to have difficulty putting a price tag on intangible reputational costs.
    • For example, a government organization may be unable to directly quantify the cost of losing the confidence and/or support of the public.
    • A helpful technique is to reframe how reputation is assigned value.
    Technique #2 – Calculate the value of avoiding reputational cost:
    1. Imagine that the particular risk event you are assessing has occurred. Describe the resulting reputational cost using qualitative language.

    For example:

    A data breach, which caused the unsanctioned disclosure of 2,000 client files, has inflicted high reputational costs on the organization. These have impacted the organization in the following ways:

    • Loss of organizational trust in IT
    • IT’s reputation as a value provider to the organization is tarnished
    • Loss of client trust in the organization
    • Potential for a public reprimand of the organization by the government to restore public trust
  • Then, determine (hypothetically) how much money the organization would be willing to spend to prevent the reputational cost from being incurred.
  • Match this dollar value to the corresponding level on the impact scale created in Activity 2.2.2.
  • 2.2.3 Select a technique to measure reputational cost (3 of 3)

    1-3 hours

    If you feel that the other techniques have not reflected reputational impacts in the overall severity level of the risk, create a parallel scale that roughly matches your financial impact scale.

    Technique #3 – Create a parallel scale for reputational impact:

    Visibility is a useful metric for measuring reputational impact. Visibility measures how widely knowledge of the risk event has spread and how negatively the organization is perceived. Visibility has two main dimensions:

    • Internal vs. External
    • Low Amplification vs. High Amplification
    • Internal/External: The further outside of the organization that the risk event is visible, the higher the reputational impact.
      Low/High Amplification: The greater the ability of the actor to communicate and amplify the occurrence of a risk event, the higher the reputational impact.
      After establishing a scale for reputational impact, test whether it reflects the severity of the financial impact levels in the financial impact scale.

    • For example, if the media learns about a recent data breach, does that feel like a $100,000 loss?
    Example:
    Scale for the use of cost assessment  of reputational impact with dimension combinations associated with impact levels. 'External, High Amp, (regulators, lawsuits) - Extreme', 'Internal, High Amp, (CEO) - Low', 'Internal, Low Amp (IT) - Negligible'.

    2.2.4 Create a likelihood scale

    1-3 hours

    Instructions:
    1. Create a scale to assess the likelihood that a risk event will occur over a given period of time.
      • Info-Tech recommends assessing the likelihood that the risk event will occur over a period of one year (the IT risk council should be reassessing the risk event no less than once per year).
    2. Ensure that the likelihood scale contains the same number of levels as the financial impact scale (3, 4, 5, 7, or 9).
    3. The example provided is likely to satisfy most IT departments; however, you may customize the distribution of likelihood values to reflect the organization’s aversion towards uncertainty.
      • For example, an extremely risk-averse organization may consider any risk event with a likelihood greater than 20% to have a “High” likelihood of occurrence.
    4. Attach the same labels used for the financial impact scale (Low, Moderate, High, etc.)

    Record the risk impact scale in section 5.3 of the Risk Management Program Manual

    Scale to assess the likelihood that a risk event will occur. '80-99% - Extreme', '60-79% - High', '40-59% - Moderate' '20-39% - Low', '1-19% - Negligible'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Note: Info-Tech endorses the use of likelihood values (1-99%) rather than frequency (3 times per year) as a measurement.
    For an explanation of why likelihood values lead to more precise and robust risk assessment, see the Appendix.

    2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment

    6-10 hours

    Input: Risk events identified

    Output: Assessed the likelihood of occurrence and impact for all identified risk events

    Materials: Risk Register Tool

    Participants: IT risk council, Relevant business stakeholders, Representation from senior management team, Business risk owner

    Instructions:

    1. Document the “Risk Category” and “Existing Controls.” in the Risk Register Tool.
      • (See the slide following this activity for tips on identifying existing controls.)
    2. Assign each risk event a likelihood and impact level.
      • Remember, you are assessing the impact that a risk event will have on the organization as a whole, not just on IT.
    3. When assigning a financial impact level to a risk event, factor in the likely number of instances that the event will occur within the time frame for which you are assessing (usually one year).
      • For risk events like third-party service outages that typically occur a few times each year, assign them an impact level that reflects the likelihood of financial impact the risk event will have over the entire year.
      • E.g. If your organization is likely to experience two major service outages next year and each outage costs the organization approximately $15,000, the total financial impact is $30,000.

    Record results in the Risk Register Tool

    2.2.5 Risk severity level assessment (continued)

    Instructions (continued):
    1. Assign a risk owner to non-negligible risk events.
      • For organizations that practice ongoing risk management and frequently reassess their risk portfolio (minimum once per year), risk ownership does not need to be assigned to “Negligible” or low-level risks.
      • View the following slides for advice on how to select a risk owner and information on their responsibilities.
    2. As you input the first few likelihood and impact values, compare them to one another to ensure consistency and accuracy:
      • Is a service outage really twice as impactful as our primary software provider going out of business?
      • Is a data breach far more likely than a ›1 hour web-services outage?
    Tips for Selecting Likelihood Values:

    Does ~10% sound right?

    Test a likelihood estimate by assessing the truth of the following statements:

    • The risk event will likely occur once in the next ten years (if the environment remains nearly identical).
    • If ten organizations existed that were nearly identical to our own, it is likely that one out of ten would experience the risk event this year.

    Screenshot of a risk severity level assessment.

    Identify current risk controls

    Consider how IT is already addressing key risks.

    Types of current risk control

    Tactical controls

    Apply to individual risks only.

    Example: A tactical control for backup/replication failure is faster WAN lines.

    Tactical risk control Strategic controls

    Apply to multiple risks.

    Example: A strategic control for backup/replication failure is implementing formal DR plans.

    Strategic risk control
    Risk event Risk event Risk event

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Current Controls' highlighted.
    Consider both tactical and strategic controls already in place when filling out risk event information in the Risk Register Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identifying existing risk controls (past risk responses) provides a clear picture of the measures already in place to avoid, mitigate, or transfer key risks. This reveals opportunities to improve existing risk controls, or where new strategies are needed, to reduce risk severity levels below business thresholds.

    Assign a risk owner for each risk event

    Designate a member of the IT risk council to be responsible for each risk event.

    Selecting the Appropriate Risk Owner

    Use the following considerations to determine the best owner for each risk:

    • The risk owner should be familiar with the process, project, or IT function related to the risk event.
    • The risk owner should have access to the necessary data to monitor and measure the severity of the risk event.
    • The risk owner’s performance assessment should reflect their ability to demonstrate the ongoing management of their assigned risk events.

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Risk Owner' highlighted.

    Risk Owner Responsibilities

    Risk ownership means that an individual is responsible for the following activities:

    • Monitoring the threat or vulnerability for changes in the likelihood of occurrence and/or likely impact.
    • Monitoring changes in the market and external environment that may alter the severity of the risk event.
    • Monitoring changes of closely related risks with interdependencies.
    • Developing and using key risk indicators (KRIs) to measure changes in risk severity.
    • Regularly reporting changes in risk severity to the IT risk council.
    • If necessary, escalating the risk event to other IT risk council personnel or senior management for reassessment.
    • Monitoring risk severity levels for risk events after a risk response has been implemented.

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Costing Tool to calculate the expected cost of IT’s high-priority risks (optional)

    Sample of the Risk Costing Tool.

    Use this tool to:

    1. Conduct a deeper analysis of severe risks.
      • Determine specific likelihood and financial impact values to communicate the severity of the risk in the Expected Cost tab.
      • Identify the maximum financial impact that the risk event may inflict.
    2. Assess the effectiveness of multiple risk responses for each risk event.
      • Determine how proposed risk events will change the likelihood of occurrence and financial impact of the risk event.
    3. Incorporate risk proximity into your cost-benefit analysis of risk responses.
      • Illustrate how spending decisions will impact the expected cost of the risk event over time.

    2.2.6 Expected cost assessment (optional)

    Assign likelihood and financial impact values to high-priority risks.

    Select risks with these characteristics:

    Strongly consider conducting an expected cost assessment for risk events that meet one or more of the following criteria.

    The risk:

    • Has been assigned to the highest risk severity level.
    • Has exposed the organization previously and had severe implications.
    • Exceeds the organization’s threshold for financial impact.
    • Involves an IT function that is highly visible to the business.
    • Will likely require risk response actions that will exceed current IT budgetary constraints.
    • Is conducive to expected cost assessment:
      • There is general consensus on likelihood estimates.
      • There is general consensus on financial impact estimates.
      • Historical data exists to support estimates.
    Determine which risks require a deeper assessment:

    Info-Tech recommends conducting a second-level assessment for 5-15% of your IT risk register.

    Communicating the expected cost of high-priority risks significantly increases awareness of IT risks by the business.

    Communicating risks to the business using their language also increases the likelihood that risk responses will receive the necessary support and investment


    Record the list of risk events requiring second-level assessment in the Risk Costing Tool.

    • Transfer the likelihood and impact levels for each event into the Risk Costing Tool using data from the Risk Register Tool.

    2.2.6 Expected cost assessment (continued)

    Assign likelihood and financial impact values to high-priority risks.

    Instructions:
    1. Go through the list of prioritized risks in the Risk Costing Tool one by one. Indicate the likelihood and impact level (from the Risk Register Tool) for the risk event being assessed.
    2. Record likelihood values (1-99%) and impact values ($) from participants.
      • Only record values from individuals that indicate they are fairly confident with their estimates.
      • Keep likelihood estimates to values that are multiples of five.
    3. Estimate and record the maximum impact that the risk event could inflict.
      • See Appendix III for information on how the possibility of high-impact scenarios may influence your decision making.
    4. Discuss the estimates provided. Eliminate outliers and retracted estimates.
      • If you are unable to achieve consensus, take the average of the values provided.
    5. If you are having difficulty arriving at a likelihood or impact value, select the median value of the level assigned to the risk during the risk severity level assessment.
      • E.g. Risk event assigned to likelihood level “Moderate” (20-39%). Select a likelihood value of 30%.

    Screenshot of the column headings on the risk severity level assessment with 'Optional Inherent Likelihood Parameters' and 'Optional Inherent Impact Parameters' highlighted.

    Who should participate?
    • Depending on the size of your IT risk council, you may want to consider conducting this exercise in a smaller group.
    • Ideally, you should try to find the right balance between ensuring that the necessary experience and knowledge is in the room while insulating the exercise from outlier opinions, noise, and distractions.

    Evaluate likelihood and impact

    Refine your risk assessment process by developing more accurate measurements of likelihood and impact.

    Intersubjective likelihood

    The goal of the expected cost assessment is to develop robust intersubjective estimates of likelihood and financial impact.

    By aggregating a number of expert opinions of what they deem to be the “correct” value, you will arrive at a collectively determined value that better reflects reality than an individual opinion.

    Example: The Delphi Method

    The Delphi Method is a common technique to produce a judgement that is representative of the collective opinion of a group.

    • Participants are sent a series of sequential questionnaires (typically by email).
    • The first questionnaire asks them what the likelihood, likely impact, and expected cost is for a specific risk event.
    • Data from the questionnaire is compiled and then communicated in a subsequent questionnaire, which encourages participants to restate or revise their estimates given the group’s judgements.
    • With each successive questionnaire, responses will typically converge around a single intersubjective value.
    Justifying Your Estimates:

    When asked to explain the numbers you arrived at during the risk assessment, pointing to an assessment methodology gives greater credibility to your estimates.

    • Assign one individual to take notes during the assessment exercise.
    • Have them document the main rationale behind each value and the level of consensus.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The underlying assumption behind intersubjective forecasting is that group judgements are more accurate than individual judgements. However, this may not be the case at all.

    Sometimes, a single expert opinion is more valuable than many uninformed opinions. Defining whose opinion is valuable and whose is not is an unpleasant exercise; therefore, selecting the right personnel to participate in the exercise is crucially important.

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    Phase 3

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Phase 1

    • 1.1 Review IT Risk Management Fundamentals
    • 1.2 Establish a Risk Governance Framework

    Phase 2

    • 2.1 Identify IT Risks
    • 2.2 Assess and Prioritize IT Risks

    Phase 3

    • 3.1 Develop Risk Responses and Monitor IT Risks
    • 3.2 Report IT Risk Priorities

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols
    • Establish the reporting schedule
    • Identify and assess risk responses
    • Analyze risk response cost-benefit
    • Create multi-year cost projections
    • Obtain executive approval for risk action plans
    • Socialize the Risk Report
    • Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers
    • Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Risk business owner

    Step 3.1

    Monitor IT Risks and Develop Risk Responses

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols
    • 3.1.2 Establish the reporting schedule
    • 3.1.3 Identify and assess risk responses
    • 3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis
    • 3.1.5 Create multi-year cost projections

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team
    • Business risk owner

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed risk event action plans
    • Risk responses identified and assessed for top risks
    • Risk response selected for top risks

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Event Action Plan to manage high-priority risks

    Manage risks in between risk assessments and create a paper trail for key risks that exceed the unacceptable risk threshold. Use a new form for every high-priority risk that requires tracking.

    Risk Event Action Plan Sample of the Risk Event Action Plan deliverable.

    Obtaining sign-off from the senior leadership team or from the ERM office is an important step of the risk management process. The Risk Event Action Plan ensures that high-priority risks are closely monitored and that changes in risk severity are detected and reported.

    Clear documentation is a way to ensure that critical information is shared with management so that they can make informed risk decisions. These reports should be succinct yet comprehensive; depending on time and resources, it is good practice to fill out this form and obtain sign-off for the majority of IT risks.

    3.1.1 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols

    The risk owner should be held accountable for monitoring their assigned risks but may delegate responsibility for these tasks.

    Instructions:
    1. Design key risk indicators (KRIs) for risks that measure changes in their severity and document them in the Risk Event Action Plan.
      • See the following slide for examples.
    2. Clearly document the risk owner and the individual(s) carrying out risk monitoring activities (delegates) in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Note: Examples of KRIs can be found on the following slide.

    What are KRIs?
    • KRIs should be observable metrics that alert the IT risk council and management when risk severity exceeds acceptable risk thresholds.
    • KRIs should serve as tripwires or early-warning indicators that trigger further actions to be taken on the risk.
    • Further actions may include:
      • Escalation to the risk owner (if delegated) or to a member of the senior leadership team.
      • Reporting to the IT risk council or IT steering committee.
      • Reassessment.
      • Updating the risk monitoring schedule.

    Document KRIs, escalation thresholds, and escalation protocols for each risk in a Risk Event Action Plan.

    Developing KRIs for success

    Visualization of KRI development, from the 'Risk Event' to the 'Intermediate Steps' with 'KRI Measurements' to the image of a growing seed.

    Examples of KRIs

    • Number of resources who quit or were fired who had access to critical data
    • Number of risk mitigation initiatives unfunded
    • Changes in time horizon of mitigation implementation
    • Number of employees who did not report phishing attempts
    • Amount of time required to get critical operations access to necessary data
    • Number of days it takes to implement a new regulation or compliance control

    3.1.2 Establish the reporting schedule

    For each risk event, document how frequently the risk owner must report to the IT risk council in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    • A clear reporting schedule enforces accountability for each risk event, ensuring that risk owners are fulfilling their monitoring responsibilities.
    • The ongoing discussion of risks between assessment cycles also increases overall awareness of how IT risks are not static but constantly evolving.
    Reporting Risk Event
    Weekly reports to ITRC Risk event severity represented as a thermometer with levels 'Extreme', 'High', 'Moderate', 'Low', and 'Negligible'.
    Bi-weekly reports to ITRC
    Monthly reports to ITRC
    Report to ITRC only if KRI thresholds triggered
    No reports; reassessed bi-annually

    Use Info-Tech’s tools to identify, analyze, and select risk responses

    1

    (Mandatory)
    Tool

    Screenshot of the Risk Register Tool.

    Risk Register Tool

    Information
    • Develop risk responses for all risk events pre-populated on the “2. Risk Register” sheet of the Risk Register Tool.
    • Document the root cause of the risk (Activity 3.1.3) and other contributing factors (Activity 3.1.4).
    • Identify risk responses (Activity 3.1.5).
    • Predict the effectiveness of the risk response, if implemented, by estimating the residual likelihood and impact of the risk (Activity 3.1.5).
    • The tool will calculate the residual severity of the risk after applying the risk response.

    2

    (Optional)
    Tool

    Screenshot of the Risk Costing Tool.

    Risk Costing Tool

    Information
    • Continue your second-level risk analysis for top risks for which you calculated expected cost in section 2.2.
    • Activity 3.1.5:
      • Identify between one and four risk response options for each risk.
      • Develop precise values for residual likelihood and impact.
      • Compare expected cost of the risk event to expected residual cost.
      • Select the risk response to recommend to senior leadership and document it in the Risk Register Tool.

    Determine the root cause of IT risks

    Root cause analysis

    Use the “Five Whys” methodology to identify the root cause and contributing/exacerbating factors for each risk event.

    Diagnosing the root cause of a risk as well as the environmental factors that increase its potential impact and likelihood of occurring allow you to identify more effective risk responses.

    Risk responses that only address the symptoms of the risk are less likely to succeed than responses that address the core issue.

    Concentric circles with 'Root Cause' at the center, 'Contributing Factors' around it, and 'Symptoms' on the outer circle.

    Example of 'The Five Whys Methodology', tracing symptoms to their root cause. In 'Symptoms' we see 'Risk Event: Network outage', Why? 'Network congestion', Why? Then on to 'Contributing Factors' the answer is 'Inadequate bandwidth for latency-sensitive applications', Why? 'Increased business use of latency-sensitive applications', Why? And finally to the 'Root Cause', 'Business units rely on 'real-time' data gathered from latency-sensitive applications', Why?

    Identify factors that contribute to the severity of the risk

    Environmental factors interact with the root cause to increase the likelihood or impact of the risk event.

    What factors matter?

    Identify relevant actors and assets that amplify or diminish the severity of the risk.

    Actors

    • Internal (business units)
    • External (vendor, regulator, market, competitor, hostile actor)

    Assets/Resources

    • Infrastructure
    • Applications
    • Processes
    • Information/data
    • Personnel
    • Reputation
    • Operations
    Develop risk responses that target contributing factors.
    Root cause:
    Business units rely on “real-time” data gathered from latency-sensitive applications

    Actors: Enterprise App users (Finance, Product Development, Product Management)

    Asset/resource: Applications, network

    Risk response:
    Decrease the use of latency-sensitive applications.

    X

    Decreasing the use of key apps contradicts business objectives.

    Contributing factors:
    Unreliable router software

    Actors: Network provider, router vendor, router software vendor, IT department

    Asset/resource: Network, router, router software

    Risk response:
    Replace the vendor that provides routers and router software.

    Replacing the vendor would reduce network outages at a relatively low cost.

    Symptoms:
    Network outage

    Actors: All business units, network provider

    Asset/resource: Network, business operations, employee productivity

    Risk response:
    Replace legacy systems.

    X

    Replacing legacy systems would be too costly.

    3.1.3 Identify and assess risk responses

    Instructions:
    Complete the following steps for each risk event.
    1. Identify a risk response action that will help reduce the likelihood of occurrence or the impact if the event were to occur.
      • Indicate the type of risk response (avoidance, mitigation, transfer, acceptance, or no risk exists).
    2. Assign each risk response action a residual likelihood level and a residual impact level.
      • This is the same step performed in Activity 2.2.6, when initial likelihood and impact levels were determined; however, now you are estimating the likelihood and impact of the risk event after the risk response action has been implemented successfully.
      • The Risk Register Tool will generate a residual risk severity level for each risk event.
    3. Identify the potential Risk Action Owner (Project Manager) if the response is selected and turned into an IT project, and document this in the Risk Register Tool.
    Document the following in the Risk Event Action Plan for each risk event:
      • Risk response actions
      • Residual likelihood and impact levels
      • Residual risk severity level
    • Review the following slides about the four types of risk response to help complete the activity.
      1. Avoidance
      2. Mitigation
      3. Transfer
      4. Acceptance

    Record the results in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Take actions to avoid the risk entirely

    Risk Avoidance

    • Risk avoidance involves taking evasive maneuvers to avoid the risk event.
    • Risk avoidance targets risk likelihood, decreasing the likelihood of the risk event occurring.
    • Since risk avoidance measures are fairly drastic, the likelihood is often reduced to negligible levels.
    • However, risk avoidance response actions often sacrifice potential benefits to eliminate the possibility of the risk entirely.
    • Typically, risk avoidance measures should only be taken for risk events with extremely high severity and when the severity (expected cost) of the risk event exceeds the cost (benefits sacrificed) of avoiding the risk.

    Example

    Risk event: Information security vulnerability from third-party cloud services provider.

    • Risk avoidance action: Store all data in-house.
    • Benefits sacrificed: Cost savings, storage flexibility, etc.
    Stock photo of a person hikiing along a damp, foggy, valley path.

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event

    Risk Mitigation

    • Risk mitigation actions are risk responses that reduce the likelihood and impact of the risk event.
    • Risk mitigation actions can be to either implement new controls or enhance existing ones.
    Example 1

    Most risk responses will reduce both the likelihood of the risk event occurring and its potential impact.

    Example

    Mitigation: Purchase and implement enterprise mobility management (EMM) software with remote wipe capability.

    • EMM reduces the likelihood that sensitive data is accessed by a nefarious actor.
    • The remote-wipe capability reduces the impact by closing the window that sensitive data can be accessed from.
    Example 2

    However, some risk responses will have a greater effect on decreasing the likelihood of a risk event with little effect on decreasing impact.

    Example

    Mitigation: Create policies that restrict which personnel can access sensitive data on mobile devices.

    • This mitigation decreases the number of corporate phones that have access to (or are storing) sensitive data, thereby decreasing the likelihood that a device is compromised.
    Example 3

    Others will reduce the potential impact without decreasing its likelihood of occurring.

    Example

    Mitigation: Use robust encryption for all sensitive data.

    • Corporate-issued mobile phones are just as likely to fall into the hands of nefarious actors, but the financial impact they can inflict on the organization is greatly reduced.

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event (continued)

    Use the following IT functions to guide your selection of risk mitigation actions:

    Process Improvement

    Key processes that would most directly improve the risk profile:

    • Change Management
    • Project Management
    • Vendor Management
    Infrastructure Management
    • Disaster Recovery Plan/Business Continuity Plan
    • Redundancy and Resilience
    • Preventative Maintenance
    • Physical Environment Security
    Personnel
    • Greater staff depth in key areas
    • Increased discipline around documentation
    • Knowledge Management
    • Training
    Rationalization and Simplification

    This is a foundational activity, as complexity is a major source of risk:

    • Application Rationalization – reducing the number of applications
    • Data Management – reducing the volume and locations of data

    Transfer risks to a third party

    Risk transfer: the exchange of uncertain future costs for fixed present costs.

    Insurance

    The most common form of risk transfer is the purchase of insurance.

    • The uncertain future cost of an IT risk event can be transferred to an insurance company who assumes the risk in exchange for insurance premiums.
    • The most common form of IT-relevant insurance is cyberinsurance.

    Not all risks can be insured. Insurable risks typically possess the following five characteristics:

    1. The loss must be accidental (the risk event cannot be insured if it could have been avoided by taking reasonable actions).
    2. The insured cannot profit from the occurrence of the risk event.
    3. The loss must be able to be measured in monetary terms.
    4. The organization must have an insurable interest (it must be the party that incurs the loss).
    5. An insurance company must offer insurance against that risk.
    Other Forms of Risk Transfer

    Other forms of risk transfer include:

    • Self-insurance
      • Appropriate funds can be set aside in advance to address the financial impact of a risk event should it occur.
    • Warranties
    • Contractual transfer
      • The financial impact of a risk event can be transferred to a third party through clauses agreed to in a contract.
      • For example, a vendor can be contractually obligated to assume all costs resulting from failing to secure the organization’s data.
    • Example email addressing fields of an IT Risk Transfer to an insurance company.

    Accept risks that fall below established thresholds

    Risk Acceptance

    Accepting a risk means tolerating the expected cost of a risk event. It is a conscious and deliberate decision to retain the threat.

    You may choose to accept a risk event for one of the following three reasons:

    1. The risk severity (expected cost) of the risk event falls below acceptability thresholds and does not justify an investment in a risk avoidance, mitigation, or transfer measure.
    2. The risk severity (expected cost) exceeds acceptability thresholds but all effective risk avoidance, mitigation, and transfer measures are ineffective or prohibitively expensive.
    3. The risk severity (expected cost) exceeds acceptability thresholds but there are no feasible risk avoidance, mitigation, and transfer measures to be implemented.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Constant monitoring and the assignment of responsibility and accountability for accepted risk events is crucial for effective management of these risks. No IT risk should be accepted without detailed documentation outlining the reasoning behind that decision and evidence of approval by senior management.

    3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis (optional)

    The purpose of a cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is to guide financial decision making.

    This helps IT make risk-conscious investment decisions that fall within the IT budget and helps the organization make sound budgetary decisions for risk response projects that cannot be addressed by IT’s existing budget.

    Instructions:
    1. Reopen the Risk Costing Tool. For each risk that you conducted an expected cost assessment in section 2.2 for, find the Excel sheet that corresponds to the risk number (e.g. R001).
    2. Identify between one and four risk response options for the risk event and document them in the Risk Costing Tool.
      • The “Risk Response 1” field will be automatically populated with expected cost data for a scenario where no action was taken (risk acceptance). This will serve as a baseline for comparing alternative responses.
      • For the following steps, go through the risk responses one by one.
    3. Estimate the first-year cost for the risk response.
      • This cost should reflect initial capital expenditures and first-year operating expenditures.
    Screenshot of the Risk Response cost-benefit-analysis from the Risk Costing Tool with 'Capital Expenditures' and 'Operating Expenditures' highlighted.

    Record the results in the Risk Costing Tool.

    3.1.4 Risk response cost-benefit analysis (continued)

    The purpose of a cost-benefit analysis (CBA) is to guide financial decision making.

    Instructions:

    1. Estimate residual risk likelihood and financial impact for Year 1 with the risk response in place.
      • Rather than estimating the likelihood level (low, medium, high), determine a precise likelihood value of the risk event occurring once the response has been implemented.
      • Estimate the dollar value of financial impacts if the risk event were to occur with the risk response in place.
      • Screenshot of the Risk Response cost-benefit-analysis from the Risk Costing Tool with figured for 'Financial Impact' and 'Probability' highlighted. The tool will calculate the expected residual cost of the risk event: (Financial Impact x Likelihood) - Costs = Expected Residual Cost
    2. Select the highest value risk response and document it in the Risk Register Tool.
    3. Document your analysis and recommendations in the Risk Event Action Plan.

    Note: See Activity 3.1.5 to build multi-year cost projections for risk responses.

    3.1.5 Create multi-year cost projections (optional)

    Select between risk response options by projecting their costs and benefits over multiple years.

    • It can be difficult to choose between risk response options that require different payment schedules. A risk response project with costs spread out over more than one year (e.g. incremental upgrades to an IT system) may be more advantageous than a project with costs concentrated up front that may cost less in the long run (e.g. replacing the system).
    • However, the impact that risk response projects have on reducing risk severity is not necessarily static. For example, an expensive project like replacing a system may drastically reduce the risk severity of a system failure. Whereas, incremental system upgrades may only marginally reduce risk severity in the short term but reach similar levels as a full system replacement in a few years.
    Instructions:

    Calculate expected cost for multiple years using the Risk Costing Tool for:

    • Risk events that are subject to change in severity over time.
    • Risk responses that reduce the severity of the risk gradually.
    • Risk responses that cannot be implemented immediately.

    Copy and paste the graphs into the Risk Report and the Risk Event Action Plan for the risk event.

    Sample charts on the cost of risk responses from the Risk Costing Tool.

    Record the results in the Risk Costing Tool.

    Step 3.2

    Report IT Risk Priorities

    Activities
    • 3.2.1 Obtain executive approval for risk action plans
    • 3.2.2 Socialize the Risk Report
    • 3.2.3 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers
    • 3.2.4 Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT risk council
    • Relevant business stakeholders
    • Representation from senior management team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Obtained approval for risk action plans
    • Communicated IT’s risk recommendations to senior leadership
    • Embedded risk management into day-to-day IT operations

    Monitor, Respond, and Report on IT Risk

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2

    Effectively deliver IT risk expertise to the business

    Communicate IT risk management in two directions:

    1. Up to senior leadership (and ERM if applicable)
    2. Down to IT employees (embedding risk awareness)
    3. Visualization of communicating Up to 'Senior Leadership' and Down to 'IT Personnel'.

    Create a strong paper trail and obtain sign-off for the ITRC’s recommendations.

    Now that you have collected all of the necessary raw data, you must communicate your insights and recommendations effectively.

    A fundamental task of risk management is communicating risk information to senior management. It is your responsibility to enable them to make informed risk decisions. This can be considered upward communication.

    The two primary goals of upward communication are:

    1. Transferring accountability for high-priority IT risks to the ERM or to senior leadership.
    2. Obtaining funds for risk response projects recommended by the ITRC.

    Good risk management also has a trickle-down effect impacting all of IT. This can be considered downward communication.

    The two primary goals of downward communication are:

    1. Fostering a risk-aware IT culture.
    2. Ensuring that the IT risk management program maintains momentum and runs effectively.

    3.2.1 Obtain executive approval for risk action plans

    Best Practices and Key Benefits

    Best practice is for all acceptable risks to also be signed-off by senior leadership. However, for ITRCs that brainstorm 100+ risks, this may not be possible. If this is the case, prioritize accepted risks that were assessed to be closest to the organization’s thresholds.

    By receiving a stamp of approval for each key risk from senior management, you ensure that:

    1. The organization is aware of important IT risks that may impact business objectives.
    2. The organization supports the risk assessment conducted by the ITRC.
    3. The organization supports the plan of action and monitoring responsibilities proposed by the ITRC.
    4. If a risk event were to occur, the organization holds ultimate accountability.
    Sample of the Risk Event Action Plan template.

    Task:
    All IT risks that were flagged for exceeding the organization’s severity thresholds must obtain sign-off by the CIO or another member of the senior leadership team.

    • In the assessment phase, you evaluated risks using severity thresholds approved by the business and determined whether or not they justified a risk response.
    • Whether your recommendation was to accept the risk or to analyze possible risk responses, the business should be made aware of most IT risks.

    3.2.2 Socialize the risk report

    Create a succinct, impactful document that summarizes the outcomes of risk assessment and highlights the IT risk council’s top recommendations to the senior leadership team.

    The Risk Report contains:
    • An executive summary page highlighting the main takeaways for senior management:
      • A short summary of results from the most recent risk assessment
      • Dashboard
      • A list of top 10 risks ordered from most severe to least
    • Subsequent individual risk analyses (1 to 10)
      • Detailed risk assessment data
      • Risk responses
      • Risk response analysis
      • Multi-year cost projection (see the following slide)
      • Dashboard
      • Recommendations
    Sample of the Risk Report template.

    Risk Report

    Pursue projects that reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event

    Encourage risk awareness to extend the benefits of risk management to every aspect of IT.

    Benefits of risk awareness:

    • More preventative and proactive approaches to IT projects are discussed and considered.
    • Changes to the IT threat landscape are more likely to be detected, communicated, and acted upon.
    • IT possesses a realistic perception of its ability to perform functions and provide services.
    • Contingency plans are put in place to hedge against risk events.
    • Fewer IT risks go unidentified.
    • CIOs and business executives make better risk decisions.

    Consequences of low risk awareness:

    • False confidence about the number of IT risks impacting the organization and their severity.
    • Risk-relevant information is not communicated to the ITRC, which may result in inaccurate risk assessments.
    • Confusion surrounding whose responsibility it is to consider how risk impacts IT decision making.
    • Uncertainty and panic when unanticipated risks impact the IT department and the organization.

    Embedding risk management in the IT department is a full-time job

    Take concrete steps to increase risk-aware decision making in IT.

    The IT risk council plays an instrumental role in fostering a culture of risk awareness throughout the IT department. In addition to periodic risk assessments, fulfilling reporting requirements, and undertaking ongoing monitoring responsibilities, members of the ITRC can take a number of actions to encourage other IT employees to adopt a risk-focused approach, particularly at the project planning stage.

    Embed risk management in project planning

    Make time for discussing project risks at every project kick-off.
    • A main benefit of including senior personnel from across IT in the ITRC is that they are able to disseminate the IT risk council’s findings to their respective practices.
    • At project kick-off meetings, schedule time to identify and assess project-specific risks.
    • Encourage the project team to identify strategies to reduce the likelihood and impact of those risks and document these in the project charter.
    • Lead by example by being clear and open about what constitutes acceptable and unacceptable risks.

    Embed risk management with employee

    Train IT staff on the ITRC’s planned responses to specific risk events.
    • If a response to a particular risk event is not to implement a project but rather to institute new policies or procedures, ensure that changes are communicated to employees and that they receive training.
    Provide risk management education opportunities.
    • Remember that a more risk-aware IT employee provides more value to the organization.
    • Invest in your employees by encouraging them to pursue education opportunities like receiving risk management accreditation or providing them with educational experiences such as workshops, seminars, and eLearning.

    Embedding risk management in the IT department is a full-time job (continued)

    Encourage risk awareness by adjusting performance metrics and job titles.

    Performance metrics:

    Depending on the size of your IT department and the amount of resources dedicated to ongoing risk management, you may consider embedding risk management responsibilities into the performance assessments of certain ITRC members or other IT personnel.

    • Personalize the risk management program metrics you have documented in your Risk Management Program Manual.
    • Evidence that KPIs are monitored and frequently reported is also a good indicator that risk owners are fulfilling their risk management responsibilities.
    • Info-Tech Insight

      If risk management responsibilities are not built into performance assessments, it is less likely that they will invest time and energy into these tasks. Adding risk management metrics to performance assessments directly links good job performance with good risk management, making it more likely that ITRC activities and initiatives gain traction throughout the IT department.

    Job descriptions:

    Changing job titles to reflect the focus of an individual’s role on managing IT risk may be a good way to distinguish personnel tasked with developing KRIs and monitoring risks on a week-to-week basis.

    • Some examples include IT Risk Officer, IT Risk Manager, and IT Risk Analyst.

    3.2.3 Transfer ownership of risk responses to project managers

    Once risk responses have obtained approval and funding, it is time to transform them into fully-fledged projects.

    Image of a hand giving a key to another hand and a circle split into quadrants of Governance with 'Governance of Risks' being put into 'Governance of Projects'.

    3.2.4 Finalize the Risk Management Program Manual

    Go back through the Risk Management Program Manual and ensure that the material will accurately reflect your approach to risk management going forward.

    Remember, the program manual is a living document that should be evolving alongside your risk management program, reflecting best practices, knowledge, and experiences accrued from your own assessments and experienced risk events.

    The best way to ensure that the program manual continues to guide and document your risk management program is to make it the focal point of every ITRC meeting and ensure that one participant is tasked with making necessary adjustments and additions.

    Sample of the Risk Management Program Manual. Risk Management Program Manual

    “Upon completing the Info-Tech workshop, the deliverables that we were left with were really outstanding. We put together a 3-year project plan from a high level, outlining projects that will touch upon our high risk areas.” (Director of Security & Risk, Water Management Company)

    Don’t allow your risk management program to flatline

    54% of small businesses haven’t implemented controls to respond to the threat of cyber attacks (Source: Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021)

    Don’t be lulled into a false sense of security. It might be your greatest risk.

    So you’ve identified the most important IT risks and implemented projects to protect IT and the business.

    Unfortunately, your risk assessment is already outdated.

    Perform regular health checks to keep your finger on the pulse of the key risks threatening the business and your reputation.

    To continue the momentum of your newly forged IT risk management program, read Info-Tech’s research on conducting periodic risk assessments and “health checks”:

    Revive Your Risk Management Program With a Regular Health Check

    • Complete Info-Tech’s Risk Management Health Check to seize the momentum you created by building a robust IT risk management program and create a process for conducting periodic health checks and embedding ongoing risk management into every aspect of IT.
    • Our focus is on using data to make IT risk assessment less like an art and more like a science. Ongoing data-driven risk management is self-improving and grounded in historical data.

    Appendix I: Familiarize yourself with key risk terminology

    Review important risk management terms and definitions.

    Risk

    An uncertain event or set of events which, should it occur, will have an effect on the achievement of objectives. A risk consists of a combination of the likelihood of a perceived threat or opportunity occurring and the magnitude of its impact on objectives (Office of Government Commerce, 2007).

    Threat

    An event that can create a negative outcome (e.g. hostile cyber/physical attacks, human errors).

    Vulnerability

    A weakness that can be taken advantage of in a system (e.g. weakness in hardware, software, business processes).

    Risk Management

    The systematic application of principles, approaches, and processes to the tasks of identifying and assessing risks, and then planning and implementing risk responses. This provides a disciplined environment for proactive decision making (Office of Government Commerce, 2007).

    Risk Category

    Distinct from a risk event, a category is an abstract profile of risk. It represents a common group of risks. For example, you can group certain types of risks under the risk category of IT Operations Risks.

    Risk Event

    A specific occurrence of an event that falls under a particular risk category. For example, a phishing attack is a risk event that falls under the risk category of IT Security Risks.

    Risk Appetite

    An organization’s attitude towards risk taking, which determines the amount of risk that it considers acceptable. Risk appetite also refers to an organization’s willingness to take on certain levels of exposure to risk, which is influenced by the organization’s capacity to financially bear risk.

    Enterprise Risk Management

    (ERM) – A strategic business discipline that supports the achievement of an organization’s objectives by addressing the full spectrum of organizational risks and managing the combined impact of those risks as an interrelated risk portfolio (RIMS, 2015).

    Appendix II: Likelihood vs. Frequency

    Why we measure likelihood, not frequency:

    The basic formula of Likelihood x Impact = Severity is a common methodology used across risk management frameworks. However, some frameworks measure likelihood using Frequency rather than Likelihood.

    Frequency is typically measured as the number of instances an event occurs over a given period of time (e.g. once per month).

    • For risk assessment, historical data regarding the frequency of a risk event is commonly used to indicate the likelihood that the event will happen in the future.

    Likelihood is a numerical representation of the “degree of belief” that the risk event will occur in a given future timeframe (e.g. 25% likelihood that the event will occur within the next year).

    False Objectivity

    While some may argue that frequency provides an objective measurement of likelihood, it is well understood in the field of likelihood theory that historical data regarding the frequency of a risk event may have little bearing over the likelihood of that event happening in the future. Frequency is often an indication of future likelihood but should not be considered an objective measurement of it.

    Likelihood scales that use frequency underestimate the magnitude of risks that lack historical precedent. For example, an IT department that has never experienced a high-impact data breach would adopt a very low likelihood score using the frequentist approach. However, if all of the organization’s major competitors have suffered a major breach within the last two years, they ought to possess a much higher degree of belief that the risk event will occur within the next year.

    Likelihood is a more comprehensive measurement of future likelihood, as frequency can be used to inform the selection of a likelihood value. The process of selecting intersubjective likelihood values will naturally internalize historical data such as the frequency that the event occurred in the past. Further, the frequency that the event is expected to occur in the future can be captured by the expected impact value. For example, a risk event that has an expected impact per occurrence of $10,000 that is expected to occur three times over the next year has an expected impact of $30,000.

    Appendix III: Should max impacts sway decision making?

    Don’t just fixate on the most likely impact – be aware of high-impact outcomes.

    During assessment, risks are evaluated according to their most likely financial impact.

    • For example, a service outage will likely last for two hours and may have an expected cost of $14,000.

    Naturally, focusing on the most likely financial impact will exclude higher impacts that – while theoretically possible – are so unlikely that they do not warrant any real consideration.

    • For example, it is possible that a service outage could last for days; however, the likelihood for such an event may be well below 1%.

    While the risk severity level assessment allows you to present impacts as a range of values (e.g. $50,000 to $75,000), the expected cost assessment requires you to select specific values.

    • However, this analysis may fail to consider much higher potential impacts that have non-negligible likelihood values (likelihood values that you cannot ignore).
    • What you consider “non-negligible” will depend on your organizational risk tolerance/appetite.

    Sometimes called Black Swan events or Fat-Tailed outcomes, high-impact events may occur when the far right of the likelihood distribution – or the “tail” – is thicker than a normal distribution (see fig. 2).

    • A good example is a data breach. While small to medium impacts are far more likely to occur than a devastating intrusion, the high-impact scenario cannot be ignored completely.

    For risk events that contain non-negligible likelihoods (too high to be ignored) consider elevating the risk severity level or expected cost.

    Figure 1 is a graph presenting a 'Normal Likelihood Distribution', the axes being 'Likelihood' and 'Financial Impact'.
    Figure 2 is a graph presenting a 'Fat-Tailed Likelihood Distribution' with a point at the top of the parabola labelled 'Most Likely Impact' but with a much wider bottom labelled 'Fat-Tailed Outcomes', the axes being 'Likelihood' and 'Financial Impact'.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s research on security and compliance risk to identify additional risk events

    Title card of the Info-tech blueprint 'Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit' with subtitle 'Don't gamble recklessly with external compliance. Play a winning system and take calculated risks to stack the odds in your favor.


    Take Control of Compliance Improvement to Conquer Every Audit

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t gamble recklessly with external compliance. Play a winning system and take calculated risks to stack the odds in your favor.

    Take an agile approach to analyze your gaps and prioritize your remediations. You don’t always have to be fully compliant as long as your organization understands and can live with the consequences.

    Stock photo of a woman sitting at a computer surrounded by rows of computers.


    Develop and Implement a Security Risk Management Program

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security risk management equals cost effectiveness.

    Time spent upfront identifying and prioritizing risks can mean the difference between spending too much and staying on budget.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz
    Executive Counsellor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Milena Litoiu
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Magerfleisch
    Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Aadil Nanji
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy Neill
    Associate Vice-President of Research
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Daisha Pennie
    IT Risk Management
    Oklahoma State University

    Ken Piddington
    CIO and Executive Advisor
    MRE Consulting

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Sharpe
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Chris Warner
    Consulting Director- Security
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sterling Bjorndahl
    Director of IT Operations
    eHealth Saskatchewan

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Tamara Dwarika
    Internal Auditor
    A leading North American Utility

    Anne Leroux
    Director
    ES Computer Training

    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Michel Fossé
    Consulting Services Manager
    IBM Canada (LGS)

    Petar Hristov
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steve Woodward
    Research Director
    CEO, Cloud Perspectives

    *Plus 10 additional interviewees who wish to remain anonymous.

    Bibliography

    “2021 State of the CIO.” IDG, 28 January 2021. Web.

    “4 Reasons Why CIOs Lose Their Jobs.” Silverton Consulting, 2012. Web.

    Beasley, Mark, Bruce Branson, and Bonnie Hancock. “The State of Risk Oversight,” AICPA, April 2021. Web.

    COBIT 2019. ISACA, 2019. Web.

    “Cognyte jeopardized its database exposing 5 billion records, including earlier data breaches.” SecureBlink, 21 June 2021. Web.

    Culp, Steve. “Accenture 2019 Global Risk Management Study, Financial Services Report.” Accenture, 2019. Web.

    Curtis, Patchin, and Mark Carey. “Risk Assessment in Practice.” COSO Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Deloitte & Touche LLP, 2012. Web.

    “Cyber Risk Management.” Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC), 2022. Web.

    Eccles, Robert G., Scott C. Newquist, and Roland Schatz. “Reputation and Its Risks.” Harvard Business Review, February 2007. Web.

    Eden, C. and F. Ackermann. Making Strategy: The Journey of Strategic Management. Sage Publications, 1998.

    “Enterprise Risk Management Maturity Model.” OECD, 9 February 2021. Web.

    Ganguly, Saptarshi, Holger Harreis, Ben Margolis, and Kayvaun Rowshankish. “Digital Risks: Transforming risk management for the 2020s.” McKinsey & Company, 10 February 2017. Web.

    “Governance Institute of Australia Risk Management Survey 2020.” Governance Institute of Australia, 2020. Web.

    “Guidance on Enterprise Risk Management.” COSO, 2022. Web.

    Henriquez, Maria. “The Top 10 Data Breaches of 2021” Security Magazine, 9 December 2021. Web.

    Holmes, Aaron. “533 million Facebook users’ phone numbers and personal data have been leaked online.” Business Insider, 3 April 2021. Web.

    Bibliography

    “Integrated Risk and Compliance Management for Banks and Financial Services Organizations: Benefits of a Holistic Approach.” MetricStream, 2022. Web.

    “ISACA’s Risk IT Framework Offers a Structured Methodology for Enterprises to Manage Information and Technology Risk.” ISACA, 25 June 2020. Web.

    ISO 31000 Risk Management. ISO, 2018. Web.

    Lawton, George. “10 Enterprise Risk Management Trends in 2022.” TechTarget, 2 February 2022. Web.

    Levenson, Michael. “MGM Resorts Says Data Breach Exposed Some Guests’ Personal Information.” The New York Times, 19 February 2020. Web.

    Management of Risk (M_o_R): Guidance for Practitioners. Office of Government Commerce, 2007. Web.

    “Many small businesses vulnerable to cyber attacks.” Insurance Bureau of Canada (IBC), 5 October 2021.

    Maxwell, Phil. “Why risk-informed decision-making matters.” EY, 3 December 2019. Web.

    “Measuring and Mitigating Reputational Risk.” Marsh, September 2014. Web.

    Natarajan, Aarthi. “The Top 6 Business Risks you should Prepare for in 2022.” Diligent, 22 December 2021. Web.

    “Operational Risk Management Excellence – Get to Strong Survey: Executive Report.” KMPG and RMA, 2014. Web.

    “Third-party risk is becoming a first priority challenge.” Deloitte, 2022. Web.

    Thomas, Adam, and Dan Kinsella. “Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020.” Deloitte, 2021. Web.

    Treasury Board Secretariat. “Guide to Integrated Risk Management.” Government of Canada, 12 May 2016. Web.

    Webb, Rebecca. “6 Reasons Data is Key for Risk Management.” ClearRisk, 13 January 2021. Web.

    “What is Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)?” RIMS, 2015. Web.

    Wiggins, Perry. “Do you spend enough time assessing strategic risks?” CFO, 26 January 2022. Web.

    Run Better Meetings

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}287|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Voice & Video Management
    • Parent Category Link: /voice-video-management

    Your newly hybrid workplace will include virtual, hybrid, and physical meetings, presenting several challenges:

    • The experience for onsite and remote attendees is not equal.
    • Employees are experiencing meeting and video fatigue.
    • Meeting rooms are not optimized for hybrid meetings.
    • The fact is that many people have not successfully run hybrid meetings before.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Successful hybrid workplace plans must include planning around hybrid meetings. Seamless hybrid meetings are the result of thoughtful planning and documented best practices.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify your current state and the root cause of unsatisfactory meetings.
    • Review and identify meetings best practices around meeting roles, delivery models, and training.
    • Improve the technology that supports meetings.
    • Use Info-Tech’s quick checklists and decision flowchart to accelerate meeting planning and cover your bases.

    Run Better Meetings Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should run better meetings, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the current state of meetings

    Understand the problem before you try to fix it. Before you can improve meetings, you need to understand what your norms and challenges currently are.

    • Checklist: Run a Virtual or Hybrid Meeting

    2. Publish best practices for how meetings should run

    Document meeting roles, expectations, and how meetings should run. Decide what kind of meeting delivery model to use and develop a training program.

    • Meeting Challenges and Best Practices
    • Meeting Type Decision Flowchart (Visio)
    • Meeting Type Decision Flowchart (PDF)

    3. Improve meeting technology

    Always be consulting with users: early in the process to set a benchmark, during and after every meeting to address immediate concerns, and quarterly to identify trends and deeper issues.

    • Team Charter
    • Communications Guide Poster Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Run Better Meetings

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Current State of Meetings

    The Purpose

    Understand the current state of meetings in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    What you need to keep doing and what you need to change

    Activities

    1.1 Brainstorm meeting types.

    1.2 Document meeting norms.

    1.3 Document and categorize meeting challenges.

    Outputs

    Documented challenges with meetings

    Meeting norms

    Desired changes to meeting norms

    2 Review and Identify Best Practices

    The Purpose

    Review and implement meeting best practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined meeting best practices for your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Document meeting roles and expectations.

    2.2 Review common meeting challenges and identify best practices.

    2.3 Document when to use a hybrid meeting, virtual meeting, or an in-person meeting.

    2.4 Develop a training program.

    Outputs

    Meeting roles and expectations

    List of meeting best practices

    Guidelines to help workers choose between a hybrid, virtual, or in-person meeting

    Training plan for meetings

    3 Improve Meeting Technology

    The Purpose

    Identify opportunities to improve meeting technology.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A strategy for improving the underlying technologies and meeting spaces

    Activities

    3.1 Empower virtual meeting attendees.

    3.2 Optimize spaces for hybrid meetings.

    3.3 Build a team of meeting champions.

    3.4 Iterate to build and improve meeting technology.

    3.5 Guide users toward each technology.

    Outputs

    Desired improvements to meeting rooms and meeting technology

    Charter for the team of meeting champions

    Communications Guide Poster

    IT Risk management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}40|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}40|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    Mitigation is about balance: take a cost-focused approach to risk management.

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}197|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Business leaders, driven by the need to make more risk-informed decisions, are putting pressure on IT to provide more timely and consistent risk reporting.
    • IT risk managers need to balance the emerging threat landscape with not losing sight of the risks of today.
    • IT needs to strengthen IT controls and anticipate risks in an age of disruption.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A common understanding of risks, threats, and opportunities gives organizations the flexibility and agility to adapt to changing business conditions and drive corporate value.

    Impact and Result

    • Use this blueprint as a baseline to build a customized IT risk taxonomy suitable for your organization.
    • Learn about the role and drivers of integrated risk management and the benefits it brings to enterprise decision-makers.
    • Discover how to set up your organization up for success by understanding how risk management links to organizational strategy and corporate performance.

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an IT Risk Taxonomy – Develop a common approach to managing risks to enable faster, more effective decision making.

    Learn how to develop an IT risk taxonomy that will remain relevant over time while providing the granularity and clarity needed to make more effective risk-based decisions.

    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy – Phases 1-3

    2. Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Guideline and Template – A set of tools to customize and design an IT risk taxonomy suitable for your organization.

    Leverage these tools as a starting point to develop risk levels and definitions appropriate to your organization. Take a collaborative approach when developing your IT risk taxonomy to gain greater acceptance and understanding of accountability.

    • IT Risk Taxonomy Committee Charter Template
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Guideline
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Definitions
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template

    3. IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook – A place to complete activities and document decisions that may need to be communicated.

    Use this workbook to document outcomes of activities and brainstorming sessions.

    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    4. IT Risk Register – An internal control tool used to manage IT risks. Risk levels archived in this tool are instrumental to achieving an integrated and holistic view of risks across an organization.

    Leverage this tool to document risk levels, risk events, and controls. Smaller organizations can leverage this tool for risk management while larger organizations may find this tool useful to structure and define risks prior to using a risk management software tool.

    • Risk Register Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    The Purpose

    Review IT risk fundamentals and governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn how enterprise risk management and IT risk management intersect and the role the IT taxonomy plays in integrated risk management.

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss risk fundamentals and the benefits of integrated risk.

    1.2 Create a cross-functional IT taxonomy working group.

    Outputs

    IT Risk Taxonomy Committee Charter Template

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    2 Identify Level 1 Risk Types

    The Purpose

    Identify suitable IT level 1 risk types.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Level 1 IT risk types are determined and have been tested against ERM level one risk types.

    Activities

    2.1 Discuss corporate strategy, business risks, macro trends, and organizational opportunities and constraints.

    2.2 Establish level 1 risk types.

    2.3 Test soundness of IT level 1 types by mapping to ERM level 1 types.

    Outputs

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    3 Identify Level 2 and Level 3 Risk Types

    The Purpose

    Define level 2 and level 3 risk types.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Level 2 and level 3 risk types have been determined.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish level 2 risk types.

    3.2 Establish level 3 risk types (and level 4 if appropriate for your organization).

    3.3 Begin to test by working backward from controls to ensure risk events will aggregate consistently.

    Outputs

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template

    Risk Register Tool

    4 Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    The Purpose

    Test the robustness of your IT risk taxonomy by populating the risk register with risk events and controls.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Your IT risk taxonomy has been tested and your risk register has been updated.

    Activities

    4.1 Continue to test robustness of taxonomy and iterate if necessary.

    4.2 Optional activity: Draft your IT risk appetite statements.

    4.3 Discuss communication and continual improvement plan.

    Outputs

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template

    Risk Register Tool

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    Further reading

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    If integrated risk is your destination, your IT risk taxonomy is the road to get you there.

    Analyst Perspective

    Donna Bales.

    The pace and uncertainty of the current business environment introduce new and emerging vulnerabilities that can disrupt an organization’s strategy on short notice.

    Having a long-term view of risk while navigating the short term requires discipline and a robust and strategic approach to risk management.

    Managing emerging risks such as climate risk, the impact of digital disruption on internal technology, and the greater use of third parties will require IT leaders to be more disciplined in how they manage and communicate material risks to the enterprise.

    Establishing a hierarchical common language of IT risks through a taxonomy will facilitate true aggregation and integration of risks, enabling more effective decision making. This holistic, disciplined approach to risk management helps to promote a more sustainable risk culture across the organization while adding greater rigor at the IT control level.

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    IT has several challenges when managing and responding to risk events:

    • Business leaders, driven by the need to make more risk-informed decisions, are putting pressure on IT to provide more timely and consistent risk reporting.
    • Navigating today’s ever-evolving threat landscape is complex. IT risk managers need to balance the emerging threat landscape while not losing sight of the risks of today.
    • IT needs to strengthen IT controls and anticipate risks in an age of disruption.

    Many IT organizations encounter obstacles in these areas:

    • Ensuring an integrated, well-coordinated approach to risk management across the organization.
    • Developing an IT risk taxonomy that will remain relevant over time while providing sufficient granularity and definitional clarity.
    • Gaining acceptance and ensuring understanding of accountability. Involving business leaders and a wide variety of risk owners when developing your IT risk taxonomy will lead to greater organizational acceptance.

    .

    • Take a collaborative approach when developing your IT risk taxonomy to gain greater acceptance and understanding of accountability.
    • Spend the time to fully analyze your current and future threat landscape when defining your level 1 IT risks and consider the causal impact and complex linkages and intersections.
    • Recognize that the threat landscape will continue to evolve and that your IT risk taxonomy is a living document that must be continually reviewed and strengthened.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A common understanding of risks, threats, and opportunities gives organizations the flexibility and agility to adapt to changing business conditions and drive corporate value.

    Increasing threat landscape

    The risk landscape is continually evolving, putting greater pressure on the risk function to work collaboratively throughout the organization to strengthen operational resilience and minimize strategic, financial, and reputational impact.

    Financial Impact

    Strategic Risk

    Reputation Risk

    In IBM’s 2021 Cost of a Data Breach Report, the Ponemon Institute found that data security breaches now cost companies $4.24 million per incident on average – the highest cost in the 17-year history of the report.

    58% percent of CROs who view inability to manage cyber risks as a top strategic risk.

    EY’s 2022 Global Bank Risk Management survey revealed that Chief Risk Officers (CROs) view the inability to manage cyber risk and the inability to manage cloud and data risk as the top strategic risks.

    Protiviti’s 2023 Executive Perspectives on Top Risks survey featured operational resilience within its top ten risks. An organization’s failure to be sufficiently resilient or agile in a crisis can significantly impact operations and reputation.

    Persistent and emerging threats

    Organizations should not underestimate the long-term impact on corporate performance if emerging risks are not fully understood, controlled, and embedded into decision-making.

    Talent Risk

    Sustainability

    Digital Disruption

    Protiviti’s 2023 Executive Perspectives on Top Risks survey revealed talent risk as the top risk organizations face, specifically organizations’ ability to attract and retain top talent. Of the 38 risks in the survey, it was the only risk issue rated at a “significant impact” level.

    Sustainability is at the top of the risk agenda for many organizations. In EY’s 2022 Global Bank Risk Management survey, environmental, social, and governance (ESG) risks were identified as a risk focus area, with 84% anticipating it to increase in priority over the next three years. Yet Info-Tech’s Tech Trends 2023 report revealed that only 24% of organizations could accurately report on their carbon footprint.

    Source: Info-Tech 2023 Tech Trends Report

    The risks related to digital disruption are vast and evolving. In the short term, risks surface in compliance and skills shortage, but Protiviti’s 2023 Executive Perspectives survey shows that in the longer term, executives are concerned that the speed of change and market forces may outpace an organization’s ability to compete.

    Build an IT risk taxonomy: As technology and digitization continue to advance, risk management practices must also mature. To strengthen operational and financial resiliency, it is essential that organizations move away from a siloed approach to IT risk management wart an integrated approach. Without a common IT risk taxonomy, effective risk assessment and aggregation at the enterprise level is not possible.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Simple, customizable approach to build an IT risk taxonomy
    • Improved satisfaction with IT for senior leadership and business units
    • Greater ability to respond to evolving threats
    • Improved understanding of IT’s role in enterprise risk management (ERM)
    • Stronger, more reliable internal control framework
    • Reduced operational surprises and failures
    • More dynamic decision making
    • More proactive risk responses
    • Improve transparency and comparability of risks across silos
    • Better financial resilience and confidence in meeting regulatory requirements
    • More relevant risk assurance for key stakeholders

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    IT Risk Taxonomy Committee Charter Template

    Create a cross-functional IT risk taxonomy committee.

    The image contains a screenshot of the IT risk taxonomy committee charter template.

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Guideline

    Use IT risk taxonomy as a baseline to build your organization’s approach.

    The image contains a screenshot of the build an it risk taxonomy guideline.

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template

    Use this template to design and test your taxonomy.

    The image contains a screenshot of the build an IT risk taxonomy design template.

    Risk Register Tool

    Update your risk register with your IT risk taxonomy.

    The image contains a screenshot of the risk register tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    Use the tools and activities in each phase of the blueprint to customize your IT risk taxonomy to suit your organization’s needs.

    The image contains a screenshot of the build an IT risk taxonomy workbook.

    Benefit from industry-leading best practices

    As a part of our research process, we used the COSO, ISO 31000, and COBIT 2019 frameworks. Contextualizing IT risk management within these frameworks ensures that our project-focused approach is grounded in industry-leading best practices for managing IT risk.

    COSO’s Enterprise Risk Management —Integrating with Strategy and Performance addresses the evolution of enterprise risk management and the need for organizations to improve their approach to managing risk to meet the demands of an evolving business environment.

    ISO 31000 – Risk Management can help organizations increase the likelihood of achieving objectives, improve the identification of opportunities and threats, and effectively allocate and use resources for risk treatment.

    COBIT 2019’s IT functions were used to develop and refine the ten IT risk categories used in our top-down risk identification methodology.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Review risk management fundamentals.

    Call #2: Review the role of an IT risk taxonomy in risk management.

    Call #3: Establish a cross-functional team.

    Calls #4-5: Identify level 1 IT risk types. Test against enterprise risk management.

    Call #6: Identify level 2 and level 3 risk types.

    Call #7: Align risk events and controls to level 3 risk types and test.

    Call #8: Update your risk register and communicate taxonomy internally.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series

    of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Review IT Risk Fundamentals and Governance

    Identify Level 1 IT Risk Types

    Identify Level 2 and Level 3 Risk Types

    Monitor, Report, and Respond to IT Risk

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Discuss risk fundamentals and the benefits of integrated risk.

    1.2 Create a cross-functional IT taxonomy working group.

    2.1 Discuss corporate strategy, business risks, macro trends, and organizational opportunities and constraints.

    2.2 Establish level 1 risk types.

    2.3 Test soundness of IT level 1 types by mapping to ERM level 1 types.

    3.1 Establish level 2 risk types.

    3.2 Establish level 3 risk types (and level 4 if appropriate for your organization).

    3.3 Begin to test by working backward from controls to ensure risk events will aggregate consistently.

    4.1 Continue to test robustness of taxonomy and iterate if necessary.

    4.2 Optional activity: Draft your IT risk appetite statements.

    4.3 Discuss communication and continual improvement plan.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. T Risk Taxonomy Committee Charter Template
    2. Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    1. Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    1. IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template
    2. Risk Register
    1. IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template
    2. Risk Register
    3. Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    1. Workshop Report

    Phase 1

    Understand Risk Management Fundamentals

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    • Governance, Risk, and Compliance
    • Enterprise Risk Management
    • Enterprise Risk Appetite
    • Risk Statements and Scenarios
    • What Is a Risk Taxonomy?
    • Functional Role of an IT Risk Taxonomy
    • Connection to Enterprise Risk Management
    • Establish Committee
    • Steps to Define IT Risk Taxonomy
    • Define Level 1
    • Test Level 1
    • Define Level 2 and 3
    • Test via Your Control Framework

    Governance, risk, and compliance (GRC)

    Risk management is one component of an organization’s GRC function.

    GRC principles are important tools to support enterprise management.

    Governance sets the guardrails to ensure that the enterprise is in alignment with standards, regulations, and board decisions. A governance framework will communicate rules and expectations throughout the organization and monitor adherence.

    Risk management is how the organization protects and creates enterprise value. It is an integral part of an organization’s processes and enables a structured decision-making approach.

    Compliance is the process of adhering to a set of guidelines; these could be external regulations and guidelines or internal corporate policies.

    GRC principles are tightly bound and continuous

    The image contains a screenshot of a continuous circle that is divided into three parts: risk, compliance, and governance.

    Enterprise risk management

    Regardless of size or structure, every organization makes strategic and operational decisions that expose it to uncertainties.

    Enterprise risk management (ERM) is a strategic business discipline that supports the achievement of an organization’s objectives by addressing the full spectrum of its risks and managing the combined impact of those risks as an interrelated risk portfolio (RIMS).

    An ERM is program is crucial because it will:

    • Help shape business objectives, drive revenue growth, and execute risk-based decisions.
    • Enable a deeper understanding of risks and assessment of current risk profile.
    • Support forward-looking risk management and more constructive dialogue with the board and regulatory agencies.
    • Provide insight on the robustness and efficacy of risk management processes, tools, and controls.
    • Drive a positive risk culture.

    ERM is supported by strategy, effective processes, technology, and people

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates how ERM is supported by strategy, effective processes, technology, and people.

    Risk frameworks

    Risk frameworks are leveraged by the industry to “provide a structure and set of definitions to allow enterprises of all types and sizes to understand and better manage their risk environments.” COSO Enterprise Risk Management, 2nd edition

    • Many organizations lean on the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations’ Enterprise Risk Management framework (COSO ERM) and ISO 31000 to view organizational risks from an enterprise perspective.
    • Prior to the introduction of standardized risk frameworks, it was difficult to quantify the impact of a risk event on the entire enterprise, as the risk was viewed in a silo or as an individual risk component.
    • Recently, the National Institute of Science and Technology (NIST) published guidance on developing an enterprise risk management approach. The guidance helps to bridge the gap between best practices in enterprise risk management and processes and control techniques that cybersecurity professionals use to meet regulatory cybersecurity risk requirements.

    The image contains a screenshot of NIST ERM approach to strategic risk.

    Source: National Institute of Standards and Technology

    New NIST guidance (NISTIR 8286) emphasizes the complexity of risk management and the need for the risk management process to be carried out seamlessly across three tiers with the overall objective of continuous improvement.

    Enterprise risk appetite

    “The amount of risk an organization is willing to take in pursuit of its objectives”

    – Robert R. Moeller, COSO ERM Framework Model
    • A primary role of the board and senior management is to balance value creation with effectively management of enterprise risks.
    • As part of this role, the board will approve the enterprise’s risk appetite. Placing this responsibility with the board ensures that the risk appetite is aligned with the company’s strategic objectives.
    • The risk appetite is used throughout the organization to assess and respond to individual risks, acting as a constant to make sure that risks are managed within the organization’s acceptable limits.
    • Each year, or in reaction to a risk trigger, the enterprise risk appetite will be updated and approved by the board.
    • Risk appetite will vary across organizations for several reasons, such as industry, company culture, competitors, the nature of the objectives pursued, and financial strength.

    Change or new risks » adjust enterprise risk profile » adjust risk appetite

    Risk profile vs. risk appetite

    Risk profile is the broad parameters an organization considers in executing its business strategy. Risk appetite is the amount of risk an entity is willing to accept in pursuit of its strategic objectives. The risk appetite can be used to inform the risk profile or vice versa. Your organization’s risk culture informs and is used to communicate both.

    Risk Tolerant

    Moderate

    Risk Averse

    • You have no compliance requirements.
    • You have no sensitive data.
    • Customers do not expect you to have strong security controls.
    • Revenue generation and innovative products take priority and risk is acceptable.
    • The organization does not have remote locations.
    • It is likely that your organization does not operate within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Healthcare
      • Telecom
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    • You have some compliance requirements, such as:
      • HIPAA
      • PIPEDA
    • You have sensitive data and are required to retain records.
    • Customers expect strong security controls.
    • Information security is visible to senior leadership.
    • The organization has some remote locations.
    • Your organization most likely operates within the following industries:
      • Government
      • Research
      • Education
    • You have multiple strict compliance and/or regulatory requirements.
    • You house sensitive data, such as medical records.
    • Customers expect your organization to maintain strong and current security controls.
    • Information security is highly visible to senior management and public investors.
    • The organization has multiple remote locations.
    • Your organization operates within the following industries:
      • Finance
      • Healthcare
      • Telecom

    Where the IT risk appetite fits into the risk program

    • Your organization’s strategy and associated risk appetite cascade down to each business department. Overall strategy and risk appetite also set a strategy and risk appetite for each department.
    • Both risk appetite and risk tolerances set boundaries for how much risk an organization is willing or prepared to take. However, while appetite is often broad, tolerance is tactical and focused.
    • Tolerances apply to specific objectives and provide guidance to those executing on a day-to-day basis. They measure the variation around performance expectations that the organization will tolerate.
    • Ideally, they are incorporated into existing governance, risk, and compliance systems and are also considered when evaluated business cases.
    • IT risk appetite statements are based on IT level 1 risk types.

    The risk appetite has a risk lens but is also closely linked to corporate performance.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates how risk appetite has a risk lens, and how it is linked to corporate performance.

    Statements of risk

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram of the risk landscape.

    Risk Appetite

    Risk Tolerance

    • The general amount of risk an organization is willing to accept while pursuing its objectives.
    • Proactive, future view of risks that reflects the desired range of enterprise performance.
    • Reflects the longer-term strategy of what needs to be achieved and the resources available to achieve it, expressed in quantitative criteria.
    • Risk appetites will vary for several reasons, such as the company culture, financial strength, and capabilities.
    • Risk tolerance is the acceptable deviation from the level set by the risk appetite.
    • Risk tolerance is a tactical tool often expressed in quantitative terms.
    • Key risk indicators are often used to align to risk tolerance limits to ensure the organization stays within the set risk boundary.

    Risk scenarios

    Risk scenarios serve two main purposes: to help decision makers understand how adverse events can affect organizational strategy and objectives and to prepare a framework for risk analysis by clearly defining and decomposing the factors contributing to the frequency and the magnitude of adverse events.

    ISACA
    • Organizations’ pervasive use of and dependency on technology has increased the importance of scenario analysis to identify relevant and important risks and the potential impacts of risk events on the organization if the risk event were to occur.
    • Risk scenarios provide “what if” analysis through a structured approach, which can help to define controls and document assumptions.
    • They form a constructive narrative and help to communicate a story by bringing in business context.
    • For the best outcome, have input from business and IT stakeholders. However, in reality, risk scenarios are usually driven by IT through the asset management practice.
    • Once the scenarios are developed, they are used during the risk analysis phase, in which frequency and business impacts are estimated. They are also a useful tool to help the risk team (and IT) communicate and explain risks to various business stakeholders.

    Top-down approach – driven by the business by determining the business impact, i.e. what is the impact on my customers, reputation, and bottom line if the system that supports payment processing fails?

    Bottom-up approach – driven by IT by identifying critical assets and what harm could happen if they were to fail.

    Example risk scenario

    Use level 1 IT risks to derive potential scenarios.

    Risk Scenario Description

    Example: IT Risks

    Risk Scenario Title

    A brief description of the risk scenario

    The enterprise is unable to recruit and retain IT staff

    Risk Type

    The process or system that is impacted by the risk

    • Service quality
    • Product and service cost

    Risk Scenario Category

    Deeper insight into how the risk might impact business functions

    • Inadequate capacity to support business needs
    • Talent and skills gap due to inability to retain talent

    Risk Statement

    Used to communicate the potential adverse outcomes of a particular risk event and can be used to communicate to stakeholders to enable informed decisions

    The organization chronically fails to recruit sufficiently skilled IT workers, leading to a loss of efficiency in overall technology operation and an increased security exposure.

    Risk Owner

    The designated party responsible and accountable for ensuring that the risk is maintained in accordance with enterprise requirements

    • Head of Human Resources
    • Business Process Owner

    Risk Oversight

    The person (role) who is responsible for risk assessments, monitoring, documenting risk response, and establishing key risk indicators

    CRO/COO

    Phase 2

    Set Your Organization Up for Success

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    • Governance, Risk, and Compliance
    • Enterprise Risk Management
    • Enterprise Risk Appetite
    • Risk Statements and Scenarios
    • What Is a Risk Taxonomy?
    • Functional Role of an IT Risk Taxonomy
    • Connection to Enterprise Risk Management
    • Establish Committee
    • Steps to Define IT Risk Taxonomy
    • Define Level 1
    • Test Level 1
    • Define Level 2 and 3
    • Test via Your Control Framework

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • How to set up a cross-functional IT risk taxonomy committee

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • CRO
    • IT Risk Owners
    • Business Leaders
    • Human Resources

    What is a risk taxonomy?

    A risk taxonomy provides a common risk view and enables integrated risk

    • A risk taxonomy is the (typically hierarchical) categorization of risk types. It is constructed out of a collection of risk types organized by a classification scheme.
    • Its purpose is to assist with the management of an organization’s risk by arranging risks in a classification scheme.
    • It provides foundational support across the risk management lifecycle in relation to each of the key risks.
    • More material risk categories form the root nodes of the taxonomy, and risk types cascade into more granular manifestations (child nodes).
    • From a risk management perspective, a taxonomy will:
      • Enable more effective risk aggregation and interoperability.
      • Provide the organization with a complete view of risks and how risks might be interconnected or concentrated.
      • Help organizations form a robust control framework.
      • Give risk managers a structure to manage risks proactively.

    Typical Tree Structure

    The image contains a screenshot of the Typical Tree Structure.

    What is integrated risk management?

    • Integrated risk management is the process of ensuring all forms of risk information, including risk related to information and technology, are considered and included in the organization’s risk management strategy.
    • It removes the siloed approach of classifying risks related to specific departments or areas of the organization, recognizing that each risk is a potential threat to the overarching enterprise.
    • By aggregating the different threats or uncertainty that might exist within an organization, integrated risk management enables more informed decisions to be made that align to strategic goals and continue to drive value back to the business.
    • By holistically considering the different risks, the organization can make informed decisions on the best course of action that will reduce any negative impacts associated with the uncertainty and increase the overall value.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ERM.

    Integrated risk management: A strategic and collaborative way to manage risks across the organization. It is a forward-looking, business-specific outlook with the objective of improving risk visibility and culture.

    Drivers and benefits of integrated risk

    Drivers for Integrated Risk Management

    • Business shift to digital experiences
    • The breadth and number of risks requiring oversight
    • The need for faster risk analysis and decision making

    Benefits of Integrated Risk Management

    • Enables better scenario planning
    • Enables more proactive risk responses
    • Provides more relevant risk assurance to key stakeholders
    • Improves transparency and comparability of risks across organizational silos
    • Supports better financial resilience

    Business velocity and complexity are making real-time risk management a business necessity.

    If integrated risk is the destination, your taxonomy is your road to get you there

    Info-Tech’s Model for Integrated Risk

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's Model for Integrated Risk.

    How the risk practices intersect

    The risk taxonomy provides a common classification of risks that allows risks to roll up systematically to enterprise risk, enabling more effective risk responses and more informed decision making.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates how the risk practices intersect.

    ERM taxonomy

    Relative to the base event types, overall there is an increase in the number of level 1 risk types in risk taxonomies

    Oliver Wyman
    • The changing risk profile of organizations and regulatory focus in some industries is pushing organizations to rethink their risk taxonomies.
    • Generally, the expansion of level 1 risk types is due to the increase in risk themes under the operational risk umbrella.
    • Non-financial risks are risks that are not considered to be traditional financial risks, such as operational risk, technology risk, culture, and conduct. Environmental, social, and governance (ESG) risk is often referred to as a non-financial risk, although it can have both financial and non-financial implications.
    • Certain level 1 ERM risks, such as strategic risk, reputational risk, and ESG risk, cover both financial and non-financial risks.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram of the Traditional ERM Structure.

    Operational resilience

    • The concept of operational resiliency was first introduced by European Central Bank (ECB) in 2018 as an attempt to corral supervisory cooperation on operational resiliency in financial services.
    • The necessity for stronger operational resiliency became clear during the early stages of COVID-19 when many organizations were not prepared for disruption, leading to serious concern for the safety and soundness of the financial system.
    • It has gained traction and is now defined in global supervisory guidance. Canada’s prudential regulator, Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions (OSFI), defines it as “the ability of a financial institution to deliver its operations, including its critical operations, through disruption.”
    • Practically, its purpose is to knit together several operational risk management categories such as business continuity, security, and third-party risk.
    • The concept has been adopted by information and communication technology (ICT) companies, as technology and cyber risks sit neatly under this risk type.
    • It is now not uncommon to see operational resiliency as a level 1 risk type in a financial institution’s ERM framework.

    Operational resilience will often feature in ERM frameworks in organizations that deliver critical services, products, or functions, such as financial services

    Operational Resilience.

    ERM level 1 risk categories

    Although many organizations have expanded their enterprise risk management taxonomies to address new threats, most organizations will have the following level 1 risk types:

    ERM Level 1

    Definition

    Definition Source

    Financial

    The ability to obtain sufficient and timely funding capacity.

    Global Association of Risk Professionals (GARP)

    Non-Financial

    Non-financial risks are risks that are not considered to be traditional financial risks such as operational risk, technology risk, culture and conduct.

    Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions (OSFI)

    Reputational

    Potential negative publicity regarding business practices regardless of validity.

    US Federal Reserve

    Global Association of Risk Professionals (GARP)

    Strategic

    Risk of unsuccessful business performance due to internal or external uncertainties, whether the event is event or trend driven. Actions or events that adversely impact an organizations strategies and/or implementation of its strategies.

    The Risk Management Society (RIMS)

    Sustainability (ESG)

    This risk of any negative financial or reputational impact on an organizations stemming from current or prospective impacts of ESG factors on its counterparties or invested assets.

    Open Risk Manual

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Talent and Risk Culture

    The widespread behaviors and mindsets that can threaten sound decision-making, prudent risk-taking, and effective risk management and can weaken an institution’s financial and operational resilience.

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Different models of ERM

    Some large organizations will elevate certain operational risks to level 1 organizational risks due to risk materiality.

    Every organization will approach its risk management taxonomy differently; the number of level 1 risk types will vary and depend highly on perceived impact.

    Some of the reasons why an organization would elevate a risk to a level 1 ERM risk are:

    • The risk has significant impact on the organization's strategy, reputation, or financial performance.
    • The regulator has explicitly called out board oversight within legislation.
    • It is best practice in the organization’s industry or business sector.
    • The organization has structured its operations around a particular risk theme due to its potential negative impact. For example, the organization may have a dedicated department for data privacy.

    Level 1

    Potential Rationale

    Industries

    Risk Definition

    Advanced Analytics

    Use of advanced analytics is considered material

    Large Enterprise, Marketing

    Risks involved with model risk and emerging risks posed by artificial intelligence/machine learning.

    Anti-Money Laundering (AML) and Fraud

    Risk is viewed as material

    Financial Services, Gaming, Real Estate

    The risk of exposure to financial crime and fraud.

    Conduct Risk

    Sector-specific risk type

    Financial Services

    The current or prospective risk of losses to an institution arising from inappropriate supply of financial services including cases of willful or negligent misconduct.

    Operational Resiliency

    Sector-specific risk type

    Financial Services, ICT

    Organizational risk resulting from an organization’s failure to deliver its operations, including its critical operations, through disruption.

    Privacy

    Board driven – perceived as material risk to organization

    Healthcare, Financial Services

    The potential loss of control over personal information.

    Information Security

    Board driven – regulatory focus

    All may consider

    The people, processes, and technology involved in protecting data (information) in any form – whether digital or on paper – through its creation, storage, transmission, exchange, and destruction.

    Risk and impact

    Mapping risks to business outcomes happens within the ERM function and by enterprise fiduciaries.

    • When mapping risk events to enterprise risk types, the relationship is rarely linear. Rather, risk events typically will have multiple impacts on the enterprise, including strategic, reputational, ESG, and financial impacts.
    • As risk information is transmitted from lower levels, it informs the next level, providing the appropriate information to prioritize risk.
    • In the final stage, the enterprise portfolio view will reflect the enterprise impacts according to risk dimensions, such as strategic, operational, reporting, and compliance.

    Rolling Up Risks to a Portfolio View

    The image contains a screenshot to demonstrate rolling up risks to a portfolio view.

    1. A risk event within IT will roll up to the enterprise via the IT risk register.
    2. The impact of the risk on cash flow and operations will be aggregated and allocated in the enterprise risk register by enterprise fiduciaries (e.g. CFO).
    3. The impacts are translated into full value exposures or modified impact and likelihood assessments.

    Common challenges

    How to synthesize different objectives between IT risk and enterprise risk

    Commingling risk data is a major challenge when developing a risk taxonomy, but one of the underlying reasons is that the enterprise and IT look at risk from different dimensions.

    • The role of the enterprise in risk management is to provide and preserve value, and therefore the enterprise evaluates risk on an adjusted risk-return basis.
    • To do this effectively, the enterprise must break down silos and view risk holistically.
    • ERM is a top-down process of evaluating risks that may impact the entity. As part of the process, ERM must manage risks within the enterprise risk framework and provide reasonable assurances that enterprise objectives will be met.
    • IT risk management focuses on internal controls and sits as a function within the larger enterprise.
    • IT takes a bottom-up approach by applying an ongoing process of risk management and constantly identifying, assessing, prioritizing, and mitigating risks.
    • IT has a central role in risk mitigation and, if functioning well, will continually reduce IT risks, simplifying the role for ERM.

    Establish a team

    Cross-functional collaboration is key to defining level 1 risk types.

    Establish a cross-functional working group.

    • Level 1 IT risk types are the most important to get right because they are the root nodes that all subtypes of risk cascade from.
    • To ensure the root nodes (level 1 risk types) address the risks of your organization, it is vital to have a strong understanding or your organization’s value chain, so your organizational strategy is a key input for defining your IT level 1 risk types.
    • Since the taxonomy provides the method for communicating risks to the people who need to make decisions, a wide understanding and acceptance of the taxonomy is essential. This means that multiple people across your organization should be involved in defining the taxonomy.
    • Form a cross-functional tactical team to collaborate and agree on definitions. The team should include subject matter experts and leaders in key risk and business areas. In terms of governance structure, this committee might sit underneath the enterprise risk council, and members of your IT risk council may also be good candidates for this tactical working group.
    • The committee would be responsible for defining the taxonomy as well as performing regular reviews.
    • The importance of collaboration will become crystal clear as you begin this work, as risks should be connected to only one risk type.

    Governance Layer

    Role/ Responsibilities

    Enterprise

    Defines organizational goals. Directs or regulates the performance and behavior of the enterprise, ensuring it has the structure and capabilities to achieve its goals.

    Enterprise Risk Council

    • Approve of risk taxonomy

    Strategic

    Ensures business and IT initiatives, products, and services are aligned to the organization’s goals and strategy and provide expected value. Ensures adherence to key principles.

    IT Risk Council

    • Provide input
    • May review taxonomy ahead of going to the enterprise risk council for approval

    Tactical

    Ensures key activities and planning are in place to execute strategic initiatives.

    Subcommittee

    • Define risk types and definitions
    • Establish and maintain taxonomy
    • Recommend changes
    • Advocate and communicate internally

    2.1 Establish a cross-functional working group

    2-3 hours

    1. Consider your organization’s operating model and current governance framework, specifically any current risk committees.
    2. Consider the members of current committees and your objectives and begin defining:
      1. Committee mandate, goals, and success factors.
      2. Responsibility and membership.
      3. Committee procedures and policies.
    3. Make sure you define how this tactical working group will interact with existing committees.

    Download Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    Input Output
    • Organization chart and operating model
    • Corporate governance framework and existing committee charters
    • Cross-functional working group charter
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • IT Taxonomy Committee Charter
    • CISO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    Phase 3

    Structure Your IT Risk Taxonomy

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    • Governance, Risk, and Compliance
    • Enterprise Risk Management
    • Enterprise Risk Appetite
    • Risk Statements and Scenarios
    • What Is a Risk Taxonomy?
    • Functional Role of an IT Risk Taxonomy
    • Connection to Enterprise Risk Management
    • Establish Committee
    • Steps to Define IT Risk Taxonomy
    • Define Level 1
    • Test Level 1
    • Define Level 2 and 3
    • Test via Your Control Framework

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish level 1 risk types
    • Test level 1 risk types
    • Define level 2 and level 3 risk types
    • Test the taxonomy via your control framework

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • CRO
    • IT Risk Owners
    • Business Leaders
    • Human Resources

    Structuring your IT risk taxonomy

    Do’s

    • Ensure your organization’s values are embedded into the risk types.
    • Design your taxonomy to be forward looking and risk based.
    • Make level 1 risk types generic so they can be used across the organization.
    • Ensure each risk has its own attributes and belongs to only one risk type.
    • Collaborate on and communicate your taxonomy throughout organization.

    Don’ts

    • Don’t develop risk types based on function.
    • Don’t develop your taxonomy in a silo.

    A successful risk taxonomy is forward looking and codifies the most frequently used risk language across your organization.

    Level 1

    Parent risk types aligned to organizational values

    Level 2

    Subrisks to level 1 risks

    Level 3

    Further definition

    Steps to define your IT risk taxonomy

    Step 1

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Guideline and identify IT level 1 risk types. Consider corporate inputs and macro trends.

    Step 2

    Test level 1 IT risk types by mapping to your enterprise's ERM level 1 risk types.

    Step 3

    Draft your level 2 and level 3 risk types. Be mutually exclusive to the extent possible.

    Step 4

    Work backward – align risk events and controls to the lowest level risk category. In our examples, we align to level 3.

    Step 5

    Add risk levels to your risk registry.

    Step 6

    Optional – Add IT risk appetite statements to risk register.

    Inputs to use when defining level 1

    To help you define your IT risk taxonomy, leverage your organization’s strategy and risk management artifacts, such as outputs from risk assessments, audits, and test results. Also consider macro trends and potential risks unique to your organization.

    Step 1 – Define Level 1 Risk Types

    Use corporate inputs to help structure your taxonomy

    • Corporate Strategy
    • Risk Assessment
    • Audit
    • Test Results

    Consider macro trends that may have an impact on how you manage IT risks

    • Geopolitical Risk
    • Economic Downturn
    • Regulation
    • Competition
    • Climate Risk
    • Industry Disruption

    Evaluate from an organizational lens

    Ask risk-based questions to help define level 1 IT risks for your organization.

    IT Risk Type

    Example Questions

    Technology

    How reliant is our organization on critical assets for business operations?

    How resilient is the organization to an unexpected crisis?

    How many planned integrations do we have (over the next 24 months)?

    Talent Risk

    What is our need for specialized skills, like digital, AI, etc.?

    Does our culture support change and innovation?

    How susceptible is our organization to labor market changes?

    Strategy

    What is the extent of digital adoption or use of emerging technologies in our organization?

    How aligned is IT with strategy/corporate goals?

    How much is our business dependent on changing customer preferences?

    Data

    How much sensitive data does our organization use?

    How much data is used and stored aggregately?

    How often is data moved? And to what locations?

    Third-party

    How many third-party suppliers do we have?

    How reliant are we on the global supply chain?

    What is the maturity level of our third-party suppliers?

    Do we have any concentration risk?

    Security

    How equipped is our organization to manage cyber threats?

    How many security incidents occur per year/quarter/day?

    Do we have regulatory obligations? Is there risk of enforcement action?

    Level 1 IT taxonomy structure

    Step 2 – Consider your organization’s strategy and areas where risks may manifest and use this guidance to advance your thinking. Many factors may influence your taxonomy structure, including internal organizational structure, the size of your organization, industry trends and organizational context, etc.

    Most IT organizations will include these level 1 risks in their IT risk taxonomy

    IT Level 1

    Definition

    Definition Source

    Technology

    Risk arising from the inadequacy, disruption, destruction, failure, damage from unauthorized access modifications, or malicious use of information technology assets, people or processes that enable and support business needs, and can result in financial loss and/or reputational damage.

    Open Risk Manual

    Note how this definition by OSFI includes cyber risk as part of technology risk. Smaller organizations and organizations that do not use large amounts of sensitive information will typically fold cyber risks under technology risks. Not all organizations will take this approach. Some organizations may elevate security risk to level 1.

    “Technology risk”, which includes “cyber risk”, refers to the risk arising from the inadequacy, disruption, destruction, failure, damage from unauthorized access, modifications, or malicious use of information technology assets, people or processes that enable and support business needs, and can result in financial loss and/or reputational damage.

    Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions (OSFI)

    Talent

    The risk of not having the right knowledge and skills to execute strategy.

    Info-Tech Research Group/McLean & Company

    Human capital challenges including succession challenges and the ability to attract and retain top talent are considered the most dominant risk to organizations’ ability to meet their value proposition (Protiviti, 2023).

    Strategic

    Risks that threaten IT’s ability to deliver expected business outcomes.

    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT’s role as strategic enabler to the business has never been so vital. With the speed of disruptive innovation, IT must be able to monitor alignment, support opportunities, and manage unexpected crises.

    Level 1 IT taxonomy structure cont'd

    Step 2 – Large and more complex organizations may have more level 1 risk types. Variances in approaches are closely linked to the type of industry and business in which the organization operates as well as how they view and position risks within their organization.

    IT Level 1

    Definition

    Definition Source

    Data

    Data risk is the exposure to loss of value or reputation caused by issues or limitations to an organization’s ability to acquire, store, transform, move, and use its data assets.

    Deloitte

    Data risk encompasses the risk of loss value or reputation resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events impacting on data.

    Australian Prudential Regulation Authority (APRA) CPG 235 -2013)

    Data is increasingly being used for strategic growth initiatives as well as for meeting regulatory requirements. Organizations that use a lot of data or specifically sensitive information will likely have data as a level 1 IT risk type.

    Third-Party

    The risk adversely impacting the institutions performance by engaging a third party, or their associated downstream and upstream partners or another group entity (intragroup outsourcing) to provide IT systems or related services.

    European Banking Association (EBA)

    Open Risk Manual uses EBA definition

    Third-party risk (supply chain risk) received heightened attention during COVID-19. If your IT organization is heavily reliant on third parties, you may want to consider elevating third-party risk to level 1.

    Security

    The risk of unauthorized access to IT systems and data from within or outside the institution (e.g., cyber-attacks). An incident is viewed as a series of events that adversely affects the information assets of an organization. The overall narrative of this type of risk event is captured as who, did what, to what (or whom), with what result.

    Open Risk Manual

    Some organizations and industries are subject to regulatory obligations, which typically means the board has strict oversight and will elevate security risk to a level 1.

    Common challenges

    Considerations when defining level 1 IT risk types

    • Ultimately, the identification of a level 1 IT risk type will be driven by the potential for and materiality of vulnerabilities that may impede an organization from delivering successful business outcomes.
    • Senior leaders within organizations play a central role in protecting organizations against vulnerabilities and threats.
    • The size and structure of your organization will influence how you manage risk.
    • The following slide shows typical roles and responsibilities for data privacy.
    • Large enterprises and organizations that use a lot of personal identifiable information (PII) data, such as those in healthcare, financial services, and online retail, will typically have data as a level 1 IT risk and data privacy as a level 2 risk type.
    • However, smaller organizations or organizations that do not use a lot of data will typically fold data privacy under either technology risk or security risk.

    Deciding placement in taxonomy

    Deciding Placement in Taxonomy.

    • In larger enterprises, data risks are managed within a dedicated functional department with its own governance structure. In small organizations, the CIO is typically responsible and accountable for managing data privacy risk.

    Global Enterprise

    Midmarket

    Privacy Requirement

    What Is Involved

    Accountable

    Responsible

    Accountable & Responsible

    Privacy Legal and Compliance Obligations

    • Ensuring the relevant Accountable roles understand privacy obligations for the jurisdictions operated in.

    Privacy Officer (Legal)

    Privacy Officer (Legal)

    Privacy Policy, Standards, and Governance

    • Defining polices and ensuring they are in place to ensure all privacy obligations are met.
    • Monitoring adherence to those policies and standards.

    Chief Risk Officer (Risk)

    Head of Risk Function

    Data Classification and Security Standards and Best-Practice Capabilities

    • Defining the organization’s data classification and security standards and ensuring they align to the privacy policy.
    • Designing and building the data security standards, processes, roles, and technologies required to ensure all security obligations under the privacy policy can be met.
    • Providing oversight of the effectiveness of data security practices and leading resolution of data security issues/incidents.

    Chief Information Security Officer (IT)

    Chief Information Security Officer (IT)

    Technical Application of Data Classification, Management and Security Standards

    • Ensuring all technology design, implementation, and operational decisions adhere to data classification, data management, and data security standards.

    Chief Information Officer (IT)

    Chief Data Architect (IT)

    Chief Information Officer (IT)

    Data Management Standards and Best-Practice Capabilities

    • Defining the organization’s data management standards and ensuring they align to the privacy policy.
    • Designing and building the data management standards, processes, roles, and technologies required to ensure data classification, access, and sharing obligations under the privacy policy can be met.
    • Providing oversight of the effectiveness of data classification, access, and sharing practices and leading resolution of data management issues/incidents.

    Chief Data Officer

    Where no Head of Data Exists and IT, not the business, is seen as de facto owner of data and data quality

    Execution of Data Management

    • Ensuring business processes that involve data classification, sharing, and access related to their data domain align to data management standards (and therefore privacy obligations).

    L1 Business Process Owner

    L2 Business Process Owner

    Common challenges

    Defining security risk and where it resides in the taxonomy

    • For risk management to be effective, risk professionals need to speak the same language, but the terms “information security,” “cybersecurity,” and “IT security” are often used interchangeably.
    • Traditionally, cyber risk was folded under technology risk and therefore resided at a lower level of a risk taxonomy. However, due to heightened attention from regulators and boards stemming from the pervasiveness of cyber threats, some organizations are elevating security risks to a level 1 IT risk.
    • Furthermore, regulatory cybersecurity requirements have emphasized control frameworks. As such, many organizations have adopted NIST because it is comprehensive, regularly updated, and easily tailored.
    • While NIST is prescriptive and action oriented, it start with controls and does not easily integrate with traditional ERM frameworks. To address this, NIST has published new guidance focused on an enterprise risk management approach. The guidance helps to bridge the gap between best practices in enterprise risk management and processes and control techniques that cybersecurity professionals use to meet regulatory cybersecurity risk requirements.

    Definitional Nuances

    “Cybersecurity” describes the technologies, processes, and practices designed to protect networks, computers, programs, and data from attack, damage, or unauthorized access.

    “IT security” describes a function as well as a method of implementing policies, procedures, and systems to defend the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of any digital information used, transmitted, or stored throughout the organization’s environment.

    “Information security” defines the people, processes, and technology involved in protecting data (information) in any form – whether digital or on paper – through its creation, storage, transmission, exchange, and destruction.

    3.1 Establish level 1 risk types

    2-3 hours

    1. Consider your current and future corporate goals and business initiatives, risk management artifacts, and macro industry trends.
    2. Ask questions to understand risks unique to your organization.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s IT level 1 risk types and identify the risk types that apply to your organization.
    4. Add any risk types that are missing and unique to your organization.
    5. Refine the definitions to suit your organization.
    6. Be mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive to the extent possible.

    Download Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Organization's strategy
    • Other organizational artifacts if available (operating model, outputs from audits and risk assessments, risk profile, and risk appetite)
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Guideline
    • IT Risk Taxonomy Definitions
    • Level 1 IT risk types customized to your organization
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • CISO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    3.2 Map IT risk types against ERM level 1 risk types

    1-2 hours

    1. Using the output from Activity 3.1, map your IT risk types to your ERM level 1 risk types.
    2. Record in the Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook.

    Download Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    InputOutput
    • IT level 1 risk types customized to your organization
    • ERM level 1 risk types
    • Final level 1 IT risk types
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • CISO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    Map IT level 1 risk types to ERM

    Test your level 1 IT risk types by mapping to your organization’s level 1 risk types.

    Step 2 – Map IT level 1 risk types to ERM

    The image contains two tables. 1 table is ERM Level 1 Risks, the other table is IT Level 1 Risks.

    3.3 Establishing level 2 and 3 risk types

    3-4 hours

    1. Using the level 1 IT risk types that you have defined and using Info-Tech’s Risk Taxonomy Guideline, first begin to identify level 2 risk types for each level 1 type.
    2. Be mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive to the extent possible.
    3. Once satisfied with your level 2 risk types, break them down further to level 3 risk types.

    Note: Smaller organizations may only define two risk levels, while larger organizations may define further to level 4.

    Download Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template

    InputOutput
    • Output from Activity 3.1, Establish level 1 risk types
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Guideline
    • Level 2 and level 3 risk types recorded in Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • CISO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    Level 2 IT taxonomy structure

    Step 3 – Break down your level 1 risk types into subcategories. This is complicated and may take many iterations to reach a consistent and accepted approach. Try to make your definitions intuitive and easy to understand so that they will endure the test of time.

    The image contains a screenshot of Level 2 IT taxonomy Structure.

    Security vulnerabilities often surface through third parties, but where and how you manage this risk is highly dependent on how you structure your taxonomy. Organizations with a lot of exposure may have a dedicated team and may manage and report security risks under a level 1 third-party risk type.

    Level 3 IT taxonomy structure

    Step 3 – Break down your level 2 risk types into lower-level subcategories. The number of levels of risk you have will depend on the size of and magnitude of risks within your organization. In our examples, we demonstrate three levels.

    The image contains a screenshot of Level 3 IT taxonomy Structure.

    Risk taxonomies for smaller organizations may only include two risk levels. However, large enterprises or more complex organizations may extend their taxonomy to level 3 or even 4. This illustration shows just a few examples of level 3 risks.

    Test using risk events and controls

    Ultimately risk events and controls need to roll up to level 1 risks in a consistent manner. Test the robustness of your taxonomy by working backward.

    Step 4 – Work backward to test and align risk events and controls to the lowest level risk category.

    • A key function of IT risk management is to monitor and maintain internal controls.
    • Internal controls help to reduce the level of inherent risk to acceptable levels, known as residual risk.
    • As risks evolve, new controls may be needed to upgrade protection for tech infrastructure and strengthen connections between critical assets and third-party suppliers.

    Example – Third Party Risk

    Third Party Risk example.

    3.4 Test your IT taxonomy

    2-3 hours

    1. Leveraging the output from Activities 3.1 to 3.3 and your IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template, begin to test the robustness of the taxonomy by working backward from controls to level 1 IT risks.
    2. The lineage should show clearly that the control will mitigate the impact of a realized risk event. Refine the control or move the control to another level 1 risk type if the control will not sufficiently reduce the impact of a realized risk event.
    3. Once satisfied, update your risk register or your risk management software tool.

    Download Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template

    InputOutput
    • Output from Activities 3.1 to 3.3
    • IT risk taxonomy documented in the IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • IT risk register
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • CISO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    Update risk register

    Step 5 – Once you are satisfied with your risk categories, update your risk registry with your IT risk taxonomy.

    Use Info-Tech’s Risk Register Tool or populate your internal risk software tool.

    Risk Register.

    Download Info-Tech’s Risk Register Tool

    Augment the risk event list using COBIT 2019 processes (Optional)

    Other industry-leading frameworks provide alternative ways of conceptualizing the functions and responsibilities of IT and may help you uncover additional risk events.

    1. Managed IT Management Framework
    2. Managed Strategy
    3. Managed Enterprise Architecture
    4. Managed Innovation
    5. Managed Portfolio
    6. Managed Budget and Costs
    7. Managed Human Resources
    8. Managed Relationships
    9. Managed Service Agreements
    10. Managed Vendors
    11. Managed Quality
    12. Managed Risk
    13. Managed Security
    14. Managed Data
    15. Managed Programs
    16. Managed Requirements Definition
    17. Managed Solutions Identification and Build
    18. Managed Availability and Capacity
    19. Managed Organizational Change Enablement
    20. Managed IT Changes
    21. Managed IT Change Acceptance and Transitioning
    22. Managed Knowledge
    23. Managed Assets
    24. Managed Configuration
    25. Managed Projects
    26. Managed Operations
    27. Managed Service Requests and Incidents
    28. Managed Problems
    29. Managed Continuity
    30. Managed Security Services
    31. Managed Business Process Controls
    32. Managed Performance and Conformance Monitoring
    33. Managed System of Internal Control
    34. Managed Compliance with External Requirements
    35. Managed Assurance
    36. Ensured Governance Framework Setting and Maintenance
    37. Ensured Benefits Delivery
    38. Ensured Risk Optimization
    39. Ensured Resource Optimization
    40. Ensured Stakeholder Engagement

    Example IT risk appetite

    When developing your risk appetite statements, ensure they are aligned to your organization’s risk appetite and success can be measured.

    Example IT Risk Appetite Statement

    Risk Type

    Technology Risk

    IT should establish a risk appetite statement for each level 1 IT risk type.

    Appetite Statement

    Our organization’s number-one priority is to provide high-quality trusted service to our customers. To meet this objective, critical systems must be highly performant and well protected from potential threats. To meet this objective, the following expectations have been established:

    • No appetite for unauthorized access to systems and confidential data.
    • Low appetite for service downtime.
      • Service availability objective of 99.9%.
      • Near real-time recovery of critical services – ideally within 30 minutes, no longer than 3 hours.

    The ideal risk appetite statement is qualitative and supported by quantitative measures.

    Risk Owner

    Chief Information Officer

    Ultimately, there is an accountable owner(s), but involve business and technology stakeholders when drafting to gain consensus.

    Risk Oversight

    Enterprise Risk Committee

    Supporting Framework(s)

    Business Continuity Management, Information Security, Internal Audit

    The number of supporting programs and frameworks will vary with the size of the organization.

    3.5 Draft your IT risk appetite statements

    Optional Activity

    2-3 hours

    1. Using your completed taxonomy and your organization’s risk appetite statement, draft an IT risk appetite statement for each level 1 risk in your workbook.
    2. Socialize the statements and gain approval.
    3. Add the approved risk appetite statements to your IT risk register.

    Download Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook

    Input Output
    • Organization’s risk appetite statement
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • IT Risk Taxonomy Design Template
    • IT risk appetite statements
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • CISO, CIO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    Key takeaways and next steps

    • The risk taxonomy is the backbone of a robust enterprise risk management program. A good taxonomy is frequently used and well understood.
    • Not only is the risk taxonomy used to assess organizational impact, but it is also used for risk reporting, scenarios analysis and horizon scanning, and risk appetite expression.
    • It is essential to capture IT risks within the ERM framework to fully understand the impact and allow for consistent risk discussions and meaningful aggregation.
    • Defining an IT risk taxonomy is a team sport, and organizations should strive to set up a cross-functional working group that is tasked with defining the taxonomy, monitoring its effectiveness, and ensuring continual improvement.
    • The work does not end when the taxonomy is complete. The taxonomy should be well socialized throughout the organization after inception through training and new policies and procedures. Ultimately, it should be an activity embedded into risk management practices.
    • The taxonomy is a living document and should be continually improved upon.

    3.6 Prepare to communicate the taxonomy internally

    1-2 hours

    To gain acceptance of your risk taxonomy within your organization, ensure it is well understood and used throughout the organization.

    1. Consider your audience and agree on the key elements you want to convey.
    2. Prepare your presentation.
    3. Test your presentation with a smaller group before communicating to senior leadership or the board.

    Coming soon: Look for our upcoming research Communicate Any IT Initiative.

    InputOutput
    • Build an IT Risk Taxonomy Workbook
    • Upcoming research: Communicate Any IT Initiative
    • Presentation
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Upcoming research: Communicate Any IT Initiative
    • Internal communication templates
    • CISO, CIO
    • Human resources
    • Corporate communications
    • CRO or risk owners
    • Business leaders

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build an IT Risk Management Program

    • Use this blueprint to transform your ad hoc risk management processes into a formalized ongoing program and increase risk management success.
    • Learn how to take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s greatest's risks before they occur.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    • Use this blueprint to understand gaps in your organization’s approach to risk management.
    • Learn how to integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice

    Coming Soon: Communicate Any IT initiative

    • Use this blueprint to compose an easy-to-understand presentation to convey the rationale of your initiative and plan of action.
    • Learn how to identify your target audience and tailor and deliver the message in an authentic and clear manner.

    Risk definitions

    Term Description
    Emergent Risk Risks that are poorly understood but expected to grow in significance.
    Residual Risk The amount of risk you have left after you have removed a source of risk or implemented a mitigation approach (controls, monitoring, assurance).
    Risk Acceptance If the risk is within the enterprise's risk tolerance or if the cost of otherwise mitigating the risk is higher than the potential loss, the enterprise can assume the risk and absorb any losses.
    Risk Appetite An organization’s general approach and attitude toward risk; the total exposed amount that an organization wishes to undertake on the basis of risk-return trade-offs for one or more desired and expected outcomes.
    Risk Assessment The process of estimating and evaluating risk.
    Risk Avoidance The risk response where an organization chooses not to perform a particular action or maintain an existing engagement due to the risk involved.
    Risk Event A risk occurrence (actual or potential) or a change of circumstances. Can consist of more than one occurrence or of something not happening. Can be referred to as an incident or accident.
    Risk Identification The process of finding, recognizing, describing, and documenting risks that could impact the achievement of objectives.
    Risk Management The capability and related activities used by an organization to identify and actively manage risks that affect its ability to achieve goals and strategic objectives. Includes principles, processes, and framework.
    Risk Likelihood The chance of a risk occurring. Usually measured mathematically using probability.
    Risk Management Policy Expresses an organization’s commitment to risk management and clarifies its use and direction.
    Risk Mitigation The risk response where an action is taken to reduce the impact or likelihood of a risk occurring.
    Risk Profile A written description of a set of risks.

    Risk definitions

    Term Description
    Risk Opportunity A cause/trigger of a risk with a positive outcome.
    Risk Owner The designated party responsible and accountable for ensuring that the risk is maintained in accordance with enterprise requirements.
    Risk Register A tool used to identify and document potential and active risks in an organization and to track the actions in place to manage each risk.
    Risk Response How you choose to respond to risk (accept, mitigate, transfer, or avoid).
    Risk Source The element that, alone or in combination, has potential to give rise to a risk. Usually this is the root cause of the risk.
    Risk Statement A description of the current conditions that may lead to the loss, and a description of the loss.
    Risk Tolerance The amount of risk you are prepared or able to accept (in terms of volume or impact); the amount of uncertainty an organization is willing to accept in the aggregate (or more narrowly within a certain business unit or for a specific risk category). Expressed in quantitative terms that can be monitored (such as volatility or deviation measures), risk tolerance often is communicated in terms of acceptable/unacceptable outcomes or as limited levels of risk. Risk tolerance statements identify the specific minimum and maximum levels beyond which the organization is unwilling to accept variations from the expected outcome.
    Risk Transfer The risk response where you transfer the risk to a third party.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    LynnAnn Brewer
    Director
    McLean & Company

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    John Kemp
    Executive Counsellor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Brittany Lutes
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead – CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Frank Sargent
    Senior Workshop Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Frank Sewell
    Advisory Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Ida Siahaan
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Steve Willis
    Practice Lead – Data Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    Andrea Tang, “Privacy Risk Management”. ISACA Journal, June 2020, Accessed January 2023
    Anthony Kruizinga, “Reshaping the risk taxonomy”. PwC, April 2021, Accessed January 2023
    Auditboard, "The Essentials of Integrated Risk Management (IRM)", June 2022, Accessed January 2023
    Brenda Boultwood, “How to Design an ERM-Friendly Risk Data Architecture”. Global Association of Risk Professionals, February 2020, Accessed January 2023
    BSI Standards Publication, "Risk Management Guidelines", ISO 31000, 2018
    Dan Swinhoe, "What is Physical Security, How to keep your facilities and devices safe from onsite attackers", August 2021, Accessed January 2023
    Eloise Gratton, “Data governance and privacy risk in Canada: A checklist for boards and c-suite”. Borden Ladner Gervais, November 2022 , Accessed January 2023
    European Union Agency for Cyber Security Glossary
    European Banking Authority, "Guidelines on ICT Risk Assessment under the Supervisory Review and Evaluation process (SREP)", September 2017, Accessed February 2023
    European Banking Authority, "Regulatory Framework for Mitigating Key Resilient Risks", Sept 2018, Accessed February 2023
    EY, "Seeking stability within volatility: How interdependent risks put CROs at the heart of the banking business", 12th annual EY/IFF global bank risk management survey, 2022, Accessed February 2023
    Financial Stability Board, "Cyber Lexicon", November 2018, Accessed February 2023
    Financial Stability Board, "Principles for Effective Risk Appetite Framework", November 2013, Accessed January 2023
    Forbes Technology Council, "14 Top Data Security Risks Every Business Should Address", January 2020, Accessed January 2023
    Frank Martens, Dr. Larry Rittenberg, "COSO, Risk Appetite Critical for Success, Using Risk Appetite to Thrive in a Changing World", May 2020, Accessed January 2023
    Gary Stoneurmer, Alice Goguen and Alexis Feringa, "NIST, Risk Management Guide for Information Technology Systems", Special Publication, 800-30, September 2012, Accessed February 2023
    Guy Pearce, "Real-World Data Resilience Demands and Integrated Approach to AI, Data Governance and the Cloud", ISACA Journal, May 2022
    InfoTech Tech Trends Report, 2023
    ISACA, "Getting Started with Risk Scenarios", 2022, Accessed February 2023
    James Kaplan, "Creating a technology risk and cyber risk appetite framework," McKinsey & Company, August 2022, Accessed February 2023
    Jean-Gregorie Manoukian, Wolters Kluwer, "Risk appetite and risk tolerance: what’s the difference?", Sept 2016, Accessed February 2023
    Jennifer Bayuk, “Technology’s Role in Enterprise Risk Management”, ISACA Journal, March 2018, Accessed in February 2023
    John Thackeray, "Global Association of Risk Professionals, 7 Key Elements of Effective ERM", January 2020, Accessed January 2023
    KPMG, "Regulatory rigor: Managing technology and cyber risk, How FRFI’s can achieve outcomes laid out in OSFI B-13", October 2022, Accessed January 2023
    Marc Chiapolino et al, “Risk and resilience priorities, as told by chief risk officers”, McKinsey and Company, December 2022, Accessed January 2023
    Mike Rost, Workiva, "5 Steps to Effective Strategic Management", Updated February 2023. Accessed February 2023
    NIST, "Risk Management Framework for Information Systems and Organization, The System Life Cycle Approach for Security and Privacy," December 2018, Accessed February 2023
    NIST, NISTIR, "Integrating CyberSecurity and Enterprise Risk", October 2020, Accessed February 2023
    Oliver Wyman, "The ORX Reference Taxonomy for operational and non-financial risk summary report", 2019, Accessed February 2023.
    Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions, "Operational Resilience Consultation Results Summary", December 2021, Accessed January 2023
    Open Risk Manual, Risk Taxonomy Definitions
    Ponemon. "Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021." IBM, July 2021. Web.
    Protiviti, "Executive Perspectives on Top Risks, 2023 & 2032, Key Issues being discussed in the boardroom and c-suite", February 2023, Accessed February 2023
    RIMS, ISACA, "Bridging the Digital Gap, How Collaboration Between IT and Risk Management can Enhance Value Creation", September 2019, Accessed February 2023
    Robert, R. Moeller, "COSO, Enterprise Risk Management, Second Edition, 2011", Accessed February 2023
    Robert Putrus, "Effective Reporting to the BoD on Critical Assets, Cyberthreats and Key Controls: The Qualitative and Quantitative Model", ISACA Journal, January 2021, Accessed January 2023
    Ron Brash, "Prioritizing Asset Risk Management in ICS Security", August 2020, Accessed February 2023
    Ronald Van Loon, "What is Data Culture and How to Implement it?", November 2023, Accessed February 2023
    SAS, "From Crisis to Opportunity, Redefining Risk Management", 2021Accessed January 2023
    Satori, Cloudian, "Data Protection and Privacy: 12 Ways to Protect User Data", Accessed January 2023
    Spector Information Security, "Building your Asset and Risk Register to Manage Technology Risk", November 2021, Accessed January 2023
    Talend, "What is data culture", Accessed February 2023
    Tom Schneider, "Managing Cyber Security Risk as Enterprise Risk", ISACA Journal, September 2022, Accessed February 2023
    Tony Martin –Vegue, "How to Write Strong Risk Scenarios and Statements", ISACA Journal, September 2021, Accessed February 2023
    The Wall Street Journal, "Making Data Risk a Top Priority", April 2018, Accessed February 2023

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}591|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $77,174 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 17 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Resource Planning
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-resource-planning
    • Enterprise application implementations are complex, and their success is critical to business operations.
    • Selecting the right software implementation partner is as important for the success of the ERP initiative as selecting the right software.
    • System implementation often thrusts the product into the spotlight, with the implementation partner being an afterthought, and all too often organizational needs are ignored altogether.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • ERP implementation is not a one-and-done exercise. Most often it is the start of a multi-year working relationship between the software vendor or systems integrator and your organization. Take the time to find the right fit to ensure success.
    • The conventional approach to ERP implementation partner selection puts the ERP vendor and systems integrators in the driver's seat with little regard to your specific needs as an organization. You need to take an eyes-wide-open approach to your organization’s strengths and weaknesses to properly select and manage the implementation partner relationship.
    • Self-assessment is the critical first step in a successful implementation. Every organization has a unique combination of critical success factors (CSFs) that will be required to unlock the potential of their ERP. You must find the right partner or partners whose strengths complement your weaknesses to ensure your success.
    • Before you start knocking on vendors’ doors, ensure you have a holistic request that encompasses the strategic, tactical, operational, and commodity factors required for the success of your ERP implementation.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s implementation partner selection process to find the right fit for your organization.
    • Understand the enterprise application CSFs and determine the unique requirements of your organization through this lens.
    • Define your implementation partner requirements separately from your software requirements and allow vendors to respond to those specifically.
    • Use our assessment tools to score and assess the CSFs required to select the right software implementation partners.

    Select an ERP Implementation Partner Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should focus on selecting the right implementation partner, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify your strategic needs

    Review the CSFs that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    • Select an ERP Implementation Partner Workbook

    2. Review your tactical, commodity, and operational needs

    Review the CSFs that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    3. Build your RFx and evaluate the responses

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    • Short-Form RFP Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Supplementary RFx Material
    • RFx Vendor Evaluation Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select an ERP Implementation Partner

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Organizational Strategic Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of strategic importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    ERP strategy model defined

    Strategic needs identified

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Build your ERP strategy model.

    1.3 Assess your strategic needs.

    Outputs

    ERP strategy model

    ERP strategy model

    Strategic needs analysis

    2 Review Your Tactical, Commodity, and Operational Needs

    The Purpose

    Review the critical success factors that are of tactical, commodity, and operational importance. Evaluating the gaps in your organization's capabilities enables you to choose a partner that can properly support you in your project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Tactical, commodity, and operational needs identified

    Activities

    2.1 Assess your tactical needs.

    2.2 Assess your commodity needs.

    2.3 Assess your operational needs.

    Outputs

    Tactical needs analysis

    Commodity needs analysis

    Operational needs analysis

    3 Build Your RFx

    The Purpose

    Review your RFx and build an initial list of vendor/implementors to reach out to. Finally, build your evaluation checklist to rate the incoming responses.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    Activities

    3.1 Decide on an RFI or RFP.

    3.2 Complete the RFx with the needs analysis.

    3.3 Build a list of targeted vendors

    Outputs

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Draft RFI or RFP

    Target vendor list

    4 Evaluate Vendors

    The Purpose

    Build a scoring template for use in vendor evaluation to ensure consistent comparison criteria are used.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A consistent and efficient evaluation process

    Activities

    4.1 Assign weightings to the evaluation criteria.

    4.2 Run a vendor evaluation simulation to validate the process.

    Outputs

    Completed partner evaluation tool

    Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}368|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • You need to build a security program that enables business services and secures the technology that makes them possible.
    • Building an effective, business-aligned security program requires that you coordinate many components, including technologies, processes, organizational structures, information flows, and behaviors.
    • The program must prioritize the right capabilities, and support its implementation with clear accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Common security frameworks focus on operational controls rather than business value creation, are difficult to convey to stakeholders, and provide little implementation guidance.
    • A security strategy can provide a snapshot of your program, but it won’t help you modernize or transform it, or align it to meet emerging business requirements.
    • There is no unique, one-size-fits-all security program. Each organization has a distinct character and profile and differs from others in several critical respects.

    Impact and Result

    Tailor your security program according to what makes your organization unique.

    • Analyze critical design factors to determine and refine the scope of your security program and prioritize core program capabilities.
    • Identify program accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities.
    • Build an implementation roadmap to ensure its components work together in a systematic way to meet business requirements.

    Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Strategy – A step-by-step guide on how to understand what makes your organization unique and design a security program with capabilities that create business value.

    This storyboard will help you lay foundations for your security program that will inform future security program decisions and give your leadership team the information they need to support your success. You will evaluate design factors that make your organization unique, prioritize the security capabilities to suit, and assess the maturity of key security program components including security governance, security strategy, security architecture, service design, and service metrics.

    • Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program Storyboard

    2. Security Program Design Tool – Tailor the security program to what makes your organization unique to ensure business-alignment.

    Use this Excel workbook to evaluate your security program against ten key design factors. The tool will produce a goals cascade that shows the relationship between business and security goals, a prioritized list of security capabilities that align to business requirements, and a list of program accountabilities.

    • Security Program Design Tool

    3. Security Program Design and Implementation Plan – Assess the current state of different security program components, plan next steps, and communicate the outcome to stakeholders.

    This second Excel workbook will help you conduct a gap analysis on key security program components and identify improvement initiatives. You can then use the Security Program Design and Implementation Plan to collect results from the design and implementation tools and draft a communication deck.

    • Security Program Implementation Tool
    • Security Program Design and Implementation Plan

    Infographic

    Workshop: Design and Implement a Business-Aligned Security Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Initial Security Program Design

    The Purpose

    Determine the initial design of your security program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An initial prioritized list of security capabilities that aligns with enterprise strategy and goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Review Info-Tech diagnostic results.

    1.2 Identify project context.

    1.3 Identify enterprise strategy.

    1.4 Identify enterprise goals.

    1.5 Build a goal cascade.

    1.6 Assess the risk profile.

    1.7 Identify IT-related issues.

    1.8 Evaluate initial program design.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder satisfaction with program

    Situation, challenges, opportunities

    Initial set of prioritized security capabilities

    Initial set of prioritized security capabilities

    Initial set of prioritized security capabilities

    Initial set of prioritized security capabilities

    Initial set of prioritized security capabilities

    Initial set of prioritized security capabilities

    2 Refine Security Program Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Refine the design of your security program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A refined, prioritized list of security capabilities that reflects what makes your organization unique.

    Activities

    2.1 Gauge threat landscape.

    2.2 Identify compliance requirements.

    2.3 Categorize the role of IT.

    2.4 Identify the sourcing model.

    2.5 Identify the IT implementation model.

    2.6 Identify the tech adoption strategy.

    2.7 Refine the scope of the program.

    Outputs

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    Refined set of prioritized security capabilities

    3 Security Program Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Finalize security program design.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key accountabilities to support the security program

    Gap analysis to produce an improvement plan

    Activities

    3.1 Identify program accountabilities.

    3.2 Conduct program gap analysis.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    Documented program accountabilities.

    Security program gap analysis

    Security program gap analysis

    4 Roadmap and Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Create and communicate an improvement roadmap for the security program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Security program design and implementation plan to organize and communicate program improvements.

    Activities

    4.1 Build program roadmap

    4.2 Finalize implementation plan

    4.3 Sponsor check-in

    Outputs

    Roadmap of program improvement initiatives

    Roadmap of program improvement initiatives

    Communication deck for program design and implementation

    Further reading

    Design a Business-Aligned Security Program

    Focus on business value first.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Business alignment is no accident.

    Michel Hébert

    Security leaders often tout their choice of technical security framework as the first and most important program decision they make. While the right framework can help you take a snapshot of the maturity of your program and produce a quick strategy and roadmap, it won’t help you align, modernize, or transform your program to meet emerging business requirements.

    Common technical security frameworks focus on operational controls rather than business services and value creation. They are difficult to convey to business stakeholders and provide little program management or implementation guidance.

    Focus on business value first, and the security services that enable it. Your organization has its own distinct character and profile. Understand what makes your organization unique, then design and refine the design of your security program to ensure it supports the right capabilities. Next, collaborate with stakeholders to ensure the right accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities are in place to support the implementation of the security program.

    Michel Hébert
    Research Director, Security & Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • You need to build a security program that enables business services and secures the technology that makes them possible.
    • Building an effective, business-aligned security program requires that you coordinate many components, including technologies, processes, organizational structures, information flows, and behaviors.
    • The program must prioritize the right capabilities, and support its implementation with clear accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities.
    • Common security frameworks focus on operational controls rather than business value creation, are difficult to convey to stakeholders, and provide little implementation guidance.
    • A security strategy can provide a snapshot of your program, but it won’t help you modernize or transform it, or align it to meet emerging business requirements.
    • There is no unique, one-size-fits-all security program. Each organization has a distinct character and profile and differs from others in several critical respects.

    Tailor your security program according to what makes your organization unique.

    • Analyze critical design factors to determine and refine the design of your security program and prioritize core program capabilities.
    • Identify program accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities.
    • Build an implementation roadmap to ensure its components work together in a systematic way to meet business requirements.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are a business leader who supports business goals and mitigates risk. Focus first on business value and the security services that enable it, not security controls.

    Your challenge

    The need for a solid and responsive security program has never been greater.

    • You need to build a security program that enables business services and secures the technology that makes them possible.
    • Building an effective, business-aligned security program requires that you coordinate many components, including technologies, processes, organizational structures, information flows, and behaviors.
    • The program must prioritize the right capabilities, and support its implementation with clear accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities.
    • You must communicate effectively with stakeholders to describe the risks the organization faces, their likely impact on organizational goals, and how the security program will mitigate those risks and support the creation of business value.
    • Ransomware is a persistent threat to organizations worldwide across all industries.
    • Cybercriminals deploying ransomware are evolving into a growing and sophisticated criminal ecosystem that will continue to adapt to maximize its profits.

    • Critical infrastructure is increasingly at risk.
    • Malicious agents continue to target critical infrastructure to harm industrial processes and the customers they serve State-sponsored actors are expected to continue to target critical infrastructure to collect information through espionage, pre-position in case of future hostilities, and project state power.

    • Disruptive technologies bring new threats.
    • Malicious actors increasingly deceive or exploit cryptocurrencies, machine learning, and artificial intelligence technologies to support their activities.

    Sources: CCCS (2023), CISA (2023), ENISA (2023)

    Your challenge

    Most security programs are not aligned with the overall business strategy.

    50% Only half of leaders are framing the impact of security threats as a business risk.

    49% Less than half of leaders align security program cost and risk reduction targets with the business.

    57% Most leaders still don’t regularly review security program performance of the business.

    Source: Tenable, 2021

    Common obstacles

    Misalignment is hurting your security program and making you less influential.

    Organizations with misaligned security programs have 48% more security incidents...

    …and the cost of their data breaches are 40% higher than those with aligned programs.

    37% of stakeholders still lack confidence in their security program.

    54% of senior leaders still doubt security gets the goals of the organization.

    Source: Frost & Sullivan, 2019
    Source: Ponemon, 2023

    Common obstacles

    Common security frameworks won’t help you align your program.

    • Common security frameworks focus on operational controls rather than business value creation, are difficult to convey to stakeholders, and provide little implementation guidance.
    • A security strategy based on the right framework can provide a snapshot of your program, but it won’t help you modernize, transform, or align your program to meet emerging business requirements.
    • The lack of guidance leads to a lack of structure in the way security services are designed and managed, which reduces service quality, increases security friction, and reduces business satisfaction.

    There is no unique, one-size-fits-all security program.

    • Each organization has a distinct character and profile and differs from others in several critical respects. The security program for a cloud-first, DevOps environment must emphasize different capabilities and accountabilities than one for an on-premise environment and a traditional implementation model.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    You are a business leader who supports business goals and mitigates risk.

    • Understand what makes your organization unique, then design and refine a security program with capabilities that create business value.
    • Next, collaborate with stakeholders to ensure the right accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities are in place, and build an implementation roadmap to ensure its components work together over time.

    Security needs to evolve as a business strategy.

    • Laying the right foundations for your security program will inform future security program decisions and give your leadership team the information they need to support your success. You can do it in two steps:
      • Evaluate the design factors that make your organization unique and prioritize the security capabilities to suit. Info-Tech’s approach is based on the design process embedded in the latest COBIT framework.
      • Review the key components of your security program, including security governance, security strategy, security architecture, service design, and service metrics.

    If you build it, they will come

    “There's so much focus on better risk management that every leadership team in every organization wants to be part of the solution.

    If you can give them good data about what things they really need to do, they will work to understand it and help you solve the problem.”

    Dan Bowden, CISO, Sentara Healthcare (Tenable)

    Design a Business-Aligned Security Program

    The image contains a screenshot of how to Design a business-aligned security program.


    Choose your own adventure

    This blueprint is ideal for new CISOs and for program modernization initiatives.

    1. New CISO

    “I need to understand the business, prioritize core security capabilities, and identify program accountabilities quickly.”

    2. Program Renewal

    “The business is changing, and the threat landscape is shifting. I am concerned the program is getting stale.”

    Use this blueprint to understand what makes your organization unique:

    1. Prioritize security capabilities.
    2. Identify program accountabilities.
    3. Plan program implementation.

    If you need a deep dive into governance, move on to a security governance and management initiative.

    3. Program Update

    “I am happy with the fundamentals of my security program. I need to assess and improve our security posture.”

    Move on to our guidance on how to Build an Information Security Strategy instead.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for security program design

    Define Scope of
    Security Program

    Refine Scope of
    Security Program

    Finalize Security
    Program Design

    Phase steps

    1.1 Identify enterprise strategy

    1.2 Identify enterprise goals

    1.3 Assess the risk profile

    1.4 Identify IT-related issues

    1.5 Define initial program design

    2.1 Gage threats and compliance

    2.2 Assess IT role and sourcing

    2.3 Assess IT implementation model

    2.4 Assess tech adoption strategy

    2.5 Refine program design

    3.1 Identify program accountabilities

    3.2 Define program target state

    3.3 Build program roadmap

    Phase outcomes

    • Initial security program design
    • Refined security program design
    • Prioritized set of security capabilities
    • Program accountabilities
    • Program gap closure initiatives

    Tools

    Insight Map

    You are a business leader first and a security leader second

    Technical security frameworks are static and focused on operational controls and standards. They belong in your program’s solar system but not at its center. Design your security program with business value and the security services that enable it in mind, not security controls.

    There is no one-size-fits-all security program
    Tailor your security program to your organization’s distinct profile to ensure the program generates value.

    Lay the right foundations to increase engagement
    Map out accountabilities, roles, and responsibilities to ensure the components of your security program work together over time to secure and enable business services.

    If you build it, they will come
    Your executive team wants to be part of the solution. If you give them reliable data for the things they really need to do, they will work to understand and help you solve the problem.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Info-Tech supports project and workshop activities with deliverables to help you accomplish your goals and accelerate your success.

    Security Program Design Tool

    Tailor the security program to what makes your organization unique to ensure alignment.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Security Program Design Tool.

    Security Program Implementation Tool

    Assess the current state of different security program components and plan next steps.



    SecurityProgram Design and Implementation Plan

    Communicate capabilities, accountabilities, and implementation initiatives.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Security Program Design and Implementation Plan.

    Key deliverable

    Security Program Design and Implementation Plan

    The design and implementation plan captures the key insights your work will generate, including:

    • A prioritized set of security capabilities aligned to business requirements.
    • Security program accountabilities.
    • Security program implementation initiatives.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Laying the right foundations for your security program will:
      • Inform the future security governance, security strategy, security architecture, and service design decisions you need to make.
      • Improve security service design and service quality, reduce security friction, and increase business satisfaction with the security program.
      • Help you give your leadership team the information they need to support your success.
      • Improve the standing of the security program with business leaders.
    • Organizations with a well-aligned security program:
      • Improve security risk management, performance measurement, resource management, and value delivery.
      • Lower rates of security incidents and lower-cost security breaches.
      • Align costs, performance, and risk reduction objectives with business needs.
      • Are more satisfied with their security program.

    Measure the value of using Info-Tech’s approach

    Assess the effectiveness of your security program with a risk-based approach.

    Deliverable

    Challenge

    Security Program Design

    • Prioritized set of security capabilities
    • Program accountabilities
    • Devise and deploy an approach to gather business requirements, identify and prioritize relevant security capabilities, and assign program accountabilities.
    • Cost and Effort : 2 FTEs x 90 days x $130,000/year

    Program Assessment and Implementation Plan

    • Security program assessment
    • Roadmap of gap closure initiatives
    • Devise and deploy an approach to assess the current state of your security program, identify gap closure or improvement initiatives, and build a transformation roadmap.
    • Cost and Effort : 2 FTEs x 90 days x $130,000/year

    Measured Value

    • Using Info-Tech’s best practice methodology will cut the cost and effort in half.
    • Savings: 2 FTEs x 45 days x $130,000/year = $65,000

    Measure the impact of your project

    Use Info-Tech diagnostics before and after the engagement to measure your progress.

    • Info-Tech diagnostics are standardized surveys that produce historical and industry trends against which to benchmark your organization.
    • Run the Security Business Satisfaction and Alignment diagnostic now, and again in twelve months to assess business satisfaction with the security program and measure the impact of your program improvements.
    • Reach out to your account manager or follow the link to deploy the diagnostic and measure your success. Diagnostics are included in your membership.

    Inform this step with Info-Tech diagnostic results

    • Info-Tech diagnostics are standardized surveys that accelerate the process of gathering and analyzing pain point data.
    • Diagnostics also produce historical and industry trends against which to benchmark your organization.
    • Reach out to your account manager or follow the links to deploy some or all these diagnostics to validate your assumptions. Diagnostics are included in your membership.

    Governance & Management Maturity Scorecard
    Understand the maturity of your security program across eight domains.
    Audience: Security Manager

    Security Business Satisfaction and Alignment Report
    Assess the organization’s satisfaction with the security program.
    Audience: Business Leaders

    CIO Business Vision
    Assess the organization’s satisfaction with IT services and identify relevant challenges.
    Audience: Business Leaders

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Higher Education

    SOURCE: Interview

    Building a business-aligned security program

    Portland Community College (PCC) is the largest post-secondary institution in Oregon and serves more than 50,000 students each year. The college has a well-established information technology program, which supports its education mission in four main campuses and several smaller centers.

    PCC launched a security program modernization effort to deal with the evolving threat landscape in higher education. The CISO studied the enterprise strategy and goals and reviewed the college’s risk profile and compliance requirements. The exercise helped the organization prioritize security capabilities for the renewal effort and informed the careful assessment of technical controls in the current security program.

    Results

    Laying the right foundations for the security program helped the security function understand how to provide the organization with a clear report of its security posture. The CISO now reports directly to the board of directors and works with stakeholders to align cost, performance, and risk reduction objectives with the needs of the college.

    The security program modernization effort prioritized several critical design factors

    • Enterprise Strategy
    • Enterprise Goals
    • IT Risk Profile
    • IT-Related Issues
    • IT Threat Landscape
    • Compliance Requirements

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1:
    Scope requirements, objectives, and specific challenges.

    Call #2:
    Define business context, assess risk profile, and identify existing security issues.

    Define initial design of security program.

    Call #3:
    Evaluate threat landscape and compliance requirements.

    Call #4:
    Analyze the role of IT, the security sourcing model, technology adoption, and implementation models.

    Refine the design of the security program.

    Call #5:
    Identify program accountabilities.

    Call #6:
    Design program target state and draft security program implementation plan.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 4 to 6 calls over the course of 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Initial Security
    Program Design

    Refine Security
    Program Design

    Security Program
    Gap Analysis

    Roadmap and Implementation Plan

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1.0 Review Info-Tech diagnostic results

    1.1.1 Identify project context

    1.1.2 Identify enterprise strategy

    1.2.1 Identify enterprise goals

    1.2.2 Build a goals cascade

    1.3 Assess the risk profile

    1.4 Identify IT-related issues

    1.5 Evaluate initial program design

    2.1.1 Gauge threat landscape

    2.1.2 Identify compliance requirements

    2.2.1 Categorize the role of IT

    2.2.2 Identify the sourcing model

    2.3.1 Identify the IT implementation model

    2.4.1 Identify the tech adoption strategy

    2.5.1 Refine the design of the program

    3.1 Identify program accountabilities

    3.2.1 Conduct program gap analysis

    3.2.2 Prioritize initiatives

    3.3.1 Build program roadmap

    3.3.2 Finalize implementation plan

    3.3.3 Sponsor check-in

    4.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    4.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Project context
    2. Stakeholder satisfaction feedback on security program
    3. Initial set of prioritized security capabilities
    1. Refined set of prioritized security capabilities
    1. Documented program accountabilities
    2. Security program gap analysis
    1. Roadmap of initiatives
    2. Communication deck for program design and implementation
    1. Completed security program design
    2. Security program design and implementation plan

    Customize your journey

    The security design blueprint pairs well with security governance and security strategy.

    • The prioritized set of security capabilities you develop during the program design project will inform efforts to develop other parts of your security program, like the security governance and management program and the security strategy.
    • Work with your member services director, executive advisor, or technical counselor to scope the journey you need. They will work with you to align the subject matter experts to support your roadmap and workshops.

    Workshop
    Days 1 and 2

    Workshop
    Days 3 and 4

    Security Program Design Factors

    Security Program Gap Analysis or
    Security Governance and Management

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}150|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,991 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 32 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Your organization wants to implement (or revamp existing) software delivery metrics to monitor performance as well as achieve its goals.
    • You know that metrics can be a powerful tool for managing team behavior.
    • You also know that all metrics are prone to misuse and mismanagement, which can lead to unintended consequences that will harm your organization.
    • You need an approach for selecting and using effective software development lifecycle (SDLC) metrics that will help your organization to achieve its goals while minimizing the risk of unintended consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Metrics are powerful, dangerous, and often mismanaged, particularly when they are tied to reward or punishment. To use SDLC metrics effectively, know the dangers, understand good practices, and then follow Info-Tech‘s TAG (team-oriented, adaptive, and goal-focused) approach to minimize risk and maximize impact.

    Impact and Result

    • Begin by understanding the risks of metrics.
    • Then understand good practices associated with metrics use.
    • Lastly, follow Info-Tech’s TAG approach to select and use SDLC metrics effectively.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Understand both the dangers and good practices related to metrics, along with Info-Tech’s TAG approach to the selection and use of SDLC metrics.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the dangers of metrics

    Explore the significant risks associated with metrics selection so that you can avoid them.

    • Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively – Phase 1: Understand the Risks of Metrics

    2. Know good practices related to metrics

    Learn about good practices related to metrics and how to apply them in your organization, then identify your team’s business-aligned goals to be used in SDLC metric selection.

    • Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively – Phase 2: Know Good Practices Related to Metrics
    • SDLC Metrics Evaluation and Selection Tool

    3. Rank and select effective SDLC metrics for your team

    Follow Info-Tech’s TAG approach to selecting effective SDLC metrics for your team, create a communication deck to inform your organization about your selected SDLC metrics, and plan to review and revise these metrics over time.

    • Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively – Phase 3: Rank and Select Effective SDLC Metrics for Your Team
    • SDLC Metrics Rollout and Communication Deck
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand the Dangers of Metrics

    The Purpose

    Learn that metrics are often misused and mismanaged.

    Understand the four risk areas associated with metrics: Productivity loss Gaming behavior Ambivalence Unintended consequences

    Productivity loss

    Gaming behavior

    Ambivalence

    Unintended consequences

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An appreciation of the dangers associated with metrics.

    An understanding of the need to select and manage SDLC metrics carefully to avoid the associated risks.

    Development of critical thinking skills related to metric selection and use.

    Activities

    1.1 Examine the dangers associated with metric use.

    1.2 Share real-life examples of poor metrics and their impact.

    1.3 Practice identifying and mitigating metrics-related risk.

    Outputs

    Establish understanding and appreciation of metrics-related risks.

    Solidify understanding of metrics-related risks and their impact on an organization.

    Develop the skills needed to critically analyze a potential metric and reduce associated risk.

    2 Understand Good Practices Related to Metrics

    The Purpose

    Develop an understanding of good practices related to metric selection and use.

    Introduce Info-Tech’s TAG approach to metric selection and use.

    Identify your team’s business-aligned goals for SDLC metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of good practices for metric selection and use.

    Document your team’s prioritized business-aligned goals.

    Activities

    2.1 Examine good practices and introduce Info-Tech’s TAG approach.

    2.2 Identify and prioritize your team’s business-aligned goals.

    Outputs

    Understanding of Info-Tech’s TAG approach.

    Prioritized team goals (aligned to the business) that will inform your SDLC metric selection.

    3 Rank and Select Your SDLC Metrics

    The Purpose

    Apply Info-Tech’s TAG approach to rank and select your team’s SDLC metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identification of potential SDLC metrics for use by your team.

    Collaborative scoring/ranking of potential SDLC metrics based on their specific pros and cons.

    Finalize list of SDLC metrics that will support goals and minimize risk while maximizing impact.

    Activities

    3.1 Select your list of potential SDLC metrics.

    3.2 Score each potential metric’s pros and cons against objectives using a five-point scale.

    3.3 Collaboratively select your team’s first set of SDLC metrics.

    Outputs

    A list of potential SDLC metrics to be scored.

    A ranked list of potential SDLC metrics.

    Your team’s first set of goal-aligned SDLC metrics.

    4 Create a Communication and Rollout Plan

    The Purpose

    Develop a rollout plan for your SDLC metrics.

    Develop a communication plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    SDLC metrics.

    A plan to review and adjust your SDLC metrics periodically in the future.

    Communication material to be shared with the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify rollout dates and responsible individuals for each SDLC metric.

    4.2 Identify your next SDLC metric review cycle.

    4.3 Create a communication deck.

    Outputs

    SDLC metrics rollout plan

    SDLC metrics review plan

    SDLC metrics communication deck

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}528|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Customer expectations regarding service are rapidly evolving. As your current IT systems may be viewed as ineffective at delivering upon these expectations, a transformation is called for.
    • It is unclear whether IT has the system architecture/infrastructure to support modern Customer Service channels and technologies.
    • The relationship between Customer Service and IT is strained. Strategic system-related decisions are being made without the inclusions of IT, and IT is only engaged post-purchase to address integration or issues as they arise.
    • Scope: An ABPM-centric approach is taken to model the desired future state, and retrospectively look into the current state to derive gaps and sequential requirements. The requirements are bundled into logical IT initiatives to be plotted on a roadmap and strategy document.
    • Challenge: The extent to which business processes can be mapped down to task-based Level 5 can be challenging depending on the maturity of the organization.
    • Pain/Risk: The health of the relationship between IT and Customer Service may determine project viability. Poor collaboration and execution may strain the relationship further.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • When transformation is called for, start with future state visioning. Current state analysis can impede your ability to see future needs and possibilities.
    • Solve your own problems by enhancing core or “traditional” Customer Service functionality first, and then move on to more ambitious business enabling functionality.
    • The more rapidly businesses can launch applications in today’s market, the better positioned they are to improve customer experience and reap the associated benefits. Ensure that technology is implemented with a solid strategy to support the initiative.

    Impact and Result

    • The right technology is established to support current and future Customer Service needs.
    • Streamlined and optimized Customer Service processes that drive efficiency and improve Customer Service quality are established.
    • The IT and Customer Service functions are both transformed from a cost center into a competitive advantage.

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Structure the project

    Identify project stakeholders, define roles, and create the project charter.

    • Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service Storyboard
    • Project RACI Chart
    • Project Charter

    2. Define vision for future state

    Identify and model the future state of key business processes.

    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    3. Document current state and assess gaps

    Model the current state of key business processes and assess gaps.

    4. Evaluate solution options

    Review the outputs of the current state architecture health assessment and adopt a preliminary posture on architecture.

    5. Evaluate application options

    Evaluate the marketplace applications to understand the “art of the possible.”

    6. Frame desired state and develop roadmap

    Compile and score a list of initiatives to bridge the gaps, and plot the initiatives on a strategic roadmap.

    • Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Vision for Future State

    The Purpose

    Discuss Customer Service-related organizational goals and align goals with potential strategies for implementation.

    Score level 5 Customer Service business processes against organizational goals to come up with a shortlist for modeling.

    Create a future state model for one of the shortlisted business processes.

    Draft the requirements as they relate to the business process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Preliminary list of Customer Service-related business goals

    List of Customer Service business processes (Task Level 5)

    Pre-selected Customer Service business process for modeling

    Activities

    1.1 Outline and prioritize your customer goals and link their relevance and value to your Customer Service processes with the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    1.2 Score customer service business processes against organizational goals with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    Outputs

    Initial position on viable Customer Service strategies

    Shortlist of key business processes

    Documented future state business process model

    Business/functional/non-functional requirements

    2 Document Current State and Assess Gaps

    The Purpose

    Create a current state model for the shortlisted business processes.

    Score the functionality and integration of current supporting applications.

    Revise future state model and business requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Inventory of Customer Service supporting applications

    Inventory of related system interfaces

    Activities

    2.1 Holistically assess multiple aspects of Customer Service-related IT assets with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    Outputs

    Documented current state business process model

    Customer Service systems health assessment

    3 Adopt an Architectural Posture

    The Purpose

    Review the Customer Service systems health assessment results.

    Discuss options.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed Customer Service systems health assessment

    Application options

    Activities

    3.1 Analyze CS Systems Strategy and review results with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    Outputs

    Posture on system architecture

    4 Frame Desired State and Develop Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Draft a list of initiatives based on requirements.

    Score and prioritize the initiatives.

    Plot the initiatives on a roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business/functional/non-functional requirements

    Activities

    4.1 Help project and management stakeholders visualize the implementation of Customer Service IT initiatives with the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.

    Outputs

    Scored and prioritized list of initiatives

    Customer Service implementation roadmap

    Further reading

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    E-commerce is accelerating, and with it, customer expectations for exceptional digital service.

    Analyst Perspective

    The future of Customer Service is digital. Your organization needs an IT strategy to meet this demand.

    The image contains a picture of Thomas E. Randall.

    As the pandemic closed brick-and-mortar stores, the acceleration of ecommerce has cemented Customer Service’s digital future. However, the pandemic also revealed severe cracks in the IT strategy of organizations’ Customer Service – no matter the industry. These cracks may include low resolution and high wait times through the contact center, or a lack of analytics that fuel a reactive environment. Unfortunately, organizations have no time to waste in resolving these issues. Customer patience for poor digital service has only decreased since March 2020, leaving organizations with little to no runway for ramping up their IT strategy.

    Organizations that quickly mature their digital Customer Service will come out the other side of COVID-19 more competitive and with a stronger reputation. This move necessitates a concrete IT strategy for coordinating what the organization’s future state should look like and agreeing on the technologies and software required to meet this state across the entire organization.

    Thomas E. Randall, Ph.D.

    Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Solution

    • COVID-19 has accelerated ecommerce, rapidly evolving customer expectations about the service they should receive. Without a robust IT strategy for enabling remote, contactless points of service, your organization will quickly fall behind.
    • The organization would like to use modern channels and technologies to enhance customer service, but it is unclear whether IT has the infrastructure to support them.
    • The relationship between Customer Service and IT is strained. Strategic system-related decisions are being made without the inclusion of IT.
    • IT is in a permanent reactive state, only engaged post-purchase to fix issues as they arise and to offer workarounds.
    • Use Info-Tech’s methodology to produce an IT strategy for Customer Service:
      • Phase 1: Define Project and Future State
      • Phase 2: Evaluate Current State
      • Phase 3: Build a Roadmap to Future State
    • Each phase contributes toward this blueprint’s key deliverable: the Strategic Roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT must proactively engage with the organization to define what good customer service should look like. This ensures IT has a fair say in what kinds of architectural solutions are feasible for any projected future state. In this proactive scenario, IT can help build the roadmap for implementing and maintaining customer service infrastructure and operations, reducing the time and resources spent on putting out preventable fires or trying to achieve an unworkable goal set by the organization.

    Key insights

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    Ecommerce growth has increased customer expectations

    Despite the huge obstacles that organizations are having to overcome to meet accelerating ecommerce from the pandemic, customers have not increased their tolerance for organizations with poor service. Indeed, customer expectations for excellent digital service have only increased since March 2020. If organizations cannot meet these demands, they will become uncompetitive.

    The future of customer service is tied up in analytics

    Without a coordinated IT strategy for leveraging technology and data to improve Customer Service, the organization will quickly be left behind. Analytics and reporting are crucial for proactively engaging with customers, planning marketing campaigns, and building customer profiles. Failing to do so leaves the organization blind to customer needs and will constantly be in firefighting mode.

    Meet the customer wherever they are – no matter the channel

    Providing an omnichannel experience is fast becoming a table stakes offering for customers. To maximize customer engagement and service, the organization must connect with the customer on whatever channel the customer prefers – be it social media, SMS, or by phone. While voice will continue to dominate how Customer Service connects with customers, demographics are shifting toward a digital-first generation. Organizations must be ready to capture this rapidly expanding audience.

    This blueprint will achieve:

    Increased customer satisfaction

    • An IT strategy for Customer Service that proactively meets customer demand, improving overall customer satisfaction with the organization’s services.
    • A process for identifying the organization’s future state of Customer Service and developing a concrete gap analysis.

    Time saved

    • Ready-to-use deliverables that analyze and provide a roadmap toward the organization’s desired future state.
    • Market analyses and rapid application selection through SoftwareReviews to streamline project time-to-completion.

    Increased ROI

    • A modernization process that aids Customer Service digital transformation, with a view to achieve high ROI.
    • Save costs through an effective requirements gathering method.
    • Building and expanding the organization’s customer base to increase revenues by meeting the customers where they are – no matter what channel.

    An IT strategy for customer service is imperative for a post-COVID world

    COVID-19 has accelerated ecommerce, rapidly evolving customer expectations for remote, contactless service.

    59% Of customers agree that the pandemic has raised their standards for service (Salesforce, 2020).

    • With COVID-19, most customer demand and employment moved online and turned remote.
    • Retailers had to rapidly respond, meeting customer demand through ecommerce. This not only entailed a complete shift in how customers could buy their goods but how retailers could provide a remote customer journey from discovery to post-purchase support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The pandemic did not improve customer tolerance for bad service – instead, the demand for good service increased dramatically. Organizations need an IT strategy to meet customer support demands wherever the customer is located.

    The technology to provide remote customer support is surging

    IT needs to be at the forefront of learning about and suggesting new technologies, working with Customer Service to deliver a consistent, business-driven approach.

    78%

    Of decision makers say they’ve invested in new technology as a result of the pandemic (Salesforce, 2020).

    OMNICHANNEL SUPPORT

    Rapidly changing demographics and modes of communications require an evolution toward omnichannel engagement. Agents need customer information synced across each channel they use, meeting the customer’s needs where they are.

    78%

    Of customers have increased their use of self-service during the pandemic (Salesforce, 2020).

    INTELLIGENT SELF-SERVICE PORTALS

    Customers want their issues resolved as quickly as possible. Machine-learning self-service options deliver personalized customer experiences, which also reduce both agent call volume and support costs for the organization.

    90%

    Of global executives who use data analytics report that they improved their ability to deliver a great customer experience (Gottlieb, 2019).

    LEVERAGING ANALYTICS

    The future of customer service is tied up with analytics: from AI-driven capabilities that include agent assist and using biometric data (e.g., speech) for security, to feeding real insights about how customers and agents are doing and performing.

    Executive Brief – Case Study

    Self-service options improve quality of service and boost organization’s competitiveness in a digital marketspace.

    INDUSTRY: Financial Services

    SOURCE: TSB

    Situation

    Solution

    Results

    • The pandemic increased pressure on TSB’s Customer Service, with higher call loads from their five million customers who were anxious about their financial situation.
    • TSB needed to speed up its processing times to ensure loan programs and other assistances were provided as quickly as possible.
    • As meeting in-person became impossible due to the lockdown, TSB had to step up its digital abilities to serve their customers.
    • TSB sought to boost its competitiveness by shifting as far as possible to digital services.
    • TSB launched government loan programs in 36 hours, ahead of its competitors.
    • TSB created and released 21 digital self-service forms for customers to complete without needing to interact with bank staff.
    • TSB processed 140,000 forms in three months, replacing 15,000 branch visits.
    • TSB increased digital self-service rate by nine percent.

    IT can demonstrate its value to business by enhancing remote customer service

    IT must engage with Customer Service – otherwise, IT risks being perennially reactive and dictated to as remote customer service needs increase.

    IT benefits

    Customer Service benefits

    • The right technology is established to support Customer Service.
    • IT is viewed as a strategic partner and innovator, not just a cost center and support function.
    • Streamlined and optimized Customer Service processes that drive efficiency and improve Customer Service quality.
    • Transformation of the Customer Service function into a competitive advantage.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Change to how Customer Service will operate is inevitable. This is an opportunity for IT to establish their value to the business and improve their autonomy in how new technologies should be onboarded and utilized.

    Customer Service and IT need to work together to mitigate their pain points

    IT and Customer Service have an opportunity to reinforce and build their organization’s customer base by working together to streamline operations.

    IT pain points

    Customer Service pain points

    • IT lacks understanding of Customer Service challenges and pain points.
    • IT has technical debt or constrained technology funding.
    • The IT department is viewed as a cost center and support organization, not an engine of innovation, growth, and service delivery performance.
    • Processes supporting Customer Service delivery may be sub-optimal.
    • The existing technology cannot support the increasingly advanced needs of Customer Service functions.
    • Customer Service isn’t fully aware of what your customers think of your service quality. There is little to no monitoring of customer sentiment.
    • There is a lack of value-based segmentation of customers and information on their channel usage and preferences.
    • Competitor actions are not actively monitored.

    IT often cannot spark a debate with Customer Service on whether a decision made without IT is misaligned with corporate direction. It’s almost always an uphill battle for IT.

    Sahri Lava, Research Director, IDC

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    DON’T FALL BEHIND

    70% of companies either have a digital transformation strategy in place or are working on one (Tech Pro Research, 2018). Unless IT can enable technology that meets the customer where they are, the organization will quickly fall behind in an age of accelerating ecommerce.

    DEVELOP FUTURE STATES

    Many customer journeys are now exclusively digital – 63% of customers expect to receive service over social media (Ringshall, 2020). Organization’s need an IT strategy to develop the future of their customer service – from leveraging analytics to self-service AI portals.

    BUILD GAP ANALYSIS

    73% of customers prefer to shop across multiple channels (Sopadjieva et al., 2017). Assess your current state’s application integrations and functionality to ensure your future state can accurately sync customer information across each channel.

    SHORTLIST SOLUTIONS

    Customer relationship management software is one of the world's fastest growing industries (Kuligowski, 2022). Choosing a best-fit solution requires an intricate analysis of the market, future trends, and your organization’s requirements.

    ADVANCE CHANGE

    95% of customers cite service as key to their brand loyalty (Microsoft, 2019). Build out your roadmap for the future state to retain and build your customer base moving forward.

    Use Info-Tech’s method to produce an IT strategy for Customer Service:

    PHASE 1: Define Project and Future State

    Output: Project Charter and Future State Business Processes

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define a Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    KEY DELIVERABLE:

    Strategic Roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the strategic roadmap.

    PHASE 2: Evaluate Current State

    Output: Requirements Identified to Bridge Current to Future State

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    PHASE 3: Build a Roadmap to Future State

    Output: Initiatives and Strategic Roadmap

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Your Strategic Roadmap

    Key deliverable and tools outline

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting materials to help you accomplish your goals.

    Project RACI Chart

    Activity 1.1a Organize roles and responsibilities for carrying out project steps.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project RACI Chart.

    Key Deliverable:

    Strategic Roadmap

    Develop, prioritize, and implement key initiatives for your customer service IT strategy, plotting and tracking them on an easy-to-read timeline.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Strategic Roadmap.

    Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    Activities 1.2a, 1.2b, and 2.1aOutline and prioritize customer service goals.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Project Charter Template

    Activity 1.1b Define the project, its key deliverables, and metrics for success.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Systems Strategy Tool

    Activities 1.3a, Phase 2, 3.1a Prioritize requirements, assess current state customer service functions, and decide what to do with your current systems going forward.

    .The image contains a screenshot of the Systems Strategy Tool.

    Looking ahead: defining metrics for success

    Phase 1 of this blueprint will help solidify how to measure this project’s success. Start looking ahead now.

    For example, the metrics below show the potential business benefits for several stakeholders through building an IT strategy for Customer Service. These stakeholders include agents, customers, senior leadership, and IT. The benefits of this project are listed to the right.

    Metric Description

    Current Metric

    Future Goal

    Number of channels for customer contact

    1

    6

    Customer self-service resolution

    0%

    50%

    % ROI

    - 4%

    11%

    Agent satisfaction

    42%

    75%

    As this project nears completion:

    1. Customers will have more opportunities for self-service resolution.
    2. Agents will experience higher satisfaction, improving attrition rates.
    3. The organization will experience higher ROI from its digital Customer Service investments.
    4. Customers can engage the contact center via a communication channel that suits them.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical Guided Implementation on this topic look like?

    Define Project and Future StateDocument and Assess Current StateEvaluate Architectural and Application OptionsBuild Roadmap to Future State

    Call #1: Introduce project, defining its vision and metrics of success.

    Call #2: Review environmental scan to define future state vision.

    Call #3: Examine future state business processes to compile initial requirements.

    Call #4: Document current state business processes.

    Call #5: Assess current customer service IT architecture.

    Call #6: Refine and prioritize list of requirements for future state.

    Call #7: Evaluate architectural options.

    Call #8: Evaluate application options.

    Call #9:Develop and score initiatives to future state.

    Call #10: Develop timeline and roadmap.

    Call #11: Review progress and wrap-up project.

    A Guided Implementation is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical Guided Implementation is two to 12 calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4Day 5

    Define Your Vision for Future State

    Document Current State and Assess Gaps

    Adopt an Architectural Posture

    Frame Desired State and Develop Roadmap

    Communicate and Implement

    Activities

    1.1 Outline and prioritize your customer goals.

    1.2 Link customer service goals’ relevance and value to your Customer Service processes.

    1.3 Score Customer Service business processes against organizational goals.

    2.1 Holistically assess multiple aspects of Customer Service-related IT assets with Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    3.1 Analyze Customer Service Systems Strategy and review results with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    4.1 Help project management stakeholders visualize implementation of Customer Service IT initiatives.

    4.2 Build strategic roadmap and plot initiatives.

    5.1 Finalize deliverables.

    5.2 Support communication efforts.

    5.3 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives.

    Deliverables

    1. Initial position on viable Customer Service strategies.
    2. Shortlist of key business processes.
    3. Documented future-state business process model.
    4. Business/functional/non-functional requirements.
    1. Documented current state business process model.
    2. Customer Service systems health assessment.
    3. Inventory of Customer Service supporting applications.
    4. Inventory of related system interfaces.
    1. Posture on system architecture.
    2. Completed Customer Service systems health assessment.
    3. List of application options.
    1. Scored and prioritized list of initiatives.
    2. Customer Service implementation roadmap.
    1. Customer Service IT Strategy Roadmap.
    2. Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives.

    Phase 1

    Define Project and Future State

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Strategic Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    1.1a Create your project’s RACI chart to establish key roles throughout the timeline of the project.

    1.1b Finalize your project charter that captures the key goals of the project, ready to communicate to stakeholders for approval.

    1.2a Begin documenting business processes to establish potential future states.

    1.2b Model future state business processes for looking beyond current constraints and building the ideal scenario.

    1.3a Document your preliminary requirements for concretizing a future state and performing a gap analysis.

    Participants required for Phase 1:

    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    1.1 Identify process owners early for successful project execution

    IT and Customer Service must work in tandem throughout the project. Both teams’ involvement ensures all stakeholders are heard and support the final decision.

    Customer Service Perspective

    IT Perspective

    • Customer Service is the victim of pain points resulting from suboptimal systems and it stands to gain the most benefits from a well-planned systems strategy.
    • Looking to reduce pain points, Customer Service will likely initiate, own, and participate heavily in the project.
    • Customer Service must avoid the tendency to make IT-independent decisions. This could lead to disparate systems that contribute little to the overall organizational goals.
    • IT owns the application and back-end support of all Customer Service business processes. Any technological aspect of processes will need IT involvement.
    • IT may or may not have the mandate to run the Customer Service strategy project. Responsibility for systems decisions remains with IT.
    • IT should own the task of filtering out unnecessary or infeasible application and technology decisions. IT capabilities to support such acquisitions and post-purchase maintenance must be considered.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While involving management is important for high-level strategic decisions, input from those who interact day-to-day with the systems is a crucial component to a well-planned strategy.

    1.1 Define project roles and responsibilities to improve progress tracking

    Assign responsibilities, accountabilities, and other project involvement roles using a RACI chart.

    • IT should involve Customer Service from the beginning of project planning to implementation and execution. The project requires input and knowledge from both functions to succeed.
    • Do not let the tasks be forgotten within inter-functional communication. Define roles and responsibilities for the project as early as possible.
    • Each member of the project team should be given a RACI designation, which will vary for each task to ensure clear ownership, execution, and progress tracking.
    • Assigning RACI early can:
      • Improve project quality by assigning the right people to the right tasks.
      • Improve chances of project task completion by assigning clear accountabilities.
      • Improve project buy-in by ensuring that stakeholders are kept informed of project progress, risks, and successes.

    R – Responsibility

    A – Accountability

    C – Consulted

    I – Informed

    1.1 Use Info-Tech’s recommended process owners and roles for this blueprint

    Customer Service Head

    Customer Service Director

    CIO

    Applications Director*

    CEO/COO

    Marketing Head

    Sales Head

    Determine Project Suitability

    ARCCCII

    Phase 1.1

    CCARIII

    Phases 1.2 – 1.3

    ARCCICC

    Phase 2

    ARICIII

    Phase 3.1

    (Architectural options)

    CCARIII

    Phase 3.1

    (Application options)

    ACIRICC

    Phases 3.2 – 3.3

    CCARCII

    * The Applications Director is to compile a list of Customer Service systems; the Customer Service Director is responsible for vetting a list and mapping it to Customer Service functions.

    ** The Applications Director is responsible for technology-related decisions (e.g. SaaS or on-premise, integration issues); the Customer Service Director is responsible for functionality-related decisions.

    1.1a Create your project’s RACI chart

    1 hour

    1. The Applications Director and Customer Service Head should identify key participants and stakeholders of the project.
    2. Use Info-Tech’s Project RACI Chart to identify ownership of tasks.
    3. Record roles in the Project RACI Chart.
    The image contains a screenshot of the project RACI chart.
    InputOutput
    • Identification of key project participants and stakeholders.
    • Identification of key project participants and stakeholders.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project RACI Chart
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Project RACI Chart

    1.1 Start developing the project charter

    A project charter should address the following:

    • Executive Summary and Project Overview
      • Goals
      • Benefits
      • Critical Success Factors
    • Scope
    • Key Deliverables
    • Stakeholders and RACI
    • Risk Assessment
      • What are some risks you may encounter during project execution?
    • Projected Timeline and Key Milestones
    • Review and Approval Process

    What is a project charter?

    • The project charter defines the project and lays the foundation for all subsequent project planning.
    • Once approved by the business, the charter gives the project lead formal authority to initiate the project.

    Why create a project charter?

    • The project charter allows all parties involved to reach an agreement and document major aspects of the project.
    • It also supports the decision-making process and can be used as a communication tool.

    Stakeholders must:

    • Understand and agree on the objectives and important characteristics of the project charter before the project is initiated.
    • Be given the opportunity to adjust the project charter to better address their needs and concerns.

    1.1b Finalize the project charter

    1-2 hours

    1. Request relevant individuals and parties to complete sections of Info-Tech’s Project Charter Template.
    2. Input the simplified RACI output from tab 3 in Info-Tech’s Project RACI Chart tool into the RACI section of the charter.
    3. Send the completed template to the CIO and Customer Service Head for approval.
    4. Communicate the document to stakeholders for changes and finalization.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Input

    Output

    • Customer Service and IT strategies
    • Justification of impetus to begin this project
    • Timeline estimates
    • A completed project charter that captures the key goals of the project, ready to communicate to stakeholders for approval.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project RACI Chart
    • Project Charter Template
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.2 IT must play a role shaping Customer Service’s future vision

    IT is only one or two degrees of separation from the end customer – their involvement can significantly impact the customer experience.

    IT

    Customer Service

    Customer

    Customer Service-Facing Application

    Customer-Facing Application

    • IT enables, supports, and maintains the applications used by the Customer Service organization to service customers. IT provides the infrastructural and technical foundation to operate the function.
    • IT supports customer-facing interfaces and channels for Customer Service interaction.
    • Channel examples include web pages, mobile device applications and optimization, and interactive voice response for callers.

    1.2 Establish a vision for Customer Service excellence

    Info-Tech has identified three prominent Customer Service strategic patterns. Evaluate which fits best with your situation and organization.

    Retention

    Efficiency

    Cross-Sell/Up-Sell

    Ensuring customers remain customers by providing proactive customer service and a seamless omnichannel strategy.

    Reducing costs by diverting customers to lower cost channels and empowering agents to solve problems quickly.

    Maximizing the value of existing customers by capitalizing on cross-sell and up-sell opportunities.

    1.2 Let profitability goals help reveal which strategy to pursue

    Profitability goals are tied to the enabling of customer service strategies.

    • If looking to drive cost decreases across the organization, pursue cost efficiency strategies such as customer volume diversion in order to lower cost channels and avoid costly escalations for customer complaints and inquiries.
    • Ongoing Contribution Margin is positive only once customer acquisition costs (CAC) have been paid back. For every customer lost, another customer has to be acquired in order to experience no loss. In this way, customer retention strategies help decrease your overall costs.
    • Once cost reduction and customer retention measures are in place, look to increase overall revenue through cross-selling and up-selling activities with your customers.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate the relationship between goals and enabling strategies.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Purely driving efficiency is not the goal. Create a balance that does not compromise customer satisfaction.

    Customer Service strategies: Case studies

    Efficiency

    • Volume diversion to lower cost channels
    • Agent empowerment

    MISS DIG 811 – a utility notification system – sought to make their customer service more efficient by moving to softphones. Using the Cisco Customer Journey Platform, Miss Dig saw a 9% YoY increase in agent productivity and 83% reduction in phone equipment costs. Source: (Cisco, 2018).

    Retention

    • Proactive Customer Service
    • Seamless omnichannel strategy

    VoiceSage worked with Home Retail Group – a general merchandise retailer – to proactively increase customer outreach, reducing the number of routine customer order and delivery queries received. In four weeks, Home Retail Group increased their 30-40% answer rate from customers to 100%, with 90% of incoming calls answered and 60% of contacts made via SMS. Source: (VoiceSage, 2018)

    Cross-Sell/

    Up-Sell

    • Cross-Sell and Up-Sell opportunities

    A global brand selling language-learning software utilized Callzilla to help improve their call conversion rate of 2%. After six months of agent and supervisor training, this company increased their call conversion rate to 16% and their upsell rate to 40%. Their average order value increased from < $300 to $465. Source: (Callzilla, n.d.)

    1.2 Performing an environmental scan can help IT optimize Customer Service support

    Though typically executed by Customer Service, IT can gain valuable insights for best supporting infrastructure, applications, and operations from an environmental scan.

    An environmental scan seeks to understand your organization’s customers from multiple directions. It considers:

    • Customers’ value-based segmentations.
    • The interaction channels customers prefer to use.
    • Customers’ likes and dislikes.
    • The general sentiment of your customer service quality.
    • What your competitors are doing in this space.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how performing an environmental scan can help IT optimize Customer Service support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Business processes must directly relate to customer service. Failing to correlate customer experience with business performance outcomes overlooks the enormous cost of negative sentiment.

    1.2 The environmental scan results should drive IT’s strategy and resource spend

    Insights derived from this scan can help frame IT’s contributions to Customer Service’s future vision.

    Why IT should care:

    Implications:

    Each customer experience, from product/service selection to post-transaction support, can have a significant impact on business performance.

    It is not just IT or Customer Service that should care; rather, it should be an organizational responsibility to care about what customers say.

    Customers have little tolerance for mediocrity or poor service and simply switch their allegiances to those that can satisfy their expectations.

    Do not ignore your competitors; they may be doing something well in Customer Service technology which may serve as your organization’s benchmark.

    With maturing mobile and social technologies, customers want to be treated as individuals rather than as a series of disconnected accounts

    Do not ignore your customers’ plea for individuality through mobile and social. Assess your customers’ technology channel preferences.

    Customer service’s perception of service quality may be drastically different than what is expected by the customers.

    Prevent your organization from investing in technology that will have no positive impact on your customer experience.

    Some customers may not provide your organization the business value that surpasses your cost to serve them.

    Focus on enhancing the technology and customer service experience for your high-value customers.

    1.2 Have Customer Service examine feedback across channels for a holistic view

    Your method of listening needs to evolve to include active listening on social and mobile channels.

    Insights and Implications for Customer Service

    Limitations of conventional listening:

    • Solicited customer feedback, such as surveys, do not provide an accurate feedback method since customers only have one channel to express their views.
    • Sentiment, voice, and text analytics within social media channels provide the most accurate and timely intelligence.

    How IT Can Help

    IT can help facilitate the customer feedback process by:

    • Conducting customer feedback with voice recognition software.
    • Monitoring customer sentiment on mobile and social channels.
    • Utilizing customer data analytic engines on social media management platforms.
    • Referring Customer Service to customer advisory councils and their databases.

    1.2 Benchmark IT assets by examining your competitors’ Customer Service capabilities

    The availability of the internet means almost complete transparency between your products and services, and those of your competitors.

    Insights and implications from Customer Service

    How IT can help

    Competitor actions are crucial. Watch your competitors to learn how they use Customer Service as a competitive differentiator and a customer acquisition tool.

    Do not learn about a competitor’s actions because your customers are already switching to them. Track your competitors before getting a harsh surprise from your customers.

    View the customer service experience from the outside in. Assessing from the inside out gives an internal perspective on how good the service is, rather than what customers are experiencing.

    Take a data and analytics-driven approach to mine insights on what customers are saying about your competitors. Negative sentiment and specific complaints can be used as reference for IT and Customer Service to:

    • Avoid repeating the competitor’s mistakes.
    • Utilize sentiment as a benchmark for goal setting and improvements.
    • Duplicate successful technology initiatives to realize business value.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Look to your competitors for comparative models but do not pursue to solely replicate what they currently have. Aim higher and attempt to surpass their capabilities and brand value.

    1.2 Collaborate with Customer Service to understand customer value segments

    Let segmentation help you gain intelligence on customers’ expectations.

    Insights and implications from customer service

    • Segment your customers based on their value relative to the cost to serve. The easiest way to do so is with channel preference categorization.
    • If the cost for retention attempts are higher than the value that those customers provide, there is little business case to pursue retention action.

    How IT can help

    • Couple value-based segmentation with channel preference and satisfaction levels of your most-valued customers to effectively target IT investments in channels that maximize service customization and quality.
    • Correlate the customers’ channel and technology usage with their business value to see which IT assets are delivering on their investments.

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate the relationship between cost of retention and value.

    “If you're developing a Customer Service strategy, it has to start with who your clients are, what [they are] trying to do, and through what channels […] and then your decision around processes have to fall out of that. If IT is trying to lead the conversation, or bring people together to lead the conversation, then marketing and whoever does segmentation has to be at the table as a huge component of this.”

    Lisa Woznica, Director of Client Experience, BMO Financial Group

    1.2 Be mindful of trends in the consumer and technology landscape

    Building a future vision of customer service requires knowing what upcoming technologies can aid the organization.

    OMNICHANNEL SUPPORT

    Rapidly changing demographics and modes of communication requires an evolution toward omnichannel engagement. 63% of customers now expect to communicate with contact centers over their social media (Ringshall 2020). Agents need customer information synced across each channel they use, meeting the customer’s needs where they are.

    INTELLIGENT SELF-SERVICE PORTALS

    Customers want their issues resolved as quickly as possible. Machine learning self-service options deliver personalized customer experiences, which also reduce both agent call volume and support costs for the organization. 60% of contact centers are using or plan to use AI in the next 12 months to improve their customer (Canam Research 2020).

    LEVERAGING ANALYTICS

    The future of customer service is tied up with analytics. This not only entails AI-driven capabilities that fetch the agent relevant information, but it finds skills-based routing and uses biometric data (e.g., speech) for security. It also feeds operations leaders’ need for easy access to real insights about how their customers and agents are doing.

    Phase 1 – Case Study

    Omnichannel support delivers a financial services firm immediate customer service results.

    INDUSTRY: Financial Services

    SOURCE: Mattsen Kumar

    Situation

    Solution

    Results

    • A financial services firm’s fast growth began to show cracks in their legacy customer service system.
    • Costs to support the number of customer queries increased.
    • There was a lack of visibility into incoming customer communications and their resolutions.
    • Business opportunities were lost due to a lack of information on customers’ preferences and challenges. Customer satisfaction was decreasing, negatively impacting the firm’s brand.
    • Mattsen Kumar diagnosed that the firm’s major issue was that their customer service processes required a high percentage of manual interventions.
    • Mattsen Kumar developed an omnichannel strategy, including a mix of social channels joined together by a CRM.
    • A key aspect of this omnichannel experience was designing automated processes with minimal manual intervention.
    • 25% reduction in callbacks from customers.
    • $50,000 reduction in operational costs.
    • Two minutes wait time reduction for chat process.
    • 14% decrease in average handle time.
    • Scaled up from 6000 to 50,000 monthly calls that could be handled by the current team.
    • Enabled more than 10,000 customer queries over chats.

    1.2 Construct your future state using a business process management approach

    Documenting and evaluating your business processes serves as a good starting point for defining the overall Customer Service strategy.

    • Examining key Customer Service business processes can unlock clues around the following:
      • Driving operational effectiveness.
      • Identifying, implementing, and maintaining reusable enterprise systems.
      • Identifying gaps that can be addressed by acquisition of additional systems.
    • Business process modeling facilitates the collaboration between business and IT, recording the sequence of events, tasks performed, by whom they are performed, and the levels of interaction with the various supporting applications.
    • By identifying the events and decision points in the process, and overlaying the people that perform the functions and technologies that support them, organizations are better positioned to identify gaps that need to be bridged.
    • Encourage the analysis by compiling the inventory of Customer Service business processes that are relevant to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A process-oriented approach helps organizations see the complete view of the system by linking strategic requirements to business requirements, and business requirements to system requirements.

    1.2 Use the APQC Framework to define your Customer Service-related processes

    • APQC’s Process Classification Framework (PCF) is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.
    • Section 5 of the PCF details various levels of Customer Service business processes, useful for mapping on to your own organization’s current state.
    • The APQC Framework can be accessed through the following link: APQC’s Process Classification Framework.

    The APQC Framework serves as a high-level, industry-neutral enterprise model that allows organizations to see activities from a cross-industry process perspective.

    The image contains a screenshot example of the APQC Process Classification Framework.
    Source: (Ziemba and Eisenbardt 2015)

    Info-Tech Caution

    The APQC framework does not list all processes within a specific organization, nor are the processes which are listed in the framework present in every organization. It is designed as a framework and global standard to be customized for use in any organization.

    1.2 Each APQC process has five levels that represent its logical components

    The image contains a screenshot of the APQC five levels. The levels include: category, process group, process, and activity.

    The PCF provides L1 through 4 for the Customer Service Framework.

    L5 processes are task- and industry-specific and need to be defined by the organization.

    Source: (APQC 2020)
    This Industry Process Classification Framework was jointly developed by APQC and IBM to facilitate improvement through process management and benchmarking. ©2018 APQC and IBM. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

    1.2a Begin documenting business processes

    4 hours

    1. Using Info-Tech’s Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool, list the Customer Service goals and rank them by importance.
    2. Score the APQC L4 processes by relevance to the defined goals and perceived satisfaction index.
    3. Define the L5 processes for the top scoring L4 process.
    4. Leave Tab 5, Columns G – I for now. These columns will be revisited in activities 1.2b and 2.1a.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Input

    Output

    • List of Customer Service goals
    • A detailed prioritization of Customer Service business processes to model for future states

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    1.2 Start designing the future state of key business processes

    If Customer Service transformation is called for, start with your future-state vision. Don’t get stuck in current state and the “art of the possible” within its context.

    Future-State Analysis

    Start by designing your future state business processes (based on the key processes shortlisting exercise). Design these processes as they would exist as your “ideal scenario.” Next, analyze your current state to help better your understanding of:

    • The gaps that exist and must be bridged to achieve the future-state vision.
    • Whether or not any critical functions that support your business were omitted accidentally from the future-state processes.
    • Whether or not any of the supporting applications or architecture can be salvaged and used toward delivery of your future-state vision.

    Though it’s a commonly used approach, documenting your current-state business processes first can have several drawbacks:

    • Current-state analysis can impede your ability to see future possibility.
    • Teams will spend a great deal of time and effort on documenting current state and inevitably succumb to “analysis paralysis.”
    • Current state assessment, when done first, limits the development of the future (or target) state, constraining thinking to the limitations of the current environment rather than the requirements of the business strategy.

    Current-State Analysis

    “If you're fairly immature and looking for a paradigm shift or different approach [because] you recognize you're totally doing it wrong today, then starting with documenting current state doesn't do a lot except make you sad. You don't want to get stuck in [the mindset of] ‘Here's the current state, and here’s the art of the possible.’”

    Trevor Timbeck, Executive Coach, Parachute Executive Coaching

    1.2 Start modeling future-state processes

    Build buy-in and accountability in process owners through workshops and whiteboarding – either in-person or remotely.

    Getting consensus on the process definition (who does what, when, where, why, and how) is one of the hardest parts of BPM.

    Gathering process owners for a process-defining workshop isn’t easy. Getting them to cooperate can be even harder. To help manage these difficulties during the workshop, make sure to:

    • Keep the scope contained to the processes being defined in order to make best use of everyone’s time, as taking time away from employees is a cost too.
    • Prior to the workshop, gather information about the processes with interviews, questionnaires, and/or system data gathering and analysis.
    • Use the information gathered to have real-life examples of the processes in question so that time isn’t wasted.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep meetings short and on task as tangents are inevitable. Set ground rules at the beginning of any brainstorming or whiteboarding session to ensure that all participants are aligned.

    1.2 Use the five W’s to help map out your future-state processes

    Define the “who, what, why, where, when, and how” of the process to gain a better understanding of individual activities.

    Owner

    Who

    What

    When

    Where

    Why

    How

    Record Claim

    Customer Service

    Customer Service Rep.

    Claim

    Accident

    Claims system

    Customer notification

    Agent enters claim into the system and notifies claims department

    Manage Claim

    Claims Department

    Claims Clerk

    Claim

    Agent submitted the claim

    Claims system

    Agent notification

    Clerk enters claim into the claims system

    Investigate Claim

    Claims Investigation

    Adjuster

    Claim

    Claim notification

    Property where claim is being made

    Assess damage

    Evaluation and expert input

    Settle Claim

    Claims Department

    Claim Approver

    Claim and Adjuster’s evaluation

    Receipt of Adjuster’s report

    Claims system

    Evaluation

    Approval or denial

    Administer Claim

    Finance Department

    Finance Clerk

    Claim amount

    Claim approval notification

    Finance system

    Payment required

    Create payment voucher and cut check

    Close Claim

    Claims Department

    Claims Clerk

    Claim and all supporting documentation

    Payment issued

    Claims system

    Claim processed

    Close the claim in the system

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s not just about your internal processes. To achieve higher customer retention and satisfaction, it’s also useful to map the customer service process from the customer perspective to identify customer pain points and disconnects.

    1.2 Use existing in-house software as a simplistic entry point to process modeling

    A diagramming tool like Visio enables you to plot process participants and actions using dedicated symbols and connectors that indicate causality.

    • Models can use a stick-figure format, a cross-functional workflow format, or BPMN notation.
    • Plot the key activities and decision points in the process using standard flowcharting shapes. Identify the data that belongs to each step in a separate document or as call-outs on the diagram.
    • Document the flow control between steps, i.e., what causes one step to finish and another to start?

    The image contains a screenshot of the sample cross-functional diagram using the claims process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Diagramming tools can force the process designer into a specific layout: linear or cross-functional/swim lane.

    • A linear format is recommended for single function and system processes.
    • A swim lane format is recommended for cross-functional and cross-departmental processes.

    1.2 Introduce low investment alternatives for process modeling for modeling disciplines

    SaaS and low-cost modeling tools are emerging to help organizations with low to medium BPM maturity visualize their processes.

    • Formal modeling tools allow a designer to model in any view and easily switch to other views to gain new perspectives on the process.
    • Subscription-based, best-of-breed SaaS tools provide scalable and flexible process modeling capabilities.
    • Open source and lower cost tools also exist to help distribute BPM modeling discipline and standards.
    • BPMS suites incorporate advanced modeling tools with process execution engines for end-to-end business process management. Integrate process discovery with modeling, process simulation, and analysis. Deploy, monitor, and measure process models in process automation engines.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram of the claims process.

    Explore SoftwareReviews’ Business Process Management market analysis by clicking here.

    1.2b Model future state business processes

    4 hours

    1. Model the future state of the most critical business processes.
    2. Use Tab 5, Columns G – H of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool to keep stock of what processes are targeted for modeling, and whether the models have been completed.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Input

    Output

    • Modeled future Customer Service business processes
    • An inventory of modeled future states for critical Customer Service business processes

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    1.3 Start a preliminary inventory of your requirements

    Use the future state business process models as a source for software requirements.

    • Business process modeling deals with business requirements that can be used as the foundation for elicitation of system (functional and non-functional) requirements.
    • Modeling creates an understanding of the various steps and transfers in each business process, as well as the inputs and outputs of the process.
    • The future state models form an understanding of what information is needed and how it flows from one point to another in each process.
    • Understand what technologies are (or can be) leveraged to facilitate the exchange of information and facilitate the process.

    For each task or event in the process, ask the following questions:

    • What is the input?
    • What is the output?
    • What are the underlying risks and how can they be mitigated?
    • What conditions should be met to mitigate or eliminate each risk?
    • What are the improvement opportunities?
    • What conditions should be met to enable these opportunities?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Incorporate future considerations into the requirements. How will the system need to adapt over time to accommodate additional processes, process variations, introduction of additional channels and capabilities, etc. Do not overreach by identifying system capabilities that cannot possibly be met.

    1.3 Understand the four different requirements to document

    Have a holistic view for capturing the various requirements the organization has for a Customer Service strategy.

    Business requirements

    High-level requirements that management would typically understand.

    User requirements

    High-level requirements on how the tool should empower users’ lives.

    Non-functional requirements

    Criteria that can be used to judge the operation of a contact center. It defines how the system should perform for the organization.

    Functional requirements

    Outline the technical requirements for the desired contact center.

    1.3 Extract requirements from the business process models

    To see how, let us examine our earlier example for the Claims Process, extracting requirements from the “Record Claim” task.

    The image contains an example of the claims process, and focuses on the record claim task.

    1.3a Document your preliminary requirements

    4 hours

    1. The Applications Director and Customer Service Head are to identify participants based on the business processes that will be reviewed.
    2. They are to conduct a workshop to gather all requirements that can be taken from the business process models.
    3. Use Tab 4 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to document your preliminary requirements.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Half-day workshop to review the proposed future-state diagrams and distill from them the business, functional, and non-functional requirements
    • Future state business process models from activities 1.2a and 1.2b
    • An inventory of preliminary requirements for modeled future states
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Results of activities 1.2a and 1.2b
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    Phase 2

    Evaluate Current State

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Strategic Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    2.1a Model current-state business processes for an inventory to compare against future-state models.

    2.1b Compare future and current business states for a preliminary gap analysis.

    2.1c Begin compiling an inventory of CS Systems by function for an overview of your current state map.

    2.2a Rate your functional and integration quality to assess the performance of your application portfolio.

    2.3a Compare states and propose action to bridge current business processes with viable future alternatives.

    2.3b Document finalized requirements, ready to enact change.

    Participants required for Phase 2:

    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives
    • IT Managers

    2.1 Document the current state of your key business processes

    Doing so will solidify your understanding of the gaps, help identify any accidental omissions from the future state vision, and provide clues as to what can be salvaged.

    • Analysis of the current state is important in the context of gap analysis. It aids in understanding the discrepancies between your baseline and the future-state vision, and ensuring that these gaps are recorded as part of the overall requirements.
    • By analyzing the current state of key business processes, you may identify critical functions that are in place today that were not taken into consideration during the future-state business process visioning exercise.
    • By overlaying the current state process models with the applications that support them, the current state models will indicate what systems and interfaces can be salvaged.
    • The baseline feeds the business case, allowing the team to establish proposed benefits and improvements from implementing the future-state vision. Seek to understand the following:
      • The volumes of work
      • Major exceptions
      • Number of employees involved
      • Amount of time spent in each area of the process

    2.1 Assess the current state to drive the gap analysis

    Before you choose any solution, identify what needs to be done to your current state in order to achieve the vision you have defined.

    • By beginning with the future state in mind, you have likely already envisioned some potential solutions.
    • By reviewing your current situation in contrast with your desired future state, you can deliberate what needs to be done to bridge the gap. The differences between the models allow you to define a set of changes that must be enacted in sequence or in parallel. These represent the gaps.
    • The gaps, once identified, translate themselves into additional requirements.

    Assessment Example

    Future State

    Current Situation

    Next Actions/ Proposals

    Incorporate social channels for responding to customer inquiries.

    No social media monitoring or channels for interaction exist at present.

    1. Implement a social media monitoring platform tool and integrate it with the current CSM.
    2. Recruit additional Customer Service representatives to monitor and respond to inquiries via social channels.
    3. Develop report(s) for analyzing volumes of inquiries received through social channels.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is important to allot time for the current-state analysis, confine it to the minimum effort required to understand the gaps, and identify any missing pieces from your future-state vision. Make sure the work expended is proportional to the benefit derived from this exercise.

    2.1a Model current-state business processes

    2 hours

    1. Model the current state of the most critical business processes, using the work done in activities 1.2a and 1.2b to help identify these processes.
    2. Use Tab 5, Column I of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool to keep stock of what models have been completed.
    3. This tool is now complete.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Modeled current-state Customer Service business processes
    • An inventory of modeled current states for critical Customer Service business processes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Results of activities 1.2a and 1.2b.
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    2.1b Compare future and current business states

    2 hours

    1. Use Tab 9 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to record a summary of the future state, current state, and actions proposed in order to bridge the gaps.
      • Fill out the desired future state of the business processes and IT architecture.
      • Fill out the current state of the business processes and IT architecture.
      • Fill out the actions required to mitigate the gaps between the future and current state.
    The image contains a screenshot of thr Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • The results of activities 1.2a, 1.2b, and 2.1a.
    • Modeled future- and current-state business processes
    • An overview and analysis of how to reach certain future states from the current state.
    • A preliminary list of next steps through bridging the gap between current and future states.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.1 Assess whether Customer Service architecture can meet future-state vision

    Approach your CS systems holistically to identify opportunities for system architecture optimization.

    • Organizations often do not have a holistic view of their Customer Service systems. These systems are often cobbled together from disparate parts, such as:
      • Point solutions (both SaaS and on-premise).
      • Custom interfaces between applications and databases.
      • Spreadsheets and other manual workarounds.
    • A high degree of interaction between multiple systems can cause distention in the application portfolio and databases, creating room for error and more work for CS and IT staff. Mapping your systems and architectural landscape can help you:
      • Identify the number of manual processes you currently employ.
      • Eliminate redundancies.
      • Allow for consolidation and/or integration.

    Consider the following metrics when tracking your CS systems:

    Time needed to perform core tasks (i.e., resolving a customer complaint)

    Accuracy of basic information (customer history, customer product portfolio)

    CSR time spent on manual process/workarounds

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a two-step process to document the current state of your Customer Service systems:

    1. Compile an inventory of systems by function
    2. Identify points of integration across systems

    2.1c Begin compiling an inventory of CS systems by function

    2 hours

    1. Using Tab 2 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool, request that the CS managers fill in the application inventory template with all the CS systems that they use.
    2. Questions to trigger exercise:
      • Which applications am I using?
      • Which CS function does the application support?
      • How many applications support the same function?
      • What spreadsheets or manual workarounds do I use to fill in system gaps?
    3. Send the filled-in template to IT Managers to validate and fill in missing system information.
    InputOutput
    • Applications Directors’ knowledge of the current state
    • IT Managers’ validation of this state
    • A corroborated inventory of the current state for Customer Service systems
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Applications Director
    • IT managers

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.1 Use activity 2.1c for an overview of your current state map

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 2.1.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A current-state map of CS systems can offer insight on:

    • Coverage, i.e. whether all functional areas are supported by systems.
    • Redundancies, i.e. functional areas with multiple systems. If a customer’s records are spread across multiple systems, it may be difficult to obtain a single source of truth.

    2.2 Assess current state with user interface architecture diagrams

    Understand a high-level overview of how your current state integrates together to rate its overall quality.

    • If IT already has an architecture diagram, use this in conjunction with your application inventory for the basis of current state discussions.
    • If your organization does not already have an architecture diagram for review and discussion, consider creating one in its most simplistic form using the following guidelines (see illustrative example on next slide):

    Represent each of your systems as a labelled shape with a unique number (this number can be referenced in other artifacts that can provide more detail).

    Color coding can also be applied to differentiate these objects, e.g., to indicate an internal system (where development is owned by your organization) vs. an external system (where development is outside of your organization’s control).

    2.2 Example: Current state with user interface architecture diagrams

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of current state with user interface architecture diagrams.

    2.2 Evaluate application functionality and functional coverage

    Use this documentation of the current state as an opportunity to spot areas for rationalizing your application portfolio.

    If an application is well-received by the organization and is an overall good platform, consider acquiring more modules from the same vendor application.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate functionality and functional coverage.

    If you have more than one application for a function, consider why that is and how you might consolidate into a single application.

    Measure the effectiveness of applications under consideration. For example, consider the number of failures when an application attempts a function (by ticket numbers), and overall satisfaction/ease of use.

    The above steps will reveal capability overlaps and application pain points and show how the overall portfolio could be made more efficient.

    2.2 Determine the degree of integration between systems

    Data and system integration are key components of an effective CS system portfolio.

    The needed level of integration will depend on three major factors:

    Integration between systems helps facilitate reporting. The required reports will vary from organization to organization:

    How many other systems benefit from the data of the application?

    Large workforces will benefit from more detailed WFM reports for optimizing workforce planning and talent acquisition.

    Will automating the integration between systems alleviate a significant amount of manual effort?

    Organizations with competitive sales and incentives will want to strategize around talent management and compensation.

    What kind of reports will your organization require in order to perform core and business-enabling functions?

    Aging workforces or organizations with highly specialized skills can benefit from detailed analysis around succession planning.

    Phase 2 – Case Study

    Integrating customer relationship information streamlines customer service and increases ROI for the organization.

    INDUSTRY: Retail and Wholesale

    SOURCE: inContact

    Situation

    Solution

    Results

    • Hall Automotive – a group of 14 multi-franchise auto dealerships located throughout Virginia and North Carolina – had customer information segmented throughout their CRM system at each dealership.
    • Call center agents lacked the technology to synthesize this information, leading customers to receive multiple and unrelated service calls.
    • Hall Automotive wanted to avoid embarrassing information gaps, integrate multiple CRM systems, and help agents focus on customers.
    • Hall Automotive utilized an inContact solution that included Automated Call Distributor, Computer Telephony Integration, and IVR technologies.
    • This created a complete customer-centric system that interfaced with multiple CRM and back-office systems.
    • The inContact solution simplified intelligent call flows, routed contacts to the right agent, and provided comprehensive customer information.
    • Call time decreased from five minutes to one minute and 23 seconds.
    • 350% increase in production.
    • Market response time down from three months to one day.
    • Cost per call cut from 83 cents to 23 cents.
    • Increased agents’ calls-per-hour from 12 to 43.
    • Scalability matched seasonal fluctuations in sales.

    2.2a Rate your functional and integration quality

    2 hours

    1. Using Tab 5 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool, evaluate the functionality of your applications.
    2. Then, use Tab 6 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to evaluate the integration of your applications.
    The image contains screenshots of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Applications Directors’ knowledge of the current state
    • IT Managers’ validation of this state
    • A documented evaluation of the organization’s application portfolio regarding functional and integration quality
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Applications Director
    • IT managers

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.3 Revisit and refine the future-state business processes and list of requirements

    With a better understanding of the current state, determine whether the future-state models hold up. Ensure that the requirements are updated accordingly to reflect the full set of gaps identified.

    • Future-state versus current-state modeling is an iterative process.
    • By assessing the gaps between target state and current state, you may decide that:
      • The future state model was overly ambitious for what can reasonably be delivered in the near-term.
      • Core functions that exist today were accidentally omitted from the future state models and need to be incorporated.
      • There are systems or processes that your organization would like to salvage, and they must be worked into the future-state model.
    • Once the future state vision is stabilized, ensure that all gaps have been translated into business requirements.
      • If possible, categorize all gaps by functional and non-functional requirements.

    2.3a Compare states and propose action

    3 hours

    • Revisit Tab 9 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to more accurately compare your organization’s current- and future-state business processes.
    • Ensure that gaps in the system architecture have been captured.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Modeled future- and current-state business processes
    • Refined and prioritized list of requirements
    • An accurate list of action steps for bridging current and future state business processes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Applications Director
    • IT managers

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.3 Prioritize and finalize the requirements

    Prioritizing requirements will help to itemize initiatives and the timing with which they need to occur.

    Requirements are to be prioritized based on relative important and the timing of the respective initiatives.

    Prioritize the full set of requirements by assigning a priority to each:

    1. High/Critical: A critical requirement; without it, the product is not acceptable to the stakeholders.
    2. Medium/Important: A necessary but deferrable requirement that makes the product less usable but still functional.
    3. Low/Desirable: A nice feature to have if there are resources, but the product can function well without it.

    Requirements prioritization must be completed in collaboration with all key stakeholders (business and IT).

    Consider the following criteria when assigning the priority:

    • Business value
    • Business or technical risk
    • Implementation difficulty
    • Likelihood of success
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Relationship to other requirements
    • Urgency
    • Unified stakeholder agreement

    Stakeholders must ask themselves:

    • What are the consequences to the business objectives if this requirement is omitted?
    • Is there an existing system or manual process/workaround that could compensate for it?
    • Why can’t this requirement be deferred to the next release?
    • What business risk is being introduced if a particular requirement cannot be implemented right away?

    2.3b Document finalized requirements

    4 hours

    1. Using Tab 4 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool, evaluate your applications’ functionality, review, refine, prioritize, and finalize your requirements.
    2. Review the proposed future state diagrams in activity 2.3a and distill from them the business, functional, and non-functional requirements.
    3. The Applications Director and Customer Service Head are to identify participants based on the business processes that will be reviewed. They are to conduct a workshop to gather all the requirements that can be taken from the business process models.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Modeled future- and current-state business processes
    • Refined and prioritized list of requirements
    • A documented finalized list of requirements to achieve future state business processes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • IT Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    Phase 3

    Build Roadmap to Future State

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Strategic Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    3.1a Analyze future architectural posture to understand how applications within the organization ought to be arranged.

    3.3a Develop a Customer Service IT Systems initiative roadmap to reach your future state.

    Participants required for Phase 3:

    • Applications Director
    • CIO
    • Customer Service Director
    • Customer Service Head
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives
    • IT Applications Director

    3.1a Analyze future architectural posture

    1 hour

    Review Tab 8 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    This tab plots each system that supports Customer Service on a 2x2 framework based on its functionality and integration scores. Where these systems plot on each 2x2 provides clues as to whether they should be considered for retention, functional enhancement (upgrade), increased system integration, or replacement.

    • Integrate: The application is functionally rich, so integrate it with other modules by building or enhancing interfaces.
    • Retain: The application satisfies both functionality and integration requirements, so it should be considered for retention.
    • Replace: The application neither offers the functionality sought, nor is it integrated with other modules.
    • Replace/Enhance: The module offers poor functionality but is well integrated with other modules. If enhancing for functionality is easy (e.g., through configuration or custom development), consider enhancement or replace it altogether.
    The image contains a screenshot of tab 8 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Review Tab 8 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • An overview of how different applications in the organization ought to be assessed
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • IT Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    3.1 Interpret 3.1a’s results for next steps

    Involving both sales and marketing in these discussions will provide a 360-degree view on what the modifications should accomplish.

    If the majority of applications are plotted in the “Integrate” quadrant:

    The applications are performing well in terms of functionality but have poor integration. Determine what improvements can be made to enhance integration between the systems where required (e.g. re-working existing interfaces to accommodate additional data elements, automating interfaces, or creating brand new custom interfaces where warranted).

    If the applications are spread across “Integrate,” “Retain,” and “Replace/Enhance”:

    There is no clear recommended direction in this case. Weigh the effort required to replace/enhance/integrate specific applications critical for supporting processes. If resource usage for piecemeal solutions is too high, consider replacement with suite.

    If the majority of applications are plotted in the “Retain” quadrant:

    All applications satisfy both functionality and integration requirements. There is no evidence that significant action is required.

    If the application placements are split between the “Retain” and “Replace/Enhance” quadrants:

    Consider whether or not IT has the capabilities to execute application replacement procedures. If considering replacement, consider the downstream impact on applications that the system in question is currently integrated with. Enhancing an application usually implies upgrading or adding a module to an existing application. Consider the current satisfaction with the application vendor and whether the upgrade or additional module will satisfy your customer service needs.

    3.1 Work through architectural considerations to narrow future states

    Best-of-breeds vs. suite

    Integration and consolidation

    Deployment

    Does the organization only need a point solution or an entire platform of solutions?

    Does the current state enable interoperability between software? Is there room for rationalization?

    Should any new software be SaaS-based, on-premises, or a hybrid?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Decommissioning and replacing entire applications can put well-functioning modules at risk. Make sure to drill down into the granular features to assess if the feature level performance prompts change. The goal is to make the architecture more efficient for Customer Service and easier to manage for IT. If integration has been chosen as a course of action, make sure that the spend on resources and effort is less than that on system replacement. Also make sure that the intended architecture streamlines usability for agents.

    3.1 Considerations: Best-of-breeds vs. suite

    If requirements extend beyond the capabilities of a best-of-breed solution, a suite of tools may be required.

    Best-of-breed

    Suite

    Benefits

    • Features may be more advanced for specific functional areas and a higher degree of customization may be possible.
    • If a potential delay in real-time customer data transfer is acceptable, best-of-breeds provide a similar level of functionality to suites for a lower price.
    • Best-of-breeds allow value to be realized faster than suites, as they are easier and faster to implement and configure.
    • Rip and replace is easier and vendor updates are relatively quick to market.

    Benefits

    • Everyone in the organization works from the same set of customer data.
    • There is a “lowest common denominator” for agent learning as consistent user interfaces lower learning curves and increase efficiency in usage.
    • There is a broader range of functionality using modules.
    • Integration between functional areas will be strong and the organization will be in a better position to enable version upgrades without risking invalidation of an integration point between separate systems.

    Challenges

    • Best-of-breeds typically cover less breadth of functionality than suites.
    • There is a lack of uniformity in user experience across best-of-breeds.
    • Data integrity risks are higher.
    • Variable infrastructure may be implemented due to multiple disparate systems, which adds to architecture complexity and increased maintenance.
    • There is potential for redundant functionality across multiple best-of-breeds.

    Challenges

    • Suites exhibit significantly higher costs compared to point solutions.
    • Suite module functionality may not have the same depth as point solutions.
    • Due to high configuration availability and larger-scale implementation requirements, the time to deploy is longer than point solutions.

    3.1 Considerations: Integration and consolidation

    Use Tab 7 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to gauge the need for consolidation.

    IT benefits

    • Decreased spend on infrastructure, application acquisition, and development.
    • Reduced complexity in vendor management.
    • Less resources and effort spent on internal integration and functional customization.

    Customer Service benefits

    • Reduced user confusion and application usage efficiency.
    • Increased operational visibility and ease process mapping.
    • Improved data management and integrity.

    Theoretical scenarios and recommendations

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of a customer service functional purpose.

    Problem:

    • Large Redundancy – multiple applications address the same function, but one application performs better than others.

    Recommendation:

    • Consolidate the functions into Application 1 and consider decommissioning Applications 2 to 4.
    The image contains a screenshot of an example of a customer service functional purpose.

    Problem:

    • Large Redundancy – multiple applications address the same function, but none of them do it well.

    Recommendation:

    • None of the applications perform well in functional support. Consider replacing with suite or leveraging the Application 3 vendor for functional module expansion, if feasible.

    3.1 Considerations: Deployment

    SaaS is typically recommended as it reduces IT support needs. However, customization limitations and higher long-term TCO values continue to be a challenge for SaaS.

    On-premises deployment

    Hybrid deployment

    Public cloud deployment

    Benefits

    • Solution and deployment are highly customizable.
    • There are fewer compliance and security risks because customer data is kept on premises.

    Challenges

    • There is slower physical deployment.
    • Physical hardware and software are required.
    • There are higher upfront costs.

    Benefits

    • Pick-and-mix which aspects to keep on premises and which to outsource.
    • Benefits of scaling and flexibility for outsourced solution.

    Challenges

    • Expensive to maintain.
    • Requires in-house skillset for on-premises option.
    • Some control is lost over outsourced customization.

    Benefits

    • Physical hardware is not required.
    • There is rapid deployment, vendor managed product updates, and server maintenance.
    • There are lower upfront costs.

    Challenges

    • There is higher TCO over time.
    • There are perceived security risks.
    • There are service availability and reliability risks.
    • There is limited customization.

    3.1 Considerations: Public cloud deployment

    Functionality is only one aspect of a broader range of issues to narrow down the viability of a cloud-based architecture.

    Security/Privacy Concerns:

    Whether the data is stored on premise or in the cloud, it is never 100% safe. The risk increases with a multi-tenant cloud solution where a single vendor manages the data of multiple clients. If your data is particularly sensitive, heavily scrutinize the security infrastructure of potential vendors or store the data internally if internal security is deemed stronger than that of a vendor.

    Location:

    If there are individuals that need to access the system database and work in different locations, centralizing the system and its database in the cloud may be an effective approach.

    Compatibility:

    Assess the compatibility of the cloud solutions with your internal IT systems. Cloud solutions should be well-integrated with internal systems for data flow to ensure efficiency in service operations.

    Cost/Budget Constraints:

    SaaS allows conversion of up-front CapEx to periodic OpEx. It assists in bolstering a business case as costs in the short-run are much more manageable. On-premise solutions have a much higher upfront TCO than cloud solutions. However, the TCO for the long-term usage of cloud solutions under the licensing model will exceed that of an on-premise solution, especially with a growing business and user base.

    Functionality/Customization:

    Ensure that the function or feature that you need is available on the cloud solution market and that the feature is robust enough to meet service quality standards. If the available cloud solution does not support the processes that fit your future-state vision and gaps, it has little business value. If high levels of customization are required to meet functionality, the amount of effort and cost in dealing with the cloud vendor may outweigh the benefits.

    Maintenance/Downtime:

    For most organizations, lapses in cloud-service availability can become disastrous for customer satisfaction and service quality. Organizations should be prepared for potential outages since customers require constant access to customer support.

    3.2 Explore the customer service technology marketplace

    Your requirements, gap analysis, and assessment of current applications architecture may have prompted the need for a new solutions purchase.

    • Customer service technology has come a long way since PABX in 1960s call centers. Let Info-Tech give you a quick overview of the market and the major systems that revolve around Customer Service.
    • The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of the market and major systems that revolve  around customer service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While Customer Relationships Management systems interlock several aspects of the customer journey, best-of-breed software for specific aspects of this journey could provide a better ROI if the organization’s coverage of these aspects are only “good enough” and need boosting.

    3.2 The CRM software market will continue to grow at an aggressive rate

    • In recent years, CRM suite solutions have matured significantly in their customer support capabilities. Much of this can be attributed to their acquisitions of smaller best-of-breed Customer Service vendors.
    • Many of the larger CRM solutions (like those offered by Salesforce) have now added social media engagement, knowledge bases, and multi-channel capabilities into their foundational offering.
    • CRM systems are capable of huge sophistication and integration with the core ERP, but they also have heavy license and implementation costs, and therefore may not be for everyone.
    • In some cases, customers are looking to augment upon very specific capabilities that are lacking from their customer service foundation. In these cases, best-of-breed solutions ought to be integrated with a CRM, ERP, or with one another through API integration.
    The image contains a screenshot of a graph that demonstrates the CRM global market growth, 2019-2027.

    3.2 Utilize SoftwareReviews to focus on which CS area needs enhancing

    Contact Center as a Service (CCaaS)

    Cloud-based customer experience solution that allows organizations to utilize a provider’s software to administer incoming support or inquiries from consumers in a hosted, subscription model.

    Customer Service Management (CSM)

    Supports an organization's interaction with current and potential customers. It uses data-driven tools designed to help organizations drive sales and deliver exceptional customer experiences.

    Customer Intelligence Platform

    Gather and analyze data from both structured and unstructured sources regarding your customers, including their demographic/firmographic details and activities, to build deeper and more effective customer relationships and improve business outcomes.

    Enterprise Social Media Management

    Software for monitoring social media activity with the goal of gaining insight into user opinion and optimizing social media campaigns.

    Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

    Consists of applications designed to automate and manage the customer life cycle. CRM software optimizes customer data management, lead tracking, communication logging, and marketing campaigns.

    Virtual Assistants and Chatbots

    interactive applications that use Artificial Intelligence (AI) to engage in conversation via speech or text. These applications simulate human interaction by employing natural language input and feedback.

    3.2 SoftwareReviews’ data accelerates and improves the software selection process

    SoftwareReviews collects and analyzes detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    With SoftwareReviews:

    • Access premium reports to understand the marketspace of 193 software categories.
    • Compare vendors with SoftwareReviews’ Data Quadrant Reports.
    • Discover which vendors have better customer relations management with SoftwareReviews’ Emotional Footprint Reports.
    • Explore the Product Scorecards of single vendors for a detailed analysis of their software offerings.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Software Reviews offerings.

    3.2 Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.

    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.

    Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.

    User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    CLICK HERE to access SoftwareReviews

    Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions.

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech.

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. The insights of our expert analysts provide unparalleled support to our members at every step of their buying journey.

    3.2 Leverage Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework

    Improve your key software selection metrics for best-of-breed customer service software.

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework.

    A simple measurement of the number of days from intake to decision.

    Use our Project Satisfaction Tool to measure stakeholder project satisfaction.

    Use our Application Portfolio Assessment Tool annually to measure application satisfaction.

    Use our Contract Review Service to benchmark and optimize your technology spending.

    Learn more about Info-Tech’s The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF) is best geared toward commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small, some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you’re looking to select. The RASF approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology described in Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    RASF Methodology

    Commodity & Personal Applications

    • Simple, straightforward applications (think OneNote vs. Evernote)
    • Total application spend of up to $10,000; limited risk and complexity
    • Selection done as a single, rigorous, one-day session

    Complex Mid-Tier Applications

    • More differentiated, department-wide applications (Marketo vs. Pardot)
    • Total application spend of up to $100,000; medium risk and complexity
    • RASF approach done over the course of an intensive 40-hour engagement

    Consulting Engagement

    Enterprise Applications

    Sophisticated, enterprise-wide applications (Salesforce vs. Dynamics)

    Total application spend of over $100,000; high risk and complexity

    Info-Tech can assist with tailored, custom engagements

    3.3 Translate gathered requirements and gaps into project-based initiatives

    Identify initiatives that can address multiple requirements simultaneously.

    The Process

    • You now have a list of requirements from assessing business processes and the current Customer Service IT systems architecture.
    • With a viable architecture and application posture, you can now begin scoring and plotting key initiatives along a roadmap.
    • Group similar requirements into categories of need and formulate logical initiatives to fulfill the requirements.
    • Ensure that all requirements are related to business needs, measurable, sufficiently detailed, and prioritized, and identify initiatives that meet the requirements.

    Consider this case:

    Paul’s organization, a midsize consumer packaged goods retailer, needs to monitor social media for sentiment, use social analytics to gain intelligence, and receive and respond to inquiries made over Twitter.

    The initiative:

    Implement a social media management platform (SMMP): A SMMP is able to deliver on all of the above requirements. SMMPs are highly capable platforms that have social listening modules and allow costumer service representatives to post to and monitor social media.

    3.3 Prioritize your initiatives and plan the order of rollout

    Initiatives should not and cannot be tackled all at once. There are three key factors that dictate the prioritization of initiatives.

    1. Value
      • What is the monetary value/perceived business value?
      • Are there regulatory or security related impacts if the initiative is not undertaken?
      • What is the time to market and is it an easily achievable goal?
      • How well does it align with the strategic direction?
    2. Risk
      • How technically complex is it?
      • Does it impact existing business processes?
      • Are there ample resources and right skillsets to support it?
    3. Dependencies
      • What initiatives must be undertaken first?
      • Which subsequent initiatives will it support?

    Example scenario using Info-Tech’s Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool

    An electronics distributor wants to implement social media monitoring and response. Its existing CRM does not have robust channel management functions. The organization plans to replace its CRM in the future, but because of project size and impact and budgetary constraints, the replacement project has been scheduled to occur two years from now.

    • The SMMP solution proposed for implementation has a high perceived value and is low risk.
    • The CRM replacement has higher value, but also carries significantly more risk.
    • Option 1: Complete the CRM replacement first, and overlay the social media monitoring component afterward (as the SMMP must be integrated with the CRM).
    • Option 2: Seize the easily achievable nature of the SMMP initiative. Implement it now and plan to re-work the CRM integration later.
    The image contains a screenshot of an example scenario using Info-Tech's Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.

    3.3a Develop a Customer Service IT Systems initiative roadmap

    1 hour

    • Complete the tool as a team during a one-hour meeting to collaborate and agree on criteria and weighting.
      1. Input initiative information.
      2. Determine value and risk evaluation criteria.
      3. Evaluate each initiative to determine its priority.
      4. Create a roadmap of prioritized initiatives.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Input the initiative information including the start date, end date, owner, and dependencies
    • Adjust the evaluation criteria, i.e., the value and risk factors
    • A list of initiatives and a roadmap toward the organization’s future state of Customer Service IT Systems
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool
    • Applications Director
    • CIO
    • Customer Service Head

    Download the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool

    Document and communicate the strategy

    Leverage the artifacts of this blueprint to summarize your findings and communicate the outcomes of the strategy project to the necessary stakeholders.

    Document Section

    Proposed Content

    Leverage the Following Artifacts

    Executive Summary

    • Introduction
    • The opportunity
    • The scope
    • The stakeholders
    • Project success measures

    Project Charter section:

    • 1.1 Project Overview
    • 1.2 Project Objectives
    • 1.3 Project Benefits
    • 2.0 Scope

    Project RACI Chart Tool:

    • Tab 3. Simplified Output
    The image contains screenshots from the Project Charter, and the RACI Chart Tool.

    Background

    • The project approach
    • Current situation overview
    • Results of the environmental scan

    Blueprint slides:

    • Info-Tech’s methodology to develop your IT Strategy for CS Systems
    The image contains a screenshot from the blueprint slides.

    Future-State Vision

    • Customer service goals
    • Future-state modeling findings

    Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool:

    • Tab 2. Customer Service Goals
    • Tab 5. Level 5 Process Inventory

    Future State Business Process Models

    The image contains screenshots from the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Current Situation

    • Current-state modeling findings
    • Current-state architecture findings
    • Gap assessment
    • Requirements

    Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool:

    • Tab 2. Inventory of Applications
    • Tab 7. Systems Health Heat Map
    • Tab 8. Systems Health Dashboard
    • Tab 9. Future vs. Current State
    • Tab 4. Requirements Collection
    The image contains screenshots from the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    Summary of Recommendations

    • Optimization opportunities
    • New capabilities

    N/A

    IT Strategy Implementation Plan

    • Implementation plan
    • Business case

    Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool:

    • Tab 2. CS Initiative Definition
    • Tab 4. CS Technology Roadmap
    The image contains screenshots from the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    With ecommerce accelerating and customer expectations rising with it, organizations must have an IT strategy to support Customer Service.

    The deliverable you have produced from this blueprint provides a solution to this problem: a roadmap to a desired future state for how IT can ground an effective customer service engagement. From omnichannel to self-service, IT will be critical to enabling the tools required to digitally meet customer needs.

    Begin implementing your roadmap!

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department

    • One training session is not enough to make a change. Leaders must embed the habits, create a culture of engagement and positivity, provide continual coaching and development, regularly gather customer feedback, and seek ways to improve.

    Build a Chatbot Proof of Concept

    • When implemented effectively, chatbots can help save costs, generate new revenue, and ultimately increase customer satisfaction for both external- and internal-facing customers.

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    • Application selection is a critical activity for IT departments. Implement a repeatable, data-driven approach that accelerates application selection efforts.

    Bibliography (1/2)

    • Callzilla. "Software Maker Compares Call Center Companies, Switches to Callzilla After 6 Months of Results." Callzilla. N.d. Accessed: 4 Jul. 2022.
    • Cisco. “Transforming Customer Service.” Cisco. 2018. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Gottlieb, Giorgina. “The Importance of Data for Superior Customer Experience and Business Success.” Medium. 23 May 2019. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Grand View Research. “Customer Relationship Management Market Size, Share & Trends Analysis Report By Solution, By Deployment, By Enterprise Size, By End Use, By Region, And Segment Forecasts, 2020 – 2027.” Grand View Research. April 2020. Accessed: 17 Feb. 2021.
    • inContact. “Hall Automotive Accelerates Customer Relations with inContact.” inContact. N.d. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Kulbyte, Toma. “37 Customer Experience Statistics to Know in 2021.” Super Office. 4 Jan. 2021. Accessed: 5 Feb. 2021.
    • Kuligowski, Kiely. "11 Benefits of CRM Systems." Business News Daily. 29 Jun. 2022. Accessed: 4 Jul. 2022.
    • Mattsen Kumar. “Ominchannel Support Transforms Customer Experience for Leading Fintech Player in India.” Mattsen Kumar. 4 Apr. 2020. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Microsoft. “State of Global Customer Service Report.” Microsoft. Mar. 2019. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Ringshall, Ben. “Contact Center Trends 2020: A New Age for the Contact Center.” Fonolo. 20 Oct. 2020. Accessed 2 Nov. 2020.
    • Salesforce. “State of Service.” Salesforce. 4th ed. 2020. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Sopadjieva, Emma, Utpal M. Dholakia, and Beth Benjamin. “A Study of 46,000 Shoppers Shows That Omnichannel Retailing Works.” Harvard Business Review. 3 Jan. 2017. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.

    Bibliography (2/2)

    • Tech Pro Research. “Digital Transformation Research Report 2018: Strategy, Returns on Investment, and Challenges.” Tech Pro Research. 29 Jul. 2018. Accessed: 5 Feb. 2021.
    • TSB. “TSB Bank Self-Serve Banking Increases 9% with Adobe Sign.” TSB. N.d. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • VoiceSage. “VoiceSage Helps Home Retail Group Transform Customer Experience.” VoiceSage. 4 May 2018. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}172|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $54,542 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

    Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor:

    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You cannot outsource application strategy.
    • Modern software options have lessened the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. But your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require centralized oversight to ensure the best overall return on investment.
    • Application portfolio management is the mechanism to ensure that the applications in your enterprise are delivering value and support for your value streams and business capabilities. Understanding value, satisfaction, technical health, and total cost of ownership are critical to digital transformation, modernization, and roadmaps.

    Impact and Result

    Build an APM program that is actionable and fit for size:

    • Understand your current state, needs, and goals for your application portfolio management.
    • Create an application and platform inventory that is built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps with business priorities and communicate risk in operational terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support your applications.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Deck – A guide that helps you establish your core application inventory, simplified rationalization, redundancy comparison, and modernization roadmap.

    Enterprises have more applications than they need and rarely apply oversight to monitor the health, cost, and relative value of applications to ensure efficiency and minimal risk. This blueprint will help you build a streamlined application portfolio management process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations – Phases 1-4

    2. Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool – A tool that assesses your current application portfolio.

    Visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices will help inform and guide your next steps.

    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    3. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook – A template that builds your application portfolio management playbook.

    Capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    4. Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool – A tool that stores application information and allows you to execute rationalization and build a portfolio roadmap.

    This tool is the central hub for the activities within Application Portfolio Management Foundations.

    • Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Work with key corporate stakeholders to come to a shared understanding of the benefits and aspects of application portfolio management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the goals of APM.

    Set the scope of APM responsibilities.

    Establish business priorities for the application portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Define goals and metrics.

    1.2 Define application categories.

    1.3 Determine steps and roles.

    1.4 Weight value drivers.

    Outputs

    Set short- and long-term goals and metrics.

    Set the scope for applications.

    Set the scope for the APM process.

    Defined business value drivers.

    2 Improve Your Inventory

    The Purpose

    Gather information on your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Populated inventory based on your and your team’s current knowledge.

    Understanding of outstanding data and a plan to collect it.

    Activities

    2.1 Populate inventory.

    2.2 Assign business capabilities.

    2.3 Review outstanding data.

    Outputs

    Initial application inventory

    List of areas of redundancy

    Plan to collect outstanding data

    3 Gather Application Information

    The Purpose

    Work with the application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dispositions for individual applications

    Application rationalization framework

    Activities

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.3 Assess TCO.

    3.4 Assess technical health.

    3.5 Assess redundancies.

    3.6 Determine dispositions.

    Outputs

    Business value score for individual applications

    End-user satisfaction scores for individual applications

    TCO score for individual applications

    Technical health scores for individual applications

    Feature-level assessment of redundant applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual applications

    4 Gather, Assess, and Select Dispositions

    The Purpose

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized initiatives

    Initial application portfolio roadmap

    Ongoing structure of APM

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives

    4.2 Populate roadmap.

    4.3 Determine ongoing APM cadence.

    4.4 Build APM action plan.

    Outputs

    Prioritized new potential initiatives.

    Built an initial portfolio roadmap.

    Established an ongoing cadence of APM activities.

    Built an action plan to complete APM activities.

    Further reading

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Analyst Perspective

    You can’t outsource accountability.

    Many lack visibility into their overall application portfolio, focusing instead on individual projects or application development. Inevitably, application sprawl creates process and data disparities, redundant applications, and duplication of resources and stands as a significant barrier to business agility and responsiveness. The shift from strategic investment to application maintenance creates an unnecessary constraint on innovation and value delivery.

    With the rise and convenience of SAAS solutions, IT has an increasing need to discover and support all applications in the organization. Unmanaged and unsanctioned applications can lead to increased reputational risk. What you don’t know WILL hurt you.

    You can outsource development, you can even outsource maintenance, but you cannot outsource accountability for the portfolio. Organizations need a holistic dashboard of application performance and dispositions to help guide and inform planning and investment discussions. Application portfolio management (APM) can’t tell you why something is broken or how to fix it, but it is an important tool to determine if an application’s value and performance are up to your standards and can help meet your future goals.

    The image contains a picture of Hans Eckman.

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group


    Is this research right for you?

    Research Navigation

    Managing your application portfolio is essential regardless of its size or whether your software is purchased or developed in house. Each organization must have some degree of application portfolio management to ensure that applications deliver value efficiently and that their risk or gradual decline in technical health is appropriately limited.

    Your APM goals

    If this describes your primary goal(s)

    • We are building a business case to determine where and if APM is needed now.
    • We want to understand how well supported are our business capabilities, departments, or core functions by our current applications.
    • We want to start our APM program with our core or critical applications.
    • We want to build our APM inventory for less than 150 applications (division, department, operating unit, government, small enterprise, etc.).
    • We want to start simple with a quick win for our 150 most important applications.
    • We want to start with an APM pilot before committing to an enterprise APM program.
    • We need to rationalize potentially redundant and underperforming applications to determine which to keep, replace, or retire.
    • We want to start enterprise APM, with up to 150 critical applications.
    • We want to collect and analyze detailed information about our applications.
    • We need tools to help us calculate total cost of ownership (TCO) and value.
    • We want to customize our APM journey and rationalization.
    • We want to build a formal communication strategy for our APM program.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor.
    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.
    • APM implies taking a holistic approach and compiling multiple priorities and perspectives.
    • Organizations have limited time to act strategically or proactively and need to be succinct.
    • Uncertainties on business value prevent IT from successfully advising software decision making.
    • IT knows its technical debt but struggles to get the business to act on technical risks.
    • Attempts at exposing these problems rarely gain buy-in and discourage the push for improvement.
    • Think low priority over no priority.
    • Integrate these tasks into your mixed workload.
    • Create an inventory built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps in accordance with business priorities and communicate risks on their terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support an application.
    • Build your APM process fit for size.

    Info-Tech Insight: You can’t outsource strategy.

    Modern software options have decreased the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. Your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require a centralized IT oversight to ensure the best return on investment.

    The top IT challenges for SE come from app management

    #1 challenge small enterprise owners face in their use of technology:

    Taking appropriate security precautions

    24%

    The costs of needed upgrades to technology

    17%

    The time it takes to fix problems

    17%

    The cost of maintaining technology

    14%

    Lack of expertise

    9%

    Breaks in service

    7%
    Source: National Small Business Association, 2019

    Having more applications than an organization needs means unnecessarily high costs and additional burden on the teams who support the applications. Especially in the case of small enterprises, this is added pressure the IT team cannot afford.

    A poorly maintained portfolio will eventually hurt the business more than it hurts IT.

    Legacy systems, complex environments, or anything that leads to a portfolio that can’t adapt to changing business needs will eventually become a barrier to business growth and accomplishing objectives. Often the blame is put on the IT department.

    56%

    of small businesses cited inflexible technology as a barrier to growth

    Source: Salesforce as quoted by Tech Republic, 2019

    A hidden and inefficient application portfolio is the root cause of so many pains experienced by both IT and the business.

    • Demand/Capacity Imbalance
    • Overspending
    • Security and Business Continuity Risk
    • Delays in Delivery
    • Barriers to Growth

    APM comes at a justified cost

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate APM and the costs.

    The benefits of APM

    APM identifies areas where you can reduce core spending and reinvest in innovation initiatives.

    Other benefits can include:

    • Fewer redundancies
    • Less risk
    • Less complexity
    • Improved processes
    • Flexibility
    • Scalability

    APM allows you to better understand and set the direction of your portfolio

    Application Inventory

    The artifact that documents and informs the business of your application portfolio.

    Application Rationalization

    The process of collecting information and assessing your applications to determine recommended dispositions.

    Application Alignment

    The process of revealing application information through interviewing stakeholders and aligning to business capabilities.

    Application Roadmap

    The artifact that showcases the strategic directions for your applications over a given timeline.

    Application Portfolio Management (APM):

    The ongoing practice of:

    • Providing visibility into applications across the organization.
    • Recommending corrections or enhancements to decision makers.
    • Aligning delivery teams on priority.
    • Showcasing the direction of applications to stakeholders.

    Create a balanced approach to value delivery

    Enterprise Agility and Value Realization

    Product Lifecycle Management

    Align your product and service improvement and execution to enterprise strategy and value realization in three key areas: defining your products and services, aligning product/service owners, and developing your product vision.

    Product Delivery Lifecycle (Agile DevOps)

    Enhance business agility by leveraging an Agile mindset and continuously improving your delivery throughput, quality, value realization, and adaptive governance.

    Application Portfolio Management

    Transform your application portfolio into a cohesive service catalog aligned to your business capabilities by discovering, rationalizing, and modernizing your applications while improving application maintenance, management, and reuse.

    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on the Application Department Strategy.


    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on Accelerate Your Transition to Product Delivery.

    Every organization experiences some degree of application sprawl

    The image contains a screenshot of images to demonstrate application sprawl.

    Causes of Sprawl

    • Poor Lifecycle Management
    • Turnover & Lack of Knowledge Transfer
    • Siloed Business Units & Decentralized IT
    • Business-Managed IT
    • (Shadow IT)
    • Mergers & Acquisitions

    Problems With Sprawl

    • Redundancy and Inefficient Spending
    • Disparate Apps & Data
    • Obsolescence
    • Difficulties in Prioritizing Support
    • Barriers to Change & Growth

    Application Sprawl:

    Inefficiencies within your application portfolio are created by the gradual and non-strategic accumulation of applications.

    You have more apps than you need.

    Only 34% of software is rated as both IMPORTANT and EFFECTIVE by users.

    Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision

    Build your APM journey map

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine Scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio.

    1.2 Determine narrative.

    1.3 Define goals and metrics.

    1.4 Define application categories.

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC).

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    2.1 Populate your inventory.

    2.2 Align to business capabilities.

    *Repeat

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess technical health.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership.

    *Repeat

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results.

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results.

    4.3 Determine dispositions.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional).

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional).

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.7 Determine ongoing cadence.

    *Repeat

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Retail

    SOURCE: Deloitte, 2017

    Supermarket Company

    The grocer was a smaller organization for the supermarket industry with a relatively low IT budget. While its portfolio consisted of a dozen applications, the organization still found it difficult to react to an evolving industry due to inflexible and overly complex legacy systems.

    The IT manager found himself in a scenario where he knew the applications well but had little awareness of the business processes they supported. Application maintenance was purely in keeping things operational, with little consideration for a future business strategy.

    As the business demanded more responsiveness to changes, the IT team needed to be able to react more efficiently and effectively while still securing the continuity of the business.

    The IT manager found success by introducing APM and gaining a better understanding of the business use and future needs for the applications. The organization started small but then increased the scope over time to produce and develop techniques to aid the business in meeting strategic goals with applications.

    Results

    The IT manager gained credibility and trust within the organization. The organization was able to build a plan to move away from the legacy systems and create a portfolio more responsive to the dynamic needs of an evolving marketplace.

    The application portfolio management initiative included the following components:

    Train teams and stakeholders on APM

    Model the core business processes

    Collect application inventory

    Assign APM responsibilities

    Start small, then grow

    Info-Tech’s application portfolio management methodology

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase Activities

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    Phase Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    • Extract key business priorities.
    • Set your goals.
    • Define scope of APM effort.

    Gather information on your own understanding of your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Work with application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    This template allows you to capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    This tool stores all relevant application information and allows you to assess your capability support, execute rationalization, and build a portfolio roadmap.

    The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook. The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Blueprint Storyboard

    This is the PowerPoint document you are viewing now. Follow this guide to understand APM, learn how to use the tools, and build a repeatable APM process that will be captured in your playbook.

    The image contains a screenshot of the blueprint storyboard.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI for on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Establish goals and foundations for your APM practice.

    Call #2:

    Initiate inventory and determine data requirements.

    Call #3:

    Initiate rationalization with group of applications.

    Call #4:

    Review result of first iteration and perform retrospective.

    Call #5:

    Initiate your roadmap and determine your ongoing APM practice.

    Note: The Guided Implementation will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our right-sized best practices in your organization. A typical GI, using our materials, is 3 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Post Workshop Steps

    Activities

    1.1 Assess your current
    application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    • Complete in-progress deliverables from the previous four days.
    • Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss the next steps.

    Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    1. Extract key business priorities
    2. Set your goals
    3. Agree on key terms and set the scope for your APM effort

    Work with your applications team to:

    1. Build a detailed inventory
    2. Identify areas of redundancy

    Work with the SMEs for a subset of applications to:

    1. Define your rationalization criteria, descriptions, and scoring
    2. Evaluate each application using rationalization criteria

    Work with application delivery specialists to:

    1. Determine the appropriate disposition for your apps
    2. Build an initial application portfolio roadmap
    3. Establish an ongoing cadence of APM activities

    Info-Tech analysts complete:

    1. Workshop report
    2. APM Snapshot and Foundations Toolset
    3. Action plan

    Note: The workshop will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    Workshop Options

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Outcomes

    1-Day Snapshot

    3-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Key Apps)

    4-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Pilot Area)

    APM Snapshot

    • Align applications to business capabilities
    • Evaluate application support for business capabilities

    APM Foundations

    • Define your APM program and cadence
    • Rationalize applications using weighted criteria
    • Define application dispositions
    • Build an application roadmap aligned to initiatives

    Establish APM practice with a small sample set of apps and capabilities.

    Establish APM practice with a pilot group of apps and capabilities.

    Blueprint Pre-Step: Get the right stakeholders to the right exercises

    The image contains four steps and demonstrates who should be handling each exercise. 1. Lay Your Foundations, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Key Corporate Stakeholders. 2. Improve Your Inventory, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Applications Subject Matter Experts. 3. Rationalize Your Apps, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Applications Subject Matter Experts, and the Delivery Leads. 4. Populate Your Roadmap, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Key Corporate Stakeholders, and the Delivery Leads.

    APM Lead/Owner (Recommended)

    ☐ Applications Lead or the individual responsible for application portfolio management, along with any applications team members, if available

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Depending on size and structure, participants could include:

    ☐ Head of IT (CIO, CTO, IT Director, or IT Manager)

    ☐ Head of shared services (CFO, COO, VP HR, etc.)

    ☐ Compliance Officer, Steering Committee

    ☐ Company owner or CEO

    Application Subject Matter Experts

    Individuals who have familiarity with a specific subset of applications

    ☐ Business owners (product owners, Head of Business Function, power users)

    ☐ Support owners (Operations Manager, IT Technician)

    Delivery Leads

    ☐ Development Managers

    ☐ Solution Architects

    ☐ Project Managers

    Understand your APM tools and outcomes

    1.Diagnostic The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.

    5. Foundations: Chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Chart APM tool.

    2. Data Journey

    The image contains a screenshot of the data journey APM tool.

    6. App Comparison

    The image contains a screenshot of the App Comparison APM tool.

    3. Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the snapshot APM tool.

    7. Roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap APM tool.

    4. Foundations: Results

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Results APM Tool.

    Examples and explanations of these tools are located on the following slides and within the phases where they occur.

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM snapshots results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    ARE YOU READY TO GET STARTED?

    Phase 1

    Lay Your Foundations

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Applications Lead

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Additional Resources

    APM supports many goals

    Building an APM process requires a proper understanding of the underlying business goals and objectives of your organization’s strategy. Effectively identifying these drivers is paramount to gaining buy-in and the approval for any changes you plan to make to your application portfolio.

    After identifying these goals, you will need to ensure they are built into the foundations of your APM process.

    “What is most critical?” but also “What must come first?”

    Discover

    Improve

    Transform

    Collect Inventory

    Uncover Shadow IT

    Uncover Redundancies

    Anticipate Upgrades

    Predict Retirement

    Reduce Cost

    Increase Efficiency

    Reduce Applications

    Eliminate Redundancy

    Limit Risk

    Improve Architecture

    Modernize

    Enable Scalability

    Drive Business Growth

    Improve UX

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s diagnostic tool

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. This tool provides visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices.
    2. Based on your assessment, you should gain a better understanding of whether the appropriate next steps are in application discovery, rationalization, or roadmapping.
    3. Complete the “Data Entry” worksheet in the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool (Excel).
    4. Review the “Results” worksheet to help inform and guide your next steps.

    Download the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    Input Output
    • Current APM program
    • Application landscape
    • APM current-state assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool
    • Applications Lead

    1.1 Understanding the diagnostic results

    • Managed Apps are your known knowns and most of your portfolio.
    • Unmanaged and Unsanctioned Apps are known but have unknown risks and compliance. Bring these under IT support.
    • Unknown Apps are high risk and noncompliant. Prioritize these based on risk, cost, and use.
    The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.
    • APM is more than an inventory and assessment. A strong APM program provides ongoing visibility and insights to drive application improvement and value delivery.
    • Use your Sprawl Factors to identify process and organizational gaps that may need to be addressed.
    • Your APM inventory is only as good as the information in it. Use this chart to identify gaps and develop a path to define missing information.
    • APM is an iterative process. Use this state assessment to determine where to focus most of your current effort.

    Understand potential motivations for APM

    The value of APM is defined by how the information will be used to drive better decisions.

    Portfolio Governance

    Transformative Initiatives

    Event-Driven Rationalization

    Improves:

    • Spending efficiency
    • Risk
    • Retirement of aged and low-value applications
    • Business enablement

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Less urgent
    • As rigorous as appropriate
    • Apply in-depth analysis as needed

    Enables:

    • Data migration or harmonization
    • Legacy modernization
    • Infrastructure/cloud migration
    • Standardizing platforms
    • Shift to cloud and SAAS

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time sensitive
    • Scope on impacted areas
    • Need to determine specific dispositions
    • Outcomes need to include detailed and actionable steps

    Responds to:

    • Mergers and acquisitions
    • Regulatory and compliance change
    • New applications
    • Application retirement by vendors
    • Changes in business operations
    • Security risks and BC/DR

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time constrained
    • Lots of discovery work
    • Primary focus on duplication
    • Increased process and system understanding

    Different motivations will influence the appropriate approach to and urgency of APM or, specifically, rationalizing the portfolio. When rationalizing is directly related to enabling or in response to a broader initiative, you will need to create a more structured approach with a formal budget and resources.

    1.2 Determine narrative

    Estimated time: 30 minutes-2 hours

    1. Open the “Narrative” tab in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    2. Start by listing your prevailing IT pain points with the application portfolio. These will be the issues experienced predominantly by the IT team and not necessarily by the stakeholders. Be sure to distinguish pain points from their root causes.
    3. Determine an equivalent business pain point for each IT pain point. This should be how the problem manifests itself to business stakeholders and should include potential risks to the organization is exposed to.
    4. Determine the business goal for each business pain point. Ideally, these are established organizational goals that key decision-makers will recognize. These goals should address the business pain points you have documented.
    5. Determine the technical objective for each business goal. These speak to the general corrections or enhancements to the portfolio required to accomplish the business goals.
    6. Use the “Narrative - Matrix” worksheet to group items into themes if needed.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Familiarity with application landscape
    • Organizational context and strategic artifacts
    • Narrative for application portfolio transformation
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Application Portfolio Manager

    Connect your pains to what the business cares about to find the most effective narrative

    Root Cause

    IT Pain Points

    Business Pain Points

    Business Goals

    Narrative

    Technical Objectives

    Sprawl

    Shadow IT/decentralized oversight

    Neglect over time

    Poor delivery processes

    Back-End Complexity

    Disparate Data/Apps

    Poor Architectural Fit

    Redundancy

    Maintenance Demand/
    Resource Drain

    Low Maintainability

    Technical Debt

    Legacy, Aging, or Expiring Apps

    Security Vulnerabilities

    Unsatisfied Customers

    Hurdles to Growth/Change

    Poor Business Analytics

    Process Inefficiency

    Software Costs

    Business Continuity Risk

    Data Privacy Risk

    Data/IP Theft Risk

    Poor User Experience

    Low-Value Apps

    Scalability

    Flexibility/Agility

    Data-Driven Insights

    M&A Transition

    Business Unit Consolidation/ Centralization

    Process Improvement

    Process Modernization

    Cost Reduction

    Stability

    Customer Protection

    Security

    Employee Enablement

    Business Enablement

    Innovation

    Create Strategic Alignment

    Identify specific business capabilities that are incompatible with strategic initiatives.

    Reduce Application Intensity

    Highlight the capabilities that are encumbered due to functional overlaps and complexity.

    Reduce Software Costs

    Specific business capabilities come at an unnecessarily or disproportionately high cost.

    Mitigate Business Continuity Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk of interruption or stoppages due to unresolved back-end issues.

    Mitigate Security Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk due to unmitigated security vulnerabilities or breaches.

    Increase Satisfaction Applications

    Specific business capabilities are not achieving their optimal business value.

    Platform Standardization

    Platform Standardization Consolidation

    Data Harmonization

    Removal/Consolidation of Redundant Applications

    Legacy Modernization

    Application Upgrades

    Removal of Low-Value Applications

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Determine the motivations behind APM. You may want to collect and review any of the organization’s strategic documents that provide additional context on previously established goals.
    2. With the appropriate stakeholders, discuss the goals of APM. Try to label your goals as either:
      1. Short term: Refers to immediate goals used to represent the progress of APM activities. Likely these goals are more IT-oriented
      2. Long term: Refers to broader and more distant goals more related to the impact of APM. These goals tend to be more business-oriented.
    3. To help clearly define your goals, discuss appropriate metrics for each goal. Often these metrics can be expressed as:
      1. Leading indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your short-term goals and the progress of APM activities.
      2. Lagging indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your long-term goals.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Overarching organizational strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Defined goals and metrics for APM
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.3 Define goals and metrics: Example

    Goals

    Metric

    Target

    Short Term

    Improve ability to inform the business

    Leading Indicators

    • Application inventory with all data fields completed
    • Applications with recommended dispositions
    • 80% of portfolio

    Improve ownership of applications

    • Applications with an assigned business and technical owner
    • 80% of portfolio

    Reduce costs of portfolio

    • TCO of full application portfolio
    • The number of recovered/avoided software licenses from retired apps
    • Reduce by 5%
    • $50,000

    Long Term

    Migrate platform

    Lagging Indicators

    • Migrate all applications
    • Total value change in on-premises apps switched to SaaS
    • 100% of applications
    • Increase 50%

    Improve overall satisfaction with portfolio

    • End-user satisfaction rating
    • Increase 25%

    Become more customer-centric

    • Increased sales
    • Increased customer experience
    • Increase 35%

    “Application” doesn’t have the same meaning to everyone

    The image contains a picture of Martin Fowler.

    Code: A body of code that's seen by developers as a single unit.

    Functionality: A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.

    Funding: An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    ?: What else?

    “Essentially applications are social constructions.

    Source: Martin Fowler

    APM focuses on business applications.

    “Software used by business users to perform a business function.”

    – ServiceNow, 2020

    Unfortunately, that definition is still quite vague.

    You must set boundaries and scope for “application”

    1. Many individual items can be considered applications on their own or components within or associated with an application.

    2. Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    • Interface
    • Software Component
    • Supporting Software
    • Platform
    • Presentation Layer
    • Middleware
    • Micro Service
    • Database
    • UI
    • API
    • Data Access/ Transfer/Load
    • Operating System

    Apps can be categorized by generic categories

    • Enterprise Applications
    • Unique Function-Specific Applications
    • Productivity Tools
    • Customer-Facing Applications
    • Mobile Applications

    Apps can be categorized by bought vs. built or install types

    • Custom
    • On-Prem
    • Off the Shelf
    • SaaS
    • Hybrid
    • End-User-Built Tools

    Apps can be categorized by the application family

    • Parent Application
    • Child Application
    • Package
    • Module
    • Suite
    • Component (Functional)

    Apps can be categorized by the group managing them

    • IT-Managed Applications
    • Business-Managed Applications (Shadow IT)
    • Partner/External Applications

    Apps can be categorized by tiers

    • Mission Critical
    • Tier 2
    • Tier 3

    Set boundaries on what is an application or the individual unit that you’re making business decisions on. Also, determine which categories of applications are in scope and how they will be included in the activities and artifacts of APM. Use your product families defined in Deliver Digital Products at Scale to help define your application categories, groups, and boundaries.

    1.4 Define application categories

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Review the items listed on the previous slide and consider what categories provide the best initial grouping to help organize your rationalization and dispositions. Update the category list to match your application groupings.
    2. Identify the additional categories you need to manage in your application portfolio.
    3. For each category, establish or modify a description or definition and provide examples that exist in your current portfolio.
    4. For each category, answer:
      1. Will these be documented in the application inventory?
      2. Will these be included in application rationalization? Think about if this item will be assigned a TCO, value score, and, ultimately, a disposition.
      3. Will these be listed in the application portfolio roadmap?
    5. If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families to help define your application categories.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Working list of applications
    • Definitions and guidelines for which application categories are in scope for APM
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    1.4 Define application categories: Example

    Category

    Definition/Description

    Examples

    Documented in your application inventory?

    Included in application rationalization?

    Listed in your application portfolio roadmap?

    Business Application

    End-user facing applications that directly enable specific business functions. This includes enterprise-wide and business-function-specific applications. Separate modules will be considered a business application when appropriate.

    ERP system, CRM software, accounting software

    Yes

    Yes. Unless currently in dev. TCO of the parent application will be divided among child apps.

    Yes

    Software Components

    Back-end solutions are self-contained units that support business functions.

    ETL, middleware, operating systems

    No. Documentation in CMDB. These will be listed as a dependency in the application inventory.

    No. These will be linked to a business app and included in TCO estimates and tech health assessments.

    No

    Productivity Tools

    End-user-facing applications that enable standard communication of general document creation.

    MS Word, MS Excel, corporate email

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    End-User- Built Microsoft Tools

    Single instances of a Microsoft tool that the business has grown dependent on.

    Payroll Excel tool, Access databases

    No. Documentation in Business Tool Glossary.

    No No

    Partner Applications

    Partners or third-party applications that the business has grown dependent on but are internally owned or managed.

    Supplier’s ERP portal, government portal

    No No

    Yes

    Shadow IT

    Business-managed applications.

    Downloaded tools

    Yes

    Yes. However, just from a redundancy perspective.

    Yes

    The roles in APM rarely exist; you need to adapt

    Application Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for the health and evolution of the application portfolio.
    • Facilitates the rationalization process.
    • Compiles and assesses application information and recommends and supports key decisions regarding the direction of the applications.
    • This is rarely a dedicated role even in large enterprises. For small enterprises, this should be an IT employee at a manager level – an IT manager or operations manager.

    Business Owner

    • Responsible for managing individual applications on a functional level and approves and prioritizes projects.
    • Provides business process or functional subject matter expertise for the assessment of applications.
    • For small enterprises, this role is rarely defined, but the responsibility should exist. Consider the head of a business unit or a process owner as the owner of the application.

    Support Owner

    • Responsible for the maintenance and management of individual applications.
    • Provides technical information and subject matter expertise for the assessment of an application.
    • For small enterprises, this would be those responsible for maintaining the application and those responsible for its initial implementation. Often support responsibilities are external, and this role will be more of a vendor manager.

    Project Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for intake, planning, and coordinating the resources that deliver any changes.
    • The body that consumes the results of rationalization and begins planning any required action or project.
    • For small enterprises, the approval process can come from a steering committee but it is often less formal. Often a smaller group of project managers facilitates planning and coordination and works closely with the delivery leads.

    Corner-of-the-Desk Approach

    • No one is explicitly dedicated to building a strategy or APM practices.
    • Information is collected whenever the applications team has time available.
    • Benefits are pushed out and the value is lost.

    Dedicated Approach

    • The initiative is given a budget and formal agenda.
    • Roles and responsibilities are assigned to team members.

    The high-level steps of APM present some questions you need to answer

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    • Who will build the inventory?
    • Do you know all your applications (Shadow IT)?
    • Do you know your applications’ functionality?
    • Do you know where your applications overlap?
    • Who do you need to consult with to fill in the gaps?
    • Who will provide specific application information?

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    • Who will collect and compile the data points for rationalization?
    • What are the specific data points?
    • Are some of the data points currently documented?
    • Who will provide specific data points on technical health, cost, performance, and business value?
    • Who will determine what business value is?

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    • Who will apply a rationalization tool or decision-making framework to generate dispositions for the applications?
    • Who will modify the tool or framework to ensure results align to the goals of the organization?
    • Who will define any actions or projects that result from the rationalization? And who needs to be consulted to assess the feasibility of any potential project?

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    • Who will present the recommended disposition, corrective action, or new project to the appropriate decision maker?
    • Who is the appropriate decision maker for application changes or project approval?
    • What format is recommended (idea, proposal, business case) and what extra analysis is required?
    • Who needs to be consulted regarding the potential changes?

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Begin by comparing Info-Tech’s list of common APM roles to the roles that exist in your organization with respect to application management and ownership.
    2. There are four high-level steps for APM: build inventory, collect & compile, assess & recommend, and validate & roadmap. Apply the SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer) model by completing the following for each step:
      1. In the Process column, modify the description, if necessary. Identify who is responsible for performing the step.
      2. In the Inputs column, modify the list of inputs.
      3. In the Suppliers column, identify who must be included to provide the inputs.
      4. In the Outputs column, modify the list of outputs.
      5. In the Customers column, identify who consumes the outputs.
    3. (Optional) Outline how the results of APM will be consumed. For example, project intake or execution, data or platform migration, application or product management, or whichever is appropriate.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Existing function and roles regarding application delivery, management, and ownership
    • Scope of APM
    • Responsibilities assigned to your roles
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • “Supporting Activities – SIPOC” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.5 Determine steps and roles

    Suppliers

    Inputs

    Process

    Outputs

    Customers

    • Applications Manager
    • Operations Manager
    • Business Owners
    • IT Team
    • List of applications
    • Application attributes
    • Business capabilities

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    Resp: Applications Manager & IT team member

    • Application inventory
    • Identified redundancies
    • Whole organization
    • Applications SMEs
    • Business Owners
    • Support Owners & Team
    • End Users
    • Application inventory
    • Existing documentation
    • Additional collection methods
    • Knowledge of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    Resp: IT team member

    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application
    • Applications Manager
    • Applications Manager
    • Defined application rationalization framework and toolset
    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Awareness of goals and priorities
    • Awareness of existing projects and resources capacity

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Application portfolio roadmap
    • Confirmed disposition for each application
    • Project request submission
    • Whole organization
    • Applications Manager
    • Solutions Engineer
    • Business Owner
    • Project request submission
    • Estimated cost
    • Estimated value or ROI

    Project Intake

    Build business case for project request.

    Resp: Project Manager

    • Approved project
    • Steering Committee

    Planning your APM modernization journey steps

    Discovery Rationalization Disposition Roadmap

    Enter your pilot inventory.

    • Optional Snapshot: Populate your desired snapshot grouping lists (departments, functions, groups, capabilities, etc.).

    Score your pilot apps to refine your rationalization criteria and scoring.

    • Score 3 to 9 apps to adjust and get comfortable with the scoring.
    • Validate scoring with the remaining apps in your pilot group. Refine and finalize the criteria and scoring descriptions.
    • Optional Snapshot: Use the Group Alignment Matrix to match your grouping list to select which apps support each grouping item.

    Determine recommended disposition for each application.

    • Review and adjust the disposition recommendations on the “Disposition Options” worksheet and set your pass/fail threshold.
    • Review your apps on the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update (override) the recommended disposition and priority if needed.

    Populate your application roadmap.

    • Indicate programs, projects, initiatives, or releases that are planned for each app.
    • Update the priority based on the initiative.
    • Use the visual roadmap to show high-level delivery phases.

    Phase 2

    Improve Your Inventory

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Applications Team

    Additional Resources

    Document Your Business Architecture

    Industry Reference Architectures

    Application Capability Template

    Pre-step: Collect your applications

    1. Consult with your IT team and leverage any existing documentation to gather an initial list of your applications.
    2. Build an initial working list of applications. This is just meant to be a starting point. Aim to include any new applications in procurement, implementation, or development.
    3. The rationalization and roadmapping phases are best completed when iteratively focusing on manageable groups of applications. Group your applications into subsets based on shared subject matter experts. Likely this will mean grouping applications by business units.
    4. Select a subset to be the first group of applications that will undergo the activities of rationalization and roadmapping to refine your APM processes, scoring, and disposition selection.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The more information you plan to capture, the larger the time and effort, especially as you move along toward advanced and strategic items. Capture the information most aligned to your objectives to make the most of your investment.

    If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families and products to help define your applications.

    Learn more about automated application discovery:
    High Application Satisfaction Starts With Discovering Your Application Inventory

    Discover your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per group

    1. Review Info-Tech’s list of application inventory attributes.
    2. Open the “Application Inventory Details” tab of the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool. Modify, add, or omit attributes.
    3. For each application, populate your prioritized data fields or any fields you know at the time of discovery. You will complete all the fields in future iterations.
    4. Complete this the best you can based on your team’s familiarity and any readily available documentation related to these applications.
    5. Use the drop-down list to select Enabling, Redundant/Overlapping, and Dependent apps. This will be used to help determine dispositions and comparisons.
    6. Highlight missing information or placeholder values that need to be verified.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Working list of applications
    • Determined attributes for inventory
    • Populated inventory
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Why is the business capability so important?

    For the purposes of an inventory, business capabilities help all stakeholders gain a sense of the functionality the application provides.

    However, the true value of business capability comes with rationalization.

    Upon linking all the organization’s applications to a standardized and consistent set of business capabilities, you can then group your applications based on similar, complementary, or overlapping functionality. In other words, find your redundancies and consolidation opportunities.

    Important Consideration

    Defining business capabilities and determining the full extent of redundancy is a challenging undertaking and often is a larger effort than APM all together.

    Business capabilities should be defined according to the unique functions and language of your organization, at varying levels of granularity, and ideally including target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy.

    This blueprint provides a simplified and generic list for the purpose of categorizing similar functionality. We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture to help in the business capability defining process, especially when visibility into your portfolio and knowledge of redundancies is poor.

    The image contains a screenshot of the business capability scenarios.

    For a more detailed capability mapping, use the Application Portfolio Snapshot and the worksheets in your current workbook.

    What is a business capability map?

    The image contains a screenshot of a business capability map.

    A business capability map (BCM) is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They are typically defined at varying levels of granularity and include target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy. These are the people, process, and tool units that deliver value to your teams and customers.

    Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage and Reference Architectures give you a head start on producing a BCM fit for your organization. The visual to the left is an example of a reference architecture for the retail industry.

    These are the foundational piece for our Application Portfolio Snapshot. By linking capabilities to your supporting applications, you can better visualize how the portfolio supports the organization at a single glance. More specifically, you can highlight how issues with the portfolio are impacting capability delivery.

    Reminder: Best practices imply that business capabilities are methodologically defined by business stakeholders and business architects to capture the unique functions and language of your organization.

    The approach laid out in this service is about applying minimal time and effort to make the case for proper investment into the best practices, which can include creating a tailored BCM. Start with a good enough example to produce a useful visual and generate a positive conversation toward resourcing and analyses.

    We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture and the Application Portfolio Snapshot to understand the thorough methods and tactics for BCM.

    Why perform a high-level application alignment before rationalization?

    Having to address redundancy complicates the application rationalization process. There is no doubt that assessing applications in isolation is much easier and allows you to arrive at dispositions for your applications in a timelier manner.

    Rationalization has two basic steps: first, collect and compile information, and second, analyze that information and determine a disposition for each application. When you don’t have redundancy, you can analyze an application and determine a disposition in isolation. When you do have redundancies, you need to collect information for multiple applications, likely across departments or lines of business, then perform a comparative analysis.

    Most likely your approach will fall somewhere between the examples below and require a hybrid approach.

    Benefits of a high-level application alignment:

    • Review the degree of redundancy across your portfolio.
    • Understand the priority areas for rationalization and the sequence of information collection.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    2.2 Align apps to capabilities and functions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per grouping

    The APM tool provides up to three different grouping comparisons to assess how well your applications are supporting your enterprise. Although business capabilities are important, identify your organizational perspectives to determine how well your portfolio supports these functions, departments, or value streams. Each grouping should be a consistent category, type, or arrangement of applications.

    1. Enter the business capabilities, from either your own BCM or the Info-Tech reference architectures, into the Business Capability column under Grouping 1.
    2. Open the “Group 1 Alignment Matrix” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    3. For each application’s row, enter an “X” in the column of a capability that the application supports.
    4. Optionally, repeat these steps under Grouping 2 and 3 for each value stream, department, function, or business unit where you’d like to assess application support. Note: To use Grouping 3, unhide the columns on the “Application and Group Lists” worksheet and unhide the worksheet “Grouping 3 Alignment Matrix.”

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Application inventory
    • List of business capabilities, Info-Tech Reference Architecture capabilities, departments, functions, divisions, or value streams for grouping comparison
    • Assigned business capabilities to applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    2.2 Aligning applications to groups example

    Alignment Matrix: Identify applications supporting each capability or function.

    Capability, Department, or Function 1

    Capability, Department, or Function 2

    Capability, Department, or Function 3

    Capability, Department, or Function 4

    Capability, Department, or Function 5

    Capability, Department, or Function 6

    Application A

    x

    Application B

    x

    Application C

    x

    Application D

    x

    Application E

    x x

    Application F

    x

    Application G

    x

    Application H

    x

    Application I

    x

    Application J

    x

    In this example:

    BC 1 is supported by App A

    BC 2 is supported by App B

    BC 3 is supported by Apps C & D

    BCs 4 & 5 are supported by App E

    BC 6 is supported by Apps F-G. BC 6 shows an example of potential redundancy and portfolio complexity.

    The APM tool supports three different Snapshot groupings. Repeat this exercise for each grouping.

    Align application to capabilities – tool view

    The image contains screenshots of the align application to capabilities - tool view

    Phase 3

    Rationalize Your Applications

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Application SMEs

    Additional Resources

    Phase pre-step: Sequence rationalization assessments appropriately

    Use the APM Snapshot results to determine APM iterations

    • Application rationalization requires an iterative approach.
    • Review your application types and alignment from Phase 2 to begin to identify areas of overlapping or redundant applications.
    • Sequence the activities of Phase 3 based on whether you have a:
      • Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Complete the application functional analysis.
        • Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to aid your comparison of application subsets.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.
      • Non-Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    Phase pre-step: Are the right stakeholders present?

    Make sure you have the right people at the table from the beginning.

    • Application rationalization requires specific stakeholders to provide specific data points.
    • Ensure your application subsets are grouped by shared subject matter experts. Ideally, these are grouped by business units.
    • For each subset, identify the appropriate SMEs for the five areas of rationalization criteria.
    • Communicate and schedule interviews with groups of stakeholders. Inform them of additional information sources to have readily available.
    • (Optional) This phase’s activities follow the clockwise sequence of the diagram to the right. Reorder the sequence of activities based on overlaps of availability in subject matter expertise.

    Application

    Rationalization

    Additional Information Sources

    Ideal Stakeholders

    • KPIs

    Business Value

    • Business Application/Product Owners
    • Business Unit/ Process Owners
    • Survey Results

    End User

    • Business Application/ Product Owners
    • Key/Power Users
    • End Users
    • General Ledger
    • Service Desk
    • Vendor Contracts

    TCO

    • Operations/Maintenance Manager
    • Vendor Managers
    • Finance & Acct.
    • Service Desk
    • ALM Tools

    Technical Health

    • Operations/ Maintenance Manager
    • Solution Architect
    • Security Manager
    • Dev. Manager
    • Capability Maps
    • Process Maps

    Application Alignment

    • Business Unit/ Process Owners

    Rationalize your applications

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    One of the principal goals of application rationalization is determining dispositions

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or course of action for an application.

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    High-level examples:

    The image contains a screenshot of an image that demonstrates a directionless portfolio of applications.

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Modernize: Create a new project to address an inadequacy.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Consolidate: Create a new project to reduce duplicate functionality.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    3.1-3.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Assessing application business value

    The Business Business Value of Applications IT
    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the applications. Technical subject matter experts of the applications they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality applications are delivered to stakeholder expectations.

    First, the authorities on business value need to define and weigh their value drivers that describe the priorities of the organization.

    This will then allow the applications team to apply a consistent, objective, and strategically aligned evaluation of applications across the organization.

    In this context…business value is the value of the business outcome that the application produces and how effective the application is at producing that outcome.

    Business value IS NOT the user’s experience or satisfaction with the application.

    Review the value drivers of your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of a the business value matrix.

    Financial vs. Human Benefits

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and are often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how an application can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward orientation refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward orientation refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Increased Revenue

    Reduced Costs

    Enhanced Services

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue and deliver value to your customers.

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which an application limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    3.1 Assess business value

    Estimated time: 1 -4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s four quadrants of business value: increase revenue/value, reduce costs, enhance services, and reach customers. Edit your value drivers, description, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each value driver, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities. When editing the scoring descriptions, keep only the one you are using.
    2. (Optional) Add an additional value driver if your organization has distinct value drivers (e.g. compliance, sustainability, innovation, and growth).
    3. For each application, score on a scale of 0 to 5 how impactful the application is for each value driver. Use the indicators set in Phase 1 to guide your scoring.
    4. For each value driver, adjust the criteria weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge of organizational priorities
    • (Optional) Existing mission, vision, and value statements
    • Scoring scheme for assessing business value
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    3.1 Weigh value drivers: Example

    The image contains a screenshot example of the weigh value drivers.

    For additional support in implementing a balanced value framework, refer to Build a Value Measurement Framework.

    Understand the back end and technical health of your applications

    Technical health identifies the extent of technology risk to the organization.

    MAINTAINABILITY (RAS)

    RAS refers to an app’s reliability, availability, and serviceability. How often, how long, and how difficult is it for your resources to keep an app functioning, and what are the resulting continuity risks? This can include root causes of maintenance challenges.

    SECURITY

    Applications should be aligned and compliant with ALL security policies. Are there vulnerabilities or is there a history of security incidents? Remember that threats are often internal and non-malicious.

    ADAPTABILITY

    How easily can the app be enhanced or scaled to meet changes in business needs? Does the app fit within the business strategy?

    INTEROPERABILITY

    The degree to which an app is integrated with current systems. Apps require comprehensive technical planning and oversight to ensure they connect within the greater application architecture. Does the app fit within your enterprise architecture strategy?

    BUSINESS CONTINUITY/DISASTER RECOVERY

    The degree to which the application is compatible with business continuity/disaster recovery (BC/DR) policies and plans that are routinely tested and verified.

    Unfortunately, the business only cares about what they can see or experience. Rationalization is your opportunity to get risk on the business’ radar and gain buy-in for the necessary action.

    3.2 Assess technical health

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested technical health criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of technical health perspective for applications within this subset
    • Maintenance history, architectural models
    • Technical health scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Technical SMEs
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    End users provide valuable perspective

    Your end users are your best means of determining front-end issues.

    Data Quality

    To what degree do the end users find the data quality sufficient to perform their role and achieve their desired outcome?

    Effectiveness

    To what degree do the end users find the application effective for performing their role and desired outcome?

    Usability

    To what degree do the end users find the application reliable and easy to use to achieve their desired outcome?

    Satisfaction

    To what degree are end users satisfied with the features of this application?

    What else matters to you?

    Tune your criteria to match your values and priorities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When facing large user groups, do not make assumptions or use lengthy methods of collecting information. Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to collect data by surveying your end users’ perspectives.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested end-user perspective criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of end user’s perspective for applications within this subset
    • User satisfaction scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Key Users
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Consider the spectrum of application cost

    An application’s cost extends past a vendor’s fee and even the application itself.

    LICENSING AND SUBSCRIPTIONS: Your recurring payments to a vendor.

    Many commercial off-the-shelf applications require a license on a per-user basis. Review contracts and determine costs by looking at per-user or fixed rates charged by the vendor.

    MAINTENANCE COSTS: Your internal spending to maintain an app.

    These are the additional costs to maintain an application such as support agreements, annual maintenance fees, or additional software or hosting expenses.

    INDIRECT COSTS: Miscellaneous expenses necessary for an app’s continued use.

    Expenses like end-user training, developer education, and admin are often neglected, but they are very real costs organizations pay regularly.

    RETURN ON INVESTMENT: Perceived value of the application related to its TCO.

    Some of our most valuable applications are the most expensive. ROI is an optional criterion to account for the value and importance of the application.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The TCO assessment is one area where what you are considering the ”application” matters quite a bit. An application’s peripherals or software components need to be considered in your estimates. For additional help calculating TCO, use the Application TCO Calculator from Build a Rationalization Framework.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested TCO criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity with the TCO for applications within this subset
    • Vendor contracts, maintenance history
    • TCO scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Vendor Managers, Operations Managers
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Phase 4

    Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    his phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Delivery Leads

    Additional Resources

    Review your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.1 Review your APM Snapshot results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. The APM Snapshot provides a dashboard to support your APM program’s focus and as an input to demand planning. Unhide the “Group 3” worksheet if you completed the alignment matrix.
    2. For each grouping area, review the results to determine underperforming areas. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis and demand planning. Use the key on the following slide to guide your analysis.
    3. Analysis guidance:
      1. Start with the quartile grouping to find areas scoring in Remediate or Critical Need and focus follow-up actions on these areas.
      2. Use the lens/category heat map to determine which lenses are underperforming. Use this to then look up the individual app scores supporting that group to identify application issues.
      3. Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to select and compare applications for the group to make your review and comparison easier.
      4. Work with teams in the group to provide root cause analysis for low scores.
      5. Build a plan to address any apps not supported by IT.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Application to Group mapping
    • Rationalization scores
    • Awareness of application support for each grouping

    Materials

    Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Snapshot with guides on how to interpret it.

    4.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Review your APM rationalization results

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.2 Review your APM Foundations results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    The APM Foundations Results dashboard (“App Rationalization Results” worksheet) provides a detailed summary of your relative app scoring to serve as input to demand planning.

    1. For each grouping, review the results to determine underperforming app support. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis using the individual criteria scores on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet.
    2. Use guidance on the following example slides to understand each area of the results.
    3. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    4. Use the column filters to compare a subset of applications or use the “App Comparison” worksheet to maintain an ongoing view by grouping, redundancy, or category.
    5. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Rationalization scores
    • Application awareness
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Modernize your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. The Recommended Disposition and Priority fields are prepopulated from your scoring thresholds and options on the “Disposition Options” worksheet. You can update any individual application disposition or priority using the drop-down menu and it will populate your selection on the “Roadmap” worksheet.
    2. Question if that disposition is appropriate. Be sure to consider:
      1. TCO – cost should come into play for any decisions.
      2. Alignment to strategic goals set for the overarching organizational, IT, technology (infrastructure), or application portfolio.
      3. Existing organizational priorities or funded initiatives impacting the app.
    3. Some dispositions may imply a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. You can use different dispositions and priorities on the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    4. Note: Modify the list of dispositions on the “Disposition Options” worksheet as appropriate for your rationalization initiative. Any modifications to the Disposition column will be automatically updated in the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    InputOutput
    • Rationalization results
    • Assigned dispositions for applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.3 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Redundancies require a different analysis and set of dispositions

    Solving application redundancy is a lot more complicated than simply keeping one application and eliminating the others.

    First, you need to understand the extent of the redundancy. The applications may support the same capability, but do they offer the same functions? Determine which apps offer which functions within a capability. This means you cannot accurately arrive at a disposition until you have evaluated all applications.

    Next, you need to isolate the preferred system. This is completed by comparing the same data points collected for rationalization and the application alignment analysis. Cost and coverage of all necessary functions become the more important factors in this decision-making process.

    Lastly, for the non-preferred redundant applications you need to determine: What will you do with the users? What will you do with the data? And what can you do with the functionality (can the actual coding be merged onto a common platform)?

    Disposition

    Description & Additional Analysis

    Call to Action (Priority)

    Keep & Absorb

    Higher value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These are the preferred apps to be kept. However, additional efforts are still required to migrate new users and data and potentially configure the app to new processes.

    Application or Process Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Shift & Retire

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These apps will be decommissioned alongside efforts to migrate users and data to the preferred system.

    *Confirm there are no unique and necessary features.

    Process Initiative & Decommission

    (Moderate)

    Merge

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives but still has some necessary unique features

    These apps will be merged with the preferred system onto a common platform.

    *Determine the unique and necessary features.

    *Determine if the multiple applications are compatible for consolidation.

    Application Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Compare groups of applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Estimated rime: 1 hour per group

    This exercise is best performed after aligning business capabilities to applications across the portfolio and identifying your areas of redundancy. At this stage, this is still an information collection exercise, and it will not yield a consolidation-based disposition until applied to all relevant applications. Lastly, this exercise may still be at too high a level to outline the full details of redundancy, but it is still vital information to collect and a starting point to determine which areas require more concentrated analysis.

    1. Determine which areas of redundancy or comparisons are desired. Duplicate the “App Comparison” worksheet for each grouping or comparison.
    2. Extend the comparison to better identify redundancy.
      1. For each area of redundancy, identify the high-level features. Aim to limit the features to ten, grouping smaller features if necessary. SoftwareReviews can be a resource for identifying common features.
      2. Label features using the MoSCoW model: must have, should have, could have, will not have.
      3. For each application, identify which features they support. You can use the grouping alignment matrix as a template for feature alignment comparison. Duplicate the worksheet, unlock it, and replace the grouping cell references with your list of features.
    Input Output
    • Areas of redundancy
    • Familiarity with features for applications within this subset
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Account Management

    Call Management

    Order/Transaction Processing

    Contract Management

    Lead/Opportunity Management

    Forecasting/Planning

    Customer Surveying

    Email Synchronization

    M M M M S S C W

    CRM 1

    CRM 2

    CRM 3

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    Estimated time: 1 hour per group

    1. Based on the feature-level assessment, determine if you can omit applications if they don’t truly overlap with other applications.
    2. Make a copy of the “App Comparison” worksheet and select the applications you want to compare based on your functional analysis.
    3. Determine the preferred application(s). Use the diagram to inform your decision. This may be the application closest to the top right (strong health and value). However, less expensive options or any options that provide a more complete set of features may be preferable.
    4. Open the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update your disposition for each application.
    5. Use these updated dispositions to determine a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. Update your roadmap with these initiatives in the next step.
    InputOutput
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    • Redundancy comparison
    • Assigned dispositions for redundant applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Roadmaps are used for different purposes

    Roadmaps are used for different communication purposes and at varying points in your application delivery practice. Some use a roadmap to showcase strategy and act as a feedback mechanism that allows stakeholders to validate any changes (process 1). Others may use it to illustrate and communicate approved and granular elements of a change to an application to inform appropriate stakeholders of what to anticipate (process 2).

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    Add to Roadmap

    Validate Direction

    Plan Project

    Execute Project

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    • Project Proposal
    • Feasibility/ Estimation
    • Impact Assessment
    • Business Case
    • Initial Design

    Approve Project

    Add to Roadmap

    Execute Project

    The steps between selecting a disposition and executing on any resulting project will vary based on the organization’s project intake standards (or lack thereof).

    This blueprint focuses on building a strategic portfolio roadmap prior to any in-depth assessments related to initiative/project intake, approval, and prioritization. For in-depth support related to intake, approval, prioritization, or planning, review the following resources.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver on your Digital Product Vision blueprint. The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale blueprint.

    Determine what makes it onto the roadmap

    A roadmap should not be limited to what is approved or committed to. A roadmap should be used to present the items that need to happen and begin the discussion of how or if this can be put into place. However, not every idea should make the cut and end up in front of key stakeholders.

    The image contains a screenshot of steps to be taken to determine what makes it onto the roadmap.

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. This is a high-level assessment to provide a sense of feasibility, practicality, and priority as well as an estimated timeline of a given initiative. Do not get lost in granular estimations. Use this as an input to your demand planning process.
    2. Enter the specific name or type of initiative.
      1. Process Initiative: Any project or effort focused on process improvements without technical modification to an app (e.g. user migration, change in SLA, new training program). Write the application and initiative name on a blue sticky note.
      2. App Initiative: Any project or effort involving technical modification to an app (e.g. refactoring, platform migration, feature addition or upgrade). Write the application and initiative name on a yellow sticky note.
      3. Decommission Initiative: Any project and related efforts to remove an app (e.g. migrating data, removal from server). Write the application and initiative name on a red sticky note.
    3. Prioritize the initiative to aid in demand planning. This is prepopulated from your selected application disposition, but you can set a different priority for the initiative here.
    4. Select the Initiative Phase in the timeline to show the intended schedule and sequencing of the initiative.
    Input Output
    • Assigned dispositions
    • Rationalization results
    • Prioritized initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Delivery Leads
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.6 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    Create a recurring update plan

    • Application inventories become stale before you know it. Build steps in your procurement process to capture the appropriate information on new applications. Also, build in checkpoints to revisit your inventory regularly to assess the accuracy of inventory data.
    • Rationalization is not one and done; it must occur with an appropriate cadence.
      • Business priorities change, which will impact the current and future value of your apps.
      • Now more than ever, user expectations evolve rapidly.
      • Application sprawl likely won’t stop, so neither will shadow IT and redundancies.
      • Obsolescence, growing technical debt, changing security threats, or shifting technology strategies are all inevitable, as is the gradual decline of an app’s health or technical fit.
    • An application’s disposition changes quicker than you think, and rationalization requires a structured cadence. You need to plan to minimize the need for repeated efforts. Conversely, many use preceding iterations to increase the analysis (e.g. more thorough TCO projections or more granular capability-application alignment).
    • Portfolio roadmaps require a cadence for both updates and presentations to stakeholders. Updates are often completed semiannually or quarterly to gauge the business adjustments that affect the timeline of the domain-specific applications. The presentation of a roadmap should be completed alongside meetings or gatherings of key decision makers.
    • M&A or other restructuring events will prompt the need to address all the above.

    The image contains a screenshot of chart to help determine frequency of updating your roadmap.

    Build your APM maturity by taking the right steps at the right time

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the steps taken to build APM maturity.

    Info-Tech’s Build an Application Rationalization Framework provides additional TCO and value tools to help build out your portfolio strategy.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    • 1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio
    • 1.2 Determine narrative
    • 1.3 Define goals and metrics
    • 1.4 Define application categories
    • 1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    • 2.1 Populate your inventory
    • 2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    • 3.1 Assess business value
    • 3.2 Assess technical health
    • 3.3 Assess end-user perspective
    • 3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    • 4.1 Review APM Snapshot results
    • 4.2 Review APM Foundations results
    • 4.3 Determine dispositions
    • 4.4 Assess redundancies (Optional)
    • 4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (Optional)
    • 4.6 Prioritize initiatives
    • 4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Determine how frequently you will update or present the artifacts of your APM practice: Application Inventory, Rationalization, Disposition, and Roadmap.
    2. For each artifact, determine the:
      1. Owner: Who is accountable for the artifact and the data or information within the artifact and will be responsible for or delegate the responsibility of updating or presenting the artifact to the appropriate audience?
      2. Update Cadence: How frequently will you update the artifact? Include what regularly scheduled meetings this activity will be within.
      3. Update Scope: Describe what activities will be performed to keep the artifact up to date. The goal here is to minimize the need for a full set of activities laid out within the blueprint. Optional: How will you expand the thoroughness of your analysis?
      4. Audience: Who is the audience for the artifact or assessment results?
      5. Presentation Cadence: How frequently and when will you review the artifact with the audience?
    InputOutput
    • Initial experience with APM
    • Strategic meetings schedule
    • Ongoing cadence for APM activities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Artifact

    Owner

    Update Cadence

    Update Scope

    Audience

    Presentation Cadence

    Inventory

    Greg Dawson

    • As new applications are acquired
    • Annual review
    • Add new application data points (this is added to implementation standards)
    • Review inventory and perform a data health check
    • Validate with app’s SME
    • Whole organization
    • Always available on team site

    Rationalization Tool

    Judy Ng

    • Annual update
    • Revisit value driver weights
    • Survey end users
    • Interview support owners
    • Interview business owners
    • Update TCO based on change in operational costs; expand thoroughness of cost estimates
    • Rescore applications
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Annually alongside yearly strategy meeting

    Portfolio Roadmap

    Judy Ng

    • Monthly update alongside project updates
    • Shift the timeline of the roadmap to current day 1
    • Carry over project updates and timeline changes
    • Validate with PMs and business owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Quarterly alongside Steering Committee meetings
    • Upon request

    Appendices

    • Additional support slides
    • Bibliography

    The APM tool provides a single source of truth and global data sharing

    The table shows where source data is used to support different aspects of APM discovery, rationalization, and modernization.

    Worksheet Data Mapping

    Application and Capability List

    Group Alignment Matrix (1-3)

    Rationalization Inputs

    Group 1-3 Results

    Application Inventory Details

    App Rationalization Results

    Roadmap

    App Redundancy Comparison

    Application and Capability List

    App list, Groupings

    App list

    App list, Groupings

    App list, Categories

    App list, Categories

    App list

    App list

    Groups 1-3 Alignment Matrix

    App to Group Tracing

    Application Categories

    Category
    drop-down

    Category

    Category

    Rationalization Inputs

    Lens Scores (weighted input to Group score)

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    Disposition Options

    Disposition list, Priorities list, Recommended Disposition and Priority

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    App Rationalization Results

    Disposition

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Name Organization’s terminology used for the application. Auto-discovery tools will provide names for the applications they reveal. However, this may not be the organizational nomenclature. You may adapt the names by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    ID Unique identifiers assigned to the application (e.g. app number). Typically an identification system developed by the application portfolio manager.
    Description A brief description of the application, often referencing core capabilities. Typically completed by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    Business Units A list of all business units, departments, or user groups. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with business unit representatives. However, this doesn’t always expose hidden applications. Application-capability mapping is the most effective way to determine all the business units/user groups of an app.
    Business Capabilities A list of business capabilities the application is intended to enable. Application capability mapping completed via interviews with business unit representatives.
    Criticality A high-level grading of the importance of the application to the business, typically used for support prioritization purposes (i.e. critical, high, medium, low). Typically the criticality rating is determined by a committee representing IT and business leaders.
    Ownership The individual accountable for various aspect of the application (e.g. product owner, product manager, application support, data owner); typically includes contact information and alternatives. If application ownership is an established accountability in your organization, typically consulting appropriate business stakeholders will reveal this information. Otherwise, application capability mapping can be an effective means of identifying who that owner should be.
    Application SMEs Any relevant subject matter experts who can speak to various aspects of the application (e.g. business process owners, development managers, data architects, data stewards, application architects, enterprise architects). Technical SMEs should be known within an IT department, but shadow IT apps may require interviews with the business unit. Application capability mapping will determine the identity of those key users/business process SMEs.
    Type An indication of whether the application was developed in-house, commercial off-the-shelf, or a hybrid option. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or development managers.
    Active Status An indication of whether the application is currently active, out of commission, in repair, etc. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or operation managers.

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Vendor Information Identification of the vendor from whom the software was procured. May include additional items such as the vendor’s contact information. Consultation with business SMEs, end users, or procurement teams, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Links to Other Documentation Pertinent information regarding the other relevant documentation of the application (e.g. SLA, vendor contracts, data use policies, disaster recovery plan). Typically includes links to documents. Consultation with product owners, service providers, or SMEs, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Number of Users The current number of users for the application. This can be based on license information but will often require some estimation. Can include additional items of quantities at different levels of access (e.g. admin, key users, power users). Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or appropriate business SMEs or review of vendor contracts or license agreements. Auto-discovery tools can reveal this information.
    Software Dependencies List of other applications or operating components required to run the application. Consultation with application architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Hardware Dependencies Identification of any hardware or infrastructure components required to run the application (i.e. databases, platform). Consultation with infrastructure or enterprise architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Development Language Coding language used for the application. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with development managers or appropriate technical SMEs.
    Platform A framework of services that application programs rely on for standard operations. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with infrastructure or development managers.
    Lifecycle Stage Where an application is within the birth, growth, mature, end-of-life lifecycle. Consultation with business owners and technical SMEs.
    Scheduled Updates Any major or minor updates related to the application, including the release date. Consultation with business owners and vendor managers.
    Planned or In-Flight Projects Any projects related to the application, including estimated project timeline. Consultation with business owners and project managers.

    Bibliography

    ”2019 Technology & Small Business Survey.” National Small Business Association (NSBA), n.d. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    “Application Rationalization – Essential Part of the Process for Modernization and Operational Efficiency.” Flexera, 2015. Web.
    “Applications Rationalization during M&A: Standardize, Streamline, Simplify.” Deloitte Consulting, 2016. Web.
    Bowling, Alan. “Clearer Visibility of Product Roadmaps Improves IT Planning.” ComputerWeekly.com, 1 Nov. 2010. Web.
    Brown, Alex. “Calculating Business Value.” Agile 2014 Orlando, 13 July 2014. Scrum Inc. 2014. Web.
    Brown, Roger. “Defining Business Value.” Scrum Gathering San Diego 2017. Agile Coach Journal. Web.
    “Business Application Definition.” Microsoft Docs, 18 July 2012. Web.
    “Connecting Small Businesses in the US.” Deloitte Consulting, 2017. Accessed 1 April. 2020.
    Craveiro, João. “Marty meets Martin: connecting the two triads of Product Management.” Product Coalition, 18 Nov. 2017. Web.
    Curtis, Bill. “The Business Value of Application Internal Quality.” CAST, 6 April 2009. Web.
    Fleet, Neville, Joan Lasselle, and Paul Zimmerman. “Using a Balance Scorecard to Measure the Productivity and Value of Technical Documentation Organizations.” CIDM, April 2008. Web.
    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Web.
    Harris, Michael. “Measuring the Business Value of IT.” David Consulting Group, 2007. Web.
    “How Application Rationalization Contributes to the Bottom Line.” LeanIX, 2017. Web.
    Jayanthi, Aruna. “Application Landscape Report 2014.” Capgemini, 4 March 2014. Web.
    Lankhorst, Marc., et al. “Architecture-Based IT Valuation.” Via Nova Architectura, 31 March 2010. Web.
    “Management of business application.” ServiceNow, Jan.2020. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    Mauboussin, Michael J. “The True Measures of Success.” HBR, Oct. 2012. Web.
    Neogi, Sombit., et al. “Next Generation Application Portfolio Rationalization.” TATA, 2011. Web.
    Riverbed. “Measuring the Business Impact of IT Through Application Performance.” CIO Summits, 2015. Web.
    Rouse, Margaret. “Application Rationalization.” TechTarget, March 2016. Web.
    Van Ramshorst, E.A. “Application Portfolio Management from an Enterprise Architecture Perspective.” Universiteit Utrecht, July 2013.
    “What is a Balanced Scorecard?” Intrafocus, n.d. Web.
    Whitney, Lance. “SMBs share their biggest constraints and great challenges.” Tech Republic, 6 May 2019. Web.

    Generative AI: Market Primer

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}349|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Much of the organization remains in the dark for understanding what Gen AI is, complicated by ambiguous branding from vendors claiming to provide Gen AI solutions.
    • Searching the market for a Gen AI platform is nearly impossible, owing to the sheer number of vendors.
    • The evaluative criteria for selecting a Gen AI platform are unclear.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You cannot rush Gen AI selection and implementation. Organizations with (1) FTEs devoted to making Gen AI work (including developers and business intelligence analysts), (2) trustworthy and regularly updated data, and (3) AI governance are just now reaching PoC testing.
    • Gen AI is not a software category – it is an umbrella concept. Gen AI platforms will be built on different foundational models, be trained in different ways, and provide varying modalities. Do not expect Gen AI platforms to be compared against the same parameters in a vendor quadrant.
    • Bad data is the tip of the iceberg for Gen AI risks. While Gen AI success will be heavily reliant on the quality of data it is fine-tuned on, there are independent risks organizations must prepare for, from Gen AI hallucinations and output reliability to infrastructure feasibility and handling high-volume events.
    • Prepare for ongoing instability in the Gen AI market. If your organization is unsure about where to start with Gen AI, the secure route is to examine what your enterprise providers are offering. Use this as a learning platform to confidently navigate which specialized Gen AI provider will be viable for meeting your use cases.

    Impact and Result

    • Consensus on Gen AI scope and key Gen AI capabilities
    • Identification of your readiness to leverage Gen AI applications
    • Agreement on Gen AI evaluative criteria
    • Knowledge of vendor viability

    Generative AI: Market Primer Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Generative AI: Market Primer – Contextualize the marketspace and prepare for generative AI selection.

    Use Info-Tech’s best practices for setting out a selection roadmap and evaluative criteria for narrowing down vendors – both enterprise and specialized providers.

    • Generative AI: Market Primer Storyboard
    • Data Governance Policy
    • AI Governance Storyboard
    • AI Architecture Assessment and Project Planning Tool
    • AI Architecture Assessment and Project Planning Tool – Sample
    • AI Architecture Templates
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Generative AI: Market Primer

    Cut through Gen AI buzzwords to achieve market clarity.

    Analyst Perspective

    The generative AI (Gen AI) marketspace is complex, nascent, and unstable.

    Organizations need to get clear on what Gen AI is, its infrastructural components, and the governance required for successful platform selection.

    Thomas Randall

    The urge to be fast-moving to leverage the potential benefits of Gen AI is understandable. There are plenty of opportunities for Gen AI to enrich an organization’s use cases – from commercial to R&D to entertainment. However, there are requisites an organization needs to get right before Gen AI can be effectively applied. Part of this is ensuring data and AI governance is well established and mature within the organization. The other part is contextualizing Gen AI to know what components of this market the organization needs to invest in.

    Owing to its popularity surge, OpenAI’s ChatGPT has become near synonymous with Gen AI. However, Gen AI is an umbrella concept that encompasses a variety of infrastructural architecture. Organizations need to ask themselves probing questions if they are looking to work with OpenAI: Does ChatGPT rest on the right foundational model for us? Does ChatGPT offer the right modalities to support our organization’s use cases? How much fine-tuning and prompt engineering will we need to perform? Do we require investment in on-premises infrastructure to support significant data processing and high-volume events? And do we require FTEs to enable all this infrastructure?

    Use this market primer to quickly get up to speed on the elements your organization might need to make the most of Gen AI.

    Thomas Randall

    Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Much of the organization remains in the dark for understanding what Gen AI is, complicated by ambiguous branding from vendors claiming to provide Gen AI solutions.
    • Searching the market for a Gen AI platform is near impossible, owing to the sheer number of vendors.
    • The evaluative criteria for selecting a Gen AI platform is unclear.

    Common Obstacles

    • Data governance is immature within the organization. There is no source of truth or regularly updated organizational process assets.
    • AI functionality is not well understood within the organization; there is little AI governance for monitoring and controlling its use.
    • The extent of effort and resources required to make Gen AI a success remains murky.

    Info-Tech's Solution

    This market primer for Gen AI will help you:

    1. Contextualize the Gen AI market: Learn what components of Gen AI an organization should consider to make Gen AI a success.
    2. Prepare for Gen AI selection: Use Info-Tech’s best practices for setting out a selection roadmap and evaluative criteria for narrowing down vendors – both enterprise and specialized providers.

    “We are entering the era of generative AI.
    This is a unique time in our history where the benefits of AI are easily accessible and becoming pervasive with co-pilots emerging in the major business tools we use today. The disruptive capabilities that can potentially drive dramatic benefits also introduces risks that need to be planned for.”

    Bill Wong, Principal Research Director – Data and BI, Info-Tech Research Group

    Who benefits from this project?

    This research is designed for:

    • Senior IT, developers, data staff, and project managers who:
      • Have received a mandate from their executives to begin researching the Gen AI market.
      • Need to quickly get up to speed on the state of the Gen AI market, given no deep prior knowledge of the space.
      • Require an overview of the different components to Gen AI to contextualize how vendor comparisons and selections can be made.
      • Want to gain an understanding of key trends, risks, and evaluative criteria to consider in their selection process.

    This research will help you:

    • Articulate the potential business value of Gen AI to your organization.
    • Establish which high-value use cases could be enriched by Gen AI functionality.
    • Assess vendor viability for enterprise and specialized software providers in the Gen AI marketspace.
    • Collect information on the prerequisites for implementing Gen AI functionality.
    • Develop relevant evaluative criteria to assist differentiating between shortlisted contenders.

    This research will also assist:

    • Executives, business analysts, and procurement teams who are stakeholders in:
      • Contextualizing the landscape for learning opportunities.
      • Gathering and documenting requirements.
      • Building deliverables for software selection projects.
      • Managing vendors, especially managing the relationships with incumbent enterprise software providers.

    This research will help you:

    • Identify examples of how Gen AI applications could be leveraged for your organization’s core use cases.
    • Verify the extent of Gen AI functionality an incumbent enterprise provider has.
    • Validate accuracy of Gen AI language and architecture referenced in project deliverables.

    Insight Summary

    You cannot speedrun Gen AI selection and implementation.

    Organizations with (1) FTEs devoted to making Gen AI work (including developers and business intelligence analysts), (2) trustworthy and regularly updated data, and (3) AI governance are just now reaching PoC testing.

    Gen AI is not a software category – it is an umbrella concept.

    Gen AI platforms will be built on different foundational models, be trained in different ways, and provide varying modalities. Do not expect to compare Gen AI platforms to the same parameters in a vendor quadrant.

    Bad data is the tip of the iceberg for Gen AI risks.

    While Gen AI success will be heavily reliant on the quality of data it is fine-tuned on, there are independent risks organizations must prepare for: from Gen AI hallucinations and output reliability to infrastructure feasibility to handle high-volume events.

    Gen AI use may require changes to sales incentives.

    If you plan to use Gen AI in a commercial setting, review your sales team’s KPIs. They are rewarded for sales velocity; if they are the human-in-the-loop to check for hallucinations, you must change incentives to ensure quality management.

    Prepare for ongoing instability in the Gen AI market.

    If your organization is unsure about where to start with Gen AI, the secure route is to examine what your enterprise providers are offering. Use this as a learning platform to confidently navigate which specialized Gen AI provider will be viable for meeting your use cases.

    Brace for a potential return of on-premises infrastructure to power Gen AI.

    The market trend has been for organizations to move to cloud-based products. Yet, for Gen AI, effective data processing and fine-tuning may call for organizations to invest in on-premises infrastructure (such as more GPUs) to enable their Gen AI to function effectively.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for understanding the Gen AI marketspace

    Phase Steps

    1. Contextualize the Gen AI marketplace

    1. Define Gen AI and its components.
    2. Explore Gen AI trends.
    3. Begin deriving Gen AI initiatives that align with business capabilities.

    2. Prepare for and understand Gen AI platform offerings

    1. Review Gen AI selection best practices and requisites for effective procurement.
    2. Determine evaluative criteria for Gen AI solutions.
    3. Explore Gen AI offerings with enterprise and specialized providers.
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Achieve consensus on Gen AI scope and key Gen AI capabilities.
    2. Identify your readiness to leverage Gen AI applications.
    3. Hand off to Build Your Generative AI Roadmap to complete pre-requisites for selection.
    1. Determine whether deeper data and AI governance is required; if so, hand off to Create an Architecture for AI.
    2. Gain consensus on Gen AI evaluative criteria.
    3. Understand vendor viability.

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    • Call #1: Discover if Gen AI is right for your organization. Understand what a Gen AI platform is and discover the art of the possible.
    • Call #2: To take advantage of Gen AI, perform a business capabilities analysis to begin deriving Gen AI initiatives.
    • Call #3: Explore whether Gen AI initiatives can be achieved either with incumbent enterprise players or via procurement of specialized solutions.
    • Call #4: Evaluate vendors and perform final due diligence.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    The Gen AI market evaluation process should be broken into segments:

    1. Gen AI market education with this primer
    2. Structured approach to selection
    3. Evaluation and final due diligence

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful"

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Software selection engagement

    Five advisory calls over a five-week period to accelerate your selection process

    • Receive expert analyst guidance over five weeks (on average) to select and negotiate software.
    • Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions.
    • Use a repeatable, formal methodology to improve your application selection process.
    • Get better, faster results guaranteed, included in membership.
    Software selection process timeline. Week 1: Awareness - 1 hour call, Week 2: Education & Discovery - 1 hour call, Week 3: Evaluation - 1 hour call, Week 4: Selection - 1 hour call, Week 5: Negotiation & Configuration - 1 hour call.

    Click here to book your selection engagement.

    Software selection workshops

    40 hours of advisory assistance delivered online.

    Select better software, faster.

    • 40 hours of expert analyst guidance
    • Project and stakeholder management assistance
    • Save money, align stakeholders, speed up the process, and make better decisions
    • Better, faster results guaranteed; 25K standard engagement fee
    Software selection process timeline. Week 1: Awareness - 5 hours of Assistance, Week 2: Education & Discovery - 10 hours of assistance, Week 3: Evaluation - 10 hours of assistance, Week 4: Selection - 10 hours of assistance, Week 5: Negotiation & Configuration - 10 hours of assistance.

    Click here to book your workshop engagement.

    Prepare Your Application for PaaS

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}181|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • The application may have been written a long time ago, and have source code, knowledge base, or design principles misplaced or lacking, which makes it difficult to understand the design and build.
    • The development team does not have a standardized practice for assessing cloud benefits and architecture, design principles for redesigning an application, or performing capacity for planning activities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An infrastructure-driven cloud strategy overlooks application specific complexities. Ensure that an application portfolio strategy is a precursor to determining the business value gained from an application perspective, not just an infrastructure perspective.
    • Business value assessment must be the core of your decision to migrate and justify the development effort.
    • Right-size your application to predict future usage and minimize unplanned expenses. This ensures that you are truly benefiting from the tier costing model that vendors offer.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify and evaluate what cloud benefits your application can leverage and the business value generated as a result of migrating your application to the cloud.
    • Use Info-Tech’s approach to building a robust application that can leverage scalability, availability, and performance benefits while maintaining the functions and features that the application currently supports for the business.
    • Standardize and strengthen your performance testing practices and capacity planning activities to build a strong current state assessment.
    • Use Info-Tech’s elaboration of the 12-factor app to build a clear and robust cloud profile and target state for your application.
    • Leverage Info-Tech’s cloud requirements model to assess the impact of cloud on different requirements patterns.

    Prepare Your Application for PaaS Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a right-sized, design-driven approach to moving your application to a PaaS platform, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Prepare Your Application for PaaS – Phases 1-2

    1. Create your cloud application profile

    Bring the business into the room, align your objectives for choosing certain cloud capabilities, and characterize your ideal PaaS environment as a result of your understanding of what the business is trying to achieve. Understand how to right-size your application in the cloud to maintain or improve its performance.

    • Prepare Your Application for PaaS – Phase 1: Create Your Cloud Application Profile
    • Cloud Profile Tool

    2. Evaluate design changes for your application

    Assess the application against Info-Tech’s design scorecard to evaluate the right design approach to migrating the application to PaaS. Pick the appropriate cloud path and begin the first step to migrating your app – gathering your requirements.

    • Prepare Your Application for PaaS – Phase 2: Evaluate Design Changes for Your Application
    • Cloud Design Scorecard Tool

    [infographic]

     
     

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}345|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $24,469 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Business Intelligence Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /business-intelligence-strategy
    • It is hard to not hear about how AI is revolutionizing the world. Across all industries, new applications for AI are changing the way humans work and how we interact with technologies that are used in modern organizations.
    • It can be difficult to see the specific applications of AI for your business. With all of the talk about the AI revolution, it can be hard to tie the rapidly changing and growing field of AI to your industry and organization and to determine which technologies are worth serious time and investment, and which ones are too early and not worth your time.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • AI is not a magic bullet. Instead, it is a tool for speeding up data-driven decision making. A more appropriate term for current AI technology is data-enabled, automated, adaptive decision support. Use when appropriate.
    • Garbage in, garbage out still applies to AI ‒ and it is even more relevant! AI technology has its foundations in data. Lots of it. Relevant, accurate, and timely data is essential to the effective use of AI.
    • AI is a rapidly evolving field – and this means that you can learn from others more effectively. Using a use case-based approach, you can learn from the successes and failures of others to more rapidly narrow down how AI can show value for you.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand what AI really means in practice.
    • Learn what others are doing in your industry to leverage AI technologies for competitive advantage.
    • Determine the use cases that best apply to your situation for maximum value from AI in your environment.
    • Define your first AI proof-of-concept (PoC) project to start exploring what AI can do for you.
    • Separate the signal from the noise when wading through the masses of marketing material around AI.

    Get Started With Artificial Intelligence Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to get up to speed with the rapid changes in AI technologies taking over the world today, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you on your AI journey.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Explore the possibilities

    Understand what AI really is in the modern world and how AI technologies impact the business functions.

    • Get Started With Artificial Intelligence – Phase 1: Explore the Possibilities

    2. Learn from your peers and give your AI a purpose

    Develop a good understanding of where AI is delivering value in your industry and other verticals. Determine the top three business goals to get value from your AI and give your AI a purpose.

    • Get Started With Artificial Intelligence – Phase 2: Learn From Your Peers and Give Your AI a Purpose

    3. Select your first AI PoC

    Brainstorm your AI PoC projects, prioritize and sequence your AI ideas, select your first AI PoC, and create a minimum viable business case for this use case.

    • Get Started With Artificial Intelligence – Phase 3: Select Your First AI PoC
    • Idea Reservoir Tool
    • Minimum Viable Business Case Document
    • Prototyping Workbook
    [infographic]

    Terms and Conditions for consulting to businesses

    By signing an agreement with Gert Taeymans bvba, Client declares that he agrees with the Terms and Conditions referred to hereafter. Terms and conditions on Client's order form or any other similar document shall not be binding upon Gert Taeymans bvba.

    The prices, quantities and delivery time stated in any quotation are not binding upon Gert Taeymans bvba. They are commercial estimates only which Gert Taeymans bvba will make reasonable efforts to achieve. Prices quoted in final offers will be valid only for 30 days. All prices are VAT excluded and do not cover expenses, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Gert Taeymans bvba reserves the right to increase a quoted fee in the event that Client requests a variation to the work agreed.

    The delivery times stated in any quotation are of an indicative nature and not binding upon Gert Taeymans bvba, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Delivery times will be formulated in working days. In no event shall any delay in delivery be neither cause for cancellation of an order nor entitle Client to any damages.

    Amendments or variations of the initial agreement between Client and Gert Taeymans bvba will only be valid when accepted by both parties in writing.

    Any complaints concerning the performance of services must be addressed to Gert Taeymans bvba in writing and by registered mail within 7 working days of the date of the performance of the services.

    In no event shall any complaint be just cause for non-payment or deferred payment of invoices. Any invoice and the services described therein will be deemed irrevocably accepted by Client if no official protest of non-payment has been sent by Client within 7 working days from the date of the mailing of the invoice.

    Client shall pay all invoices of Gert Taeymans bvba within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of invoice unless otherwise agreed in writing by Gert Taeymans bvba. In the event of late payment, Gert Taeymans bvba may charge a monthly interest on the amount outstanding at the rate of two (2) percent with no prior notice of default being required, in which case each commenced month will count as a full month. Any late payment will entitle Gert Taeymans bvba to charge Client a fixed handling fee of 300 EUR. All costs related to the legal enforcement of the payment obligation, including lawyer fees, will be charged to Client.

    In no event will Gert Taeymans bvba be liable for damages of any kind, including without limitation, direct, incidental or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, damages for lost profits, business interruption and loss of programs or information) arising out of the use of Gert Taeymans bvba services.

    Gert Taeymans bvba collects personal data from Client for the performance of its services and the execution of its contracts. Such personal data can also be used for direct marketing, allowing Gert Taeymans bvba to inform Client of its activities on a regular basis. If Client objects to the employment of its personal data for direct marketing, Client must inform Gert Taeymans bvba on the following address: gert@gerttaeymans.consulting.

    Client can consult, correct or amend its personal data by addressing such request to Gert Taeymans bvba by registered mail. Personal data shall in no event be sold, rented or made available to other firms or third parties where not needed for the execution of the contract. Gert Taeymans bvba reserves the right to update and amend its privacy policy from time to time to remain consistent with applicable privacy legislation.

    The logo of the Client will be displayed on the Gert Taeymans bvba website, together with a short description of the project/services.

    Any changes to Client’s contact information such as addresses, phone numbers or e-mail addresses must be communicated to Gert Taeymans bvba as soon as possible during the project.

    Both parties shall maintain strict confidence and shall not disclose to any third party any information or material relating to the other or the other's business, which comes into that party's possession and shall not use such information and material. This provision shall not, however, apply to information or material, which is or becomes public knowledge other than by breach by a party of this clause.

    Gert Taeymans bvba has the right at any time to change or modify these terms and conditions at any time without notice.

    The agreement shall be exclusively governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Belgium. The competent courts of Antwerp, Belgium will finally settle any dispute about the validity, the interpretation or the execution of this agreement.

    These Terms and Conditions are the only terms and conditions applicable to both parties.

    If any provision or provisions of these Terms and Conditions shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, such provision shall be enforced to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, and the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby.

    Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}465|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Augmented reality is a new technology and use cases are still emerging. Organizations have to work hard to stay ahead of the curve and predict how they will be impacted.
    • There are limited off-the-shelf augmented reality solutions in terms of business applications. IT not only needs to understand the emerging augmented reality hardware, but also the plethora of development platforms.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Augmented reality presents a new avenue to solve problems that cannot be addressed efficiently with existing technology. It is a new tool that will impact the way you work.
    • Beyond addressing existing problems, augmented reality will provide the ability to differently execute business processes. Current processes have been designed with existing systems and capabilities in mind. Augmented reality impacts organizational design processes that are more complex.
    • As a technology with an evolving set of use cases, IT and the business must anticipate some of the challenges that may arise with the use of augmented reality (e.g. health and safety, application development, regulatory).

    Impact and Result

    • Our methodology addresses the possible issues by using a case-study approach to demonstrate the “art of the possible” for augmented reality.
    • With an understanding of augmented reality, it is possible to find applicable use cases for this emerging technology and get a leg up on competitors.
    • By utilizing Info-Tech’s Augmented Reality Use Case Picklist and the Augmented Reality Stakeholder Presentation Template, the IT team and their business stakeholders can confidently approach augmented reality adoption.

    Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why your organization should care about augmented reality’s potential to transform the workplace and how Info-Tech will support you as you identify and build your augmented reality use case.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand augmented reality

    Analyze the four key benefits of augmented reality to understand how the technology can resolve industry issues.

    • Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative – Phase 1: Understand Augmented Reality
    • Augmented Reality Glossary

    2. Finding space for augmented reality

    Develop and prioritize use cases for augmented reality using Info-Tech’s AR Initiative Framework.

    • Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative – Phase 2: Finding Space for Augmented Reality
    • Augmented Reality Use Case Picklist

    3. Communicate project decisions to stakeholders

    Present the augmented reality initiative to stakeholders and understand the way forward for the AR initiative.

    • Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative – Phase 3: Communicate Project Decisions to Stakeholders
    • Augmented Reality Stakeholder Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Activate Your Augmented Reality Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Augmented Reality and Its Use Cases

    The Purpose

    Understand the fundamentals of augmented reality technology and its real-world business applications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized list of augmented reality use cases.

    Activities

    1.1 Introduce augmented reality technology.

    1.2 Understand augmented reality use cases.

    1.3 Review augmented reality case studies.

    Outputs

    An understanding of the history and current state of augmented reality technology.

    An understanding of “the art of the possible” for augmented reality.

    An enhanced understanding of augmented reality.

    2 Conduct an Environmental Scan and Internal Review

    The Purpose

    Examine where the organization stands in the current competitive environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of what is needed from an augmented reality initiative to differentiate your organization from its competitors.

    Activities

    2.1 Environmental analysis (PEST+SWOT).

    2.2 Competitive analysis.

    2.3 Listing of interaction channels and disposition.

    Outputs

    An understanding of the internal and external propensity for augmented reality.

    An understanding of comparable organizations’ approach to augmented reality.

    A chart with the disposition of each interaction channel and its applicability to augmented reality.

    3 Parse Critical Technology Drivers

    The Purpose

    Determine which business processes will be affected by augmented reality.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of critical technology drivers and their KPIs.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify affected process domains.

    3.2 Brainstorm impacts of augmented reality on workflow enablement.

    3.3 Distill critical technology drivers.

    3.4 Identify KPIs for each driver.

    Outputs

    A list of affected process domains.

    An awareness of critical technology drivers for the augmented reality initiative.

    Build Better Workflows

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}496|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    Do you experience any of the following challenges:

    • You lack process documentation.
    • Your documentation lacks flowchart examples.
    • Your workflows have points of friction and need improvement.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows.
    • Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs

    Impact and Result

    • Understand the basics of documenting a workflow in flowchart format.
    • Run activities to revise and stress-test your workflows to improve their accuracy and effectiveness.
    • Ensure your workflows are part of a continuous improvement cycle – keep them up to date as a living document.

    Build Better Workflows Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Better Workflows – A step by step document that walks you through the process of convening a working group to design and update a process flowchart.

    Ask the right questions and pressure test the workflow so the documentation is as helpful as possible to all who consult it.

    • Build Better Workflows Storyboard

    2. Workflow Activity: An onboarding example for a completed flowchart review.

    Use this workflow as an example of the output of an onboarding workflow-improvement activity.

    • Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example (Visio)
    • Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Build Better Workflows

    Go beyond draft one to refine and pressure test your process.

    Analyst Perspective

    Remove friction as you document workflows

    Emily Sugerman

    Emily Sugerman
    Research Analyst, Infrastructure & Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    You can’t mature processes without also documenting them. Process documentation is most effective when workflows are both written out and also visualized in the form of flow charts.

    Your workflows may appear in standard operating procedures, in business continuity and disaster recovery plans, or anywhere else a process’ steps need to be made explicit. Often, just getting something down on paper is a win. However, the best workflows usually do not emerge fully-formed out of a first draft. Your workflow documentation must achieve two things:

    • Be an accurate representation of how you currently operate or how you will operate in the near future as a target state.
    • Be the output of a series of refinements and improvements as the workflow is reviewed and iterated.

    This research will use the example of improving an onboarding workflow. Ask the right questions and pressure test the workflow so the documentation is as helpful as possible to all who consult it.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Your documentation lacks workflows entirely, or ...
    • Your workflows are documented in flowchart form but are not accurate, and/or ...
    • Your workflows are documented in flowchart form but contain points of friction and need process improvement.
    • Getting the relevant stakeholders together to contribute to workflow design and validate them.
    • Selecting the right detail level to include in the workflow – not too much and not too little.
    • Knowing the right questions to ask to review and improve your workflow flowcharts.

    Use this material to help

    • Understand the basics of documenting a workflow in flowchart format.
    • Run activities to revise and stress-test your workflows to improve their accuracy and effectiveness.
    • Ensure your workflows are part of a continuous improvement cycle – keep them up-to-date as a living document.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows. Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs.

    Follow these steps to build, analyze, and improve the workflow

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram that demonstrates the steps needed to build better workflows.

    Insight Summary

    Keep future state in mind.
    Don’t just document – target your future state as you document your workflows. Find opportunities for automation, pinpoint key handoff points, and turn cold handoffs into warm handoffs.

    Promote the benefits of documenting workflows as flowcharts.
    Foreground to the IT team how this will improve customer experience. End-users will benefit from more efficient workflows.

    Remember the principle of constructive criticism.
    Don’t be afraid to critique the workflow but remember this can be a team-building experience. Focus on how these changes will be mutually beneficial, not assigning blame for workflow friction.

    Don’t waste time building shelfware.
    Establish a review cadence to ensure the flowchart is a living document that people actually use.

    Benefits of building better workflows

    Risks of inadequate workflows

    Benefits of documented workflows

    • Lack of clear communication: If you don’t have workflows, you are losing out on an effective way to document and communicate processes.
    • Outdated documentation: If you do have workflows documented in standard operating procedures, they probably need to be updated unless you already consistently update documentation.
    • Facilitate knowledge transfer.
    • Standardize processes for service delivery consistency.
    • Optimize processes by discovering and improving points of friction within the workflow.
    • Improve transparency of processes to set expectations for other stakeholders.
    • Reduce risk.

    Why are visualized workflows useful?

    Use these talking points to build commitment toward documenting/updating processes.

    Risk reduction
    “Our outdated documentation is a risk, as people will assume the documented process is accurate.”

    Transparency
    “The activity of mapping our processes will bring transparency to everyone involved.”

    Accountability
    “Flow charts will help us clarify task ownership at a glance.”

    Accessibility
    “Some team members prefer diagrams over written steps, so we should provide both.”

    Knowledge centralization
    “Our flow charts will include links to other supporting documentation (checklists, vendor documentation, other flowcharts).”

    Role clarification
    “Separating steps into swim lanes can clarify different tiers, process stages, and ownership, while breaking down silos.”

    Communication
    To leadership/upper management: “This process flow chart quickly depicts the big picture.”

    Knowledge transfer
    “Flow charts will help bring new staff up to speed more quickly.”

    Consistency
    “Documenting a process standardizes it and enables everyone to do it in the same way.”

    Review what process mapping is

    A pictorial representation of a process that is used to achieve transparency.

    This research will use one specific example of an onboarding process workflow. Before drilling down into onboarding workflows specifically, review Info-Tech’s Process Mapping Guide for general guidance on what to do before you begin:

    • Know the purpose of process mapping.
    • Articulate the benefits of process mapping.
    • Recognize the risks of not process mapping.
    • Understand the different levels of processes.
    • Adopt BPMN 2.0 as a standard.
    • Consider tools for process mapping.
    • Select a process to map.
    • Learn methods to gather information.

    The image contains screenshots of the Process Mapping Guide.

    Download the Process Mapping Guide

    Select the workflow your team will focus upon

    Good candidates include:

    • Processes you don’t have documented and need to build from scratch.
    • An existing process that results in an output your users are currently dissatisfied with (if you run an annual IT satisfaction survey, use this data to find this information).
    • An existing process that is overly manual, lacks automation, and causes work slowdown for your staff.

    Info-Tech workflow examples

    Active Directory Processes

    Application Development Process

    Application Maintenance Process

    Backup Process

    Benefits Legitimacy Workflow

    Business Continuity Plan Business Process

    Business Continuity Plan Recovery Process

    Commitment Purchasing Workflow

    Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Process

    Crisis Management Process

    Data Protection Recovery Workflow

    Disaster Recovery Process

    Disaster Recovery Plan/Business Continuity Plan Review Workflow

    End-User Device Management Workflow Library

    Expense Process

    Event Management Process

    Incident Management and Service Desk Workflows

    MACD Workflow Mapping

    Problem Management Process

    Project Management Process

    Ransomware Response Process

    Sales Process for New Clients

    Security Policy Exception Process

    Self-Service Resolution Process

    Service Definition Process

    Service Desk Ticket Intake by Channel

    Software Asset Management Processes

    Target State Maintenance Workflow

    Example: Onboarding workflow

    Onboarding is a perennial challenge due to the large number of separate teams and departments who are implicated in the process.

    There can be resistance to alignment. As a result, everyone needs to be pulled in to see the big picture and the impact of an overly manual and disconnected process.

    Additionally, the quality of the overall onboarding process (of which IT is but one part) has a significant impact on the employee experience of new hires, and the long-term experience of those employees. This workflow is therefore often a good one to target for improvement.

    “Organizations with a standardized onboarding process experience 62% greater new hire productivity, along with 50% greater new hire retention.”1

    “Companies that focus on onboarding retain 50% more new employees than companies that don’t.”2

    1. Carucci, “To Retain New Hires, Spend More Time Onboarding Them,” 2018
    2. Uzialko, “What Does Poor Onboarding, 2023

    Tabletop exercise: Generate first draft

    In the tabletop exercise, your team will walk through your onboarding process step by step and document what happens at each stage. Prep for this meeting with the following steps:

    1. Identify roles: facilitator, notetaker, and participants. Determine who should be involved in the working group in addition to IT (HR, Hiring Team, Facilities, etc.).
    2. Decide what method of documentation you will use in the meeting. If meeting in person, cue cards are useful because they can be easily rearranged or inserted. If meeting remotely, the notetaker or facilitator will need to share their screen and capture each step with software (such as Visio, PowerPoint, or a whiteboarding software).
    3. Before you even begin mapping out the process, conduct a quick brainstorming session. What are your current challenges with it? What is working? Document on a whiteboard (electronic or hard copy).
    4. Document each step of the process as it currently happens. You will improve it later. Include task ownership.

    Roles

    Facilitator
    Tasks:

    • Guide discussion – restate contributors’ ideas, ask probing questions.
    • Keep group on track – cut off or redirect conversation when off track.

    Notetaker
    Tasks:

    • Ensure the steps are documented via the agreed-upon tools (e.g. cue cards). If the process is being documented in software, the notetaker may be solely responsible for documentation.
    • The notetaker may be the same person as the facilitator.

    Document your workflow challenges: Onboarding

    Brainstorm and document. Group similar challenges together to pull out themes.

    Lack of communication/expectation setting with users:

    Messy process, poor coordination among task owners:

    User experience affected:

    • Users submit onboarding requests with too little lead time.
    • HR/hiring manager does not include all necessary information when submitting new hire request.
    • Approvals are slowing down our ability to fulfill in a timely manner.
    • Lots of manual, repeated tasks.
    • Too much back and forth between technicians.
    • Procurement delays (supply chain challenges) leading to new user starting with no device/workaround.
    • Inconsistent resolution times for these types of requests.
    • Complaints about onboarding were one of the most frequently recurring issues in our most recent annual IT satisfaction survey.
    • Some of these complaints fall more to the responsibility of HR and direct managers, but some of the complaints relate to onboarding tasks not being completed by start date, which is our responsibility.

    Establish flowcharting standards

    If you don’t have existing flowchart standards, use the basic notation conventions used in the examples here.

    Basic notation convention shapes: Circle, oval, square, rectangle, diamond, thought bubble.

    Start, End, and Connector. Traditional flowcharting standards reserve this shape for connectors to other flowcharts or other points in the existing flowchart. Unified modeling language (UML) also uses the circle for start and end points.

    Start, End. Traditional flowcharting standards use this for start and end. However, Info-Tech recommends using the circle shape to reduce the number of shapes and avoid confusion with other similar shapes.

    Process Step. Individual process steps or activities (e.g. create ticket or escalate ticket). If it’s a series of steps, then use the sub-process symbol and flowchart the sub-process separately.

    Sub-Process. A series of steps. For example, a critical incident standard operating procedure (SOP) might reference a recovery process as one of the possible actions. Marking it as a sub-process, rather than listing each step within the critical incident SOP, streamlines the flowchart and avoids overlap with other flowcharts (e.g. the recovery process).

    Decision. Represents decision points, typically with yes/no branches, but you could have other branches depending on the question (e.g. a “Priority” question could branch into separate streams for Priority 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 issues).

    Document/Report Output. For example, the output from a backup process might include an error log.

    Map the current process

    Prompt the working group with the following questions.

    • What happens when the ticket comes in? Who submits it? Where is it coming from? What are the trigger events? Are there any input channels we should eliminate?
    • What is the terminal event? Where does the workflow end?
    • Do we have a triage step?
    • Is the ticket prioritized? Does this need to be a step?
    • Do we create child tickets? Separate tasks for different teams? Do we create a primary/main ticket and sub-tickets? How should we represent this in the flowchart?
    • How should we represent escalations? How should we represent task ownership by different teams?
    • What are our decision points: points when the path can potentially branch (e.g. into yes/no branches)?

    Map the process: First pass

    The image contains a screenshot example of the first pass.

    Tabletop exercise: Revise workflow

    Time to review and revise the workflow. What gaps exist? How can you improve the process? What documentation gaps have been overlooked?

    Consider the following refinements for the onboarding workflow:

    • Identify missing steps
    • Clearly identify task ownership
    • Establish SLAs and timepoints
    • Capture/implement user feedback
    • Identify approval roadblocks
    • Identify communication points
    • Identify opportunities for automation
    • Create personas
    • Create onboarding checklist

    Roles

    Facilitator
    Tasks:

    • Guide discussion – restate contributors’ ideas, ask probing questions.
    • Keep group on track – cut off or redirect conversation when off track.

    Notetaker
    Tasks:

    • Ensure the steps are documented via the agreed-upon tools (e.g. cue cards). If the process is being documented in software, the notetaker may be solely responsible for documentation.
    • The notetaker may be the same person as the facilitator, but this takes some practice.

    Map the process: Critique draft

    The image contains a screenshot example of critique draft.

    Solicit feedback from the group.

    "

    • Our workflow is slowed down by hidden approvals that we haven’t mapped.
    • We have no efficient way to prevent submission of incomplete requests.
    • Our workflow doesn’t clearly show how different tasks are assigned to different teams.
    • We still don’t know how long this all takes.
    • We’re missing some tasks – what about including facilities?
    • We’re missing next steps for some of the decision points.
    "

    Review: Identify missing steps

    Consider the following refinements.

    Be complete.

    The workflow should surface tacit knowledge, so make it explicit (Haddadpoor et al.):

    • Where are the inputs coming from? Do you need to account for various input channels? Have you forgotten any?
    • Are there any input channels that you want to eliminate?
    • Have you overlooked any hardware, software, or services entitlements that should be called out?
    • Have all decision paths been worked through? Do you need to add any missing decision points?
    • Add information flows and annotations as needed.

    Review: Task ownership

    Identify task ownership.

    The flow chart will be more useful if it clearly identifies who does what in the process.

    • Consider organizing the sub-processes within the overall onboarding process into swim lanes, one for each team or group involved in the process.
    • Swim lanes help clarify who does what in the overall process (e.g. all the tasks completed by HR appear in the HR swim lane, all the tasks completed by service desk appear in the service desk swim lane).
    • They can also help draw attention to escalation points or handoff points between different teams. Assess the steps around the boundary of each swim lane. Does the working group experience/know of friction at these handoff points? What might solve it?
    • In what order should the tasks occur? What dependencies do they have?

    The image contains a screenshot of a model that demonstrates task ownership swim lanes.

    “Each task has an owner, and the task list is visible to the employee and other stakeholders, so there's visibility about whether each person has done their actions.”

    Matthew Stibbe, qtd. in Zapier, 2022

    Review: The time the workflow takes

    For onboarding, this means setting SLOs/SLAs and internal timepoints.

    Add internal timepoints for the major steps/tasks in the workflow. Begin to track these service level objectives and adjust as necessary.

    • Review old onboarding tickets and track how long each main step/task takes (or should take). Every additional approval risks adding days.
    • Consider where there are opportunities to increase automation or use templates to save time.
    • Zero in on which task within the onboarding workflow is slowing down the process.
    • Create an overall service level objective that communicates how many days the onboarding workflow is expected to take. Decide where escalations go when the SLA is breached.

    When you have validated the service level objectives are accurate and you can meet them an acceptable amount of time, communicate the overall SLA to your users. This will ensure they submit future onboarding requests to your team with enough lead time to fulfill the request. Try to place the SLA directly in the service catalog.

    “Tracking the time within the workflow can be a powerful way to show the working group why there is user dissatisfaction.”

    Sandi Conrad, Principal Advisory Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Review: Capture user feedback

    For onboarding, this means implementing a transactional survey.

    The onboarding workflow will be subject to periodic reviews and continual improvement. Suggestions for improvement should come not only from the internal IT team, but also the users themselves.

    • Transactional surveys, launched at the close of a ticket, allow the ticket submitter to provide feedback on their customer service experience.
    • Onboarding tickets are somewhat more complex than the average incident or service request, since the ticket is often opened by one user (e.g. in HR) on behalf of another (the new employee).
    • Decide whose experience you want feedback on – the submitter of the request or the new user. Investigate your ITSM tool’s capabilities: is it possible to direct the survey to someone who is not the ticket submitter?
    Take Action on Service Desk Customer Feedback

    Use Info-Tech’s Take Action on Service Desk Customer Feedback for more guidance on creating these surveys.

    Review: Identify approval roadblocks

    For onboarding, approvals can be the main roadblock to fulfilling requests

    • How are the requests coming in? Do we have a predefined service catalog?
    • What kinds of approvals do we receive (manager, financial, legal, security, regulatory)? Ask the team to think about where there are instances of back and forth and clean that up.
    • Identify where approvals interrupt the technical flow.
      • Confirm that these approvals are indeed necessary (e.g. are certain approval requests ever declined? If not, follow up on whether they are necessary or whether some can be made into preapprovals).
      • Avoid putting agents in charge of waiting on or following up about approvals.
      • Investigate whether interruptive approvals can be moved.

    Review: Identify communication points

    A positive onboarding experience is an important part of a new employee’s success.

    Though IT is only one part of an employee’s onboarding experience, it’s an important part. Delays for hardware procurement and a lack of communication can lead to employee disengagement. Ask the team:

    • Are we communicating with our users when delays occur? When do delays occur most often?
    • How can we mitigate delays? Though we can’t resolve larger supply chain problems, can we increase stock in the meantime?
    • Can we start tracking delays to incorporate into the SLA
    • Do we offer loaner devices in the meantime?

    Place communication bullet points in the flow chart to indicate where the team will reach out to users to update or notify them of delays.

    Review: Identify opportunities for automation

    Where can we automate for onboarding?

    Identify when the process is dragged out due to waiting times (e.g. times when the technician can’t address the ticket right away).

    • Analyze the workflow to identify which tasks tend to stagnate because technician is busy elsewhere. Are these candidates for automation?
    • Is our ITSM tool capable of setting up automatically routed child tickets triggered by the main onboarding ticket? Does it generate a series of tasks? Is it a manual process? Which teams do these tasks/tickets go to?
    • Can we automate notifications if devices are delayed?
    • Can we use mobile device management for automated software installation?
    • If we have a robust service catalog, can we provide it to the users to download what they need? Or is this too many extra steps for our users?
    • Can we create personas to speed up onboarding?

    Avoid reinforcing manual processes, which make it even harder for departmental silos to work together.

    Review: Automation example – create personas

    Create role-based templates.

    Does HR know which applications our users need? Are they deferring to the manager, who then asks IT to simply duplicate an existing user?

    Personas are asset profiles that apply to multiple users (e.g. in a department) and that can be easily duplicated for new hires. You might create three persona groups in a department, with variations within each subgroup or title. To do this, you need accurate information upfront.

    Then, if you’re doing zero touch deployment, you can automate software to automatically load.

    Many HRIS systems have the ability to create a persona, and also to add users to the AD, email, and distribution groups without IT getting involved. This can alleviate work from the sysadmin. Does our HRIS do this?

    • Review old onboarding tickets. Do they include manual steps like setting up mailboxes, creating user accounts, adding to groups?
    • Investigate your ITSM tool’s onboarding template. Does it allow you to create a form through which to create dynamic required fields?
    • Identify the key information service desk needs from the department supervisor, or equivalent role, to begin the onboarding request – employee type, access level, hardware and software entitlements, etc.

    Revised workflow

    How does the group feel about the revised workflow?

    • Are any outputs still missing?
    • Can we add any more annotations to provide more context to someone reading this for the first time?
    • Do the task names follow a “verb-noun” format?
    • Are the handoffs clear?
    • Are some of the steps overly detailed compared to others?
    • Does it help resolve the challenges we listed?
    • Does it achieve the benefits we want to achieve?

    Download the Workflow Activity: Onboarding Example

    Remember the principle of constructive criticism.

    Don’t be afraid to critique the workflow but remember this can also be a team-building experience. Focus on how these changes will be mutually beneficial, not assigning blame for workflow friction.

    Post-review: Revised workflow

    The image contains a screenshot example of a revised workflow.

    Final check

    • Do we need to run this by Legal?
    • Have we included too many sub-processes? Not enough?
    • Is the flowchart easy to read and follow?

    Decide how often this workflow will be revised.

    • Is this workflow part of a larger piece of documentation that has a set review cadence? Where is it stored?
    • If not, what is a realistic time frame for regular review?
    • Who will own this process in an ongoing way and be in charge of convening a future review working group?

    Validation with stakeholders

    • What documentation does the flowchart belong to? When will you review it again?
    • Who do you need to validate the flowchart with?

    Share the flowchart and set up a review meeting.

    • Walk through the workflow with stakeholders who did not participate in building it.
    • Do they find it easy to follow?
    • Can they identify missing steps?

    Don’t waste time building shelfware.

    Establish a review cadence to ensure the flowchart is a living document that people actually use.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Bibliography

    Bushkill, Claire. “The top 5 ways to automate your onboarding checklist.” Rippling Blog. 18 Mar 2022. Accessed 29 Nov 2022. Ha https://www.rippling.com/blog/the-top-5-ways-to-automate-your-onboarding-checklist
    Carucci, Ron. “To Retain New Hires, Spend More Time Onboarding Them.” Harvard Business Review, 3 Dec 2018
    Haddadpoor, Asefeh, et al. “Process Documentation: A Model for Knowledge Management in Organizations.” Materia Socio-Medica, vol. 27, no. 5, Oct. 2015, pp. 347–50. PubMed Central, https://doi.org/10.5455/msm.2015.27.347-350.
    King, Melissa. “New hire checklist: An employee onboarding checklist template for 2022.” Zapier. 14 Jul 2022. Accessed 29 Nov 2022. https://zapier.com/blog/onboarding-checklist/
    Uzialko, Adam. “What Does Poor Onboarding Really Do to Your Team?” Business News Daily. 23 Jan 2023.
    https://www.manageengine.com/products/service-desk...

    Contributors

    Sandi Conrad, Principal Advisory Director, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz, Executive Counselor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Allison Kinnaird, Practice Lead, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Natalie Sansone, Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}117|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,049 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 8 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • IT leaders do not have a single holistic view of how their 45 IT processes are operating.
    • Expecting any single individual to understand the details of all 45 IT processes is unrealistic.
    • Problems in performance only become evident when the process has already failed.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.
    • Don’t measure things just because you can; change what you measure as your organization matures.

    Impact and Result

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT Metrics Library to review typical KPIs for each of the 45 process areas and select those that apply to your organization.
    • Configure your IT Management Dashboard to record your selected KPIs and start to measure performance.
    • Set up the cadence for review of the KPIs and develop action plans to improve low-performing indicators.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to develop your KPI program that leads to improved performance.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Choose the KPIs

    Identify the KPIs that matter to your organization’s goals.

    • Create a Holistic IT Dashboard – Phase 1: Choose the KPIs
    • IT Metrics Library

    2. Build the Dashboard

    Use the IT Management Dashboard on the Info-Tech website to display your chosen KPIs.

    • Create a Holistic IT Dashboard – Phase 2: Build the Dashboard

    3. Create the Action Plan

    Use the review of your KPIs to build an action plan to drive performance.

    • Create a Holistic IT Dashboard – Phase 3: Build the Action Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify What to Measure (Offsite)

    The Purpose

    Determine the KPIs that matter to your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify organizational goals

    Identify IT goals and their organizational goal alignment

    Identify business pain points

    Activities

    1.1 Identify organizational goals.

    1.2 Identify IT goals and organizational alignment.

    1.3 Identify business pain points.

    Outputs

    List of goals and pain points to create KPIs for

    2 Configure the Dashboard Tool (Onsite)

    The Purpose

    Learn how to configure and use the IT Management Dashboard.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured IT dashboard

    Initial IT scorecard report

    Activities

    2.1 Review metrics and KPI best practices.

    2.2 Use the IT Metrics Library.

    2.3 Select the KPIs for your organization.

    2.4 Use the IT Management Dashboard.

    Outputs

    Definition of KPIs to be used, data sources, and ownership

    Configured IT dashboard

    3 Review and Develop the Action Plan

    The Purpose

    Learn how to review and plan actions based on the KPIs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Lead KPI review to actions to improve performance

    Activities

    3.1 Create the scorecard report.

    3.2 Interpret the results of the dashboard.

    3.3 Use the IT Metrics Library to review suggested actions.

    Outputs

    Initial IT scorecard report

    Action plan with initial actions

    4 Improve Your KPIs (Onsite)

    The Purpose

    Use your KPIs to drive performance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improve your metrics program to drive effectiveness

    Activities

    4.1 Develop your action plan.

    4.2 Execute the plan and tracking progress.

    4.3 Develop new KPIs as your practice matures.

    Outputs

    Understanding of how to develop new KPIs using the IT Metrics Library

    5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up (Offsite)

    The Purpose

    Ensure all documentation and plans are complete.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documented next steps

    Activities

    5.1 Complete IT Metrics Library documentation.

    5.2 Document decisions and next steps.

    Outputs

    IT Metrics Library

    Action plan

    Further reading

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Measurement alone provides only minimal improvements

    It’s difficult for CIOs and other top-level leaders of IT to know if everything within their mandate is being managed effectively. Gaining visibility into what’s happening on the front lines without micromanaging is a challenge most top leaders face.

    Understanding Info-Tech’s Management and Governance Framework of processes that need to be managed and being able to measure what’s important to their organization's success can give leaders the ability to focus on their key responsibilities of ensuring service effectiveness, enabling increased productivity, and creating the ability for their teams to innovate.

    Even if you know what to measure, the measurement alone will lead to minimal improvements. Having the right methods in place to systematically collect, review, and act on those measurements is the differentiator to driving up the maturity of your IT organization.

    The tools in this blueprint can help you identify what to measure, how to review it, and how to create effective plans to improve performance.

    Tony Denford

    Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • IT leaders do not have a single holistic view of how their IT processes are operating.
    • Expecting any single individual to understand the details of all IT processes is unrealistic.
    • Problems in performance only become evident when the process has already failed.

    Common Obstacles

    • Business changes quickly, and what should be measured changes as a result.
    • Most measures are trailing indicators showing past performance.
    • Measuring alone does not result in improved performance.
    • There are thousands of operational metrics that could be measured, but what are the right ones for an overall dashboard?

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT Metrics Library to review typical KPIs for each of the process areas and select those that apply to your organization.
    • Configure your IT Management Dashboard to record your selected KPIs and start to measure performance.
    • Set up the cadence for review of the KPIs and develop action plans to improve low-performing indicators.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Mature your IT department by aligning your measures with your organizational goals. Acting early when your KPIs deviate from the goals leads to improved performance.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations quickly choose holistic measures, review the results, and devise action plans.

    • The sheer number of possible metrics can be overwhelming. Choose metrics from our IT Metrics Library or choose your own, but always ensure they are in alignment with your organizational goals.
    • Ensure your dashboard is balanced across all 45 process areas that a modern CIO is responsible for.
    • Finding leading indicators to allow your team to be proactive can be difficult if your team is focused on the day-to-day operational tasks.
    • It can be time consuming to figure out what to do if an indicator is underperforming.

    Build your dashboard quickly using the toolset in this research and move to improvement actions as soon as possible.

    The image is a bar graph, titled KPI-based improvements. On the X-axis are four categories, each with one bar for Before KPIs and another for After KPIs. The categories are: Productivity; Fire Incidents; Request Response Time; and Savings.

    Productivity increased by 30%

    Fire/smoke incidents decreased by 25% (high priority)

    Average work request response time reduced by 64%

    Savings of $1.6 million in the first year

    (CFI, 2013)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • What should be measured can change over time as your organization matures and the business environment changes. Understanding what creates business value for your organization is critical.
    • Organizations almost always focus on past result metrics. While this is important, it will not indicate when you need to adjust something until it has already failed.
    • It’s not just about measuring. You also need to review the measures often and act on the biggest risks to your organization to drive performance.

    Don’t get overwhelmed by the number of things you can measure. It can take some trial and error to find the measures that best indicate the health of the process.

    The importance of frequent review

    35% - Only 35% of governing bodies review data at each meeting. (Committee of University Chairs, 2008)

    Common obstacles

    Analysis paralysis

    Poor data can lead to incorrect conclusions, limit analysis, and undermine confidence in the value of your dashboard.

    Achieving perfect data is extremely time consuming and may not add much value. It can also be an excuse to avoid getting started with metrics and analytics.

    Data quality is a struggle for many organizations. Consider how much uncertainty you can tolerate in your analysis and what would be required to improve your data quality to an acceptable level. Consider cost, technological resources, people resources, and time required.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Analytics are only as good as the data that informs it. Aim for just enough data quality to make informed decisions without getting into analysis paralysis.

    Common obstacles

    The problem of surrogation

    Tying KPIs and metrics to performance often leads to undesired behavior. An example of this is the now infamous Wells Fargo cross-selling scandal, in which 3.5 million credit card and savings accounts were opened without customers’ consent when the company incented sales staff to meet cross-selling targets.

    Although this is an extreme example, it’s an all-too-common phenomenon.

    A focus on the speed of closure of tickets often leads to shortcuts and lower-quality solutions.

    Tying customer value to the measures can align the team on understanding the objective rather than focusing on the measure itself, and the team will no longer be able to ignore the impact of their actions.

    Surrogation is a phenomenon in which a measure of a behavior replaces the intent of the measure itself. People focus on achieving the measure instead of the behavior the measure was intended to drive.

    Info-Tech’s thought model

    The Threefold Role of the IT Executive Core CIO Objectives
    IT Organization - Manager A - Optimize the Effectiveness of the IT Organization
    Enterprise - Partner B - Boost the Productivity of the Enterprise
    Market - Innovator C - Enable Business Growth Through Technology

    Low-Maturity Metrics Program

    Trailing indicators measure the outcomes of the activities of your organization. Hopefully, the initiatives and activities are aligned with the organizational goals.

    High-Maturity Metrics Program

    The core CIO objectives align with the organizational goals, and teams define leading indicators that show progress toward those goals. KPIs are reviewed often and adjustments are made to improve performance based on the leading indicators. The results are improved outcomes, greater transparency, and increased predictability.

    The image is a horizontal graphic with multiple text boxes. The first (on the left) is a box that reads Organizational Goals, second a second box nested within it that reads Core CIO Objectives. There is an arrow pointing from this box to the right. The arrow connects to a text box that reads Define leading indicators that show progress toward objectives. To the right of that, there is a title Initiatives & activities, with two boxes beneath it: Processes and Projects. Below this middle section, there is an arrow pointing left, with the text: Adjust behaviours. After this, there is an arrow pointing right, to a box with the title Outcomes, and the image of an unlabelled bar graph.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Adopt an iterative approach to develop the right KPIs for your dashboard

    Periodically: As appropriate, review the effectiveness of the KPIs and adjust as needed.

    Frequently: At least once per month, but the more frequent, the more agility your organization will have.

    The image shows a series of steps in a process, each connected by an arrow. The process is iterative, so the steps circle back on themselves, and repeat. The process begins with IT Metrics Library, then Choose or build KPIs, then Build Dashboard, then Review KPIs and Create action plan. Review KPIs and Create action plan are steps that the graphic indicates should be repeated, so the arrows are arranged in a circle around these two items. Following that, there is an additional step: Are KPIs and action plans leading to improved results? After this step, we return to the Choose or build KPIs step.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Quickly identify the KPIs that matter to your organization using the IT Metrics Library.
    2. Build a presentable dashboard using the IT Management Dashboard available on the Info-Tech website.
    3. When indicators show underperformance, quickly get them back on track using the suggested research in the IT Metrics Library.
    4. If your organization’s needs are different, define your own custom metrics using the same format as the IT Metrics Library.
    5. Use the action plan tool to keep track of progress

    Info-Tech’s methodology for creating a holistic IT dashboard

    1. Choose the KPIs 2. Build the Dashboard 3. Create the Action Plan
    Phase Steps
    1. Review available KPIs
    2. Select KPIs for your organization
    3. Identify data sources and owners
    1. Understand how to use the IT Management Dashboard
    2. Build and review the KPIs
    1. Prioritize low-performing indicators
    2. Review suggested actions
    3. Develop your action plan
    Phase Outcomes A defined and documented list of the KPIs that will be used to monitor each of the practice areas in your IT mandate A configured dashboard covering all the practice areas and the ability to report performance in a consistent and visible way An action plan for addressing low-performing indicators

    Insight summary

    Mature your IT department by aligning your measures with your organizational goals. Acting early when your KPIs deviate from the goals leads to improved performance.

    Don’t just measure things because you can. Change what you measure as your organization becomes more mature.

    Select what matters to your organization

    Measure things that will resolve pain points or drive you toward your goals.

    Look for indicators that show the health of the practice, not just the results.

    Review KPIs often

    Ease of use will determine the success of your metrics program, so keep it simple to create and review the indicators.

    Take action to improve performance

    If indicators are showing suboptimal performance, develop an action plan to drive the indicator in the right direction.

    Act early and often.

    Measure what your customers value

    Ensure you understand what’s valued and measure whether the value is being produced. Let front-line managers focus on tactical measures and understand how they are linked to value.

    Look for predictive measures

    Determine what action will lead to the desired result and measure if the action is being performed. It’s better to predict outcomes than react to them.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    IT Metrics Library

    Customize the KPIs for your organization using the IT Metrics Library

    IT Metrics Library Action Plan

    Keep track of the actions that are generated from your KPI review

    Key deliverable:

    IT Management Dashboard and Scorecard

    The IT Overall Scorecard gives a holistic view of the performance of each IT function

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • An IT dashboard can help IT departments understand how well they are performing against key indicators.
    • It can allow IT teams to demonstrate to their business partners the areas they are focusing on.
    • Regular review and action planning based on the results will lead to improved performance, efficiency, and effectiveness.
    • Create alignment of IT teams by focusing on common areas of performance.

    Business Benefits

    • Ensure alignment and transparency between the business and IT.
    • Understand the value that IT brings to the operation and strategic initiatives of your organization.
    • Understand the contribution of the IT team to achieving business outcomes.
    • Focus IT on the areas that are important to you by requesting new measures as business needs change.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Utilize the existing IT Metrics Library and IT Dashboard tools to quickly kick off your KPI program

    • Developing the metrics your organization should track can be very time consuming. Save approximately 120 hours of effort by choosing from the IT Metrics Library.
    • The need for a simple method to display your KPIs means either developing your own tool or buying one off the shelf. Use the IT Management Dashboard to quickly get your KPI program up and running. Using these tools will save approximately 480 hours.
    • The true value of this initiative comes from using the KPIs to drive performance.

    Keeping track of the number of actions identified and completed is a low overhead measure. Tracking time or money saved is higher overhead but also higher value.

    The image is a screen capture of the document titled Establish Baseline Metrics. It shows a table with the headings: Metric, Current, Goal.

    The image is a chart titled KPI benefits. It includes a legend indicating that blue bars are for Actions identified, purple bars are for Actions completed, and the yellow line is for Time/money saved. The graph shows Q1-Q4, indicating an increase in all areas across the quarters.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Using data-driven decision making to drive stability and increase value

    Industry: Government Services

    Source: Info-Tech analyst experience

    Challenge

    A newly formed application support team with service desk responsibilities was becoming burned out due to the sheer volume of work landing on their desks. The team was very reactive and was providing poor service due to multiple conflicting priorities.

    To make matters worse, there was a plan to add a major new application to the team’s portfolio.

    Solution

    The team began to measure the types of work they were busy doing and then assessed the value of each type of work.

    The team then problem solved how they could reduce or eliminate their low-value workload.

    This led to tracking how many problems were being resolved and improved capabilities to problem solve effectively.

    Results

    Upon initial data collection, the team was performing 100% reactive workload. Eighteen months later slightly more than 80% of workload was proactive high-value activities.

    The team not only was able to absorb the additional workload of the new application but also identified efficiencies in their interactions with other teams that led to a 100% success rate in the change process and a 92% decrease in resource needs for major incidents.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostic and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 - Choose the KPIs

    Call #1: Scope dashboard and reporting needs.

    Call #2: Learn how to use the IT Metrics Library to select your metrics.

    Phase 2 – Build the Dashboard

    Call #3: Set up the dashboard.

    Call #4: Capture data and produce the report.

    Phase 3 – Create the Action Plan

    Call #5: Review the data and use the metrics library to determine actions.

    Call #6: Improve the KPIs you measure.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 5 and 8 calls over the course of 2 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Identify What to Measure Configure the Dashboard Tool Review and Develop the Action Plan Improve Your KPIs Compile Workshop Output
    Activities

    1.1 Identify organizational goals.

    1.2 Identify IT goals and organizational alignment.

    1.3 Identify business pain points.

    2.1 Determine metrics and KPI best practices.

    2.2 Learn how to use the IT Metrics Library.

    2.3 Select the KPIs for your organization.

    2.4 Configure the IT Management Dashboard.

    3.1 Create the scorecard report.

    3.2 Interpret the results of the dashboard.

    3.3 Use the IT Metrics Library to review suggested actions.

    4.1 Develop your action plan.

    4.2 Execute the plan and track progress.

    4.3 Develop new KPIs as your practice matures.

    5.1 Complete the IT Metrics Library documentation.

    5.2 Document decisions and next steps.

    Outcomes 1. List of goals and pain points that KPIs will measure

    1. Definition of KPIs to be used, data sources, and ownership

    2. Configured IT dashboard

    1. Initial IT scorecard report

    2. Action plan with initial actions

    1. Understanding of how to develop new KPIs using the IT Metrics Library

    1. IT Metrics Library documentation

    2. Action plan

    Phase 1

    Choose the KPIs

    Phase 1

    1.1 Review Available KPIs

    1.2 Select KPIs for Your Org.

    1.3 Identify Data Sources and Owners

    Phase 2

    2.1 Understand the IT Management Dashboard

    2.2 Build and Review the KPIs

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Low-Performing Indicators

    3.2 Review Suggested Actions

    3.3 Develop the Action Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Reviewing and selecting the KPIs suggested in the IT Metrics Library.

    Identifying the data source for the selected KPI and the owner responsible for data collection.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Step 1.1

    Review Available KPIs

    Activities

    1.1.1 Download the IT Metrics Library and review the KPIs for each practice area.

    Choose the KPIs

    Step 1.1 – Review Available KPIs

    Step 1.2 – Select KPIs for Your Org.

    Step 1.3 – Identify Data Sources and owners

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Downloading the IT Metrics Library

    Understanding the content of the tool

    Reviewing the intended goals for each practice area

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    Downloaded tool ready to select the KPIs for your organization

    Using the IT Metrics Library

    Match the suggested KPIs to the Management and Governance Framework

    The “Practice” and “Process” columns relate to each of the boxes on the Info-Tech Management and Governance Framework. This ensures you are measuring each area that needs to be managed by a typical IT department.

    The image shows a table on the left, and on the right, the Info-Tech Management and Governance Structure. Sections from the Practice and Process columns of the table have arrows emerging from them, pointing to matching sections in the framework.

    Using the IT Metrics Library

    Content for each entry

    KPI - The key performance indicator to review

    CSF - What needs to happen to achieve success for each goal

    Goal - The goal your organization is trying to achieve

    Owner - Who will be accountable to collect and report the data

    Data Source (typical) - Where you plan to get the data that will be used to calculate the KPI

    Baseline/Target - The baseline and target for the KPI

    Rank - Criticality of this goal to the organization's success

    Action - Suggested action if KPI is underperforming

    Blueprint - Available research to address typical underperformance of the KPI

    Practice/Process - Which practice and process the KPI represents

    1.1.1 Download the IT Metrics Library

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Ideas for which KPIs would be useful to track for each of the practice areas

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts

    Participants

    • IT senior leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    4 hours

    1. Click the link below to download the IT Metrics Library spreadsheet.
    2. Open the file and select the “Data Entry” tab.
    3. The sheet has suggested KPIs for each of the 9 practice areas and 45 processes listed in the Info-Tech Management and Governance Framework. You can identify this grouping in the “Practice” and “Process” columns.
    4. For each practice area, review the suggested KPIs and their associated goals and discuss as a team which of the KPIs would be useful to track in your organization.

    Download the IT Metrics Library

    Step 1.2

    Select KPIs for Your Organization

    Activities

    1.2.1 Select the KPIs that will drive your organization forward

    1.2.2 Remove unwanted KPIs from the IT Metrics Library

    Choose the KPIs

    Step 1.1 – Review Available KPIs

    Step 1.2 – Select KPIs for Your Org.

    Step 1.3 – Identify Data Sources and Owners

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Selecting the KPIs for your organization and removing unwanted KPIs from IT Metrics Library

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    A shortlist of selected KPIs

    1.2.1 Select the KPIs that will drive your organization forward

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • KPIs would be useful to track for each of the practice areas

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    4 hours

    1. Review the suggested KPIs for each practice area and review the goal.
    2. Some suggested KPIs are similar, so make sure the goal is appropriate for your organization.
    3. Pick up to three KPIs per practice.

    1.2.2 Remove unwanted KPIs

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • KPIs would be useful to track for each of the practice areas

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    0.5 hours

    1. To remove unwanted KPIs from the IT Metric Library Tool, select the unwanted row, right-click on the row, and delete it.
    2. The result should be up to three KPIs per practice area left on the spreadsheet.

    Step 1.3

    Identify data sources and owners

    Activities

    1.3.1 Document the data source

    1.3.2 Document the owner

    1.3.3 Document baseline and target

    Choose the KPIs

    Step 1.1 – Review Available KPIs

    Step 1.2 – Select KPIs for Your Org.

    Step 1.3 – Identify Data Sources and Owners

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Documenting for each KPI where you plan to get the data, who is accountable to collect and report the data, what the current baseline is (if available), and what the target is

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    A list of KPIs for your organization with appropriate attributes documented

    1.3 Identify data sources, owners, baseline, and target

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Completed IT Metrics Library

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    2 hours

    1. For each selected KPI, complete the owner, data source, baseline, and target if the information is available.
    2. If the information is not available, document the owner and assign them to complete the other columns.

    Phase 2

    Build the Dashboard

    Phase 1

    1.1 Review Available KPIs

    1.2 Select KPIs for Your Org.

    1.3 Identify Data Sources and Owners

    Phase 2

    2.1 Understand the IT Management Dashboard

    2.2 Build and Review the KPIs

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Low-Performing Indicators

    3.2 Review Suggested Actions

    3.3 Develop the Action Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Understanding the IT Management Dashboard

    Configuring the IT Management Dashboard and entering initial measures

    Produce thing IT Scorecard from the IT Management Dashboard

    Interpreting the results

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Step 2.1

    Understand the IT Management Dashboard

    Activities

    2.1.1 Logging into the IT Management Dashboard

    2.1.2 Understanding the “Overall Scorecard” tab

    2.1.3 Understanding the “My Metrics” tab

    Build the Dashboard

    Step 2.1 – Understand the IT Management Dashboard

    Step 2.2 – Build and review the KPIs

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Accessing the IT Management Dashboard

    Basic functionality of the tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    Understanding of how to administer the IT Management Dashboard

    2.1.1 Logging into the IT Management Dashboard

    Input

    • Info-Tech membership

    Output

    • Access to the IT Management Dashboard

    Materials

    • Web browser

    Participants

    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    0.5 hours

    1. Using your web browser, access your membership at infotech.com.
    2. Log into your Info-Tech membership account.
    3. Select the “My IT Dashboard” option from the menu (circled in red).
    4. If you cannot gain access to the tool, contact your membership rep.

    The image is a screen capture of the Info-Tech website, with the Login button at the top right of the window circled in red.

    2.1.2 Understanding the “Overall Scorecard” tab

    0.5 hours

    1. Once you select “My IT Dashboard,” you will be in the “Overall Scorecard” tab view.
    2. Scrolling down reveals the data entry form for each of the nine practice areas in the Info-Tech Management and Governance Framework, with each section color-coded for easy identification.
    3. Each of the section headers, KPI names, data sources, and data values can be updated to fit the needs of your organization.
    4. This view is designed to show a holistic view of all areas in IT that are being managed.

    2.1.3 Understanding the “My Metrics” tab

    0.5 hours

    1. On the “My Metrics” tab you can access individual scorecards for each of the nine practice areas.
    2. Below the “My Metrics” tab is each of the nine practice areas for you to select from. Each shows a different subset of KPIs specific to the practice.
    3. The functionality of this view is the same as the overall scorecard. Each title, KPI, description, and actuals are editable to fit your organization’s needs.
    4. This blueprint does not go into detail on this tab, but it is available to be used by practice area leaders in the same way as the overall scorecard.

    Step 2.2

    Build and review the KPIs

    Activities

    2.2.1 Entering the KPI descriptions

    2.2.2 Entering the KPI actuals

    2.2.3 Producing the IT Overall Scorecard

    Build the Dashboard

    Step 2.1 – Understand the IT Management Dashboard

    Step 2.2 – Build and review the KPIs

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Entering the KPI descriptions

    Entering the actuals for each KPI

    Producing the IT Overall Scorecard

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    An overall scorecard indicating the selected KPI performance

    2.2.1 Entering the KPI descriptions

    Input

    • Access to the IT Management Dashboard
    • IT Metrics Library with your organization’s KPIs selected

    Output

    • KPI descriptions entered into tool

    Materials

    • Web browser

    Participants

    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    1 hour

    1. Navigate to the IT Management Dashboard as described in section 2.1.1 and scroll down to the practice area you wish to complete.
    2. If needed, modify the section name to match your organization’s needs.
    3. Select “Add another score.”

    2.2.1 Entering the KPI descriptions

    1 hour

    1. Select if your metric is a custom metric or a standard metric available from one of the Info-Tech diagnostic tools.
    2. Enter the metric name you selected from the IT Metrics Library.
    3. Select the value type.
    4. Select the “Add Metric” button.
    5. The descriptions only need to be entered when they change.

    Example of a custom metric

    The image is a screen capture of the Add New Metric function. The metric type selected is Custom metric, and the metric name is Employee Engagement. There is a green Add Metric button, which is circled in red.

    Example of a standard metric

    The image is a screen capture of the Add New Metric function. The metric type selected is Standard Metric. The green Add Metric button at the bottom is circled in red.

    2.2.2 Entering the KPI actuals

    Input

    • Actual data from each data source identified

    Output

    • Actuals recorded in tool

    Materials

    • Web browser

    Participants

    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    1 hour

    1. Select the period you wish to create a scorecard for by selecting “Add New Period” or choosing one from the drop-down list.
    2. For each KPI on your dashboard, collect the data from the data source and enter the actuals.
    3. Select the check mark (circled) to save the data for the period.

    The image is a screen capture of the My Overall Scorecard Metrics section, with a button at the bottom that reads Add New Period circled in red

    The image has the text People and Resources at the top. It shows data for the KPI, and there is a check mark circled in red.

    2.2.3 Producing the IT Overall Scorecard

    Input

    • Completed IT Overall Scorecard data collection

    Output

    • IT Overall Scorecard

    Materials

    • Web browser

    Participants

    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    0.5 hours

    1. Select the period you wish to create a scorecard for by selecting from the drop-down list.
    2. Click the “Download as PDF” button to produce the scorecard.
    3. Once the PDF is produced it is ready for review or distribution.

    Phase 3

    Create the Action Plan

    Phase 1

    1.1 Review Available KPIs

    1.2 Select KPIs for Your Org.

    1.3 Identify Data Sources and Owners

    Phase 2

    2.1 Understand the IT Management Dashboard

    2.2 Build and Review the KPIs

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Low-Performing Indicators

    3.2 Review Suggested Actions

    3.3 Develop the Action Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Prioritizing low-performing indicators

    Using the IT Metrics Library to review suggested actions

    Developing your team’s action plan to improve performance

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Step 3.1

    Prioritize low-performing indicators

    Activities

    3.1.1 Determine criteria for prioritization

    3.1.2 Identify low-performing indicators

    3.1.3 Prioritize low-performing indicators

    Create the action plan

    Step 3.1 – Prioritize low-performing indicators

    Step 3.2 – Review suggested actions

    Step 3.3 – Develop the action plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Determining the criteria for prioritization of low-performing indicators

    Identifying low-performing indicators

    Prioritizing the low-performing indicators

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    A prioritized list of low-performing indicators that need remediation

    3.1.1 Determine criteria for prioritization

    Often when metrics programs are established, there are multiple KPIs that are not performing at the desired level. It’s easy to expect the team to fix all the low-performing indicators, but often teams are stretched and have conflicting priorities.

    Therefore it’s important to spend some time to prioritize which of your indicators are most critical to the success of your business.

    Also consider, if one area is performing well and others have multiple poor indicators, how do you give the right support to optimize the results?

    Lastly, is it better to score slightly lower on multiple measures or perfect on most but failing badly on one or two?

    3.1.1 Determine criteria for prioritization

    Input

    • Business goals and objectives
    • IT goals and objectives
    • IT organizational structure

    Output

    • Documented scorecard remediation prioritization criteria

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip charts

    Participants

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    1 hour

    1. Identify any KPIs that are critical and cannot fail without high impact to your organization.
    2. Identify any KPIs that cannot fail for an extended period and document the time period.
    3. Rank the KPIs from most critical to least critical in the IT Metrics Library.
    4. Look at the owner accountable for the performance of each KPI. If there are any large groups, reassess the ownership or rank.
    5. Periodically review the criteria to see if they’re aligned with meeting current business goals.

    3.1.2 Identify low-performing indicators

    Input

    • Overall scorecard
    • Overall scorecard (previous period)
    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • List of low-performing indicators that need remediation
    • Planned actions to improve performance

    Materials

    • Whiteboard or flip charts

    Participants

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    1 hour

    1. Review the overall scorecard for the current period. List any KPIs that are not meeting the target for the current month in the “Action Plan” tab of the IT Metrics Library.
    2. Compare current month to previous month. List any KPIs that are moving away from the long-term target documented in the tool IT Metrics Library.
    3. Revise the target in the IT Metrics Library as business needs change.

    3.1.3 Prioritize low-performing indicators

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Prioritized list of planned actions for low-performing indicators

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators
    • Task owners

    1 hour

    1. Look through the list of new and outstanding planned actions in the “Action Plan” tab of the IT Metrics Library, review progress, and prioritize outstanding items.
    2. Compare the list that needs remediation with the rank in the data entry tab.
    3. Adjust the priority of the outstanding and new actions to reflect the business needs.

    Step 3.2

    Review suggested actions

    Activities

    3.2.1 Review suggested actions in the IT Metrics Library

    Create the Action Plan

    Step 3.1 – Prioritize low-performing indicators

    Step 3.2 – Review suggested actions

    Step 3.3 – Develop the action plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Reviewing the suggested actions in the IT Metrics Library

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    An idea of possible suggested actions

    Take Action

    Knowing where you are underperforming is only half the battle. You need to act!

    • So far you have identified which indicators will tell you whether or not your team is performing and which indicators are most critical to your business success.
    • Knowing is the first step, but things will not improve without some kind of action.
    • Sometimes the action needed to course-correct is small and simple, but sometimes it is complicated and may take a long time.
    • Utilize the diverse ideas of your team to find solutions to underperforming indicators.
    • If you don’t have a viable simple solution, leverage the IT Metrics Library, which suggests high-level action needed to improve each indicator. If you need additional information, use your Info-Tech membership to review the recommended research.

    3.2.1 Review suggested actions in the IT Metrics Library

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Suggested actions

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators
    • Task owners

    0.5 hours

    1. For each of your low-performing indicators, review the suggested action and related research in the IT Metrics Library.

    Step 3.3

    Develop the action plan

    Activities

    3.3.1 Document planned actions

    3.3.2 Assign ownership of actions

    3.3.3 Determine timeline of actions

    3.3.4 Review past action status

    Create the action plan

    Step 3.1 – Prioritize low- performing indicators

    Step 3.2 – Review suggested actions

    Step 3.3 – Develop the action plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    Using the action plan tool to document the expected actions for low-performing indicators

    Assigning an owner and expected due date for the action

    Reviewing past action status for accountability

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators

    Outcomes of this step

    An action plan to invoke improved performance

    3.3.1 Document planned actions

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Planned actions

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators
    • Task owners

    1 hour

    1. Decide on the action you plan to take to bring the indicator in line with expected performance and document the planned action in the “Action Plan” tab of the IT Metrics Library.

    Info-Tech Insight

    For larger initiatives try to break the task down to what is likely manageable before the next review. Seeing progress can motivate continued action.

    3.3.2 Assign ownership of actions

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Identified owners for each action

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators
    • Task owners

    0.5 hours

    1. For each unassigned task, assign clear ownership for completion of the task.
    2. The task owner should be the person accountable for the task.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Assigning clear ownership can promote accountability for progress.

    3.3.3 Determine timeline of actions

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Expected timeline for each action

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators
    • Task owners

    0.5 hours

    1. For each task, agree on an estimated target date for completion.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If the target completion date is too far in the future, break the task into manageable chunks.

    3.3.4 Review past action status

    Input

    • IT Metrics Library

    Output

    • Complete action plan for increased performance

    Materials

    • IT Metrics Library

    Participants

    • Process area owners
    • Metrics program owners and administrators
    • Task owners

    0.5 hours

    1. For each task, review the progress since last review.
    2. If desired progress is not being made, adjust your plan based on your organizational constraints.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Seek to understand the reasons that tasks are not being completed and problem solve for creative solutions to improve performance.

    Measure the value of your KPI program

    KPIs only produce value if they lead to action

    • Tracking the performance of key indicators is the first step, but value only comes from taking action based on this information.
    • Keep track of the number of action items that come out of your KPI review and how many are completed.
    • If possible, keep track of the time or money saved through completing the action items.

    Keeping track of the number of actions identified and completed is a low overhead measure.

    Tracking time or money saved is higher overhead but also higher value.

    The image is a chart titled KPI benefits. It includes a legend indicating that blue bars are for Actions identified, purple bars are for Actions completed, and the yellow line is for Time/money saved. The graph shows Q1-Q4, indicating an increase in all areas across the quarters.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Identifying actions needed to remediate poor-performing KPIs
    2. Associating time and/or money savings as a result of actions taken
    Metric Current Goal
    Number of actions identified per month as a result of KPI review 0 TBD
    $ saved through actions taken due to KPI review 0 TBD
    Time saved through actions taken due to KPI review 0 TBD

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Through this project we have identified typical key performance indicators that are important to your organization’s effective management of IT.

    You’ve populated the IT Management Dashboard as a simple method to display the results of your selected KPIs.

    You’ve also established a regular review process for your KPIs and have a method to track the actions that are needed to improve performance as a result of the KPI review. This should allow you to hold individuals accountable for improvement efforts.

    You can also measure the effectiveness of your KPI program by tracking how many actions are identified as a result of the review. Ideally you can also track the money and time savings.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech Workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Select the KPIs for your organization

    Examine the benefits of the KPIs suggested in the IT Metrics Library and help selecting those that will drive performance for your maturity level.

    Build an action plan

    Discuss options for identifying and executing actions that result from your KPI review. Determine how to set up the discipline needed to make the most of your KPI review program.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Valence Howden

    Principal Research Director, CIO – Service Management Info-Tech Research Group

    • Valence has extensive experience in helping organizations be successful through optimizing how they govern themselves, how they design and execute strategies, and how they drive service excellence in all work.

    Tracy-Lynn Reid

    Practice Lead, CIO – People & Leadership Info-Tech Research Group

    • Tracy-Lynn covers key topics related to People & Leadership within an information technology context.

    Fred Chagnon

    Practice Lead, Infrastructure & Operations Info-Tech Research Group

    • Fred brings extensive practical experience in all aspects of enterprise IT Infrastructure, including IP networks, server hardware, operating systems, storage, databases, middleware, virtualization and security.

    Aaron Shum

    Practice Lead, Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    • With 20+ years of experience across IT, InfoSec, and Data Privacy, Aaron currently specializes in helping organizations implement comprehensive information security and cybersecurity programs as well as comply with data privacy regulations.

    Cole Cioran

    Practice Lead, Applications and Agile Development Info-Tech Research Group

    • Over the past twenty-five years, Cole has developed software; designed data, infrastructure, and software solutions; defined systems and enterprise architectures; delivered enterprise-wide programs; and managed software development, infrastructure, and business systems analysis practices.

    Barry Cousins

    Practice Lead, Applications – Project and Portfolio Mgmt. Info-Tech Research Group

    • Barry specializes in Project Portfolio Management, Help/Service Desk, and Telephony/Unified Communications. He brings an extensive background in technology, IT management, and business leadership.

    Jack Hakimian

    Vice President, Applications Info-Tech Research Group

    • Jack has close to 25 years of Technology and Management Consulting experience. He has served multi-billion-dollar organizations in multiple industries, including Financial Services and Telecommunications. Jack also served several large public sector institutions.

    Vivek Mehta

    Research Director, CIO Info-Tech Research Group

    • Vivek publishes on topics related to digital transformation and innovation. He is the author of research on Design a Customer-Centric Digital Operating Model and Create Your Digital Strategy as well as numerous keynotes and articles on digital transformation.

    Carlos Sanchez

    Practice Lead, Enterprise Applications Info-Tech Research Group

    • Carlos has a breadth of knowledge in enterprise applications strategy, planning, and execution.

    Andy Neill

    Practice Lead, Enterprise Architecture, Data & BI Info-Tech Research Group

    • Andy has extensive experience in managing technical teams, information architecture, data modeling, and enterprise data strategy.

    Michael Fahey

    Executive Counselor Info-Tech Research Group

    • As an Executive Counselor, Mike applies his decades of business experience and leadership, along with Info-Tech Research Group’s resources, to assist CIOs in delivering outstanding business results.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics to Ensure Business and User Satisfaction

    • Reinforce service orientation in your IT organization by ensuring your IT metrics generate value-driven resource behavior.

    Use Applications Metrics That Matter

    • It all starts with quality and customer satisfaction.

    Take Control of Infrastructure Metrics

    • Master the metrics maze to help make decisions, manage costs, and plan for change.

    Bibliography

    Bach, Nancy. “How Often Should You Measure Your Organization's KPIs?” EON, 26 June 2018. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    “The Benefits of Tracking KPIs – Both Individually and for a Team.” Hoopla, 30 Jan. 2017. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    Chepul, Tiffany. “Top 22 KPI Examples for Technology Companies.” Rhythm Systems, Jan. 2020. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    Cooper, Larry. “CSF's, KPI's, Metrics, Outcomes and Benefits” itSM Solutions. 5 Feb. 2010. Accessed Jan 2020.

    “CUC Report on the implementation of Key Performance Indicators: case study experience.” Committee of University Chairs, June 2008. Accessed Jan 2020.

    Harris, Michael, and Bill Tayler. “Don’t Let Metrics Undermine Your Business.” HBR, Sep.–Oct 2019. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    Hatari, Tim. “The Importance of a Strong KPI Dashboard.” TMD Coaching. 27 Dec. 2018. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    Roy, Mayu, and Marian Carter. “The Right KPIs, Metrics for High-performing, Cost-saving Space Management.” CFI, 2013. Accessed Jan 2020.

    Schrage, Michael, and David Kiron. “Leading With Next-Generation Key Performance Indicators.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 26 June 2018. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    Setijono, Djoko, and Jens J. Dahlgaard. “Customer value as a key performance indicator (KPI) and a key improvement indicator (KII)” Emerald Insight, 5 June 2007. Accessed Jan 2020.

    Skinner, Ted. “Balanced Scorecard KPI Examples: Comprehensive List of 183 KPI Examples for a Balanced Scorecard KPI Dashboard (Updated for 2020).” Rhythm Systems, Jan. 2020. Accessed Jan 2020.

    Wishart, Jessica. “5 Reasons Why You Need The Right KPIs in 2020” Rhythm Systems, 1 Feb. 2020. Accessed Jan. 2020.

    Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}69|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: End-User Computing Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /end-user-computing-strategy
    • Hybrid work environments, remote from anywhere and any device, and the security concerns that go hand-in-hand with these strategies have accelerated the move to VDI and DaaS.
    • IT departments can encounter many obstacles to VDI and DaaS, many of which will be determined by your business model and other factors, including complicated shared infrastructure, inadequate training or insufficient staff, and security and compliance concerns.
    • If you do not consider how your end user will be impacted, you will run into multiple issues that affect end-user satisfaction, productivity, and adoption.
    • How will you manage and navigate the right solution for your organization?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • In the world of VDI and DaaS, if you do not get buy-in from the end user, the rate of adoption and the overall success of the implementation will prove difficult to measure. It will be impossible to calculate ROI even as you feel the impact of your TCO.

    Impact and Result

    • The dimensions of end-user experience can be broken down into four distinct categories that will impact not only the end user but also the business: performance, availability, functionality, and security.
    • Picturing your landscape in this framework will help clearly define your considerations when deciding on whether a VDI or DaaS solution is right for your business.

    Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops Storyboard – A guide to the strategic, technical, and support implications that should be considered in support of a move to VDI or DaaS.

    By defining your goals, framing solutions based on end-user workloads, and understanding the pros and cons of various solutions, you can visualize what success looks like for your VDI/DaaS deployment. This includes defining your KPIs by end-user experience, knowing the decision gates for a successful deployment, and defining your hypothesis for value to make your decision more accurate and gain C-suite buy-in.

    • Considerations for a Move to Virtual Desktops Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    What strategic, technical, and support implications should be considered in support of a move to VDI or DaaS?

    Executive Summary

    Insight

    End-user experience is your #1 consideration

    Virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI)/desktop as a service (DaaS) users expect their user experience to be at least equal to that provided by a physical PC, and they do not care about the underlying infrastructure. If the experience is less, then IT has failed in the considerations for VDI/ DaaS. In this research we analyze the data that the IT industry tracks but doesn't use or sometimes even look at regarding user experience (UX).

    Identify the gaps in your IT resources that are critical to success

    Understanding the strengths and weaknesses in your in-house technical skills and business requirements will assist you in making the right decision when it comes to VDI or DaaS solutions. In the case of DaaS this will include a managed service provider for small to medium-sized IT teams. Many IT teams lack a seasoned IT project manager who can identify gaps, risks, and weaknesses in the organization's preparedness. Redeploy your IT staff to new roles that impact management and monitoring of UX.

    IT should think about VDI and DaaS solutions

    Ultimately, IT needs to reduce its complexity, increase user satisfaction, reduce management and storage costs, and maintain a secure and effective environment for both the end user and the business. They must also ensure productivity standards throughout the considerations, strategically, tactically, and in support of a move to a VDI or DaaS solution.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    With the evolution of VDI over the last 15-plus years, there has been a proliferation of solutions, such as Citrix desktop services, VMware Horizon, and in-house hypervisor solutions (e.g. ESX hosts). There has also been a great deal of growth and competition of DaaS and SaaS solutions in the cloud space. Hybrid work environments, remote from anywhere and any device, and the security concerns that go hand-in-hand with these strategies have certainly accelerated the move to VDI and DaaS.

    How will you manage and navigate the right solution for your organization?

    Common Obstacles

    IT departments can encounter many obstacles to VDI and DaaS, many of which will be determined by your business model and other factors, such as:

    • Complicated shared infrastructure such as federated multitenant partners and legacy app servers.
    • Inadequate in-house training or insufficient staff to execute migration or manage post-migration activates such as governance and retention policies.
    • Security, compliance, legal, and data classification concerns. Some security tools cannot be deployed in the cloud, limiting you to an on-premises solution.
    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By defining your end goals, framing solutions based on end-user workloads, and understanding the pros and cons of what solution(s) will meet your needs, you can visualize what success looks like.

    1. Define your KPIs by end-user experience.
    2. Knowing what the decision gates are for a successful VDI/DaaS deployment will prove out your selection process.
    3. Define your hypothesis for value. How you determine value will make your decision more accurate and gain C-suite buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every IT organization needs to be asking what success looks like. If you do not consider how your end user will be impacted, whether they are doing something as simple as holding a team meeting with voice and video or working with highly technical workloads on a virtual environment, you will run into multiple issues that affect end-user satisfaction, productivity, and adoption. Understand the tension metrics that may conflict with meeting business objectives and KPIs.

    Voice of the customer

    Client-Driven Insight

    Different industries have different requirements and issues, so they look at solutions differently.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If end-user experience is at the forefront of business requirements, then any solution that fits the business KPIs can be successful.

    Client Pain Point

    Description Indicators

    Flexible work environmentWhat VDI solution can support a work-from-anywhere scenario? Possible solutions: Azure Virtual Desktop, IGEL client, Citrix virtual apps, and desktop services.
    Security concerns Corporate resources need to be secure. Working with untrusted endpoints or unsecured locations. Using VPN-type solution.
    End-user experience What performance metrics should be used to evaluate UX? Are there issues around where the endpoint is located? What kind of link do they have to the virtual desktop? What solutions are there?
    Optimization of routing What routings need to take place to achieve reduced latency and improved experience?
    Multifactor authenticationSecurity features such as a multilayered MFA and corporate data protection.
    Business continuity What are the options when dealing with cloud outages, meeting SLAs, and building resilience?
    Optimizing app performance and response times Define users based on a multiuser environment. Engineers and designers require more CPU resources, which negatively impacts on other users. Optimize CPU to avoid this situation. MS Teams and video streaming apps are not performing in an optimized manner.
    Optimization of cloud costs Scalability and usage schedule. Minimize cloud costs with tools to handle workloads and usage.
    Third-party access outsourcingContractors and third parties accessing business resources need to control data and source code along with developer tools in a centrally managed SaaS.

    The enterprise end-user compute landscape is changing

    Starting on the left are three computer types 'Windows on a PC', 'Mac', and 'VDI on a Thick Client'. In the next part, the first two are combined into 'BYOD', and the tree begins at 'Win11'. Branches from Win11 are: 'DIY' which branches to 'Autopilot & Endpoint Manager (Intune)'; 'Outsource' which branches to 'Device as a Service' which brances to 'Dell', 'Lenovo', and 'HP'; and another branch from 'Outsource', 'Azure Desktop', Which snakes us around to the top of the diagram at 'VDI'. VDI branches to 'VDI on a thin client' and 'VDI on a Browser', then they both branch into 'DIY' which branches to 'Citrix', 'VMware', and 'Azure', and 'Outsource' which branches to 'Desktop as a Service Vendor'.

    Surveys are telling us a story

    Questions you should be asking before you create your RFP
    • What are the use cases and types of workloads?
    • What is the quality of the network connection and bandwidth for the user base?
    • What are the application requirements?
    • What type of end points does the user have and what is the configuration?
    • Where are the data storage containers, how are they accessed, and are there proximity constraints?
    • What is the business security and identity policy requirements?
    • What are the functional and nonfunctional requirements?
    • Will the virtual desktops be persistent or non-persistent?

    How would you rate the user experience on your VDI/DaaS solution?


    (Source: Hysolate, 2020)

    • 18% of CISOs say htue employees are happy with their company's VDI/DaaS solution
    • 82% say their employees are neutral or unhappy with their company's VDI/DaaS solution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Asking critical use-case questions should give you a clear picture of the end-user experience outcome.

    End-user KPI metrics are difficult to gather

    Security is always quoted as a primary justification for VDI/DaaS, while UX is far down the list of KPIs. WHY?

    IT engineers use network and performance metrics to manage end-user complaints of “slowness,” which in reality is not what the user is experiencing.

    IT needs to invest in more meaningful metrics to manage end-user pain:

    • Logon duration
    • App load time
    • App response time
    • Session response time
    • Graphic quality and responsiveness and latency
    • Application availability and performance
    Bar chart of justifications used for business investment in VDI/DaaS. The most used justification is 'IT Efficiency' at 38%, and highlighted in the 2nd last place is 'Employee Experience' at 11%.
    (Source: Enterprise Strategy Group, 2020)

    Dimensions of user experience

    The dimensions of end-user experience can be broken down into four distinct categories that will impact not only the end user but also the business.

    Picturing your landscape in this framework will help clearly define your considerations when deciding on whether a VDI or DaaS solution is right for your business. We will investigate how these scenarios impact the end user, what that means, and how that can guide the questions that you are asking as you move to an RFP.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In the world of VDI and DaaS, if you do not get buy-in from the end user, the rate of adoption and the overall success of the implementation will prove difficult to measure. It will be impossible to calculate ROI even as you feel the impact of your TCO.

    Three arrows pointing right with labels in sequence 'Dimensions', 'Operational Metrics', and 'Technical Capabilities/ Controls'

    Cycle diagram with many tiers, titled 'USER EXPERIENCE'. The first tier from the center has four items cycling clockwise 'Availability', 'Functionality', 'Security', and 'Performance'. The second tier is associated to the first tier: under Availability is 'Maintenance', 'Uptime', and 'Degradation'; under Functionality is 'Graphics Quality', 'User Friction', and 'Usability'; under Security is 'Endpoint Monitoring', 'Plane Control', and 'Identity'; under Performance is 'Response Time', 'Reliability', and 'Latency'. Around the edge on the third tier are many different related terms.

    KPIs and metrics

    • Understand the types of end-user activities that are most likely to be reported as being slow.
    • You need to know what storage, CPU, memory, and network resources are being used when the user performs those activities. In other words, what is the OS doing behind the scenes and what hardware is it using?
    • Once you have determined which resources are being used by the various activities you will have to monitor the UX metrics to see which OS, network, storage, or server configuration issue is causing the performance issue that the user is reporting.

    What IT measures

    Most business KPI objectives concentrate on business goals, whether it be cost containment, security, simplification, ease of management, or centralization of apps and data, but rarely is there a KPI for end-user experience.

    You can’t fix what you can’t see. Putting a cost benefit to end-user satisfaction may come in the form of productivity.

    This may be a central reason why VDI has not been widely adopted as an architecture since it came to the marketplace more than 15 years ago.

    Samples of different KPIs and metrics.

    VDI processes to monitor

    Monitoring end-user metrics will mitigate the tension between business KPIs and end-user satisfaction

    Metric

    Description

    End-User
    Experience

    PERFORMANCELogon durationOnce the user puts in their password, how long does it take to get to their desktop? What is the measurement and how do you measure?
    App load timeWhen an app is launched by the user there should be immediate indication that it is loading.
    App response timeWhen the user performs a task, there should be no wait time, or hourglass icon, waiting for the app to catch up to the user input. (There is no succinct way to measure this.)
    Session response timeHow does the user’s OS respond to I/O? The user should not experience any latency issues when doing a drag and drop, clicking on a menu item, or doing a search.
    AVAILABILITYSLAsWhen something goes wrong in the VDI/DaaS environment, how quickly can the user expect to get back to their tasks?
    Geographic locationWhen all other considerations are configured correctly, the user experience may be impacted by their location. So, for example, a user working out of Mexico and logging into a VDI may experience latency based on location compared to a user in California, for example, where the resources are stored, managed, and monitored.
    Application availabilityMuch like app load time and response time, the only factor affecting the user experience is the back-end load on the app itself, for example a CAD or heavy resource app not properly resourced.
    FUNCTIONALITYConfiguration of user desktopDegradation in functionality is caused by improper allocation of CPU, RAM, and GPU for the tasks at hand, creating a bad UX and end-user satisfaction score.
    Graphics quality and responsivenessThe user should have the same experience as if on their own physical machine. A video experience should not have any lag in it, for example. MS Teams should not have latency or sound quality issues.
    Predictive analysisContinuous performance and availability monitoring.
    END USERBrowser real user monitoring (RUM)A real-time view into how the web application is performing from the point of view of a real end user.
    Customer satisfaction scoreSurvey-based metrics on customer satisfaction.

    “If employees are the competitive edge and key differentiator for a business, I&O has a duty of care to ensure that the employees’ digital experience enables and does not impede the value of that asset.” (John Annand, Principal Director, Info-Tech Research Group)

    The case for VDI today

    Is security and data sovereignty the only reason?

    Technical capability
    AVAILABILITYVDI is a better fit than DaaS in organizations that have limited or unreliable internet connectivity.
    FUNCTIONALITYApplication flexibility: Resource-intensive applications may require specific virtual desktop configurations, for example in-house GIS apps, CAD, and gaming software requiring specific GPU configurations.
    SECURITYData protection is often stated as a need to maintain an on-premises VDI solution, ensuring sensitive and highly privileged data does not travel across the internet.
    AVAILABILITYWhile some cloud providers will allow you to bring your OS licensing along with a cloud migration, many subscriptions already include OS licensing, and you may be paying additional licensing costs.
    SECURITYVDI makes sense if security and control are primary business KPIs, the IT resources are experienced virtual infrastructure engineers and administrators, and funding is not a hindrance.
    PERFORMANCEWhen processing power is a functional requirement, such as CPU, GPU, and storage capacity, VDI offers performance benefits over a standard PC, reducing the need to deploy high-powered PCs to end users.

    “Though the desktops are moving to the cloud, accountability is not.” (Gary Bea, Director of Consulting Services and Technical Operations, Goliath Technologies)

    The case for DaaS

    Any device anywhere: key benefits of DaaS

    Technical capabilityChallenges
    AVAILABILITYDelivers a consistent user experience regardless of location or device.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The total cost of the solution will be higher than you anticipate, and management is complex. Additionally, your ability to set your conditions and controls is limited.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Depending on your technical abilities and experience with cloud services, you will likely benefit from professional third-party services, technical services, and consulting, which can be critical when deciding if DaaS can fit into your current IT architecture, processes, and security posture.

    SECURITYEnhances security posture by eliminating your client VPN and keeping sensitive data off the endpoint device.
    FUNCTIONALITYOnboard and offboard users quickly and securely.
    FUNCTIONALITYProvides centralize workspace management.
    FUNCTIONALITYScale up or down on demand with a consumption- and subscription-based contract.
    FUNCTIONALITYSignificantly reduce operational overhead compared to managing a traditional VDI deployment.

    Technical capability comparison

    Table comparing technical capabilities using a scale of circle quarters: zero quarters being 'Poor' and 4 quarters being 'Good'. There are six columns in the body, three of which are under 'VDI': 'Thin Client', 'Thick Client', and 'Web Client', and the other three are 'Desktop as a service', 'Device as a service', and 'Win11 w/ Autopilot & Intune'. Rows are split into four categories: In 'Performance' are 'Reliability', 'Response Time', and 'Latency'; in 'Availability' are 'Uptime' and 'Degradation'; in 'Functionality' are 'Usability', 'Graphics Quality', and 'User Friction'; in 'Security' are 'Endpoint Mgt.', 'Control Plane', and 'Identity'.

    X as an endpoint client

    From an end-user experience perspective, what makes sense in terms of usage and cost?

    Thin Client
    • ✓ Easy provisioning and simple to use and manage
    • ✓ Easy to secure and update
    • ✓ Less vulnerable to data loss
    • ✓ Easily scaled
    • ✓ Requires less power
    • ✓ Cheaper than PCs
    • x compared to a PC
    • x Not powerful enough to manage loads such as CAD
    • x Infrastructure and network must be robust and up to date to avoid possible network latency
    • Examples: Terminals, Dell Wyse 5070, Lenovo M625, IGEL, HP Thin Client, repurposed PCs, Chromebook
    Desktop as a Service
    • ✓ Flexibility: work from anywhere, on any device, collaboratively
    • ✓ Resource scalability not reliant on on-premises server hardware
    • ✓ Easy to configure, install, and maintain
    • ✓ Reliable and easy to provision
    • ✓ Centralized sensitive data cloud security
    • x Requires high-speed internet, especially for remote users
    • x Learning curve can cause user friction
    • x Workload configuration use cases
    • Examples: Citrix, VM Horizon, AWS WorkSpaces, WVD, BYOD
    Thick Client
    • ✓ Completely flexible, for use with on-premises or cloud infrastructure
    • ✓ Able to work offline
    • ✓ Multimedia or bandwidth-intensive resource processing
    • ✓ Higher server capacity due to less resource load on servers
    • x Higher maintenance and updates attention
    • x Patching, security, and data migration friction
    • x More security vulnerability
    • x Less cost effective
    • Examples: Windows, MacOS desktops, laptops, smartphones, tablets
    Device as a Service
    • ✓ Device supply chain flow fulfillment, services, and recovery
    • ✓ Able to update to new equipment more frequently
    • ✓ Scale up and down as needed
    • ✓ Better device backup, asset tracking , security, and EOL disposal
    • x Challenging risk management, regulatory obligations, and liabilities
    • x Change in helpdesk and business workflows
    • x Vendor may limit selection
    • Examples: PCs, smartphones, mobile computing devices, Lenovo, HP, Microsoft, Dell, Macs, iPads, iPhones
    Web Client
    • ✓ Can be accessed from any computer; only requires username and password
    • ✓ Client works with a URL, so browser-based
    • ✓ Updates are easier than on a Windows client
    • x Security risk and information leakage
    • x Dependent on internet access
    • x Unable to work on high-impact resource apps (e.g. CAD, graphics)
    • x Limited user base, less technical operations
    • Examples: Chrome, Edge, HTML5

    Security: on-premises versus cloud

    Security decisions based on risk tolerance

    • What is your risk tolerance? When deciding between VDI and DaaS, the first consideration is whether the business is better served with an on-premises or a cloud solution.
    • Low risk tolerance: Considerer data sovereignty, complex compliance requirements, and data classification. For example, at the Pentagon, DoD requires heavy compliance with security and data sovereignty. DaaS cloud providers may be in a better position to respond to threats and attacks in a timely manner.
    • Low risk tolerance: If the business mandates security tools that cannot be deployed in cloud solutions, VDI is a better solution.
    • Low risk tolerance: Smaller businesses that don’t have resources with the expertise and skill set to handle security are better served in cloud. Security operations centers (SOCs) are more likely to present in large corporations.
    • Low risk tolerance: When patching requires customization, for example in legacy applications, the ability to test patches is impacted, which may cause possible complications or failures.
    • High risk tolerance: For cloud-based solutions, patching is taken out of the IT team’s hands, and testing is done against the complete cloud solution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    What is the better security posture and control plane? Clarify your stakeholders’ objectives, then see if VDI is an adequate solution.

    Security needs for VDI and DaaS

    • IDENTITY AND ACCESS MANAGEMENT — MFA, authorization, provisioning, SSO, identity federation, data owners, workflows, role-based access control (RBAC), user lifecycle management
    • ENCRYPTION — TLS 1.3, and 256-bit, endpoint encryption, file encryption, AES, PKI, BitLocker
    • DATA LOSS PREVENTION — Centralized policy management, sensitive data detection, HIPAA, GDPR
    • ANTIVIRUS & PATCH MANAGEMENT — Group policy management, AV exclusions, anti-ransomware, keylogger mitigation
    • DDoS protection — HTTP, UDP flood mitigation, content delivery network, always-on services
    • ENDPOINT DETECTION & RESPONSE — Detect and react to advanced active attacks on endpoints

    Activity

    Define the virtual infrastructure solution for your end users

    1. Define and build your value hypothesis/proposition
      1. What is the business case? Who is championing the investment?
      2. Identify the project management team and stakeholders.
      3. Set goals to be achieved based on value.
      4. Identify KPIs and metrics to measure success.
    2. Identify use cases and personas
      1. Identify possible user friction (e.g. emotional, cognitive, interaction).
      2. Understand current infrastructure shortcomings/capabilities (e.g. network, security posture/tolerance, staffing needs, qualified technicians, end-user devices).
    3. Articulate use cases into functional and nonfunctional requirements
      1. Separate must haves and nice to haves.
      2. Categorize requirements into identifiable functionality capabilities.
      3. Review your outputs and identify “gotchas” using the MECE (mutually exclusive, collectively exhaustive) principle.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of a dashboard.Modernize and Transform Your End-User Computing Strategy

    Phase 3.2 of this research set covers virtual desktop infrastructure.

    Stock image of a world surrounded by clouds.Implement Desktop Virtualization and Transition to Everything as a Service

    Follow Info-Tech’s process for implementing the right desktop virtualization solution to create a project plan that will help ensure that you not only choose the right solution but also implement it effectively.

    Stock image of a finger pushing a button.Cloud Strategy Workbook

    Use this tool to assess cloud services (desktop-as-a-service).

    Stock image of a world surrounded by clouds.Desktop Virtualization TCO Calculator

    This tool is designed to help you understand what desktop virtualization looks like from a cost perspective.

    Bibliography

    Anderson, Joseph. “Five Ways VDI Will Grow in 2022 Thanks to Hybrid Work.” StratoDesk, 28 Feb. 2022. Web.

    Bowker, Mark. “Are Desktops Doomed? Trends in Digital Workspaces, VDI, and DaaS.” ESG, May 2020. Web.

    “The CISO's Dilemma: How Chief Information Security Officers Are Balancing Enterprise Endpoint Security and Worker Productivity in Response to COVID-19.” Hysolate, Oct. 2020. Web.

    King, Val. “Why the End-User Experience Is Not Good for Your Remote Workforce .” Whitehat Virtual Technologies, 2 Dec. 2021. Web.

    Perry, Yifat. “VDI vs DaaS: 5 Key Differences and 6 Leading Solutions.” NetApp, 26 Aug. 2020. Web.

    Rigg, Christian. “Best virtual desktop services 2022.” TechRadar, 20 Jan. 2022 . Web.

    Seget, Vladan. “Key metrics to consider when assessing the performance of your VDI/DaaS environment.” vladan.fr, 19 April 2021. Web.

    Spruijt, Ruben. “Why Should You Care About VDI and Desktop-as-a-Service?” Nutanix, 28 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Stowers, Joshua. “The Best Desktop as a Service (DaaS) Providers 2022.” business.com, 21 Dec. 2021. Web.

    “Virtual Desktop Infrastructure(VDI) Market 2022.” MarketWatch, 5 Jan. 2022. Web. Press release.

    Zamir, Tal. “VDI Security Best Practices: Busting the Myths.” Hysolate, 29 Nov. 2021. Web.

    Zychowicz, Paul. “Why do virtual desktop deployments fail?” Turbonomic Blog, 16 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}563|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Organizations are unaware of the capabilities of web analytics tools and unsure how to leverage these new technologies to enhance their web experience.
    • Traditional solutions offer only information and data about the activity on the website. It is difficult for organizations to understand the customer motivations and behavioral patterns using the data.
    • In addition, there is an overwhelming number of vendors offering various solutions. Understanding which solution best fits your business needs is crucial to avoid overspending.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Understanding organizational goals and business objectives is essential in effectively leveraging web analytics.
    • It is easy to get lost in a sea of expensive web analytical tools. Choosing tools that align with the business objectives will keep the costs of customer acquisition and retention to a minimum.
    • Beyond selection and implementation, leveraging web analytic tools requires commitment from the organization to continuously monitor key KPIs to ensure good customer web experience.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand what web analytic tools are and some key trends in the market space. Learn about top advanced analytic tools that help understand user behavior.
    • Discover top vendors in the market space and some of the top-level features they offer.
    • Understand how to use the metrics to gather critical insights about the website’s use and key initiatives for successful implementation.

    Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy Storyboard – A deck outlining the importance of web analytic tools and how they can be leveraged to meet your business needs.

    This research offers insight into web analytic tools, key trends in the market space, and an introduction to advanced web analytics techniques. Follow our five-step initiative to successfully select and implement web analytics tools and identify which baseline metrics to measure and continuously monitor for best results.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Leverage Web Analytics to Reinforce Your Web Experience Management Strategy

    Web analytics tools are the gateway to understanding customer behavior.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    In today’s world, users want to consume concise content and information quickly. Websites have a limited time to prove their usefulness to a new user. Content needs to be as few clicks away from the user as possible. Analyzing user behavior using advanced analytics techniques can help website designers better understand their audience.

    Organizations need to implement sophisticated analytics tools to track user data from their website. However, simply extracting data is not enough to understand the user motivation. A successful implementation of a web analytics tool will comprise both understanding what a customer does on the website and why the customer does what they do.

    This research will introduce some fundamental and advanced analytics tools and provide insight into some of the vendors in the market space.

    Photo of Sai Krishna Rajaramagopalan, Research Specialist, Applications − Enterprise Applications, Info-Tech Research Group. Sai Krishna Rajaramagopalan
    Research Specialist, Applications − Enterprise Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Web analytics solutions have emerged as applications that provide extensive information and data about users visiting your webpage. However, many organizations are unaware of the capabilities of these tools and unsure how to leverage these new technologies to enhance user experience.
    Common Obstacles
    • Traditional solutions offer information and data about customers’ activity on the website but no insight into their motivations and behavioral patterns.
    • In addition, an overwhelming number of vendors are offering various solutions. Understanding which solution best fits your business needs is crucial to avoid overspending.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • This research is aimed to help you understand what web analytic tools are and some key trends in the market space. Learn about top advanced analytic tools that help you understand user behavior. Discover top vendors in the market space and some of the high-level features offered.
    • This research also explains techniques and metrics to gather critical insights about your website’s use and will aid in understanding users’ motivations and patterns and better predict their behavior on the website.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is easy to get lost in a sea of expensive web analytics tools. Choose tools that align with your business objectives to keep the costs of customer acquisition and retention to a minimum.

    Ensure the success of your web analytics programs by following five simple steps

    1. ORGANIZATIONAL GOALS

    The first key step in implementing and succeeding with web analytics tools is to set clearly defined organizational goals, e.g. improving product sales.

    3. KPI METRICS

    Define key performance indicators (KPIs) that help track the organization’s performance, e.g. number of page visits, conversion rates, bounce rates.

    5. REVIEW

    Continuous improvement is essential to succeed in understanding customers. The world is a dynamic place, and you must constantly revise your organizational goals, business objectives, and KPIs to remain competitive.

    Centerpiece representing the five surrounding steps.

    2. BUSINESS OBJECTIVES

    The next step is to lay out business objectives that help to achieve the organization’s goals, e.g. to increase customer leads, increase customer transactions, increase web traffic.

    4. APPLICATION SELECTION

    Understand the web analytics tool space and which combination of tools and vendors best fits the organization’s goals.

    Web Analytics Introduction

    Understand traditional and advanced tools and their capabilities.

    Understanding web analytics

    • Web analytics is the branch of analytics that deals with the collection, reporting, and analysis of data generated by users visiting and interacting with a website.
    • The purpose of web analytics is to measure user behavior, optimize the website’s user experience and flow, and gain insights that help meet business objectives like increasing conversions and sales.
    • Web analytics allows you to see how your website is performing and how people are acting while on your website. What’s important is what you can do with this knowledge.
    • Data collected through web analytics may include traffic sources, referring sites, page views, paths taken, and conversion rates. The compiled data often forms a part of customer relationship management analytics to facilitate and streamline better business decisions.
    • Having strong web analytics is important in understanding customer behavior and fine-tuning marketing and product development approaches accordingly.
    Example of a web analytics dashboard.

    Why you should leverage web analytics

    Leveraging web analytics allows organizations to better understand their customers and achieve their business goals.

    The global web analytics market size is projected to reach US$5,156.3 million by 2026, from US$2,564 million in 2019, at a CAGR of 10.4% during 2021-2026. (Source: 360 Research Reports, 2021) Of the top 1 million websites with the highest traffic, there are over 3 million analytics technologies used. Google Analytics has the highest market share, with 50.3%. (Source: “Top 1 Million Sites,” BuiltWith, 2022)
    Of the 200 million active websites, 57.3% employ some form of web analytics tool. This trend is expected to grow as more sophisticated tools are readily available at a cheaper cost. (Source: “On the Entire Internet,” BuiltWith, 2022; Siteefy, 2022) A three-month study by Contentsquare showed a 6.9% increase in traffic, 11.8% increase in page views, 12.4% increase in transactions, and 3.6% increase in conversion rates through leveraging web analytics. (Source: Mordor Intelligence, 2022)

    Case Study

    Logo for Ryanair.
    INDUSTRY
    Aviation
    SOURCE
    AT Internet
    Web analytics

    Ryanair is a low-fare airline in Europe that receives nearly all of its bookings via its website. Unhappy with its current web analytics platform, which was difficult to understand and use, Ryanair was looking for a solution that could adapt to its requirements and provide continuous support and long-term collaboration.

    Ryanair chose AT Internet for its intuitive user interface that could effectively and easily manage all the online activity. AT was the ideal partner to work closely with the airline to strengthen strategic decision making over the long term, increase conversions in an increasingly competitive market, and increase transactions on the website.

    Results

    By using AT Internet Web Analytics to improve email campaigns and understand the behavior of website visitors, Ryanair was able to triple click-through rates, increase visitor traffic by 16%, and decrease bounce rate by 18%.

    Arrows denoting increases or decreases in certain metrics: '3x increase in click-through rates', '16% increase in visitor traffic', '18% decrease in bounce rate'.

    Use traditional web analytics tools to understand your consumer

    What does the customer do?
    • Traditional web analytics allows organizations to understand what is happening on their website and what customers are doing. These tools deliver hard data to measure the performance of a website. Some of the data measured through traditional web analytics are:
    • Visit count: The number of visits received by a webpage.
    • Bounce rate: The percentage of visitors that leave the website after only viewing the first page compared to total visitors.
    • Referrer: The previous website that sent the user traffic to a specific website.
    • CTA clicks: The number of times a user clicks on a call to action (CTA) button.
    • Conversion rate: Proportion of users that reach the final outcome of the website.
    Example of a traditional web analytics dashboard.

    Use advanced web analytics techniques to understand your consumer

    Why does the customer do what they do?
    • Traditional web analytic tools fail to explain the motivation of users. Advanced analytic techniques help organizations understand user behavior and measure user satisfaction. The techniques help answer questions like: Why did a user come to a webpage? Why did they leave? Did they find what they were looking for? Some of the advanced tools include:
    • Heatmapping: A visual representation of where the users click, scroll, and move on a webpage.
    • Recordings: A recording of the mouse movement and clicks for the entire duration of a user’s visit.
    • Feedback forms and surveys: Voice of the customer tools allowing users to give direct feedback about websites.
    • Funnel exploration: The ability to visualize the steps users take to complete tasks on your site or app.
    Example of an advanced web analytics dashboard.

    Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

    Heatmapping
    • Heatmaps are used to visualize where users move their mouse, click, and scroll in a webpage.
    • Website heatmaps use a warm-to-cold color scheme to indicate user activity, with the warmest color indicating the highest visitor engagement and the coolest indicating the lowest visitor engagement.
    • Organizations can use this tool to evaluate the elements of the website that attract users and identify which sections require improvement to increase user engagement.
    • Website designers can make changes and compare the difference in user interaction to measure the effectiveness of the changes.
    • Scrollmaps help designers understand what the most popular scroll-depth of your webpage is – and that’s usually a prime spot for an important call to action.
    Example of a website with heatmapping overlaid.
    (Source: An example of a heatmap layered with a scrollmap from Crazy Egg, 2020)

    Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

    Funneling

    • Funnels are graphical representations of a customer’s journey while navigating through the website.
    • Funnels help organizations identify which webpage users land on and where users drop off.
    • Organizations can capture every user step to find the unique challenges between entry and completion. Identifying what friction stands between browsing product grids and completing a transaction allows web designers to then eliminate it.
    • Designers can use A/B testing to experiment with different design philosophies to compare conversion statistics.
    • Funneling can be expanded to cross-channel analytics by incorporating referral data, cookies, and social media analytics.
    Example of a bar chart created through funneling.

    Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

    Session recordings

    • Session recordings are playbacks of users’ interaction with the website on a single session. User interaction can vary between mouse clicks, keyboard input, and mouse scroll.
    • Recordings help organizations understand user motivation and help identify why users undertake certain tasks or actions on the webpage.
    • Playbacks can also be used to see if users are confused anywhere between the landing page and final transaction phase. This way, playbacks further help ensure visitors complete the funneling seamlessly.
    Example of a session recording featuring a line created by the mouse's journey.

    Apply industry-leading techniques to leverage web analytics

    Feedback and microsurveys

    • Feedback can be received directly from end users to help organizations improve the website.
    • Receiving feedback from users can be difficult, since not every user is willing to spend time to submit constructive and detailed feedback. Microsurveys are an excellent alternative.
    • Users can submit short feedback forms consisting of a single line or emojis or thumbs up or down.
    • Users can directly highlight sections of the page about which to submit feedback. This allows designers to quickly pinpoint areas for improvement. Additionally, web designers can play back recordings when feedback is submitted to get a clear idea about the challenges users face.
    Example of a website with a microsurvey in the corner.

    Market Overview

    Choose vendors and tools that best match your business needs.

    Top-level traditional features

    Feature Name

    Description

    Visitor Count Tracking Counts the number of visits received by a website or webpage.
    Geographic Analytics Uses location information to enable the organization to provide location-based services for various demographics.
    Conversion Tracking Measures the proportion of users that complete a certain task compared to total number of users.
    Device and Browser Analytics Captures and summarizes device and browser information.
    Bounce and Exit Tracking Calculates exit rate and bounce rate on a webpage.
    CTA Tracking Measures the number of times users click on a call to action (CTA) button.
    Audience Demographics Captures, analyzes, and displays customer demographic/firmographic data from different channels.
    Aggregate Traffic Reporting Works backward from a conversion or other key event to analyze the differences, trends, or patterns in the paths users took to get there.
    Social Media Analytics Captures information on social signals from popular services (Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, etc.).

    Top-level advanced features

    Feature Name

    Description

    HeatmappingShows where users have clicked on a page and how far they have scrolled down a page or displays the results of eye-tracking tests through the graphical representation of heatmaps.
    Funnel ExplorationVisualizes the steps users take to complete tasks on your site or app.
    A/B TestingEnables you to test the success of various website features.
    Customer Journey ModellingEffectively models and displays customer behaviors or journeys through multiple channels and touchpoints.
    Audience SegmentationCreates and analyzes discrete customer audience segments based on user-defined criteria or variables.
    Feedback and SurveysEnables users to give feedback and share their satisfaction and experience with website designers.
    Paid Search IntegrationIntegrates with popular search advertising services (i.e. AdWords) and can make predictive recommendations around areas like keywords.
    Search Engine OptimizationProvides targeted recommendations for improving and optimizing a page for organic search rankings (i.e. via A/B testing or multivariate testing).
    Session RecordingRecords playbacks of users scrolling, moving, u-turning, and rage clicking on your site.

    Evaluate software category leaders using SoftwareReviews’ vendor rankings and awards

    Logo for SoftwareReviews.
    Sample of SoftwareReviews' The Data Quadrant. The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    Sample of SoftwareReviews' The Emotional Footprint. The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    Logo for SoftwareReviews.
    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals. Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process. CLICK HERE to ACCESS

    Comprehensive software reviews
    to make better IT decisions

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization. User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. Combined with the insight of our expert analysts, our members receive unparalleled support in their buying journey.

    Top vendors in the web analytics space

    Logo for Google Analytics. Google Analytics provides comprehensive traditional analytics tools, free of charge, to understand the customer journey and improve marketing ROI. Twenty-four percent of all web analytical tools used on the internet are provided by Google analytics.
    Logo for Hotjar. Hotjar is a behavior analytics and product experience insights service that helps you empathize with and understand your users through their feedback via tools like heatmaps, session recordings, and surveys. Hotjar complements the data and insights you get from traditional web analytics tools like Google Analytics.
    Logo for Crazy Egg. Crazy Egg is a website analytics tool that helps you optimize your site to make it more user-friendly, more engaging, and more conversion-oriented. It does this through heatmaps and A/B testing, which allow you to see how people are interacting with your site.
    Logo for Amplitude Analytics. Amplitude Analytics provides intelligent insight into customer behavior. It offers basic functionalities like measuring conversion rate and engagement metrics and also provides more advanced tools like customer journey maps and predictive analytics capabilities through AI.

    Case Study

    Logo for Miller & Smith.
    INDUSTRY
    Real Estate
    SOURCE
    Crazy Egg

    Heatmaps and playback recordings

    Challenge

    Miller & Smith had just redesigned their website, but the organization wanted to make sure it was user-friendly as well as visually appealing. They needed an analytics platform that could provide information about where visitors were coming from and measure the effectiveness of the marketing campaigns.

    Solution

    Miller & Smith turned to Crazy Egg to obtain visual insights and track user behavior. They used heatmaps and playback recordings to see user activity within webpages and pinpoint any issues with user interface. In just a few weeks, Miller & Smith gained valuable data to work with: the session recordings helped them understand how users were navigating the site, and the heatmaps allowed them to see where users were clicking – and what they were skipping.

    Results

    Detailed reports generated by the solution allowed Miller & Smith team to convince key stakeholders and implement the changes easily. They were able to pinpoint what changes needed to be made and why these changes would improve their experience.

    Within few weeks, the bounce rate improved by 7.5% and goal conversion increased by 8.5% over a similar period the previous year.

    Operationalizing Web Analytics Tools

    Execute initiatives for successful implementation.

    Ensure success of your web analytics programs by following five simple steps

    1. ORGANIZATIONAL GOALS

    The first key step in implementing and succeeding with web analytics tools is to set clearly defined organizational goals, e.g. improving product sales.

    3. KPI METRICS

    Define key performance indicators (KPIs) that help track the organization’s performance, e.g. number of page visits, conversion rates, bounce rates.

    5. REVIEW

    Continuous improvement is essential to succeed in understanding customers. The world is a dynamic place, and you must constantly revise your organizational goals, business objectives, and KPIs to remain competitive.

    Centerpiece representing the five surrounding steps.

    2. BUSINESS OBJECTIVES

    The next step is to lay out business objectives that help to achieve the organization’s goals, e.g. to increase customer leads, increase customer transactions, increase web traffic.

    4. APPLICATION SELECTION

    Understand the web analytics tool space and which combination of tools and vendors best fits the organization’s goals.

    1.1 Understand your organization’s goals

    30 minutes

    Output: Organization’s goal list

    Materials: Whiteboard, Markers

    Participants: Core project team

    1. Identify the key organizational goals for both the short term and the long term.
    2. Arrange the goals in descending order of priority.

    Example table of goals ranked by priority and labeled short or long term.

    1.2 Align business objectives with organizational goals

    30 minutes

    Output: Business objectives

    Materials: Whiteboard, Markers

    Participants: Core project team

    1. Identify the key business objectives that help attain organization goals.
    2. Match each business objective with the corresponding organizational goals it helps achieve.
    3. Arrange the objectives in descending order of priority.

    Example table of business objectives ranked by priority and which organization goal they're linked to.

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Efficiently using website elements and CTA button placement
    2. Reducing friction between the landing page and end point
    3. Leveraging direct feedback from users to continuously improve customer experience

    1.3 Establish baseline metrics that you intend to improve via your web analytics tools

    30 minutes

    Example table with metrics, each with a current state and goal state.

    Accelerate your software selection project

    Vendor selection projects often demand extensive and unnecessary documentation.

    Software Selection Insight

    Balance the effort-to-information ratio required for a business impact assessment to keep stakeholders engaged. Use documentation that captures the key data points and critical requirements without taking days to complete. Stakeholders are more receptive to formal selection processes that are friction free.

    The Software Selection Workbook

    Work through the straightforward templates that tie to each phase of the Rapid Application Selection Framework, from assessing the business impact to requirements gathering.

    Sample of the Software Selection Workbook deliverable.

    The Vendor Evaluation Workbook

    Consolidate the vendor evaluation process into a single document. Easily compare vendors as you narrow the field to finalists.

    Sample of the Vendor Evaluation Workbook deliverable.

    The Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual

    Quickly explain the Rapid Application Selection Framework to your team while also highlighting its benefits to stakeholders.

    Sample of the Guide to Software Selection: A Business Stakeholder Manual deliverable.

    Revisit the metrics you identified and revise your goals

    Track the post-deployment results, compare the metrics, and set new targets for the next fiscal year.

    Example table of 'Baseline Website Performance Metrics' with the column 'Revised Target' highlighted.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of two people going over a contract. Modernize Your Corporate Website to Drive Business Value

    Drive higher user satisfaction and value through UX-driven websites.

    Stock image of a person using the cloud on their smartphone. Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution

    Your website is your company’s face to the world: select a best-of-breed platform to ensure you make a rock-star impression with your prospects and customers!

    Stock image of people studying analytics. Create an Effective Web Redesign Strategy

    Ninety percent of web redesign projects, executed without an effective strategy, fail to accomplish their goals.

    Bibliography

    "11 Essential Website Data Factors and What They Mean." CivicPlus, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    “Analytics Usage Distribution in the Top 1 Million Sites.” BuiltWith, 1 Nov. 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    "Analytics Usage Distribution on the Entire Internet." BuiltWith, 1 Nov. 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Bell, Erica. “How Miller and Smith Used Crazy Egg to Create an Actionable Plan to Improve Website Usability.” Crazy Egg, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Brannon, Jordan. "User Behavior Analytics | Enhance The Customer Journey." Coalition Technologies, 8 Nov 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Cardona, Mercedes. "7 Consumer Trends That Will Define The Digital Economy In 2021." Adobe Blog, 7 Dec 2020. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    “The Finer Points.“ Analytics Features. Google Marketing Platform, 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Fitzgerald, Anna. "A Beginner’s Guide to Web Analytics." HubSpot, 21 Sept 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    "Form Abandonment: How to Avoid It and Increase Your Conversion Rates." Fullstory Blog, 7 April 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Fries, Dan. "Plug Sales Funnel Gaps by Identifying and Tracking Micro-Conversions." Clicky Blog, 9 Dec 2019. Accessed 7 July 2022.

    "Funnel Metrics in Saas: What to Track and How to Improve Them?" Userpilot Blog, 23 May 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Garg, Neha. "Digital Experimentation: 3 Key Steps to Building a Culture of Testing." Contentsquare, 21 June 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    “Global Web Analytics Market Size, Status and Forecast 2021-2027.” 360 Research Reports, 25 Jan. 2021. Web.

    Hamilton, Stephanie. "5 Components of Successful Web Analytics." The Daily Egg, 2011. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    "Hammond, Patrick. "Step-by-Step Guide to Cohort Analysis & Reducing Churn Rate." Amplitude, 15 July 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Hawes, Carry. "What Is Session Replay? Discover User Pain Points With Session Recordings." Dynatrace, 20 Dec 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Huss, Nick. “How Many Websites Are There in the World?” Siteefy, 8 Oct. 2022. Web.

    Nelson, Hunter. "Establish Web Analytics and Conversion Tracking Foundations Using the Google Marketing Platform.” Tortoise & Hare Software, 29 Oct 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    "Product Analytics Vs Product Experience Insights: What’s the Difference?" Hotjar, 14 Sept 2021. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    “Record and watch everything your visitors do." Inspectlet, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    “Ryanair: Using Web Analytics to Manage the Site’s Performance More Effectively and Improve Profitability." AT Internet, 1 April 2020. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Sibor, Vojtech. "Introducing Cross-Platform Analytics.” Smartlook Blog, 5 Nov 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    "Visualize Visitor Journeys Through Funnels.” VWO, n.d. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    "Web Analytics Market Share – Growth, Trends, COVID-19 Impact, and Forecasts (2022-2027)." Mordor Intelligence, 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    “What is the Best Heatmap Tool for Real Results?” Crazy Egg, 27 April 2020. Web.

    "What Is Visitor Behavior Analysis?" VWO, 2022. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Zheng, Jack G., and Svetlana Peltsverger. “Web Analytics Overview.” IGI Global, 2015. Accessed 26 July 2022.

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}271|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Secure Cloud & Network Architecture
    • Parent Category Link: /secure-cloud-network-architecture
    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to cope with the challenges associated with an hybrid workforce and how best to secure it.
    • Understanding the main principles of zero trust: never trust, always verify, assume breach, and verify explicitly.
    • How to go about achieving a zero trust framework.
    • Understanding the premise of SASE as it pertains to a hybrid workforce.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Securing your hybrid workforce should be an opportunity to get started on the zero trust journey. Realizing the core features needed to achieve this will assist you determine which of the options is a good fit for your organization.

    Impact and Result

    Every organization's strategy to secure their hybrid workforce should include introducing zero trust principles in certain areas. Our unique approach:

    • Assess the suitability of SASE/SSE and zero trust.
    • Present capabilities and feature benefits.
    • Procure SASE product and/or build a zero trust roadmap.

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Secure Your Hybrid Workforce Deck – The purpose of the storyboard is to provide a detailed description of the steps involved in securing your hybrid workforce with zero trust.

    The storyboard contains two easy-to-follow steps on securing your hybrid workforce with zero trust, from assessing the suitability of SASE/SSE to taking a step in building a zero trust roadmap.

    • Secure Your Hybrid Workforce – Phases 1-2

    2. Suitability Assessment Tool – A tool to identify whether SASE/SSE or a zero trust roadmap is a better fit for your organization.

    Use this tool to identify your next line of action in securing your hybrid workforce by assessing key components that conforms to the ideals and principles of Zero Trust.

    • Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    3. RFP Template – A document to guide you through requesting proposals from vendors.

    Use this document to request proposals from select vendors.

    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    SASE as a driver to zero trust.

    Analyst Perspective

    Consolidate your security and network.

    Remote connections like VPNs were not designed to be security tools or to have the capacity to handle a large hybrid workforce; hence, organizations are burdened with implementing controls that are perceived to be "security solutions." The COVID-19 pandemic forced a wave of remote work for employees that were not taken into consideration for most VPN implementations, and as a result, the understanding of the traditional network perimeter as we always knew it has shifted to include devices, applications, edges, and the internet. Additionally, remote work is here to stay as recruiting talent in the current market means you must make yourself attractive to potential hires.

    The shift in the network perimeter increases the risks associated with traditional VPN solutions as well as exposing the limitations of the solution. This is where zero trust as a principle introduces a more security-focused strategy that not only mitigates most (if not all) of the risks, but also eliminates limitations, which would enhance the business and improve customer/employee experience.

    There are several ways of achieving zero trust maturity, and one of those is SASE, which consolidates security and networking to better secure your hybrid workforce as implied trust is thrown out of the window and verification of everything becomes the new normal to defend the business.

    This is a picture of Victor Okorie

    Victor Okorie
    Senior Research Analyst, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    CISOs are looking to zero trust to fill the gaps associated with their traditional remote setup as well as to build an adaptable security strategy. Some challenges faced include:

    • Understanding the main principles of zero trust: never trust, always verify, assume breach, and verify explicitly.
    • Understanding how to achieve a zero trust framework.
    • Understanding the premise of SASE as it pertains to a hybrid workforce.

    Common Obstacles

    The zero trust journey may seem tedious because of a few obstacles like:

    • Knowing what the principle is all about and the components that align with it.
    • Knowing where to start. Due to the lack of a standardized path for the zero trust journey, going about the journey can be confusing.
    • Not having a uniform definition of what makes up a SASE solution as it is heavily dependent on vendors.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Info-Tech provides a three-service approach to helping organizations better secure their hybrid workforce.

    • Understand your current, existing technological capabilities and challenges with your hybrid infrastructure, and prioritize those challenges.
    • Gain insight into zero trust and SASE as a mitigation/control/tool to those challenges.
    • Identify the SASE features that are relevant to your needs and a source guide for a SASE vendor.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Securing your hybrid workforce should be an opportunity to get started on the zero trust journey. Realizing the core features needed to achieve this will assist you in determining which of the options is a good fit for your organization.

    Turn your challenges into opportunities

    Hybrid workforce is the new normal

    The pandemic has shown there is no going back to full on-prem work, and as such, security should be looked at differently with various considerations in mind.

    Understand that current hybrid solutions are susceptible to various forms of attack as the threat attack surface area has now expanded with users, devices, applications, locations, and data. The traditional perimeter as we know it has expanded beyond just the corporate network, and as such, it needs a more mature security strategy.

    Onboarding and offboarding have been done remotely, and with some growth recorded, the size of companies has also increased, leading to a scaling issue.

    Employees are now demanding remote work capabilities as part of contract negotiation before accepting a job.

    Attacks have increased far more quickly during the pandemic, and all indications point to them increasing even more.

    Scarce available security personnel in the job market for hire.

    Reality Today

    This image is a circle graph and 67% of it is coloured with the number 67% in the middle of the graph

    The number of breach incidents by identity theft.
    Source: Security Magazine, 2022.

    This image is a circle graph and 78% of it is coloured with the number 78% in the middle of the graph

    IT security teams want to adopt zero trust.
    Source: Cybersecurity Insiders, 2019.

    Reduce the risks of remote work by using zero trust

    $1.07m

    $1.76m

    235

    Increase in breaches related to remote work

    Cost difference in a breach where zero trust is deployed

    Days to identify a breach

    The average cost of a data breach where remote work was a factor rose by $1.07 million in 2021. COVID-19 brought about rapid changes in organizations, and digital transformation changes curbed some of its excesses. Organizations that did not make any digital transformation changes reported a $750,000 higher costs compared to global average.

    The average cost of a breach in an organization with no zero trust deployed was $5.04 million in 2021 compared to the average cost of a breach in an organization with zero trust deployed of $3.28 million. With a difference of $1.76 million, zero trust makes a significant difference.

    Organizations with a remote work adoption rate of 50% took 235 days to identify a breach and 81 days to contain that breach – this is in comparison to the average of 212 days to identify a breach and 75 days to contain that breach.

    Source: IBM, 2021.

    Network + Security = SASE

    What exactly is a SASE product?

    The convergence and consolidation of security and network brought about the formation of secure access service edge (SASE – pronounced like "sassy"). Digital transformation, hybrid workforce, high demand of availability, uninterrupted access for employees, and a host of other factors influenced the need for this convergence that is delivered as a cloud service.

    The capabilities of a SASE solution being delivered are based on certain criteria, such as the identity of the entity (users, devices, applications, data, services, location), real-time context, continuous assessment and verification of risk and "trust" throughout the lifetime of a session, and the security and compliance policies of the organization.

    SASE continuously identifies users and devices, applies security based on policy, and provides secure access to the appropriate and requested application or data regardless of location.

    image contains a list of the SASE Network Features and Security Features. the network Features are: WAN optimization; SD WAN; CDN; Network-as-a-service. The Security Features are: CASB; IDPS; ZTNA/VPN; FWaaS; Browser isolation; DLP; UEBA; Secure web gateway; Sandboxing

    Current Approach

    The traditional perimeter security using the castle and moat approach is depicted in the image here. The security shields valuable resources from external attack; however, it isn't foolproof for all kinds of external attacks. Furthermore, it does not protect those valuable resources from insider threat.

    This security perimeter also allows for lateral movement when it has been breached. Access to these resources is now considered "trusted" solely because it is now behind the wall/perimeter.

    This approach is no longer feasible in our world today where both external and internal threats pose continuous risk and need to be contained.

    Determine the suitability of SASE and zero trust

    The Challenge:

    Complications facing traditional infrastructure

    • Increased hybrid workforce
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Limited Infosec personnel
    • Poor threat detection
    • Increased attack surface

    Common vulnerabilities in traditional infrastructure

    • MITM attack
    • XSS attack
    • Session hijacking
    • Trust-based model
    • IP spoofing
    • Brute force attack
    • Distributed denial of service
    • DNS hijacking
    • Latency issues
    • Lateral movement once connection is established

    TRADITIONAL INFRASTRUCTURE

    NETWORK

    SECURITY

    AUTHENTICATION

    IDENTITY

    ACCESS

    • MPLS
    • Corporate Network
    • Antivirus installed
    • Traditional Firewall
    • Intrusion Detection and Prevention System
    • Allow and Deny rules
    • Businesses must respond to consumer requests to:
    • LDAP
    • AAA
    • Immature password complexity
    • Trusted device with improperly managed endpoint protection.
    • Little or no DNS security
    • Web portal (captive)
    • VPN client

    Candidate Solutions

    Proposed benefits of SASE

    • Access is only granted to the requested resource
    • Consolidated network and security as a service
    • Micro-segmentation on application and gateway
    • Adopts a zero trust security posture for all access
    • Managed detection and response
    • Uniform enforcement of policy
    • Distributed denial of service shield

    SASE

    NETWORK

    SECURITY

    AUTHENTICATION

    IDENTITY

    ACCESS

    • Software defined – WAN
    • Content delivery network
    • WAN optimization
    • Network-as-a-service
    • Firewall-as-a-service/NGFW
    • Zero trust network access
    • Endpoint detection & response
    • Secure web gateway
    • Cloud access security broker
    • Data loss prevention
    • Remote browser isolation
    • Multifactor authentication
    • Context-based security policy for authentication
    • Authorization managed with situational awareness and real-time risk analytics
    • Continuous verification throughout an access request lifecycle
    • Zero trust identity on users, devices, applications, and data.
    • Strong password complexity enforced
    • Privilege access management
    • Secure internet access
    • SASE client

    ZERO TRUST

    TENETS OF ZERO TRUST

    ZERO TRUST PILLARS

    • Continuous, dynamic authentication and verification
    • Principle of least privilege
    • Always assume a breach
    • Implement the tenets of zero trust across the following domains of your environment:
      • IDENTITY
      • APPLICATION
      • NETWORK
      • DEVICES
      • DATA

    Proposed benefits of zero trust

    • Identify and protect critical and non-critical resources in accordance with business objectives.
    • Produce initiatives that conform to the ideals of zero trust and are aligned with the corresponding pillars above.
    • Formulate policies to protect resources and aid segmentation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Securing your hybrid workforce should be an opportunity to get started on the zero trust journey. Realizing the core features needed to achieve this will help you determine which of the options is a good fit for your organization.

    Measure the value of using Info-Tech's approach

    IT and business value

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    Assess the benefits of adopting SASE or zero trust

    Vendors will try to control the narrative in terms of what they can do for you, but it's time for you to control the narrative and identify pain points to IT and the business, and with that, to understand and define what the vendor solution can do for you.

    PHASE 2

    Assess the benefits of adopting SASE or zero trust

    Vendors will try to control the narrative in terms of what they can do for you, but it's time for you to control the narrative and identify pain points to IT and the business, and with that, to understand and define what the vendor solution can do for you.

    Short-term benefits

    • Gain awareness of your zero trust readiness.
    • Embed a zero trust mindset across your architecture.
    • Control the narrative of what SASE brings to your organization.

    Long-term benefits

    • Identified controls to mitigate risks with current architecture while on a zero trust journey.
    • Improved security posture that reduces risk by increasing visibility into threats and user connections.
    • Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirements, and improved time to respond to threats using a SASE or SSE solution.

    Determine SASE cost factors

    IT and business value

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT leaders need to examine different areas of their budget and determine how the adoption of a SASE solution could influence several areas of their budget breakdown.

    Determining the SASE cost factors early could accelerate the justification the business needs to move forward in making an informed decision.

    01- Infrastructure

    • Physical security
    • Cabling
    • Power supply and HVAC
    • Hosting

    02- Administration

    • Human hours to analyze logs and threats
    • Human hours to secure infrastructure
    • Fees associated with maintenance

    03- Inbound

    • DPI
    • DDoS
    • Web application firewall
    • VPN concentrators

    04- Outbound

    • IDPS
    • DLP on-prem
    • QoS
    • Sandbox & URL filtering

    04- Data Protection

    • Real-time URL
      insights
    • Threat hunting
    • Data loss prevention

    06- Monitoring

    • Log storage
    • Logging engine
    • Dashboards
    • Managed detection
      and response

    Info-Tech's methodology for securing your hybrid workforce

    1. Current state and future mitigation

    2. Assess the benefits of moving to SASE/zero trust

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    1.3 SASE as a driver of zero trust

    2.1 Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    2.2 Build a zero trust roadmap

    Phase Outcomes

    Identify and prioritize risks of current infrastructure and several ways to mitigate them.

    RFP template and build a zero trust roadmap.

    Consider several factors needed to protect your growing hybrid workforce and assess your current resource capabilities, solutions, and desire for a more mature security program. The outcome should either address a quick pain point or a long-term roadmap.

    The internet is the new corporate network

    The internet is the new corporate network, which opens the organization up to more risks not protected by the current security stack. Using Info-Tech's methodology of zero trust adoption is a sure way to reduce the attack surface, and SASE is one useful tool to take you on the zero trust journey.

    Current-state risks and future mitigation

    Securing your hybrid workforce via zero trust will inevitably include (but is not limited to) technological products/solutions.

    SASE and SSE features sit as an overlay here as technological solutions that will help on the zero trust journey by aggregating all the disparate solutions required for you to meet zero trust requirements into a single interface. The knowledge and implementation of this helps put things into perspective of where and what our target state is.

    The right solution for the right problem

    It is critical to choose a solution that addresses the security problems you are actually trying to solve.

    Don't allow the solution provider to tell you what you need – rather, start by understanding your capability gaps and then go to market to find the right partner.

    Take advantage of the RFP template to source a SASE or SSE vendor. Additionally, build a zero trust roadmap to develop and strategize initiatives and tasks.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Zero Trust and SASE Suitability Tool
    Identify critical and vulnerable DAAS elements to protect and align them to business goals.

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    Perform a gap analysis between current and target states to build a zero trust roadmap.

    Key deliverable:

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce With Zero Trust Communication deck
    Present your zero trust strategy in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed as a part of this blueprint.

    Phase 1

    Current state and future mitigation

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    1.3 SASE as a driver of zero trust

    2.1 Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    2.2 Build a zero trust roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Introduction to the tool, how to use the input tabs to identify current challenges, technologies being used, and to prioritize the challenges. The prioritized list will highlight existing gaps and eventually be mapped to recommended mitigations in the following phase.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • CSO
    • IT security team
    • IT network team

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    Traditional security & remote access solutions must be modernized

    Info-Tech Insight
    Traditional security is architected with a perimeter in mind and is poorly suited to the threats in hybrid or distributed environments.

    Ensure you minimize or eliminate weak points on all layers.

    • SECURITY
      • DDoS
      • DNS hijacking
      • Weak VPN protocols
    • IDENTITY
      • One-time verification allowing lateral movement
    • NETWORK
      • Risk perimeter stops at corporate network edge
      • Split tunneling
    • AUTHENTICATION
      • Weak authentication
      • Weak passwords
    • ACCESS
      • Man-in-the-middle attack
      • Cross-site scripting
      • Session hijacking

    1.1.1 For example: traditional VPNs are poorly suited to a hybrid workforce

    There are many limitations that make it difficult for traditional VPNs to adapt to an ever-growing hybrid workforce.

    The listed limitations are tied to associated risks of legacy infrastructure as well as security components that are almost non-existent in a VPN implementation today.

    Scaling

    VPNs were designed for small-scale remote access to corporate network. An increase in the remote workforce will require expensive hardware investment.

    Visibility

    Users and attackers are not restricted to specific network resources, and with an absence of activity logs, they can go undetected.

    Managed detection & response

    Due to the reduction in or lack of visibility, threat detections are poorly managed, and responses are already too late.

    Hardware

    Limited number of locations for VPN hardware to be situated as it can be expensive.

    Hybrid workforce

    The increase in the hybrid workforce requires the risk perimeter to be expanded from the corporate network to devices and applications. VPNs are built for privacy, not security.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Hybrid workforces are here to stay, and adopting a strategy that is adaptable, flexible, simple, and cost-effective is a recommended road to take on the journey to bettering your security and network.

    1.1 Identify risk from legacy infrastructure

    Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. Ensure all vulnerabilities described on slide 17 are removed.
    2. Note any forecasted challenge you think you might have down the line with your current hybrid setup.
    3. Identify any trend that may be of interest to you with regards to your hybrid setup.

    This is a screenshot of the organizational profile table found in the Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Download the Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Input

    • List of key pain points and challenges
    • List of forecasted challenges and trends of interest

    Output

    • Prioritized list of pain points and/or challenges

    Materials

    • Excel tool
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • CISO
    • InfoSec team
    • IT manager
    • CIO
    • Infrastructure team

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    A zero trust implementation comes with benefits/initiatives that mitigate the challenges identified in earlier activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Zero trust/"always verify" is applied to identity, workloads, devices, networks, and data to provide a greater control for risks associated with traditional network architecture.

    Improve IAM maturity

    Zero trust identity and access will lead to a mature IAM process in an organization with the removal of implicit trust.

    Secure your remote access

    With a zero trust network architecture (ZTNA), both the remote and on-prem network access are more secure than the traditional network deployment. The software-defined parameter ensures security on each network access.

    Reduce threat surface area

    With zero trust principle applied on identity, workload, devices, network, and data, the threat surface area which births some of the risks identified earlier will be significantly reduced.

    Improve hybrid workforce

    Scaling, visibility, network throughput, secure connection from anywhere, micro-segmentation, and a host of other benefits to improve your hybrid workforce.

    1.2 SASE as an overlay to zero trust

    Security and network initiatives of a zero trust roadmap converged into a single pane of glass.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Security and network converged into a single pane of glass giving you some of the benefits and initiatives of a zero trust implemented architecture in one package.

    Improve IAM maturity

    The identity-centric nature of SASE solutions helps to improve your IAM maturity as it applies the principle of least privilege. The removal of implicit trust and continuous verification helps foster this more.

    Secure your remote access

    With ZTNA, both the remote and on-prem network access are more secure than the traditional network deployment. The software defined parameter ensures security on each network access.

    Reduce threat surface area

    Secure web gateway, cloud access security broker, domain name system, next-generation firewall, data loss prevention, and ZTNA protect against data leaks, prevent lateral movement, and prevent malicious actors from coming in.

    Improve hybrid workforce

    Reduced costs and complexity of IT, faster user experience, and reduced risk as a result of the scalability, visibility, ease of IT administration, network throughput, secure connection from anywhere, micro-segmentation, and a host of other benefits will surely improve your hybrid workforce.

    Align SASE features to zero trust core capabilities

    Verify Identity

    • Authentication & verification are enforced for each app request or session.
    • Use of multifactor authentication.
    • RBAC/ABAC and principle of least privilege are applied on the identity regardless of user, device, or location.

    Verify Device

    • Device health is checked to ensure device is not compromised or vulnerable.
    • No admin permissions on user devices.
    • Device-based risk assessment is enforced as part of UEBA.

    Verify Access

    • Micro-segmentation built around network, user, device, location and roles.
    • Use of context and content-based policy enforced to the user, application, and device identity.
    • Network access only granted to specified application request and not to the entire network.

    Verify Services

    • Applications and services are checked before access is granted.
    • Connections to the application and services are inspected with the security controls built into the SASE solution.

    Info-Tech Insight

    These features of SASE and zero trust mitigate the risks associated with a traditional VPN and reduce the threat surface area. With security at the core, network optimization is not compromised.

    Security components of SASE

    Otherwise known as security service edge (SSE)

    Security service edge is the convergence of all security services typically found in SASE. At its core, SSE consists of three services which include:

    • Secure web gateway – secure access to the internet and web.
    • Cloud access security broker – secure access to SaaS and cloud applications.
    • Zero trust network access – secure remote access to private applications.

    SSE components are also mitigations or initiatives that make up a zero trust roadmap as they comply with the zero trust principle, and as a result, they sit up there with SASE as an overlay/driver of a zero trust implementation. SSE's benefits are identical to SASE's in that it provides zero trust access, risk reduction, low costs and complexity, and a better user experience. The difference is SSE's sole focus on security services and not the network component.

    SASE

    NETWORK FEATURES

    SECURITY FEATURES

    • WAN optimization
    • SD WAN
    • CDN
    • Network-as-a-service
    • CASB
    • IDPS
    • ZTNA/VPN
    • FWaaS
    • Browser isolation
    • DLP
    • UEBA
    • Secure web gateway
    • Sandboxing

    1.3 Pros & cons of zero trust and SASE

    Zero Trust

    SASE

    Pros

    Cons

    Pros

    Cons

    • Robust IAM process and technologies with role-based access control.
    • Strong and continuous verification of identity of user accounts, devices, data, location, and principle of least privilege applied.
    • Micro-segmentation applied around users, network, devices, roles, and applications to prevent lateral movement.
    • Threat attack surface eliminated, which reduces organizational risks.
    • Protection of data strengthened based on sensitivity and micro-segmentation.
    • Difficult to identify the scope of the zero trust initiative.
    • Requires continuous and ongoing update of access controls.
    • Zero trust journey/process could take years and is prone to being abandoned without commitment from executives.
    • Legacy systems can be hard to replace, which would require all stakeholders to prioritize resource allocation.
    • Can be expensive to implement.
    • Adopts a zero trust security posture for all access requests.
    • Converged and consolidated network and security delivered as a cloud service to the user rather than a single point of enforcement.
    • Centralized visibility of devices, data in transit and at rest, user activities, and threats.
    • Cheaper than a zero trust roadmap implementation.
    • Managed detection and response.
    • The limited knowledge of SASE.
    • No universally agreed upon SASE definition.
    • SASE products are still being developed and are open to vendors' interpretation.
    • Existing vendor relationships could be a hinderance to deployment.
    • Hard to manage MSSPs.

    Understand SASE and zero trust suitability for your needs

    Estimated Time: 1 hour

    Use the dashboard to understand the value assessment of adopting a SASE product or building a zero trust roadmap.

    This is an image of the SASE Suitability Assessment

    This is the image of the Zero Trust Suitability Assessment

    Info-Tech Insight

    This tool will help steer you on a path to take as a form of mitigation/control to some or all the identified challenges.

    Phase 2

    Make a decision and next steps

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Limitations of legacy infrastructure

    1.2 Zero trust principle as a control

    1.3 SASE as a driver of zero trust

    2.1 Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    2.2 Build a zero trust roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Introduction to the tool activity, how to use the input tabs and considerations to generate an output that could help understand the current state of your hybrid infrastructure and what direction is to be followed next to improve.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • CSO
    • IT security
    • IT network team

    Secure Your Hybrid Workforce

    Step 2.1

    Sourcing out a SASE/SSE vendor

    Activities

    2.1.1 Use the RFP template to request proposal from vendors

    2.1.2 Use SoftwareReviews to compare vendors

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO, CISO, IT manager, Infosec team, executives.

    Outcomes of this step

    • Zero Trust Roadmap

    2.1.1 Use the RFP template to request proposal from vendors

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, use the RFP Template to include technical capabilities of your desired SASE product and to request proposals from vendors.
    2. The features that are most important to your organization generated from phase one should be highlighted in the RFP.

    Input

    • List of SASE features
    • Technical capabilities

    Output

    • RFP

    Materials

    • RFP Template

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership

    Download the RFP Template

    2.1.2 Use SoftwareReviews to compare vendors

    SoftwareReviews

    • The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.
    • Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.
    • The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.
    • Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Step 2.2

    Zero trust readiness and roadmap

    Activities

    2.2.1 Assess the maturity of your current zero trust implementation

    2.2.2 Understand business needs and current security projects

    2.2.3 Set target maturity state with timeframe

    This step involves the following participants:

    CIO, CISO, IT manager, Infosec team, executives.

    Outcomes of this step

    Zero Trust Roadmap

    2.2.1 Assess the maturity of your current zero trust implementation

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    • Realizing that zero trust is a journey helps create a better roadmap and implementation. Identify the current controls or solutions in your organization that align with the principle of zero trust.
    • Break down these controls or solutions into different silos (e.g. identity, security, network, data, device, applications, etc.).
    • Determine your zero trust readiness.

    Input

    • List of zero trust controls/solutions
    • Siloed list of zero trust controls/solutions
    • Current state of zero trust maturity

    Output

    • Zero trust readiness and current maturity state

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Security Benefit Assessment tool

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership

    Download the Zero Trust Security Benefit Assessment tool

    2.2.2 Understand business needs and current security projects

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. Identify the business and IT executives, application owners, and board members whose vision aligns with the zero trust journey.
    2. Identify existing projects within security, IT, and the business and highlight interdependencies or how they fit with the zero trust journey.
    3. Build a rough sketch of the roadmap that fits the business needs, current projects and the zero trust journey.

    Input

    • Meetings with stakeholders
    • List of current and future projects

    Output

    • Sketch of zero trust roadmap

    Materials

    • Whiteboard activity

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • IT ops team
    • Business executives
    • Board members

    Download Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    2.2.3 Set target maturity state with a given timeframe

    Estimated Time: 1-3 hours

    1. With the zero trust readiness, current business, IT and security projects, current maturity state, and sketch of the roadmap, setting a target maturity state within some timeframe is at the top of the list. The target maturity state will include a list of initiatives that could be siloed and confined to a timeframe.
    2. A Gantt chart or graph could be used to complete this task.

    Input

    • Results from previous activity slides

    Output

    • Current state and target state assessment for gap analysis
    • List of initiatives and timeframe

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security team
    • IT leadership
    • IT ops team
    • Business executives
    • Board members

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Insights Gained

    • Difference between zero trust as a principle and SASE as a framework
    • Difference between SASE and SSE platforms.
    • Assessment of which path to take in securing your hybrid workforce

    Deliverables Completed

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Zero Trust - SASE Suitability Assessment Tool

    Assess current security capabilities and build a roadmap of tasks and initiatives that close maturity gaps.

    Research Contributors

    • Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy
    • Cameron Smith, Research Lead, Security & Privacy
    • Brad Mateski, Zones, Solutions Architect for CyberSecurity
    • Bob Smock, Info-Tech Research Group, Vice President of Consulting
    • Dr. Chase Cunningham, Ericom Software, Chief Strategy Officer
    • John Kindervag, ON2IT Cybersecurity, Senior Vice President, Cybersecurity Strategy and ON2IT Group Fellow
    • John Zhao, Fonterra, Enterprise Security Architect
    • Rongxing Lu, University of New Brunswick, Associate Professor
    • Sumanta Sarkar, University of Warwick, Assistant Professor
    • Tim Malone, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Director Information Security
    • Vana Matte, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Vice President of Technology Services

    Related Info-Tech Research

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Security Strategy Model

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations. This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building out a security roadmap.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's research: Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    IT security was typified by perimeter security. However, the way the world does business has mandated a change to IT security. In response, zero trust is a set of principles that can add flexibility to planning your IT security strategy.

    Use this blueprint to determine your zero trust readiness and understand how zero trust can benefit both security and the business.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's research: Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Many organizations are looking to improve their identity and access management (IAM) practices but struggle with where to start and whether all areas of IAM have been considered. This blueprint will help you improve the organization's IAM practices by following our three-phase methodology:

    • Assess identity and access requirements.
    • Identify initiatives using the identity lifecycle.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build a roadmap.

    Bibliography

    "2021 Data Breach Investigations Report." Verizon, 2021. Web.
    "Fortinet Brings Networking and Security to the Cloud" Fortinet, 2 Mar. 2021. Web.
    "A Zero Trust Strategy Has 3 Needs – Identify, Authenticate, and Monitor Users and Devices on and off the Network." Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    "Applying Zero Trust Principles to Enterprise Mobility." CISA, Mar. 2022. Web.
    "CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model." CISA, Cybersecurity Division, June 2021. Web.
    "Continuous Diagnostics and Mitigation Program Overview." CISA, Jan. 2022. Web.
    "Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021 | IBM." IBM, July 2021. Web.
    English, Melanie. "5 Stats That Show The Cost Saving Effect of Zero Trust." Teramind, 29 Sept. 2021. Web.
    Hunter, Steve. "The Five Business Benefits of a Zero Trust Approach to Security." Security Brief - Australia, 19 Aug. 2020. Web.
    "Improve Application Access and Security With Fortinet Zero Trust Network Access." Fortinet, 2 Mar. 2021. Web.
    "Incorporating zero trust Strategies for Secure Network and Application Access." Fortinet, 21 Jul. 2021. Web.
    Jakkal, Vasu. "Zero Trust Adoption Report: How Does Your Organization Compare?" Microsoft, 28 July 2021. Web.
    "Jericho Forum™ Commandments." The Open Group, Jericho Forum, May 2007. Web.
    Schulze, Holger. "2019 Zero Trust Adoption Report." Cybersecurity Insiders, 2019. Web.
    "67% of Organizations Had Identity-Related Data Breaches Last Year." Security Magazine, 22 Aug. 2022. Web.
    United States, Executive Office of the President Joseph R. Biden, Jr. "Executive Order on Improving the Nation's Cybersecurity." The White House, 12 May 2021. Web.

    Lead Staff through Change

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}510|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: High Impact Leadership
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Sixty to ninety percent of change initiatives fail, costing organizations dollars off the bottom line and lost productivity.
    • Seventy percent of change initiatives fail because of people-related issues, which place a major burden on managers to drive change initiatives successfully.
    • Managers are often too busy focusing on the process elements of change; as a result, they neglect major opportunities to leverage and mitigate staff behaviors that affect the entire team.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Change is costly, but failed change is extremely costly. Managing change right the first time is worth the time and effort.
    • Staff pose the biggest opportunity and risk when implementing a change – managers must focus on their teams in order to maintain positive change momentum.
    • Large and small changes require the same change process to be followed but at different scales.
    • The size of a change must be measured according to the level of impact the change will have on staff, not how executives and managers perceive the change.
    • To effectively lead their staff through change, managers must anticipate staff reaction to change, develop a communication plan, introduce the change well, help their staff let go of old behaviors while learning new ones, and motivate their staff to adopt the change.

    Impact and Result

    • Anticipate and respond to staff questions about the change in order to keep messages consistent, organized, and clear.
    • Manage staff based on their specific concerns and change personas to get the best out of your team during the transition through change.
    • Maintain a feedback loop between staff, executives, and other departments in order to maintain the change momentum and reduce angst throughout the process.

    Lead Staff through Change Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Learn how to manage people throughout the change process

    Set up a successful change adoption.

    • Storyboard: Lead Staff through Change

    2. Learn the intricacies of the change personas

    Correctly identify which persona most closely resembles individual staff members.

    • None

    3. Assess the impact of change on staff

    Ensure enough time and effort is allocated in advance to people change management.

    • Change Impact Assessment Tool

    4. Organize change communications messages for a small change

    Ensure consistency and clarity in change messages to staff.

    • Basic Business Change Communication Worksheet

    5. Organize change communications messages for a large change

    Ensure consistency and clarity in change messages to staff.

    • Advanced Business Change Description Form

    6. Evaluate leadership of the change process with the team

    Improve people change management for future change initiatives.

    • Change Debrief Questionnaire
    [infographic]

    Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}375|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $123,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /governance-risk-compliance

    Businesses are expected to balance achieving innovation through initiatives that transform the organization with effective risk management. While this is nothing new, added challenges arise due to:

    • An increasingly large vendor ecosystem within which to manage risk.
    • A fragmented approach to risk management that separates cyber and IT risk from enterprise risk.
    • A rapidly growing number of threat actors and a larger attack surface.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • All risks are digital risks.
    • Manage digital risk with a collaborative approach that supports digital transformation, ensures digital resilience, and distributes responsibility for digital risk management across the organization.

    Impact and Result

    Address digital risk to build digital resilience. In the process, you will drive transformation and maintain digital trust among your employees, end users, and consumers by:

    • Defining digital risk, including primary risk categories and prevalent risk factors.
    • Leveraging industry examples to help identify external risk considerations.
    • Building a digital risk profile, addressing core risk categories, and creating a correlating plan for digital risk management.

    Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Risk does not exist in isolation and must extend beyond your cyber and IT teams. Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to manage digital risk to help drive digital transformation and build your organization's digital resilience.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Redefine digital risk and resilience

    Discover an overview of what digital risk is, learn how to assess risk factors for the five primary categories of digital risk, see several industry-specific scenarios, and explore how to plan for and mitigate identified risks.

    • Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk – Phases 1-2
    • Digital Risk Management Charter

    2. Build your digital risk profile

    Begin building the digital risk profile for your organization, identify where your key areas of risk exposure exist, and assign ownership and accountability among the organization’s business units.

    • Digital Risk Profile Tool
    • Digital Risk Management Executive Report
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Achieve Digital Resilience by Managing Digital Risk

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Scope and Define Digital Risk

    The Purpose

    Develop an understanding and standard definition of what digital risk is, who it impacts, and its relevance to the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what digital risk means and how it differs from traditional enterprise or cybersecurity risk.

    Develop a definition of digital risk that recognizes the unique external and internal considerations of your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context

    1.2 Review the current roles of enterprise, IT, and cyber risk management within the organization

    1.3 Define digital transformation and list transformation initiatives

    1.4 Define digital risk in the context of the organization

    1.5 Define digital resilience in the context of the organization

    Outputs

    Digital risk drivers

    Applicable definition of digital risk

    Applicable definition of digital resilience

    2 Make the Case for Digital Risk Management

    The Purpose

    Understand the roles digital risk management and your digital risk profile have in helping your organization achieve safe, transformative growth.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An overview and understanding of digital risk categories and subsequent individual digital risk factors for the organization

    Industry considerations that highlight the importance of managing digital risk

    A structured approach to managing the categories of digital risk

    Activities

    2.1 Review and discuss industry case studies and industry examples of digital transformation and digital risk

    2.2 Revise the organization's list of digital transformation initiatives (past, current, and future)

    2.3 Begin to build your organization's Digital Risk Management Charter (with inputs from Module 1)

    2.4 Revise, customize, and complete a Digital Risk Management Charter for the organization

    Outputs

    Digital Risk Management Charter

    Industry-specific digital risks, factors, considerations, and scenarios

    The organization's digital risks mapped to its digital transformation initiatives

    3 Build Your Digital Risk Profile

    The Purpose

    Develop an initial digital risk profile that identifies the organization’s core areas of focus in managing digital risk.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A unique digital risk profile for the organization

    Digital risk management initiatives that are mapped against the organization's current strategic initiatives and aligned to meet your digital resilience objectives and benchmarks

    Activities

    3.1 Review category control questions within the Digital Risk Profile Tool

    3.2 Complete all sections (tabs) within the Digital Risk Profile Tool

    3.3 Assess the results of your Digital Risk Profile Tool

    3.4 Discuss and assign initial weightings for ownership of digital risk among the organization's stakeholders

    Outputs

    Completion of all category tabs within the Digital Risk Profile Tool

    Initial stakeholder ownership assignments of digital risk categories

    4 Manage Your Digital Risk

    The Purpose

    Refine the digital risk management plan for the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A targeted, organization-specific approach to managing digital risk as a part of the organization's projects and initiatives on an ongoing basis

    An executive presentation that outlines digital risk management for your senior leadership team

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct brief information sessions with the relevant digital risk stakeholders identified in Module 3.

    4.2 Review and revise the organization's Digital Risk Profile as necessary, including adjusting weightings for the digital risk categories

    4.3 Begin to build an actionable digital risk management plan

    4.4 Present your findings to the organization's relevant risk leaders and executive team

    Outputs

    A finalized and assessed Digital Risk Profile Tool

    Stakeholder ownership for digital risk management

    A draft Digital Risk Management plan and Digital Risk Management Executive Report

    Effectively Recognize IT Employees

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}547|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $100 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Even when organizations do have recognition programs, employees want more recognition than they currently receive.
    • In a recent study, McLean & Company found that 69% of IT employees surveyed felt they were not adequately praised and rewarded for superior work.
    • In a lot of cases, the issue with recognition programs isn’t that IT departments haven’t thought about the importance but rather that they haven’t focused on proper execution.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You’re busy – don’t make your recognition program more complicated than it needs to be. Focus on day-to-day ideas and actively embed recognition into your IT team’s culture.
    • Recognition is impactful independent of rewards (i.e. items with a monetary value), but rewarding employees without proper recognition can be counterproductive. Put recognition first and use rewards as a way to amplify its effectiveness.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech tools and guidance will help you develop a successful and sustainable recognition program aligned to strategic goals and values.
    • By focusing on three key elements – customization, alignment, and transparency – you can improve your recognition culture within four weeks, increasing employee engagement and productivity, improving relationships, and reducing turnover.

    Effectively Recognize IT Employees Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement an IT employee recognition program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Executive Brief
    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phases 1-3

    1. Assess the current recognition landscape

    Understand the current perceptions around recognition practices in the organization and determine the behaviors that your program will seek to recognize.

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phase 1: Assess the Current Recognition Landscape
    • IT Employee Recognition Survey Questions

    2. Design the recognition program

    Determine the structure and processes to enable effective recognition in your IT organization.

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phase 2: Design the Recognition Program
    • Employee Recognition Program Guide
    • Employee Recognition Ideas Catalog
    • Employee Recognition Nomination Form

    3. Implement the recognition program

    Rapidly build and roll out a recognition action and sustainment plan, including training managers to reinforce behavior with recognition.

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phase 3: Implement the Recognition Program
    • Recognition Action and Communication Plan
    • Manager Training: Reinforce Behavior With Recognition
    [infographic]

    Build a Data Warehouse

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}200|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Relational data warehouses, although reliable, centralized repositories for corporate data, were not built to handle the speed and volume of data and analytics today.
    • IT is under immense pressure from business units to provide technology that will yield greater agility and insight.
    • While some organizations are benefitting from modernization technologies, the majority of IT departments are unfamiliar with the technologies and have not yet defined clear use cases.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The vast majority of your corporate data is not being properly leveraged. Modernize the data warehouse to get value from the 80% of unstructured data that goes unused.
    • Avoid rip and replace. Develop a future state that complements your existing data warehouse with emerging technologies.
    • Be flexible in your roadmap. Create an implementation roadmap that’s incremental and adapts to changing business priorities.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish both the business and IT perspectives of today’s data warehouse environment.
    • Explore the art-of-the-possible. Don’t get stuck trying to gather technical requirements from business users who don’t know what they don’t know. Use Info-Tech’s interview guide to discuss the pains of the current environment, and more importantly, where stakeholders want to be in the future.
    • Build an internal knowledgebase with respect to emerging technologies. The technology landscape is constantly shifting and often difficult for IT staff to keep track of. Use Info-Tech’s Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Education Deck to ensure that IT is able to appropriately match the right tools to the business’ use cases.
    • Create a compelling business case to secure investment and support.

    Build a Data Warehouse Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be looking to modernize the relational data warehouse, review Info-Tech’s framework for identifying modernization opportunities, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current data warehouse environment

    Review the business’ perception and architecture of the current data warehouse environment.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 1: Assess the Current Data Warehouse Environment
    • Data Warehouse Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Define modernization drivers

    Collaborate with business users to identify the strongest motivations for data warehouse modernization.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 2: Define Modernization Drivers
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Stakeholder Interview Guide
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Education Deck
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Initiative Building Tool

    3. Create the modernization future state

    Combine business ideas with modernization initiatives and create a roadmap.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 3: Create the Modernization Future State
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Architectural Template
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Deployment Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Warehouse

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Current Data Warehouse Environment

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for data warehouse modernization.

    Establish the business and IT perspectives of the current state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Holistic understanding of the current data warehouse.

    Business user engagement from the start of the project.

    Activities

    1.1 Review data warehouse project history.

    1.2 Evaluate data warehouse maturity.

    1.3 Draw architecture diagrams.

    1.4 Review supporting data management practices.

    Outputs

    Data warehouse maturity assessment

    Data architecture diagrams

    2 Explore Business Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Conduct a user workshop session to elicit the most pressing needs of business stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Modernization technology selection is directly informed by business drivers.

    In-depth IT understanding of the business pains and opportunities.

    Activities

    2.1 Review general trends and drivers in your industry.

    2.2 Identify primary business frustrations, opportunities, and risks.

    2.3 Identify business processes to target for modernization.

    2.4 Capture business ideas for the future state.

    Outputs

    Business ideas for modernization

    Defined strategic direction for data warehouse modernization

    3 Review the Technology Landscape

    The Purpose

    Educate IT staff on the most common technologies for data warehouse modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved ability for IT to match technology with business ideas.

    Activities

    3.1 Appoint Modernization Advisors.

    3.2 Hold an open education and discussion forum for modernization technologies.

    Outputs

    Modernization Advisors identified

    Modernization technology education deck

    4 Define Modernization Solutions

    The Purpose

    Consolidate business ideas into modernization initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Refinement of the strategic direction for data warehouse modernization.

    Activities

    4.1 Match business ideas to technology solutions.

    4.2 Group similar ideas to create modernization initiatives.

    4.3 Create future-state architecture diagrams.

    Outputs

    Identified strategic direction for data warehouse modernization

    Defined modernization initiatives

    Future-state architecture for data warehouse

    5 Establish a Modernization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Validate and build out initiatives with business users.

    Define benefits and costs to establish ROI.

    Identify enablers and barriers to modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completion of materials for a compelling business case and roadmap.

    Activities

    5.1 Validate use cases with business users.

    5.2 Define initiative benefits.

    5.3 Identify enablers and barriers to modernization.

    5.4 Define preliminary activities for initiatives.

    5.5 Evaluate initiative costs.

    5.6 Determine overall ROI.

    Outputs

    Validated modernization initiatives

    Data warehouse modernization roadmap

    Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}85|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy

    IT is being challenged to change how it operates to better support evolving organizations by:

    • Considering the needs of customers, end users, and organizational stakeholders simultaneously.
    • Leveraging resources strategically to support the various IT and digital services being offered.
    • Creating a digital services enablement office that can design, monitor, and continuously enhance services.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The role of IT is changing, and with that, how IT needs to operate to deliver value is also changing. Don’t get left behind with an irrelevant IT operating model.
    • Elevate your reputation as a leader beyond the CIO role. Mature your organization’s digital services by considering the customer experience first.
    • As recessions, disasters, and pandemics hit, don’t adopt old ways of operating with 2008 centralized models. Embrace a hybrid IT where value sets your organization apart.

    Impact and Result

    • Embrace the Exponential IT Operating Model so you can:
      • Say “yes” to stakeholders trying to provide a better experience for customers and consumers.
      • Leverage data more effectively across your organization.
      • Consider how to integrate and deliver services using resources effectively and strategically.

    Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model Deck – The next generation operating model for organizations embracing exponential IT.

    This research piece is for any IT leaders looking to support the organization in its post-transformation state by focusing on the customer experience when operating. CIOs struggling with outdated IT operating models can demonstrate true partnership with this digital services next-generation IT operating model.

    • Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model Storyboard

    2. Exponential IT Operating Model Readiness Assessment – A tool to assess your organization’s readiness to adopt this next generation of IT operating models.

    Use this tool to determine whether your organization has the fundamental components necessary to support the adoption of an Exponential IT operating model.

    • Exponential IT Operating Model Readiness Assessment

    3. Career Vision Roadmap Tool – A template to create a simple visual roadmap of your desired career progression from CIO to chief digital services officer (CDSO).

    Use this template to create a roadmap on how to transform your career from CIO to CDSO leveraging key strengths and relationships. Focus on opportunities to demonstrate IT’s maturity and the customer experience at the forefront of your decisions.

    • Career Vision Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Implement the Next-Generation IT Operating Model

    The operating model for organizations embracing Exponential IT and transforming into technology-first enterprises.

    Analyst Perspective

    Be the organization that can thrive in an exponential IT world.

    A picture of Carlene McCubbin A picture of Brittany Lutes

    Carlene McCubbin
    Research Practice Lead
    CIO Organizational
    Transformation Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Brittany Lutes
    Research Director,
    CIO Organization Transformation Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    IT leaders are increasingly expected to be responsible for understanding and delivering high-value customer experiences. This evolution depends on the distribution and oversight of IT capabilities that are embedded throughout the organizational structure.

    Defining digital strategic objectives, establishing governance frameworks for an autonomous culture, and enabling the organization to act on insightful data are all impossible without a new way of operating that involves the oversight and accountability of advancing IT roles. Through exponential change, functional groups can lose clarity regarding their responsibilities, creating a sense of ambiguity and disorder.

    But adopting a new way of working that supports an exponential IT organization does not have to be difficult. Leveraging Info-Tech Research Group's next-generation operating model, you can clearly demonstrate how the organization will collaborate to deliver on the various digital and IT services. This is no longer just an IT operating model, but a technology-first enterprise model.

    Included in this blueprint:

    Exponential IT Model

    Defines how the Exponential IT model operates and delivers value to the organization.
    This is done by exploring:

    • Exponential IT cultural norms and behaviors
    • Opportunities and risks of the Exponential IT model
    • A breakdown of the embedded, integrated, and centralized aspects of the model
    • Operating model value stream stages
    • An assessment on whether the Exponential IT operating model is right for your organization

    Changing Role of IT Leader

    Defines how chief information officers (CIOs) can operate or elevate their role in this changing operating model.

    • Identifies why the C-suite is changing – again
    • How IT leaders should consider where they will add value in the new operating model
    • Outlines examples of future organization-wide structures and where IT roles are positioned
    • Supports IT leaders in developing themselves to operate in this structure

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    IT is challenged to change how it operates to better support evolving organizations. IT must:

    • Consider the needs of customers, end users, and organization stakeholders simultaneously.
    • Leverage resources strategically to support the various IT and digital services being offered.
    • Create a digital services enablement office to design, monitor, and enhance services continuously.

    While many organizations have projects that support a digital strategy, few have an operating model that supports this digital services strategy.

    Common Obstacles

    Organizations struggle to support the definition and ongoing maintenance of services because:

    • The organization's Digital and IT services offerings are not clear.
    • The functional team accountable to deliver on each IT or Digital service is ambiguous.
    • There are insufficient resources to support all the IT and Digital services being offered.
    • C-suite leaders required to support the services are missing or in the wrong role to effectively lead.
    • Technology has not been standardized to ensure consistency and effectiveness.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Embrace the IT operating model that focuses on the enablement and delivery of Digital and IT services by:

    • Having technology stakeholders actively collaborate to decide on priorities and deliver on objectives.
    • Leveraging data more effectively across the organization to understand and meet user needs.
    • Ensuring technology architecture and security standards are well-established and followed by all throughout the organization.
    • Allocating dedicated and skilled resources to ensure services can be continuously delivered.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The first IT operating model where customer engagement with IT and Digital Services is at the forefront.

    What is an operating model?

    An IT operating model is a visual representation of the way your IT organization will function using a clear and coherent blueprint. This visualization demonstrates how capabilities are organized and aligned to deliver on the business mission and strategic and technological objectives.

    The should visualize the optimization and alignment of the IT organization to deliver the capabilities required to achieve business goals. Additionally, it should demonstrate the workflow so key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization. Investing time in the front-end to get the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and your model to change as the business changes.

    An image of a sample Operating Model


    From computerization to digitization to the new frontier in autonomization, IT has progressively matured, enabling it to actively lead this next stage of business transformation.

    EXPONENTIAL RISK
    Autonomous processes will integrate with human-led processes, creating risks to business continuity, information security, and quality of delivery. Supplier power will exacerbate business risks.

    EXPONENTIAL REWARD
    The efficiency gains and new value chains created through artificial intelligence (AI), robotics, and additive manufacturing will be very significant. Most of this value will be realized through the augmentation of human labor.

    EXPONENTIAL DEMAND
    Autonomous solutions for productivity and back-office applications will eventually become commoditized and provided by a handful of large vendors. There will, however, be a proliferation of in-house algorithms and workflows to autonomize the middle and front office, offered by a busy landscape of industry-centric capability vendors.

    EXPONENTIAL IT

    Exponential IT involves IT leading the cognitive re-engineering of the organization with evolved practices for:

    • IT governance
    • Asset management
    • Vendor management
    • Data management
    • Business continuity management
    • Information security management

    To learn more about IT's journey into autonomization, check out Info-Tech Research Group's Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset blueprint.

    The IT operating model must evolve to respond to exponential change

    • Ensuring customers are not an afterthought to IT leaders. Customers inform how and where IT leaders invest resources to realize organizational objectives.
    • Adopting a formalized approach to service definition and delivery to eliminate silos.
    • Leveraging data throughout the organization to better inform and enable the various digital services in meeting customer demands.
    • Responding to employee demands for development and training opportunities by applying skills in new settings.
    • Having cross-collaboration mechanisms built into the ways of operating to reduce silos across the organization.
    • Enabling services through a strong set of governance and risk mandates and practices.
    • Eliminating the need for IT capabilities to only be within an IT department.

    IT can no longer be just a service provider:

    78% of IT leaders with established digital strategies and 45% of IT leaders with emerging digital strategies are driven by customer experiences.
    Source: Foundry "Digital Business Study,"2023

    40% - The number of CIOs that are responsible for creating new products or services to support revenue generation.
    Source: Foundry, "The State of the CIO," 2023

    This change requires a breakdown of traditional IT-business divisions

    CIOs must recognize that separating IT from the business is restrictive

    • Many organizations have recently completed or are in the process of completing a digital transformation focused on enhanced employee and customer experiences.
    • Post-transformation organizations must change how they operate to continue to deliver on those enhanced experiences, especially for the customer.
    • There must no longer be a wall between IT and the business, but a unified organization offering digital services that include IT components. Already, 81% of work is being performed across the functional boundaries created in an organization (Deloitte, 2023).
    • Effectively designing, delivering, and maintaining these services depends on a Digital Services functional layer, expanding IT's involvement into how the business delivers worthwhile experiences to customers.
    • This Digital Services functional layer will consider whether the new services are better owned by the IT group or another area of the organization.
    • CIOs need to be prepared to adopt a new way of operating or be left to manage a smaller subset of IT functions.

    "I think we've done the IT industry a disservice by constantly referring to IT and the business, artificially creating this wedge."
    – David Vidoni, VP of IT at Pegasystems
    Source: Dan Roberts, CIO, 2023

    Four trends driving an Exponential IT organization include:

    Emerging Technologies

    • 67% of respondents to KPMG's 2022 Global Tech Survey indicated they intend to embrace emerging platforms by the end of 2024.(1)
    • The technology landscape is constantly shifting with artificial intelligence (AI), quantum computing, 5G cellular networks, and next-generation robotics. Each of these technologies requires new capabilities and a new way in which those capabilities are organized.

    Enhanced Customer Experiences

    • 24% of CIOs have been tasked by their CEO to increase the customer experience.(3)
    • Organizations realize that to gain and retain customers, it has become necessary to consistently evaluate service offerings and identify opportunities for enhancement or new services.

    Digital Trust

    • 1/3 of CISOs plan to increase their GRC focus during the next year and 36% have already begun to implement Zero Trust components.(2)
    • Risk and security capabilities mature focusing on defined enterprise accountability, consideration of ethics and inclusivity and proactive security controls.

    Embedded Technology & Skills

    • Spending on embedded software is expected to increase to $21.5 billion by 2027.(4)
    • The technology strategy no longer resides solely within IT. The organization must take ownership of this strategy while they define their digital strategies. Technology services are also embedded.

    (1) "Global Tech Survey," KPMG, 2022
    (2) "Global Digital Trust Insights Report," PwC, 2023
    (3) "State of IT Report," Foundry, 2023
    (4) "Global surge in embedded software demand; here is why," DAC Digital, 2023

    Application of the Four Key Trends on your Exponential IT operating model:

    Respond to Emerging Technology In response to changing customer demands, organizations need to actively seek, assess, and integrate emerging technology offerings easily and effectively. By governing data at an enterprise level and implementing the necessary guardrails in the form of architecture and security standards at the technology layer, it becomes easier to adopt new technologies such as artificial intelligence (AI). This should be tied to any mandated objectives.
    Build Digital Trust Capabilities Finding and hiring the right security professionals has long been a challenge for organizations. In the Exponential IT model, focus on security oversight increases and fewer operational resources are required. The model sees governing IT security processes and vendor delivery as priorities to enable the right technology without exposing the organization to undue risk. There should be more security-related capabilities in your Exponential IT model.
    Elevate the Customer Experience Evolving the organization's digital offering requires understanding of and active response to the changing demands of customers. This is accomplished by leveraging information from organization-wide data sources and the modular components of the organization's current digital offerings. The components can be reconfigured (or new ones added) to create digital services for the customer.
    Formalize Embedded Business Technology & Roles Technology is actively included in the organization's business (digital) strategy. This ensures that technology remains an embedded component of how the organization competes in the market, supplies invaluable services, and delivers on strategic objectives. The separation of IT from the organization becomes redundant.
    Visualize your IT Operating Model.

    Adopting an Exponential IT operating model is typically influenced by resonating with the following drivers:

    Culture

    IT Strategy & Objectives

    Organization Operating Model

    Organization Size & Structure

    Perception of IT

    Risk Appetite

    A cooperative and innovative culture where the organization does not feel constrained by current processes. Establishing a growth mindset across all the organization's groups is reflected by the trust service owners receive.

    Focused on delivering the best customer experience. The roadmap would include ample opportunities to better support the customer in obtaining or exceeding the degree of value they receive from the organization.

    Empowering service owners across the organization to be accountable for the delivery and value of their services. Lots of collaboration among stakeholders who know what services are offered and how those services leverage technology.

    More appropriate for larger organizations due to the resources required to design and enable successful services. IT resources would also be pooled by skills.

    IT is not a service provider but an equal that enables the organization's success. Without IT involvement, digital services may be omitted and opportunities to enhance the customer experience would be missed.

    While innovation and new service offerings are critical to success, there are functional groups that remain focused on defining the level of risk tolerance that supports the appropriate risk appetite to consider new service offerings.

    Section 1: The Next-Generation Operating Model

    The Technology Value Trinity

    Delivery of Business Value & Strategic Needs

    I&T OPERATING MODEL

    DIGITAL & TECHNOLOGY STRATEGY

    I&T GOVERNANCE

    The model for how IT is organized to deliver on business needs and strategies.

    The identification of objectives and initiatives necessary to achieve business goals.

    Ensures the organization and its customers extract maximum value from the use of information and technology.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work together to deliver business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others must change as well.
    How do these three elements relate?

    • I&T Operating Model aligns resources, processes, measures, stakeholders, value streams, and decision rights to enable the delivery of your strategy and priorities. This is done by strategically structuring IT capabilities in a way that enables the organization's vision and considers the context in which the model will operate.
    • Digital and IT Strategy tells you what you must achieve to be successful. For an Exponential IT organization, customer demands and digital service offerings would drive strategic decisions.
    • I&T Governance is the confirmation of IT's goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy. This is the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work so that what is delivered aligns with the strategy.

    Strategy, operating models, and governance are too often considered separate practices – strategies are defined without clarity on how to support. A significant change to your strategy necessitates a change to your operating model, which in turn necessitates a change to your governance and organizational structure.

    The Exponential IT operating model delivers value across seven components

    Exponential IT

    Capabilities

    Products, Services and Technology

    Performance Measures

    Stakeholder Engagement & Collaboration

    Decision Rights & Authority

    Value Streams

    Sourcing

    IT capabilities in the Exponential IT model are spread across the organization. The result removes the separation between IT and the organization. Instead, the organization takes accountability for ensuring technology capabilities are delivered.

    Digital service offerings dominate this model, focusing on providing better experiences for customers. Some technology platforms are specific to a service such as access management, while others span service offerings such as architecture or security.

    This model's success is measured by the overall ability to satisfy the customer experience through designing and delivering the right digital service offerings. Service owners are responsible for continuously monitoring and advancing the delivery of the service.

    The end-customer is the main stakeholder for this operating model, where understanding their needs and demands informs the design, maintenance, and improvement of all services. There is no longer IT vs. the business but an organizational perspective of services.

    This model's decision-making spans the organization. The service owners of digital offerings have authority and autonomy deciding which services to design, how they should be integrated with other services, and how those services will continually deliver value to customers.

    Exponential IT's five core value streams are:

    1. Identifying and prioritizing customer needs
    2. Designing IT and Digital Services
    3. Enabling IT & Digital Service success
    4. Assigning skilled employees to deliver services
    5. Owning & managing services

    Internal resource pools might need to be supplemented with contract resources when demand exceeds capacity, requiring a strong partnership with the Vendor Management Team. Service owners will also need to engage and manage the performance of their vendor solution partners.

    Organizations adopting the Exponential IT Model will experience new norms and behaviors

    Customer-Centric
    Dedicated to the customer experience and making sure that the end customer is considered first and foremost.

    "Yes" Approach
    The organization can say yes to emerging technology and customer desires because it has organized itself to be agile in its digital service offerings.

    Digital Service Ownership
    Digital service offerings are owned and managed across the organization ensuring the continuous delivery of value to customers.

    Employee Development
    Resources are organized into pods based on specific skills or functions increasing the likelihood of adopting new skills.

    Autonomization
    Centralized and accessible data provides service owners autonomy when making informed decisions that support enhanced customer experiences.

    Exponential IT is an embedded model approach

    Info-Tech has identified seven common IT operating model archetypes. Each model represents a different approach to who delivers technology services and how. Each model is designed to drive different outcomes, as the way your organization is structured will dictate the way it behaves. The Exponential IT model is an emerging archetype which capitalizes on embedded delivery.

    An image of the exponential IT embedded model approach.

    Centralized

    Shifted

    Embedded

    Owned and operated by leadership within IT. IT takes full responsibility of the functional areas and maintains control over the outcomes.

    Can be owned/operated by a variety of leadership roles throughout the organization. This can shift from IT ownership to other organizational leadership. Decisions about ownership are often made to enable quick response or mitigate risks.

    Owned/operated by leadership outside of traditional IT. Another area of the organization has taken authoritative power over the outcome of this functional area for a quicker response.

    Even as an embedded IT operating model, shifted and centralized IT functions as support

    1. Embedded functions required for scaled autonomation
      Definition and oversight of the organization's strategic direction demonstrated through a customer-first culture, data insights, and a well-defined risk appetite.
    2. Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering
      Actively considers the customer experience and designs the appropriate services to be delivered. Considers all aspects in the design and delivery of services by exploring opportunities to integrate components to enhance customer experiences or architecting new service offerings to eliminate gaps.
    3. Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources
      Technology functions continue to deliver exceptional services to the enterprise including clear standards for technology and solution architecture, application of security requirements, and resources to enable various service offerings.

    Opportunities and risks of the Exponential IT model

    Opportunities

    Risks
    • Focused on the end-customer experience and how to ensure that customer remains satisfied and loyal to the organization.
    • The capability center allows resources to be used strategically according to where they would most improve the customer experience.
    • Services are owned by the most appropriate areas within the organization—sometimes IT and other times not. In either case, services should always possess technological knowledge.
    • The organization's transformation strategy is not just driving IT's strategy but how IT should be organized and operating. This eliminates disconnect from larger strategic objectives.
    • Data intelligence and customer insights enable the shifted and centralized areas of the operating model to deliver effective and valuable experiences for all stakeholders.
    • Requires a high degree of maturity to support a variety of individuals in owning IT and digital capabilities.
    • Organizational buy-in to this operating model archetype is a must. IT cannot select this operating model without that support.
    • Processes around how all IT and Digital Services consider security and technology standards need to be well-documented and enforceable.
    • Depending on which leaders oversee the three areas of the model (embedded, shifted, or centralized), power struggles could occur which negatively impact services.
    • This model will demand governance, risk, and culture to be at the forefront of how it operates. If an accountability framework does not exist, expect this model to fail.

    The Exponential IT operating model blends embedded, shifted and centralized delivery to balance agility & risk

    An image of the Exponential IT Operating Model.

    The Exponential IT model commands a new placement and significance of IT capabilities

    Using capabilities for the operating model

    • Capabilities are focused on the entire system that would be in place to satisfy a particular need. This not only includes the people who are able to complete a specific task, but the technology, processes, and resources required to deliver.
    • Focusing on capabilities rather than the individuals in organizational redesign enables a more objective and holistic view of what your organization is striving toward.
    • Capabilities deliver on specific need(s) and how they are organized changes the way those needs are delivered.
    The Exponential IT principles as an image: Strategy and Governance, Financial Management, Service Planning and Architecture, People and Resources, Security and Risk, Applications, Data and Analytics, Infrastructure and Operations, and PPM and Projects.

    1. Embedded functions required for autonomization

    Overview of the function:

    • Focuses on a single strategy and roadmap for the organization that actively includes technology.
    • Governance, risk, compliance, and general oversight are defined and embedded throughout the organization.
    • Ensures that quality data is being generated to help inform the defined digital service offering.
    • Readies the organization to adopt emerging technology quickly and with minimal disruption to other digital service offerings.
    • A team of technical experts that decides what information should exist for operational efficiency or service innovation.

    Embedded functions required for autonomization

    2. Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering

    Overview of the function:

    • Analyzes and responds to insights about the customer experience.
    • Maintains the portfolio of the organization's digital service offerings.
    • Considers what is necessary to operate efficiently as an organization while simultaneously exploring emerging technology to optimize new or existing digital services.
    • Requires the expertise and involvement of both business-minded and technology-skilled resources.
    • The differentiating factor from other IT operating models is how it holistically considers all the components throughout the organization and how they are connected.

    Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering

    3. Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources

    Overview of the function:

    • Compared with other IT operating model archetypes, the Exponential IT model has fewer capabilities that are centralized within the technology function of an organization.
    • Architecture and standards are the foundation of successful embedded delivery, ensuring reuse, improved integration, and a unified experience. This includes technology, risk, data, AI and security architecture, models, and standards.
    • Employee resources are also organized in pods to be leveraged based on greatest need and skills availability.
    • This lets the organization be more agile when innovating and implementing new digital service offerings.

    Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources

    Exponential IT explores new value stream stages

    Customer Perspective

    The organization is continually anticipating their wants and needs and establishing mechanisms to vocalize those needs.

    Customer receives the right IT and digital services to respond to their needs.

    The service is easy to use and continuously responds to wants and needs.

    The service is meeting expectations or exceeding them.

    There is a dedicated service owner who can hear demands and feedback, then action desirable outcomes.

    Value Stream Stages

    An image of the Value Stream

    Organizational Perspective

    Expected Outcome

    Customers' wants and needs are understood and at times anticipated before the customer requests them.

    Assess needs to determine if service is already offered or needs to be created. Design services that will enhance the customer experience.

    Look for opportunities to integrate processes and resources to increase the performance of IT and Digital Services.

    Ensure that the right employees with the right skills are working to develop or enhance service offering.

    The service owner manages the ongoing lifecycle of the service and establishes a roadmap on how value will continue to be delivered.

    Critical Processes

    • Customer experience
    • Research and innovation
    • Stakeholder management
    • Research and innovation
    • Service design & portfolio management
    • Performance management
    • Continuous improvement
    • Integration planning
    • Service management
    • Resource planning and allocation
    • Service strategy & roadmap
    • Service governance
    • Service performance management

    Metrics

    • Customer satisfaction score
    • Service-to-need alignment
    • Gaps in service portfolio
    • Speed to design services
    • Service performance
    • Service adoption
    • Time to resolve customer demand
    • Frequency by which service requires enhancements
    • Service satisfaction
    • Alignment of service strategy to organization strategy

    1.1 Assess if the Exponential IT operating model is right for your organization

    1 hour

    1. Begin by downloading the Exponential IT Operating Model Assessment.
    2. Review the questions within each of the operating model components. For each question, use the drop-down menu to determine your level of agreement.
    3. The more your organization agrees with the statements, the more likely your organization is prepared to implement an Exponential IT operating model.
    4. The less your organization agrees with the statements, the more likely you should adopt a different IT operating model.
    5. For support implementing the Exponential IT or another IT operating model, explore the Visualize Your IT Operating Model blueprint (coming soon).

    Input

    • Desire to change the organization's IT & Digital operating model

    Output

    • Desire to implement the IT & Digital Service Enablement operating model

    Materials

    • Exponential IT Operating Model Assessment

    Participants

    • Executive IT leadership
    • Business leadership

    Explore other Info-Tech research to support your organization transformation initiatives

    Visualize the IT Operating Model blueprint (coming soon)

    Visualize the IT Operating Model blueprint (coming soon)

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Section 2: Elevating the CIO Role

    The next generation of IT C-suite roles are here

    As the operating model changes and becomes increasingly embedded into the organization's delivery of IT and Digital Services, new C-suite roles are being defined

    • One of the most critical roles being defined in this change is the Chief Digital Services Officer (CDSO) who focuses on all components of the digital experience from the lens of the customer.
    • There are two directions from which the CDSO role is typically approached as it gains popularity:
      • CIOs evolve beyond just information and technology—focusing on how IT & Digital Services enhance the customer experience
      • Business leaders who have technical know-how increase their involvement and responsibility over IT related functions
    • IT leaders need to consider where they would rather sit: focused only on technology and remaining a service provider to the organization, or embedding technology into the services, products, and organization in general?

    60%

    The number of APAC CIOs who can anticipate their job to be challenged by their peers within the organization.

    Source: Singh, Yashvendra, CIO, 2023.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This is not about making the CIO report to someone else but allowing the CIO to elevate their role into that of a CDSO.

    Increasing IT leadership's span of control throughout the organization

    As maturity increases so does span of control, ownership & executive influence

    Organizations hoping to fully adopt the Exponential IT operating model require a shift in leadership expectations. Notably, these leaders will have oversight and accountability for functions beyond the traditional IT group.

    As the organization matures its governance, security, and data management practices, increasing how it delivers high-impact experiences to customers, it would have one leader who owns all the components to ensure clear alignment with goals and business strategy.

    An image of a graph where the X axis is labeled Span of Control & Influence, and the Y axis is Organization Maturity.

    Emerging Exponential IT organizations will have distributed authority

    • Organizations beginning their transition toward an exponential model often continue to have distributed leaders providing oversight of distinct functional areas.
    • Their spans of control are smaller, but very clearly defined, eliminating confusion through a transparent accountability framework.
    • Each leader strives toward optimization and efficiency regarding IT capabilities, for which they are responsible.
    1. Distributed Leadership
      Embedded functions required for scaled autonomation
      Distributed leaders identify the ways technology will enable them to advance enterprise objectives while maintaining autonomy over their own functions. They may oversee technology.
    2. Experience Officer
      Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering
      An Experience Officer will help consider the insights gained from enterprise data and make informed decisions around enterprise service offerings. They actively explore new ways to deliver high-value experiences.
    3. Chief Technology Officer (CTO)
      Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources
      A CTO will continue to oversee the core technology, including infrastructure and service management functions.

    Established organizations will be driven by a digital transformation journey

    • Organizations that have begun to deliver on their transformation journey will typically see two distinct C-suite leaders emerge—the CIO and the CDO.
    • The Chief Digital Officer (CDO) often explores ways to optimize the integration and management of data to enable insightful decision making from the organization.
    • The Chief Information Officer (CIO), however, considers mechanisms to standardize how new technologies can be integrated with the architecture.
    • While both leaders have distinct responsibilities, their roles intersect at the customer experience.

    An image of the digital transformation journey

    Advanced organizations will be managed by a single emerging role

    • A single leader will oversee all the functional areas where value is delivered and enabled by IT capabilities.
    • Through a large span of control, this leader can holistically consider opportunities to optimize the customer experience and ensure recommendations are actioned to deliver on that enhanced experience.
    • This leader's span of control will require a strong understanding of both strategic and operational functions to authoritatively oversee all aspects for which they are responsible.

    CDSO – Chief Digital Service Officer

    1. Embedded functions required for scaled autonomation
      The CDSO will set, oversee, and manage the delivery of an enterprise's digital strategy, ensuring accountability through good governance and data practices.
    2. Integrated design and optimization of the digital service offering
      They ensure that the enterprise holistically considers the various services that could be offered to exceed customer expectations through high-impact experiences.
    3. Centralized standards for IT technology, security & resources
      They also ensure stable and secure architecture standards to enable consistency across the organization and a seamless ability to integrate new technology to support service offerings.

    Evolution of the IT C-suite now includes the CDSO

    Chief Digital Service Officer

    Chief Information Officer

    Chief Digital Officer

    Chief Technology Officer

    Chief Experience Officer

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Board
    • CEO/Executive Leadership
    • Organization Leadership
    • Service Owners
    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Oversight of the entire portfolio of IT and Digital Services
    • Use of information & technology to meet organizational objectives

    *Some leaders in this role are being called Chief Digital Information Officer.

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Board
    • CEO/Executive Leadership
    • Organization Leadership
    • End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Oversight of the information and technology required to support and enable the organization

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Board
    • CEO/Executive Leadership
    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Oversight on transforming how the organization uses technology, often considering customer perspectives

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Organization Leadership
    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Collaborating with the CIO, the CTO leads the organization's ability to integrate and adopt necessary technology products and services

    Main Stakeholder(s):

    • Customers & End Users

    Main Responsibilities:

    • Establish the customer experience strategy
    • Create policies to support that strategy
    • Collaborate with other organizational leaders to integrate any activities around the customer experience

    Examples of what the emerging organizational structure can look like

    An image of three hierarchies, showing what the emerging organizational structure can look like.

    This is more than a new title for IT leaders

    It's about establishing a business first perspective

    • IT leaders exploring this new way of operating are not just adopting the new title of CDSO or CDIO.
    • These leaders must change how information, technology, and digital experiences are consumed across the various stakeholders – especially the end customer.
    • IT leaders who pursue this new IT operating model choose to be more than order takers for an organization.
    • They are:
      • Partners in defining the organization's digital service offerings
      • Recognizing the benefits of distributing decision-making authority for IT-related aspects to others throughout the organization
      • Prioritizing capabilities like portfolio management, architecture, vendor management, relationship management, cloud and user experience

    "'For me, the IT portfolio for the next few years and the IT architecture have taken the place that IT strategy used to have,' he adds. This view doesn't position IT outside of the organization, but rather gives it central importance in the company."
    – Bernd Rattey, Group CIO and CDO of Deutsche Bahn (DB), qtd. by Jens Dose, CIO, 2023

    1.2 Plan your career move to CDSO

    1-3 hours

    • Create a roadmap on how to move from your current role to CDSO by identifying current strengths and opportunities to improve.
    • Download the Career Vision Roadmap Tool from the website. An example of this is on the next slide.
    • Document the tagline. This is your overarching career focus and goal – what is your passion? Think beyond titles to what you want to be doing, the atmosphere you want to be in, and what you want to add value to.
    • Document the current role: what are the strengths, achievements and opportunities?
    • Consider the CDSO role: how will you build stronger relationships and competencies to elevate your profile within the organization? What is an example of what someone would display in this role?
    • Define specific roles or stakeholders that you should develop a stronger relationship with.

    Download the Career Vision Roadmap Tool

    Input

    • Desire to implement the IT & Digital Service Enablement Operating Model

    Output

    • Roadmap to elevate from a CIO to a CDSO

    Materials

    • Career Vision Roadmap
    • IT & Digital Services Enablement operating model archetype
    • CDSO job profile

    Participants

    • CIO (or any other role aspiring to eventually become a CDSO)
    • Individual activity

    Career Vision Roadmap:
    Executive Leader
    Akbar K.

    Sample

    To provide customers with an exceptional experience by ensuring all IT and Digital Services consider and anticipate their needs or wants. Enable IT and Digital Services to be successful through clear leadership, strong collaboration, and continuous improvement or innovation.

    CIO

    1. Establish technology standards that enable the organization to consistently and securely integrate platforms or solutions.
    2. Lead the project team that defined and standardized the organization's reference architecture.
    3. Need to work on listening to a variety of stakeholder demands rather than only specific roles/titles.

    Transition

    • Strengths: Technology acumen, budget planning, allocating resources
    • Enhance: Stakeholder relationship management.
    • Work with current CDO to define and implement more digital transformation initiatives.

    CDSO

    • Being responsive to customer expectations and communicating clear and realistic timelines.
    • Establish trust among the organization that services will deliver expected value.
    • Empowering service owners to manage and oversee the delivery of their services.

    Network Opportunities

    • Connect with board members and understand each of their key areas of priority.
    • Begin to interact with end customers and define ways that will enhance their customer experience.
    • Chief Digital Officer

    Actions now in line with aspiration

    Appendix: Capabilities & Capability Model

    IT and digital capabilities

    Using capabilities for the operating model:

    • Capabilities are focused on the entire system that would be in place to satisfy a particular need. This not only includes people who have skills to complete a specific task, but also the technology, processes, and resources required to deliver.
    • Focusing on capabilities rather than the individuals in organizational redesign enables a more objective and holistic view of what your organization is striving toward.
    • Capabilities deliver on specific need(s) and how they are organized changes the way those need(s) are delivered.

    An image of the IT Management and Governance Framework.

    Strategic Direction

    • IT Governance
    • Strategic Planning
    • Digital Strategy
    • Performance Measurement
    • IT Management & Policies
    • Organizational Quality Management
    • R&D and Innovation
    • Stakeholder Management

    People & Resources

    • Strategic Communications
    • People Resource Management
    • Workforce Strategy & Planning
    • Organizational Change Enablement
    • Adoption & Training
    • Financial/Budget Management
    • Vendor Portfolio Management
    • Vendor Selection & Contract Management
    • Vendor Performance Management

    Architecture & Integration

    • Enterprise Architecture Delivery
    • Business Architecture Delivery
    • Solution Architecture Delivery
    • Technology Architecture
    • Data Architecture
    • Security Architecture
    • Process Integration
    • Integration Planning

    Service Planning

    • Service Governance
    • Service Strategy & Roadmap
    • Service Management
    • Service Governance
    • Service Performance Measurement
    • Service Design & Planning
    • Service Orchestration

    Security & Risk

    • Security Strategic Planning
    • Risk Management
    • External Compliance Management
    • Security Response & Recovery Management
    • Security Management
    • Controls & Internal Audit Planning
    • Security Defense Operations
    • Security Administration
    • Cybersecurity Threat Intelligence
    • Integrated Physical/IT Security
    • OT/IoT Security
    • Data Protection & Privacy

    Application Delivery

    • Application Lifecycle Management
    • Systems Integration Management
    • Application Development
    • User Experience
    • Quality Assurance & UAT
    • Application Maintenance
    • Low Code Development

    Project Portfolio Management

    • Demand Management
    • Requirement Analysis Management
    • Portfolio Management
    • Project Management

    Data & Business Intelligence (BI)

    • Reporting & Analytics
    • Data Management
    • Data Quality
    • Data Integration
    • Enterprise Content Management
    • Data Governance
    • Data Strategy
    • AI/ML Management

    Service Delivery

    • Operations Management
    • Service Desk Management
    • Incident Management
    • Problem Management
    • Service Enhancements
    • Operational Change Enablement
    • Release Management
    • Automation Management

    Infrastructure & Operations

    • Asset Management
    • Infrastructure Portfolio Strategic Planning
    • Availability & Capacity Management
    • Network & Infrastructure Management
    • Configuration Management
    • Cloud Orchestration
    An image of the summary slide for this blueprint, with the headings: Centralized; Shifted; and Embedded.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley
    Practice Lead – Vendor Management Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Christine Coz
    Executive Counselor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Duraid Ibrahim
    Executive Counselor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Chris Goodhue
    Managing Partner– Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead – CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead – CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Vicki van Alphen
    Executive Counselor – Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    *Plus an additional 5 industry experts who anonymously contributed to this research piece.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Adopt an Exponential IT Mindset

    • To succeed in the coming business transformation, IT will have to adopt different priorities in its mission, governance, capabilities, and partnerships.
    • CIOs will have to provide exceptionally mature services while owning business targets.

    Become a Transformational CIO

    • Business transformations are happening, but CIOs are often involved only when it comes time to implement change. This makes it difficult for the CIO to be perceived as an organizational leader.
    • Elevate your stature as a business leader.
    • Create a high-powered IT organization that is focused on driving lasting change, improving client experiences, and encouraging collaboration across the entire enterprise.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
    • Pre-pandemic digital strategies have been primarily focused on automation. However, your post-pandemic digital strategy must focus on driving resilience for growth opportunities.

    Bibliography

    Bennet, Trevon. "What is a Chief Experience Officer (CXO)? And what do they do?" Indeed, 14 March 2023. https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/finding-a-job/what-is-chief-experience-officer#:~:text=A%20CXO%20plans%20strategies%20and,customer%20acquisition%20and%20retention%20strategies
    Bishop, Carrie. "Five years of Digital Services in San Francisco." Medium, 20 January 2022. https://medium.com/san-francisco-digital-services/five-years-of-digital-services-in-san-francisco-805a758c2b83
    DAC Digital and Chawla, Yash. "Global surge in embedded software demand; here is why." DAC Digital, 2023 <ttps://dac.digital/global-surge-in-embedded-software-demand-here-is-why/
    Deloitte. "If you want your digital transformation to succeed, align your operating model to your strategy." Harvard Business Review, 31 January 2020. https://hbr.org/sponsored/2020/01/if-you-want-your-digital-transformation-to-succeed-align-your-operating-model-to-your-strategy.
    Deloitte. "2023 Global Human Capital Trends Report." Deloitte, 2023. https://www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/sg/Documents/human-capital/sea-cons-hc-trends-report-2023.pdf
    Dose, Jens. "Deutsche Bahn CIO on track to decentralize IT." CIO, 19 April 2023. https://www.cio.com/article/473071/deutsche-bahn-cio-on-track-to-decentralize-it.html
    Ehrlich, Oliver., Fanderl, Harald., Maldara, David., & Mittangunta, Divya. "How the operating model can unlock the power of customer experience." McKinsey, 28 June 2022. https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/growth-marketing-and-sales/our-insights/how-the-operating-model-can-unlock-the-full-power-of-customer-experience
    FCW. "Digital Government Summit Agenda." FCW. 2021. https://events-archive.fcw.com/events/2021/digital-government-summit/index.html
    Foundry. "State of the CIO." IDG, 25 January 2023. https://foundryco.com/tools-for-marketers/research-state-of-the-cio/
    Foundry. "Digital Business Study 2023: IT Leaders are future-proofing their business with digital strategies." IDG, 2023. https://foundryco.com/tools-for-marketers/research-digital-business/
    Indeed Editorial Team. "Centralized vs. Decentralized Structures: 7 Key Differences." Indeed, 10 March 2023. https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/centralized-vs-decentralized
    Indeed Editorial Team. "What is process integration?." Indeed, 14 November 2022. https://ca.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/process-integration#:~:text=Process%20integration%2C%20or%20business%20process,it%20reach%20its%20primary%20objectives
    KPMG International. "Global Tech Report." KPMG, 2022.
    McHugh, Brian. "Service orchestration is reshaping IT—Here's what to know." Active Batch, 8 November 2022. https://www.advsyscon.com/blog/service-orchestration-what-is/
    Morris, Chris. "IDC FutureScape: Worldwide CIO Agenda 2023 Predictions."" IDC, January, 2023. https://www.idc.com/getdoc.jsp?containerId=AP49998523
    PwC. "Global Digital Trust Insights Report." PwC, 2023
    Roberts, Dan. "5 CIOs on building a service-oriented IT culture." CIO, 13 April 2023. https://www.cio.com/article/472805/5-cios-on-building-a-service-oriented-it-culture.html
    Singh, Yashvendra. "CIOs must evolve to stave off existential threat to their role." CIO, 30 March 2023. https://www.cio.com/article/465612/cios-must-evolve-to-stave-off-existential-threat-to-their-role.html
    Spacey, John. "16 Examples of IT Services." Simplicable, 28 January 2018. https://simplicable.com/IT/it-services

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}284|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $20,972 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 14 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
    • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new systems and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical capabilities and resources needed to satisfy their growing testing backlog, risking product success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Testing is often viewed as a support capability rather than an enabler of business growth. It receives focus and investment only when it becomes a visible problem.
    • The rise in security risks, aggressive performance standards, constantly evolving priorities, and misunderstood quality policies further complicate QA as it drives higher expectations for effective practices.
    • QA starts with good requirements. Tests are only as valuable as the requirements they are validating and verifying. Early QA improves the accuracy of downstream tests and reduces costs of fixing defects late in delivery.
    • Quality is an organization-wide accountability. Upstream work can have extensive ramifications if all roles are not accountable for the decisions they make.
    • Quality must account for both business and technical requirements. Valuable change delivery is cemented in a clear understanding of quality from both business and IT perspectives.

    Impact and Result

    • Standardize your definition of a product. Come to an organizational agreement of what attributes define a high-quality product. Accommodate both business and IT perspectives in your definition.
    • Clarify the role of QA throughout your delivery pipeline. Indicate where and how QA is involved throughout product delivery. Instill quality-first thinking in each stage of your pipeline to catch defects and issues early.
    • Structure your test design, planning, execution, and communication practices to better support your quality definition and business and IT environments and priorities. Adopt QA good practices to ensure your tests satisfy your criteria for a high-quality and successful product.

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a strong foundation for quality, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your QA process

    Standardize your product quality definition and your QA roles, processes, and guidelines according to your business and IT priorities.

    • Build a Strong Foundation for Quality – Phase 1: Define Your QA Process
    • Test Strategy Template

    2. Adopt QA good practices

    Build a solid set of good practices to define your defect tolerances, recognize the appropriate test coverage, and communicate your test results.

    • Build a Strong Foundation for Quality – Phase 2: Adopt QA Good Practices
    • Test Plan Template
    • Test Case Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Software Quality Assurance Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your QA Process

    The Purpose

    Discuss your quality definition and how quality is interpreted from both business and IT perspectives.

    Review your case for strengthening your QA practice.

    Review the standardization of QA roles, processes, and guidelines in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of quality that is accepted across IT and between the business and IT.

    Clear QA roles and responsibilities.

    A repeatable QA process that is applicable across the delivery pipeline.

    Activities

    1.1 List your QA objectives and metrics.

    1.2 Adopt your foundational QA process.

    Outputs

    Quality definition and QA objectives and metrics.

    QA guiding principles, process, and roles and responsibilities.

    2 Adopt QA Good Practices

    The Purpose

    Discuss the practices to reveal the sufficient degree of test coverage to meet your acceptance criteria, defect tolerance, and quality definition.

    Review the technologies and tools to support the execution and reporting of your tests.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    QA practices aligned to industry good practices supporting your quality definition.

    Defect tolerance and acceptance criteria defined against stakeholder priorities.

    Identification of test scenarios to meet test coverage expectations.

    Activities

    2.1 Define your defect tolerance.

    2.2 Model and prioritize your tests.

    2.3 Develop and execute your QA activities.

    2.4 Communicate your QA activities.

    Outputs

    Defect tolerance levels and courses of action.

    List of test cases and scenarios that meet test coverage expectations.

    Defined test types, environment and data requirements, and testing toolchain.

    Test dashboard and communication flow.

    Streamline Application Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}403|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $64,272 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 40 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Maintenance
    • Parent Category Link: /maintenance
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical management capabilities to balance maintenance with new development and ensure high product value.
    • Application management is often viewed as a support function rather than an enabler of business growth. Focus and investments are only placed on management when it becomes a problem.
    • The lack of governance and practice accountability leaves application management in a chaotic state: politics take over, resources are not strategically allocated, and customers are frustrated.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • New features, fixes, and enhancements are all treated the same and managed in a single backlog. Teams need to focus on prioritizing their efforts on what is valuable to the organization, not to a single department.
    • Business integration is not optional. The business (i.e. product owners) must be represented in guiding delivery efforts and performing ongoing validation and verification of new features and changes.

    Impact and Result

    • Justify the necessity to optimize application management. Gain a grounded understanding of stakeholder objectives and validate their achievability against the current maturity of application management.
    • Strengthen backlog management practices. Obtain a holistic picture of the business and technical impacts, risks, value, complexity, and urgency of each backlog item in order to justify its priority and relevance. Apply the appropriate management approach to each software product according to its criticality and value to the business.
    • Establish and govern a repeatable process. Develop a management process with well-defined steps, quality controls, and roles and responsibilities, and instill good practices to improve the success of delivery.

    Streamline Application Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should sustain your application management practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your priorities

    State the success criteria of your application management practice through defined objectives and metrics. Assess your maturity.

    • Streamline Application Management – Phase 1: Define Your Priorities
    • Application Management Strategy Template
    • Application Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Govern application management

    Structure your application management governance model with the right process and roles. Inject product ownership into your practice.

    • Streamline Application Management – Phase 2: Govern Application Management

    3. Build your optimization roadmap

    Build your application management optimization roadmap to achieve your target state.

    • Streamline Application Management – Phase 3: Build Your Optimization Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Streamline Application Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Priorities

    The Purpose

    State the success criteria of your application management practice through defined objectives and metrics.

    Assess your maturity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded stakeholder expectations

    Application management maturity and identification of optimization opportunities

    Activities

    1.1 Set your objectives.

    1.2 Assess your maturity.

    Outputs

    Application management objectives and metrics

    Application management maturity and optimization opportunities

    2 Govern Application Management

    The Purpose

    Structure your application management governance model with the right process and roles.

    Inject product ownership into your practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Management approach aligned to product value and criticality

    Management techniques to govern the product backlog

    Target-state application management process and roles

    Activities

    2.1 Select your management approach.

    2.2 Manage your single product backlog.

    2.3 Optimize your management process.

    2.4 Define your management roles.

    Outputs

    Application management approach for each application

    Product backlog management practices

    Application management process

    Application management roles and responsibilities and communication flow

    3 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build your application management optimization roadmap to achieve your target state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Optimization opportunities

    Application management optimization roadmap

    Activities

    3.1 Build your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Application management optimization roadmap

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}478|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $21,171 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Tier 2 and 3 specialists lose time and resources working on tickets instead of more complex projects.
    • The service desk finds themselves resolving the same incidents over and over, wasting manual work on tasks that could be automated.
    • Employees expect modern, consumer-like experiences when they need help; they want to access information and resources from wherever they are and have the tools to solve their problems themselves without waiting for help.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • It can be difficult to overcome the mindset that difficult functions need to be escalated. Shift left involves a cultural change to the way the service desk works, and overcoming objections and getting buy-in up front is critical.
    • Many organizations have built a great knowledgebase but fail to see the value of it over time as it becomes overburdened with overlapping and out-of-date information. Knowledge capture, updating, and review must be embedded into your processes if you want to keep the knowledgebase useful.
    • Similarly, the self-service portal is often deployed out of the box with little input from end users and fails to deliver its intended benefits. The portal needs to be designed from the end user’s point of view with the goal of self-resolution if it will serve its purpose of deflecting tickets.

    Impact and Result

    • Embrace a shift-left strategy by moving repeatable service desk tasks and requests into lower-cost delivery channels such as self-help tools and automation.
    • Shift work from Tier 2 and 3 support to Tier 1 through good knowledge management practices that empower the first level of support with documented solutions to recurring issues and free up more specialized resources for project work and higher value tasks.
    • Shift knowledge from the service desk to the end user by enabling them to find their own solutions. A well-designed and implemented self-service portal will result in fewer logged tickets to the service desk and empowered, satisfied end users.
    • Shift away manual repetitive work through the use of AI and automation.
    • Successfully shifting this work left can reduce time to resolve, decrease support costs, and increase end-user satisfaction.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand why a shift-left strategy can help to optimize your service desk, review Info-Tech's methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare to shift left

    Assess whether you’re ready to optimize the service desk with a shift-left strategy, get buy-in for the initiative, and define metrics to measure success.

    • Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy – Phase 1: Prepare to Shift Left
    • Shift-Left Prerequisites Assessment
    • Shift-Left Strategy
    • Shift-Left Stakeholder Buy-In Presentation

    2. Design shift-left model

    Build strategy and identify specific opportunities to shift service support left to Level 1 through knowledge sharing and other methods, to the end-user through self-service, and to automation and AI.

    • Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy – Phase 2: Design Shift Left Model
    • Shift-Left Action Plan
    • Knowledge Management Workflows (Visio)
    • Knowledge Management Workflows (PDF)
    • Self-Service Portal Checklist
    • Self-Service Resolution Workflow (Visio)
    • Self-Service Resolution Workflow (PDF)

    3. Implement and communicate

    Identify, track, and implement specific shift-left opportunities and document a communications plan to increase adoption.

    • Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy – Phase 3: Implement & Communicate
    • Incident Management Workflow (Visio)
    • Incident Management Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare to Shift Left

    The Purpose

    Define how shift left would apply in your organization, get buy-in for the initiative, and define metrics to measure success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined scope and objectives for the shift-left initiative

    Buy-in for the program

    Metrics to keep the project on track and evaluate success

    Activities

    1.1 Review current service desk structure

    1.2 Discuss challenges

    1.3 Review shift-left model and discuss how it would apply in your organization

    1.4 Complete the Shift-Left Prerequisites Assessment

    1.5 Complete a RACI chart for the project

    1.6 Define and document objectives

    1.7 Review the stakeholder buy-in presentation

    1.8 Document critical success factors

    1.9 Define KPIs and metrics

    Outputs

    Shift-left scope

    Completed shift-left prerequisites assessment

    RACI chart

    Defined objectives

    Stakeholder buy-in presentation

    Critical success factors

    Metrics to measure success

    2 Plan to Shift to Level 1

    The Purpose

    Build strategy and identify specific opportunities to shift service support left to Level 1 through knowledge sharing and other methods.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified initiatives to shift work to Level 1

    Documented knowledge management process workflows and strategy

    Activities

    2.1 Identify barriers to Level 1 resolution

    2.2 Discuss knowledgebase challenges and areas for improvement

    2.3 Optimize KB input process

    2.4 Optimize KB usage process

    2.5 Optimize KB review process

    2.6 Discuss and document KCS strategy and roles

    2.7 Document knowledge success metrics

    2.8 Brainstorm additional methods of increasing FLR

    Outputs

    KB input workflow

    KB usage workflow

    KB review workflow

    KCS strategy and roles

    Knowledge management metrics

    Identified opportunities to shift to Level 1

    3 Plan to Shift to End User and Automation

    The Purpose

    Build strategy and identify specific opportunities to shift service support left to the end user through self-service and to automation and AI.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified initiatives to shift work to self-service and automation

    Evaluation of self-service portal and identified opportunities for improvement

    Activities

    3.1 Review existing self-service portal and discuss vision

    3.2 Identify opportunities to improve portal accessibility, UI, and features

    3.3 Evaluate the user-facing knowledgebase

    3.4 Optimize the ticket intake form

    3.5 Document plan to improve, communicate, and evaluate portal

    3.6 Map the user experience with a workflow

    3.7 Document your AI strategy

    3.8 Identify candidates for automation

    Outputs

    Identified opportunities to improve portal

    Improvements to knowledgebase

    Improved ticket intake form

    Strategy to communicate and measure success of portal

    Self-service resolution workflow

    Strategy to apply AI and automation

    Identified opportunities to shift tasks to automation

    4 Build Implementation and Communication Plan

    The Purpose

    Build an action plan to implement shift left, including a communications strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Action plan to track and implement shift-left opportunities

    Communications plan to increase adoption

    Activities

    4.1 Examine process workflows for shift-left opportunities

    4.2 Document shift-left-specific responsibilities for each role

    4.3 Identify and track shift-left opportunities in the action plan

    4.4 Brainstorm objections and responses

    4.5 Document communications plan

    Outputs

    Incident management workflow with shift-left opportunities

    Shift left responsibilities for key roles

    Shift-left action plan

    Objection handling responses

    Communications plan

    Document Business Goals and Capabilities for Your IT Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}77|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • As a strategic driver, IT needs to work with the business. Yet, traditionally IT has not worked hand-in-hand with the business. IT does not know what information it needs from the business to execute on its initiatives.
    • A faster time to new investment decisions mean that IT needs a repeatable and efficient process to understand what the business needs.
    • CIOs must execute strategic initiatives to create an IT function that can support the business. Most CIOs fail because of low business support.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Understanding the business context is a must for all strategic IT initiatives. At its core, each strategic IT project requires answers to a specific set of questions regarding the business.
    • An effective CIO understands which part of the business context applies to which strategic IT project and, in turn, what questions to ask to uncover those insights.

    Impact and Result

    • Uncover what IT knows and needs to know about the business context. This is a necessary first step to begin each of Info-Tech’s strategic IT initiatives, which any CIO should complete.
    • Conduct efficient and repeatable business context discovery activities to uncover business context gaps.
    • Document the business context you have uncovered and streamline the process for executing on Info-Tech’s strategic CIO blueprints.

    Document Business Goals and Capabilities for Your IT Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should define the business context, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand how we can support you in completing key CIO strategic initiatives.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and document the business needs of the organization

    Define the business context needed to complete strategic IT initiatives.

    • Document Business Goals and Capabilities for Your IT Strategy – Storyboard
    • Business Context Discovery Tool
    • Business Context Discovery Record Template
    • PESTLE Analysis Template
    • Strategy Alignment Map Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Document Business Goals and Capabilities for Your IT Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify the Missing Business Context (pre-work)

    The Purpose

    Conduct analysis and facilitate discussions to uncover business needs for IT.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A baseline understanding of what business needs mean for IT

    Activities

    1.1 Define the strategic CIO initiatives our organization will pursue.

    1.2 Complete the Business Context Discovery Tool.

    1.3 Schedule relevant interviews.

    1.4 Select relevant Info-Tech diagnostics to conduct.

    Outputs

    Business context scope

    Completed Business Context Discovery Tool

    Completed Info-Tech diagnostics

    2 Uncover and Document the Missing Context

    The Purpose

    Analyze the outputs from step 1 and uncover the business context gaps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A thorough understanding of business needs and why IT should pursue certain initiatives

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct group or one-on-one interviews to identify the missing pieces of the business context.

    Outputs

    Documentation of answers to business context gaps

    3 Uncover and Document the Missing Context

    The Purpose

    Analyze the outputs from step 1 and uncover the business context gaps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A thorough understanding of business needs and why IT should pursue certain initiatives

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct group or one-on-one interviews to identify the missing pieces of the business context.

    Outputs

    Documentation of answers to business context gaps

    4 Review Business Context and Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Review findings and implications for IT’s strategic initiative.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A thorough understanding of business needs and how IT’s strategic initiatives addresses those needs

    Activities

    4.1 Review documented business context with IT team.

    4.2 Discuss next steps for strategic CIO initiative execution.

    Outputs

    Finalized version of the business context

    Stabilize Infrastructure & Operations During Work-From-Anywhere

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}309|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Work-from-anywhere isn’t going anywhere. IT Infrastructure & Operations needs to:

    • Rebuild trust in the stability of IT infrastructure and operations.
    • Identify gaps created from the COVID-19 rush to remote work.
    • Identify how IT can better support remote workers.

    IT went through an initial crunch to enable remote work. It’s time to be proactive and learn from our mistakes.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The nature of work has fundamentally changed. IT departments must ensure service continuity, not for how the company worked in 2019, but how the company is working now and will be working tomorrow.
    • Revisit the basics. Don’t focus on becoming an innovator until you have improved network access, app access, file access, and collaboration tools.
    • Aim for near-term innovation. Once you’re a trusted operator, become a business partner by directly empowering end users at home and in the office.

    Impact and Result

    Build a work-from-anywhere strategy that resonates with the business.

    • Strengthen the foundations of collaboration tools, app access, file access, network access, and endpoint standards.
    • Explore opportunities to strengthen IT operations.
    • Proactively help the business through employee experience monitoring and facilities optimization.

    Stabilize Infrastructure & Operations During Work-From-Anywhere Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a strategy for improving how well IT infrastructure and operations support work-from-anywhere, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Stabilize IT infrastructure

    Ensure your fundamentals are solid.

    2. Update IT operations

    Revisit your practices to ensure you can effectively operate in work-from-anywhere.

    3. Optimize IT infrastructure & operations

    Offer additional value to the business by proactively addressing these items.

    • Roadmap Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Stabilize Infrastructure & Operations During Work-From-Anywhere

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Stabilize IT Infrastructure

    The Purpose

    Strengthen the foundations of IT infrastructure.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved end-user experience

    Stabilized environment

    Activities

    1.1 Review work-from-anywhere framework and identify capability gaps.

    1.2 Review diagnostic results to identify satisfaction gaps.

    1.3 Record improvement opportunities for foundational capabilities: collaboration, network, file access, app access.

    1.4 Identify deliverables and opportunities to provide value for each.

    Outputs

    Projects and initiatives to stabilize IT infrastructure

    Deliverables and opportunities to provide value for foundational capabilities

    2 Update IT Operations and Optimize

    The Purpose

    Update IT operational practices to support work-from-anywhere more effectively.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved IT operations

    Activities

    2.1 Identify IT infrastructure and operational capability gaps.

    2.2 Record improvement opportunities for DRP & BCP.

    2.3 Record improvement opportunities for endpoint and systems management practices.

    2.4 Record improvement opportunities for IT operational practices.

    2.5 Explore office space optimization and employee experience monitoring.

    Outputs

    Projects and initiatives to update IT operations to better support work-from-anywhere

    Longer-term strategic initiatives

    Deliverables and opportunities to provide value for each capability

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}237|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Your organization has many business processes that rely on repetitive, routine manual data collection and processing work, and there is high stakeholder interest in automating them.
    • You’re investigating whether robotic process automation (RPA) is a suitable technological enabler for automating such processes.
    • Being a trending technology, especially with its association with artificial intelligence (AI), there is much marketing fluff, hype, and misunderstanding about RPA.
    • Estimating the potential impact of RPA on business is difficult, as the relevant industry statistics often conflict each other and you aren’t sure how applicable it is to your business.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There are no physical robots in RPA. RPA is about software “bots” that interact with applications as if they were human users to perform routine, repetitive work in your place. It’s for any business in any industry, not just for manufacturing.
    • RPA is lightweight IT; it reduces the cost of entry, maintenance, and teardown of automation as well as the technological requirement of resources that maintain it, as it complements existing automation solutions in your toolkit.
    • RPA is rules-based. While AI promises to relax the rigidity of rules, it adds business risks that are poorly understood by both businesses and subject-matter experts. Rules-based “RPA 1.0” is mature and may pose a stronger business case than AI-enabled RPA.
    • RPA’s sweet spot is “swivel chair automation”: processes that require human workers to act as a conduit between several systems, moving between applications, manually keying, re-keying, copying, and pasting information. A bot can take their place.

    Impact and Result

    • Discover RPA and how it differentiates from other automation solutions.
    • Understand the benefits and risks of complementing RPA with AI.
    • Identify existing business processes best suited for automation with RPA.
    • Communicate RPA’s potential business benefits to stakeholders.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should use RPA to automate routine, repetitive data collection and processing work, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Discover robotic process automation

    Learn about RPA, including how it compares to IT-led automation rooted in business process management practices and the role of AI.

    • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 1: Discover Robotic Process Automation
    • Robotic Process Automation Communication Template

    2. Identify processes best suited for robotic process automation

    Identify and prioritize candidate processes for RPA.

    • Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation – Phase 2: Identify Processes Best Suited for Robotic Process Automation
    • Process Evaluation Tool for Robotic Process Automation
    • Minimum Viable Business Case Document
    [infographic]

    Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}389|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are facing challenges from explosive information growth in both volume and complexity, as well as the need to use more new sources of information for social media just to remain in business.
    • A lot of content can be created quickly, but managing those digital assets properly through metadata tagging that will be used consistently and effectively requires processes to be in place to create standardized and informational metadata at the source of content creation.
    • Putting these processes in place changes the way the organization handles its information, which may generate pushback, and requires socialization and proper management of the metadata strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Metadata is an imperative part of the organizations broader information management strategy. Some may believe that metadata is not needed anymore; Google search is not a magic act – it relies on information tagging that reflects cultural sentiment.
    • Metadata should be pliable. It needs to grow with the changing cultural and corporate vernacular and knowledge, and adapt to changing needs.
    • Build a map for your metadata before you dig for buried treasure. Implement metadata standards and processes for current digital assets before chasing after your treasure troves of existing artifacts.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a sustainable and effective digital asset management (DAM) program by understanding Info-Tech’s DAM framework and how the framework fits within your organization for better management of key digital assets.
    • Create an enterprise-wide metadata design principles handbook to keep track of metadata schemas and standards, as well as communicate the standards to the entire organization.
    • Gather requirements for your DAM program, as well as the DAM system and roles, by interviewing key stakeholders and identifying prevalent pains and opportunities. Understand where digital assets are created, used, and stored throughout the enterprise to gain a high-level perspective of DAM requirements.
    • Identify the organization’s current state of metadata management along with the target state, identify the gaps, and then define solutions to fill those gaps. Ensure business initiatives are woven into the mix.
    • Create a comprehensive roadmap to prioritize initiatives and delineate responsibilities.

    Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a digital asset management program focused on metadata, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a foundation for your DAM project

    Gain an in-depth understanding of what digital asset management is as well as how it is supported by Info-Tech’s DAM framework.

    • Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata – Phase 1: Build a Foundation for Your DAM Project
    • DAM Design Principles Handbook
    • Where in the World Is My Digital Asset? Tool
    • Digital Asset Inventory Tool
    • DAM Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Dive into the DAM strategy

    Create a metadata program execution strategy and assess current and target states for the organization’s DAM.

    • Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata – Phase 2: Dive Into the DAM Strategy
    • DAM Roadmap Tool
    • DAM Metadata Execution Strategy Document

    3. Create intuitive metadata for your DAM

    Design a governance plan for ongoing DAM and metadata management.

    • Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata – Phase 3: Create Intuitive Metadata for Your Digital Assets
    • Metadata Manager Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Break Open Your DAM With Intuitive Metadata

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Structure the Metadata Project

    The Purpose

    Develop a foundation of knowledge regarding DAM and metadata, as well as the best practices for organizing the organization’s information and digital assets for ideal findability.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Design standardized processes for metadata creation and digital asset management to help to improve findability of key assets.

    Gain knowledge of how DAM can benefit both IT and the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Build a DAM and metadata knowledge foundation.

    1.2 Kick-start creation of the organization’s DAM design principles handbook.

    1.3 Interview key business units to understand drivers for the program.

    1.4 Develop a DAM framework.

    Outputs

    DAM Design Principles Handbook

    DAM Execution Strategy Document

    2 Assess Requirements for the DAM Program

    The Purpose

    Inventory the organization’s key digital assets and their repositories.

    Gather the organization’s requirements for a full-time digital asset librarian, as well as the DAM system.  

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine clear and specific requirements for the organization from the DAM system and the people involved.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct a digital asset inventory to identify key assets to include in DAM.

    2.2 Prioritize digital assets to determine their risk and value to ensure appropriate support through the information lifecycle.

    2.3 Determine the requirements of the business and IT for the DAM system and its metadata.

    Outputs

    Digital Asset Inventory Tool

    DAM Requirements Gathering Tool

    3 Design Roadmap and Plan Implementation

    The Purpose

    Determine strategic initiatives and create a roadmap outlining key steps required to get the organization to start enabling data-driven insights.

    Determine timing of the initiatives. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish a clear direction for the DAM program.

    Build a step-by-step outline of how to create effective metadata with true business-IT collaboration.

    Have prioritized initiatives with dependencies mapped out.

    Activities

    3.1 Assess current and target states of DAM in the organization.

    3.2 Brainstorm and document practical initiatives to close the gap.

    3.3 Discuss strategies rooted in business requirements to execute the metadata management program to improve findability of digital assets.

    Outputs

    DAM Roadmap Tool

    4 Establish Metadata Governance

    The Purpose

    Identify the roles required for effective DAM and metadata management.

    Create sample metadata according to established guiding principles and implement a feedback method to create intuitive metadata in the organization. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Metadata management is an ongoing project. Implementing it requires user input and feedback, which governance will help to support.

    By integrating metadata governance with larger information or data governance bodies, DAM and metadata management will gain sustainability. 

    Activities

    4.1 Discuss and assign roles and responsibilities for initiatives identified in the roadmap.

    4.2 Review policy requirements for the information assets in the organization and strategies to address enforcement.

    4.3 Integrate the governance of metadata into larger governance committees.

    Outputs

    DAM Execution Strategy

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}104|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $100,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • You don’t know where to start when it comes to building an innovation program for your organization.
    • You need to create a culture of innovation in your business, department, or team.
    • Past innovation efforts have been met with resistance and cynicism.
    • You don’t know what processes you need to support business-led innovation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Innovation is about people, not ideas or processes. Innovation does not require a formal process, a dedicated innovation team, or a large budget; the most important success factor for innovation is culture. Companies that facilitate innovative behaviors like growth mindset, collaboration, and taking smart risks are most likely to see the benefits of innovation.

    Impact and Result

    • Outperform your peers by 30% by adopting an innovative approach to your business.
    • Move quickly to launch your innovation practice and beat the competition.
    • Develop the skills and capabilities you need to sustain innovation over the long term.

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program Storyboard – A step-by-step process to create the innovation culture, processes, and tools you need for business-led innovation.

    This storyboard includes three phases and nine activities that will help you define your purpose, align your people, and build your practice.

    • Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program – Phases 1-3

    2. Innovation Program Template – An executive communication deck summarizing the outputs from this research.

    Use this template in conjunction with the activities in the main storyboard to create and communicate your innovation program. This template uses sample data from a fictional retailer, Acme Corp, to illustrate an ideal innovation program summary.

    • Innovation Program Template

    3. Job Description – Chief Innovation Officer

    This job description can be used to hire your Chief Innovation Officer. There are many other job descriptions available on the Info-Tech website and referenced within the storyboard.

    • Chief Innovation Officer

    4. Innovation Ideation Session Template – Use this template to facilitate innovation sessions with the business.

    Use this framework to facilitate an ideation session with members of the business. Instructions for how to customize the information and facilitate each section is included within the deck.

    • Innovation Ideation Session Template

    5. Initiative Prioritization Workbook – Use this spreadsheet template to easily and transparently prioritize initiatives for pilot.

    This spreadsheet provides an analytical and transparent method to prioritize initiatives based on weighted criteria relevant to your business.

    • Initiative Prioritization Workbook

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Ambitions

    The Purpose

    Define your innovation ambitions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a better understanding of why you are innovating and what your organization will gain from an innovation program.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your innovation mandate.

    1.2 Define your innovation ambitions.

    1.3 Determine value proposition & metrics.

    Outputs

    Complete the "Our purpose" section of the Innovation Program Template

    Complete "Vision and guiding principles" section

    Complete "Scope and value proposition" section

    Success metrics

    2 Align Your People

    The Purpose

    Build a culture, operating model, and team that support innovation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a plan to address culture gaps and identify and implement your operating model.

    Activities

    2.1 Foster a culture of innovation.

    2.2 Define your operating model.

    Outputs

    Complete "Building an innovative culture" section

    Complete "Operating model" section

    3 Develop Your Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Create the capability to facilitate innovation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create a resourcing plan and prioritization templates to make your innovation program successful.

    Activities

    3.1 Build core innovation capabilities.

    3.2 Develop prioritization criteria.

    Outputs

    Team structure and resourcing requirements

    Prioritization spreadsheet template

    4 Build Your Program

    The Purpose

    Finalize your program and complete the final deliverable.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Walk away with a complete plan for your innovation program.

    Activities

    4.1 Define your methodology to pilot projects.

    4.2 Conduct a program retrospective.

    Outputs

    Complete "Operating model" section in the template

    Notable wins and goals

    Further reading

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    Transform your business by adopting the culture and practices that drive innovation.

    Analyst Perspective

    Innovation is not about ideas, it's about people.

    Many organizations stumble when implementing innovation programs. Innovation is challenging to get right, and even more challenging to sustain over the long term.

    One of the common stumbling blocks we see comes from organizations focusing more on the ideas and the process than on the culture and the people needed to make innovation a way of life. However, the most successful innovators are the ones which have adopted a culture of innovation and reinforce innovative behaviors across their organization. Organizational cultures which promote growth mindset, trust, collaboration, learning, and a willingness to fail are much more likely to produce successful innovators.

    This research is not just about culture, but culture is the starting point for innovation. My hope is that organizations will go beyond the processes and methodologies laid out here and use this research to dramatically improve their organization's performance.

    Kim Rodriguez

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    As a leader in your organization, you need to:

    • Understand your organization's innovation goals.
    • Create an innovation program or structure.
    • Develop a culture of innovation across your team or organization.
    • Demonstrate an ability to innovate and grow the business.

    Common Obstacles

    In the past, you might have experienced one or more of the following:

    • Innovation initiatives lose momentum.
    • Cynicism and distrust hamper innovation.
    • Innovation efforts are unfocused or don't provide the anticipated value.
    • Bureaucracy has created a bottleneck that stifles innovation.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Understand the different types of innovation.
    • Develop a clear vision, scope, and focus.
    • Create organizational culture and behaviors aligned with your innovation ambitions.
    • Adopt an operational model and methodologies best suited for your culture, goals, and budget.
    • Successfully run a pilot program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no single right way to approach innovation. Begin with an understanding of your innovation ambitions, your existing culture, and the resources available to you, then adopt the innovation operating model that is best suited to your situation.

    Note: This research is written for the individual who is leading the development of the innovation. This role is referred to as the Chief Innovation Officer (CINO) throughout this research but could be the CIO, CTO, IT director, or another business leader.

    Why is innovation so challenging?

    Most organizations want to be innovative, but very few succeed.

    • Bureaucracy slows innovation: Innovation requires speed – it is important to fail fast and early so you can iterate to improve the final solution. Small, agile organizations like startups tend to be more risk tolerant and can move more quickly to iterate on new ideas compared to larger organizations.
    • Change is uncomfortable: Most people are profoundly uncomfortable with failure, risk, and unknowns – three critical components of innovation. Humans are wired to think efficiently rather than innovatively, which leads to confirmation bias and lack of ingenuity.
    • You will likely fail: Innovation initiatives rarely succeed on the first try – Harvard Business Review estimates between 70% and 90% of innovation efforts fail. Organizations which are more tolerant of failure tend to be significantly more innovative than those which are not (Review of Financial Studies, 2014).

    Based on a survey of global innovation trends and practices:

    75%

    Three-quarters of companies say innovation is a top-three priority.
    Source: BCG, 2021

    30%

    But only 30% of executives say their organizations are doing it well.
    Source: BCG, 2019

    The biggest obstacles to innovation are cultural

    The biggest obstacles to innovation in large companies

    Based on a survey of 270 business leaders.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2018

    A bar graph from the Harvard Business Review

    The most common challenges business leaders experience relate to people and culture. Success is based on people, not ideas.

    Politics, turf wars, and a lack of alignment: territorial departments, competition for resources, and unclear roles are holding back the innovation efforts of 55% of respondents.

    FIX IT
    Senior leadership needs to be clear on the innovation goals and how business units are expected to contribute to them.

    Cultural issues: many large companies have a culture that rewards operational excellence and disincentivizes risk. A history of failed innovation attempts may result in significant resistance to new change efforts.

    FIX IT
    Cultural change takes time. Ensure you are rewarding collaboration and risk-taking, and hire people with fresh new perspectives.

    Inability to act on signals crucial to the future of the business: only 18% of respondents indicated their organization was unaware of disruptions, but 42% said they struggled with acting on leading indicators of change.

    FIX IT
    Build the ability to quickly run pilots or partner with startups and incubators to test out new ideas without lengthy review and approval processes.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2018

    Build Your Enterprise Innovation Program

    Define your purpose, assess your culture, and build a practice that delivers true innovation.

    An image summarizing how to define your purpose, align your people, and Build your Practice.
    1 Source: Boston Consulting Group, 2021
    2 Source: Boston Consulting Group, 2019
    3 Source: Harvard Business Review, 2018

    Use this research to outperform your peers

    A seven-year review showed that the most innovative companies outperformed the market by upwards of 30%.

    A line graph showing the Normalized Market Capitalization for 2020.

    Innovators are defined as companies that were listed on Fast Company World's 50 Most Innovative Companies for 2+ years.

    Innovation is critical to business success.

    A 25-year study by Business Development Canada and Statistics Canada showed that innovation was more important to business success than management, human resources, marketing, or finance.

    Executive brief case study

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare
    SOURCE: Interview

    Culture is critical

    This Info-Tech member is a nonprofit, community-based mental health organization located in the US. It serves about 25,000 patients per year in community, school, and clinic settings.

    This organization takes its innovation culture very seriously and has developed methodologies to assess individual and team innovation readiness as well as innovation types, which it uses to determine everyone's role in the innovation process. These assessments look at knowledge of and trust in the organization, its innovation profile, and its openness to change. Innovation enthusiasts are involved early in the process when it's important to dream big, while more pragmatic perspectives are incorporated later to improve the final solution.

    Results

    The organization has developed many innovative approaches to delivering healthcare. Notably, they have reimagined patient scheduling and reduced wait times to the extent that some patients can be seen the same day. They are also working to improve access to mental health care despite a shortage of professionals.

    Developing an Innovative Culture

    • Innovation Readiness Assessment
    • Coaching Specific to Innovation Profile
    • Innovation Enthusiasts Involved Early
    • Innovation Pragmatists Involved Later
    • High Success Rate of Innovation

    Define innovation roles and responsibilities

    A table showing key innovation roles and responsibilities.

    Info-Tech's methodology for building your enterprise innovation program

    1. Define Your Purpose

    2. Align Your People

    3. Build Your Practice

    Phase Steps

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    Phase Outcomes

    Understand where the mandate for innovation comes from, and what the drivers are for pursuing innovation. Define what innovation means to your organization, and set the vision, mission, and guiding principles. Articulate the value proposition and key metrics for measuring success.

    Understand what it takes to build an innovative culture, and what types of innovation structure are most suited to your innovation goals. Define an innovation methodology and build your core innovation capabilities and team.

    Gather ideas and understand how to assess and prioritize initiatives based on standardized metrics. Develop criteria for tracking and measuring the success of pilot projects and conduct a program retrospective.

    Innovation program taxonomy

    This research uses the following common terms:

    Innovation Operating Model
    The operating model describes how the innovation program delivers value to the organization, including how the program is structured, the steps from idea generation to enterprise launch, and the methodologies used.
    Examples: Innovation Hub, Grassroots Innovation.

    Innovation Methodology
    Methodologies describe the ways the operating model is carried out, and the approaches used in the innovation practice.
    Examples: Design Thinking, Weighted Criteria Scoring

    Chief Innovation Officer
    This research is written for the person or team leading the innovation program – this might be a CINO, CIO, or other leader in the organization.

    Innovation Team
    The innovation team may vary depending on the operating model, but generally consists of the individuals involved in facilitating innovation across the organization. This may be, but does not have to be, a dedicated innovation department.

    Innovation Program
    The program for generating ideas, running pilot projects, and building a business case to implement across the enterprise.

    Pilot Project
    A way of testing and validating a specific concept in the real world through a minimum viable product or small-scale implementation. The pilot projects are part of the overall pilot program.

    Insight summary

    Innovation is about people, not ideas or processes
    Innovation does not require a formal process, a dedicated innovation team, or a large budget; the most important success factor for innovation is culture. Companies that facilitate innovative behaviors like growth mindset, collaboration, and the ability to take smart risk are most likely to see the benefits of innovation.

    Very few are doing innovation well
    Only 30% of companies consider themselves innovative, and there's a good reason: innovation involves unknowns, risk, and failure – three situations that people and organizations typically do their best to avoid. Counter this by removing the barriers to innovation.

    Culture is the greatest barrier to innovation
    In a survey of 270 business leaders, the top three most common obstacles were politics, turf wars, and alignment; culture issues; and inability to act on signals crucial to the business (Harvard Business Review, 2018). If you don't have a supportive culture, your ability to innovate will be significantly reduced.

    Innovation is a means to an end
    It is not the end itself. Don't get caught up in innovation for the sake of innovation – make sure you are getting the benefits from your investments. Measurable success factors are critical for maintaining the long-term success of your innovation engine.

    Tackle wicked problems
    Innovative approaches are better at solving complex problems than traditional practices. Organizations that prioritize innovation during a crisis tend to outperform their peers by over 30% and improve their market position (McKinsey, 2020).

    Innovate or die
    Innovation is critical to business growth. A 25-year study showed that innovation was more important to business success than management, human resources, marketing, or finance (Statistics Canada, 2006).

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Sample Job Descriptions and Organization Charts

    Determine the skills, knowledge, and structure you need to make innovation happen.

    Sample Job Descriptions and Organization Charts

    Ideation Session Template

    Facilitate an ideation session with your staff to identify areas for innovation.

    Ideation Session Template

    Initiative Prioritization Workbook

    Evaluate ideas to identify those which are most likely to provide value.

    Prioritization Workbook

    Key deliverable:

    Enterprise Innovation Program Summary

    Communicate how you plan to innovate with a report summarizing the outputs from this research.

    Enterprise Innovation Program Summary

    Measure the value of this research

    US businesses spend over half a trillion dollars on innovation annually. What are they getting for it?

    • The top innovators(1) typically spend 5-15% of their budgets on innovation (including R&D).
    • This research helps organizations develop a successful innovation program, which delivers value to the organization in the form of new products, services, and methods.
    • Leverage this research to:
      • Get your innovation program off the ground quickly.
      • Increase internal knowledge and expertise.
      • Generate buy-in and excitement about innovation.
      • Develop the skills and capabilities you need to drive innovation over the long term.
      • Validate your innovation concept.
      • Streamline and integrate innovation across the organization.

    (1) based on BCG's 50 Most Innovative Companies 2022

    30%

    The most innovative companies outperform the market by 30%.
    Source: McKinsey & Company, 2020

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical guided implementation (GI) on this topic look like?

    Phase 0 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Finish

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: Understand your mandate.
    (Activity 1.1)

    Call #3: Innovation vision, guiding principles, value proposition, and scope.
    (Activities 1.2 and 1.3)

    Call #4: Foster a culture of innovation. (Activity 2.1)

    Call #5: Define your methodology. (Activity 2.2)

    Call #6: Build core innovation capabilities. (Activity 2.3)

    Call #7: Build your ideation and pilot programs. (Activities 3.1 and 3.2)

    Call #8: Identify success metrics and notable wins. (Activity 3.3)

    Call #9: Summarize results and plan next steps.

    A GI is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of three to six months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4

    Wrap Up

    Activities

    Define Your Ambitions

    Align Your People

    Develop Your Capabilities

    Build Your Program

    Next Steps and
    Wrap Up (offsite)

    1. Understand your innovation mandate (complete activity prior to workshop)
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    1. Build core innovation capabilities
    2. Develop prioritization criteria
    1. Define your methodology to pilot projects
    2. Conduct a program retrospective
    1. Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    2. Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Our purpose
    2. Message from the CEO
    3. Vision and guiding principles
    4. Scope and value proposition
    5. Success metrics
    1. Building an innovative culture
    2. Operating model
    1. Core capabilities and structure
    2. Idea evaluation prioritization criteria
    1. Program retrospective
    2. Notable wins
    3. Executive summary
    4. Next steps
    1. Completed enterprise innovation program
    2. An engaged and inspired team

    Phase 1: Define Your Purpose

    Develop a better understanding of the drivers for innovation and what success looks like.

    Purpose

    People

    Practice

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand your innovation mandate, including its drivers, scope, and focus.
    • Define what innovation means to your organization.
    • Develop an innovation vision and guiding principles.
    • Articulate the value proposition and proposed metrics for evaluating program success.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CINO
    • Business executives

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Transportation
    SOURCE: Interview

    ArcBest
    ArcBest is a multibillion-dollar shipping and logistics company which leverages innovative technologies to provide reliable and integrated services to its customers.

    An Innovative Culture Starts at the Top
    ArcBest's innovative culture has buy-in and support from the highest level of the company. Michael Newcity, ArcBest's CEO, is dedicated to finding better ways of serving their customers and supports innovation across the company by dedicating funding and resources toward piloting and scaling new initiatives.
    Having a clear purpose and mandate for innovation at all levels of the organization has resulted in extensive grassroots innovation and the development of a formalized innovation program.

    Results
    ArcBest has a legacy of innovation, going back to its early days when it developed a business intelligence solution before anything else existed on the market. It continues to innovate today and is now partnering with start-ups to further expand its innovation capabilities.

    "We don't micromanage or process-manage incremental innovation. We hire really smart people who are inspired to create new things and we let them run – let them create – and we celebrate it.
    Our dedication to innovation comes from the top – I am both the President and the Chief Innovation Officer, and innovation is one of my top priorities."

    Michael Newcity

    Michael Newcity
    President and Chief Innovation Officer ArcBest

    1.1 Understand your innovation mandate

    Before you can act, you need to understand the following:

    • Where is the drive for innovation coming from?
      The source of your mandate dictates the scope of your innovation practice – in general, innovating outside the scope of your mandate (i.e. trying to innovate on products when you don't have buy-in from the product team) will not be successful.
    • What is meant by "innovation"?
      There are many different definitions for innovation. Before pursuing innovation at your organization, you need to understand how it is defined. Use the definition in this section as a starting point, and craft your own definition of innovation.
    • What kind of innovation are you targeting?
      Innovation can be internal or external, emergent or deliberate, and incremental or radically transformative. Understanding what kind of innovation you want is the starting point for your innovation practice.

    The source of your mandate dictates the scope of your influence

    You can only influence what you can control.

    Unless your mandate comes from the CEO or Board of Directors, driving enterprise-wide innovation is very difficult. If you do not have buy-in from senior business leaders, use lighthouse projects and a smaller innovation practice to prove the value of innovation before taking on enterprise innovation.

    In order to execute on a mandate to build innovation, you don't just need buy-in. You need support in the form of resources and funding, as well as strong leadership who can influence culture and the authority to change policies and practices that inhibit innovation.

    For more resources on building relationships in your organization, refer to Info-Tech's Become a Transformational CIO blueprint.

    What is "innovation"?

    Innovation is often easier to recognize than define.

    Align on a useful definition of innovation for your organization before you embark on a journey of becoming more innovative.

    Innovation is the practice of developing new methods, products or services which provide value to an organization.

    Practice
    This does not have to be a formal process – innovation is a means to an end, not the end itself.

    New
    What does "new" mean to you?

    • New application of an existing method
    • Developing a completely original product
    • Adopting a service from another industry

    Value
    What does value mean to you? Look to your business strategy to understand what goals the organization is trying to achieve, then determine how "value" will be measured.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Some innovations are incremental, while some are radically transformative. Decide what kind of innovation you want to cultivate before developing your strategy.

    We can categorize innovation in three ways

    Evaluate your goals with respect to innovation: focus, strategy, and potential to transform.

    Focus: Where will you innovate?

    Focus

    Strategy: To what extent will you guide innovation efforts?

    Strategy

    Potential: How radical will your innovations be?

    Potential

    What are your ambitions?

    1. Develop a better understanding of what type of innovation you are trying to achieve by plotting out your goals on the categories on the left.
    2. All categories are independent of one another, so your goals may fall anywhere on the scales for each category.
    3. Understanding your innovation ambitions helps establish the operating model best suited for your innovation practice.
    4. In general, innovation which is more external, deliberate, and radical tends to be more centralized.

    Activity 1.1 Understand your innovation mandate

    1 hour

    1. Schedule a 30-minute discussion with the person (i.e. CEO) or group (i.e. Board of Directors) ultimately requesting the shift toward innovation. If there is no external party, then conduct this assessment yourself.
    2. Facilitate a discussion that addresses the following questions:
    • What is meant by "innovation"?
    • What are they hoping to achieve through innovation?
    • What is the innovation scope? Are any areas off-limits (i.e. org structure, new products, certain markets)?
    • What is the budget (i.e. people, money) they are willing to commit to innovation?
    • What type of innovation are they pursuing?
    1. Record this information and complete the "Our Purpose" section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Download the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Knowledge of the key decision maker/sponsor for innovation

    Output

    • Understanding of the mandate for innovation, including definition, value, scope, budget, and type of innovation

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO
    • CEO, CTO, or Board of Directors (whoever is requesting/sponsoring the pursuit of innovation)

    1.2 Define your innovation ambitions

    Articulate your future state through a vision and guiding principles.

    • Vision and purpose make up the foundation on which all other design aspects will be based. These aspects should not be taken lightly, but rather they should be the force that aligns everyone to work toward a common outcome. It is incumbent on leaders to make them part of the DNA of the organization – to drive organization, structure, culture, and talent strategy.
    • Your vision statement is a future-focused statement that summarizes what you hope to achieve. It should be inspirational, ambitious, and concise.
    • Your guiding principles outline the guardrails for your innovation practice. What will your focus be? How will you approach innovation? What is off-limits?
    • Define the scope and focus for your innovation efforts. This includes what you can innovate on and what is off limits.

    Your vision statement is your North Star

    Articulate an ambitious, inspirational, and concise vision statement for your innovation efforts.

    A strong vision statement:

    • Is future-focused and outlines what you want to become and what you want to achieve.
    • Provides focus and direction.
    • Is ambitious, focused, and concise.
    • Answers: What problems are we solving? Who and what are we changing?

    Examples:

    • "We create radical new technologies to solve some of the world's hardest problems." – Google X, the Moonshot Factory
    • "To be the most innovative enterprise in the world." – 3M
    • "To use our imagination to bring happiness to millions of people." – Disney

    "Good business leaders create a vision, articulate the vision, passionately own the vision, and relentlessly drive it to completion." – Jack Welch, Former Chairman and CEO of GE

    Your guiding principles are the guardrails for creativity

    Strong guiding principles give your team the freedom and direction to innovate.

    Strong guiding principles:

    • Focus on the approach, i.e. how things are done, as opposed to what needs to be done.
    • Are specific to the organization.
    • Inform and direct decision making with actionable statements. Avoid truisms, general statements, and observations.
    • Are long-lasting and based on values, not solutions.
    • Are succinct and easily digestible.
    • Can be measured and verified.
    • Answers: How do we approach innovation? What are our core values

    Craft your guiding principles using these examples

    Encourage experimentation and risk-taking
    Innovation often requires trying new things, even if they might fail. We encourage experimentation and learn from failure, so that new ideas can be tested and refined.

    Foster collaboration and cross-functional teams
    Innovation often comes from the intersection of different perspectives and skill sets.

    Customer-centric
    Focus on creating value for the end user. This means understanding their needs and pain points, and using that knowledge to develop new methods, products, or services.

    Embrace diversity and inclusivity
    Innovation comes from a variety of perspectives, backgrounds, and experiences. We actively seek out and encourage diversity and inclusivity among our team members.

    Foster a culture of learning and continuous improvement
    Innovation requires continuous learning, development, and growth. We facilitate a culture that encourages learning and development, and that seeks feedback and uses it to improve.

    Flexible and adaptable
    We adapt to changes in the market, customer needs, and new technologies, so that it can continue to innovate and create value over time.

    Data-driven
    We use performance metrics and data to guide our innovation efforts.

    Transparency
    We are open and transparent in our processes and let the business needs guide our innovation efforts. We do not lead innovation, we facilitate it.

    Activity 1.2 Craft your vision statement and guiding principles

    1-2 hours

    1. Gather your innovation team and key program sponsors. Review the guidelines for creating vision statements and guiding principles, as well as your mandate and focus for innovation.
    2. As a group, discuss what you hope to achieve through your innovation efforts.
    3. Separately, have each person write down their ideas for a vision statement. Bring the group back together and share ideas. Group the concepts together and construct a single statement which outlines your aspirational vision.
    4. As a group, review the example guiding principles.
    5. Separately, have each person write down three to five guiding principles. Bring the group back together and share ideas. Group similar concepts together and consolidate duplicate ideas. From this list, construct six to eight guiding principles.
    6. Document your vision and guiding principles in the appropriate sections of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Understanding of your innovation mandate
    • Business vision, mission, and values
    • Sample vision statements and guiding principles

    Output

    • Vision statement
    • Guiding principles

    Materials

    • In person: Whiteboard/flip charts, sticky notes, pens, and notepads
    • Virtual: Consider using a shared document, virtual whiteboard, or online facilitation tool like MURAL
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO
    • Innovation sponsors
    • Business leaders
    • Innovation team

    1.3 Determine your value proposition and metrics

    Justify the existence of the innovation program with a strong value proposition.

    • The value proposition for developing an innovation program will be different for each organization, depending on what the organization hopes to achieve. Consider your mandate for innovation as well as the type of innovation you are pursuing when crafting the value proposition.
    • Some of the reasons organizations may pursue innovation:
      • Business growth: Respond to market disruption; create new customers; take advantage of opportunities.
      • Branding: Create market differentiation; increase customer satisfaction and retention; adapt to customer needs.
      • Profitability: Improve products, services, or operations to increase competitiveness and profitability; develop more efficient processes.
      • Culture: Foster a culture of creativity and experimentation within the organization, encouraging employees to think outside the box.
      • Positive impact: Address social challenges such as poverty and climate change.

    Develop a strong value proposition for your innovation program

    Demonstrate the value to the business.

    A strong value proposition not only articulates the value that the business will derive from the innovation program but also provides a clear focus, helps to communicate the innovation goals, and ultimately drives the success of the program.

    Focus
    Prioritize and focus innovation efforts to create solutions that provide real value to the organization

    Communicate
    Communicate the mandate and benefits of innovation in a clear and compelling way and inspire people to think differently

    Measure Success
    Measure the success of your program by evaluating outcomes based on the value proposition

    Track appropriate success metrics for your innovation program

    Your success metrics should link back to your organizational goals and your innovation program's value proposition.

    Revenue Growth: Increase in revenue generated by new products or services.

    Market Share: Percentage of total market that the business captures as a result of innovation.

    Customer Satisfaction: Reviews, customer surveys, or willingness to recommend the company.

    Employee Engagement: Engagement surveys, performance, employee retention, or turnover.

    Innovation Output: The number of new products, services, or processes that have been developed.

    Return on Investment: Financial return on the resources invested in the innovation process.

    Social Impact: Number of people positively impacted, net reduction in emissions, etc.

    Time to Launch: The time it takes for a new product or service to go from idea to launch.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The total impact of innovation is often intangible and extremely difficult to capture in performance metrics. Focus on developing a few key metrics rather than trying to capture the full value of innovation.

    How much does innovation cost?

    Company Industry Revenue(2)
    (USD billions)
    R&D Spend
    (USD billions)
    R&D Spend
    (% of revenue)
    Apple Technology $394.30 $26.25 6.70%
    Microsoft Technology $203.10 $25.54 12.50%
    Amazon.com Retail $502.20 $67.71 13.40%
    Alphabet Technology $282.10 $37.94 13.40%
    Tesla Manufacturing $74.90 $3.01 4.00%
    Samsung Technology $244.39 (2021)(3) $19.0 (2021) 7.90%
    Moderna Pharmaceuticals $23.39 $2.73 11.70%
    Huawei Technology $99.9 (2021)4 Not reported -
    Sony Technology $83.80 Not reported -
    IBM Technology $60.50 $1.61 2.70%
    Meta Software $118.10 $32.61 27.60%
    Nike Commercial goods $49.10 Not reported -
    Walmart Retail $600.10 Not reported -
    Dell Technology $105.30 $2.60 2.50%
    Nvidia Technology $28.60 $6.85 23.90%


    The top innovators(1) in the world spend 5% to 15% of their revenue on innovation.

    Innovation requires a dedicated investment of time, money, and resources in order to be successful. The most innovative companies, based on Boston Consulting Group's ranking of the 50 most innovative companies in the world, spend significant portions of their revenue on research and development.

    Note: This data uses research and development as a proxy for innovation spending, which may overestimate the total spend on what this research considers true innovation.

    (1) Based on Boston Consulting Group's ranking of the 50 most innovative companies in the world, 2022
    (2) Macrotrends, based on the 12 months ending Sept 30, 2022
    (3) Statista
    (4) CNBC, 2022

    Activity 1.3 Develop your value proposition and performance metrics

    1 hour

    1. Review your mandate and vision statement. Write down your innovation goals and desired outcomes from pursuing innovation, prioritize the desired outcomes, and select the top five.
    2. For each desired outcome, develop one to two metrics which could be used to track its success. Some outcomes are difficult to track, so get creative when it comes to developing metrics. If you get stuck, think about what would differentiate a great outcome from an unsuccessful one.
    3. Once you have developed a list of three to five key metrics, read over the list and ensure that the metrics you have developed don't negatively influence your innovation. For example, a metric of the number of successful launches may drive people toward launching before a product is ready.
    4. For each metric, develop a goal. For example, you may target 1% revenue growth over the next fiscal year or 20% energy use reduction.
    5. Document your value proposition and key performance metrics in the appropriate sections of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Understanding of your innovation mandate
    • Vision statement

    Output

    • Value proposition
    • Performance metrics

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO

    Phase 2: Align Your People

    Create a culture that fosters innovative behaviors and puts processes in place to support them.

    Purpose

    People

    Practice

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand the key aspects of innovative cultures, and the behaviors associated with innovation.
    • Assess your culture and identify gaps.
    • Define your innovation operating model based on your organizational culture and the focus for innovation.
    • Build your core innovation capabilities, including an innovation core team (if required based on your operating model).

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CINO
    • Innovation team

    2.1 Foster a culture of innovation

    Culture is the most important driver of innovation – and the most challenging to get right.

    • Fostering a culture of innovation requires a broad approach which considers the perspectives of individuals, teams, leadership, and the overall organization.
    • If you do not have support from leadership, it is very difficult to change organizational culture. It may be more effective to start with an innovation pilot or lighthouse project in order to gain support before addressing your culture.
    • Rather than looking to change outcomes, focus on the behaviors which lead to innovation – such as growth mindset and willingness to fail. If these aren't in place, your ability to innovate will be limited.
    • This section focuses on the specific behaviors associated with increased innovation. For additional resources on implementing these changes, refer to Info-Tech's other research:

    Info-Tech's Fix Your IT Culture can help you promote innovative behaviors

    Refer to Improve IT Team Effectiveness to address team challenges

    Build a culture of innovation

    Focus on behaviors, not outcomes.

    The following behaviors and key indicators either stifle or foster innovation.

    Stifles Innovation Key Indicators Fosters Innovation Key Indicators
    Fixed mindset "It is what it is" Growth mindset "I wonder if there's a better way"
    Performance focused "It's working fine" Learning focused "What can we learn from this?"
    Fear of reprisal "I'll get in trouble" Psychological safety "I can disagree"
    Apathy "We've always done it this way" Curiosity "I wonder what would happen if…"
    Cynicism "It will never work" Trust "You have good judgement"
    Punishing failure "Who did this?" Willingness to fail "It's okay to make mistakes"
    Individualism "How does this benefit me?" Collaboration "How does this benefit us?"
    Homogeneity "We never disagree" Diversity and inclusion "We appreciate different views"
    Excessive bureaucracy "We need approval" Autonomy "I can do this"
    Risk avoidance "We can't try that" Appropriate risk-taking "How can we do this safely?"

    Ensure you are not inadvertently stifling innovation.
    Review the following to ensure that the desired behaviors are promoted:

    • Hiring practices
    • Performance evaluation metrics
    • Rewards and incentives
    • Corporate policies
    • Governance structures
    • Leadership behavior

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Commercial Real Estate and Retail
    SOURCE: Interview

    How not to approach innovation.

    This anonymous national organization owned commercial properties across the country and had the goal of becoming the most innovative real estate and retail company in the market.

    The organization pursued innovation in the digital solutions space across its commercial and retail properties. Within this space, there were significant differences in risk tolerance across teams, which resulted in the more risk-tolerant teams excluding the risk-averse members from discussions in order to circumvent corporate policies on risk tolerance. This resulted in an adversarial and siloed culture where each group believed they knew better than the other, and the more risk-averse teams felt like they were policing the actions of the risk-tolerant group.

    Results

    Morale plummeted, and many of the organization's top people left. Unfortunately, one of the solutions did not meet regulatory requirements, and the company faced negative media coverage and legal action. There was significant reputational damage as a result.

    Lessons Learned

    Considering differences in risk tolerance and risk appetite is critical when pursuing innovation. While everyone doesn't have to agree, leadership needs to understand the different perspectives and ensure that no one party is dominating the conversation over the others. An understanding of corporate risk tolerance and risk appetite is necessary to drive innovation.

    All perspectives have a place in innovation. More risk tolerant perspectives should be involved early in the ideas-generation phase, and risk-averse perspectives should be considered later when ideas are being refined.

    Speed should not override safety or circumvent corporate policies.

    Understand your risk tolerance and risk appetite

    Evaluate and align the appetite for risk.

    • It is important to understand the organization's risk tolerance as well as the desire for risk. Consider the following risk categories when investigating the organization's views on risk:
      • Financial risk: the potential for financial or property loss.
      • Operational risk: the potential for disruptions to operations.
      • Reputational risk: the potential for negative impact to brand or reputation.
      • Compliance risk: the potential for loss due to non-compliance with laws and regulations.
    • Greater risk tolerance typically enables greater innovation. Understand the varying levels of risk tolerance across your organization, and how these differences might impact innovation efforts.

    An arrow showing the directions of risk tolerance.

    It is more important to match the level of risk tolerance to the degree of innovation required. Not all innovation needs to be (or can feasibly be) disruptive.
    Many factors impact risk tolerance including:

    • Regulation
    • Organization size
    • Country
    • Industry
    • Personal experience
    • Type of risk

    Use Info-Tech's Security Risk Management research to better understand risk tolerance

    Activity 2.1 Assess your innovation culture

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the behaviors which support and stifle innovation and give each behavior a score from 1 (stifling innovation) to 5 (fostering innovation). Any behaviors which fall below a 4 on this scale should be prioritized in your efforts to create an innovative culture.
    2. Review the following policies and practices to determine how they may be contributing to the behaviors you see in your organization:
      1. Hiring practices
      2. Performance evaluation metrics
      3. Rewards, recognition, and incentives
      4. Corporate policies
      5. Governance structures
      6. Leadership behavior
    3. Identify three concrete actions you can take to correct any behaviors which are stifling innovation. Examples might be revising a policy which punishes failure or changing performance incentives to reward appropriate risk taking.
    4. Summarize your findings in the appropriate section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Innovation behaviors

    Output

    • Understanding of your organization's culture
    • Concrete actions you can take to promote innovation

    Materials

    • List of innovative behaviors
    • Relevant policies and documents to review
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO

    2.2 Define your innovation model

    Set up your innovation practice for success using proven models and methodologies.

    • There are many ways to approach innovation, from highly distributed forms where it's just part of everyone's job to very centralized and arm's-length innovation hubs or even outsourced innovation via startups. You can combine different approaches to create your own approach.
    • You may or may not have a formal innovation team, but if you do, their role is to facilitate innovation – not lead it. Innovation is most effective when it is led by the business.
    • There are many tools and methodologies you can use to facilitate innovation. Choose the one (or combination) that best suits your needs.

    Select the right model

    There is no one right way to pursue innovation, but some methods are better than others for specific situations and goals. Consider your existing culture, your innovation goals, and your budget when selecting the right methodology for your innovation.

    Model Description Advantages Disadvantages Good when…
    Grassroots Innovation Innovation is the responsibility of everyone, and there is no centralized innovation team. Ideas are piloted and scaled by the person/team which produces it.
    • Can be used in any organization or team
    • Can support low or high degree of structure
    • Low funding requirement
    • Requires a strong innovation culture
    • Often does not produce results since people don't have time to focus on innovation
    • Innovation culture is strong
    • Funding is limited
    • Goal is internal, incremental innovation
    Community of Practice Innovation is led by a cross-divisional Community of Practice (CoP) which includes representation from across the business. Champions consult with their practice areas and bring ideas forward.
    • Bringing people together can help stimulate and share ideas
    • Low funding requirement
    • Able to support many types of innovation
    • Some people may feel left out if they can't be involved
    • May not produce results if people are too busy to dedicate time to innovate
    • Innovation culture is present
    • Funding is limited
    • Goal is incremental or disruptive innovation
    Innovation Enablement
    *Most often recommended*
    A dedicated innovation team with funding set aside to support pilots with a high degree of autonomy, with the role of facilitating business-led innovation.
    • Most flexible of all options
    • Supports business-led innovation
    • Can deliver results quickly
    • Can enable a higher degree of innovation
    • Requires dedicated staff and funding
    • Innovation culture is present
    • Funding is available
    • Goal is internal or external, incremental or radical innovation
    Center of Excellence Dedicated team responsible for leading innovation on behalf of the organization. Generally, has business relationship managers who gather ideas and liaise with the business.
    • Can deliver results quickly
    • Can offer a fresh perspective
    • Can enable a higher degree of innovation
    • Requires dedicated staff and funding
    • Is typically separate from the business
    • Results may not align with the business needs or have adequate input
    • Innovation culture is weak
    • Funding is significant
    • Goal is external, disruptive innovation
    Innovation Hub An arm's length innovation team is responsible for all or much of the innovation and may not interact much with the core business.
    • Can deliver results quickly
    • Can be extremely innovative
    • Expensive
    • Results may not align with the business needs or have adequate/any input
    • Innovation culture is weak
    • Funding is very significant
    • Goal is external, radical innovation
    Outsourced Innovation Innovation is outsourced to an external organization which is not linked to the primary organization. This can take the form of working with or investing in startups.
    • Can lead to more innovative ideas than internal innovation
    • Investments can become a diverse revenue stream if startups are successful
    • Innovation does not rely on culture
    • Higher risk of failure
    • Less control over goals or focus
    • Results may not align with the business needs or have any input from users
    • Innovation does not rely on culture
    • Funding is significant
    • Goal is external or internal, radical innovation

    Use the right methodologies to support different stages of your innovation process

    A chart showing methodologies to support different stages of the integration process.

    Adapted from Niklaus Gerber via Medium, 2022

    Methodologies are most useful when they are aligned with the goals of the innovation organization.

    For example, design thinking tends to be excellent for earlier innovation planning, while Agile can allow for faster implementation and launch of initiatives later in the process.

    Consider combining two or more methodologies to create a custom approach that best suits your organization's capabilities and goals.

    Sample methodologies

    A robust innovation methodology ensures that the process for developing, prioritizing, selecting, implementing, and measuring initiatives is aligned with the results you are hoping to achieve.

    Different types of problems (drivers for innovation) may necessitate different methodologies, or a combination of methodologies.

    Hackathon: An event which brings people together to solve a well-defined problem.

    Design Thinking: Creative approach that focuses on understanding the needs of users.

    Lean Startup: Emphasizes rapid experimentation in order to validate business hypotheses.

    Design Sprint: Five-day process for answering business questions via design, prototyping, and testing.

    Agile: Iterative design process that emphasizes project management and retrospectives.

    Three Horizons: Framework that looks at opportunities on three different time horizons.

    Innovation Ambition Matrix: Helps organizations categorize projects as part of the core offering, an adjacent offering, or completely new.

    Global Innovation Management: A process of identifying, developing and implementing new ideas, products, services, or processes using alternative thinking.

    Blue Ocean Strategy: A methodology that helps organizations identify untapped market space and create new markets via unique value propositions.

    Activity 2.2 Design your innovation model

    1-2 hours

    1. Think about the following factors which influence the design of your innovation practice:
      1. Existing organizational culture
      2. Available funding to support innovation
      3. Type of innovation you are targeting
    2. Review the innovation approaches, and identify which approach is most suitable for your situation. Note why this approach was selected.
    3. Review the innovation methodologies and research those of interest. Select two to five methodologies to use for your innovation practice.
    4. Document your decisions in the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Understanding of your mandate and existing culture

    Output

    • Innovation approach
    • Selected methodologies

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO
    • Innovation team

    2.3 Build your core innovation capabilities

    Develop the skills, knowledge, and experience to facilitate successful innovation.

    • Depending on the approach you selected in step 2.2, you may or may not require a dedicated innovation team. If you do, use the job descriptions and sample organization charts to build it. If not, focus on developing key capabilities which are needed to facilitate innovation.
    • Diversity is key for successful innovation – ensure your team (formal or otherwise) includes diverse perspectives and backgrounds.
    • Use your guiding principles when hiring and training your team.
    • Focus on three core roles: evangelists, enablers, and experts.

    Focus on three key roles when building your innovation team

    Types of roles will depend on the purpose and size of the innovation team.

    You don't need to grow them all internally. Consider partnering with vendors and other organizations to build capabilities.

    Evangelists

    Visionaries who inspire, support, and facilitate innovation across the business. Their responsibilities are to drive the culture of innovation.

    Key skills and knowledge:

    • Strong communication skills
    • Relationship-building
    • Consensus-building
    • Collaboration
    • Growth mindset

    Sample titles:

    • CINO
    • Chief Transformation Officer
    • Chief Digital Officer
    • Innovation Lead
    • Business Relationship Manager

    Enablers

    Translate ideas into tangible business initiatives, including assisting with business cases and developing performance metrics.

    Key skills and knowledge:

    • Critical thinking skills
    • Business knowledge
    • Facilitation skills
    • Consensus-building
    • Relationship-building

    Sample titles:

    • Product Owner
    • Design Thinking Lead
    • Data Scientist
    • Business Analyst
    • Human Factors Engineer
    • Digital Marketing Specialist

    Experts

    Provide expertise in product design, delivery and management, and responsible for supporting and executing on pilot projects.

    Key skills and knowledge:

    • Project management skills
    • Technical expertise
    • Familiarity with emerging technologies
    • Analytical skills
    • Problem-solving skills

    Sample titles:

    • Product Manager
    • Scrum Master/Agile Coach
    • Product Engineer/DevOps
    • Product Designer
    • Emerging tech experts

    Sample innovation team structure (large enterprise)

    Visualize the whole value delivery process end-to-end to help identify the types of roles, resources, and capabilities required. These capabilities can be sourced internally (i.e. grow and hire internally) or through collaboration with centers of excellence, commercial partners, etc.

    A flow chart of a sample innovation team structure.

    Streamline your process by downloading Info-Tech's job description templates:

    Activity 2.3 Build your innovation team

    2-3 hours

    1. Review your work from the previous activities as well as the organizational structure and the job description templates.
    2. Start a list with two columns: currently have and needed. Start listing some of the key roles and capabilities from earlier in this step, categorizing them appropriately.
    3. If you are using an organizational structure for your innovation process, start to frame out the structure and roles for your team.
    4. Develop a list of roles you need to hire, and the key capabilities you need from candidates. Using the job descriptions, write job postings for each role.
    5. Record your work in the appropriate section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Previous work
    • Info-Tech job description templates

    Output

    • List of capabilities required
    • Org chart
    • Job postings for required roles

    Materials

    • Note-taking capability
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • CINO

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Fix Your IT Culture

    • Promote psychological safety and growth mindset within your organization.
    • Develop the organizational behaviors that lead to innovation.

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    • Address behaviors, processes, and cultural factors which impact team effectiveness.
    • Grow the team's ability to address challenges and navigate volatile, uncertain, complex and ambiguous environments.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • Transformation and change are increasingly becoming the new normal. While this normality may help make people more open to change in general, specific changes still need to be planned, communicated, and managed. Agility and continuous improvement are good but can degenerate into volatility if change isn't managed properly.

    Phase 3: Build Your Practice

    Define your innovation process, streamline pilot projects, and scale for success.

    Purpose

    People

    Practice

    1. Understand your mandate
    2. Define your innovation ambitions
    3. Determine value proposition and metrics
    1. Foster a culture of innovation
    2. Define your operating model
    3. Build core innovation capabilities
    1. Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies
    2. Define your pilot project methodology
    3. Conduct a program retrospective

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build the methodologies needed to elicit ideas from the business.
    • Develop criteria to evaluate and prioritize ideas for piloting.
    • Define your pilot program methodologies and processes, including criteria to assess and compare the success of pilot projects.
    • Conduct an end-of-year program retrospective to evaluate the success of your innovation program.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CINO
    • Innovation team

    Case study

    INDUSTRY: Government
    SOURCE: Interview

    Confidential US government agency

    The business applications group at this government agency strongly believes that innovation is key to progress and has instituted a formal innovation program as part of their agile operations. The group uses a Scaled Agile Framework (SAFe) with 2-week sprints and a 12-week program cycle.

    To support innovation across the business unit, the last sprint of each cycle is dedicated toward innovation and teams do not commit to any other during these two weeks. At the end of each innovation sprint, ideas are presented to leadership and the valuable ones were either implemented initially or were given time in the next cycle of sprints for further development. This has resulted in a more innovative culture across the practice.

    Results

    There have been several successful innovations since this process began. Notably, the agency had previously purchased a robotic process automation platform which was only being used for a few specific applications. One team used their innovation sprint to expand the use cases for this solution and save nearly 10,000 hours of effort.

    Standard 12-week Program Cycle
    An image of a standard 12-week program

    Design your innovation operating model to maximize value and learning opportunities

    Pilots are an iterative process which brings together innovators and business teams to test and evaluate ideas.

    Your operating model should include several steps including ideation, validation, evaluation and prioritization, piloting, and a retrospective which follows the pilot. Use the example on this slide when designing your own innovation operating model.

    An image of the design process for innovation operation model.

    3.1 Build your ideation and prioritization methodologies

    Engage the business to generate ideas, then prioritize based on value to the business.

    • There are many ways of generating ideas, from informal discussion to formal ideation sessions or submission forms. Whatever you decide to use, make sure that you're getting the right information to evaluate ideas for prioritization.
    • Use quantitative and qualitative metrics to evaluate ideas generated during the ideation process.
      • Quantitative metrics might include potential return on investment (ROI) or effort and resources required to implement.
      • Qualitative metrics might include alignment with the organizational strategy or the level of risk associated with the idea.

    Engage the business to generate ideas

    There are many ways of generating innovative ideas. Pick the methods that best suit your organization and goals.

    Design Thinking
    A structured approach that encourages participants to think creatively about the needs of the end user.

    An image including the following words: Empathize, Define; Ideate; Test.

    Ideation Workshop
    A formal session that is used to understand a problem then generate potential solutions. Workshops can incorporate the other methodologies (such as brainstorming, design thinking, or mind mapping) to generate ideas.

    • Define the problem
    • Generate ideas
    • Capture ideas
    • Evaluate and prioritize
    • Assign next steps

    Crowdsourcing
    An informal method of gathering ideas from a large group of people. This can be a great way to generate many ideas but may lack focus.

    Value Proposition Canvas
    A visual tool which helps to identify customer (or user) needs and design products and services that meet those needs.

    an image of the Value Proposition Canvas

    Evaluate ideas and focus on those with the greatest value

    Evaluation should be transparent and use both quantitative and qualitative metrics. The exact metrics used will depend on your organization and goals.

    It is important to include qualitative metrics as these dimensions are better suited to evaluating highly innovative ideas and can capture important criteria like alignment with overall strategy and feasibility.

    Develop 5 to 10 criteria that you can use to evaluate and prioritize ideas. Some criteria may be a pass/fail (for example, minimum ROI) and some may be comparative.

    Evaluate
    The first step is to evaluate ideas to determine if they meet the minimum criteria. This might include quantitative criteria like ROI as well as qualitative criteria like strategic alignment and feasibility.

    Prioritize
    Ideas that pass the initial evaluation should be prioritized based on additional criteria which might include quantitative criteria such as potential market size and cost to implement, and qualitative criteria such as risk, impact, and creativity.

    Quantitative Metrics

    Quantitative metrics are objective and easily comparable between initiatives, providing a transparent and data-driven process for evaluation and prioritization.
    Examples:

    • Potential market size
    • ROI
    • Net present value
    • Payback period
    • Number of users impacted
    • Customer acquisition cost
    • Customer lifetime value
    • Breakeven analysis
    • Effort required to implement
    • Cost to implement

    Qualitative Metrics

    Qualitative metrics are less easily comparable but are equally important when it comes to evaluating ideas. These should be developed based on your organization strategy and innovation goals.
    Examples:

    • Strategy alignment
    • Impact on users
    • Uncertainty and risk
    • Innovation potential
    • Culture impact
    • Feasibility
    • Creativity and originality
    • Type of innovation

    Activity 3.1 Develop prioritization metrics

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your mandate, purpose, innovation goals and the sample prioritization and evaluation metrics.
    2. Write down a list of your goals and their associated metrics, then prioritize which are the most important.
    3. Determine which metrics will be used to evaluate ideas before they move on to the prioritization stage, and which metrics will be used to compare initiatives in order to determine which will receive further investment.
    4. For each evaluation metric, determine the minimum threshold required for an idea to move forward. For each prioritization metric identify the definition and how it will be evaluated. Qualitative metrics may require more precise definitions than quantitative metrics.
    5. Enter your metrics into the Initiative Prioritization Template.

    Input

    • Innovation mandate
    • Innovation goals
    • Sample metrics

    Output

    • Evaluation and prioritization metrics for ideas

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Innovation Program Template

    Participants

    • Innovation leader

    Download the Initiative Prioritization Template

    3.2 Build your program to pilot initiatives

    Test and refine ideas through real-world pilot projects.

    • The purpose of your pilot is to test and refine ideas in the real world. In order to compare pilot projects, it's important to track key performance indicators throughout the pilot. Measurements should be useful and comparable.
    • Innovation facilitators are responsible for supporting pilot projects, including designing the pilot, setting up metrics, tracking outcomes, and facilitating retrospectives.
    • Pilots generally follow an Agile methodology where ideas may be refined as the pilot proceeds, and the process iterates until either the idea is discarded or it has been refined into an initiative which can be scaled.
    • Expect that most pilots will fail the first time, and many will fail completely. This is not a loss; lessons learned from the retrospective can be used to improve the process and later pilots.

    Use pilot projects to test and refine initiatives before scaling to the rest of the organization

    "Learning is as powerful as the outcome." – Brett Trelfa, CIO, Arkansas Blue Cross

    1. Clearly define the goals and objectives of the pilot project. Goals and objectives ensure that the pilot stays on track and can be measured.
    2. Your pilot group should include a variety of participants with diverse perspectives and skill sets, in order to gather unique insights.
    3. Continuously track the progress of the pilot project. Regularly identify areas of improvement and implement changes as necessary to refine ideas.
    4. Regularly elicit feedback from participants and iterate in order to improve the final innovation. Not all pilots will be successful, but every failure can help refine future solutions.
    5. Consider scalability. If the pilot project is successful, it should be scalable and the lessons learned should be implemented in the larger organization.

    Sample pilot metrics

    Metrics are used to validate and test pilot projects to ensure they deliver value. This is an important step before scaling to the rest of the organization.

    Adoption: How many end users have adopted the pilot solution?

    Utilization: Is the solution getting utilized?

    Support Requests: How many support requests have there been since the pilot was initiated?

    Value: Is the pilot delivering on the value that it proposed? For example, time savings.

    Feasibility: Has the feasibility of the solution changed since it was first proposed?

    Satisfaction: Focus groups or surveys can provide feedback on user/customer satisfaction.

    A/B Testing: Compare different methods, products or services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure standard core metrics are used across all pilot projects so that outcomes can be compared. Additional metrics may be used to refine and test hypotheses through the pilot process.

    Activity 3.2 Build your program to pilot initiatives

    1-2 hours

    1. Gather the innovation team and review your mandate, purpose, goals, and the sample innovation operating model and metrics.
    2. As a group, brainstorm the steps needed from idea generation to business case. Use sticky notes if in person, or a collaboration tool if remote.
    3. Determine the metrics that will be used to evaluate ideas at each decision step (for example, prior to piloting). Outline what the different decisions might be (for example, proceed, refine or discard) and what happens as a result of each decision.
    4. Document your final steps and metrics in the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Innovation mandate
    • Innovation goals
    • Sample metrics

    Output

    • Pilot project methodology
    • Pilot project metrics

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template
    • Sticky notes (in person) or digital collaboration tool (if remote)

    Participants

    • Innovation leader
    • Innovation team

    3.3 Conduct a program retrospective

    Generate value from your successful pilots by scaling ideas across the organization.

    • The final step in the innovation process is to scale ideas to the enterprise in order to realize the full potential.
    • Keeping track of notable wins is important for showing the value of the innovation program. Track performance of initiatives that come out of the innovation program, including their financial, cultural, market, and brand impacts.
    • Track the success of the innovation program itself by evaluating the number of ideas generated, the number of pilots run and the success of the pilots. Keep in mind that many failed pilots is not a failure of the program if the lessons learned were valuable.
    • Complete an innovation program retrospective every 6 to 12 months in order to adjust and make any changes if necessary to improve your process.

    Retrospectives should be objective, constructive, and action-oriented

    A retrospective is a review of your innovation program with the aim of identifying lessons learned, areas for improvement, and opportunities for growth.

    During a retrospective, the team will reflect on past experiences and use that information to inform future decision making and improve outcomes.

    The goal of a retrospective is to learn from the past and use that knowledge to improve in the future.

    Objective

    Ensure that the retrospective is based on facts and objective data, rather than personal opinions or biases.

    Constructive

    Ensure that the retrospective is a positive and constructive experience, with a focus on finding solutions rather than dwelling on problems.

    Action-Oriented

    The retrospective should result in a clear action plan with specific steps to improve future initiatives.

    Activity 3.3 Conduct a program retrospective

    1-2 hours

    1. Post a large piece of paper on the wall with a timeline from the last year. Include dates and a few key events, but not much more. Have participants place sticky notes in the spots to describe notable wins or milestones that they were proud of. This can be done as part of a formal meeting or asynchronously outside of meetings.
    2. Bring the innovation team together and review the poster with notable wins. Do any themes emerge? How does the team feel the program is doing? Are there any changes needed?
    3. Consider the metrics you use to track your innovation program success. Did the scaled projects meet their targets? Is there anything that could be refined about the innovation process?
    4. Evaluate the outcomes of your innovation program. Did it meet the targets set for it? Did the goals and innovation ambitions come to fruition?
    5. Complete this step every 6 to 12 months to assess the success of your program.
    6. Complete the "Notable Wins" section of the Innovation Program Template.

    Input

    • Innovation mandate
    • Innovation goals
    • Sample metrics

    Output

    • Notable wins
    • Action items for refining the innovation process

    Materials

    • Innovation Program Template
    • Sticky notes (in person) or digital collaboration tool (if remote)

    Participants

    • CIO
    • Innovation team
    • Others who have participated in the innovation process

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Adopt Design Thinking in Your Organization

    • A user's perspective while interacting with the products and services is very different from the organization's internal perspective while implementing and provisioning those. A design-based organization balances the two perspectives to drive user-satisfaction over end-to-end journeys.

    Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint

    • Build and test a prototype in four days using Info-Tech's Innovation Design Sprint Methodology.
    • Create an environment for co-creation between IT and the business.

    Fund Innovation With a Minimum Viable Business Case

    • Our approach guides you through effectively designing a solution, de-risking a project through impact reduction techniques, building and pitching the case for your project, and applying the business case as a mechanism to ensure that benefits are realized.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Congratulations on launching your innovation program!

    You have now completed your innovation strategy, covering the following topics:

    • Executive Summary
    • Our Purpose
    • Scope and Value Proposition
    • Guiding Principles
    • Building an Innovative Culture
    • Program Structure
    • Success Metrics
    • Notable Wins

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Accelerate Digital Transformation With a Digital Factory

    • Understand the foundations of good design: purpose, organizational support, and leadership.
    • Understand the design of the operating model: structure and organization, management practices, culture, environment, teams, technology platforms, and meaningful metrics and KPIs.

    Sustain and Grow the Maturity of Innovation in Your Enterprise

    • Unlock your innovation potential by looking at your innovation projects on both a macro and micro level.
    • Innovation capacity is directly linked with creativity; allow your employees' creativity to flourish using Info-Tech's positive innovation techniques.

    Define Your Digital Business Strategy

    • Design a strategy that applies innovation to your business model, streamline and transform processes, and make use of technologies to enhance interactions with customers and employees.
    • Create a balanced roadmap that improves digital maturity and prepares you for long-term success in a digital economy.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez

    Kim Osborne Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kim is a professional engineer and Registered Communications Distribution Designer with over a decade of experience in management and engineering consulting spanning healthcare, higher education, and commercial sectors. She has worked on some of the largest hospital construction projects in Canada, from early visioning and IT strategy through to design, specifications, and construction administration. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach, with a track record of supporting successful projects.
    Kim holds a Bachelor's degree in Mechatronics Engineering from University of Waterloo.

    Joanne Lee

    Joanne Lee
    Principal Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joanne is an executive with over 25 years of experience in digital technology and management consulting across both public and private entities from solution delivery to organizational redesign across Canada and globally.
    Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Joanne was a management consultant within KPMG's CIO management consulting services and the Western Canadas Digital Health Practice lead. She has held several executive roles in the industry with the most recent position as Chief Program Officer for a large $450M EHR implementation. Her expertise spans cloud strategy, organizational design, data and analytics, governance, process redesign, transformation, and PPM. She is passionate about connecting people, concepts, and capital.
    Joanne holds a Master's in Business and Health Policy from the University of Toronto and a Bachelor of Science (Nursing) from the University of British Columbia.

    Jack Hakimian

    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jack has more than 25 years of technology and management consulting experience. He has served multi-billion-dollar organizations in multiple industries including Financial Services and Telecommunications. Jack also served a number of large public sector institutions.
    He is a frequent speaker and panelist at technology and innovation conferences and events and holds a Master's degree in Computer Engineering as well as an MBA from the ESCP-EAP European School of Management.

    Michael Tweedie

    Michael Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike Tweedie brings over 25 years as a technology executive. He's led several large transformation projects across core infrastructure, application, and IT services as the head of Technology at ADP Canada. He was also the Head of Engineering and Service Offerings for a large French IT services firm, focused on cloud adoption and complex ERP deployment and management.
    Mike holds a Bachelor's degree in Architecture from Ryerson University.

    Mike Schembri

    Mike Schembri
    Senior Executive Advisor
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Mike is the former CIO of Fuji Xerox Australia and has 20+ years' experience serving IT and wider business leadership roles. Mike has led technical and broader business service operations teams to value and growth successfully in organizations ranging from small tech startups through global IT vendors, professional service firms, and manufacturers.
    Mike has passion for strategy and leadership and loves working with individuals/teams and seeing them grow.

    John Leidl

    John Leidl
    Senior Director, Member Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    With over 35 years of IT experience, including senior-level VP Technology and CTO leadership positions, John has a breadth of knowledge in technology innovation, business alignment, IT operations, and business transformation. John's experience extends from start-ups to corporate enterprise and spans higher education, financial services, digital marketing, and arts/entertainment.

    Joe Riley

    Joe Riley
    Senior Workshop Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joe ensures our members get the most value out of their Info-Tech memberships by scoping client needs, current state and desired business outcomes, and then drawing upon his extensive experience, certifications, and degrees (MBA, MS Ops/Org Mgt, BS Eng/Sci, ITIL, PMP, Security+, etc.) to facilitate our client's achievement of desired and aspirational business outcomes. A true advocate of ITSM, Joe approaches technology and technology practices as a tool and enabler of people, core business, and competitive advantage activities.

    Denis Goulet

    Denis Goulet
    Senior Workshop Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Denis is a transformational leader and experienced strategist who has worked with 100+ organizations to develop their digital, technology, and governance strategies.
    He has held positions as CIO, Chief Administrative Office (City Manager), General Manager, Vice President of Engineering, and Management Consultant, specializing in enterprise and technology strategy.

    Cole Cioran

    Cole Cioran
    Managing Partner
    Info-Tech Research Group

    I knew I wanted to build great applications that would delight their users. I did that over and over. Along the way I also discovered that it takes great teams to deliver great applications. Technology only solves problems when people, processes, and organizations change as well. This helped me go from writing software to advising some of the largest organizations in the world on how to how to build a digital delivery umbrella of Product, Agile, and DevOps and create exceptional products and services powered by technology.

    Carlene McCubbin

    Carlene McCubbin
    Research Lead, CIO Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    During her tenure at Info-Tech, Carlene has led the development of Info-Tech's Organization and Leadership practice and worked with multiple clients to leverage the methodologies by creating custom programs to fit each organization's needs.
    Before joining Info-Tech, Carlene received her Master of Communications Management from McGill University, where she studied development of internal and external communications, government relations, and change management.

    Isabelle Hertanto

    Isabelle Hertanto
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Isabelle Hertanto has over 15 years of experience delivering specialized IT services to the security and intelligence community. As a former federal officer for Public Safety Canada, Isabelle trained and led teams on data exploitation and digital surveillance operations in support of Canadian national security investigations. Since transitioning into the private sector, Isabelle has held senior management and consulting roles across a variety of industry sectors, including retail, construction, energy, healthcare, and the broader Canadian public sector.

    Hans Eckman

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Hans Eckman is a business transformation leader helping organizations connect business strategy and innovation to operational excellence. He supports Info-Tech members in SDLC optimization, Agile and DevOps implementation, CoE/CoP creation, innovation program development, application delivery, and leadership development. Hans is based out of Atlanta, Georgia.

    Valence Howden

    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    With 30 years of IT experience in the public and private sector, Valence has developed experience in many Information Management and Technology domains, with a particular focus in the areas of Service Management, Enterprise and IT Governance, Development and Execution of Strategy, Risk Management, Metrics Design and Process Design, and Implementation and Improvement. Prior to joining Info-Tech, he served in technical and client-facing roles at Bell Canada and CGI Group Inc., as well as managing the design, integration, and implementation of services and processes in the Ontario Public Sector.

    Clayton Gillett

    Clayton Gillett
    Managing Partner
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Clayton Gillett is a Managing Partner for Info-Tech, providing technology management advisory services to healthcare clients. Clayton joined Info-Tech with more than 28 years of experience in health care information technology. He has held senior IT leadership roles at Group Health Cooperative of Puget Sound and OCHIN, as well as advisory or consulting roles at ECG Management Consultants and Gartner.

    Donna Bales

    Donna Bales
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Bales is a Principal Research Director in the CIO Practice at Info-Tech Research Group specializing in research and advisory services in IT risk, governance, and compliance. She brings over 25 years of experience in strategic consulting and product development and has a history of success in leading complex, multi-stakeholder industry initiatives.

    Igor Ikonnikov

    Igor Ikonnikov
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Igor Ikonnikov is a Research and Advisory Director in the Data and Analytics practice. Igor has extensive experience in strategy formation and execution in the information management domain, including master data management, data governance, knowledge management, enterprise content management, big data, and analytics.
    Igor has an MBA from the Ted Rogers School of Management (Toronto, Canada) with a specialization in Management of Technology and Innovation.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Michael Newcity

    Michael Newcity
    Chief Innovation Officer
    ArcBest

    Kevin Yoder

    Kevin Yoder
    Vice President, Innovation
    ArcBest

    Gary Boyd

    Gary Boyd
    Vice President, Information Systems & Digital Transformation
    Arkansas Blue Cross and Blue Shield

    Brett Trelfa

    Brett Trelfa
    Chief Information Officer
    Arkansas Blue Cross and Blue Shield

    Kristen Wilson-Jones

    Kristen Wilson-Jones
    Chief Technology & Product Officer
    Medcurio

    Note: additional contributors did not wish to be identified

    Bibliography

    Altringer, Beth. "A New Model for Innovation in Big Companies" Harvard Business Review. 19 Nov. 2013. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023. https://hbr.org/2013/11/a-new-model-for-innovation-in-big-companies
    Arpajian, Scott. "Five Reasons Why Innovation Fails" Forbes Magazine. 4 June 2019. Accessed 31 Jan. 2023. https://www.forbes.com/sites/forbestechcouncil/2019/06/04/five-reasons-why-innovation-fails/?sh=234e618914c6
    Baldwin, John & Gellatly, Guy. "Innovation Capabilities: The Knowledge Capital Behind the Survival and Growth of Firms" Statistics Canada. Sept. 2006. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023. https://www.bdc.ca/fr/documents/other/innovation_capabilities_en.pdf
    Bar Am, Jordan et al. "Innovation in a Crisis: Why it is More Critical Than Ever" McKinsey & Company, 17 June 2020. Accessed 12 Jan. 2023. <https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/strategy-and-corporate-finance/our-insights/innovation-in-a-crisis-why-it-is-more-critical-than-ever >
    Boston Consulting Group, "Most Innovative Companies 2021" BCG, April 2021. Accessed 30 Jan. 2023. https://web-assets.bcg.com/d5/ef/ea7099b64b89860fd1aa3ec4ff34/bcg-most-innovative-companies-2021-apr-2021-r.pdf
    Boston Consulting Group, "Most Innovative Companies 2022" BGC, 15 Sept. 2022. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023. https://www.bcg.com/en-ca/publications/2022/innovation-in-climate-and-sustainability-will-lead-to-green-growth
    Christensen, Clayton M. The Innovator's Dilemma: When New Technologies Cause Great Firms to Fail. Harvard Business Review Press, 2016.
    Gerber, Niklaus. "What is innovation? A beginner's guide into different models, terminologies and methodologies" Medium. 20 Sept 2022. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://world.hey.com/niklaus/what-is-innovation-a-beginner-s-guide-into-different-models-terminologies-and-methodologies-dd4a3147
    Google X, Homepage. Accessed 6 Feb. 2023. https://x.company/
    Harnoss, Johann D. & Baeza, Ramón. "Overcoming the Four Big Barriers to Innovation Success" Boston Consulting Group, 24 Sept. 2019. Accessed 30 Jan 2023. https://www.bcg.com/en-ca/publications/2019/overcoming-four-big-barriers-to-innovation-success
    Jaruzelski, Barry et al. "Global Innovation 1000 Study" Pricewaterhouse Cooper, 30 Oct. 2018. Accessed 13 Jan. 2023. <https://www.strategyand.pwc.com/gx/en/insights/innovation1000.html>
    Kharpal, Arjun. "Huawei posts first-ever yearly revenue decline as U.S. sanctions continue to bite, but profit surges" CNBC. 28 March 2022. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://www.cnbc.com/2022/03/28/huawei-annual-results-2021-revenue-declines-but-profit-surges.html
    Kirsner, Scott. "The Biggest Obstacles to Innovation in Large Companies" Harvard Business Review, 30 July 2018. Accessed 12 Jan. 2023. <https://hbr.org/2018/07/the-biggest-obstacles-to-innovation-in-large-companies>
    Macrotrends. "Apple Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/AAPL/apple/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Microsoft Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/MSFT/microsoft/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Amazon Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/AMZN/amazon/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Alphabet Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/GOOG/alphabet/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Tesla Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/TSLA/tesla/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Moderna Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/MRNA/moderna/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Sony Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/SONY/sony/revenue
    Macrotrends. "IBM Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/IBM/ibm/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Meta Platforms Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/META/meta-platforms/revenue
    Macrotrends. "NIKE Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/NKE/nike/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Walmart Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/WMT/walmart/revenue
    Macrotrends. "Dell Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/DELL/dell/revenue
    Macrotrends. "NVIDIA Revenue 2010-2022" Macrotrends. Accessed 23 Jan. 2023. https://www.macrotrends.net/stocks/charts/NVDA/nvidia/revenue
    Sloan, Paul. "How to Develop a Vision for Innovation" Innovation Management, 10 Aug. 2009. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://innovationmanagement.se/2009/08/10/how-to-develop-a-vision-for-innovation/
    Statista. "Samsung Electronics' global revenue from 2005 to 2021" Statista. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://www.statista.com/statistics/236607/global-revenue-of-samsung-electronics-since-2005/
    Tichy, Noel & Ram Charan. "Speed, Simplicity, Self-Confidence: An Interview with Jack Welch" Harvard Business Review, 2 March 2020. Accessed 7 Feb. 2023. https://hbr.org/1989/09/speed-simplicity-self-confidence-an-interview-with-jack-welch
    Weick, Karl and Kathleen Sutcliffe. Managing the Unexpected: Sustained Performance in a Complex World, Third Edition. John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
    Xuan Tian, Tracy Yue Wang, Tolerance for Failure and Corporate Innovation, The Review of Financial Studies, Volume 27, Issue 1, 2014, Pages 211–255, Accessed https://doi.org/10.1093/rfs/hhr130

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}276|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $30,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /organizational-design
    • Organizational design implementations can be highly disruptive for IT staff and business partners. Without a structured approach, IT leaders may experience high turnover, decreased productivity, and resistance to the change.
    • CIOs walk a tightrope as they manage the operational and emotional turbulence while aiming to improve business satisfaction within IT. Failure to achieve balance could result in irreparable failure.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mismanagement will hurt you. The majority of IT organizations do not manage organizational design implementations effectively, resulting in decreased satisfaction, productivity loss, and increased IT costs.
    • Preventing mismanagement is within your control. 72% of change management issues can be directly improved by managers. IT leaders have a tendency to focus their efforts on operational changes rather than on people.

    Impact and Result

    Leverage Info-Tech’s organizational design implementation process and deliverables to build and implement a detailed transition strategy and to prepare managers to lead through change.

    Follow Info-Tech’s 5-step process to:

    1. Effect change and sustain productivity through real-time employee engagement monitoring.
    2. Kick off the organizational design implementation with effective communication.
    3. Build an integrated departmental transition strategy.
    4. Train managers to effectively lead through change.
    5. Develop personalized transition plans.

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how you should implement a new organizational design, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a change communication strategy

    Create strategies to communicate the changes to staff and maintain their level of engagement.

    • Implement a New Organizational Structure – Phase 1: Build a Change Communication Strategy
    • Organizational Design Implementation FAQ
    • Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation

    2. Build the organizational transition plan

    Build a holistic list of projects that will enable the implementation of the organizational structure.

    • Implement a New Organizational Structure – Phase 2: Build the Organizational Transition Plan
    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool

    3. Lead staff through the reorganization

    Lead a workshop to train managers to lead their staff through the changes and build transition plans for all staff members.

    • Implement a New Organizational Structure – Phase 3: Lead Staff Through the Reorganization
    • Organizational Design Implementation Manager Training Guide
    • Organizational Design Implementation Stakeholder Engagement Plan Template
    • Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build Your Change Project Plan

    The Purpose

    Create a holistic change project plan to mitigate the risks of organizational change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Building a change project plan that encompasses both the operational changes and minimizes stakeholder and employee resistance to change.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the new organizational structure.

    1.2 Determine the scope of your organizational changes.

    1.3 Review your MLI results.

    1.4 Brainstorm a list of projects to enable the change.

    Outputs

    Project management planning and monitoring tool

    McLean Leadership Index dashboard

    2 Finalize Change Project Plan

    The Purpose

    Finalize the change project plan started on day 1.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Finalize the tasks that need to be completed as part of the change project.

    Activities

    2.1 Brainstorm the tasks that are contained within the change projects.

    2.2 Determine the resource allocations for the projects.

    2.3 Understand the dependencies of the projects.

    2.4 Create a progress monitoring schedule.

    Outputs

    Completed project management planning and monitoring tool

    3 Enlist Your Implementation Team

    The Purpose

    Enlist key members of your team to drive the implementation of your new organizational design.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Mitigate the risks of staff resistance to the change and low engagement that can result from major organizational change projects.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine the members that are best suited for the team.

    3.2 Build a RACI to define their roles.

    3.3 Create a change vision.

    3.4 Create your change communication strategy.

    Outputs

    Communication strategy

    4 Train Your Managers to Lead Through Change

    The Purpose

    Train your managers who are more technically focused to handle the people side of the change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Leverage your managers to translate how the organizational change will directly impact individuals on their teams.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct the manager training workshop with managers.

    4.2 Review the stakeholder engagement plans.

    4.3 Review individual transition plan template with managers.

    Outputs

    Conflict style self-assessments

    Stakeholder engagement plans

    Individual transition plan template

    5 Build Your Transition Plans

    The Purpose

    Complete transition plans for individual members of your staff.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Create individual plans for your staff members to ease the transition into their new roles.

    Activities

    5.1 Bring managers back in to complete transition plans.

    5.2 Revisit the new organizational design as a source of information.

    5.3 Complete aspects of the templates that do not require staff feedback.

    5.4 Discuss strategies for transitioning.

    Outputs

    Individual transition plan template

    Further reading

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    Prioritize quick wins and critical services during IT org changes.

    This blueprint is part 3/3 in Info-Tech’s organizational design program and focuses on implementing a new structure

    Part 1: Design Part 2: Structure Part 3: Implement
    IT Organizational Architecture Organizational Sketch Organizational Structure Organizational Chart Transition Strategy Implement Structure
    1. Define the organizational design objectives.
    2. Develop strategically-aligned capability map.
    3. Create the organizational design framework.
    4. Define the future state work units.
    5. Create future state work unit mandates.
    1. Assign work to work units (accountabilities and responsibilities).
    2. Develop organizational model options (organizational sketches).
    3. Assess options and select go-forward model.
    1. Define roles by work unit.
    2. Create role mandates.
    3. Turn roles into jobs.
    4. Define reporting relationships between jobs.
    5. Define competency requirements.
    1. Determine number of positions per job.
    2. Conduct competency assessment.
    3. Assign staff to jobs.
    1. Form OD implementation team.
    2. Develop change vision.
    3. Build communication presentation.
    4. Identify and plan change projects.
    5. Develop organizational transition plan.
    1. Train managers to lead through change.
    2. Define and implement stakeholder engagement plan.
    3. Develop individual transition plans.
    4. Implement transition plans.
    Risk Management: Create, implement, and monitor risk management plan.
    HR Management: Develop job descriptions, conduct job evaluation, and develop compensation packages.

    Monitor and Sustain Stakeholder Engagement →

    The sections highlighted in green are in scope for this blueprint. Click here for more information on designing or on structuring a new organization.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For:

    • CIOs

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Effectively implement a new organizational structure.
    • Develop effective communications to minimize turnover and lost productivity during transition.
    • Identify a detailed transition strategy to move to your new structure with minimal interruptions to service quality.
    • Train managers to lead through change and measure ongoing employee engagement.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • IT Leaders

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Effectively lead through the organizational change.
    • Manage difficult conversations with staff and mitigate staff concerns and turnover.
    • Build clear transition plans for their teams.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Organizational Design (OD) projects are typically undertaken in order to enable organizational priorities, improve IT performance, or to reduce IT costs. However, due to the highly disruptive nature of the change, only 25% of changes achieve their objectives over the long term. (2013 Towers Watson Change and Communication ROI Survey)

    Complication

    • OD implementations can be highly disruptive for IT staff and business partners. Without a structured approach, IT leaders may experience high turnover, decreased productivity, and resistance to the change.
    • CIOs walk a tightrope as they manage the operational and emotional turbulence while aiming to improve business satisfaction within IT. Failure to achieve balance could result in irreparable failure.

    Resolution

    • Leverage Info-Tech’s organizational design implementation process and deliverables to build and implement a detailed transition strategy and to prepare managers to lead through change. Follow Info-Tech’s 5-step process to:
      1. Effect change and sustain productivity through real-time employee engagement monitoring.
      2. Kick off the organizational design implementation with effective communication.
      3. Build an integrated departmental transition strategy.
      4. Train managers to effectively lead through change.
      5. Develop personalized transition plans.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Mismanagement will hurt you. The majority of IT organizations do not manage OD implementations effectively, resulting in decreased satisfaction, productivity loss, and increased IT costs.
    2. Preventing mismanagement is within your control. 72% of change management issues can be directly improved by managers. (Abilla, 2009) IT leaders have a tendency to focus their efforts on operational changes rather than on people. This is a recipe for failure.

    Organizational Design Implementation

    Managing organizational design (OD) changes effectively is critical to maintaining IT service levels and retaining top talent throughout a restructure. Nevertheless, many organizations fail to invest appropriate consideration and resources into effective OD change planning and execution.

    THREE REASONS WHY CIOS NEED TO EFFECTIVELY MANAGE CHANGE:

    1. Failure is the norm; not the exception. According to a study by Towers Watson, only 55% of organizations experience the initial value of a change. Even fewer organizations, a mere 25%, are actually able to sustain change over time to experience the full expected benefits. (2013 Towers Watson Change and Communication ROI Survey)
    2. People are the biggest cause of failure. Organizational design changes are one of the most difficult types of changes to manage as staff are often highly resistant. This leads to decreased productivity and poor results. The most significant people challenge is the loss of momentum through the change process which needs to be actively managed.
    3. Failure costs money. Poor IT OD implementations can result in increased turnover, lost productivity, and decreased satisfaction from the business. Managing the implementation has a clear ROI as the cost of voluntary turnover is estimated to be 150% of an employee’s annual salary. (Inc)

    86% of IT leaders believe organization and leadership processes are critical, yet the majority struggle to be effective

    PERCENTAGE OF IT LEADERS WHO BELIEVE THEIR ORGANIZATION AND LEADERSHIP PROCESSES ARE HIGHLY IMPORTANT AND HIGHLY EFFECTIVE

    A bar graph, with the following organization and leadership processes listed on the Y-axis: Human Resources Management; Leadership, Culture, Values; Organizational Change Management; and Organizational Design. The bar graph shows that over 80% of IT leaders rate these processes as High Importance, but less than 40% rate them as having High Effectiveness.

    GAP BETWEEN IMPORTANCE AND EFFECTIVENESS

    Human Resources Management - 61%

    Leadership, Culture, Values - 48%

    Organizational Change Management - 55%

    Organizational Design - 45%

    Note: Importance and effectiveness were determined by identifying the percentage of individuals who responded with 8-10/10 to the questions…

    • “How important is this process to the organization’s ability to achieve business and IT goals?” and…
    • “How effective is this process at helping the organization to achieve business and IT goals?”

    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, Management and Governance Diagnostic. N=22,800 IT Professionals

    Follow a structured approach to your OD implementation to improve stakeholder satisfaction with IT and minimize risk

    • IT reorganizations are typically undertaken to enable strategic goals, improve efficiency and performance, or because of significant changes to the IT budget. Without a structured approach to manage the organizational change, IT might get the implementation done, but fail to achieve the intended benefits, i.e. the operation succeeds, but the patient has died on the table.
    • When implementing your new organizational design, it’s critical to follow a structured approach to ensure that you can maintain IT service levels and performance and achieve the intended benefits.
    • The impact of organizational structure changes can be emotional and stressful for staff. As such, in order to limit voluntary turnover, and to maintain productivity and performance, IT leaders need to be strategic about how they communicate and respond to resistance to change.

    TOP 3 BENEFITS OF FOLLOWING A STRUCTURED APPROACH TO IMPLEMENTING ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN

    1. Improved stakeholder satisfaction with IT. A detailed change strategy will allow you to successfully transition staff into new roles with limited service interruptions and with improved stakeholder satisfaction.
    2. Experience minimal voluntary turnover throughout the change. Know how to actively engage and minimize resistance of stakeholders throughout the change.
    3. Execute implementation on time and on budget. Effectively managed implementations are 65–80% more likely to meet initial objectives than those with poor organizational change management. (Boxley Group, LLC)

    Optimize your organizational design implementation results by actively preparing managers to lead through change

    IT leaders have a tendency to make change even more difficult by focusing on operations rather than on people. This is a recipe for failure. People pose the greatest risk to effective implementation and as such, IT managers need to be prepared and trained on how to lead their staff through the change. This includes knowing how to identify and manage resistance, communicating the change, and maintaining positive momentum with staff.

    Staff resistance and momentum are the most challenging part of leading through change (McLean & Company, N=196)

    A bar graph with the following aspects of Change Management listed on the Y-Axis, in increasing order of difficulty: Dealing with Technical Issues; Monitoring metrics to measure progress; Amending policies and processes; Coordinating with stakeholders; Getting buy-in from staff; Maintaining a positive momentum with staff.

    Reasons why change fails: 72% of failures can be directly improved by the manager (shmula)

    A pie chart showing the reasons why change fails: Management behavior not supportive of change = 33%; Employee resistance to change = 39%; Inadequate resources or budget = 14%; and All other obstacles = 14%.

    Leverage organizational change management (OCM) best practices for increased OD implementation success

    Effective change management correlates with project success

    A line graph, with Percent of respondents that met or exceeded project objectives listed on the Y-axis, and Poor, Fair, Good, and Excellent listed on the X-axis. The line represents the overall effectiveness of the change management program, and as the value on the Y-axis increases, so does the value on the X-axis.

    Source: Prosci. From Prosci’s 2012 Best Practices in Change Management benchmarking report.

    95% of projects with excellent change management met or EXCEEDED OBJECTIVES, vs. 15% of those with poor OCM. (Prosci)

    143% ROI on projects with excellent OCM. In other words, for every dollar spent on the project, the company GAINS 43 CENTS. This is in contrast to 35% ROI on projects with poor OCM. (McKinsey)

    Info-Tech’s approach to OD implementation is a practical and tactical adaptation of several successful OCM models

    BUSINESS STRATEGY-ORIENTED OCM MODELS. John Kotter’s 8-Step model, for instance, provides a strong framework for transformational change but doesn’t specifically take into account the unique needs of an IT transformation.

    GENERAL-PURPOSE OCM FRAMEWORKS such as ACMP’s Standard for Change Management, CMI’s CMBoK, and Prosci’s ADKAR model are very comprehensive and need to be configured to organizational design implementation-specific initiatives.

    COBIT MANAGEMENT PRACTICE BAI05: MANAGE ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE ENABLEMENT follows a structured process for implementing enterprise change quickly. This framework can be adapted to OD implementation; however, it is most effective when augmented with the people and management training elements present in other frameworks.

    References and Further Reading

    Tailoring a comprehensive, general-purpose OCM framework to an OD implementation requires familiarity and experience. Info-Tech’s OD implementation model adapts the best practices from a wide range of proven OCM models and distills it into a step-by-step process that can be applied to an organizational design transformation.

    The following OD implementation symptoms can be avoided through structured planning

    IN PREVIOUS ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGES, I’VE EXPERIENCED…

    “Difficultly motivating my staff to change.”

    “Higher than average voluntary turnover during and following the implementation.”

    “An overall sense of staff frustration or decreased employee engagement.”

    “Decreased staff productivity and an inability to meet SLAs.”

    “Increased overtime caused by being asked to do two jobs at once.”

    “Confusion about the reporting structure during the change.”

    “Difficulty keeping up with the rate of change and change fatigue from staff.”

    “Business partner dissatisfaction about the change and complaints about the lack of effort or care put in by IT employees.”

    “Business partners not wanting to adjust to the change and continuing to follow outdated processes.”

    “Decrease in stakeholder satisfaction with IT.”

    “Increased prevalence of shadow IT during or following the change.”

    “Staff members vocally complaining about the IT organization and leadership team.”

    Follow this blueprint to develop and execute on your OD implementation

    IT leaders often lack the experience and time to effectively execute on organizational changes. Info-Tech’s organizational design implementation program will provide you with the needed tools, templates, and deliverables. Use these insights to drive action plans and initiatives for improvement.

    How we can help

    • Measure the ongoing engagement of your employees using Info-Tech’s MLI diagnostic. The diagnostic comes complete with easily customizable reports to track and act on employee engagement throughout the life of the change.
    • Use Info-Tech’s customizable project management tools to identify all of the critical changes, their impact on stakeholders, and mitigate potential implementation risks.
    • Develop an in-depth action plan and transition plans for individual stakeholders to ensure that productivity remains high and that service levels and project expectations are met.
    • Align communication with real-time staff engagement data to keep stakeholders motivated and focused throughout the change.
    • Use Info-Tech’s detailed facilitation guide to train managers on how to effectively communicate the change, manage difficult stakeholders, and help ensure a smooth transition.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s customizable deliverables to execute your organizational design implementation

    A graphic with 3 sections: 1.BUILD A CHANGE COMMUNICATION STRATEGY; 2.BUILD THE ORGANIZATIONAL TRANSITION PLAN; 3.1 TRAIN MANAGERS TO LEAD THROUGH CHANGE; 3.2 TRANSITION STAFF TO NEW ROLES. An arrow emerges from point one and directs right, over the rest of the steps. Text above the arrow reads: ONGOING ENGAGEMENT MONITORING AND COMMUNICATION. Dotted arrows emerge from points two and three directing back toward point one. Text below the arrow reads: COMMUNICATION STRATEGY ITERATION.

    CUSTOMIZABLE PROJECT DELIVERABLES

    1. BUILD A CHANGE COMMUNICATION STRATEGY

    • McLean Leadership Index: Real-Time Employee Engagement Dashboard
    • Organizational Design
    • Implementation Kick-Off Presentation
    • Organizational Design Implementation FAQ

    2. BUILD THE ORGANIZATIONAL TRANSITION PLAN

    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool

    3.1 TRAIN MANAGERS TO LEAD THROUGH CHANGE

    3.2 TRANSITION STAFF TO NEW ROLES

    • Organizational Design Implementation Manager Training Guide
    • Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template

    Leverage Info-Tech’s tools and templates to overcome key engagement program implementation challenges

    KEY SECTION INSIGHTS:

    BUILD A CHANGE COMMUNICATION STRATEGY

    Effective organizational design implementations mitigate the risk of turnover and lost productivity through ongoing monitoring and managing of employee engagement levels. Take a data-driven approach to managing engagement with Info-Tech’s real-time MLI engagement dashboard and adjust your communication and implementation strategy before engagement risks become issues.

    BUILD THE ORGANIZATIONAL TRANSITION PLAN

    Your organizational design implementation is made up of a series of projects and needs to be integrated into your larger project schedule. Too often, organizations attempt to fit the organizational design implementation into their existing schedules which results in poor resource planning, long delays in implementation, and overall poor results.

    LEAD STAFF THROUGH THE REORGANIZATION

    The majority of IT managers were promoted because they excelled at the technical aspect of their job rather than in people management. Not providing training is setting your organization up for failure. Train managers to effectively lead through change to see a 72% decrease in change management issues. (Abilla, 2009)

    METRICS:

    1. Voluntary turnover: Conduct an exit interview with all staff members during and after transition. Identify any staff members who cite the change as a reason for departure. For those who do leave, multiply their salary by 1.5% (the cost of a new hire) and track this over time.
    2. Business satisfaction trends: Conduct CIO Business Vision one year prior to the change vs. one year after change kick-off. Prior to the reorganization, set metrics for each category for six months after the reorganization, and one year following.
    3. Saved development costs: Number of hours to develop internal methodology, tools, templates, and process multiplied by the salary of the individual.

    Use this blueprint to save 1–3 months in implementing your new organizational structure

    Time and Effort Using Blueprint Without Blueprint
    Assess Current and Ongoing Engagement 1 person ½ day – 4 weeks 1–2 hours for diagnostic set up (allow extra 4 weeks to launch and review initial results). High Value 4–8 weeks
    Set Up the Departmental Change Workbooks 1–5 people 1 day 4–5 hours (varies based on the scope of the change). Medium Value 1–2 weeks
    Design Transition Strategy 1–2 people 1 day 2–10 hours of implementation team’s time. Medium Value 0–2 weeks
    Train Managers to Lead Through Change 1–5 people 1–2 weeks 1–2 hours to prepare training (allow for 3–4 hours per management team to execute). High Value 3–5 weeks

    These estimates are based on reviews with Info-Tech clients and our experience creating the blueprint.

    Totals:

    Workshop: 1 week

    GI/DIY: 2-6 weeks

    Time and Effort Saved: 8-17 weeks

    CIO uses holistic organizational change management strategies to overcome previous reorganization failures

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: Client interview

    Problem

    When the CIO of a large manufacturing company decided to undertake a major reorganization project, he was confronted with the stigma of a previous CIO’s attempt. Senior management at the company were wary of the reorganization since the previous attempt had failed and cost a lot of money. There was major turnover since staff were not happy with their new roles costing $250,000 for new hires. The IT department saw a decline in their satisfaction scores and a 10% increase in help desk tickets. The reorganization also cost the department $400,000 in project rework.

    Solution

    The new CIO used organizational change management strategies in order to thoroughly plan the implementation of the new organizational structure. The changes were communicated to staff in order to improve adoption, every element of the change was mapped out, and the managers were trained to lead their staff through the change.

    Results

    The reorganization was successful and eagerly adopted by the staff. There was no turnover after the new organizational structure was implemented and the engagement levels of the staff remained the same.

    $250,000 - Cost of new hires and salary changes

    10% - Increase in help desk tickets

    $400,000 - Cost of project delays due to the poorly effective implementation of changes

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    3. Lead Staff Through the Reorganization
    1. Build a Change Communication Strategy 2. Build the Organizational Transition Plan 3.1 Train Managers to Lead Through Change 3.2 Transition Staff to New Roles
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Launch the McLean Leadership Index to set a baseline.

    1.2 Establish your implementation team.

    1.3 Build your change communication strategy and change vision.

    2.1 Build a holistic list of change projects.

    2.2 Monitor and track the progress of your change projects.

    3.1.1 Conduct a workshop with managers to prepare them to lead through the change.

    3.1.2 Build stakeholder engagement plans and conduct conflict style self-assessments.

    3.2.1 Build transition plans for each of your staff members.

    3.2.2 Transition your staff to their new roles.

    Guided Implementations
    • Set up your MLI Survey.
    • Determine the members and roles of your implementation team.
    • Review the components of a change communication strategy.
    • Review the change dimensions and how they are used to plan change projects.
    • Review the list of change projects.
    • Review the materials and practice conducting the workshop.
    • Debrief after conducting the workshop.
    • Review the individual transition plan and the process for completing it.
    • Final consultation before transitioning staff to their new roles.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1: Effectively communicate the reorganization to your staff. Module 2: Build the organizational transition plan. Module 3.1: Train your managers to lead through change. Module 3.2: Complete your transition plans

    Phase 1 Results:

    • Plans for effectively communicating with your staff.

    Phase 2 Results:

    • A holistic view of the portfolio of projects required for a successful reorg

    Phase 3.1 Results:

    • A management team that is capable of leading their staff through the reorganization

    Phase 3.2 Results:

    • Completed transition plans for your entire staff.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities

    Build Your Change Project Plan

    1.1 Review the new organizational structure.

    1.2 Determine the scope of your organizational changes.

    1.3 Review your MLI results.

    1.4 Brainstorm a list of projects to enable the change.

    Finalize Change Project Plan

    2.1 Brainstorm the tasks that are contained within the change projects.

    2.2 Determine the resource allocation for the projects.

    2.3 Understand the dependencies of the projects.

    2.4 Create a progress monitoring schedule

    Enlist Your Implementation Team

    3.1 Determine the members that are best suited for the team.

    3.2 Build a RACI to define their roles.

    3.3 Create a change vision.

    3.4 Create your change communication strategy.

    Train Your Managers to Lead Through Change

    4.1 Conduct the manager training workshop with managers.

    4.2 Review the stakeholder engagement plans.

    4.3 Review individual transition plan template with managers

    Build Your Transition Plans

    5.1 Bring managers back in to complete transition plans.

    5.2 Revisit new organizational design as a source for information.

    5.3 Complete aspects of the template that do not require feedback.

    5.4 Discuss strategies for transitioning.

    Deliverables
    1. McLean Leadership Index Dashboard
    2. Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool
    1. Completed Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool
    1. Communication Strategy
    1. Stakeholder Engagement Plans
    2. Conflict Style Self-Assessments
    3. Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template
    1. Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template

    Phase 1

    Build a Change Communication Strategy

    Build a change communication strategy

    Outcomes of this Section:

    • Launch the McLean Leadership Index
    • Define your change team
    • Build your reorganization kick-off presentation and FAQ for staff and business stakeholders

    This section involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT leadership team
    • IT staff

    Key Section Insight:

    Effective organizational design implementations mitigate the risk of turnover and lost productivity through ongoing monitoring of employee engagement levels. Take a data-driven approach to managing engagement with Info-Tech’s real-time MLI engagement dashboard and adjust your communication and implementation strategy in real-time before engagement risks become issues.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Build a Change Communication Strategy

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1-6 weeks

    Step 1.1: Launch Your McLean Leadership Index Survey

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Discuss the benefits and uses of the MLI.
    • Go over the required information (demographics, permissions, etc.).
    • Set up a live demo of the survey.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Launch the survey with your staff.
    • Have a results call with a member of the Info-Tech staff.

    With these tools & templates:

    McLean Leadership Index

    Step 1.2: Establish Your Implementation Team

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review what members of your department should participate.
    • Build a RACI to determine the roles of your team members.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Hold a kick-off meeting with your new implementation team.
    • Build the RACI for your new team members and their roles.

    Step 1.3: Build Your Change Communication Strategy

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Customize your reorganization kick-off presentation.
    • Create your change vision. Review the communication strategy.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Hold your kick-off presentation with staff members.
    • Launch the reorganization communications.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation
    • Organizational Design Implementation FAQ

    Set the stage for the organizational design implementation by effectively introducing and communicating the change to staff

    Persuading people to change requires a “soft,” empathetic approach to keep them motivated and engaged. But don’t mistake “soft” for easy. Managing the people and communication aspects around the change are amongst the toughest work there is, and require a comfort and competency with uncertainty, ambiguity, and conflict.

    Design Engagement Transition
    Communication

    Communication and engagement are the chains linking your design to transition. If the organizational design initiative is going to be successful it is critical that you manage this effectively. The earlier you begin planning the better. The more open and honest you are about the change the easier it will be to maintain engagement levels, business satisfaction, and overall IT productivity.

    Kick-Off Presentation Inputs

    • LAUNCH THE MCLEAN LEADERSHIP INDEX
    • IDENTIFY YOUR CHANGE TEAM
    • DETERMINE CHANGE TEAM RESPONSIBILITIES
    • DEVELOP THE CHANGE VISION
    • DEFINE KEY MESSAGES AND GOALS
    • IDENTIFY MAJOR CHANGES
    • IDENTIFY KEY MILESTONES
    • BUILD AND MAINTAIN A CHANGE FAQ

    Use the MLI engagement dashboard to measure your current state and the impact of the change in real-time

    The McLean Leadership Index diagnostic is a low-effort, high-impact program that provides real-time metrics on staff engagement levels. Use these insights to understand your employees’ engagement levels throughout the organizational design implementation to measure the impact of the change and to manage turnover and productivity levels throughout the implementation.

    WHY CARE ABOUT ENGAGEMENT DURING THE CHANGE? ENGAGED EMPLOYEES REPORT:

    39% Higher intention to stay at the organization.

    29% Higher performance and increased likelihood to work harder and longer hours. (Source: McLean and Company N=1,308 IT Employees)

    Why the McLean Leadership Index?

    Based on the Net Promoter Score (NPS), the McLean Leadership Index is one question asked monthly to assess engagement at various points in time.

    Individuals responding to the MLI question with a 9 or 10 are your Promoters and are most positive and passionate. Those who answer 7 or 8 are Passives while those who answer 0 to 6 are Detractors.

    Track your engagement distribution using our online dashboard to view MLI data at any time and view results based on teams, locations, manager, tenure, age, and gender. Assess the reactions to events and changes in real-time, analyze trends over time, and course-correct.

    Dashboard reports: Know your staff’s overall engagement and top priorities

    McLean Leadership Index

    OVERALL ENGAGEMENT RESULTS

    You get:

    • A clear breakdown of your detractors, passives, and promotors.
    • To view results by team, location, and individual manager.
    • To dig deeper into results by reviewing results by age, gender, and tenure at the organization to effectively identify areas where engagement is weak.

    TIME SERIES TRENDS

    You get:

    • View of changes in engagement levels for each team, location, and manager.
    • Breakdown of trends weekly, monthly, quarterly, and yearly.
    • To encourage leaders to monitor results to analyze root causes for changes and generate improvement initiatives.

    QUALITATIVE COMMENTS

    You get:

    • To view qualitative comments provided by staff on what is impacting their engagement.
    • To reply directly to comments without impacting the anonymity of the individuals making the comments.
    • To leverage trends in the comments to make changes to communication approaches.

    Launch the McLean Leadership Index in under three weeks

    Info-Tech’s dedicated team of program managers will facilitate this diagnostic program remotely, providing you with a convenient, low-effort, high-impact experience.

    We will guide you through the process with your goals in mind to deliver deep insight into your successes and areas to improve.

    What You Need To Do:

    1. Contact Info-Tech to launch the program and test the functionality in a live demo.
    2. Identify demographics and set access permissions.
    3. Complete manager training with assistance from Info-Tech Advisors.
    4. Participate in a results call with an Info-Tech Advisor to review results and develop an action plan.

    Info-Tech’s Program Manager Will:

    1. Collect necessary inputs and generate your custom dashboard.
    2. Launch, maintain, and support the online system in the field.
    3. Send out a survey to 25% of the staff each week.
    4. Provide ongoing support over the phone, and the needed tools and templates to communicate and train staff as well as take action on results.

    Explore your initial results in a one-hour call with an Executive Advisor to fully understand the results and draw insights from the data so you can start your action plan.

    Start Your Diagnostic Now

    We'll help you get set up as soon as you're ready.

    Start Now

    Communication has a direct impact on employee engagement; measure communication quality using your MLI results

    A line graph titled: The impact of manager communication on employee engagement. The X-axis is labeled from Strongly Disagree to Strongly Agree, and the Y-axis is labeled: Percent of Engaged Respondents. There are 3 colour-coded lines: dark blue indicates My manager provides me with high-quality feedback; light blue indicates I clearly understand what is expected of me on the job; and green indicates My manager keeps me well informed about decisions that affect me. The line turns upward as it moves to the right of the graph.

    (McLean & Company, 2015 N=17,921)

    A clear relationship exists between how effective a manager’s communication is perceived to be and an employee’s level of engagement. If engagement drops, circle back with employees to understand the root causes.

    Establish an effective implementation team to drive the organizational change

    The implementation team is responsible for developing and disseminating information around the change, developing the transition strategy, and for the ongoing management of the changes.

    The members of the implementation team should include:

    • CIO
    • Current IT leadership team
    • Project manager
    • Business relationship managers
    • Human resources advisor

    Don’t be naïve – building and executing the implementation plan will require a significant time commitment from team members. Too often, organizations attempt to “fit it in” to their existing schedules resulting in poor planning, long delays, and overall poor results. Schedule this work like you would a project.

    TOP 3 TIPS FOR DEFINING YOUR IMPLEMENTATION TEAM

    1. Select a Project Manager. Info-Tech strongly recommends having one individual accountable for key project management activities. They will be responsible for keeping the project on time and maintaining a holistic view of the implementation.
    2. Communication with Business Partners is Critical. If you have Business Relationship Managers (BRMs), involve them in the communication planning or assign someone to play this role. You need your business partners to be informed and bought in to the implementation to maintain satisfaction.
    3. Enlist Your “Volunteer Army.” (Kotter’s 8 Principles) If you have an open culture, Info-Tech encourages you to have an extended implementation team made up of volunteers interested in supporting the change. Their role will be to support the core group, assist in planning, and communicate progress with peers.

    Determine the roles of your implementation team members

    1.1 30 Minutes

    Input

    • Implementation team members

    Output

    • RACI for key transition elements

    Materials

    • RACI chart and pen

    Participants

    • Core implementation committee
    1. Each member should be actively engaged in all elements of the organizational design implementation. However, it’s important to have one individual who is accountable for key activities and ensures they are done effectively and measured.
    2. Review the chart below and as a group, brainstorm any additional key change components.
    3. For each component listed below, identify who is Accountable, Responsible, Consulted, and Informed for each (suggested responsibility below).
    CIO IT Leaders PM BRM HR
    Communication Plan A R R R C
    Employee Engagement A R R R C

    Departmental Transition Plan

    R A R I R
    Organizational Transition Plan R R A I C
    Manager Training A R R I C

    Individual Transition Plans

    R A R I I
    Technology and Logistical Changes R R A I I
    Hiring A R I I R
    Learning and Development R A R R R
    Union Negotiations R I I I A
    Process Development R R A R I

    Fast-track your communication planning with Info-Tech’s Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation

    Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation

    Communicate what’s important to your staff in a simple, digestible way. The communication message should reflect what is important to your stakeholders and what they want to know at the time.

    • Why is this change happening?
    • What are the goals of the reorganization?
    • What specifically is changing?
    • How will this impact me?
    • When is this changing?
    • How and where can I get more information?

    It’s important that the tone of the meeting suits the circumstances.

    • If the reorganization is going to involve lay-offs: The meeting should maintain a positive feel, but your key messages should stress the services that will be available to staff, when and how people will be communicated with about the change, and who staff can go to with concerns.
    • If the reorganization is to enable growth: Focus on celebrating where the organization is going, previous successes, and stress that the staff are critical in enabling team success.

    Modify the Organizational Design ImplementationKick-Off Presentation with your key messages and goals

    1.2 1 hour

    Input

    • New organizational structure

    Output

    • Organizational design goal statements

    Materials

    • Whiteboard & marker
    • ODI Kick-off Presentation

    Participants

    • OD implementation team
    1. Within your change implementation team, hold a meeting to identify and document the change goals and key messages.
    2. As a group, discuss what the key drivers were for the organizational redesign by asking yourselves what problem you were trying to solve.
    3. Select 3–5 key problem statements and document them on a whiteboard.
    4. For each problem statement, identify how the new organizational design will allow you to solve those problems.
    5. Document these in your Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation.

    Modify the presentation with your unique change vision to serve as the center piece of your communication strategy

    1.3 1 hour

    Input

    • Goal statements

    Output

    • Change vision statement

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Pens
    • Voting dots

    Participants

    • Change team
    1. Hold a meeting with the change implementation team to define your change vision. The change vision should provide a picture of what the organization will look like after the organizational design is implemented. It should represent the aspirational goal, and be something that staff can all rally behind.
    2. Hand out sticky notes and ask each member to write down on one note what they believe is the #1 desired outcome from the organizational change and one thing that they are hoping to avoid (you may wish to use your goal statements to drive this).
    3. As a group, review each of the sticky notes and group similar statements in categories. Provide each individual with 3 voting dots and ask them to select their three favorite statements.
    4. Select your winning statements in teams of 2–3. Review each statement and as a team work to strengthen the language to ensure that the statement provides a call to action, that it is short and to the point, and motivational.
    5. Present the statements back to the group and select the best option through a consensus vote.
    6. Document the change vision in your Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation.

    Customize the presentation identifying key changes that will be occurring

    1.4 2 hours

    Input

    • Old and new organizational sketch

    Output

    • Identified key changes that are occurring

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Sticky notes & Pens
    • Camera

    Participants

    • OD implementation team
    1. On a whiteboard, draw a high-level picture of your previous organizational sketch and your new organizational sketch.
    2. Using sticky notes, ask individuals to highlight key high-level challenges that exist in the current model (consider people, process, and technology).
    3. Consider each sticky note, and highlight and document how and where your new sketch will overcome those challenges and the key differences between the old structure and the new.
    4. Take a photo of the two sketches and comments, and document these in your Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation.

    Modify the presentation by identifying and documenting key milestones

    1.5 1 hour

    Input

    • OD implementation team calendars

    Output

    • OD implementation team timeline

    Materials

    • OD Implementation Kick-Off Presentation

    Participants

    • OD implementation team
    1. Review the timeline in the Organizational Design Implementation Kick-Off Presentation. As a group, discuss the key milestones identified in the presentation:
      • Kick-off presentation
      • Departmental transition strategy built
      • Organizational transition strategy built
      • Manager training
      • One-on-one meetings with staff to discuss changes to roles
      • Individual transition strategy development begins
    2. Review the timeline, and keeping your other commitments in mind, estimate when each of these tasks will be completed and update the timeline.

    Build an OD implementation FAQ to proactively address key questions and concerns about the change

    Organizational Design Implementation FAQ

    Leverage this template as a starting place for building an organizational design implementation FAQ.

    This template is prepopulated with example questions and answers which are likely to arise.

    Info-Tech encourages you to use the list of questions as a basis for your FAQ and to add additional questions based on the changes occurring at your organization.

    It may also be a good idea to store the FAQ on a company intranet portal so that staff has access at all times and to provide users with a unique email address to forward questions to when they have them.

    Build your unique organizational design implementation FAQ to keep staff informed throughout the change

    1.6 1 hour + ongoing

    Input

    • OD implementation team calendars

    Output

    • OD implementation team timeline

    Materials

    • OD Implementation Kick-Off Presentation

    Participants

    • OD implementation team
    1. Download a copy of the Organizational Design Implementation FAQ and as a group, review each of the key questions.
    2. Delete any questions that are not relevant and add any additional questions you either believe you will receive or which you have already been asked.
    3. Divide the questions among team members and have each member provide a response to these questions.
    4. The CIO and the project manager should review the responses for accuracy and ensure they are ready to be shared with staff.
    5. Publish the responses on an IT intranet site and make the location known to your IT staff.

    Dispelling rumors by using a large implementation team

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: CIO

    Challenge

    When rumors of the impending reorganization reached staff, there was a lot of confusion and some of the more vocal detractors in the department enforced these rumors.

    Staff were worried about changes to their jobs, demotions, and worst of all, losing their jobs. There was no communication from senior management to dispel the gossip and the line managers were also in the dark so they weren’t able to offer support.

    Staff did not feel comfortable reaching out to senior management about the rumors and they didn’t know who the change manager was.

    Solution

    The CIO and change manager put together a large implementation team that included many of the managers in the department. This allowed the managers to handle the gossip through informal conversations with their staff.

    The change manager also built a communication strategy to communicate the stages of the reorganization and used FAQs to address the more common questions.

    Results

    The reorganization was adopted very quickly since there was little confusion surrounding the changes with all staff members. Many of the personnel risks were mitigated by the communication strategy because it dispelled rumors and took some of the power away from the vocal detractors in the department.

    An engagement survey was conducted 3 months after the reorganization and the results showed that the engagement of staff had not changed after the reorganization.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1a: Launch the MLI Dashboard (Pre-Work)

    Prior to the workshop, Info-Tech’s advisors will work with you to launch the MLI diagnostic to understand the overall engagement levels of your organization.

    1b: Review Your MLI Results

    The analysts will facilitate several exercises to help you and your team identify your current engagement levels, and the variance across demographics and over time.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.1: Define Your Change Team Responsibilities

    Review the key responsibilities of the organizational design implementation team and define the RACI for each individual member.

    1.3: Define Your Change Vision and Goals

    Identify the change vision statement which will serve as the center piece for your change communications as well as the key message you want to deliver to your staff about the change. These messages should be clear, emotionally impactful, and inspirational.

    1.4: Identify Key Changes Which Will Impact Staff

    Collectively brainstorm all of the key changes that are happening as a result of the change, and prioritize the list based on the impact they will have on staff. Document the top 10 biggest changes – and the opportunities the change creates or problems it solves.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.5: Define the High-Level Change Timeline

    Identify and document the key milestones within the change as a group, and determine key dates and change owners for each of the key items. Determine the best way to discuss these timelines with staff, and whether there are any which you feel will have higher levels of resistance.

    1.5: Build the FAQ and Prepare for Objection Handling

    As a group, brainstorm the key questions you believe you will receive about the change and develop a common FAQ to provide to staff members. The advisor will assist you in preparing to manage objections to limit resistance.

    Phase 2

    Build The Organizational Transition Plan

    Build the organizational transition plan

    Outcomes of this section:

    • A holistic list of projects that will enable the implementation of the organizational structure.
    • A schedule to monitor the progress of your change projects.

    This section involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Reorganization Implementation Team

    Key Section Insight:

    Be careful to understand the impacts of the change on all groups and departments. For best results, you will need representation from all departments to limit conflict and ensure a smooth transition. For large IT organizations, you will need to have a plan for each department/work unit and create a larger integration project.

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Build the Organizational Transition Plan

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2-4 weeks

    Step 2.1: Review the Change Dimensions and How They Are Used to Plan Change Projects

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Review the purpose of the kick-off meeting.
    • Review the change project dimensions.
    • Review the Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Conduct your kick-off meeting.
    • Brainstorm a list of reorganization projects and their related tasks.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Step 2.2: Review the List of Change Projects

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Revisit the list of projects and tasks developed in the brainstorming session.
    • Assess the list and determine resourcing and dependencies for the projects.
    • Review the monitoring process.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Complete the Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool.
    • Map out your project dependencies and resourcing.
    • Develop a schedule for monitoring projects.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool to plan and track your reorganization

    • Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool to document and track all of the changes that are occurring during your reorganization.
    • Automatically build Gantt charts for all of the projects that are being undertaken, track problems in the issue log, and monitor the progress of projects in the reporting tab.
    • Each department/work group will maintain its own version of this tool throughout the reorganization effort and the project manager will maintain a master copy with all of the projects listed.
    • The chart comes pre-populated with example data gathered through the research and interview process to help generate ideas for your own reorganization.
    • Review the instructions at the top of each work sheet for entering and modifying the data within each chart.

    Have a short kick-off meeting to introduce the project planning process to your implementation team

    2.1 30 minutes

    Output

    • Departmental ownership of planning tool

    Materials

    • OD Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Change Project Manager
    • Implementation Team
    • Senior Management (optional)
    1. The purpose of this kick-off meeting is to assign ownership of the project planning process to members of the implementation team and to begin thinking about the portfolio of projects required to successfully complete the reorganization.
    2. Use the email template included on this slide to invite your team members to the meeting.
    3. The topics that need to be covered in the meeting are:
      • Introducing the materials/templates that will be used throughout the process.
      • Assigning ownership of the Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool to members of your team.
        • Ownership will be at the departmental level where each department or working group will manage their own change projects.
      • Prepare your implementation team for the next meeting where they will be brainstorming the list of projects that will need to be completed throughout the reorganization.
    4. Distribute/email the tools and templates to the team so that they may familiarize themselves with the materials before the next meeting.

    Hello [participant],

    We will be holding our kickoff meeting for our reorganization on [date]. We will be discussing the reorganization process at a high level with special attention being payed to the tools and templates that we will be using throughout the process. By the end of the meeting, we will have assigned ownership of the Project Planning Tool to department representatives and we will have scheduled the next meeting where we’ll brainstorm our list of projects for the reorganization.

    Consider Info-Tech’s four organizational change dimensions when identifying change projects

    CHANGE DIMENSIONS

    • TECHNOLOGY AND LOGISTICS
    • COMMUNICATION
    • STAFFING
    • PROCESS

    Technology and Logistics

    • These are all the projects that will impact the technology used and physical logistics of your workspace.
    • These include new devices, access/permissions, new desks, etc.

    Communication

    • All of the required changes after the reorganization to ongoing communications within IT and to the rest of the organization.
    • Also includes communication projects that are occurring during the reorganization.

    Staffing

    • These projects address the changes to your staff’s roles.
    • Includes role changes, job description building, consulting with HR, etc.

    Process

    • Projects that address changes to IT processes that will occur after the reorganization.

    Use these trigger questions to help identify all aspects of your coming changes

    STAFFING

    • Do you need to hire short or long-term staff to fill vacancies?
    • How long does it typically take to hire a new employee?
    • Will there be staff who are new to management positions?
    • Is HR on board with the reorganization?
    • Have they been consulted?
    • Have transition plans been built for all staff members who are transitioning roles/duties?
    • Will gaps in the structure need to be addressed with new hires?

    COMMUNICATION

    • When will the change be communicated to various members of the staff?
    • Will there be disruption to services during the reorganization?
    • Who, outside of IT, needs to know about the reorganization?
    • Do external communications need to be adjusted because of the reorganization? Moving/centralizing service desk, BRMs, etc.?
    • Are there plans/is there a desire to change the way IT communicates with the rest of the organization?
    • Will the reorganization affect the culture of the department? Is the new structure compatible with the current culture?

    Use these trigger questions to help identify all aspects of your coming changes (continued)

    TECHNOLOGY AND LOGISTICS

    • Will employees require new devices in their new roles?
    • Will employees be required to move their workspace?
    • What changes to the workspace are required to facilitate the new organization?
    • Does new furniture have to be purchased to accommodate new spaces/staff?
    • Is the workspace adequate/up to date technologically (telephone network, Wi-Fi coverage, etc.)?
    • Will employees require new permissions/access for their changing roles?
    • Will permissions/access need to be removed?
    • What is your budget for the reorganization?
    • If a large geographical move is occurring, have problems regarding geography, language barriers, and cultural sensitivities been addressed?

    PROCESS

    • What processes need to be developed?
    • What training for processes is required?
    • Is the daily functioning of the IT department predicted to change?
    • Are new processes being implemented during the reorganization?
    • How will the project portfolio be affected by the reorganization?
    • Is new documentation required to accompany new/changing processes?

    Brainstorm the change projects to be carried out during the reorganization for your team/department

    2.2 3 hours

    Input

    • Constructive group discussion

    Output

    • Thorough list of all reorganization projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, sticky notes
    • OD Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Implementation Team
    • CIO
    • Senior Management
    1. Before the meeting, distribute the list of trigger questions presented on the two previous slides to prepare your implementation team for the brainstorming session.
    2. Begin the meeting by dividing up your implementation team into the departments/work groups that they represent (and have ownership of the tool over).
    3. Distribute a different color of sticky notes to each team and have them write out each project they can think of for each of the change planning dimensions (Staffing, Communication, Process and Technology/Logistics) using the trigger questions.
    4. After one hour, ask the groups to place the projects that they brainstormed onto the whiteboard divided into the four change dimensions.
    5. Discuss the complete list of projects on the board.
      • Remove projects that are listed more than once since some projects will be universal to some/all departments.
      • Adjust the wording of projects for the sake of clarity.
      • Identify projects that are specific to certain departments.
    6. Document the list of high-level projects on tab 2 “Project Lists” within the OD Implementation Project Planning Tool after the activity is complete.

    Prioritize projects to assist with project planning modeling

    Prioritization is the process of ranking each project based on its importance to implementation success. Hold a meeting for the implementation team and extended team to prioritize the project list. At the conclusion of the meeting, each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The implementation teams will use these priority levels to ensure efforts are targeted towards the proper projects. A simple way to do this for your implementation is to use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order requirements.

    The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization

    MUST HAVE - Projects must be implemented for the organizational design to be considered successful.

    SHOULD HAVE - Projects are high priority that should be included in the implementation if possible.

    COULD HAVE - Projects are desirable but not necessary and could be included if resources are available.

    WON'T HAVE - Projects won’t be in the next release, but will be considered for the future releases.

    The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994.

    Keep the following criteria in mind as you determine your priorities

    Effective Prioritization Criteria

    Criteria Description
    Regulatory & Legal Compliance These requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Policy or Contract Compliance Unless an internal policy or contract can be altered or an exception can be made, these projects will be considered mandatory.
    Business Value Significance Give a higher priority to high-value projects.
    Business Risk Any project with the potential to jeopardize the entire project should be given a high priority and implemented early.
    Implementation Complexity Give a higher priority to quick wins.
    Alignment with Strategy Give a higher priority to requirements that enable the corporate strategy and IT strategy.
    Urgency Prioritize projects based on time sensitivity.
    Dependencies A project on its own may be low priority, but if it supports a high-priority requirement, then its priority must match it.
    Funding Availability Do we have the funding required to make this change?

    Prioritize the change projects within your team/department to be executed during the reorganization

    2.3 3 hours

    Input

    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Output

    • Prioritized list of projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, sticky notes
    • OD Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Implementation Team
    • Extended Implementation Team
    1. Divide the group into their department teams. Draw 4 columns on a whiteboard, including the following:
      • Must have
      • Should have
      • Could have
      • Won’t have
    2. As a group, review each project and collaboratively identify which projects fall within each category. You should have a strong balance between each of the categories.
    3. Beginning with the “must have” projects, determine if each has any dependencies. If any of the projects are dependent on another, add the dependency project to the “must have” category. Group and circle the dependent projects.
    4. Continue the same exercise with the “should have” and “could have” options.
    5. Record the results on tab “2. Project List” of the Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool using the drop down option.

    Determine resource availability for completing your change projects

    2.4 2 hours

    Input

    • Constructive group discussion

    Output

    • Thorough list of all reorganization projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, sticky notes
    • OD Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Implementation Team
    • CIO
    • Senior Management
    1. Divide the group into their department teams to plan the execution of the high-level list of projects developed in activity 2.2.
    2. Review the list of high-level projects and starting with the “must do” projects, consider each in turn and brainstorm all of the tasks required to complete these projects. Write down each task on a sticky note and place it under the high-level project.
    3. On the same sticky note as the task, estimate how much time would be required to complete each task. Be realistic about time frames since these projects will be on top of all of the regular day-to-day work.
    4. Along with the time frame, document the resources that will be required and who will be responsible for the tasks. If you have a documented Project Portfolio, use this to determine resourcing.
    5. After mapping out the tasks, bring the group back together to present their list of projects, tasks, and required resources.
      • Go through the project task lists to make sure that nothing is missed.
      • Review the timelines to make sure they are feasible.
      • Review the resources to ensure that they are available and realistic based on constraints (time, current workload, etc.).
      • Repeat the process for the Should do and Could do projects.
    1. Document the tasks and resources in tab “3. Task Monitoring” in the OD Implementation Project Planning Tool after the activity is complete.

    Map out the change project dependencies at the departmental level

    2.5 2 hours

    Input

    • Constructive group discussion

    Output

    • Thorough list of all reorganization projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard, sticky notes
    • OD Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Participants

    • Implementation Team
    • CIO
    • Senior Management
    1. Divide the group into their department teams to map the dependencies of their tasks created in activity 2.3.
    2. Take the project task sticky notes created in the previous activity and lay them out along a timeline from start to finish.
    3. Determine the dependencies of the tasks internal to the department. Map out the types of dependencies.
      • Finish to Start: Preceding task must be completed before the next can start.
      • Start to Start: Preceding task must start before the next task can start.
      • Finish to Finish: Predecessor must finish before successor can finish.
      • Start to Finish: Predecessor must start before successor can finish.
    4. Bring the group back together and review each group’s timeline and dependencies to make sure that nothing has been missed.
    5. As a group, determine whether there are dependencies that span the departmental lists of projects.
    6. Document all of the dependencies within the department and between departmental lists of projects and tasks in the OD Implementation Project Planning Tool.

    Amalgamate all of the departmental change planning tools into a master copy

    2.6 3 hours

    Input

    • Department-specific copies of the OD Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Output

    • Universal list of all of the change projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard and sticky notes

    Participants

    • Implementation Project Manager
    • Members of the implementation team for support (optional)
    1. Before starting the activity, gather all of the OD Implementation Project Planning Tools completed at the departmental level.
    2. Review each completed tool and write all of the individual projects with their timelines on sticky notes and place them on the whiteboard.
    3. Build timelines using the documented dependencies for each department. Verify that the resources (time, people, physical) are adequate and feasible.
    4. Combine all of the departmental project planning tools into one master tool to be used to monitor the overall status of the reorganization. Separate the projects based on the departments they are specific to.
    5. Finalize the timeline based on resource approval and using the dependencies mapped out in the previous exercise.
    6. Approve the planning tools and store them in a shared drive so they can be accessed by the implementation team members.

    Create a progress monitoring schedule

    2.7 1 hour weekly

    Input

    • OD Implementation Project Planning Tools (departmental & organizational)

    Output

    • Actions to be taken before the next pulse meeting

    Participants

    • Implementation Project Manager
    • Members of the implementation team for support
    • Senior Management
    1. Hold weekly pulse meetings to keep track of project progress.
    2. The agenda of each meeting should include:
      • Resolutions to problems/complications raised at the previous week’s meeting.
      • Updates on each department’s progress.
      • Raising any issues/complications that have appeared that week.
      • A discussion of potential solutions to the issues/complications.
      • Validating the work that will be completed before the next meeting.
      • Raising any general questions or concerns that have been voiced by staff about the reorganization.
    3. Upload notes from the meeting about resolutions and changes to the schedules to the shared drive containing the tools.
    4. Increase the frequency of the meetings towards the end of the project if necessary.

    Building a holistic change plan enables adoption of the new organizational structure

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: CIO

    Challenge

    The CIO was worried about the impending reorganization due to problems that they had run into during the last reorganization they had conducted. The change management projects were not planned well and they led to a lot of uncertainty before and after the implementation.

    No one on the staff was ready for the reorganization. Change projects were completed four months after implementation since many of them had not been predicted and cataloged. This caused major disruptions to their user services leading to drops in user satisfaction.

    Solution

    Using their large and diverse implementation team, they spent a great deal of time during the early stages of planning devoted to brainstorming and documenting all of the potential change projects.

    Through regular meetings, the implementation team was able to iteratively adjust the portfolio of change projects to fit changing needs.

    Results

    Despite having to undergo a major reorganization that involved centralizing their service desk in a different state, there were no disruptions to their user services.

    Since all of the change projects were documented and completed, they were able to move their service desk staff over a weekend to a workspace that was already set up. There were no changes to the user satisfaction scores over the period of their reorganization.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.2 Brainstorm Your List of Change Projects

    Review your reorganization plans and facilitate a brainstorming session to identify a complete list of all of the projects needed to implement your new organizational design.

    2.5 Map Out the Dependencies and Resources for Your Change Projects

    Examine your complete list of change projects and determine the dependencies between all of your change projects. Align your project portfolio and resource levels to the projects in order to resource them adequately.

    Phase 3

    Lead Staff Through the Reorganization

    Train managers to lead through change

    Outcomes of this Section:

    • Completed the workshop: Lead Staff Through Organizational Change
    • Managers possess stakeholder engagement plans for each employee
    • Managers are prepared to fulfil their roles in implementing the organizational change

    This section involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT leadership team
    • IT staff

    Key Section Insight:

    The majority of IT managers were promoted because they excelled at the technical aspect of their job rather than in people management. Not providing training is setting your organization up for failure. Train managers to effectively lead through change to see a 72% decrease in change management issues. (Source: Abilla, 2009)

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Train Managers to Lead Through Change

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1-2 weeks

    Step 3.1: Train Your Managers to Lead Through the Change

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Go over the manager training workshop section of this deck.
    • Review the deliverables generated from the workshop (stakeholder engagement plan and conflict style self-assessment).

    Then complete these activities…

    • Conduct the workshop with your managers.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Design Implementation Manager Training Guide
    • Organizational Design Implementation Stakeholder Engagement Plan Template

    Step 3.2: Debrief After the Workshop

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the outcomes of the manager training.
    • Mention any feedback.
    • High-level overview of the workshop deliverables.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Encourage participants to review and revise their stakeholder engagement plans.
    • Review the Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template and next steps.

    Get managers involved to address the majority of obstacles to successful change

    Managers all well-positioned to translate how the organizational change will directly impact individuals on their teams.

    Reasons Why Change Fails

    EMPLOYEE RESISTANCE TO CHANGE - 39%

    MANAGEMENT BEHAVIOR NOT SUPPORTIVE OF CHANGE - 33%

    INADEQUATE RESOURCE OR BUDGET - 14%

    OTHER OBSTACLES - 14%

    72% of change management issues can be directly improved by management.

    (Source: shmula)

    Why are managers crucial to organizational change?

    • Managers are extremely well-connected.
      • They have extensive horizontal and vertical networks spanning the organization.
      • Managers understand the informal networks of the organization.
    • Managers are valuable communicators.
      • Managers have established strong relationships with employees.
      • Managers influence the way staff perceive messaging.

    Conduct a workshop with managers to help them lead their teams through change

    Organizational Design Implementation Manager Training Guide

    Give managers the tools and skills to support their employees and carry out difficult conversations.

    Understand the role of management in communicating the change

    Understand reactions to change

    Resolve conflict

    Respond to FAQs

    Monitor and measure employee engagement

    Prepare managers to effectively execute their role in the organizational change by running a 2-hour training workshop.

    Complete the activities on the following slides to:

    • Plan and prepare for the workshop.
    • Execute the group exercises.
    • Help managers develop stakeholder engagement plans for each of their employees.
    • Initiate the McLean Leadership Index™ survey to measure employee engagement.

    Plan and prepare for the workshop

    3.1 Plan and prepare for the workshop.

    Output

    • Workshop participants
    • Completed workshop prep

    Materials

    • Organizational Design Implementation Manager Training Guide

    Instructions

    1. Create a list of all managers that will be responsible for leading their teams through the change.
    2. Select a date for the workshop.
      • The training session will run approximately 2 hours and should be scheduled within a week of when the implementation plan is communicated organization-wide.
    3. Review the material outlined in the presentation and prepare the Organizational Design Implementation Manager Training Guide for the workshop:
      • Copy and print the “Pre-workshop Facilitator Instructions” and “Facilitator Notes” located in the notes section below each slide.
      • Revise frequently asked questions (FAQs) and responses.
      • Delete instruction slides.

    Invite managers to the workshop

    Workshop Invitation Email Template

    Make necessary modifications to the Workshop Invitation Email Template and send invitations to managers.

    Hi ________,

    As you are aware, we are starting to roll out some of the initiatives associated with our organizational change mandate. A key component of our implementation plan is to ensure that managers are well-prepared to lead their teams through the transition.

    To help you proactively address the questions and concerns of your staff, and to ensure that the changes are implemented effectively, we will be conducting a workshop for managers on .

    While the change team is tasked with most of the duties around planning, implementing, and communicating the change organization-wide, you and other managers are responsible for ensuring that your employees understand how the change will impact them specifically. The workshop will prepare you for your role in implementing the organizational changes in the coming weeks, and help you refine the skills and techniques necessary to engage in challenging conversations, resolve conflicts, and reduce uncertainty.

    Please confirm your attendance for the workshop. We look forward to your participation.

    Kind regards,

    Change team

    Prepare managers for the change by helping them build useful deliverables

    ODI Stakeholder Engagement Plan Template & Conflict Style Self-Assessment

    Help managers create useful deliverables that continue to provide value after the workshop is completed.

    Workshop Deliverables

    Organizational Design Implementation Stakeholder Engagement Plan Template

    • Document the areas of change resistance, detachment, uncertainty, and support for each employee.
    • Document strategies to overcome resistance, increase engagement, reduce uncertainty, and leverage their support.
    • Create action items to execute after the workshop.

    Conflict Style Self-Assessment

    • Determine how you approach conflicts.
    • Analyze the strengths and weaknesses of this approach.
    • Identify ways to adopt different conflict styles depending on the situation.

    Book a follow-up meeting with managers and determine which strategies to Start, Stop, or Continue

    3.2 1 hour

    Output

    • Stakeholder engagement templates

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Pen and paper

    Participants

    • Implementation Team
    • Managers
    1. Schedule a follow-up meeting 2–3 weeks after the workshop.
    2. Facilitate an open conversation on approaches and strategies that have been used or could be used to:
      • Overcome resistance
      • Increase engagement
      • Reduce uncertainty
      • Leverage support
    3. During the discussion, document ideas on the whiteboard.
    4. Have participants vote on whether the approaches and strategies should be started, stopped, or continued.
      • Start: actions that the team would like to begin.
      • Stop: actions that the team would like to stop.
      • Continue: actions that work for the team and should proceed.
    5. Encourage participants to review and revise their stakeholder engagement plans.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1 The Change Maze

    Break the ice with an activity that illustrates the discomfort of unexpected change, and the value of timely and instructive communication.

    3.2 Perform a Change Management Retrospective

    Leverage the collective experience of the group. Share challenges and successes from previous organizational changes and apply those lessons to the current transition.

    3.3 Create a Stakeholder Engagement Plan

    Have managers identify areas of resistance, detachment, uncertainty, and support for each employee and share strategies for overcoming resistance and leveraging support to craft an action plan for each of their employees.

    3.4 Conduct a Conflict Style Self-Assessment

    Give participants an opportunity to better understand how they approach conflicts. Administer the Conflict Style Self-Assessment to identify conflict styles and jumpstart a conversation about how to effectively resolve conflicts.

    Transition your staff to their new roles

    Outcomes of this Section:

    • Identified key responsibilities to transition
    • Identified key relationships to be built
    • Built staff individual transition plans and timing

    This section involves the following participants:

    • All IT staff members

    Key Section Insight

    In order to ensure a smooth transition, you need to identify the transition scheduled for each employee. Knowing when they will retire and assume responsibilities and aligning this with the organizational transition will be crucial.

    Phase 3b outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3b: Transition Staff to New Roles

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2-4

    Step 4.1: Build Your Transition Plans

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Review the Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template and its contents.
    • Return to the new org structure and project planning tool for information to fill in the template.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Present the template to your managers.
    • Have them fill in the template with their staff.
    • Approve the completed templates.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool
    • Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template

    Step 4.2: Finalize Your Transition Plans

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss strategies for timing the transition of your employees.
    • Determine the readiness of your departments for transitioning.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a transition readiness timeline of your departments.
    • Move your employees to their new roles.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool
    • Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template

    Use Info-Tech’s transition plan template to map out all of the changes your employees will face during reorganization

    Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template

    • Use Info-Tech’s Organizational Design Implementation Transition Plan Template to document (in consultation with your employees) all of the changes individual staff members need to go through in order to transition into their new roles.
    • It provides a holistic view of all of the changes aligned to the change planning dimensions, including:
      • Current and new job responsibilities
      • Outstanding projects
      • Documenting where the employee may be moving
      • Technology changes
      • Required training
      • New relationships that need to be made
      • Risk mitigation
    • The template is designed to be completed by managers for their direct reports.

    Customize the transition plan template for all affected staff members

    4.1 30 minutes per employee

    Output

    • Completed transition plans

    Materials

    • Individual transition plan templates (for each employee)

    Participants

    • Implementation Team
    • Managers
    1. Implementation team members should hold one-on-one meetings with the managers from the departments they represent to go through the transition plan template.
    2. Some elements of the transition plan can be completed at the initial meeting with knowledge from the implementation team and documentation from the new organizational structure:
      • Employee information (except for the planned transition date)
      • New job responsibilities
      • Logistics and technology changes
      • Relationships (recommendations can be made about beneficial relationships to form if the employee is transitioning to a new role)
    3. After the meeting, managers can continue filling in information based on their own knowledge of their employees:
      • Current job responsibilities
      • Outstanding projects
      • Training (identify gaps in the employee’s knowledge if their role is changing)
      • Risks (potential concerns or problems for the employee during the reorganization)

    Verify and complete the individual transition plans by holding one-on-one meetings with the staff

    4.2 30 minutes per employee

    Output

    • Completed transition plans

    Materials

    • Individual transition plan templates (for each employee)

    Participants

    • Managers
    • Staff (Managers’ Direct Reports)
    1. After the managers complete everything they can in the transition plan templates, they should schedule one-on-one meetings with their staff to review the completed document to ensure the information is correct.
    2. Begin the meeting by verifying the elements that require the most information from the employee:
      • Current job responsibilities
      • Outstanding projects
      • Risks (ask about any problems or concerns they may have about the reorganization)
    3. Discuss the following elements of the transition plan to get feedback:
      • Training (ask if there is any training they feel they may need to be successful at the organization)
      • Relationships (determine if there are any relationships that the employee would like to develop that you may have missed)
    4. Since this may be the first opportunity that the staff member has had to discuss their new role (if they are moving to one), review their new job title and new job responsibilities with them. If employees are prepared for their new role, they may feel more accountable for quickly adopting the reorganization.
    5. Document any questions that they may have so that they can be answered in future communications from the implementation team.
    6. After completing the template, managers will sign off on the document in the approval section.

    Validate plans with organizational change project manager and build the transition timeline

    4.3 3 hours

    Input

    • Individual transition plans
    • Organizational Design Implementation Project Planning Tool

    Output

    • Timeline outlining departmental transition readiness

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Implementation Project Manager
    • Implementation Team
    • Managers
    1. After receiving all of the completed individual transition plan templates from managers, members of the implementation team need to approve the contents of the templates (for the departments that they represent).
    2. Review the logistics and technology requirements for transition in each of the templates and align them with the completion dates of the related projects in the Project Planning Tool. These dates will serve as the earliest possible time to transition the employee. Use the latest date from the list to serve as the date that the whole department will be ready to transition.
    3. Hand the approved transition plan templates and the dates at which the departments will be ready for transitioning to the Implementation Project Manager.
    4. The Project Manager needs to verify the contents of the transition plans and approve them.
    5. On a calendar or whiteboard, list the dates that each department will be ready for transitioning.
    6. Review the master copy of the Project Planning Tool. Determine if the outstanding projects limit your ability to transition the departments (when they are ready to transition). Change the ready dates of the departments to align with the completion dates of those projects.
    7. Use these dates to determine the timeline for when you would like to transition your employees to their new roles.

    Overcoming inexperience by training managers to lead through change

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Manufacturing

    Source: CIO

    Challenge

    The IT department had not undergone a major reorganization in several years. When they last reorganized, they experienced high turnover and decreased business satisfaction with IT.

    Many of the managers were new to their roles and only one of them had been around for the earlier reorganization. They lacked experience in leading their staff through major organizational changes.

    One of the major problems they faced was addressing the concerns, fears, and resistance of their staff properly.

    Solution

    The implementation team ran a workshop for all of the managers in the department to train them on the change and how to communicate the impending changes to their staff. The workshop included information on resistance and conflict resolution.

    The workshop was conducted early on in the planning phases of the reorganization so that any rumors or gossip could be addressed properly and quickly.

    Results

    The reorganization was well accepted by the staff due to the positive reinforcement from their managers. Rumors and gossip about the reorganization were under control and the staff adopted the new organizational structure quickly.

    Engagement levels of the staff were maintained and actually improved by 5% immediately after the reorganization.

    Voluntary turnover was minimal throughout the change as opposed to the previous reorganization where they lost 10% of their staff. There was an estimated cost savings of $250,000–$300,000.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.2.1 Build Your Staff Transition Plan

    Review the contends of the staff transition plan, and using the organizational change map as a guide, build the transition schedule for one employee.

    3.2.1 Review the Transition Plan With the Transition Team

    Review and validate the results for your transition team schedule with other team members. As a group, discuss what makes this exercise difficult and any ideas for how to simplify the exercise.

    Works cited

    American Productivity and Quality Center. “Motivation Strategies.” Potentials Magazine. Dec. 2004. Web. November 2014.

    Bersin, Josh. “Time to Scrap Performance Appraisals?” Forbes Magazine. 5 June 2013. Web. 30 Oct 2013.

    Bridges, William. Managing Transitions, 3rd Ed. Philadelphia: Da Capo Press, 2009.

    Buckley, Phil. Change with Confidence – Answers to the 50 Biggest Questions that Keep Change Leaders up at Night. Canada: Jossey-Bass, 2013.

    “Change and project management.” Change First. 2014. Web. December 2009. <http://www.changefirst.com/uploads/documents/Change_and_project_management.pdf>.

    Cheese, Peter, et al. “Creating an Agile Organization.” Accenture. Oct. 2009. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Croxon, Bruce et al. “Dinner Series: Performance Management with Bruce Croxon from CBC's 'Dragon's Den.'” HRPA Toronto Chapter. Sheraton Hotel, Toronto, ON. 12 Nov. 2013. Panel discussion.

    Culbert, Samuel. “10 Reasons to Get Rid of Performance Reviews.” Huffington Post Business. 18 Dec. 2012. Web. 28 Oct. 2013. <http://www.huffingtonpost.com/samuel-culbert/performance-reviews_b_2325104.html>.

    Denning, Steve. “The Case Against Agile: Ten Perennial Management Objections.” Forbes Magazine. 17 Apr. 2012. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Works cited cont.

    “Establish A Change Management Structure.” Human Technology. Web. December 2014.

    Estis, Ryan. “Blowing up the Performance Review: Interview with Adobe’s Donna Morris.” Ryan Estis & Associates. 17 June 2013. Web. Oct. 2013. <http://ryanestis.com/adobe-interview/>.

    Ford, Edward L. “Leveraging Recognition: Noncash incentives to Improve Performance.” Workspan Magazine. Nov 2006. Web. Accessed May 12, 2014.

    Gallup, Inc. “Gallup Study: Engaged Employees Inspire Company Innovation.” Gallup Management Journal. 12 Oct. 2006. Web. 12 Jan 2012.

    Gartside, David, et al. “Trends Reshaping the Future of HR.” Accenture. 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2013.

    Grenville-Cleave, Bridget. “Change and Negative Emotions.” Positive Psychology News Daily. 2009.

    Heath, Chip, and Dan Heath. Switch: How to Change Things When Change Is Hard. Portland: Broadway Books. 2010.

    HR Commitment AB. Communicating organizational change. 2008.

    Keller, Scott, and Carolyn Aiken. “The Inconvenient Truth about Change Management.” McKinsey & Company, 2009. <http://www.mckinsey.com/en.aspx>.

    Works cited cont.

    Kotter, John. “LeadingChange: Why Transformation Efforts Fail.” Harvard Business Review. March-April 1995. <http://hbr.org>.

    Kubler-Ross, Elisabeth and David Kessler. On Grief and Grieving: Finding the Meaning of Grief Through the Five Stages of Loss. New York: Scribner. 2007.

    Lowlings, Caroline. “The Dangers of Changing without Change Management.” The Project Manager Magazine. December 2012. Web. December 2014. <http://changestory.co.za/the-dangers-of-changing-without-change-management/>.

    “Managing Change.” Innovative Edge, Inc. 2011. Web. January 2015. <http://www.getcoherent.com/managing.html>.

    Muchinsky, Paul M. Psychology Applied to Work. Florence: Thomson Wadsworth, 2006.

    Nelson, Kate and Stacy Aaron. The Change Management Pocket Guide, First Ed., USA: Change Guides LLC, 2005.

    Nguyen Huy, Quy. “In Praise of Middle Managers.” Harvard Business Review. 2001. Web. December 2014. <https://hbr.org/2001/09/in-praise-of-middle-managers/ar/1>

    “Only One-Quarter of Employers Are Sustaining Gains From Change Management Initiatives, Towers Watson Survey Finds.” Towers Watson. August 2013. Web. January 2015. <http://www.towerswatson.com/en/Press/2013/08/Only-One-Quarter-of-Employers-Are-Sustaining-Gains-From-Change-Management>.

    Shmula. “Why Transformation Efforts Fail.” Shmula.com. September 28, 2009. <http://www.shmula.com/why-transformation-efforts-fail/1510/>

    Establish Data Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}123|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $48,494 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, as well as changing and maturing user landscapes and demands for data.
    • Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organizations often miss the mark.
    • Your data governance efforts should be directly aligned to delivering measurable business value by supporting key strategic initiatives, value streams, and underlying business capabilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your organization’s value streams and their associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you may experience elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.
    • Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture.
    • Data governance must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function. It should not be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

    Impact and Result

    Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organizational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Info-Tech's approach will help you:

    • Align your data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy, and the organizational value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
    • Understand your current data governance capabilities and build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
    • Define data governance leadership, accountability, and responsibility.
    • Ensure data governance is supported by an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

    Establish Data Governance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Data Governance Research – A step-by-step document to ensure that the people handling the data are involved in the decisions surrounding data usage, data quality, business processes, and change implementation.

    Data governance is a strategic program that will help your organization control data by managing the people, processes, and information technology needed to ensure that accurate and consistent data policies exist across varying lines of the business, enabling data-driven insight. This research will provide an overview of data governance and its importance to your organization, assist in making the case and securing buy-in for data governance, identify data governance best practices and the challenges associated with them, and provide guidance on how to implement data governance best practices for a successful launch.

    • Establish Data Governance – Phases 1-3

    2. Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook – A structured tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

    This workbook will help your organization understand the business and user context by leveraging your business capability map and value streams, develop data use cases using Info-Tech's framework for building data use cases, and gauge the current state of your organization's data culture.

    • Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    3. Data Use Case Framework Template – An exemplar template to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organization’s data-related problems and opportunities.

    This business needs gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization. This template provides a framework for data requirements and a mapping methodology for creating use cases.

    • Data Use Case Framework Template

    4. Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool – A visual roadmapping tool to assist with establishing effective data governance practices.

    This tool will help your organization plan the sequence of activities, capture start dates and expected completion dates, and create a roadmap that can be effectively communicated to the organization.

    • Data Governance Initiative Planning and Roadmap Tool

    5. Business Data Catalog – A comprehensive template to help you to document the key data assets that are to be governed based on in-depth business unit interviews, data risk/value assessments, and a data flow diagram for the organization.

    Use this template to document information about key data assets such as data definition, source system, possible values, data sensitivity, data steward, and usage of the data.

    • Business Data Catalog

    6. Data Governance Program Charter Template – A program charter template to sell the importance of data governance to senior executives.

    This template will help get the backing required to get a data governance project rolling. The program charter will help communicate the project purpose, define the scope, and identify the project team, roles, and responsibilities.

    • Data Governance Program Charter Template

    7. Data Governance Policy

    This policy establishes uniform data governance standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of your organization.

    • Data Governance Policy

    8. Data Governance Exemplar – An exemplar showing how you can plan and document your data governance outputs.

    Use this exemplar to understand how to establish data governance in your organization. Follow along with the sections of the blueprint Establish Data Governance and complete the document as you progress.

    • Data Governance Exemplar
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish Data Governance

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Business Context and Value

    The Purpose

    Identify key business data assets that need to be governed.

    Create a unifying vision for the data governance program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the value of data governance and how it can help the organization better leverage its data.

    Gain knowledge of how data governance can benefit both IT and the business.

    Activities

    1.1 Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organization

    1.2 Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework

    1.3 Discuss vision and mission for data governance

    1.4 Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams

    1.5 Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities

    Outputs

    Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework

    Vision and mission for data governance

    2 Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels

    The Purpose

    Assess which data contains value and/or risk and determine metrics that will determine how valuable the data is to the organization.

    Assess where the organization currently stands in data governance initiatives.

    Determine gaps between the current and future states of the data governance program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a holistic understanding of organizational data and how it flows through business units and systems.

    Identify which data should fall under the governance umbrella.

    Determine a practical starting point for the program.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity

    2.2 Set target-state data governance capabilities

    Outputs

    Current state of data governance maturity

    Definition of target state

    3 Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping

    The Purpose

    Determine strategic initiatives and create a roadmap outlining key steps required to get the organization to start enabling data-driven insights.

    Determine timing of the initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish clear direction for the data governance program.

    Step-by-step outline of how to create effective data governance, with true business-IT collaboration.

    Activities

    3.1 Evaluate and prioritize performance gaps

    3.2 Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives

    3.3 Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping

    Outputs

    Target-state data governance initiatives

    Data domain to data governance role mapping

    4 Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

    The Purpose

    Consolidate the roadmap and other strategies to determine the plan of action from Day One.

    Create the required policies, procedures, and positions for data governance to be sustainable and effective.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized initiatives with dependencies mapped out.

    A clearly communicated plan for data governance that will have full business backing.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and prioritize next steps

    4.2 Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI

    4.3 Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support

    Outputs

    Initialized roadmap

    Initialized RACI

    Further reading

    Establish Data Governance

    Deliver measurable business value.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Establish a data governance program that brings value to your organization.

    Picture of analyst

    Data governance does not sit as an island on its own in the organization – it must align with and be driven by your enterprise governance. As you build out data governance in your organization, it’s important to keep in mind that this program is meant to be an enabling framework of oversight and accountabilities for managing, handling, and protecting your company’s data assets. It should never be perceived as bureaucratic or inhibiting to your data users. It should deliver agreed-upon models that are conducive to your organization’s operating culture, offering clarity on who can do what with the data and via what means. Data governance is the key enabler for bringing high-quality, trusted, secure, and discoverable data to the right users across your organization. Promote and drive the responsible and ethical use of data while helping to build and foster an organizational culture of data excellence.

    Crystal Singh

    Director, Research & Advisory, Data & Analytics Practice

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The amount of data within organizations is growing at an exponential rate, creating a need to adopt a formal approach to governing data. However, many organizations remain uninformed on how to effectively govern their data. Comprehensive data governance should define leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling and be supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures. This will help ensure the right data gets to the right people at the right time, using the right mechanisms.

    Common Obstacles

    Organizations are faced with challenges associated with changing data landscapes, evolving business models, industry disruptions, regulatory and compliance obligations, and changing and maturing user landscape and demand for data. Although the need for a data governance program is often evident, organizations miss the mark when their data governance efforts are not directly aligned to delivering measurable business value. Initiatives should support key strategic initiatives, as well as value streams and their underlying business capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Info-Tech’s approach to establishing and sustaining effective data governance is anchored in the strong alignment of organizational value streams and their business capabilities with key data governance dimensions and initiatives. Organizations should:

    • Align their data governance with enterprise governance, business strategy and value streams to ensure the program delivers measurable business value.
    • Understand their current data governance capabilities so as to build out a future state that is right-sized and relevant.
    • Define data leadership, accountability, and responsibility. Support these with an operating model that effectively manages change and communication and fosters a culture of data excellence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operating costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and increased business risk.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations build and sustain an effective data governance program.

    • Your organization has recognized the need to treat data as a corporate asset for generating business value and/or managing and mitigating risk.
    • This has brought data governance to the forefront and highlighted the need to build a performance-driven enterprise program for delivering quality, trusted, and readily consumable data to users.
    • An effective data governance program is one that defines leadership, accountability, and responsibility related to data use and handling. It’s supported by a well-oiled operating model and relevant policies and procedures, all of which help build and foster a culture of data excellence where the right users get access to the right data at the right time via the right mechanisms.

    As you embark on establishing data governance in your organization, it’s vital to ensure from the get-go that you define the drivers and business context for the program. Data governance should never be attempted without direction on how the program will yield measurable business value.

    “Data processing and cleanup can consume more than half of an analytics team’s time, including that of highly paid data scientists, which limits scalability and frustrates employees.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Image is a circle graph and 30% of it is coloured with the number 30% in the middle of the graph

    “The productivity of employees across the organization can suffer.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Respondents to McKinsey’s 2019 Global Data Transformation Survey reported that an average of 30% of their total enterprise time was spent on non-value-added tasks because of poor data quality and availability. – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Common obstacles

    Some of the barriers that make data governance difficult to address for many organizations include:

    • Gaps in communicating the strategic value of data and data governance to the organization. This is vital for securing senior leadership buy-in and support, which, in turn, is crucial for sustained success of the data governance program.
    • Misinterpretation or a lack of understanding about data governance, including what it means for the organization and the individual data user.
    • A perception that data governance is inhibiting or an added layer of bureaucracy or complication rather than an enabling and empowering framework for stakeholders in their use and handling of data.
    • Embarking on data governance without firmly substantiating and understanding the organizational drivers for doing so. How is data governance going to support the organization’s value streams and their various business capabilities?
    • Neglecting to define and measure success and performance. Just as in any other enterprise initiative, you have to be able to demonstrate an ROI for time, resources and funding. These metrics must demonstrate the measurable business value that data governance brings to the organization.
    • Failure to align data governance with enterprise governance.
    Image is a circle graph and 78% of it is coloured with the number 78% in the middle of the graph

    78% of companies (and 92% of top-tier companies) have a corporate initiative to become more data-driven. – Alation, 2020

    Image is a circle graph and 58% of it is coloured with the number 58% in the middle of the graph

    But despite these ambitions, there appears to be a “data culture disconnect” – 58% of leaders overestimate the current data culture of their enterprises, giving a grade higher than the one produced by the study. – Fregoni, 2020

    The strategic value of data

    Power intelligent and transformative organizational performance through leveraging data.

    Respond to industry disruptors

    Optimize the way you serve your stakeholders and customers

    Develop products and services to meet ever-evolving needs

    Manage operations and mitigate risk

    Harness the value of your data

    The journey to being data-driven

    The journey to declaring that you are a data-driven organization requires a pit stop at data enablement.

    The Data Economy

    Data Disengaged

    You have a low appetite for data and rarely use data for decision making.

    Data Enabled

    Technology, data architecture, and people and processes are optimized and supported by data governance.

    Data Driven

    You are differentiating and competing on data and analytics; described as a “data first” organization. You’re collaborating through data. Data is an asset.

    Data governance is essential for any organization that makes decisions about how it uses its data.

    Data governance is an enabling framework of decision rights, responsibilities, and accountabilities for data assets across the enterprise.

    Data governance is:

    • Executed according to agreed-upon models that describe who can take what actions with what information, when, and using what methods (Olavsrud, 2021).
    • True business-IT collaboration that will lead to increased consistency and confidence in data to support decision making. This, in turn, helps fuel innovation and growth.

    If done correctly, data governance is not:

    • An annoying, finger-waving roadblock in the way of getting things done.
    • Meant to solve all data-related business or IT problems in an organization.
    • An inhibitor or impediment to using and sharing data.

    Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

    An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    Create impactful data governance by embedding it within enterprise governance

    A model is depicted to show the relationship between enterprise governance and data governance.

    Organizational drivers for data governance

    Data governance personas:

    Conformance: Establishing data governance to meet regulations and compliance requirements.

    Performance: Establishing data governance to fuel data-driven decision making for driving business value and managing and mitigating business risk.

    Two images are depicted that show the difference between conformance and performance.

    Data Governance is not a one-person show

    • Data governance needs a leader and a home. Define who is going to be leading, driving, and steering data governance in your organization.
    • Senior executive leaders play a crucial role in championing and bringing visibility to the value of data and data governance. This is vital for building and fostering a culture of data excellence.
    • Effective data governance comes with business and IT alignment, collaboration, and formally defined roles around data leadership, ownership, and stewardship.
    Four circles are depicted. There is one person in the circle on the left and is labelled: Data Governance Leadership. The circle beside it has two people in it and labelled: Organizational Champions. The circle beside it has three people in it and labelled: Data Owners, Stewards & Custodians. The last circle has four people in it and labelled: The Organization & Data Storytellers.

    Traditional data governance organizational structure

    A traditional structure includes committees and roles that span across strategic, tactical, and operational duties. There is no one-size-fits-all data governance structure. However, most organizations follow a similar pattern when establishing committees, councils, and cross-functional groups. Most organizations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program, such as the focus of the data governance project and the maturity and size of the organization.

    A triangular model is depicted and is split into three tiers to show the traditional data governance organizational structure.

    A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data.

    “Albert Einstein is said to have remarked, ‘The world cannot be changed without changing our thinking.’ What is clear is that the greatest barrier to data success today is business culture, not lagging technology. “– Randy Bean, 2020

    What does it look like?

    • Everybody knows the data.
    • Everybody trusts the data.
    • Everybody talks about the data.

    “It is not enough for companies to embrace modern data architectures, agile methodologies, and integrated business-data teams, or to establish centers of excellence to accelerate data initiatives, when only about 1 in 4 executives reported that their organization has successfully forged a data culture.”– Randy Bean, 2020

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture

    • In a data-driven culture, decisions are made based on data evidence, not on gut instinct.
    • Data often has untapped potential. A data-driven culture builds tools and skills, builds users’ trust in the condition and sources of data, and raises the data skills and understanding among their people on the front lines.
    • Building a data culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money. This investment will not achieve the transformation you want without data literacy at the grassroots level.

    Data-driven culture = “data matters to our company”

    Despite investments in data initiative, organizations are carrying high levels of data debt

    Data debt is “the accumulated cost that is associated with the sub-optimal governance of data assets in an enterprise, like technical debt.”

    Data debt is a problem for 78% of organizations.

    40% of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.

    66% of organizations say a backlog of data debt is impacting new data management initiatives.

    33% of organizations are not able to get value from a new system or technology investment.

    30% of organizations are unable to become data-driven.

    Source: Experian, 2020

    Absent or sub-optimal data governance leads to data debt

    Only 3% of companies’ data meets basic quality standards. (Source: Nagle, et al., 2017)

    Organizations suspect 28% of their customer and prospect data is inaccurate in some way. (Source: Experian, 2020)

    Only 51% of organizations consider the current state of their CRM or ERP data to be clean, allowing them to fully leverage it. (Source: Experian, 2020)

    35% of organizations say they’re not able to see a ROI for data management initiatives. (Source: Experian, 2020)

    Embrace the technology

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

    • Data catalog
    • Business data glossary
    • Data lineage
    • Metadata management

    While data governance tools and technologies are no panacea, leverage their automated and AI-enabled capabilities to augment your data governance program.

    Logos of data governance tools and technology.

    Measure success to demonstrate tangible business value

    Put data governance into the context of the business:

    • Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.
    • Leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with senior leadership.

    Don’t let measurement be an afterthought:

    Start substantiating early on how you are going to measure success as your data governance program evolves.

    Build a right-sized roadmap

    Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right-sized to deliver value in your organization.

    Key considerations:

    • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
    • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
    • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

    Sample milestones:

    Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

    Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

    Data Governance Charter and Policies

    Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

    Use Case Build and Prioritization

    Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.

    Business Data Glossary

    Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.

    Tools & Technology

    Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

    Key takeaways for effective business-driven data governance

    Data governance leadership and sponsorship is key.

    Ensure strategic business alignment.

    Build and foster a culture of data excellence.

    Evolve along the data journey.

    Make data governance an enabler, not a hindrance.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the impact of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

    Insight 1

    Data governance should not sit as an island in your organization. It must continuously align with the organization’s enterprise governance function. It shouldn’t be perceived as a pet project of IT, but rather as an enterprise-wide, business-driven initiative.

    Insight 2

    Ensure your data governance program delivers measurable business value by aligning the associated data governance initiatives with the business architecture. Leverage the measures of success or KPIs of the underlying business capabilities to demonstrate the value data governance has yielded for the organization.

    Insight 3

    Data governance remains the foundation of all forms of reporting and analytics. Advanced capabilities such as AI and machine learning require effectively governed data to fuel their success.

    Tactical insight

    Tailor your data literacy program to meet your organization’s needs, filling your range of knowledge gaps and catering to your different levels of stakeholders. When it comes to rolling out a data literacy program, there is no one-size-fits-all solution. Your data literacy program is intended to fill the knowledge gaps about data, as they exist in your organization. It should be targeted across the board – from your executive leadership and management through to the subject matter experts across different lines of the business in your organization.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for establishing data governance

    1. Build Business and User Context 2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities 3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
    Phase Steps
    1. Substantiate Business Drivers
    2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
    1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
    2. Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture
    1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
    Phase Outcomes
    • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
    • A business capability map for your organization
    • Categorization of your organization’s key capabilities
    • A strategy map tied to data governance
    • High-value use cases for data governance
    • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
    • An understanding your organization’s current data culture
    • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook data-verified=

    Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    Use the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook as you plan, build, roll-out, and scale data governance in your organization.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Use Case Framework Template

    Data Use Case Framework Template

    This template takes you through a business needs gathering activity to highlight and create relevant use cases around the organization’s data-related problems and opportunities.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Business Data Glossary data-verified=

    Business Data Glossary

    Use this template to document the key data assets that are to be governed and create a data flow diagram for your organization.

    Screenshot of Info-Tech's Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard data-verified=

    Data Culture Diagnostic and Scorecard

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand how your organization scores across 10 areas relating to data culture.

    Key deliverable:

    Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Leverage this blueprint’s approach to ensure your data governance initiatives align and support your key value streams and their business capabilities.

    • Aligning your data governance program and its initiatives to your organization’s business capabilities is vital for tracing and demonstrating measurable business value for the program.
    • This alignment of data governance with value streams and business capabilities enables you to use business-defined KPIs and demonstrate tangible value.
    Screenshot from this blueprint on the Measurable Business Value

    In phases 1 and 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish the business context, define your business drivers and KPIs, and understand your current data governance capabilities and strengths.

    In phase 3, we will help you develop a plan and a roadmap for addressing any gaps and improving the relevant data governance capabilities so that data is well positioned to deliver on those defined business metrics.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team, has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keeps us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Establish Data Governance project overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    1. Build Business and User context2. Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities3. Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan
    Best-Practice Toolkit
    1. Substantiate Business Drivers
    2. Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance
    1. Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
    2. Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture
    1. Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan
    Guided Implementation
    • Call 1
    • Call 2
    • Call 3
    • Call 4
    • Call 5
    • Call 6
    • Call 7
    • Call 8
    • Call 9
    Phase Outcomes
    • Your organization’s business capabilities and value streams
    • A business capability map for your organization
    • Categorization of your organization’s key capabilities
    • A strategy map tied to data governance
    • High-value use cases for data governance
    • An understanding of the core components of an effective data governance program
    • An understanding your organization’s current data culture
    • A data governance roadmap and target-state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    An outline of what guided implementation looks like.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information. workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Establish Business Context and Value Understand Current Data Governance Capabilities and Plot Target-State Levels Build Data Domain to Data Governance Role Mapping Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State
    Activities
    • Establish business context, value, and scope of data governance at the organization
    • Introduction to Info-Tech’s data governance framework
    • Discuss vision and mission for data governance
    • Understand your business architecture, including your business capability map and value streams
    • Build use cases aligned to core business capabilities
    • Understand your current data governance capabilities and maturity
    • Set target state data governance capabilities
    • Evaluate and prioritize performance gaps
    • Develop and consolidate data governance target-state initiatives
    • Define the role of data governance: data domain to data governance role mapping
    • Identify and prioritize next steps
    • Define roles and responsibilities and complete a high-level RACI
    • Wrap-up and discuss next steps and post-workshop support
    Deliverables
    1. Sample use cases (tied to the business capability map) and a repeatable use case framework
    2. Vision and mission for data governance
    1. Current state of data governance maturity
    2. Definition of target state
    1. Target-state data governance initiatives
    2. Data domain to data governance role mapping
    1. Initialized roadmap
    2. Initialized RACI

    Phase 1

    Build Business and User Context

    Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 1 is highlighted.

    “When business users are invited to participate in the conversation around data with data users and IT, it adds a fundamental dimension — business context. Without a real understanding of how data ties back to the business, the value of analysis and insights can get lost.” – Jason Lim, Alation

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify Your Business Capabilities
    • Define your Organization’s Key Business Capabilities
    • Develop a Strategy Map that Aligns Business Capabilities to Your Strategic Focus

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Governance Leader/Data Leader (CDO)
    • Senior Business Leaders
    • Business SMEs
    • Data Leadership, Data Owners, Data Stewards and Custodians

    Step 1.1

    Substantiate Business Drivers

    Activities

    1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

    1.1.2 Categorize Your Organization’s Key Business Capabilities

    1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Leverage your organization’s existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map, guided by info-Tech’s approach
    • Determine which business capabilities are considered high priority by your organization
    • Map your organization’s strategic objectives to value streams and capabilities to communicate how objectives are realized with the support of data

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Info-Tech Insight

    Gaining a sound understanding of your business architecture (value streams and business capabilities) is a critical foundation for establishing and sustaining a data governance program that delivers measurable business value.

    1.1.1 Identify Your Business Capabilities

    Confirm your organization's existing business capability map or initiate the formulation of a business capability map:

    • If you have an existing business capability map, meet with the relevant business owners/stakeholders to confirm that the content is accurate and up to date. Confirm the value streams (how your organization creates and captures value) and their business capabilities are reflective of the organization’s current business environment.
    • If you do not have an existing business capability map, follow this activity to initiate the formulation of a map (value streams and related business capabilities):
      1. Define the organization’s value streams. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define how your organization creates and captures value.
      2. Define the relevant business capabilities. Meet with senior leadership and other key business stakeholders to define the business capabilities.

    Note: A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities are business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Input

    • List of confirmed value streams and their related business capabilities

    Output

    • Business capability map with value streams for your organization

    Materials

    • Your existing business capability map or the template provided in the Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook accompanying this blueprint

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

    Define or validate the organization’s value streams

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. These value realization activities, in turn, depend on data.

    If the organization does not have a business architecture function to conduct and guide Activity 1.1.1, you can leverage the following approach:

    • Meet with key stakeholders regarding this topic, then discuss and document your findings.
    • When trying to identify the right stakeholders, consider: Who are the decision makers and key influencers? Who will impact this piece of business architecture related work? Who has the relevant skills, competencies, experience, and knowledge about the organization?
    • Engage with these stakeholders to define and validate how the organization creates value.
    • Consider:
      • Who are your main stakeholders? This will depend on the industry in which you operate. For example, customers, residents, citizens, constituents, students, patients.
      • What are your stakeholders looking to accomplish?
      • How does your organization’s products and/or services help them accomplish that?
      • What are the benefits your organization delivers to them and how does your organization deliver those benefits?
      • How do your stakeholders receive those benefits?

    Align data governance to the organization's value realization activities.

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face the possibilities of elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, negative impact to reputation and brand, and/or increased exposure to business risk.

    Example of value streams – Retail Banking

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Retail Banking

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for retail banking.

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

    Example of value streams – Higher Education

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Higher Education

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for higher education

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

    Example of value streams – Local Government

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Local Government

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for local government

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

    Example of value streams – Manufacturing

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Manufacturing

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    Model example of value streams for manufacturing

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

    Example of value streams – Retail

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities.

    Example value stream descriptions for: Retail

    Model example of value streams for retail

    Value streams enable the organization to create or capture value in the market in which it operates by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    For this value stream, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    Define the organization’s business capabilities in a business capability map

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation. Business capabilities represent stable business functions and typically will have a defined business outcome.

    Business capabilities can be thought of as business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.”

    If your organization doesn’t already have a business capability map, you can leverage the following approach to build one. This initiative requires a good understanding of the business. By working with the right stakeholders, you can develop a business capability map that speaks a common language and accurately depicts your business.

    Working with the stakeholders as described above:

    • Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them.
    • Consider: What is the objective of your value stream? (This can highlight which capabilities support which value stream.)
    • As you initiate your engagement with your stakeholders, don’t start a blank page. Leverage the examples on the next slides as a starting point for your business capability map.
    • When using these examples, consider: What are the activities that make up your particular business? Keep the ones that apply to your organization, remove the ones that don’t, and add any needed.

    Align data governance to the organization's value realization activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

    Example business capability map – Retail Banking

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Retail Banking

    Model example business capability map for retail banking

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail Banking.

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Model example business capability map for higher education

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Higher Education.

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Model example business capability map for local government

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Local Government.

    Example business capability map – Manufacturing

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Manufacturing

    Model example business capability map for manufacturing

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Manufacturing.

    Example business capability map - Retail

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and hence represents a view of what your data governance program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Leverage your business capability map verification session with these key stakeholders as a prime opportunity to share and explain the role of data and data governance in supporting the very value realization capabilities under discussion. This will help to build awareness and visibility of the data governance program.

    Example business capability map for: Retail

    Model example business capability map for retail

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    1.1.2 Categorize Your Organization’s Key Capabilities

    Determine which capabilities are considered high priority in your organization.

    1. Categorize or heatmap the organization’s key capabilities. Consult with senior and other key business stakeholders to categorize and prioritize the business’ capabilities. This will aid in ensuring your data governance future state planning is aligned with the mandate of the business. One approach to prioritizing capabilities with business stakeholders is to examine them through the lens of cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, and/or by high value/high risk.
    2. Identify cost advantage creators. Focus on capabilities that drive a cost advantage for your organization. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize programs that support them.
    3. Identify competitive advantage differentiators. Focus on capabilities that give your organization an edge over rivals or other players in your industry.

    This categorization/prioritization exercise helps highlight prime areas of opportunity for building use cases, determining prioritization, and the overall optimization of data and data governance.

    Input

    • Strategic insight from senior business stakeholders on the business capabilities that drive value for the organization

    Output

    • Business capabilities categorized and prioritized (e.g. cost advantage creators, competitive advantage differentiators, high value/high risk)

    Materials

    • Your existing business capability map or the business capability map derived in the previous activity

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    For more information, refer to Info-Tech’s Document Your Business Architecture.

    Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

    This exercise is useful in ensuring the data governance program is focused and aligned to support the priorities and direction of the business.

    • Depending on the mandate from the business, priority may be on developing cost advantage. Hence the capabilities that deliver efficiency gains are the ones considered to be cost advantage creators.
    • The business’ priority may be on maintaining or gaining a competitive advantage over its industry counterparts. Differentiation might be achieved in delivering unique or enhanced products, services, and/or experiences, and the focus will tend to be on the capabilities that are more end-stakeholder-facing (e.g. customer-, student-, patient,- and/or constituent-facing). These are the organization’s competitive advantage creators.

    Example: Retail

    Example of business capabilities categorization or heatmapping – Retail

    For this business capability map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    1.1.3 Develop a Strategy Map Tied to Data Governance

    Identify the strategic objectives for the business. Knowing the key strategic objectives will drive business-data governance alignment. It’s important to make sure the right strategic objectives of the organization have been identified and are well understood.

    1. Meet with senior business leaders and other relevant stakeholders to help identify and document the key strategic objectives for the business.
    2. Leverage their knowledge of the organization’s business strategy and strategic priorities to visually represent how these map to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data and data governance needs and initiatives. Tip: Your map is one way to visually communicate and link the business strategy to other levels of the organization.
    3. Confirm the strategy mapping with other relevant stakeholders.

    Guide to creating your map: Starting with strategic objectives, map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance to initiatives that support those capabilities. This is one approach to help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

    Input

    • Strategic objectives as outlined by the organization’s business strategy and confirmed by senior leaders

    Output

    • A strategy map that maps your organizational strategic objectives to value streams, business capabilities, and, ultimately, to data program

    Materials

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    Download Info-Tech’s Data Governance Planning and Roadmapping Workbook

    Example of a strategy map tied to data governance

    • Strategic objectives are the outcomes that the organization is looking to achieve.
    • Value streams enable an organization to create and capture value in the market through interconnected activities that support strategic objectives.
    • Business capabilities define what a business does to enable value creation in value streams.
    • Data capabilities and initiatives are descriptions of action items on the data and data governance roadmap and which will enable one or multiple business capabilities in its desired target state.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Start with the strategic objectives, then map the value streams that will ultimately drive them. Next, link the key capabilities that enable each value stream. Then map the data and data governance initiatives that support those capabilities. This process will help you prioritize the data initiatives that deliver the most value to the organization.

    Example: Retail

    Example of a strategy map tied to data governance for retail

    For this strategy map, download Info-Tech’s Industry Reference Architecture for Retail.

    Step 1.2

    Build High-Value Use Cases for Data Governance

    Activities

    1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Leveraging your categorized business capability map to conduct deep-dive sessions with key business stakeholders for creating high-value uses cases
    • Discussing current challenges, risks, and opportunities associated with the use of data across the lines of business
    • Exploring which other business capabilities, stakeholder groups, and business units will be impacted

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relevant use cases that articulate the data-related challenges, needs, or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed ,will deliver value to the organization

    Info-Tech Tip

    One of the most important aspects when building use cases is to ensure you include KPIs or measures of success. You have to be able to demonstrate how the use case ties back to the organizational priorities or delivers measurable business value. Leverage the KPIs and success factors of the business capabilities tied to each particular use case.

    1.2.1 Build High-Value Use Cases

    This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    1. Bring together key business stakeholders (data owner, stewards, SMEs) from a particular line of business as well as the relevant data custodian(s) to build cases for their units. Leverage the business capability map you created for facilitating this act.
    2. Leverage Info-Tech’s framework for data requirements and methodology for creating use cases, as outlined in the Data Use Case Framework Template and seen on the next slide.
    3. Have the stakeholders move through each breakout session outlined in the Use Case Worksheet. Use flip charts or a whiteboard to brainstorm and document their thoughts.
    4. Debrief and document results in the Data Use Case Framework Template
    5. Repeat this exercise with as many lines of the business as possible, leveraging your business capability map to guide your progress and align with business value.

    Tip: Don’t conclude these use case discussions without substantiating what measures of success will be used to demonstrate the business value of the effort to produce the desired future state, as relevant to each particular use case.

    Input

    • Value streams and business capabilities as defined by business leaders
    • Business stakeholders’ subject area expertise
    • Data custodian systems, integration, and data knowledge

    Output

    • Use cases that articulate data-related challenges, needs or opportunities that are tied to defined business capabilities and hence if addressed will deliver measurable value to the organization.

    Materials

    • Your business capability map from activity 1.1.1
    • Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template
    • Whiteboard or flip charts (or shared screen if working remotely)
    • Markers/pens

    Participants

    • Key business stakeholders
    • Data stewards and business SMEs
    • Data custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group

    Download Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

    Info-Tech’s Framework for Building Use Cases

    Objective: This business needs-gathering activity will highlight and create relevant use cases around data-related problems or opportunities that are clear and contained and, if addressed, will deliver value to the organization.

    Leveraging your business capability map, build use cases that align with the organization’s key business capabilities.

    Consider:

    • Is the business capability a cost advantage creator or an industry differentiator?
    • Is the business capability currently underserved by data?
    • Does this need to be addressed? If so, is this risk- or value-driven?

    Info-Tech’s Data Requirements and Mapping Methodology for Creating Use Cases

    1. What business capability (or capabilities) is this use case tied to for your business area(s)?
    2. What are your data-related challenges in performing this today?
    3. What are the steps in this process/activity today?
    4. What are the applications/systems used at each step today?
    5. What data domains are involved, created, used, and/or transformed at each step today?
    6. What does an ideal or improved state look like?
    7. What other business units, business capabilities, activities, and/or processes will be impacted or improved if this issue was solved?
    8. Who are the stakeholders impacted by these changes? Who needs to be consulted?
    9. What are the risks to the organization (business capability, revenue, reputation, customer loyalty, etc.) if this is not addressed?
    10. What compliance, regulatory, and/or policy concerns do we need to consider in any solution?
    11. What measures of success or change should we use to prove the value of the effort (such as KPIs, ROI)? What is the measurable business value of doing this?

    The resulting use cases are to be prioritized and leveraged for informing the business case and the data governance capabilities optimization plan.

    Taken from Info-Tech’s Data Use Case Framework Template

    Phase 2

    Understand Your Current Data Governance Capabilities

    Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 2 is highlighted.

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Understand the Key Components of Data Governance
    • Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Leadership
    • Data Ownership & Stewardship
    • Policies & Procedures
    • Data Literacy & Culture
    • Operating Model
    • Data Management
    • Data Privacy & Security
    • Enterprise Projects & Services

    Step 2.1

    Understand the Key Components of Data Governance

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Understanding the core components of an effective data governance program and determining your organization’s current capabilities in these areas:
      • Data Leadership
      • Data Ownership & Stewardship
      • Policies & Procedures
      • Data Literacy & Culture
      • Operating Model
      • Data Management
      • Data Privacy & Security
      • Enterprise Projects & Services

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding the core components of an effective data governance program
    • An understanding your organization’s current data governance capabilities

    Review: Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

    An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    Key components of data governance

    A well-defined data governance program will deliver:

    • Defined accountability and responsibility for data.
    • Improved knowledge and common understanding of the organization’s data assets.
    • Elevated trust and confidence in traceable data.
    • Improved data ROI and reduced data debt.
    • An enabling framework for supporting the ethical use and handling of data.
    • A foundation for building and fostering a data-driven and data-literate organizational culture.

    The key components of establishing sustainable enterprise data governance, taken from Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework:

    • Data Leadership
    • Data Ownership & Stewardship
    • Operating Model
    • Policies & Procedures
    • Data Literacy & Culture
    • Data Management
    • Data Privacy & Security
    • Enterprise Projects & Services

    Data Leadership

    • Data governance needs a dedicated head or leader to steer the organization’s data governance program.
    • For organizations that do have a chief data officer (CDO), their office is the ideal and effective home for data governance.
    • Heads of data governance also have titles such as director of data governance, director of data quality, and director of analytics.
    • The head of your data governance program works with all stakeholders and partners to ensure there is continuous enterprise governance alignment and oversight and to drive the program’s direction.
    • While key stakeholders from the business and IT will play vital data governance roles, the head of data governance steers the various components, stakeholders, and initiatives, and provides oversight of the overall program.
    • Vital data governance roles include: data owners, data stewards, data custodians, data governance steering committee (or your organization’s equivalent), and any data governance working group(s).

    The role of the CDO: the voice of data

    The office of the chief data officer (CDO):

    • Has a cross-organizational vision and strategy for data.
    • Owns and drives the data strategy; ensures it supports the overall organizational strategic direction and business goals.
    • Leads the organizational data initiatives, including data governance
    • Is accountable for the policy, strategy, data standards, and data literacy necessary for the organization to operate effectively.
    • Educates users and leaders about what it means to be “data-driven.”
    • Builds and fosters a culture of data excellence.

    “Compared to most of their C-suite colleagues, the CDO is faced with a unique set of problems. The role is still being defined. The chief data officer is bringing a new dimension and focus to the organization: ‘data.’ ”

    – Carruthers and Jackson, 2020

    Who does the CDO report to?

    Example reporting structure.
    • The CDO should be a true C- level executive.
    • Where the organization places the CDO role in the structure sends an important signal to the business about how much it values data.

    “The title matters. In my opinion, you can’t have a CDO without executive authority. Otherwise no one will listen.”

    – Anonymous European CDO

    “The reporting structure depends on who’s the ‘glue’ that ties together all these uniquely skilled individuals.”

    – John Kemp, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

    Data Ownership & Stewardship

    Who are best suited to be data owners?

    • Wherever they may sit in your organization, data owners will typically have the highest stake in that data.
    • Data owners need to be suitably senior and have the necessary decision-making power.
    • They have the highest interest in the related business data domain, whether they are the head of a business unit or the head of a line of business that produces data or consumes data (or both).
    • If they are neither of these, it’s unlikely they will have the interest in the data (in terms of its quality, protection, ethical use, and handling, for instance) necessary to undertake and adopt the role effectively.

    Data owners are typically senior business leaders with the following characteristics:

    • Positioned to accept accountability for their data domain.
    • Hold authority and influence to affect change, including across business processes and systems, needed to improve data quality, use, handling, integration, etc.
    • Have access to a budget and resources for data initiatives such as resolving data quality issues, data cleansing initiatives, business data catalog build, related tools and technology, policy management, etc.
    • Hold the influence needed to drive change in behavior and culture.
    • Act as ambassadors of data and its value as an organizational strategic asset.

    Right-size your data governance organizational structure

    • Most organizations strive to identify roles and responsibilities at a strategic and operational level. Several factors will influence the structure of the program such as the focus of the data governance project as well as the maturity and size of the organization.
    • Your data governance structure has to work for your organization, and it has to evolve as the organization evolves.
    • Formulate your blend of data governance roles, committees, councils, and cross-functional groups, that make sense for your organization.
    • Your data governance organizational structure should not add complexity or bureaucracy to your organization’s data landscape; it should support and enable your principle of treating data as an asset.

    There is no one-size-fits-all data governance organizational structure.

    Example of a Data Governance Organizational Structure

    Critical roles and responsibilities for data governance

    Data Governance Working Groups

    Data governance working groups:

    • Are cross-functional teams
    • Deliver on data governance projects, initiatives, and ad hoc review committees.

    Data Stewards

    Traditionally, data stewards:

    • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to adherence to standards/procedures, monitoring data quality, raising issues identified, etc.
    • Are responsible for managing access, quality, escalating issues, etc.

    Data Custodians

    • Traditionally, data custodians:
    • Serve on an operational level addressing issues related to data and database administration.
    • Support the management of access, data quality, escalating issues, etc.
    • Are SMEs from IT and database administration.

    Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

    Enabling business capabilities with data governance role definitions

    Example: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Operating Model

    Your operating model is the key to designing and operationalizing a form of data governance that delivers measurable business value to your organization.

    “Generate excitement for data: When people are excited and committed to the vision of data enablement, they’re more likely to help ensure that data is high quality and safe.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Operating Model

    Defining your data governance operating model will help create a well-oiled program that sustainably delivers value to the organization and manages risks while building and fostering a culture of data excellence along the way. Some organizations are able to establish a formal data governance office, whether independent or attached to the office of the chief data officer. Regardless of how you are organized, data governance requires a home, a leader, and an operating model to ensure its sustainability and evolution.

    Examples of focus areas for your operating model:

    • Delivery: While there are core tenets to every data governance program, there is a level of variability in the implementation of data governance programs across organizations, sectors, and industries. Every organization has its own particular drivers and mandates, so the level and rigor applied will also vary.
    • The key is to determine what style will work best in your organization, taking into consideration your organizational culture, executive leadership support (present and ongoing), catalysts such as other enterprise-wide transformative and modernization initiatives, and/or regulatory and compliances drivers.

    • Communication: Communication is vital across all levels and stakeholder groups. For instance, there needs to be communication from the data governance office up to senior leadership, as well as communication within the data governance organization, which is typically made up of the data governance steering committee, data governance council, executive sponsor/champion, data stewards, and data custodians and working groups.
    • Furthermore, communication with the wider organization of data producers, users, and consumers is one of the core elements of the overall data governance communications plan.

    Communication is vital for ensuring acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users as well as for sharing success stories of the program.

    Operating Model

    Tie the value of data governance and its initiatives back to the business capabilities that are enabled.

    “Leading organizations invest in change management to build data supporters and convert the skeptics. This can be the most difficult part of the program, as it requires motivating employees to use data and encouraging producers to share it (and ideally improve its quality at the source)[.]” – Petzold, et al., 2020

    Operating Model

    Examples of focus areas for your operating model (continued):

    • Change management and issue resolution: Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organizational disruption, with governance recommendations and future state requiring potentially significant business change. This may include a redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units, which will require tweaking the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data.
    • Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the steps necessary to adapt and reduce potential confrontation. By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

      Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

    • Performance measuring, monitoring and reporting: Measuring and reporting on performance, successes, and realization of tangible business value are a must for sustaining, growing, and scaling your data governance program.
    • Aligning your data governance to the organization's value realization activities enables you to leverage the KPIs of those business capabilities to demonstrate tangible and measurable value. Use terms and language that will resonate with your senior business leadership.

    Info-Tech Tip:

    Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

    Policies, Procedures & Standards

    “Data standards are the rules by which data are described and recorded. In order to share, exchange, and understand data, we must standardize the format as well as the meaning.” – U.S. Geological Survey

    Policies, Procedures & Standards

    • When defining, updating, or refreshing your data policies, procedures, and standards, ensure they are relevant, serve a purpose, and/or support the use of data in the organization.
    • Avoid the common pitfall of building out a host of policies, procedures, and standards that are never used or followed by users and therefore don’t bring value or serve to mitigate risk for the organization.
    • Data policies can be thought of as formal statements and are typically created, approved, and updated by the organization’s data decision-making body (such as a data governance steering committee).
    • Data standards and procedures function as actions, or rules, that support the policies and their statements.
    • Standards and procedures are designed to standardize the processes during the overall data lifecycle. Procedures are instructions to achieve the objectives of the policies. The procedures are iterative and will be updated with approval from your data governance committee as needed.
    • Your organization’s data policies, standards, and procedures should not bog down or inhibit users; rather, they should enable confident data use and handling across the overall data lifecycle. They should support more effective and seamless data capture, integration, aggregation, sharing, and retention of data in the organization.

    Examples of data policies:

    • Data Classification Policy
    • Data Retention Policy
    • Data Entry Policy
    • Data Backup Policy
    • Data Provenance Policy
    • Data Management Policy

    Data Domain Documentation

    Select the correct granularity for your business need

    Diagram of data domain documentation
    Sources: Dataversity; Atlan; Analytics8

    Data Domain Documentation Examples

    Data Domain Documentation Examples

    Data Culture

    “Organizational culture can accelerate the application of analytics, amplify its power, and steer companies away from risky outcomes.” – Petzold, et al., 2020

    A healthy data culture is key to amplifying the power of your data and to building and sustaining an effective data governance program.

    What does a healthy data culture look like?

    • Everybody knows the data.
    • Everybody trusts the data.
    • Everybody talks about the data.

    Building a culture of data excellence.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to understand your organization’s culture around data.

    Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for more information on the Data Culture Diagnostic

    Cultivating a data-driven culture is not easy

    “People are at the heart of every culture, and one of the biggest challenges to creating a data culture is bringing everyone into the fold.” – Lim, Alation

    It cannot be purchased or manufactured,

    It must be nurtured and developed,

    And it must evolve as the business, user, and data landscapes evolve.

    “Companies that have succeeded in their data-driven efforts understand that forging a data culture is a relentless pursuit, and magic bullets and bromides do not deliver results.” – Randy Bean, 2020

    Hallmarks of a data-driven culture

    There is a trusted, single source of data the whole company can draw from.

    There’s a business glossary and data catalog and users know what the data fields mean.

    Users have access to data and analytics tools. Employees can leverage data immediately to resolve a situation, perform an activity, or make a decision – including frontline workers.

    Data literacy, the ability to collect, manage, evaluate, and apply data in a critical manner, is high.

    Data is used for decision making. The company encourages decisions based on objective data and the intelligent application of it.

    A data-driven culture requires a number of elements:

    • High-quality data
    • Broad access and data literacy
    • Data-driven decision-making processes
    • Effective communication

    Data Literacy

    Data literacy is an essential part of a data-driven culture.

    • Building a data-driven culture takes an ongoing investment of time, effort, and money.
    • This investment will not realize its full return without building up the organization’s data literacy.
    • Data literacy is about filling data knowledge gaps across all levels of the organization.
    • It’s about ensuring all users – senior leadership right through to core users – are equipped with appropriate levels of training, skills, understanding, and awareness around the organization’s data and the use of associated tools and technologies. Data literacy ensures users have the data they need and they know how to interpret and leverage it.
    • Data literacy drives the appetite, demand, and consumption for data.
    • A data-literate culture is one where the users feel confident and skilled in their use of data, leveraging it for making informed or evidence-based decisions and generating insights for the organization.

    Data Management

    • Data governance serves as an enabler to all of the core components that make up data management:
      • Data quality management
      • Data architecture management
      • Data platform
      • Data integration
      • Data operations management
      • Data risk management
      • Reference and master data management (MDM)
      • Document and content management
      • Metadata management
      • Business intelligence (BI), reporting, analytics and advanced analytics, artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning (ML)
    • Key tools such as the business data glossary and data catalog are vital for operationalizing data governance and in supporting data management disciplines such as data quality management, metadata management, and MDM as well as BI, reporting, and analytics.

    Enterprise Projects & Services

    • Data governance serves as an enabler to enterprise projects and services that require, use, share, sell, and/or rely on data for their viability and, ultimately, their success.
    • Folding or embedding data governance into the organization’s project management function or project management office (PMO) serves to ensure that, for any initiative, suitable consideration is given to how data is treated.
    • This may include defining parameters, following standards and procedures around bringing in new sources of data, integrating that data into the organization’s data ecosystem, using and sharing that data, and retaining that data post-project completion.
    • The data governance function helps to identify and manage any ethical issues, whether at the start of the project and/or throughout.
    • It provides a foundation for asking relevant questions as it relates to the use or incorporation of data in delivering the specific project or service. Do we know where the data obtained from? Do we have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used? What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with our intended use of that data? Are we positioned to mitigate those risks?
    • Mature data governance creates organizations where the above considerations around data management and the ethical use and handling of data is routinely implemented across the business and in the rollout and delivery of projects and services.

    Data Privacy & Security

    • Data governance supports the organization’s data privacy and security functions.
    • Key tools include the data classification policy and standards and defined roles around data ownership and data stewardship. These are vital for operationalizing data governance and supporting data privacy, security, and the ethical use and handling of data.
    • While some organizations may have a dedicated data security and privacy group, data governance provides an added level of oversight in this regard.
    • Some of the typical checks and balances include ensuring:
      • There are policies and procedures in place to restrict and monitor staff’s access to data (one common way this is done is according to job descriptions and responsibilities) and that these comply with relevant laws and regulations.
      • There’s a data classification scheme in place where data has been classified on a hierarchy of sensitivity (e.g. top secret, confidential, internal, limited, public).
      • The organization has a comprehensive data security framework, including administrative, physical, and technical procedures for addressing data security issues (e.g. password management and regular training).
      • Risk assessments are conducted, including an evaluation of risks and vulnerabilities related to intentional and unintentional misuse of data.
      • Policies and procedures are in place to mitigate the risks associated with incidents such as data breaches.
      • The organization regularly audits and monitors its data security.

    Ethical Use & Handling of Data

    Data governance will support your organization’s ethical use and handling of data by facilitating definition around important factors, such as:

    • What are the various data assets in the organization and what purpose(s) can they be used for? Are there any limitations?
    • Who is the related data owner? Who holds accountability for that data? Who will be answerable?
    • Where was the data obtained from? What is the intended use of that data? Do you have rights to use that data? Are there legislations, policies, or regulations that guide or dictate how that data can be used?
    • What are the positive effects, negative impacts, and/or risks associated with the use of that data?

    Ethical Use & Handling of Data

    • Data governance serves as an enabler to the ethical use and handling of an organization’s data.
    • The Open Data Institute (ODI) defines data ethics as: “A branch of ethics that evaluates data practices with the potential to adversely impact on people and society – in data collection, sharing and use.”
    • Data ethics relates to good practice around how data is collected, used and shared. It’s especially relevant when data activities have the potential to impact people and society, whether directly or indirectly (Open Data Institute, 2019).
    • A failure to handle and use data ethically can negatively impact an organization’s direct stakeholders and/or the public at large, lead to a loss of trust and confidence in the organization's products and services, lead to financial loss, and impact the organization’s brand, reputation, and legal standing.
    • Data governance plays a vital role in building and managing your data assets, knowing what data you have, and knowing the limitations of that data. Data ownership, data stewardship, and your data governance decision-making body are key tenets and foundational components of your data governance. They enable an organization to define, categorize, and confidently make decisions about its data.

    Step 2.2

    Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

    Activities

    2.2.1 Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Conduct a data culture survey or leverage Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic to increase your understanding of your organization’s data culture

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of your organizational data culture

    2.2.1 Gauge Your Organization’s Current Data Culture

    Conduct a Data Culture Survey or Diagnostic

    The objectives of conducting a data culture survey are to increase the understanding of the organization's data culture, your users’ appetite for data, and their appreciation for data in terms of governance, quality, accessibility, ownership, and stewardship. To perform a data culture survey:

    1. Identify members of the data user base, data consumers, and other key stakeholders for surveying.
    2. Conduct an information session to introduce Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic survey. Explain the objective and importance of the survey and its role in helping to understand the organization’s current data culture and inform the improvement of that culture.
    3. Roll out the Info-Tech Data Culture Diagnostic survey to the identified users and stakeholders.
    4. Debrief and document the results and scorecard in the Data Strategy Stakeholder Interview Guide and Findings document.

    Input

    • Email addresses of participants in your organization who should receive the survey

    Output

    • Your organization’s Data Culture Scorecard for understanding current data culture as it relates to the use and consumption of data
    • An understanding of whether data is currently perceived to be an asset to the organization

    Materials

    Screenshot of Data Culture Scorecard

    Participants

    • Participants include those at the senior leadership level through to middle management, as well as other business stakeholders at varying levels across the organization
    • Data owners, stewards, and custodians
    • Core data users and consumers

    Contact your Info-Tech Account Representative for details on launching a Data Culture Diagnostic.

    Phase 3

    Build a Target State Roadmap and Plan

    Three circles are in the image that list the three phases and the main steps. Phase 3 is highlighted.

    “Achieving data success is a journey, not a sprint.” Companies that set a clear course, with reasonable expectations and phased results over a period of time, get to the destination faster.” – Randy Bean, 2020

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Build your Data Governance Roadmap
    • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Data Governance Leadership
    • Data Owners/Data Stewards
    • Data Custodians
    • Data Governance Working Group(s)

    Step 3.1

    Formulate an Actionable Roadmap and Right-Sized Plan

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Build your data governance roadmap
    • Develop a target state plan comprising of prioritized initiatives

    Outcomes of this step

    • A foundation for data governance initiative planning that’s aligned with the organization’s business architecture: value streams, business capability map, and strategy map

    Build a right-sized roadmap

    Formulate an actionable roadmap that is right sized to deliver value in your organization.

    Key considerations:

    • When building your data governance roadmap, ensure you do so through an enterprise lens. Be cognizant of other initiatives that might be coming down the pipeline that may require you to align your data governance milestones accordingly.
    • Apart from doing your planning with consideration for other big projects or launches that might be in-flight and require the time and attention of your data governance partners, also be mindful of the more routine yet still demanding initiatives.
    • When doing your roadmapping, consider factors like the organization’s fiscal cycle, typical or potential year-end demands, and monthly/quarterly reporting periods and audits. Initiatives such as these are likely to monopolize the time and focus of personnel key to delivering on your data governance milestones.

    Sample milestones:

    Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Definition

    Define the home for data governance and other key roles around ownership and stewardship, as approved by senior leadership.

    Data Governance Charter and Policies

    Create a charter for your program and build/refresh associated policies.

    Data Culture Diagnostic

    Understand the organization’s current data culture, perception of data, value of data, and knowledge gaps.

    Use Case Build and Prioritization

    Build a use case that is tied to business capabilities. Prioritize accordingly.

    Business Data Glossary/Catalog

    Build and/or refresh the business’ glossary for addressing data definitions and standardization issues.

    Tools & Technology

    Explore the tools and technology offering in the data governance space that would serve as an enabler to the program. (e.g. RFI, RFP).

    Recall: Info-Tech’s Data Governance Framework

    An image of Info-Tech's Data Governance Framework

    Build an actionable roadmap

    Data Governance Leadership & Org Structure Division

    Define key roles for getting started.

    Use Case Build & Prioritization

    Start small and then scale – deliver early wins.

    Literacy Program

    Start understanding data knowledge gaps, building the program, and delivering.

    Tools & Technology

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you.

    Key components of your data governance roadmap

    By now, you have assessed current data governance environment and capabilities. Use this assessment, coupled with the driving needs of your business, to plot your data Governance roadmap accordingly.

    Sample data governance roadmap milestones:

    • Define data governance leadership.
    • Define and formalize data ownership and stewardship (as well as the role IT/data management will play as data custodians).
    • Build/confirm your business capability map and data domains.
    • Build business data use cases specific to business capabilities.
    • Define business measures/KPIs for the data governance program (i.e. metrics by use case that are relevant to business capabilities).
    • Data management:
      • Build your data glossary or catalog starting with identified and prioritized terms.
      • Define data domains.
    • Design and define the data governance operating model (oversight model definition, communication plan, internal marketing such as townhalls, formulate change management plan, RFP of data governance tool and technology options for supporting data governance and its administration).
    • Data policies and procedures:
      • Formulate, update, refresh, consolidate, rationalize, and/or retire data policies and procedures.
      • Define policy management and administration framework (i.e. roll-out, maintenance, updates, adherence, system to be used).
    • Conduct Info-Tech’s Data Culture Diagnostic or survey (across all levels of the organization).
    • Define and formalize the data literacy program (build modules, incorporate into LMS, plan lunch and learn sessions).
    • Data privacy and security: build data classification policy, define classification standards.
    • Enterprise projects and services: embed data governance in the organization’s PMO, conduct “Data Governance 101” for the PMO.

    Defining data governance roles and organizational structure at Organization

    The approach employed for defining the data governance roles and supporting organizational structure for .

    Key Considerations:

    • The data owner and data steward roles are formally defined and documented within the organization. Their involvement is clear, well-defined, and repeatable.
    • There are data owners and data stewards for each data domain within the organization. The data steward role is given to someone with a high degree of subject matter expertise.
    • Data owners and data stewards are effective in their roles by ensuring that their data domain is clean and free of errors and that they protect the organization against data loss.
    • Data owners and data stewards have the authority to make final decisions on data definitions, formats, and standard processes that apply to their respective data sets. Data owners and data stewards have authority regarding who has access to certain data.
    • Data owners and data stewards are not from the IT side of the organization. They understand the lifecycle of the data (how it is created, curated, retrieved, used, archived, and destroyed) and they are well-versed in any compliance requirements as it relates to their data.
    • The data custodian role is formally defined and is given to the relevant IT expert. This is an individual with technical administrative and/or operational responsibility over data (e.g. a DBA).
    • A data governance steering committee exists and is comprised of well-defined roles, responsibilities, executive sponsors, business representatives, and IT experts.
    • The data governance steering committee works to provide oversight and enforce policies, procedures, and standards for governing data.
    • The data governance working group has cross-functional representation. This comprises business and IT representation, as well as project management and change management where applicable: data stewards, data custodians, business subject matter experts, PM, etc.).
    • Data governance meetings are coordinated and communicated about. The meeting agenda is always clear and concise, and meetings review pressing data-related issues. Meeting minutes are consistently documented and communicated.

    Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your organization’s value streams and the associated business capabilities require effectively governed data. Without this, you face elevated operational costs, missed opportunities, eroded stakeholder satisfaction, and exposure to increased business risk.

    Enable business capabilities with data governance role definitions.

    Sample: Business capabilities to data owner and data stewards mapping for a selected data domain

    Consider your technology options:

    Make the available data governance tools and technology work for you:

    • Data catalog
    • Business data glossary
    • Data lineage
    • Metadata management

    Logos of data governance tools and technology.

    These are some of the data governance tools and technology players. Check out SoftwareReviews for help making better software decisions.

    Make the data steward the catalyst for organizational change and driving data culture

    The data steward must be empowered and backed politically with decision-making authority, or the role becomes stale and powerless.

    Ensuring compliance can be difficult. Data stewards may experience pushback from stakeholders who must deliver on the policies, procedures, and processes that the data steward enforces.

    Because the data steward must enforce data processes and liaise with so many different people and departments within the organization, the data steward role should be their primary full-time job function – where possible.

    However, in circumstances where budget doesn’t allow a full-time data steward role, develop these skills within the organization by adding data steward responsibilities to individuals who are already managing data sets for their department or line of business.

    Info-Tech Tip

    A stewardship role is generally more about managing the cultural change that data governance brings. This requires the steward to have exceptional interpersonal skills that will assist in building relationships across departmental boundaries and ensuring that all stakeholders within the organization believe in the initiative, understand the anticipated outcomes, and take some level of responsibility for its success.

    Changes to organizational data processes are inevitable; have a communication plan in place to manage change

    Create awareness of your data governance program. Use knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

    Data governance initiatives must contain a strong organizational disruption component. A clear and concise communication strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

    By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

    Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

    Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organization, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

    Attempting to implement change without an effective communication plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Launching a data governance initiative is guaranteed to disrupt the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

    Create a common data governance vision that is consistently communicated to the organization

    A data governance program should be an enterprise-wide initiative.

    To create a strong vision for data governance, there must be participation from the business and IT. A common vision will articulate the state the organization wishes to achieve and how it will reach that state. Visioning helps to develop long-term goals and direction.

    Once the vision is established, it must be effectively communicated to everyone, especially those who are involved in creating, managing, disposing, or archiving data.

    The data governance program should be periodically refined. This will ensure the organization continues to incorporate best methods and practices as the organization grows and data needs evolve.

    Info-Tech Tips

    • Use information from the stakeholder interviews to derive business goals and objectives.
    • Work to integrate different opinions and perspectives into the overall vision for data governance.
    • Brainstorm guiding principles for data and understand the overall value to the organization.

    Develop a compelling data governance communications plan to get all departmental lines of business on board

    A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organization.

    A successful data governance communications plan involves making the initiative visible and promoting staff awareness. Educate the team on how data is collected, distributed, and used, what internal processes use data, and how that data is used across departmental boundaries.

    By demonstrating how data governance will affect staff directly, you create a deeper level of understanding across lines of business, and ultimately, a higher level of acceptance for new processes, rules, and guidelines.

    A clear and concise communications strategy will raise the profile of data governance within the organization, and staff will understand how the program will benefit them and how they can share in the success of the initiative. This will end up providing support for the initiative across the board.

    A proactive communications plan will:

    • Assist in overcoming issues with data control, stalemates between stakeholder units, and staff resistance.
    • Provide a formalized process for implementing new policies, rules, guidelines, and technologies, and managing organizational data.
    • Detail data ownership and accountability for decision making, and identify and resolve data issues throughout the organization.
    • Encourage acceptance and support of the initiative.

    Info-Tech Tip

    Focus on literacy and communication: include training in the communication plan. Providing training for data users on the correct procedures for updating and verifying the accuracy of data, data quality, and standardized data policies will help validate how data governance will benefit them and the organization.

    Leverage the data governance program to communicate and promote the value of data within the organization

    The data governance program is responsible for continuously promoting the value of data to the organization. The data governance program should seek a variety of ways to educate the organization and data stakeholders on the benefit of data management.

    Even if data policies and procedures are created, they will be highly ineffective if they are not properly communicated to the data producers and users alike.

    There needs to be a communication plan that highlights how the data producer and user will be affected, what their new responsibilities are, and the value of that change.

    To learn how to manage organizational change, refer to Info-Tech’s Master Organizational Change Management Practices.

    Understand what makes for an effective policy for data governance

    It can be difficult to understand what a policy is, and what it is not. Start by identifying the differences between a policy and standards, guidelines, and procedures.

    Diagram of an effective policy for data governance

    The following are key elements of a good policy:

    Heading Descriptions
    Purpose Describes the factors or circumstances that mandate the existence of the policy. Also states the policy’s basic objectives and what the policy is meant to achieve.
    Scope Defines to whom and to what systems this policy applies. Lists the employees required to comply or simply indicates “all” if all must comply. Also indicates any exclusions or exceptions, i.e. those people, elements, or situations that are not covered by this policy or where special consideration may be made.
    Definitions Define any key terms, acronyms, or concepts that will be used in the policy. A standard glossary approach is sufficient.
    Policy Statements Describe the rules that comprise the policy. This typically takes the form of a series of short prescriptive and proscriptive statements. Sub-dividing this section into sub-sections may be required depending on the length or complexity of the policy.
    Non-Compliance Clearly describe consequences (legal and/or disciplinary) for employee non-compliance with the policy. It may be pertinent to describe the escalation process for repeated non-compliance.
    Agreement Confirms understanding of the policy and provides a designated space to attest to the document.

    Leverage myPolicies, Info-Tech’s web-based application for managing your policies and procedures

    Most organizations have problems with policy management. These include:

    1. Policies are absent or out of date
    2. Employees largely unaware of policies in effect
    3. Policies are unmonitored and unenforced
    4. Policies are in multiple locations
    5. Multiple versions of the same policy exist
    6. Policies managed inconsistently across different silos
    7. Policies are written poorly by untrained authors
    8. Inadequate policy training program
    9. Draft policies stall and lose momentum
    10. Weak policy support from senior management

    Technology should be used as a means to solve these problems and effectively monitor, enforce, and communicate policies.

    Product Overview

    myPolicies is a web-based solution to create, distribute, and manage corporate policies, procedures, and forms. Our solution provides policy managers with the tools they need to mitigate the risk of sanctions and reduce the administrative burden of policy management. It also enables employees to find the documents relevant to them and build a culture of compliance.

    Some key success factors for policy management include:

    • Store policies in a central location that is well known and easy to find and access. A key way that technology can help communicate policies is by having them published on a centralized website.
    • Link this repository to other policies’ taxonomies of your organization. E.g. HR policies to provide a single interface for employees to access guidance across the organization.
    • Reassess policies annually at a minimum. myPolicies can remind you to update the organization’s policies at the appropriate time.
    • Make the repository searchable and easily navigable.
    • myPolicies helps you do all this and more.
    myPolicies logo myPolicies

    Enforce data policies to promote consistency of business processes

    Data policies are short statements that seek to manage the creation, acquisition, integrity, security, compliance, and quality of data. These policies vary amongst organizations, depending on your specific data needs.

    • Policies describe what to do, while standards and procedures describe how to do something.
    • There should be few data policies, and they should be brief and direct. Policies are living documents and should be continuously updated to respond to the organization’s data needs.
    • The data policies should highlight who is responsible for the data under various scenarios and rules around how to manage it effectively.

    Examples of Data Policies

    Trust

    • Data Cleansing and Quality Policy
    • Data Entry Policy

    Availability

    • Acceptable Use Policy
    • Data Backup Policy

    Security

    • Data Security Policy
    • Password Policy Template
    • User Authorization, Identification, and Authentication Policy Template
    • Data Protection Policy

    Compliance

    • Archiving Policy
    • Data Classification Policy
    • Data Retention Policy

    Leverage data management-related policies to standardize your data management practices

    Info-Tech’s Data Management Policy:

    This policy establishes uniform data management standards and identifies the shared responsibilities for assuring the integrity of the data and that it efficiently and effectively serves the needs of the organization. This policy applies to all critical data and to all staff who may be creators and/or users of such data.

    Info-Tech’s Data Entry Policy:

    The integrity and quality of data and evidence used to inform decision making is central to both the short-term and long-term health of an organization. It is essential that required data be sourced appropriately and entered into databases and applications in an accurate and complete manner to ensure the reliability and validity of the data and decisions made based on the data.

    Info-Tech’s Data Provenance Policy:

    Create policies to keep your data's value, such as:

    • Only allow entry of data from reliable sources.
    • Employees entering and accessing data must observe requirements for capturing/maintaining provenance metadata.
    • Provenance metadata will be used to track the lifecycle of data from creation through to disposal.

    Info-Tech’s Data Integration and Virtualization Policy:

    This policy aims to assure the organization, staff, and other interested parties that data integration, replication, and virtualization risks are taken seriously. Staff must use the policy (and supporting guidelines) when deciding whether to integrate, replicate, or virtualize data sets.

    Select the right mix of metrics to successfully supervise data policies and processes

    Policies are only as good as your level of compliance. Ensure supervision controls exist to oversee adherence to policies and procedures.

    Although they can be highly subjective, metrics are extremely important to data governance success.

    • Establishing metrics that measure the performance of a specific process or data set will:
      • Create a greater degree of ownership from data stewards and data owners.
      • Help identify underperforming individuals.
      • Allow the steering committee to easily communicate tailored objectives to individual data stewards and owners.
    • Be cautious when establishing metrics. The wrong metrics can have negative repercussions.
      • They will likely draw attention to an aspect of the process that doesn’t align with the initial strategy.
      • Employees will work hard and grow frustrated as their successes aren’t accurately captured.

    Policies are great to have from a legal perspective, but unless they are followed, they will not benefit the organization.

    • One of the most useful metrics for policies is currency. This tracks how up to date the policy is and how often employees are informed about the policy. Often, a policy will be introduced and then ignored. Policies must be continuously reviewed by management and employees.
    • Some other metrics include adherence (including performance in tests for adherence) and impacts from non-adherence.

    Review metrics on an ongoing basis with those data owners/stewards who are accountable, the data governance steering committee, and the executive sponsors.

    Establish data standards and procedures for use across all organizational lines of business

    A data governance program will impact all data-driven business units within the organization.

    • Data management procedures are the methods, techniques, and steps to accomplish a specific data objective. Creating standard data definitions should be one of the first tasks for a data governance steering committee.
    • Data moves across all departmental boundaries and lines of business within the organization. These definitions must be developed as a common set of standards that can be accepted and used enterprise wide.
    • Consistent data standards and definitions will improve data flow across departmental boundaries and between lines of business.
    • Ensure these standards and definitions are used uniformly throughout the organization to maintain reliable and useful data.

    Data standards and procedural guidelines will vary from company to company.

    Examples include:

    • Data modeling and architecture standards.
    • Metadata integration and usage procedures.
    • Data security standards and procedures.
    • Business intelligence standards and procedures.

    Info-Tech Tip

    Have a fundamental data definition model for the entire business to adhere to. Those in the positions that generate and produce data must follow the common set of standards developed by the steering committee and be accountable for the creation of valid, clean data.

    Changes to organizational data processes are inevitable; have a communications plan in place to manage change

    Create awareness of your data governance program, using knowledge transfer to get as many people on board as possible.

    By planning for and efficiently communicating any changes that a data governance initiative may bring, many initial issues can be resolved from the outset.

    Governance recommendations will require significant business change. The redesign of a substantial number of data processes affecting various business units will require an overhaul of the organization’s culture, thought processes, and procedures surrounding its data. Preparing people for change well in advance will allow them to take the necessary steps to adapt and reduce potential confrontation.

    Because a data governance initiative will involve data-driven business units across the organization, the governance team must present a compelling case for data governance to ensure acceptance of new processes, rules, guidelines, and technologies by all data producers and users.

    Attempting to implement change without an effective communications plan can result in disagreements over data control and stalemates between stakeholder units. The recommendations of the governance group must reflect the needs of all stakeholders or there will be pushback.

    Data governance initiatives will very likely bring about a level of organizational disruption. A clear and concise communications strategy that conveys milestones and success stories will address the various concerns that business unit stakeholders may have.

    Info-Tech Tip

    Launching a data governance program will bring with it a level of disruption to the culture of the organization. That disruption doesn’t have to be detrimental if you are prepared to manage the change proactively and effectively.

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Picture of analyst

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team. Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Screenshot of example data governance strategy map.

    Build Your Business and User Context

    Work with your core team of stakeholders to build out your data governance strategy map, aligning data governance initiatives with business capabilities, value streams, and, ultimately, your strategic priorities.

    Screenshot of Data governance roadmap

    Formulate a Plan to Get to Your Target State

    Develop a data governance future state roadmap and plan based on an understanding of your current data governance capabilities, your operating environment, and the driving needs of your business.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Create a Data Management Roadmap

    Streamline your data management program with our simplified framework.

    The First 100 Days as CDO

    Be the voice of data in a time of transformation.

    Research Contributors

    Name Position Company
    David N. Weber Executive Director - Planning, Research and Effectiveness Palm Beach State College
    Izabela Edmunds Information Architect Mott MacDonald
    Andy Neill Practice Lead, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Dirk Coetsee Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Graham Price Executive Advisor, Advisory Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
    Igor Ikonnikov Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Jean Bujold Senior Workshop Delivery Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Reddy Doddipalli Senior Workshop Director Info-Tech Research Group
    Valence Howden Principal Research Director, CIO Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    Alation. “The Alation State of Data Culture Report – Q3 2020.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Allott, Joseph, et al. “Data: The next wave in forestry productivity.” McKinsey & Company, 27 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Bean, Randy. “Why Culture Is the Greatest Barrier to Data Success.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 30 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Brence, Thomas. “Overcoming the Operationalization Challenge with Data Governance at New York Life.” Informatica, 18 March 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Bullmore, Simon, and Stuart Coleman. “ODI Inside Business – a checklist for leaders.” Open Data Institute, 19 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Canadian Institute for Health Information. “Developing and implementing accurate national standards for Canadian health care information.” Canadian Institute for Health Information. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Carruthers, Caroline, and Peter Jackson. “The Secret Ingredients of the Successful CDO.” IRM UK Connects, 23 Feb. 2017.

    Dashboards. “Useful KPIs for Healthy Hospital Quality Management.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Dashboards. “Why (and How) You Should Improve Data Literacy in Your Organization Today.” Dashboards. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Datapine. “Healthcare Key Performance Indicators and Metrics.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Datapine. “KPI Examples & Templates: Measure what matters the most and really impacts your success.” Datapine. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Diaz, Alejandro, et al. “Why data culture matters.” McKinsey Quarterly, Sept. 2018. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Everett, Dan. “Chief Data Officer (CDO): One Job, Four Roles.” Informatica, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Experian. “10 signs you are sitting on a pile of data debt.” Experian. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Fregoni, Silvia. “New Research Reveals Why Some Business Leaders Still Ignore the Data.” Silicon Angle, 1 Oct. 2020.

    Informatica. Holistic Data Governance: A Framework for Competitive Advantage. Informatica, 2017. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Knight, Michelle. “What Is a Data Catalog?” Dataversity, 28 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Lim, Jason. “Alation 2020.3: Getting Business Users in the Game.” Alation, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    McDonagh, Mariann. “Automating Data Governance.” Erwin, 29 Oct. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    NewVantage Partners. Data-Driven Business Transformation: Connecting Data/AI Investment to Business Outcomes. NewVantage Partners, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Olavsrud, Thor. “What is data governance? A best practices framework for managing data assets.” CIO.com, 18 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Open Data Institute. “Introduction to data ethics and the data ethics canvas.” Open Data Institute, 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Open Data Institute. “The UK National Data Strategy 2020: doing data ethically.” Open Data Institute, 17 Nov. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Open Data Institute. “What is the Data Ethics Canvas?” Open Data Institute, 3 July 2019. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Pathak, Rahul. “Becoming a Data-Driven Enterprise: Meeting the Challenges, Changing the Culture.” MIT Sloan Management Review, 28 Sept. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Redman, Thomas, et al. “Only 3% of Companies’ Data Meets Basic Quality Standards.” Harvard Business Review. 11 Sept 2017.

    Petzold, Bryan, et al. “Designing data governance that delivers value.” McKinsey & Company, 26 June 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Smaje, Kate. “How six companies are using technology and data to transform themselves.” McKinsey & Company, 12 Aug. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Talend. “The Definitive Guide to Data Governance.” Talend. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    “The Powerfully Simple Modern Data Catalog.” Atlan, 2021. Web.

    U.S. Geological Survey. “Data Management: Data Standards.” U.S. Geological Survey. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Waller, David. “10 Steps to Creating a Data-Driven Culture.” Harvard Business Review, 6 Feb. 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    “What is the Difference Between A Business Glossary, A Data Dictionary, and A Data Catalog, and How Do They Play A Role In Modern Data Management?” Analytics8, 23 June 2021. Web.

    Wikipedia. “RFM (market research).” Wikipedia. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Windheuser, Christoph, and Nina Wainwright. “Data in a Modern Digital Business.” Thoughtworks, 12 May 2020. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Wright, Tom. “Digital Marketing KPIs - The 12 Key Metrics You Should Be Tracking.” Cascade, 3 March 2021. Accessed 25 June 2021.

    Tactics to Retain IT Talent

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}549|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Regrettable turnover is impacting organizational productivity and leading to significant costs associated with employee departures and the recruitment required to replace them.
    • Many organizations focus on increasing engagement to improve retention, but this approach doesn’t address the entire problem.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

    Impact and Result

    • Build the case for creating retention plans by leveraging employee data and feedback to identify the key reasons for turnover that need to be addressed.
    • Target employee segments and work with management to develop solutions to retain top talent.

    Tactics to Retain IT Talent Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Tactics to Retain IT Talent Storyboard – Use this storyboard to develop a targeted talent retention plan to retain top and core talent in the organization.

    Integrate data from exit surveys and interviews, engagement surveys, and stay interviews to understand the most commonly cited reasons for employee departure in order to select and prioritize tactics that improve retention. This blueprint will help you identify reasons for regrettable turnover, select solutions, and create an action plan.

    • Tactics to Retain IT Talent Storyboard

    2. Retention Plan Workbook – Capture key information in one place as you work through the process to assess and prioritize solutions.

    Use this tool to document and analyze turnover data to find suitable retention solutions.

    • Retention Plan Workbook

    3. Stay Interview Guide – Managers will use this guide to conduct regular stay interviews with employees to anticipate and address turnover triggers.

    The Stay Interview Guide helps managers conduct interviews with current employees, enabling the manager to understand the employee's current engagement level, satisfaction with current role and responsibilities, suggestions for potential improvements, and intent to stay with the organization.

    • Stay Interview Guide

    4. IT Retention Solutions Catalog – Use this catalog to select and prioritize retention solutions across the employee lifecycle.

    Review best-practice solutions to identify those that are most suitable to your organizational culture and employee needs. Use the IT Retention Solutions Catalog to explore a variety of methods to improve retention, understand their use cases, and determine stakeholder responsibilities.

    • IT Retention Solutions Catalog
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Tactics to Retain IT Talent

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Reasons for Regrettable Turnover

    The Purpose

    Identify the main drivers of turnover at the organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Find out what to explore during focus groups.

    Activities

    1.1 Review data to determine why employees join, stay, and leave.

    1.2 Identify common themes.

    1.3 Prepare for focus groups.

    Outputs

    List of common themes/pain points recorded in the Retention Plan Workbook.

    2 Conduct Focus Groups

    The Purpose

    Conduct focus groups to explore retention drivers.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore identified themes.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct four 1-hour focus groups with the employee segment(s) identified in the pre-workshop activities.

    2.2 Info-Tech facilitators independently analyze results of focus groups and group results by theme.

    Outputs

    Focus group feedback.

    Focus group feedback analyzed and organized by themes.

    3 Identify Needs and Retention Initiatives

    The Purpose

    Home in on employee needs that are a priority.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of initiatives to address the identified needs

    Activities

    3.1 Create an empathy map to identify needs.

    3.2 Shortlist retention initiatives.

    Outputs

    Employee needs and shortlist of initiatives to address them.

    4 Prepare to Communicate and Launch

    The Purpose

    Prepare to launch your retention initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear action plan for implementing your retention initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Select retention initiatives.

    4.2 Determine goals and metrics.

    4.3 Plan stakeholder communication.

    4.4 Build a high-level action plan.

    Outputs

    Finalized list of retention initiatives.

    Goals and associated metrics recorded in the Retention Plan Workbook.

    Further reading

    Tactics to Retain IT Talent

    Keep talent from walking out the door by discovering and addressing moments that matter and turnover triggers.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Many organizations are facing an increase in voluntary turnover as low unemployment, a lack of skilled labor, and a rise in the number of vacant roles have given employees more employment choices.

    Common Obstacles

    Regrettable turnover is impacting organizational productivity and leading to significant costs associated with employee departures and the recruitment required to replace them.

    Many organizations tackle retention from an engagement perspective: Increase engagement to improve retention. This approach doesn't consider the whole problem.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Build the case for creating retention plans by leveraging employee data and feedback to identify the key reasons for turnover that need to be addressed.

    Target employee segments and work with management to develop solutions to retain top talent.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

    This research addresses regrettable turnover

    This is an image of a flow chart with three levels. The top level has only one box, labeled Turnover.  the Second level has 2 boxes, labeled Voluntary, and Involuntary.  The third level has two boxes under Voluntary, labeled Non-regrettable: The loss of employees that the organization did not wish to keep, e.g. low performers, and Regrettable:  The loss of employees that the organization wishes it could have kept.

    Low unemployment and rising voluntary turnover makes it critical to focus on retention

    As the economy continues to recover from the pandemic, unemployment continues to trend downward even with a looming recession. This leaves more job openings vacant, making it easier for employees to job hop.

    This image contains a graph of the US Employment rate between 2020 - 2022 from the US Bureau of Economic Analysis and Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), 2022, the percentage of individuals who change jobs every one to five years from 2022 Job Seeker Nation Study, Jobvite, 2022, and voluntary turnover rates from BLS, 2022

    With more employees voluntarily choosing to leave jobs, it is more important than ever for organizations to identify key employees they want to retain and put plans in place to keep them.

    Retention is a challenge for many organizations

    The number of HR professionals citing retention/turnover as a top workforce management challenge is increasing, and it is now the second highest recruiting priority ("2020 Recruiter Nation Survey," Jobvite, 2020).

    65% of employees believe they can find a better position elsewhere (Legaljobs, 2021). This is a challenge for organizations in that they need to find ways to ensure employees want to stay at the organization or they will lose them, which results in high turnover costs.

    Executives and IT are making retention and turnover – two sides of the same coin – a priority because they cost organizations money.

    • 87% of HR professionals cited retention/turnover as a critical and high priority for the next few years (TINYpulse, 2020).
    • $630B The cost of voluntary turnover in the US (Work Institute, 2020).
    • 66% of organizations consider employee retention to be important or very important to an organization (PayScale, 2019).

    Improving retention leads to broad-reaching organizational benefits

    Cost savings: the price of turnover as a percentage of salary

    • 33% Improving retention can result in significant cost savings. A recent study found turnover costs, on average, to be around a third of an employee's annual salary (SHRM, 2019).
    • 37.9% of employees leave their organization within the first year. Employees who leave within the first 90 days of being hired offer very little or no return on the investment made to hire them (Work Institute, 2020).

    Improved performance

    Employees with longer tenure have an increased understanding of an organization's policies and processes, which leads to increased productivity (Indeed, 2021).

    Prevents a ripple effect

    Turnover often ripples across a team or department, with employees following each other out of the organization (Mereo). Retaining even one individual can often have an impact across the organization.

    Transfer of knowledge

    Retaining key individuals allows them to pass it on to other employees through communities of practice, mentoring, or other knowledge-sharing activities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Improving retention goes beyond cost savings: Employees who agree with the statement "I expect to be at this organization a year from now" are 71% more likely to put in extra hours and 32% more likely to accomplish more than what is expected of their role (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2021; N=77,170 and 97,326 respectively).

    However, the traditional engagement-focused approach to retention is not enough

    Employee engagement is a strong driver of retention, with only 25% of disengaged employees expecting to be at their organization a year from now compared to 92% of engaged employees (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2018-2021; N=117,307).

    Average employee Net Promoter Score (eNPS)

    This image contains a graph of the Average employee Net Promoter Score (eNPS)

    Individual employee Net Promoter Scores (eNPS)

    This image contains a graph of the Individual employee Net Promoter Scores (eNPS)

    However, engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave.

    This analysis of McLean & Company's engagement survey results shows that while an organization's average employee net promoter score (eNPS) stays relatively static, at an individual level there is a huge amount of volatility.

    This demonstrates the need for an approach that is more capable of responding to or identifying employees' in-the-moment needs, which an annual engagement survey doesn't support.

    Turnover triggers and moments that matter also have an impact on retention

    Retention needs to be monitored throughout the employee lifecycle. To address the variety of issues that can appear, consider three main paths to turnover:

    1. Employee engagement – areas of low engagement.
    2. Turnover triggers that can quickly lead to departures.
    3. Moments that matter in the employee experience (EX).

    Employee engagement

    Engagement drivers are strong predictors of turnover.

    Employees who are highly engaged are 3.6x more likely to believe they will be with the organization 12 months from now than disengaged employees (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2018-2021; N=117,307).

    Turnover triggers

    Turnover triggers are events that act as shocks or catalysts that quickly lead to an employee's departure.

    Turnover triggers are a cause for voluntary turnover more often than accumulated issues (Lee et al.).

    Moments that matter

    Employee experience is the employee's perception of the accumulation of moments that matter within their employee lifecycle.

    Retention rates increase from 21% to 44% when employees have positive experiences in the following categories: belonging, purpose, achievement, happiness, and vigor at work. (Workhuman, 2020).

    While managers do not directly impact turnover, they do influence the three main paths to turnover

    Research shows managers do not appear as one of the common reasons for employee turnover.

    Top five most common reasons employees leave an organization (McLean & Company, Exit Survey, 2018-2021; N=107 to 141 companies,14,870 to 19,431 responses).

    Turnover factorsRank
    Opportunities for career advancement1
    Satisfaction with my role and responsibilities2
    Base pay3
    Opportunities for career-related skill development4
    The degree to which my skills were used in my job5

    However, managers can still have a huge impact on the turnover of their team through each of the three main paths to turnover:

    Employee engagement

    Employees who believe their managers care about them as a person are 3.3x more likely to be engaged than those who do not (McLean & Company, 2021; N=105,186).

    Turnover triggers

    Managers who are involved with and aware of their staff can serve as an early warning system for triggers that lead to turnover too quickly to detect with data.

    Moments that matter

    Managers have a direct connection with each individual and can tailor the employee experience to meet the needs of the individuals who report to them.

    Gallup has found that 52% of exiting employees say their manager could have done something to prevent them from leaving (Gallup, 2019). Do not discount the power of managers in anticipating and preventing regrettable turnover.

    Addressing engagement, turnover triggers, and moments that matter is the key to retention

    This is an image of a flow chart with four levels. The top level has only one box, labeled Turnover.  the Second level has 2 boxes, labeled Voluntary, and Involuntary.  The third level has two boxes under Voluntary, labeled Non-regrettable, and Regrettable.  The fourth level has three boxes under Regrettable, labeled Employee Engagement, Turnover triggers, and Moments that matter

    Info-Tech Insight

    HR traditionally seeks to examine engagement levels when faced with retention challenges, but engagement is only a part of the full picture. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

    Follow Info-Tech's two-step process to create a retention plan

    1. Identify Reasons for Regrettable Turnover

    2. Select Solutions and Create an Action Plan

    Step 1

    Identify Reasons for Regrettable Turnover

    After completing this step you will have:

    • Analyzed and documented why employees join, stay, and leave your organization.
    • Identified common themes and employee needs.
    • Conducted employee focus groups and prioritized employee needs.

    Step 1 focuses on analyzing existing data and validating it through focus groups

    Employee engagement

    Employee engagement and moments that matter are easily tracked by data. Validating employee feedback data by speaking and empathizing with employees helps to uncover moments that matter. This step focuses on analyzing existing data and validating it through focus groups.

    Engagement drivers such as compensation or working environment are strong predictors of turnover.
    Moments that matter
    Employee experience (EX) is the employee's perception of the accumulation of moments that matter with the organization.
    Turnover triggers
    Turnover triggers are events that act as shocks or catalysts that quickly lead to an employee's departure.

    Turnover triggers

    This step will not touch on turnover triggers. Instead, they will be discussed in step 2 in the context of the role of the manager in improving retention.

    Turnover triggers are events that act as shocks or catalysts that quickly lead to an employee's departure.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT managers often have insights into where and why retention is an issue through their day-to-day work. Gathering detailed quantitative and qualitative data provides credibility to these insights and is key to building a business case for action. Keep an open mind and allow the data to inform your gut feeling, not the other way around.

    Gather data to better understand why employees join, stay, and leave

    Start to gather and examine additional data to accurately identify the reason(s) for high turnover. Begin to uncover the story behind why these employees join, stay, and leave your organization through themes and trends that emerge.

    Look for these icons throughout step 2.

    Join

    Why do candidates join your organization?

    Stay

    Why do employees stay with your organization?

    Leave

    Why do employees leave your organization?

    For more information on analysis, visualization, and storytelling with data, see Info-Tech's Start Making Data-Driven People Decisions blueprint.

    Employee feedback data to look at includes:

    Gather insights through:

    • Focus groups
    • Verbatim comments
    • Exit interviews
    • Using the employee value proposition (EVP) as a filter (does it resonate with the lived experience of employees?)

    Prepare to draw themes and trends from employee data throughout step 1.

    Uncover employee needs and reasons for turnover by analyzing employee feedback data.

    • Look for trends (e.g. new hires join for career opportunities and leave for the same reason, or most departments have strong work-life balance scores in engagement data).
    • Review if there are recurring issues being raised that may impact turnover.
    • Group feedback to highlight themes (e.g. lack of understanding of EVP).
    • Identify which key employee needs merit further investigation or information.

    This is an image showing how you can draw out themes and trends using employee data throughout step 1.

    Classify where key employee needs fall within the employee lifecycle diagram in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook. This will be used in step 2 to pinpoint and prioritize solutions.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The employee lifecycle is a valuable way to analyze and organize engagement pain points, moments that matter, and turnover triggers. It ensures that you consider the entirety of an employee's tenure and the different factors that lead to turnover.

    Examine new hire data and begin to document emerging themes

    Join

    While conducting a high-level analysis of new hire data, look for these three key themes impacting retention:

    Issues or pain points that occurred during the hiring process.

    Reasons why employees joined your organization.

    The experience of their first 90 days. This can include their satisfaction with the onboarding process and their overall experience with the organization.

    Themes will help to identify areas of strength and weakness organization-wide and within key segments. Document in tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

    1. Start by isolating the top reasons employees joined your organization. Ask:
      • Do the reasons align with the benefits you associate with working at your organization?
      • How might this impact your EVP?
      • If you use a new hire survey, look at the results for the following questions:
      • For which of the following reasons did you apply to this organization?
      • For what reasons did you accept the job offer with this organization?
    2. then, examine other potential problem areas that may not be covered by your new hire survey, such as onboarding or the candidate experience during the hiring process.
      • If you conduct a new hire survey, look at the results in the following sections:
        • Candidate Experience
        • Acclimatization
        • Training and Development
        • Defining Performance Expectations

      Analyze engagement data to identify areas of strength that drive retention

      Employees who are engaged are 3.6x more likely to believe they will be with the organization 12 months from now (McLean & Company Engagement Survey, 2018-2021; N=117,307). Given the strength of this relationship, it is essential to identify areas of strength to maintain and leverage.

      1. Look at the highest-performing drivers in your organization's employee engagement survey and drivers that fall into the "leverage" and "maintain" quadrants of the priority matrix.
        • These drivers provide insight into what prompts broader groups of employees to stay.

      This is an image of a quadrant analysis, with the following quadrants in order from left to right, top to bottom.  Improve; Leverage; Evaluate; Maintain.

      1. Look into what efforts have been made to maintain programs, policies, and practices related to these drivers and ensure they are consistent across the entire organization.
      2. Document trends and themes related to engagement strengths in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      If you use Info-Tech's Engagement Survey, look in detail at what are classified as "Retention Drivers": total compensation, working environment, and work-life balance.

      Identify areas of weakness that drive turnover in your engagement data

      1. Look at the lowest-performing drivers in your organization's employee engagement survey and drivers that fall into the "improve" and "evaluate" quadrants of the priority matrix.
        • These drivers provide insight into what pushes employees to leave the organization.
      2. Delve into organizational efforts that have been made to address issues with the programs, policies, and practices related to these drivers. Are there any projects underway to improve them? What are the barriers preventing improvements?
      3. Document trends and themes related to engagement weaknesses in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      If you use a product other than Info-Tech's Engagement Survey, your results will look different. The key is to look at areas of weakness that emerge from the data.

      This is an image of a quadrant analysis, with the following quadrants in order from left to right, top to bottom.  Improve; Leverage; Evaluate; Maintain.

      If you use Info-Tech's Engagement Survey, look in detail at what are classified as "Retention Drivers": total compensation, working environment, and work-life balance.

      Mine exit surveys to develop an integrated, holistic understanding of why employees leave

      Conduct a high-level analysis of the data from your employee exit diagnostic. While analyzing this data, consider the following:

      • What are the trends and quantitative data about why employees leave your organization that may illuminate employee needs or issues at specific points throughout the employee lifecycle?
      • What are insights around your key segments? Data on key segments is easily sliced from exit survey results and can be used as a starting point for digging deeper into retention issues for specific groups.
      • Exit surveys are an excellent starting point. However, it is valuable to validate the data gathered from an exit survey using exit interviews.
      1. Isolate results for key segments of employees to target with retention initiatives (e.g. by age group or by department).
      2. Identify data trends or patterns over time; for example, that compensation factors have been increasing in importance.
      3. Document trends and themes taken from the exit survey results in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      If your organization conducts exit interviews, analyze the results alongside or in lieu of exit survey data.

      Compare new hire data with exit data to identify patterns and insights

      Determine if new hire expectations weren't met, prompting employees to leave your organization, to help identify where in the employee lifecycle issues driving turnover may be occurring.

      1. Look at your new hire data for the top reasons employees joined your organization.
        • McLean & Company's New Hire Survey database shows that the top three reasons candidates accept job offers on average are:
          1. Career opportunities
          2. Nature of the job
          3. Development opportunities
      2. Next, look at your exit data and the top reasons employees left your organization.
        1. McLean & Company's Exit Survey database shows that the top three reasons employees leave on average are:
          1. Opportunities for career advancement
          2. Base pay
          3. Satisfaction with my role and responsibilities
      3. Examine the results and ask:
        • Is there a link between why employees join and leave the organization?
        • Did they cite the same reasons for joining and for leaving?
        • What do the results say about what your employees do and do not value about working at your organization?
      4. Document the resulting insights in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      Example:

      A result where employees are leaving for the same reason they're joining the organization could signal a disconnect between your organization's employee value proposition and the lived experience.

      Revisit your employee value proposition to uncover misalignment

      Your employee value proposition (EVP), formal or informal, communicates the value your organization can offer to prospective employees.

      If your EVP is mismatched with the lived experience of your employees, new hires will be in for a surprise when they start their new job and find out it isn't what they were expecting.

      Forty-six percent of respondents who left a job within 90 days of starting cited a mismatch of expectations about their role ("Job Seeker Nation Study 2020," Jobvite, 2020).

      1. Use the EVP as a filter through which you look at all your employee feedback data. It will help identify misalignment between the promised and the lived experience.
      2. If you have EVP documentation, start there. If not, go to your careers page and put yourself in the shoes of a candidate. Ask what the four elements of an EVP look like for candidates:
        • Compensation and benefits
        • Day-to-day job elements
        • Working conditions
        • Organizational elements
      3. Next, compare this to your own day-to-day experiences. Does it differ drastically? Are there any contradictions with the lived experience at your organization? Are there misleading statements or promises?
      4. Document any insights or patterns you uncover in tab 2 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      Conduct focus groups to examine themes

      Through focus groups, explore the themes you have uncovered with employees to discover employee needs that are not being met. Addressing these employee needs will be a key aspect of your retention plan.

      Identify employee groups who will participate in focus groups:

      • Incorporate diverse perspectives (e.g. employees, managers, supervisors).
      • Include employees from departments and demographics with strong and weak engagement for a full picture of how engagement impacts your employees.
      • Invite boomerang employees to learn why an individual might return to your organization after leaving.

      image contains two screenshots Mclean & Company's Standard Focus Group Guide.

      Customize Info-Tech's Standard Focus Group Guide based on the themes you have identified in tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      The goal of the focus group is to learn from employees and use this information to design or modify a process, system, or other solution that impacts retention.

      Focus questions on the employees' personal experience from their perspective.

      Key things to remember:

      • It is vital for facilitators to be objective.
      • Keep an open mind; no feelings are wrong.
      • Beware of your own biases.
      • Be open and share the reason for conducting the focus groups.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Maintaining an open dialogue with employees will help flesh out the context behind the data you've gathered and allow you to keep in mind that retention is about people first and foremost.

      Empathize with employees to identify moments that matter

      Look for discrepancies between what employees are saying and doing.

      1. Say

      "What words or quotes did the employee use?"

      3.Think

      "What might the employee be thinking?"

      Record feelings and thoughts discussed, body language observed, tone of voice, and words used.

      Look for areas of negative emotion to determine the moments that matter that drive retention.

      2. Do

      "What actions or behavior did the employee demonstrate?"

      4. Feel

      "What might the employee be feeling?"

      Record them in tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook.

      5. Identify Needs

      "Needs are verbs (activities or desires), not nouns (solutions)"

      Synthesize focus group findings using Info-Tech's Empathy Map Template.

      6. Identify Insights

      "Ask yourself, why?"

      (Based on Stanford d.school Empathy Map Method)

      Distill employee needs into priority issues to address first

      Take employee needs revealed by your data and focus groups and prioritize three to five needs.

      Select a limited number of employee needs to develop solutions to ensure that the scope of the project is feasible and that the resources dedicated to this project are not stretched too thin. The remaining needs should not be ignored – act on them later.

      Share the needs you identify with stakeholders so they can support prioritization and so you can confirm their buy-in and approval where necessary.

      Ask yourself the following questions to determine your priority employee needs:

      • Which needs will have the greatest impact on turnover?
      • Which needs have the potential to be an easy fix or quick win?
      • Which themes or trends came up repeatedly in different data sources?
      • Which needs evoked particularly strong or negative emotions in the focus groups?

      This image contains screenshots of two table templates found in tab 5 of the Retention Plan Workbook

      In the Retention Plan Workbook, distill employee needs on tab 2 into three to five priorities on tab 5.

      Step 2

      Select Solutions and Create an Action Plan

      After completing this step, you will have:

      • Selected and prioritized solutions to address employee needs.
      • Created a plan to launch stay interviews.
      • Built an action plan to implement solutions.

      Select IT-owned solutions and implement people leader–driven initiatives

      Solutions

      First, select and prioritize solutions to address employee needs identified in the previous step. These solutions will address reasons for turnover that influence employee engagement and moments that matter.

      • Brainstorm solutions using the Retention Solutions Catalog as a starting point. Select a longlist of solutions to address your priority needs.
      • Prioritize the longlist of solutions into a manageable number to act on.

      People leaders

      Next, create a plan to launch stay interviews to increase managers' accountability in improving retention. Managers will be critical to solving issues stemming from turnover triggers.

      • Clarify the importance of harnessing the influence of people leaders in improving retention.
      • Discover what might cause individual employees to leave through stay interviews.
      • Increase trust in managers through training.

      Action plan

      Finally, create an action plan and present to senior leadership for approval.

      Look for these icons in the top right of slides in this step.

      Select solutions to employee needs, starting with the Retention Solutions Catalog

      Based on the priority needs you have identified, use the Retention Solutions Catalog to review best-practice solutions for pain points associated with each stage of the lifecycle.

      Use this tool as a starting point, adding to it and iterating based on your own experience and organizational culture and goals.

      This image contains three screenshots from Info-Tech's Retention Solutions Catalog.

      Use Info-Tech's Retention Solutions Catalog to start the brainstorming process and produce a shortlist of potential solutions that will be prioritized on the next slide.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Unless you have the good fortune of having only a few pain points, no single initiative will completely solve your retention issues. Combine one or two of these broad solutions with people-leader initiatives to ensure employee needs are addressed on an individual and an aggregate level.

      Prioritize solutions to be implemented

      Target efforts accordingly

      Quick wins are high-impact, low-effort initiatives that will build traction and credibility within the organization.

      Long-term initiatives require more time and need to be planned for accordingly but will still deliver a large impact. Review the planning horizon to determine how early these need to begin.

      Re-evaluate low-impact and low-effort initiatives and identify ones that either support other higher impact initiatives or have the highest impact to gain traction and credibility. Look for low-hanging fruit.

      Deprioritize initiatives that will take a high degree of effort to deliver lower-value results.

      When assessing the impact of potential solutions, consider:

      • How many critical segments or employees will this solution affect?
      • Is the employee need it addresses critical, or did the solution encompass several themes in the data you analyzed?
      • Will the success of this solution help build a case for further action?
      • Will the solution address multiple employee needs?

      Info-Tech Insight

      It's better to master a few initiatives than under-deliver on many. Start with a few solutions that will have a measurable impact to build the case for further action in the future.

      Solutions

      Low ImpactMedium ImpactLarge Impact
      Large EffortThis is an image of the used to help you prioritize solutions to be implemented.
      Medium Effort
      Low Effort

      Use tab 3 of the Retention Plan Workbook to prioritize your shortlist of solutions.

      Harness the influence of people leaders to improve employee retention

      Leaders at all levels have a huge impact on employees.

      Effective people leaders:

      • Manage work distribution.
      • Create a motivating work environment.
      • Provide development opportunities.
      • Ensure work is stimulating and challenging, but not overwhelming.
      • Provide clear, actionable feedback.
      • Recognize team member contributions.
      • Develop positive relationships with their teams.
      • Create a line of sight between what the employee is doing and what the organization's objectives are.

      Support leaders in recommitting to their role as people managers through Learning & Development initiatives with particular emphasis on coaching and building trust.

      For coaching training, see Info-Tech's Build a Better Manager: Team Essentials – Feedback and Coaching training deck.

      For more information on supporting managers to become better people leaders, see Info-Tech's Build a Better Manager: Manage Your People blueprint.

      "HR can't fix turnover. But leaders on the front line can."
      – Richard P. Finnegan, CEO, C-Suite Analytics

      Equip managers to conduct regular stay interviews to address turnover triggers

      Managers often have the most visibility into their employees' personal and work lives and have a key opportunity to anticipate and address turnover triggers.

      Stay interviews are an effective way of uncovering potential retention issues and allowing managers to act as an early warning system for turnover triggers.

      Examples of common turnover triggers and potential manager responses:

      • Moving, creating a long commute to the office.
        • Through stay interviews, a manager can learn that a long commute is an issue and can help find workarounds such as flexible/remote work options.
      • Not receiving an expected promotion.
        • A trusted manager can anticipate issues stemming from this, discuss why the decision was made, and plan development opportunities for future openings.

      Stay interview best practices

      1. Conducted by an employee's direct manager.
      2. Happen regularly as a part of an ongoing process.
      3. Based on the stay interview, managers produce a turnover forecast for each direct report.
        1. The method used by stay interview expert Richard P. Finnegan is simple: red for high risk, yellow for medium, and green for low.
      4. Provide managers with training and a rough script or list of questions to follow.
        1. Use and customize Info-Tech's Stay Interview Guide to provide a guide for managers on how to conduct a stay interview.
      5. Managers use the results to create an individualized retention action plan made up of concrete actions the manager and employee will take.

      Sources: Richard P. Finnegan, CEO, C-Suite Analytics; SHRM

      Build an action plan to implement the retention plan

      For each initiative identified, map out timelines and actions that need to be taken.

      When building actions and timelines:

      • Refer to the priority needs you identified in tab 4 of the Retention Plan Workbook and ensure they are addressed first.
      • Engage internal stakeholders who will be key to the development of the initiatives to ensure they have sufficient time to complete their deliverables.
        • For example, if you conduct manager training, Learning & Development needs to be involved in the development and launch of the program.
      • Include a date to revisit your baseline retention and engagement data in your project milestones.
      • Designate process owners for new processes such as stay interviews.

      Plan for stay interviews by determining:

      • Whether stay interviews will be a requirement for all employees.
      • How much flexibility managers will have with the process.
      • How you will communicate the stay interview approach to managers.
      • If manager training is required.
      • How managers should record stay interview data and how you will collect this data from them as a way to monitor retention issues.
        • For example, managers can share their turnover forecasts and action plans for each employee.

      Be clear about manager accountabilities for initiatives they will own, such as stay interviews. Plan to communicate the goals and timelines managers will be asked to meet, such as when they must conduct interviews or their responsibility to follow up on action items that come from interviews.

      Track project success to iterate and improve your solutions

      Analyze measurements

      • Regularly remeasure your engagement and retention levels to identify themes and trends that provide insights into program improvements.
      • For example, look at the difference in manager relationship score to see if training has had an impact, or look at changes in critical segment turnover to calculate cost savings.

      Revisit employee and manager feedback

      • After three to six months, conduct additional surveys or focus groups to determine the success of your initiatives and opportunities for improvement. Tweak the program, including stay interviews, based on manager and employee feedback.

      Iterate frequently

      • Revisit your initiatives every two or three years to determine if a refresh is necessary to meet changing organizational and employee needs and to update your goals and targets.

      Key insights

      Insight 1Insight 2Insight 3

      Retention and turnover are two sides of the same coin. You can't fix retention without first understanding turnover.

      Engagement surveys mask the volatility of the employee experience and hide the reason why individual employees leave. You must also talk to employees to understand the moments that matter and engage managers to understand turnover triggers.

      Improving retention isn't just about lowering turnover, it's about discovering what healthy retention looks like for your organization.

      Insight 4Insight 5Insight 6

      HR professionals often have insights into where and why retention is an issue. Gathering detailed employee feedback data through surveys and focus groups provides credibility to these insights and is key to building a case for action. Keep an open mind and allow the data to inform your gut feeling, not the other way around.

      Successful retention plans must be owned by both IT leaders and HR.

      IT leaders often have the most visibility into their employees' personal and work lives and have a key opportunity to anticipate and address turnover triggers.

      Stay interviews help managers anticipate potential retention issues on their teams.

      Workshop Overview

      Contact your account representative for more information.
      workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

      Info-Tech AnalystsPre-workPost-work
      Client Data Gathering and PlanningImplementation Supported Through Analyst Calls

      1.1 Discuss participants, logistics, overview of workshop activities

      1.2 Provide support to client for below activities through calls.

      2.1 Schedule follow-up calls to work through implementation of retention solutions based on identified needs.
      Client

      1.Gather results of engagement survey, new hire survey, exit survey, and any exit and stay interview feedback.

      2.Gather and analyze turnover data.

      3.Identify key employee segment(s) and identify and organize participants for focus groups.

      4.Complete cost of turnover analysis.

      5.Review turnover data and prioritize list of employee segments.

      1.Obtain senior leader approval to proceed with retention plan.

      2.Finalize and implement retention solutions.

      3.Prepare managers to conduct stay interviews.

      4.Communicate next steps to stakeholders.

      Workshop Overview

      Contact your account representative for more information.
      workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

      ActivitiesDay 1Day 2Day 3Day 4
      Assess Current StateConduct Focus GroupsIdentify Needs and Retention InitiativesPrepare to Communicate and Launch

      1.1 Review data to determine why employees join, stay, and leave.

      1.2 Identify common themes.

      1.3 Prepare for focus groups.

      2.1 Conduct four 1-hour focus groups with the employee segment(s) identified in the pre-workshop activities..

      2.2 Info-Tech facilitators independently analyze results of focus groups and group results by theme.

      3.1 Create an empathy map to identify needs

      3.2 Shortlist retention initiatives

      4.1 Select retention initiatives

      4.2 Determine goals and metrics

      4.3 Plan stakeholder communication4.4 Build a high-level action plan

      Deliverables

      1.List of common themes/pain points recorded in the Retention Plan Workbook

      2.Plan for focus groups documented in the Focus Group Guide

      1.Focus group feedback

      2.Focus group feedback analyzed and organized by themes

      1.Employee needs and shortlist of initiatives to address them1.Finalized list of retention initiatives

      Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

      DIY Toolkit

      “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

      Guided Implementation

      “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

      Workshop

      “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

      Consulting

      “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

      Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

      Research Contributors and Experts

      Jeff Bonnell
      VP HR
      Info-Tech Research Group

      Phillip Kotanidis
      CHRO
      Michael Garron Hospital

      Michael McGuire
      Director, Organizational Development
      William Osler Health System

      Dr. Iris Ware
      Chief Learning Officer
      City of Detroit

      Richard P. Finnegan
      CEO
      C-Suite Analytics

      Dr. Thomas Lee
      Professor of Management
      University of Washington

      Jane Moughon
      Specialist in increasing profits, reducing turnover, and maximizing human potential in manufacturing companies

      Lisa Kaste
      Former HR Director
      Citco

      Piyush Mathur
      Head of Workforce Analytics
      Johnson & Johnson

      Gregory P. Smith
      CEO
      Chart Your Course

      Works Cited

      "17 Surprising Statistics about Employee Retention." TINYpulse, 8 Sept. 2020. Web.
      "2020 Job Seeker Nation Study." Jobvite, April 2020. Web.
      "2020 Recruiter Nation Survey." Jobvite, 2020. Web.
      "2020 Retention Report: Insights on 2019 Turnover Trends, Reasons, Costs, & Recommendations." Work Institute, 2020. Web.
      "25 Essential Productivity Statistics for 2021." TeamStage, 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021.
      Agovino, Theresa. "To Have and to Hold." SHRM, 23 Feb. 2019. Web.
      "Civilian Unemployment Rate." Bureau of Labor Statistics, June 2020. Web.
      Foreman, Paul. "The domino effect of chief sales officer turnover on salespeople." Mereo, 19 July 2018. Web.
      "Gross Domestic Product." U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis, 27 May 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2020.
      Kinne, Aaron. "Back to Basics: What is Employee Experience?" Workhuman, 27August 2020. Accessed 21 Jun. 2021.
      Lee, Thomas W, et al. "Managing employee retention and turnover with 21st century ideas." Organizational Dynamics, vol 47, no. 2, 2017, pp. 88-98. Web.
      Lee, Thomas W. and Terence R. Mitchell. "Control Turnover by Understanding its Causes." The Blackwell Handbook of Principles of Organizational Behaviour. 2017. Print.
      McFeely, Shane, and Ben Wigert. "This Fixable Problem Costs U.S. Businesses $1 Trillion." Gallup. 13 March 2019. Web.
      "Table 18. Annual Quit rates by Industry and Region Not Seasonally Adjusted." Bureau of Labor Statistics. June 2021. Web.
      "The 2019 Compensation Best Practices Report: Will They Stay or Will They Go? Employee Retention and Acquisition in an Uncertain Economy." PayScale. 2019. Web.
      Vuleta, Branka. "30 Troubling Employee Retention Statistics." Legaljobs. 1 Feb. 2021. Web.
      "What is a Tenured Employee? Top Benefits of Tenure and How to Stay Engaged as One." Indeed. 22 Feb. 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021.

      Evolve Your Business Through Innovation

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}330|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: N/A
      • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
      • member rating average days saved: N/A
      • Parent Category Name: Innovation
      • Parent Category Link: /innovation
      • Innovation teams are tasked with the responsibility of ensuring that their organizations are in the best position to succeed while the world is in a period of turmoil, chaos, and uncertainty.
      • CIOs have been expected to help the organization transition to remote work and collaboration instantaneously.
      • CEOs are under pressure to redesign, and in some cases reinvent, their business model to cope with and compete in a new normal.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      It is easy to get swept up during a crisis and cling to past notions of normal. Unfortunately, there is no controlling the fact that things have changed fundamentally, and it is now incumbent upon you to help your organization adapt and evolve. Treat this as an opportunity because that is precisely what this is.

      Impact and Result

      There are some lessons we can learn from innovators who have succeeded through past crises and from those who are succeeding now.

      There are a number of tactics an innovation team can employ to help their business evolve during this time:

      1. Double down on digital transformation (DX)
      2. Establish a foresight capability
      3. Become a platform for good

      Evolve Your Business Through Innovation Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Evolve your business through innovation

      Download our guide to learn what you can do to evolve your business and innovate your way through uncertainty.

      • Evolve Your Business Through Innovation Storyboard
      [infographic]

      Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}274|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $62,999 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: Architecture Domains
      • Parent Category Link: /architecture-domains
      • A mature EA function is increasingly becoming an organizational priority to drive innovation, provide insight, and define digital capabilities.
      • Proliferation of digital technology has increased complexity, straining the EA function to deliver insights.
      • An EA tool increases the efficiency with which the EA function can deliver insights, but a large number of organizations have not a selected an EA tool that suits their needs.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • EA tool value largely comes from tying organizational context and requirements to the selection process.
      • Organizations that have selected an EA tool often fail to have it adopted and show its true value. To ensure successful adoption and value delivery, the EA tool selection process must account for the needs of business stakeholders and tool users.

      Impact and Result

      • Link the need for the EA tool to your organization’s EA value proposition. The connection enables the EA tool to address the future needs of stakeholders and the design style of the EA team.
      • Use Info-Tech’s EA Solution Recommendation Tool to create a shortlist of EA tools that is suited to the preferences of the organization.
      • Gather additional information on the shortlist of EA tool vendors to narrow down the selection using the EA Tool Request for Information Template.

      Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need Research & Tools

      Start here – read the Executive Brief

      Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should procure an EA tool in the digital age, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Executive Brief
      • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phases 1-3

      1. Make the case

      Decide if an EA tool is needed in your organization and define the requirements of EA tool users.

      • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 1: Make the Case
      • EA Value Proposition Template
      • EA Tool User Requirements Template

      2. Shortlist EA tools

      Determine your organization’s preferences in terms of product capabilities and vendor characteristics.

      • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 2: Shortlist EA Tools
      • EA Solution Recommendation Tool

      3. Select and communicate the process

      Gather information on shortlisted vendors and make your final decision.

      • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 3: Select and Communicate the Process
      • EA Tool Request for Information Template
      • EA Tool Demo Script Template
      • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
      • EA Tool Selection Process Template
      [infographic]

      Select an Enterprise Application

      • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}588|cart{/j2store}
      • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
      • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
      • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
      • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Applications
      • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-applications
      • Organizations rarely have both the sufficient knowledge and resources to properly evaluate, select, and implement an enterprise application software (EAS), forcing them to turn to external partnerships.
      • Inadequate and incomplete requirements skew the EAS selection in one direction or another. Many EAS projects fail due to a lack of clear description and specification of functional requirements.
      • The EAS technology market is so vast that it becomes nearly impossible to know where to start or how to differentiate between vendors and products.

      Our Advice

      Critical Insight

      • Accountability for EAS success is shared between IT and the business. There is no single owner of an EAS. A unified approach to building your strategy promotes an integrated roadmap so all stakeholders have clear direction on the future state.
      • While technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences, there are many other drivers of dissatisfaction. IT must stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for enterprise applications.
      • EAS projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with EAS capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just occur at the executive level but at each level of the organization.

      Impact and Result

      • Conduct an EAS project preparedness assessment as a means to ensure you maximize the value of your time, effort, and spending.
      • Gather the necessary resources to form the team to conduct the EAS selection.
      • Gett the proper EAS requirement landscape by mapping out business capabilities and processes, translating into prioritized EAS requirements.
      • Review SoftwareReviews vendor reports to shortlist vendors for your RFP process.
      • Use Info-Tech’s templates and tools to gather your EAS requirements, build your RFP and evaluation scorecard, and build a foundational EAS selection framework.

      Select an Enterprise Application Research & Tools

      Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

      1. Select an Enterprise Application Software Storyboard - A blueprint which prepares you for a proper and better enterprise application selection outcome.

      Properly selecting and implementing an enterprise application requires a proper structure. This blueprint guides you with a framework to help in such project, including steps such as assessing readiness, plan for the right resources, requirements gathering, shortlisting, obtaining and evaluating vendor responses, and preparing for implementation.

      • Select an Enterprise Application Software Storyboard

      2. Select an Enterprise Application Readiness Assessment Checklist – a checklist to assess your readiness towards moving ahead with the selection process.

      The EAS Readiness Checklist includes a list of essential tasks to be completed prior to the enterprise application selection and implementation project.

      • EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist

      3. ERP/HRIS/CRM Requirements Templates – a set of templates to help build a list of requirements and features for the selection process.

      These templates are specific to either ERP, HRIS, or CRM. Each template lists out a set of modules and features allowing you to easily build your requirements.

      • ERP Requirements Template
      • HRIS Requirements Template
      • CRM Requirements Template

      4. Vendor Solicitation (RFP) to Evaluation Suite of Tools – Use Info-Tech’s RFP, vendor response and evaluation tools and templates to increase your efficiency in your RFP and evaluation process.

      Configure this time-saving suite of tools to your organizational culture, needs, and most importantly the desired outcome of your RFP initiative.

      • EAS Request for Proposal Template
      • EAS Vendor Response Template
      • ERP Vendor Demonstration Script Template
      • HRIS Vendor Demonstration Script Template
      • CRM Vendor Demonstration Script Template
      • EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool
      [infographic]

      Workshop: Select an Enterprise Application

      Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

      1 Workshop debrief – Prepare for implementation

      The Purpose

      Review evaluation framework.

      Prepare for implementation.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Activities

      1.1 Support the project team in establishing the evaluation framework.

      1.2 Discuss demo scripts scenarios.

      1.3 Discuss next steps and key items in preparation for the implementation.

      Outputs

      Evaluation framework considerations.

      Demo script considerations.

      RFP considerations.

      2 Workshop Preparation

      The Purpose

      The facilitator works with the team to verify organizational readiness for EAS project and form the EAS project team.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Level-set on organizational readiness for EAS

      Organizational project alignment

      Activities

      2.1 Introduce the workshop and complete an overview of activities.

      2.2 Complete organizational context assessment to level-set understanding.

      2.3 Complete EAS readiness assessment.

      2.4 Form EAS selection team.

      Outputs

      EAS readiness assessment

      Structured EAS selection team

      3 Mapping Capabilities to Prioritizing Requirements

      The Purpose

      Determine the business capabilities and process impacted by the EAS.

      Determine what the business needs to get out of the EAS solution.

      Build the selection roadmap and project plan.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Business and ERP solution alignment

      Activities

      3.1 Map business capabilities/processes.

      3.2 Inventory application and data flow.

      3.3 List EAS requirements.

      3.4 Prioritize EAS requirements.

      Outputs

      Business capability/process map

      List or map of application + data flow

      Prioritized EAS requirements

      4 Vendor Landscape and your RFP

      The Purpose

      Understand EAS market product offerings.

      Readying key RFP aspects and expected vendor responses.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Shortlist of vendors to elicit RFP response.

      Translated EAS requirements into RFP.

      Activities

      4.1 Build RFP.

      4.2 Build vendor response template.

      Outputs

      Draft of RFP template.

      Draft of vendor response template.

      5 How to Evaluate Vendors

      The Purpose

      Prepare for demonstration and evaluation.

      Establish evaluation criteria.

      Key Benefits Achieved

      Narrow your options for ERP selection to best-fit vendors.

      Activities

      5.1 Run an RFP evaluation simulation.

      5.2 Establish evaluation criteria.

      5.3 Customize the RFP and Demonstration and Scoring Tool.

      Outputs

      Draft of demo script template.

      Draft of evaluation criteria.

      Draft of RFP and Demonstration and Scoring Tool.

      Further reading

      Select an Enterprise Application

      Selecting a best-fit solution requires balancing needs, cost, and vendor capability.

      Analyst Perspective

      A foundational EAS strategy is critical to decision-making.

      Enterprise application software (EAS) is a core tool that a business leverages to accomplish its goals. An EAS that is doing its job well is invisible to the business. The challenges come when the tool is no longer invisible. It has become a source of friction in the functioning of the business.

      EAS systems are expensive, their benefits are difficult to quantify, and they often suffer from poor user satisfaction. Post-implementation, technology evolves, organizational goals change, and the health of the system is not monitored. This is complicated in today’s digital landscape with multiple integration points, siloed data, and competing priorities.

      Too often organizations jump into selecting replacement systems without understanding the needs of the organization. Alignment between business and IT is just one part of the overall strategy. Identifying key pain points and opportunities, assessed in the light of organizational strategy, will provide a strong foundation to the transformation of the EAS system. Learning about different vendor product offerings with a rigorous approach and evaluation framework will pave way for a better selection outcome.

      Hong Kwok, Research Director

      Hong Kwok
      Research Director
      Info-Tech Research Group

      Executive Summary

      Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
      Selecting and implementing an EAS is one of the most expensive and time-consuming technology transformations an organization can undertake. EAS projects are notorious for time and budget overruns, with only a margin of the anticipated benefits being realized. Making the wrong technology selection or failing to plan for an EAS implementation has significant – and possibly career-ending – implications.

      The EAS technology market is so vast that it is nearly impossible to know where to start or how to differentiate between vendors and products.

      Inadequate and incomplete requirements skew the EAS selection in one direction to another. Many EAS projects fail due to a lack of clear description and specification of functional requirements.

      Organizations rarely have both the sufficient knowledge and resources to properly evaluate, select, and implement an EAS, forcing them to turn to external partnerships.

      EAS selection must be driven by your organization’s overall strategy. Ensure you are ready to embark on this journey with the right resources.

      Determine what EAS solution fits your organization through a structured requirement gathering process to a vendor evaluation framework.

      Ensure strong points of integration between EAS and other software such as ERP to HRIS. No EAS should live in isolation.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Accountability for EAS success is shared between IT and the business. There is no single owner of an EAS. A unified approach to building your strategy promotes an integrated roadmap so all stakeholders have clear direction on the future state.

      You are not just picking a piece of software, you are choosing a long-term technology partner

      Reasons for Selectin Chosen Software

      Decision making in selection often stands on functional fit; don’t forget to consider vendor fit.

      As the ERP technology market becomes increasingly saturated and difficult to decode, vendors are trying to get ahead by focusing on building a partnership, not just making a sale.

      68 % of organizations are satisfied with the overall ERP vendor experience, up from 54% in 2017.

      Panorama Consulting Solutions, “Report,” 2018

      What is an Enterprise Application?

      Our Definition: Enterprise Application Software (EAS) is a large software system that provides a broad and integrated set of features which supports a range of business operations and processes across an organization. The system is broadly deployed, provides a unified interface and data structure, allowing for higher business productivity and reporting efficiencies. Best known EAS solutions include Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Human Resource Information System (HRIS), and Customer Relationship Management (CRM).

      More focused EAS solutions may also bring benefits to your organization, depending on the scale of operations, complexity of operations, and functions. Here are some examples:

      PSA: Professional Services Automation
      SCMS: Supply Chain Management System
      WMS: Warehouse Management System
      EAM: Enterprise Asset Management
      PIMS: Product Information Management System
      MES: Manufacturing Execution System
      MA: Marketing Automation

      Our other Selection Framework

      When selecting personal or commodity applications, or mid-tier applications with spend below $100,000, use our Rapid Application Selection Framework.

      Download this tool

      Enterprise Applications Lifecycle Advisory Services

      Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

      Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

      What is EPR

      Enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems facilitate the flow of information across business units. They allow for the seamless integration of systems and create a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making.

      In many organizations, the ERP system is considered the lifeblood of the enterprise. Problems with this key operational system will have a dramatic impact on the ability of the enterprise to survive and grow.

      An ERP system:

      • Automates processes, reducing the amount of manual, routine work.
      • Integrates with core modules, eliminating the fragmentation of systems.
      • Centralizes information for reporting from multiple parts of the value chain to a single point.
      ERP use cases: Product-centric
      Suitable for organizations that manufacture, assemble, distribute, or manage material goods.
      Service-centric
      Suitable for organizations that provide and manage field services and/or professional services.

      Human Resource Information System (HRIS)

      What is HRIS?

      An HRIS is used to acquire, store, manipulate, analyze, retrieve, and distribute information regarding an organization’s human resources. HRIS covers the entire employee lifecycle from recruit to retire.

      An HRIS:

      • Retains employee data in a single repository.
      • Enhances employee engagement through self-service and visibility into their records.
      • Enhances data security through role-based access control.
      • Eliminates manual processes and enables workflow automation.
      • Reduces transaction processing time and HR administrative tasks.
      • Presents an end-to-end, comprehensive view of all HR processes.
      • Reduces exposure to risk with compliance to rules and regulations.
      • Enhances the business’s reporting capability on various aspects of human capital.

      Human Resource Information System

      Customer relationship management (CRM)

      What is CRM?

      A CRM platform (or suite) is a core enterprise application that provides a broad feature set for supporting customer interaction processes, typically across marketing, sales and customer service. These suites supplant more basic applications for customer interaction management (such as the contact management module of an ERP or office productivity suite).

      A CRM suite provides many key capabilities, including but not limited to:

      • Account management
      • Order history tracking
      • Pipeline management
      • Case management
      • Campaign management
      • Reports and analytics
      • Customer journey execution

      A CRM provides a host of native capabilities, but many organizations elect to tightly integrate their CRM solution with other parts of their customer experience ecosystem to provide a 360-degree view of their customers.

      Customer relationship management

      The good EAS numbers

      There are many good reasons to support EAS implementation and use.

      92% of organizations report that CRM use is important for accomplishing revenue objectives.
      Source: Validity, 2020

      Almost 26% of companies implement HRIS is to obtain greater functionalities, while other main reasons are to increase efficiencies, support growth, and consolidate systems.
      Source: SoftwarePath, 2022

      Functionality of an ERP is believed to be the most important aspect by almost 40% of companies.
      Source: SelectHub, 2022

      The ugly EAS numbers

      Risks are high in EAS projects.

      Statistical analysis of ERP projects indicates rates of failure vary from 50 to 70 percent. Taking the low end of those analyst reports, one in two ERP projects is considered a failure.
      Source: Electric Journal of Information Systems Evaluation.

      46% of HR technology projects exceed their planned timelines.
      Source: Unleash, 2020

      Almost 70% of all CRM implementation projects do not meet expected objectives.
      Source: Future Computing and Informatics Journal

      Enterprise Application dissatisfaction

      Finance, IT, Sales, HR, and other users of the Enterprise Application system can only optimize with the full support of each other. Cooperation between departments is crucial when trying to improve the technology capabilities and customer interaction.

      Drivers of Dissatisfaction
      Business Data People and teams Technology
      • Misaligned objectives
      • Product fit
      • Changing priorities
      • Lack of metrics
      • Access to data
      • Data hygiene
      • Data literacy
      • One view of the customer
      • User adoption
      • Lack of IT support
      • Training (use of data and system)
      • Vendor relations
      • Systems integration
      • Multi-channel complexity
      • Capability shortfall
      • Lack of product support

      Info-Tech Insight
      While technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences, there are many other drivers of dissatisfaction. IT must stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for Enterprise Applications.

      Case Study

      Align strategy and technology to meet consumer demand.

      NETFLIX

      INDUSTRY
      Entertainment

      SOURCE
      Forbes, 2017

      Challenge
      Beginning as a mail-out service, Netflix offered subscribers a catalog of videos to select from and have mailed to them directly. Customers no longer had to go to a retail store to rent a video. However, the lack of immediacy of direct mail as the distribution channel resulted in slow adoption.

      Blockbuster was the industry leader in video retail but was lagging in its response to industry, consumer, and technology trends around customer experience.

      Solution
      In response to the increasing presence of tech-savvy consumers on the internet, Netflix invested in developing an online platform as its primary distribution channel. The benefit of doing so was two-fold: passive brand advertising (by being present on the internet) and meeting customer demands for immediacy and convenience. Netflix also recognized the rising demand for personalized service and created an unprecedented, tailored customer experience.

      Results
      Netflix’s disruptive innovation is built on the foundation of great customer experience management. Netflix is now a $28 billion company, which is ten times what Blockbuster was worth.

      Netflix used disruptive technologies to innovatively build a customer experience that put it ahead of the long-time video rental industry leader, Blockbuster.

      Info-Tech’s methodology for selecting an Enterprise Application

      1. Build alignment and assemble the team 2. Define your EAS 3. Engage, evaluate, and select 4. Next steps
      Phase steps
      1. Aligning business and IT
      2. Readiness and resourcing
      1. Map capabilities
      2. List Requirements
      3. Prioritize requirements
      1. Know the products
      2. Engage the vendors
      3. Select properly
      1. Plan for implementation
      Phase outcomes Discuss organizational goals and how to advance those using the EA system. Identify gaps and remediation steps in preparation of the selection. Assemble the EA selection team. List and review business capabilities and translate into EAS requirements. Prioritize requirements for selection. Gain an understanding of the product offerings on the market. Engage the vendors through RFPs and conduct a proper evaluation with an objective evaluation criteria and framework. Review and discuss the different elements required in preparation for the implementation project.

      Blueprint deliverables

      Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

      ERP/HRIS/CRM Requirements Template

      ERP Requirements Template

      Accelerate your requirement gathering with a pre-compiled list of common requirements.

      RFx Demo Scoring Tool

      RFx Demo Scoring Tool

      Quickly compare the vendors who respond to the RFx to identify the best fit for your needs.

      Key deliverable:

      RFx templates

      Use one of our templates to build a ready-for-distribution implementation partner RFx tailored to the unique success factors of your implementation.

      Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

      DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
      "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to his the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

      Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

      Guided Implementation

      A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

      A typical GI is between six to ten calls over the course of four to six months.

      What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

      Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

      Call #1: Scoping call to understand the current situation.

      Call #2: Discuss readiness and resourcing needs.

      Call #3: Discuss the capabilities and application inventory.

      Call #4: Discuss requirement gathering and prioritization.

      Call #5: Go over SoftwareReviews and review draft RFx.

      Call #6: Discuss evaluation tool and evaluation process.

      Call #7: Discuss preparation for implementation.

      Workshop Overview

      Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
      Activities

      Organizational Strategic Needs

      1.1 Review the business context.

      1.2 Overview of the EAS Landscape

      1.2 Assess EAS project readiness

      1.3 Determine the members of the EAS selection team

      From Capabilities to Requirements

      2.1 Map business capabilities

      2.2 Inventory application and interactions

      2.3 Gather requirements

      2.4 Prioritize requirements

      Vendor Landscape and Your RFP

      3.1 Understanding product offerings

      3.2 Build a list of targeted vendors

      3.3 Build RFP

      3.4 Build vendor response template

      How to Evaluate Vendors

      4.1 Run a RFP evaluation simulation

      4.2 Build demo script

      4.3 Establish evaluation criteria

      Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

      5.1 Clean up in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

      5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

      Deliverables
      1. EAS Readiness Checklist and remediation plan
      2. List of members in EAS selection team
      1. List of key business processes
      2. Inventory application and data flow map
      3. Prioritized EAS requirements
      1. Draft RFP template
      2. Draft vendor response template
      1. Draft demo script template
      2. Draft vendor evaluation tool
      1. Completed RFP template
      2. Completed vendor response template
      3. Completed demo script template
      4. Vendor evaluation plan

      Contact your account representative for more information.
      workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

      Phase 1

      Build alignment and assemble the Team

      Phase 1
      1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
      1.2 Validate Readiness
      1.3 Determine Resourcing

      Phase 2
      1.1 Capability Mapping
      1.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
      1.3 Requirements Prioritizing

      Phase 3
      3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
      3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
      3.3 Evaluation
      Select and Negotiate

      Phase 4
      4.1 Prepare for Implementation

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      Gain an understanding of recent EAS technology.

      Validate readiness before starting EAS selection.

      Assemble EAS selection team through identification of key players.

      This phase involves the following participants:

      Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project, including:

      • CxO (e.g. CIO, CFO)
      • Departmental leaders
      • Project management team
      • Subject matter experts

      Select an Enterprise Application

      Create a compelling case that addresses strategic business objectives

      When someone at the organization asks you WHY, you need to deliver a compelling case. The ERP project will receive pushback, doubt, and resistance; if you can’t answer the question WHY, you will be left back-peddling.

      When faced with a challenge, prepare for the WHY.

      • Why do we need this?
      • Why are we spending all this money?
      • Why are we bothering?
      • Why is this important?
      • Why did we do it this way?
      • Why did we choose this vendor?

      Most organizations can answer “What?”

      Some organizations can answer “How?”

      Very few organizations have an answer for “Why?”

      Each stage of the project will be difficult and present its own unique challenges and failure points. Re-evaluate if you lose sight of WHY at any stage in the project.

      Ensure you have completed the necessary prerequisites for EAS selection

      Prior to embarking on selection, ensure you have set the right building blocks and completed the necessary prerequisites: your strategy and roadmap, and business case.

      STRATEGY & ROADMAP
      Whatever EAS is required, take the time to align your strategy and roadmap to business priorities. Right-size a technology strategy by assessing deployment model alternatives and future-state options with your EAS vision, operating model, and current-state assessment as inputs. Put your strategy to action with a living roadmap by following Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop an Actionable Strategy and Roadmap.

      EAS BUSINESS CASE
      Use a business case to justify the business need for your EAS project and secure funding for moving forward with the proposal. A business case will further provide executive decision makers with the tools to compare and prioritize initiatives. Drive a consistent approach to promoting successful initiatives and holding the organization accountable to the projected benefits with Info-Tech’s blueprint, Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case.

      Align the EAS strategy with the corporate strategy

      Corporate strategy Unified strategy EAS strategy
      • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
      • Identifies future goals and business aspirations.
      • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.
      • EAS optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate business objectives.
      • Communicates the organization’s budget and spending on EAS.
      • Identifies IT initiatives that will support the business and key EAS objectives.
      • Outlines staffing and resourcing for EAS initiatives.

      Info-Tech Insight
      EAS projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with EAS capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just to occur at the executive level alone, but at each level of the organization.

      Understand how EAS fits into your wider IT organization

      Identify the IT drivers and opportunities to take advantage of when embarking on your EAS project.

      Greenfield or brownfield: Do you currently have an EAS? Do you have multiple EASs? What is the history of your EAS deployment? How customized is it?

      End of life: What lifecycle stage is it in?

      Utilization: Are there point solutions in your application portfolio that support some EAS capabilities? Is functionality duplicated and/or underutilized?

      Reason for change: What are your organizational drivers for this EAS project (e.g. acquisition/merger)?

      APPLICATION PORTFOLIO STRATEGY

      Business leaders need application managers to do more than support business operations. Applications must drive business growth, and application managers need their portfolios to be current and effective and to evolve continuously to support the business or risk being marginalized. Rationalize your applications with a roadmap that propels the business forward.

      Go to this link

      Before switching vendors, evaluate your existing EAS to see if it’s being underutilized or could use an upgrade

      The cost of switching vendors can be challenging, but it will depend entirely on the quality of data and whether it makes sense to keep it.

      • Achieving success when switching vendors first requires reflection. We need to ask why we are dissatisfied with our incumbent software.
      • If the product is old and inflexible, the answer may be obvious, but don’t be afraid to include your incumbent in your evaluation if your issues might be solved with an upgrade.
      • Look at your use-case requirements to see where you want to take the EAS solution and compare them to your incumbent’s roadmap. If they don’t match, switching vendors may be the only solution. If your roadmaps align, see if you’re fully leveraging the solution or will be able to start working through process improvements

      Fully leveraging your current software now will have two benefits:

      1 It may turn out that poor leveraging of your incumbent software was the problem all along; switching vendors won’t solve the problem by itself. As the data to the right shows, a fifth of SMEs and a quarter of large enterprises do not fully leverage their incumbent software.
      2 If you still decide to switch, you’ll be in a good negotiating position. If vendors can see you are engaged and fully leveraging your software, they will be less complacent during negotiations to win you over.
      20%
      Small/Medium
      Enterprises
      25%
      Large
      Enterprises
      only occasionally or rarely/never use their software

      Source: SoftwareReviews, 2020; N=45,027

      Info-Tech Insight
      Switching vendors won’t improve poor internal processes. To be fully successful and meet the goals of the business case, new software implementations must be accompanied by process review and improvement.

      Familiarize yourself with the EAS market

      How it got here Where it’s going
      • Acquisition and consolidation: The major vendors in the industry have grown over time through acquisition, particularly focusing on expanding products in industrial verticals.
      • Product stack: What it means is having to navigate complexity related to the product stack when thinking about EAS, which turns the conversation from EAS as a single product to EAS as a package of multiple products.
      • Modularity and interoperability: The benefit of the stack is that it often means modularity and the ability to implement parts of a solution or in an order that aligns to the customer’s needs. On the other hand, the stack is not always understood by or well communicated to the customer, and the interdependence of components often means they must be licensed together.
      • Customizable cloud: Software-as-a-Service in multitenant environments offers a hands-off value proposition, but increasingly customers are looking to customize their instances beyond the capability offered through configurability.
      • Best-of-breed consolidation: EAS vendors are continuing to consolidate functionality to increase interoperability and increase ease of integration. The market is rife with acquisitions and mergers, making the strong players even stronger.
      • Client experience: While most vendors now offer products that will meet the wide gamut of EAS business requirements, vendors are now paying extra attention to the client experience from partnership perspective.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Evaluating the EAS vendor landscape is becoming increasingly difficult as the playing field evens out in terms of functionality offerings. As such, it is becoming increasingly important to more meticulously evaluate vendors themselves as part of the selection process. This is especially important in EAS projects, as they tend to be multi-year in nature and result in long-term vendor partnerships.

      What types of Enterprise solutions are at my disposal?

      IT leaders typically compare EAS on-premises with SaaS options, but there are actually four different deployment scenarios.

      1. On Premises 3. Proprietary Cloud 4. White-Label Cloud 2. SaaS
      • The traditional model for EAS deployment.
      • Upfront licensing term plus annual maintenance/ support fee.
      • Requires local server, database, and authentication.
      • Good support for industry modules.
      • Customizable.
      • EAS vendor hosts an instance of the EAS system in its own data center.
      • Patches may or may not be applied automatically.
      • Monthly per-user or traditional billing.
      • Otherwise, as with on premises.
      • EAS VAR or reseller hosts an instance of the EAS system in its own data center or in a public IaaS provider’s (e.g. Rackspace, Amazon EC2).
      • Otherwise, as with proprietary cloud.
      • Common model for cloud EAS.
      • All users share a single instance.
      • Patches and updates are applied automatically.
      • Monthly per-user fee.
      • Poor industry support.
      • Configurable but not customizable.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Cloud may apply in other ways to the EAS implementation. Most vendors offer particular EAS services delivered via the cloud. For example, some vendors offers CRM, project management, and payroll self-service as cloud-based options to augment on-premises ERP solutions.

      Know when to adopt and when to bypass cloud EAS

      Use the following guidelines to determine if your organization will benefit from the cloud, or if you should stick to a more traditional delivery model.

      Adopt a cloud-based EAS platform if you have: Do not adopt a cloud-based EAS platform if you have:
      Standard processes – Businesses that have standard, repeatable processes can benefit greatly from the cost savings that cloud provides, as the need for expensive customizations is greatly minimized. Highly regulated industry – Although there is no hard evidence that says cloud-based solutions are not able to support security or compliance needs, in certain industries such as banking or insurance, cloud is not the norm and may be a tough sell for IT.
      Lean IT operations – Organizations with lean IT or no formal IT departments supporting them will find SaaS EAS particularly appealing. Those with IT that can support day-to-day operations but are not prepared for disaster recovery should also consider cloud EAS, either hosted or SaaS-based. Unreliable network – If the business regularly faces network outages or remote employees have unreliable internet connections, a cloud-based solution may not be the best option. IT would face many complaints from disgruntled workers unable to access data.
      Mobile workforce – Telecommuting is becoming more common, as is the requirement for data to be readily available for those on the road. Using cloud is a good way to provide this functionality. Unsavvy workforce – Organizations that prefer to be late adopters of technology may face strong resistance to taking their software to the cloud. Some employees may not like the idea of using a browser to connect to the system.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Knowing when to choose a cloud EAS deployment comes down to two main factors: knowing the level of complexity required by the business, and knowing the available IT resources that can be dedicated to support and manage EAS.

      Consider 3 classic scenarios when evaluating cloud EAS

      Cloud EAS should be considered by all organizations, but these scenarios present the strongest opportunity.

      The Startup The Spinoff The Modernizer
      • There is no greenfield in ERP, but if you’re a startup, you’re quite close.
      • Given the virtually nonexistent IT department in startups, having an on-premises ERP can be daunting. A SaaS delivery model is usually the best choice in these scenarios. Even if the resources are available, they are better spent driving business growth.
      • Startups typically have less stringent industry requirements, making SaaS a more attractive option.
      • Though not entirely new companies, spinoffs or subsidiaries often have needs similar to those of startups but with an added integration requirement.
      • When it comes to ERP, the deployment type will depend on how resources are split with the parent company. If there is little to no IT support, then SaaS is ideal.
      • If the parent company is already using cloud ERP, whether SaaS, hosted, or an internal cloud, then it is often easy for the spinoff to gain access as well.
      • Companies with legacy systems that are not salvageable, or out-of-date point solutions that do not scale, have the opportunity to start from scratch.
      • Those looking at reducing capital expenses should consider SaaS and hosted ERP deployments.
      • Those looking at having state-of-the-art technology in-house should consider building an internal private cloud that supports their ERP deployment.

      Make sure you are ready to proceed with selection

      Organizational readiness is essential for maximizing the benefits realized from your ERP. Cover all critical elements of pre-work, resources, buy-in, and strategy and planning before embarking on ERP selection and/or implementation.

      Pre-work
      Current State Understanding
      Business Process Improvement
      Future State Vision

      Resources
      Project Team
      Governance Structures
      Third-Party Partners
      Cost and Budget

      Buy-in
      Goals and Objectives
      Exec Business Sponsorship
      Stakeholder Engagement
      Change Management

      STRATEGY and PLANNING
      ERP Strategy & Roadmap
      Risk Management
      Project Metrics

      Without a preparedness assessment, organizations end up wasting a lot of time on resolving gaps in planning that could have been mitigated upfront, which ultimately makes the implementation project more challenging.
      – Suanne McGrath-Kelly, President & Principal Consultant, Plan in Motion Inc., interviewed by Info-Tech, 2019.

      Assess your EAS readiness before moving forward

      To avoid common project pitfalls, complete the necessary prerequisites before proceeding with EAS. Consider whether the risks of proceeding unprepared fall within your organization’s risk tolerance. If they do not, pivot back to strategy.

      Preceding tasks Risks of proceeding unprepared
      Project Vision
      Project Scope
      EAS Business Case
      Current State Map
      Improvement Opportunity Analysis
      Future State Considerations
      Strategic Requirements
      Project Metrics and Benchmarks
      Risk Assessment
      EAS Strategic Roadmap
      EAS Project Work Initiatives
      Misalignment of project objectives
      Time and cost overruns
      Lack of executive buy-in or support
      Over- or under-investment in systems
      Unknown and unmet system requirements
      Product selection misfit
      Misalignment of requirements to needs
      Inability to measure project success
      Inability to proactively mitigate risk impact
      Lack of decision-making traceability
      Unclear expectations of tasks and roles

      1.2.1 Assess EAS selection readiness

      1 – 2 hours

      1. As a group, review Section 1 of the EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist with the core project team and/or project sponsor, item by item. For completed items, tick the corresponding checkbox. Document all incomplete items in the Readiness Remediation Plan table in the first column (“Incomplete Readiness Item”).
      2. For each incomplete item, use your discretion to determine whether the completion is critical in preparation for EAS selection and implementation. This may vary given the complexity of your EAS project. If the item is critical to the project, indicate this with “Y” in the second column (“Criticality (Y/N)”).
      3. For each critical item, reflect on the barriers that have prevented or are preventing its completion. Possible barriers include incomplete task dependencies, low value to effort determination, lack of organizational knowledge or resources, pressure of deadlines, etc. Document these barriers in the third column (“Barriers to Completion”).
      4. Determine a remediation approach for each barrier identified. Document the approach in the fourth column (“Remediation Approach”).
        1. For each remediation activity, designate a due date and remediation owner. Document this in the fifth column (“Due Date and Owner”).
        2. Carry out the remediation of critical tasks and return to this blueprint to kick-start your selection and implementation project.
      Input Output
      • EAS Foundation
      • EAS Strategy
      • Readiness remediation approach
      • Validation of ERP project readiness
      Materials Participants
      • EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist
      • Project sponsor
      • Core project team

      Download the EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist

      Build a well-balanced core team to see the project through

      Have a cross-departmental team define goals and objectives in order to significantly increase EAS success and improve communication.

      • Hold a meeting with Finance, Operations, and IT stakeholders. The overall objective of the meeting is to confirm that all parties agree on the goals and metrics that gauge success of the EAS project.
      • The kick-off process will significantly improve internal communications. Invite all impacted internal groups to work as a team to address any significant issues before the application process is formally activated.
      • Set up a quarterly review process to understand changing needs. This will change the way the EAS system will be utilized.

      “Each individual should understand at least one business area and have a hand in another.”
      – Mark Earley
      Senior Research Director,
      Info-Tech Research Group

      Info-Tech Insight
      An EAS selection and implementation requires more than just a procurement team. The core EAS project team should be cross-functional. .

      Be ready with a resourcing strategy for your EAS project

      EAS selection and implementation is a giant undertaking that can rarely be supported by internal resources alone.

      It is important to understand where your organization’s resourcing gaps are when embarking on a selection and implementation project. Once gaps are identified, the amount of external support needed from vendor(s), consultants, or system integrators can be determined.

      Select from the three most commonly used resourcing strategies for EAS selection and implementation projects:

      • Implement in-house using your own staff.
      • Implement using a combination of your own staff and professional services from the vendor(s) and/or system integrator (SI).
      • Implement using professional services.

      Build your implementation team

      Prioritize members from your core selection team. They will have strong insight into the tool and its envisioned position in the organization.

      General Roles

      1. Integration Specialists
      2. Solution or Enterprise Architects
      3. QA Engineer
      4. IT Service Management Team

      External Roles

      1. Vendor’s Implementation Team or Professional Services
      2. Systems Integrator (SI)

      Right-size the EAS selection team to ensure you get the right information but are still able to move ahead quickly

      Full-Time Resourcing: At least one member of these five team members must be allocated to the selection initiative as a full-time resource.

      IT Leader Technical Lead Business Analyst/
      Project Manager
      Business Lead Process Expert(s)
      This team member is an IT director or CIO who will provide sponsorship and oversight from the IT perspective. This team member will focus on application security, integration, and enterprise architecture. This team member elicits business needs and translates them into technology requirements. This team member will provide sponsorship from the business needs perspective. Typically, a CXO or SVP of a business function. These team members are the business process owners who will help steer the requirements and direction.

      Info-Tech Insight
      It is critical for the selection team to determine who has decision rights. Organizational culture will play the largest role in dictating which team member holds the final say for selection decisions. For more information on stakeholder management and involvement, see this guide.

      Complete the project timeline required during your selection phase

      Include as many steps as necessary to understand, validate, and compare vendor solutions so you can make a confident, well-informed decision.

      Use Info-Tech’s 15-Step Selection Process:

      1. Initiate procurement.
      2. Select procurement manager.
      3. Prepare for procurement; check that prerequisites are met.
      4. Select appropriate procurement vehicle (RFI, RFP, RFQ, etc.).
      5. Assemble procurement teams.
      6. Create procurement project plan.
      7. Identify and notify vendors about procurement.
      8. Configure procurement process.
      9. Gather requirements.
      10. Prioritize requirements.
      11. Build the procurement documentation package.
      12. Issue the procurement.
      13. Evaluate proposals.
      14. Evaluate vendor demos and reference checks.
      15. Recommend a vendor.

      Strengthen your procurement. If your organization lacks a clear selection process, refer to Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process research to help construct a formal process for procuring application technology.

      Download the Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process

      Visualize what success looks like

      Understand how success metrics are relevant at each stage of strategy formation by keeping the end in mind. Apply a similar thought model to your other success metrics for a holistic evaluation of your strategy.

      Implementation
      Pre-Implementation Post-Implementation
      Baseline measure Strategic insight Strategic action Success measure End result
      Use data you already have. Any given pain point can act as your pre-implementation baseline. Previously, this measure may have been evaluated by asking “what?” or “how much?” Move away from looking at your baseline measure as transactional data, and incorporate the ability to generate strategic insight with your EAS. Change the questions you are asking to drive insights: “who?” “why?” and “how does it affect the business?” Support the business by putting your strategic analytics into action. Ensure there are capabilities built into your ERP to strategically address your baseline measure. Leverage these functions to act on your strategic insights. In the interest of IT and business alignment, speak the same language when measuring success. Use a business success measurement to determine the contribution made by your EAS strategy. Visualize your success in the context of the business as a whole. Projecting success in the interest of your stakeholders will gain and maintain buy-in, allowing you to leverage the strategic functionality of your new EAS.
      Example Time to Procure Delay in time to procure caused by bottleneck in requisition processing ERP used to create advanced workflows to streamline requisition approval process Time efficiencies gained free up employee time to focus on more strategic efforts Contributed to strategic operational innovation

      Prove the value of your EAS through metrics

      Establish baseline metrics early and measure throughout the project can iteratively prove the value of your EAS.

      Functional processes IT resource efficiency
      Functional benefits and efficiencies gained through effectively diagnosing and meeting business needs. Benefits enabled through reductions in IT system, network, and resource usage.
      Example metrics Record to report
      • Days to close month-end
      • Time to produce statements
      Market to order
      • Customer retention rate
      • Conversion/Cost per lead
      • Number of help desk requests
      • Number of active users
      • Time to resolution
      Quote to cash
      • Sales cycle duration
      • Cash conversion cycle
      Issue to resolution
      • # of returns
      • # of customer complaints
      • Time to resolve complaints
      Procure to pay
      • Average time to procure
      • Cycle time of purchase order
      Forecast to delivery
      • Variance of demand plan
      • Time to replenish inventory
      Plan to perform
      • Time to complete plan
      • Variance of plan to actual
      Hire to retire
      • Training $ per employee
      • Total overtime cost

      Improve baseline metrics through…

      1. Increased help desk efficiency. Through training of personnel and increased efficiency of processes.
      2. Increased level of self-service for end users. Implementation of functionality that matches business needs will increase the efficiency of functional business tasks.
      3. Decreased time to escalation. Knowing when to escalate tasks sooner can decrease wasted effort by tier-one workers.
      4. Automation of simple, repetitive tasks. Automation frees time for more important tasks.

      1.3.1 Assemble EAS selection team

      1 hour

      1. Working as a group, list key players in the organization that should be in EAS selection team.
      2. Determine the role of each member.
      3. Define the level of commitment each member can have on the EAS selection team. Keep in mind their availabilities during the selection process.
      4. Determine who has decision rights.
      Input Output
      • Knowledge of the team, governance structure, and organizational culture
      • List members in EAS selection team
      Materials Participants
      • Sticky notes
      • Markers
      • Executive sponsor
      • Core project team

      Phase 2

      Define your EAS

      Phase 1
      1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
      1.2 Validate Readiness
      1.3 Determine Resourcing

      Phase 2
      2.1 Capability Mapping
      2.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
      2.3 Requirements Prioritizing

      Phase 3
      3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
      3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
      3.3 Evaluation
      Select and Negotiate

      Phase 4
      4.1 Prepare for
      Implementation

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      Identifying business processes , inventory applications and data flows, gathering requirements and prioritizing them.

      This phase involves the following participants:

      Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project including:

      • CxO (e.g. CIO, CFO)
      • Departmental leaders
      • Project management team
      • Subject matter experts
      • Core project team

      Select an Enterprise Application

      Leverage Info-Tech’s requirements gathering framework to serve as the basis for capturing your CRM requirements

      Requirements Gathering Framework

      Info-Tech’s Requirements Gathering Framework is a comprehensive approach to requirements management that can be scaled to any size of project or organization. This framework ensures that the application created will capture the needs of all stakeholders and deliver business value. Don’t treat elicitation, analysis, and validation in isolation: planning, monitoring, communicating, and managing must permeate all three stages in order to avoid makeshift solutions.

      Capability vs. process vs. feature

      Understanding the difference

      When examining HRMS optimization it is important to approach it from the appropriate layer.

      Capability:

      • The ability of an entity (e.g. organization or department) to achieve its objectives (APQC, 2017).
      • An ability that an organization, person, or system possesses. They are typically expressed in general and high-level terms and typically require a combination of organization, people, processes, and technology to achieve (TOGAF).

      Process:

      • Processes can be manual or technology enabled. A process is a series of interrelated activities that convert inputs into results (outputs).
      • Processes consume resources, require standards for repeatable performance, and respond to control systems that direct the quality, rate, and cost of performance. The same process can be highly effective in one circumstance and poorly effective in another with different systems, tools, knowledge, and people (APQC, 2017).

      Feature:

      • A distinguishing characteristic of a software item (e.g. performance, portability, or functionality) (IEEE, 2005).

      In today’s complex organizations, it can be difficult to understand where inefficiencies stem from and how performance can be enhanced.

      To fix problems and maximize efficiencies, organizations must examine business capabilities and processes to determine gaps and areas of lagging performance.

      Info-Tech’s HRIS framework and industry tools such as the APQC’s Process Classification Framework can help make sense of this.

      Process inventory

      Business capability map (Level 0)

      Business Capability Map

      If you do not have a documented process model, you can use the APQC Framework to help define your inventory of business processes.
      APQC’s Process Classification Framework is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.

      In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

      A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation rather than how.

      Business capabilities:

      • Represent stable business functions.
      • Are unique and independent of each other.
      • Will typically have a defined business outcome.

      A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

      EAS process mapping

      Objectives The organization’s objectives are typically outcomes that the organization is looking to achieve as a result of the business strategy.
      Value Streams Value streams are external/internal processes that help the organization realize its goals.
      Capabilities The what: Business capabilities support value streams in the creation and capture of value.
      Processes The how: Business processes define how they will fulfill a given capability.

      The operating model

      An operating model is a framework that drives operating decisions. It helps to set the parameters for the scope of EAS and the processes that will be supported. The operating model will serve to group core operational processes. These groupings represent a set of interrelated, consecutive processes aimed at generating a common output.

      The value stream

      Value stream defined:

      Value Streams Design Product Produce Product Sell Product Customer Service
      • Manufacturers work proactively to design products and services that will meet consumer demand.
      • Products are driven by consumer demand and governmental regulations.
      • Production processes and labor costs are constantly analyzed for efficiencies and accuracies.
      • Quality of product and services are highly regulated through all levels of the supply chain.
      • Sales networks and sales staff deliver the product from the organization to the end consumer.
      • Marketing plays a key role throughout the value stream, connecting consumers’ wants and needs to the products and services offered.
      • Relationships with consumers continue after the sale of products and services.
      • Continued customer support and data mining is important to revenue streams.

      Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities in the marketplace. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment in which an organization operates.

      There are two types of value streams: core and support.

      • Core value streams are mostly external-facing. They deliver value to either external or internal customers and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
      • Support value streams are internal-facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.

      An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers.

      2.1.1 List your key processes

      1-3 hours

      1. As a group, discuss the business capabilities, value streams, and business processes.
      2. For each capability determine the following:
        1. Is this capability applicable to our organization?
        2. What application, if any, supports this capability?
      3. Are there any missing capabilities to add?
      Input Output
      • Current systems
      • Key processes
      • APQC Framework
      • Organizational process map
      • List of key business processes
      Materials Participants
      • APQC Framework
      • Whiteboard, PowerPoint, or flip charts and markers
      • Primary stakeholders in each value stream supported by the EAS
      • Core project team

      Activity 2.1.1 – Process inventory

      Core finance Core HR Workforce management Talent Management Warehouse management Enterprise asset management
      Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology
      • General ledger
      • Accounts payable
      • Accounts receivable
      • GL consolidation
      • Cash management
      • Billing and invoicing
      • Expenses
      • Payroll accounting
      • Tax management
      • Reporting
      • Payroll administration
      • Benefits administration
      • Position management
      • Organizational structure
      • Core HR records
      • Time and attendance
      • Leave management
      • Scheduling
      • Performance management
      • Talent acquisition
      • Offboarding & onboarding
      • Plan layout
      • Manage inventory
      • Manage loading docks
      • Pick, pack, ship
      • Plan and manage workforce
      • Manage returns
      • Transfer product cross-dock
      • Asset lifecycle management
      • Supply chain management
      • Maintenance planning and scheduling
      Planning and budgeting Strategic HR Procurement Customer relationship management Facilities management Project management
      Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology
      • Budget reporting
      • Variance analysis
      • Multi-year operating plan
      • Monthly forecasting
      • Annual operating plan
      • Compensation planning
      • Workforce planning
      • Succession planning
      • Supplier management
      • Purchase order management
      • Workflow approvals
      • Contract / tender management
      • Contact management
      • Activity management
      • Analytics
      • Plan and acquire
      • Asset maintenance
      • Disposal
      • Project management
      • Project costing
      • Budget control
      • Document management

      Gaining Enterprise Architecture Oversight during application selection yields better user satisfaction results

      Procurement/Legal Oversight and
      Low satisfaction with software selection High satisfaction with software selection
      Process % Used % Used Process
      Used ROI/Cost Benefit Analysis 42% 43% Used ROI/Cost-Benefit Analysis
      Used Formal Decision Criteria 39% 41% Used Formal Decision Criteria
      Approval 33% 37% Enterprise Architecture Oversight and Approval
      Security Oversight and Approval 27% 36% Security Oversight and Approval
      Used Third-Party Data Reports 26% 28% Procurement/Legal Oversight and Approval
      Enterprise Architecture Oversight and Approval 26% 28% Used Third-Party Data Reports
      Used a Consultant 21% 17% Used a Consultant

      High satisfaction was defined as a response of 8, 9, or 10 from the overall recommendation question. Low satisfaction was 7 or less.

      Source: SoftwareReviews, 2018

      Map data flow

      Example ERP data flow

      Example ERP data flow

      When assessing the current application portfolio that supports your EAS, the tendency will be to focus on the applications under the EAS umbrella. These relate mostly to marketing, sales, and customer service. Be sure to include systems that act as input to, or benefit due to outputs from EAS or similar applications.

      Be sure to include enterprise applications that are not included in the EAS application portfolio. Popular systems to consider for POIs include billing, directory services, content management, and collaboration tools.

      Integration is paramount: your EAS application often integrates with other applications within the organization. Create an integration map to reflect a system of record and the exchange of data. To increase customer engagement, channel integration is a must (i.e. with robust links to unified communications solutions, email, and VoIP telephony systems).

      Enterprise application landscape

      Enterprise application landscape

      2.1.2 Inventory applications and interactions

      1-3 hours

      1. Individually list all electronic systems involved in the EAS function of the organization.
      2. Document data flows into and out of each system to the EAS. Refer to the example on the previous slides (ERP data flow) and sample Enterprise Application map.
      3. Review the processes in place (look at each functional area, including data moving into and out of systems.) Document manual processes. Identify integration points. If flow charts exist for these processes, it may be useful to provide these to the participants.
      4. If possible, diagram the system. Include information direction flow.
      Input Output
      • Business process inventory
      • List of applications (if available)
      • Current systems
      • Data flow map
      Materials Participants
      • Whiteboard, markers
      • Internal requirements documentation tools (if available)
      • Business analyst(s)
      • Subject matter experts
      • Core project team (optional)

      Understand how to navigate the complex web of stakeholders in ERP requirements gathering

      Identify which stakeholders to include and what their level of involvement should be during requirements elicitation based on relevant topic expertise.

      Sponsor End user IT Business
      Description An internal stakeholder who has final sign-off on the ERP project. Frontline users of the ERP technology. Back-end support staff who are tasked with project planning, execution, and eventual system maintenance. Additional stakeholders who will be impacted by any ERP technology changes.
      Examples
      • CEO
      • CIO/CTO
      • COO
      • CFO
      • Warehouse personnel
      • Sales teams
      • HR admins
      • Applications manager
      • Vendor relationship manager(s)
      • Director, Procurement
      • VP, Marketing
      • Manager, HR
      Value Executive buy-in and support is essential to the success of the project. Often, the sponsor controls funding and resource allocation. End users determine the success of the system through user adoption. If the end user does not adopt the system, the system is deemed useless and benefits realization is poor. IT is likely to be responsible for more in-depth requirements gathering. IT possesses critical knowledge concerning system compatibility, integration, and data. Involving business stakeholders in the requirements gathering will ensure alignment between HR and organizational objectives.

      Stakeholder influence vs. interest

      Large-scale EAS projects require the involvement of many stakeholders from all corners and levels of the organization, including project sponsors, IT, end users, and business stakeholders. Consider the influence and interest of stakeholders in contributing to the requirements elicitation process and involve them accordingly.

      Chart of Stakeholder Involvement during selection

      Extract functional and non-functional requirements from the customer interaction business process diagrams

      Once the most significant processes have been mapped, the business requirements must be extracted from the maps and transformed into functional and non-functional requirements. The example below illustrates how to extract requirements from an insurance claim process for the Record Claim step.

      Task Input Output Risks Opportunities Condition Sample requirements
      Record customer service claim Customer email Case record
      • Agent accidentally misses the email and case is not submitted
      • Reduce time to populate customer’s claim information into the case
      • Automation of data capture and routing
      • Pre-population of the case with the email contents
      • Suggested routing based on nature of case
      • Multi-language support

      Business:

      • System requires email-to-case functionality

      Non-functional:

      • The cases must be supported in multiple languages

      Functional:

      • The case must support the following information:
        • Title
        • Customer
        • Subject
        • Case origin
        • Case type

      Example claims process

      2.2.1 Capture your EAS requirements

      Time required varies

      1. Focus groups of 10-20 individuals may be the best way to ensure complete coverage of business requirements for EAS. This group should be cross-functional, with manager- or director-level representation from the departments that have a vested interest in the EAS project.
      2. Use your organization’s standard internal tools or download Info-Tech’s ERP Requirements Template, HRIS Requirements Template, or CRM Requirements Template.
      3. Document the requirements from the elicitation sessions.
      • The core team of business analysts should be present throughout, and the sessions should be led by an experienced facilitator (such as a senior business analyst).
      • Requirements for EAS should focus on achieving the future state rather than replicating the current state.
      • The facilitator should steer the team toward requirements that are solution-agnostic (i.e. not coached in terms of a particular vendor or product). Focus on customer and internal personas to help drive requirements.
      Input Output
      • Business unit functional requirements
      • Business process inventory
      • Data flow map
      • Inventory of business requirements
      Materials Participants
      • Whiteboard, markers
      • Internal requirements documentation tools (if available)
      • Info-Tech’s ERP Requirements Template, HRIS Requirements Template, or CRM Requirements Template (optional)
      • Business analyst(s)
      • Project manager
      • Subject matter experts
      • Core project team (optional)

      Prioritize your EAS requirements to assist with the selection

      Requirements prioritization ensures that the ERP selection project team focuses on the right requirements when putting together the RFP.

      Prioritization is the process of ranking each requirement based on its importance to project success. Hold a meeting for the domain SMEs, implementation SMEs, project managers, and project sponsors to prioritize the requirements list. At the conclusion of the meeting, each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The implementation SMEs will use these priority levels to ensure efforts are targeted toward the proper requirements and to plan features available on each release.

      Use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order requirements.

      The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization
      Must have Requirements must be implemented for the solution to be considered successful.
      Should have Requirements that are high priority should be included in the solution if possible.
      Could have Requirements are desirable but not necessary and could be included if resources are available.
      Won't have Requirements won’t be in the next release, but will be considered for the future releases.

      The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994. MindTools.

      Base your prioritization on the right set of criteria

      Effective prioritization criteria

      Criteria Description
      Regulatory and legal compliance These requirements will be considered mandatory.
      Policy compliance Unless an internal policy can be altered or an exception can be made, these requirements will be considered mandatory.
      Business value significance Give a higher priority to high-value requirements.
      Business risk Any requirement with the potential to jeopardize the entire project should be given a high priority and implemented early.
      Likelihood of success Especially in “proof of concept” projects, it is recommended that requirements have good odds.
      Implementation complexity Give a higher priority to low implementation difficulty requirements.
      Alignment with strategy Give a higher priority to requirements that enable the corporate strategy.
      Urgency Prioritize requirements based on time sensitivity.
      Dependencies A requirement on its own may be low priority, but if it supports a high-priority requirement, then its priority must match it.

      2.3.1 Prioritize your solution requirements

      Time required varies

      1. Consolidate all duplicate requirements to form a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive list of functional and non-functional requirements.
      2. Identify the significance of each requirement for your solution evaluation according to the MoSCoW model. Control the number of mandatory requirements you document. Too many mandatory requirements could create an unrealistic framework for evaluating solutions.
      3. Categorize your requirements and delineate between functional (i.e. capabilities the system will be able to perform) and non-functional (i.e. environmental conditions of the system, such as technical and security requirements).
      InputOutput
      • Inventory of business requirements
      • Inventory of business requirements with priorities
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Whiteboard, markers
      • Internal requirements documentation tools (if available)
      • Info-Tech’s ERP Requirements Template, HRIS Requirements Template, or CRM Requirements Template (optional)
      • Business analyst(s)
      • Project manager
      • Subject matter experts
      • Core project team

      Identify which vendors’ product and capabilities meet your must-have requirements

      Highlight must-haves in the RFP

      • Once you have prioritized your business requirements for the EAS initiative, it is time to package them into an RFP.
      • It is critical to highlight must-have requirements in the RFP document. Doing so immediately eliminates vendors who do not feel that their products are suitable for your needs.

      WATCH OUT!

      Many vendors will try to stretch their capabilities to fit your must-have requirements. Leverage vendor demos in the next stage of selection to quickly rule out products that do not cover your critical requirements.

      Identify key process areas where you require vendor knowledge

      Example of Key process areas

      Completing a process inventory and a list of EAS requirements often shows process areas that need updates and improvement. Take this opportunity to highlight areas where you would benefit from knowing about most recent best practices and technologies.

      Inquire about these when engaging the vendor to know their level of knowledge and how their products work best in your industry.

      General product knowledge requests are not enough. Be specific.

      Determine the product knowledge areas that are specific to your implementation.

      Product Knowledge Proof of Concept Development Customer Service Warehousing Core HR Other Overall
      Data Security *
      Process Improvements * *
      Configuration
      Data Architecture *
      Integration
      On premise Infrastructure
      Cloud Infrastructure *
      Other

      Identify the product knowledge that is required in relation to your implementation. This can include core product knowledge and should be related to larger infrastructure and organizational requirements.

      More than just functional requirements

      What to include What to look at What is differentiating
      • Remember to include must-have conditions that do not directly relate to the behavior or functionality of the EAS product, but rather describe environmental conditions under which the solution must remain effective or qualities that the systems must have.
      • These can include requirements related to capacity, speed, security, availability, and the information architecture and presentation of the user interface.
      • Consider the vendor’s overall ability to execute.
        • Are they financially stable?
        • Do they have the resources to execute?
        • Do they have the skills to execute?
        • Are they able to provide post-implementation support?
      • Vendors understand that SaaS isn’t for everyone. Deployment models are one way they will continue to differentiate themselves.
      • Some vendors choose to compete on breadth and others on depth of expertise in public, private, and hosted cloud offerings.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Be wary of sunsetting products! Selecting the EAS based on a good knowledge of the vendor’s roadmap allows for business operations to continue without having to repeat a selection and implementation project in the near future.

      Dominant use-case scenarios for potential ERP solutions

      While an organization may be both product- and service-centric, most organizations fall into one of the two categories.

      Use case: Public sector

      The service-centric ERP use case is suitable for most organizations in the public sector. With that in mind, consider ERP solutions that offer grant disbursements, fleet management, and staffing/resourcing capabilities.

      Product-centric ERP Service-centric ERP
      What it is The product-centric ERP is suitable for organizations that manufacture, assemble, distribute, or manage material goods throughout a product lifecycle. ERP vendors and/or products that align to this use case usually cater to industries such as manufacturing, retail, aerospace and defense, distribution, and food and beverage. The service-centric ERP use case is suitable for organizations that provide and manage field services and/or professional services throughout a project lifecycle. ERP vendors and/or products that align to this use case usually cater to industries such as utilities, maintenance and repair, government, education, and professional services (i.e. consulting, legal).
      How it works Product-centric ERP has strong functionality in supply chain management, manufacturing, procurement management, and material job and project management. Service-centric ERP has strong functionality in resource job and project management, service management, and customer relationship management.

      EAS table stakes vs differentiating features

      Make sure features align with your objectives first.

      What are table stakes / standard features?

      • For every type of EAS, such as ERP, HRIS, and CRM, certain features are standard, but that doesn’t mean they are all equal.
      • The existence of features doesn’t guarantee quality or functionality to the standards you need. Never assume that yes in a features list means you don’t need to ask for a demo.

      What is differentiating/additional feature?

      • Differentiating features take two forms:
        • Some platforms offer differentiating features that are vertical specific.
        • Other platforms offer differentiating features that are considered cutting edge. These cutting-edge features may become table stakes over time.
      • These features may increase productivity but also require process changes.

      Info-Tech Insight
      If table stakes are all you need from your EAS solution, the only true differentiator for the organization is price. Otherwise, dig deeper to find the best price to value for your needs. Remove the product from your shortlist if table stakes are not met!

      Reign-In Ballooning Scope for EAS Selection Projects

      Stretching the EAS beyond its core capabilities is a short-term solution for a long-term problem. Educate stakeholders about the limits of EAS technology.

      Common pitfalls for EAS selection

      • Tangential capabilities may require separate solutions. It is common for stakeholders to list features such as content management as part of the new EAS platform. While content management goes hand in hand with the EAS’s ability to manage customer interactions, document management is best handled by a standalone platform.

      Keeping stakeholders engaged and in line

      • Ballooning scope leads to stakeholder dissatisfaction. Appeasing stakeholders by over customizing the platform will lead to integration and headaches down the road.
      • Make sure stakeholders feel heard. Do not turn down ideas in the midst of an elicitation session. Once the requirements gathering sessions are completed, the project team has the opportunity to mark requirements as “out of scope”, and communicate the reasoning behind the decision.
      • Educate stakeholders on the core functionality of EAS. Many stakeholders do not know the best-fit use cases for EAS platforms. Help end users understand what EAS is good at, and where additional technologies will be needed.

      Phase 3

      Engage, Evaluate, and Finalize Selection

      Phase 1
      1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
      1.2 Validate Readiness
      1.3 Determine Resourcing

      Phase 2
      2.1 Capability Mapping
      2.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
      2.3 Requirements Prioritizing

      Phase 3
      3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
      3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
      3.3 Evaluation Select and Negotiate

      Phase 4
      4.1 Prepare for Implementation

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      In this phase of the project, you will review your RFx and build an initial list of vendors/implementors to reach out to. The final step is to build your evaluation checklist for rating the incoming responses.

      This phase involves the following participants:

      Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project including:

      • Evaluation team
      • Vendor management team
      • Project management team
      • Core project team

      Select an Enterprise Application

      Products and vendors demystified

      Knowing who can provide the solution will shorten the selection process and provide the most suitable set of features.

      The Product The Vendor The VAR
      A product is the software, hardware, add-ins, and any value-added services or tools that are bundled together, e.g. SAP Rise (see What is RISE with SAP), SAP S4/HANA, etc. A vendor can carry and sell multiple products or lines of products (e.g. Oracle sells Oracle Fusion and NetSuite, etc.). The Value-added reseller (VAR) can sell a pre-packaged / pre-configured product. VARs are usually partners of the vendor and typically provide other packaged services including system hosting, customization, implementation, and integrations.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Selecting an Enterprise Application is much more than just selecting a software or product; it is selecting a long-term platform and partner to help achieve long-term strategic goals. Refer to our blueprint Select an ERP Implementation Partner.

      Consolidating the vendor shortlist up-front reduces downstream effort

      Put the “short” back in shortlist!

      • Radically reduce effort by narrowing the field of potential vendors earlier in the selection process. Too many organizations don’t funnel their vendor shortlist until near the end of the selection process. The result is wasted time and effort evaluating options that are patently not a good fit.
      • Leverage external data (such as SoftwareReviews) and expert opinion to consolidate your shortlist into a smaller number of viable vendors before the investigative interview stage, and eliminate time spent evaluating dozens of RFP responses.
      • Having fewer RFP responses to evaluate means you will have more time to do greater due diligence.

      Review your use cases to start your shortlist

      Your Info-Tech analysts can help you narrow down the list of vendors that will meet your requirements.

      Next steps will include:

      1. Reviewing your requirements.
      2. Checking out SoftwareReviews.
      3. Creating the RFP.
      4. Conducting demos and detailed proposal reviews.
      5. Selecting and contracting with a finalist!

      Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

      SoftwareReviews

      The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

      Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

      The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

      Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

      Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

      Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.

      Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.

      Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.

      User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

      SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech.

      Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. The insights of our expert analysts provide unparalleled support to our members at every step of their buying journey.

      CLICK HERE to access SoftwareReviews

      Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions.

      We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

      Case Study

      Manufacturer and retailer utilizes Info-Tech for goal of unifying four separate ERP systems

      INDUSTRY
      Manufacturing

      SOURCE
      Info-Tech Consulting

      Challenge Solution Results

      An amalgamation of eight different manufacturing, retail, and supply brands that operated four separate ERP systems and processes across the United States had poor visibility into operations.

      The organization had plans to unify the brands from a systems perspective and accommodate the company’s growth in a scalable and repeatable way.

      Info-Tech was previously engaged to perform an Establish a Concrete ERP Foundation workshop to set the groundwork for the eventual ERP selection.

      The organization engaged Info-Tech’s consulting group to assist in requirements gathering and RFP development.

      Info-Tech consultants traveled to five different states to gather ERP requirements from stakeholders and identify solution requirements.

      Info-Tech developed an ERP requirements matrix from the organization’s processes, including technical requirements and operations/support services.

      Info-Tech matched the organization with a use case and weighted requirements to assist in future scoring.

      An RFP was constructed using the organization’s requirements. and distributed to 10 qualified vendors for completion.

      Strengthen your RFP process with a thorough review

      Drive better sourcing outcomes.

      A quality SOW is the result of a quality RFI/RFP (RFx).

      Use Info-Tech’s RFP Review as a Service to review key items and ensure your RFP will generate quality responses and SOWs.

      • Is it well structured, with a consistent use of fonts and bullets?
      • Is it laid out in sections that are easily identifiable and that progress from high-level to more detailed information?
      • Can a vendor quickly identify the ten (or fewer) things that are most important to you?

      Contact Us

      3.2.1 Prepare the RFP

      1-2 hours

      1. Download Info-Tech’s ERP Request for Proposal Template or prepare internal best-practice RFP tools.
      2. Build your RFP.
        1. Complete the statement of work and general information sections to provide organizational context to your long-listed vendors.
        2. Outline the organization’s procurement instructions for vendors, including due diligence, assessment criteria, and dates.
        3. Input the business requirements document as created in Activity 1.3.1.
        4. Create a scenario overview to provide vendors with an opportunity to give an estimated price.
      3. Obtain approval for your RFP. Each organization has a unique procurement process; follow your own organization’s process as you submit your RFPs to vendors. Ensure compliance with your organization’s standard and gain approval for submitting your RFP.
      Input Output
      • Business requirements document
      • Procurement procedures
      • EAS RFP
      Materials Participants
      • Internal RFP tools/ templates (if available)
      • Info-Tech’s ERP RFP Template (optional)
      • Procurement SMEs
      • Project manager
      • Core project team (optional)

      Download the ERP Request for Proposal Template

      Streamline your evaluation of vendor responses

      Use Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template to standardize vendor responses.

      • Vendors tend to use their own standard templates when responding, which complicates evaluations.
      • Customize Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template to adjust for the scope and content of your project; input your organization’s procurement process and ERP requirements.
      • The template is meant to streamline the evaluation of vendor responses by ensuring you achieve comprehensiveness and consistency across all vendor responses. The template requires vendors to prove their organizational viability, understanding of the problem, and tested technology and implementation methodologies.

      Sections of the tool:

      1 Executive Summary

      2 About the Vendor

      3 Understanding of the Challenge

      4 Methodology

      5 Proposed Solution

      6 Project Plan and Timeline

      7 Vendor Qualifications

      8 References

      9 Additional Value-Added Services

      10 Additional Value-Added Goods

      For an explanation of how advanced features are determined, see Information Presentation – Feature Ranks (Stoplights) in the Appendix.

      What to look in vendor responses

      Vendor responses to an RFP can be very revealing about whether their product offering aligns with your EAS roadmap.

      Validate the vendor responses so that there are no misunderstandings with their offer. Here are key items to validate.

      Key items Why is this important?
      About the Vendor This is where the vendor will describe itself and prove its organizational viability.
      Understanding of the Challenge Demonstrating understanding of the problem is the first step in being able to provide a solution.
      Methodology Shows the vendor has a proven methodology to approach and solve the challenge.
      Proposed Solution Describes how the vendor will address the challenge. This is a very important section as it will articulate what you will receive from the vendor as a solution.
      Project Plan and Timeline Provides an overview of the project management methodology, phases of the project, and what will be delivered and when.
      Vendor Qualifications Provides evidence of prior experience with delivering similar projects for similar clients.
      References Provides contact information for individuals or organizations for which the vendor has worked and who can vouch for the experience and success of working with this vendor.
      Value-Added Services and Goods Allows vendors an opportunity to set themselves apart from the competition with additional services and/or goods applicable to your project but not covered elsewhere in the template.

      3.2.2 Build a vendor response template

      1-2 hours

      1. Download Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template.
      2. Validate that the provided template is comprehensive and will collect the information necessary for your organization to effectively evaluate the product and vendor and will inform a decision to invite the vendor in for a demonstration.
      3. Make the small customizations necessary to tailor the template to your organization (i.e. swap out “[Company X]” for your organization’s name).

      Download the ERP Vendor Response Template

      InputOutput
      • EAS RFP
      • ERP Vendor Response Template
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template
      • Procurement SMEs
      • Project manager
      • Core project team

      3.2.3 Evaluate RFP responses

      Varies

      1. Customize Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool to build a vendor and product evaluation framework for your EAS selection team.
      2. Review all RFP responses together with the core project team and stakeholders from procurement (if necessary).
      3. Input vendor solution information into the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool.
      4. Analyze the vendors against your evaluation framework by paying specific attention to costing, overall score, and evaluation notes and comments.
      5. Identify vendors with whom you wish to arrange vendor demonstration.
      6. Contact vendors and arrange briefings.
      InputOutput
      • EAS RFP
      • ERP Vendor Response Template
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template
      • Procurement SMEs
      • Project manager
      • Core project team

      Download the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool

      Identify specific use cases and develop demonstration scenarios

      These techniques can be used to gather requirements now and for vendor demos during the evaluation stage.

      Describe use cases to indicate how the various processes will operate. This technique can help end-users describe what the solution must do without needing to know how to describe requirements. Outline scenarios based on these use cases for vendors to demonstrate how their solution can fulfill business requirements.

      Define
      Define objectives for each specific use case.

      Explore
      Explore the various process paths and alternate outcomes for each use case.

      Build
      Build the details of the scenarios to describe the roles of the people involved and the detailed process steps to be accomplished.

      Use
      For each scenario, outline the expected outputs and variations.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Do not exceed three vendors when selecting participants for a product demonstration. Each vendor demonstration should last between one day and one week, depending on the scope of the project. Exceeding the threshold of three vendors can be massively time consuming and yield diminishing returns.

      Conduct vendor demos that extend beyond baseline requirements

      • Demo scripts should focus on differentiating vendor processes and capabilities that contribute to achieving your business’ strategic objectives.
      • You want vendors to show you what differentiates them and what can they do that is specific to your industry.
      • Avoid focusing on baseline EAS capabilities. While this may drive consistency across demonstrations, you will not get a clear picture of how one vendor may align with your unique business needs.
      • Ask the vendor questions pertaining to the differentiating factors listed below. Consider if the differentiating factors are worthwhile over the baseline capabilities shown.
      Adhere to this framework when crafting your scenarios:
      Simple and straightforward Series of steps
      • A straightforward narrative of what you need the product to do.
      • Once written, scenarios should be circulated to key stakeholders in the organization for validation.
      • Demonstrate how a user would interact with the system.
      • Should not be an explanation of specific features/functions.
      Specific Suitable for your business
      • Demonstrate exactly what you need the system to do, but don’t get into implementation details – don’t go too far into the how.
      • Select only critical functions that must be demonstrated.
      • Scenarios should reflect current realities within the organization, while still allowing processes to be improved.

      Add your scenarios to Info-Tech’s sample EAS demo script

      Take a holistic approach to vendor and product evaluation

      Almost – or equally – as important as evaluating vendor feature capabilities is the need to evaluate vendor viability and non-functional aspects of the EAS solution. Include an evaluation of the following criteria in your vendor scoring methodology.

      Vendor capability Description
      Usability and Intuitiveness The degree to which the system interface is easy to use and intuitive to end users.
      Ease of IT Administration The degree to which the IT administrative interface is easy to use and intuitive to IT administrators.
      Ease of Data Integration The relative ease with which the system can be integrated with an organization’s existing application environment including legacy systems, point solutions, and other large enterprise applications.
      Ease of Customization The relative ease with which a system can be customized to accommodate niche or industry-specific business or functional needs.
      Vendor Support Options The availability of vendor support options including selection consulting, application development resources, implementation assistance, and ongoing support resources.
      Availability and Quality of Training The availability of quality training services and materials that will enable users to get the most out of the product selected.
      Product Strategy, Direction, and Rate of Improvement The vendor’s proven ability for constant product improvement, deliberate strategic direction, and overall commitment to research and development efforts in responding to emerging trends.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Evaluating the vendor capabilities, not just product capabilities, is particularly important with EAS solutions. EAS solutions are typically long-term commitments; ensure that your organization is teaming up with a vendor or provider that you feel you can work well with and depend on.

      Case Study

      Structured RFP and demo processes ease the pain of vendor evaluations during the selection phase.

      INDUSTRY
      Automotive

      SOURCE
      Research Interview

      Challenge Solution Results

      This company is one of the largest automotive manufacturers worldwide and has various manufacturing facilities and distribution centers across Canada.

      With over 8,000 employees, the company has a multifaceted health and safety program. While head office enabled and used the health and safety module within the existing HRIS, some divisions within the company found the system complex and were still relying heavily on manual entry spreadsheets for incident investigations. As a result, the company decided to explore other options.

      A project team was created, led by a project manager from head office’s IT department. The team also included health and safety specialists from across the organization, who served as subject matter experts.

      The team put together a project outline, a roadmap for required functionality, and a business case to present to senior leadership, highlighting benefits and potential payback.

      After acquiring executive sponsorship, the team developed a Request for Proposal that was sent to 11 vendors.

      Among the evaluation criteria set in the RFP, injury cost analysis and analytics on safety were identified as the most critical requirements. Based on this criteria, the team narrowed down the options to four RFP responses, which were opened to 16 different sites to ensure consensus across the company.

      The team developed demo scripts to guide the product demonstrations. They also built evaluation scorecards that were used to narrow down the selection to two vendors. Ultimately, the final selection decision came down to how well the vendors’ teams knew the business, and the vendor that demonstrated greater industry expertise was selected.

      3.2.4 Build a demo script for product demonstration evaluation

      1-2 hours

      1. With the EAS selection team, use Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Demonstration Script, HRIS Vendor Demonstration Script, or CRM Vendor Demonstration Script to write a demo script that reflects your organization’s EAS needs.
      2. Outline the logistics of the demonstration in the Introduction section of the template. Be sure to outline the total length of the demo and the amount of time that should be dedicated to the following:
        1. Product demonstration in response to the demo script.
        2. Showcase of unique product elements, not reflective of the demo script.
        3. Question and answer session.
        4. Breaks and other potential interruptions.
      3. Provide prompts for the vendor to display the capabilities by listing and describing usage scenarios by functional area. For example, when asking a vendor to demonstrate financial and accounting management capabilities, you may break scenarios out by task (e.g. general ledger, accounts payable) or user role (e.g. finance manager, administrator).

      Info-Tech Insight
      Challenge vendor project teams during product demonstrations. Asking the vendor to make adjustments or customizations on the fly will allow you to get an authentic feel for product capability and flexibility and for the degree of adaptability of the vendor project team. Ask the vendor to demonstrate how to do things not listed in your user scenarios, such as change system visualizations or design, change underlying data, add additional data sets, demonstrate collaboration capabilities, or trace an audit trail.

      3.2.4 Build a demo script for product demonstration evaluation

      Before the actual demonstrations, remember to communicate to the team the scenarios to be covered. Distribute the scripts ahead of the demonstrations so that the evaluation team know what is expected from the vendors.

      Input Output
      • Business requirements document
      • Logistical considerations
      • Usage scenarios by functional area
      • EAS demo script
      Materials Participants
      • Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Demonstration Script, HRIS Vendor Demonstration Script, or CRM Vendor Demonstration Script
      • Business analyst(s)
      • Core project team

      A vendor scoring model provides a clear anchor point for your evaluation of EAS vendors based on a variety of inputs

      A vendor scoring model is a systematic method for effectively assessing competing vendors. A weighted-average scoring model is an approach that strikes a strong balance between rigor and evaluation speed.

      How do I build a scoring model? What are some of the best practices?
      • Start by shortlisting the key criteria you will use to evaluate your vendors. Functional capabilities should always be a critical category, but you’ll also want to look at criteria such as affordability, architectural fit, and vendor viability.
      • Depending on the complexity of the project, you may break down some criteria into sub-categories to assist with evaluation (for example, breaking down functional capabilities into constituent use cases so you can score each one).
      • One you’ve developed the key criteria for your project, the next step is weighting each criteria. Your weightings should reflect the priorities for the project at hand. For example, some projects may put more emphasis on affordability, others on vendor partnership.
      • Using the information collected in the subsequent phases of this blueprint, score each criteria from 1-100, then multiply by the weighting factor. Add up the weighted scores to arrive at the aggregate evaluation score for each vendor on your shortlist.
      • While the criteria for each project may vary, it’s helpful to have an inventory of repeatable criteria that can be used across application selection projects. The next slide contains an example that you can add or subtract from.
      • Don’t go overboard on the number of criteria: five to ten weighted criteria should be the norm for most projects. The more criteria (and sub-criteria) you must score against, the longer it will take to conduct your evaluation. Always remember – link the level of rigor to the size and complexity of your project! It’s possible to create a convoluted scoring model that takes significant time to fill out but yields little additional value.
      • Creation of the scoring model should be a consensus-driven activity between IT, procurement, and the key business stakeholders – it should not be built in isolation. Everyone should agree on the fundamental criteria and weights that are employed.
      • Consider using not just the outputs of investigative interviews and RFP responses to score vendors, but also third-party review services like SoftwareReviews.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Even the best scoring model will still involve some “art” rather than science – scoring categories such as vendor viability always entail a degree of subjective interpretation.

      Establish vendor evaluation criteria

      Vendor demonstrations are an integral part of the selection process. Having clearly defined selection criteria will help with setting up relevant demos and informing the vendor scorecards.

      Vendor evaluation criteria (weight)

      Functionality (30%) Ease of Use (25%)
      • Breadth of capability
      • Tactical capability
      • Operational capability
      • End-user usability
      • Administrative usability
      • UI attractiveness
      • Self-service options
      Cost (15%) Vendor (15%)
      • Maintenance
      • Support
      • Licensing
      • Implementation (internal and external costs)
      • Support model
      • Customer base
      • Sustainability
      • Product roadmap
      • Proof of concept
      • Implementation model
      Technology (15%)
      • Configurability options
      • Customization requirements
      • Deployment options
      • Security and authentication
      • Integration environment
      • Ubiquity of access (mobile)

      Info-Tech Insight
      Do not buy something that does not fit your functional needs just because it is the cheapest. ERP is a massive, long-term investment. If you purchase a system that does not contain the functionality that meets the organization’s business needs, not only will you face issues with user adoption, but you may also face having to revisit your ERP project down the road. In the end, this will cost you more than it will save you.

      Conduct client reference interviews to identify how other organizations have successfully used the vendor’s solution

      Request references from the vendors. Make sure the vendors deliver what they promise.

      Vendors are inevitably going to provide references that will give positive feedback, but don’t be afraid to dig into the interviews to understand some of the limitations related to the solution.

      • Even if a vendor is great for one client doesn’t necessarily mean it will fit for you. Ask the vendor to provide references from organizations in your own or a similar industry or from someone who has automated similar business processes or outlined similar expectations.
      • Use these reference calls as an opportunity to gain a more accurate understanding of the quality of the vendor’s service support and professional services.
      • If you are looking to include a high level of customization in your EAS solution, pay particular attention to this step and the client responses, as these will help you understand how easy a vendor is to work with.
      • Make the most of your client reference interviews by preparing your questions in advance and following a specific script.

      Sample Reference Check Questions

      Use Info-Tech’s Sample Reference Check Questions to provide a framework and starting point for your interviews with a vendor’s previous clients. Review the questions and customize to fit your needs.

      Determine costs of the solution

      Ensure the business case includes both internal and external costs related to the new EAS platform, allocating costs of project managers to improve accuracy of overall costs and level of success.

      EAS solutions include application costs and costs to design processes, install, and configure. These start-up costs can be a significant factor in whether the initial purchase is feasible.

      EAS vendor costs Internal costs
      • Application licensing
      • Implementation and configuration
      • Professional services
      • Maintenance and support
      • Training
      • Third-party add-ons
      • Data transformation
      • Integration
      • Project management
      • Business readiness
      • Change management
      • Resourcing (user groups, design/consulting, testing)
      • Training
      • Auditors (if regulatory requirements need vetting)
      When thinking about vendor costs, also consider the matching internal cost associated with the vendor activity (e.g. data cleansing, internal support). Project management is a top-five critical success factor at all stages of an enterprise application initiative from planning to post-implementation (Information Systems Frontiers). Ensuring that costs for such critical areas are accurately represented will contribute to success.

      Bring in the right resources to guarantee success. Work with the PMO or project manager to get creating the SOW.

      60% of IT projects are not finished “mostly or always” on time (Wellingtone, 2018).

      55% of IT personnel feel that the business objectives of their software projects are clear to them (Geneca, 2017).

      Download the blueprint Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable to define requirements for installation and configuration.

      3.3.1 Establish your evaluation criteria

      Time required varies

      Customize Info-Tech’s RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool to build an evaluation framework for vendor responses based on set criteria rather than relative comparisons.

      This tool allows you to evaluate whether your organization’s requirements have been met by the vendor RFP response and provides a location for comprehensive documentation of the RFP response and demonstration details, including costing and availability/quality of product features, architecture, and vendor support.

      Finally, the tool gives you the ability to evaluate your shortlisted vendors’ demonstrations.

      InputOutput
      • Business requirements document
      • Logistical considerations
      • Usage scenarios by functional area
      • EAS evaluation criteria
      MaterialsParticipants
      • Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool
      • Procurement SMEs
      • Core project team

      3.3.1 Establish your evaluation criteria

      Time required varies

      1. With the EAS selection team, brainstorm a list of criteria against which you are going to evaluate each vendor and product.
      2. Categorize each criteria into four to eight groups.
      3. Assign ranked weightings to each category of evaluation criteria. The weightings should add up to 100%. Be sure to identify which criteria are most important to your team by assigning higher weightings to those criteria. If you are having trouble assigning ranked weightings to criteria, take your team through an exercise of ranking pairs. For example, if deciding on the ranked importance of cost, ease of use, and vendor support, break down the discussion by addressing just two criteria at a time: “Between cost and ease of use, which is more important?” If cost is selected… “Between cost and vendor support, which is more important?” If cost is selected again, decide on your second and third rankings by addressing the remaining two criteria… “Between vendor support and ease of use, which is more important?”
      4. Document the final output from this activity as an input to your EAS selection. Optionally, record it in Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool.

      Download the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool

      Info-Tech Insight
      Do not reveal your evaluation criteria to vendors. Allowing vendors to see what matters most to your organization may sway their response and/or demo. Avoid this by keeping your decided evaluation criteria and weightings among your selection team only.

      3.3.2 Evaluate vendor product demonstrations

      Time required varies

      1. Using the demonstration script and vendor criteria previously established, customize Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool to build a scorecard that quickly evaluates vendor product demonstrations.
      2. Distribute the scorecard to every member of the team who is evaluating a particular demonstration.
      3. Evaluate each vendor product demonstration using the tool.
      4. Average all scores from each vendor demonstration to inform your selection decision. Note that the vendor with the highest overall score may not necessarily be the best fit for your organization.
      Input Output
      • Demonstration script
      • Evaluation criteria
      • ERP demonstration vendor scores
      Materials Participants
      • Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool
      • Core project team

      Download the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool

      Decision Point: Select the Finalist

      After reviewing all vendor responses to your RFP, conducting vendor demos, and running a pilot project (if applicable) – the time has arrived to select your finalist.

      All core selection team members should hold a session to score each shortlisted vendor against the criteria enumerated on the previous slide, based on an in-depth review of proposals, the demo sessions, and any pilots or technical assessments.

      The vendor that scores the highest in aggregate is your finalist.

      Congratulations – you are now ready to proceed to final negotiation and inking a contract. This blueprint provides a detailed approach on the mechanics of a major vendor negotiation.

      Get the best value out from your EAS vendor. Negotiate on your own terms.

      Here are a few tips common to EAS vendors and its offerings.

      Vendors will give time-limited discounts to obtain your buy-in.

      • Depending on your procurement process, it is good practice to have at least two competing vendors in the running to obtain the best value.
      • Make sure that the package offered is coherent – that there are no gaps in the product offering.
      • Ask for access to a higher level of customer care or even developers to obtain quicker, specific support
      • Inquire about specific support and patching service, especially if you have customizations.
      • Ask for additional hours for training and support, pre- and post- implementation.
      • Think long-term – you want to have a good working relationship over the long haul, with a vendor that fits with your overall strategy, and not have to repeat and negotiate often.

      Use Info-Tech’s vendor services

      Info-Tech’s vendor management services has price benchmarks as well knowledgeable advisors who can help evaluate proposals to obtain the best value

      Speak to a vendor management services’ advisor today.

      Contact Us

      Communicate to the vendor whether they were accepted or rejected

      Communicate with each vendor following the demonstration and product evaluation. Ask follow-up questions, highlight areas of concern, and inform them of their status in the selection process.

      The RFP process is a standard business practice. As a customer, you are not under any obligation to educate the vendor as to the details of acceptance or rejection. However, consider every point of contact as an opportunity to build a strong network of potential vendors to help you acquire the best products for your organization.

      Use Info-Tech’s Vendor Communication Set template to communicate with the vendor following the demonstration and product evaluations. This set includes:

      Rejection Notice: Inform the vendor that they are no longer under consideration and highlight opportunities for future debrief.

      Approval Notice: Inform the vendor of its progress to the next stage of selection and identify next steps.

      Go to this link

      Phase 4

      Prepare for Implementation

      Phase 1
      1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
      1.2 Validate Readiness
      1.3 Determine Resourcing

      Phase 2
      2.1 Capability Mapping
      2.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
      2.3 Requirements Prioritizing

      Phase 3
      3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
      3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
      3.3 Evaluation Select and Negotiate

      Phase 4
      4.1 Prepare for Implementation

      This phase will walk you through the following activities:

      Discussion on what it takes to transition to a proper implementation.

      Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project including:

      • Project management team
      • Core project team

      Select an Enterprise Application

      Leverage Info-Tech’s research to plan and execute your EAS implementation

      Use Info-Tech Research Group’s three-phase implementation process to guide your own planning.

      Assess

      Prepare

      Govern and course correct

      Establish and execute an end-to-end, agile framework to succeed with the implementation of a major enterprise application.

      Visit this link

      External resources are available for implementations

      Organizations rarely have sufficient internal staffing to resource an EAS project on their own. Consider the options for closing the gap in internal resource availability.

      The most common project resourcing structures for enterprise projects are:

      Your own staff +

      1 Management Consultant

      2 Vendor Consultant

      3 System Integrator

      Consider the following:

      Internal vs. External Roles and Responsibilities

      Clearly delineate between internal and external team responsibilities and accountabilities, and communicate this to your technology partner upfront.

      Internal vs. External Accountabilities

      Accountability is different than responsibility. Your vendor or SI partner may be responsible for completing certain tasks, but be careful not to outsource accountability for the implementation – ultimately, the internal team will be accountable.

      Partner Implementation Methodologies

      Often vendors and/or SIs will have their own preferred implementation methodology. Consider the use of your partner's implementation methodology; however, you know what will work for your organization.

      Info-Tech Insight
      When contemplating a resourcing structure, consider:

      • Availability of in-house implementation competencies and resources.
      • Timeline and constraints.
      • Integration environment complexity.

      Review your options for external resources

      Narrow your search for a management consultant, vendor consultant, or system integrator partner by understanding under which circumstances each would be most appropriate.

      When to choose… Management consultant Vendor consultant System integrators
      • There is an existing and trusted relationship.
      • Scope of work includes consideration of internal IT operations, costing, etc.
      • Organization requires external industry expertise for strategy formulation.
      • They will have a role in overall change management within the enterprise.
      • There are no concerns with overall IT processes or capabilities.
      • The project scope is restricted to a single technology or application.
      • There is minimal integration with other systems.
      • The consultant has no role in business process change.
      • They will be a specialist reporting to other consultants.
      • Project includes products from different vendors or multiple add-ons.
      • Extensive integration is required with legacy or other applications.
      • They will be responsible for outsourced operational support or development following implementation.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Depending on your internal resourcing constraints and IT maturity, you may need to work with multiple partners. If this is the case, just be aware that working with multiple partners can complicate vendor relationship management and makes having a dedicated vendor or partner relationship manager even more important.

      4.1.1 Establish team composition

      1 – 2 hours

      Utilize Info-Tech’s Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation to establish your team composition. Within that blueprint:

      1. Assess the skills necessary for an implementation. Inventory the competencies required for the implementation project team. Map your internal resources to each competency as applicable.
      2. Select your internal implementation team. Determine who needs to be involved closely with the implementation. Key stakeholders should also be considered as members of your implementation team.
      3. Identify the number of external consultants/support required for implementation. Consider your in-house skills, timeline considerations, integration environment complexity, and cost constraints as you make your team composition plan. Be sure to dedicate an internal resource to managing the vendor and partner relationships.
      4. Document the roles and responsibilities, accountabilities, and other expectations of your team as they relate to each step of the implementation.
      Input Output
      • Skills assessment
      • Stakeholder analysis
      • Vendor partner selection
      • Team composition
      Materials Participants
      • Sticky notes
      • Whiteboard
      • Markers
      • Project Team

      Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

      Follow our iterative methodology with a task list focused on the business must-have functionality to achieve rapid execution and to allow staff to return to their daily work sooner.

      Visit this link

      Ensure your implementation team has a high degree of trust and communication

      If external partners are needed, dedicate an internal resource to managing the vendor and partner relationships.

      Communication Proximity Trust
      Teams must have some type of communication strategy. This can be broken into:
      • Regularity: Having a set time each day to communicate progress and a set day to conduct retrospectives.
      • Ceremonies: Injecting awards and continually emphasizing delivery of value can encourage relationship building and constructive motivation.
      • Escalation: Voicing any concerns and having someone responsible for addressing those concerns.
      Distributed teams create complexity as communication can break down. This can be mitigated by:
      • Location: Placing teams in proximity can close the barrier of geographical distance and time zone differences.
      • Inclusion: Making a deliberate attempt to pull remote team members into discussions and ceremonies.
      • Communication tools: Having the right technology (e.g. video conference) can help bring teams closer together virtually.
      Members should trust that other members are contributing to the project and completing their required tasks on time. Trust can be developed and maintained by:
      • Accountability: Having frequent quality reviews and feedback sessions. As work becomes more transparent, people become more accountable.
      • Role clarity: Having a clear definition of what everyone’s role is.

      Create a formal communication process throughout the EAS implementation

      Establish a comprehensive communication process around the EAS enterprise roll-out to ensure that end users stay informed.

      The EAS kick-off meeting(s) should encompass:

      • Target business-user requirements
      • Target quality of service (QoS) metrics
      • Other IT department needs
      • Special consideration needs
      • Tangible business benefits of application
      • The high-level application overview

      The overall objective for inter-departmental EAS kick-off meetings is to confirm that all parties agree on certain key points and understand platform rationale and functionality.

      The kick-off process will significantly improve internal communications by inviting all affected internal IT groups, including business units, to work together to address significant issues before the application process is formally activated.

      Department groups or designated trainers should take the lead and implement a process for:

      • Scheduling EAS platform roll-out/kick-off meetings.
      • Soliciting preliminary input from the attending groups to develop further training plans.
      • Establishing communication paths and the key communication agents from each department who are responsible for keeping lines open moving forward.

      Plan for your implementation of EAS based on deployment model

      Place your EAS solution into your IT landscape by configuring and adjusting the tool based on your specific deployment method.

      On-Premises SaaS-based
      1. Identify custom features and configuration items
      2. Train developers and IT staff on new software investment
      3. Install software
      4. Configure software
      5. Test installation and configuration
      6. Test functionality
      1. Train developers and IT staff on new software investment
      2. Set up connectivity
      3. Identify VPN or internal solution
      4. Check firewalls
      5. Validate bandwidth regulations

      Integration is a top IT challenge and critical to the success of the EAS solution

      EAS solutions are most effective when they are integrated with ERP, HRIS, and CRM solutions.

      Data interchange between the EAS solution and other data sources is necessary Formulate a comprehensive map of the systems, hardware, and software with which the EAS solution must be able to integrate. Master data needs to constantly be synchronized; without this, you lose out on one of the primary benefits of integration. These connections should be bidirectional for maximum value (i.e. marketing data to the CRM, customer data to MMS).
      Specialized projects that include an intricate prospect or customer list and complex rules may need to be built by IT The more custom fields you have in your EAS and point solutions, the more schema mapping you will have to do. Include this information in the RFP to receive guidance from vendors regarding the ease with which integration can be achieved.
      Pay attention to legacy apps and databases If you have a legacy EAS and databases, more custom code will be required. Many vendors claim that custom integrations can be performed for most systems, but custom comes at a cost. Don’t just ask if they can integrate; ask how long it will take and for references from organizations which have been successful in this.

      Scenario: Failure to address EAS data integration will cost you in the long run

      A company spent $15 million implementing a new CRM system in the cloud and decided NOT to spend an additional $1.5 million to do a proper cloud DI tool procurement. The mounting costs followed.

      Cost element – Custom Data Integration $
      2 FTEs for double entry of sales order data $ 100,000/year
      One-time migration of product data to CRM $ 240,000 otc
      Product data maintenance $ 60,000/year
      Customer data synchronization interface build $ 60,000 otc
      Customer data interface maintenance $ 10,000/year
      Data quality issues $ 100,000/year
      New SaaS integration built in year 3 $ 300,000 otc
      New SaaS integration maintenance $ 150,000/year
      Cost element – Data Integration Tool $
      DI strategy and platform implementation $1,500,000 otc
      DI tool maintenance $ 15,000/year
      New SaaS integration point in year 3 $ 300,000 otc

      Comparison of Solution TCOs Chart

      Custom integration is costing this organization $300,000/year for one SaaS solution.

      The proposed integration solution would have paid for itself in 3-4 years and saved exponential costs in the long run.

      Proactively address data quality in the EAS during implementation

      Data quality is a make-or-break issue in an EAS platform; garbage in is garbage out.

      • EAS solutions are one of the leading offenders for generating poor quality data. As such, it’s important to have a plan in place for structuring your data architecture in such a way that poor data quality is minimized from the get-go.
      • Having a plan for data quality should precede data migration efforts; some types of poor data quality can be mitigated prior to migration.
      • There are five main types of poor-quality data found in EAS platforms.
        • Duplicate data: Duplicate records can be a major issue. Leverage dedicated de-dupe tools to eliminate them.
        • Stale data: Out-of-date customer information can reduce the usefulness of the platform. Use automated social listening tools to help keep data fresh.
        • Incomplete data: Records with missing info limit platform value. Specify data validation parameters to mandate that all fields are filled in.
        • Invalid and conflicting data: Can create cascading errors. Establishing conflict resolution rules in ETL tools for data integration can reduce issues.

      Info-Tech Insight
      If you have a complex EAS environment, appoint data stewards for each major domain and procure a de-dupe tool. As the complexity of EAS system-to-system integrations increase, so will the chance that data quality errors will crop up – for example, bi-directional POI with other sources of customer information dramatically increase the chances of conflicting/duplicate data.

      Profile data, eliminate dead weight, and enforce standards to protect data

      Identify and eliminate dead weight Poor data can originate in the firm’s EAS system. Custom queries, stored procedures, or profiling tools can be used to assess the key problem areas.
      Loose rules in the EAS system lead to records of no significant value in the database. Those rules need to be fixed, but if changes are made before the data is fixed, users could encounter database or application errors, which will reduce user confidence in the system.
      • Conduct a data flow analysis: map the path that data takes through the organization.
      • Use a mass cleanup to identify and destroy dead weight data. Merge duplicates either manually or with the aid of software tools. Delete incomplete data, taking care to reassign related data.
      • COTS packages typically allow power users to merge records without creating orphaned records in related tables, but custom-built applications typically require IT expertise.
      Create and enforce standards and policies Now that the data has been cleaned, it’s important to protect the system from relapsing.
      Work with business users to find out what types of data require validation and which fields should have changes audited. Whenever possible, implement drop-down lists to standardize values and make programming changes to ensure that truncation ceases.
      • Truncated data is usually caused by mismatches in data structures during either one-time data loads or ongoing data integrations.
      • Don’t go overboard on assigning required fields; users will just put key data in note fields.
      • Discourage the use of unstructured note fields: the data is effectively lost except if it gets subpoenaed.

      Info-Tech Insight
      Data quality concerns proliferate with the customization level of your platform. The more extensive the custom integration points and module/database extensions that you have made, the more you will need to have a plan in place for managing data quality from a reactive and proactive standpoint.

      Ensure requirements are met with robust user acceptance testing

      User acceptance testing (UAT) is a test procedure that helps to ensure end-user requirements are met. Test cases can reveal bugs before the suite is implemented.

      Five secrets of UAT success

      1 Create the plan With the information collected from requirements gathering, create the plan. Make sure this information is added to the main project plan documentation.
      2 Set the agenda The time allotted will vary depending on the functionality being tested. Ensure that the test schedule allows for the resolution of issues and discussion.
      3 Determine who will participate Work with relevant stakeholders to identify the people who can best contribute to system testing. Look for experienced power users who have been involved in earlier decision making about the system.
      4 Highlight acceptance criteria With the UAT group, pinpoint the criteria to determine system acceptability. Refer to requirements specified in use cases in the initial requirements-gathering stages of the project.
      5 Collect end user feedback Weaknesses in resolution workflow design, technical architecture, and existing customer service processes can be highlighted and improved with ongoing surveys and targeted interviews.

      Calculate post-deployment metrics to assess measurable value of the project

      Track the post-deployment results from the project and compare the metrics to the current state and target state.

      EAS selection and implementation metrics
      Description Formula Current or estimated Target Post-deployment
      End-user satisfaction # of satisfied users
      # of end users
      70% 90% 85%
      Percentage over/under estimated budget Amount spent – 100%
      Budget
      5% 0% 2%
      Percentage over/under estimated timeline Project length – 100%
      Estimated timeline
      10% -5% -10%
      EAS strategy metrics
      Description Formula Current or estimated Target Post-deployment
      Number of leads generated (per month) # of leads generated 150 200 250
      Average time to resolution (in minutes) Time spent on resolution
      # of resolutions
      30 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes
      Cost per interaction by campaign Total campaign spending
      # of customer interactions
      $17.00 $12.00 $12.00

      Continue to adapt your governance model

      Your EAS and applications environment will continue to evolve. Make sure your governance model is always ready to capture the everchanging needs.

      Business needs will not stop changing whether you have an ongoing EAS or other application project. It is thus important to keep your governance efficient and streamlined to capture these needs to then make the EAS continue deliver value and remain aligned to long-term corporate objectives.

      Visit this link

      Summary of Accomplishment

      Select an Enterprise Application

      EAS technology is critical to facilitating an organization’s flow of information across business units. It allows for seamless integration of systems and creates a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making. Having a structured approach to gathering the necessary resources, defining key requirements, and engaging with the right shortlist of vendors to pick the best finalist is crucial.

      This selection guide allows organizations to execute a structured methodology for picking an EAS that aligns with their needs. This includes:

      • Alignment and prioritization of key business and technology drivers for an EAS selection.
      • Identification and prioritization of the EAS requirements.
      • Construction of a robust EAS RFP.
      • A strong market scan of key players.
      • A survey of crucial implementation considerations.

      This formal EAS selection initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify data and integration priorities, and allow for the rollout of a platform that’s highly likely to satisfy all stakeholder needs.

      If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

      Contact your account representative for more information.
      workshops@infotech.com
      1-888-670-8889

      Research Contributors

      Name Title Organization
      Anonymous Anonymous Telecommunications industry
      Anonymous Anonymous Construction material industry
      Anonymous Anonymous Automotive industry
      Corey Tenenbaum Head of IT Taiga Motors
      Mark Earley Director, Consulting Info-Tech Research Group
      Ricardo di Olivera Research Director, Enterprise Applications Info-Tech Research Group

      Bibliography

      “2016 Report on ERP Systems and Enterprise Software.” Panorama Consulting Solutions, 2016. Web.

      “2018 Report on ERP Systems and Enterprise Software.” Panorama Consulting Solutions, 2018. Web.

      “2022 HRIS Software Report.” SoftwarePath, 2022 . Web

      Cross-Industry Process Classification Framework (PCF) Version 7.2.1. APQC, 26 Sept. 2019. Web.

      “Doomed From the Start? Why a Majority of Business and IT Teams Anticipate Their Software Development Projects Will Fail.” Geneca, 25 Jan. 2017. Web.

      Farhan, Marwa Salah, et al. “A Systematic Review for the Determination and Classification of the CRM Critical Success Factors Supporting with Their Metrics.” Future Computing and Informatics Journal, vol. 3, no. 2, Dec. 2018, pp. 398–416.

      Gheorghiu, Gabriel. “ERP Buyer’s Profile for Growing Companies.” SelectHub, 23 Sept. 2022. Web

      “Process Frameworks.” APQC, 4 Nov. 2020. Web.

      “Process vs. Capability: Understanding the Difference.” APCQ, 2017. Web.

      Savolainen, Juha, et al. “Transitioning from Product Line Requirements to Product Line Architecture.” 29th Annual International Computer Software and Applications Conference (COMPSAC'05), IEEE, vol. 1, 2005, pp. 186-195, doi: 10.1109/COMPSAC.2005.160

      Saxena, Deepak, and Joe McDonagh. "Evaluating ERP Implementations: The Case for a Lifecycle based Interpretive Approach." Electronic Journal of Information Systems Evaluation 22.1 (2019): pp29-37.

      “SOA Reference Architecture – Capabilities and the SOA RA.” The Open Group, TOGAF, n.d. Web.

      Smith, Anthony. “How To Create A Customer-Obsessed Company Like Netflix.” Forbes, 12 Dec. 2017. Web.

      "The Moscow Method", MindTools. Web.

      “The State of CRM Data Management 2020.” Validity, 2020. Web.

      “The State of Project Management Annual Survey 2018.” Wellingtone, 2018. Web.

      “Why HR Projects Fail.” Unleash, 2021. Web